- Manuals
- Brands
- Mitsubishi
- Inverter
- FR-A840-00023-0.4K
- Instruction Manual
Mitsubishi FR-A800-E FR-A840-00023-0.4K Inverter Instruction Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Mitsubishi FR-A800-E FR-A840-00023-0.4K Inverter Instruction Manual PDF
INVERTER
IN VER
TER FR
-A 800
IN STR
U C
TIO N
M A
N U
A L (D
ETA ILED
)
M
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
IB(NA)-0600503ENG-M(2103)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.
MODEL FR-A800 INSTRUCTION MANUAL
MODEL CODE XXX-XXX
Model FR-A800 Instruction Manual (Detailed)
Model code 1A2-P52
FR-A800 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (DETAILED)
FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 04750(90K)(-GF) FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 06830(280K)(-GF) FR-A842-07700(315K) to 12120(500K)(-GF) FR-A846-00023(0.4K) to 03610(132K)
High functionality and high performance
C O
N TE
N TS
Safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.1 Product checking and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.2 Component names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.3 Operation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.4 Related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Chapter 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.1 Peripheral devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.1.1 Inverter and peripheral devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 2.1.2 Peripheral devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel or the front covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.1 Inverter installation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 2.3.2 Amount of heat generated by the inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 2.3.3 Cooling system types for inverter enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 2.3.4 Inverter installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 2.3.5 Protruding the heat sink through a panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.4 Terminal connection diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.5 Main circuit terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.5.1 Details on the main circuit terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 2.5.2 Main circuit terminal layout and wiring to power supply and motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 2.5.3 Recommended cables and wiring length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 2.5.4 Earthing (grounding) precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.6 Control circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.6.1 Details on the control circuit terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 2.6.2 Control logic (sink/source) change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 2.6.3 Wiring of control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 2.6.4 Wiring precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 2.6.5 When using separate power supplies for the control circuit and the main circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 2.6.6 When supplying 24 V external power to the control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 2.6.7 Safety stop function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.7 Communication connectors and terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.7.1 PU connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 2.7.2 USB connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 2.7.3 RS-485 terminal block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
1
2.9 Parameter settings for a motor with encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
2.10.1 Connection of the brake resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 2.10.2 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 2.10.3 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 2.10.4 Connection of the brake unit (BU type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 2.10.5 Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 2.10.6 Connection of the multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 2.10.7 Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 2.10.8 Connection of the power regeneration converter (MT-RC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 2.10.9 Connection of the DC reactor (FR-HEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
2.11.1 System configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 2.11.2 Network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 2.11.3 Network components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 2.11.4 Component names of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 2.11.5 Wiring method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 2.11.6 Operation status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Chapter 3 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER . . . . 116
3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
3.1.1 Leakage currents and countermeasures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 3.1.2 Techniques and measures for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 3.1.3 Built-in EMC filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.2 Power supply harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
3.2.1 Power supply harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 3.2.2 Harmonic suppression guidelines in Japan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3.3 Installation of a reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
3.5 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400 V class motor insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
3.6 Checklist before starting operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Chapter 4 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
4.1.1 Components of the operation panel (FR-DU08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 4.1.2 Basic operation of the operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 4.1.3 Digital characters and their corresponding printed equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 4.1.4 Changing the parameter setting value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4.2 Monitoring the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
4.2.1 Monitoring of output current and output voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
2
C O
N TE
N TS
4.2.2 First priority monitor screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 4.2.3 Displaying the set frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
4.3 Easy setting of the inverter operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
4.4.1 Simple mode parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.5.1 Setting the frequency on the operation panel (example: operating at 30 Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 4.5.2 Perform PU operation using the setting dial like a potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 4.5.3 Setting the frequency with switches (multi-speed setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 4.5.4 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (voltage input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 4.5.5 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (current input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4.6.1 Setting the frequency on the operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 4.6.2 Setting the frequency and giving a start command with switches (multi-speed setting) (Pr.4 to Pr.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 4.6.3 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (voltage input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 4.6.4 Changing the frequency (60 Hz, initial value) at the maximum voltage input (5 V, initial value). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 4.6.5 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (current input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 4.6.6 Changing the frequency (60 Hz, initial value) at the maximum current input (at 20 mA, initial value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.7.1 Giving a start command by using external signals for JOG operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 4.7.2 Giving a start command from the operation panel for JOG operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Chapter 5 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
5.1 Parameter list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
5.1.1 Parameter list (by parameter number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 5.1.2 Use of a function group number for the identification of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 5.1.3 Parameter list (by function group number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
5.2 Control method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5.2.1 Vector control and Real sensorless vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 5.2.2 Changing the control method and mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 5.2.3 Selecting the Advanced magnetic flux vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 5.2.4 Selecting the PM sensorless vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 5.2.5 Low-speed range torque characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5.3.1 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector control (speed control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 5.3.2 Setting procedure of Vector control (speed control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 5.3.3 Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control (speed control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 5.3.4 Setting the torque limit level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 5.3.5 Performing high-accuracy, fast-response control (gain adjustment for Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM
sensorless vector control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 5.3.6 Troubleshooting in the speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 5.3.7 Speed feed forward control, model adaptive speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 5.3.8 Torque bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 5.3.9 Avoiding motor overrunning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 5.3.10 Notch filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
5.4.1 Torque control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
3
5.4.2 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector control (torque control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 5.4.3 Setting procedure for Vector control (torque control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 5.4.4 Torque command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 5.4.5 Speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 5.4.6 Torque control gain adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 5.4.7 Troubleshooting in torque control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 5.4.8 Torque control by variable-current limiter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
5.5.1 About position control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 5.5.2 Setting procedure of Vector control (position control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 5.5.3 Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control (position control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 5.5.4 Simple positioning function by parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 5.5.5 Position control by the FR-A8AL pulse train input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 5.5.6 Position control by pulse train input to the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 5.5.7 Clear signal selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 5.5.8 Pulse monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 5.5.9 Electronic gear settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 5.5.10 Position adjustment parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 5.5.11 Position control gain adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 5.5.12 Troubleshooting in position control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
5.6 Adjustment during Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, PM sensorless vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
5.6.1 Speed detection filter and torque detection filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 5.6.2 Excitation ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 5.6.3 Gain adjustment of current controllers for the d axis and the q axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
5.7.1 Real time clock function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 5.7.2 Reset selection / disconnected PU detection / PU stop selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 5.7.3 PU display language selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 5.7.4 Buzzer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 5.7.5 PU contrast adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 5.7.6 Display-off setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 5.7.7 Direct setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 5.7.8 Resetting USB host errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 5.7.9 Easy frequency setting (Volume-knob-like setting) and key lock function selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 5.7.10 Frequency change increment amount setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 5.7.11 Multiple rating setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 5.7.12 Using the power supply exceeding 480 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 5.7.13 Parameter write selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 5.7.14 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 5.7.15 Free parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 5.7.16 Setting multiple parameters by batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 5.7.17 Extended parameter display and user group function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 5.7.18 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 5.7.19 Inverter parts life display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 5.7.20 Maintenance timer alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 5.7.21 Current average value monitor signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern . . . . . . .367
5.8.1 Setting the acceleration and deceleration time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 5.8.2 Acceleration/deceleration pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 5.8.3 Remote setting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 5.8.4 Starting frequency and start-time hold function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 5.8.5 Minimum motor speed frequency and hold function at the motor start up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 5.8.6 Shortest acceleration/deceleration and optimum acceleration/deceleration (automatic acceleration/deceleration) . . . . . 384 5.8.7 Lift operation (automatic acceleration/deceleration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
5.9.1 Operation mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 5.9.2 Startup of the inverter in Network operation mode at power-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
4
C O
N TE
N TS
5.9.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 5.9.4 Reverse rotation prevention selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 5.9.5 Frequency setting using pulse train input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 5.9.6 JOG operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 5.9.7 Operation by multi-speed setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
5.10.1 Motor overheat protection (electronic thermal O/L relay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 5.10.2 Fault definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 5.10.3 Cooling fan operation selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 5.10.4 Earth (ground) fault detection at start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 5.10.5 Varying the activation level of the undervoltage protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 5.10.6 Initiating a protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 5.10.7 I/O phase loss protection selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 5.10.8 Retry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 5.10.9 Limiting the output frequency (maximum/minimum frequency). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 5.10.10 Avoiding machine resonance points (frequency jump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 5.10.11 Stall prevention operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 5.10.12 Load characteristics fault detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 5.10.13 Motor overspeeding detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
5.11.1 Speed indication and its setting change to rotations per minute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 5.11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 5.11.3 Monitor display selection for terminals FM/CA and AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 5.11.4 Adjustment of terminal FM/CA and terminal AM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 5.11.5 Energy saving monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 5.11.6 Output terminal function selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 5.11.7 Output frequency detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 5.11.8 Output current detection function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 5.11.9 Output torque detection function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 5.11.10 Remote output function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 5.11.11 Analog remote output function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 5.11.12 Fault code output selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 5.11.13 Pulse train output to announce cumulative output energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 5.11.14 Detection of control circuit temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 5.11.15 Encoder pulse dividing output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
5.12.1 Analog input selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 5.12.2 Analog input terminal (terminal 1, 4) function assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 5.12.3 Analog input compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 5.12.4 Response level of analog input and noise elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 5.12.5 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 5.12.6 Torque (magnetic flux) setting voltage (current) bias and gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 5.12.7 Checking of current input on analog input terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 5.12.8 Input terminal function selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 5.12.9 Inverter output shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 5.12.10 External fault input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 5.12.11 Selecting the condition to activate the Second function selection (RT) signal or the Third function selection (X9) signal 525
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
5.13.1 Applied motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 5.13.2 Offline auto tuning for an induction motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 5.13.3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (under Vector control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 5.13.4 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (motor constant tuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 5.13.5 Online auto tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 5.13.6 Signal loss detection of encoder signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
5.14 (A) Application parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
5.14.1 Electronic bypass function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 5.14.2 Self power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 5.14.3 Brake sequence function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 5.14.4 Start count monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
5
5.14.5 Stop-on-contact control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 5.14.6 Load torque high-speed frequency control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 5.14.7 Traverse function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 5.14.8 Anti-sway control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 5.14.9 Orientation control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 5.14.10 PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 5.14.11 Changing the display increment of numerical values used in PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 5.14.12 PID Pre-charge function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 5.14.13 Dancer control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 5.14.14 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start with an induction motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 5.14.15 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start with a PM motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 5.14.16 Offline auto tuning for a frequency search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 5.14.17 Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 5.14.18 PLC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 5.14.19 Trace function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
5.15.1 Wiring and configuration of PU connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 5.15.2 Wiring and configuration of RS-485 terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 5.15.3 Initial setting of operation via communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 5.15.4 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 5.15.5 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 5.15.6 MODBUS RTU communication specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686 5.15.7 CC-Link IE Field Network function setting (FR-A800-GF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 5.15.8 USB device communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 5.15.9 Automatic connection with GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 5.15.10 Backup/restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
5.16 (G) Control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705
5.16.1 Manual torque boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706 5.16.2 Base frequency voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707 5.16.3 Load pattern selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708 5.16.4 Excitation current low-speed scaling factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 5.16.5 Energy saving control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712 5.16.6 Adjustable 5 points V/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 5.16.7 SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 5.16.8 DC injection brake, zero speed control, and servo lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 5.16.9 Output stop function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 5.16.10 Start signal operation selection / stop selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 5.16.11 Regenerative brake selection and DC feeding mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 5.16.12 Regeneration avoidance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732 5.16.13 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735 5.16.14 Slip compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736 5.16.15 Encoder feedback control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736 5.16.16 Droop control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738 5.16.17 Speed smoothing control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
5.17 Parameter clear / All parameter clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743
5.18 Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .744
5.18.1 Parameter copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 5.18.2 Parameter verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
5.19 Copying and verifying parameters using a USB memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .747
5.20 Checking parameters changed from their initial values (initial value change list) . . . . . . . . .751
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .752
5.21.1 Cyclic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752 5.21.2 I/O signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753 5.21.3 Details of the remote input and output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 5.21.4 Details of the remote register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
6
C O
N TE
N TS
5.21.5 Programming examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 5.21.6 Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770 5.21.7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
Chapter 6 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
6.1 Inverter fault and alarm indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
6.2 Reset method for the protective functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
6.3 Check and clear of the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
6.4 List of fault displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
6.5 Causes and corrective actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
6.6 Check first when you have a trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
6.6.1 Motor does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 6.6.2 Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 6.6.3 Inverter generates abnormal noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 6.6.4 Motor generates heat abnormally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804 6.6.5 Motor rotates in the opposite direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804 6.6.6 Speed greatly differs from the setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804 6.6.7 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 6.6.8 Speed varies during operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806 6.6.9 Operation mode is not changed properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 6.6.10 Operation panel (FR-DU08) display is not operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 6.6.11 The motor current is too large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 6.6.12 Speed does not accelerate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 6.6.13 Unable to write parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 6.6.14 Power lamp is not lit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Chapter 7 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
7.1 Inspection item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
7.1.1 Daily inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 7.1.2 Periodic inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 7.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 7.1.4 Checking the inverter and converter modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814 7.1.5 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 7.1.6 Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 7.1.7 Removal and reinstallation of the control circuit terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
7.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents, and powers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
7.2.1 Measurement of powers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 7.2.2 Measurement of voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 7.2.3 Measurement of currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 7.2.4 Measurement of inverter input power factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 7.2.5 Measurement of converter output voltage (between terminals P and N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 7.2.6 Measurement of inverter output frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 7.2.7 Insulation resistance test using megger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824 7.2.8 Withstand voltage test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
7
Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
8.1 Inverter rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .826
8.2 Motor rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .829
8.2.1 Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829 8.2.2 Vector control dedicated motor SF-THY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832 8.2.3 IPM motor MM-CF (2000 r/min series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
8.3 Common specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .835
8.4 Outline dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .837
8.4.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837 8.4.2 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
Chapter 9 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
9.1 For customers replacing the conventional model with this inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .856
9.1.1 Replacement of the FR-A700 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856 9.1.2 Replacement of the FR-A500(L) series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
9.2 International standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .858
9.3 Acquisition of type certification for ship classification standards (400 V class) . . . . . . . . . . .858
9.3.1 Applicable models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858 9.3.2 Details of type certification for standard model / Separated converter type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858 9.3.3 Details of type certification for IP55 compatible model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860 9.3.4 Wiring for compliance with EMC standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
9.4 Specification comparison between PM sensorless vector control and induction motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .863
9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods . . . . . . . . . . .864
9.6 For customers using HMS network options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .893
9.7 Ready bit status selection (Pr.349, N240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .897
8
Safety instructions Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Electric inverter. This Instruction Manual (Detailed) provides detailed instructions for advanced settings of the FR-A800 series inverters. Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using this product, read all the relevant instruction manuals carefully to ensure proper use. Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect this product until you have read the Instruction Manuals and appended documents carefully. Do not use this product until you have a full knowledge of this product mechanism, safety information and instructions. Installation, operation, maintenance and inspection must be performed by qualified personnel. Here, qualified personnel means a person who meets all the following conditions:
A person who possesses a certification in regard with electric appliance handling, or person took a proper engineering training. Such training may be available at your local Mitsubishi Electric office. Contact your local sales office for schedules and locations.
A person who can access operating manuals for the protective devices (for example, light curtain) connected to the safety control system, or a person who has read these manuals thoroughly and familiarized themselves with the protective devices.
In this Instruction Manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Note that even the level may lead to a serious consequence depending on conditions. Be sure to follow the
instructions of both levels as they are critical to personnel safety.
WARNING
CAUTION
Incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.
Incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury, or may cause only material damage.
9
1
Electric shock prevention
Fire prevention
Injury prevention
WARNING Do not remove the front cover or the wiring cover while the power of this product is ON, and do not run this product with
the front cover or the wiring cover removed as the exposed high voltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry can be touched. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
Even if power is OFF, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic inspection as the inside of this product is charged. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
Before wiring or inspection, check that the LED display of the operation panel is OFF. Any person who is involved in wiring or inspection shall wait for 10 minutes or longer after the power supply has been cut off, and check that there are no residual voltage using a digital multimeter or the like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time after power OFF, and it is dangerous.
This product must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical code (NEC section 250, IEC 61140 class 1 and other applicable standards). A neutral- point earthed (grounded) power supply must be used for 400 V class of this product to be compliant with EN standard.
Any person who is involved in wiring or inspection of this product shall be fully competent to do the work. This product body must be installed before wiring. Otherwise you may get an electric shock or be injured. Do not touch the setting dial or keys with wed hands. Doing so may cause an electric shock. Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or pinching. Doing so may cause an electric shock. Do not change the cooling fan while power is ON as it is dangerous. Do not touch the printed circuit board or handle the cables with wet hands. Doing so may cause an electric shock. Never touch the motor terminals, etc. right after powering OFF as the DC voltage is applied to the motor for 1 second at
powering OFF if the main circuit capacitor capacity is measured. Doing so may cause an electric shock. Before wiring or inspection for a PM motor, confirm that the PM motor is stopped as a PM motor is a synchronous motor
with high-performance magnets embedded inside and high-voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the motor is running even after the power of this product is turned OFF. In an application, such as fan and blower, that the motor may be driven by the load, connect a low-voltage manual contactor at the output side of this product and keep it open during wiring and inspection of this product. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
CAUTION This product must be installed on a nonflammable wall without holes in it so that its components cannot be touched from
behind. Installing it on or near flammable material may cause a fire. If this product becomes faulty, the product power must be switched OFF. A continuous flow of large current may cause
a fire. When using a brake resistor, a sequence that will turn OFF power when a fault signal is output must be configured.
Otherwise the brake resistor may excessively overheat due to damage of the brake transistor and such, causing a fire. Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+ and N/-. Doing so could cause a fire. Be sure to perform daily and periodic inspections as specified in the Instruction Manual. There is a possibility of
explosion, damage, or fire if this product is used without inspection.
CAUTION The voltage applied to each terminal must be as specified in the Instruction Manual. Otherwise an explosion or damage
may occur. The cables must be connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise an explosion or damage may occur. The polarity (+ and -) must be correct. Otherwise an explosion or damage may occur. While power is ON or for some time after power-OFF, do not touch this product as it will be extremely hot. Doing so may
cause burns.
0
Additional instructions The following instructions must be also followed. If this product is handled incorrectly, it may cause unexpected fault, an injury, or an electric shock.
*1 0 to +50C for the FR-A800-GF. *2 0 to 40C for the FR-A800-GF.
*3 2.9 m/s2 or less for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher.
CAUTION Transportation and installation To prevent injury, wear cut-resistant gloves when opening packaging with sharp tools. Use proper lifting techniques or a trolley when carrying products. Failure to do so may lead to injuries. Do not stand or place any heavy object on this product. Do not stack the boxes containing this product higher than the number recommended. When carrying this product, do not hold it by the front cover. It may fall or break. During installation, caution must be taken not to drop this product as doing so may cause injuries. The product must be installed on a surface that withstands the weight of the product. Do not install this product on a hot surface. Ensure the mounting orientation of this product is correct. Ensure this product is mounted securely in its enclosure. Do not install or operate this product if it is damaged or has parts missing. Foreign conductive objects must be prevented from entering this product. That includes screws and metal fragments or
other flammable substance such as oil. As this product is a precision instrument, do not drop or subject it to impact.
The surrounding air temperature must be between -10 and +50C*1 (non-freezing) for this product at HD (heavy duty),
ND (normal duty) (initial setting), or LD (light duty) rating, and between -10 and +40C*2 (non-freezing) for this product at SLD (super light duty) rating. Otherwise the product may be damaged.
The ambient humidity must be 95% RH or less (non-condensing) for this product. Otherwise the product may be damaged. (Refer to page 37 for details.)
The temporary storage temperature (applicable to a short limited time such as a transportation time) must be between - 20 and +65C. Otherwise this product may be damaged.
This product must be used indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt). Otherwise the product may be damaged.
Do not use this product at an altitude above 2500 m. Vibration should not exceed 5.9 m/s2*3 at 10 to 55 Hz in X, Y, and Z directions. Otherwise the product may be damaged. (For details, refer to page 37.)
If halogens (including fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine) contained in fumigants for wood packages enter this product, the product may be damaged. Prevent the entry of fumigant residuals or use an alternative method such as heat disinfection. Note that sterilization of disinfection of wood packages should be performed before packing the product.
Wiring Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge absorber, or radio noise filter on the output side of this product.
These devices may overheat or burn out. The output terminals (terminals U, V, and W) must be connected to a motor correctly. Otherwise the motor will rotate
inversely. Even with the power OFF, high voltage is still applied to the terminals U, V and W while the PM motor is running. Ensure
the PM motor has stopped before carrying out any wiring. Otherwise you may get an electric shock. Never connect a PM motor to a commercial power supply. Connecting a commercial power supply to the input terminals
(U, V, W) of a PM motor will burn it out. The PM motor must be applied a power from this product with the output terminals (U, V, W).
Test operation Before starting the test operation, confirm or adjust the parameter settings. Failure to do so may cause some machines
to make unexpected motions.
11
1
WARNING Usage Stay away from the equipment after using the retry function in this product as the equipment will restart suddenly after
the output shutoff of this product. Depending on the function settings of this product, the product does not stop its output even when the STOP/RESET
key on the operation panel is pressed. To prepare for it, provide a separate circuit and switch (to turn OFF the power of this product, or apply a mechanical brake, etc.) for an emergency stop.
Be sure to turn OFF the start (STF/STR) signal before clearing the fault as this product will restart the motor suddenly after a fault is cleared.
Do not use a PM motor for an application that the motor may be driven by the load and run at a speed higher than the maximum motor speed.
Use only a three-phase induction motor or PM motor as a load on this product. Connection of any other electrical equipment to the output of this product may damage the equipment.
Performing pre-excitation (by using the LX or X13 signal) during torque control (under Real sensorless vector control) may rotate a motor at a low speed even though a start command (STF or STR) is not given. This product with the start command ON may also rotate the motor at a low speed when the speed limit value is set to zero. Confirm that the motor running does not cause any safety problems before performing pre-excitation.
Do not modify this product. Do not remove any part which is not instructed to be removed in the Instruction Manuals. Doing so may lead to a failure
or damage of this product.
2
*1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.
CAUTION Usage The electronic thermal O/L relay function may not be enough for protection of a motor from overheating. It is
recommended to install an external thermal relay or a PTC thermistor for overheat protection. Do not repeatedly start or stop this product with a magnetic contactor on its input side. Doing so may shorten the life of
this product. Use a noise filter or other means to minimize electromagnetic interference with other electronic equipment used nearby
this product. Appropriate precautions must be taken to suppress harmonics. Otherwise harmonics in power systems generated from
this product may heat/damage a power factor correction capacitor or a generator. To drive a 400 V class motor with this product, use an insulation-enhanced motor, or take measures to suppress surge
voltage. Otherwise surge voltage, which is attributed to the length and thickness of wire, may occur at the motor terminals, causing the motor insulation to deteriorate.
As all parameters return to their initial values after the Parameter clear or All parameter clear is performed, the needed parameters for this product operation must be set again before the operation is started.
This product can be easily set for high-speed operation. Therefore, consider all things related to the operation such as the performance of a motor and equipment in a system before the setting change.
This product's brake function cannot be used as a mechanical brake. Use a separate device instead. Perform an inspection and test operation of this product if it has been stored for a long period of time. To avoid damage to this product due to static electricity, static electricity in your body must be discharged before you
touch this product. Only one PM motor can be connected to a single unit of this product. A PM motor must be used under PM sensorless vector control. Do not use a synchronous motor, induction motor, or
synchronous induction motor. Do not connect a PM motor to this product with it set to the induction motor control setting (initial setting). Do not connect
an induction motor to this product with it set to the PM sensorless vector control setting. Doing so will cause failure. As a process of starting a PM motor, turn ON the power of this product first, and then close the contactor on the output
side of this product. To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the inverter and the system against unauthorized
access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from external devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions. We shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving inverter trouble and system trouble by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.
Emergency stop A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided for devices or equipment in a system to prevent
hazardous conditions in case of failure of this product or an external device controlling this product. If the breaker installed on the input side of this product trips, check for wiring faults (such as short circuits) and damage
to internal parts of this product. Identify and remove the cause of the trip before resetting the tripped breaker (or before applying the power to this product again).
When any protective function is activated, take an appropriate corrective action before resetting this product to resume the operation.
Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of this product. Doing so will cause failure.
Disposal This product must be treated as industrial waste.
13
1
General instruction For clarity, illustrations in this Instruction Manual may be drawn with covers or safety guards removed. Ensure all covers
and safety guards are properly installed prior to starting operation. For details on the PM motor, refer to the Instruction Manual of the PM motor.
4
CHAPTER 1
C H
A PT
ER 1
4
5
INTRODUCTION
6
7
8
9
10
1.1 Product checking and accessories .........................................................................................................................17 1.2 Component names .................................................................................................................................................19 1.3 Operation steps ......................................................................................................................................................21 1.4 Related manuals.....................................................................................................................................................23
15
1
1 INTRODUCTION The contents described in this chapter must be read before using this product. Always read the instructions before use. For the separated converter type, refer to the "INTRODUCTION" in the FR-A802 (Separated Converter Type) Instruction Manual (Hardware). For the IP55 compatible model, refer to the "INTRODUCTION" in the FR-A806 (IP55/UL Type 12 specification) Instruction Manual (Hardware).
Abbreviations
Trademarks Microsoft and Visual C++ are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Corporation in Japan. MODBUS is a registered trademark of SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC USA, INC. PROFIBUS and Profibus-DP are trademarks of PROFIBUS & PROFINET International. Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Notes on descriptions in this Instruction Manual Connection diagrams in this Instruction Manual appear with the control logic of the input terminals as sink logic, unless
otherwise specified. (For the control logic, refer to page 72.)
Harmonic Suppression Guidelines All the models of the inverters used by specific consumers are covered by "the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage". (For details, refer to page 123.)
Item Description DU Operation panel (FR-DU08) Operation panel Operation panel (FR-DU08) and LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) Parameter unit Parameter unit (FR-PU07) PU Operation panel and parameter unit Inverter Mitsubishi Electric FR-A800 series inverter FR-A800-GF FR-A800 series inverter with built-in CC-Link IE Field Network communication function Vector control compatible option FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR-A8APA/FR-A8APR/FR-A8APS (plug-in option), FR-A8TP (control terminal option) Pr. Parameter number (Number assigned to function) PU operation Operation using the PU (operation panel/parameter unit) External operation Operation using the control circuit signals Combined operation Combined operation using the PU (operation panel/parameter unit) and External operation Mitsubishi Electric standard motor SF-JR
Mitsubishi Electric constant- torque motor SF-HRCA
Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU Mitsubishi Electric IPM motor MM-CF
6 1. INTRODUCTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1.1 Product checking and accessories Unpack the product and check the rating plate and the capacity plate of the inverter to ensure that the model agrees with the order and the product is intact.
Inverter model
*1 Specification differs by the type. Major differences are shown in the following table.
*2 Conforming to IEC 60721-3-3 3C2/3S2 *3 Applicable for the FR-A820-00340(5.5K) or higher, and the FR-A840-00170(5.5K) or higher.
NOTE In this Instruction Manual, the inverter model name consists of the applicable motor capacity and the rated current.
(Example) FR-A820-00046(0.4K)
Rating plate
Input rating Output rating
SERIAL
Inverter model
Country of origin
F R - A 8 2 0 - 00046 - 1 -
400 V class
Symbol Voltage class 200 V class
4 2
CA
Symbol Type1
FM 2 1
Symbol Description
0.4K to 500K 00023 to 12120
Inverter ND rated capacity (kW) Inverter SLD rated current (A)
IP55 compatible model
Symbol Structure, functionality Standard model
6
0 Separated converter type2
Symbol Circuit board coating2
WithoutNone
With With
Plated conductor
Without
With Without
063
60
Symbol Function
Standard typeNone
GF With built-in CC-link IE Field Network function
Type Monitor output Initial setting
Built-in EMC filter Control logic Rated frequency
Pr.19 Base frequency voltage
FM (terminal FM equipped model)
Terminal FM (pulse train output) Terminal AM (analog voltage output (0 to 10 VDC))
OFF Sink logic 60 Hz 9999 (same as the power supply voltage)
CA (terminal CA equipped model)
Terminal CA (analog current output (0 to 20 mADC)) Terminal AM (analog voltage output (0 to 10 VDC))
ON Source logic 50 Hz 8888 (95% of the power supply voltage)
171. INTRODUCTION 1.1 Product checking and accessories
1
Accessory Fan cover fixing screws
These screws are necessary for compliance with the EU Directives. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Startup).)
Eyebolt for hanging the inverter
How to read the SERIAL number
Capacity Screw size (mm) Quantity FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K) FR-A840-00083(2.2K), FR-A840-00126(3.7K) M3 35 1
FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K) M3 35 2
FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-01250(22K) FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-00620(22K) M440 2
Capacity Eyebolt size Quantity
FR-A840-04320(160K) to FR-A840-06830(280K) M12 2
The SERIAL consists of one symbol, two characters indicating the production year and month, and six characters indicating the control number. The last digit of the production year is indicated as the Year, and the Month is indicated by 1 to 9, X (October), Y (November), or Z (December).
Rating plate example
Symbol Year Month Control number SERIAL
8 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 Product checking and accessories
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1.2 Component names Component names are as follows.
(s)
(r)
(a)
(j)
(k)
(i)
(l)
(n)
(m)
(d)
(h)
(f)
(g)
(o)
(p)
(t)
(q)
(e)
(b)
(c)
(u)
191. INTRODUCTION 1.2 Component names
2
Symbol Name Description Refer to page
(a) PU connector Connects the operation panel or the parameter unit. This connector also enables the RS-485 communication. 84
(b) USB A connector Connects a USB memory device. 85
(c) USB mini B connector Connects a personal computer and enables communication with FR Configurator2. 85
(d) RS-485 terminals Enables RS-485, MODBUS RTU communication. 86
(e) Terminating resistor selection switch (SW1)
Select whether or not to use the terminating resistor for RS-485 communication. 86
(f) Plug-in option connector 1 Connects a plug-in option or a communication option. (For the FR-A800-GF, a CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board is installed to the connector 1. Refer to page 110.)
Instruction Manual of the option
(g) Plug-in option connector 2 (h) Plug-in option connector 3 (i) Voltage/current input switches (SW2) Selects between voltage and current for the input via terminals 2 and 4. 496 (j) Control circuit terminal block Connects cables for the control circuit. 68 (k) EMC filter ON/OFF connector Turns ON/OFF the EMC filter. 120 (l) Main circuit terminal block Connects cables for the main circuit. 54 (m) Charge lamp Stays ON while the power is supplied to the main circuit. 55
(n) Wiring cover This cover is removable without unplugging cables. (FR-A820-01250(22K) or lower, FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower) 57
(o) Alarm lamp Turns ON when the protective function of the inverter is activated. 55 (p) Power lamp Stays ON while the power is supplied to the control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L21). 55
(q) Upper front cover
Remove this cover for the installation of the product, installation of a plug-in (communication) option, RS-485 terminal wiring, switching of the voltage/ current input switches, etc. (The FR-A800-GF had a front cover with an LED display cover.)
33
(r) Lower front cover Remove this cover for wiring. 33 (s) Operation panel (FR-DU08) Operates and monitors the inverter. 138
(t) Cooling fan Cools the inverter. (FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or higher, FR-A840-00083(2.2K) or higher) 816
(u) Switches (SW3 and SW4) for manufacturer setting Do not change the initial setting (OFF ). OFF
ON
0 1. INTRODUCTION 1.2 Component names
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1.3 Operation steps
ON
Fr eq
ue nc
y
Time (S)
(Hz) Start command
Frequency command
Inverter output frequency
Step of operation
Installation/mounting
Control mode selection
Wiring of the power supply and motor
Connect a switch, relay, etc. to the control circuit terminal block of the inverter to give a start command. (External)
Start command via the PU connector and RS-485 terminal of the inverter and plug-in option (Communication)
Set from the PU (operation panel/ parameter unit).
(PU)
Set from the PU (operation panel/ parameter unit).
Change of frequency with ON/OFF switches connected to terminals (multi-speed setting)
(External) (External)
(PU) (External) (External) (External)
How to give a start command?
t i t rt
How to give a frequency
command?
t i fr
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e) (f) (g) (h)
(i) (j) (k) (l)
Perform frequency setting by a current output device (Connection across terminals 4 and 5)
Perform frequency setting by a voltage output device (Connection across terminals 2 and 5)
Perform frequency setting by a current output device (Connection across terminals 4 and 5)
Perform frequency setting by a voltage output device (Connection across terminals 2 and 5)
How to give a frequency
command?
t i fr
Change frequency with ON/OFF switches connected to terminals (multi-speed setting)
(External)
Start command with on the operation panel (PU)
: Initial setting
211. INTRODUCTION 1.3 Operation steps
2
Symbol Overview Refer to page (a) Install the inverter. 37 (b) Perform wiring for the power supply and the motor. 55
(c) Select the control method (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control). 221
(d) Give the start command via communication. 659 (e) Give both the start and frequency commands from the PU. (PU operation mode) 149
(f) Give the start command from the PU and the frequency command via terminals RH, RM, and RL. (External/PU combined operation mode 2) 151
(g) Give the start command from the PU and the frequency command by voltage input via terminal 2. (External/PU combined operation mode 2) 152
(h) Give the start command from the PU and the frequency command by current input via terminal 4. (External/PU combined operation mode 2) 153
(i) Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command from the PU. (External/PU combined operation mode 1) 155
(j) Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command via terminals RH, RM, and RL. (External operation mode) 156
(k) Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command by voltage input via terminal 2. (External operation mode) 157
(l) Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command by current input via terminal 4. (External operation mode) 160
2 1. INTRODUCTION 1.3 Operation steps
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1.4 Related manuals Manuals related to the FR-A800 inverter are shown in the following table.
Name Manual number FR-A800 Instruction Manual (Startup) IB-0600493 FR-A800-GF Instruction Manual (Startup) IB-0600600 FR-A802 (Separated Converter Type) Instruction Manual (Hardware) IB-0600533 FR-A802-GF (Separated Converter Type) Instruction Manual (Hardware) IB-0600601 FR-CC2 (Converter unit) Instruction Manual IB-0600542 FR-A806 (IP55/UL Type 12 specification) Instruction Manual (Hardware) IB-0600531ENG FR Configurator 2 Instruction Manual IB-0600516ENG FR-A800/F800 PLC Function Programming Manual IB-0600492ENG FR-A800/F800 Safety Stop Function Instruction Manual BCN-A23228-001
231. INTRODUCTION 1.4 Related manuals
2
MEMO
4 1. INTRODUCTION 1.4 Related manuals
CHAPTER 2
C H
A PT
ER 2
4
5
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
6
7
8
9
10
2.1 Peripheral devices ..................................................................................................................................................27 2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel or the front covers....................................................................33 2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design ....................................................................................................37 2.4 Terminal connection diagrams................................................................................................................................46 2.5 Main circuit terminals ..............................................................................................................................................54 2.6 Control circuit..........................................................................................................................................................68 2.7 Communication connectors and terminals..............................................................................................................84 2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control) .............................................................................................87 2.9 Parameter settings for a motor with encoder..........................................................................................................94 2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units ..................................................................................................................97 2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF) ............................................................................110
25
2
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING This chapter explains the installation and the wiring of this product. Always read the instructions before use. For the separated converter type, refer to the "INSTALLATION AND WIRING" in the FR-A802 (Separated Converter Type) Instruction Manual (Hardware). For the IP55 compatible model, refer to the "INSTALLATION AND WIRING" in the FR-A806 (IP55/UL Type 12 specification) Instruction Manual (Hardware).
6 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.1 Peripheral devices
2.1.1 Inverter and peripheral devices
Earth (Ground)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P1P/+ N/-P/+
P/+(P3) PR
P/+ P/+
PR
PR
: Install these options as required.
U
Earth (Ground)
V W IM connection PM connection
(c) Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage current breaker (ELB), fuse
(e) AC reactor (FR-HAL)
(f) DC reactor (FR-HEL) (o) High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
(p) EMC filter (ferrite core) (FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
U V W
Earth (Ground) (q) Induction motor
(r) Contactor Example) No-fuse switch (DSN type)
(s) IPM motor (MM-CF)
(g) Line noise filter (FR-BLF)
(h) High power factor converter (FR-HC2)
(i) Multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC)
(j) Power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
(k) Power regeneration converter (MT-RC)
(m) Resistor unit (FR-BR, MT-BR5)
(l) Brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU)
(d) Magnetic contactor (MC)
(a) Inverter(b) Three-phase AC power supply (n) USB connector
Personal computer (FR Configurator 2)
USB
USB host (A connector)
USB device (Mini B connector)
Communication status indicator (LED)(USB host)
272. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.1 Peripheral devices
2
*1 To select a stand-alone option, refer to the Instruction Manual of each option.
Symbol Name Overview Refer to page
(a) Inverter (FR-A800)
The life of the inverter is influenced by the surrounding air temperature. The surrounding air temperature should be as low as possible within the permissible range. This must be noted especially when the inverter is installed in an enclosure. Incorrect wiring may lead to damage of the inverter. The control signal lines must be kept fully away from the main circuit lines to protect them from noise. The built-in EMC filter can reduce the noise.
37, 46, 120
(b) Three-phase AC power supply Must be within the permissible power supply specifications of the inverter. 826
(c) Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB), or fuse
Must be selected carefully since an inrush current flows in the inverter at power ON. 29
(d) Magnetic contactor (MC) Install this to ensure safety. Do not use this to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will shorten the life of the inverter.
128
(e) AC reactor (FR-HAL)
Install this to suppress harmonics and to improve the power factor. An AC reactor (FR-HAL) (option) is required when installing the inverter near a large power supply system (1000 kVA or more). Under such condition, the inverter may be damaged if you do not use a reactor. Select a reactor according to the applied motor capacity.
127
(f) DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Install this to suppress harmonics and to improve the power factor. Select a reactor according to the applied motor capacity. For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or a motor with a capacity of 75 kW or higher, always connect the FR-HEL. When using the DC reactor with the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR- A840-01800(55K) or lower, remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 before connecting the DC reactor to the inverter.
127
(g) Noise filter (FR-BLF) The FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower are equipped with the common mode choke. 118
(h) High power factor converter (FR-HC2) Suppresses the power supply harmonics significantly. Install this as required. 104
(i) Multifunction regeneration converter (FR- XC)*1
Provides a large braking capability. Install this as required.
105
(j) Power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)*1
107
(k) Power regeneration converter (MT-RC)*1 108
(l) Brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU)*1 Allows the inverter to provide the optimal regenerative braking capability. Install this as required. 100
(m) Resistor unit (FR-BR, MT-BR5)*1
(n) USB connection
Connect between the inverter and a personal computer with a USB (ver. 1.1) cable. Use a USB memory device to copy parameter settings or use the trace function.
85
(o) High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)*1
Improves the braking capability of the inverter built-in brake. Remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX to connect this (7.5K or lower). Always install a thermal relay when using a brake resistor for the inverters with 11K or higher capacity.
97
(p) Noise filter (ferrite core) (FR-BSF01, FR- BLF)
Install this to reduce the electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter. The noise filter is effective in the range from about 0.5 to 5 MHz. A wire should be wound four turns at maximum.
118
(q) Induction motor Connect a squirrel-cage induction motor.
(r) Example) No-fuse switch (DSN type)
Connect this for an application where a PM motor is driven by the load even while the inverter power is OFF. Do not open or close the contactor while the inverter is running (outputting).
(s) IPM motor (MM-CF) Use the specified motor. An IPM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply. 833
8 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.1 Peripheral devices
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground) the motor and inverter. Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor, or capacitor type filter on the inverter's output side. Doing
so will cause the inverter shut off or damage the capacitor or surge suppressor. If any of the above devices is connected, immediately remove it. When installing a molded case circuit breaker on the output side of the inverter, contact the manufacturer of the molded case circuit breaker.
Electromagnetic wave interference: The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. To minimize interference, enabling the built-in EMC filter or installing an external EMC filters is effective. (Refer to page 120.)
For details on the options and peripheral devices, refer to the respective Instruction Manual. A PM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply. A PM motor is a motor with permanent magnets embedded inside. High voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the
motor is running. Before closing the contactor at the output side, make sure that the inverter power is ON and the motor is stopped.
2.1.2 Peripheral devices Check the model of the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to the capacity. Refer to the following table for right selection.
292. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.1 Peripheral devices
3
Molded case circuit breaker / earth leakage circuit breaker This is a matrix showing the rated current of the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB)
(NF or NV type) according to the selected inverter and rating.
NOTE Select an MCCB according to the power supply capacity. Install one MCCB per inverter. For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the
Instruction Manual (Startup) or Instruction Manual (Hardware), and select an appropriate fuse or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB).
Voltage Inverter model Without AC/DC power factor improving reactor With AC/DC power factor improving reactor
SLD LD ND HD SLD LD ND HD
200 V class
FR-A820-00046(0.4K) 10 A 10 A 5 A 5 A 10 A 10 A 5 A 3 A FR-A820-00077(0.75K) 15 A 15 A 10 A 5 A 15 A 15 A 10 A 5 A FR-A820-00105(1.5K) 20 A 20 A 15 A 10 A 15 A 15 A 15 A 10 A FR-A820-00167(2.2K) 30 A 30 A 20 A 15 A 30 A 30 A 15 A 15 A FR-A820-00250(3.7K) 50 A 50 A 30 A 20 A 40 A 40 A 30 A 15 A FR-A820-00340(5.5K) 75 A 60 A 50 A 30 A 50 A 50 A 40 A 30 A FR-A820-00490(7.5K) 100 A 75 A 60 A 50 A 75 A 75 A 50 A 40 A FR-A820-00630(11K) 125 A 125 A 75 A 60 A 100 A 100 A 75 A 50 A FR-A820-00770(15K) 150 A 150 A 125 A 75 A 125 A 125 A 100 A 75 A FR-A820-00930(18.5K) 175 A 175 A 150 A 125 A 150 A 125 A 125 A 100 A FR-A820-01250(22K) 225 A 225 A 175 A 150 A 175 A 150 A 125 A 125 A FR-A820-01540(30K) 300 A 250 A 225 A 175 A 225 A 200 A 150 A 125 A FR-A820-01870(37K) 350 A 300 A 250 A 225 A 250 A 225 A 200 A 150 A FR-A820-02330(45K) 400 A 400 A 300 A 250 A 350 A 300 A 225 A 200 A FR-A820-03160(55K) 400 A 300 A 500 A 400 A 300 A 225 A FR-A820-03800(75K) 500 A 400 A 400 A 300 A FR-A820-04750(90K) 600 A 500 A 400 A 400 A
400 V class
FR-A840-00023(0.4K) 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 3 A FR-A840-00038(0.75K) 10 A 10 A 5 A 5 A 10 A 10 A 5 A 5 A FR-A840-00052(1.5K) 10 A 10 A 10 A 5 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 5 A FR-A840-00083(2.2K) 20 A 20 A 10 A 10 A 15 A 15 A 10 A 10 A FR-A840-00126(3.7K) 30 A 30 A 20 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 15 A 10 A FR-A840-00170(5.5K) 30 A 30 A 30 A 20 A 30 A 30 A 20 A 15 A FR-A840-00250(7.5K) 50 A 50 A 30 A 30 A 40 A 40 A 30 A 20 A FR-A840-00310(11K) 60 A 60 A 50 A 30 A 50 A 50 A 40 A 30 A FR-A840-00380(15K) 75 A 75 A 60 A 50 A 60 A 60 A 50 A 40 A FR-A840-00470(18.5K) 100 A 100 A 75 A 60 A 75 A 75 A 60 A 50 A FR-A840-00620(22K) 125 A 125 A 100 A 75 A 100 A 100 A 75 A 60 A FR-A840-00770(30K) 150 A 150 A 125 A 100 A 125 A 100 A 100 A 75 A FR-A840-00930(37K) 175 A 175 A 150 A 125 A 150 A 125 A 100 A 100 A FR-A840-01160(45K) 200 A 200 A 175 A 150 A 175 A 150 A 125 A 100 A FR-A840-01800(55K) 200 A 175 A 225 A 200 A 150 A 125 A FR-A840-02160(75K) 225 A 225 A 200 A 150 A FR-A840-02600(90K) 350 A 225 A 225 A 200 A FR-A840-03250(110K) 400 A 350 A 225 A 225 A FR-A840-03610(132K) 400 A 400 A 350 A 225 A FR-A840-04320(160K) 500 A 400 A 400 A 350 A FR-A840-04810(185K) 600 A 500 A 400 A 400 A FR-A840-05470(220K) 600 A 600 A 500 A 400 A FR-A840-06100(250K) 700 A 600 A 600 A 500 A FR-A840-06830(280K) 800 A 700 A 600 A 600 A
MCCB INV
MCCB INV
M
M
0 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.1 Peripheral devices
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the inverter model, and select cables and reactors according to the motor output.
When the breaker installed on the inverter input side is shut off, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter etc. The cause of the output shutoff must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the breaker.
Magnetic contactor at the inverter's input line This is a matrix showing the model name of the Mitsubishi magnetic contactor to be installed at the inverter's input line
according to the selected inverter and rating.
Voltage Inverter model Without AC/DC power factor improving reactor With AC/DC power factor improving reactor
SLD LD ND HD SLD LD ND HD
200 V class
FR-A820-00046(0.4K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 FR-A820-00077(0.75K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 FR-A820-00105(1.5K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 FR-A820-00167(2.2K) S-T21 S-T21 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 FR-A820-00250(3.7K) S-T25 S-T25 S-T21 S-T10 S-T21 S-T21 S-T10 S-T10 FR-A820-00340(5.5K) S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T21 S-T35 S-T25 S-T21 S-T10 FR-A820-00490(7.5K) S-T50 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T21 FR-A820-00630(11K) S-T65 S-T50 S-T35 S-T35 S-T50 S-T50 S-T35 S-T35 FR-A820-00770(15K) S-T65 S-T65 S-T50 S-T35 S-T50 S-T50 S-T50 S-T35 FR-A820-00930(18.5K) S-T100 S-T100 S-T65 S-T50 S-T65 S-T65 S-T50 S-T50 FR-A820-01250(22K) S-N150 S-T100 S-T100 S-T65 S-T100 S-T100 S-T65 S-T50 FR-A820-01540(30K) S-N150 S-N150 S-T100 S-T100 S-N150 S-N125 S-T100 S-T65 FR-A820-01870(37K) S-N180 S-N180 S-N150 S-T100 S-N150 S-N150 S-N125 S-T100 FR-A820-02330(45K) S-N220 S-N220 S-N180 S-N150 S-N180 S-N180 S-N150 S-N125 FR-A820-03160(55K) S-N220 S-N180 S-N300 S-N300 S-N180 S-N150 FR-A820-03800(75K) S-N400 S-N300 S-N300 S-N180 FR-A820-04750(90K) S-N600 S-N400 S-N300 S-N300
400 V class
FR-A840-00023(0.4K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 FR-A840-00038(0.75K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 FR-A840-00052(1.5K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 FR-A840-00083(2.2K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 FR-A840-00126(3.7K) S-T21 S-T21 S-T10 S-T10 S-T12 S-T12 S-T10 S-T10 FR-A840-00170(5.5K) S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T10 S-T21 S-T21 S-T12 S-T10 FR-A840-00250(7.5K) S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T12 FR-A840-00310(11K) S-T35 S-T35 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 FR-A840-00380(15K) S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T21 S-T35 S-T35 S-T21 S-T21 FR-A840-00470(18.5K) S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T21 FR-A840-00620(22K) S-T50 S-T50 S-T35 S-T35 S-T50 S-T50 S-T35 S-T35 FR-A840-00770(30K) S-T65 S-T65 S-T50 S-T35 S-T50 S-T50 S-T50 S-T35 FR-A840-00930(37K) S-T100 S-T100 S-T65 S-T50 S-T65 S-T65 S-T50 S-T50 FR-A840-01160(45K) S-N150 S-T100 S-T100 S-T65 S-T100 S-T100 S-T65 S-T50 FR-A840-01800(55K) S-T100 S-T100 S-N150 S-T100 S-T100 S-T65 FR-A840-02160(75K) S-N180 S-N150 S-T100 S-T100 FR-A840-02600(90K) S-N220 S-N180 S-N150 S-T100 FR-A840-03250(110K) S-N300 S-N220 S-N180 S-N150 FR-A840-03610(132K) S-N300 S-N300 S-N220 S-N180 FR-A840-04320(160K) S-N400 S-N300 S-N300 S-N220 FR-A840-04810(185K) S-N600 S-N400 S-N300 S-N300 FR-A840-05470(220K) S-N600 S-N600 S-N400 S-N300 FR-A840-06100(250K) S-N600 S-N600 S-N600 S-N400 FR-A840-06830(280K) S-N800 S-N600 S-N600 S-N600
312. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.1 Peripheral devices
3
NOTE The matrix shows the magnetic contactor selected according to the standards of Japan Electrical Manufacturers' Association
(JEM standards) for AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the MC is used for emergency stops during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times. If using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving, select the MC for the inverter input current according to the rated current against JEM 1038 standards for AC-3 class. When installing an MC on the inverter output side to switch to the commercial-power supply operation while running a general- purpose motor, select the MC for the rated motor current according to the rated current against JEM 1038 standards for AC- 3 class.
When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the inverter model, and select cables and reactors according to the motor output.
When the breaker installed on the inverter input side is shut off, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter etc. The cause of the output shutoff must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the breaker.
2 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.1 Peripheral devices
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel or the front covers
Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel
To reinstall the operation panel, align its connector on the back with the PU connector of the inverter, and insert the operation panel. After confirming that the operation panel is fit securely, tighten the screws. (Tightening torque: 0.40 to 0.45 Nm)
Removal of the lower front cover (FR-A820-01540(30K) or lower, FR-A840- 00770(30K) or lower)
Loosen the two screws on the operation panel. (These screws cannot be removed.)
Press the upper edge of the operation panel while pulling out the operation panel.
(a) Loosen the screws on the lower front cover. (These screws cannot be removed.) (b) While holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sides of the lower front cover, pull out the cover using its upper
side as a support. (c) With the lower front cover removed, the main circuit and the control circuit can be wired.
(a) (b) (c)
Loosen
332. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel or the front covers
3
Removal of the upper front cover (FR-A820-01540(30K) or lower, FR- A840-00770(30K) or lower)
Reinstallation of the front covers (FR-A820-01540(30K) or lower, FR- A840-00770(30K) or lower)
NOTE When installing the upper front cover, fit the connector of the operation panel securely along the guides of the PU connector.
(a) With the lower front cover removed, loosen the screw on the upper front cover. (This screw cannot be removed.) (FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to FR-A820-01540(30K) and FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to FR-A840-00770(30K) have two mounting screws.)
(b) While holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sides of the upper front cover, pull out the cover using its upper side as a support.
(c) With the upper front cover removed, the RS-485 terminals can be wired and the plug-in option can be installed.
(a) (b) (c)
Loosen
(a) Clip on the upper front cover as illustrated. Check that it is properly secured.
(b) Tighten the screws on the lower part of the cover. (FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to FR-A820-01540(30K) and FR-A840- 00170(5.5K) to FR-A840-00770(30K) have two mounting screws.)
(c) Install the lower front cover by inserting the upper hook into the socket of the upper front cover. (d) Tighten the screws on the lower part of the lower front cover.
(a) (b) (c) (d)
Tighten
Tighten
4 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel or the front covers
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Removal of the lower front cover (FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher, FR- A840-00930(37K) or higher)
Removal of the upper front cover (FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher, FR- A840-00930(37K) or higher)
(a) Remove the mounting screws to remove the lower front cover. (b) With the lower front cover removed, the main circuit can be wired.
(a) (b)
(a) With the lower front cover removed, loosen the screws on the upper front cover. (These screws cannot be removed.) (b) While holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sides of the upper front cover, pull out the cover using its upper
side as a support. (c) With the upper front cover removed, the control circuit and the RS-485 terminals can be wired and the plug-in option can
be installed.
(a) (c)(b)
Loosen
352. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel or the front covers
3
Reinstallation of the front covers (FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher, FR- A840-00930(37K) or higher)
NOTE Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. Always tighten the installation screws of the front cover.
(a) Clip on the upper front cover as illustrated. Check that it is properly secured.
(b) Tighten the screws on the lower part of the cover. (c) Attach the lower front cover using the screws.
(b) (c)(a)
Tighten Tighten
6 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel or the front covers
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design When designing or manufacturing an inverter enclosure, determine the structure, size, and device layout of the enclosure by fully considering the conditions such as heat generation of the contained devices and the operating environment. An inverter unit uses many semiconductor devices. To ensure higher reliability and long period of operation, operate the inverter in the ambient environment that completely satisfies the equipment specifications.
2.3.1 Inverter installation environment The following table lists the standard specifications of the inverter installation environment. Using the inverter in an environment that does not satisfy the conditions deteriorates the performance, shortens the life, and causes a failure. Refer to the following points, and take adequate measures.
Standard environmental specifications of the inverter
*1 0 to +50C for the FR-A800-GF. *2 0 to +40C for the FR-A800-GF. *3 Temperature applicable for a short time, for example, in transit. *4 For the installation at an altitude above 1000 m, consider a 3% reduction in the rated current per 500 m increase in altitude.
*5 2.9 m/s2 or less for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher.
Temperature The permissible surrounding air temperature of the inverter is between -10C and +50C (-10C and +40C at the SLD rating). (The permissible surrounding air temperature of the FR-A800-GF is between 0 and +50C (0 and +40C for the SLD rating).) Always operate the inverter within this temperature range. Operation outside this range will considerably shorten the service lives of the semiconductors, parts, capacitors and others. Take the following measures to keep the surrounding air temperature of the inverter within the specified range.
Measures against high temperature Use a forced ventilation system or similar cooling system. (Refer to page 41.) Install the enclosure in an air-conditioned electric chamber. Block direct sunlight. Provide a shield or similar plate to avoid direct exposure to the radiated heat and wind of a heat source. Ventilate the area around the enclosure well.
Measures against low temperature Provide a space heater in the enclosure. Do not power OFF the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter OFF.)
Sudden temperature changes Select an installation place where temperature does not change suddenly. Avoid installing the inverter near the air outlet of an air conditioner. If temperature changes are caused by opening/closing of a door, install the inverter away from the door.
Item Description
Surrounding air temperature
LD, ND (initial setting), HD -10 to +50C*1 (non-freezing)
SLD -10 to +40C*2(non-freezing)
Ambient humidity With circuit board coating (conforming to class 3C2/3S2 in IEC 60721-3-3): 95% RH or less (non-condensing) Without circuit board coating: 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Storage temperature -20 to +65C*3
Atmosphere Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt) Altitude Maximum 2500 m*4
Vibration 5.9 m/s2 or less*5 at 10 to 55 Hz (in either X, Y, or Z direction)
Measurement position
Measurement position
Inverter 5 cm 5 cm
5 cm
372. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
3
NOTE For the amount of heat generated by the inverter unit, refer to page 40.
Humidity Operate the inverter within the ambient air humidity of usually 45 to 90% (up to 95% with circuit board coating). Too high humidity will pose problems of reduced insulation and metal corrosion. On the other hand, too low humidity may cause a spatial electrical breakdown. The humidity conditions for the insulation distance defined in JEM 1103 standard "Insulation Distance from Control Equipment" is 45 to 85%.
Measures against high humidity Make the enclosure enclosed, and provide it with a hygroscopic agent. Provide dry air into the enclosure from outside. Provide a space heater in the enclosure.
Measures against low humidity Air with proper humidity can be blown into the enclosure from outside. Also, when installing or inspecting the unit, discharge your body (static electricity) beforehand, and keep your body away from the parts and patterns.
Measures against condensation Condensation may occur if frequent operation stops change the in-enclosure temperature suddenly or if the outside air temperature changes suddenly. Condensation causes such faults as reduced insulation and corrosion.
Take the measures against high humidity. Do not power OFF the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter OFF.)
Dust, dirt, oil mist Dust and dirt will cause such faults as poor contacts, reduced insulation and cooling effect due to the moisture-absorbed accumulated dust and dirt, and in-enclosure temperature rise due to a clogged filter. In an atmosphere where conductive powder floats, dust and dirt will cause such faults as malfunction, deteriorated insulation and short circuit in a short time. Since oil mist will cause similar conditions, it is necessary to take adequate measures.
Countermeasure Place the inverter in a totally enclosed enclosure.
Take measures if the in-enclosure temperature rises. (Refer to page 41.) Purge air.
Pump clean air from outside to make the in-enclosure air pressure higher than the outside air pressure.
Corrosive gas, salt damage If the inverter is exposed to corrosive gas or to salt near a beach, the printed board patterns and parts will corrode or the relays and switches will result in poor contact. In such places, take the measures given in the previous paragraph.
Explosive, flammable gases As the inverter is non-explosion proof, it must be contained in an explosion-proof enclosure. In places where explosion may be caused by explosive gas, dust or dirt, an enclosure cannot be used unless it structurally complies with the guidelines and has passed the specified tests. This makes the enclosure itself expensive (including the test charges). The best way is to avoid installation in such places and install the inverter in a non-hazardous place.
High altitude Use the inverter at an altitude of within 2500 m. For use at an altitude above 1000 m, consider a 3% reduction in the rated current per 500 m increase in altitude. If it is used at a higher place, it is likely that thin air will reduce the cooling effect and low air pressure will deteriorate dielectric strength.
8 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Vibration, impact The vibration resistance of the inverter is up to 5.9 m/s2 (2.9 m/s2 or less for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher) at 10 to 55 Hz frequency and 1 mm amplitude for the directions of X, Y, Z axes. Applying vibration and impacts for a long time may loosen the structures and cause poor contacts of connectors, even if those vibration and impacts are within the specified values. Especially when impacts are applied repeatedly, caution must be taken because such impacts may break the installation feet.
Countermeasure Provide the enclosure with rubber vibration isolators. Strengthen the structure to prevent the enclosure from resonance. Install the enclosure away from the sources of the vibration.
392. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
4
2.3.2 Amount of heat generated by the inverter Installing the heat sink inside the enclosure When the heat sink is installed inside the enclosure, the amount of heat generated by the inverter unit is shown in the following tables.
NOTE The figures indicate the amount of heat generated when the output current is the rated current, power supply voltage is 220 V
(200 V class) or 440 V (400 V class), and the carrier frequency is 2 kHz.
Voltage Inverter model Amount of heat generated (W)
SLD LD ND HD
200 V class
FR-A820-00046(0.4K) 60 55 40 30 FR-A820-00077(0.75K) 95 85 60 40 FR-A820-00105(1.5K) 140 130 110 70 FR-A820-00167(2.2K) 200 185 130 100 FR-A820-00250(3.7K) 310 285 190 135 FR-A820-00340(5.5K) 355 320 240 160 FR-A820-00490(7.5K) 525 480 350 230 FR-A820-00630(11K) 570 515 370 280 FR-A820-00770(15K) 770 700 590 450 FR-A820-00930(18.5K) 950 850 720 600 FR-A820-01250(22K) 1000 950 880 840 FR-A820-01540(30K) 1450 1300 1050 880 FR-A820-01870(37K) 1650 1480 1270 1050 FR-A820-02330(45K) 2120 1900 1610 1300 FR-A820-03160(55K) 2750 2450 1830 1450 FR-A820-03800(75K) 3020 2710 2180 1700 FR-A820-04750(90K) 3960 3530 2700 2220
400 V class
FR-A840-00023(0.4K) 55 50 40 30 FR-A840-00038(0.75K) 75 70 55 40 FR-A840-00052(1.5K) 85 80 70 50 FR-A840-00083(2.2K) 130 120 100 75 FR-A840-00126(3.7K) 175 160 130 90 FR-A840-00170(5.5K) 245 230 170 135 FR-A840-00250(7.5K) 345 315 220 165 FR-A840-00310(11K) 370 345 280 210 FR-A840-00380(15K) 450 415 390 285 FR-A840-00470(18.5K) 565 520 450 385 FR-A840-00620(22K) 740 675 520 450 FR-A840-00770(30K) 930 825 690 560 FR-A840-00930(37K) 1110 1020 840 700 FR-A840-01160(45K) 1340 1220 1020 860 FR-A840-01800(55K) 2000 1640 1290 1060 FR-A840-02160(75K) 2520 2100 1790 1350 FR-A840-02600(90K) 3150 2575 2200 1770 FR-A840-03250(110K) 3600 2800 2300 1850 FR-A840-03610(132K) 4050 3600 2800 2250 FR-A840-04320(160K) 4650 3800 3450 2650 FR-A840-04810(185K) 5300 4650 3850 3400 FR-A840-05470(220K) 5850 5100 4550 3700 FR-A840-06100(250K) 6650 5850 5100 4500 FR-A840-06830(280K) 7550 6600 5900 5050
0 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Installing the heat sink outside the enclosure When the heat sink is installed outside the enclosure, the amount of heat generated by the inverter unit is shown in the following tables. (For details on protruding the heat sink through a panel, refer to page 44.)
NOTE The figures indicate the amount of heat generated when the output current is the rated current, power supply voltage is 220 V
(200 V class) or 440 V (400 V class), and the carrier frequency is 2 kHz.
2.3.3 Cooling system types for inverter enclosure From the enclosure that contains the inverter, the heat of the inverter and other equipment (transformers, lamps, resistors, etc.) and the incoming heat such as direct sunlight must be dissipated to keep the in-enclosure temperature lower than the permissible temperatures of the in-enclosure equipment including the inverter. The cooling systems are classified as follows in terms of the cooling calculation method.
Cooling by natural heat dissipation from the enclosure surface (totally enclosed type) Cooling by heat sink (aluminum fin, etc.)
Voltage Inverter model Amount of heat generated (W)
Heat sink section (outside of enclosure) Control section (inside of enclosure) SLD LD ND HD SLD LD ND HD
200 V class
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) 104 95 77 40 36 35 33 30 FR-A820-00167(2.2K) 161 147 95 70 39 38 35 30 FR-A820-00250(3.7K) 263 240 155 103 47 45 35 32 FR-A820-00340(5.5K) 265 235 174 110 90 85 66 50 FR-A820-00490(7.5K) 375 340 244 155 150 140 106 75 FR-A820-00630(11K) 405 365 261 190 165 150 109 90 FR-A820-00770(15K) 555 500 421 315 215 200 169 135 FR-A820-00930(18.5K) 690 615 520 430 260 235 200 170 FR-A820-01250(22K) 700 665 620 595 300 285 260 245 FR-A820-01540(30K) 1035 925 745 615 415 375 305 265 FR-A820-01870(37K) 1170 1040 895 735 480 440 375 315 FR-A820-02330(45K) 1520 1360 1150 920 600 540 460 380 FR-A820-03160(55K) 1960 1740 1280 1000 790 710 550 450 FR-A820-03800(75K) 2165 1930 1530 1180 855 780 650 520 FR-A820-04750(90K) 2860 2530 1925 1560 1100 1000 775 660
400 V class
FR-A840-00023(0.4K) 20 18 12 6 35 32 28 24 FR-A840-00038(0.75K) 36 32 23 12 39 38 32 28 FR-A840-00052(1.5K) 42 39 33 19 43 41 37 31 FR-A840-00083(2.2K) 77 71 57 38 53 49 43 37 FR-A840-00126(3.7K) 120 109 86 53 55 51 44 37 FR-A840-00170(5.5K) 180 170 120 90 65 60 50 45 FR-A840-00250(7.5K) 260 235 160 115 85 80 60 50 FR-A840-00310(11K) 260 245 195 145 110 100 85 65 FR-A840-00380(15K) 315 290 275 200 135 125 115 85 FR-A840-00470(18.5K) 395 360 310 265 170 160 140 120 FR-A840-00620(22K) 510 465 360 305 230 210 160 145 FR-A840-00770(30K) 655 575 480 385 275 250 210 175 FR-A840-00930(37K) 780 720 590 485 330 300 250 215 FR-A840-01160(45K) 970 880 740 610 370 340 280 250 FR-A840-01800(55K) 1400 1140 890 730 600 500 400 330 FR-A840-02160(75K) 1780 1470 1250 925 740 630 540 425 FR-A840-02600(90K) 2235 1820 1540 1230 915 755 660 540 FR-A840-03250(110K) 2540 1960 1590 1260 1060 840 710 590 FR-A840-03610(132K) 2830 2500 1950 1570 1220 1100 850 680 FR-A840-04320(160K) 3250 2660 2410 1850 1400 1140 1040 800 FR-A840-04810(185K) 3700 3250 2690 2380 1600 1400 1160 1020 FR-A840-05470(220K) 4090 3570 3180 2590 1760 1530 1370 1110 FR-A840-06100(250K) 4650 4090 3570 3150 2000 1760 1530 1350 FR-A840-06830(280K) 5280 4620 4130 3530 2270 1980 1770 1520
412. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
4
Cooling by ventilation (forced ventilation type, pipe ventilation type) Cooling by heat exchanger or cooler (heat pipe, cooler, etc.)
2.3.4 Inverter installation Inverter placement
Install the inverter on a strong surface securely with screws. Leave enough clearances and take cooling measures. Avoid places where the inverter is subjected to direct sunlight, high temperature and high humidity. Install the inverter on a nonflammable wall surface. When encasing multiple inverters in an enclosure, install them in parallel as a cooling measure. For heat dissipation and maintenance, keep clearance between the inverter and the other devices or enclosure surface.
The space below the inverter is required for wiring, and the space above the inverter is required for heat dissipation. When designing or building an enclosure for the inverter, carefully consider influencing factors such as heat generation of
the contained devices and the operating environment.
Cooling system Enclosure structure Comment
Natural
Natural ventilation (enclosed type / open type)
This system is low in cost and generally used, but the enclosure size increases as the inverter capacity increases. This system is for relatively small capacities.
Natural ventilation (totally enclosed type)
Being a totally enclosed type, this system is the most appropriate for hostile environment having dust, dirt, oil mist, etc. The enclosure size increases depending on the inverter capacity.
Forced air
Heat sink cooling This system has restrictions on the heat sink mounting position and area. This system is for relatively small capacities.
Forced ventilation This system is for general indoor installation. This is appropriate for enclosure downsizing and cost reduction, and often used.
Heat pipe This system is a totally enclosed type, and is appropriate for enclosure downsizing.
INV
INV
INV Heat sink
INV
INV
Heat pipe
Fix six positions for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher.
2 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 For the FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower and FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or lower, allow 1 cm or more clearance. *2 When using the FR-A820-01250(22K) or lower and FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower at the surrounding air temperature of 40C or less (30C or
less for the SLD rated inverter), inverters can be mounted side by side without leaving any clearance. *3 There needs to be a space of at least 30 cm in front of the inverter to replace the cooling fan of the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher. Refer to
page 816 for fan replacement.
Installation orientation of the inverter Install the inverter on a wall as specified. Do not mount it horizontally or in any other way.
Above the inverter Heat is blown up from inside the inverter by the small fan built in the unit. Any equipment placed above the inverter should be heat resistant.
Arrangement of multiple inverters When multiple inverters are placed in the same enclosure, generally arrange them horizontally as shown in the figure (a). When it is inevitable to arrange them vertically to minimize space, take such measures as to provide guides between the inverters since heat generated in the inverters in bottom row can increase the temperatures in the inverters in top row, causing inverter failures. When installing multiple inverters, fully take measures to prevent the surrounding air temperature of the inverter from being higher than the permissible value by providing ventilation or increasing the enclosure size.
Clearances (side)
Inverter
Clearances (front)
10 cm or more
10 cm or more
10 cm or more
10 cm or more
20 cm or more
20 cm or more
5 cm or more*1,*2
5 cm or more*1,*2
FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
Vertical
5 cm or more *1,*3
Allow clearance.
Arrangement of multiple inverters
Guide Guide
Enclosure Enclosure
Guide
(a) Horizontal arrangement (b) Vertical arrangement
Inverter
InverterInverterInverter Inverter
Inverter
432. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
4
Arrangement of the ventilation fan and inverter Heat generated in the inverter is blown up from the bottom of the unit as warm air by the cooling fan. When installing a ventilation fan for that heat, determine the place of ventilation fan installation after fully considering an air flow. (Air passes through areas of low resistance. Make an airway and airflow plates to expose the inverter to cool air.)
2.3.5 Protruding the heat sink through a panel When encasing the inverter to an enclosure, the heat generated in the enclosure can be greatly reduced by protruding the heat sink of the inverter. When installing the inverter in a compact enclosure, etc., this installation method is recommended.
When using the panel through attachment (FR-A8CN) For the FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 04750(90K) and the FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 03610(132K), a heat sink can be protruded outside the enclosure using a panel through attachment (FR-A8CN). (For the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher, the attachment is not necessary when the heat sink is to be protruded.) For a panel cut dimension drawing and an installation procedure of the panel through attachment (FR-A8CN) to the inverter, refer to a manual of FR-A8CN.
Protrusion of heat sink for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher Panel cutting Cut the panel of the enclosure according to the inverter capacity.
Arrangement of the ventilation fan and inverter
Inverter Inverter
FR-A840-04320(160K) FR-A840-04810(185K)
FR-A840-05470(220K) FR-A840-06100(250K) FR-A840-06830(280K)
200 200 484
13 95
4 18
98 5 Hole
6-M10 screw
Unitmm
Hole
300 300
662
15 95
4 15
98 4
6-M10 screw
Unitmm
4 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Mount point change of installation frame from the rear to the front The upper and lower installation frames are attached on the inverter (one for each position). Change the mount point of the upper and lower installation frames from the rear to the front as shown in the figure. When reattaching the installation frames, make sure that the installation orientation is correct.
Installation of the inverter on the enclosure Push the inverter heat sink part outside the enclosure, and fix the inverter to the panel with upper and lower installation frames.
NOTE As the heat sink part protruded through the panel includes a cooling fan, this type of installation is not suitable for the
environment of water drops, oil, mist, dust, etc. Be careful not to drop screws, dust etc. into the inverter and cooling fan section.
Upper installation frame
Lower installation frame
Shift
Shift
Inverter
Inside the enclosure
Enclosure
Exhausted air
Installation frame
Dimension of the outside of the enclosure
Cooling wind
Enclosure
There are finger guards behind the enclosure. Therefore, the thickness of the panel should be less than 10 mm (*1) and also do not place anything around finger guards to avoid contact with the finger guards.
Finger guard 140 mm
6 m
m
10 mm*1
185 mm
452. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
4
2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
Type FM
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
PC24VDC power supply (Common for external power supply transistor)
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
Start self-holding selection
Middle speed
High speed
Low speed
Jog operation
Second function selection
Output stop
Reset Terminal 4 input selection
(Current input selection) Selection of automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 10E(+10V)
10(+5V)
2
(Analog common)
2 3
1
Auxiliary input
Terminal 4 input (Current input)
1
4
Frequency setting potentiometer 1/2W1k
Running
Up to frequency
Instantaneous power failure Overload
Frequency detection
Open collector output common Sink/source common
F/C (FM)
SD
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)
Jumper
Motor
Relay output 1 (Fault output)
C1
B1
A1
U V W
P1
Indicator (Frequency meter, etc.)
+ -
(-)
(+) Analog signal output (0 to 10VDC)
Earth (Ground)
AM
5
0 to 5VDC selectable 0 to 10VDC
Multi-speed selection
Open collector output
Moving-coil type 1mA full-scale
Contact input common
Calibration resistor
Earth (Ground)
Main circuit terminal Control circuit terminal
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC selectable
MC
Main circuit
C2
B2
A2 Relay output 2
Relay output
M
0 to 20mADC
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC
selectable 4 to 20mADC TXD+
Terminating resistor
TXD-
RXD+ RXD-
GND (SG)
Data transmission
GND
RS-485 terminals
PU connector
USB A connector
USB mini B connector
S IN
K
S O
U R
C E
Connector for plug-in option connection
STF
STR
STP(STOP)
RH
RM
RL
JOG
RT
MRS
RES
AU
CS
SD
RUN
SU
IPF
OL
FU
SE
Data reception
(+) (-)
5
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
ON
OFF
+2424V external power supply input SD
Common terminal
VCC
(+) (-)
5V (Permissible load current 100mA)
Sink logic
Earth (Ground)
R
R
Connector 1 Connector 2
Connector 3
Jumper
Jumper
PX PR N/-P/+
Control circuit
Initial value
Initial value
Initial value
ON
42 OFF
Voltage/current input switch
Brake unit (Option)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Brake resistor (FR-ABR)
Safety monitor output
Safety monitor output common
So (SO)
SOC
S1
S2
PC
SD SIC
Safety stop signal
Safety stop input (Channel 1)
Shorting wire
Safety stop input common
Safety stop input (Channel 2)
Jumper
P1
Earth (Ground)
R
P3 PR N/-P/+
Brake unit (Option)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Brake resistor
Inrush current limit circuit
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
24V
Inrush current limit circuit
24V
Output shutoff circuit
6 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or whenever a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option. Refer to page 826 to select the right DC reactor according to the applicable motor capacity. When a DC reactor is connected to the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower or the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, if a jumper is installed across terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
*2 When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21. *3 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 521.) *4 Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse. *5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the corresponding
switch of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly to the OFF position. To input a current, set the switch to the ON position. Terminals 10 and 2 are also used as a PTC input terminal (Pr.561). (Refer to page 421.)
*6 It is recommended to use 2 W 1 k when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently. *7 Remove the jumper between terminals PR and PX to connect the brake resistor. (FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or
lower). *8 Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in the FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-
00023(0.4K) to 01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of brake resistors. (Refer to page 97.) *9 Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3. *10 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Output terminal function selection (Pr.195 or Pr.196). (Refer to page 473.) *11 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Output terminal function selection (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 473.) *12 Terminal FM can be used to output pulse trains as open collector output by setting Pr.291. *13 Not required when calibrating the scale with the operation panel.
NOTE To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm or more away from the power cables. Also, keep the
cables of the main circuit for input and output separated. After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
Set the switches of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
472. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
4
Type CA
Analog current output (0 to 20mADC)
F/C (CA)
R
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
PC
Common for external power supply transistor
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
Start self-holding selection
Middle speed
High speed
Low speed
Jog operation
Second function selection
Output stop
Reset Terminal 4 input selection
(Current input selection) Selection of automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 10E(+10V)
10(+5V)
2
(Analog common)
2 3
1
Auxiliary input
Terminal 4 input (Current input)
1
4
Frequency setting potentiometer 1/2W1k
Running
Up to frequency
Instantaneous power failure Overload
Frequency detection
Open collector output common Sink/source common
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)
Jumper
Motor
Relay output 1 (Fault output)
C1
B1
A1
U V W
P1
(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)
Analog signal output
Earth (Ground)
AM
5
0 to 5VDC selectable 0 to 10VDC
(DC0 to 10V)
Multi-speed selection
Open collector output
Contact input common
Earth (Ground)
Main circuit terminal Control circuit terminal
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC selectable
MC
Main circuit
C2
B2
A2 Relay output 2
Relay output
M
0 to 20mADC
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC
selectable 4 to 20mADC TXD+
Terminating resistor
TXD-
RXD+ RXD-
Data transmission
GND
RS-485 terminals
PU connector
USB A connector
USB mini B connector
S IN
K
S O
U R
C E
Connector for plug-in option connection
STF
STR
STP(STOP)
RH
RM
RL
JOG
RT
MRS
RES
AU
CS
SD
RUN
SU
IPF
OL
FU
SE
Data reception
(+) (-)
5
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
ON
OFF
+2424V external power supply input
VCC
(+) (-)
5V (Permissible load current 100mA)
Source logic
Earth (Ground)
R
Connector 1 Connector 2
Connector 3
Jumper
Jumper
PX PR N/-P/+
Control circuit
Initial value
Initial value
Initial value
ON
42 OFF
Voltage/current input switch
Brake unit (Option)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Brake resistor (FR-ABR)
Safety monitor output
Safety monitor output common
So (SO)
SOC
Safety stop signal
Safety stop input (Channel 1)
Shorting wire
Safety stop input common
Safety stop input (Channel 2)
S1
S2
PC
SD SIC
SD
24VDC power supply
Jumper
P1
Earth (Ground)
R
P3 PR N/-P/+
Brake unit (Option)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Brake resistor
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
GND (SG)
Inrush current limit circuit
Output shutoff circuit
24V
Inrush current limit circuit
Common terminal
24V
8 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or whenever a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option. Refer to page 826 to select the right DC reactor according to the applicable motor capacity. When a DC reactor is connected to the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower or the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, if a jumper is installed across terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
*2 When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21. *3 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 521.) *4 Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse. *5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the corresponding
switch of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly to the OFF position. To input a current, set the switch to the ON position. Terminals 10 and 2 are also used as a PTC input terminal (Pr.561). (Refer to page 421.)
*6 It is recommended to use 2 W 1 k when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently. *7 Remove the jumper between terminals PR and PX to connect the brake resistor. (FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or
lower). *8 Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in the FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-
00023(0.4K) to 01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of brake resistors. (Refer to page 97.) *9 Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3. *10 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Output terminal function selection (Pr.195 or Pr.196). (Refer to page 473.) *11 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 473.)
NOTE To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm or more away from the power cables. Also, keep the
cables of the main circuit for input and output separated. After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
Set the switches of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
492. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
5
Type FM (FR-A800-GF)
*1 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or whenever a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option. Refer to page 826 to select the right DC reactor according to the applicable motor capacity. When a DC reactor is connected to the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower or the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, if a jumper is installed across terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
PC24VDC power supply (Common for external power supply transistor)
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
Start self-holding selection
Middle speed
High speed
Low speed
Jog operation
Second function selection
Output stop
Reset Terminal 4 input selection
(Current input selection) Selection of automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 10E(+10V)
10(+5V)
2
(Analog common)
2 3
1
Auxiliary input
Terminal 4 input (Current input)
1
4
Frequency setting potentiometer 1/2W1k
Running
Up to frequency
Instantaneous power failure Overload
Frequency detection
Open collector output common Sink/source common
F/C (FM)
SD
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)
Jumper
Motor
Relay output 1 (Fault output)
C1
B1
A1
U V W
P1
Indicator (Frequency meter, etc.)
+ -
(-)
(+) Analog signal output (0 to 10VDC)
Earth (Ground)
AM
5 0 to 5VDC selectable 0 to 10VDC
Multi-speed selection
Open collector output
Moving-coil type 1mA full-scale
Contact input common
Calibration resistor
Earth (Ground)
Main circuit terminal Control circuit terminal
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC selectable
MC
Main circuit
C2
B2
A2 Relay output 2
Relay output
M
0 to 20mADC
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC
selectable 4 to 20mADC TXD+
Terminating resistor
TXD-
RXD+ RXD-
GND (SG)
Data transmission
GND
RS-485 terminals
PU connector
USB A connector
USB mini B connector
S IN
K
S O
U R
C E
Connector for plug-in option connection
STF
STR
STP(STOP)
RH
RM
RL
JOG
RT
MRS
RES
AU
CS
SD
RUN
SU
IPF
OL
FU
SE
Data reception
(+) (-)
5
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
ON
OFF
+2424V external power supply input SD
Common terminal
VCC
(+) (-)
5V (Permissible load current 100mA)
Sink logic
Earth (Ground)
R
R
Connector 2
Connector 3
CC-Link IE Field Network communication connector
PORT 1
PORT 2
Jumper
Jumper
PX PR N/-P/+
Control circuit
Initial value
Initial value
Initial value
ON
42 OFF
Voltage/current input switch
Brake unit (Option)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Brake resistor (FR-ABR)
Safety monitor output
Safety monitor output common
So (SO)
SOC
S1
S2
PC
SD SIC
Safety stop signal
Safety stop input (Channel 1)
Shorting wire
Safety stop input common
Safety stop input (Channel 2)
Jumper
P1
Earth (Ground)
R
P3 PR N/-P/+
Brake unit (Option)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Brake resistor
Inrush current limit circuit
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
24V
Inrush current limit circuit
24V
Output shutoff circuit
0 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*2 When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21. *3 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 521.) *4 Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse. *5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the corresponding
switch of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly to the OFF position. To input a current, set the switch to the ON position. Terminals 10 and 2 are also used as a PTC input terminal (Pr.561). (Refer to page 421.)
*6 It is recommended to use 2 W 1 k when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently. *7 Remove the jumper between terminals PR and PX to connect the brake resistor. (FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or
lower). *8 Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in the FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-
00023(0.4K) to 01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of brake resistors. (Refer to page 97.) *9 Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3. *10 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Output terminal function selection (Pr.195 or Pr.196). (Refer to page 473.) *11 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Output terminal function selection (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 473.) *12 Terminal FM can be used to output pulse trains as open collector output by setting Pr.291. *13 Not required when calibrating the scale with the operation panel.
NOTE To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm or more away from the power cables. Also, keep the
cables of the main circuit for input and output separated. After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
Set the switches of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
512. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
5
Type CA (FR-A800-GF)
Analog current output (0 to 20mADC)
F/C (CA)
R
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
PC
Common for external power supply transistor
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
Start self-holding selection
Middle speed
High speed
Low speed
Jog operation
Second function selection
Output stop
Reset Terminal 4 input selection
(Current input selection) Selection of automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 10E(+10V)
10(+5V)
2
(Analog common)
2 3
1
Auxiliary input
Terminal 4 input (Current input)
1
4
Frequency setting potentiometer 1/2W1k
Running
Up to frequency
Instantaneous power failure Overload
Frequency detection
Open collector output common Sink/source common
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)
Jumper
Motor
Relay output 1 (Fault output)
C1
B1
A1
U V W
P1
(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)
Analog signal output
Earth (Ground)
AM
50 to 5VDC selectable 0 to 10VDC
(DC0 to 10V)
Multi-speed selection
Open collector output
Contact input common
Earth (Ground)
Main circuit terminal Control circuit terminal
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC selectable
MC
Main circuit
C2
B2
A2 Relay output 2
Relay output
M
0 to 20mADC
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC
selectable 4 to 20mADC TXD+
Terminating resistor
TXD-
RXD+ RXD-
Data transmission
GND
RS-485 terminals
S IN
K
S O
U R
C E
STF
STR
STP(STOP)
RH
RM
RL
JOG
RT
MRS
RES
AU
CS
SD
RUN
SU
IPF
OL
FU
SE
Data reception
(+) (-)
5
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
ON
OFF
+2424V external power supply input
VCC
(+) (-)
5V (Permissible load current 100mA)
Source logic
Earth (Ground)
R
Jumper
Jumper
PX PR N/-P/+
Control circuit
Initial value
Initial value
Initial value
ON
42 OFF
Voltage/current input switch
Brake unit (Option)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Brake resistor (FR-ABR)
Safety monitor output
Safety monitor output common
So (SO)
SOC
Safety stop signal
Safety stop input (Channel 1)
Shorting wire
Safety stop input common
Safety stop input (Channel 2)
S1
S2
PC
SD SIC
SD
24VDC power supply
Jumper
P1
Earth (Ground)
R
P3 PR N/-P/+
Brake unit (Option)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Brake resistor
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
GND (SG)
Inrush current limit circuit
PU connector
USB A connector
USB mini B connector
Connector for plug-in option connection
Connector 2
Connector 3
CC-Link IE Field Network communication connector
PORT 1
PORT 2
Output shutoff circuit
24V
Inrush current limit circuit
Common terminal
24V
2 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or whenever a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option. Refer to page 826 to select the right DC reactor according to the applicable motor capacity. When a DC reactor is connected to the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower or the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, if a jumper is installed across terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
*2 When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21. *3 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 521.) *4 Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse. *5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the corresponding
switch of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly to the OFF position. To input a current, set the switch to the ON position. Terminals 10 and 2 are also used as a PTC input terminal (Pr.561). (Refer to page 421.)
*6 It is recommended to use 2 W 1 k when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently. *7 Remove the jumper between terminals PR and PX to connect the brake resistor. (FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or
lower). *8 Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in the FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-
00023(0.4K) to 01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of brake resistors. (Refer to page 97.) *9 Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3. *10 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Output terminal function selection (Pr.195 or Pr.196). (Refer to page 473.) *11 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 473.)
NOTE To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm or more away from the power cables. Also, keep the
cables of the main circuit for input and output separated. After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
Set the switches of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
532. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
5
2.5 Main circuit terminals
2.5.1 Details on the main circuit terminals
*1 Available when used in the common bus regeneration mode
Terminal symbol Terminal name Terminal function description Refer to page
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC power input
Connect these terminals to the commercial power supply. Do not connect anything to these terminals when using the high power factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR- XC)*1, or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).
U, V, W Inverter output Connect these terminals to a three-phase squirrel cage motor or a PM motor.
R1/L11, S1/L21 Power supply for the control circuit
Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/L2. To retain the fault display and fault output, or to use the high power factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC)*1, or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and across S/L2 and S1/ L21, and supply external power to these terminals. The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from R1/L11 and S1/L21 differs according to the inverter capacity. FR-A820-00630(11K) or lower, FR-A840-00380(15K) or lower: 60 VA FR-A820-00770(15K) or higher, FR-A840-00470(18.5K) or higher: 80 VA
77
P/+, PR Brake resistor connection for FR- A820-00630(11K) or lower, or FR-A840-00380(15K) or lower
Connect an optional brake resistor (FR-ABR) across terminals P/+ and PR. Remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX for the inverter capacity that has terminal PX. Connecting a brake resistor increases the regenerative braking capability. 97
P3, PR
Brake resistor connection for FR- A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), or FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
Connect an optional brake resistor across terminals P3 and PR. Connecting a brake resistor increases the regenerative braking capability.
P/+, N/- Brake unit connection Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), power regeneration converter (MT-RC), high power factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC), or DC power supply (under DC feeding mode). When connecting multiple inverters, FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K) or FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K), in parallel using the FR-CV, FR-HC2, or FR-XC*1, always use either terminal P/+ or P3 for the connection. (Do not use terminals P/+ and P3 together.) Do not connect the DC power supply between terminals P3 and N/-. Use terminals P/+ and N/- for DC feeding.
100 P3, N/-
Brake unit connection for FR- A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), or FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
P/+, P1
DC reactor connection for FR- A820-03160(55K) or lower, or FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
Remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1, and connect a DC reactor. When a DC reactor is not connected, the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 should not be removed. When using a motor with a capacity of 75 kW or higher, always connect a DC reactor, which is available as an option.
109
DC reactor connection for FR- A820-03800(75K) or higher, or FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
Always connect a DC reactor, which is available as an option.
PR, PX Built-in brake circuit connection
When the jumper is connected across terminals PX and PR (initial status), the built-in brake circuit is valid. The built-in brake circuit is equipped in the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.
Earth (ground) For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Be sure to earth (ground) the inverter. 67
4 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5 Main circuit terminals
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When connecting an optional brake resistor (FR-ABR) or a brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU), remove the jumpers across
terminals PR and PX. For the details, refer to page 97.
2.5.2 Main circuit terminal layout and wiring to power supply and motor
FR-A820-00046(0.4K), FR-A820-00077(0.75K) FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K) FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to FR-A840-00126(3.7K)
FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K)
FR-A820-00630(11K) FR-A840-00310(11K), FR-A840-00380(15K)
FR-A820-00770(15K) to FR-A820-01250(22K) FR-A840-00470(18.5K), FR-A840-00620(22K)
FR-A820-01540(30K)*1, FR-A840-00770(30K)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/- P/+
PR
PXR1/L11 S1/L21
M
Jumper
Jumper
MotorPower supply Charge lamp
Jumper
Jumper
MotorPower supply M
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ PR
R1/L11 S1/L21 PX
Charge lamp
N/- P/+ PR
PX
R1/L11 S1/L21 Jumper
Jumper
Power supply M
Motor
Charge lamp
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/- P/+ PRR1/L11 S1/L21
Power supply
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
M Motor
Charge lamp
Jumper
Jumper
PRP3
R1/L11 S1/L21
M
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
Power supply
Charge lamp
Jumper
Motor
Jumper M
N/-
P/+
PRP3 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
Power supply
Jumper
Jumper
Motor
Charge lamp
552. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5 Main circuit terminals
5
*1 Terminals P3 and PR of the FR-A820-01540(30K) are not provided with a screw. Do not connect anything to them. *2 When an option other than the DC reactor must be connected to terminal P/+, use terminal P/+ (for option connection).
FR-A820-01870(37K), FR-A820-02330(45K) FR-A820-03160(55K)
FR-A820-03800(75K), FR-A820-04750(90K) FR-A840-03250(110K) to FR-A840-04810(185K)*2
FR-A840-00930(37K) to FR-A840-01800(55K)
FR-A840-02160(75K), FR-A840-02600(90K) FR-A840-05470(220K) to FR-A840-06830(280K)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+P1
M
R1/L11 S1/L21 Charge lamp
Jumper
Jumper
MotorPower supply
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+P1
Jumper
Charge lamp
Power supply M
R1/L11 S1/L21
Jumper Motor
Power supply M
Motor DC reactor
(option)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+ (for option connection)
P/+
P/+
Jumper
Charge lamp R1/L11 S1/L21
M Power supply Motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ P3 PR
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
R1/L11 S1/L21
M Power supply Motor
S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
P/+
DC reactor (option)
R/L1
Jumper
Charge lamp R1/L11 S1/L21
M
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
P/+
Power supply MotorDC reactor (option)
Jumper
Charge lamp
6 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5 Main circuit terminals
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE Make sure the power cables are connected to the R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. (Phase need not be matched.) Never connect the
power cable to the U, V, and W of the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter. Connect the motor to U, V, and W. (The phases must be matched.) When wiring the inverter main circuit conductor of the FR-A840-05470(220K) or higher, tighten a nut from the right side of the
conductor. When wiring two cables, place cables on both sides of the conductor. For wiring, use bolts (nuts) provided with the inverter. (Refer to the following figure.)
Handling of the wiring cover (FR-A820-00630(11K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to 00620(22K)) For the hook of the wiring cover, cut off the necessary parts using a pair of needle-nose pliers etc.
NOTE Cut off the same number of lugs as wires. If parts where no wire is put through have been cut off (10 mm or more), protective
structure (IEC 60529) becomes an open type (IP00).
2.5.3 Recommended cables and wiring length Select a recommended size cable to ensure that the voltage drop ratio is within 2%. If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, the voltage drop in the main circuit will cause the motor torque to decrease especially at a low speed. The following tables show the recommended cable size for cables that are 20 m in length.
572. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5 Main circuit terminals
5
For the ND rating 200 V class (220 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
200 V class (220 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
400 V class (440 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Applicable inverter model
FR-A820-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00046(0.4K) to 00167(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6 00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 5.5 6 8 16 10 16 00630(11K) M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16 00770(15K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 22-8 38 22 38 14 2 4 35 25 25 01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25 01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 80-10 60-10 80 60 80 22 3/0 1/0 70 70 35 02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 03160(55K) M12 (M8) 46 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
Applicable inverter model
FR-A820-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00046(0.4K) to 00167(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6 00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 5.5 8 8 10 10 10 00630(11K) M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16 00770(15K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 38 14 4 4 25 25 16 01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25 01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 22 1/0 1/0 70 70 35 02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 03160(55K) M12 (M8) 46 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 03800(75K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 125 125 125 38 250 250 120 120 04750(90K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 38 300 300 150 150
Applicable inverter model
FR-A840-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00023(0.4K) to 00126(3.7K)
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 4 00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00310(11K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 10 00380(15K) M5 2.5 8-5 5.5-5 8 5.5 8 5.5 8 10 10 6 10 00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 14-6 8-6 14 8 14 8 6 8 16 10 16 00620(22K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16 00770(30K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00930(37K) M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 01160(45K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 1 2 50 50 25 01800(55K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
8 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5 Main circuit terminals
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
400 V class (440 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, HIV cable (600 V grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wire) etc. with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 50C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter. For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable) etc. with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C or more. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 50C or less and housed in an enclosure.
*2 For all the 200 V class capacities and FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, THHW cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter. For the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, THHN cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40C or less and housed in an enclosure. (For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction Manual (Startup) or Instruction Manual (Hardware).)
*3 For the FR-A820-00770(15K) or lower and the FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, PVC cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter. For the FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, XLPE cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40C or less and housed in an enclosure. (Selection example mainly for use in Europe.)
*4 Screws for terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, PX, P/+, N/-, and P1, and the screw for earthing (grounding). The size of screws for terminals PR and PX on FR-A820-00340(5.5K) and FR-A820-00490(7.5K) is indicated in parentheses. The size of the earthing (grounding) screw on FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher is indicated in parentheses. The size of the screw for terminal P/+ for option connection on FR-A840-03250(110K) and FR-A840-03610(132K) is indicated in parentheses.
For the SLD rating 200 V class (220 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Applicable inverter model
FR-A840-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00023(0.4K) to 00126(3.7K)
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 4 00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00310(11K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 10 00380(15K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 8 5.5 10 10 6 6 10 00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 8-6 8-6 8 8 14 8 8 8 10 10 16 00620(22K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16 00770(30K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00930(37K) M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 01160(45K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 50 50 25 01800(55K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 02160(75K) M10 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 02600(90K) M10 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 22 3/0 3/0 50 50 25 03250(110K) M10 (M12) 26.5 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35 03610(132K) M10 (M12) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 04320(160K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 125 125 150 38 250 250 120 120 70 04810(185K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 38 300 300 150 150 95 05470(220K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2100 2100 2100 60 24/0 24/0 295 295 95 06100(250K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2100 2100 2125 60 24/0 24/0 295 295 95 06830(280K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2125 2125 2125 60 2250 2250 2120 2120 120
Applicable inverter model
FR-A820-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00046(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00077(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00105(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00167(2.2K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6 00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 5.5 6 8 16 10 16 00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16 00630(11K) M5 2.5 22-5 22-5 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
592. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5 Main circuit terminals
6
200 V class (220 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
400 V class (440 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
00770(15K) M6 4.4 38-6 22-6 38 22 38 14 2 4 50 25 25 00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 50 50 25 01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 80-8 80-8 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
Applicable inverter model
FR-A820-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable
Applicable inverter model
FR-A820-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00046(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00077(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00105(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00167(2.2K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6 00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 14 5.5 8 8 10 10 10 00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16 00630(11K) M5 2.5 22-5 22-5 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00770(15K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 38 14 4 4 25 25 25 00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 50 50 25 01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 80-8 80-8 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35 01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 03160(55K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 125 125 125 38 250 250 120 120 03800(75K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 38 24/0 24/0 295 295 04750(90K) M12 (M8) 46 100-12 100-12 2100 2100 2100 60 24/0 24/0 295 295
Applicable inverter model
FR-A840-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00023(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00038(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00052(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00083(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00126(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 4 00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 10 00310(11K) M5 2.5 8-5 5.5-5 8 5.5 8 5.5 8 10 10 6 10 00380(15K) M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 8 6 8 16 10 16 00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16 00620(22K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00770(30K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00930(37K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 1 2 50 50 25 01160(45K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
0 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5 Main circuit terminals
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
400 V class (440 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, HIV cable (600 V grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wire) etc. with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 50C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter. For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable) etc. with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C or more. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 50C or less and housed in an enclosure.
*2 For all the 200 V class capacities and FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, THHW cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter. For the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, THHN cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40C or less and housed in an enclosure. (For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction Manual (Startup) or Instruction Manual (Hardware).)
*3 For the FR-A820-00770(15K) or lower and the FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, PVC cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter. For the FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, XLPE cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40C or less and housed in an enclosure. (Selection example mainly for use in Europe.)
*4 Screws for terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, PX, P/+, N/-, and P1, and the screw for earthing (grounding). The size of screws for terminals PR and PX on FR-A820-00340(5.5K) and FR-A820-00490(7.5K) is indicated in parentheses. The size of the earthing (grounding) screw on FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher is indicated in parentheses. The size of the screw for terminal P/+ for option connection on FR-A840-03250(110K) and FR-A840-03610(132K) is indicated in parentheses.
For the LD rating 200 V class (220 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Applicable inverter model
FR-A840-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00023(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00038(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00052(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00083(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00126(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 14 14 2.5 2.5 4 00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 10 00310(11K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 8 5.5 10 10 6 6 10 00380(15K) M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 14 8 8 8 10 10 16 00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16 00620(22K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00770(30K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00930(37K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 50 50 25 01160(45K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 01800(55K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 02160(75K) M10 26.5 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35 02600(90K) M10 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 03250(110K) M10 (M12) 26.5 150-10 150-10 125 125 150 38 250 250 120 120 70 03610(132K) M10 (M12) 26.5 150-10 150-10 150 150 150 38 300 300 150 150 95 04320(160K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2100 2100 2100 60 24/0 24/0 295 295 95 04810(185K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2100 2100 2125 60 24/0 24/0 295 295 95 05470(220K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2125 2125 2125 60 2250 2250 2120 2120 120 06100(250K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2150 2150 2150 60 2300 2300 2150 2150 150 06830(280K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2200 2200 2200 100 2350 2350 2185 2185 295
Applicable inverter model
FR-A820-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00046(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00077(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00105(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00167(2.2K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
612. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5 Main circuit terminals
6
200 V class (220 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
400 V class (440 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 8-5 5.5-5 14 5.5 14 5.5 6 10 16 6 16 00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16 00630(11K) M5 2.5 22-5 22-5 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00770(15K) M6 4.4 38-6 22-6 38 22 38 14 2 4 35 25 25 00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25 01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 80-8 60-8 80 60 80 22 3/0 1/0 70 70 35 01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
Applicable inverter model
FR-A820-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable
Applicable inverter model
FR-A820-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00046(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00077(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00105(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00167(2.2K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6 00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 14 5.5 10 10 6 6 6 00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16 00630(11K) M5 2.5 22-5 22-5 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00770(15K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 38 14 4 4 25 25 16 00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25 01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 80 22 1/0 1/0 70 70 35 01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 03160(55K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 125 125 125 38 250 250 120 120 03800(75K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 38 24/0 24/0 150 150 04750(90K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 150 150 2100 60 24/0 24/0 295 295
Applicable inverter model
FR-A840-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00023(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00038(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00052(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00083(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00126(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 4 00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 10 00310(11K) M5 2.5 8-5 5.5-5 8 5.5 8 5.5 8 10 10 6 10 00380(15K) M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 8 6 8 16 10 16 00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16 00620(22K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00770(30K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00930(37K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 1 2 50 50 25 01160(45K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
2 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5 Main circuit terminals
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
400 V class (440 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, HIV cable (600 V grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wire) etc. with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 50C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter. For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable) etc. with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C or more. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 50C or less and housed in an enclosure.
*2 For all the 200 V class capacities and FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, THHW cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter. For the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, THHN cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40C or less and housed in an enclosure. (For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction Manual (Startup) or Instruction Manual (Hardware).)
*3 For the FR-A820-00770(15K) or lower and the FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, PVC cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter. For the FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, XLPE cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40C or less and housed in an enclosure. (Selection example mainly for use in Europe.)
*4 Screws for terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, PX, P/+, N/-, and P1, and the screw for earthing (grounding). The size of screws for terminals PR and PX on FR-A820-00340(5.5K) and FR-A820-00490(7.5K) is indicated in parentheses. The size of the earthing (grounding) screw on FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher is indicated in parentheses. The size of the screw for terminal P/+ for option connection on FR-A840-03250(110K) and FR-A840-03610(132K) is indicated in parentheses.
For the HD rating 200 V class (220 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Applicable inverter model
FR-A840-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00023(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00038(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00052(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00083(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00126(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6 00310(11K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 8 5.5 10 10 6 6 6 00380(15K) M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 14 8 8 8 10 10 10 00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16 00620(22K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00770(30K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 00930(37K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 50 50 25 01160(45K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 01800(55K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 02160(75K) M10 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 02600(90K) M10 26.5 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35 03250(110K) M10 (M12) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 03610(132K) M10 (M12) 26.5 150-10 150-10 125 125 150 38 250 250 120 120 70 04320(160K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 38 300 300 150 150 95 04810(185K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2100 2100 2100 60 24/0 24/0 295 295 95 05470(220K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2100 2100 2125 60 24/0 24/0 295 295 95 06100(250K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2125 2125 2125 60 2250 2250 2120 2120 120 06830(280K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2150 2150 2150 60 2300 2300 2150 2150 150
Applicable inverter model
FR-A820-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00046(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00077(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00105(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00167(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
632. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5 Main circuit terminals
6
200 V class (220 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
400 V class (440 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6 00630(11K) M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 5.5 6 8 16 10 16 00770(15K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16 00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 22-8 38 22 38 14 2 4 35 25 25 01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25 01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 80-10 60-10 80 60 80 22 3/0 1/0 70 70 35 03160(55K) M12 (M8) 46 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
Applicable inverter model
FR-A820-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable
Applicable inverter model
FR-A820-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00046(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00077(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00105(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00167(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6 00630(11K) M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 5.5 8 8 10 10 10 00770(15K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16 00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 38 14 4 4 25 25 16 01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25 01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 22 1/0 1/0 70 70 35 03160(55K) M12 (M8) 46 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 03800(75K) M12 (M8) 46 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 04750(90K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 125 125 125 38 250 250 120 120
Applicable inverter model
FR-A840-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00023(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00038(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00052(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00083(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00126(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00310(11K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00380(15K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6 00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 8-6 5.5-6 8 5.5 8 5.5 8 10 10 6 10 00620(22K) M6 4.4 14-6 8-6 14 8 14 8 6 8 16 10 16 00770(30K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16 00930(37K) M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 01160(45K) M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 01800(55K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 1 2 50 50 25
4 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5 Main circuit terminals
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
400 V class (440 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, HIV cable (600 V grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wire) etc. with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 50C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter. For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable) etc. with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C or more. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 50C or less and housed in an enclosure.
*2 For all the 200 V class capacities and FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, THHW cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter. For the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, THHN cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40C or less and housed in an enclosure. (For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction Manual (Startup) or Instruction Manual (Hardware).)
*3 For the FR-A820-00770(15K) or lower and the FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, PVC cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter. For the FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, XLPE cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40C or less and housed in an enclosure. (Selection example mainly for use in Europe.)
*4 Screws for terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, PX, P/+, N/-, and P1, and the screw for earthing (grounding). The size of screws for terminals PR and PX on FR-A820-00340(5.5K) and FR-A820-00490(7.5K) is indicated in parentheses. The size of the earthing (grounding) screw on FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher is indicated in parentheses. The size of the screw for terminal P/+ for option connection on FR-A840-03250(110K) and FR-A840-03610(132K) is indicated in parentheses.
The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following formula:
Line voltage drop [V] =
Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when the voltage drop (torque reduction) in the low speed range needs to be reduced.
Applicable inverter model
FR-A840-[]
Terminal screw size*4
Tightening torque (Nm)
Crimp terminal Cable gauge
HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
R/L1, S/ L2, T/
L3 U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
Earthing (grounding)
cable
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Earthing (grounding)
cable 00023(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00038(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00052(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00083(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00126(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 00310(11K) M5 2.5 5.5-6 5.5-6 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 00380(15K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6 00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 5.5-6 5.5-6 5.5 5.5 8 5.5 10 10 6 6 6 00620(22K) M6 4.4 8-6 8-6 8 8 14 8 8 8 10 10 10 00770(30K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16 00930(37K) M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 01160(45K) M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 01800(55K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 50 50 25 02160(75K) M10 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 02600(90K) M10 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 03250(110K) M10 (M12) 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 22 3/0 3/0 50 50 25 03610(132K) M10 (M12) 26.5 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35 04320(160K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 04810(185K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 125 125 150 38 250 250 120 120 70 05470(220K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 38 300 300 150 150 95 06100(250K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2100 2100 2100 60 24/0 24/0 295 295 95 06830(280K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2100 2100 2125 60 24/0 24/0 295 295 95
wire resistance [m/m] wiring distance [m] current [A] 1000
652. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5 Main circuit terminals
6
NOTE Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque.
A screw that has been tightened too loosely can cause a short circuit or malfunction. A screw that has been tightened too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage.
Use crimp terminals with insulation sleeves to wire the power supply and motor.
Total wiring length With induction motor Connect one or more general-purpose motors within the total wiring length shown in the following table. (The wiring length should be 100 m or shorter under Vector control.)
When driving a 400 V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor. In this case, take one of the following measure.
Use a "400 V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor" and set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection according to the wiring length.
For the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, connect a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) at the output side of the inverter. For the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, connect a sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) at the output side of the inverter.
With PM motor Use the wiring length of 100 m or shorter when connecting a PM motor. Use one PM motor for one inverter. Multiple PM motors cannot be connected to an inverter. When the wiring length exceeds 50 m for a 400 V class motor driven by an inverter under PM sensorless vector control, set "9" (6 kHz) or less in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.
NOTE Especially for long-distance wiring, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused by stray capacitance of the
wiring, leading to an activation of the overcurrent protection, malfunction of the fast-response current limit operation, or even to an inverter failure. It may also cause a malfunction or fault of the equipment connected ON the inverter output side. If the fast-response current limit function malfunctions, disable the function. (Refer to Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection on page 431.)
A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) can be used under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control. A sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) can be used under V/F control. Do not use the filters under different control methods.
For details on Pr.72 PWM frequency selection, refer to page 356. Refer to page 130 to drive a 400 V class motor by an inverter. The carrier frequency is limited during PM sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 356.)
Pr.72 setting (carrier frequency)
FR-A820-00046(0.4K) FR-A840-00023(0.4K)
FR-A820-00077(0.75K) FR-A840-00038(0.75K)
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or higher FR-A840-00052(1.5K) or higher
2 (2 kHz) or lower 300 m 500 m 500 m 3 (3 kHz) or higher 200 m 300 m 500 m
Total wiring length (FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or higher, FR-A840-00052(1.5K) or higher)
Wiring length 50 m or shorter Wiring length 50 to 100 m Wiring length longer
than 100 m 15 (14.5 kHz) or lower 9 (9 kHz) or lower 4 (4 kHz) or lower
500 m or less
300 m
300 m
300 m + 300 m = 600 m
6 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5 Main circuit terminals
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.5.4 Earthing (grounding) precautions Always earth (ground) the motor and inverter.
Purpose of earthing (grounding) Generally, an electrical apparatus has an earth (ground) terminal, which must be connected to the ground before use. An electrical circuit is usually insulated by an insulating material and encased. However, it is impossible to manufacture an insulating material that can shut off a leakage current completely, and actually, a slight current flows into the case. The purpose of earthing (grounding) the case of an electrical apparatus is to prevent operators from getting an electric shock from this leakage current when touching it. To avoid the influence of external noises, the earthing (grounding) is important to EMI-sensitive equipment that handle low- level signals or operate very fast such as audio equipment, sensors, computers.
Earthing (grounding) system to be established As described previously, the purpose of earthing (grounding) is roughly classified into the electrical shock prevention and the prevention of malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic noise. These two purposes should be clearly distinguished, and the appropriate earth (ground) system must be established to prevent the leakage current having the inverter's high frequency components from reversing through another earth (ground) point for malfunction prevention by following these instructions:
Make the separate earth (ground) connection (I) for high frequency products such as the inverter from any other devices (EMI-sensitive devices described above) wherever possible. Establishing adequate common (single-point) earth (ground) system (II) shown in the following figure is allowed only in cases where the separate earth (ground) system (I) is not feasible. Do not make inadequate common (single-point) earth (ground) connection (III). As leakage currents containing many high frequency components flows into the earthing (grounding) cables of the inverter and peripheral devices (including a motor), the inverter must also be earthed (grounded) separately from EMI-sensitive devices described above. In a high building, it may be effective to use its iron structure frames as earthing (grounding) electrode for EMI prevention in order to separate from the earth (ground) system for electric shock prevention.
NOTE To be compliant with the EU Directive (Low Voltage Directive), refer to the Instruction Manual (Startup).
- Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes (NEC section 250, IEC 61140 class 1 and other applicable standards). A neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply for 400 V class inverter in compliance with EN standard must be used.
- Use the thickest possible earthing (grounding) cable. The earthing (grounding) cable should be equal to the size indicated in the table on page 57.
- The earthing (grounding) point should be as close as possible to the inverter, and the earth (ground) wire length should be as short as possible.
- Run the earthing (grounding) cable as far away as possible from the I/O wiring of the EMI-sensitive devices and run them in parallel in the minimum distance.
Inverter Other
equipment
(I) Separate earthing (grounding): Good
Inverter Other equipment
(II) Common (single-point) earthing (grounding): OK
Inverter Other equipment
(III) Inadequate common (single-point) earthing (grounding): Bad
672. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5 Main circuit terminals
6
2.6 Control circuit
2.6.1 Details on the control circuit terminals Input signal
Type Terminal symbol Common Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification
Refer to
page
C on
ta ct
in pu
t
STF*1
SD (sink (negative common)) PC (source (positive common))
Forward rotation start
Turn ON the STF signal to start forward rotation and turn it OFF to stop.
When the STF and STR signals are turned ON simultaneously, the stop command is given.
Input resistance: 4.7 k, voltage when contacts are open: 21 to 27 VDC, current when contacts are short-circuited: 4 to 6 mADC
722
STR*1 Reverse rotation start
Turn ON the STR signal to start reverse rotation and turn it OFF to stop.
STP (STOP)*1
Start self-holding selection
Turn ON the STP (STOP) signal to self-hold the start signal. 722
RH RM RL*1
Multi-speed selection
Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH, RM and RL signals. 411
JOG*1
Jog mode selection Turn ON the JOG signal to enable JOG operation (initial setting) and turn ON the start (STF or STR) signal to start JOG operation.
410
Pulse train input
Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. To use as a pulse train input terminal, change the Pr.291 setting. (maximum input pulse: 100k pulses/s)
Input resistance: 2 k, current when contacts are short-circuited: 8 to 13 mADC
406
RT*1 Second function selection
Turn ON the RT signal to enable the second function. When the second function such as "Second torque boost" and "Second V/F (base frequency)" is set, turning ON the RT signal enables the selected function.
Input resistance: 4.7 k, voltage when contacts are open: 21 to 27 VDC, current when contacts are short-circuited: 4 to 6 mADC
525
MRS*1 Output stop
Turn ON the MRS signal (20 ms or more) to stop the inverter output. Use this signal to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor with an electromagnetic brake.
524
RES*1 Reset
Use this signal to reset a fault output provided when a protective function is activated. Turn ON the RES signal for 0.1 second or longer, then turn it OFF. In the initial setting, reset is always enabled. By setting Pr.75, reset can be enabled only at an inverter fault occurrence. The inverter recovers about 1 second after the reset is released.
336
AU*1 Terminal 4 input selection
The terminal 4 function is available only when the AU signal is ON. Turning the AU signal ON makes terminal 2 invalid.
496
CS*1
Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
When the CS signal is left ON, the inverter restarts automatically at power restoration. Note that restart setting is necessary for this operation. In the initial setting, a restart is disabled.
628, 635
8 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 The terminal function can be selected by Pr.178 to Pr.196 (Input terminal function selection). (Refer to page 521.) *2 Set Pr.73, Pr.267, and the voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting.
Applying a voltage with the switch ON (current input is selected) or applying a current with the switch OFF (voltage input is selected) could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuits of output devices. (For the details, refer to page 496.)
*3 Sink logic is initially set for the FM-type inverter. *4 Source logic is initially set for the CA-type inverter.
Fr eq
ue nc
y se
tti ng
10E 5 Frequency setting power supply
When connecting the frequency setting potentiometer at an initial status, connect it to terminal 10. Change the input specifications of terminal 2 using Pr.73 when connecting it to terminal 10E.
10 VDC 0.4 V, permissible load current: 10 mA
496
10 5 5 VDC 0.5 V, permissible load current: 10 mA
496
2 5 Frequency setting (voltage)
Inputting 0 to 5 VDC (or 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA) provides the maximum output frequency at 5 V (10 V, 20 mA) and makes input and output proportional. Use Pr.73 to switch among input 0 to 5 VDC (initial setting), 0 to 10 VDC, and 0 to 20 mA. Set the voltage/ current input switch 1 for terminal 2 in the ON position to select current input (0 to 20 mA).*2
For voltage input, input resistance: 10 to 11 k, maximum permissible voltage: 20 VDC. For current input, input resistance: 245 5 , maximum permissible current: 30 mA.
496
4 5 Frequency setting (current)
Inputting 4 to 20 mADC (or 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V) provides the maximum output frequency at 20 mA and makes input and output proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is ON (terminal 2 input is invalid). Use Pr.267 to switch among input 4 to 20 mA (initial setting), 0 to 5 VDC, and 0 to 10 VDC. Set the voltage/current input switch 2 for terminal 4 in the OFF position to select voltage input (0 to 5 V / 0 to 10 V).*2 Use Pr.858 to switch terminal functions.
496
1 5 Frequency setting auxiliary
Input 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC to add this signal to the frequency setting signal input via terminal 2 or 4. Use Pr.73 to switch between input 0 to 5 VDC and 0 to 10 VDC (initial setting). Use Pr.868 to switch terminal functions.
Input resistance: 10 to 11 k, maximum permissible voltage: 20 VDC.
496
Th er
m is
to r
10 2 PTC thermistor
input
For receiving PTC thermistor outputs. When PTC thermistor is valid (Pr.561 "9999"), terminal 2 is not available for frequency setting.
Applicable PTC thermistor specification, overheat detection resistance: 0.5 to 30 k (Set by Pr.561)
415
Po w
er s
up pl
y in
pu t
+24 SD 24 V external power supply input
For connecting a 24 V external power supply. If a 24 V external power supply is connected, power is supplied to the control circuit while the main power circuit is OFF.
Input voltage: 23 to 25.5 VDC, input current: 1.4 A or less
80
Type Terminal symbol Common Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification
Refer to
page
Voltage/current input switch
2 4
switch1 switch2
692. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
7
Output signal
*1 The terminal function can be selected by Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 473.) *2 Terminal FM is provided in the FM-type inverter. *3 Terminal CA is provided in the CA-type inverter.
Type Terminal symbol Common Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification
Refer to
page
R el
ay
A1, B1, C1*1
Relay output 1 (fault output)
1 changeover contact output that indicates that an inverter's protective function has been activated and the outputs are stopped. Fault: discontinuity across B and C (continuity across A and C), Normal: continuity across B and C (discontinuity across A and C)
Contact capacity: 230 VAC 0.3 A (power factor = 0.4), 30 VDC 0.3 A
473
A2, B2, C2*1
Relay output 2 1 changeover contact output 473
O pe
n co
lle ct
or
RUN*1 SE Inverter running
The output is in LOW state when the inverter output frequency is equal to or higher than the starting frequency (initial value: 0.5 Hz). The output is in HIGH state during stop or DC injection brake operation.
Permissible load: 24 VDC (27 VDC at maximum) 0.1 A (The voltage drop is 2.8 V at maximum while the signal is ON.) The open collector transistor is ON (conductive) in LOW state. The transistor is OFF (not conductive) in HIGH state.
473
SU*1 SE Up to frequency
The output is in LOW state when the output frequency is within the set frequency range 10% (initial value). The output is in HIGH state during acceleration/deceleration and at a stop.
Fault code (4 bits) output. (Refer to page 492.)
484
OL*1 SE Overload warning
The output is in LOW state when stall prevention is activated by the stall prevention function. The output is in HIGH state when stall prevention is canceled.
431
IPF*1 SE Instantaneous power failure
The output is in LOW state when an instantaneous power failure occurs or when the undervoltage protection is activated.
628, 635
FU*1 SE Frequency detection
The output is in LOW state when the inverter output frequency is equal to or higher than the preset detection frequency, and is in HIGH state when it is less than the preset detection frequency.
484
Pu ls
e
FM*2 SD
For meter
Among several monitor items such as output frequency, select one to output it via these terminals. The signal is not output during an inverter reset. The size of output signal is proportional to the magnitude of the corresponding monitor item. Use Pr.55, Pr.56, and Pr.866 to set full scales for the monitoring output frequency, output current, and torque. (Refer to page 457.)
Output item: output frequency (initial setting)
Permissible load current: 2 mA, pulse for full scale: 1440 pulses/ s
457
NPN open collector output
This terminal can be used for open collector outputs depending on the Pr.291 setting.
Maximum output pulse: 50k pulses/s, permissible load current: 80 mA
406
An al
og
AM 5 Analog voltage output Output item:
output frequency (initial setting)
Output signal: 0 10 VDC, permissible load current: 1 mA (load impedance 10 k or more), resolution: 13 bits
457
CA*3 5 Analog current output
Load impedance: 200 to 450 , output signal: 0 to 20 mADC
457
0 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Safety stop signal
Common terminal
*1 Sink logic is initially set for the FM-type inverter. *2 Source logic is initially set for the CA-type inverter.
Terminal symbol Terminal name Common Terminal function description Rated specification
Refer to
page
S1 Safety stop input (channel 1)
SIC
Use terminals S1 and S2 to receive the safety stop signal input from the safety relay module. Terminals S1 and S2 can be used at a time (dual channel). The Inverter judges the condition of the internal safety circuit from the status (shorted/opened) between terminals S1 and SIC, or between S2 and SIC. When the status is opened, the inverter output is shut off. In the initial status, terminal S1 and S2 are shorted with terminal PC by shorting wires. Terminal SIC is shorted with terminal SD. Remove the shorting wires and connect the safety relay module when using the safety stop function.
Input resistance: 4.7 k, input current: 4 to 6 mADC (with 24 VDC input)
82
S2 Safety stop input (channel 2)
So (SO) Safety monitor output (open collector output) SOC
The output status varies depending on the input status of the safety stop signals. The output is in HIGH state during occurrence of the internal safety circuit failure. The output is in LOW state otherwise. (The open collector transistor is ON (conductive) in LOW state. The transistor is OFF (not conductive) in HIGH state.) Refer to the Safety Stop Function Instruction Manual if the output becomes in HIGH state even though both terminals S1 and S2 are open. (Contact your sales representative for this manual.)
Permissible load: 24 VDC (27 VDC at maximum), 0.1 A (The voltage drop is 3.4 V at maximum while the signal is ON.)
Terminal symbol Common Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification
Refer to
page
SD
Contact input common (sink)*1
Common terminal for the contact input terminal (sink logic), terminal FM.
External transistor common (source)*2
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by undesirable current.
24 VDC power supply common
Common terminal for the 24 VDC power supply (terminal PC, terminal +24). Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
PC
External transistor common (sink)*1
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid malfunction by undesirable current.
Power supply voltage range: 19.2 to 28.8 VDC, permissible load current: 100 mA
73 Contact input common (source)*2
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).
SD 24 VDC power supply Can be used as a 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply.
5 Frequency setting common
Common terminal for the frequency setting signal (via terminal 2, 1, or 4) and for the analog output terminals AM and CA. Do not earth (ground).
496
SE Open collector output common Common terminal for terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU
SIC Safety stop input terminal common Common terminal for terminals S1 and S2. 82
SOC Safety monitor output terminal common Common terminal for terminal So (SO). 82
712. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
7
Communication
CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
2.6.2 Control logic (sink/source) change Switch the control logic of input signals as necessary. To change the control logic, change the jumper connector position on the control circuit board. Connect the jumper connector to the connector pin of the desired control logic. The control logic of input signals is initially set to the sink logic (SINK) for the type FM inverter. The control logic of input signals is initially set to the source logic (SOURCE) for the type CA inverter. (The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper connector position.)
Type Terminal symbol Terminal name Terminal function description Refer
to page
R S-
48 5
PU connector
RS-485 communication can be made through the PU connector (For connection on a 1:1 basis only) Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485) Transmission format: Multidrop link Communication speed: 4800 to 115200 bps Wiring length: 500 m
659
R S-
48 5
te rm
in al
s TXD+ Inverter transmission terminal RS-485 communication can be made through the RS-485 terminals.
Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485) Transmission format: Multidrop link Communication speed: 300 to 115200 bps Overall length: 500 m
661
TXD- RXD+ Inverter reception
terminalRXD- GND (SG) Earthing (grounding)
U SB
USB A connector
A connector (receptacle). Plug a USB memory device into this connector to copy parameter settings or use the trace function. Interface: conforms to USB
1.1 (USB 2.0 full-speed compatible) Transmission speed: 12 Mbps
85
USB B connector
Mini B connector (receptacle). By connecting the inverter to a personal computer via this connector, FR Configurator2 installed on the computer can be used for setting the inverter, or monitoring or testing the inverter operation.
85
Type Terminal name Terminal function description Refer
to page
C C
-L in
k IE PORT 1
Communication can be made via the CC-Link IE Field Network. 110 PORT 2
For sink logic
SOURCE
SINK
Jumper connector
2 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE Make sure that the jumper connector is installed correctly. Never change the control logic while power is ON. To change the control logic for the FR-A800-GF, remove the control circuit terminal block and change the jumper connector
position. (Refer to page 819 for details on how to remove the terminal block.) After changing the jumper connector position, reinstall the control circuit terminal block securely in place.
Sink logic and source logic In the sink logic, a signal turns ON when a current exits from the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals. In the source logic, a signal turns ON when a current enters into the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
Current
PC
STF R
STR R
Source logic
Source connector
Current
SD
STF R
STR R
Sink connector
Sink logic
Current flow concerning the input/output signal when sink logic is selected
Current flow concerning the input/output signal when source logic is selected
DC input (source type)
24 VDC
RUN
SE
TB1
TB18
R
Inverter
R
Current flow
+ -+-
DC input (sink type)
Inverter
24 VDC
RUN
SE
TB1
TB17
R
R
Current flow
732. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
7
When using an external power supply for transistor output
2.6.3 Wiring of control circuit Control circuit terminal layout
Recommended cable gauge: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2
*1 This terminal operates as terminal FM for the type FM inverter. For the type CA inverter, the terminal operates as terminal CA.
Wiring method Power supply connection Use crimp terminals and stripped wire for the control circuit wiring. For single wire, the stripped wire can be used without crimp terminal. Connect the end of wires (crimp terminal or stranded wire) to the terminal block.
1. Strip the signal wires as follows. If too much of the wire is stripped, a short circuit may occur with neighboring wires. If not enough of the wire is stripped, wires may become loose and fall out. Twist the stripped end of wires to prevent them from fraying. Do not solder them.
Sink logic Use terminal PC as a common terminal, and perform wiring as follows. (Do not connect terminal SD on the inverter with the terminal of 0 V for the external power supply. When using terminals PC-SD as a 24 VDC power supply, do not install an external power supply in parallel with the inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable currents.)
Source logic Use terminal SD as a common terminal, and perform wiring as follows. (Do not connect terminal PC on the inverter with the terminal of +24 V for the external power supply. When using terminals PC-SD as a 24 VDC power supply, do not install an external power supply in parallel with the inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable currents.)
QY40P type transistor output unit
TB1
TB2
TB17
TB18
24 VDC SD
PC
STR
STF
Inverter
24 VDC (SD)
Current flow
Constant voltage circuit
QY80 type transistor output unit
Constant voltage circuit
PC
TB1
TB2
TB17Fuse
TB18
STF
STR
SD
Inverter
24 VDC (SD)
24 V
D C
Current flow
AM
2 5 4 1 F/C +24 SD SD S1 S2 PC A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2SICSo SOC
5 10E 10 SE SE SURUN IPF OL FU PC RL RM RH RT AU SD SD CSSTP MRS RES STF STR JOG
1
Cable sheath stripping length
4 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2. Crimp the terminals on the wire. Insert the wire into a crimp terminal, making sure that 0 to 0.5 mm of the wire protrudes from the end of the sleeve. Check the condition of the crimp terminals after crimping. Do not use the crimp terminals of which the crimping is inappropriate, or the face is damaged.
Crimp terminals commercially available (as of October 2020) Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
*1 A ferrule terminal with an insulation sleeve compatible with the MTW wire which has a thick wire insulation. *2 Applicable for terminals A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, C2.
NICHIFU Co., Ltd.
NOTE When using stranded wires without a blade terminal, twist enough to avoid short circuit with a nearby terminals or wires. Place the flathead screwdriver vertical to the open/close button. In case the blade tip slips, it may cause an inverter damage
or injury.
Wire gauge (mm2)
Ferrule part No. Crimping tool model No.With insulation sleeve Without insulation sleeve For UL wire*1
0.3 AI 0,34-10TQ
CRIMPFOX 6
0.5 AI 0,5-10WH AI 0,5-10WH-GB 0.75 AI 0,75-10GY A 0,75-10 AI 0,75-10GY-GB 1 AI 1-10RD A 1-10 AI 1-10RD/1000GB 1.25, 1.5 AI 1, 5-10BK A 1, 5-10 AI 1,5-10BK/1000GB*2
0.75 (two-wire product) AI-TWIN 20,75-10GY
Wire gauge (mm2)
Blade terminal part No. Insulation cap part No. Crimping tool model
No. 0.3 to 0.75 BT 0.75-11 VC 0.75 NH 69
3. Insert the wire into the terminal block. When using single wire or stranded wire without crimp terminal, push an open/close button all the way down with a flathead screwdriver, and insert the wire.
Crumpled tip Wires are not inserted into the sleeve
Unstranded wires
Damaged
Wire
Sleeve
0 to 0.5mm
Flathead screwdriver
Open/close button
752. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
7
Wire removal Pull the wire while pushing the open/close button all the way down firmly with a flathead screwdriver.
NOTE Pulling out the wire forcefully without pushing the open/close button all the way down may damage the terminal block. Use a small flathead screwdriver (tip thickness: 0.4 mm / tip width: 2.5 mm).
If a flathead screwdriver with a narrow tip is used, terminal block may be damaged. Commercially available products (as of October 2020)
Place the flathead screwdriver vertical to the open/close button. In case the blade tip slips, it may cause an inverter damage or injury.
Common terminals of the control circuit (SD, PC, 5, SE) Terminals SD (sink logic), PC (source logic), 5, and SE are common terminals (0 V) for I/O signals. (All common terminals
are isolated from each other.) Do not earth (ground) these terminals. Avoid connecting terminal SD (sink logic) with terminal 5, terminal PC (source logic) with terminal 5, and terminal SE with terminal 5.
In the sink logic, terminal SD is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF, STR, STP (STOP), RH, RM, RL,
JOG, RT, MRS, RES, AU, and CS) and the pulse train output terminal (FM*1). The open collector circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
In the source logic, terminal PC is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF, STR, STP (STOP), RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, MRS, RES, AU, CS). The open collector circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
Terminal 5 is a common terminal for the frequency setting terminals (1, 2, and 4) and the analog output terminals (AM and
CA*2). It should be protected from external noise using a shielded or twisted cable. Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminals (RUN, SU, OL, IPF, and FU). The contact input
circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler. *1 Terminal FM is provided in the FM-type inverter. *2 Terminal CA is provided in the CA-type inverter.
Signal inputs by contactless switches The contact input terminals of the inverter (STF, STR, STP (STOP), RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, MRS, RES, AU, and CS) can be controlled using a transistor instead of a contact switch as follows.
Product name Model Manufacturer
Screwdriver SZF 0- 0,4 2,5 Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
Flathead screwdriver
Open/close button
+24 V
STF, etc.
SD Inverter
External signal input using transistor (sink logic)
PC
RSTF, etc.
+24 V
Inverter
External signal input using transistor (source logic)
6 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.6.4 Wiring precautions It is recommended to use a cable of 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 for the connection to the control circuit terminals. The wiring length should be 30 m (200 m for terminal FM) at the maximum. Use two or more parallel micro-signal contacts or twin contacts to prevent contact faults when using contact inputs since
the control circuit input signals are micro-currents.
To suppress EMI, use shielded or twisted cables for the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and power circuits (including the 200 V relay sequence circuit). For the cables connected to the control circuit terminals, connect their shields to the common terminal of the connected control circuit terminal. When connecting an external power supply to terminal PC, however, connect the shield of the power supply cable to the negative side of the external power supply. Do not directly earth (ground) the shield to the enclosure, etc.
Always apply a voltage to the fault output terminals (A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, and C2) via a relay coil, lamp, etc. When a relay coil is connected to the output terminals, use one with a surge absorbing function (reflux diode). When the
voltage application direction is incorrect, the inverter will be damaged. Pay attention to the diode direction or other precautions to avoid incorrect wiring.
For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, separate the wiring of the control circuit away from the wiring of the main circuit. Make cuts in rubber bush of the inverter side and lead the wires through.
2.6.5 When using separate power supplies for the control circuit and the main circuit
Cable size for the control circuit power supply (terminals R1/L11 and S1/ L21)
Terminal screw size: M4
Micro signal contacts Twin contacts
RUN
SE
Power 24 or 12 VDC
Inverter
RA
Rubber bush (viewed from inside)
Make cuts along the lines on the inside with a cutter knife
772. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
7
Cable gauge: 0.75 to 2 mm2
Tightening torque: 1.5 Nm
Connection method
FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower, FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or lower
FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to FR-A820-00630(11K), FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to FR-A840-00380(15K)
Connection diagram If a fault occurs and the electromagnetic contactor (MC) installed at the inverter's input line is opened, power supply to the control circuit is also stopped and the fault signals cannot be output anymore. Terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 of the control circuit are provided to keep outputting the fault signals in such a case. Follow the following steps to wire terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 on the inverter to the power input lines of the MC. Do not connect the power cable to incorrect terminals. Doing so may damage the inverter.
Inverter MC
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3 R1/L11
S1/L21
Remove the jumper
Main circuit terminal block
(c)
(a)
(b)
(d)
T/L3
S/L2 R/L1
S1/L21
R1/L11
(a) Remove the upper screws. (b) Remove the lower screws. (c) Remove the jumper. (d) Connect the separate power cable for the control circuit to the lower terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).
Main circuit terminal block
(c)
(d)
(a)
T/L3 S/L2
R/L1
S1/L21 R1/L11
(b)
(a) Remove the upper screws. (b) Remove the lower screws. (c) Remove the jumper. (d) Connect the separate power cable for the control circuit to the upper terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).
8 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FR-A820-00770(15K) or higher, FR-A840-00470(18.5K) or higher
R1/L11 S1/L21
Power supply terminal block for the control circuit
(c)
(d)
(a) (b)
Power supply terminal block for the control circuit
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21 Power supply terminal block for the control circuit
Main power supply
MC
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K) FR-A840-00470(18.5K), 00620(22K)
FR-A820-01540(30K) FR-A840-00770(30K)
FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher FR-A840-00930(37K) or higher
(a) Remove the upper screws. (b) Remove the lower screws. (c) Pull the jumper toward you to remove. (d) Connect the separate power cable for the control circuit to the upper terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).
792. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
8
NOTE When using separate power supplies, always remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and across S/L2 and S1/
L21. The inverter may be damaged if the jumpers are not removed. When the control circuit power is supplied from other than the input line of the MC, the voltage of the separate power supply
must be the same as that of the main control circuit. The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from R1/L11 and S1/L21 differs according to the inverter
capacity.
If the main circuit power is switched OFF (for 0.1 second or more) then ON again, the inverter is reset and a fault output will not be held.
When a power supply is provided for the control circuit separately from the main circuit and a capacitive device (such as an EMC filter or a radio noise filter) is connected, refer to the following diagram. (For the wiring example to comply with ship classification standards, refer to page 858.)
2.6.6 When supplying 24 V external power to the control circuit
Connect the 24 V external power supply across terminals +24 and SD to turn the I/O terminal ON/OFF operation, keep the operation panel ON, and carry out communication during communication operation even at power-OFF state of inverter's main circuit power supply. When the main circuit power supply is turned ON, the power supply is switched from the 24 V external power supply to the main circuit power supply.
Specification of the applied 24 V external power supply
Commercially available products (as of October 2020)
*1 For the latest information about OMRON power supply, contact OMRON corporation.
Inverter Power supply capacity
FR-A820-00630(11K) or lower FR-A840-00380(15K) or lower 60 VA
FR-A820-00770(15K) or higher FR-A840-00470(18.5K) or higher 80 VA
R1/L11 S1/L21
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
MC
Capacitive device
Item Rated specification Input voltage 23 to 25.5 VDC Input current 1.4 A or less
Model Product overview Manufacturer
S8FS-G05024C*1
Specifications: Capacity 50 W, output voltage 24 VDC, output current 2.2 A Installation method: Direct installation, screw type terminal block with cover Input: Single-phase 100 to 240 VAC
OMRON Corporation S8VK-S06024*1
Specifications: Capacity 60 W, output voltage 24 VDC, output current 2.5 A Installation method: DIN rail, push-in (spring) type terminal block Input: Single-phase 100 to 240 VAC
S8VK-WA24024*1
Specifications: Capacity 240 W, output voltage 24 VDC, output current 10 A Installation method: DIN rail, push-in (spring) type terminal block Input: Three-phase 200 to 240 VAC
0 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Starting and stopping the 24 V external power supply operation Supplying 24 V external power while the main circuit power is OFF starts the 24 V external power supply operation.
Likewise, turning OFF the main circuit power while supplying 24 V external power starts the 24 V external power supply operation.
Turning ON the main circuit power stops the 24 V external power supply operation and enables the normal operation.
NOTE When the 24 V external power is supplied while the main circuit power supply is OFF, the inverter operation is disabled. In the initial setting, when the main circuit power supply is turned ON during the 24 V external power supply operation, a reset
is performed in the inverter, then the power supply changes to the main circuit power supply. (The reset can be disabled using Pr.30. (Refer to page 724.))
Confirming the 24 V external power supply input During the 24 V external power supply operation, "EV" blinks on the operation panel. The alarm lamp also blinks. Thus,
the 24 V external power supply operation can be confirmed even when the operation panel is removed.
During 24 V external power supply operation, the 24 V external power supply operation (EV) signal is output. To use the EV signal, set "68 (positive logic) or 168 (negative logic)" in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign function to an output terminal.
Operation while the 24 V external power is supplied Fault history and parameters can be read and parameters can be written (when the parameter write from the operation
panel is enabled) using the operation panel keys. The safety stop function is invalid during the 24 V external power supply operation. During the 24 V external power supply operation, the monitor items and signals related to inputs to main circuit power
supply, such as the output current, converter output voltage, and IPF signal, are invalid. The alarms, which have occurred when the main circuit power supply is ON, continue to be output after the power supply
is changed to the 24 V external power supply. Perform the inverter reset or turn OFF then ON the power to reset the faults. If the power supply changes from the main circuit power supply to the 24 V external power supply while measuring the
main circuit capacitor's life, the measurement completes after the power supply changes back to the main circuit power supply (Pr.259 = "3").
The output data is retained when "1 or 11" is set in Pr.495 Remote output selection.
NOTE Inrush current equal to or higher than the 24 V external power supply specification may flow at power-ON. Confirm that the
power supply and other devices are not affected by the inrush current and the voltage drop caused by it. Depending on the power supply, the overcurrent protection may be activated to disable the power supply. Select the power supply and capacity carefully.
When the wiring length between the external power supply and the inverter is long, the voltage often drops. Select the appropriate wiring size and length to keep the voltage in the rated input voltage range.
In a serial connection of several inverters, the current increases when it flows through the inverter wiring near the power supply. The increase of the current causes voltage to drop further. When connecting different inverters to different power supplies, use the inverters after confirming that the input voltage of each inverter is within the rated input voltage range. Depending on the power supply, the overcurrent protection may be activated to disable the power supply. Select the power supply and capacity carefully.
"E.SAF" or "E.P24" may appear when the start-up time of the 24 V power supply is too long (less than 1.5 V/s) in the 24 V external power supply operation.
"E.P24" may appear when the 24 V external power supply input voltage is low. Check the external power supply input. Do not touch the control circuit terminal block (circuit board) during the 24 V power supply operation (when conducted).
Otherwise you may get an electric shock or burn.
POWER ALARM
Blinking
Blinking
812. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
8
2.6.7 Safety stop function Function description The terminals related to the safety stop function are as follows.
*1 In the initial status, terminals S1 and PC, S2 and PC, and SIC and SD are respectively shorted with shorting wires. To enable the safety stop function, remove all the shorting wires, and then connect a safety relay module as shown in the connection diagram.
*2 When any fault listed on the next page occurs in the internal safety circuit, the corresponding indication is shown on the operation panel.
NOTE Terminal So (SO) can be used to display a fault indication and to prevent restarting of the inverter. The signal output from
terminal So (SO) cannot be used to input a safety stop signal to other devices.
Connection diagram To prevent restart at failure occurrence, connect terminals So (SO) and SOC to the reset button, which are the feedback input terminals of the safety relay module.
Terminal symbol Terminal function description
S1*1 Input terminal as the safety stop channel 1. Status of both the circuit between terminals S1 and SIC and the circuit between terminals S2 and SIC Open: Safety stop is activated. Shorted: Safety stop is not activated
S2*1 Input terminal as the safety stop channel 2.
SIC*1 Common terminal for S1 and S2.
So (SO)
Output terminal used for fault detection and fault indication display. The terminal is ON (conducted) while no internal safety circuit failure*2 exists.
OFF: Internal safety circuit fault*2
ON: No internal safety circuit failure*2
SOC Open collector output (terminal So (SO)) common
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
M
So (SO)
SOC
S1
S2 G G
ASIC
Inverter
SIC
SD
Logic
RESET
Emergency stop button
Safety relay module / Safety programmable controller
PC Gate Driver
Gate Driver
IGBTs
24 VDC
CPU
+24V
2 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Safety stop function operation
*1 The terminal ON state shows that the terminal is conducted (the line is closed), and the OFF state shows that the terminal is not conducted (the line is open).
*2 When not using the safety stop function, short across terminals S1 and PC, S2 and PC, and SIC and SD to use the inverter. (In the initial status, terminals S1 and PC, S2 and PC, and SIC and SD are respectively shorted with shorting wires.)
*3 If any of the faults shown in the following table occurs, terminal So (SO) and the SAFE signal turn OFF.
*4 When the internal safety circuit is operated normally (no faults occurs), terminal So (SO) and the SAFE signal remains ON until "E.SAF" is displayed. Terminal So (SO) and the SAFE signal turns OFF when "E.SAF" is displayed.
*5 "SA" is displayed when terminals S1 and S2 are identified as OFF due to a fault occurred in the internal safety circuit. *6 If another fault occurs when the fault E.SAF occurs, the other fault indication may be displayed. *7 If another warning occurs when the warning SA occurs, the other warning indication may be displayed. *8 The ON/OFF state of the output signal is the one for the positive logic. The ON and OFF are reversed for the negative logic. *9 To assign the function of the SAFE signal to an output terminal, set either value shown in the following table in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection).
*10 The use of SAFE signal has not been certified for compliance with safety standards.
For more details, refer to the Safety Stop Function Instruction Manual. Find a PDF file of the manual in the CD-ROM enclosed with the product. The manual can also be downloaded in PDF form from the Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website. www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/fa
Input power
Internal safety circuit
status
Input terminal*1*2 Output terminal
Output signal*8*9*10 Inverter operating status
Operation panel indication
S1 S2 So (SO) SAFE E.SAF*6 SA*7
OFF OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state) Not displayed Not displayed
ON
Normal ON ON ON*3 OFF Operation enabled Not displayed Not displayed
Normal ON OFF OFF*4 OFF*4 Output shutoff (Safe state) Displayed Displayed
Normal OFF ON OFF*4 OFF*4 Output shutoff (Safe state) Displayed Displayed
Normal OFF OFF ON*3 ON*3 Output shutoff (Safe state) Not displayed Displayed
Fault ON ON OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state) Displayed Not displayed*5
Fault ON OFF OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state) Displayed Displayed Fault OFF ON OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state) Displayed Displayed Fault OFF OFF OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state) Displayed Displayed
Fault type Operation panel indication Fault type Operation panel indication Option fault E.OPT Speed deviation excess detection E.OSD Communication option fault E.OP1 to E.OP3 Signal loss detection E.ECT Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board) E.PE Excessive position fault E.OD
Retry count excess E.RET Brake sequence fault E.MB1 to E.MB7 Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board) E.PE2
CPU fault E.CPU
Operation panel power supply short circuit/RS-485 terminals power supply short circuit
E.CTE E.5 to E.7
Encoder phase fault E.EP
24 VDC power fault E.P24 Magnetic pole position unknown E.MP Safety circuit fault E.SAF
Internal circuit fault E.13 Overspeed occurrence E.OS
Output signal Pr.190 to Pr.196 settings
Positive logic Negative logic SAFE 80 180
832. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.6 Control circuit
8
2.7 Communication connectors and terminals
2.7.1 PU connector Mounting the operation panel or the parameter unit on the enclosure
surface Having an operation panel or a parameter unit on the enclosure surface is convenient. With a connection cable, the
operation panel or the parameter unit can be mounted to the enclosure surface and connected to the inverter. Use the cable option FR-CB2[ ] or the following connector and cable available on the market. (To install the operation panel, the optional connector (FR-ADP) is also required.) Securely insert one end of the cable into the PU connector and the other end into the connection connector on the parameter unit or the FR-ADP attached on the operation panel until the stoppers are fixed.
NOTE Refer to the following table when fabricating the cable on the user side. Keep the total cable length within 20 m.
Communication operation Using the PU connector as a computer network port enables communication operation from a personal computer, etc.
When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can run to monitor the inverter or read and write parameters. Communication can be performed with the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link operation). For the details, refer to page 659.
Parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB2[ ]) (option)
Operation panel (FR-DU08) Parameter unit (FR-PU07) (option)
Operation panel connection connector (FR-ADP) (option)
STF FWD PU
Operation panel (FR-LU08) (option)
Name Remarks Communication cable Cable compliant with EIA-568 (such as 10BASE-T cable)
4 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.7 Communication connectors and terminals
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.7.2 USB connector
USB host communication
Different inverter data can be saved in a USB memory device. The USB host communication enables the following functions.
When the inverter recognizes the USB memory device without any problem, " " is briefly displayed on the operation panel.
When the USB memory device is removed, " " is briefly displayed on the operation panel. The operating status of the USB host can be checked on the LED display of the inverter.
When a device such as a USB charger is connected to the USB connector and an excessive current (500 mA or higher)
flows, USB host error " " (UF warning) is displayed on the operation panel. When the UF warning appears, the USB error can be canceled by removing the USB device and setting Pr.1049 = "1".
(The UF warning can also be canceled by resetting the inverter power or resetting with the RES signal.)
Interface Conforms to USB 1.1 Transmission speed 12 Mbps
Wiring length Maximum 5 m Connector USB A connector (receptacle)
Compatible USB memory
Format FAT32 Capacity 1 GB or more (used in the recorder mode of the trace function)
Encryption function Not available
Function Description Refer
to page
Parameter copy
Copies the parameter settings from the inverter to the USB memory device. A maximum of 99 parameter setting files can be saved in a USB memory device.
The parameter setting data copied in the USB memory device can be copied to other inverters. This function is useful in backing up the parameter setting or for sharing the parameter setting among multiple inverters.
The parameter setting file can be copied onto a personal computer from the USB memory device and edited using FR Configurator2.
747
Trace The monitoring data and output status of the signals can be saved in a USB memory device. The saved data can be imported to FR Configurator2 to diagnose the operating status of the inverter. 649
PLC function data copy
This function copies the PLC function project data to a USB memory device when the PLC function is used.
The PLC function project data copied in the USB memory device can be copied to other inverters. This function is useful in backing up the parameter setting and for allowing multiple inverters to operate
by the same sequence programs.
646
LED display status Operating status OFF No USB connection. ON The communication is established between the inverter and the USB device. Fast blinking The USB memory device is being accessed. (Do not remove the USB memory device.) Slow blinking Error in the USB connection.
Place a flathead screwdriver, etc. in a slot and push up the cover to open.
USB host (A connector)
USB device (Mini B connector)
Communication status indicator (LED)
Personal computer (FR Configurator2)
USB memory device
852. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.7 Communication connectors and terminals
8
NOTE Do not connect devices other than a USB memory device to the inverter. If a USB device is connected to the inverter via a USB hub, the inverter cannot recognize the USB memory device properly.
USB device communication The inverter can be connected to a personal computer with a USB (ver. 1.1) cable. Parameter setting and monitoring can be performed by using FR Configurator2.
NOTE For details on FR Configurator2, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.
2.7.3 RS-485 terminal block Communication operation
The RS-485 terminals enable communication operation from a personal computer, etc. When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can run to monitor the inverter or read and write parameters. Communication can be performed with the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link operation) and MODBUS RTU protocol. For the details, refer to page 661.
Interface Conforms to USB 1.1 Transmission speed 12 Mbps
Wiring length Maximum 5 m Connector USB mini B connector (receptacle)
Power supply Self-powered
Conforming standard EIA-485 (RS-485) Transmission format Multidrop link
Communication speed maximum 115200 bps Overall length 500 m
Connection cable Twisted pair cable (4 pairs)
+ -+ TXD RXD-VCC GND
+ -+ TXD RXD-VCC GND
OPEN
100
RDA1 (RXD1+)
RDB1 (RXD1-)
RDA2 (RXD2+)
RDB2 (RXD2-)
SDA1 (TXD1+)
SDB1 (TXD1-)
SDA2 (TXD2+)
SDB2 (TXD2-)
P5S (VCC)
SG (GND)
P5S (VCC)
SG (GND)
Terminating resistor switch Initially-set to "OPEN". Set only the terminating resistor switch of the remotest inverter to the "100" position.
6 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.7 Communication connectors and terminals
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
Using encoder-equipped motors together with a Vector control compatible option enables speed, torque, and positioning control operations under orientation control, encoder feedback control, and full-scale Vector control. This section explains wiring for use of the FR-A8AP.
Appearance and parts name of the FR-A8AP
Terminals of the FR-A8AP
NOTE When the encoder's output voltage differs from its input power supply voltage, the signal loss detection (E.ECT) may occur. Incorrect wiring or faulty setting to the encoder will cause a fault such as an overcurrent (E.OC[ ]) and an inverter overload
(E.THT). Correctly perform the encoder wiring and setting.
Front view Rear view
Terminal layout
PA 2
PB 2
PZ 2
SD SD PO
PA 1
PB 1
PZ 1
PG PG PI N
PIN and PO are not used.
1 2 3 4
O N 1 2
O N
SW2
SW3
SW 1
(a)
(a)
(a)(b)
(a)(a)
(a)
(e)
(d)
(f)
(c)
(h)
Symbol Name Description Refer to page (a) Mounting hole Used for installation to the inverter. (b) Terminal block Connected with the encoder. 91
(c) Encoder type selection switch (SW3) Switches the encoder type (differential line driver/complementary). 88
(d) CON2 connector Used for extension.
(e) Terminating resistor selection switches (SW1) Switch ON or OFF the internal terminating resistor. 88
(f) Switches (SW2) for manufacturer setting
Do not change the initial setting (both SW2-1 and SW2-2 switches: OFF ).
(g) Board mounted option connector Used to connect this product to the option connector on the inverter. 19 (h) LED for manufacturer check Not used.
1 2
O N
Terminal symbol Terminal name Description
PA1 Encoder A-phase signal input terminal
A-, B- and Z-phase signals are input from the encoder.
PA2 Encoder A-phase inverse signal input terminal PB1 Encoder B-phase signal input terminal PB2 Encoder B-phase inverse signal input terminal PZ1 Encoder Z-phase signal input terminal PZ2 Encoder Z-phase inverse signal input terminal PG Encoder power supply (positive) input terminal Input terminal for the encoder power supply.
Connect the external power supply and the encoder power cable. When the encoder output is the differential line driver type, only 5 V can be input. Make the voltage of the external power supply same as the encoder output voltage. (Check the encoder specification.)
SD Encoder power supply ground terminal
PIN Not used.
PO
872. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
8
Switches on the FR-A8AP Use the encoder type selection switch (SW3) to select the differential line driver or the complementary.
It is initially set to the differential line driver. Switch its position according to the output circuit.
Use the terminating resistor selection switches (SW1) to select ON/OFF of the internal terminating resistor. Set the switches ON (initial status) when an encoder output type is differential line driver, and set OFF when complementary. ON: With internal terminating resistor (initial status) OFF: Without internal terminating resistor
NOTE Set all switches to the same setting (ON/OFF). Set the switches OFF when sharing an encoder with another unit (NC (computerized numerical controller), etc.) having a
terminating resistor under the differential line driver setting.
Motor and switch setting
*1 Set according to the motor (encoder). *2 Prepare the power supply (5 V/12 V/15 V/24 V) for the encoder according to the encoder's output voltage. When the control terminal option FR-
A8TP is installed, 24 V power supply can be provided from the FR-A8TP. *3 When the encoder output is the differential line driver type, only 5 V can be input.
NOTE The SW2 switches are for manufacturer setting. Do not change the setting. When the power supply of the inverter is turned OFF, also turn off the power supply of the encoder. Otherwise, the plug-in
option may be damaged.
Complementary
Differential line driver (initial status)
1 2 3 4
O N
1 2
O N
SW2
SW3
SW 1
Internal terminating resistor-ON (initial status)
Internal terminating resistor-OFF
1 2 3 4
O N 1 2
O N
SW2
SW3
SW 1
Motor Encoder type selection switch (SW3)
Terminating resistor selection switches (SW1)
Power supply specification*2
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor with encoder Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor with encoder
SF-JR Differential ON 5 V SF-HR Differential ON 5 V
Others *1 *1 *1*3
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor with encoder
SF-JRCA Differential ON 5 V SF-HRCA Differential ON 5 V Others *1 *1 *1*3
Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU Complementary OFF 12 V Other manufacturer's motor with encoder *1 *1 *1*3
8 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Encoder specifications
Encoder cable SF-JR/HR/JRCA/HRCA with encoder
SF-V5RU, SF-THY
Item Encoder for SF-JR Encoder for SF-V5RU Resolution 1024 pulses/rev 2048 pulse/rev Power supply voltage 5 VDC 10% 12 VDC 10%, 24 VDC 10% Current consumption 150 mA 150 mA
Output signal form Phase A and Phase B: 90 degrees out of phase, Phase Z: 1 pulse/rev
Phase A and Phase B: 90 degrees out of phase, Phase Z: 1 pulse/rev
Output circuit Differential line driver AM26LS31 equivalent Complementary
Output voltage H level: 2.4 V or more, L level: 0.5 V or less
H level: (Power supply for encoder - 3 V) or more, L level: 3 V or less
F-DPEVSB 12P 0.2 mm2
Earth cable Approx. 140 mm
60 mm L
D/MS3057-12A
D/MS3106B20-29S
11 m
m
PZ2 PZ1 PB2 PB1 PA2 PA1
PG
PG
SD
SD
P B N A R C
H K
PLG
2 mm2
A B C
D
EK
FGH J
L M
S
N
R
PT
D/MS3106B20-29S (As viewed from wiring side)
Positioning keyway
FR-A800 (FR-A8AP)
Model Length L (m) FR-JCBL5 5 FR-JCBL15 15 FR-JCBL30 30
A P clip for earthing (grounding) a shielded cable is provided.
Earth cable
F-DPEVSB 12P 0.2 mm2
L D/MS3106B20-29S
D/MS3057-12A
11 m
m
60 mm
Approx. 140 mm PZ2 PZ1 PB2 PB1 PA2 PA1
SD
SD
PG
PG
G F D C B A
R S
PLG
2 mm2
FR-A800 (FR-A8AP)
A B C D EK
FGHJ
L M
S
N
R
PT
D/MS3106B20-29S (As viewed from wiring side
Positioning keyway
Model Length L (m) FR-V7CBL5 5 FR-V7CBL15 15 FR-V7CBL30 30
892. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
9
When using an encoder cable (FR-JCBL, FR-V5CBL, etc.) dedicated to the conventional motor, the cables need to be treated as the terminal block of the FR-A8AP is an insertion type. Cut the crimp terminal of the encoder cable and strip its sheath to make its cable wires loose. Also, treat the shielding wires of the shielded twisted pair cable to ensure that they do not contact conductive areas. Wire the stripped cable after twisting it to prevent it from becoming loose. In addition, do not solder it.
NOTE Information on crimp terminals
Commercially available products (as of October 2020) Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
NICHIFU Co., Ltd.
When using a blade terminal (without insulation sleeve), take caution that the twisted wires do not come out.
Connection terminal compatibility table
Terminal screw size
Wire gauge (mm2)
Ferrule part No. Crimping tool
model No.With insulation sleeve
Without insulation sleeve
M2 0.3 AI 0,34-6TQ A 0,34-7
CRIMPFOX 6 0.5 AI 0,5-6WH A 0,5-6
Terminal screw size
Wire gauge (mm2)
Blade terminal part No.
Insulation cap part No.
Crimping tool model No.
M2 0.3 to 0.75 BT 0.75-7 VC 0.75 NH 69
Motor SF-V5RU, SF-THY SF-JR/HR/JRCA/HRCA (with encoder) Encoder cable FR-V7CBL FR-JCBL
FR-A8AP terminal
PA1 PA PA PA2 Do not connect anything to this. PAR PB1 PB PB PB2 Do not connect anything to this. PBR PZ1 PZ PZ PZ2 Do not connect anything to this. PZR PG PG 5E SD SD AG2
5 mm
Cable stripping size
0 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Wiring example Speed control
Torque control
Standard motor with encoder (SF-JR), 5 V differential line driver Vector control dedicated motor (SF- V5RU, SF-THY), 12 V complementary
Three-phase AC power
supply
MCCB MC R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
SF-JR motor with encoder
U V W
U V W E
C
*3
*1
*2
*4 *6
R PA1
FR-A8AP
PA2
PB1 PB2
PZ1 PZ2
PG
PG SD
SD
Differential
Terminating resistor ON
OFF
Complementary
A N
B P
H K
M
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start
Contact input common
STF STR
SD
PLG
Earth (Ground)
Inverter
10
2 2
3
1
Torque limit command
(10 V)
1
Frequency command Frequency setting
potentiometer 1/2 W 1 k 5
(+) (-)
5 VDC power supply(+) (-) *5
*4 *6 *3
PA1 FR-A8AP
PA2
PB1 PB2
PZ1 PZ2
PG
PG SD
SD
*1
Differential
Terminating resistor
ON
OFF
Complementary
SF-V5RU, SF-THY
U V W
U
A B C
V W E
G1 G2
A
Earth (Ground)
*2
Three-phase AC power
supply
MCCB MC OCR
B
C D
F G
S R
M
FAN
PLG
External thermal relay input *8
Thermal protector
*7
RH(OH) SD
Inverter
PC 2 W 1 k
12 VDC power supply(+) (-) *5
Standard motor with encoder (SF-JR), 5 V differential line driver Vector control dedicated motor (SF- V5RU, SF-THY), 12 V complementary
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
SF-JR motor with encoder
U V W
U V W E
C
*3
*1
*2
*4 *6
R PA1
FR-A8AP
PA2
PB1 PB2
PZ1 PZ2
PG
PG SD
SD
Differential
Terminating resistor ON
OFF
Complementary
A N
B P
H K
M
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start
Contact input common
STF STR
SD
PLG
Earth (Ground)
Inverter
5 VDC power supply(+) (-) *5
10
2 2
3
1
Torque command (10 V)
1
Speed limit command Frequency setting
potentiometer 1/2 W 1 k 5
(+) (-)
Three-phase AC power
supply
MCCB MC
*4 *6 *3
PA1 FR-A8AP
PA2
PB1 PB2
PZ1 PZ2
PG
PG SD
SD
*1
Differential
Terminating resistor
ON
OFF
Complementary
SF-V5RU, SF-THY
U V W
U
A B C
V W E
G1 G2
A
Earth (Ground)
*2
Three-phase AC power
supply
MCCB MC OCR
B
C D
F G
S R
M
FAN
PLG
External thermal relay input *8
Thermal protector
*7
RH(OH) SD
Inverter
PC 2 W 1 k
12 VDC power supply(+) (-) *5
912. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
9
Position control
*1 The pin number differs according to the encoder used. Speed, control, torque control, and position control by pulse train input are available with or without the Z-phase being connected.
*2 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio must be 1:1. *3 Earth (ground) the shield of the encoder cable to the enclosure using a tool such as a P-clip. (Refer to page 93.) *4 For the complementary, set the terminating resistor selection switches in the OFF position. (Refer to page 88.) *5 A separate external power supply is necessary according to the encoder power specification.
When the encoder output is the differential line driver type, only 5 V can be input. Make the voltage of the external power supply the same as the encoder output voltage, and connect the external power supply between terminals PG and SD.
*6 For terminal compatibility of the FR-JCBL, FR-V7CBL, and FR-A8AP, refer to page 90. *7 Single-phase power supply (200 V/50 Hz, 200 to 230 V/60 Hz) is used for the fan for a 7.5 kW or lower dedicated motor. *8 Connect the recommended 2W1k resistor between terminals PC and OH. (Recommended product: MOS2C102J 2W1k by KOA Corporation)
Insert the input line and the resistor to a 2-wire blade terminal, and connect the blade terminal to terminal OH. (For the recommended 2-wire blade terminals, refer to page 74.) Insulate the lead wire of the resistor, for example by applying a contraction tube, and shape the wires so that the resistor and its lead wire do not touch other cables. Caulk the lead wire securely together with the thermal protector input line using a 2-wire blade terminal. (Do not subject the lead wire's bottom area to an excessive pressure.) To use a terminal as terminal OH, assign the OH (External thermal relay input) signal to an input terminal. (Set "7" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189. For details, refer to page 521.)
*9 Assign the function using Pr.178 to Pr.184, Pr.187 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection). *10 When position control is selected, terminal JOG function is invalid and simple position pulse train input terminal becomes valid. *11 Assign the function using Pr.190 to Pr.194 (Output terminal function selection).
Vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU, SF-THY), 12 V complementary
Torque limit command (10 V)
1
5
(+) (-)
Three-phase AC power
supply
MCCB R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
*4 *6 *3
PA1 FR-A8AP
PA2
PB1 PB2
PZ1 PZ2
PG
PG SD
SD
Forward stroke end Reverse stroke end
Pre-excitation/servo on
Clear signal
Pulse train
Sign signal
Preparation ready signal
STF STR LX *9
CLR *9CLEAR
JOG *10
NP *9
*1
Differential line driver
Terminating resistor
ON
OFF
SF-V5RU, SF-THY
U V W
U
A B C
V W E
G1 G2
A
Earth (ground)
*2
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB MC OCR
B
C D
F G
S R
M
FAN
PLG
External thermal protector relay input *8
Thermal protector
*7
RH(OH) SD
Inverter
Positioning unit MELSEC-iQ-R RD75P[]
MELSEC-Q QD75P[ ]N/QD75P[ ] MELSEC-L LD75P[ ]
PC 2 W 1 k
12 VDC power supply(+) (-) *5
PULSE F
PULSE R
PULSE COM
CLRCOM
RDYCOM
READY
PC
RDY *11
SE
FLS RLS
DOG STOP
COM
24 VDC power supply
MC
Complementary
PC
Resistor (2 W1k) Insulate
Insulate
RH (OH)
To thermal protector
2-wire blade terminal
When OH signal is assigned to terminal RH (Pr.182 = 7)
2 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Instructions for encoder cable wiring Use shielded twisted pair cables (0.2 mm2 or larger) to connect the FR-A8AP. For the wiring to terminals PG and SD, use
several cables in parallel or use a thick cable, according to the wiring length. To protect the cables from noise, run them away from any source of noise (such as the main circuit and power supply voltage).
*1 When differential line driver is set and a wiring length is 30 m or more.
The wiring length can be extended to 100 m by increasing the 5 V power supply (approximately to 5.5 V) while using six or more 0.2 mm2 gauge
cables in parallel or a 1.25 mm2 or larger gauge cable. The voltage applied must be within power supply specifications of encoder. To reduce noise of the encoder cable, earth (ground) the encoder's shielded cable to the enclosure (as close as possible
to the inverter) with a metal P-clip or U-clip.
When one encoder is shared between the FR-A8AP and CNC (computerized numerical controller), its output signal should be connected as follows. In this case, the wiring length between the FR-A8AP and CNC should be as short as possible, within 5 m.
NOTE For details on the optional encoder dedicated cable (FR-JCBL/FR-V7CBL), refer to page 89. The FR-V7CBL is provided with a P-clip for earthing (grounding) shielded cables.
Wiring length Parallel connection Larger-size cable Within 10 m At least two cables in parallel
Wire gauge 0.2 mm2
0.4 mm2 or larger Within 20 m At least four cables in parallel 0.75 mm2 or larger
Within 100 m*1 At least six cables in parallel 1.25 mm2 or larger
PZ2 PZ1
PA1 PA2 FB1 FB2
SD
SD
PG
PG
G F D C B A
R S
Encoder
2 mm2
FR-A800 (FR-A8AP)
Example of parallel connection with two cables
(with complementary encoder output)
Encoder cable Shield
P-clip
Earthing (grounding) example using a P-clip
Maximum 5 m (two parallel cables)
CNC
Inverter (FR-A8AP) Encoder
932. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
9
2.9 Parameter settings for a motor with encoder
Parameters for the encoder (Pr.359, Pr.369, Pr.851, Pr.852) Set the encoder specifications.
The parameters above can be set when a Vector control compatible option is installed.
The following table shows parameters to be set according to the Vector control compatible option to be used.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
359 C141
852 C241 Encoder rotation direction 1
0 Set when using a motor for which forward rotation (encoder) is clockwise (CW) viewed from the shaft
Set for the operation at 120 Hz or less.
100 Set for the operation at a frequency higher than 120 Hz.
1 Set when using a motor for which forward rotation (encoder) is counterclockwise (CCW) viewed from the shaft.
Set for the operation at 120 Hz or less.
101 Set for the operation at a frequency higher than 120 Hz.
369 C140
851 C240 Number of encoder pulses 1024 0 to 4096 Set the number of encoder pulses.
Set the number of pulses before it is multiplied by 4.
CW
CCW
Item FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR- A8APA parameter FR-A8APR parameter FR-A8APS parameter FR-A8TP parameter
Encoder/Resolver rotation direction Pr.359 Pr.852
Number of detector pulses Pr.369 (fixed pulses of 1024) (obtained via communication from the encoder)
Pr.851
4 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.9 Parameter settings for a motor with encoder
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameter settings for the motor under Vector control
*1 Offline auto tuning is required. (Refer to page 532.) *2 Set this parameter according to the motor. *3 Use the thermal protector input provided with the motor.
When using the inverter with the SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series), refer to the following table to set Pr.83 Rated motor voltage and Pr.84 Rated motor frequency.
When using the inverter with the SF-V5RU1, SF-V5RU3, or SF-V5RU4, refer to the following table to set Pr.83 Rated motor voltage and Pr.84 Rated motor frequency.
Motor model Pr.9 Electronic
thermal O/L relay
Pr.71 Applied motor
Pr.80 Motor capacity
Pr.81 Number of
motor poles
Pr.359/Pr.852 Encoder rotation direction
Pr.369/Pr.851 Number of
encoder pulses
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor
SF-JR Rated motor current 0 (initial value) Motor capacity Number of
motor poles 1 (initial value) 1024 (initial value)
SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower
Rated motor current 20 Motor capacity 4 1 (initial value) 1024 (initial
value)
SF-HR Rated motor current 40 Motor capacity Number of
motor poles 1 (initial value) 1024 (initial value)
Others Rated motor current 0 (3)*1 Motor capacity Number of
motor poles *2 *2
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor
SF-JRCA 4P Rated motor current 1 Motor capacity 4 1 (initial value) 1024 (initial
value)
SF-HRCA Rated motor current 50 Motor capacity Number of
motor poles 1 (initial value) 1024 (initial value)
Others Rated motor current 1 (13)*1 Motor capacity Number of
motor poles *2 *2
Vector control dedicated motor
SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) 0*3 30 Motor capacity 4 1 (initial value) 2048
SF-V5RU (other than the 1500 r/min series)
0*3 1 (13)*1 Motor capacity 4 1 (initial value) 2048
SF-THY 0*3 30 (33)*1 Motor capacity 4 1 (initial value) 2048 Other manufacturers standard motor
Rated motor current 0 (3)*1 Motor capacity Number of
motor poles *2 *2
Other manufacturers constant-torque motor
Rated motor current 1 (13)*1 Motor capacity Number of
motor poles *2 *2
PM motor Refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8APR.
Motor capacity
SF-V5RU Motor
capacity
SF-V5RU 200 V 400 V 200 V 400 V
Pr.83 (V) Pr.84 (Hz) Pr.83 (V) Pr.84 (Hz) Pr.83 (V) Pr.84 (Hz) Pr.83 (V) Pr.84 (Hz) 1.5 kW 188 52 345 52 18.5 kW 171 51 346 51 2.2 kW 188 52 360 52 22 kW 160 51 336 51 3.7 kW 190 52 363 52 30 kW 178 51 328 51 5.5 kW 165 51 322 51 37 kW 166 51 332 51 7.5 kW 164 51 331 51 45 kW 171 51 342 51 11 kW 171 51 320 51
55 kW 159 51 317 51 15 kW 164 51 330 51
Motor model Pr.83 setting
Pr.84 setting 200 V class 400 V class
SF-V5RU1-30kW or lower 160 V 320 V
33.33 Hz SF-V5RU1-37kW 170 V 340 V SF-V5RU3-22kW or lower 160 V 320 V SF-V5RU3, 30kW 170 V 340 V SF-V5RU4-3.7kW and 7.5kW 150 V 300 V
16.67 HzSF-V5RU4 and motors other than described above 160 V 320 V
952. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.9 Parameter settings for a motor with encoder
9
Combination with the Vector control dedicated motor When using the inverter with a Vector control dedicated motor, refer to the following table.
Combination with the SF-V5RU and SF-THY (ND rating)
Combination with the SF-V5RU1, 3, 4, and SF-THY (ND rating)
400 V class are developed upon receipt of order. *1 The maximum speed is 2400 r/min. *2 80% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 2400 r/min or faster.) *3 90% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 1000 r/min or faster.) *4 For motors with overload capacity 150% 60 seconds ("Y" at the end of their model names), contact your sales representative. *5 This model is developed upon receipt of order.
Voltage 200 V class 400 V class Rated speed 1500 r/min
Base frequency 50 Hz Maximum speed 3000 r/min
Motor capacity Motor frame No. Motor model Inverter model
FR-A820-[] Motor frame
No. Motor model Inverter model FR-A840-[]
1.5 kW 90L SF-V5RU1K 00167(2.2K) 90L SF-V5RUH1K 00083(2.2K) 2.2 kW 100L SF-V5RU2K 00250(3.7K) 100L SF-V5RUH2K 00083(2.2K) 3.7 kW 112M SF-V5RU3K 00340(5.5K) 112M SF-V5RUH3K 00126(3.7K) 5.5 kW 132S SF-V5RU5K 00490(7.5K) 132S SF-V5RUH5K 00250(7.5K) 7.5 kW 132M SF-V5RU7K 00630(11K) 132M SF-V5RUH7K 00310(11K) 11 kW 160M SF-V5RU11K 00770(15K) 160M SF-V5RUH11K 00380(15K) 15 kW 160L SF-V5RU15K 00930(18.5K) 160L SF-V5RUH15K 00470(18.5K) 18.5 kW 180M SF-V5RU18K 01250(22K) 180M SF-V5RUH18K 00620(22K) 22 kW 180M SF-V5RU22K 01540(30K) 180M SF-V5RUH22K 00770(30K) 30 kW 200L*2 SF-V5RU30K 01870(37K) 200L*2 SF-V5RUH30K 00930(37K)
37 kW 200L*2 SF-V5RU37K 02330(45K) 200L*2 SF-V5RUH37K 01160(45K)
45 kW 200L*2 SF-V5RU45K 03160(55K) 200L*2 SF-V5RUH45K 01800(55K)
55 kW 225S*1 SF-V5RU55K 03800(75K) 225S*1 SF-V5RUH55K 02160(75K)
75 kW 250MD SF-THY 04750(90K) 250MD SF-THY 02600(90K) 90 kW 250MD SF-THY 03250(110K) 110 kW 280MD SF-THY 03610(132K) 132 kW 280MD SF-THY 04320(160K) 160 kW 280MD SF-THY 04810(185K) 200 kW 280L SF-THY 05470(220K) 250 kW 315H SF-THY 06830(280K)
SF-V5RU[]1 (1:2) SF-V5RU[]3 (1:3) SF-V5RU[]4 (1:4) Voltage 200 V class Rated speed 1000 r/min 1000 r/min 500 r/min
Base frequency 33.33 Hz 33.33 Hz 16.6 Hz
Maximum speed 2000 r/min 3000 r/min 2000 r/min
Motor capacity
Motor frame
No. Motor model
Inverter model
FR-A820-[]
Motor frame
No. Motor model
Inverter model
FR-A820-[]
Motor frame
No. Motor model
Inverter model
FR-A820-[] 1.5 kW 100L SF-V5RU1K1(Y) 00167(2.2K) 112M SF-V5RU1K3(Y) 00167(2.2K) 132M SF-V5RU1K4(Y) 00167(2.2K) 2.2 kW 112M SF-V5RU2K1(Y) 00250(3.7K) 132S SF-V5RU2K3(Y) 00250(3.7K) 160M SF-V5RU2K4(Y) 00250(3.7K)
3.7 kW 132S SF-V5RU3K1(Y) 00340(5.5K) 132M SF-V5RU3K3(Y) 00340(5.5K) 160L SF-V5RU3K4 00490(7.5K)*4
5.5 kW 132M SF-V5RU5K1(Y) 00490(7.5K) 160M SF-V5RU5K3(Y) 00490(7.5K) 180L SF-V5RU5K4 (Y) 00490(7.5K) 7.5 kW 160M SF-V5RU7K1(Y) 00630(11K) 160L SF-V5RU7K3(Y) 00630(11K) 200L SF-V5RU7K4(Y) 00630(11K) 11 kW 160L SF-V5RU11K1(Y) 00770(15K) 180M SF-V5RU11K3(Y) 00770(15K) 225S SF-V5RU11K4(Y) 00770(15K)
15 kW 180M SF-V5RU15K1(Y) 00930(18.5K) 180L SF-V5RU15K3(Y) 00930(18.5K) 225S SF-V5RU15K4 01250(22K)*4
18.5 kW 180L SF-V5RU18K1(Y) 01250(22K) 200L SF-V5RU18K3(Y) 01250(22K) 250MD SF-THY*5 01250(22K)
22 kW 200L SF-V5RU22K1(Y) 01540(30K) 200L SF-V5RU22K3(Y) 01540(30K) 280MD SF-THY*5 01540(30K)
30 kW 200L*3 SF-V5RU30K1(Y) 01870(37K) 225S*1 SF-V5RU30K3(Y) 01870(37K) 280MD SF-THY*5 01870(37K)
37 kW 225S SF-V5RU37K1(Y) 02330(45K) 250MD*1 SF-THY*5 02330(45K) 280MD SF-THY*5 02330(45K)
45 kW 250MD SF-THY*5 03160(55K) 250MD*1 SF-THY*5 03160(55K) 280MD SF-THY*5 03160(55K)
55 kW 250MD SF-THY*5 03800(75K) 280MD*1 SF-THY*5 03800(75K) 280L SF-THY*5 03800(75K)
6 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.9 Parameter settings for a motor with encoder
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required. Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in accordance with the Instruction Manual of the corresponding option unit.
2.10.1 Connection of the brake resistor When an inverter-driven motor is driven by a load or requires rapid deceleration, install an external brake resistor. Connect
the brake resistor to terminals P/+(P3) and PR. (For the locations of terminal P/+(P3) and PR, refer to the terminal block layout (page 55).)
For the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and the FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower, the plug-in brake resistor is connected to terminals P/+ and PX. When the plug-in brake resistor does not have enough thermal capability for high-duty operation, install an external brake resistor. At this time, remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX and connect the brake resistor to terminals P/+ and PR. terminal block layout (page 55).) Removing jumpers across terminals PR and PX disables the plug-in brake resistor (power is not supplied). The plug-in brake resistor can be left connected to the inverter, and so is the plug-in brake resistor's lead wire connected to the terminal.
FR-A820-00046(0.4K), FR-A820-00077(0.75K) FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K) FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to FR-A840-00126(3.7K)
Brake resistor
Jumper
Terminal PR
Terminal PX
Terminal PR
1) Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper.
2) Connect the brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR. (The jumper should remain disconnected.)
Terminal P/+
Jumper
Terminal PR
Terminal PX
Terminal PR Terminal P/+
Brake resistor
1) Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper.
2) Connect the brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR. (The jumper should remain disconnected.)
972. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
9
*1 Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
NOTE For the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and the FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower, the jumper across terminals PR and PX must
be disconnected before connecting the dedicated brake resistor. Doing so may damage the inverter. A brake resistor cannot be used with options such as brake units, high power factor converters, and power regeneration
converters.
Connection of the dedicated external brake resistor (FR-ABR) The FR-ABR can be applied to the FR-A820-01250(22K) or lower and the FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower. Set parameters as follows:
Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "1"
FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K)
Terminal PX
Jumper
Terminal P/+ Terminal PRTerminal PR
Brake resistor
1) Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper.
2) Connect the brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR. (The jumper should remain disconnected.)
FR-A820-00630(11K), FR-A840-00310(11K), FR-A840-00380(15K)
FR-A820-00770(15K) to FR-A820-01250(22K), FR-A840-00470(18.5K), FR-A840-00620(22K)
FR-A840-00770(30K) FR-A840-00930(37K) to FR-A840-01800(55K)
Brake resistor
Jumper1
Connect the brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR.
Terminal PR Terminal P/+
Connect the brake resistor across terminals P3 and PR.
Brake resistor
Terminal PR Terminal P3
Connect the brake resistor across terminals P3 and PR.
Terminal PR Terminal P3
Brake resistor
Connect the brake resistor across terminals P3 and PR.
Terminal PR
Terminal P3
Brake resistor
8 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty = 10% (for 7.5K or lower) or 6% (for 11K or higher) (Refer to page 724.)
When the regenerative brake transistor is damaged, the following sequence is recommended to prevent overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
*1 Since the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher are not provided with terminal PX, a jumper need not to be removed.
*2 Refer to the following table for the thermal relay models for each capacity. Refer to the following diagram for the connection. (Always install a thermal relay when using a brake resistor for the inverters with 11K or higher capacity.)
Connection of a brake resistor other than the FR-ABR A brake resistor can be used with the FR-A820-01250(22K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. Use a brake resistor that has resistance and power consumption values higher than the following. Also, the brake resistor must have a sufficient capacity to consume the regenerative power.
R FR-ABR
Thermal relay (OCR)(2)Inverter
PX PR
P/+ (P3)S/L2
T/L3
R/L1
Disconnect jumper. (1)
MC
Power Supply
T F
ONOFF MC
MC OCR
Contact
Power Supply
S/L2
T/L3
R/L1 Inverter (OCR)(2)
Thermal relay
Disconnect jumper. (1)B
C
T F
ONOFF
OCR Contact
MC
MC
R FR-ABR
PX PR
P/+ (P3)
Power supply voltage
High-duty brake resistor
Thermal relay model (Mitsubishi electric
product) Rated operating current
200 V
FR-ABR-0.4K TH-T25-0.7A
120 VAC: 2 A (NO contact) / 3 A (NC contact), 240 VAC: 1 A (NO contact) / 2 A (NC contact) (AC15 class) 110 VDC: 0.2 A, 220 VDC: 0.1 A (DC13 class)
FR-ABR-0.75K TH-T25-1.3A FR-ABR-2.2K TH-T25-2.1A FR-ABR-3.7K TH-T25-3.6A FR-ABR-5.5K TH-T25-5A FR-ABR-7.5K TH-T25-6.6A FR-ABR-11K TH-T25-11A FR-ABR-15K TH-T25-11A FR-ABR-22K TH-T65-22A
400 V
FR-ABR-H0.4K TH-T25-0.24A FR-ABR-H0.75K TH-T25-0.35A FR-ABR-H1.5K TH-T25-0.9A FR-ABR-H2.2K TH-T25-1.3A FR-ABR-H3.7K TH-T25-2.1A FR-ABR-H5.5K TH-T25-2.5A FR-ABR-H7.5K TH-T25-3.6A FR-ABR-H11K TH-T25-6.6A FR-ABR-H15K TH-T25-6.6A FR-ABR-H22K TH-T25-9A
To the inverter P/+ terminal
To the FR-ABR
1/L1 5/L3
2/T1 6/T3
Voltage class Inverter Minimum resistance () Power consumption (kW)
200 V class
FR-A820-00046(0.4K) 100 1.44 FR-A820-00077(0.75K) 80 1.81 FR-A820-00105(1.5K) 50 2.89 FR-A820-00167(2.2K) 33 4.38 FR-A820-00250(3.7K) 30 4.81 FR-A820-00340(5.5K) 18 8.02 FR-A820-00490(7.5K) 18 8.02 FR-A820-00630(11K) 12 12.0 FR-A820-00770(15K) 8.5 17.0 FR-A820-00930(18.5K) 6.5 22.2 FR-A820-01250(22K) 6.5 22.2
992. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
10
*1 Power consumption differs according to the voltage protection level. The voltage protection level is set in Pr.977. (Refer to page 345.)
Set parameters as follows: Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "1" Set Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty according to the amount and frequency of the regenerative driving, and make
sure that the resistor can consume the regenerative power properly. (Refer to page 724.) When the regenerative brake transistor is damaged, install a thermal relay as shown in the following sequence to prevent
overheat and burnout of the brake resistor. Properly select a thermal relay according to the regenerative driving frequency or the rated power or resistance of the brake resistor.
*1 Since the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher are not provided with terminal PX, a jumper need not to be removed.
2.10.2 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2) Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2(-H)) as follows to improve the braking capability during deceleration.
Voltage class Inverter Minimum resistance () Power consumption (kW)*1
Pr.977 = "0" Pr.977 = "1"
400 V class
FR-A840-00023(0.4K) 371 1.56 1.66 FR-A840-00038(0.75K) 236 2.45 2.61 FR-A840-00052(1.5K) 190 3.04 3.24 FR-A840-00083(2.2K) 130 4.44 4.74 FR-A840-00126(3.7K) 83 6.96 7.42 FR-A840-00170(5.5K) 66 8.75 9.34 FR-A840-00250(7.5K) 45 12.8 13.7 FR-A840-00310(11K) 34 17.0 18.1 FR-A840-00380(15K) 34 17.0 18.1 FR-A840-00470(18.5K) 21 27.5 29.3 FR-A840-00620(22K) 21 27.5 29.3 FR-A840-00770(30K) 13.5 42.8 45.6 FR-A840-00930(37K) 13.5 42.8 45.6 FR-A840-01160(45K) 13.5 42.8 45.6 FR-A840-01800(55K) 13.5 42.8 45.6
R Brake resistor
Thermal relay (OCR)Inverter
PX PR
P/+ (P3)S/L2
T/L3
R/L1
Remove the jumper. (1)
MC
Power Supply
T F
ONOFF MC
MC OCR
Contact
MC
T
R
PX PR
P/+ (P3)
Brake resistor Thermal relay (OCR)
S/L2 T/L3
R/L1
ON OFF B
C
F
MC
Remove the jumper. (1)
Power Supply
OCR Contact
CAUTION If the resistor selection is incorrect, overcurrent may damage the inverter built-in brake transistor. Besides, the resistor
may be burned due to overheat. If the selection of the thermal relay is incorrect, the resistor may be burned due to overheat.
0 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Connection example with the GRZG type discharging resistor
*1 When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbols (P/+, N/-) on the inverter and on the brake unit (FR-BU2). (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
*2 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer. *3 Be sure to remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX when using the FR-BU2 with the inverter of FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower, or FR-
A840-00250(7.5K) or lower. *4 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and discharging resistor must be within 5 m. When using twisted pair cable, use
the cable within 10 m. *5 It is recommended to install an external thermal relay to prevent overheat of the discharging resistor. *6 For the connection method of the discharging resistor, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-BU2. *7 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). Terminal P3 has the same
function as terminal P/+ on the inverter. Recommended external thermal relay
NOTE Set "1" in Pr.0 Brake mode selection in the FR-BU2 to use a GRZG type discharging resistor. Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
*5
*1
*4
*6
U V W
P/+ (P3) N/-
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Motor M
Inverter PR
N/- BUE SD
P/+ A B C
FR-BU2
GRZG type discharging
resistor RR
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB MC
OFFON
MC T
10 m or less
OCR contact
MC
External thermal relay
OCR
*2
*1 PR PX
*3
*4
*7
brake unit Discharging resistor Recommended external thermal relay
FR-BU2-1.5K GZG 300W-50 (one) TH-T25 1.3A
FR-BU2-3.7K GRZG 200-10 (three in series) TH-T25 3.6A
FR-BU2-7.5K GRZG 300-5 (four in series) TH-T25 6.6A
FR-BU2-15K GRZG 400-2 (six in series) TH-T25 11A
FR-BU2-H7.5K GRZG 200-10 (six in series) TH-T25 3.6A
FR-BU2-H15K GRZG 300-5 (eight in series) TH-T25 6.6A
FR-BU2-H30K GRZG 400-2 (twelve in series) TH-T25 11A To the brake unit terminal P/+
To a resistor
1/L1 5/L3
2/T1 6/T3
1012. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
10
Connection example with the FR-BR(-H) resistor unit
*1 When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbols (P/+, N/-) on the inverter and on the brake unit (FR-BU2). (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
*2 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer. *3 Be sure to remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX when using the FR-BU2 with the inverter of FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower, or FR-
A840-00250(7.5K) or lower. *4 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and resistor unit (FR-BR) must be within 5 m. When using twisted pair cable, use
the cable within 10 m. *5 The contact between TH1 and TH2 is closed in the normal status and is open at a fault. *6 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). Terminal P3 has the same
function as terminal P\+ on the inverter.
NOTE Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
Connection example with the MT-BR5 type resistor unit After making sure that the wiring is correct and secure, set Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "1" and Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty = "0 (initial value)". Set Pr.0 Brake mode selection = "2" in the brake unit FR-BU2.
*1 When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbols (P/+, N/-) on the inverter and on the brake unit (FR-BU2). (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
*2 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer. *3 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and resistor unit (FR-BR) must be within 5 m. When using twisted pair cable, use
the cable within 10 m. *4 The contact between TH1 and TH2 is open in the normal status and is closed at a fault. *5 The CN8 connector used with the MT-BU5 type brake unit is not used.
NOTE The warning "oL" of the stall prevention (overvoltage) does not occur while Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "1" and
Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty = 0% (initial value). (Refer to page 724.)
U V W
P/+ (P3) N/-
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Motor M
Inverter PR
N/- BUE SD
P/+
P
A B C
FR-BU2
FR-BR
TH2
TH1 PR
Three phase AC power supply
MCCB MC
OFFON
MC T *2
*1
10 m or less
MC
*6 PR PX
*4
*4
*3
*5
MC R/L1 Motor
M
Inverter
S/L2 T/L3
U V
P/+ N/- P
PR
10 m or less
W
Three phase AC power supply
MCCB
TH1
TH2
MC
CR1
OFFON
MC
CR1
T 2
3 1
3
5
4
P N BUE SD
P PR
Brake unit FR-BU2
Resistor unit MT-BR5
A B C
2 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.10.3 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU) Connect the brake unit (FR-BU(-H)) as follows to improve the braking capability during deceleration. The FR-BU is compatible with the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*1 When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbols (P/+, N/-) on the inverter and on the brake unit (FR-BU(-H)). (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.)
*2 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer. *3 For the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower, be sure to remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX. *4 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU) and resistor unit (FR-BR) must be within 5 m. When using twisted pair cable, use
the cable within 10 m. *5 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). Terminal P3 has the same
function as terminal P\+ on the inverter.
NOTE If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor will overheat. Install a magnetic contactor on the inverter's
input side and configure a circuit that shut off the current in case of a fault. Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
2.10.4 Connection of the brake unit (BU type) Connect the brake unit (BU type) correctly as follows. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Remove the jumpers across terminals HB and PC and terminals TB and HC on the brake unit, and fit one across terminals PC and TB. The BU type brake unit is compatible with the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) and lower.
*1 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer. *2 For the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower, be sure to remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX. *3 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). Terminal P3 has the same
function as terminal P\+ on the inverter.
U V W
P/+ (P3) N/-
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Motor
M
Inverter
10 m or less
PR
N/- P/+
P
HA HB HC
FR-BU
FR-BR
TH2
TH1
PR Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB MC
MC
OFFON
MC T *2
*1
PR PX
*4
*3
*5
U V W
Motor
M
Inverter
Brake unit (BU type)
Discharging resistor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/-
P/+(P3)
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB MC
P
PR
OCR
N
Fit a jumper
Remove the jumper
HC
HB
HA
TB
OCR
PC
MC
OFFON
MC
T *1
PR PX
*2
*3
1032. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
10
NOTE The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit, and discharging resistor must be within 2 m. Even when the cable is
twisted, the wiring length must be within 5 m. If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor will overheat and result in a fire. Install a magnetic
contactor on the inverter's input side and configure a circuit that shut off the current in case of a fault. Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
2.10.5 Connection of the high power factor converter (FR- HC2)
When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) to suppress power harmonics, perform wiring securely as follows. Incorrect connection will damage the high power factor converter and the inverter. After making sure that the wiring is correct and secure, set the rated motor voltage in Pr.19 Base frequency voltage (under V/F control) or Pr.83 Rated motor voltage (under other than V/F control) and "2 or 102" in Pr.30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to page 724.)
*1 Remove jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 as well as across terminals S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the power supply for the control circuit to terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21. Do not connect anything to power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3). Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. (The E.OPT fault (Option fault) occurs. (Refer to page 791.))
*2 Instead of connecting the terminals to the AC power supply, the control circuit can be powered by connecting terminal R1/L11 to terminal P/+ (P3) and terminal S1/L21 to terminal N/-. In this case, do not connect the terminals to the AC power supply. Doing so will damage the inverter.
*3 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). When connecting multiple inverters in parallel, always use either terminal P/+ or P3 for the connection. (Do not use terminals P/+ and P3 together.)
*4 When the FR-HC2 is connected, the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 does not affect the function. (The FR-HC2 can be connected with the jumper connected (initial setting). Refer to page 55 for the jumper connection status in the initial setting.)
*5 Do not install an MCCB across terminals P/+ and N/- (between terminals P and P/+ or between terminals N and N/-). Connecting the opposite polarity of terminals N/- and P/+ will damage the inverter.
*6 Use Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10 (X11) signal. (Refer to page 521.) For RS-485 or any other communication where the start command is only transmitted once, use the X11 signal to save the operation mode at the time of an instantaneous power failure.
*7 Assign the IPF signal to a terminal on the FR-HC2. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-HC2.) *8 Always connect terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 on the FR-HC2 to the power supply. Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage
the FR-HC2. *9 Do not install an MCCB or MC across terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) on the reactor 1 and terminals (R4/L14, S4/L24, T4/L34) on the FR-HC2. Doing
so disrupts proper operation. *10 Securely perform grounding (earthing) by using the grounding (earthing) terminal. *11 Installation of a fuse is recommended. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-HC2.) *12 Outside box is not available for the FR-HC2-H280K or higher. Connect filter capacitors, inrush current limit resistors, and magnetic contactors.
(Refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-HC2.)
ROH2 ROH1
Outside box (FR-HCB2) Inverter
High power factor converter
(FR-HC2)Reactor2 (FR-HCL22)
Motor
M
Reactor1 (FR-HCL21)
P/+ (P3) P/+ N/-N/-
R1/L11 S1/L21
X10 X11
SD
RDY
RSO SE
R/L1
Earth (ground)
S/L2 T/L3
Three-phase AC power supply
U V W
R1/L11 S1/L21
88R88R 88S88S
ROH SD
MCCB MC R4/ L14 R4/L14 S4/ L24 S4/L24 T4/ L34 T4/L34
R3/ L13 R3/
L13 S3/ L23
S3/ L23
T3/ L33
T3/ L33
R2/ L12
R2/ L12
S2/ L22
S2/ L22
T2/ L32
T2/ L32
R/ L1 S/ L2 T/ L3
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
RES IPF
Fuse
P1
4 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 and the voltage phases of terminals R4/L14, S4/L24, and T4/L34 must
be matched. The control logic (sink logic/source logic) of the high power factor converter and the inverter must be matched. (Refer to page
72.) Do not connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL) to the inverter when the FR-HC2 is connected.
2.10.6 Connection of the multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC)
Common bus regeneration mode with harmonic suppression disabled (Pr.416 = "0")
When connecting the multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC) to improve the braking capability, perform wiring securely as follows. Failure to do so will damage the converter and the inverter. Turn ON switch 1 (connection mode setting switch) in the function selection switch assembly (SW2). If the switch setting does not match the actual wiring, the connection mode fault "E.T" occurs.
CAUTION Always connect terminal RDY on the FR-HC2 to a terminal where the X10 signal or MRS signal is assigned on the
inverter. Always connect terminal SE on the FR-HC2 to terminal SD on the inverter. Not connecting these terminals may damage the FR-HC2.
1052. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
10
After making sure that the wiring is correct and secure, set "2 or 102" in Pr.30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to page 724.)
*1 Never connect the power supply to terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 on the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter and the converter. *2 Instead of connecting the terminals to the AC power supply, the control circuit can be powered by connecting terminal R1/L11 to terminal P/+ (P3)
and terminal S1/L21 to terminal N/-. In this case, do not connect the terminals to the AC power supply. Doing so will damage the inverter. *3 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). When connecting multiple
inverters in parallel, always use either terminal P/+ or P3 for the connection. (Do not use terminals P/+ and P3 together.) *4 When the FR-XC is connected, the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 does not affect the function. (The FR-XC can be connected with the
jumper connected.) Refer to page 55 for the jumper connection status in the initial setting.) *5 Connect between the inverter terminal P/+ and the converter terminal P/+ and between the inverter terminal N/- and the converter terminal N/-
for polarity consistency. Connecting opposite polarity of terminals P/+ and N/- will damage the converter and the inverter.
*6 Confirm the correct phase sequence of three-phase current to connect between the reactor and the converter, and between the power supply and terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. Incorrect connection will damage the converter.
*7 Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 of the converter. Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage the converter.
*8 Assign the X10 signal to any of the input terminals. *9 To use separate power supply for the control circuit, remove each jumper at terminal R1/L11 and terminal S1/L21. *10 Install UL listed fuses on the input side of the reactor to meet the UL/cUL standards (refer to the FR-XC Instruction Manual for information about
the fuse).
Power supply
MCCB MC FR-XCL
N/-
FR-XC
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3 RSO SE
C B A
RYB
IM
P/+
P4 R2/L12
S2/L22
T2/L32
R2/L12
S2/L22
T2/L32 P/+(P3)Fuse
R/L1
N/-
Inverter
S/L2
T/L3
Fuse
RES SD
X10(MRS)
IM R/L1
N/-
Inverter
S/L2
T/L3
RES SD
X10(MRS)
IM R/L1
N/-
Inverter
S/L2
T/L3
RES SD
X10(MRS)
R1/L11 S1/L21
LOH SD
RES SOF
O pe
n co
lle ct
or
Junction terminal
Fuse
Fuse
Junction terminal
Fuse
Fuse
Junction terminal
*1
*2
*2
*2
*1
*1
*6*7
*6*11 *12
*8
*8
*8
U
V
W
U
V
W
U
V
W
R1/L11 S1/L21
R1/L11 S1/L21
R1/L11 S1/L21
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
*9
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
*10
*10
*10 P1
*3*4*5
P/+(P3)
P1
P/+(P3)
P1
*3*4*5
*3*4*5
6 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*11 Do not install an MCCB or MC between the reactor and the converter. Doing so disrupts proper operation. *12 Do not connect anything to terminal P4.
NOTE The control logic (sink logic/source logic) of the converter and the inverter must be matched. The converter does not operate
properly if the control logic is not consistent with each other. (Refer to page 72 for the switching of the control logic. Refer to the FR-XC Instruction Manual for the switching of the control logic of the converter.)
Keep the wiring length between terminals as short as possible. When the power is distorted or falls off sharply, the reactors may generate abnormal acoustic noise. This acoustic noise is
caused by the power supply fault and not by the damage of the converter. Configure a system so that the magnetic contactor at the converter input side shuts off the power supply at a failure of the
converter or the connected inverter. (The converter does not shut off the power supply by itself.) Failure to do so may overheat and burn the resistors in the converter and the connected inverter.
Do not connect a DC reactor to the inverter when using the converter in the common bus regeneration mode. For details on model selection and connection, refer to the FR-XC Instruction Manual. For details on connection in common bus regeneration mode with harmonic suppression enabled or in power regeneration
mode 2, refer to the FR-XC Instruction Manual.
2.10.7 Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
When wiring for connecting the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) to the inverter, make sure to match the terminal symbols (P/+, N/-) on the inverter and on the power regeneration common converter. The FR-CV is compatible with the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. After making sure that the wiring is correct and secure, set "2 or 102" in Pr.30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to page 724.)
*1 Remove jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 as well as across terminals S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the power supply for the control circuit to terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21. Do not connect anything to power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3). Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. (The E.OPT fault (Option fault) occurs. (Refer to page 791.))
*2 Instead of connecting the terminals to the AC power supply, the control circuit can be powered by connecting terminal R1/L11 to terminal P/+ (P3) and terminal S1/L21 to terminal N/-. In this case, do not connect the terminals to the AC power supply. Doing so will damage the inverter.
*3 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). When connecting multiple inverters in parallel, always use either terminal P/+ or P3 for the connection. (Do not use terminals P/+ and P3 together.)
*4 When the FR-CV is connected, the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 does not affect the function. (The FR-CV can be connected with the jumper connected.)
*5 Do not install an MCCB across terminals P/+ and N/- (between terminals P/L+ and P/+ or between N/L- and N/-). Connecting the opposite polarity of terminals N/- and P/+ will damage the inverter.
CAUTION In the common bus regeneration mode, always connect between the converter terminal RYB and the inverter terminal
to which the X10 (MRS) signal is assigned and between the converter terminal SE and the inverter terminal SD. If the terminals are not connected, the converter may be damaged.
R/L11 S/L21 T/L31
R2/L12 S2/L22 T2/L32
R2/L1 S2/L2 T2/L3
R/L11 S/L21 T/MC1
P/L+
U
V
W
M
FR-CV type Power regeneration common converter
Inverter
PC SD
X10
RES
P24 SD
RDYB RSO
SE
RDYA
N/L-
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+ (P3)
N/-
Three-phase AC power
supply
MCCB MC1
Dedicated stand-alone reactor (FR-CVL)
P1
1072. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
10
*6 Use Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10 signal. (Refer to page 521.) *7 Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, and T/MC1. Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage the
power regeneration common converter. *8 Always connect terminal RDY on the FR-HC2 to a terminal where the X10 signal or MRS signal is assigned on the inverter. Always connect
terminal SE on the FR-HC2 to terminal SD on the inverter. Not connecting these terminals may damage the FR-CV.
NOTE The voltage phases of terminals R/L11, S/L21, and T/MC1 and the voltage phases of terminals R2/L1, S2/L2, and T2/L3 must
be matched. Use the sink logic when the FR-CV is connected. It cannot be connected when the source logic is selected. Do not connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL) to the inverter when the FR-CV is connected.
2.10.8 Connection of the power regeneration converter (MT-RC)
When connecting the power regeneration converter (MT-RC), perform wiring securely as follows. Incorrect connection will damage the power regeneration converter and the inverter. The MT-RC is compatible with FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher. After making sure that the wiring is correct and secure, set "1" in Pr.30 Regenerative function selection and "0" in Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty.
*1 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). Terminal P3 has the same function as terminal P\+ on the inverter.
NOTE When using the inverter with the MT-RC, install a magnetic contactor (MC) at the input side of the inverter so that power is
supplied to the inverter after one second or more has elapsed after powering ON the MT-RC. When power is supplied to the inverter prior to the MT-RC, the inverter and the MT-RC may be damaged or the MCCB may be shut off or damaged.
When connecting the power coordination reactor and others, refer to Instruction Manual of the MT-RC for precautions.
DCL P1
P1
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 R1/L11 S1/L21
R R2 RES
U V W
Inverter
MT-RCL
P N/-
P N
RDY
SE
MT-RC
Reset signal
Ready signal
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB MC2MC1
M
STF SD
S
T
S2
T2
R2
S2
T2
R
S
T
R1
S1
C
Alarm signalB A
P/+ (P3)*1
MT-RC power supply (MC1)
Inverter input power supply (MC2)
1s or more
ON
ON
8 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.10.9 Connection of the DC reactor (FR-HEL) Keep the surrounding air temperature within the permissible range (-10 to +50C). Keep enough clearance around the
reactor because it heats up. (Take 10 cm or more clearance on top and bottom and 5 cm or more on left and right regardless of the installation direction.)
When using the DC reactor (FR-HEL), connect it to terminals P/+ and P1. In this case, the jumper connected across terminals P/+ and P1 must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor will not be effective. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
Select a DC reactor according to the applied motor capacity (refer to page 826). For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, and when a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor.
Since the DC reactor (FR-HEL) is electrically connected to the enclosure through mounting screws, the DC reactor is earthed (grounded) by being securely mounted to the enclosure. However, if the DC reactor is not earthed (grounded) securely enough, an earthing (grounding) cable may be used. When using an earthing (grounding) cable for the FR-HEL-(H)55K or lower, wire the cable to the installation hole where varnish is removed. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-HEL.) For the FR-HEL-(H)75K or higher, use an earth (ground) terminal to perform earthing (grounding). (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-HEL.)
NOTE The wiring distance must be within 5 m. As a reference, the cable gauge for the connection must be equal to or larger than that of the power cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
and the earthing (grounding) cable. (Refer to page 57.)
10 cm or more
5 cm or more
5 cm or more
5 cm or more
5 cm or more
P1 FR-HEL
Remove the jumper
P/+
1092. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
11
2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR- A800-GF)
2.11.1 System configuration example Mount the "RJ71EN71", "RJ71GF11-T2", "QJ71GF11-T2", or "LJ71GF11-T2" type CC-Link IE Field Network master/local
module on the main or extension base unit having the programmable controller CPU used as the master station. Connect the CC-Link IE Field Network programmable controller (master station) to the inverter with an Ethernet cable.
2.11.2 Network configuration Network topology
The network can be wired into star topology, line topology, and ring topology. A network can consist of a combination of star and line topologies, but the ring topology cannot be combined with star or
line topology.
*1 Add/remove slave stations one by one. If multiple slave stations are added/removed at a time, all stations on the network will be reconnected, resulting in a momentarily error in all the stations.
Station number and connection position Modules can be connected in any order regardless of the station number.
Cascade connection Up to 20-layer connection is available for the cascade connection.
Replacing CC-Link IE Field Network devices For star topology, slave stations can be replaced without powering off the whole system.
NOTE Refer to the MELSEC iQ-R, MELSEC-Q, or MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual for the
detailed network configurations.
2.11.3 Network components This section describes components comprising the CC-Link IE Field Network.
Inverter
MPower supply
Inverter
MPower supply
Up to 120 units can be connected
RJ71GF11-T2
Intelligent device station
RJ71EN71 type, RJ71GF11-T2 type MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network User's Manual (Application) ...............SH-081259ENG
LJ71GF11-T2 type MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual ...............SH-080972ENG
Instruction manual regarding the CC-Link IE Field Network
master station
Ethernet cable
QJ71GF11-T2 type MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual ...............SH-080917ENG
Master station
Item Description
Star topology Modules are configured into a star using a switching hub and Ethernet cables. Slave stations can be easily added in a star topology. Furthermore, data link continues among normally-operating stations in a star topology.*1
Line topology Modules are configured into a line with Ethernet cables. A switching hub is not required. If an error occurs, the station in error and the stations after that are disconnected from the network.*1
Ring topology Modules are configured into a ring using Ethernet cables. Data link continues with the stations that are operating normally. A switching hub is not required.*1
0 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Connection cable For wiring, use the 1000BASE-T compliant Ethernet cables.
Recommended products (as of October 2020)
*1 SC-E5EW cable is for in-enclosure and indoor uses. SC-E5EW-L cable is for outdoor use.
NOTE For CC-Link IE Field Network wiring, use the recommended wiring components by CC-Link Partner Association. Cables for CC-Link IE Controller Network cannot be used for CC-Link IE Field Network. Depending on the cable connector shape, the cable may not be connected to the communication connector.
Hubs Use hubs that meet the following conditions. Operation is not guaranteed if the hubs do not meet these conditions.
*1 A repeater hub is not available.
Industrial switching hub
2.11.4 Component names of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board
NOTE Do not remove the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board or the earth plate.
Ethernet cable Board mounted option connector Type
Category 5e or higher straight cable (double shielded/ STP) RJ-45 connector
The following conditioning cables: IEEE802.3 (1000BASE-T) ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5e)
Model Manufacturer SC-E5EW series*1 Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.
- Compliance with the IEEE802.3 (1000BASE-T) - Support of the auto MDI/MDI-X function - Support of the auto-negotiation function - Switching hub (layer 2 switch)*1
Model Manufacturer NZ2EHG-T8 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
RUN D LINK
SD ERR
RD L.ERR
Connector for communication (PORT2)
Operation status indication LED
Connector for communication (PORT1)
CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board
Earth plate
1112. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
11
2.11.5 Wiring method Ethernet cable connection
Connect or remove an Ethernet cable after switching the power of the inverter OFF. When wiring the Ethernet cable to the communication connector, check the connecting direction of the Ethernet cable
connector. Insert the connector to the communication connector until it clicks. When removing the Ethernet cable from the communication connector, hold down the latch on the Ethernet cable
connector, and pull out the cable while holding the latch.
NOTE PORT 1 and PORT 2 do not need to be distinguished.
Precautions Do not touch the core of the cable-side or module-side connector, and protect it from dirt or dust. If oil from your hand, dirt
or dust is attached to the core, it can increase transmission loss, arising a problem in data link.
- When only one connector is used in star topology, either PORT 1 or PORT 2 is applicable. - When using two connectors for line topology and ring topology, an Ethernet cable can be connected to the connectors in
any combination For example, the cable can be connected across two of PORT 1 or across PORT 1 and PORT 2.
Connection between PORT1 and PORT1, PORT2 and PORT2
Connection between PORT1 and PORT2
To the next connector for communication (PORT2)
To the next connector for communication (PORT2)
Connector for
communication (PORT2)
Connector for
communication (PORT1)
Connector for
communication (PORT2)
Connector for
communication (PORT1)
Connector for
communication (PORT2)
Connector for
communication (PORT1)
Connector for
communication (PORT2)
Connector for
communication (PORT1)
2 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Check the following:
Do not use Ethernet cables with broken latches. Doing so may cause the cable to unplug or malfunction. Hold the connector part when connecting and disconnecting the Ethernet cable. Pulling a cable connected to the module
may damage the module or cable, or result in malfunction due to poor contact. The maximum station-to-station distance is 100 m. However, the distance may be shorter depending on the operating
environment of the cable. For details, contact your cable manufacturer. Check the instructions on page 110 before wiring, and perform correct wiring. When the operations listed below are performed, all stations on the network may be reconnected. At that time, a data link
error may momentarily occur in all the stations, and the communication error E.OP1 may occur in the connected inverters.
To keep outputting a data link error (inverter communication error), set Pr.500 Communication error execution waiting time or Pr.502 Stop mode selection at communication error.
NOTE When wiring cables to the inverter's RS-485 terminals, take caution not to let the cables touch the CC-Link IE Field Network
communication circuit board or of the inverter's circuit board. Otherwise, electromagnetic noises may cause malfunctions. After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter. Doing so may cause a fault, failure, or malfunction.
2.11.6 Operation status LEDs Check the operation status LED to confirm the CC-Link IE Field Network operating status.
- Is any Ethernet cable disconnected? - Is any of the Ethernet cables shorted? - Are the connectors securely connected?
Network configuration Operation Star topology Powering ON/OFF a slave station or the switching hub
Connecting/disconnecting an Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub Disconnecting an Ethernet cable from a slave station and connecting it to another slave station or to
the switching hub Disconnecting ten stations or more, or disconnecting half the number of slave stations in the system or
more Changing the network topology when adding a slave station
Line topology / ring topology Simultaneously powering ON/OFF multiple stations Simultaneously connecting/disconnecting Ethernet cables to/from multiple stations (When a data link
faulty station returns, a data link error will occur in all the stations.) Disconnecting ten stations or more, or disconnecting half the number of slave stations in the system or
more Changing the network topology when adding a slave station
At plug in/unplug or power ON/OFF
A momentary error in all stations
SD ERR L.ERRRD
D LINKRUN
1132. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
11
*1 Also lit in no-communication state. *2 This LED indicates a communication break between the master station and the inverter (due to cable disconnection or breakage, power-OFF of
the master power supply, or reset, etc.).
LED name Description ON OFF
RUN Operating status Normal operation (normal 5 V internal voltage)*1
Hardware failure
SD Transmission status Data transmitting No data transmitting RD Reception status Data receiving No data receiving D LINK Cyclic communication status Cyclic transmitting No cyclic transmitting or disconnected ERR Node failure status*2 Node failure Normal operation L.ERR Link error Received data error Received data normal
4 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
CHAPTER 3
C H
A PT
ER 3
4
5
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER
6
7
8
9
10
3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents ..................................................................................116 3.2 Power supply harmonics.......................................................................................................................................123 3.3 Installation of a reactor .........................................................................................................................................127 3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC)....................................................................................................128 3.5 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400 V class motor insulation........................................................130 3.6 Checklist before starting operation .......................................................................................................................131 3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter ...............................................................................................................134
115
11
3 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER This chapter explains the precautions for use of this product. Always read the instructions before use. For the separated converter type, refer to the "PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER" in the FR-A802 (Separated Converter Type) Instruction Manual (Hardware). For the IP55 compatible model, refer to the "PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER" in the FR-A806 (IP55/UL Type 12 specification) Instruction Manual (Hardware).
3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
3.1.1 Leakage currents and countermeasures Capacitance exists between the inverter I/O cables, other cables and earth and in the motor, through which a leakage current flows. The amount of current leakage depends on the factors such as the size of the capacitance and the carrier frequency. Low acoustic noise operation at an increased carrier frequency of the inverter will increase current leakage. Take the following precautions to prevent current leakage. Earth leakage circuit breakers should be selected based on their rated current sensitivity, independently of the carrier frequency setting.
To-earth (ground) leakage currents Leakage currents may flow not only into the power system of the inverter but also into the other power systems through the earthing (grounding) cable, etc. These leakage currents may operate earth leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays unnecessarily.
Precautions If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Note that motor noise increases. Selecting Pr.240 Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive. By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed to suppress harmonics and surge voltage in the power system of the
inverter and other devices, operation can be performed with the carrier frequency kept high (with low noise).
NOTE Long wiring will increase the leakage current. High motor capacity will increase the leakage current. The leakage current of the 400 V class is larger than that of the 200 V
class.
Line-to-line leakage currents Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacitance between the inverter output cables may operate the external thermal relay unnecessarily. When the wiring length is long (50 m or more) for the 400 V class small-capacity models (FR- A840-00250(7.5K) or lower), the external thermal relay is likely to operate unnecessarily because the ratio of the leakage current to the rated motor current increases.
6 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Line-to-line leakage current example (200 V class)
*1 The leakage currents of the 400 V class are about twice as large.
Countermeasures Use Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Note that motor noise increases. Selecting Pr.240 Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive. To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line leakage currents, it is recommended to use a temperature sensor to directly detect motor temperature.
Installation and selection of the molded case circuit breaker Install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power receiving side to protect the wiring at the inverter input side. Select an MCCB according to the inverter input side power factor, which depends on the power supply voltage, output frequency and load. Especially for a completely electromagnetic MCCB, a slightly large capacity must be selected since its operation characteristic varies with harmonic currents. (Check it in the data of the corresponding breaker.) As an earth leakage current breaker, use the Mitsubishi earth leakage current breaker designed for harmonics and surge suppression.
Selecting the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage circuit breaker
To install the earth leakage circuit breaker on the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows, independently of the PWM carrier frequency.
Motor capacity (kW)
Rated motor current (A)
Leakage current (mA)*1 Condition
Wiring length 50 m Wiring length 100 m 0.4 1.8 310 500
Motor: SF-JR 4P Carrier frequency: 14.5 kHz Cable: 2 mm2, 4 cores Cabtyre cable
0.75 3.2 340 530 1.5 5.8 370 560 2.2 8.1 400 590 3.7 12.8 440 630 5.5 19.4 490 680 7.5 25.6 535 725
Power supply
Thermal relay
Line-to-line static capacitances
MCCB MC
Line-to-line leakage currents path
Motor
Inverter M
Breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression Rated sensitivity current In 10 (Ig1 + Ign + Igi + Ig2 + Igm)
Standard breaker Rated sensitivity current In 10 {Ig1 + Ign + Igi + 3 (Ig2 + Igm)}
Ig1, Ig2: Leakage currents in wire path during commercial power supply operation Ign: Leakage current from noise filters on the input side of the inverter Igm: Leakage current from the motor during commercial power supply operation Igi: Leakage current of inverter unit
Example of leakage current of cable path per 1 km during the commercial power supply operation when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit (200 V 60 Hz)
Leakage current example of three-phase induction motor during the commercial power supply operation (200 V 60 Hz)
Motor capacity (kW)Cable size (mm2)
1.5 3.7 2.2
7.5 1522 11
37 30
55 455.5 18.5
0.1
0.2 0.3
0.5 0.7 1.0
2.0
Le ak
ag e
cu rr
en ts
(m A
)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Le ak
ag e
cu rr
en ts
(m A)
2 3.5 5.5
8 14 22 30 38
60 80 100
150 Motor capacity (kW)
For " " connection, the amount of leakage current is approx. 1/3 of the above value.
(Three-phase three-wire delta connection 400 V 60 Hz)
Example of leakage current of cable path per 1km during the commercial power supply operation when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit
Leakage current example of three- phase induction motor during the commercial power supply operation
(Totally-enclosed fan-cooled type motor 400 V 60 Hz)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Le ak
ag e
cu rr
en ts
(m A
)
Le ak
ag e
cu rr
en ts
(m A
)
2 3.5 5.5
8 1422 30 38
60 80 100
150
Cable size (mm2)
0. 1
0. 2 0. 3
0. 5 0. 7 1. 0
2. 0
1. 5 3. 7 2. 2
7. 5 1522 11
37 30
55 455.5 18. 5
1173. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
11
Inverter leakage current (with and without EMC filter)
NOTE Install the earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) on the input side of the inverter. In the connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current is blunt against a ground fault in the inverter output side.
Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 61140 class 1 and other applicable standards)
When the breaker is installed on the output side of the inverter, it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics even if the effective value is within the rating. In this case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase, leading to temperature rise.
The following models and products are standard breakers: the models BV-C1, BC-V, NVB, NV-L, NV-G2N, NV-G3NA, and NV-2F, the earth leakage circuit breakers with AA neutral wire open-phase protection, and the earth leakage relays (except NV-ZHA). The other series, models, and products are designed for harmonic and surge suppression: the NV-C series, NV-S series, MN series, the models NV30-FA, NV50-FA, NV-H, and BV-C2, earth leakage alarm breaker NF-Z, and the earth leakage relay NV- ZHA.
3.1.2 Techniques and measures for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Some electromagnetic noises enter the inverter to cause the inverter malfunction, and others are radiated by the inverter to cause the peripheral devices to malfunction. (The former is called EMS problem, the latter is called EMI problem, and both is called EMC problem.) Though the inverter is designed to be immune to noises, it requires the following basic measures and EMS measures as it handles low-level signals. Pay attention to the electromagnetic noises that could be generated by the inverter since the inverter chops outputs at high carrier frequency. If these electromagnetic noises cause peripheral devices to malfunction, EMI countermeasures should be taken to suppress noises. These techniques differ slightly depending on EMI paths.
Basic measures Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in parallel with each other and do not bundle
them.
Example Item
Breaker designed for harmonic and
surge suppression Standard breaker
Leakage current Ig1 (mA)
Leakage current Ign (mA) 0 (without noise filter)
Leakage current Igi (mA) 1 (without EMC filter). For the leakage current of the inverter, refer to the following table.
Leakage current Ig2 (mA)
Motor leakage current Igm (mA) 0.18
Total leakage current (mA) 3.00 6.66 Rated sensitivity current (mA) ( Ig 10) 30 100
Noise filter
Inverter
ELB
Ig1 Ign
Igi
Ig2 Igm
M
5.5 mm2 5 m 5.5 mm2 50 m
200 V 2.2 kW
3
33 = 0.171000m 5m
33 = 1.651000m 50m
Voltage (V)
EMC filter Remarks
ON (mA) OFF (mA) 200 22 1
Input power conditions 220 V/60 Hz (200 V class) or 440 V/60 Hz (400 V class), within 3% of power supply unbalance
400 35 2
400 2 1
Phase earthing (grounding)
Earthed-neutral system
8 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Use shielded twisted pair cables for the detector connecting and control signal cables and connect the sheathes of the shielded cables to terminal SD.
Ground (Earth) the inverter, motor, etc. at one point.
EMS measures to reduce electromagnetic noises that enter the inverter and cause it to malfunction
When devices that generate many electromagnetic noises (which use magnetic contactors, electromagnetic brakes, many relays, for example) are installed near the inverter and the inverter may malfunction due to electromagnetic noises, the following countermeasures must be taken:
Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate many electromagnetic noises to suppress electromagnetic noises. Install data line filters to signal cables (refer to page 120). Ground (Earth) the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with cable clamp metal.
EMI measures to reduce electromagnetic noises that are radiated by the inverter to cause the peripheral devices to malfunction
Inverter-generated noises are largely classified into those radiated by the inverter itself and by the I/O cables connected to its main circuit, those electromagnetically and electrostatically induced to the signal cables of the peripheral devices close to the power cable connected to the inverter main circuit, and those transmitted through the power cables.
Noise propagated through power supply cable
Path (c)
Path (b)
Path (a)Noise directly radiated from inverter
Path (d), (e)
Air propagated noise
Path (f)
Electrical path propagated noise
Path (h)
Path (g)
Inverter generated electromagnetic noise
Electromagnetic induction noise
Electrostatic induction noise
Noise radiated from power supply cable
Noise radiated from motor connection cable
Noise from earthing (grounding) cable due to leakage current
Instrument Receiver
M
Sensor power supply
Motor
Telephone
Sensor
(a)
(b)
(c)
(c)
(f)
(g)
(e)
(g)
(d) (f)
Inverter (a)
Noise propagation path Countermeasure
(a), (b), (c)
When devices that handle low-level signals and are liable to malfunction due to electromagnetic noises, e.g. instruments, receivers and sensors, are contained in the enclosure that contains the inverter or when their signal cables are run near the inverter, the devices may malfunction due to by air-propagated electromagnetic noises. The following countermeasures must be taken: Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter. Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I/O cables. Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle
them. Set the EMC filter ON/OFF connector of the inverter to the ON position. (Refer to page 120.) Inserting a line noise filter into the output suppresses the radiated noise from the cables. Use shielded cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further
effects.
(d), (e), (f)
When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the power cables, magnetic and static induction noises may be propagated to the signal cables to cause malfunction of the devices and the following countermeasures must be taken: Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter. Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I/O cables. Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle
them. Use shielded cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further
effects.
(g)
When the peripheral devices use the power system of the inverter, its generated noises may flow back through the power supply cables to cause malfunction of the devices and the following countermeasures must be taken: Set the EMC filter ON/OFF connector of the inverter to the ON position. (Refer to page 120.) Install the line noise filter (FR-BLF/FR-BSF01) to the power cables (output cables) of the inverter.
1193. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
12
Data line filter Data line filter is effective as an EMI countermeasure. Provide a data line filter for the detector cable, etc.
Commercially available data line filter: ZCAT3035-1330 (by TDK), ESD-SR-250 (by TOKIN) Specification example (ZCAT3035-1330 by TDK)
The impedance values above are reference values, and not guaranteed values.
EMI measure example
NOTE For compliance with the EU EMC Directive, refer to the Instruction Manual (Startup).
3.1.3 Built-in EMC filter This inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter (capacitive filter) and a common mode choke. These are effective in reducing air-propagated noise on the input side of the inverter. To enable the EMC filter, set the EMC filter ON/OFF connector to the ON position. The FM type is initially set to "disabled" (OFF), and the CA type to "enabled" (ON).
(h) When a closed loop circuit is formed by connecting the peripheral device wiring to the inverter, leakage currents may flow through the earthing (grounding) cable of the inverter to cause the device to malfunction. In that case, disconnecting the earthing (grounding) cable from the device may stop the malfunction of the device.
Item Description
Impedance () 10 to 100 MHz 80 100 to 500 MHz 150
Outline dimension drawings (mm)
Noise propagation path Countermeasure
34 1
TDK
39 1
Product name Lot number
30 1
Cable fixing band mount
13 1
Inverter
Sensor Use a twisted pair shielded cable.
Enclosure Decrease carrier frequency.
MotorM FR- BLF
Do not earth (ground) control cable.
Inverter power supply
Install filter (FR-BLF or FR-BSF01) on inverter output side.
Separate inverter and power line by more than 30 cm (at least 10 cm) from sensor circuit.
Control power supply
Do not earth (ground) enclosure directly.
Power supply for
sensor
Use 4-core cable for motor power cable and use one cable as earth (ground) cable.
Do not earth (ground) shield but connect it to signal common cable.
EMC filter
0 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The input side common mode choke, which is built in the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower inverter, is always enabled regardless of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector setting.
How to enable or disable the filter For FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or higher and FR-A840-00023(0.4K) or higher
Before removing a front cover, check to make sure that the indication of the inverter operation panel is OFF, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and check that there is no residual voltage using a digital multimeter or the like.
When disconnecting the connector, push the fixing tab and pull the connector straight without pulling the cable or forcibly pulling the connector with the tab fixed. When installing the connector, also engage the fixing tab securely. (If it is difficult to disconnect the connector, use a pair of needle-nose pliers, etc.)
For FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower Before removing a front cover, check to make sure that the indication of the inverter operation panel is OFF, wait for at
least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and check that there is no residual voltage using a digital multimeter or the like.
Remove the control circuit terminal block. (Refer to page 819.) Connect the shorting wire to the corresponding terminal to enable or disable the filter. Connect the wire to the terminal in
the same way as general wiring of the control circuit terminal block. (Refer to page 74.) After switching, reinstall the control circuit terminal block as it was.
NOTE Fit the connector or shorting wire to either ON or OFF position. Enabling (turning ON) the EMC filter increases leakage current. (Refer to page 117.)
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 00250(3.7K) FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or lower
FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to 00630(11K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to 00380(15K)
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 00250(3.7K) FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 00126(3.7K)
FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to 00630(11K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to 00380(15K)
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K) FR-A840-00470(18.5K), 00620(22K)
FR-A820-00770(15K) or higher FR-A840-00470(18.5K) or higher
FR-A820-01540(30K) or higher FR-A840-00770(30K) or higher
EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON
FILTER
O F
F O
N
FILTER
O F
F O
N
EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON
FILTER
O F
F O
N
FILTER
O F
F O
N FILTER FILTER
O FFO N
FILTER FILTER
O FFO N
FR-A820-00046(0.4K), 00077(0.75K)
EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON
FR-A820-00046(0.4K), 00077(0.75K)
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
(Side view)
Disengage connector fixing tab. With tab disengaged, pull up the connector straight.
1213. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
12
WARNING While power is ON or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
2 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3.2 Power supply harmonics
3.2.1 Power supply harmonics The inverter may generate power supply harmonics from its converter circuit to affect the power generator, power factor correction capacitor etc. Power supply harmonics are different from noise and leakage currents in source, frequency band and transmission path. Take the following countermeasure suppression techniques.
Differences between harmonics and noises
Countermeasures The harmonic current generated from the inverter to the input side differs according to various conditions such as the wiring impedance, whether a reactor is used or not, and output frequency and output current on the load side. For the output frequency and output current, we understand that this should be calculated in the conditions under the rated load at the maximum operating frequency.
NOTE The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side may be overheated or damaged by the
harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since an excessive current flows in the inverter to activate overcurrent protection, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side when the motor is driven by the inverter. For power factor improvement, install a reactor on the inverter input side or in the DC circuit.
3.2.2 Harmonic suppression guidelines in Japan Inverters have a converter section (rectifier circuit) and generate a harmonic current. Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point via a power transformer. The Harmonic Suppression Guidelines was established to protect other consumers from these outgoing harmonic currents.
Item Harmonics Noise
frequency Normally 40th to 50th degrees or less (3 kHz or less). High frequency (several 10 kHz to 1 GHz order).
Location To-electric channel, power impedance. To-space, distance, wiring path. Quantitative understanding Theoretical calculation possible. Random occurrence, quantitative grasping difficult.
Generated amount Nearly proportional to the load capacity. Changes with the current variation ratio. (Gets larger as switching speed increases.)
Affected equipment immunity Specified by standards per equipment. Different depending on maker's equipment specifications.
Countermeasure Provide a reactor. Increase distance.
AC reactor (FR-HAL)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Do not install power factor improving capacitor.
MCCB MC
Inverter
P ow
er s
up pl
y
R
S
T Z
Y
X U
V
W
P1 R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
P/+
M
1233. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.2 Power supply harmonics
12
The three-phase 200 V input specifications 3.7 kW or lower were previously covered by "the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Household Appliances and General-purpose Products" and other models were covered by "the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage". However, the transistorized inverter has been excluded from the target products covered by "the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Household Appliances and General- purpose Products" in January 2004 and "the Harmonic Suppression Guideline for Household Appliances and General-purpose Products" was repealed on September 6, 2004. All capacity and all models of general-purpose inverter used by specific consumers are now covered by "the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage" (hereinafter referred to as "the Specific Consumer Guidelines").
"Specific Consumer Guidelines" This guideline sets forth the maximum harmonic currents outgoing from a high-voltage or especially high-voltage receiving consumer who will install, add or renew harmonic generating equipment. If any of the maximum values is exceeded, this guideline requires that consumer to take certain suppression measures.
Maximum values of outgoing harmonic currents per 1 kW contract power
Application of the specific consumer guidelines
Conversion factor
Received power voltage 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd Over 23rd
6.6 kV 3.5 2.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.9 0.76 0.70 22 kV 1.8 1.3 0.82 0.69 0.53 0.47 0.39 0.36 33 kV 1.2 0.86 0.55 0.46 0.35 0.32 0.26 0.24
Install, add or renew equipment
Calculation of equivalent capacity total
Equivalent capacity total
Calculation of outgoing harmonic current
Not more than harmonic current upper
limit?
Harmonic suppression measures unnecessary
Harmonic suppression measures necessaryEqual to or less
than upper limit
More than upper limit
Above reference capacity
Equal to or less than reference capacity
Classification Circuit type Conversion factor Ki
3 Three-phase bridge (capacitor smoothing)
Without reactor K31 = 3.4 With reactor (AC side) K32 = 1.8 With reactor (DC side) K33 = 1.8 With reactors (AC, DC sides) K34 = 1.4
5 Self-excitation three-phase bridge When a high power factor converter is used K5 = 0
4 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.2 Power supply harmonics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Equivalent capacity limit
Harmonic content (when the fundamental current is considered as 100%)
Calculation of equivalent capacity P0 of harmonic generating equipment "Equivalent capacity" is the capacity of a 6-pulse converter converted from the capacity of consumer's harmonic generating equipment and is calculated by the following equation. If the sum of equivalent capacities is higher than the limit (refer to the list of the equivalent capacity limits), harmonics must be calculated by the equation in next subheading.
*1 Rated capacity: Determined by the capacity of the applied motor and found in the table "Rated capacities and outgoing harmonic currents of inverter-driven motors". The rated capacity used here is used to calculate the generated harmonic amount and is different from the power supply capacity required for actual inverter drive.
Calculation of outgoing harmonic current
Rated capacities and outgoing harmonic currents of inverter-driven motors
Received power voltage Reference capacity 6.6 kV 50 kVA 22/33 kV 300 kVA 66 kV or more 2000 kVA
Reactor 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th Not used 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8 Used (AC side) 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3 Used (DC side) 30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2 Used (AC, DC sides) 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4
P0 = (Ki Pi) [kVA] Ki: Conversion factor (Refer to the list of the conversion factors.)
Pi: Rated capacity of harmonic generating equipment*1 [kVA] i: Number indicating the conversion circuit type
Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted from received power voltage) operation ratio harmonic content
Operation ratio: actual load factor operation time ratio during 30 minutes Harmonic content: Refer to the list of the harmonic content.
Applicable motor (kW)
Fundamental wave current (A)
Fundamental wave current
converted from 6.6 kV (mA)
Rated capacity
(kVA)
Outgoing harmonic current converted from 6.6 kV (mA) (No reactor, 100% operation ratio)
200 V 400 V 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
0.4 1.61 0.81 49 0.57 31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882 0.75 2.74 1.37 83 0.97 53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494 1.5 5.50 2.75 167 1.95 108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006 2.2 7.93 3.96 240 2.81 156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320 3.7 13.0 6.50 394 4.61 257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092 5.5 19.1 9.55 579 6.77 376.1 237.4 49.22 44.58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42 7.5 25.6 12.8 776 9.07 504.4 318.2 65.96 59.75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97 11 36.9 18.5 1121 13.1 728.7 459.6 95.29 86.32 48.20 34.75 29.15 20.18 15 49.8 24.9 1509 17.6 980.9 618.7 128.3 116.2 64.89 46.78 39.24 27.16 18.5 61.4 30.7 1860 21.8 1209 762.6 158.1 143.2 79.98 57.66 48.36 33.48 22 73.1 36.6 2220 25.9 1443 910.2 188.7 170.9 95.46 68.82 57.72 39.96 30 98.0 49.0 2970 34.7 1931 1218 252.5 228.7 127.7 92.07 77.22 53.46 37 121 60.4 3660 42.8 2379 1501 311.1 281.8 157.4 113.5 95.16 65.88 45 147 73.5 4450 52.1 2893 1825 378.3 342.7 191.4 138.0 115.7 80.10 55 180 89.9 5450 63.7 3543 2235 463.3 419.7 234.4 169.0 141.7 98.10
1253. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.2 Power supply harmonics
12
Determining if a countermeasure is required A countermeasure for harmonics is required if the following condition is satisfied: outgoing harmonic current > maximum value per 1 kW contract power contract power.
Harmonic suppression techniques
Applicable motor (kW)
Fundamental wave current (A)
Fundamental wave current
converted from 6.6 kV (mA)
Rated capacity
(kVA)
Outgoing harmonic current converted from 6.6 kV (mA) (with a DC reactor, 100% operation ratio)
200 V 400 V 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
75 245 123 7455 87.2 2237 969 626 373 350 239 224 164 90 293 147 8909 104 2673 1158 748 445 419 285 267 196 110 357 179 10848 127 3254 1410 911 542 510 347 325 239 132 216 13091 153 3927 1702 1100 655 615 419 393 288 160 258 15636 183 4691 2033 1313 782 735 500 469 344 220 355 21515 252 6455 2797 1807 1076 1011 688 645 473 250 403 24424 286 7327 3175 2052 1221 1148 782 733 537 280 450 27273 319 8182 3545 2291 1364 1282 873 818 600 315 506 30667 359 9200 3987 2576 1533 1441 981 920 675 355 571 34606 405 10382 4499 2907 1730 1627 1107 1038 761 400 643 38970 456 11691 5066 3274 1949 1832 1247 1169 857 450 723 43818 512 13146 5696 3681 2191 2060 1402 1315 964 500 804 48727 570 14618 6335 4093 2436 2290 1559 1462 1072 560 900 54545 638 16364 7091 4582 2727 2564 1746 1636 1200 630 1013 61394 718 18418 7981 5157 3070 2886 1965 1842 1351
No. Item Description
1 Reactor installation (FR- HAL, FR-HEL)
Install an AC reactor (FR-HAL) on the AC side of the inverter or a DC reactor (FR-HEL) on its DC side, or install both to suppress outgoing harmonic currents.
2
High power factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC)
This converter trims the current waveform to be a sine waveform by switching the rectifier circuit (converter module) with transistors. Doing so suppresses the generated harmonic amount significantly. Connect it to the DC area of an inverter. Use the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) with the accessories that come as standard. To use the FR-XC series converter, use the converter with an FR- XCB box-type reactor and enable the harmonic suppression function.
3 Installation of power factor improving capacitor
When used with a reactor connected in series, the power factor improving correction capacitor can absorb harmonic currents.
4 Transformer multi-phase operation
Use two transformers with a phase angle difference of 30 in combinations of to and to , to provide an effect corresponding to 12 pulses, reducing low-degree harmonic currents.
5 Passive filter (AC filter) A capacitor and a reactor are used together to reduce impedances at specific frequencies. Harmonic currents are expected to be absorbed greatly by using this technique.
6 Active filter
This filter detects the current in a circuit generating a harmonic current and generates a harmonic current equivalent to a difference between that current and a fundamental wave current to suppress the harmonic current at the detection point. Harmonic currents are expected to be absorbed greatly by using this technique.
6 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.2 Power supply harmonics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3.3 Installation of a reactor When the inverter is connected near a large-capacity power transformer (1000 kVA or more) or when a power factor correction capacitor is to be switched over, an excessive peak current may flow in the power input circuit, damaging the converter circuit. To prevent this, always install an AC reactor (FR-HAL), which is available as an option.
MCCB MC InverterAC reactor
(FR-HAL)
Power supply
R
S
T Z
Y
X U
V
W
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
M
5000 5300
4000
3000
2000
1000
110165 247 330 420 550 kVA
Capacities requiring installation of AC reactor
Inverter capacity
P ow
er s
up pl
y sy
st em
ca
pa ci
ty
(kVA)
1273. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.3 Installation of a reactor
12
3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC)
Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC) On the inverter input side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes. (Refer to page 29 for selection.)
To disconnect the inverter from the power supply at activation of a protective function or at malfunctioning of the driving system (emergency stop, etc.). For example, an MC prevents overheat or burnout of the brake resistor when heat capacity of the resistor is insufficient or brake regenerative transistor is damaged with short while connecting an optional brake resistor.
To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at power restoration after an inverter stop made by a power failure. To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work.
Use the inverter input current as a reference for selection of an MC to perform an emergency stop during operation, and select the MC conforming to JEM 1038-AC-3 class rated operational current.
NOTE Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1,000,000 times),
frequent starts and stops of the magnetic contactor must be avoided. Turn ON or OFF the start (STF/STR) signal for the inverter start control to run or stop the inverter.
Inverter start/stop circuit example As shown in the following figure, always use the start signal (turn ON or OFF the STF/STR signal) to make a start or stop.
*1 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer. *2 To hold the Fault signal when the inverter's protective circuit is activated, connect the control circuit power supply terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21
to the input side of the MC. Before connection, remove jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and across terminals S/L2 and S1/L21. (Refer to page 77 for removal of the jumper.)
Handling of the magnetic contactor on the inverter's output side Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the magnetic contactor is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will activate. When the magnetic contactor is provided to switch to a commercial power supply, for example, it is recommended to use the electronic bypass function Pr.135 to Pr.139 (refer to page 563). (The commercial power supply operation is not available with Vector control dedicated motors (SF-V5RU, SF-THY) nor with PM motors.)
Power supply
MCCB
RA
U
V
A1
B1
C1
W
To the motor
Inverter
SD
MC
STF/STR
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3 R1/L11
S1/L21
OFF ON
MC
Stop
Start
RA
MC
Operation preparation
Start/Stop
RA
MC
T 1
2
8 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Handling of the manual contactor on the inverter's output side A PM motor is a synchronous motor with high-performance magnets embedded inside. High-voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the motor is running even after the inverter power is turned OFF. In an application where the PM motor is driven by the load even after the inverter is powered OFF, a low-voltage manual contactor must be connected at the inverter's output side.
NOTE Before wiring or inspection for a PM motor, confirm that the PM motor is stopped. In an application, such as fan and blower,
where the motor is driven by the load, a low-voltage manual contactor must be connected at the inverter's output side, and wiring and inspection must be performed while the contactor is open. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
Do not open or close the contactor while the inverter is running (outputting).
1293. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC)
13
3.5 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400 V class motor insulation
In the PWM type inverter, a surge voltage attributable to wiring constants is generated at the motor terminals. Especially in a 400 V class motor, the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation. When the 400 V class motor is driven by the inverter, consider the following countermeasures:
Countermeasures (with induction motor) It is recommended to take one of the following countermeasures:
Rectifying the motor insulation and limiting the PWM carrier frequency according to the wiring length
For the 400 V class motor, use an insulation-enhanced motor. Specifically,
Order a "400 V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor". For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use an "inverter-driven dedicated
motor". Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection as indicated below according to the wiring length.
Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side For the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, connect the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) to the inverter
output side. For the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, connect the sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) to the inverter output side.
Countermeasures (with PM motor) When the wiring length exceeds 50 m, set "9" (6 kHz) or less in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.
NOTE For details on Pr.72 PWM frequency selection, refer to page 356. (When using an optional sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC),
set "25" (2.5 kHz) in Pr.72.) For details on the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) and the sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC), refer to the
Instruction Manual of each option. A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) can be used under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector
control. A sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) can be used under V/F control. Do not use the filters under different control methods. The carrier frequency is limited during PM sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 356.)
Wiring length Shorter than 50 m 50 to 100 m Longer than 100 m
Pr.72 PWM frequency selection 15 (14.5 kHz) or lower 9 (9 kHz) or lower 4 (4 kHz) or lower
0 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.5 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400 V class motor insulation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3.6 Checklist before starting operation The FR-A800 series inverter is a highly reliable product, but incorrect peripheral circuit making or operation/handling method may shorten the product life or damage the product. Before starting operation, always recheck the following points.
Checkpoint Countermeasure Refer to page
Check by user
Crimp terminals are insulated. Use crimp terminals with insulation sleeves to wire the power supply and the motor.
The wiring between the power supply (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/ L3) and the motor (terminals U, V, W) is correct.
Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the inverter. Never perform such wiring. 55
No wire offcuts are left from the time of wiring.
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure, or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
The main circuit cable gauge is correctly selected.
Use an appropriate cable gauge to suppress the voltage drop to 2% or less. If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a voltage drop in the main circuit will cause the motor torque to decrease especially during the output of a low frequency.
57
The total wiring length is within the specified length.
Keep the total wiring length within the specified length. In long distance wiring, charging currents due to stray capacitance in the wiring may degrade the fast- response current limit operation or cause the equipment on the inverter's output side to malfunction. Pay attention to the total wiring length.
57
Countermeasures are taken against EMI.
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In such case, enable the EMC filter (turn ON the EMC filter ON/OFF connector) to minimize interference.
120
On the inverter's output side, there is no power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor, or radio noise filter installed.
Doing so will shut off the inverter output or damage the capacitor or surge suppressor. If any of the above devices is connected, immediately remove it.
When performing an inspection or rewiring on the product that has been energized, the operator has waited long enough after shutting off the power supply.
For a short time after the power-OFF, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor, and it is dangerous. Before performing an inspection or rewiring, wait 10 minutes or longer after the power supply turns OFF, then confirm that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/- of the inverter is low enough using a digital multimeter, etc.
The inverter's output side has no short circuit or ground fault occurring.
A short circuit or ground fault on the inverter's output side may damage the inverter module.
Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation since repeated short circuits caused by peripheral circuit inadequacy or an earth (ground) fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced motor insulation resistance may damage the inverter module.
Fully check the to-earth (ground) insulation and phase-to-phase insulation of the inverter's output side before power-ON. Especially for an old motor or use in hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance, etc.
The circuit is not configured to use the inverter's input-side magnetic contactor to start/stop the inverter frequently.
Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit, frequent starts and stops of the magnetic contactor must be avoided. Turn ON or OFF the inverter's start (STF/STR) signal to run or stop the inverter.
128
A mechanical brake is not connected to terminals P/+ and PR.
To terminals P/+ and PR, connect only an external brake resistor. 97
The voltage applied to the inverter I/O signal circuits is within the specifications.
Application of a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits or opposite polarity may damage the I/O devices. Especially check the wiring to prevent the speed setting potentiometer from being connected incorrectly to short circuit terminals 10E and 5.
68
1313. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.6 Checklist before starting operation
13
When using the electronic bypass operation, electrical and mechanical interlocks are provided between the electronic bypass contactors MC1 and MC2.
When using a switching circuit as shown below, chattering due to misconfigured sequence or arc generated at switching may allow undesirable current to flow in and damage the inverter. Miswiring may also damage the inverter. (The commercial power supply operation is not available with Vector control dedicated motors (SF-V5RU, SF-THY) nor with PM motors.)
If switching to the commercial power supply operation while a failure such as an output short circuit has occurred between the magnetic contactor MC2 and the motor, the damage may further spread. If a failure has occurred between the MC2 and the motor, a protection circuit such as using the OH signal input must be provided.
A countermeasure is provided for power restoration after a power failure.
If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide an MC on the inverter's input side and also make up a sequence which will not switch ON the start signal. If the start signal (start switch) remains ON after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the power is restored.
For Vector control, the encoder is properly installed.
The encoder must be directly connected to a motor shaft without any backlash. (Real sensorless vector control or PM sensorless vector control do not require an encoder.)
87
A magnetic contactor (MC) is installed on the inverter's input side.
On the inverter's input side, connect an MC for the following purposes: To disconnect the inverter from the power supply at activation of a protective
function or at malfunctioning of the driving system (emergency stop, etc.). To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at power restoration after
an inverter stop made by a power failure. To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance
and inspection work. To use an MC to perform an emergency stop during operation, select the MC conforming to JEM 1038-AC-3 rated current for the inverter rated input current.
128
The magnetic contactor on the inverter's output side is properly handled.
Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. 128
When using a PM motor, a low- voltage manual contactor is installed on the inverter's output side.
A PM motor is a synchronous motor with high-performance magnets embedded inside. High-voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the motor is running even after the inverter power is turned OFF. In an application, such as fan and blower, where the motor is driven by the load, a low-voltage manual contactor must be connected on the inverter's output side, and wiring and inspection must be performed while the contactor is open. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
128
An EMI countermeasure is provided for the frequency setting signals.
If electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter causes the frequency setting signal to fluctuate and the motor rotation speed to be unstable when changing the motor speed with analog signals, the following countermeasures are effective: Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel
with each other and do not bundle them. Run the signal cables as far away as possible from the power cables (inverter
I/O cables). Use shielded cables. Install a data line filter to signal cable (example: ZCAT3035-1330 by TDK).
118
A countermeasure is provided for an overload operation.
When performing frequent starts/stops by the inverter, rise/fall in the temperature of the transistor element of the inverter will repeat due to a repeated flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing current at locked condition, starting current, etc. Reducing current may extend the service life but may also cause torque shortage, which leads to a start failure. Adding a margin to the current can eliminate such a condition. For an induction motor, use an inverter of a higher capacity (up to two ranks). For a PM motor, use an inverter and PM motor of higher capacities.
The specifications and rating match the system requirements. Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements. 826
Checkpoint Countermeasure Refer to page
Check by user
Power supply
Inverter Undesirable current
MC2
MC1 Interlock
U V
W
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
M
2 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.6 Checklist before starting operation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 Recommended common mode choke: FT-3KM F series FINEMET common mode choke cores manufactured by Hitachi Metals, Ltd. FINEMET is a registered trademark of Hitachi Metals, Ltd.
Countermeasures are taken against electrical corrosion on the motor bearing.
When a motor is driven by the inverter, axial voltage is generated on the motor shaft, which may cause electrical corrosion of the bearing in rare cases depending on the wiring, load, operating conditions of the motor or specific inverter settings (high carrier frequency and EMC filter ON). Contact your sales representative to take appropriate countermeasures for the motor. The following shows examples of countermeasures for the inverter. Decrease the carrier frequency. Turn OFF the EMC filter. Provide a common mode choke*1 on the output side of the inverter. (This is
effective regardless of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector setting.)
Checkpoint Countermeasure Refer to page
Check by user
1333. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.6 Checklist before starting operation
13
3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter When a fault is detected by the protective function, the protective function activates and outputs the Fault signal. However, the Fault signal may not be output at an inverter's fault occurrence when the detection circuit or output circuit fails, etc. Although Mitsubishi assures the best quality products, provide an interlock which uses inverter status output signals to prevent accidents such as damage to the machine when the inverter fails for some reason. Also at the same time consider the system configuration where a failsafe from outside the inverter, without using the inverter, is enabled even if the inverter fails.
Interlock method which uses the inverter status output signals By combining the inverter output signals to provide an interlock as shown below, an inverter failure can be detected.
When using various signals, assign the functions to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) referring to the table on the left.
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Checking by using the Fault signal output from the inverter... (a) When the inverter's protective function activates and the inverter output is stopped, the Fault (ALM) signal is output. (The ALM signal is assigned to terminal A1B1C1 in the initial setting). With this signal, check that the inverter operates properly. In addition, negative logic can be set. (ON when the inverter is normal, OFF when the fault occurs.)
Checking the inverter operating status by using the Inverter operation ready signal output from the inverter ... (b)
The Inverter operation ready (RY) signal is output when the inverter power is ON and the inverter becomes operative. Check if the RY signal is output after powering ON the inverter.
No. Interlock method Check method Used signals Refer to page
a Inverter protective function operation
Operation check of an alarm contact. Circuit error detection by negative logic. Fault (ALM) signal 483
b Inverter operating status Operation ready signal check. Inverter operation ready (RY) signal 479
c Inverter running status Logic check of the start signal and running signal. Start (STF or STR) signal Inverter running (RUN) signal 479, 722
d Inverter running status Logic check of the start signal and output current. Start (STF or STR) signal Output current detection (Y12) signal 487, 722
Output signal
Pr.190 to Pr.196 setting Positive logic Negative logic
ALM 99 199 RY 11 111 RUN 0 100 Y12 12 112
ON
(about 1 s)
OFF
Reset ON
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
ALM (when output
at NC contact) RES
Inverter fault occurrence (trip)
Time OFF
ON Reset processing
4 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Checking the inverter operating status by using the start signal input to the inverter and the Inverter running signal output from the inverter ... (c)
The Inverter running (RUN) signal is output when the inverter is running. (The RUN signal is assigned to terminal RUN in the initial setting.) Check if the RUN signal is output while a start signal (the STF/STR signal for forward/reverse rotation command) is input to the inverter. Even after the start signal is turned OFF, the RUN signal is kept output until the inverter makes the motor to decelerate and to stop. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the inverter's deceleration time.
Checking the motor operating status by using the start signal input to the inverter and the Output current detection signal output from the inverter ... (d)
The Output current detection (Y12) signal is output when the inverter operates and currents flows into the motor. Check if the Y12 signal is output while a start signal (the STF/STR signal for forward/reverse rotation command) is input to the inverter. The Y12 signal is initially set to be output at 150% inverter rated current. Adjust the level to around 20% using no load current of the motor as reference with Pr.150 Output current detection level. Like the Inverter running (RUN) signal, even after the start signal is turned OFF, the Y12 signal is kept output until the inverter stops the output to a decelerating motor. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the inverter's deceleration time.
Backup method which does not use the inverter Even if the interlock is provided by the inverter status signal, enough failsafe is not ensured depending on the failure status of the inverter itself. For example, if an inverter CPU fails in a system interlocked with the inverter's Fault, start, and RUN signals, no Fault signals will be output and the RUN signal will be kept ON because the inverter CPU is down. Provide a speed detector to detect the motor speed and current detector to detect the motor current, and consider the backup system such as performing a check as follows according to the level of importance of the system.
Start signal and actual operation check Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the inverter by comparing the start signal to the inverter and detected speed of the speed detector or detected current of the current detector. Note that the current is flowing through the motor while the motor coasts to stop, even after the inverter's start signal is turned OFF. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the inverter's deceleration time. In addition, it is recommended to check the three-phase current when using the current detector.
Time
Power supply
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
STF
RH
RY
Reset processing
Pr. 13 Starting frequency
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON
DC injection brake operation point
DC injection brake operation
RUN ON OFF
1353. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter
13
Command speed and actual operation check Check for a gap between the actual speed and commanded speed by comparing the inverter's speed command and the speed detected by the speed detector.
Inverter
Controller
System failure
To the alarm detection sensor
Sensor (speed, temperature,
air volume, etc.)
6 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter
CHAPTER 4
C H
A PT
ER 4
4
5
BASIC OPERATION
6
7
8
9
10
4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08)..................................................................................................................................138 4.2 Monitoring the inverter ..........................................................................................................................................143 4.3 Easy setting of the inverter operation mode .........................................................................................................144 4.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)......................................................................................146 4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation) ...........................................................................................................149 4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation) ...................................................................................................155 4.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation) .........................................................................................................162
137
13
4 BASIC OPERATION This chapter explains the basic operation of this product. Always read the instructions before use.
4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08)
4.1.1 Components of the operation panel (FR-DU08) To mount the operation panel (FR-DU08) on the enclosure surface, refer to page 84.
(a) (b) (c)
(d) (e)
(g)
(f)
(h) (i)
(j) (k) (l)
(m)
8 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
No. Appearance Name Description
(a) Inverter operation mode LED indicator
PU: ON when the inverter is in the PU operation mode. EXT: ON when the inverter is in the External operation mode. (ON when the inverter in the initial setting is powered ON.) NET: ON when the inverter is in the Network operation mode. PU and EXT: ON when the inverter is in the External/PU combined operation mode 1 or 2.
(b) Operation panel mode LED indicator
MON: ON when the operation panel is in the monitor mode. Quickly blinks twice intermittently while the protective function is activated. Slowly blinks when the display-off function of the operation panel is valid. PRM: ON when the operation panel is in the parameter setting mode.
(c) Controlled motor type LED indicator
IM: ON when the inverter is set to control the induction motor. PM: ON when the inverter is set to control the PM motor. The indicator blinks during test operation.
(d) Frequency unit LED indicator
ON when the actual frequency is monitored. (Blinks when the set frequency is monitored.)
(e) Monitor (5-digit LED) Shows a numeric value (readout) of a monitor item such as the frequency or a parameter number. (The monitor item can be changed according to the settings of Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776.)
(f) PLC function LED indicator ON when the PLC function of the inverter is valid.
(g) FWD key, REV key
FWD key: Starts forward rotation operation. Its LED is ON during forward rotation operation. REV key: Starts reverse rotation operation. Its LED is ON during reverse rotation operation. Either LED blinks under the following conditions. When the frequency command is not given even if the forward/reverse command is
given. When the frequency command is equal to the starting frequency or lower. When the MRS signal is being input.
(h) STOP/RESET key Stops the operation commands. Used to reset the inverter when the protective function is activated.
(i) Setting dial
The setting dial of the Mitsubishi Electric inverters. Turn the setting dial to change the setting of frequency or parameter, etc. Press the setting dial to perform the following operations: To display a set frequency on the LED display in the monitor mode. (The monitor item
shown on the display can be changed by using Pr.992.) To display the present setting during calibration. To display a fault record number in the fault history mode.
(j) MODE key
Switches the operation panel to a different mode. The easy setting of the inverter operation mode is enabled by pressing this key
simultaneously with . Every key on the operation panel becomes inoperable by holding this key for 2 seconds. The key inoperable function is invalid when Pr.161 = "0 (initial setting)". (Refer to page 341.)
(k) SET key
Confirms each selection. When this key is pressed during inverter operation, the monitor item changes. (The monitor item on each screen can be changed according to the settings of Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776.)
(l) ESC key Goes back to the previous display. Holding this key for a longer time changes the display back to the monitor mode.
(m) PU/EXT key
Switches between the PU operation mode, the PUJOG operation mode, and the External operation mode. The easy setting of the inverter operation mode is enabled by pressing this key
simultaneously with . Also cancels the PU stop warning.
Output frequency
Initial setting in the monitor mode Output current
Output voltage
1394. BASIC OPERATION 4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08)
14
4.1.2 Basic operation of the operation panel Basic operation
*1 For details on operation modes, refer to page 389. *2 The monitor item can be changed. (Refer to page 446.) *3 For details on the trace function, refer to page 649. *4 For details on the fault history, refer to page 779. *5 The USB memory mode indication appears while a USB memory device is connected. (Refer to page 85.)
Operation mode switchover/Frequency setting
Fu nc
tio n
M on
ito r
Pa ra
m et
er s
et tin
g Fa
ul t h
is to
ry
Blinking Blinking Blinking
External operation mode1(displayed at power-ON)
First screen (Output frequency2 monitoring)
PU operation mode1 PU Jog operation mode1
Second screen (Output current2 monitoring)
Third screen (Output voltage2 monitoring)
Change the setting.
(Example)
Frequency setting written and complete
Alternating
The last eight fault records can be displayed. (On the display of the last fault record (fault record 1), a decimal point LED is ON.)
The present setting is displayed.
Change the setting. Parameter write complete
Alternating(Example)
(Example) (Example) (Example)
Parameter copy
Initial value change listIPM initialization
Parameter clear All parameter clear Fault history clear
Automatic parameter setting
Trace function 3
5
Fault record 1 4 Fault record 2 4 Fault record 8 4
When the fault history is empty, is displayed.
Group parameter setting
Hold down
0 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameter setting mode In the parameter setting mode, inverter functions (parameters) are set. The following table explains the indications in the parameter setting mode.
4.1.3 Digital characters and their corresponding printed equivalents
Digital characters displayed on the operation panel display are as follows.
Operation panel indication Function name Description Refer
to page
Parameter setting mode Under this mode, the set value of the displayed parameter number is read or changed. 142
Parameter clear Clears and resets parameter settings to the initial values. Calibration parameters and offline auto tuning parameters are not cleared. For details on the uncleared parameters, refer to page 864.
743
All parameter clear Clears and resets parameter settings to the initial values. Calibration parameters and the offline auto tuning parameters are also cleared. For details on the uncleared parameters, refer to page 864.
743
Fault history clear Deletes the fault history. 774
Parameter copy Copies the parameter settings saved in the inverter to the operation panel. The parameters copied to the operation panel can be also copied to other inverters.
744
Initial value change list Identifies the parameters that have been changed from their initial settings. 751
IPM initialization Changes the parameters to the settings required to drive an IPM motor (MM-CF) as a batch. Also changes the parameters back to the settings required to drive an induction motor.
230
Automatic parameter setting
Changes parameter settings as a batch. The target parameters include communication parameters for the Mitsubishi Electric human machine interface (GOT) connection and the parameters for the rated frequency settings of 50 Hz/60 Hz.
350
Group parameter setting Displays parameter numbers by function groups. 201
0
E(e)
R
1
F(f)
r
2
G(g)
S(s)
3
H(h)
T(t)
4
I(i)
U
5
J(j)
u
6
K(k)
V
7
L(l)
v
8
M(m)
W
9
N
w
A
n
X(x)
B(b)
O
Y(y)
C
o
Z(z)
c
P(p)
D(d)
Q(q)
1414. BASIC OPERATION 4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08)
14
4.1.4 Changing the parameter setting value The following shows the procedure to change the setting of Pr.1 Maximum frequency.
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.
3. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
4. Selecting the parameter
Turn until " " (Pr.1) appears. Press to read the present set value.
" " (initial value) appears.
5. Changing the setting value
Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to confirm the selection. " " and " "
are displayed alternately.
NOTE If a parameter write condition is not satisfied, a parameter write error appears on the LCD display. (Refer to page 779.)
When Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "0 (initial setting)," the parameter setting change is only available while the inverter is stopped and under the PU operation mode. To enable the parameter setting change while the inverter is running or under the operation mode other than PU operation mode, change the Pr.77 setting. (Refer to page 345.)
Turn to read another parameter.
Press to show the setting again on the LCD display.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
Press three times to return the monitor display to the indication of the frequency.
Error indication Description
Parameter write error
Write error during operation
Calibration error
Mode designation error
2 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4.2 Monitoring the inverter
4.2.1 Monitoring of output current and output voltage
Press on the operation panel in the monitor mode to switch the monitor item between output frequency, output current,
and output voltage.
Operating procedure 1. Press during inverter operation to monitor the output frequency. [Hz] indicator turns ON.
2. Press to monitor the output current. This operation is valid under any operation mode of the inverter and whether the inverter is running or at a stop. The unit of current "A" appears.
3. Press to monitor the output voltage. The unit of voltage "V" appears.
NOTE Other monitor item, such as output power or set frequency, is also available. Use Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor
selection or Pr.774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 to Pr.776 Operation panel monitor selection 3 to change the setting. (Refer to page 446.)
4.2.2 First priority monitor screen The first priority monitor screen, which is displayed first when the operation panel becomes in the monitor mode, is selectable.
To set it, press for a while when the desired monitor item is displayed on a monitor screen.
The following show the procedure to set the monitor screen displaying the output current as the first priority monitor screen.
Operating procedure 1. Change the mode of the operation panel to the monitor mode, and switch the monitor screen to the one on which
the output current can be monitored.
2. Press for a while (1 second). The output current monitor screen is set as the first priority monitor screen.
3. When the operation panel is in the monitor mode next time, the output current monitored value is displayed first.
NOTE Use Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection or Pr.774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 to Pr.776 Operation
panel monitor selection 3 to change the monitor item. (Refer to page 446.)
4.2.3 Displaying the set frequency To display the present set frequency, change the mode of the operation panel to the monitor mode and press the setting dial
( ) while the inverter runs in the PU operation mode or in the External/PU combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 Operation
mode selection = "3").
NOTE Use Pr.992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection to change the item to be displayed. (Refer to page 446.)
1434. BASIC OPERATION 4.2 Monitoring the inverter
14
4.3 Easy setting of the inverter operation mode The operation mode suitable for start and speed command combinations can be set easily using Pr.79 Operation mode selection. The following shows the procedure to operate with the external start command (STF/STR) and the frequency command by
using .
Operating procedure 1. Press and for 0.5 seconds.
2. Turn until " " (External/PU combined operation mode 1) appears. (For other settings, refer to the following table.)
3. Press to confirm the selection. External/PU combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3") is set.
*1 To use the setting dial as a potentiometer, refer to page 341.
Operation panel indication Operation method
Operation mode Start command Frequency
command
, *1 PU operation mode
External (STF, STR)
Analog voltage input External operation mode
External (STF, STR)
*1 External/PU combined operation mode 1
, Analog voltage input External/PU combined operation mode 2
Blinking
Blinking
Blinking
Blinking
Blinking
Blinking
4 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.3 Easy setting of the inverter operation mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE
" " appears if the Pr.79 setting is tried to be changed while the inverter is set that only the parameters registered in the user group are read (Pr.160 = "1") but Pr.79 is not included in the user group.
" " appears if a setting change is attempted during inverter operation. Turn OFF the start command ( /
, or STF/STR signal).
If is pressed before pressing , the easy setting is terminated and the operation panel returns to the monitor
mode. If the easy setting is terminated while Pr.79 = "0 (initial value)", check the inverter operation mode because the inverter may switch its operation mode between the PU operation mode and the External operation mode.
Reset by pressing is enabled.
The priorities of the frequency commands while Pr.79 = "3" are "Multi-speed operation (RL/RM/RH/REX) > PID control (X14) > terminal 4 analog input (AU) > digital input from the operation panel".
1454. BASIC OPERATION 4.3 Easy setting of the inverter operation mode
14
4.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)
Parameters that are frequently used for the FR-A800 series are grouped as simple mode parameters. When Pr.160 User group read selection = "9999", only the simple mode parameters are displayed on the operation panel. This section explains the simple mode parameters.
4.4.1 Simple mode parameter list For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial values of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter's setting, change and check can be made on the operation panel (FR-DU08).
Pr.160 User group read selection can narrow down the displayed parameters to only the simple mode parameters. (In the initial setting, all parameters are displayed.) Set Pr.160 User group read selection as required. (To change the parameter setting, refer to page 142.)
Pr.160 setting Description 9999 Only simple mode parameters are displayed.
0 (initial value) All parameters (simple mode parameters and extended parameters) are displayed.
1 Only parameters registered in user groups are displayed.
6 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Simple mode parameter
*1 The initial value for the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower. *2 The initial value for the FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K), FR-A840-00052(1.5K) to FR-A840-00126(3.7K). *3 The initial values for the FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K). *4 The initial value for the FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K). *5 The initial value for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) and higher. *6 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *7 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher. *8 The initial value for the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower is set to the 85% of the inverter rated current. *9 The initial value for the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower. *10 Initial value for the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and FR-A840-00310(11K) and higher. *11 The initial value in "FM" column is for the FM-type inverter that has terminal FM, and that in "CA" column is for the CA-type inverter that has
terminal CA.
Pr. Pr. group Name Increment
Initial value*11
Range Application Refer
to pageFM CA
0 G000 Torque boost 0.1%
6%*1
0 to 30%
Set this parameter to obtain a higher starting torque under V/F control. Also set this when a loaded motor cannot be driven, the warning "OL" occurs, and the inverter output is shut off with the fault indication "E.OC1".
706 4%*2
3%*3
2%*4
1%*5
1 H400 Maximum frequency 0.01 Hz
120 Hz*6 0 to 120 Hz Set the upper limit for the output frequency.
42860 Hz*7
2 H401 Minimum frequency 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the lower limit for the output frequency.
3 G001 Base frequency 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set this parameter when the rated motor frequency is 50 Hz. Check the rating plate of the motor.
707
4 D301 Multi-speed setting (high speed)
0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
Pre-set the speeds that will be switched among by terminals.
151, 156, 4115 D302
Multi-speed setting (middle speed)
0.01 Hz 30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
6 D303 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 0.01 Hz 10 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
7 F010 Acceleration time 0.1 s 5s*9
0 to 3600 s Sets the acceleration time.
367 15s*10
8 F011 Deceleration time 0.1 s 5s*9
0 to 3600 s Sets the deceleration time. 15s*10
9 H000 C103
Electronic thermal O/L relay
0.01 A*6 Inverter rated current*8
0 to 500 A*6 Protects the motor from heat. Set the rated motor current. 415
0.1 A*7 0 to 3600 A*7
79 D000 Operation mode selection 1 0 0 to 4, 6, 7 Select the start and frequency command
sources. 389
125 T022 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency
0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Allows the frequency at the maximum potentiometer setting (5 V in the initial setting) to be changed.
159, 505
126 T042 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Allows the frequency at the maximum current input (20 mA in the initial setting) to be changed.
161, 505
160 E440 User group read selection 1 0 0, 1, 9999
This function restricts the parameters that are read by the operation panel and parameter unit.
354
998 E430 PM parameter initialization 1 0
0, 3003, 3103, 8009, 8109, 9009, 9109
Selects the PM sensorless vector control and set the parameters that are required to drive a PM motor.
230
999 E431 Automatic parameter setting 1 9999
1, 2, 10, 11, 12, 13, 20, 21, 9999
Changes parameter settings as a batch. The target parameters include communication parameters for the Mitsubishi Electric human machine interface (GOT) connection and the parameters for the rated frequency settings of 50/60 Hz.
350
1474. BASIC OPERATION 4.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)
14
Parameters for the CC-Link IE Field Network communication (FR-A800- GF)
NOTE When Pr.160 in the FR-A800-GF is set to "9999", the parameters for the CC-Link IE Field Network communication, as well as
the simple mode parameters, are displayed.
Pr. Pr. group Name Increment Initial value Range Application
Refer to
page
313 M410 DO0 output selection 1 9999
0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to 57, 60, 61, 63, 64, 68, 70, 79, 80, 84 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 120, 122, 125 to 128, 130 to 136, 138, to 157, 160, 161, 163, 164, 168, 170, 179, 180, 184 to 199, 200 to 208, 300 to 308, 9999
Assign signals to the remote registers RX10 to RX12.
473, 758314 M411 DO1 output
selection 1 9999
315 M412 DO2 output selection 1 9999
349
Communication reset selection/ Ready bit status selection
1 0
0 (100) Enables the error reset function in any operation mode.
663 1 (101) Enables the error reset function only in the
Network operation mode.
N010 Communication reset selection
0 Enables the error reset function in any operation mode.
1 Enables the error reset function only in the Network operation mode.
434 N110 Network number (CC- Link IE)
1 0 0 to 255 Enter the network number of the inverter. 752
435 N111 Station number (CC-Link IE) 1 0 0 to 255 Enter the station number of the inverter.
500 N011 Communication error execution waiting time
0.1s 0 s 0 to 999.8 s Set the time from when the communication line error occurs until the inverter starts the operation for the communication error
663501 N012
Communication error occurrence count display
1 0 0 Displays the communication error occurrence count
502 N013
Stop mode selection at communication error
1 0 0 to 4 Set the operations when the communication line error occurs and when the communication line error is removed.
541 N100 Frequency command sign selection
1 0 0 Signed frequency command value
752 1 Unsigned frequency command value
779 N014
Operation frequency during communication error
0.01 Hz. 9999
0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency for the operation when a communication error occurs.
663 9999 The motor runs at the frequency used before
the communication error.
8 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation) Select a method to give the frequency command from the list below, and refer to the specified page for its procedure.
4.5.1 Setting the frequency on the operation panel (example: operating at 30 Hz)
Use the operation panel (FR-DU08) to give a start command and a frequency command. (PU operation)
The following shows the procedure to operate at 30 Hz.
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.
3. Setting the frequency
Turn until the target frequency " " (30.00 Hz) appears. The indication blinks for about five seconds.
While the indication is flashing, press to confirm the selection for the frequency. " " and " "are
displayed alternately. After about three seconds of alternate display, the monitor display goes back to " " (the indication of a monitored value).
(If is not pressed during the flashing for about five seconds, the monitor display goes back to " " (0.00
Hz). In that case, turn again and set the frequency.)
4. Start acceleration constant speed
Press or to start running. The frequency value on the monitor increases according to the setting of
Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (30.00 Hz) appears on the monitor. (To change the set frequency, return to step 3. The previously set frequency appears.)
Method to give the frequency command Refer to page Setting the frequency on the operation panel in the frequency setting mode 149 Give commands by turning the setting dial like a potentiometer 150 Give commands by turning ON/OFF switches wired to inverter's terminals (multi-speed setting) 151 Setting the frequency by inputting voltage signals 152 Setting the frequency by inputting current signals 153
Operation panel (FR-DU08)
1494. BASIC OPERATION 4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
15
5. Deceleration stop
Press to stop. The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting of Pr.8 Deceleration
time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor stops rotating.
NOTE
To display the set frequency under PU operation mode or External/PU combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3"), press .
(Refer to page 446.)
can also be used like a potentiometer to perform inverter operation. (Refer to page 150.)
Parameters referred to Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
4.5.2 Perform PU operation using the setting dial like a potentiometer
Set Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection = "1" (setting dial potentiometer).
The following shows the procedure to change the frequency from 0 Hz to 60 Hz during operation.
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.
3. Changing the parameter setting Change Pr.161 setting to "1". (To change the setting, refer to page 142.)
4. Start
Press or to start the inverter operation.
5. Setting the frequency
Turn until " " appears. The value in the flashing indication is set as the value of a set frequency (The
indication blinks for about five seconds). needs not to be pressed.
NOTE If the indication changes from the blink of "60.00" to the display of "0.00", Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation
selection may be set to a value other than "1".
Simply turning enables frequency setting whether the inverter is running or at a stop. The newly-set frequency is saved as the set frequency in EEPROM after 10 seconds. With the setting dial, the frequency can go up to the setting value of Pr.1 Maximum frequency. Check the Pr.1 Maximum
frequency setting, and adjust the setting according to the application.
Parameters referred to Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 428 Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selectionpage 341
0 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4.5.3 Setting the frequency with switches (multi-speed setting)
Use or on the operation panel (FR-DU08) to give a start command.
Turn ON the RH, RM, or RL signal to give a frequency command (multi-speed setting). Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2).
[Connection diagram]
The following shows the procedure to operate at a low speed (10 Hz).
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode Set "4" in Pr.79. [PU] and [EXT] indicators are ON. (To change the setting, refer to page 144.)
3. Setting the frequency Turn ON the low-speed switch (RL signal).
4. Start acceleration constant speed
Press or to start running. The frequency value on the monitor increases according to the setting of Pr.7
Acceleration time, and " " (10.00 Hz) appears on the monitor.
5. Deceleration stop
Press to stop. The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting of Pr.8 Deceleration
time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor stops rotating. Turn OFF the low-speed switch (RL signal).
NOTE Initially, the high-speed switch (RH signal) is set to 60 Hz for the FM type inverter or 50 Hz for the CA type inverter. The middle-
speed switch (RM signal) is set to 30 Hz, and the low-speed switch (RL signal) is set to 10 Hz. (To change the settings, use Pr.4, Pr.5, and Pr.6, respectively.)
In the initial setting, if two or more speed switches (signals) are simultaneously turned ON, priority is given to the switch (signal) for the lower speed. For example, when both RH and RM signals turn ON, the RM signal (Pr.5) has the higher priority.
Up to 15-speed switching operation can be performed.
Parameters referred to Pr.4 to Pr.6 (multi-speed setting)page 411 Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
Inverter
High speed Middle speed Low speed
SD
RH RM RL
Operation panel (FR-DU08)
Switch
ON
ON
ON
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H z) Speed 1
(High speed)
Speed 2 (Middle speed)
Speed 3 (Low speed)
Time
RH
RM
RL
1514. BASIC OPERATION 4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
15
4.5.4 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (voltage input)
Use or on the operation panel (FR-DU08) to give a start command.
Use the frequency setting potentiometer to give a frequency command (by connecting it to terminals 2 and 5 (voltage input)). Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2).
[Connection diagram] (The inverter supplies 5 V power to the frequency setting potentiometer via terminal 10.)
The following shows the procedure to operate at 60 Hz.
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode Set "4" in Pr.79. [PU] and [EXT] indicators are ON. (To change the setting, refer to page 142.)
3. Start
Press or . [FWD] or [REV] indicator blinks as no frequency command is given.
4. Acceleration constant speed Turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the monitor increases
according to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor.
5. Deceleration Turn the frequency setting potentiometer counterclockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the monitor
decreases according to the setting of Pr.8 Deceleration time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor stops rotating. [FWD] or [REV] indicator blinks.
6. Stop
Press . [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
NOTE To change the frequency (60 Hz) at the maximum voltage input (initial value: 5 V), adjust Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain frequency. To change the frequency (0 Hz) at the minimum voltage input (initial value: 0 V), adjust the calibration parameter C2
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency. When terminal 10 is used, the maximum output frequency may fluctuate in a range of 6 Hz due to fluctuations in the output
voltage (5 V 0.5 VDC). Use Pr.125 or Pr.C4 to adjust the output frequency at the maximum analog input as required. (Refer to page 505.)
When terminal 10E is used, the maximum output frequency may fluctuate (in a range of 2 to 3 Hz) due to fluctuations in the output voltage (10 0.4 VDC). Use Pr. 125 or Pr. C4 to adjust the output frequency at the maximum analog input as required. (Refer to page 505.)
Inverter Operation panel
(FR-DU08) Frequency setting potentiometer
5
10 2
Potentiometer
2 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters referred to Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequencypage 505 C2(Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequencypage 505
4.5.5 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (current input)
Use or on the operation panel (FR-DU08) to give a start command.
Use the current regulator which outputs 4 to 20 mA to give a frequency command (by connecting it across terminals 4 and 5 (current input)).
Turn ON the AU signal. Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2).
[Connection diagram]
The following shows the procedure to operate at 60 Hz.
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode Set "4" in Pr.79. [PU] and [EXT] indicators are ON. (To change the setting, refer to page 142.)
3. Selecting the input via terminal 4 Turn ON the Terminal 4 input selection (AU) signal. Input via terminal 4 to the inverter is enabled.
4. Start
Press or . [FWD] or [REV] indicator blinks as no frequency command is given.
5. Acceleration constant speed Input a current of 20 mA to the inverter from the regulator. The frequency value on the monitor increases according
to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor.
6. Deceleration Input a current of 4 mA or less. The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting of Pr.8
Deceleration time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor stops rotating. [FWD] or [REV] indicator blinks.
7. Stop
Press . [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
Inverter Operation panel
(FR-DU08)
Current signal source
(4 to 20mADC) 5(-)
4(+) SD
AUAU signal
1534. BASIC OPERATION 4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
15
NOTE Pr.184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4 (initial value)" (AU signal). To change the frequency (60 Hz) at the maximum current input (initial value: 20 mA), adjust Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency
setting gain frequency. To change the frequency (0 Hz) at the minimum current input (initial value: 4 mA), adjust the calibration parameter C5
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency.
Parameters referred to Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 505 Pr.184 AU terminal function selectionpage 521 C5(Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequencypage 505
4 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation) Select a method to give the frequency command from the list below, and refer to the specified page for its procedure.
4.6.1 Setting the frequency on the operation panel
Turn ON the STF/STR signal to give a start command.
Use on the operation panel (FR-DU08) to give a frequency command. Set Pr.79 = "3" (External/PU combined operation mode 1).
[Connection diagram]
The following shows the procedure to operate at 30 Hz.
Operating procedure 1. Changing the operation mode
Set "3" in Pr.79. [PU] and [EXT] indicators are ON. (To change the setting, refer to page 142.)
2. Setting the frequency
Turn until the target frequency " " (30.00 Hz) appears. The indication blinks for about five seconds.
While the indication is flashing, press to confirm the selection for the frequency. " " and " "are
displayed alternately. After about three seconds of alternate display, the monitor display goes back to " " (the
indication of a monitored value). (If is not pressed during the flashing for about five seconds, the monitor
display goes back to " " (0.00 Hz). In that case, turn again and set the frequency.)
3. Start acceleration constant speed Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency value on the monitor increases according to the setting
of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (30.00 Hz) appears on the monitor. [FWD] indicator is ON during the forward rotation, and [REV] indicator is ON during the reverse rotation. (To change the set frequency, return to step 2. The previously set frequency appears.)
4. Deceleration stop Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting
of Pr.8 Deceleration time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor stops rotating.
Method to give the frequency command Refer to page Setting the frequency on the operation panel in the frequency setting mode 155 Turning ON/OFF switches wired to inverter's terminals (multi-speed setting) 156 Setting the frequency by inputting voltage signals 157 Setting the frequency by inputting current signals 160
Inverter Operation panel
(FR-DU08)
SD
STF STR
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation startSwitch
1554. BASIC OPERATION 4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
15
NOTE When both the forward rotation start switch (STF signal) and the reverse rotation start switch (STR signal) are turned ON, the
motor cannot be started. If both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop. Pr.178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr.179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61")
(initial value). Setting Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "3" enables multi-speed operation.
If on the operation panel is pressed during the External operation, the inverter stops and the PU stop warning is
activated (" " appears on the LCD display of the operation panel). To reset the PU stop warning, turn OFF the start switch
(STF or STR signal), and then press (refer to page 338).
Parameters referred to Pr.4 to Pr.6 (multi-speed setting)page 411, Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367 Pr.178 STF terminal function selection, Pr.179 STR terminal function selectionpage 521 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
4.6.2 Setting the frequency and giving a start command with switches (multi-speed setting) (Pr.4 to Pr.6)
Turn ON the STF/STR signal to give a start command. Turn ON the RH, RM, or RL signal to give a frequency command (multi-speed setting).
[Connection diagram]
The following shows the procedure to operate at a high speed (60 Hz).
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Setting the frequency Turn ON the high-speed switch (RH signal).
3. Start acceleration constant speed Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency value on the monitor increases according to the setting
of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor. [FWD] indicator is ON during the forward rotation, and [REV] indicator is ON during the reverse rotation. When the RM signal is turned ON, 30 Hz is displayed. When the RL signal is turned ON, 10 Hz is displayed.
4. Deceleration stop Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting
of Pr.8 Deceleration time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor stops rotating. [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF. Turn OFF the high-speed switch (RH signal).
Forward rotation start
RM
STF STR RH
SD RL
Inverter
Switch
Reverse rotation start High speed
Middle speed Low speed
ON
ON
ON
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H z) Speed 1
(High speed)
Speed 2 (Middle speed)
Speed 3 (Low speed)
Time
RH
RM
RL
6 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When both the forward rotation start switch (STF signal) and the reverse rotation start switch (STR signal) are turned ON, the
motor cannot be started. If both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop. Initially, the high-speed switch (RH signal) is set to 60 Hz for the FM type inverter or 50 Hz for the CA type inverter. The middle-
speed switch (RM signal) is set to 30 Hz, and the low-speed switch (RL signal) is set to 10 Hz. (To change the settings, use Pr.4, Pr.5, and Pr.6, respectively.)
In the initial setting, if two or more speed switches (signals) are simultaneously turned ON, priority is given to the switch (signal) for the lower speed. For example, when both RH and RM signals turn ON, the RM signal (Pr.5) has the higher priority.
Up to 15-speed switching operation can be performed.
Parameters referred to Pr.4 to Pr.6 (multi-speed setting)page 411 Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367
4.6.3 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (voltage input)
Turn ON the STF/STR signal to give a start command. Use the frequency setting potentiometer to give a frequency command (by connecting it across terminals 2 and 5 (voltage
input)).
[Connection diagram] (The inverter supplies 5 V power to the frequency setting potentiometer via terminal 10.)
The following shows the procedure to operate at 60 Hz.
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Start Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). [FWD] or [REV] indicator blinks as no frequency command is given.
3. Acceleration constant speed Turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the monitor increases
according to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor. [FWD] indicator is ON during the forward rotation, and [REV] indicator is ON during the reverse rotation.
4. Deceleration Turn the frequency setting potentiometer counterclockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the monitor
decreases according to the setting of Pr.8 Deceleration time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor stops rotating. [FWD] or [REV] indicator blinks.
5. Stop Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
Inverter
Frequency setting potentiometer
5
10 2
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start
STF STR SDSwitch
Potentiometer
1574. BASIC OPERATION 4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
15
NOTE When both the forward rotation start switch (STF signal) and the reverse rotation start switch (STR signal) are turned ON, the
motor cannot be started. If both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop. Pr.178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr.179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61")
(initial value). When terminal 10 is used, the maximum output frequency may fluctuate in a range of 6 Hz due to fluctuations in the output
voltage (5 V 0.5 VDC). Use Pr. 125 or Pr. C4 to adjust the output frequency at the maximum analog input as required. (Refer to page 505.)
When terminal 10E is used, the maximum output frequency may fluctuate (in a range of 2 to 3 Hz) due to fluctuations in the output voltage (10 0.4 VDC). Use Pr. 125 or Pr. C4 to adjust the output frequency at the maximum analog input as required. (Refer to page 505.)
Parameters referred to Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367 Pr.178 STF terminal function selection, Pr.179 STR terminal function selectionpage 521
8 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4.6.4 Changing the frequency (60 Hz, initial value) at the maximum voltage input (5 V, initial value)
Change the maximum frequency.
The following shows the procedure to change the frequency at 5 V from 60 Hz (initial value) to 50 Hz using a frequency setting potentiometer for 0 to 5 VDC input. Set 50 Hz in Pr.125 so that the inverter outputs 50 Hz at 5 V input.
Operating procedure 1. Selecting the parameter
Turn until " " (Pr.125) appears.
Press to read the present set value. (60.00 Hz)
2. Changing the maximum frequency
Turn to change the set value to " ". (50.00 Hz)
Press to confirm the selection. " " and " "are displayed alternately.
3. Selecting the mode and the monitor item
Press three times to select the monitor mode, and change the monitor item to the frequency.
4. Start Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal), and turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full. (Refer to steps 2 and 3 in 4.6.3.) The motor is operated at 50 Hz.
NOTE To change the frequency at the input of 0 V (minimum voltage), use the calibration parameter C2.
Other adjustment methods for the frequency setting voltage gain are the following: adjustment by applying a voltage directly across terminals 2 and 5, and adjustment using a specified point without applying a voltage across terminals 2 and 5. (Refer to page 505.)
Parameters referred to Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequencypage 505 C2(Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequencypage 505 C4(Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gainpage 505
60Hz (50Hz)
Output frequency (Hz)
0
0 Frequency setting signal
100%
10V
Initial value
Bias
0 5V
Pr.125Gain
C2 (Pr.902)
C3(Pr.902) C4(Pr.903)
1594. BASIC OPERATION 4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
16
4.6.5 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (current input)
Turn ON the STF/STR signal to give a start command. Turn ON the AU signal. Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "2" (External operation mode).
[Connection diagram]
The following shows the procedure to operate at 60 Hz.
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Selecting the input via terminal 4 Turn ON the Terminal 4 input selection (AU) signal. Input via terminal 4 to the inverter is enabled.
3. Start Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). [FWD] or [REV] indicator blinks as no frequency command is given.
4. Acceleration constant speed Input a current of 20 mA to the inverter from the regulator. The frequency value on the monitor increases according
to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor. [FWD] indicator is ON during the forward rotation, and [REV] indicator is ON during the reverse rotation.
5. Deceleration Input a current of 4 mA or less. The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting of Pr.8
Deceleration time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor stops rotating. [FWD] or [REV] indicator blinks.
6. Stop Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
NOTE When both the forward rotation start switch (STF signal) and the reverse rotation start switch (STR signal) are turned ON, the
motor cannot be started. If both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop. Pr.184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4 (initial value)" (AU signal).
Parameters referred to Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367 Pr.184 AU terminal function selectionpage 521
Inverter
Switch
5(-) 4(+)
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start
STF STR
SD AU
Current signal source
(4 to 20mADC)
0 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4.6.6 Changing the frequency (60 Hz, initial value) at the maximum current input (at 20 mA, initial value)
Change the maximum frequency.
The following shows the procedure to change the frequency at 20 mA from 60 Hz (initial value) to 50 Hz using a frequency setting potentiometer for 4 to 20 mA input. Set 50 Hz in Pr.126 so that the inverter outputs 50 Hz at 20 mA input.
Operating procedure 1. Selecting the parameter
Turn until " " (Pr.126) appears.
Press to read the present set value (60.00 Hz).
2. Changing the maximum frequency
Turn to change the set value to " " (50.00 Hz).
Press to confirm the selection. " " and " "are displayed alternately.
3. Selecting the mode and the monitor item
Press three times to select the monitor mode and to monitor a frequency.
4. Start Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR) to apply a 20 mA current (refer to steps 3 and 4 in 4.6.5). Operate at 50 Hz.
NOTE To change the frequency at the input of 4 mA (minimum current), use the calibration parameter C5.
Other adjustment methods for the frequency setting current gain are the following: adjustment by applying a current through terminals 4 and 5, and adjustment using a specified point without applying a current through terminals 4 and 5. (Refer to page 505.)
Parameters referred to Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 505 C5(Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequencypage 505 C7(Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gainpage 505
60Hz (50Hz)
Pr.126
0
Frequency setting signal
100%
Initial value
Bias Gain
0 20 4 20mA
Output frequency (Hz)
C5 (Pr.904)
C6(Pr.904) C7(Pr.905)
0 1 5V 0 2 10V
1614. BASIC OPERATION 4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
16
4.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation)
4.7.1 Giving a start command by using external signals for JOG operation
JOG operation is performed while the JOG signal is ON. Use Pr.15 Jog frequency to set a frequency, and set Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time to set the acceleration/
deceleration time for JOG operation. Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "2" (External operation mode).
[Connection diagram]
The following shows the procedure to operate at 5 Hz.
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Turning ON the JOG signal Turn ON the JOG switch (JOG signal). The inverter is set ready for the JOG operation.
3. Start acceleration constant speed Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency increases according to the setting of Pr.16 Jog
acceleration/deceleration time, and " " (5.00 Hz) appears on the LCD display. [FWD] indicator is ON during the forward rotation, and [REV] indicator is ON during the reverse rotation.
4. Deceleration stop Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency decreases according to the setting of Pr.16 Jog
acceleration/deceleration time. " " (0.00 Hz) appears on the LCD display, and the motor stops rotating. [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF. Turn OFF the JOG switch (JOG signal).
NOTE To change the frequency, change the setting of Pr.15 Jog frequency (initial value: 5 Hz). To change the acceleration/deceleration time, change the setting of Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time (initial value:
0.5 second).
Parameters referred to Pr.15 Jog frequency, Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration timepage 410 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
STFForward rotation start
SD
JOG
Inverter
JOG signal Reverse rotation start STR
Switch
2 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4.7.2 Giving a start command from the operation panel for JOG operation
JOG operation is performed while or on the operation panel is pressed.
The following shows the procedure to operate at 5 Hz.
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode
Press twice to choose the PUJOG operation mode. The display shows " ", and [PU] indicator is ON.
3. Start acceleration constant speed
Hold or down to keep the JOG operation. The frequency increases according to the setting of Pr.16
Jog acceleration/deceleration time, and " " (5.00 Hz) appears on the LCD display.
4. Deceleration stop
Release or . The frequency decreases according to the setting of Pr.16 Jog acceleration/
deceleration time. " " (0.00 Hz) appears on the LCD display, and the motor stops rotating.
NOTE To change the frequency, change the setting of Pr.15 Jog frequency (initial value: 5 Hz). To change the acceleration/deceleration time, change the setting of Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time (initial value:
0.5 second).
Parameters referred to Pr.15 Jog frequency, Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration timepage 410
Operation panel (FR-DU08)
1634. BASIC OPERATION 4.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation)
16
MEMO
4 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation)
CHAPTER 5
C H
A PT
ER 5
4
5
PARAMETERS
6
7
8
9
10
5.1 Parameter list........................................................................................................................................................166 5.2 Control method .....................................................................................................................................................216 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control ....................235 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control .............................................................272 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control ..............................................................298 5.6 Adjustment during Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, PM sensorless vector control .......................332 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters .....................................................................................................................334 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern ............................................367 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command...............................................................................................389 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter.........................................................................................................................415 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring .............................................................................................................444 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters .........................................................................................................496 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters.............................................................................................................................528 5.14 (A) Application parameters ...................................................................................................................................562 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters............................................................................................................659 5.16 (G) Control parameters.........................................................................................................................................705 5.17 Parameter clear / All parameter clear ...................................................................................................................743 5.18 Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel ...................................................................................744 5.19 Copying and verifying parameters using a USB memory .....................................................................................747 5.20 Checking parameters changed from their initial values (initial value change list).................................................751 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF) .............................................................................................................752
165
16
5 PARAMETERS This chapter explains the function setting for use of this product. Always read the instructions before use. The following marks are used to indicate the controls. (Parameters without any mark are valid for all the controls.)
The setting range and the initial value of parameters differ depending on the structure or functions of the inverter. The following common designations are used for each type of the inverter models.
5.1 Parameter list
5.1.1 Parameter list (by parameter number) For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial values of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter's setting, change and check can be made on the operation panel (FR-DU08).
NOTE indicates simple mode parameters. Use Pr.160 User group read selection to indicate the simple mode parameters
only (initial setting is to indicate the extended mode parameters). The changing of the parameter settings may be restricted in some operating statuses. Use Pr.77 Parameter write selection
to change the setting of the restriction. Refer to page 864 for instruction codes for communication and availability of Parameter clear, all clear, and Parameter copy.
Mark Control method Applied motor V/F control
Three-phase induction motorAdvanced magnetic flux vector control
Real sensorless vector control
Vector control Three-phase induction motor, PM motor
PM sensorless vector control PM motor
V/F
Magnetic flux
Sensorless
Vector
PM
Inverter model Common designation FR-A8[]0 Standard model FR-A8[]2 Separated converter type FR-A8[]6 IP55 compatible model
Simple
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
B as
ic fu
nc tio
n
0 G000 Torque boost 0 to 30% 0.1%
6%*1
706 4%*1
3%*1
2%*1
1%*1
1 H400 Maximum frequency 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 120 Hz*2
428 60 Hz*3
2 H401 Minimum frequency 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 428
3 G001 Base frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 707
4 D301 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 411
5 D302 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 30 Hz 411
6 D303 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 10 Hz 411
7 F010 Acceleration time 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s*4
367 15s*5
8 F011 Deceleration time 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s*4
367 15s*5
9 H000 C103
Electronic thermal O/L relay Rated motor current
0 to 500 A*2 0.01 A*2 Inverter rated current
415, 532, 5510 to 3600 A*3 0.1 A*3
D C
in je
ct io
n br
ak e 10 G100 DC injection brake operation
frequency 0 to 120 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 3 Hz 715
11 G101 DC injection brake operation time 0 to 10 s, 8888 0.1 s 0.5 s 715
12 G110 DC injection brake operation voltage 0 to 30% 0.1%
4%*6
7152%*6
1%*6
13 F102 Starting frequency 0 to 60 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.5 Hz 381, 382
14 G003 Load pattern selection 0 to 5, 12 to 15 1 0 708
JO G
o pe
ra tio
n 15 D200 Jog frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 5 Hz 410
16 F002 Jog acceleration/ deceleration time 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 410
17 T720 MRS input selection 0, 2, 4 1 0 524
18 H402 High speed maximum frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz
120 Hz*2 428
60 Hz*3
19 G002 Base frequency voltage 0 to 1000 V, 8888, 9999 0.1 V 9999 8888 707
A cc
el er
at io
n/ de
ce le
ra tio
n tim
e
20 F000 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency 1 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 367
21 F001 Acceleration/deceleration time increments 0, 1 1 0 367
Simple
Simple
Simple
Simple
Simple
Simple
Simple
Simple
Simple
Simple Simple
1675. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
16
St al
l p re
ve nt
io n 22 H500 Stall prevention operation
level (Torque limit level) 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 245, 431
23 H610 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed
0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 431
M ul
ti- sp
ee d
se tti
ng
24 to 27 D304 to D307
Multi-speed setting (speed 4 to speed 7) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 411
28 D300 Multi-speed input compensation selection 0, 1 1 0 411
29 F100 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection 0 to 6 1 0 372
30 E300 Regenerative function selection
0 to 2, 10, 11, 20, 21, 100 to 102, 110, 111, 120, 121*11
1 0
7242, 10, 11, 102, 110, 111*12 1 10
0, 2, 10, 20, 100, 102, 110, 120*13 1 0
Fr eq
ue nc
y ju
m p 31 H420 Frequency jump 1A 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 429
32 H421 Frequency jump 1B 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 429 33 H422 Frequency jump 2A 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 429 34 H423 Frequency jump 2B 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 429 35 H424 Frequency jump 3A 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 429 36 H425 Frequency jump 3B 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 429
37 M000 Speed display 0, 1 to 9998 1 0 444
Fr eq
ue nc
y de
te ct
io n 41 M441 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 0 to 100% 0.1% 10% 484
42 M442 Output frequency detection 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 484
43 M443 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 484
Se co
nd fu
nc tio
n
44 F020 Second acceleration/ deceleration time 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5 s 367,
622
45 F021 Second deceleration time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 367, 622
46 G010 Second torque boost 0 to 30%, 9999 0.1% 9999 706 47 G011 Second V/F (base frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 707
48 H600 Second stall prevention operation level 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 431
49 H601 Second stall prevention operation frequency 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 431
50 M444 Second output frequency detection 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 30 Hz 484
51 H010 C203
Second electronic thermal O/ L relay Rated second motor current
0 to 500 A, 9999 *2 0.01 A*2
9999 415, 532, 5510 to 3600 A, 9999 *3 0.1 A*3
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M on
ito rin
g fu
nc tio
n
52 M100 Operation panel main monitor selection
0, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 36, 38 to 46, 50 to 57, 61, 62, 64, 67, 71 to 75, 87 to 98, 100
1 0 446
54 M300 FM/CA terminal function selection
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 32 to 34, 36, 46, 50, 52, 53, 61, 62, 67, 70, 87 to 90, 92, 93, 95, 97, 98
1 1 457
55 M040 Frequency monitoring reference 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 457
56 M041 Current monitoring reference 0 to 500 A *2 0.01 A*2 Inverter rated
current 457 0 to 3600 A *3 0.1 A*3
A ut
om at
ic re
st ar
t
57 A702 Restart coasting time 0, 0.1 to 30 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 628, 635
58 A703 Restart cushion time 0 to 60 s 0.1 s 1 s 628
59 F101 Remote function selection 0 to 3, 11 to 13 1 0 377
60 G030 Energy saving control selection 0, 4, 9 1 0 712
A ut
om at
ic a
cc el
er at
io n/
de ce
le ra
tio n
61 F510 Reference current 0 to 500 A, 9999 *2 0.01 A*2
9999 384, 3870 to 3600 A, 9999 *3 0.1 A*3
62 F511 Reference value at acceleration 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 384
63 F512 Reference value at deceleration 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 384
64 F520 Starting frequency for elevator mode 0 to 10 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 387
65 H300 Retry selection 0 to 5 1 0 426
66 H611 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 431
R et
ry
67 H301 Number of retries at fault occurrence 0 to 10, 101 to 110 1 0 426
68 H302 Retry waiting time 0.1 to 600 s 0.1 s 1 s 426 69 H303 Retry count display erase 0 1 0 426
70*14 G107 Special regenerative brake duty 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 724
71 C100 Applied motor
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 8090, 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
1 0 528, 532, 551
72 E600 PWM frequency selection 0 to 15*2
1 2 356 0 to 6, 25*3
73 T000 Analog input selection 0 to 7, 10 to 17 1 1 496, 501
74 T002 Input filter time constant 0 to 8 1 1 503
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
1695. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
17
75
Reset selection/ disconnected PU detection/ PU stop selection
0 to 3, 14 to 17, 1000 to 1003, 1014 to 1017
1
14
336
0 to 3, 14 to 17, 100 to 103, 114 to 117, 1000 to 1003, 1014 to 1017, 1100 to 1103, 1114 to 1117
E100 Reset selection 0 to 3 0
E101 Disconnected PU detection 0, 1
E102 PU stop selection 1
E107 Reset limit 0*2
1 0 0, 1*3
76 M510 Fault code output selection 0 to 2 1 0 492 77 E400 Parameter write selection 0 to 2 1 0 345
78 D020 Reverse rotation prevention selection 0 to 2 1 0 406
79 D000 Operation mode selection 0 to 4, 6, 7 1 0 389,
398
M ot
or c
on st
an t
80 C101 Motor capacity 0.4 to 55 kW, 9999*2 0.01 kW*2
9999 221, 532, 5510 to 3600 kW, 9999*3 0.1 kW*3
81 C102 Number of motor poles 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 9999 1 9999 221, 532, 551
82 C125 Motor excitation current 0 to 500 A, 9999*2 0.01 A*2
9999 532 0 to 3600 A, 9999*3 0.1 A*3
83 C104 Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 200 V*7 221,
532, 551400 V*8
84 C105 Rated motor frequency 10 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 221, 532, 551
85 G201 Excitation current break point 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 711
86 G202 Excitation current low-speed scaling factor 0 to 300%, 9999 0.1% 9999 711
89 G932 Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic flux vector)
0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 228
90 C120 Motor constant (R1) 0 to 50 , 9999*2 0.001*2
9999 532, 551, 6380 to 400 m, 9999*3 0.01m*3
91 C121 Motor constant (R2) 0 to 50 , 9999*2 0.001*2
9999 532 0 to 400 m, 9999*3 0.01m*3
92 C122 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld)
0 to 6000 mH, 9999*2 0.1mH*2 9999 532,
5510 to 400 mH, 9999*3 0.01mH*3
93 C123 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq)
0 to 6000 mH, 9999*2 0.1mH*2 9999 532,
5510 to 400 mH, 9999*3 0.01mH*3
94 C124 Motor constant (X) 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1%*2
9999 532 0.01%*3
95 C111 Online auto tuning selection 0 to 2 1 0 558
96 C110 Auto tuning setting/status 0, 1, 11, 101 1 0 532, 551, 638
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
Simple
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A dj
us ta
bl e
5 po
in ts
V /F
100 G040 V/F1 (first frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 713 101 G041 V/F1 (first frequency voltage) 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0 V 713 102 G042 V/F2 (second frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 713
103 G043 V/F2 (second frequency voltage) 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0 V 713
104 G044 V/F3 (third frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 713
105 G045 V/F3 (third frequency voltage) 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0 V 713
106 G046 V/F4 (fourth frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 713
107 G047 V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage) 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0 V 713
108 G048 V/F5 (fifth frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 713 109 G049 V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage) 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0 V 713
Th ird
fu nc
tio n
110 F030 Third acceleration/ deceleration time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 367
111 F031 Third deceleration time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 367 112 G020 Third torque boost 0 to 30%, 9999 0.1% 9999 706 113 G021 Third V/F (base frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 707
114 H602 Third stall prevention operation level 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 431
115 H603 Third stall prevention operation frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 431
116 M445 Third output frequency detection 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 484
PU c
on ne
ct or
c om
m un
ic at
io n
117 N020 PU communication station number 0 to 31 1 0 670
118 N021 PU communication speed 48, 96, 192, 384, 576, 768, 1152 1 192 670
119
PU communication stop bit length / data length 0, 1, 10, 11
1
1
670N022 PU communication data length 0, 1 0
N023 PU communication stop bit length 0, 1 1
120 N024 PU communication parity check 0 to 2 1 2 670
121 N025 PU communication retry count 0 to 10, 9999 1 1 670
122 N026 PU communication check time interval 0, 0.1 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 670
123 N027 PU communication waiting time setting 0 to 150 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 670
124 N028 PU communication CR/LF selection 0 to 2 1 1 670
125 T022 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 505
126 T042 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 505
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
Simple
Simple
1715. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
17
PI D
o pe
ra tio
n
127 A612 PID control automatic switchover frequency 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 601
128 A610 PID action selection
0, 10, 11, 20, 21, 40 to 43, 50, 51, 60, 61, 70, 71, 80, 81, 90, 91, 100, 101, 1000, 1001, 1010, 1011, 2000, 2001, 2010, 2011
1 0 601, 622
129 A613 PID proportional band 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1% 100% 601, 622
130 A614 PID integral time 0.1 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1 s 601, 622
131 A601 PID upper limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 601, 622
132 A602 PID lower limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 601, 622
133 A611 PID action set point 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 601, 622
134 A615 PID differential time 0.01 to 10 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 601, 622
B yp
as s
135 A000 Electronic bypass sequence selection 0, 1 1 0 563
136 A001 MC switchover interlock time 0 to 100 s 0.1 s 1 s 563 137 A002 Start waiting time 0 to 100 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 563 138 A003 Bypass selection at a fault 0, 1 1 0 563
139 A004 Automatic switchover frequency from inverter to bypass operation
0 to 60 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 563
B ac
kl as
h m
ea su
re 140 F200 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 Hz 372
141 F201 Backlash acceleration stopping time 0 to 360 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 372
142 F202 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 Hz 372
143 F203 Backlash deceleration stopping time 0 to 360 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 372
144 M002 Speed setting switchover 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 102, 104, 106, 108, 110, 112
1 4 444
PU 145 E103 PU display language selection 0 to 7 1 339
147 F022 Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 367
C ur
re nt
d et
ec tio
n
148 H620 Stall prevention level at 0 V input 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 431
149 H621 Stall prevention level at 10 V input 0 to 400% 0.1% 200% 431
150 M460 Output current detection level 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 487
151 M461 Output current detection signal delay time 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 0 s 487
152 M462 Zero current detection level 0 to 400% 0.1% 5% 487 153 M463 Zero current detection time 0 to 10 s 0.01 s 0.5 s 487
154 H631 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation
0, 1, 10, 11 1 1 431
155 T730 RT signal function validity condition selection 0, 10 1 0 525
156 H501 Stall prevention operation selection 0 to 31, 100, 101 1 0 431
157 M430 OL signal output timer 0 to 25 s, 9999 0.1 s 0 s 245, 431
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
158 M301 AM terminal function selection
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 32 to 34, 36, 46, 50, 52 to 54, 61, 62, 67, 70, 87 to 90, 91 to 98
1 1 457
159 A005 Automatic switchover frequency range from bypass to inverter operation
0 to 10 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 563
160 E440 User group read selection 0, 1, 9999 1 0 354
161 E200 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 341
A ut
om at
ic re
st ar
t 162 A700 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection
0 to 3, 10 to 13, 1000 to 1003, 1010 to 1013 1 0
628, 635, 638
163 A704 First cushion time for restart 0 to 20 s 0.1 s 0 s 628
164 A705 First cushion voltage for restart 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 628
165 A710 Stall prevention operation level for restart 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 628
C ur
re nt
d et
ec tio
n 166 M433 Output current detection signal retention time 0 to 10 s, 9999 0.1 s 0.1 s 487
167 M464 Output current detection operation selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 487
168 E000
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. E080
169 E001 E081
C um
ul at
iv e
m on
ito r 170 M020 Watt-hour meter clear 0, 10, 9999 1 9999 446
171 M030 Operation hour meter clear 0, 9999 1 9999 446
U se
r g ro
up 172 E441 User group registered display/batch clear 9999, (0 to 16) 1 0 354
173 E442 User group registration 0 to 1999, 9999 1 9999 354 174 E443 User group clear 0 to 1999, 9999 1 9999 354
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
Simple
1735. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
17
In pu
t t er
m in
al fu
nc tio
n as
si gn
m en
t
178 T700 STF terminal function selection
0 to 20, 22 to 28, 32, 37, 42 to 48, 50 to 53, 57 to 60, 62, 64 to 74, 76 to 80, 85, 87 to 89, 92 to 96, 128, 129, 9999
1 60 521
179 T701 STR terminal function selection
0 to 20, 22 to 28, 32, 37, 42 to 48, 50 to 53, 57 to 59, 61, 62, 64 to 74, 76 to 80, 85, 87 to 89, 92 to 96, 128, 129, 9999
1 61 521
180 T702 RL terminal function selection
0 to 20, 22 to 28, 32, 37, 42 to 48, 50 to 53, 57 to 59, 62, 64 to 74, 76 to 80, 85, 87 to 89, 92 to 96, 128, 129, 9999
1 0 521
181 T703 RM terminal function selection 1 1 521
182 T704 RH terminal function selection 1 2 521
183 T705 RT terminal function selection 1 3 521
184 T706 AU terminal function selection 1 4 521
185 T707 JOG terminal function selection 1 5 521
186 T708 CS terminal function selection 1 6 521
187 T709 MRS terminal function selection 1
24*11*13 521
10*12
188 T710 STOP terminal function selection 1 25 521
189 T711 RES terminal function selection 1 62 521
O ut
pu t t
er m
in al
fu nc
tio n
as si
gn m
en t
190 M400 RUN terminal function selection
0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to 57, 60, 61, 63, 64, 67, 68, 70, 79, 80, 84, 85, 90 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 120, 122, 125 to 128, 130 to 136, 138 to 157, 160, 161, 163, 164, 167, 168, 170, 179, 180, 184, 185, 190 to 199, 200 to 208, 211 to 213, 247, 300 to 308, 311 to 313, 347, 9999
1 0 473
191 M401 SU terminal function selection 1 1 473
192 M402 IPF terminal function selection 1
2*11*13 473
9999*12
193 M403 OL terminal function selection 1 3 473
194 M404 FU terminal function selection 1 4 473
195 M405 ABC1 terminal function selection
0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to 57, 60, 61, 63, 64, 67, 68, 70, 79, 80, 84, 85, 90, 91, 94 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 120, 122, 125 to 128, 130 to 136, 138 to 157, 160, 161, 163, 164, 167, 168, 170, 179, 180, 184, 185, 190, 191, 194 to 199, 200 to 208, 211 to 213, 247, 300 to 308, 311 to 313, 347, 9999
1 99 473
196 M406 ABC2 terminal function selection 1 9999 473
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M ul
ti- sp
ee d
se tti
ng
232 to 239
D308 to D315
Multi-speed setting (speed 8 to speed 15) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 411
240 E601 Soft-PWM operation selection 0, 1 1 1 356
241 M043 Analog input display unit switchover 0, 1 1 0 505
242 T021 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 2)
0 to 100% 0.1% 100% 501
243 T041 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 4)
0 to 100% 0.1% 75% 501
244
Cooling fan operation selection
0, 1, 101 to 105, 1000, 1001, 1101 to 1105 1 1
423H100 Cooling fan operation selection 0, 1, 101 to 105 1 1
H106 Cooling fan operation selection during the test operation
0, 1 1 0
Sl ip
c om
pe ns
at io
n 245 G203 Rated slip 0 to 50%, 9999 0.01% 9999 736
246 G204 Slip compensation time constant 0.01 to 10 s 0.01 s 0.5 s 736
247 G205 Constant output range slip compensation selection 0, 9999 1 9999 736
248 A006 Self power management selection 0 to 2 1 0 569
249 H101 Earth (ground) fault detection at start 0, 1 1 0 425
250 G106 Stop selection 0 to 100 s, 1000 to 1100 s, 8888, 9999 0.1s 9999 722
251 H200 Output phase loss protection selection 0, 1 1 1 426
Fr eq
ue nc
y co
m pe
ns at
io n 252 T050 Override bias 0 to 200% 0.1% 50% 501
253 T051 Override gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 501
254 A007 Main circuit power OFF waiting time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 1 s 600 s 569
Li fe
c he
ck
255 E700 Life alarm status display (0 to 255) 1 0 359
256*15 E701 Inrush current limit circuit life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 359
257 E702 Control circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 359
258*15 E703 Main circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 359
259*15 E704 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 0, 1, 11 1 0 359
260 E602 PWM frequency automatic switchover 0, 1 1 1 356
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
1755. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
17
Po w
er fa
ilu re
s to
p
261 A730 Power failure stop selection 0 to 2, 11, 12, 21, 22 1 0 642
262 A731 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 0 to 20 Hz 0.01 Hz 3 Hz 642
263 A732 Subtraction starting frequency 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 642
264 A733 Power-failure deceleration time 1 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5 s 642
265 A734 Power-failure deceleration time 2 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 642
266 A735 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 642
267 T001 Terminal 4 input selection 0 to 2 1 0 496
268 M022 Monitor decimal digits selection 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 446
269 E023 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
270 A200 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection
0 to 3, 11 to 13 1 0 577, 580
Lo ad
to rq
ue h
ig h-
sp ee
d fr
eq ue
nc y
co nt
ro l
271 A201 High-speed setting maximum current 0 to 400% 0.1% 50% 580
272 A202 Middle-speed setting minimum current 0 to 400% 0.1% 100% 580
273 A203 Current averaging range 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 580
274 A204 Current averaging filter time constant 1 to 4000 1 16 580
St op
-o n-
co nt
ac t
co nt
ro l 275 A205
Stop-on contact excitation current low-speed scaling factor
0 to 300%, 9999 0.1% 9999 577
276 A206 PWM carrier frequency at stop-on contact
0 to 9, 9999*2
1 9999 577 0 to 4, 9999*3
B ra
ke s
eq ue
nc e
278 A100 Brake opening frequency 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz. 3 Hz 572 279 A101 Brake opening current 0 to 400% 0.1% 130% 572
280 A102 Brake opening current detection time 0 to 2 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 572
281 A103 Brake operation time at start 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 572 282 A104 Brake operation frequency 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz. 6 Hz 572 283 A105 Brake operation time at stop 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 572
284 A106 Deceleration detection function selection 0, 1 1 0 572
285 A107 Overspeed detection
frequency 0 to 30 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz. 9999
269, 572, 736H416 Speed deviation excess
detection frequency
D ro
op c
on tr
ol 286 G400 Droop gain 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 738 287 G401 Droop filter time constant 0 to 1 s 0.01 s 0.3 s 738
288 G402 Droop function activation selection 0 to 2, 10, 11, 20 to 22 1 0 738
289 M431 Inverter output terminal filter 5 to 50 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 473
290 M044 Monitor negative output selection 0 to 7 1 0 446,
457
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
291 D100 Pulse train I/O selection [FM type] 0, 1, 10, 11, 20, 21, 100 1 0 406,
457 [CA type] 0, 1
292 A110 Automatic acceleration/
deceleration 0, 1, 3, 5 to 8, 11 1 0 384, 387, 572F500
293 F513 Acceleration/deceleration separate selection 0 to 2 1 0 384
294 A785 UV avoidance voltage gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 642
295 E201 Frequency change increment amount setting 0, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 0.01 0 342
Pa ss
w or
d 296 E410 Password lock level 0 to 6, 99, 100 to 106, 199, 9999 1 9999 348
297 E411 Password lock/unlock (0 to 5), 1000 to 9998, 9999 1 9999 348
298 A711 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1 9999 532, 638
299 A701 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting 0, 1, 9999 1 0 628
C C
-L in
k IE
313*17 M410 DO0 output selection 0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to 57, 60, 61, 63, 64, 68, 70, 79, 80, 84 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 120, 122, 125 to 128, 130 to 136, 138 to 157, 160, 161, 163, 164, 168, 170, 179, 180, 184 to 199, 200 to 208, 211 to 213, 247, 248, 300 to 308, 311 to 313, 347, 348, 9999
1 9999 473
314*17 M411 DO1 output selection 1 9999 473
315*17 M412 DO2 output selection 1 9999 473
316*16 M413 DO3 output selection 1 9999 473
317*16 M414 DO4 output selection 1 9999 473
318*16 M415 DO5 output selection 1 9999 473
319*16 M416 DO6 output selection 1 9999 473
320*16 M420 RA1 output selection 0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to 57, 60, 61, 63, 64, 68, 70, 79, 80, 84 to 91, 94 to 99, 200 to 208, 211 to 213, 247, 248, 9999
1 9999 473
321*16 M421 RA2 output selection 1 9999 473
322*16 M422 RA3 output selection 1 9999 473
328 E310 Inverter/converter switching 0 to 9999 1 0 *18
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
Simple
1775. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
17
R S-
48 5
co m
m un
ic at
io n
331 N030 RS-485 communication station number 0 to 31 (0 to 247) 1 0 670
332 N031 RS-485 communication speed
3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96, 192, 384, 576, 768, 1152
1 96 670
333
RS-485 communication stop bit length / data length 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1
670N032 RS-485 communication data length 0, 1 1 0
N033 RS-485 communication stop bit length 0, 1 1 1
334 N034 RS-485 communication parity check selection 0 to 2 1 2 670
335 N035 RS-485 communication retry count 0 to 10, 9999 1 1 670
336 N036 RS-485 communication check time interval 0 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 0 s 670
337 N037 RS-485 communication waiting time setting 0 to 150 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 670
338 D010 Communication operation command source 0, 1 1 0 400
339 D011 Communication speed command source 0 to 2 1 0 400
340 D001 Communication startup mode selection 0 to 2, 10, 12 1 0 398
341 N038 RS-485 communication CR/ LF selection 0 to 2 1 1 670
342 N001 Communication EEPROM write selection 0, 1 1 0 663
343 N080 Communication error count 1 0 686
349*17
Communication reset selection/Ready bit status selection
0, 1, 100, 101, 1000, 1001, 1100, 1101, 10000, 10001, 10100, 10101, 11000, 11001, 11100, 11101
1 0 663
N010 Communication reset selection 0, 1 1 0 663
N240 Ready bit status selection 0, 1 1 0 663
N241 Reset selection after inverter faults are cleared 0, 1 1 0 893
N242 DriveControl writing restriction selection 0, 1 1 0 893
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
O rie
nt at
io n
co nt
ro l
350*9 A510 Stop position command selection 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 585
351*9 A526 Orientation speed 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz. 2 Hz 585
352*9 A527 Creep speed 0 to 10 Hz 0.01 Hz. 0.5 Hz 585
353*9 A528 Creep switchover position 0 to 16383 1 511 585
354*9 A529 Position loop switchover position 0 to 8191 1 96 585
355*9 A530 DC injection brake start position 0 to 255 1 5 585
356*9 A531 Internal stop position command 0 to 16383 1 0 585
357*9 A532 Orientation in-position zone 0 to 255 1 5 585
358*9 A533 Servo torque selection 0 to 13 1 1 585
359*9 C141 Encoder rotation direction 0, 1, 100, 101 1 1 94, 585, 736
360*9 A511 16-bit data selection 0 to 127 1 0 585
361*9 A512 Position shift 0 to 16383 1 0 585
362*9 A520 Orientation position loop gain 0.1 to 100 0, 1 1.0 585
363*9 A521 Completion signal output delay time 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 585
364*9 A522 Encoder stop check time 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 585
365*9 A523 Orientation limit 0 to 60 s, 9999 1 s 9999 585
366*9 A524 Recheck time 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 585
En co
de r f
ee db
ac k 367*9 G240 Speed feedback range 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 736
368*9 G241 Feedback gain 0 to 100 0.1 1 736
369*9 C140 Number of encoder pulses 0 to 4096 1 1024 94, 585, 736
373 C142 Encoder position tuning setting/status 0, 1 1 0 542
374 H800 Overspeed detection level 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 443
376*9 C148 Encoder signal loss detection enable/disable selection
0, 1 1 0 561
S- pa
tte rn
a cc
el er
at io
n/ de
ce le
ra tio
n C 380 F300 Acceleration S-pattern 1 0 to 50% 1% 0% 372
381 F301 Deceleration S-pattern 1 0 to 50% 1% 0% 372 382 F302 Acceleration S-pattern 2 0 to 50% 1% 0% 372
383 F303 Deceleration S-pattern 2 0 to 50% 1% 0% 372
Pu ls
e tr
ai n
in pu
t
384 D101 Input pulse division scaling factor 0 to 250 1 0 406
385 D110 Frequency for zero input pulse 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 406
386 D111 Frequency for maximum input pulse 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 406
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
1795. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
18
O rie
nt at
io n
co nt
ro l
393*9 A525 Orientation selection 0 to 2, 10 to 12 1 0 585
394*9 A540 Number of machine side gear teeth 0 to 32767 1 1 585
395*9 A541 Number of motor side gear teeth 0 to 32767 1 1 585
396*9 A542 Orientation speed gain (P term) 0 to 1000 1 60 585
397*9 A543 Orientation speed integral time 0 to 20 s 0.001 s 0.333 s 585
398*9 A544 Orientation speed gain (D term) 0 to 100 0.1 1 585
399*9 A545 Orientation deceleration ratio 0 to 1000 1 20 585
413*9 M601 Encoder pulse division ratio 1 to 32767 1 1 495
PL C
414 A800 PLC function operation selection 0 to 2, 11, 12 1 0 646
415 A801 Inverter operation lock mode setting 0, 1 1 0 646
416 A802 Pre-scale function selection 0 to 5 1 0 646 417 A803 Pre-scale setting value 0 to 32767 1 1 646
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
419 B000 Position command source selection
0 to 2, 10, 100, 110, 200, 210, 300, 310, 1110, 1310
1 0 303, 319
420 B001 Command pulse scaling factor numerator (electronic gear numerator)
1 to 32767 1 1 325
421 B002
Command pulse multiplication denominator (electronic gear denominator)
1 to 32767 1 1 325
422 B003 Position control gain 0 to 150 s-1 1 s-1 25 s-1 328 423 B004 Position feed forward gain 0 to 100% 1% 0% 328
424 B005 Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant
0 to 50 s 0.001s 0 s 325
425 B006 Position feed forward command filter 0 to 5 s 0.001 s 0 s 328
426 B007 In-position width 0 to 32767 pulses 1 pulse 100 pulses 327 427 B008 Excessive level error 0 to 400k pulses, 9999 1k pulses 40k pulses 327 428 B009 Command pulse selection 0 to 5 1 0 319 429 B010 Clear signal selection 0, 1 1 1 320
430 B011 Pulse monitor selection
0 to 5, 12, 13, 100 to 105, 112, 113, 1000 to 1005, 1012, 1013, 1100 to 1105, 1112, 1113, 2000 to 2005, 2012, 2013, 2100 to 2105, 2112, 2113, 3000 to 3005, 3012, 3013, 3100 to 3105, 3112, 3113, 8888, 9999
1 9999 321
432*9 D120 Pulse train torque command bias 0 to 400% 1% 0% 283
433*9 D121 Pulse train torque command gain 0 to 400% 1% 150% 283
C C
-L in
k IE 434*17 N110 Network number (CC-Link IE) 0 to 255 1 0 699
435*17 N111 Station number (CC-Link IE) 0 to 255 1 0 699
446 B012 Model position control gain 0 to 150 s-1 1 s-1 25 s-1 328
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Se co
nd m
ot or
c on
st an
t
450 C200 Second applied motor
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 8090, 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094, 9999
1 9999 528
451 G300 Second motor control method selection
0 to 6, 10 to 14, 20, 100 to 106, 110 to 114, 9999
1 9999 221
453 C201 Second motor capacity 0.4 to 55 kW, 9999*2 0.01 kW*2
9999 532, 5510 to 3600 kW, 9999*3 0.1 kW*3
454 C202 Number of second motor poles 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 9999 1 9999 532,
551
455 C225 Second motor excitation current
0 to 500 A, 9999*2 0.01 A*2 9999 532
0 to 3600 A, 9999*3 0.1 A*3
456 C204 Rated second motor voltage 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 200 V*7 532,
551400 V*8
457 C205 Rated second motor frequency 10 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 532,
551
458 C220 Second motor constant (R1) 0 to 50 , 9999*2 0.001*2
9999 532, 551, 6380 to 400 m, 9999*3 0.01m*3
459 C221 Second motor constant (R2) 0 to 50 , 9999*2 0.001*2
9999 532 0 to 400 m, 9999*3 0.01m*3
460 C222 Second motor constant (L1) / d-axis inductance (Ld)
0 to 6000 mH, 9999*2 0.1mH*2 9999 532,
5510 to 400 mH, 9999*3 0.01mH*3
461 C223 Second motor constant (L2) / q-axis inductance (Lq)
0 to 6000 mH, 9999*2 0.1mH*2 9999 532,
5510 to 400 mH, 9999*3 0.01mH*3
462 C224 Second motor constant (X) 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1%*2
9999 532 0.01%*3
463 C210 Second motor auto tuning setting/status 0, 1, 11, 101 1 0
532, 551, 638
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
1815. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
18
Si m
pl e
po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
464 B020 Digital position control sudden stop deceleration time
0 to 360 s 0.1 s 0 s 303
465 B021 First target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
466 B022 First target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
467 B023 Second target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
468 B024 Second target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
469 B025 Third target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
470 B026 Third target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
471 B027 Fourth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
472 B028 Fourth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
473 B029 Fifth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
474 B030 Fifth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
475 B031 Sixth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
476 B032 Sixth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
477 B033 Seventh target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
478 B034 Seventh target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
479 B035 Eighth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
480 B036 Eighth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
481 B037 Ninth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
482 B038 Ninth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
483 B039 Tenth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
484 B040 Tenth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
485 B041 Eleventh target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
486 B042 Eleventh target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
487 B043 Twelfth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
488 B044 Twelfth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
489 B045 Thirteenth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
490 B046 Thirteenth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
491 B047 Fourteenth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
492 B048 Fourteenth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
493 B049 Fifteenth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
494 B050 Fifteenth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R em
ot e
ou tp
ut 495 M500 Remote output selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 489 496 M501 Remote output data 1 0 to 4095 1 0 489 497 M502 Remote output data 2 0 to 4095 1 0 489
498 A804 PLC function flash memory clear 0, 9696 (0 to 9999) 1 0 646
500*17 N011 Communication error execution waiting time 0 to 999.8 s 0.1 s 0 s 663
501*17 N012 Communication error occurrence count display 0 1 0 663
502 N013 Stop mode selection at communication error 0 to 4, 11, 12 1 0 663
M ai
nt en
an ce 503 E710 Maintenance timer 1 0 (1 to 9998) 1 0 363
504 E711 Maintenance timer 1 warning output set time 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999 363
505 M001 Speed setting reference 1 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 444
506*15 E705 Display estimated main circuit capacitor residual life (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 359
507 E706 Display/reset ABC1 relay contact life 0 to 100% 1% 100% 359
508 E707 Display/reset ABC2 relay contact life 0 to 100% 1% 100% 359
S- pa
tte rn
a cc
el er
at io
n/ de
ce le
ra tio
n D 516 F400 S-pattern time at a start of
acceleration 0.1 to 2.5 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 372
517 F401 S-pattern time at a completion of acceleration 0.1 to 2.5 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 372
518 F402 S-pattern time at a start of deceleration 0.1 to 2.5 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 372
519 F403 S-pattern time at a completion of deceleration 0.1 to 2.5 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 372
522 G105 Output stop frequency 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 720
539 N002 MODBUS RTU communication check time interval
0 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 686
541*17 N100 Frequency command sign selection 0, 1 1 0 699
U SB
547 N040 USB communication station number 0 to 31 1 0 701
548 N041 USB communication check time interval 0 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 701
C om
m un
ic at
io n 549 N000 Protocol selection 0, 1 1 0 663
550 D012 NET mode operation command source selection 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 400
551 D013 PU mode operation command source selection 1 to 3, 9999 1 9999 400
552 H429 Frequency jump range 0 to 30 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 429
PI D
c on
tr ol 553 A603 PID deviation limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 601
554 A604 PID signal operation selection 0 to 3, 10 to 13 1 0 601
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
1835. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
18
A ve
ra ge
c ur
re nt
m on
ito rin
g 555 E720 Current average time 0.1 to 1 s 0.1 s 1 s 363 556 E721 Data output mask time 0 to 20 s 0.1 s 0 s 363
557 E722 Current average value monitor signal output reference current
0 to 500 A*2 0.01 A*2
Inverter rated current 363
0 to 3600 A*3 0.1 A*3
560 A712 Second frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1 9999 532,
638
561 H020 PTC thermistor protection level 0.5 to 30 k, 9999 0.01 k 9999 415
563 M021 Energization time carrying- over times (0 to 65535) 1 0 446
564 M031 Operating time carrying-over times (0 to 65535) 1 0 446
565 G301 Second motor excitation current break point 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 711
566 G302 Second motor excitation current low-speed scaling factor
0 to 300%, 9999 0.1% 9999 711
Se co
nd m
ot or
c on
st an
t
569 G942 Second motor speed control gain 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 228
M ul
tip le
ra tin
g
570 E301 Multiple rating setting
0 to 3*11*12
1 2 343 1, 2*13
571 F103 Holding time at a start 0 to 10 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 381
573 A680
4 mA input check selection 1 to 4, 11 to 14, 21 to 24, 9999 1 9999 517
T052
574 C211 Second motor online auto tuning 0 to 2 1 0 558
PI D
c on
tr ol 575 A621 Output interruption detection
time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1 s 601
576 A622 Output interruption detection level 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 601
577 A623 Output interruption cancel level 900 to 1100% 0.1% 1000% 601
Tr av
er se
592 A300 Traverse function selection 0 to 2 1 0 582 593 A301 Maximum amplitude amount 0 to 25% 0.1% 10% 582
594 A302 Amplitude compensation amount during deceleration 0 to 50% 0.1% 10% 582
595 A303 Amplitude compensation amount during acceleration 0 to 50% 0.1% 10% 582
596 A304 Amplitude acceleration time 0.1 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5 s 582 597 A305 Amplitude deceleration time 0.1 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5 s 582
598 H102 Undervoltage level 175 to 215 VDC*7/350 to 430 VDC*8, 9999
0.1 V 9999 425
599 T721 X10 terminal input selection 0, 1 1 0*11*13
724 1*12
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
El ec
tr on
ic th
er m
al O
/L re
la y 600 H001 First free thermal reduction
frequency 1 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 415
601 H002 First free thermal reduction ratio 1 1 to 100% 1% 100% 415
602 H003 First free thermal reduction frequency 2 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 415
603 H004 First free thermal reduction ratio 2 1 to 100% 1% 100% 415
604 H005 First free thermal reduction frequency 3 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 415
606 T722 Power failure stop external signal input selection 0, 1 1 1 642
607 H006 Motor permissible load level 110 to 250% 1% 150% 415
608 H016 Second motor permissible load level 110 to 250%, 9999 1% 9999 415
PI D
c on
tr ol 609 A624 PID set point/deviation input
selection 1 to 5 1 2 601, 622
610 A625 PID measured value input selection 1 to 5 1 3 601,
622
611 F003 Acceleration time at a restart 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 628, 635
617 G080 Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor
0 to 300%, 9999 0.1% 9999 711
C um
ul at
iv e
pu ls
e m
on ito
rin g
635*9 M610 Cumulative pulse clear signal selection 0 to 3 1 0 321
636*9 M611 Cumulative pulse division scaling factor 1 to 16384 1 1 321
637*9 M612 Control terminal option- Cumulative pulse division scaling factor
1 to 16384 1 1 321
638*9 M613 Cumulative pulse storage 0 to 3 1 0 321
B ra
ke s
eq ue
nc e
639 A108 Brake opening current selection 0, 1 1 0 572
640 A109 Brake operation frequency selection 0, 1 1 0 572
641 A130 Second brake sequence operation selection 0, 7, 8, 9999 1 0 572
642 A120 Second brake opening frequency 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz. 3 Hz 572
643 A121 Second brake opening current 0 to 400% 0.1% 130% 572
644 A122 Second brake opening current detection time 0 to 2 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 572
645 A123 Second brake operation time at start 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 572
646 A124 Second brake operation frequency 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz. 6 Hz 572
647 A125 Second brake operation time at stop 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 572
648 A126 Second deceleration detection function selection 0, 1 1 0 572
650 A128 Second brake opening current selection 0, 1 1 0 572
651 A129 Second brake operation frequency selection 0, 1 1 0 572
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
1855. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
18
Sp ee
d sm
oo th
in g
co nt
ro l 653 G410 Speed smoothing control 0 to 200% 0.1% 0% 741
654 G411 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 20 Hz 741
A na
lo g
re m
ot e
ou tp
ut 655 M530 Analog remote output selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 490
656 M531 Analog remote output 1 800 to 1200% 0.1% 1000% 490 657 M532 Analog remote output 2 800 to 1200% 0.1% 1000% 490 658 M533 Analog remote output 3 800 to 1200% 0.1% 1000% 490
659 M534 Analog remote output 4 800 to 1200% 0.1% 1000% 490
In cr
ea se
d m
ag ne
tic ex
ci ta
tio n
de ce
le ra
tio n
660 G130 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation selection
0, 1 1 0 735
661 G131 Magnetic excitation increase rate 0 to 40%, 9999 0.1% 9999 735
662 G132 Increased magnetic excitation current level 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 735
663 M060 Control circuit temperature signal output level 0 to 100C 1C 0C 494
665 G125 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 732
668 A786 Power failure stop frequency gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 642
673 G060 SF-PR slip amount adjustment operation selection
2 to 4, 6, 9999 1 9999 714
674 G061 SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain 0 to 500% 0.1% 100% 714
675 A805 User parameter auto storage function selection 1, 9999 1 9999 646
Se co
nd d
ro op
c on
tr ol
679 G420 Second droop gain 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 738
680 G421 Second droop filter time constant 0 to 1 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 738
681 G422 Second droop function activation selection
0 to 2, 10, 11, 20 to 22, 9999 1 9999 738
682 G423 Second droop break point gain 0.1 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 738
683 G424 Second droop break point torque 0.1 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 738
684 C000 Tuning data unit switchover 0, 1 1 0 532, 551
M ai
nt en
an ce
686 E712 Maintenance timer 2 0 (1 to 9998) 1 0 363
687 E713 Maintenance timer 2 warning output set time 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999 363
688 E714 Maintenance timer 3 0 (1 to 9998) 1 0 363
689 E715 Maintenance timer 3 warning output set time 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999 363
690 H881 Deceleration check time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1 s 269
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
El ec
tr on
ic th
er m
al O
/L re
la y 692 H011 Second free thermal
reduction frequency 1 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 415
693 H012 Second free thermal reduction ratio 1 1 to 100% 1% 100% 415
694 H013 Second free thermal reduction frequency 2 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 415
695 H014 Second free thermal reduction ratio 2 1 to 100% 1% 100% 415
696 H015 Second free thermal reduction frequency 3 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 415
699 T740 Input terminal filter 5 to 50 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 521
M ot
or c
on st
an t
702 C106 Maximum motor frequency 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 551
706 C130 Induced voltage constant (phi f)
0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 9999
0.1 mV (rad/s) 9999 551
707 C107 Motor inertia (integer) 10 to 999, 9999 1 9999 551 711 C131 Motor Ld decay ratio 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551 712 C132 Motor Lq decay ratio 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551
717 C182 Starting resistance tuning compensation 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551
721 C185 Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width
0 to 6000 s, 10000 to 16000 s, 9999 1 s 9999 551
724 C108 Motor inertia (exponent) 0 to 7, 9999 1 9999 551
725 C133 Motor protection current level 100 to 500%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551
738 C230 Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f)
0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 9999
0.1 mV (rad/s) 9999 551
739 C231 Second motor Ld decay ratio 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551 740 C232 Second motor Lq decay ratio 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551
741 C282 Second starting resistance tuning compensation 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551
742 C285 Second motor magnetic pole detection pulse width
0 to 6000 s, 10000 to 16000 s, 9999 1 s 9999 551
743 C206 Second motor maximum frequency 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 551
744 C207 Second motor inertia (integer) 10 to 999, 9999 1 9999 551
745 C208 Second motor inertia (exponent) 0 to 7, 9999 1 9999 551
746 C233 Second motor protection current level 100 to 500%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551
747 G350 Second motor low-speed range torque characteristic selection
0, 9999 1 9999 233
PI D
c on
tr ol
753 A650 Second PID action selection
0, 10, 11, 20, 21, 50, 51, 60, 61, 70, 71, 80, 81, 90, 91, 100, 101, 1000, 1001, 1010, 1011, 2000, 2001, 2010, 2011
1 0 601
754 A652 Second PID control automatic switchover frequency
0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 601
755 A651 Second PID action set point 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 601
756 A653 Second PID proportional band 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1% 100% 601
757 A654 Second PID integral time 0.1 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1 s 601 758 A655 Second PID differential time 0.01 to 10 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 601 759 A600 PID unit selection 0 to 43, 9999 1 9999 615
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
1875. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
18
PI D
P re
-c ha
rg e
760 A616 Pre-charge fault selection 0, 1 1 0 618 761 A617 Pre-charge ending level 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 618 762 A618 Pre-charge ending time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 618
763 A619 Pre-charge upper detection level 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 618
764 A620 Pre-charge time limit 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 618
765 A656 Second pre-charge fault selection 0, 1 1 0 618
766 A657 Second pre-charge ending level 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 618
767 A658 Second pre-charge ending time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 618
768 A659 Second pre-charge upper detection level 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 618
769 A660 Second pre-charge time limit 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 618
M on
ito rin
g 774 M101 Operation panel monitor selection 1 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17 to 20,
22 to 36, 38 to 46, 50 to 57, 61, 62, 64, 67, 71 to 75, 87 to 98, 100, 9999
1 9999 446
775 M102 Operation panel monitor selection 2 1 9999 446
776 M103 Operation panel monitor selection 3 1 9999 446
777 A681 4 mA input fault operation
frequency 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 517 T053
778 A682
4 mA input check filter 0 to 10 s 0.01 s 0 s 517 T054
779 N014 Operation frequency during communication error 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 663
788 G250 Low speed range torque characteristic selection 0, 9999 1 9999 233
791 F070 Acceleration time in low- speed range 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 367
792 F071 Deceleration time in low- speed range 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 367
799 M520 Pulse increment setting for output power
0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000 kWh 0.1 kWh 1 kWh 493
800 G200 Control method selection 0 to 6, 9 to 14, 20, 100 to 106, 109 to 114 1 20 221
801 H704 Output limit level 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 245, 283
802 G102 Pre-excitation selection 0, 1 1 0 715
To rq
ue c
om m
an d 803 G210
Constant output range torque characteristic selection
0 to 2, 10, 11 1 0 245, 283
804 D400 Torque command source selection 0 to 6 1 0 283
805 D401 Torque command value (RAM) 600 to 1400% 1% 1000% 283
806 D402 Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM) 600 to 1400% 1% 1000% 283
Sp ee
d lim
it 807 H410 Speed limit selection 0 to 2 1 0 287
808 H411 Forward rotation speed limit/ speed limit 0 to 400 Hz 0.01 Hz. 60 Hz 50 Hz 287
809 H412 Reverse rotation speed limit/ reverse-side speed limit 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 287
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
To rq
ue li
m it
810 H700 Torque limit input method selection 0 to 2 1 0 245
811 D030 Set resolution switchover 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 245, 444
812 H701 Torque limit level (regeneration) 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 245
813 H702 Torque limit level (3rd quadrant) 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 245
814 H703 Torque limit level (4th quadrant) 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 245
815 H710 Torque limit level 2 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 245
816 H720 Torque limit level during acceleration 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 245
817 H721 Torque limit level during deceleration 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 245
Ea sy
g ai
n tu
ni ng 818 C112 Easy gain tuning response
level setting 1 to 15 1 2 254
819 C113 Easy gain tuning selection 0 to 2 1 0 254
A dj
us tm
en t
820 G211 Speed control P gain 1 0 to 1000% 1% 60% 254 821 G212 Speed control integral time 1 0 to 20 s 0.001 s 0.333 s 254 822 T003 Speed setting filter 1 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 503
823*9 G215 Speed detection filter 1 0 to 0.1 s 0.001 s 0.001 s 332
824 G213 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain)
0 to 500% 1% 100% 294, 333
825 G214 Torque control integral time 1 (current loop integral time) 0 to 500 ms 0.1 ms 5 ms 294,
333 826 T004 Torque setting filter 1 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 503 827 G216 Torque detection filter 1 0 to 0.1 s 0.001 s 0 s 332
828 G224 Model speed control gain 0 to 1000% 1% 60% 263, 328
829*9 A546 Number of machine end encoder pulses 0 to 4096, 9999 1 9999 585
830 G311 Speed control P gain 2 0 to 1000%, 9999 1% 9999 254 831 G312 Speed control integral time 2 0 to 20 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 254 832 T005 Speed setting filter 2 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 503
833*9 G315 Speed detection filter 2 0 to 0.1 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 332
834 G313 Torque control P gain 2 (current loop proportional gain)
0 to 500%, 9999 1% 9999 294
835 G314 Torque control integral time 2 (current loop integral time) 0 to 500 ms, 9999 0.1 ms 9999 294
836 T006 Torque setting filter 2 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 503 837 G316 Torque detection filter 2 0 to 0.1 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 332
To rq
ue b
ia s
840 G230 Torque bias selection 0 to 3, 24, 25, 9999 1 9999 265 841 G231 Torque bias 1 600 to 1400%, 9999 1% 9999 265 842 G232 Torque bias 2 600 to 1400%, 9999 1% 9999 265 843 G233 Torque bias 3 600 to 1400%, 9999 1% 9999 265 844 G234 Torque bias filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 265 845 G235 Torque bias operation time 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 265
846 G236 Torque bias balance compensation 0 to 10 V, 9999 0.1 V 9999 265
847 G237 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias 0 to 400%, 9999 1% 9999 265
848 G238 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 gain 0 to 400%, 9999 1% 9999 265
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
1895. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
19
A dd
iti on
al fu
nc tio
n
849 T007 Analog input offset adjustment 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 503
850 G103 Brake operation selection 0 to 2 1 0 715
851*9 C240 Control terminal option- Number of encoder pulses 0 to 4096 1 2048 94
852*9 C241 Control terminal option- Encoder rotation direction 0, 1, 100, 101 1 1 94
853*9 H417 Speed deviation time 0 to 100 s 0.1 s 1 s 269 854 G217 Excitation ratio 0 to 100% 1% 100% 332
855*9 C248 Control terminal option- Signal loss detection enable/ disable selection
0, 1 1 0 561
858 T040 Terminal 4 function assignment 0, 1, 4, 9999 1 0
245, 431, 500
859 C126 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
0 to 500 A, 9999*2 0.01 A*2 9999 532,
5510 to 3600 A, 9999*3 0.1 A*3
860 C226 Second motor torque current/Rated PM motor current
0 to 500 A, 9999*2 0.01 A*2
9999 532, 5510 to 3600 A, 9999*3 0.1 A*3
862*9 C242 Encoder option selection 0, 1 1 0 226
863*9 M600 Control terminal option- Encoder pulse division ratio 1 to 32767 1 1 495
864 M470 Torque detection 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 488 865 M446 Low speed detection 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 1.5 Hz 484
In di
ca tio
n
866 M042 Torque monitoring reference 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 457
867 M321 AM output filter 0 to 5 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 463
868 T010 Terminal 1 function assignment 0 to 6, 9999 1 0
245, 431, 500
869 M334 Current output filter 0 to 5 s 0.01 s 0.02 s 463
870 M440 Speed detection hysteresis 0 to 5 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 484
871*9 C243 Control terminal option Encoder position tuning setting/status
0, 1 1 0 542
Pr ot
ec tiv
e fu
nc tio
n 872*15 H201 Input phase loss protection selection 0, 1 1 0 426
873*9 H415 Speed limit 0 to 400 Hz 0.01 Hz. 20 Hz 269 874 H730 OLT level setting 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 245 875 H030 Fault definition 0, 1 1 0 422
876*9 H022 Thermal protector input 0, 1 1 1 415
C on
tr ol
s ys
te m
877 G220 Speed feed forward control/ model adaptive speed control selection
0 to 2 1 0 263, 328
878 G221 Speed feed forward filter 0 to 1 s 0.01 s 0 s 263
879 G222 Speed feed forward torque limit 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 263
880 C114 Load inertia ratio 0 to 200 times 0.1 times 7 times 254, 263, 328
881 G223 Speed feed forward gain 0 to 1000% 1% 0% 263
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R eg
en er
at io
n av
oi da
nc e
882 G120 Regeneration avoidance operation selection 0 to 2 1 0 732
883 G121 Regeneration avoidance operation level 300 to 1200 V 0.1 V
DC380V*7 732
DC760V*8
884 G122 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity
0 to 5 1 0 732
885 G123 Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value
0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 732
886 G124 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 732
887*9 C244 Control terminal option Encoder magnetic pole position offset
0 to 16383, 65535 1 65535 542
Fr ee
p ar
am et
er 888 E420 Free parameter 1 0 to 9999 1 9999 350
889 E421 Free parameter 2 0 to 9999 1 9999 350
En er
gy s
av in
g m
on ito
rin g
891 M023 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times 0 to 4, 9999 1 9999 446,
467 892 M200 Load factor 30 to 150% 0.1% 100% 467
893 M201 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity)
0.1 to 55 kW*2 0.01 kW*2 Inverter rated capacity 467
0 to 3600 kW*3 0.1 kW*3
894 M202 Control selection during commercial power-supply operation
0 to 3 1 0 467
895 M203 Power saving rate reference value 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 467
896 M204 Power unit cost 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 467
897 M205 Power saving monitor average time 0 to 1000 h, 9999 1 h 9999 467
898 M206 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 0, 1, 10, 9999 1 9999 467
899 M207 Operation time rate (estimated value) 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 467
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
1915. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
19
C al
ib ra
tio n
pa ra
m et
er
C0 (900)*10 M310 FM/CA terminal calibration 463
C1 (901)*10 M320 AM terminal calibration 463
C2 (902)*10 T200 Terminal 2 frequency setting
bias frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 505
C3 (902)*10 T201 Terminal 2 frequency setting
bias 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 505
125 (903)*10 T202 Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 505
C4 (903)*10 T203 Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 505
C5 (904)*10 T400 Terminal 4 frequency setting
bias frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 505
C6 (904)*10 T401 Terminal 4 frequency setting
bias 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 505
126 (905)*10 T402 Terminal 4 frequency setting
gain frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 505
C7 (905)*10 T403 Terminal 4 frequency setting
gain 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 505
C12 (917)*10 T100 Terminal 1 bias frequency
(speed) 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 505
C13 (917)*10 T101 Terminal 1 bias (speed) 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 505
C14 (918)*10 T102 Terminal 1 gain frequency
(speed) 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 505
C15 (918)*10 T103 Terminal 1 gain (speed) 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 505
C16 (919)*10 T110 Terminal 1 bias command
(torque/magnetic flux) 0 to 400% 0.1% 0% 510
C17 (919)*10 T111 Terminal 1 bias (torque/
magnetic flux) 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 510
C18 (920)*10 T112 Terminal 1 gain command
(torque/magnetic flux) 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 510
C19 (920)*10 T113 Terminal 1 gain (torque/
magnetic flux) 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 510
C8 (930)*10 M330 Current output bias signal 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 463
C9 (930)*10 M331 Current output bias current 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 463
C10 (931)*10 M332 Current output gain signal 0 to 100% 0.1% 100% 463
C11 (931)*10 M333 Current output gain current 0 to 100% 0.1% 100% 463
C38 (932)*10 T410 Terminal 4 bias command
(torque/magnetic flux) 0 to 400% 0.1% 0% 510
C39 (932)*10 T411 Terminal 4 bias (torque/
magnetic flux) 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 510
C40 (933)*10 T412 Terminal 4 gain command
(torque/magnetic flux) 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 510
C41 (933)*10 T413 Terminal 4 gain (torque/
magnetic flux) 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 510
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PI D
d is
pl ay
C42 (934)*10 A630 PID display bias coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 615
C43 (934)*10 A631 PID display bias analog value 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 615
C44 (935)*10 A632 PID display gain coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 615
C45 (935)*10 A633 PID display gain analog value 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 615
977 E302 Input voltage mode selection 0 to 2 1 0 345
989 E490 Parameter copy alarm release
10*2 1
10*2 744
100*3 100*3
PU
990 E104 PU buzzer control 0, 1 1 1 340 991 E105 PU contrast adjustment 0 to 63 1 58 340
M on
ito rin
g
992 M104 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection
0 to 3, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 36, 38 to 46, 50 to 57, 61, 62, 64, 67, 71 to 75, 87 to 98, 100
1 0 446
D ro
op c
on tr
ol 994 G403 Droop break point gain 0.1 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 738
995 G404 Droop break point torque 0.1 to 100% 0.1% 100% 738
997 H103 Fault initiation 0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 425
998 E430 PM parameter initialization
0, 3003, 3103, 8009, 8109, 9009, 9109 1 0 230
999 E431 Automatic parameter setting
1, 2, 10, 11, 12, 13, 20, 21, 9999 1 9999 350
1000 E108 Direct setting selection 0 to 2 1 0 340
1002 C150 Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient 50 to 150%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551
A dd
iti on
al fu
nc tio
n 1003 G601 Notch filter frequency 0, 8 to 1250 Hz 1 Hz 0 271 1004 G602 Notch filter depth 0 to 3 1 0 271
1005 G603 Notch filter width 0 to 3 1 0 271
C lo
ck
1006 E020 Clock (year) 2000 to 2099 1 2000 334 1007 E021 Clock (month, day) Jan. 1 to Dec. 31 1 101 334 1008 E022 Clock (hour, minute) 0:00 to 23:59 1 0 334
1015 A607 Integral stop selection at limited frequency 0 to 2, 10 to 12 1 0 601
1016 H021 PTC thermistor protection detection time 0 to 60 s 1 s 0 415
1018 M045 Monitor with sign selection 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 446
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
Simple
Simple
1935. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
19
Tr ac
e
1020 A900 Trace operation selection 0 to 4 1 0 649 1021 A901 Trace mode selection 0 to 2 1 0 649 1022 A902 Sampling cycle 0 to 9 1 2 649 1023 A903 Number of analog channels 1 to 8 1 4 649 1024 A904 Sampling auto start 0, 1 1 0 649 1025 A905 Trigger mode selection 0 to 4 1 0 649
1026 A906 Number of sampling before trigger 0 to 100% 1% 90% 649
1027 A910 Analog source selection (1ch)
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 24, 32 to 36, 39 to 42, 46, 52 to 54, 61, 62, 64, 67, 71 to 75, 87 to 98, 201 to 213, 222 to 227, 230 to 232, 235 to 238
1
201 649
1028 A911 Analog source selection (2ch) 202 649
1029 A912 Analog source selection (3ch) 203 649
1030 A913 Analog source selection (4ch) 204 649
1031 A914 Analog source selection (5ch) 205 649
1032 A915 Analog source selection (6ch) 206 649
1033 A916 Analog source selection (7ch) 207 649
1034 A917 Analog source selection (8ch) 208 649
1035 A918 Analog trigger channel 1 to 8 1 1 649
1036 A919 Analog trigger operation selection 0, 1 1 0 649
1037 A920 Analog trigger level 600 to 1400 1 1000 649 1038 A930 Digital source selection (1ch)
1 to 255 1
1 649 1039 A931 Digital source selection (2ch) 2 649 1040 A932 Digital source selection (3ch) 3 649 1041 A933 Digital source selection (4ch) 4 649 1042 A934 Digital source selection (5ch) 5 649 1043 A935 Digital source selection (6ch) 6 649 1044 A936 Digital source selection (7ch) 7 649 1045 A937 Digital source selection (8ch) 8 649 1046 A938 Digital trigger channel 1 to 8 1 1 649
1047 A939 Digital trigger operation selection 0, 1 1 0 649
1048 E106 Display-off waiting time 0 to 60 min 1 min 0 340 1049 E110 USB host reset 0, 1 1 0 341
A nt
i-s w
ay c
on tr
ol
1072 A310 DC brake judgment time for anti-sway control operation 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 3 s 584
1073 A311 Anti-sway control operation selection 0, 1 1 0 584
1074 A312 Anti-sway control frequency 0.05 to 3 Hz, 9999 0.001 Hz 1 Hz 584 1075 A313 Anti-sway control depth 0 to 3 1 0 584 1076 A314 Anti-sway control width 0 to 3 1 0 584 1077 A315 Rope length 0.1 to 50 m 0.1 m 1 m 584 1078 A316 Trolley weight 1 to 50000 kg 1 kg 1 kg 584 1079 A317 Load weight 1 to 50000 kg 1 kg 1 kg 584
1103 F040 Deceleration time at emergency stop 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5 s 367
1105*9 C143 Encoder magnetic pole position offset 0 to 16383, 65535 1 65535 542
M on
ito rin
g 1106 M050 Torque monitor filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 446 1107 M051 Running speed monitor filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 446
1108 M052 Excitation current monitor filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 446
1113 H414 Speed limit method selection 0 to 2, 10, 9999 1 0 287
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1114 D403 Torque command reverse selection 0, 1 1 1 283
1115 G218 Speed control integral term clear time 0 to 9998 ms 1 ms 0 s 254
1116 G206 Constant output range speed control P gain compensation 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 254
1117 G261 Speed control P gain 1 (per- unit system) 0 to 300, 9999 0.01 9999 254
1118 G361 Speed control P gain 2 (per- unit system) 0 to 300, 9999 0.01 9999 254
1119 G262 Model speed control gain (per-unit system) 0 to 300, 9999 0.01 9999 263
1121 G260 Per-unit speed control reference frequency 0 to 400 Hz 0.01 Hz.
120 Hz*2 254
60 Hz*3
PI D
c on
tr ol
1134 A605 PID upper limit manipulated value 0 to 100% 0.1% 100% 622
1135 A606 PID lower limit manipulated value 0 to 100% 0.1% 100% 622
1136 A670 Second PID display bias coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 615
1137 A671 Second PID display bias analog value 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 615
1138 A672 Second PID display gain coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 615
1139 A673 Second PID display gain analog value 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 615
1140 A664 Second PID set point/ deviation input selection 1 to 5 1 2 601
1141 A665 Second PID measured value input selection 1 to 5 1 3 601
1142 A640 Second PID unit selection 0 to 43, 9999 1 9999 601 1143 A641 Second PID upper limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 601 1144 A642 Second PID lower limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 601 1145 A643 Second PID deviation limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 601
1146 A644 Second PID signal operation selection 0 to 3, 10 to 13 1 0 601
1147 A661 Second output interruption detection time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1 601
1148 A662 Second output interruption detection level 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 601
1149 A663 Second output interruption cancel level 900 to 1100% 0.1% 1000% 601
PL C 1150 to
1199 A810 to A859
PLC function user parameters 1 to 50 0 to 65535 1 0 646
1220 B100 Target position/speed selection 0 to 2 1 0 896
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
1955. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
19
Si m
pl e
po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
1221 B101 Start command edge detection selection 0, 1 1 0 303
1222 B120 First positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1223 B121 First positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1224 B122 First positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1225 B123 First positioning sub- function
0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to 102, 110 to 112 1 10 303
1226 B124 Second positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1227 B125 Second positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1228 B126 Second positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1229 B127 Second positioning sub- function
0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to 102, 110 to 112 1 10 303
1230 B128 Third positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1231 B129 Third positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1232 B130 Third positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1233 B131 Third positioning sub- function
0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to 102, 110 to 112 1 10 303
1234 B132 Fourth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1235 B133 Fourth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1236 B134 Fourth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1237 B135 Fourth positioning sub- function
0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to 102, 110 to 112 1 10 303
1238 B136 Fifth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1239 B137 Fifth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1240 B138 Fifth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1241 B139 Fifth positioning sub- function
0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to 102, 110 to 112 1 10 303
1242 B140 Sixth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1243 B141 Sixth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1244 B142 Sixth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1245 B143 Sixth positioning sub- function
0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to 102, 110 to 112 1 10 303
1246 B144 Seventh positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1247 B145 Seventh positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1248 B146 Seventh positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1249 B147 Seventh positioning sub- function
0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to 102, 110 to 112 1 10 303
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
pl e
po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
1250 B148 Eighth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1251 B149 Eighth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1252 B150 Eighth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1253 B151 Eighth positioning sub- function
0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to 102, 110 to 112 1 10 303
1254 B152 Ninth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1255 B153 Ninth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1256 B154 Ninth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1257 B155 Ninth positioning sub- function
0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to 102, 110 to 112 1 10 303
1258 B156 Tenth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1259 B157 Tenth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1260 B158 Tenth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1261 B159 Tenth positioning sub- function
0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to 102, 110 to 112 1 10 303
1262 B160 Eleventh positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1263 B161 Eleventh positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1264 B162 Eleventh positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1265 B163 Eleventh positioning sub- function
0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to 102, 110 to 112 1 10 303
1266 B164 Twelfth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1267 B165 Twelfth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1268 B166 Twelfth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1269 B167 Twelfth positioning sub- function
0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to 102, 110 to 112 1 10 303
1270 B168 Thirteenth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1271 B169 Thirteenth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1272 B170 Thirteenth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1273 B171 Thirteenth positioning sub- function
0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to 102, 110 to 112 1 10 303
1274 B172 Fourteenth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1275 B173 Fourteenth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1276 B174 Fourteenth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1277 B175 Fourteenth positioning sub- function
0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to 102, 110 to 112 1 10 303
1278 B176 Fifteenth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1279 B177 Fifteenth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5 s 303
1280 B178 Fifteenth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
1281 B179 Fifteenth positioning sub- function
0, 2, 10, 12, 100, 102, 110, 112 1 10 303
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
1975. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
19
H om
e po
si tio
n re
tu rn
/ po
si tio
n de
te ct
io n
1282 B180 Home position return method selection 0 to 6 1 4 303
1283 B181 Home position return speed 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz. 2 Hz 303
1284 B182 Home position return shifting speed 0 to 10 Hz 0.01 Hz. 0.5 Hz 303
1285 B183 Home position shift amount lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
1286 B184 Home position shift amount upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 303
1287 B185 Travel distance after proximity dog ON lower 4 digits
0 to 9999 1 2048 303
1288 B186 Travel distance after proximity dog ON upper 4 digits
0 to 9999 1 0 303
1289 B187 Home position return stopper torque 0 to 200% 0.1% 40% 303
1290 B188 Home position return stopper waiting time 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 303
1292 B190 Position control terminal input selection 0, 1 1 0 303
1293 B191 Roll feeding mode selection 0, 1 1 0 303
1294 B192 Position detection lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 327
1295 B193 Position detection upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 327
1296 B194 Position detection selection 0 to 2 1 0 327
1297 B195 Position detection hysteresis width 0 to 32767 1 0 327
1298 B013 Second position control gain 0 to 150 s-1 1 s-1 25 s-1 328
1299 G108 Second pre-excitation selection 0, 1 1 0 715
1300 to 1343
N500 to N543
Communication option parameters. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the option.
1348 G263 P/PI control switchover frequency 0 to 400 Hz 0.01 Hz. 0 Hz 254
1349 G264 Emergency stop operation selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 367
1350 to 1359
N550 to N559
Communication option parameters. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the option.
1410 A170 Starting times lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 576 1411 A171 Starting times upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 576
1412 C135 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent 0 to 2, 9999 1 9999 551
1413 C235 Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent
0 to 2, 9999 1 9999 551
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 Differs according to the capacity. 6%: FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower, FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower 4%: FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K), FR-A840-00052(1.5K) to FR-A840-00126(3.7K) 3%: FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K) 2%: FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K) 1%: FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
*2 The setting range or initial value for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *3 The setting range or initial value for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher. *4 The initial value for the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower. *5 The initial value for the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher. *6 Differs according to the capacity.
4%: FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower, FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower 2%: FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K) 1%: FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
*7 The value for the 200 V class. *8 The value for the 400 V class. *9 The setting is available only when a plug-in option that supports Vector control is installed. For the corresponding parameters of each option, refer
to the detail page. *10 The parameter number in parentheses is that used (displayed) on the LCD operation panel and the parameter unit. *11 The setting range or initial value for the standard model. *12 The setting range or initial value for the separated converter type. *13 The setting range or initial value for the IP55 compatible model. *14 The setting is available for the standard structure model. *15 The setting is available for the standard structure model and the IP55 compatible model. *16 The setting is available when the PLC function is enabled.
Lo ad
c ha
ra ct
er is
tic s
fa ul
t d et
ec tio
n
1480 H520 Load characteristics measurement mode 0, 1 (2 to 5, 81 to 85) 1 0 439
1481 H521 Load characteristics load reference 1 0 to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1% 9999 439
1482 H522 Load characteristics load reference 2 0 to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1% 9999 439
1483 H523 Load characteristics load reference 3 0 to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1% 9999 439
1484 H524 Load characteristics load reference 4 0 to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1% 9999 439
1485 H525 Load characteristics load reference 5 0 to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1% 9999 439
1486 H526 Load characteristics maximum frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 439
1487 H527 Load characteristics minimum frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 439
1488 H531 Upper limit warning detection width 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 20% 439
1489 H532 Lower limit warning detection width 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 20% 439
1490 H533 Upper limit fault detection width 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 439
1491 H534 Lower limit fault detection width 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 439
1492 H535 Load status detection signal delay time / load reference measurement waiting time
0 to 60 s 0.1 s 1 s 439
1499 E415 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
C le
ar p
ar am
et er
s Pr.CLR Parameter clear (0), 1 1 0 743 ALL.CL All parameter clear (0), 1 1 0 743
Err.CL Fault history clear (0), 1 1 0 774
Pr.CPY Parameter copy (0), 1 to 3 1 0 744 Pr.CHG Initial value change list 1 0 751 IPM IPM initialization 0, 3003 1 0 230 AUTO Automatic parameter setting 350 Pr.MD Group parameter setting (0), 1, 2 1 0 201
Function Pr. Pr. group Name Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Refer to page
Customer settingFM CA
1995. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
20
*17 The setting is available for the FR-A800-GF or when a compatible plug-in option is installed. *18 Refer to the FR-A8AVP Instruction Manual (For Inverter/Converter Switching).
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.1.2 Use of a function group number for the identification of parameters
A parameter identification number shown on the PU can be switched from a parameter number to a function group number. As parameters are grouped by function and displayed by the group, the related parameters can be set continually at a time.
Changing a parameter identification number to a function group number
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears on the 12- segment LCD display.)
3. Selecting a parameter
Turn until " " (Group parameter setting) appears.
Press to confirm the selection. The setting " " (initial value) will appear.
4. Selecting the use of the function group number
Turn to change the set value to " " (function group number). Press to confirm the Group parameter
setting. " " and " " are displayed alternately after the setting is completed.
Pr.MD setting Description
0 The setting of parameter identification number remains the same as the last setting.
1 The parameter number is used for the identification of parameters, and displayed in numerical order.
2 The function group number is used for the identification of parameters, and displayed in alphanumeric order.
2015. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
20
Selecting a parameter by function group number to change its setting The following shows the procedure to change the setting of P.H400 (Pr.1) Maximum frequency.
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.
3. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears on the 12- segment LCD display.)
4. Enabling the function group selection
Press several times until " " appears. Parameter groups can now be selected.
5. Enabling the function group selection
Turn until " " (Protective function parameter 4) appears. Press to confirm the selection.
" " will appear, which shows that the operation panel is ready for selection of a number in the group of Protective function parameter 4.
6. Selecting a parameter
Turn until " " (P.H400 Maximum frequency) appears. Press to display the present set
value. " (initial value)" appears.
7. Changing the setting value
Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to confirm the selection. " " and
" " are displayed alternately after the setting is completed.
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.1.3 Parameter list (by function group number) E: Environment setting
parameters Parameters for the inverter operating environment.
F: Parameters for the settings of the acceleration/deceleration time and the acceleration/deceleration pattern
Parameters for the motor acceleration/deceleration characteristics.
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
E000 168 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
E001 169 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
E020 1006 Clock (year) 334 E021 1007 Clock (month, day) 334 E022 1008 Clock (hour, minute) 334
E023 269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
E080 168 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
E081 169 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
E100 75 Reset selection 336 E101 75 Disconnected PU detection 336 E102 75 PU stop selection 336 E103 145 PU display language selection 339 E104 990 PU buzzer control 340 E105 991 PU contrast adjustment 340 E106 1048 Display-off waiting time 340 E107 75 Reset limit 336 E108 1000 Direct setting selection 340 E110 1049 USB host reset 341
E200 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection 341
E201 295 Frequency change increment amount setting 342
E300 30 Regenerative function selection 724
E301 570 Multiple rating setting 343 E302 977 Input voltage mode selection 345
E310 328 Inverter/converter switching
*7
E400 77 Parameter write selection 345 E410 296 Password lock level 348 E411 297 Password lock/unlock 348
E415 1499 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
E420 888 Free parameter 1 350 E421 889 Free parameter 2 350
E430 998 PM parameter initialization 230
E431 999 Automatic parameter setting 350
E440 160 User group read selection
354
E441 172 User group registered display/ batch clear 354
E442 173 User group registration 354 E443 174 User group clear 354 E490 989 Parameter copy alarm release 744 E600 72 PWM frequency selection 356 E601 240 Soft-PWM operation selection 356
Simple
Simple
Simple
Simple
E602 260 PWM frequency automatic switchover 356
E700 255 Life alarm status display 359
E701 256*4 Inrush current limit circuit life display 359
E702 257 Control circuit capacitor life display 359
E703 258*4 Main circuit capacitor life display 359
E704 259*4 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 359
E706 507 Display/reset ABC1 relay contact life 359
E707 508 Display/reset ABC2 relay contact life 359
E710 503 Maintenance timer 1 363
E711 504 Maintenance timer 1 warning output set time 363
E712 686 Maintenance timer 2 363
E713 687 Maintenance timer 2 warning output set time 363
E714 688 Maintenance timer 3 363
E715 689 Maintenance timer 3 warning output set time 363
E720 555 Current average time 363 E721 556 Data output mask time 363
E722 557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current 363
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
F000 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency 367
F001 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments 367
F002 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time 410
F003 611 Acceleration time at a restart 628, 635
F010 7 Acceleration time 367
F011 8 Deceleration time 367
F020 44 Second acceleration/ deceleration time
367, 622
F021 45 Second deceleration time 367, 622
F022 147 Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency 367
F030 110 Third acceleration/ deceleration time 367
F031 111 Third deceleration time 367
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
Simple
Simple
2035. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
20
D: Parameters for the setting of operation command and frequency command
Parameters for setting the command source to the inverter, and the motor driving frequency and torque.
H: Protective function parameter Parameters to protect the motor and the inverter.
F040 1103 Deceleration time at emergency stop 367
F070 791 Acceleration time in low-speed range 367
F071 792 Deceleration time in low-speed range 367
F100 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection 372
F101 59 Remote function selection 377
F102 13 Starting frequency 381, 382
F103 571 Holding time at a start 381
F200 140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency 372
F201 141 Backlash acceleration stopping time 372
F202 142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 372
F203 143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 372
F300 380 Acceleration S-pattern 1 372 F301 381 Deceleration S-pattern 1 372 F302 382 Acceleration S-pattern 2 372 F303 383 Deceleration S-pattern 2 372
F400 516 S-pattern time at a start of acceleration 372
F401 517 S-pattern time at a completion of acceleration 372
F402 518 S-pattern time at a start of deceleration 372
F403 519 S-pattern time at a completion of deceleration 372
F500 292 Automatic acceleration/ deceleration
384, 387, 572
F510 61 Reference current 384, 387
F511 62 Reference value at acceleration 384
F512 63 Reference value at deceleration 384
F513 293 Acceleration/deceleration separate selection 384
F520 64 Starting frequency for elevator mode 387
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
D000 79 Operation mode selection
389, 398
D001 340 Communication startup mode selection 398
D010 338 Communication operation command source 400
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
Simple
D011 339 Communication speed command source 400
D012 550 NET mode operation command source selection 400
D013 551 PU mode operation command source selection 400
D020 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 406
D030 811 Set resolution switchover 245, 444
D100 291 Pulse train I/O selection 406, 457
D101 384 Input pulse division scaling factor 406
D110 385 Frequency for zero input pulse 406
D111 386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 406
D120 432*1 Pulse train torque command bias 283
D121 433*1 Pulse train torque command gain 283
D200 15 Jog frequency 410
D300 28 Multi-speed input compensation selection 411
D301 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 411
D302 5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 411
D303 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 411
D304 to D307 24 to 27 Multi-speed setting (speed 4 to
speed 7) 411
D308 to D315
232 to 239
Multi-speed setting (speed 8 to speed 15) 411
D400 804 Torque command source selection 283
D401 805 Torque command value (RAM) 283
D402 806 Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM) 283
D403 1114 Torque command reverse selection 283
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
H000 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay
415, 532, 551
H001 600 First free thermal reduction frequency 1 415
H002 601 First free thermal reduction ratio 1 415
H003 602 First free thermal reduction frequency 2 415
H004 603 First free thermal reduction ratio 2 415
H005 604 First free thermal reduction frequency 3 415
H006 607 Motor permissible load level 415
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
Simple
Simple
Simple
Simple
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
H010 51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay
415, 532, 551
H011 692 Second free thermal reduction frequency 1 415
H012 693 Second free thermal reduction ratio 1 415
H013 694 Second free thermal reduction frequency 2 415
H014 695 Second free thermal reduction ratio 2 415
H015 696 Second free thermal reduction frequency 3 415
H016 608 Second motor permissible load level 415
H020 561 PTC thermistor protection level 415
H021 1016 PTC thermistor protection detection time 415
H022 876*1 Thermal protector input 415 H030 875 Fault definition 422
H100 244 Cooling fan operation selection 423
H101 249 Earth (ground) fault detection at start 425
H102 598 Undervoltage level 425 H103 997 Fault initiation 425
H106 244 Cooling fan operation selection during the test operation
423
H200 251 Output phase loss protection selection 426
H201 872*4 Input phase loss protection selection 426
H300 65 Retry selection 426
H301 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence 426
H302 68 Retry waiting time 426 H303 69 Retry count display erase 426 H400 1 Maximum frequency 428
H401 2 Minimum frequency 428
H402 18 High speed maximum frequency 428
H410 807 Speed limit selection 287
H411 808 Forward rotation speed limit/ speed limit 287
H412 809 Reverse rotation speed limit/ reverse-side speed limit 287
H414 1113 Speed limit method selection 287 H415 873*1 Speed limit 269
H416 285 Speed deviation excess detection frequency
269, 736
H417 853*1 Speed deviation time 269 H420 31 Frequency jump 1A 429 H421 32 Frequency jump 1B 429 H422 33 Frequency jump 2A 429 H423 34 Frequency jump 2B 429 H424 35 Frequency jump 3A 429 H425 36 Frequency jump 3B 429 H429 552 Frequency jump range 429
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
Simple
Simple
H500 22 Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level)
245, 431
H501 156 Stall prevention operation selection 431
H520 1480 Load characteristics measurement mode 439
H521 1481 Load characteristics load reference 1 439
H522 1482 Load characteristics load reference 2 439
H523 1483 Load characteristics load reference 3 439
H524 1484 Load characteristics load reference 4 439
H525 1485 Load characteristics load reference 5 439
H526 1486 Load characteristics maximum frequency 439
H527 1487 Load characteristics minimum frequency 439
H531 1488 Upper limit warning detection width 439
H532 1489 Lower limit warning detection width 439
H533 1490 Upper limit fault detection width 439
H534 1491 Lower limit fault detection width 439
H535 1492 Load status detection signal delay time / load reference measurement waiting time
439
H600 48 Second stall prevention operation level 431
H601 49 Second stall prevention operation frequency 431
H602 114 Third stall prevention operation level 431
H603 115 Third stall prevention operation frequency 431
H610 23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed
431
H611 66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency 431
H620 148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input 431
H621 149 Stall prevention level at 10 V input 431
H631 154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation
431
H700 810 Torque limit input method selection 245
H701 812 Torque limit level (regeneration) 245
H702 813 Torque limit level (3rd quadrant) 245
H703 814 Torque limit level (4th quadrant) 245
H704 801 Output limit level 245, 283
H710 815 Torque limit level 2 245
H720 816 Torque limit level during acceleration 245
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
2055. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
20
M: Monitoring and its output signal
Parameters for the settings regarding the monitoring to check the inverter's operating status and the output signals for the monitoring.
H721 817 Torque limit level during deceleration 245
H730 874 OLT level setting 245 H800 374 Overspeed detection level 443 H881 690 Deceleration check time 270
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
M000 37 Speed display 444 M001 505 Speed setting reference 444 M002 144 Speed setting switchover 444 M020 170 Watt-hour meter clear 446
M021 563 Energization time carrying- over times 446
M022 268 Monitor decimal digits selection 446
M023 891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times
446, 467
M030 171 Operation hour meter clear 446
M031 564 Operating time carrying-over times 446
M040 55 Frequency monitoring reference 457
M041 56 Current monitoring reference 457 M042 866 Torque monitoring reference 457
M043 241 Analog input display unit switchover 505
M044 290 Monitor negative output selection
446, 457
M045 1018 Monitor with sign selection 446 M050 1106 Torque monitor filter 446 M051 1107 Running speed monitor filter 446
M052 1108 Excitation current monitor filter 446
M060 663 Control circuit temperature signal output level 494
M100 52 Operation panel main monitor selection 446
M101 774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 446
M102 775 Operation panel monitor selection 2 446
M103 776 Operation panel monitor selection 3 446
M104 992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection
457, 446
M200 892 Load factor 467
M201 893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity) 467
M202 894 Control selection during commercial power-supply operation
467
M203 895 Power saving rate reference value 467
M204 896 Power unit cost 467
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
M205 897 Power saving monitor average time 467
M206 898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 467
M207 899 Operation time rate (estimated value) 467
M300 54 FM/CA terminal function selection 457
M301 158 AM terminal function selection 457
M310 C0 (900)*2
FM/CA terminal calibration 463
M320 C1 (901)*2
AM terminal calibration 463
M321 867 AM output filter 463
M330 C8 (930)*2
Current output bias signal 463
M331 C9 (930)*2
Current output bias current 463
M332 C10 (931)*2
Current output gain signal 463
M333 C11 (931)*2
Current output gain current 463
M334 869 Current output filter 463
M400 190 RUN terminal function selection 473
M401 191 SU terminal function selection 473 M402 192 IPF terminal function selection 473 M403 193 OL terminal function selection 473 M404 194 FU terminal function selection 473
M405 195 ABC1 terminal function selection 473
M406 196 ABC2 terminal function selection 473
M410 313*5*6 DO0 output selection 473
M411 314*5*6 DO1 output selection 473
M412 315*5*6 DO2 output selection 473
M413 316*5 DO3 output selection 473
M414 317*5 DO4 output selection 473
M415 318*5 DO5 output selection 473
M416 319*5 DO6 output selection 473
M420 320*5 RA1 output selection 473
M421 321*5 RA2 output selection 473
M422 322*5 RA3 output selection 473
M430 157 OL signal output timer 245, 431
M431 289 Inverter output terminal filter 473
M433 166 Output current detection signal retention time 487
M440 870 Speed detection hysteresis 484 M441 41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 484 M442 42 Output frequency detection 484
M443 43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation 484
M444 50 Second output frequency detection 484
M445 116 Third output frequency detection
488, 484
M446 865 Low speed detection 484 M460 150 Output current detection level 487
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
parameters Parameters for the setting of the input terminals via which commands are given to the inverter.
M461 151 Output current detection signal delay time 487
M462 152 Zero current detection level 487 M463 153 Zero current detection time 487
M464 167 Output current detection operation selection 487
M470 864 Torque detection 488 M500 495 Remote output selection 489 M501 496 Remote output data 1 489 M502 497 Remote output data 2 489 M510 76 Fault code output selection 492
M520 799 Pulse increment setting for output power 493
M530 655 Analog remote output selection 490
M531 656 Analog remote output 1 490 M532 657 Analog remote output 2 490 M533 658 Analog remote output 3 490 M534 659 Analog remote output 4 490
M600 863*1 Control terminal option- Encoder pulse division ratio 495
M601 413*1 Encoder pulse division ratio 495
M610 635*1 Cumulative pulse clear signal selection 321
M611 636*1 Cumulative pulse division scaling factor 321
M612 637*1 Control terminal option- Cumulative pulse division scaling factor
321
M613 638*1 Cumulative pulse storage 321
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
T000 73 Analog input selection 496, 501
T001 267 Terminal 4 input selection 496 T002 74 Input filter time constant 503 T003 822 Speed setting filter 1 503 T004 826 Torque setting filter 1 503 T005 832 Speed setting filter 2 503 T006 836 Torque setting filter 2 503 T007 849 Analog input offset adjustment 503
T010 868 Terminal 1 function assignment
245, 431, 500
T021 242 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 2)
501
T022 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 505
T040 858 Terminal 4 function assignment
245, 431, 500
T041 243 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 4)
501
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
Simple
T042 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 505
T050 252 Override bias 501 T051 253 Override gain 501 T052 573 4 mA input check selection 517
T053 777 4 mA input fault operation frequency 517
T054 778 4 mA input check filter 517
T100 C12 (917)*2
Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) 505
T101 C13 (917)*2
Terminal 1 bias (speed) 505
T102 C14 (918)*2
Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) 505
T103 C15 (918)*2
Terminal 1 gain (speed) 505
T110 C16 (919)*2
Terminal 1 bias command (torque/magnetic flux) 510
T111 C17 (919)*2
Terminal 1 bias (torque/ magnetic flux) 510
T112 C18 (920)*2
Terminal 1 gain command (torque/magnetic flux) 510
T113 C19 (920)*2
Terminal 1 gain (torque/ magnetic flux) 510
T200 C2 (902)*2
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 505
T201 C3 (902)*2
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 505
T202 125 (903)*2
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 505
T203 C4 (903)*2
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 505
T400 C5 (904)*2
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 505
T401 C6 (904)*2
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 505
T402 126 (905)*2
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 505
T403 C7 (905)*2
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 505
T410 C38 (932)*2
Terminal 4 bias command (torque/magnetic flux) 510
T411 C39 (932)*2
Terminal 4 bias (torque/ magnetic flux) 510
T412 C40 (933)*2
Terminal 4 gain command (torque/magnetic flux) 510
T413 C41 (933)*2
Terminal 4 gain (torque/ magnetic flux) 510
T700 178 STF terminal function selection 521
T701 179 STR terminal function selection 521
T702 180 RL terminal function selection 521 T703 181 RM terminal function selection 521 T704 182 RH terminal function selection 521 T705 183 RT terminal function selection 521 T706 184 AU terminal function selection 521
T707 185 JOG terminal function selection 521
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
Simple
2075. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
20
C: Motor constant parameters Parameters for the applied motor setting.
T708 186 CS terminal function selection 521
T709 187 MRS terminal function selection 521
T710 188 STOP terminal function selection 521
T711 189 RES terminal function selection 521
T720 17 MRS input selection 524 T721 599 X10 terminal input selection 724
T722 606 Power failure stop external signal input selection 642
T730 155 RT signal function validity condition selection 525
T740 699 Input terminal filter 521
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
C000 684 Tuning data unit switchover 532, 551
C100 71 Applied motor 528, 532
C101 80 Motor capacity 221, 532, 551
C102 81 Number of motor poles 221, 532, 551
C103 9 Rated motor current 415, 532, 551
C104 83 Rated motor voltage 221, 532, 551
C105 84 Rated motor frequency 221, 532, 551
C106 702 Maximum motor frequency 551 C107 707 Motor inertia (integer) 551 C108 724 Motor inertia (exponent) 551
C110 96 Auto tuning setting/status 532, 551, 638
C111 95 Online auto tuning selection 558
C112 818 Easy gain tuning response level setting 254
C113 819 Easy gain tuning selection 254
C114 880 Load inertia ratio 254, 263
C120 90 Motor constant (R1) 532, 551, 638
C121 91 Motor constant (R2) 532
C122 92 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld)
532, 551
C123 93 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq)
532, 551
C124 94 Motor constant (X) 532 C125 82 Motor excitation current 532
C126 859 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
532, 551
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
Simple
C130 706 Induced voltage constant (phi f) 551
C131 711 Motor Ld decay ratio 551 C132 712 Motor Lq decay ratio 551 C133 725 Motor protection current level 551
C135 1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent 551
C140 369*1 Number of encoder pulses 94, 585, 736
C141 359*1 Encoder rotation direction 94, 585, 736
C142 373*1 Encoder position tuning setting/status 542
C143 1105*1 Encoder magnetic pole position offset 542
C148 376*1 Encoder signal loss detection enable/disable selection 561
C150 1002 Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient 551
C182 717 Starting resistance tuning compensation 551
C185 721 Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width 551
C200 450 Second applied motor 528
C201 453 Second motor capacity 532, 551
C202 454 Number of second motor poles 532, 551
C203 51 Rated second motor current 415, 532, 551
C204 456 Rated second motor voltage 532, 551
C205 457 Rated second motor frequency 532, 551
C206 743 Second motor maximum frequency 551
C207 744 Second motor inertia (integer) 551
C208 745 Second motor inertia (exponent) 551
C210 463 Second motor auto tuning setting/status
532, 551, 638
C211 574 Second motor online auto tuning 558
C220 458 Second motor constant (R1) 532, 551, 638
C221 459 Second motor constant (R2) 532
C222 460 Second motor constant (L1) / d-axis inductance (Ld)
532, 551
C223 461 Second motor constant (L2) / q-axis inductance (Lq)
532, 551
C224 462 Second motor constant (X) 532
C225 455 Second motor excitation current 532
C226 860 Second motor torque current/ Rated PM motor current
532, 551
C230 738 Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) 551
C231 739 Second motor Ld decay ratio 551 C232 740 Second motor Lq decay ratio 551
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A: Application parameters Parameters for the setting of a specific application.
C233 746 Second motor protection current level 551
C235 1413 Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent 551
C240 851*1 Control terminal option- Number of encoder pulses 94
C241 852*1 Control terminal option- Encoder rotation direction 94
C242 862*1 Encoder option selection 226
C243 871*1 Control terminal option Encoder position tuning setting/status
542
C244 887*1 Control terminal option Encoder magnetic pole position offset
542
C248 855*1 Control terminal option-Signal loss detection enable/disable selection
561
C282 741 Second starting resistance tuning compensation 551
C285 742 Second motor magnetic pole detection pulse width 551
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer
to page
A000 135 Electronic bypass sequence selection 563
A001 136 MC switchover interlock time 563 A002 137 Start waiting time 563 A003 138 Bypass selection at a fault 563
A004 139 Automatic switchover frequency from inverter to bypass operation 563
A005 159 Automatic switchover frequency range from bypass to inverter operation
563
A006 248 Self power management selection 569
A007 254 Main circuit power OFF waiting time 569
A100 278 Brake opening frequency 572 A101 279 Brake opening current 572
A102 280 Brake opening current detection time 572
A103 281 Brake operation time at start 572 A104 282 Brake operation frequency 572 A105 283 Brake operation time at stop 572
A106 284 Deceleration detection function selection 572
A107 285 Overspeed detection frequency 572 A108 639 Brake opening current selection 572
A109 640 Brake operation frequency selection 572
A110 292 Automatic acceleration/ deceleration
384, 387, 572
A120 642 Second brake opening frequency 572 A121 643 Second brake opening current 572
A122 644 Second brake opening current detection time 572
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
A123 645 Second brake operation time at start 572
A124 646 Second brake operation frequency 572
A125 647 Second brake operation time at stop 572
A126 648 Second deceleration detection function selection 572
A128 650 Second brake opening current selection 572
A129 651 Second brake operation frequency selection 572
A130 641 Second brake sequence operation selection 572
A170 1410 Starting times lower 4 digits 576 A171 1411 Starting times upper 4 digits 576
A200 270 Stop-on contact/load torque high- speed frequency control selection
577, 580
A201 271 High-speed setting maximum current 580
A202 272 Middle-speed setting minimum current 580
A203 273 Current averaging range 580
A204 274 Current averaging filter time constant 580
A205 275 Stop-on contact excitation current low-speed scaling factor 577
A206 276 PWM carrier frequency at stop-on contact 577
A300 592 Traverse function selection 582 A301 593 Maximum amplitude amount 582
A302 594 Amplitude compensation amount during deceleration 582
A303 595 Amplitude compensation amount during acceleration 582
A304 596 Amplitude acceleration time 582 A305 597 Amplitude deceleration time 582
A310 1072 DC brake judgment time for anti- sway control operation 584
A311 1073 Anti-sway control operation selection 584
A312 1074 Anti-sway control frequency 584 A313 1075 Anti-sway control depth 584 A314 1076 Anti-sway control width 584 A315 1077 Rope length 584 A316 1078 Trolley weight 584 A317 1079 Load weight 584 A510 350*1 Stop position command selection 585
A511 360*1 16-bit data selection 585
A512 361*1 Position shift 585
A520 362*1 Orientation position loop gain 585
A521 363*1 Completion signal output delay time 585
A522 364*1 Encoder stop check time 585
A523 365*1 Orientation limit 585
A524 366*1 Recheck time 585
A525 393*1 Orientation selection 585
A526 351*1 Orientation speed 585
A527 352*1 Creep speed 585
A528 353*1 Creep switchover position 585
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer
to page
2095. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
21
A529 354*1 Position loop switchover position 585
A530 355*1 DC injection brake start position 585
A531 356*1 Internal stop position command 585
A532 357*1 Orientation in-position zone 585
A533 358*1 Servo torque selection 585
A540 394*1 Number of machine side gear teeth 585
A541 395*1 Number of motor side gear teeth 585
A542 396*1 Orientation speed gain (P term) 585
A543 397*1 Orientation speed integral time 585
A544 398*1 Orientation speed gain (D term) 585
A545 399*1 Orientation deceleration ratio 585
A546 829*1 Number of machine end encoder pulses 585
A600 759 PID unit selection 615
A601 131 PID upper limit 601, 622
A602 132 PID lower limit 601, 622
A603 553 PID deviation limit 601 A604 554 PID signal operation selection 601 A605 1134 PID upper limit manipulated value 622 A606 1135 PID lower limit manipulated value 622
A607 1015 Integral stop selection at limited frequency 601
A610 128 PID action selection 601, 622
A611 133 PID action set point 601, 622
A612 127 PID control automatic switchover frequency 601
A613 129 PID proportional band 601, 622
A614 130 PID integral time 601, 622
A615 134 PID differential time 601, 622
A616 760 Pre-charge fault selection 618 A617 761 Pre-charge ending level 618 A618 762 Pre-charge ending time 618 A619 763 Pre-charge upper detection level 618 A620 764 Pre-charge time limit 618 A621 575 Output interruption detection time 601 A622 576 Output interruption detection level 601 A623 577 Output interruption cancel level 601
A624 609 PID set point/deviation input selection
601, 622
A625 610 PID measured value input selection
601, 622
A630 C42 (934)*2
PID display bias coefficient 615
A631 C43 (934)*2
PID display bias analog value 615
A632 C44 (935)*2
PID display gain coefficient 615
A633 C45 (935)*2
PID display gain analog value 615
A640 1142 Second PID unit selection 601 A641 1143 Second PID upper limit 601
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer
to page A642 1144 Second PID lower limit 601 A643 1145 Second PID deviation limit 601
A644 1146 Second PID signal operation selection 601
A650 753 Second PID action selection 601 A651 755 Second PID action set point 601
A652 754 Second PID control automatic switchover frequency 601
A653 756 Second PID proportional band 601 A654 757 Second PID integral time 601 A655 758 Second PID differential time 601 A656 765 Second pre-charge fault selection 618 A657 766 Second pre-charge ending level 618 A658 767 Second pre-charge ending time 618
A659 768 Second pre-charge upper detection level 618
A660 769 Second pre-charge time limit 618
A661 1147 Second output interruption detection time 601
A662 1148 Second output interruption detection level 601
A663 1149 Second output interruption cancel level 601
A664 1140 Second PID set point/deviation input selection 601
A665 1141 Second PID measured value input selection 601
A670 1136 Second PID display bias coefficient 615
A671 1137 Second PID display bias analog value 615
A672 1138 Second PID display gain coefficient 615
A673 1139 Second PID display gain analog value 615
A680 573 4 mA input check selection 517
A681 777 4 mA input fault operation frequency 517
A682 778 4 mA input check filter 517
A700 162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection
628, 635, 638
A701 299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting 628
A702 57 Restart coasting time 628, 635
A703 58 Restart cushion time 628 A704 163 First cushion time for restart 628 A705 164 First cushion voltage for restart 628
A710 165 Stall prevention operation level for restart 628
A711 298 Frequency search gain 532, 638
A712 560 Second frequency search gain 532, 638
A730 261 Power failure stop selection 642
A731 262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 642
A732 263 Subtraction starting frequency 642 A733 264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 642 A734 265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 642
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer
to page
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
B: Position control parameters Parameters for the position control setting.
A735 266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency 642
A785 294 UV avoidance voltage gain 642 A786 668 Power failure stop frequency gain 642 A800 414 PLC function operation selection 646
A801 415 Inverter operation lock mode setting 646
A802 416 Pre-scale function selection 646 A803 417 Pre-scale setting value 646 A804 498 PLC function flash memory clear 646
A805 675 User parameter auto storage function selection 646
A810 to A859
1150 to 1199
PLC function user parameters 1 to 50 646
A900 1020 Trace operation selection 649 A901 1021 Trace mode selection 649 A902 1022 Sampling cycle 649 A903 1023 Number of analog channels 649 A904 1024 Sampling auto start 649 A905 1025 Trigger mode selection 649 A906 1026 Number of sampling before trigger 649 A910 1027 Analog source selection (1ch) 649 A911 1028 Analog source selection (2ch) 649 A912 1029 Analog source selection (3ch) 649 A913 1030 Analog source selection (4ch) 649 A914 1031 Analog source selection (5ch) 649 A915 1032 Analog source selection (6ch) 649 A916 1033 Analog source selection (7ch) 649 A917 1034 Analog source selection (8ch) 649 A918 1035 Analog trigger channel 649 A919 1036 Analog trigger operation selection 649 A920 1037 Analog trigger level 649 A930 1038 Digital source selection (1ch) 649 A931 1039 Digital source selection (2ch) 649 A932 1040 Digital source selection (3ch) 649 A933 1041 Digital source selection (4ch) 649 A934 1042 Digital source selection (5ch) 649 A935 1043 Digital source selection (6ch) 649 A936 1044 Digital source selection (7ch) 649 A937 1045 Digital source selection (8ch) 649 A938 1046 Digital trigger channel 649 A939 1047 Digital trigger operation selection 649
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
B000 419 Position command source selection
303, 319
B001 420 Command pulse scaling factor numerator (electronic gear numerator)
325
B002 421 Command pulse multiplication denominator (electronic gear denominator)
325
B003 422 Position control gain 328 B004 423 Position feed forward gain 328
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer
to page
B005 424 Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant
325
B006 425 Position feed forward command filter 328
B007 426 In-position width 327 B008 427 Excessive level error 327 B009 428 Command pulse selection 319 B010 429 Clear signal selection 319 B011 430 Pulse monitor selection 319 B012 446 Model position control gain 328 B013 1298 Second position control gain 328
B020 464 Digital position control sudden stop deceleration time 303
B021 465 First target position lower 4 digits 303
B022 466 First target position upper 4 digits 303
B023 467 Second target position lower 4 digits 303
B024 468 Second target position upper 4 digits 303
B025 469 Third target position lower 4 digits 303
B026 470 Third target position upper 4 digits 303
B027 471 Fourth target position lower 4 digits 303
B028 472 Fourth target position upper 4 digits 303
B029 473 Fifth target position lower 4 digits 303
B030 474 Fifth target position upper 4 digits 303
B031 475 Sixth target position lower 4 digits 303
B032 476 Sixth target position upper 4 digits 303
B033 477 Seventh target position lower 4 digits 303
B034 478 Seventh target position upper 4 digits 303
B035 479 Eighth target position lower 4 digits 303
B036 480 Eighth target position upper 4 digits 303
B037 481 Ninth target position lower 4 digits 303
B038 482 Ninth target position upper 4 digits 303
B039 483 Tenth target position lower 4 digits 303
B040 484 Tenth target position upper 4 digits 303
B041 485 Eleventh target position lower 4 digits 303
B042 486 Eleventh target position upper 4 digits 303
B043 487 Twelfth target position lower 4 digits 303
B044 488 Twelfth target position upper 4 digits 303
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
2115. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
21
B045 489 Thirteenth target position lower 4 digits 303
B046 490 Thirteenth target position upper 4 digits 303
B047 491 Fourteenth target position lower 4 digits 303
B048 492 Fourteenth target position upper 4 digits 303
B049 493 Fifteenth target position lower 4 digits 303
B050 494 Fifteenth target position upper 4 digits 303
B100 1220 Target position/speed selection 896
B101 1221 Start command edge detection selection 303
B120 1222 First positioning acceleration time 303
B121 1223 First positioning deceleration time 303
B122 1224 First positioning dwell time 303 B123 1225 First positioning sub-function 303
B124 1226 Second positioning acceleration time 303
B125 1227 Second positioning deceleration time 303
B126 1228 Second positioning dwell time 303
B127 1229 Second positioning sub- function 303
B128 1230 Third positioning acceleration time 303
B129 1231 Third positioning deceleration time 303
B130 1232 Third positioning dwell time 303 B131 1233 Third positioning sub-function 303
B132 1234 Fourth positioning acceleration time 303
B133 1235 Fourth positioning deceleration time 303
B134 1236 Fourth positioning dwell time 303
B135 1237 Fourth positioning sub- function 303
B136 1238 Fifth positioning acceleration time 303
B137 1239 Fifth positioning deceleration time 303
B138 1240 Fifth positioning dwell time 303 B139 1241 Fifth positioning sub-function 303
B140 1242 Sixth positioning acceleration time 303
B141 1243 Sixth positioning deceleration time 303
B142 1244 Sixth positioning dwell time 303 B143 1245 Sixth positioning sub-function 303
B144 1246 Seventh positioning acceleration time 303
B145 1247 Seventh positioning deceleration time 303
B146 1248 Seventh positioning dwell time 303
B147 1249 Seventh positioning sub- function 303
B148 1250 Eighth positioning acceleration time 303
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
B149 1251 Eighth positioning deceleration time 303
B150 1252 Eighth positioning dwell time 303
B151 1253 Eighth positioning sub- function 303
B152 1254 Ninth positioning acceleration time 303
B153 1255 Ninth positioning deceleration time 303
B154 1256 Ninth positioning dwell time 303 B155 1257 Ninth positioning sub-function 303
B156 1258 Tenth positioning acceleration time 303
B157 1259 Tenth positioning deceleration time 303
B158 1260 Tenth positioning dwell time 303 B159 1261 Tenth positioning sub-function 303
B160 1262 Eleventh positioning acceleration time 303
B161 1263 Eleventh positioning deceleration time 303
B162 1264 Eleventh positioning dwell time 303
B163 1265 Eleventh positioning sub- function 303
B164 1266 Twelfth positioning acceleration time 303
B165 1267 Twelfth positioning deceleration time 303
B166 1268 Twelfth positioning dwell time 303
B167 1269 Twelfth positioning sub- function 303
B168 1270 Thirteenth positioning acceleration time 303
B169 1271 Thirteenth positioning deceleration time 303
B170 1272 Thirteenth positioning dwell time 303
B171 1273 Thirteenth positioning sub- function 303
B172 1274 Fourteenth positioning acceleration time 303
B173 1275 Fourteenth positioning deceleration time 303
B174 1276 Fourteenth positioning dwell time 303
B175 1277 Fourteenth positioning sub- function 303
B176 1278 Fifteenth positioning acceleration time 303
B177 1279 Fifteenth positioning deceleration time 303
B178 1280 Fifteenth positioning dwell time 303
B179 1281 Fifteenth positioning sub- function 303
B180 1282 Home position return method selection 303
B181 1283 Home position return speed 303
B182 1284 Home position return shifting speed 303
B183 1285 Home position shift amount lower 4 digits 303
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N: Communication operation parameters
Parameters for the setting of communication operation such as the communication specifications or operating characteristics.
G: Control parameters Parameters for motor control.
B184 1286 Home position shift amount upper 4 digits 303
B185 1287 Travel distance after proximity dog ON lower 4 digits 303
B186 1288 Travel distance after proximity dog ON upper 4 digits 303
B187 1289 Home position return stopper torque 303
B188 1290 Home position return stopper waiting time 303
B190 1292 Position control terminal input selection 303
B191 1293 Roll feeding mode selection 303
B192 1294 Position detection lower 4 digits 327
B193 1295 Position detection upper 4 digits 327
B194 1296 Position detection selection 327
B195 1297 Position detection hysteresis width 327
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
N000 549 Protocol selection 663
N001 342 Communication EEPROM write selection 663
N002 539 MODBUS RTU communication check time interval 686
N010 349*6 Communication reset selection 663
N011 500*6 Communication error execution waiting time 663
N012 501*6 Communication error occurrence count display 663
N013 502 Stop mode selection at communication error 663
N014 779 Operation frequency during communication error 663
N020 117 PU communication station number 670
N021 118 PU communication speed 670 N022 119 PU communication data length 670
N023 119 PU communication stop bit length 670
N024 120 PU communication parity check 670
N025 121 PU communication retry count 670
N026 122 PU communication check time interval 670
N027 123 PU communication waiting time setting 670
N028 124 PU communication CR/LF selection 670
N030 331 RS-485 communication station number 670
N031 332 RS-485 communication speed 670
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
N032 333 RS-485 communication data length 670
N033 333 RS-485 communication stop bit length 670
N034 334 RS-485 communication parity check selection 670
N035 335 RS-485 communication retry count 670
N036 336 RS-485 communication check time interval 670
N037 337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting 670
N038 341 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection 670
N040 547 USB communication station number 701
N041 548 USB communication check time interval 701
N080 343 Communication error count 686
N100 541*6 Frequency command sign selection 699
N110 434*6 Network number (CC-Link IE) 699
N111 435*6 Station number (CC-Link IE) 699
N240 349*6 Ready bit status selection 663
N241 349*6 Reset selection after inverter faults are cleared 893
N242 349*6 DriveControl writing restriction selection 893
N500 to N543, N550 to N559
1300 to 1343, 1350 to 1359
Communication option parameters. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the option.
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
G000 0 Torque boost 706
G001 3 Base frequency 707 G002 19 Base frequency voltage 707 G003 14 Load pattern selection 708 G010 46 Second torque boost 706 G011 47 Second V/F (base frequency) 707 G020 112 Third torque boost 706 G021 113 Third V/F (base frequency) 707
G030 60 Energy saving control selection 712
G040 100 V/F1 (first frequency) 713 G041 101 V/F1 (first frequency voltage) 713 G042 102 V/F2 (second frequency) 713
G043 103 V/F2 (second frequency voltage) 713
G044 104 V/F3 (third frequency) 713 G045 105 V/F3 (third frequency voltage) 713 G046 106 V/F4 (fourth frequency) 713 G047 107 V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage) 713 G048 108 V/F5 (fifth frequency) 713 G049 109 V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage) 713
G060 673 SF-PR slip amount adjustment operation selection 714
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
Simple
Simple
2135. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
21
G061 674 SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain 714
G080 617 Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor
711
G100 10 DC injection brake operation frequency 715
G101 11 DC injection brake operation time 715
G102 802 Pre-excitation selection 715 G103 850 Brake operation selection 715 G105 522 Output stop frequency 720 G106 250 Stop selection 722
G107 70*3 Special regenerative brake duty 724
G108 1299 Second pre-excitation selection 715
G110 12 DC injection brake operation voltage 715
G120 882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection 732
G121 883 Regeneration avoidance operation level 732
G122 884 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity
732
G123 885 Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value
732
G124 886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 732
G125 665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 732
G130 660 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation selection
735
G131 661 Magnetic excitation increase rate 735
G132 662 Increased magnetic excitation current level 735
G200 800 Control method selection 221 G201 85 Excitation current break point 711
G202 86 Excitation current low-speed scaling factor 711
G203 245 Rated slip 736
G204 246 Slip compensation time constant 736
G205 247 Constant output range slip compensation selection 736
G206 1116 Constant output range speed control P gain compensation 254
G210 803 Constant output range torque characteristic selection
245, 283
G211 820 Speed control P gain 1 254 G212 821 Speed control integral time 1 254
G213 824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain)
294, 333
G214 825 Torque control integral time 1 (current loop integral time)
294, 333
G215 823*1 Speed detection filter 1 332 G216 827 Torque detection filter 1 332 G217 854 Excitation ratio 332
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
G218 1115 Speed control integral term clear time 254
G220 877 Speed feed forward control/ model adaptive speed control selection
263
G221 878 Speed feed forward filter 263
G222 879 Speed feed forward torque limit 263
G223 881 Speed feed forward gain 263 G224 828 Model speed control gain 263 G230 840 Torque bias selection 265 G231 841 Torque bias 1 265 G232 842 Torque bias 2 265 G233 843 Torque bias 3 265 G234 844 Torque bias filter 265 G235 845 Torque bias operation time 265
G236 846 Torque bias balance compensation 265
G237 847 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias 265
G238 848 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 gain 265
G240 367*1 Speed feedback range 736
G241 368*1 Feedback gain 736
G250 788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection 233
G260 1121 Per-unit speed control reference frequency 254
G261 1117 Speed control P gain 1 (per- unit system) 254
G262 1119 Model speed control gain (per- unit system) 263
G263 1348 P/PI control switchover frequency 254
G264 1349 Emergency stop operation selection 367
G300 451 Second motor control method selection 221
G301 565 Second motor excitation current break point 711
G302 566 Second motor excitation current low-speed scaling factor
711
G311 830 Speed control P gain 2 254 G312 831 Speed control integral time 2 254
G313 834 Torque control P gain 2 (current loop proportional gain)
294
G314 835 Torque control integral time 2 (current loop integral time) 294
G315 833*1 Speed detection filter 2 332 G316 837 Torque detection filter 2 332
G350 747 Second motor low-speed range torque characteristic selection
233
G361 1118 Speed control P gain 2 (per- unit system) 254
G400 286 Droop gain 738 G401 287 Droop filter time constant 738
G402 288 Droop function activation selection 738
G403 994 Droop break point gain 738
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 The setting is available when a plug-in option for Vector control is installed.
*2 On the LCD operation panel or the parameter unit used as the command source, the parameter number in parentheses appears instead of that starting with the letter C.
*3 The setting is available for the standard model. *4 The setting is available for the standard model and the IP55
compatible model. *5 The setting is available when the PLC function is enabled. *6 The setting is available for the FR-A800-GF or when a
compatible plug-in option is installed. *7 Refer to the FR-A8AVP Instruction Manual (For Inverter/
Converter Switching).
G404 995 Droop break point torque 738 G410 653 Speed smoothing control 741
G411 654 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency 741
G420 679 Second droop gain 738
G421 680 Second droop filter time constant 738
G422 681 Second droop function activation selection 738
G423 682 Second droop break point gain 738
G424 683 Second droop break point torque 738
G601 1003 Notch filter frequency 271 G602 1004 Notch filter depth 271 G603 1005 Notch filter width 271
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
G932 89 Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic flux vector) 228
G942 569 Second motor speed control gain 228
Pr. group Pr. Name Refer to page
2155. PARAMETERS 5.1 Parameter list
21
5.2 Control method V/F control (initial setting), Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control are available with this inverter.
V/F control The inverter controls the output frequency (F) and the output voltage (V) so that the ratio of frequency to voltage (V/F) is kept constant when the frequency is changed.
Advanced magnetic flux vector control The inverter performs vector calculation and divide its output current into the excitation current and the torque current. The inverter compensates the frequency and the voltage to output a current that meets the load torque to the motor, which improves the motor torque at low speed. The output frequency is further compensated (slip compensation) to bring the actual motor speed closer to the commanded speed. This control method is useful when the load fluctuates are severe.
NOTE Advanced magnetic flux vector control requires the following conditions.
If these conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control. Otherwise, malfunctions such as insufficient torque, uneven rotation may occur.
For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (It must be 0.4 kW or higher.) If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
The motor described in the following table is used.
Single-motor operation (one motor to one inverter) is performed. The wiring length from inverter to motor is 30 m or less. (When the wiring length exceeds 30 m, perform offline auto tuning with
the wiring in place.) A sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) is not used.
Real sensorless vector control As the inverter estimates the motor speed and controls the output current more accurately, a high-level control of the speed
and the torque is enabled. Select Real sensorless vector control for a high-accuracy, fast-response control. The offline auto tuning is required initially.
This control method is useful for the following purposes:
Motor Condition Mitsubishi Electric standard motor (SF-JR)
The offline auto tuning is not required. Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor (SF-HR) Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA 4P / SF-HRCA) Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor (SF-PR) Other motor (Mitsubishi motor SF-TH, etc. or other manufacturer's motor) The offline auto tuning is required.
- To minimize the speed fluctuation even at a severe load fluctuation - To generate a low speed torque - To prevent machine from damage due to a too large torque (To set the torque limit) - To control the torque
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE Real sensorless vector control requires the following conditions.
If these conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control. Otherwise, malfunctions such as insufficient torque, uneven rotation may occur.
For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (It must be 0.4 kW or higher.) If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
Offline auto tuning is performed. Offline auto tuning is necessary under Real sensorless vector control even when the Mitsubishi Electric motor is used.
Single-motor operation (one motor to one inverter) is performed. A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF/FR-BMF) or sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) is not used.
Vector control With a vector control option installed, full-scale vector control operation of a motor with an encoder can be performed.
Speed control (zero speed control, servo lock), torque control, and position control can be performed with fast response and high accuracy.
Vector control has excellent control characteristic compared to other control methods such as V/F control. Its control characteristic is equal to those of DC machines.
This control method is useful for the following purposes:
NOTE Vector control requires the following conditions.
When the conditions are not satisfied, malfunctions such as insufficient torque, uneven rotation may occur. The rated motor current should be equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (It must be 0.4 kW or higher.)
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
Torque control is not available for a PM motor. The motor described in the following table is used.
Single-motor operation (one motor to one inverter) is performed. The wiring length from inverter to motor is 30 m or less. (When the wiring length exceeds 30 m, perform offline auto tuning with
the wiring in place.) A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF/FR-BMF) or sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) is not used.
PM sensorless vector control The inverter enables highly efficient motor control and highly accurate motor speed control of a PM (permanent magnet
embedded) motor, which is more efficient than an induction motor. A speed detector such as an encoder is not required as the inverter estimates the motor speed by the calculation from the
inverter output voltage and current. The inverter drives the PM motor with the least required current for a load in order to achieve the highest motor efficiency.
- To minimize the speed fluctuation even at a severe load fluctuation - To generate a low speed torque - To prevent machine from damage due to a too large torque (To set the torque limit) - To control the torque or position - To control a torque generated in a motor in a servo-lock state (the motor with its shaft stopped)
Motor Condition Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series)
The offline auto tuning is not required. Mitsubishi Electric standard motor with encoder (SF-JR) Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor with encoder (SF-HR) Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor with encoder (SF- JRCA 4P, SF-HRCA) Other motors (motors other than SF-V5RU 1500 r/min series, other manufactures' motors, etc.) The offline auto tuning is required.
2175. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
21
When using an IPM motor MM-CF, simply performing the motor parameter initialization (PM parameter initialization or IPM initialization) enables PM sensorless vector control.
NOTE The PM sensorless vector control requires the following conditions. The motor described in the following table is used.
For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (It must be 0.4 kW or higher.) If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
Single-motor operation (one motor to one inverter) is performed. The wiring length from the inverter to the motor is 100 m or less. (Refer to page 66.) (When the wiring length from the inverter
to the IPM motor MM-CF exceeds 30 m, perform offline auto tuning.) A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF/FR-BMF) or sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) is not used.
5.2.1 Vector control and Real sensorless vector control Vector control is one of the control techniques for driving an induction motor. To help explain Vector control, the fundamental equivalent circuit of an induction motor is shown below.
In the above diagram, currents flowing in the induction motor can be classified into a current id (excitation current) for making a magnetic flux in the motor and a current iq (torque current) for causing the motor to develop torque.
PM sensorless vector control image
Inverter circuitController
Output current
Output voltage
Inverter
Virtual motor
Magnetic field observer
Speed command
Speed/magnetic pole position
*1 A magnetic field observer is a control method that calculates the motor speed/magnetic pole position based on the motor voltage and current of a virtual motor which is set up in the drive unit.
*1
Motor Condition Mitsubishi Electric IPM motor (MM-CF) The offline auto tuning is not required. IPM motor (other than MM-CF), SPM motor The offline auto tuning is required.
r1: Primary resistance r2: Secondary resistance
1: Primary leakage inductance
2: Secondary leakage inductance M: Mutual inductance S: Slip id: Excitation current iq: Torque current im: Motor current
1 im
r1
r2
S Mid iq
2
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
In Vector control, the voltage and output frequency are calculated to control the motor so that the excitation current and torque current flow to the optimum as described below:
The excitation current is controlled to place the internal magnetic flux of the motor in the optimum status. The torque command value is derived so that the difference between the motor speed command and the actual speed
(speed estimated value for Real sensorless vector control) obtained from the encoder connected to the motor shaft is zero. Torque current is controlled so that torque as set in the torque command is developed.
Motor-generated torque (TM), slip angular velocity (s) and the motor's secondary magnetic flux (2) can be found by the following calculation: TM 2 iq 2 = M id
s =
where, L2: secondary inductance L2 = 2 + M
Vector control provides the following advantages: Vector control has excellent control characteristic compared to V/F control and other controls. The control characteristic of
the Vector control is equal to those of DC machines. It is applicable to fast response applications with which induction motors were previously regarded as difficult to use.
Applications requiring a wide variable-speed range from extremely low speed to high speed, frequent acceleration/ deceleration operations, continuous four-quadrant operations, etc.
Torque control is enabled (when an induction motor is used). It allows servo-lock torque control which generates a torque in the motor shaft while stopped. (Not available under Real
sensorless vector control.)
torque current
iq motor current im
excitation current id
L2 r2
id iq
2195. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
22
PWM modulation
Output voltage
conversion
Torque current control
Speed control
Slip calculation
Current conversion
Pre-excitation current control
Magnetic flux
control
Magnetic flux
calculation
*
FB - +
+
-
iq
id
Vq
Vd
0
s iq
2
id
2 id
M
FB
+
- iq
0
+
+
iq
id
*
Speed estimation
iq
*
Vq Vd
Block diagram of Real sensorless vector control
PWM modulation
Output voltage
conversion
Torque current control
Speed control
Slip calculation
Current conversion
Pre-excitation current control
Magnetic flux
control
Magnetic flux
calculation
FB - +
+
-
iq
id
Vq
Vd
0
s iq
2
id
2 id
M
Encoder
FB
+
- iq
0
+
+
iq
id
*
**
Block diagram of Vector control
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The above results are used to make PWM modulation and run the motor.
5.2.2 Changing the control method and mode Set the control method and the control mode. V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control are the control methods available for selection. The available control modes are speed control, torque control, and position control modes. Select a control mode under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control. Under Real sensorless vector control, select a control mode from the speed control and torque control modes. Under Vector control, select a control mode from the speed control, torque control, and position control modes. The control method is initially set to V/F control. When using an IPM motor MM-CF, simply performing the IPM parameter initialization enables the PM sensorless vector control and selects the speed control and position control.
Select a control method and a control mode by setting Pr.800 (Pr.451) Control method selection. The control mode can be switched using a mode switching signal (MC).
Speed control Speed control operation is performed to zero the difference between the speed command (*) and actual rotation value detected by encoder (FB). At this time, the motor load is found and its result is transferred to the torque current controller as a torque current command (iq*).
Torque current control
A voltage (Vq) is calculated to flow a current (iq) which is identical to the torque current command (iq*) found by the speed controller.
Magnetic flux control
The magnetic flux (2) of the motor is derived from the excitation current (id). The excitation current command (id*) is calculated to use that motor magnetic flux (2) as a predetermined magnetic flux.
Excitation current control
A voltage (Vd) is calculated to flow a current (id) which is identical to the excitation current command (id*).
Output frequency calculation
Motor slip (s) is calculated on the basis of the torque current value (iq) and magnetic flux (2). The output frequency (0) is found by adding that slip (s) to the feedback (FB) found by a feedback from the encoder.
2215. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
22
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher. *3 The initial value differs according to the inverter's voltage class (200/400 V class). *4 When the IPM motor MM-CF is selected in Pr.71 Applied motor, the rated frequency of the MM-CF is used. When a PM motor other than the
MM-CF is selected for Pr.71, 75 Hz (for the motor capacity 15 kW or lower) or 100 Hz (18.5 kW or higher) is used. *5 V/F control is set when Pr.453 and Pr.454 = "9999".
Setting the motor capacity and the number of motor poles (Pr.80, Pr.81) Motor specifications (the motor capacity and the number of motor poles) must be set to select Advanced magnetic flux
vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control. Set the motor capacity (kW) in Pr.80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles in Pr.81 Number of motor poles.
NOTE Setting the number of motor poles in Pr.81 changes the Pr.144 Speed setting switchover setting automatically. (Refer to
page 444.)
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
71 C100 Applied motor 0
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 8090, 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
By selecting a standard motor or constant-torque motor, the thermal characteristic and motor constant of each motor are set.
80 C101 Motor capacity 9999
0.4 to 55 kW*1 Set the applied motor capacity.
0 to 3600 kW*2
9999 V/F control 81 C102 Number of motor poles 9999
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of motor poles. 9999 V/F control
83 C104 Rated motor voltage 200/400 V*3 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage (V).
84 C105 Rated motor frequency 9999
10 to 400 Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz). 9999 The setting value of Pr.3 Base frequency is used.*4
800 G200 Control method selection 20
0 to 6 Vector control 9 Vector control, PM sensorless vector control test operation 10 to 12 Real sensorless vector control 13, 14 PM sensorless vector control
20 V/F control / Advanced magnetic flux vector control / PM sensorless vector control
100 to 106 Vector control
Fast-response operation
109 Vector control, PM sensorless vector control test operation
110 to 112 Real sensorless vector control 110, 113, 114 PM sensorless vector control
451 G300
Second motor control method selection 9999
0 to 6 Vector control 10 to 12 Real sensorless vector control 13, 14 PM sensorless vector control 20 V/F control (Advanced magnetic flux vector control) 100 to 106 Vector control
Fast-response operation110 to 112 Real sensorless vector control
110, 113, 114 PM sensorless vector control
9999 Advanced magnetic flux vector control when the induction motor is selected in Pr.71.*5 As set in Pr.800 when the PM motor is selected in Pr.71.
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Selection of the control method and the control mode Select a control method (and a control mode) from V/F control (speed control), Advanced magnetic flux vector control
(speed control), Real sensorless vector control (speed control or torque control), Vector control (speed control, torque control, or position control), or PM sensorless vector control (speed control or position control).
*1 The setting values of 100 and above are used when the fast-response operation is selected. *2 Advanced magnetic flux vector control is applied if a Vector control compatible option is not installed. *3 For an induction motor, the setting "13, 14, 113, or 114" in Pr.800 (Pr.451) has the same meaning as the setting "10 or 110" in Pr.800 (Pr.451)
(speed control under Real sensorless vector control).
Settings of Pr.80 (Pr.453)
and Pr.81 (Pr.454)
Pr.71 (Pr.450)
Pr.800 setting*1
Pr.451 setting*1 Control method Control mode Remarks
Other than 9999
Induction motor*3
0, 100
Vector control*2
Speed control 1, 101 Torque control
2, 102 Speed control / torque control switchover
MC signal ON: torque control MC signal OFF: speed control
3, 103 Position control
4, 104 Speed control / position control switchover
MC signal ON: position control MC signal OFF: speed control
5, 105 Position control / torque control switchover
MC signal ON: torque control MC signal OFF: position control
6, 106 Torque control (variable-current limiter control)
9, 109 Vector control test operation 10, 110
Real sensorless vector control
Speed control 11, 111 Torque control
12, 112 Speed control / torque control switchover
MC signal ON: torque control MC signal OFF: speed control
20 (initial value) 20 Advanced magnetic flux
vector control Speed control
9999 (initial value) Advanced magnetic flux vector control for the second motor
IPM motor (MM-CF)*4
9, 109 PM sensorless vector control test operation 13, 113
PM sensorless vector control
Position control*6
14, 114 Speed control / position control switchover*6
MC signal ON: position control MC signal OFF: speed control
20 (initial value), 110 20, 110 Speed control
IPM/SPM motor (other than MM-CF)
0, 100*7
Vector control*9
Speed control 3, 103 Position control
4, 104*8 Speed control / position control switchover
MC signal ON: position control MC signal OFF: speed control
9, 109 PM sensorless vector control test operation 20 (initial value), 110*10
20, 110*10 PM sensorless vector control Speed control
IPM/SPM motor 9999 (initial
value) The setting value of Pr.800 is used for the second motor. (PM sensorless vector control (speed control) when Pr.800 = "9 or 109")
9999*5 V/F control
2235. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
22
*4 For the IPM motor MM-CF, the setting other than "9, 13, 14, 109, 113, 114, or 9999" in Pr.800 (Pr.451) has the same meaning as the setting "20 or 110" in Pr.800 (Pr.451) (speed control under PM sensorless vector control).
*5 V/F control is applied when Pr.80 or Pr.81 is "9999", regardless of the Pr.800 setting. When Pr.71 is set to the IPM motor MM-CF, PM sensorless vector control is enabled even if Pr.80 "9999" or Pr.81 = "9999". (When other PM motors are used, set Pr.80 and Pr.81 according to the motor. Otherwise, proper operation cannot be performed.)
*6 Setting Pr.788 (Pr.747) = "0" (low-speed range torque characteristic disabled) selects speed control. *7 The operation for the setting of "0 or 100" is performed when "1, 2, 6, 101, 102, or 106" is set. *8 The operation for the setting of "4 or 104" is performed when "5 or 105" is set. *9 Speed control under PM sensorless vector control is applied if an option for vector control for PM motor is not installed. *10 The operation for the setting of "20 or 110" is performed when "10 to 14 or 111 to 114" is set.
Selecting the fast-response operation (Pr.800 (Pr.451) = 100 to 106, or 109 to 114")
Setting Pr.800 (Pr.451) = "any of 100 to 106 or 109 to 114" selects the fast-response operation. The fast-response operation is available during Vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and PM sensorless vector control.
*1 When driving a 3.7 kW no-load motor. *2 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *3 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
NOTE During fast-response operation, the carrier frequency is always 4 kHz. (Refer to page 356.) The inverter overload trip (E.THT) is more likely to occur when fast-response operation is set at the SLD or LD rating.
Vector control test operation, PM sensorless vector control test operation (Pr.800 = "9 or 109")
A test operation for speed control is available without connecting a motor to the inverter. The speed calculation changes to track the speed command, and such speed changes can be checked on the operation panel or by outputting it as analog signals to terminal FM/CA or AM.
NOTE Since current is not detected and voltage is not output, monitors related to current and voltage such as output current and
output voltage, etc. and output signals do not function. For speed calculation, speed is calculated in consideration of Pr.880 Load inertia ratio. Since current synchronization operation occurs during the test operation for PM sensorless vector control, the output
frequency becomes the same value as the command frequency.
I/O signal status during the test operation During the test operation, the following signals are disabled.
Control method Speed response
Fast-response operation Pr.800 (Pr.451) = "100 to 106, or 109 to 114"
Normal-response operation Pr.800 (Pr.451) = "0 to 6, or 9 to 14"
Vector control 130 Hz at maximum 50 Hz at maximum
Real sensorless vector control 50 Hz at maximum*1 20 Hz at maximum*2
10 Hz at maximum*3
PM sensorless vector control 50 Hz at maximum 30 Hz at maximum
Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.189) Output terminal function selection (Pr.190 to Pr.196)
Brake opening completion (BRI) Load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost (X17) V/F switchover (X18) Orientation command (X22) Control mode switchover (MC) Start-time tuning start external input (X28) Torque bias selection 1, Torque bias selection 2 (X42, X43) Second brake sequence open completion (BRI2) Torque limit selection (X93)
Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm (THP) Brake opening request (BOF) Second brake opening request (BOF2) Orientation complete (ORA) Orientation fault (ORM) Regenerative status output (Y32) In-position (Y36) Travel completed (MEND) Start time tuning completion (Y39) Home position return failure (ZA) Position detection level (FP) During position command operation (PBSY) Home position return completed (ZP)
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters referred to Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
Status of the monitoring during the test operation : Enabled : Disabled (0 is displayed at any time.) : A cumulative total before the test operation is displayed. : Not available
*1 The monitoring-enabled items differ depending on the output interface (operation panel, parameter unit, terminal FM/CA, or terminal AM). For the details, refer to page 457.
*2 When the inverter operation is switched to the test operation, the indication is changed to 0. When PM sensorless vector control is selected again after the test operation, the output current peak value and the electronic thermal relay load factor from the last operation are displayed.
*3 The output is enabled via terminal AM only. *4 When the inverter operation is switched to the test operation, the accumulated thermal value is reduced because the output current is considered
as 0.
Parameters referred to Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selectionpage 446 Pr.158 AM terminal function selectionpage 457
Changing the control method with external terminals (RT signal, X18 signal)
Control method (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control) can be switched using external terminals. The control method can be switched using either the Second function selection (RT) signal or the V/F switchover (X18) signal.
When using the RT signal, set the second motor in Pr.450 Second applied motor and set the second motor's control method in Pr.451 Second motor control method selection. Turning ON the RT signal enables the second function, enabling the switchover of the control method.
Monitor item Monitoring on DU/PU
Output via FM/ CA/AM Monitor item Monitoring on
DU/PU Output via FM/
CA/AM Output frequency PID deviation *3
Fault indication Input terminal status Frequency setting value Output terminal status
Motor speed Option input terminal status
Converter output voltage Option output terminal status
Electronic thermal O/L relay load factor *2 *2 Motor thermal load factor *4 *4
Output current peak value *2 *2 Inverter thermal load factor *4 *4
Converter output voltage peak value PTC thermistor value
Load meter PID measured value 2 Cumulative energization time Remote output 1 Reference voltage output Remote output 2 Actual operation time Remote output 3 Cumulative energy Remote output 4 Trace status PID manipulated variable *3
Station number (RS-485 terminals) Second PID set point
Station number (PU connector) Second PID measured
value
Station number (CC-Link) Second PID deviation *3
Energy saving effect Second PID measured value 2
Cumulative energy saving Second PID manipulated variable *3
PID set point Dancer main speed setting
PID measured value
2255. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
22
When using the X18 signal, turning ON the X18 signal switches the presently-selected control method (Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control) to the V/F control. Use this method to switch the control method for one motor. At this time, the second functions including the electronic thermal O/L relay characteristic are not changed. (To switch the second functions, use the RT signal.) To input the X18 signal, set "18" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
*1 V/F control is set by turning ON the X18 signal. *2 V/F control when Pr.453 or Pr.454 is set to "9999" regardless of the Pr.451 setting. When Pr.450 is set to the IPM motor MM-CF, PM sensorless
vector control is enabled even if Pr.453 "9999" or Pr.454 = "9999".
NOTE The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal. The RT signal is a second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 525.) The control method could be changed by external terminals (RT signal, X18 signal) while the inverter is stopped. If a signal is
switched during the operation, the control method changes after the inverter stops.
Switching between two encoder-equipped motors (Pr.862) Using the Vector control compatible plug-in options together with the control terminal option (FR-A8TP) enables the Vector
control operation by switching between two encoder-equipped motors according to the RT signal. Use Pr.862 Encoder option selection to set the combination of the motors (first/second), plug-in option, and control terminal option.
*1 When Pr.450 Second applied motor ="9999", the first motor is selected even if the RT signal turns ON.
NOTE Pr.862 setting is valid even when either the plug-in option or control terminal option is installed. For using the control terminal
option alone, the motor does not run when Pr.862 is the initial value as it is. (When the RT signal is OFF)
Changing the control mode with external terminals (MC signal) The setting of Pr.800 or Pr.451 can be used to switch the control mode by turning ON/OFF the MC signal. Refer to page
223 to set Pr.800 or Pr.451. To input the MC signal, set "26" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
First motor control method Second motor control method (RT signal-ON) Pr.450 setting Pr.453 to Pr.454
settings Pr.451 setting
V/F control
V/F control 9999 9999 9999*2
Advanced magnetic flux vector control Induction motor
Other than 9999
20
Real sensorless vector control 10 to 14
Vector control Induction motor 0 to 6, 100 to
106 IPM/SPM motor 0, 3, 4, 6
PM sensorless vector control, IPM/SPM motor Other than 9999
Advanced magnetic flux vector control*1
Real sensorless vector control*1
Vector control*1 PM sensorless vector control
Same control as the first motor*1 9999
V/F control 9999*2 Advanced magnetic flux vector control Induction motor
Other than 9999
20, 9999
Real sensorless vector control 10 to 14
Vector control Induction motor 0 to 6, 100 to
106 IPM/SPM motor 0, 3, 4, 6
PM sensorless vector control, IPM/SPM motor Other than 9999
Pr.862 Encoder option selection
RT signal-OFF (First motor)
RT signal-ON (Second motor)*1
0 (initial value) Plug-in option Control terminal option 1 Control terminal option Plug-in option
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When using an analog input terminal (terminal 1, 4) for torque limit and torque command, switching of the control mode changes the terminal function as follows:
Functions of the terminal 1 under different control modes
Terminal 4 functions by control
: No function *1 Real sensorless vector control (Pr.800 = "12"), vector control (Pr.800 = "2") *2 Vector control (Pr.800 = "4"), PM sensorless vector control (Pr.800 ="14") *3 Vector control (Pr.800 = "5") *4 This function is valid under vector control. *5 Invalid when Pr.868 = "1". *6 Invalid when Pr.868 = "4".
NOTE Switching between the speed control and the torque control is always enabled regardless of the motor status: in a stop, in
running, or in DC injection brake (during pre-excitation). During operation, switching between speed control and position control or between torque control and position control occurs
when the output frequency reaches Pr.865 Low speed detection or lower with no position command given. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.450 Second applied motorpage 528 Pr.804 Torque command source selectionpage 283 Pr.807 Speed limit selectionpage 287 Pr.810 Torque limit input method selectionpage 245 Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500
Pr.868 setting
Speed control/torque control switchover*1
Speed control/position control switchover*2
Position control/torque control switchover*3
Speed control (MC signal-OFF)
Torque control (MC signal-ON)
Speed control (MC signal-OFF)
Position control (MC signal-ON)
Position control (MC signal-OFF)
Torque control (MC signal-ON)
0 (initial value)
Auxiliary speed setting
Speed limit assistance
Auxiliary speed setting Speed limit
assistance
1 Magnetic flux command*4
Magnetic flux command*4
Magnetic flux command*4
Magnetic flux command*4
Magnetic flux command
Magnetic flux command
2 Regenerative torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
Regenerative torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
Regenerative torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
Regenerative torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
3 Torque command (Pr.804 = "0") Torque command
(Pr.804 = "0")
4 Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
Torque command (Pr.804 = "0")
Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
Torque command (Pr.804 = "0")
5 Forward/reverse rotation speed limit (Pr.807 = "2")
Forward/reverse rotation speed limit (Pr.807 = "2")
6 Torque bias 9999
Pr.858 setting
Speed control/torque control switchover*1
Speed control/position control switchover*2
Position control/torque control switchover*3
Speed control (MC signal-OFF)
Torque control (MC signal-ON)
Speed control (MC signal-OFF)
Position control (MC signal-ON)
Position control (MC signal-OFF)
Torque control (MC signal-ON)
0 (initial value)
Speed command (AU signal-ON)
Speed limit (AU signal-ON)
Speed command (AU signal-ON)
Speed limit (AU signal-ON)*4
1 Magnetic flux command*4*5
Magnetic flux command *4*5
Magnetic flux command *4*5
Magnetic flux command *4*5
Magnetic flux command*5
Magnetic flux command*5
4 Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")*6
Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")*6
Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")*6
Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")*6
9999
2275. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
22
5.2.3 Selecting the Advanced magnetic flux vector control
To use the Advanced magnetic flux vector control, set the motor capacity, the number of motor poles, and the motor type using Pr.80 and Pr.81.
Advanced magnetic flux vector control Operating procedure 1. Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 46.)
2. Make the motor setting (Pr.71).
*1 For the other setting values of Pr.71, refer to page 528. *2 For offline auto tuning, refer to page 532.
3. Set the motor overheat protection (Pr.9). (Refer to page 415.)
4. Set the motor capacity and number of motor poles (Pr.80, Pr.81). (Refer to page 221.) V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).
5. Set the rated motor voltage and frequency (Pr.83, Pr.84). (Refer to page 532.)
6. Set the operation command. (Refer to page 389.) Select the start command and speed command.
7. Perform the test operation.
As required Perform the offline auto tuning (Pr.96). (Refer to page 532.) Select the online auto tuning (Pr.95). (Refer to page 558.)
NOTE To perform driving in a better accuracy, perform offline auto tuning, then set the online auto tuning, and select Real sensorless
vector control. Under this control, rotations are more likely to be uneven than under V/F control. (This control method is not suitable for
grinder, wrapping machine, etc., which require even rotation at a low speed.) For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, the operation with a surge voltage suppression
filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) installed between the inverter and the motor may reduce the output torque. The optional sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) cannot be used between the inverter and the motor. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Magnetic flux
Motor Pr.71 setting*1 Remarks
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor
SF-JR 0 (initial value) (3, 4) SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 20 SF-HR 40 Others 0 (3) Offline auto tuning is required.*2
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor SF-JRCA 4P 1 SF-HRCA 50 Other (SF-JRC, etc.) 1 (13) Offline auto tuning is required.*2
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor SF-PR 70
Other manufacturer's standard motor 0 (3) Offline auto tuning is required.*2
Other manufacturer's constant-torque motor 1 (13) Offline auto tuning is required.*2
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Keeping the motor speed constant when the load fluctuates (speed control gain)
Use Pr.89 to keep the motor speed constant during variable load operation. (This parameter is useful to make adjustments on the motor speed after replacing a conventional model with an FR-A800 series model.)
Driving two motors under Advanced magnetic flux vector control Turning ON the Second function selection (RT) signal enables the second motor operation. Set a second motor in Pr.450 Second applied motor. (In the initial setting, "9999" (no second applied motor) is selected.
Refer to page 528.)
NOTE The RT signal is a Second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 525.)
The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.71, Pr.450 Applied motorpage 528 Pr.800, Pr.451 Control method selectionpage 221
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
89 G932
Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic flux vector)
9999 0 to 200%
Makes adjustments to keep the motor speed constant during variable load operation under Advanced magnetic flux vector control. The reference value is 100%.
9999 The gain set by Pr.71. (The gain set in accordance with the motor.)
569 G942
Second motor speed control gain 9999
0 to 200% Makes adjustments to keep the second motor speed constant during variable load operation under Advanced magnetic flux vector control. The reference value is 100%.
9999 The gain set by Pr.450. (The gain set in accordance with the motor.)
Function RT signal-ON (second motor) RT signal-OFF (first motor) Applied motor Pr.450 Pr.71 Motor capacity Pr.453 Pr.80 Number of motor poles Pr.454 Pr.81 Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic flux vector) Pr.569 Pr.89
Control method selection Pr.451 Pr.800
Lo ad
to rq
ue
Speed
2295. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
23
5.2.4 Selecting the PM sensorless vector control
Setting for the PM sensorless vector control by selecting IPM initialization on the operation panel
(" ")
The parameters required to drive an IPM motor MM-CF are automatically set by batch. (Refer to page 231.) [PM] indicator on the operation panel (FR-DU08) is turned ON when the PM sensorless vector control is set.
The following shows the procedure to initialize the parameter settings for an MM-CF IPM motor by selecting IPM parameter initialization on the operation panel.
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode
Press to choose the PU operation mode.
[PU] indicator turns ON.
3. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode.
[PRM] indicator is ON.
4. IPM initialization selection
Turn until " " (IPM initialization) appears.
5. Displaying the set value
Press to read the present set value.
" " (initial value) appears.
6. Changing the setting value
Turn to change the value to " ", and press to confirm it.
" " and " " are displayed alternately. The setting is completed.
NOTE If parameters are initialized for a PM motor in the IPM initialization mode, the Pr.998 PM parameter initialization setting is
automatically changed. In the initial parameter setting, the capacity same as the inverter capacity is set in Pr.80 Motor capacity. To use a motor
capacity that is one rank lower than the inverter capacity, set Pr.80 Motor capacity by selecting the mode on the operation panel.
To set a speed by adjusting frequencies or to monitor it, use Pr.998. (Refer to page 231.)
Setting Description 0 Parameter settings for an induction motor 3003 Parameter settings for MM-CF IPM motor (rotations per minute)
PM
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Initializing the parameters required for the PM sensorless vector control (Pr.998)
PM parameter initialization sets parameters required for driving an IPM motor MM-CF. The offline auto tuning enables the operation with an IPM motor other than MM-CF and with SPM motors. Two MM-CF PM parameter initialization methods are available; setting Pr.998 PM parameter initialization, and selecting
IPM initialization (" ") on the operation panel.
To use a motor capacity that is one rank lower than the inverter capacity, set Pr.80 Motor capacity before performing PM parameter initialization.
When Pr.998 = "3003, 8009, or 9009", the monitor is displayed and the frequency is set using the motor rotations per minute. To use frequency to display or set, set Pr.998 = "3103, 8109, or 9109".
Set Pr.998 = "0" to change the PM sensorless vector control parameter settings to the parameter settings required to drive an induction motor.
When using an IPM motor or SPM motor other than MM-CF, set Pr.998 = "8009, 8109, 9009, or 9109".
NOTE Make sure to set Pr.998 before setting other parameters. If the Pr.998 setting is changed after setting other parameters, some
of those parameters are initialized too. (Refer to the "List of the target parameters for the motor parameter initialization".) To change back to the parameter settings required to drive an induction motor, perform Parameter clear or All parameter clear. If the setting of Pr.998 PM parameter initialization is changed between "3003, 8009, 9009 (rotations per minute)" "3103,
8109, 9109 (frequency)", the target parameters are respectively set to their initial values. The purpose of Pr.998 is not to change the display units. Use Pr.144 Speed setting switchover to change the display units between rotations per minute and frequency. Using Pr.144 enables switching the unit between rotations per minute and frequencies without initializing the setting of the motor parameters. Example) Changing the Pr.144 setting between "6" and "106" switches the display units between frequency and rotations per minute.
For an inverter out of the capacity range of the IPM motor MM-CF, "3003 or 3103" cannot be set. (Refer to page 833 for the capacities of MM-CF motors.)
The PM parameter initialization (Pr.998) changes parameter settings for the first motor. When a PM motor is used as the second motor, parameters for the second motor must be set individually.
List of the target parameters for the motor parameter initialization The parameter settings in the following table are changed to the settings required to perform PM sensorless vector control
by selecting the IPM initialization on the operation panel or by using Pr.998 PM parameter initialization. The changed settings differ according to the specification (capacity) of the PM motor used.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
998 E430
PM parameter initialization 0
0 Parameter setting (in frequencies) for an induction motor
The setting of the motor parameters is changed to the setting required to drive an induction motor.
3003 Parameter setting (in rotations per minute) for the MM-CF IPM motor The setting of the motor parameters is
changed to the setting required to drive an IPM motor.3103 Parameter setting (in frequencies) for the
MM-CF IPM motor
8009 Parameter setting (in rotations per minute) for an IPM motor other than MM-CF (after tuning)
The setting of the motor parameters is changed to the setting required to drive an IPM motor. (Set Pr.71 Applied motor and perform offline auto tuning in advance. (Refer to page 551.))8109
Parameter setting (in frequencies) for an IPM motor other than the MM-CF (after tuning)
9009 Parameter setting (in rotations per minute) for an SPM motor (after tuning)
The setting of the motor parameters is changed to the setting required to drive an SPM motor. (Set Pr.71 Applied motor and perform offline auto tuning in advance. (Refer to page 551.))
9109 Parameter setting (in frequencies) for an SPM motor (after tuning)
2315. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
23
Performing Parameter clear or All parameter clear resets these parameter settings to the settings required to drive an induction motor.
Pr. Name
Setting Setting incrementsInduction
motor PM motor (setting in rotations per minute)
PM motor (setting in frequencies)
0 (initial value)
3003 (MM- CF)
8009 9009
(other than MM-
CF)
3103 (MM- CF)
8109 9109
(other than MM-
CF)
3003, 8009, 9009
0, 3003, 8109, 9109FM CA
1 Maximum frequency
120 Hz*1
3000 r/min
Maximum motor rotations per minute*8
200 Hz
Maximum motor frequency*
8
1 r/min 0.01 Hz 60 Hz*2
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay Inverter rated current
Rated motor current*10
Rated motor current*10
0.01 A*1
0.1 A*2
13 Starting frequency 0.5 Hz 8 r/min*5 Pr.84 10% 0.5 Hz*6 Pr.84
10% 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
15 Jog frequency 5 Hz 200 r/min Pr.84 10% 13.33 Hz Pr.84
10% 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
18 High speed maximum frequency
120 Hz*1 3000 r/min 200 Hz 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
60 Hz*2
20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
22 Stall prevention operation level 150%*7 150%*7 0.1%
37 Speed display 0 0 1
55 Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
56 Current monitoring reference
Inverter rated current
Rated motor current*10
Pr.859 Rated motor current*10
Pr.859 0.01 A*1
0.1 A*2
71 Applied motor 0 330*3 330*3 1
80 Motor capacity 9999 Motor capacity (MM-CF)*4
Motor capacity (MM-CF)*4
0.01 kW*1
0.1 kW*2
81 Number of motor poles 9999 8*4 8*4 1 84 Rated motor frequency 9999 2000 r/min 133.33 Hz 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
116 Third output frequency detection 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
125 (903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
126 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
144 Speed setting switchover 4 108 Pr.81 +100 8 Pr.81 1
240 Soft-PWM operation selection 1 0 1
263 Subtraction starting frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
374 Overspeed detection level 9999 3150 r/min
Maximum motor rotations per minute + 10 Hz*8*9
210 Hz
Maximum motor frequency + 10 Hz*8
1 r/min 0.01 Hz
386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
505 Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 133.33 Hz Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 0.01 Hz
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
: Not changed *1 Initial value for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 Initial value for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) and higher. *3 When Pr.71 Applied motor = "333, 334, 8093, 8094, 9093, or 9094", the Pr.71 setting is not changed. *4 When a value other than "9999" is set, the set value is not changed. *5 200 r/min when Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection = "0". *6 13.33 Hz when Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection = "0". *7 110% for SLD, 120% for LD, 150% for ND, and 200% for HD (Refer to Pr.570 Multiple rating setting on page 343.) *8 The Pr.702 Maximum motor frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency (rotations per minute). When Pr.702 ="9999 (initial value)",
the Pr.84 Rated motor frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency (rotations per minute). *9 The setting value is converted from frequency to rotations per minute. (It differs according to the number of motor poles.) *10 Refer to page 833 for the rated motor current of MM-CF.
NOTE If IPM parameter initialization is performed in rotations per minute (Pr.998 = "3003, 8009, or 9009"), the parameters not listed
in the table and the monitor items are also set and displayed in rotations per minute.
5.2.5 Low-speed range torque characteristics
The torque characteristics in a low-speed range under PM sensorless vector control can be changed.
557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current
Inverter rated current
Rated motor current*10
Pr.859 Rated motor current*10
Pr.859 0.01 A*1
0.1 A*2
820 Speed control P gain 1 60% 30% 1% 821 Speed control integral time 1 0.333 s 0.333 s 0.001 s
824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain)
100% 100% 1%
825 Torque control integral time 1 (current loop integral time) 5 ms 20 ms 0.1 ms
870 Speed detection hysteresis 0 Hz 8 r/min 0.5 Hz*9 0.5 Hz 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
885 Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value
6 Hz 200 r/min Pr.84 10% 13.33 Hz Pr.84
10% 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity)
Inverter rated current Motor capacity (Pr.80)
0.01 kW*1
0.1 kW*2
C14 (918)
Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
1121 Per-unit speed control reference frequency
120 Hz*1
3000 r/min
Maximum motor rotations per minute*8
200 Hz
Maximum motor frequency*
8
1 r/min 0.01 Hz 60 Hz*2
Pr. Name
Setting Setting incrementsInduction
motor PM motor (setting in rotations per minute)
PM motor (setting in frequencies)
0 (initial value)
3003 (MM- CF)
8009 9009
(other than MM-
CF)
3103 (MM- CF)
8109 9109
(other than MM-
CF)
3003, 8009, 9009
0, 3003, 8109, 9109FM CA
PM
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Operation
788 G250
Low speed range torque characteristic selection 9999
0 Disables the low-speed range torque characteristic (current synchronization operation).
9999*1 Enables the low-speed range torque characteristic (high frequency superposition control)
747 G350
Second motor low-speed range torque characteristic selection
9999 0 Disables the low-speed range torque characteristic (current
synchronization operation) while the RT signal is ON.
9999*1 Enables the low-speed range torque characteristic (high frequency superposition control) while the RT signal is ON.
2335. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
23
*1 The low-speed range high-torque characteristic (current synchronization operation) is disabled for PM motors other than MM-CF, even if "9999" is set.
When the low-speed range torque characteristic is enabled (Pr.788 = "9999 (initial value)")
The high frequency superposition control provides enough torque in the low-speed range operation. The low-speed range high-torque characteristic is only valid with an MM-CF motor.
When the low-speed range high-torque characteristic is disabled (Pr.788 = "0")
The current synchronization operation reduces much motor noise compared with the high frequency superposition control. Since the torque in a low-speed range is low, use this setting for an operation with light start-up load.
Low-speed range high-torque characteristic is set for the second motor (Pr.747)
Use Pr.747 Second motor low-speed range torque characteristic selection to switch the torque characteristic in a low- speed range according to the application or to switch among motors connected to one inverter.
The Pr.747 becomes valid when the RT signal turns ON.
NOTE Position control under PM sensorless vector control is not available when the current synchronization operation is selected.
Zero speed and servo lock are also disabled during current synchronization operation. For torque characteristics, refer to page 833. The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.2 Control method
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
Speed control performs control so that the speed command and the actual motor rotation speed match.
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
To limit the torque during speed control Torque limit
P.H500, P.H700 to P.H704, P.H710, P.H720, P.H721, P.H730, P.T010, P.T040, P.G210
Pr.22, Pr.801, Pr.803, Pr.810, Pr.812 to Pr.817, Pr.858, Pr.868, Pr.874
245
To adjust the speed control gain Easy gain tuning gain adjustment
P.C112 to P.C114, P.G206, P.G211, P.G212, P.G218, P.G260, P.G261, P.G311, P.G312, P.G361
Pr.818 to Pr.821, Pr.830, Pr.831, Pr.880, Pr.1115 to Pr.1118, Pr.1121
254
To improve the motor trackability for the speed command changes
Speed feed forward control, model adaptive speed control
P.G220 to P.G224, P.G262, P.C114
Pr.828, Pr.877 to Pr.881, Pr.1119
263
To stabilize the speed detection signal Speed detection filter P.G215, P.G315 Pr.823, Pr.833 332
To make starting torque start-up faster Torque bias P.G230 to
P.G238 Pr.840 to Pr.848 265
To avoid motor overrunning Speed deviation excess, speed limit, deceleration check
P.H415 to P.H417, P.H881
Pr.285, Pr.690, Pr.853, Pr.873 269
To avoid mechanical resonance Notch filter P.G601 to P.G603
Pr.1003 to Pr.1005 271
To adjust the gain during PM sensorless vector control Speed control gain adjustment P.G211, P.G212 Pr.820, Pr.821 254
2355. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
23
Control block diagram
NOTE The RT (Second function selection) signal and the X9 (Third function selection) signal are used to enable switching between
acceleration/deceleration time settings. The acceleration/deceleration time after switching depends on the settings in Pr.44 Second acceleration/deceleration time and Pr.45 Second deceleration time, or Pr.110 Third acceleration/deceleration time and Pr.111 Third deceleration time. The acceleration/deceleration time is a period of time taken to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.
Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments is used to change the setting increment. When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected, the inverter accelerates the motor from the frequency
search result frequency to the set frequency. (Pr.57 Restart coasting time 9999, Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection = "10, 12, 13, 1010, 1012, or 1013")
Pr.811 Set resolution switchover is used to change the setting increment for speed setting, operation speed monitoring, and torque limit setting.
Pr.862 Encoder option selection is used to change the Vector control compatible plug-in option or the control terminal option for the first and second motors.
To avoid overdriving the motor due to incorrect encoder pulse settings, the output frequency can be limited with the set frequency plus the value set in Pr.873 Speed limit.
Terminal 2
Terminal 4 [Pr.858 = 0]
Terminal 1 [Pr.868 = 0]
RL
RM
RH
REX
Option
Operation panel
Servo lock
Servo lock
DC injection brake operation
Zero speed control
Zero speed control
Multi-speed selection
[Pr.4 to 6, 24 to 27,
232 to 239]
Pre-excitation selection [Pr.802]
LX signal ON
LX signalDeceleration stop [Pr.11]
Deceleration stop [Pr.11]
Brake operation selection [Pr.850]
Speed setting filter
Terminal 2 bias [C2, C3(Pr.902)] Terminal 2 gain [Pr.125, C4(Pr.903)]
Terminal 4 bias [C5, C6(Pr.904)] Terminal 4 gain [Pr.126, C7(Pr.905)]
Analog input offset adjustment [Pr.849]
Analog input selection [Pr.73]
Operation mode [Pr.79]
Upper/lower limit setting
[Pr.1]
[Pr.2] [Pr.13]
Acceleration/deceleration
Vector control
Control mode
Real sensorless vector control
Running
During stop
[Pr.10]
[Pr.7] [Pr.8]
1
0
1
0
AU signal
[Pr.822]
=9999
9999
[Pr.74]
[Pr.822]
RT signal
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
A
[Pr.832]
=9999
9999
[Pr.74]
[Pr.822]
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-
-
0
0
1,2
1 1
22
2
0,1
24,25
- +
+
+
+
+ +
+ + +
0
Absolute value
B
A
C
D
Speed controller P/PI selection
Speed feed forward control
Droop control
Speed feed forward control/ model adaptive speed
control selection [Pr.877]
Speed feed forward control/ model adaptive speed
control selection [Pr.877]
Load inertia ratio Js
[Pr.880]
Model speed control gain
[Pr.828] ([Pr.1119])
Speed control P gain [Pr.820]
([Pr.830]) ([Pr.1117]) ([Pr.1118])
([Pr.1109(PROFIBUS)])
Speed control integral time
[Pr.821] ([Pr.831])
([Pr.1109(PROFIBUS)])
Iq* limiter
T100% JIq100%
Iq* limiter Iq* limiter Notch filter
[Pr.1003 to 1005]
Speed control P gain compensation amount in
the constant output range [Pr.1116] Control mode
Speed limit value
Speed command value
Droop speed
Encoder option (FR-A8AP, FR-A8AL, or others)
Speed detection filter [Pr.823]
([Pr.833])
Control method Speed detection value
Speed estimation value
Torque bias selection [Pr.840]
Contact input terminal X42,X43
Torque bias [Pr.841 to 843]
Analog input Terminal 1
Terminal 1 [Pr.868 = 6]
PROFIBUS communication
Torque setting filter
[Pr.826] ([Pr.836])
Torque bias filter [Pr.844]
Control method
E Torque current command value
Iq*
Input filter time constant [Pr.74]
Torque bias [Pr.846 to 848] [Pr.919 to 920]
Torque control
Vector control
Real sensorless vector control
Vector control/ Real sensorless
vector control
Other control method
Speed control
d/dt limiter 400Hz
T100% Iq100%
J
Speed feed forward gain
[Pr.881]
Speed feed forward filter
[Pr.878]
Speed feed forward torque limit
[Pr.879]
Speed controller
Model adaptive speed control
Torque bias Torque limit
2375. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
23
B
Speed controller P/PI selection
Speed control integral term clear time
[Pr.1115]
X44 signal ON, or P/PI control switchover frequency [Pr.1348] estimated speed value
Torque bias operation time [Pr.845]
One of the conditions satisfied Torque bias selection
[Pr.845 9999]
0
C
Droop control
Rated motor frequency [Pr.84]
Control mode
Droop speed
Droop function activation selection
[Pr.288]
Speed control
Torque control
Iq100%
Speed detection value
Rated motor frequency [Pr.84]
Per-unit speed control reference frequency [Pr.1121]
0 to 2
10,11
20 to 22
Droop filter time constant [Pr.287]
Droop gain [Pr.286]
[Pr.1109(PROFIBUS)]
0
2
1
ON
OFF
ON
OFFNo
D
Torque limit
Analog input Terminal 1, 4
Torque setting filter
Terminal 1 [Pr.868 = 4]
Terminal 4 [Pr.858 = 4]
TL signal ON or X92 signal ON
Control mode Vector control
Constant output range torque characteristic selection
[Pr.803] Output limit level
[Pr.801] Output limit level
[Pr.801]
Real sensorless vector control30%
PROFIBUS communication settings using REF 1 to 7
Torque setting filter
[Pr.826] ([Pr.836])
Torque limit input method selection
[Pr.810]
Input filter time constant [Pr.74]
Torque command source selection [Pr.804]
Torque command value [Pr.805]
([Pr.806])
1
3,5,6PROFIBUS communication CC-Link communication
CC-Link IE communication
[Pr.826] RT signal
[Pr.836]
During acceleration or deceleration
Terminal 1 bias [C16, C17 (Pr.919)] Terminal 1 gain [C18, C19 (Pr.920)]
Stall prevention operation level [Pr.22] Torque limit level (regeneration) [Pr.812] Torque limit level (3rd quadrant) [Pr.813] Torque limit level (4th quadrant) [Pr.814] Torque limit level 2
[Pr.815]
Torque limit level during acceleration
[Pr.816]
Torque limit level during deceleration
[Pr.817]
Terminal 4 bias [C38, C39 (Pr.932)] Terminal 4 gain [C40, C41 (Pr.933)]
[Pr.826] 9999
ON
OFF
= 9999
9999
= 9999
[Pr.74]
[Pr.836]
[Pr.74]
PROFIBUS communication settings using REF 1 to 7
Yes
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
+ -
100%
+ +
70%
PROFIBUS communication
One of the conditions satisfied
Vector control
Real sensorless vector control
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
E Torque current command value
Iq*
Slip frequency operation
Thermistor R2 compensation
Motor temperature detection filter [Pr.407]
FR-A8AZ Both conditions satisfied
Both conditions satisfied
One of the conditions satisfied Real sensorless vector control
Magnetic flux observer enabled
Logic inverted
Online auto tuning selection [Pr.95]
Magnetic flux observer sl
Slip frequency sl
Output frequency out
Speed detection value
[Pr.1109 = [][][]1] and Vector control
selected
Rated motor frequency [Pr.84]
Excitation ratio [Pr.854]
Control method
Control mode
Magnetic flux command value
Estimated magnetic flux value
Magnetic flux controller
Magnetic flux operation
F Excitation current command value
Id*
Magnetic flux observer Estimated magnetic flux value
[Pr.95=2] Magnetic flux observer enabled or Real sensorless vector control selected
Excitation current low-speed scaling factor
[Pr.86]
Stop-on contact excitation current low-speed scaling factor
[Pr.275]
Speed control
Torque control
Excitation current break point
[Pr.85] (10Hz)
Excitation current break point
[Pr.85] (10Hz)
Stop-on-contact control
[Pr.868 = 1] and Vector control
selected Analog input Terminal 1
Magnetic flux 100%
Excitation ratio
Real sensorless low-speed excitation
Stop-on contact excitation
Secondary resistance temperature compensation
(130%)
Magnetic flux control / slip frequency
2395. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
24
5.3.1 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector control (speed control)
Operating procedure 1. Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 46.)
2. Set the motor (Pr.71). (Refer to page 528.) Set Pr.71 Applied motor to "0" (standard motor) or "1" (constant-torque motor).
3. Set the overheat protection of the motor (Pr.9). (Refer to page 415.)
+ -
+ -
Iq
Id
+ +
+ -
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
Iq
Id
+ +
Slip frequency operation
Speed estimator
Magnetic flux observer
+ +
+ +
Enabled
Real sensorless vector control
3-phase to 2-phase conversion Inverter output current detection
Iu
Iv
Iw
E Torque current command value
Iq*
Torque control P gain
[Pr.824] ([Pr.834])
Torque control integral time
[Pr.825] ([Pr.835])
Vq
Vd
F Excitation
current command value
Id*
Torque control P gain
[Pr.824] ([Pr.834])
Torque control integral time
[Pr.825] ([Pr.835])
Estimated speed value
Slip frequency sl
Magnetic flux observer
sl
Estimated speed value
Magnetic flux observer Estimated magnetic
flux value
Real sensorless vector control
FR-A8AP FR-A8AL
Torque detection filter [Pr.827]
([Pr.837])
Vector control IM
sl
Real sensorless vector control
Control method
Magnetic flux observer
Incoherent operation
Online auto tuning selection [Pr.95]
One of the conditions satisfied
2-phase to 3-phase conversion
Inverter voltage output
Soft-PWM processing
Soft-PWM operation selection [Pr.240]
PWM
Vu
Vv
Vw
q-axis current controller
d-axis current controller
Phase calculation
Magnetic flux observer
Current control / voltage output / magnetic flux observer
Sensorless
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4. Set the motor capacity and number of motor poles (Pr.80 and Pr.81). (Refer to page 221.) V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).
5. Set the rated motor voltage and the rated motor frequency (Pr.83 and Pr.84). (Refer to page 532.)
6. Select the control method (Pr.800). (Refer to page 221.) Select Pr.800 = 10 (speed control) or "12" (speed/torque switchover) to enable speed control.
7. Set the operation command. (Refer to page 389.) Select the start command and speed command.
8. Set the torque limit (Pr.810). (Refer to page 245.)
9. Perform the offline auto tuning (Pr.96) (Refer to page 532.)
10. Perform the test operation.
As required Select online auto tuning (Pr.95) (Refer to page 558.) Perform easy gain tuning. (Refer to page 256.) Adjust the speed control gain manually. (Refer to page 257.)
NOTE During Real sensorless vector control, offline auto tuning must be performed properly before starting operations. The speed command setting range under Real sensorless vector control is 0 to 400 Hz. The carrier frequency is limited during Real sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 356.) Torque control is not available in a low-speed (about 10 Hz or lower) regenerative range, or with a low speed and light load
(about 5 Hz or lower and rated torque about 20% or lower). Vector control must be selected. Performing pre-excitation (LX signal and X13 signal) under torque control may start the motor running at a low speed even
when the start signal (STF or STR) is not input. The inverter at a start command ON may also rotate the motor at a low speed even though a speed limit value is set to zero. Therefore, confirm that the motor running does not cause any safety problem before performing pre-excitation.
Switching between the forward rotation command (STF) and reverse rotation command (STR) must not be performed during operations under torque control. An overcurrent trip (E.OC[]) or opposite rotation deceleration fault (E.11) will occur.
When performing continuous operations under Real sensorless vector control in the FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower or FR- A840-00126(3.7K) or lower, the speed fluctuation increases when the value is 20 Hz or less, and in the low-speed range of less than 1 Hz, there may be torque shortage. In such case, stop the inverter and restart it to improve the situation.
In case of starting the motor while the motor is coasting under Real sensorless vector control, the frequency search must be set for the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr.57 "9999", Pr.162 = "10"). (Refer to page 628.)
When Real sensorless vector control is applied, there may not be enough torque provided in the ultra low-speed range of about 2 Hz or lower. Generally, the speed control range is as follows. For power driving, 1:200 (2, 4 or 6 poles) (available at 0.3 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz), 1:30 (8 poles or more) (available at 2 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz). For regenerative driving, 1:12 (2 to 10 poles) (available at 5 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz).
2415. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
24
5.3.2 Setting procedure of Vector control (speed control)
Using an induction motor Operating procedure 1. Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 91.)
Install a Vector control compatible option.
2. Set the option to be used (Pr.862). Set Pr.862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be used. (Refer to page 226.)
3. Set the applied motor and encoder (Pr.71, Pr.359 (Pr.852), and Pr.369 (Pr.851)). (Refer to page 94.)
4. Set the overheat protection of the motor (Pr.9). (Refer to page 415.) When using the SF-V5RU or a motor equipped with a thermal sensor, set Pr.9 = 0 A.
5. Set the motor capacity and number of motor poles (Pr.80 and Pr.81). (Refer to page 221.) V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).
6. Set the rated motor voltage and the rated motor frequency (Pr.83 and Pr.84). (Refer to page 532.)
7. Select the control method (Pr.800). (Refer to page 221.) Select Pr.800 = "0" (speed control), "2" (speed/torque switchover), or "4" (speed/position switchover) to enable speed control.
8. Set the operation command. (Refer to page 389.) Select the start command and speed command.
9. Set the torque limit (Pr.810). (Refer to page 245.)
10. Perform the test operation.
As required Perform offline auto tuning (Pr.96) (Refer to page 532) Select online auto tuning (Pr.95) (Refer to page 558.) Perform easy gain tuning. (Refer to page 256.) Adjust the speed control gain manually. (Refer to page 257.)
NOTE The speed command setting range under Vector control is 0 to 400 Hz. The carrier frequency is limited during Vector control. (Refer to page 356.) Refer to the Instruction Manual of each option for details on Vector control using the FR-A8APR, FR-A8APS, or FR-A8APA.
Vector
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Using a PM motor Operating procedure 1. Set the applied encoder (Pr.359 (Pr.852), Pr.369 (Pr.851)).
Refer to page 94 and set the parameters according to the option and the encoder to be used.
2. Set the applied motor (Pr.9, Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.83, Pr.84). Set Pr.71 Applied motor, Pr.9 Rated motor current, Pr.80 Motor capacity, Pr.81 Number of motor poles, Pr.83 Rated motor voltage, and Pr.84 Rated motor frequency according to the motor specifications. (Setting "9999 (initial value)" in Pr.80 or Pr.81 selects V/F control.) Set Pr.702, Pr.706, Pr.707, Pr.724 and Pr.725 as required.
3. Select Vector control (speed control). (Refer to page 221.)
4. Perform offline auto tuning and encoder position tuning (Pr.96). (Refer to page 542.) Set Pr.96, and perform tuning.
5. Configure the initial parameter setting for the applied motor using Pr.998. When the setting for the PM motor is selected in Pr.998 PM parameter initialization, Vector control for the PM motor with an encoder is enabled. "8009": Parameter (rotations per minute) settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF "8109": Parameter (frequency) settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF "9009": Parameter (rotations per minute) settings for an SPM motor "9109": Parameter (frequency) settings for an SPM motor
6. Perform the test operation.
NOTE For PM motors, after performing offline auto tuning and encoder position tuning, first perform PM parameter initialization. If
parameter initialization is performed after setting other parameters, some of those parameters are initialized too. (Refer to page 231 for the parameters that are initialized.)
2435. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
24
5.3.3 Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control (speed control)
This inverter is set for a general-purpose motor in the initial setting. Follow the following procedure to change the setting for the PM sensorless vector control.
Driving an MM-CF IPM motor Operating procedure 1. Perform IPM parameter initialization. (Refer to page 230.)
Set "3003 or 3103" in Pr.998 PM parameter initialization, or select "3003" in " (IPM initialization).
2. Set parameters such as the acceleration/deceleration time and multi-speed setting. Set parameters such as the acceleration/deceleration time and multi-speed setting as required.
3. Set the operation command. (Refer to page 389.) Select the start command and speed command.
4. Perform the test operation.
As required Perform offline auto tuning for a PM motor. (Refer to page 551.)
NOTE To change to the PM sensorless vector control, perform PM parameter initialization at first. If parameter initialization is
performed after setting other parameters, some of those parameters are initialized too. (Refer to page 231 for the parameters that are initialized.)
To use a motor capacity that is one rank lower than the inverter capacity, set Pr.80 Motor capacity before performing PM parameter initialization.
The speed setting range for an MM-CF IPM motor is between 0 and 200 Hz. The carrier frequency is limited during PM sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 356.) Constant-speed operation cannot be performed in the low-speed range of 200r/min or less under current synchronization
operation. (Refer to page 233.) During PM sensorless vector control, the RUN signal is output about 100 ms after turning ON the start command (STF, STR).
The delay is due to the magnetic pole detection. During PM sensorless vector control, the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function operates only when an
MM-CF IPM motor is connected When a built-in brake or a regeneration unit is used, the frequency search may not be available at 2200 r/min or higher. The restart operation cannot be performed until the motor speed drops to a frequency where the frequency search is available.
setting Description
3003 Parameter settings for MM-CF IPM motor (rotations per minute)
3103 Parameter settings for MM-CF IPM motor (frequencies)
PM
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving a PM motor other than MM-CF Operating procedure 1. Setting the applied motor (Pr.9, Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.83, and Pr.84). (Refer to page 528, page 551.)
Set "8093 (IPM motor other than MM-CF) or 9093 (SPM motor)" in Pr.71 Applied motor. Set Pr.9 Rated motor current, Pr.80 Motor capacity, Pr.81 Number of motor poles, Pr.83 Rated motor voltage, and Pr.84 Rated motor frequency according to the motor specifications. (Setting "9999 (initial value)" in Pr.80 or Pr.81 selects V/F control.)
2. Performing the offline auto tuning for a PM motor (Pr.96) (Refer to page 551.) Set "1" (offline auto tuning without rotating motor (for other than MM-CF)) in Pr.96, and perform tuning.
3. Configure the initial setting for the PM sensorless vector control using Pr.998. (Refer to page 231.) When the setting for the PM motor is selected in Pr.998 PM parameter initialization, the PM sensorless vector control is selected. [PM] on the operation panel (FR-DU08) is lit when the PM sensorless vector control is set.
4. Set parameters such as the acceleration/deceleration time and multi-speed setting. Set parameters such as the acceleration/deceleration time and multi-speed setting as required.
5. Set the operation command. (Refer to page 389.) Select the start command and speed command.
6. Perform the test operation.
NOTE To change to the PM sensorless vector control, perform PM parameter initialization at first. If parameter initialization is
performed after setting other parameters, some of those parameters are initialized too. (Refer to page 231 for the parameters that are initialized.)
To use a motor capacity that is one rank lower than the inverter capacity, set Pr.80 Motor capacity before performing PM parameter initialization.
The carrier frequency is limited during PM sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 356.) Constant-speed operation cannot be performed in the low-speed range of 200r/min or less under current synchronization
operation. (Refer to page 233.) During PM sensorless vector control, the RUN signal is output about 100 ms after turning ON the start command (STF, STR).
The delay is due to the magnetic pole detection.
5.3.4 Setting the torque limit level
Limit the output torque not to exceed the specified value. The torque limit level can be set in a range of 0 to 400%. The TL signal can be used to switch between two types of torque limit. The torque limit level can be selected by setting it with a parameter, or by using analog input terminals (terminals 1, 4). Also, the torque limit levels of forward rotation (power driving/regenerative driving) and reverse rotation (power driving/regenerative driving) can be set individually.
setting Description
8009 Parameter settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF (rotations per minute)
8109 Parameter settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF (frequency)
9009 Parameter settings (in rotations per minute) for an SPM motor
9109 Parameter settings (in frequencies) for an SPM motor
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
22 H500
Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level) 150/200%*1 0 to 400% Set the torque limit level as a percentage with regards to the rated
torque as 100%.
Sensorless Vector PM
2455. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
24
85 G201
Excitation current break point 9999
0 to 400 Hz Set a frequency of the low-speed range in the constant output range torque characteristic selection.
9999 SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined frequency is applied. Motor other than the above: 10 Hz is applied.
86 G202
Excitation current low- speed scaling factor 9999
0 to 300% Set a torque scaling factor applied to the operation in the low- speed range in the constant output range torque characteristic selection.
9999 SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined scaling factor is applied. Motor other than the above: 130% is applied.
157 M430 OL signal output timer 0 s
0 to 25 s Set the OL signal output start time at the activation of torque limit operation.
9999 No OL signal output.
801 H704 Output limit level 9999
0 to 400% Set the torque current limit level.
9999 The torque limit setting value is used for limiting the torque current level.
803 G210
Constant output range torque characteristic selection
0
0 The torque rises in the low- speed range.
The motor power output is limited to be constant in the constant power range.
1 The torque is kept constant in the low-speed range.
The torque is limited to be constant in the constant power range.
2 The torque is kept constant in the low-speed range. (The torque current is limited.)
The torque is limited to be constant in the constant power range unless the output limit of the torque current is reached. (The torque current is limited.)
10 The torque is kept constant in the low-speed range.
The motor power output is limited to be constant in the constant power range.
11 The torque rises in the low- speed range.
The torque is limited to be constant in the constant power range.
804 D400
Torque command source selection 0
0 The internal torque limit 2 cannot be used.
1 Torque limit by the parameter setting (Pr.805 or Pr.806) (-400 to 400%)
2 The internal torque limit 2 cannot be used
3 Torque limit through the CC-Link / CC-Link IE Field Network / CC- Link IE TSN communication (FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, FR-A800-GF, FR-A8NCG, FR-A800-GN)
4 The internal torque limit 2 cannot be used 5 Torque limit through the CC-Link / CC-Link IE Field Network / CC-
Link IE TSN communication (FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, FR-A800-GF, FR-A8NCG, FR-A800-GN)
6
805 D401
Torque command value (RAM) 1000% 600 to
1400% Writes the torque limit value in RAM. Regards 1000% as 0%, and set torque command by an offset of 1000%.
806 D402
Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM) 1000% 600 to
1400%
Writes the torque limit value in RAM and EEPROM. Regards 1000% as 0%, and set torque command by an offset of 1000%.
810 H700
Torque limit input method selection 0
0 Internal torque limit 1 (torque limited by parameter settings) 1 External torque limit (torque limited by terminals 1 and 4) 2 Internal torque limit 2 (torque limited by communication options)
811 D030 Set resolution switchover 0
0 Speed setting, running speed monitor increments 1 r/min Torque limit setting increments
0.1% 1 Speed setting, running speed
monitor increments 0.1 r/min
10 Speed setting, running speed monitor increments 1 r/min Torque limit setting increments
0.01% 11 Speed setting, running speed
monitor increments 0.1 r/min 812 H701
Torque limit level (regeneration) 9999
0 to 400% Set the torque limit level for forward rotation regenerative driving. 9999 Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 When changing from V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control to Real sensorless vector control or Vector control in the FR-A820- 00250(3.7K) or lower or the FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or lower, 150% changes to 200%.
NOTE The lower limit for the torque limit level under Real sensorless vector control is set to 30% even if a value lower than 30% is set. When the low-speed range high-torque characteristic is disabled under PM sensorless vector control (Pr.788 = "0"), the torque
limit is not activated in a low-speed range with a rated frequency of less than 10%. Under PM sensorless vector control, the torque limit level is reduced inversely proportional to the output frequency in the
constant output range of the rated motor frequency or higher.
Block diagram of torque limit
Selecting the torque limit input method (Pr.810) Use Pr.810 Torque limit input method selection to select the method to limit the output torque for speed control.
The method in the initial setting is use of the parameter settings.
Torque limit level using parameter settings (Pr.810 = "0", Pr.812 to Pr.814) The torque is limited by parameter setting (Internal torque limit 1). In the initial value, a limit is applied to all quadrants by Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level).
813 H702
Torque limit level (3rd quadrant) 9999
0 to 400% Set the torque limit level for reverse rotation power driving. 9999 Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values.
814 H703
Torque limit level (4th quadrant) 9999
0 to 400% Set the torque limit level for reverse rotation regenerative driving. 9999 Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values.
815 H710 Torque limit level 2 9999
0 to 400% When the torque limit selection (TL) signal is ON, Pr.815 is the torque limit value regardless of Pr.810.
9999 The torque limit set to Pr.810 is valid. 816 H720
Torque limit level during acceleration 9999
0 to 400% Set the torque limit value during acceleration. 9999 The same torque limit as constant speed.
817 H721
Torque limit level during deceleration 9999
0 to 400% Set the torque limit value during deceleration. 9999 The same torque limit as constant speed.
858 T040
Terminal 4 function assignment 0 0, 1, 4, 9999 The torque limit level can be changed with setting value "4" and the
signal to terminal 4. 868 T010
Terminal 1 function assignment 0 0 to 6, 9999 The torque limit level can be changed with setting value "4" and the
signal to terminal 1. 874 H730 OLT level setting 150% 0 to 400% The inverter can be set to be shut off at activation of torque limit
and stalling of the motor. Set the output to be shut off.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Torque limit
Speed command +
-
Iq current control
M
Encoder
Pr.810 setting Torque limit input method Operation
0 (initial value) Internal torque limit 1 Perform the torque limit operation using the parameter (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.814) settings. If changing the torque limit parameters via communication is enabled, the torque limit input can be performed via communication.
1 External torque limit Torque limit using analog voltage (current) to terminal 1 or terminal 4 is valid.
2 (Internal torque limit 2) The torque limit through the CC-Link (FR-A8NC) or CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A8NCE/ FR-A800-GF) communication is valid.
2475. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
24
To set individually for each quadrant, use Pr.812 Torque limit level (regeneration), Pr.813 Torque limit level (3rd quadrant), Pr.814 Torque limit level (4th quadrant). When "9999" is set, Pr.22 setting is regarded as torque limit level in all the quadrants.
Torque limit level using analog input (terminals 1, 4) (Pr.810 = "1", Pr.858, Pr.868)
The torque is limited with the analog input of terminal 1 or terminal 4. (External torque limit) Torque limit using analog input is valid with a limit value lower than the internal torque limit (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.814). (If
the torque limit using analog input exceeds the internal torque limit, the internal torque limit is valid.) When inputting the torque limit value from terminal 1, set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment = "4". When inputting
from terminal 4, set Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment = "4". When Pr.858 = "4" and Pr.868 = "2", the torque for regenerative driving is limited with the terminal 1 analog input, and the
torque for power driving is limited with the terminal 4 analog input.
The torque limit using analog input can be corrected with the calibration parameters C16 (Pr.919) to C19 (Pr.920), and C38 (Pr.932) to C41 (Pr.933). (Refer to page 510.)
quad1 (Pr.22)
quad4 (Pr.814)
(Pr.813) quad2
(Pr.812)
Reverse rotation
Forward rotation
Torque limit
Speed
Reverse driving
Reverse regeneration
Rated speed
quad3
+
-
Forward regeneration
Forward driving
quad1 (Pr. 22)
quad4 (Pr. 814)
quad3 (Pr. 813)
quad2 (Pr. 812)
Reverse rotation
Forward rotation
Torque limit
Speed
+
-
Forward driving
Forward regeneration
Reverse driving
Reverse regeneration
Rated speed
quad4
quad2
Forward rotationReverse rotation
Torque limit
Speed
+
-
Forward regeneration
Forward driving
Reverse regeneration
Reverse driving
quad3
quad1
Terminal 4 input or internal torque limit whichever is smaller
Terminal 4 input or internal torque limit whichever is smaller
Terminal 4 input or internal torque limit whichever is smaller
Terminal 4 input or internal torque limit whichever is smaller
Rated speed When Pr. 858=4, Pr. 868=2 Analog input (terminal 1, 4) or internal torque control (Pr. 22 etc.) whichever is smaller
Calibration example of terminal 1
400
150
0
0 Torque setting signal
100%
10V
Initial value
Bias
0 5V
C18(Pr.920) GainTo
rq ue
(% )
C16(Pr.919)
C17(Pr.919) C19(Pr.920)
Calibration example of terminal 4
400
150
0
Torque setting signal
100%
Initial value
Bias
0 20mA
C40(Pr.933) GainTo
rq ue
(% )
C38(Pr.932)
C39(Pr.932) C41(Pr.933)
20 4
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When inputting an analog signal to the terminal 1, give a positive voltage (0 to +10 V (+5 V)).
When a negative voltage (0 to -10 V (-5 V)) is input, the torque limit value set by the analog signal becomes "0".
Functions of terminals 1 and 4 by control ( : no function)
*1 When Pr.868 "0", the other functions of terminal 1 (auxiliary input, override function, PID control) do not operate. *2 When Pr.858 "0", PID control and speed commands using terminal 4 do not operate even when the AU signal is ON. *3 When both Pr.858 and Pr.868 are "1" (magnetic flux command) or "4" (torque limit), the function of terminal 1 has higher priority, and terminal 4
does not function. *4 Valid when Vector control compatible options are installed and the Vector control is selected.
Torque limit level through the CC-Link / CC-Link IE Field Network / CC- Link IE TSN communication (Pr.810 = "2", Pr.805, Pr.806)
When the CC-Link (FR-A8NC), CC-Link IE Field network (FR-A8NCE/FR-A800-GF), or CC-Link IE TSN (FR-A8NCG/FR- A800-GN) communication is used, the Pr.805 or Pr.806 setting is used as the torque limit value. (Internal torque limit 2)
When the CC-Link communication (Ver. 2) is used in the quadruple or octuple setting (Pr.544 = "14, 18, 114, or 118"), the torque limit value can be input using a remote register (RWwC).
When the CC-Link IE Field Network or CC-Link IE TSN is used, the torque limit value can be input using a remote register (RWw2).
*1 The torque limit setting is defined as an absolute value.
Pr.858 setting*1 Terminal 4 function Pr.868 setting*2 Terminal 1 function
0 (initial value) Speed command (AU signal-ON)
0 (initial value) Speed setting assistance
1*4 Magnetic flux command*4
2 3 4 Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1") 5 6 Torque bias (Pr.840 = "1 to 3") 9999
1*4
Magnetic flux command*4 0 (initial value) Speed setting assistance
*3 1*4 Magnetic flux command*4
Magnetic flux command*4
2 3 4 Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1") 5 6 Torque bias (Pr.840 = "1 to 3") 9999
4*2
Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1") 0 (initial value) Speed setting assistance
1*4 Magnetic flux command*4
Power driving torque limit (Pr.810 = "1") 2 Regenerative torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1") 3
*3 4 Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1") 5 6 Torque bias (Pr.840 = "1 to 3") 9999
9999
Pr.804 setting
Torque limit input Setting range*1 Setting
incrementsCC-Link/PLC function CC-Link IE Field Network / CC- Link IE TSN
1 Torque limit by Pr.805, Pr.806*2 Torque limit by remote register (RWw2)*3
600 to 1400 (-400% to 400%) 1%
3 Torque limit by remote register (RWw2)*3
5 Torque limit by remote register (RWw2)*3 Torque limit by remote register
(RWw2)*3
-32768 to 32767 (two's complement) (-327.68% to 327.67%)*4
0.01%*4
6 Torque limit by Pr.805, Pr.806*2
2495. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
25
*2 Can also be set from operation panel or parameter unit. *3 The torque can also be limited by setting a value in Pr.805 or Pr.806. *4 If set by operation panel or parameter unit, setting range is "673 to 1327 (-327% to 327%)", setting increment is 1%.
When the CC-Link communication (Ver. 2) is used in the quadruple or octuple setting (Pr.544 = "24, 28, or 128"), the torque limit value can be input using a remote register (RWwC to RWwF) for each of the four quadrants.
NOTE When "2" is set in Pr.810 while the communication option is not connected, a protective function (E.OPT) is activated. (PLC
function disabled) For details on the FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, or FR-A8NCG, refer to the Instruction Manual of each option. For details on the CC-
Link IE Field Network, refer to page 752. For details on CC-Link IE TSN communication, refer to the CC-Link IE TSN Function Manual.
Second torque limit level (TL signal, Pr.815) For Pr.815 Torque limit level 2, when the Torque limit selection (TL) signal is ON, the setting value of Pr.815 is the limit
value regardless of the setting of Pr.810 Torque limit input method selection. To assign the TL signal, set "27" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
quad1quad4 Pr.805(Pr.806) RWwC, RWw2
Pr.805(Pr.806) RWwC, RWw2
Pr.805(Pr.806) RWwC, RWw2
Pr.805(Pr.806) RWwC, RWw2
quad3 quad2
Reverse rotation Forward rotation
Torque limit
Speed
Forward driving
Forward regenerationReverse driving
Reverse regeneration
Rated speed
RWwF
RWwE
RWwC
RWwD
Reverse rotation Forward rotation
quad4
quad2
Torque limit
Speed
Forward regeneration
Forward drivingReverse regeneration
Reverse driving
quad3
quad1
Rated speed
Pr.815 Pr.815
Pr.815Pr.815
quad4
quad2
Reverse rotation
Forward rotation
Torque limit
Speed
Reverse driving
Reverse regeneration
quad3
+-
Forward regeneration
Forward driving
quad1
Rated speed
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Setting the torque limit values during acceleration/deceleration individually (Pr.816, Pr.817)
The torque limit during acceleration and deceleration can be set individually. Torque limit using the setting values of Pr.816 Torque limit level during acceleration and Pr.817 Torque limit level during deceleration is as follows.
If 1 second elapses while the difference between the set speed and rotation speed is within 2 Hz, the torque limit level during acceleration/deceleration (Pr.816 or Pr.817) changes to the torque control level during constant speed (Pr.22).
When the difference between the set speed and rotation speed is -2 Hz or less, the torque limit level during deceleration Torque limit level during deceleration (Pr.817) activates.
NOTE The Pr.816 and Pr.817 settings are invalid under position control.
Changing the setting increments of the torque limit level (Pr.811) The setting increments of Pr.22 Torque limit level, Pr.801 Output limit level, and Pr.812 to Pr.817 Torque limit level
can be changed to 0.01% by setting Pr.811 Set resolution switchover = "10 or 11".
*1 For details on the increments of speed setting and running speed monitoring, refer to page 444.
NOTE The internal resolution of the torque limit is 0.024% (100/212), and fractions below this resolution are rounded off. When Real sensorless vector control is selected, fractions below a resolution equivalent to 0.1% are rounded off even if Pr.811
= "10 or 11" is set. For details on changing the speed setting increments, refer to page 444.
Changing the torque characteristic of the constant-power range (Pr.801, Pr.803)
Under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control, the torque characteristic can be changed between in the low-speed range and in the constant power range.
Pr.811 setting Increments of speed setting and running speed monitoring*1
Torque limit setting increments
0 1 r/min 0.1%
1 0.1 r/min 10 1 r/min
0.01% 11 0.1 r/min
Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration
1s
Pr.816
Torque limit level during acceleration
Torque limit set to Pr.810
Pr.817
Torque limit level during deceleration
Set frequency
Output frequency
(Hz)
Time
-2 Hz < set speed - rotation speed < 2 Hz
Torque limit level
-2 Hz set speed - rotation speed
2515. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
25
Use Pr.85 Excitation current break point to change the low-speed range, and use Pr.86 Excitation current low-speed scaling factor to change the torque in the low-speed range. When Pr.85 = "9999 (initial value)", a predetermined frequency is used. When Pr.86 = "9999 (initial value)", a predetermined scaling factor is used (refer to page 711).
*1 This is applicable only under Real sensorless vector control. The upper limit of the torque at 0 Hz is determined by multiplying the torque limit in the constant-torque range by the scaling factor set in Pr.86.
To avoid overload or overcurrent of the inverter or motor, use Pr.801 Output limit level to limit the torque current.
NOTE When the torque limit setting value (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.817, etc.) is less than the value set in Pr.801, the Pr.801 setting is
used for limiting the torque current.
Trip during torque limit operation (Pr.874) The inverter can be set to be shut off at activation of torque limit and stalling of the motor.
Pr.803 setting Torque characteristic in low- speed range
Torque characteristic in constant-power range Torque characteristic Output limit
0 (initial value) The torque changes according to the scaling factor set in Pr.86.*1
Constant motor output
1 Constant torque Constant torque Without 2 Constant torque Constant torque With 10 Constant torque Constant motor output
11 The torque changes according to the scaling factor set in Pr.86.*1
Constant torque Without
Pr.801 setting Description 0 to 400% Set the torque current limit level. 9999 The torque limit setting value (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.817, etc.) is used for limiting the torque current.
Pr.85
Pr.803=0 Torque
Low-speed range
Constant torque range Constant power range
Constant power limit
Torque rise limit
Rated speed Speed
Pr.803=1
Constant torque limit Constant torque limit
Pr.85 Rated speed Speed
Torque Low-speed range
Constant torque range Constant power range
SpeedRated speedPr.85
Pr.801
When the output limit is not exceeded
Pr.803=2 Torque
Low-speed range
Constant torque range Constant power range
Torque reduction when the output is limited
Constant torque limit
Constant torque limit
Pr.803=10
Pr.85
Torque Low-speed range
Constant torque range Constant power range
Constant power limit
Constant torque limit
Rated speed Speed
Pr.803=11
Torque rise limit Constant torque limit
Pr.85 Rated speed Speed
Torque Low-speed range
Constant torque range Constant power range
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When a high load is applied and the torque limit is activated under speed control or position control, the motor stalls. At this time, if a state where the rotation speed is lower than the value set in Pr.865 Low speed detection and the output torque exceeds the level set in Pr.874 OLT level setting continues for 3 seconds, Stall prevention stop (E.OLT) is activated and the inverter output is shut off.
NOTE Under V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control, if the output frequency drops to 0.5 Hz due to the stall prevention
operation and this state continues for 3 seconds, a fault indication (E.OLT) appears, and the inverter output is shut off. This operation is activated regardless of the Pr.874 setting.
This fault does not occur under torque control.
Adjusting the signal output under torque limit operation and output timing (OL signal, Pr.157)
If the output torque exceeds the torque limit level and the torque limit is activated, the overload warning (OL signal) is turned ON for 100 ms or longer. When the output torque drops to the torque limit level or lower, the output signal also turns OFF.
Pr.157 OL signal output timer can be used to set whether to output the OL signal immediately, or whether to output it after a certain time period has elapsed.
The OL signal is also output during the regeneration avoidance operation (" " display (overvoltage stall)).
NOTE The OL signal is assigned to terminal OL in the initial status. The OL signal can also be assigned to other terminals by setting
"3 (positive logic) or 103 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 431 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473 Pr.840 Torque bias selectionpage 265 Pr.865 Low speed detectionpage 484
Pr.157 setting value Description
0 (initial value) Output immediately. 0.1 to 25 Output after the set time (s). 9999 Not output.
Output torque
Output frequency
Start signal (STF)
Fault signal (ALM)
Pr.874 Torque limit
Pr.865
3s
Torque
Time
Time
E.OLT occurrence
Overload state (OL operation)
OL output signal
Pr.157 Set time(s)
2535. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
25
5.3.5 Performing high-accuracy, fast-response control (gain adjustment for Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control)
The load inertia ratio (load moment of inertia) for the motor is calculated in real time from the torque command and rotation speed during motor driving by the Vector control. Because the optimum gain for speed control and position control is set automatically from the Load inertia ratio and the response level, the work required for gain adjustment is reduced. (Easy gain tuning) If the load inertia ratio cannot be calculated due to load fluctuations, or under Real sensorless vector control or PM sensorless vector control, the control gain can be set automatically by entering the load inertia ratio manually. Manual gain adjustment is useful for achieving optimum machine performance or improving unfavorable conditions, such as vibration and acoustic noise during operation with high load inertia or gear backlash.
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
Sensorless Vector PM
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
818 C112
Easy gain tuning response level setting 2 1 to 15 Set the response level.
1 (Slowest) to 15 (Fastest)
819 C113 Easy gain tuning selection 0
0 No easy gain tuning
1 Gain is calculated with load calculation (This function is valid under Vector control.)
2 Gain is calculated with load (Pr.880) manual input
820 G211 Speed control P gain 1 60% 0 to 1000%
The proportional gain during speed control is set. (Setting this parameter higher improves the trackability for speed command changes. It also reduces the speed fluctuation caused by external disturbance.)
821 G212 Speed control integral time 1 0.333 s 0 to 20 s
The integral time during speed control is set. (Setting this parameter lower shortens the return time to the original speed when the speed fluctuates due to external disturbance.)
830 G311 Speed control P gain 2 9999
0 to 1000% Second function of Pr.820 (valid when RT signal is ON) 9999 The Pr.820 setting is applied to the operation.
831 G312 Speed control integral time 2 9999
0 to 20 s Second function of Pr.821 (enabled when the RT signal is ON) 9999 The Pr.821 setting is applied to the operation.
880 C114 Load inertia ratio 7-fold 0 to 200-fold Set the load inertia ratio for the motor.
1115 G218
Speed control integral term clear time 0 ms 0 to 9998 ms Set time until the integral term is reduced and cleared after P
control switching. 1116 G206
Constant output range speed control P gain compensation 0% 0 to 100% Set a compensation amount of the speed control P gain in the
constant output range (rated speed or higher). 1117 G261
Speed control P gain 1 (per-unit system) 9999
0 to 300 Set a proportional gain under speed control in the per-unit system. 9999 The Pr.820 setting is applied to the operation.
1118 G361
Speed control P gain 2 (per-unit system) 9999
0 to 300 Second function of Pr.1117 (valid when RT signal ON) 9999 The Pr.1117 setting is applied to the operation.
1121 G260
Per-unit speed control reference frequency
120 Hz*1 0 to 400 Hz Set the speed at 100% when setting speed control P gain or
model speed control gain in the per-unit system.60 Hz*2
1348 G263
P/PI control switchover frequency 0 Hz 0 to 400 Hz Set the motor speed for the P/PI control switchover.
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Block diagram of easy gain tuning function
NOTE Easy gain tuning is valid for the first motor. When applying the second motor (RT signal is ON), tuning is not performed.
Execution procedure for easy gain tuning (Pr.819 = "1" Load inertia ratio automatic calculation)
Easy gain tuning (load inertia ratio automatic calculation) is only valid in the speed control and position control modes of Vector control. It is invalid under torque control, V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and PM sensorless vector control.
1. Set the response level in Pr.818 Easy gain tuning response level setting. Setting this parameter higher improves the trackability for commands, but setting it too high causes vibration. The following figure shows the relationship between the setting and the response level.
2. The load inertia ratio is calculated during acceleration/deceleration, and from this value and the value of Pr.818 Easy gain tuning response level setting, the gain for each control is set automatically. Pr.880 Load inertia ratio is used as the initial value of the load inertia ratio when performing tuning. During tuning, the estimated value is set in Pr.880. The calculation of the load inertia ratio may take excessive time or otherwise not be performed properly if the following conditions are not satisfied.
Load inertia ratio [Pr.880]
Gain table
M Current control
Load inertia ratio estimation
section
+ -
+ -
Detector
Command
Automatic setting
Encoder
Response level setting [Pr.818]
Speed control/position loop gain Model speed control gain [Pr.820, Pr.821, Pr.828, Pr.422]
ON when [Pr.819 = "1"]
ON when [Pr.819 = "1, 2"]
Speed/position feedback
Actual motor speed
Load inertia
moment
Torque command
Pr. 818 setting
Guideline of mechanical resonance
frequency (Hz)
Inverter application
Response level Slowest response
Fastest response
Middle response
8 10 12 15 18 22 28 34 42 52 64 79 98 122 150
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Large conveyor
Arm robot Precision machine tool
General machine tool, conveyor
2555. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
25
The time in acceleration/deceleration driving until 1500 r/min is reached in 5 seconds or less. The rotation speed in driving is 150 r/min or higher. The acceleration/deceleration torque is 10% or higher. No sudden external disturbances during acceleration/deceleration. The load inertia ratio is about 30-fold or lower. No gear backlash or belt sagging.
3. Press or to calculate the continuous load inertia ratio, or calculate the gain. (The operation command during External operation is the STF or STR signal.)
Execution procedure for easy gain tuning (Pr.819 = "2" Load inertia ratio manual input)
Easy gain tuning (Load inertia ratio manual input) is valid in the speed control mode under Real sensorless vector control, the speed control and position control modes under Vector control, and the speed control mode under PM sensorless vector control.
1. Set the load inertia ratio for the motor in Pr.880 Load inertia ratio.
2. Set "2" (easy gain tuning enabled) in Pr.819 Easy gain tuning selection. After setting, Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1 are set automatically. Operation is performed with the adjusted gain from the next operation.
3. Perform the test operation, and set the response level in Pr.818 Easy gain tuning response level setting. Setting this parameter higher improves the trackability for commands, but setting it too high causes vibration. (The response level can be adjusted during operation when Pr.77 Parameter write selection ="2" (parameters can be written during operation).)
NOTE When Pr.819 = "1 or 2" is set, even if the Pr.819 setting value is returned to "0" after tuning is performed, the data that was
set in each parameter is retained in the tuning results. If good precision cannot be obtained even after executing easy gain tuning, because of external disturbances or other reasons,
perform fine adjustment manually. At this time, set the setting value of Pr.819 to "0" (no easy gain tuning).
Parameters set automatically by easy gain tuning The following table shows the relationship between the easy gain tuning function and gain adjustment parameters.
NOTE If easy gain tuning is executed at an inertia equal to or higher than the specified value under Vector control, a fault such as
hunting may occur. Also, if the motor shaft is fixed by the servo lock or position control, the bearing may be damaged. In this case, do not perform easy gain tuning. Adjust the gain manually.
The load inertia ratio is only calculated under Vector control.
Easy gain tuning selection (Pr.819) setting 0 1 2
Pr.880 Load inertia ratio Manual input
The inertia calculation result (RAM) using easy gain tuning is displayed. The parameter is set at the following times. Every hour after turning ON the power When Pr.819 is set to a value other than "1" After changing to a control other than Vector
control (such as V/F control) using Pr.800 Write (manual input) is available only during a stop.
Manual input
Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1 Pr.828 Model speed control gain Pr.422 Position control gain Pr.446 Model position control gain
Manual input
The tuning result (RAM) is displayed. The parameter is set at the following times. Every hour after turning ON the power When Pr.819 is set to a value other than "1" After changing to a control other than Vector
control (such as V/F control) using Pr.800 Write (manual input) is not available
Gain is calculated when Pr.819 is set to "2", and the result is set in the parameter. When read, the tuning result (parameter setting value) is displayed. Write (manual input) is not available
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Adjusting the speed control gain manually (Pr.819 = "0" No easy gain tuning)
The speed control gain can be adjusted for the conditions such as abnormal machine vibration, acoustic noise, slow response, and overshoot.
Setting 60% (initial value) in Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 is equivalent to 120 rad/s (speed response of a single motor). (Equivalent to the half the rad/s value during Real sensorless vector control or with the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher during Vector control.) Setting this parameter higher speeds up the response, but setting this too high causes vibration and acoustic noise.
Setting Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1 lower shortens the return time to the original speed during speed fluctuation, but setting it too low causes overshoot.
*1 The following shows the response level to the proportional gain.
*2 Performing PM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 231.)
Actual speed gain is calculated as follows when load inertia is applied.
Adjustment procedure 1. Change the Pr.820 setting while checking the conditions.
2. If it cannot be adjusted well, change Pr.821 setting, and perform step 1 again.
Pr.820 setting
Response level (rad/s) FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
Vector control Real sensorless vector control Vector control Real sensorless
vector control 60 120 60 60 30 100 200 100 100 50
Pr.820 Setting100%60%
(initial value*2)
Proportional gain
200 rad/s*1
120 rad/s*1
Since increasing the proportional gain enhances the response level and decreases the speed fluctuation.
Load fluctuation
Speed
Decreasing the integral time shortens the return time taken.
Actual speed gain = Speed gain of a single motor JM+JL
JM JM: Motor inertia JL: Load inertia converted as the motor axis inertia
2575. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
25
NOTE When adjusting the gain manually, set Pr.819 Easy gain tuning selection to "0" (no easy gain tuning) (initial value). Pr.830 Speed control P gain 2 and Pr.831 Speed control integral time 2 are valid when terminal RT is ON. In this case,
replace them for Pr.820 and Pr.821 in the description above.
When using a multi-pole motor (8 poles or more) If the motor inertia is known, set Pr.707 Motor inertia (integer) and Pr.724 Motor inertia (exponent). (Refer to page 532.) Under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control, adjust Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr.824 Torque control
P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) to suit the motor, by referring to the following methods. Setting the parameter of Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 higher speeds up the response, but setting this too high causes
vibration and acoustic noise. Setting the parameter of Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) too low causes current ripple,
and a noise synchronous with this will be emitted from the motor. Adjustment method:
No. Movement / condition Adjustment method
1 Load inertia is too high.
Set Pr.820 and Pr.821 higher.
Pr.820 If acceleration is slow, raise the setting by 10% and then set the value to 80 to 90% of the setting immediately before vibration/noise starts occurring.
Pr.821 If overshoots occur, set about 80 to 90% of the maximum value without overshooting while increasing the setting value by twice.
2 Vibration or acoustic noise are generated from machines.
Set Pr.820 lower and Pr.821 higher.
Pr.820 Set about 80 to 90% of the maximum value without any vibration/noise while decreasing the setting value by 10%.
Pr.821 If overshoots occur, set about 80 to 90% of the maximum value without overshooting while increasing the setting value by twice.
3 Response is slow. Set Pr.820 higher.
Pr.820 If acceleration is slow, set about 80 to 90% of the maximum value without any vibration/ acoustic noise while increasing the setting value by 5%.
4 Return time (response time) is long.
Set Pr.821 lower. Set about 80 to 90% of the maximum value without overshooting or unstable movements while decreasing the setting value of Pr.821 by half.
5 Overshoots or unstable movements occur.
Set Pr.821 higher. Set about 80 to 90% of the maximum value without overshooting or unstable movements while increasing the setting value of Pr.821 by double.
No. Movement / condition Adjustment method
1 Motor rotation speed in the low- speed range is unstable.
Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 must be set higher according to the motor inertia. For multi-pole motors, because the inertia of the motor itself tends to be large, first perform broad adjustment to improve the unstable movements, and then perform fine adjustment by referring to the response level based on this setting. Also, for Vector control, gain adjustment appropriate for the inertia can be easily performed by using easy gain tuning (Pr.819 = "1").
2 Rotation speed trackability is poor. Set Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 higher. Raise the setting by 10%s and set a value that approximately 80% to 90% of the setting right before vibration/noise starts occurring. If it cannot be adjusted well, double Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1 and perform the adjustment of Pr.820 again.
3 Large fluctuation of the rotation speed relative to load fluctuation.
4
Torque shortage or motor backlash occurs when starting or passing a low-speed range under Real sensorless vector control.
Set the speed control gain higher. (The same as No.1.) If this cannot be prevented through gain adjustment, raise Pr.13 Starting frequency for a fault that occurs when starting, or shorten the acceleration time and avoid continuous operation in a low-speed range.
5 Unusual vibration, noise and overcurrent of the motor or machine occurs. Set Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) lower.
Lower the setting by 10% and set a value that is approximately 80% to 90% of the setting immediately before the condition improves.
6 Overcurrent or overspeed (E.OS) occurs when starting under Real sensorless vector control.
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Compensating the speed control P gain in the constant output range (Pr.1116)
In the constant output range (rated speed or higher), the response of speed control is reduced due to weak field. Thus, the speed control P gain is needed to be compensated using Pr.1116 Constant output range speed control P gain compensation.
In Pr.1116, set a compensation amount for the doubled rated speed regarding the speed control P gain at the rated speed or lower as 100%.
Setting the speed control P gain in the per-unit system (Pr.1117, Pr.1118, Pr.1121)
The speed control P gain can be set in the per-unit (pu) system. In the per-unit system:
The speed control P gain becomes as follows according to Pr.1117 Speed control P gain 1 (per-unit system), Pr.1118 Speed control P gain 2 (per-unit system), and the RT signal.
NOTE The per-unit system setting is available only under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control. When the speed control P gain or model speed control gain is set in the per-unit system, the easy gain tuning selection
(Pr.819 = "1 or 2") becomes invalid.
Switching over P/PI control (Pr.1115, X44 signal) In speed control under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control, whether or not to add the integral time (I) when
performing gain adjustment with P gain and integral time can be performed with the P/PI control switchover signal (X44). When X44 signal is OFF...PI control When X44 signal is ON...P control
(Speed control P gain at rated speed or higher) = (Speed control P gain at rated speed or lower) (100% + compensation amount) Compensation amount = Pr.1116/Rated speed (Speed - Rated speed)
Speed
100%
0%
200%
Rated speed Rated speed2
Pr.1116=100%
Pr.1116=0%(Initial value)
Pr.1116=50%
Ratio multiplied to speed control P gain
150%
When "1" is set, the torque (Iq) command is 100% (rated Iq) when the speed deviation is 100%. When "10" is set, the torque (Iq) command is 10% (rated Iq) when the speed deviation is 100%. Set the 100% speed in Pr.1121 Per-unit speed control reference frequency.
Pr.1117 Pr.1118 Pr.830 RT signal Speed control P gain
9999 9999
OFF Pr.820 9999 ON Pr.820 Other than 9999 ON Pr.830
Other than 9999 9999 Pr.1117
9999 Other than 9999
OFF Pr.820 ON Pr.1118
Other than 9999
Other than 9999
OFF Pr.1117 ON Pr.1118
2595. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
26
To input the X44 signal, set "44" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal.
The shock of P/PI control switchover is absorbed by setting Pr.1115 Speed control integral term clear time. When the X44 signal is turned ON, integration is stopped and the accumulated integral term is reduced and cleared according to the setting of Pr.1115 Speed control integral term clear time (initial value is 0 ms). In Pr.1115, set time when the integral term is reduced from 100% to 0% regarding the rated torque current (Iq) as 100%. Turning OFF the X44 signal resumes the integral operation.
[Function block diagram]
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. The speed loop integration can be disabled at the emergency stop using Pr.1349 Emergency stop operation selection.
(Refer to page 367.)
P/PI control switchover according to the motor speed (Pr.1348) When the motor speed falls below the Pr.1348 setting during speed control under Real sensorless vector control or Vector
control, speed loop integration is stopped and the accumulated integral term is cleared. Pr.1348 setting or more: PI control Less than the Pr.1348 setting: P control
The shock of P/PI control switchover is absorbed by setting Pr.1115 Speed control integral term clear time. When the motor speed falls below the Pr.1348 setting, speed loop integration is stopped and the accumulated integral term is reduced and cleared according to the Pr.1115 setting (initial value is 0 ms). In Pr.1115, set time when the integral term is reduced from 100% to 0% regarding the rated torque current (Iq) as 100%. When the motor speed is increased to the Pr.1348 setting plus 2 Hz or more, integral operation is resumed.
NOTE The speed loop integration can be disabled at the emergency stop using Pr.1349 Emergency stop operation selection.
(Refer to page 367.)
X44-ON
X44-OFF
+
+
0
Speed command
Speed command
+
-
Speed proportional operation
Integral term reduction
Speed integral
operation
Speed estimator
Torque control M
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.3.6 Troubleshooting in the speed control
No. Condition Possible cause Countermeasure
1 The motor does not rotate. (Vector control)
Motor wiring is incorrect.
Check the wiring. Set V/F control (set Pr.80 Motor capacity or Pr.81 Number of motor poles to "9999") and check the motor rotation direction. For SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series), set Pr.19 Base frequency voltage to 170 V (340 V) when the value is 3.7 kW or lower, and set it to 160 V (320 V) when the value is higher, and set Pr.3 Base frequency to 50 Hz.
When a forward signal is input, rotation in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the motor shaft direction is correct. (Clockwise rotation means that the phase sequence of the inverter secondary side wiring is different.)
Encoder type selection switch (Vector control compatible option) is incorrect.
Check the encoder specifications. Check the encoder type selection switch of differential/complementary (Vector control compatible option).
The wiring of the encoder is incorrect.
When using the system where the motor shaft can be rotated by an external force other than the motor without any safety troubles at Vector control setting, rotate the motor counterclockwise and check if FWD is indicated. If REV is indicated, the phase sequence of the encoder is incorrect. Check the wiring, and set Pr.359 (Pr.852) Encoder rotation direction in accordance with the motor specification. (Refer to page 87.) If the clockwise direction is forward as viewed from the motor shaft side, set Pr.359(Pr.852) = "0". If the counterclockwise direction is forward as viewed from the motor shaft side, set Pr.359 (Pr.852) = "1".
The parameter setting and the number of encoder pulses used are different.
If the parameter setting value is lower than the number of encoder pulses used, the motor does not rotate. Set Pr.369 (Pr.852) Number of encoder pulses correctly. (Refer to page 87.)
Encoder power specifications are incorrect. Alternatively, power is not input.
Check the encoder power specifications (5 V/12 V/15 V/24 V), and input the external power supply. When the encoder output is the differential line driver type, only 5 V can be input. Make the voltage of the external power supply same as the encoder output voltage, and connect the external power supply between PG and SD.
The option to be used and parameter settings do not match.
Correctly set Pr.862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be used. (Refer to page 226.)
2
Motor does not run at the correct speed. (Command speed and actual speed differ.)
Speed command from the controller is different from the actual speed. The speed command is affected by noise.
Check that the speed command sent from the controller is correct. (Take EMC measures.)
Lower the setting of Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.
The command speed and the speed recognized by the inverter are different.
Adjust the bias and gain Pr.125, Pr.126, C2 to C7, C12 to C15 of the speed command again.
The setting for the number of encoder pulses is incorrect.
Check the settings of Pr.369 (Pr.851) (under Vector control). (Refer to page 87.)
The motor constant varies due to increase in the motor temperature.
Enable the online auto tuning at startup (set Pr.95 (Pr.574) = "1") (under Real sensorless vector control). (Refer to page 558.) To perform the online auto tuning at startup for a lift, use of the Start-time tuning start external input (X28) signal is recommended.
3 The speed does not accelerate to the command speed.
Torque shortage. The torque limit is operating.
Raise the torque limit. (Refer to the torque limit for speed control on page 245.)
Increase the capacity. Only P (proportional) control is performed.
Speed deviation occurs under P (proportional) control when the load is heavy. Select PI control.
Sensorless Vector PM
2615. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
26
Parameters referred to Pr.3 Base frequency, Pr.19 Base frequency voltagepage 707 Pr.72 PWM frequency selectionpage 356 Pr.80 Motor capacity, Pr.81 Number of motor polespage 221 Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 505 Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction, Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses, Pr.851 Control terminal option-Number of encoder pulses, Pr.852 Control terminal option-Encoder rotation directionpage 87 Pr.822 Speed setting filter 1page 503 Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain)page 294
4 Motor speed fluctuates.
Speed command varies.
Check that the speed command sent from the controller is correct. (Take EMC measures.)
Set Pr.72 lower. Set Pr.822 Speed setting filter 1 higher. (Refer to page 503.)
Torque shortage. Raise the torque limit. (Refer to the torque limit for speed control on page 245.)
Speed control gain is not suitable for the machine. (Resonance occurs.)
Perform easy gain tuning. Adjust Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr.821 Speed control integral time
1. Perform speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control.
5
Hunting (vibration or acoustic noise) occurs in the motor or the machine.
Speed control gain is too high.
Perform easy gain tuning. Set Pr.820 lower and Pr.821 higher. Perform speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control.
Torque control gain is too high. Set Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) lower.
Motor wiring is incorrect. Check the wiring.
6
Acceleration/ deceleration time is different from the setting.
Torque shortage. Raise the torque limit.
(Refer to the torque limit for speed control on page 245.) Perform speed feed forward control.
Load inertia is too high. Set acceleration/deceleration time suitable for the load.
7 Machine movement is unstable.
Speed control gain is not suitable for the machine.
Perform easy gain tuning. Adjust Pr.820 and Pr.821. Perform speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control.
Response is slow because of the inverter's acceleration/ deceleration time setting.
Set the optimum acceleration/deceleration time.
8 Rotation ripple occurs during the low-speed operation.
High carrier frequency is affecting the motor rotation.
Set Pr.72 lower.
Speed control gain is too low. Set Pr.820 higher.
No. Condition Possible cause Countermeasure
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.3.7 Speed feed forward control, model adaptive speed control
Speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control can be selected using parameter settings. Under speed feed forward control, the motor trackability for speed command changes can be improved. Under model adaptive speed control, the speed trackability and the response level to motor external disturbance torque can be adjusted individually.
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
When using model adaptive speed control, use the data obtained from the easy gain tuning for Pr.828 Model speed control gain setting. Make the setting with easy gain tuning (at the same time). (Refer to page 254.)
Speed feed forward control (Pr.877 = "1") When the load inertia ratio is set in Pr.880, the required torque for the set inertia is calculated according to the acceleration
and deceleration commands, and the torque is generated quickly. When the speed feed forward gain is 100%, the calculation result for speed feed forward is applied as is. If the speed command changes suddenly, the torque is increased by the speed feed forward calculation. The maximum
limit for the speed feed forward torque is set in Pr.879. The speed feed forward result can also be lessened with a primary delay filter in Pr.878.
Sensorless Vector PM
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
828 G224 Model speed control gain 60% 0 to 1000% Set the gain for the model speed controller.
877 G220
Speed feed forward control/model adaptive speed control selection
0 0 Perform normal speed control. 1 Perform speed feed forward control. 2 Model adaptive speed control becomes valid.
878 G221 Speed feed forward filter 0 s 0 to 1 s Set the primary delay filter for the result of the speed feed forward
calculated from the speed command and load inertia ratio. 879 G222
Speed feed forward torque limit 150% 0 to 400% Set a maximum limit for the speed feed forward torque.
880 C114 Load inertia ratio 7-fold 0 to 200-fold Set the load inertia ratio for the motor.
881 G223 Speed feed forward gain 0% 0 to 1000% Set the calculation result for speed feed forward as the gain.
1119 G262
Model speed control gain (per-unit system) 9999
0 to 300 Set the gain for the model speed controller in the per-unit system. 9999 The Pr.828 setting is applied to the operation.
1121 G260
Per-unit speed control reference frequency
120 Hz*1 0 to 400 Hz Set the speed at 100% when setting speed control P gain or model
speed control gain in the per-unit system.60 Hz*2
Load inertia ratio J s
[Pr. 880]
[Pr. 878] Speed feed
forward filter
[Pr. 879] Speed feed
forward torque limitSpeed feed
forward gain
[Pr. 881]
Speed feed forward control
Torque control
Speed estimator
Speed control
P gain 1 [Pr. 820]
Speed control integral time 1
[Pr. 821]
M
Actual speed controller
+
- +
+ +Speed command
[Block diagram]
.
2635. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
26
NOTE The speed feed forward control is enabled for the first motor. Even if the driven motor is switched to the second motor while Pr.877 = "1", the second motor is operated as Pr.877 = "0". Under PM sensorless vector control, the notch filter is available when low-speed range high-torque characteristic is enabled
by Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection ="9999 (initial value)". (Refer to page 233.)
Model adaptive speed control (Pr.877 = "2", Pr.828, Pr.1119) The model speed of the motor is calculated, and the feedback is applied to the speed controller on the model side. Also,
this model speed is set as the command of the actual speed controller. The inertia ratio of Pr.880 is used when the speed controller on the model side calculates the torque current command
value. The torque current command of the speed controller on the model side is added to the output of the actual speed controller,
and set as the input of the iq current control. Pr.828 is used for the speed control on the model side (P control), and first gain Pr.820 is used for the actual speed controller.
The model speed control gain can be set in the per-unit (pu) system in Pr.1119. In the per-unit system:
NOTE The model adaptive speed control is enabled for the first motor. Even if the driven motor is switched to the second motor while Pr.877 ="2", the second motor is operated as Pr.877 = "0". Under PM sensorless vector control, the notch filter is available when low-speed range high-torque characteristic is enabled
by Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection ="9999 (initial value)". (Refer to page 233.) Under model adaptive speed control, because the appropriate gain values for the model and actual loop sections are based
on the response that was set for easy gain tuning, when raising the response level, Pr.818 Easy gain tuning response level setting must be re-evaluated (raised).
The per-unit system setting (Pr.1119) is available only under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control. When the speed control P gain or model speed control gain is set in the per-unit system, the easy gain tuning selection
(Pr.819 = "1 or 2") becomes invalid.
When "1" is set, the torque (Iq) command is 100% (rated Iq) when the speed deviation is 100%. When "1" is set, the torque (Iq) command is 100% (rated Iq) when the speed deviation is 100%. Set the 100% speed in Pr.1121 Per-unit speed control reference frequency.
Torque control
Speed estimator
Speed control P gain 1
Speed control integral time 1
MSpeed command
Actual speed controller Model speed calculation
+
- +
+ +Model speed
control gain [Pr. 828]
1 J s
J Torque coefficient (J: )
+
-
Model adaptive speed control
[Block diagram]
[Pr. 880]
[Pr. 820]
[Pr. 821]
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Combining with easy gain tuning The following table shows the relationship between speed feed forward and model adaptive speed control, and the easy
gain tuning function.
Parameters referred to Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1, Pr.830 Speed control P gain 2page 254 Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1, Pr.831 Speed control integral time 2page 254 Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selectionpage 233
5.3.8 Torque bias
The torque bias function can be used to make the starting torque start-up faster. At this time, the motor starting torque can be adjusted with a contact signal or analog signal.
Easy gain tuning selection (Pr.819) setting 0 1 2
Pr.880 Load inertia ratio . Manual input
The inertia ratio value calculated by easy gain tuning is displayed. Manual input is available only during a stop.
Manual input
Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 Manual input The tuning result is displayed. Write is not available.
The tuning result is displayed. Write is not available.
Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1 Manual input
The tuning result is displayed. Write is not available.
The tuning result is displayed. Write is not available.
Pr.828 Model speed control gain Manual input The tuning result is displayed. Write is not available.
The tuning result is displayed. Write is not available.
Pr.881 Speed feed forward gain Manual input Manual input Manual input
Sensorless Vector
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
840 G230 Torque bias selection 9999
0 Set the torque bias amount using contact signals (X42, X43) in Pr.841 to Pr.843.
1 Set the torque bias amount using terminal 1 in any of C16 to C19. (When the squirrel cage rises during forward motor rotation.)
2 Set the torque bias amount using terminal 1 in any of C16 to C19. (When the squirrel cage rises during reverse motor rotation.)
3 The torque bias amount using terminal 1 can be set automatically in C16 to C19 and Pr.846 according to the load.
24 Torque bias command via PROFIBUS-DP communication (FR-A8NP) (-400% to 400%)
25 Torque bias command via PROFIBUS-DP communication (FR-A8NP) (-327.68% to 327.67%)
9999 No torque bias, rated torque 100% 841 G231 Torque bias 1
9999
600 to 999% Negative torque bias amount (-400% to -1%)
842 G232 Torque bias 2 1000 to
1400% Positive torque bias amount (0 to 400%)
843 G233 Torque bias 3 9999 No torque bias setting
844 G234 Torque bias filter 9999
0 to 5 s The time until the torque starts up. 9999 The same operation as 0 s.
845 G235
Torque bias operation time 9999
0 to 5 s The time for retaining the torque of the torque bias amount. 9999 The same operation as 0 s.
846 G236
Torque bias balance compensation 9999
0 to 10 V Set the voltage for the balanced load. 9999 The same operation as 0 V. (Fixed to 0 V/0%.
847 G237
Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias 9999
0 to 400% The bias value setting in the torque command. 9999 The same as (C16, C17 (Pr.919)) when ascending
848 G238
Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 gain 9999
0 to 400% The gain value setting in the torque command. 9999 The same as (C18, C19 (Pr.920)) when ascending
2655. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
26
Block diagram
Setting the torque bias amount using contact input (Pr.840 = "0", Pr.841 to Pr.843)
Select the torque bias amount shown in the following table using the corresponding contact signal combination. To input the X42 signal, set "42" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to
a terminal, and to input the X43 signal, set "43".
When Pr.841 = "1025", the torque bias is 25%. When Pr.842 = "975", the torque bias is -25%. When Pr.843 = "925", the torque bias is -75%.
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Setting the torque bias amount using terminal 1 (Pr.840 ="1, 2", Pr.847, Pr.848)
Calculate the torque bias from the load input to terminal 1 as shown in the following diagram, and then apply the torque bias.
To set the torque bias amount with a voltage input to terminal 1, set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment ="6".
Torque bias selection 1 (X42)
Torque bias selection 2 (X43) Torque bias amount
OFF OFF 0%
ON OFF Pr.841 -400% to +400% (Setting value: 600 to 1400%)
OFF ON Pr.842 -400% to +400% (Setting value: 600 to 1400%)
ON ON Pr.843 -400% to +400% (Setting value: 600 to 1400%)
Speed command
Torque bias selection 1
Torque bias selection 2
[Pr. 846]
C16, C17 [Pr. 919] C18, C19 [Pr. 920]
Internal parameters
[Pr. 841] [Pr. 842] [Pr. 843]
Speed command
CW Cage
CW > Cage
[Pr. 840 = 1, 2, 3][Pr. 840 = 0]
Speed control P gain
Torque control M
PLG CW
Cage
Load detector
Terminal 1
-
+
- +
X42
X43
SD [Pr. 826] Torque setting filter 1
+
[Pr. 845]
Speed control
integral time
+
0 Integration cleared to 0
+
+
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The torque bias amount (Pr.847) and gain amount (Pr.848) when descending (reverse motor rotation when the Pr.840 setting is "1", forward motor rotation when the setting is "2") can be set in a range of 0 to 400%. When Pr.847 or Pr.848 ="9999", the setting is the same for both descending and ascending (C16 to C19).
NOTE Input 0 to 10 V (torque command) to the terminal 1 that is used for the torque bias function. Any negative input voltage is
regarded as 0 V.
Setting the torque bias amount automatically using terminal 1 (Pr.840 = "3", Pr.846)
The settings of C16 Terminal 1 bias command (torque/magnetic flux), C17 Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic flux), C18 Terminal 1 gain command (torque/magnetic flux), C19 Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux) and Pr.846 Torque bias balance compensation can be set automatically according to the load.
To set the torque bias amount with a voltage input to terminal 1, set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment = "6".
Pr.840 setting When ascending When descending
1
(Forward motor rotation) (Reverse motor rotation)
2
(Reverse motor rotation) (Forward motor rotation)
Torque command terminal 1 gain C18(Pr. 920)
Torque command terminal 1 bias C16(Pr. 919)
Voltage for max. load C19(Pr. 920)Voltage for
balanced load Pr. 846
Terminal 1 input
Bias amount
C17(Pr. 919)
Voltage for max. load C19(Pr. 920)Voltage for
balanced load Pr. 846
Bias amount
Terminal 1 input
Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 gain Pr. 847
Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias Pr. 848
C17(Pr. 919)
Torque command terminal 1 gain C18(Pr. 920)
Voltage for max. load C19(Pr. 920)
Voltage for balanced load Pr. 846
Bias amount
Terminal 1 input
Torque command terminal 1 bias C16(Pr. 919)
C17(Pr. 919)
Voltage for max. load C19(Pr. 920)
Voltage for balanced load Pr. 846
Bias amount
Terminal 1 input
Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias Pr. 847
Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 gain Pr. 848
C17(Pr. 919)
2675. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
26
Set the terminal 1 to accept inputs of load detection voltage, set "3" in Pr.840 Torque bias selection, and adjust the parameter settings according to the following procedures.
NOTE To perform a torque bias operation after the automatic setting is completed, set Pr.840 to "1" or "2".
Torque bias command via PROFIBUS-DP communication (Pr.840 = "24 or 25")
A torque bias command value can be set using the FR-A8NP (PROFIBUS-DP communication).
NOTE For details on the FR-A8NP setting, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8NP.
Torque bias operation (Pr.844, Pr.845) The torque start-up can be made slower by setting Pr.844 Torque bias filter "9999". The torque start-up operation at
this time is the time constant of the primary delay filter.
Setting C16, C17 (Pr.919)
Setting C18, C19 (Pr.920)
Setting Pr.846
Drive with no load
Drive under the maximum load
When the speed stabilizes, read C18,
C19 (Pr.920)
When the speed stabilizes, read C16,
C17 (Pr.919) (C16, C17 (Pr.919) setting completed)
Press .
Press .
(C18, C19 (Pr.920) setting completed)
The load input at no load is set as the terminal 1
bias, and a terminal 1 bias command is automatically set according to the load.
The load input at the maximum load is set as
the terminal 1 gain, and a terminal 1 gain command
is automatically set according to the load.
Read Pr.846
The load input at a balanced load is
automatically set as a torque bias balance
compensation for power driving.
Drive with a balanced load
Press .
The torque balance compensation for power driving is
completed.
Pr.840 setting Method to give torque bias command Setting range Setting
increments
24 Torque bias command from the buffer memory of PROFIBUS (REF1 to 7) 600 to 1400 (-400% to 400%) 1%
25 Torque bias command from the buffer memory of PROFIBUS (REF1 to 7)
-32768 to 32767 (two's complement) (-327.68% to 327.67%)
0.01%
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Set the time for continuing the output torque simply by using the command value for the torque bias in Pr.845 Torque bias operation time.
*1 When pre-excitation is not performed, the torque bias functions at the same time as the start signal.
NOTE When torque bias is enabled and Pr.868 = "6", terminal 1 operates as a torque command instead of a frequency setting
auxiliary. When override compensation is selected using Pr.73 Analog input selection and terminal 1 is the main speed, no main speed (main speed = 0 Hz) is set.
The torque bias is valid for the first motor. When applying the second motor (RT signal is ON), the torque bias function is not performed.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 496 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 C16 to C19 (Pr.919, Pr.920) (torque setting voltage (current) bias/gain)page 510
5.3.9 Avoiding motor overrunning
Motor overrunning due to excessive load torque or an error in the setting of the number of encoder pulses can be avoided.
*1 This is the overspeed detection frequency under encoder feedback control. (Refer to page 736.) *2 The setting is available when a Vector control compatible option is installed.
Speed deviation excess detection (Pr.285, Pr.853) A shutoff can be set for when the deviation between the set frequency and actual rotation speed is large, such as when
the load torque is excessive.
Speed
Torque bias
Torque bias filter primary delay time
constant
Time when torque is generated by
torque bias setting
Pre-excitation LX 1
Start signal
Pr. 844
Pr. 845
Output torque
Vector
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
285 H416
Speed deviation excess detection frequency*1 9999
0 to 30 Hz
Set the speed deviation excess detection frequency (difference between the actual rotation speed and speed command value) at which the protective function (E.OSD) activates.
9999 No speed deviation excess
853*2
H417 Speed deviation time 1.0 s 0 to 100 s
Set the time from when the speed deviation excess state is entered to when the protective function (E.OSD) activates.
873*2
H415 Speed limit 20 Hz 0 to 400 Hz Set the frequency limit with the set frequency + Pr.873
value.
690 H881 Deceleration check time 1.0 s
0 to 3600 s Set the time required to shut off output due to deceleration check after the start signal is OFF.
9999 No deceleration check
2695. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
27
When the difference (absolute value) between the speed command value and actual rotation speed in speed control under Vector control is equal to or higher than the setting value in Pr.285 Speed deviation excess detection frequency for a continuous time equal to or longer than the setting value in Pr.853 Speed deviation time, the speed deviation excess detection (E.OSD) activates to shut off the inverter output.
Speed limit (Pr.873) This function prevents overrunning even when the setting value for and the value of the actual number of pulses are
different. When the setting value for the number of encoder pulses is lower than the actual number of pulses, because the motor may increase speed, the output frequency is limited with the frequency of (set frequency + Pr.873).
NOTE When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected (Pr.57 Restart coasting time "9999") and
the setting value for the number of encoder pulses is lower than the actual number of pulses, the output speed is limited with the synchronous speed of the value of Pr.1 Maximum frequency + Pr.873.
When a regenerative driving torque limit is applied and the speed limit function activates, the output torque may drop suddenly. Also, when the speed limit function activates during pre-excitation operation, output phase loss (E.LF) may occur. If the setting for the number of encoder pulses is confirmed as correct, it is recommended that Pr.873 be set to the maximum value (400 Hz).
Even if the set frequency is lowered after inverter operation, the speed limit value is not lowered. During deceleration, the speed is limited at frequency command value + Pr.873.
Deceleration check (Pr.690) This function can stop the inverter output when the motor is accelerated accidentally during rotation. This prevents a
malfunction due to incorrect encoder pulse settings. The function is activated when the difference between the actual motor speed and the speed command value exceeds 2
Hz. If the motor does not decelerate within the time period set in Pr.690, the speed deviation excess detection (E.OSD) is
activated to shut off the inverter output.
Set frequency
Actual speed
Time
Speed deviation excessive fault activated
(E. OSD)
ONOFFFault output (ALM)
Pr.853
Pr.285
Fr eq
ue nc
y (H
z)
Actual speed at error occurrence
Set speed + Pr. 873 value
Value of Pr. 873
Set speed
Speed during normal operation
Motor speed
Time
Motor coasting
Fault output (ALM) ON
Pr.690
E.OSD
Speed command 2Hz
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE The deceleration check is enabled in the speed control of the Vector control. If the protective function (E.OSD) operates due to deceleration check, check whether the Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses
setting is correct.
Parameters referred to Pr.285 Overspeed detection frequencypage 736 Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses, Pr.851 Control terminal option-Number of encoder pulsespage 94
5.3.10 Notch filter
The response level of speed control in the resonance frequency band of mechanical systems can be lowered to avoid mechanical resonance.
Pr.1003 Notch filter frequency This sets the frequency for the center when attenuating the gain. If the mechanical resonance frequency is unknown, lower
the notch frequency in order from the highest. The point where the resonance is smallest is the optimum setting for the notch frequency.
Pr.1004 Notch filter depth A deeper notch depth has a greater effect in reducing mechanical resonance, but because the phase delay is larger,
swinging may increase. Adjust by starting from the shallowest value.
Pr.1005 Notch filter width This sets the width of the frequency to which to apply the notch filter. The setting can be adjusted according to the width
of the frequency range to be excluded. If the width is too wide, the response level of speed control will drop, and the system may become unstable.
NOTE If a value higher than 500 Hz is set in Pr.1003 while the response speed is normal (Pr.800 = any of "0 to 5 and 9 to 14"), the
inverter operates at 500 Hz.
Parameters referred to Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1003 G601 Notch filter frequency 0
0 No notch filter 8 to 1250 Hz Set the frequency for the center of gain attenuation.
1004 G602 Notch filter depth 0 0 to 3 0 (Deep) 3 (Shallow)
1005 G603 Notch filter width 0 0 to 3 0 (Narrow) 3 (Wide)
Setting 3 2 1 0 Gain (depth)
-4 dB (Shallow) -8 dB -14dB -40 dB
(Deep)
Sensorless Vector PM
Gain
Frequency0dB
Pr.1003 Notch filter frequency
Pr.1005 Notch filter width
Pr.1004 Notch filter depth
2715. PARAMETERS 5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
27
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
5.4.1 Torque control Under torque control, output torque is controlled to output the torque as commanded. Motor rotation speed is steady when the motor output torque and load torque are balanced.
Thus, motor speed during torque control is determined by the load. Under torque control, motor speed accelerates so motor output torque does not exceed motor load.
In order to prevent the motor from overspeeding, set a speed limit. (Speed control is performed instead of torque control during speed limit.)
If speed limit is not set, speed limit value setting is regarded as 0 Hz and torque control is not enabled.
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
Torque command source selection or torque command value setting Torque command P.D400 to P.D403, P.G210,
P.H704 Pr.801, Pr.803 to Pr.806, Pr.1114 283
To prevent the motor from overspeeding Speed limit P.H410 to P.H412, P.H414 Pr.807 to Pr.809, Pr.1113 287
To raise precision of torque control Torque control gain adjustment
P.G213, P.G214, P.G313, P.G314
Pr.824, Pr.825, Pr.834, Pr.835 294
To stabilize torque detection signal Torque detection filter P.G216, P.G316 Pr.827, Pr.837 332
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Block diagram
NOTE To select coasting instead of deceleration stop with speed limit when the start command is turned OFF, set Pr.250 Stop
selection. The RT (Second function selection) signal and the X9 (Third function selection) signal are used to enable switching between
acceleration/deceleration time settings. The acceleration/deceleration time after switching depends on the settings in Pr.44 Second acceleration/deceleration time and Pr.45 Second deceleration time, or Pr.110 Third acceleration/deceleration time and Pr.111 Third deceleration time. The acceleration/deceleration time is a period of time taken to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.
Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments is used to change the setting increment. When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected, the inverter accelerates the motor from the frequency
search result frequency to the set frequency. (Pr.57 Restart coasting time 9999, Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection = "10, 12, 13, 1010, 1012, or 1013")
Pr.811 Set resolution switchover is used to change the setting increment for speed setting, operation speed monitoring, and torque limit setting.
Pr.862 Encoder option selection is used to change the Vector control compatible plug-in option or the control terminal option for the first and second motors.
Pr.1113 Speed limit method selection is used to change the direction of rotation, torque command polarity, and power driving / regenerative driving status.
Speed limit
Terminal 2 bias [C2, C3(Pr.902)] Terminal 2 gain [Pr.125, C4(Pr.903)]OFF
ON
ON
OFF 9999
=9999
9999
=9999
Analog input offset adjustment [Pr.849]
Terminal 4 bias [C5,C6(Pr.904)] Terminal 4 gain [Pr.126,C7(Pr.905)]
Terminal 1 bias [C12,C13(Pr.917)] Terminal 1 gain [C14,C15(Pr.918)]
Terminal 1 input, 0 to 10 V
Terminal 1 input, -10 to 0 V
Terminal 1 input, 0 to 10 V
Terminal 1 input, -10 to 0 V
Reverse
Forward
Forward
Reverse
Analog input selection [Pr.73]
Upper/lower limit setting
Operation mode [Pr.79]
Speed limit selection [Pr.807]
0
1
2
[Pr.7] [Pr.8]
[Pr.1]
[Pr.2]
Acceleration/deceleration*AU signal
Terminal 2
Terminal 4 [Pr.858 = 0]
Terminal 1 [Pr.868 = 0]
Speed setting filter
RL RM
RH
REX
Option
Operation panel
Parameter [Pr.808, Pr.809]
Maximum frequency
[Pr.1]
Terminal 1 [Pr.868 = 5]
RT signal [Pr.822]
[Pr.822]
[Pr.74]
[Pr.832]
[Pr.74]
[Pr.832]
Multi-speed selection [Pr.4 to 6, 24 to 27,
232 to 239]
A
* Acceleration/deceleration is disabled when Pr.807 = "2" and the setting value in Pr.1 Maximum frequency is used for limiting the speed.
ON
OFF 9999
=9999
9999
=9999
Speed setting filter
RT signal [Pr.822]
[Pr.822]
[Pr.74]
[Pr.832]
[Pr.74]
[Pr.832]
2735. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
27
-
PROFIBUS CC-Link CC-Link IE
4
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
-1
+ -
0
0
0
- Absolute value
Absolute value
Absolute value
Absolute value
Speed control integral time
[Pr.821] ([Pr.831]) ([Pr.1109
(PROFIBUS)])
Torque command source selection [Pr.804]
Terminal 1 bias [C16, C17 (Pr.919)] Terminal 1 gain [C18, C19 (Pr.920)]
Pulse train torque command bias [Pr.432] Pulse train torque command gain [Pr.433]Pulse train
input FR-A8AL
Encoder option (FR-A8AP, FR-A8AL, or others)
Speed estimation value
Speed detection value
Control mode
Speed detection
filter [Pr.823]
([Pr.833])
Vector control
Real sensorless vector control
Speed limit value
Enabled
Disabled
C Torque current command value
Iq*
Torque limit selection
Speed control P gain
[Pr.820] ([Pr.830])
([Pr.1117]) ([Pr.1118]) ([Pr.1109
(PROFIBUS)])
16-bit digital input
FR-A8AX
Mode 2
Torque command value [Pr.805]
([Pr.806])
Constant output range torque characteristic selection
[Pr.803]
Speed control P gain compensation amount in the constant output range
[Pr.1116]
Torque setting filter
[Pr.826] ([Pr.836])
Analog input Terminal 1
Torque setting
filter
A
B
ON
OFF 9999
= 9999
9999
= 9999
RT signal [Pr.826]
[Pr.868 = 3, 4]
[Pr.826]
[Pr.74]
[Pr.836]
[Pr.74]
[Pr.836]
Speed limit selection
3, 5, 6
Torque command selection
Speed controller 2
Enabled
Mode 2
Speed control P gain [Pr.820]
([Pr.830]) ([Pr.1117]) ([Pr.1118])
([Pr.1109(PROFIBUS)])
Speed control integral time
[Pr.821] ([Pr.831])
([Pr.1109(PROFIBUS)])
Mode 2, 3
Reverse-side speed limit value
Reverse rotation speed limit/ reverse-side speed limit
[Pr.809]
Enabled
Disabled
-1
-1
+
Mode 1
Mode 1
Mode 1
Both conditions satisfied
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Notch filter [Pr.1003 to Pr.1005]
Speed control P gain compensation amount in the constant output range
[Pr.1116]
Speed controller
Mode 2
Mode 3 Iq* limiter
Mode 4
One of the conditions satisfied
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0
1
2
B Stall prevention operation level [Pr.22]
Torque limit level (regeneration) [Pr.812] Torque limit level (3rd quadrant) [Pr.813] Torque limit level (4th quadrant) Pr.814]
Analog input Terminal 1, 4
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Torque setting filter
[Pr.826] ([Pr.836])
Torque limit input method selection
[Pr.810]
TL signal ON or
X92 signal ON During
acceleration or deceleration
Pre-excitation selection [Pr.802]
Constant output range torque
characteristic selection [Pr.803]
Output limit level [Pr.801]
30%
30%
Control mode
Control mode
Vector control
Vector control
Output limit level [Pr.801]
Real sensorless vector control
= 9999
9999
Torque limit level during acceleration
[Pr.816] Torque limit level
during deceleration [Pr.817]
Constant output range torque
characteristic selection [Pr.803] [Pr.801 9999]
Torque limit level 2 [Pr.815]
PROFIBUS communication CC-Link communication
CC-Link IE communication
Torque limit selection
Real sensorless vector control
2755. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
27
+ -
100%
+ +
70%
PROFIBUS communication
One of the conditions satisfied
Vector control
Real sensorless vector control
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
C Torque current command value
Iq*
Slip frequency operation
Thermistor R2 compensation
Motor temperature detection filter [Pr.407]
FR-A8AZ Both conditions satisfied
Both conditions satisfied
One of the conditions satisfied Real sensorless vector control
Magnetic flux observer enabled
Logic inverted
Online auto tuning selection [Pr.95]
Magnetic flux observer sl
Slip frequency sl
Output frequency out
Speed detection value
[Pr.1109 = [][][]1] and Vector control
selected
Rated motor frequency [Pr.84]
Excitation ratio [Pr.854]
Control method
Control mode
Magnetic flux command value
Estimated magnetic flux value
Magnetic flux controller
Magnetic flux operation
D Excitation current command value
Id*
Magnetic flux observer Estimated magnetic flux value
[Pr.95=2] Magnetic flux observer enabled or Real sensorless vector control selected
Excitation current low-speed scaling factor
[Pr.86]
Stop-on contact excitation current low-speed scaling factor
[Pr.275]
Speed control
Torque control
Excitation current break point
[Pr.85] (10Hz)
Excitation current break point
[Pr.85] (10Hz)
Stop-on-contact control
[Pr.868 = 1] and Vector control
selected Analog input Terminal 1
Magnetic flux 100%
Excitation ratio
Real sensorless low-speed excitation
Stop-on contact excitation
Secondary resistance temperature compensation
(130%)
Magnetic flux control / slip frequency
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
+ -
+ -
Iq
Id
+ +
+ -
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
Iq
Id
+ +
Slip frequency operation
Speed estimator
Magnetic flux observer
+ +
+ +
Enabled
Real sensorless vector control
3-phase to 2-phase conversion Inverter output current detection
Iu
Iv
Iw
C Torque current command value
Iq*
Torque control P gain
[Pr.824] ([Pr.834])
Torque control integral time
[Pr.825] ([Pr.835])
Vq
Vd
D Excitation
current command value
Id*
Torque control P gain
[Pr.824] ([Pr.834])
Torque control integral time
[Pr.825] ([Pr.835])
Estimated speed value
Slip frequency sl
Magnetic flux observer
sl
Estimated speed value
Magnetic flux observer Estimated magnetic
flux value
Real sensorless vector control
FR-A8AP FR-A8AL
Torque detection filter [Pr.827]
([Pr.837])
Vector control IM
sl
Real sensorless vector control
Control method
Magnetic flux observer
Incoherent operation
Online auto tuning selection [Pr.95]
One of the conditions satisfied
2-phase to 3-phase conversion
Inverter voltage output
Soft-PWM processing
Soft-PWM operation selection [Pr.240]
PWM
Vu
Vv
Vw
q-axis current controller
d-axis current controller
Phase calculation
Magnetic flux observer
Current control / voltage output / magnetic flux observer
2775. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
27
Operation transition
If the setting value of Pr.7 and Pr.8 is "0", turning OFF the start signal enables speed control, and the output torque is controlled by the torque limit value.
Operation example (when Pr.804 = "0") Torque control is possible when actual rotation speed does not exceed the speed limit value. When the actual speed reaches or exceeds the speed limit value, speed limit is activated, torque control is stopped and speed control (proportional control) is performed.
Item Description
Start signal
External operation STF, STR signal
PU operation or of operation panel/ parameter unit
Torque command
Select the method to give the torque command, and give the torque command.
Speed limit Select the method to give the speed limit command, and input the speed limit value.
Torque control Speed limit
Speed limit value is increased up to preset value according to the Pr.7 Acceleration time setting. Speed limit value Speed limit value is decreased
down to zero according to the Pr.8 Deceleration time setting.
Speed
Start signal
Output torque
Speed limit
Output torque is provided according to the terminal 1 setting.Speed control is performed during speed
limit. (Thus, torque according to the commanded is not developed.)
Speed limit value
Start signal
Output torque
Speed
Limit at the torque limit value
Torque control Speed control
(speed limit)
Output torque is provided according to the terminal 1 setting.
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The following diagram indicates operation relative to commands given by analog input via terminal 1.
At the STF signal ON, the speed limit value is raised in accordance with the setting of Pr.7. Speed control is performed when the actual speed exceeds the speed limit value. At the STF signal OFF, the speed limit value is lowered in accordance with the setting of Pr.8. Under torque control, the actual operation speed is a constant speed when the torque command and load torque are
balanced. The direction of motor torque generation is determined by a combination of the input torque command polarity and the start
signal, as given in the following table.
NOTE Once the speed limit is activated, speed control is performed and internal torque limit (Pr.22 Torque limit level) is enabled.
(Initial value) In this case, it may not be possible to return to torque control. Torque limit should be external torque limit (terminals 1 and 4). (Refer to page 245.)
Under torque control, the undervoltage avoidance function (Pr.261 = "11" or "12"), which is one of the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function, is invalid. When Pr.261 = "11 (12)", the operation is performed in the same manner as if Pr.261 = "1 (2)".
Under torque control, perform linear acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 = "0 (initial value)"). When acceleration/deceleration patterns other than the linear acceleration/deceleration are selected, the protective function of the inverter may be activated. (Refer to page 372.)
Performing pre-excitation (by using the LX or X13 signal) during torque control (under Real sensorless vector control) may rotate a motor at a low speed even though a start command (STF or STR) is not given. The inverter at a start command ON may also rotate the motor at a low speed even though a speed limit value is set to 0. It must be confirmed that the motor running does not cause any safety problem before performing pre-excitation.
Polarity of torque command
Torque generation direction STF signal ON STR signal ON
+ torque command Forward direction (forward power driving / reverse regenerative driving)
Reverse direction (forward regenerative driving / reverse power driving)
- torque command Reverse direction (forward regenerative driving / reverse power driving)
Forward direction (forward power driving / reverse regenerative driving)
STF (Forward
rotation command)
Pr.7 Speed limit value
Time
Speed
Speed
Torque control
operation Torque control operation
Pr.8
Speed limit operation
(Speed control)
Speed limit operation
(Speed control)
Speed limit operation (Speed control)
When the speed limit activates, torque according to the commanded is not developed.
OL ON ON ON
2795. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
28
5.4.2 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector control (torque control)
Operating procedure 1. Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 46.)
2. Make the motor setting (Pr.71). (Refer to page 528.) Set Pr.71 Applied motor to "0" (standard motor) or "1" (constant-torque motor).
3. Set the motor overheat protection (Pr.9). (Refer to page 415.)
4. Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles (Pr.80 and Pr.81). (Refer to page 221.) V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).
5. Set the rated motor voltage and frequency (Pr.83 and Pr.84). (Refer to page 532.)
6. Select the control method (Pr.800). (Refer to page 221.) Select Pr.800 Control method selection = "11" (torque control) or "12" (speed/torque switchover) to enable torque control.
7. Set the torque command (Pr.804). (Refer to page 283.)
8. Set the speed limit (Pr.807). (Refer to page 287.)
9. Perform the offline auto tuning (Pr.96). (Refer to page 532.)
10. Set the acceleration time to "0" (Pr.7). (Refer to page 367.)
11. Perform the test operation.
As required Select online auto tuning (Pr.95). (Refer to page 558.) Adjust the torque control gain manually. (Refer to page 294.)
Sensorless
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE During Real sensorless vector control, offline auto tuning must be performed properly before starting operations. The carrier frequency is limited during Real sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 356.) Torque control is not available in a low-speed (about 10 Hz or lower) regenerative range, or with a low speed and light load
(about 5 Hz or lower and rated torque about 20% or lower). Performing pre-excitation (LX signal and X13 signal) under torque control may start the motor running at a low speed even
when the start signal (STF or STR) is not input. The inverter at a start command ON may also rotate the motor at a low speed even though a speed limit value is set to 0. Confirm that the motor running does not cause any safety problem before performing pre-excitation.
Switching between the forward rotation command (STF) and reverse rotation command (STR) must not be performed during operations under torque control. An overcurrent trip (E.OC[]) or opposite rotation deceleration fault (E.11) will occur.
When performing continuous operations under Real sensorless vector control in the FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower or FR- A840-00126(3.7K) or lower, the speed fluctuation increases when the value is 20 Hz or less, and in the low-speed range of less than 1 Hz, there may be torque shortage. In such case, stop the inverter and restart it to improve the situation.
If starting may occur while the motor is coasting under Real sensorless vector control, the frequency search must be set for the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr.57 "9999", Pr.162 = "10").
When Real sensorless vector control is applied, there may not be enough torque provided in the ultra low-speed range of about 2 Hz or lower. Generally, the speed control range is as follows. For power driving, 1:200 (2, 4 or 6 poles) (available at 0.3 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz), 1:30 (8 poles or more) (available at 2 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz). For regenerative driving, 1:12 (2 to 10 poles) (available at 5 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz).
To give the constant torque command in the constant output range, set "1 or 11" in Pr.803 Constant output range torque characteristic selection. (Refer to page 283.)
For the settings for the SF-V5RU, refer to page 94.
2815. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
28
5.4.3 Setting procedure for Vector control (torque control)
Operating procedure 1. Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 91.)
Install a Vector control compatible option.
2. Set the option to be used (Pr.862). Set Pr.862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be used. (Refer to page 226.)
3. Set the motor and the encoder (Pr.71, Pr.359 (Pr.852), and Pr.369 (Pr.851)). (Refer to page 94.)
4. Set the overheat protection of the motor (Pr.9). (Refer to page 415.) When using the SF-V5RU or a motor equipped with a thermal sensor, set Pr.9 = 0 A.
5. Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles (Pr.80 and Pr.81). (Refer to page 221.) V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).
6. Set the rated motor voltage and frequency (Pr.83 and Pr.84). (Refer to page 94.)
7. Select the control method (Pr.800). (Refer to page 221.) Select Pr.800 Control method selection = "1" (torque control), "2" (speed/torque switchover), or "5" (position/ torque switchover) to enable torque control.
8. Set the torque command (Pr.804). (Refer to page 283.)
9. Set the speed limit (Pr.807). (Refer to page 287.)
10. Set the acceleration time to "0" (Pr.7). (Refer to page 367.)
11. Perform the test operation.
As required Perform offline auto tuning (Pr.96). (Refer to page 532.) Select the online auto tuning (Pr.95). (Refer to page 558.) Adjust the torque control gain manually. (Refer to page 294.)
NOTE The carrier frequency is limited during Vector control. (Refer to page 356.) Torque control is not available under the Vector control with PM motors. To give the constant torque command in the constant output range, set "1 or 11" in Pr.803 Constant output range torque
characteristic selection. (Refer to page 283.) For the settings for the SF-V5RU, refer to page 94.
Vector
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.4.4 Torque command
For torque control selection, the torque command source can be selected.
*1 The setting is available when the FR-A8AL is installed.
Control block diagram
NOTE When the torque command exceeding the torque limit value (Pr.22, Pr.810, Pr.812 to Pr.817) is given, the output torque is
within the torque limit value. (Refer to page 272.)
Sensorless Vector
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
432 D120*1
Pulse train torque command bias 0% 0 to 400% For 0 pulses/s, set the torque to be used during stall prevention
operation. 433 D121*1
Pulse train torque command gain 150% 0 to 400% For 400k pulses/s, set the torque command to be used during stall
prevention operation.
801 H704 Output limit level 9999
0 to 400% Set the torque current limit level. 9999 The torque limit setting value is used for limiting the torque current level.
803 G210
Constant output range torque characteristic selection
0
0, 10 Constant motor output command
In the torque command setting, select torque command for the constant output area.
1, 11 Constant torque command
2
The torque is constant unless the output limit of the torque current is reached. (The torque current is limited.)
804 D400
Torque command source selection 0
0 Torque command given by analog input via terminal 1
1 Torque command (-400% to 400%) given by the parameter setting (Pr.805 or Pr.806)
2 Torque command given by the pulse train input (FR-A8AL)
3
Torque command through the CC-Link / CC-Link IE Field Network / CC- Link IE TSN communication (FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, FR-A800-GF, FR- A8NCG, FR-A800-GN) Torque command given through PROFIBUS-DP communication (FR- A8NP)
4 12/16-bit digital input (FR-A8AX) 5 Torque command through the CC-Link / CC-Link IE Field Network / CC-
Link IE TSN communication (FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, FR-A800-GF, FR- A8NCG, FR-A800-GN) Torque command given through PROFIBUS-DP communication (FR- A8NP)
6
805 D401
Torque command value (RAM) 1000% 600 to 1400% Writes the torque command value in RAM. Regards 1000% as 0%, and
set torque command by an offset of 1000%. 806 D402
Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM) 1000% 600 to 1400% Writes the torque command value in RAM and EEPROM. Regards
1000% as 0%, and set torque command by an offset of 1000%.
1114 D403
Torque command reverse selection 1
0 Not reversed Select whether to reverse the torque command polarity or not when the reverse rotation command (STR) is turned ON.
1 Reversed
+
-
-
Parameter [Pr. 805, Pr. 806] 16-bit digital input
(FR-A8AX)
Speed limit input Speed control
(proportional control)
Analog input 0 1,3,5,6
4
[Pr. 804] Torque command source selection
Torque control
+
M
Speed estimated
value
Real sensorless vector control
Vector control
Speed estimated
value Speed estimator
Encoder
Speed limit value
Pulse train input (FR-A8AL)
2
2835. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
28
Torque command given by analog input (terminal 1) (Pr.804 = "0 (initial value)")
Torque commands are given by voltage (current) input via terminal 1. Set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment = "3 or 4" to give the torque command via terminal 1. Torque commands given by analog inputs can be calibrated by the calibration parameters C16 (Pr.919) to C19 (Pr.920)
(Refer to page 510.)
Torque command given by parameter (Pr.804 = "1") Set Pr.805 Torque command value (RAM) or Pr.806 Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM) to set the torque
command value. For Pr.805 or Pr.806, regard 1000% as 0%, and set torque command by offset from 1000%. The following diagram shows relation between the Pr.805 or Pr.806 setting and the actual torque command value.
To change the torque command value frequently, write it in Pr.805. Writing values in Pr.806 frequently will shorten the life of the EEPROM.
When the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A8NCE/FR-A800-GF) or CC-Link IE TSN (FR-A8NCG/FR-A800-GN) communication is used, the torque command given from the remote register (RWw2) is valid.
NOTE When the torque command is set by Pr.805 (RAM), powering OFF the inverter erases the changed parameter value.
Therefore, the parameter set value is the one saved by Pr.806 (EEPROM) when the power is turned back on. If giving torque command by parameter setting, set the speed limit value properly to prevent overspeeding. (Refer to page
287.)
Torque command using pulse train (Pr.804 = "2") Torque command given by the pulse train input to the FR-A8AL is available.
Torque command
150%
-100%
(-10V)
0 100%
(+10V)
-150%
Terminal 1
analog input
Torque command value
400%
600% 1000% 1400%
-400%
Pr.805, Pr.806 settings
Torque command value =Pr.805(or Pr.806)-1000%
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Use Pr.428 Command pulse selection to select a type of pulse train input to the FR-A8AL.
Use Pr.432 Pulse train torque command bias and Pr.433 Pulse train torque command gain to set the bias and gain values for the torque command respectively.
NOTE For details on the FR-A8AL, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8AL.
Torque command given through the CC-Link / CC-Link IE Field Network / CC-Link IE TSN / PROFIBUS-DP (Pr.804 = "3, 5, 6")
Set the torque command value through the CC-Link (FR-A8NC/PLC function), CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A8NCE/FR- A800-GF), CC-Link IE TSN (FR-A8NCG/FR-A800-GN), or PROFIBUS-DP (FR-A8NP) communication.
For speed limit when "3 or 5" is set in Pr.804 through the CC-Link communication, Pr.807 Speed limit selection becomes invalid and Pr.808 Forward rotation speed limit/speed limit and Pr.809 Reverse rotation speed limit/reverse-side speed limit become valid. (When Pr.544 CC-Link extended setting = "0, 1, 12, 100, or 112")
Pr.428 setting Command pulse train type During forward rotation During reverse rotation
0 (initial value)
Negative logic
Forward pulse train Reverse pulse train
1 Pulse train + sign
2 A phase pulse train B phase pulse train
3
Positive logic
Forward pulse train Reverse pulse train
4 Pulse train + sign
5 A phase pulse train B phase pulse train
PP NP
PP
NP HL
PP NP
PP NP
PP
NP H L
PP
NP
Torque command value
Pulse train input frequency 0 400k pulses/s
Pr.433 setting
Pr.432 setting
2855. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
28
For the CC-Link communication, Pr.807 is valid when the extended cyclic setting of CC-Link communication is quadruple or octuple. For CC-Link IE Field Network or CC-Link IE TSN, Pr.807 is always valid.
*1 The torque command can also be given from operation panel or parameter unit. *2 The torque command can also be given by setting a value in Pr.805 or Pr.806. *3 Setting range if set by operation panel or parameter unit is "673 to 1327 (-327% to 327%)"; setting increment is 1%.
NOTE For details on the FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, FR-A8NCG, or FR-A8NP setting, refer to the Instruction Manual for each
communication option. For details on the CC-Link IE Field Network, refer to page 752. For details on CC-Link IE TSN communication, refer to the CC-Link IE TSN Function Manual.
For details on the setting using the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.
Torque command given by 16-bit digital input (Pr.804 = "4") Give the torque command by 12-bit or 16-bit digital input using FR-A8AX (plug-in option).
NOTE For details on FR-A8AX setting, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-A8AX
Changing the torque characteristic of the constant-power range (Pr.801, Pr.803)
According to the motor's characteristics, base frequency or higher decreases the torque. To give the constant torque command in base frequency or higher, set "1 or 11" in Pr.803 Constant output range torque characteristic selection.
Torque in a low-speed range is constant during torque control regardless of the setting of Pr.803. However, when "2" is set in Pr.803 under Real sensorless vector control, the torque may not be kept constant in the low-speed range.
To avoid overload or overcurrent of the inverter or motor, use Pr.801 Output limit level to limit the torque current in the constant power range.
Pr.804 setting
Torque command input
Setting range Setting incrementsCC-Link/PLC function
CC-Link IE Field Network / CC-Link IE
TSN PROFIBUS-DP
1 Torque command by Pr.805, Pr.806*1
Torque command by remote register (RWw2)*2
Torque command by Pr.805, Pr.806*1
600 to 1400 (-400% to 400%) 1%
3 Torque command by remote register (RWw1 or RWwC)*2
Torque command by the buffer memory of PROFIBUS-DP (REF1 to 7)*2
5 Torque command by remote register (RWw1 or RWwC)*2
Torque command by remote register (RWw2)*2
Torque command by the buffer memory of PROFIBUS-DP (REF1 to 7)*2
-32768 to 32767 (complement of 2) (-327.68% to 327.67%)*3 0.01%*3
6 Torque command by Pr.805, Pr.806*1
Torque command by Pr.805, Pr.806*1
Pr.803 setting Torque characteristic in constant-power range
Torque characteristic Output limit 0 (initial value), 10 Constant motor output 1, 11 Constant torque Without 2 Constant torque With
Pr.801 setting Description 0 to 400% Set the torque current limit level. 9999 The torque limit setting value (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.817, etc.) is used for limiting the torque current.
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Reverse selection of the torque command (Pr.1114) The Pr.1114 Torque command reverse selection setting determines whether or not the torque command polarity is
reversed when the reverse rotation command (STR) is turned ON.
Parameters referred to Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500 Calibration parameter C16 (Pr.919) to C19 (Pr.920) (terminal 1 bias, gain torque)page 510
5.4.5 Speed limit
When operating under torque control, motor overspeeding may occur if the load torque drops to a value less than the torque command value, etc. Set the speed limit value to prevent overspeeding. If the actual speed reaches or exceeds the speed limit value, the control method switches from torque control to speed control, preventing overspeeding.
Speed Rated speed
Torque
Pr. 803 = 1, 11: constant torque command
Pr. 803 = 0, 10: constant power command (torque reduction)
Constant torque range
Constant power range
Pr.803 = 0, 1, 10, 11
SpeedRated speed
Pr.801
Torque Pr.803 = 2
Constant torque command
When the output limit is not exceeded
Torque reduction when the output is limited
Constant torque range Constant power range
Pr.1114 setting Torque command polarity at STR signal ON (sign)
0 Not reversed 1 (Initial value) Reversed
Sensorless Vector
Pr. Name Initial value Setting
range Description FM CA
807 H410 Speed limit selection 0
0 Uses the speed command during speed control as the speed limit.
1 Sets speed limits for forward and reverse directions individually by using Pr.808 and Pr.809.
2 Forward/reverse rotation speed limit Applies speed limit by analog voltage input to the terminal 1. Speed limit for forward/reverse side is switched by its polarity.
808 H411
Forward rotation speed limit/speed limit 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 400 Hz Sets the forward side speed limit.
809 H412
Reverse rotation speed limit/reverse-side speed limit
9999 0 to 400 Hz Sets the reverse side speed limit.
9999 Pr.808 setting value is effective.
1113 H414
Speed limit method selection 0
9999 Speed limit mode 1 0 Speed limit mode 2 1 Speed limit mode 3 2 Speed limit mode 4
10 X93 signal OFF: Speed limit mode 3, X93 signal ON: Speed limit mode 4
2875. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
28
Speed limit method selection (Pr.1113)
Control block diagram (speed limit mode 1)
Using the speed command during speed control (Pr.1113 = "9999", Pr.807 = "0").
Speed limit is set by the same method as speed setting during speed control. (Speed setting by PU (operation panel/ parameter unit), multi-speed setting, plug-in option, etc.)
When the start signal turns ON, the limit level increases from 0 Hz to the set speed by taking the time set in Pr.7 Acceleration time. When the start signal turns OFF, the limit level at the time decreases to the operation start level of Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency, by taking the time set in Pr.8 Deceleration time.
NOTE The second and third acceleration/deceleration time can be set. When speed limit command exceeds Pr.1 Maximum frequency setting, the speed limit value becomes Pr.1 setting. When
speed limit command falls below Pr.2 Minimum frequency setting, the speed limit value becomes Pr.2 setting. Also, the speed limit command is smaller than Pr. 13 Starting frequency, the speed limit value becomes 0 Hz.
To perform speed limit by analog input, calibrate analog input terminals 1, 2 and 4. (Refer to page 505.) To use analog inputs to perform speed limit, turn the external signals (RH, RM, RL) OFF. If any of the external signals (RH,
RM, RL) is ON, speed limit by multi-speed are enabled.
Pr.1113 setting Speed limit method Speed limit value
9999 Speed limit mode 1
Forward rotation speed limit Pr.807 = "0": Speed command during speed control Pr.807 = "1": Pr.808 Pr.807 = "2": Analog input at analog input of 0 to 10 V, or Pr.1 at analog input of -10 to 0 V Reverse rotation speed limit Pr.807 = "0": Speed command during speed control Pr.807 = "1": Pr.809, or Pr.808 when Pr.809 = "9999" Pr.807 = "2": Pr.1 at analog input of 0 to 10 V, or analog input at analog input of -10 to 0 V
0 (initial value) Speed limit mode 2 Speed limit
Pr.807 = "0 or 2": Speed command during speed control Pr.807 = "1": Pr.808 Reverse-side speed limit Pr.809, or Pr.808 when Pr.809 = "9999"
1 Speed limit mode 3
2 Speed limit mode 4
10 Switching by external terminals
X93 signal OFF: Speed limit mode 3, X93 signal ON: Speed limit mode 4
+
-
-
0
1
2 Parameter(Pr. 808, Pr. 809)
Forward/reverse rotation speed limit
Torque command
Speed control (proportional control)
Same method as speed command input
Torque control
+
M Pr. 807 Speed limit selection
Speed estimated value < speed limit value
Speed estimator Real sensorless vector control
Vector control
Encoder
Speed estimated value speed limit value
STF(STR) ON OFF
Speed Forward rotation
Speed setting value during speed control
Pr.7
Time
Torque controllable range
The speed setting value is the speed limit value.
Pr.8
Reverse rotation
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Setting separately for forward and reverse rotation (Pr.1113 = "9999", Pr.807 = "1")
Sets speed limits for forward and reverse directions individually by using Pr.808 Forward rotation speed limit/speed limit Pr.809 Reverse rotation speed limit/reverse-side speed limit.
When Pr.809 = "9999" (initial value), speed limit is determined by the setting value of Pr.808 for both forward and reverse rotations.
Forward/reverse rotation speed limit using analog input (Pr.1113 = "9999", Pr.807 = "2")
When performing speed limit by analog inputs to terminal 1, speed limit can be switched between forward and reverse rotation by its voltage polarity.
When Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment = "5", forward/reverse speed limit is enabled. If 0 to 10 V is input, forward rotation speed limit is applied. Reverse rotation speed limit at this time is the value of Pr.1
Maximum frequency. If -10 to 0 V is input, reverse rotation speed limit is applied. Forward rotation speed limit at this time is the value of Pr.1
Maximum frequency.
Pr.809
Speed
Reverse rotation
Pr.808
Torque controllable range
150 150 Output torque
(%) 0
Pr.7 Pr.8
STF(STR) ON OFF
Speed limit
Speed limit
Speed limit
Speed limit
Forward rotation
Pr.808
Pr.809
Torque controllable range
Time
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
2895. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
29
Upper speed limit is the value of Pr.1 for both forward and reverse rotations.
NOTE To perform speed limit by using terminal 1, calibrate terminal 1. (Refer to page 505.)
Speed limit mode 2 (Pr.1113 = "0" initial value) Following the polarity change in the torque command, the polarity of the speed limit value changes. This prevents the
speed from increasing in the torque polarity direction. (When the torque command value is 0, the polarity of the speed limit value is positive.)
When Pr.807 Speed limit selection = "0, 2", the setting during speed control is applied for the speed limit. When Pr.807 Speed limit selection = "1", Pr.808 Forward rotation speed limit/speed limit is applied for the speed limit.
Pr.7
ONOFFStart signal
Speed
Time
Speed
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Output torque (%)
0
Speed
Reverse rotation
Forward rotation
Output torque (%)
Terminal 1 input
Pr.1
0
Torque controllable range
Torque controllable range
Torque controllable range
Terminal 1 input
Terminal 1 input (-10 to 0 V) The reverse rotation speed limit
150 150 150 150
Pr.1
Pr.8
Pr.1 Pr.7
ONOFFStart signal
Speed
Time
Terminal 1 input (0 to 10 V) The forward rotation speed limit
Pr.8
Pr.1
Torque controllable range
When terminal 1 input is "-10 to 0 V" When terminal 1 input is "0 to 10 V"
The reverse rotation speed limit
The forward rotation speed limit
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When the load has reversed the rotation opposite to the torque polarity, the setting of Pr.809 Reverse rotation speed limit/reverse-side speed limit is applied for the speed limit. (The speed limit value and reverse-side speed limit value are limited at Pr.1 Maximum frequency (maximum 400 Hz under Vector control).)
Speed limit mode 3 (Pr.1113 = "1") Select this mode when the torque command is positive. The forward rotation command is for power driving (such as
winding) and the reverse rotation command is for regenerative driving (such as unwinding). (Refer to each following figures.)
When Pr.807 Speed limit selection = "0, 2", the setting during speed control is applied for the speed limit. When Pr.807 Speed limit selection = "1", Pr.808 Forward rotation speed limit/speed limit is applied for the speed limit.
Pr.7
ONOFFStart signal
Rotation speed
Time
Torque command
value Speed limit value
-Speed limit value
Reverse-side speed limit value
Reverse-side speed limit value
Rotation speed
-Pr.809
Pr.809
Range where torque control is available
Range where torque control is available
Speed limit value Pr.8
Pr.809 Reverse-side
speed limit value Pr.7
ONOFFStart signal
Rotation speed
Time
Speed limit value Pr.8
-Pr.809 Reverse-side
speed limit value
Range where torque control is available
When the torque command value is negativeWhen the torque command value is positive
2915. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
29
When the torque command becomes negative, the setting of Pr.809 Reverse rotation speed limit/reverse-side speed limit is applied to prevent the speed from increasing in the reverse rotation direction. (The speed limit value and reverse- side speed limit value are limited at Pr.1 Maximum frequency (maximum 400 Hz under Vector control).)
Speed limit mode 4 (Pr.1113 = "2") Select this mode when the torque command is negative. The forward rotation command is for regenerative driving (such
as unwinding) and the reverse rotation command is for power driving (such as winding). (Refer to each following figures.) When Pr.807 Speed limit selection = "0, 2", the setting during speed control is applied for the speed limit. When Pr.807
Speed limit selection = "1", Pr.808 Forward rotation speed limit/speed limit is applied for the speed limit.
Unwinding (regenerative driving)
Winding (power driving)
Winding (power driving)
Unwinding (regenerative driving)
Forward rotation
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Reverse rotation
Pr.7
ONOFFStart signal
Rotation speed
Time
Torque command
value Speed limit value
Reverse-side speed limit value
Rotation speed
-Pr.809
Range where torque control is available
Range where torque control is available
Speed limit value
Pr.8
-Pr.809 Reverse-side
speed limit value
Pr.7
ONOFFStart signal
Rotation speed
Time
Speed limit value Pr.8
-Pr.809 Reverse-side
speed limit value
Range where torque control is available
For regenerative driving by reverse rotation command (unwinding)
For power driving by forward rotation command (winding)
For forward rotation command
Torque command value
Speed limit value
Reverse-side speed limit value
Rotation speed
-Pr.809
Range where torque control is available
For reverse rotation command
Forward rotation power driving
Reverse rotation regenerative driving
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When the torque command becomes negative, the setting of Pr.809 Reverse rotation speed limit/reverse-side speed limit is applied to prevent the speed from increasing in the reverse rotation direction. (The speed limit value and reverse- side speed limit value are limited at Pr.1 Maximum frequency (maximum 400 Hz under Vector control).)
Speed limit mode switching via external terminals (Pr.1113 = "10") The speed limit mode can be switched between 3 and 4 using the Torque control selection (X93) signal. To assign the X93 signal, set "93" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
X93 signal Speed limit mode
OFF Mode 3 (positive torque command, same status as setting Pr.1113 = "1")
ON Mode 4 (negative torque command, same status as setting Pr.1113 = "2")
Unwinding (regenerative driving)
Winding (power driving)
Winding (power driving)
Unwinding (regenerative driving)
Forward rotation
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Reverse rotation
Pr.7
ONOFFStart signal
Rotation speed
Time
Torque command
valueSpeed limit value
Reverse-side speed limit value
Rotation speed
Pr.809
Range where torque control is available
Range where torque control is available
Speed limit value
Pr.8
Pr.809 Reverse-side
speed limit value
Pr.7
ONOFFStart signal
Rotation speed
Time Speed limit value
Pr.8
Pr.809 Reverse-side
speed limit value
Range where torque control is available
For regenerative driving by forward rotation command (unwinding)
For power driving by reverse rotation command (winding)
For reverse rotation command
Torque command
value Speed limit value
Reverse-side speed limit value
Rotation speed
Pr.809
Range where torque control is available
For forward rotation command
Reverse rotation power driving
Forward rotation regenerative driving
2935. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
29
NOTE
During the speed limit operation, " " (SL) is displayed on the operation panel and the OL signal is output.
OL signal is assigned to terminal OL in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.2 Minimum frequencypage 428 Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to 27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 (multi-speed operation)page 411 Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367 Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection)page 473 Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500 Pr.125, Pr.126, C2 to C7, C12 to C15 (Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain)page 505
5.4.6 Torque control gain adjustment
Operation is normally stable enough in the initial setting, but some adjustments can be made if abnormal vibration, noise or overcurrent occur for the motor or machinery.
Current loop proportional (P) gain adjustment (Pr.824) The 100% current loop proportional gain is equivalent to 1000 rad/s during Real sensorless vector control, and to 1400
rad/s during Vector control. For ordinary adjustment, try to set within the range of 50 to 500%. Set the proportional gain for during torque control. If setting value is large, changes in current command can be followed well and current fluctuation relative to external
disturbance is smaller. If the setting value is however too large, it becomes unstable and high frequency torque pulse is produced.
Current control integral time adjustment (Pr.825) Set the integral time of current control during torque control. Torque response increases if set small; current however becomes unstable if set too small. If the setting value is small, it produces current fluctuation toward disturbance, decreasing time until it returns to original
current value.
Using two types of gain (Pr.834, Pr.835) Use Pr.834 Torque control P gain 2 (current loop proportional gain), Pr.835 Torque control integral time 2 (current
loop integral time) if the gain setting needs to be switched according to application or if multiple motors are switched by a single inverter.
Pr.834, Pr.835 is enabled when the second function selection (RT) signal is turned ON.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
824 G213
Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain)
100% 0 to 500% Set the current loop proportional gain.
825 G214
Torque control integral time 1 (current loop integral time)
5 ms 0 to 500 ms Set current loop integral compensation time.
834 G313
Torque control P gain 2 (current loop proportional gain)
9999 0 to 500% Sets the current loop proportional gain when RT signal
is ON. 9999 The Pr.824 setting is applied to the operation.
835 G314
Torque control integral time 2 (current loop integral time)
9999 0 to 500 ms Sets the current loop integral compensation time when
RT signal is ON.
9999 The Pr.825 setting is applied to the operation.
Sensorless Vector
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE The RT signal is a second function selection signal which also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 525.) The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
Adjustment procedure Adjust if any of phenomena such as unusual vibration, noise, current or overcurrent is produced by the motor or machinery.
1. Change the Pr.824 setting while checking the conditions.
2. If it cannot be adjusted well, change the Pr.825 setting, and perform step 1 again.
5.4.7 Troubleshooting in torque control
Parameters referred to Pr.72 PWM frequency selectionpage 356 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221
Adjustment method Set Pr.824 lower and Pr.825 longer. First, lower Pr.824 and then check of there is still any abnormal vibration, noise or current from the motor If it still requires improvement, make Pr.825 longer.
Pr.824 Lower the setting by 10% each time and set a value that is approximately 80 to 90% of the setting immediately before the abnormal noise or current improves. If set too low, current ripple is produced and produces a sound from the motor that synchronizes with it.
Pr.825 Lengthen the current setting by doubling it each time and set a value that is approximately 80 to 90% of the setting value, immediately before abnormal noise or current is improved. If set too long, current ripple is produced and produces a sound from the motor that synchronizes with it.
Condition Possible cause Countermeasure
1 Torque control does not operate properly.
There is incorrect phase sequence between the motor wiring and encoder wiring.
Check the wiring. (Refer to page 91.)
Pr.800 Control method selection is not appropriate. Check the Pr.800 setting. (Refer to page 221.)
The speed limit value has not been input.
Set the speed limit value. (If speed limit value is not input, it becomes 0 Hz by default and the motor does not run.)
Torque command varies.
Check that the torque command sent from the controller is correct.
Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection lower. Set Pr.826 Torque setting filter 1 higher.
The torque command and the torque recognized by the inverter are different.
Re-calibrate the settings of C16 Terminal 1 bias command (torque/magnetic flux), C17 Terminal 1 bias (torque/ magnetic flux), C18 Terminal 1 gain command (torque/ magnetic flux), C19 Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux) (Refer to page 510.)
Torque fluctuation due to motor temperature variation
Select the magnetic flux observer by Pr.95 Online auto tuning selection. (Refer to page 558.)
The option to be used and parameter settings do not match.
Correctly set Pr.862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be used. (Refer to page 226.)
2
When a small torque command is given, the motor rotates in a direction opposite to the start signal.
Torque offset calibration is inaccurate. Re-calibrate C16 and C17. (Refer to page 510.)
3
Torque control cannot operate normally during acceleration/ deceleration. The motor vibrates.
Speed limit is operating. (Speed limit may operate because the speed limit value will increase or decrease according to acceleration/ deceleration time setting of Pr.7 and Pr.8 when Pr.807 = "0 or 2".)
Set the acceleration/deceleration time shorter. Alternatively, set "0" for the acceleration/deceleration time. (Forward/reverse rotation speed limit at this time is the value at a constant speed.)
4 Output torque is nonlinear for the torque command.
Torque shortage. Return Pr.854 Excitation ratio to the initial value.
Sensorless Vector
2955. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
29
Pr.807 Speed limit selectionpage 287 C16 to C19 (torque setting voltage (current) bias/gain)page 510
5.4.8 Torque control by variable-current limiter control
By changing the torque limit value for speed control, torque control can be performed.
By adding the bias amount to the line speed (master speed) as the speed command value to saturate the speed controller and changing the torque limit value, torque control can be performed.
For a positive bias amount (the speed command value faster than the line speed), power driving is applied, and for a negative bias amount (the speed command value slower than the line speed), regenerative driving is applied.
Speed control is the basic control. For how to set the speed command and torque limit value, refer to the description of speed control (page 235).
Under speed control with Pr.800 = "0 or 100", when the speed command value is changed by an external force, the torque limit is invalid during a change in the speed command value to adjust the internal speed command value to the actual speed. Under variable speed limiter control with Pr.800 = "6 or 106", the process to adjust the speed command value to the actual speed is not performed, and thus the torque limit remains valid. This prevents torque from suddenly changing at a speed change.
Vector
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
800 G200
Control method selection 20
6 Vector control Variable-current limiter torque control)106 Torque control under Vector control
(fast-response operation) 0 to 5, 100 to 105 Vector control 9, 109 Vector control test operation 10 to 12, 110 to 112 Real sensorless vector control 13 to 14, 113, 114 (PM sensorless vector control)
20 V/F control (Advanced magnetic flux vector control, PM sensorless vector control)
451 G300
Second motor control method selection 9999
0 to 6, 10 to 14, 20, 100 to 106, 110 to 114
Select the control method for the second motor. The second motor is enabled when the RT signal is ON. The setting range is the same as that of Pr.800.
9999 The setting value of Pr.800 is used.
Line speed
Speed command value
Torque limit value (absolute value)
Generated torque Power driving
Regenerative driving 0
0
0
Line speed
Speed command value
Pr.800=0, 100 0
0
0
Torque limit value (absolute value)
Line speed
Speed command value
Generated torque
0
0
0
Torque limit value (absolute value)
Pr.800=6, 106
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When Pr.800 = "6 or 106" (torque control by a variable-current limiter), Pr.690 Deceleration check time and Pr.873 Speed
limit are ignored.
Parameters referred to Pr.690 Deceleration check timepage 269 Pr.873 Speed limitpage 269 Pr.800 Control method selection, Pr.451 Second motor control method selectionpage 221
2975. PARAMETERS 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
29
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
5.5.1 About position control
In position control, speed commands, which are calculated to eliminate the difference between the command pulse (parameter setting) and the feedback pulse number, are output to rotate the motor.
This inverter can perform simple positioning by contact input or position control by simple pulse input to the inverter.
Control block diagram
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
To perform Simple position control by setting parameters
Parameter position command
P.B000, P.B020 to P.B050, P.B101, P.B120 to P.B188, P.B190 to P.B195
Pr.419, Pr.464 to Pr.494, Pr.1221 to Pr.1290, Pr.1292, Pr.1293
303
To perform position control by pulse input to the inverter
Simple pulse train position command P.B000, P.B009, P.B010 Pr.419, Pr.428, Pr.429 319
To adjust the gear ratio of the motor and machine Electronic gear settings P.B001, P.B002, P.B005 Pr.420, Pr.421, Pr.424 325
To improve the precision of the position control
Position adjustment parameter settings
P.B007 to P.B008, P.B192 to P.B195
Pr.426 to Pr.427, Pr.1294 to Pr.1297 327
Position control gain adjustment
P.B003, P.B004, P.B006, P.B012, P.B013, P.G220, P.G224, P.C114
Pr.422, Pr.423, Pr.425, Pr.446, Pr.828, Pr.877, Pr.880, Pr.1298
328
To monitor pulses Pulse monitor selection P.B011 Pr.430 321 Cumulative pulse monitoring P.M610 to P.M613 Pr.635 to Pr.638 321
Vector PM
0, 10, 100, 110
Pr.419
Pr.420 Pr.421
Pr.424
Pr.425 Pr.423
Pr.422 M
Pr.429
Pr.428 1
2 Pr.877 0,1
Model position control gain
J Torque coefficient
Torque control
+
+ +
++
+ -
- -
- +
integral
Pr.446
Model speed control gain
Pr.828
Speed feed forward gain
0,12 2 21 0
0
Encoder
integral
Command pulse (FR-A8AL)
Command pulse (FR-A8AL)
PGP, PP
PGN, NP
RH RM RL
REX STF STR
Pr.4 to 6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 Pr.465 to Pr.494 Pr.1222 to Pr.1281
Electronic gear
Multi-speed, communication
Position command source selection
Command pulse selection
Pr.428 Command pulse
Pulse train sign
JOG
NP
Command pulse selection
Position command acceleration/deceleration
time constant
Position loop gain
Clear signal selection
Differentiation
Position feedback
Deviation counter
Speed control
Position feed forward
command filter Position feed forward gain
Travel distance
Position Acceleration/deceleration time Dwell time Auxiliary functionSpeed Point table
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation example Calculate the speed command so that the difference between the number of pulses of the internal pulse train (if Pr.419 =
"0", command pulses are used in the inverter from the number of pulses defined by parameters (Pr.465 to Pr.494)) and the number of pulses in the feedback from the motor terminal encoder (estimated value when PM sensorless vector control is used) is 0, and then rotate the motor based on the calculation.
The pulses are slow during motor acceleration and fast at full speed. The pulses become slower during deceleration, and eventually reach 0 and the motor stops a little after the command pulse. This time difference is necessary to ensure stop accuracy and is called stop setting time.
NOTE To assign the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal, set "23" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection). To assign the In-position (Y36) signal, set "36" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
1) Once a pulse train is input, pulses are accumulated in the deviation counter, and the droop pulses in this counter become position control pulses and speed command.
2) When the motor starts to rotate in response to the speed command from the inverter, feedback pulses are also generated by the encoder at the same time. Subtract the encoder feedback pulses or feedback estimate value from the droop pulses in the deviation counter. The deviation counter keeps rotating the motor while keeping a certain droop amount.
3) If the command pulse input stops, the amount of droop pulses in the deviation counter decreases and thus the speed slows down. When there is no droop pulse, the motor stops.
4) If the number of droop pulses becomes smaller than the value set in Pr.426 In-position width, the system determines that positioning is complete and the In-position (Y36) signal is turned ON.
Acceleration TimeDeceleration Stop settling time
Motor speed
Pulse distribution
Droop pulse value
Pulse train Rough Fine Rough
LX signal Servo on
STF (STR) Forward (reverse)
Y36 signal In-position signal
Command pulse frequency [pulses/s]
Motor speed [r/min]
2995. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
30
5.5.2 Setting procedure of Vector control (position control)
Using an induction motor Operating procedure 1. Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 87.)
Install a Vector control compatible option.
2. Set the option to be used (Pr.862). Set Pr.862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be used. (Refer to page 221.)
3. Set the motor and the encoder (Pr.71, Pr.359 (Pr.852), Pr.369 (Pr.851)). (Refer to page 94.)
4. Set the overheat protection of the motor (Pr.9). (Refer to page 415.) When using the SF-V5RU or a motor equipped with a thermal sensor, set Pr.9 = 0 A.
5. Set the motor capacity and number of motor poles (Pr.80, Pr.81). (Refer to page 221.) V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).
6. Set the rated motor voltage and frequency (Pr.83, Pr.84). (Refer to page 95.)
7. Select the control method (Pr.800). (Refer to page 221.) Set Pr.800 = "3" (position control), "4" (speed - position switching), or "5" (position - torque switching) to enable position control.
8. Select the position command source (Pr.419).
9. Perform the test operation.
As required Set the electronic gear. (Refer to page 325.) Set the position adjustment parameters. (Refer to page 327.) Adjust the position control gain. (Refer to page 328.) Set the torque limit. (Refer to page 245.)
NOTE The carrier frequency is limited during Vector control. (Refer to page 356.) Refer to the Instruction Manual of each option for details on Vector control using the FR-A8APR, FR-A8APS, or FR-A8APA. To perform operation in position control mode, the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal needs to be turned ON. To assign the
LX signal, set "23" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Vector
For position command given by point table, set Pr.419 = "0 (initial value), 10, 100, or 110 to set the positioning parameters (Pr.465 to Pr.494, Pr.1222 to Pr.1281). (Refer to page 303.)
For position command given by inverter pulse train input, set Pr.419 = "2" to select a pulse train type for commands (Pr.428). (Refer to page 320.)
For position command given from the positioning module of the programmable controller, set Pr.419 = "1" to select a pulse train type for commands (Pr.428). (Refer to page 316.)
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Using a PM motor Operating procedure 1. Set the applied encoder (Pr.359 (Pr.852), Pr.369 (Pr.851)).
Refer to page 94 and set the parameters according to the option and the encoder to be used.
2. Set the applied motor (Pr.9, Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.83, Pr.84). Set Pr.71 Applied motor, Pr.9 Rated motor current, Pr.80 Motor capacity, Pr.81 Number of motor poles, Pr.83 Rated motor voltage, and Pr.84 Rated motor frequency according to the motor specifications. (Setting "9999 (initial value)" in Pr.80 or Pr.81 selects V/F control.) Set Pr.702, Pr.706, Pr.707, Pr.724 and Pr.725 as required.
3. Select Vector control (speed control). (Refer to page 221.)
4. Perform offline auto tuning and encoder position tuning (Pr.96). (Refer to page 542.) Set Pr.96, and perform tuning.
5. Configure the initial parameter setting for the applied motor using Pr.998. When the setting for the PM motor is selected in Pr.998 PM parameter initialization, Vector control for the PM motor with an encoder is enabled. "8009": Parameter (rotations per minute) settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF "8109": Parameter (frequency) settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF "9009": Parameter (rotations per minute) settings for an SPM motor "9109": Parameter (frequency) settings for an SPM motor
6. Set Pr.800 to position control.
7. Perform the test operation.
NOTE For PM motors, after performing offline auto tuning and encoder position tuning, first perform PM parameter initialization. If
parameter initialization is performed after setting other parameters, some of those parameters are initialized too. (Refer to page 231 for the parameters that are initialized.)
3015. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
30
5.5.3 Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control (position control)
Operating procedure 1. Perform IPM parameter initialization. (Refer to page 230.)
Set "3003 or 3103" in Pr.998 PM parameter initialization or select "3003" in " (IPM parameter initial settings).
2. Select the control mode (Pr.800). (Refer to page 221.) Set Pr.800 = "13" (position control) or "14" (speed/position switchover) to enable position control.
3. Select the position command source (Pr.419).
4. Perform the test operation.
As required Set the electronic gear. (Refer to page 325.) Set the position adjustment parameters. (Refer to page 327.) Adjust the position control gain. (Refer to page 328) Set the torque limit. (Refer to page 245.)
NOTE The carrier frequency is limited during PM sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 356.) Position deviation may occur due to motor temperature changes. In such case, shut off the inverter outputs, and restart. Perform position control under PM sensorless vector control only when using an MM-CF IPM motor with low-speed range high-
torque characteristic (Pr.788 = "9999 (initial value)") Position control is performed on the assumption of 4096 pulses/motor rotation.
The positioning accuracy is 200 pulses/rev for 1.5K or lower, and 100 pulses/rev for 2K or higher (under no load). To perform operation in position control mode, the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal needs to be turned ON. To assign the
LX signal, set "23" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Setting Description 3003 Parameter settings for MM-CF IPM motor (rotations per minute) 3103 Parameter settings for MM-CF IPM motor (frequencies)
PM
For position command given by point table, set Pr.419 = "0 (initial value), 10, 100, or 110 to set the positioning parameters (Pr.465 to Pr.494, Pr.1222 to Pr.1281). (Refer to page 303.)
For position command given by inverter pulse train input, set Pr.419 = "2" to select a pulse train type for commands (Pr.428). (Refer to page 319.)
For position command given from the positioning module of the programmable controller, set Pr.419 = "1" to select a pulse train type for commands (Pr.428). (Refer to page 316.)
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.5.4 Simple positioning function by parameters
Set positioning parameters such as the number of pulses (position) and acceleration/deceleration time in advance to create a point table (point table method). Positioning operation is performed by selecting the point table.
Vector PM
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
419 B000
Position command source selection 0
0, 10, 100, 110, 200, 210, 300, 310, 1110, 1310
Simple position control by point table (Settings are available for the home position data at servo-OFF, clearing of the current position 2 monitor value, and the absolute position control.)
1 Position command given by the pulse train input to the FR- A8AL*1
2 Simple pulse train position command given by the pulse train input to the inverter
464 B020
Digital position control sudden stop deceleration time
0 s 0 to 360 s Set the time period until the inverter stops when the forward rotation (reverse rotation) command is turned OFF with the position feed forward function.
465 B021
First target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 1. 466 B022
First target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
467 B023
Second target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 2. 468 B024
Second target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
469 B025
Third target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 3. 470 B026
Third target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
471 B027
Fourth target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 4. 472 B028
Fourth target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
473 B029
Fifth target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 5. 474 B030
Fifth target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
475 B031
Sixth target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 6. 476 B032
Sixth target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
477 B033
Seventh target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 7. 478 B034
Seventh target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
479 B035
Eighth target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 8. 480 B036
Eighth target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
481 B037
Ninth target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 9. 482 B038
Ninth target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
483 B039
Tenth target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 10. 484 B040
Tenth target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
485 B041
Eleventh target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 11. 486 B042
Eleventh target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
3035. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
30
487 B043
Twelfth target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 12. 488 B044
Twelfth target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
489 B045
Thirteenth target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 13. 490 B046
Thirteenth target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
491 B047
Fourteenth target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 14. 492 B048
Fourteenth target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
493 B049
Fifteenth target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
Set the target position of the point table 15. 494 B050
Fifteenth target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
1221 B101
Start command edge detection selection 0
0 Turning OFF the forward (reverse) rotation command stops the motor in the setting time of Pr.464.
1 Position forward is continued even if the forward (reverse) rotation command is turned OFF.
1222 B120
First positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 1.
1223 B121
First positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1224 B122
First positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1225 B123
First positioning sub- function 10 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
102, 110 to 112 1226 B124
Second positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 2.
1227 B125
Second positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1228 B126
Second positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1229 B127
Second positioning sub- function 10 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
102, 110 to 112 1230 B128
Third positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 3.
1231 B129
Third positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1232 B130
Third positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1233 B131
Third positioning sub- function 10 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
102, 110 to 112 1234 B132
Fourth positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 4.
1235 B133
Fourth positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1236 B134
Fourth positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1237 B135
Fourth positioning sub- function 10 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
102, 110 to 112 1238 B136
Fifth positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 5.
1239 B137
Fifth positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1240 B138
Fifth positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1241 B139
Fifth positioning sub- function 10 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
102, 110 to 112
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1242 B140
Sixth positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 6.
1243 B141
Sixth positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1244 B142
Sixth positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1245 B143
Sixth positioning sub- function 10 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
102, 110 to 112 1246 B144
Seventh positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 7.
1247 B145
Seventh positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1248 B146
Seventh positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1249 B147
Seventh positioning sub-function 10 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
102, 110 to 112 1250 B148
Eighth positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 8.
1251 B149
Eighth positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1252 B150
Eighth positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1253 B151
Eighth positioning sub- function 10 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
102, 110 to 112 1254 B152
Ninth positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 9.
1255 B153
Ninth positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1256 B154
Ninth positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1257 B155
Ninth positioning sub- function 10 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
102, 110 to 112 1258 B156
Tenth positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 10.
1259 B157
Tenth positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1260 B158
Tenth positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1261 B159
Tenth positioning sub- function 10 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
102, 110 to 112 1262 B160
Eleventh positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 11.
1263 B161
Eleventh positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1264 B162
Eleventh positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1265 B163
Eleventh positioning sub-function 10 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
102, 110 to 112 1266 B164
Twelfth positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 12.
1267 B165
Twelfth positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1268 B166
Twelfth positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1269 B167
Twelfth positioning sub- function 10 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
102, 110 to 112 1270 B168
Thirteenth positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 13.
1271 B169
Thirteenth positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1272 B170
Thirteenth positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1273 B171
Thirteenth positioning sub-function 10 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
102, 110 to 112
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
3055. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
30
*1 During position control under Vector control, if Pr.419 = "1" while the FR-A8AL is not installed (or is disabled), a protective function (E.OPT) is activated.
Selecting the position command input method (Pr.419) Use Pr.419 to set simple position control by point table. Settings are available for the home position data at servo-OFF, clearing of the current position 2 monitor value, and the
absolute position control.
1274 B172
Fourteenth positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 14.
1275 B173
Fourteenth positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1276 B174
Fourteenth positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1277 B175
Fourteenth positioning sub-function 10 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
102, 110 to 112 1278 B176
Fifteenth positioning acceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
Set the characteristics of the point table 15.
1279 B177
Fifteenth positioning deceleration time 5 s 0.01 to 360 s
1280 B178
Fifteenth positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
1281 B179
Fifteenth positioning sub-function 10 0, 2, 10, 12, 100, 102,
110, 112
1282 B180
Home position return method selection 4
0 Dog type 1 Count type 2 Data set type 3 Stopper type
4 Ignoring the home position (servo-ON position as the home position)
5 Dog type back end reference 6 Count type with front end reference
1283 B181
Home position return speed 2 Hz 0 to 30 Hz Set the speed for the home position return operation.
1284 B182
Home position return shifting speed 0.5 Hz 0 to 10 Hz Set the speed immediately before the home position return.
1285 B183
Home position shift amount lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 Set the home position shift distance.
Home position shift amount = Pr.1286 10000 digits + Pr.12851286
B184 Home position shift amount upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999
1287 B185
Travel distance after proximity dog ON lower 4 digits
2048 0 to 9999 Set the travel distance after detecting the proximity dog. Travel distance after proximity dog = Pr.1288 10000 + Pr.12871288
B186
Travel distance after proximity dog ON upper 4 digits
0 0 to 9999
1289 B187
Home position return stopper torque 40% 0 to 200% Set the activation level of torque limit operation for the
stopper-type home position return. 1290 B188
Home position return stopper waiting time 0.5 s 0 to 10 s Set the waiting time until home position return is started
after the inverter detects the pressing status.
1292 B190
Position control terminal input selection 0
0 Sudden stop signal (X87) normally open input (NO contact input)
1 Sudden stop signal (X87) normally closed input (NC contact input)
1293 B191
Roll feeding mode selection 0
0 Roll feed disabled 1 Roll feed enabled
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Item Description Position command The position command input method can be selected. Home position retention Select whether to retain the home position data when the LX signal is OFF (servo-OFF).
Monitor value clearing Select whether to clear the current position 2 monitor value when the home position return is completed or when position control is switched to other control mode.
Absolute position control Select the availability of absolute position control.
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 Timing to clear the current position 2 monitor value differs depending on the setting value. (Refer to page 321.) *2 During position control under Vector control, if Pr.419 = "1" while the FR-A8AL is not installed (or is disabled), a protective function (E.OPT) is
activated. *3 During position control under Vector control, if Pr.419 = "1110 or 1310" while the FR-A8APS is not installed (or is disabled), a protective function
(E.OPT) is activated.
Positioning by a point table (Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239, Pr.465 to Pr.494, and Pr.1222 to Pr.1281)
Create a the point table by setting the following parameters.
Position data settings Set the position feed length to Pr.465 to Pr.494. The feed length set to each point table is selected by multi-speed terminals (RH, RM, RL and REX). Under Vector control with encoder, set the value calculated with the following formula as the position feed length: (encoder
resolution number of rotations 4). For example, to stop the motor after 100 times of rotations using the SF-V5RU,
The value is calculated with 2048 (pulses/rev) 100 (rotations per minute) 4 (multiplier) = 819200 (feed length)
Pr.419 setting Position command Home position retention
Monitor value clearing*1
Absolute position controlWhen home position
return is completed
When position control is switched
to other control mode
0 Simple position control by point table (position command given by setting parameters)
Not retained Not cleared Cleared
Disabled
1 Position command given by the pulse train input to the FR- A8AL*2
2 Simple pulse train position command given by the pulse train input to the inverter
10
Simple position control by point table (position command given by setting parameters)
Retained 100 Not retained
Cleared Cleared 110 Retained 200 Not retained
Not cleared Not cleared 210 Retained 300 Not retained
Cleared Not cleared 310
Retained1110 Cleared Cleared Enabled (with the FR-A8APS installed)*31310 Cleared Not cleared
Point table
Position data [Command
side] Maximum
speed Acceleration
time Deceleration
time Dwell time Auxiliary function
Point table selection signal
Upper Lower REX RH RM RL 1 Pr.466 Pr.465 Pr.4 Pr.1222 Pr.1223 Pr.1224 Pr.1225 OFF ON OFF OFF 2 Pr.468 Pr.467 Pr.5 Pr.1226 Pr.1227 Pr.1228 Pr.1229 OFF OFF ON OFF 3 Pr.470 Pr.469 Pr.6 Pr.1230 Pr.1231 Pr.1232 Pr.1233 OFF OFF OFF ON 4 Pr.472 Pr.471 Pr.24 Pr.1234 Pr.1235 Pr.1236 Pr.1237 OFF OFF ON ON 5 Pr.474 Pr.473 Pr.25 Pr.1238 Pr.1239 Pr.1240 Pr.1241 OFF ON OFF ON 6 Pr.476 Pr.475 Pr.26 Pr.1242 Pr.1243 Pr.1244 Pr.1245 OFF ON ON OFF 7 Pr.478 Pr.477 Pr.27 Pr.1246 Pr.1247 Pr.1248 Pr.1249 OFF ON ON ON 8 Pr.480 Pr.479 Pr.232 Pr.1250 Pr.1251 Pr.1252 Pr.1253 ON OFF OFF OFF 9 Pr.482 Pr.481 Pr.233 Pr.1254 Pr.1255 Pr.1256 Pr.1257 ON OFF OFF ON 10 Pr.484 Pr.483 Pr.234 Pr.1258 Pr.1259 Pr.1260 Pr.1261 ON OFF ON OFF 11 Pr.486 Pr.485 Pr.235 Pr.1262 Pr.1263 Pr.1264 Pr.1265 ON OFF ON ON 12 Pr.488 Pr.487 Pr.236 Pr.1266 Pr.1267 Pr.1268 Pr.1269 ON ON OFF OFF 13 Pr.490 Pr.489 Pr.237 Pr.1270 Pr.1271 Pr.1272 Pr.1273 ON ON OFF ON 14 Pr.492 Pr.491 Pr.238 Pr.1274 Pr.1275 Pr.1276 Pr.1277 ON ON ON OFF 15 Pr.494 Pr.493 Pr.239 Pr.1278 Pr.1279 Pr.1280 Pr.1281 ON ON ON ON
3075. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
30
To set 819200 as the first feed length, separate the number into the upper and lower 4 digits as follows:
Pr.466 (upper digits) = 81 (decimal), Pr.465 (lower digits) = 9200 (decimal) The position feed length of PM sensorless vector control is fixed at 4096 for each motor rotation.
Acceleration/deceleration time setting Set the acceleration/deceleration time for parameters corresponding to each point table. The frequency which is the basis of acceleration/deceleration time is Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency. However, 1 Hz/s is the minimum acceleration/deceleration rate (acceleration/deceleration frequency divided by acceleration/deceleration time). If the acceleration/deceleration rate is smaller than 1, the motor runs at 1 Hz/s or in the deceleration time.
The maximum acceleration/deceleration time is limited at 360 seconds. During position control, acceleration/deceleration pattern is always the liner acceleration/deceleration, and the Pr.29
Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection setting is ignored.
Setting the waiting (dwell) time Set the waiting (dwell) time which is the interval from the completion of the position command of a selected point table to
the start of the position command of the next point table. Set the dwell time from 0 to 20000 ms for parameters corresponding to each point table.
Auxiliary function setting Set the handling and operation methods of the position data in each point table. Set the auxiliary function for parameters corresponding to each point table.
For the sign, select the sign of position data. For the command method, select the absolute position command or incremental position command. For the absolute
position command, specify the distance from the home position. For the incremental position command, specify the distance from the current position command.
Position commands cannot be received until the completion of the home position return. For the operation method, select "individual", "continuous", or "loop operation using the point table selected at the start".
When continuous operation is selected, next point table is executed after a command has been executed. Set "individual" as the operation method for the point table which is the last of the continuous operation. When "loop operation using the point table selected at the start" is selected, the positioning operation is the loop. To stop the operation, turn OFF the STF (STR) signal, or turn ON the X87 (sudden stop) input signal.
Individual operation is only executed in the selected point table. The dwell time setting is disabled in individual operation. Continuous operation setting is not available for the point table 15 ("0, 2, 10, 12, 100, 102, 110 or 112" can be set to
Pr.1281).
Auxiliary function parameter setting Sign (100s digit) Command method
(tens place) Operation method
(ones place) 0
Plus (0)
Absolute position command (0)
Individual (0) 1 Continuous (1) 2 Loop operation using the point table selected at the
start of the operation (2) 10
Incremental position command (1)
Individual (0) 11 Continuous (1) 12 Loop operation using the point table selected at the
start of the operation (2) 100
Minus (1)
Absolute position command (0)
Individual (0) 101 Continuous (1) 102 Loop operation using the point table selected at the
start of the operation (2) 110
Incremental position command (1)
Individual (0) 111 Continuous (1) 112 Loop operation using the point table selected at the
start of the operation (2)
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Example 1 of positioning operation using point table (automatic continuous positioning operation)
The following figure shows an operation example using the following point table.
NOTE During continuous operation, the position command speed drops to 0 in each point table operation before starting the next
point table operation. During continuous operation, no point table selection signal is received. Select the position feed length using point table before
turning ON the start command. Only the maximum frequency can be changed during operation.
Example 2 of positioning operation using point table (Automatic loop positioning operation using the point table selected at the start of the operation)
The following figure shows a loop operation example using the point table 2 to point table 4 in the following point table. The operation is started from the point table 2 (start point). Set "12" in the auxiliary function of the point table 4 (end point).
*1 The positioning operation is the loop. To stop the operation, turn OFF the STF (STR) signal, or turn ON the X87 (sudden stop) input signal. Operation:
1. The operation is started from the point table 2 (start point).
2. The operation is switched to the one using the point table 3.
3. The operation is switched to the one using the point table 4 (end point).
4. According to the setting in the auxiliary function for the point table 4 (Pr.1237 = "12"), the operation is switched to the one using the point table 2 selected at the start (loops back to the start point from the end point).
Point table Target position Maximum
speed (Hz) Acceleration
time(s) Deceleration
time(s) Dwell time
(ms) Auxiliary function Upper Lower
1 100 0 60 5 5 1000 1 (absolute position, continuous)
2 50 0 30 6 6 0 10 (incremental position, individual)
Point table Target position Maximum speed (Hz)
Acceleration time (s)
Deceleration time (s)
Dwell time (ms)*1 Auxiliary function
1 50000 60 1 1 100 1 (absolute position, continuous)
2 70000 20 2 2 100 11 (incremental position, continuous)
3 100000 10 4 4 100 1 (absolute position, continuous)
4 60000 5 3 3 100 12 (incremental position, continuous)
0
60Hz(Pr.4)
30Hz(Pr.5)
Time
Position command speed
STF ON
5s 5s 6s 6s
Point table 1 Point table 2
RH
Target position 1000000 500000
Servo ON (LX) ON
ON
Dwell time (Pr.1224)
(Pr.1222) (Pr.1223) (Pr.1226) (Pr.1227)
3095. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
31
5. The loop of operations 1 to 4 executes.
Example 3 of positioning operation using point table (variable speed operation)
The maximum frequency can be changed during positioning operation. Use as many point tables as the number of maximum speeds to be set.
The following figure shows an operation example using the following point table.
Set "0" as the dwell time to perform variable speed operation.
Return to home position during point table positioning Home position return is performed to match the command coordinates with the machine coordinates. The returned home position can be set as point 0, and positioning operation is available using this.
Home position return procedure 1. Set parameters related to home position return.
Point table Target position Maximum
speed (Hz) Acceleration
time (s) Deceleration
time (s) Dwell time
(ms) Auxiliary function Upper Lower
1 5 0 30 1 1 0 1 (absolute position, continuous)
2 3 0 20 Invalid Invalid 0 11 (incremental position, individual)
3 10 0 10 Invalid Invalid 0 1 (absolute position, continuous)
4 6 0 5 Invalid Invalid 0 10 (incremental position, individual)
0
20Hz
10Hz
Time
Position command speed
STF ON
Point table No.2
Point table No.3
RM ON
Position feed length 70000 60000
Servo ON (LX) ON
700000 100000
Point table No.4
5Hz
160000
30000
Point table No.2
70000
230000 100000
-130000
Point table No.3
Point table No.4
60000
160000
Point table No.2
Point table No.3
70000
230000
-130000
100000
20Hz 20Hz
5Hz
10Hz 10Hz100ms 100ms 100ms 100ms 100ms 100ms 100ms 100ms
0
30 Hz (Pr.4)
Time
Position command speed
STF
Acceleration time (1 s) of point table 1
20 Hz (Pr.5)
10 Hz (Pr.6) 5 Hz
(Pr.24)
Deceleration time (1 s) of point table 1
Position feed length
50000
50000 80000 100000 1600000
30000 20000 60000
RH
RM
RL
Servo ON (LX) ON
ON
ON
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Set the home position return method (Pr.1282). Set the home position return speed (Pr.1283) Set the home position creep speed (Pr.1284) Set the home position return shift amount if necessary(Pr.1286 10000 + Pr.1285). Set the post proximity dog travel distance if necessary. (Pr.1288 10000 + Pr.1287)
2. Turn OFF all point table selections. Turn OFF all RH, RM, RL and REX signals.
3. Turn ON the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal.
4. Turn ON the start signal (STF or STR). Home position return is performed according to the settings.
NOTE The setting values of the point table 1 are used as acceleration/deceleration time. After turning ON the start signal, only the setting values of Pr.1283 Home position return speed, Pr.1284 Home position
return shifting speed can be changed. Perform home position return at the motor switchover.
Selecting the home position return method (Pr.1282 to Pr.1288) Pr.1282 setting
Home position return method Description
0 Dog type*1
Deceleration starts when the Proximity dog signal is turned ON. For the home position after turn OFF of the Proximity dog signal, the position specified by the first Z-phase signal or the position of the first Z-phase signal shifted by the home position shift amount (Pr.1285, Pr.1286) is used.
1 Count type*1
Deceleration starts when the proximity dog signal is turned ON. After the proximity dog, the motor travels the specified travel distance (Pr.1287, Pr.1288). Then, it uses the position specified by the first Z-phase signal or position of the Z-phase signal shifted by the home position shift amount (Pr.1285, Pr.1286).
2 Data set type
The position at which the start signal is input is used as the home position.
Vector
X76
Home position
Point table 1 acceleration time
Proximity dog
Home position return speed
Creep speed
Point table 1 deceleration time
LX
Z-phase
0
Position command speed
Time
Home position shift amount
STF
Point table selection signal
Vector
X76
Home position
Point table 1 acceleration time
Home position return speed
Creep speed
Point table 1 deceleration time
LX
Z-phase Proximity dog
0
Position command speed
Time
Home position shift amount
Travel distance after proximity dog
STF
Point table selection signal
Vector
PM
Home position
LX
0
Position command speed
Time
STF
Point table selection signal
3115. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
31
3 Stopper type
A workpiece is pressed to a mechanical stopper, and the position where it is stopped is set as the home position. Pressing is confirmed when the estimated speed value remains equal to or lower than the value set in Pr.865 Low speed detection for 0.5 second during the torque limit operation. (While the stopper-type home position is performed, Pr.1289 Home position return stopper torque is applied.) After Pr.1290 Home position return stopper waiting time has passed after pressing is confirmed, the home position is shifted by the home position shift distance (Pr.1285 and Pr.1286). After a position command is created and the absolute value of the droop pulse (after electronic gear) falls below the in-position width, the home position return is completed.
4 (initial value)
Ignoring the home position (servo ON position as the home position)
The servo ON position is used as the home position.
5
Dog type back end reference
Deceleration starts at the front end of the proximity dog. After the back end is passed, the position is shifted by the post-dog travel distance and home position shift amount. The position after the shifts is set as the home position. Set pulses required for deceleration from the creep speed or more as the total of the post-dog travel distance and home position shift amount.
Pr.1282 setting
Home position return method Description
Vector
PM
Home position
Point table 1 acceleration time
Home position return speed
Creep speed
Servo-ON (LX)
0
Position command speed
Time
Home position shift amount
Start signal
Point table selection signal
Pressing confirmation level (Pr.1289) Normal (Pr.22)
Normal (Pr.22)Torque limit level
Torque limit
Pressing confirmed
0.5s Pr.1290 Point table 1 deceleration time
Point table 1 acceleration time
Vector
PM
Home position
LX
0 Time
STF
Point table selection signal
RDY
Position command speed
Vector
PM
Proximity dog signal (X76)
Home position
Point table 1 acceleration time Home position
return speed
Creep speed
Point table 1 deceleration time
Servo-ON (LX)
Proximity dog 0
Position command speed
Time
Post-dog travel distance
+ Home position
shift amount
Start signal (STF)
Point table selection signal
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 If it is set under PM sensorless vector control, Home position return parameter setting error (HP3) occurs.
NOTE Home position return automatic back-off function
In a system that uses home position return with proximity dog, if the home position return is commanded while the motor is in a position within the proximity dog, the motor moves out of the proximity dog once, then starts deceleration to stop when it comes to the proximity dog again. The home position return is performed automatically after that.
Home position return error If home position return is not normally completed, the following warnings appear on the operation panel.
The home position return failure (ZA) signal is output while the home position return warning is occurring. To use the ZA signal, set "56 (positive logic) or 156 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function.
Sudden stop (Pr.464, Pr.1221, and X87 signal) The operation performed during STF(STR)-OFF can be selected with Pr.1221 Start command edge detection selection.
6
Count type with front end reference
Deceleration starts at the front end of the proximity dog, and the position is shifted by the post-dog travel distance and home position shift distance. The position after the shifts is set as the home position. Set pulses required for changing the speed from the home position speed to the creep speed or more as the total of the post-dog travel distance and home position shift amount.
Pr.1282 setting
Home position return method Description
Vector
PM 0
Proximity dog signal (X76)
Servo-ON (LX)
Start signal (STF)
Point table selection signal
Point table 1 acceleration time Home position
return speed
Point table 1 deceleration time
Position command speed
Home position
Creep speed
Proximity dog Time
Post-dog travel distance
+ Home position
shift amount
Operation panel indication Name Possible cause
HP1 Home position return setting error The home position setting has failed.
HP2 Home position return uncompleted
Start signal for the point table positioning has turned ON without completing the home position return.
The proximity dog signal is turned OFF during transition from the home position return speed to the creep speed when home position return is performed in the dog type or dog type back end reference.
The position command is given for the motor to reach the post-dog travel distance during transition from the home position return speed to the creep speed when home position return is performed in the count type.
The position command is given for the motor to reach the total of the post-dog travel distance and home position shift distance during deceleration from the creep speed after the proximity dog signal is turned OFF in the dog type back end reference.
The speed did not reach the creep speed in the count type with front end reference.
HP3 Home position return parameter setting error An unavailable home position return method is selected.
Home position return start position Home position
Home position return speed
Creep speed
X76 Proximity dog
3135. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
31
If STF(STR) is turned OFF during positioning or home position returning when Pr.1221 = "0 (initial value)" is set, it stops in the time set as Pr.464 Digital position control sudden stop deceleration time.
Turning ON the Sudden stop signal (X87) during positioning operation or home position return operation, the motor stops in the setting time of Pr.464. To assign the X87 signal, set "87" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
The input logic of the X87 signal Pr.1292 Position control terminal input selection can be set using.
NOTE When deceleration time longer than the normal deceleration time (including Pr.1223) is set in Pr.464, the normal deceleration
time is applied. The X87 signal is effective during position control JOG operation.
Roll feed mode (Pr.1293) If the roll feed mode is enabled in an application that needs repeated positioning in the same direction, such as a conveyor,
positioning can be performed repeatedly without position command overflow. When the roll feed mode is enabled (Pr.1293 = "1"), the position where the first position command is created is set as the
home position and the droop pulses are cleared. When Pr.1293 = "1", simple positioning is available even if home position return cannot be completed.
Positioning modes which enables the roll feed mode are the point table mode, the home position return mode, and the JOG mode.
Pr.1292 setting Input logic (X87)
0 (initial value) Normally open input (NO contact input specification)
1 Normally closed input (NC contact input specification)
0 Time
Position command speed
STF ON
Servo ON (LX)
Pr.464
ON
When Pr.1221="0 (initial value)" is set
0 Time
Position command speed
STF ON
Servo ON (LX) ON
When Pr.1221="1" is set
0 Time
Position command speed
STF ON
Servo ON (LX)
Pr.464
ON
X87 ON
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Basic operation example
Input/output signals for point table positioning
Output signal operation during positioning by point table
Input/ output Signal name Function Pr.178 to Pr.189
setting
Pr.190 to Pr.196 setting Positive
logic Negative
logic
Input X76 Proximity dog ON: dog ON,
OFF: dog OFF 76
X87 Sudden stop When turned ON, the motor decelerates and stops according to Pr.464. 87
Output
MEND Travel completed
Turns ON when the position command operation has completed while the number of droop pulses is within the positioning completion width.
38 138
ZA Home position return failure
Turns ON while the home position return warning occurs. 56 156
PBSY During position command operation Turns ON during position command operation. 61 161
ZP Home position return completed
Turns ON after home position return operation is complete. 63 163
Servo-ON (LX)
0
Position command speed
Start signal (STF)
Point table selection signal
1000 10000
Indication of position command or current position
Y36
Point table 1
LX
0
Speed
Time
STF
PBSY
Point table selection signal (RH)
Dwell time
Point table 2
MEND
Position command
Motor speed
3155. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
31
Output signal operation during positioning with home position return
NOTE When the LX signal is turned OFF, the home position return completed (ZP) signal is turned OFF. When the LX signal is turned
ON again while Pr.419 = "10", the ZP signal is also turned ON.
Parameters referred to Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequencypage 367 Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selectionpage 372
5.5.5 Position control by the FR-A8AL pulse train input
Position control by the command from the positioning module of the programmable controller is available using the FR-A8AL.
*1 During position control under Vector control, if Pr.419 = "1" while the FR-A8AL is not installed (or is disabled), a protective function (E.OPT) is activated.
X76
Home position
Proximity dog
Home position return speed
Creep speed
LX
Z-phase
0
Speed
Time
Home position shift amount
STF
Point table selection signal
MEND
ZP
Y36
PBSY
Vector PM
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
419 B000
Position command source selection 0
0, 10, 100, 110, 200, 210, 300, 310, 1110, 1310
Simple position control by point table (Settings are available for the home position data at servo-OFF, clearing of the current position 2 monitor value, and the absolute position control.)
1 Position command given by the FR-A8AL pulse train input*1
2 Simple pulse train position command given by the pulse train input to the inverter
428 B009 Command pulse selection 0
0 Forward/Reverse pulse train Negative logic1 Pulse train + rotation direction sign
2 A/B phase pulse train 3 Forward/Reverse pulse train
Positive logic4 Pulse train + rotation direction sign 5 A/B phase pulse train
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Connection diagram Connection with the positioning module of RD75P type MELSEC iQ-R series is also available.
*1 The pin number differs according to the encoder used. Speed control, torque control, and position control by pulse train input are available with or without the Z-phase being connected.
*2 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio must be 1:1. *3 Earth (ground) the shield of the encoder cable to the enclosure using a tool such as a P-clip. (Refer to page 87.) *4 For the complementary, set the terminating resistor selection switch to the OFF position (initial status). (Refer to page 87.) *5 A separate external power supply of 15 V is necessary according to the encoder power specification. When the encoder output is the differential
line driver type, only 5 V can be input. When the 24 V power supply of the FR-A8AL is used, the power is supplied to the encoder through terminal PG24. When the 5 V/12 V power supply of the FR-A8AL is used, the power is supplied to the encoder through terminal PGV. Do not use the external power supply simultaneously with the 5 V/12 V power supply or the 24 V power supply. Make the voltage of the external power supply the same as the encoder output voltage, and connect the external power supply between terminals PG and SD.
*6 Assign the function using Pr.178 to Pr.184, Pr.187 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection). *7 The pulse signal from the position module is available for both open collector and differential line driver. However, the connections are different.
(The following figure shows an example for differential line driver.) For the connection method, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8AL.
Operation outline If the pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal is turned ON, output shutoff is canceled and the position control preparation
ready (RDY) signal is turned ON after 0.1 second. When the LSP signal (forward stroke end) or the LSN signal (reverse stroke end) is turned ON, the motor rotates according to the command pulse. When the forward (reverse) stroke end signal is turned OFF, the motor does not rotate in the corresponding direction.
To use the LSP or LSN signal, set the corresponding number in the following table in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to an input terminal. When the LSP and LSN signals are not assigned, the STF signal is used as the forward stroke end signal, and the STR signal is used as the reverse stroke end signal.
Pr.178 to Pr.189 setting Signal 88 LSP 89 LSN
1 5
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
*7
PA
FR-A8AL
PAR
PB PBR
PZ PZR
PG
PG24 SD
LSP LSN LX
CRCLEAR
PP
PGP
PGN
Vector-control-dedicated motors
U V W
U V W E
A
MCCB
B
C D
F G
S R
M
Positioning module MELSEQ iQ-R RD75P
PULSE F
CLRCOM PG024
RDYCOM
READY
NPPULSE R
SD
SD
VDD OPC RDY
VDD
FLS RLS
DOG
STOP
COM
PG0COM FPZ2
SD
Complementary
Differential
*4
*1
*2
*3
*6
*5
Terminating resistor
OFF
ON
Three-phase AC power
supply
Inverter
Earth (Ground)
(+) (-)
Torque limit command
(10V)
Encoder
Forward stroke end Reverse stroke end
Pre-excitation (servo on)
3175. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
31
The LSP and LSN signals can be input via an external terminal only regardless of the setting in Pr.338 Communication operation command source or Pr.339 Communication speed command source.
Interface between the position module and the inverter. To operate an inverter using a positioning module, the interfaces for the position command pulse train must agree with
each other.
Selecting the pulse train type (Pr.428) To select the pulse train input to the FR-A8AL, set "1" in Pr.419 after installing the FR-A8AL on the inverter.
Output form Hardware Input pulse frequency
Open collector Max 200k pulses/s
Differential line driver Max 500k pulses/s
Actual rotation Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Base signal
Position control preparation ready (RDY)
Forward stroke end (LSP)
Reverse stroke end (LSN)
In-position (Y36)
Servo on (LX)
0.1s Forward rotation pulse train (PGP/PP) Reverse rotation pulse train (PGN/NP)
PP(NP) OPC
VDD
Command unit Inverter (FR-A8AL)
*: Wiring length : max. 2 m
+24
SD
Connect externally
(PGN)PGP
PP(NP) OPC
VDD +24
Command unit
*: Wiring length : max. 10 m
Inverter (FR-A8AL)Do not connect
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The command pulse is switchable according to the position module as shown in the following table.
5.5.6 Position control by pulse train input to the inverter
The simple position pulse train command can be input by pulse train input and simple position pulse train signal (NP) to the JOG terminal.
Operation outline If the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal is turned ON, output shutoff is canceled and the Position control preparation
ready (RDY) signal is turned ON after 0.1 second. When the LSP signal (forward stroke end) or the LSN signal (reverse stroke end) is turned ON, the motor rotates according to the command pulse. When the forward (reverse) stroke end signal is turned OFF, the motor does not rotate in the corresponding direction.
To use the LSP or LSN signal, set the corresponding number in the following table in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to an input terminal. When the LSP and LSN signals are not assigned, the STF signal is used as the forward stroke end signal, and the STR signal is used as the reverse stroke end signal.
Command pulse train type During forward rotation
During reverse rotation
Setting of Pr.428 Remarks
Negative logic
Forward pulse train Reverse pulse train
0 (initial value)
RD75 (CW/CCW mode) Note: When (CW/CCW mode) and (PULSE/ SIGN mode) are connected incorrectly, the motor moves only one direction.
Pulse train + sign 1 RD75 (PULSE/SIGN mode)
A phase pulse train B phase pulse train
2
The number of pulses are multiplied by 4 to count. When differential line driver is used, the number of pulses after the number encoder pulses is quadruplicated should be 500k pulses/s or lower. When open collector is used, the number should be 200k pulses/s or lower.
Positive logic
Forward pulse train Reverse pulse train
3
Pulse train + sign 4
A phase pulse train B phase pulse train
5
The number of pulses are multiplied by 4 to count. When differential line driver is used, the number of pulses after the number encoder pulses is quadruplicated should be 500k pulses/s or lower. When open collector is used, the number should be 200k pulses/s or lower.
PP NP
PP
NP HL
PP NP
PP NP
PP
NP H L
PP
NP
Vector PM
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
419 B000
Position command source selection 0
0, 10, 100, 110, 200, 210, 300, 310, 1110, 1310
Simple position control by point table (Settings are available for the home position data at servo-OFF, clearing of the current position 2 monitor value, and the absolute position control.)
1 Position command given by the FR-A8AL pulse train input
2 Simple pulse train position command given by the pulse train input to the inverter
428 B009 Command pulse selection 0
0 to 2 Pulse train + rotation direction sign
Negative logic 3 to 5 Positive logic
Pr.178 to Pr.189 setting Signal 88 LSP 89 LSN
3195. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
32
The LSP and LSN signals can be input via an external terminal only regardless of the setting in Pr.338 Communication operation command source or Pr.339 Communication speed command source.
Selecting the pulse train type (Pr.428 and NP signal) Set Pr.419 Position command source selection = "2" (simple pulse train position command). Set "68" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the Simple position pulse train sign (NP)
to the input terminal. Select the command pulse train with Pr.428 Command pulse selection.
Select Vector control or PM sensorless vector control to select the position control method.
NOTE If Pr.419 = "2" (simple pulse train position command) is set, terminal JOG is used for the simple position pulse train input
regardless of the Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection pulse train input/output selection setting.
5.5.7 Clear signal selection
This function is useful to reset the number of droop pulses to 0 when home position return is performed. The Simple position droop pulse clear (CLR) signal is valid when the inverter is in the External operation mode. The NET
position pulse clear (CLRN) signal is valid when the inverter is in the Network operation mode (not applicable when the FR-A8NS is installed).
If the simple position droop pulse clear (CLR) signal is turned ON when Pr.429 Clear signal selection = "0", the deviation counter is cleared at the edge of the signal. The CLR/CLRN signal is also turned ON in synchronization with the zero pulse signal of the encoder such as the home position return signal, and the deviation counter is cleared.
For a terminal used for the CLR signal, set "69" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
Pr.428 setting Command pulse train type During forward rotation During reverse rotation
0 to 2 Negative logic
Pulse train + rotation direction sign
3 to 5 Positive logic
Pulse train + rotation direction sign
Actual rotation
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Base signal
Operation ready completion (RDY)
Forward stroke end (LSP)
Reverse stroke end (LSN)
Inverter pulse train command Sign signal (NP)
In-position (Y36)
Servo on (LX)
0.1s
JOG
NP HL
JOG
NP H L
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
429 B010 Clear signal selection 1
0
The values of the position pulse (command pulse, droop pulse, current position, and current position 2) are cleared at the rising edge when the clear (CLR/CLRN) signal is switched from OFF to ON.
1 The values of the position pulse are cleared while the clear (CLR/CLRN) signal is turned ON.
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
For a terminal used for the CLR signal, set "59" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
NOTE The accumulated number of pulses is cleared at base shutoff or when the CLR/CLRN signal is turned ON. Refer to page 321 for the condition to clear the values of the position pulse. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
5.5.8 Pulse monitor
Various pulses can be monitored.
*1 The setting is available when a Vector control compatible option is installed.
Pulse monitor selection (Pr.430) Shows the various pulse conditions during operation as the number of pulses. Set "0" in Pr.52 Operation panel main
monitor selection to display the output frequency monitor.
Deviation counter image
CLR/CLRN ON
When Pr. 429 = "0" When Pr. 429 = "1 (initial value)"
Deviation counter image
CLR/CLRN ON
Counter clear while ONCounter clear at the edge of turning on of the signal
Vector PM
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
430 B011 Pulse monitor selection 9999
0 to 5, 12, 13, 100 to 105, 112, 113, 1000 to 1005, 1012, 1013, 1100 to 1105, 1112, 1113, 2000 to 2005, 2012, 2013, 2100 to 2105, 2112, 2113, 3000 to 3005, 3012, 3013, 3100 to 3105, 3112, 3113
Shows the various pulse conditions during operation as the number of pulses.
8888, 9999 Shows the frequency monitor.
635*1
M610 Cumulative pulse clear signal selection 0 0 to 3 Select the clearing method for the cumulative
pulse monitor.
636*1
M611 Cumulative pulse division scaling factor 1 1 to 16384
Set the division scaling factor on the cumulative pulse for the Vector control compatible plug-in option.
637*1
M612
Control terminal option- Cumulative pulse division scaling factor
1 1 to 16384 Set the division scaling factor on the cumulative pulse for the control terminal option (FR-A8TP).
638*1
M613 Cumulative pulse storage 0 0 to 3
Select the processing method for the cumulative pulse monitor value when the power is turned OFF or the inverter is reset.
3215. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
32
Also, setting "26 to 31" in Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992 (multifunction monitor) changes the electronic gear operation setting in the case of monitoring pulses. (Refer to page 446.)
*1 Accumulated value of estimated feedback pulses when PM sensorless vector control is used
Position pulses are cleared according to the following conditions.
Pr.430 setting Description [][][]0
Pulse monitor selection
Displays the lower of the position command (accumulated value of command pulses). [][][]1 Displays the upper of the position command (accumulated value of command pulses). [][][]2 Displays the lower of the current position (accumulated value of feedback pulses*1). [][][]3 Displays the upper of the current position (accumulated value of feedback pulses*1). [][][]4 Displays the lower of the accumulated value of droop pulses. [][][]5 Displays the upper of the accumulated value of droop pulses. [][]12 Displays the lower of the current position 2 (accumulated value of feedback pulses*1). [][]13 Displays the upper of the current position 2 (accumulated value of feedback pulses*1). []0[][]
For pulse monitor selection
Displays the monitor item selected in the pulse monitor selection after the electronic gear operation.
[]1[][] Displays the monitor item selected in the pulse monitor selection before the electronic gear operation.
0[][][]
For the multifunction monitor / PLC function special register
Displays the monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor (position command, current position, and droop pulse) before the electronic gear operation. Displays the item in the PLC function special register (position command, current position, droop pulse, and current position 2) before the electronic gear operation.
1[][][]
Displays the monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor (position command, current position, and droop pulse) after the electronic gear operation. Displays the item in the PLC function special register (position command, current position, droop pulse, and current position 2) after the electronic gear operation.
2[][][]
Displays the monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor (position command, current position, and droop pulse) before the electronic gear operation. Displays the item in the PLC function special register (position command, current position, droop pulse, and current position 2) before the electronic gear operation.
3[][][]
Displays the monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor (position command, current position, and droop pulse) after the electronic gear operation. Displays the item in the PLC function special register (position command, current position, droop pulse, and current position 2) after the electronic gear operation.
8888
Output frequency display
Displays the monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor (position command, current position, and droop pulse) after the electronic gear operation. Displays the item in the PLC function special register (position command, current position, droop pulse, and current position 2) after the electronic gear operation.
9999
Displays the monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor (position command, current position, and droop pulse) before the electronic gear operation. Displays the item in the PLC function special register (position command, current position, droop pulse, and current position 2) before the electronic gear operation.
Clearing condition Position command / current position / droop pulse
Pr.419 setting 0, 100, 200, 300 10, 110, 210, 310 1, 2 1110, 1310
Servo-OFF (LX-OFF) (output shutoff)
Clear signal input*2 *3 *5
Home position return completed *1 *1*4 *6 *1*4
When position control is switched to other control mode
Clear signal input (under the control mode other than position control)
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
: cleared, : not cleared *1 The droop pulses are not cleared. *2 The CLR/CLRN signal is input when a value other than "1" is set in Pr.419, and the signal is input through terminal CR of the FR-A8AL when
Pr.419 = "1". *3 Pulses are cleared when a clear signal is input. (The home position information is not retained.) *4 Pulses are cleared only when the home position return is completed. Once the pulses are cleared, they are not cleared even if the LX signal is
turned ON. *5 The data is cleared when absolute position control is disabled. *6 The home position return is not available. *7 The following shows the example of the clearing the value of the current position 2 monitor under the control mode other than the position control
mode.
NOTE The monitor value of the current position 2 is not cleared when switching between the first and second motors. For details on the special register for the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.
Pulse monitoring on the operation panel (FR-DU08) The position command, current position and the status of droop pulses can be displayed on the operation panel. If displayed data has signs, minus signs appear for both upper and lower digits. If -99999999 or 99999999 is exceeded on the pulse monitor, the monitor value is reset to 0.
NOTE The pulse count starts at servo on.
Clearing condition Current position 2
Pr.419 setting 0 10 100 110 1, 2 1110 200 210 300 310 1310
Servo-OFF (LX-OFF) (output shutoff)
Clear signal input*2 *3 *3 *5 *5
Home position return completed *6
When position control is switched to other control mode
*7 *7 *7 *7 *7
Clear signal input (under the control mode other than position control)
*7 *7 *7 *7 *7
Display data Monitor display without signs Monitor display with signs
-10000 Lower monitor
Upper monitor
-100 Lower monitor
Upper monitor
0
Other than position control (speed)
OFF
ON
Cleared to 0 by turning ON of the CLR signal
STF ON
OFFCLR
MC
STF
ON
0
OFF
Position control
ON
Monitoring of current position 2
ON
Monitor value updated
Monitoring of current position 2
Other than position control (speed)
Not cleared to 0 at the control switchover
Not cleared to 0 at the control switchover
Position control
3235. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
32
Cumulative pulse monitoring When the Vector control compatible plug-in option or the control terminal option (FR-A8TP) is used, the accumulated value
of the encoder pulses can be monitored. The cumulative pulse monitor is available when "71 to 74" is set in the monitor selection parameters (Pr.52, Pr.774, Pr.775,
Pr.776, and Pr.992).
*1 Negative values are not displayed on the operation panel. The values "-1 to -32767" are displayed as "65535 to 32769" on the operation panel.
Cumulative pulse division scaling factor (Pr.636, Pr.637) Set the division scaling factor on the cumulative pulse in Pr.636 or Pr.637. Cumulative pulse count value calculation method
Cumulative pulse count value = Cumulative pulse division scaling factor (Cumulative pulse overflow times 32768 + Cumulative pulse monitor value) Cumulative pulse count value: Number of pulses multiplied by 4 Cumulative pulse division scaling factor: Pr.636, Pr.637
Cumulative pulse monitor value clear (Pr.635) The cumulative pulse monitor and the cumulative pulse overflow times can be cleared by X52 signal or X53 signal. To input the X52 or X53 signal, set "52 (X52)" or "53 (X53)" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)
to assign the function to a terminal. Use Pr.635 Cumulative pulse division scaling factor to select the clearance method for the cumulative pulse monitor
and the cumulative pulse overflow times.
Cumulative pulse storage The cumulative pulse monitor value and cumulative pulse overflow times can be retained when the power is turned OFF
or the inverter is reset.
Monitor item Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992
Display with minus sign Description
Cumulative pulse 71 *1 The cumulative number of pulses is displayed (for Vector control compatible plug-in option). (Monitoring range: -32767 to 32767)
Cumulative pulse overflow times 72 *1 The number of the cumulative pulses carrying overflow times is displayed (for
Vector control compatible plug-in option). Cumulative pulse (control terminal option) 73 *1 The cumulative number of pulses is displayed (for the FR-A8TP). (Monitoring
range: -32767 to 32767) Cumulative pulse overflow times (control terminal option)
74 *1 The number of the cumulative pulse overflow times is displayed (for FR-A8TP).
Pr.635 setting X52 signal Cumulative pulse monitor value clear
X53 signal Cumulative pulse monitor clear (control terminal option)
0 Cleared at the edge when the signal is switched to ON. Cleared at the edge when the signal is switched to ON. 1 Cleared while the signal is ON. Cleared at the edge when the signal is switched to ON. 2 Cleared at the edge when the signal is switched to ON. Cleared while the signal is ON. 3 Cleared while the signal is ON. Cleared while the signal is ON.
Clear signal (X52, X53)
Cleared at the ON edge Cleared while the signal is ON
Cumulative pulse Cumulative pulse
overflow times
Clear signal (X52, X53)
Cumulative pulse Cumulative pulse
overflow times
ON ON
Pr.638 setting
Cumulative pulse monitor / Cumulative pulse overflow times
Cumulative pulse monitor / Cumulative pulse overflow times (Control terminal option)
At power-OFF At reset At power-OFF At reset 0 Not stored in the EEPROM Cleared Not stored in the EEPROM Cleared 1 Stored in the EEPROM Retained Not stored in the EEPROM Cleared 2 Not stored in the EEPROM Cleared Stored in the EEPROM Retained 3 Stored in the EEPROM Retained Stored in the EEPROM Retained
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When the power is turned OFF during the reset process, the cumulative pulse monitor value and the cumulative pulse overflow
times are not stored in the EEPROM. For storing the cumulative pulse monitor value and the cumulative pulse overflow times in the EEPROM at power OFF, connect
R1/L11 with P/+, and S1/L21 with N/- so that the control power is retained. When connecting the FR-HC2 high power factor converter or the converter unit (FR-CC2), assign the FR-HC2/FR-CC2 instantaneous power failure detection (X11) signal to an input terminal to input the IPF signal from the FR-HC2/FR-CC2 to the terminal for X11 signal.
Parameters referred to Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selectionpage 446
5.5.9 Electronic gear settings
Set the gear ratio between the machine gear and motor gear.
Gear ratio calculation (Pr.420, Pr.421) The position resolution (travel distance per pulse [mm]) is the travel distance per motor rotation s [mm] and the feedback pulse Pf [pulses/rev] of the detector.
The travel distance in 1 command pulse can be separately specified with a parameter and so an integer can be set as the travel distance in 1 command pulse.
The following formula shows the relationship between the motor speed and internal command pulse frequency.
NOTE Set the electronic gear ratio in the range of 1/50 to 20. Note that, if the setting value is too small, the speed command will also
be too small; while if it is too large, the speed ripple will be too large.
Vector PM
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
420 B001
Command pulse scaling factor numerator (electronic gear numerator)
1 1 to 32767 Set the electronic gear. Pr.420 is the numerator and Pr.421 is the denominator.
421 B002
Command pulse multiplication denominator (electronic gear denominator)
1 1 to 32767
424 B005
Position command acceleration/ deceleration time constant 0 s 0 to 50 s
Use it when the rotation is not smooth because the electronic gear ratio is large (10 times or larger) and the rotation speed is slow.
s Pf
: Travel distance per pulse [mm] s: Travel distance in one motor rotation [mm] pf: Number of feedback pulses [pulse/rev] (the number of pulses after the number encoder pulses is quadruplicated)
s
Pr.420
Pf Pr.421
fo = Pf fo: internal command pulse frequency [pulses/s] No: motor rotation speed [r/min]
Pr.420 Pr.421
No 60
3255. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
32
Relationship between the position resolution and system accuracy The system accuracy (the positioning accuracy of the machine) is the sum of electric deviation and mechanical deviation. Normally try to prevent the total deviation from being affected by the electronic deviation. Refer to the following relationship as a reference.
Motor stop characteristics When running the motor by the parameter settings, the relationship between the internal command pulse frequency and the number of motor rotations is as shown in the figure on page 299. Pulses as much as the motor speed delay are accumulated in the deviation counter. These pulses are called droop pulses (). The relationship between the command frequency (fo) and position loop gain (Kp: Pr.422) is shown in the following formula.
The number of droop pulses () is 8192 with the initial value Kp = 25 s-1.
Since the inverter has droop pulses during operation, a stop settling time (ts), which is the time between the zero command output and the motor stop, is required. Set the operation pattern taking into the account the stop setting time.
The stop settling time (ts) is 0.12 second for the initial value Kp = 25 s-1.
The accuracy of positioning is (5 to 10) = [mm]
Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (Pr.424) If the electronic gear ratio is large (1:10 or larger) and the rotation speed is slow, the rotation is not smooth and the rotation
shape becomes like a pulse. Set this option in such a case to smoothen the rotation.
If the command pulse frequency varies rapidly when no acceleration time can be assigned to the command pulse, overshoot or excessive error alarms may occur. Set this option in such a case to set the acceleration/deceleration time. Normally it is set to 0.
Parameters referred to Pr.422 Position control gainpage 328
Setting example 1 Setting example 2 In a driving system whose ball screw pitch is PB = 10 (mm) and the reduction ratio is 1/n = 1, the electronic gear ratio is s = 10 (mm) when = 0.01 (mm) and Pf = 4000 (pulses/rev) is set as the number of feedback pulses. Based on this, use the following formula:
Thus, set the parameters as follows: Pr.420 = "4", Pr.421 = "1".
Find the internal command pulse frequency for the rated motor speed of the dedicated motor. Where the command pulse ratio (Pr.420/ Pr.421) = 1, the number of encoder pulses = 2048 (pulses/rev), and the feedback pulse pf = 2048 4.
The internal command pulse is 204800 (pulses/s) in accordance with the above formula.
= s
Pr.420
Pf Pr.421
Pr.420 =
Pf Pr.421 s
= 0.01 4000
= 4
10 1
fo = 2048 4 No
Pr.421
60 Pr.420
= 204800
< ( 1
to 1
) : positioning accuracy 5 10
= fo
[pulse] 204800
[pulse] (with the rated motor speed) 52pK
ts = 3 1
[s] Kp
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.5.10 Position adjustment parameter settings
In-position width (Pr.426, Y36 signal) The Y36 signal is used as the in-position signal. If the number of droop pulses is equal to or smaller than the Pr.426 setting value, the In-position (Y36) signal turns ON. To use the Y36 signal, set "36 (positive logic) or 136 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function.
Excessive level error (Pr.427) If the number of droop pulses exceeds the Pr.427 setting, a position error is detected, Excessive position fault (E.OD) is
activated and the inverter output is shut off. Increase the error threshold level when a small value is set as the Pr.422 Position control gain setting value. Set a small value for early detection even when the load is heavy.
If Pr.427 = "9999", E.OD is not activated regardless of the amount of droop pulses.
Position detection signal (Pr.1294 to Pr.1297, FP signal) The Position detection level (FP) signal is turned ON when the current position [before the electronic gear] exceeds the
Pr.1295 10000 + Pr.1294 position detected. To use the FP signal, set "60 (positive logic) or 160 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function.
Whether the position detection is determined on the plus side or minus side can be selected by Pr.1296 Position detection selection. When "0" is set, the position is detected on both the plus and minus sides. When "1" is set, the position is detected on the plus side only. When "2" is set, the position is detected on the minus side only.
When a current position varies, the Position detection level (FP) signal may repeat ON/OFF (chatter). Setting hysteresis to the detected position prevents chattering of the signal. Use Pr.1297 Position detection hysteresis width to set a hysteresis width.
Vector PM
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 426 B007 In-position width 100 pulses 0 to 32767 pulses Set the number of droop pulses that triggers the In-position
(Y36) signal.
427 B008 Excessive level error 40K
0 to 400K Set the number of droop pulses that activates Excessive position fault (E.OD).
9999 Function disabled 1294 B192
Position detection lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 Set the lower four digits of the position detection value.
1295 B193
Position detection upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 Set the upper four digits of the position detection value.
1296 B194
Position detection selection 0
0 The position is detected on both the plus and minus sides. 1 The position is detected on the plus side only. 2 The position is detected on the minus side only.
1297 B195
Position detection hysteresis width 0 0 to 32767 Set the hysteresis width for the detected position where the
Position detection level (FP) signal turns ON.
Position [before electronic gear]
0 Time
ON
ON
ON
ON
FP (For Pr.1296 = 1)
FP (For Pr.1296 = 0)
FP (For Pr.1296 = 2)
Position detection level Pr.1295 10000 + Pr.1294
Position detection level Pr.1295 10000 + Pr.1294
3275. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
32
5.5.11 Position control gain adjustment
Easy gain tuning is provided as an easy tuning method. For details about easy gain tuning, refer to page 254. If easy gain tuning does not produce any effect, make fine adjustments by using the following parameters. Set "0" to Pr.819 Easy gain tuning selection before setting the following parameters.
Position loop gain (Pr.422, Pr.1298) Make adjustment when any of such a phenomena as unusual vibration, noise and overcurrent of the motor/machine
occurs. Increasing the setting improves traceability for the position command and also improves servo rigidity at a stop, but
oppositely makes an overshoot and vibration more liable to occur. Normally set this parameter within the range about 5 to 50.
Position feed forward gain (Pr.423) This function is designed to cancel a delay caused by the droop pulses in the deviation counter. Set this parameter when
a sufficient position response cannot be obtained after setting Pr.422. When a tracking delay for command pulses poses a problem, increase the setting gradually and use this parameter within
the range where an overshoot or vibration will not occur. This function has no effects on servo rigidity at a stop. Normally set this parameter to 0. When setting Pr.423, set Pr.877 = "0 or 1" to enable position feed forward control.
Position [before electronic gear]
ON ONON
Current position
Pr.1297 Pr.1297
FP
Time
Position detection level Pr.1295 10000 + Pr.1294
Vector PM
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 422 B003 Position control gain 25 s-1 0 to 150 s-1 Set the gain for the position loop.
1298 B013 Second position control gain 25 s-1 0 to 150 s-1 Set the position loop gain for the second motor.
423 B004 Position feed forward gain 0% 0 to 100% Function to cancel a delay caused by the droop pulses in the
deviation counter. 425 B006
Position feed forward command filter 0 s 0 to 5 s Input the primary delay filter for the feed forward command.
446 B012 Model position control gain 25 s-1 0 to 150 s-1 Set the gain for the model position controller.
828 G224 Model speed control gain 60% 0 to 1000% Set the gain for the model speed controller.
877 G220
Speed feed forward control/ model adaptive speed control selection
0 0, 1 Perform position feed forward control.
2 Model adaptive position control becomes valid.
880 C114 Load inertia ratio 7-fold 0 to 200-fold Set the load inertia ratio for the motor.
Movement/ condition How to adjust Pr.422
Response is slow.
Increase the setting value. Increase the setting value by 3 s-1 until immediately before an overshoot, stop-time vibration or other instable phenomenon does not occur, and set about 80 to 90% of that value.
Overshoot, stop-time vibration or other instable phenomenon occurs.
Lower the setting value. Lower the setting value by 3 s-1 until immediately before an overshoot, stop- time vibration or other instable phenomenon does not occur, and set about 80 to 90% of that value.
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Model adaptive position control (Pr.446) Set each response for position commands and for load and external disturbances individually. Set this parameter when a sufficient position response cannot be obtained after setting Pr.422. When setting Pr.446, set Pr.877 = "2" to enable the model adaptive position control, Pr.828 Model speed control gain
"0", and a load inertia ratio in Pr.880 Load inertia ratio. Set a small value in Pr.446 first, and then increase the setting gradually and use this parameter within the range where an
overshoot or vibration will not occur.
5.5.12 Troubleshooting in position control Vector PM
Condition Possible cause Countermeasure
The motor does not rotate.
There is incorrect phase sequence between the motor wiring and encoder wiring.
Check the wiring. (Refer to page 87.)
The setting of Pr.800 Control method selection is not appropriate. Check the Pr.800 setting. (Refer to page 221.)
No LX signal or STF/STR signal is input. Check if the signals are properly input.
A command pulse or NP signal is not correctly input.
Check if the command pulse is properly input (check the accumulated value for command pulses in Pr.430 Pulse monitor selection). Check the command pulse type in Pr.428 Command pulse selection. Check that the position pulse sign (NP) is assigned to an input terminal (inverter pulse input).
The setting in Pr.419 Position command source selection is incorrect.
Check the Pr.419 Position command source selection.
When simple position control by a point table (Pr.419 = "0") is used, the position feed length set by Pr.465 to Pr.494 is not correct.
Check the position feed length in Pr.465 to Pr.494.
The option to be used and parameter settings do not match.
Correctly set Pr.862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be used. (Refer to page 226.)
The position is unfavorably shifted.
A command pulse is not correctly input.
Check the command pulse type in Pr.428 Command pulse selection. Check if the command pulse is properly input (check the accumulated value of command pulses in Pr.430). Check that the position pulse sign (NP) is assigned to an input terminal (inverter pulse input).
The command is affected by noise. Noise is superpositioned on the encoder feedback signals.
Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection lower. Change the earthing (grounding) position of the shielded cable. Alternatively, do not connect it.
Hunting occurs in the motor or the machine.
Position loop gain is too high. Set Pr.422 Position control gain lower.
Speed loop gain is too high. Perform easy gain tuning. Set Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1 lower and Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1 higher.
Machine movement is unstable.
Acceleration/deceleration time settings are affecting adversely. Set Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time lower.
3295. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
33
Flowchart
NOTE The speed command of position control is related to speed control. (Refer to page 235.)
Motor or machine is hunting.
Y
N
Decrease the position loop gain (Pr. 422).
Set the electronic gear. (Pr. 420, Pr. 421)
NHave you made the electronic gear
setting?
Y
Y
N
Perform easy gain tuning. The speed control gain is high. Decrease the speed control proportional gain (Pr. 820). Increase the speed control integral time (Pr. 821).
Machine operation is unstable.
Y
N
Do not turn off the forward (reverse) rotation stroke end signal before completion of positioning.
YThe forward (reverse) rotation stroke end signal has turned off before completion
of positioning.
N
YPosition shift occurs.
N
Insufficient torque. Increase the excitation ratio (Pr. 854).
Check the speed control measures.
N
Y
Position control is not exercised normally
Have you checked the speed control items?
Please contact your sales representative.
The position loop gain (Pr. 422) is high.
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters referred to Pr.7 Acceleration timepage 367 Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367 Pr.72 PWM frequency selectionpage 356 Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221 Pr.802 Pre-excitation selectionpage 715 Pr.819 Easy gain tuning selectionpage 254 Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1page 254 Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1page 254
3315. PARAMETERS 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
33
5.6 Adjustment during Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, PM sensorless vector control
5.6.1 Speed detection filter and torque detection filter
Set time constant of primary delay filter for speed feedback signal and torque feedback signal. Speed loop response is reduced. Under ordinary circumstances, therefore, use the initial value as it is.
*1 The setting is available when a Vector control compatible option is installed.
Stabilizing speed detection (Pr.823, Pr.833) Speed loop response is reduced. Under ordinary circumstances, therefore, use the initial value as it is.
If there is speed ripple due to high frequency disturbance, adjust until speed stabilizes by gradually raising the setting. Speed is oppositely destabilized if the setting value is too large.
This setting is valid under Vector control only.
Stabilizing torque detection (Pr.827, Pr.837) Current loop response is reduced. Under ordinary circumstances, therefore, use the initial value as it is.
If there is torque ripple due to high frequency disturbance, adjust until speed stabilizes by gradually raising the setting. Speed is oppositely destabilized if the setting value is too large.
Employing multiple primary delay filters Use Pr.833 and Pr.837 if changing filter according to application. Pr.833, Pr.837 is enabled when the Second function
selection (RT) signal is turned ON.
NOTE The RT signal is a second function selection signal which also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 525.) The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
5.6.2 Excitation ratio
The excitation ratio can be lowered to enhance efficiency for light loads. (Motor magnetic noise can be reduced.)
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
To stabilize speed and torque feedback signal
Speed detection filter, torque detection filter
P.G215, P.G216, P.G315, P.G316
Pr.823, Pr.827, Pr.833, Pr.837 332
To change excitation ratio Excitation ratio P.G217 Pr.854 332
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
823 G215*1 Speed detection filter 1 0.001 s
0 Without filter
0.001 to 0.1 s Set the time constant of primary delay filter for speed feedback signal.
827 G216 Torque detection filter 1 0 s
0 Without filter
0.001 to 0.1 s Set the time constant of primary delay filter torque feedback signal.
833 G315*1 Speed detection filter 2 9999
0 to 0.1 s Second function of Pr.823 (enabled when the RT signal is ON)
9999 Same as Pr.823 setting
837 G316 Torque detection filter 2 9999
0 to 0.1 s Second function of Pr.827 (enabled when the RT signal is ON)
9999 Same as Pr.827 setting
Sensorless Vector PM
Sensorless Vector
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.6 Adjustment during Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, PM sensorless vector control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When excitation ratio is reduced, output torque startup is less responsive. The setting of Pr.854 is invalid if Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment or Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment is set
to "1" (flux command according to terminal).
5.6.3 Gain adjustment of current controllers for the d axis and the q axis
The gain of the current controller can be adjusted.
Use Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) to adjust the proportional gain of current controllers for the d axis and the q axis. The 100% gain is equivalent to 1000 rad/s. Setting this parameter higher improves the trackability for current command changes. It also reduces the current fluctuation caused by external disturbances.
Use Pr.825 Torque control integral time 1 (current loop integral time) to set the integral time of current controllers for the d axis and the q axis. If the setting value is small, it produces current fluctuation against external disturbances, decreasing time until it returns to original current value.
NOTE Pr.834 Torque control P gain 2 (current loop proportional gain) and Pr.835 Torque control integral time 2 (current loop
integral time) are valid when the RT signal turns ON. In this case, replace them for Pr.824 and Pr.825 in the description above.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
854 G217 Excitation ratio 100% 0 to 100% Set an excitation ratio when there is no load.
Excitation ratio [%]
100 (Initial value)
Pr.854 setting
0 100 Load[%]
PM
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
824 G213
Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) 100% 0% to 500% The proportional gain of the current controller is set.
825 G214
Torque control integral time 1 (current loop integral time) 5 ms 0 to 500 ms The integral time of the current controller is set.
3335. PARAMETERS 5.6 Adjustment during Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, PM sensorless vector control
33
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
5.7.1 Real time clock function The time can be set. The time can only be updated while the inverter power is ON.
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
To set the time Real time clock function P.E020 to P.E022 Pr.1006 to Pr.1008 334 To set a limit for the reset function. To shut off output if the operation panel disconnects. To force deceleration to a stop on the operation panel.
Reset selection/ disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection/reset limit
P.E100 to P.E102, P.E107 Pr.75 336
To select the display language of the parameter unit
PU display language selection P.E103 Pr.145 339
To control the buzzer of the parameter unit and operation panel PU buzzer control P.E104 Pr.990 340
To adjust the LCD contrast of the parameter unit PU contrast adjustment P.E105 Pr.991 340
To turn OFF the operation panel when not using it for a certain period of time Display-off setting P.E106 Pr.1048 340
To switch the monitor display of the operation panel to the PID set point setting screen by simply turning the setting dial
Direct setting P.E108 Pr.1000 340
To use the USB memory USB host reset P.E110 Pr.1049 341 To use the setting dial of the operation panel like a potentiometer to set the frequency. To disable the operation panel.
Operation panel operation selection P.E200 Pr.161 341
To change the frequency change increments which changes when using the setting dial of the operation panel
Frequency change increment amount setting P.E201 Pr.295 342
To use the regeneration unit to increase the motor braking torque
Regenerative brake selection P.E300, P.G107 Pr.30, Pr.70 724
To change the overload current rating specification Multiple rating setting P.E301 Pr.570 343
To input a voltage between 480 V and 500 V Input voltage mode selection P.E302 Pr.977 345
To prevent parameter rewriting Parameter write disable selection P.E400 Pr.77 345
To restrict parameters with a password Password P.E410, P.E411 Pr.296, Pr.297 348 To use parameters freely Free parameter P.E420, P.E421 Pr.888, Pr.889 350 To change parameter settings for an IPM motor as a batch IPM parameter initialization P.E430 Pr.998 231
To set multiple parameters by batch Automatic parameter setting P.E431 Pr.999 350
To display the required parameters Applicable parameter display and user group function
P.E440 to P.E443 Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174 354
To release the Parameter copy warning (CP) Parameter copy alarm release P.E490 Pr.989 744
To reduce the motor noise and EMI PWM carrier frequency changing P.E600 to P.E602 Pr.72, Pr.240,
Pr.260 356
To understand the maintenance time of inverter parts and peripheral devices
Inverter parts life display P.E700 to P.E705 Pr.255 to Pr.259, Pr.506 359
Maintenance output function P.E710 to P.E715 Pr.503 to Pr.504,
Pr.686 to Pr.689 363
Current average monitor P.E720 to P.E722 Pr.555 to Pr.557 363
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The real time clock function is enabled using an optional LCD operation panel (FR-LU08).
Simple clock function When the current year, month, day, hour and minute are set in the parameters above, the inverter internal clock starts
ticking. The set date and time can be checked by reading the parameters.
NOTE The time data of the internal clock is saved in the inverter's EEPROM every 10 minutes. The clock does not run while the control circuit power is OFF. The clock needs to be set every time after turning ON the inverter
power. Prepare separate power supply, such as an external 24 V power supply, to supply power continuously to the control circuit for the simple clock function.
However, if the power to the main circuit of the inverter is turned ON with the control circuit power already ON, the clock data is reset to the data stored in EEPROM because the Inverter reset is performed whenever the power is supplied to the main circuit of the inverter in the initial setting. To prevent the clock from resetting, set Pr.30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to page 724.)
The set time is used for functions such as the Fault history.
Real time clock function
When the FR-LU08 is connected to the inverter, the internal clock of the inverter can be synchronized with the clock in the FR-LU08 (Real time clock function). The FR-LU08 with battery (CR1216) backup can keep its clock function running even if the main power of the inverter is turned OFF. (The inverter internal clock stops running when the inverter power is turned OFF.)
To adjust the clock in the FR-LU08, set Pr.1006 to Pr.1008 on the FR-LU08.
NOTE Time synchronization between the inverter internal clock and the clock in the FR-LU08 is performed every one minute. If the FR-LU08 clock is reset due to dead battery for example, the data in the inverter internal clock is used.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 1006 E020 Clock (year) 2000 (year) 2000 to 2099 Set the year.
1007 E021
Clock (month, day)
101 (January 1)
101 to 131, 201 to 228, (229), 301 to 331, 401 to 430, 501 to 531, 601 to 630, 701 to 731, 801 to 831, 901 to 930, 1001 to 1031, 1101 to 1130, 1201 to 1231
Set the month and day. 1000's and 100's digits: Month (1 (January) to 12 (December)). 10's and 1's digits: Day (1 to the last day of the month (28, 29, 30, or 31)). For December 31, set "1231".
1008 E022
Clock (hour, minute) 0 (00:00)
0 to 59, 100 to 159, 200 to 259, 300 to 359, 400 to 459, 500 to 559, 600 to 659, 700 to 759, 800 to 859, 900 to 959, 1000 to 1059, 1100 to 1159, 1200 to 1259, 1300 to 1359, 1400 to 1459, 1500 to 1559, 1600 to 1659, 1700 to 1759, 1800 to 1859, 1900 to 1959, 2000 to 2059, 2100 to 2159, 2200 to 2259, 2300 to 2359
Set the hour and minute using the 24-hour clock. 1000's and 100's digits: 0 to 23 hours, 10's and 1's digits: 0 to 59 minutes. For 23:59, set "2359".
PREV NEXTSET STOP PU
Hz0. 00 Hz Out 1:00
PREV NEXTSET STOP PU
Hz0. 00 Hz Out 2:00
PREV NEXTSET STOP PU
Hz0. 00 Hz Out 3:00
1:00
Inverter internal clock
Count-up Count-up
Synchronization
Power-OFF Power-ON
Synchronization
1:00
Inverter internal clock
3:00
1:00 2:00 3:00
Inverter internal clock
3355. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
33
5.7.2 Reset selection / disconnected PU detection / PU stop selection
The acceptance of reset command, the inverter operation in the event of detection of the PU (operation panel / parameter unit) disconnected, and the acceptance of stop command from the PU (PU stop function) can be selected using Pr.E100 (Reset selection), Pr.E101 (Disconnected PU detection), and Pr.E102 (PU stop selection), respectively, or using Pr.75 alone.
The parameters above do not return to their initial values even if Parameter clear/All parameter clear is executed. *1 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower *2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
75
Reset selection/ disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection
14
0 to 3, 14 to 17, 1000 to 1003, 1014 to 1017*1
In the initial setting, the reset command input is always enabled, the inverter operation continues even when PU is disconnected, and the operation can be stopped on the PU.
0 to 3, 14 to 17, 100 to 103, 114 to 117, 1000 to 1003, 1014 to 1017, 1100 to 1103, 1114 to 1117*2
E100 Reset selection 0
0 Reset input is always enabled.
1 Reset input is enabled only when the protective function is activated.
2 Reset input is enabled only when the start signal is OFF.
3 Reset input is enabled when the protective function is activated and the start signal is OFF.
E101 Disconnected PU detection 0
0 Operation continues even when the PU is disconnected. 1 The inverter output is shut off when the PU is disconnected.
E102 PU stop selection 1
0 The inverter decelerates to a stop when the STOP key on the PU is pressed in PU operation mode. (The PU stop function is disabled.)
1 The inverter decelerates to a stop when the STOP key on the PU is pressed in any operation mode of the PU, external, or Network. (The PU stop function is enabled.)
E107 Reset limit 0 0 Reset limit is disabled.
1*2 Reset limit is enabled.
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*3 The setting is available for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
Reset selection (P.E100) While P.E100 = "1", or Pr.75 = "1, 3, 15, 17, 101, 103, 115, or 117", the reset command input is enabled (using the RES
signal or through communication) only when the protective function is activated. While P.E100 = "2" or Pr.75 = "1000, 1002, 1014, 1016, 1100, 1102, 1114, or 1116", the reset command input is enabled
(using the RES signal or through communication) only when the start signal is OFF. While P.E100 = "3" or Pr.75 = "1001, 1003, 1015, 1017, 1101, 1103, 1115, or 1117", the reset command input is enabled
(using the RES signal or through communication) only when the protective function is activated with the start signal OFF.
Pr.75 setting Reset input Operation after PU disconnection is
detected PU stop function Reset limit function
0 Always enabled. Operation continues. Disabled Disabled 1 When the protective function is activated. Operation continues. Disabled Disabled 2 Always enabled. Inverter output shutoff Disabled Disabled 3 When the protective function is activated. Inverter output shutoff Disabled Disabled 14 (initial value) Always enabled. Operation continues. Enabled Disabled
15 When the protective function is activated. Operation continues. Enabled Disabled 16 Always enabled. Inverter output shutoff Enabled Disabled 17 When the protective function is activated. Inverter output shutoff Enabled Disabled 100 Always enabled. Operation continues. Disabled Enabled*3
101 When the protective function is activated. Operation continues. Disabled Enabled*3
102 Always enabled. Inverter output shutoff Disabled Enabled*3
103 When the protective function is activated. Inverter output shutoff Disabled Enabled*3
114 Always enabled. Operation continues. Enabled Disabled 115 When the protective function is activated. Operation continues. Enabled Disabled 116 Always enabled. Inverter output shutoff Enabled Disabled 117 When the protective function is activated. Inverter output shutoff Enabled Disabled 1000 When the start signal is OFF. Operation continues. Disabled Disabled
1001 When the protective function is activated and the start signal is OFF. Operation continues. Disabled Disabled
1002 When the start signal is OFF. Inverter output shutoff Disabled Disabled
1003 When the protective function is activated and the start signal is OFF. Inverter output shutoff Disabled Disabled
1014 When the start signal is OFF. Operation continues. Enabled Disabled
1015 When the protective function is activated and the start signal is OFF. Operation continues. Enabled Disabled
1016 When the start signal is OFF. Inverter output shutoff Enabled Disabled
1017 When the protective function is activated and the start signal is OFF. Inverter output shutoff Enabled Disabled
1100 When the start signal is OFF. Operation continues. Disabled Enabled*3
1101 When the protective function is activated and the start signal is OFF. Operation continues. Disabled Enabled*3
1102 When the start signal is OFF. Inverter output shutoff Disabled Enabled*3
1103 When the protective function is activated and the start signal is OFF. Inverter output shutoff Disabled Enabled*3
1114 When the start signal is OFF. Operation continues. Enabled Enabled*3
1115 When the protective function is activated and the start signal is OFF. Operation continues. Enabled Enabled*3
1116 When the start signal is OFF. Inverter output shutoff Enabled Enabled*3
1117 When the protective function is activated and the start signal is OFF. Inverter output shutoff Enabled Enabled*3
3375. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
33
NOTE When the RES signal is input during operation, the motor coasts since the inverter being reset shuts off the output. Also, the
cumulative values of electronic thermal O/L relay and regenerative brake duty are cleared. When "reset input always enabled" is selected, the reset key on the PU is enabled only when the protective function is
activated. The following table shows applicable start commands. (When both the STF and STR signals are ON, the start signal status is
OFF.)
Disconnected PU detection (P.E101) When the inverter detects that the PU (FR-DU08/FR-PU07) is disconnected from the inverter for 1 second or more while
P.E101 or Pr.75 is set to shut off the inverter output upon disconnection of the PU, the PU disconnection ("E.PUE") indication is displayed and the inverter output is shut off.
NOTE When the PU has been disconnected before power-ON, the output is not shut off. To restart the inverter operation, confirm that the PU is connected before reset. When the inverter detects that the PU is disconnected during PU JOG operation while P.E101 or Pr.75 is set to continue the
inverter operation even when the PU is disconnected, the inverter decelerates the motor to a stop. During RS-485 communication operation via the PU connector, the Reset selection function and the PU stop selection function
are enabled but the Disconnected PU detection function is disabled. (The communication is checked according to Pr.122 PU communication check time interval.)
PU stop selection (P.E102) When the PU stop function is enabled, the motor can be decelerated to a stop by pressing on the PU in either PU,
External, or Network operation mode.
The table below describes situations in which the PU stop function is activated. The indication " " is displayed on the
PU, and the operation cannot be restarted while the indication remains on. However, the Fault signal is not output.
How to restart the inverter which has been stopped in the External operation mode by using on the PU ("PS" (PU stop) warning reset method)
For the operation panel (FR-DU08)
1. After completion of deceleration stop, turn OFF the STF and STR signals.
2. Press three times (" " is cleared) when Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "0 (initial value) or 6". When Pr.79 = "2, 3, or 7", the PU stop warning can be cleared with one keystroke.
For the parameter unit (FR-PU07)
Start signal input interface Applicable start signal External terminal X13, X22, LX, X28, JOGF, JOGR, STF, or STR
PU Forward/reverse rotation command given by pressing the FWD/REV key
Communication X13, X22, LX, X28, STF, or STR
Operation mode Operation External External/PU combined 1 Network
on the PU is pressed during operation.
PU operation mode on the PU is pressed while the inverter is operated by a command source other than
the PU. (The command interface/source is selected by setting Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection.)
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1. After completion of deceleration stop, turn OFF the STF or STR signal.
2. Press (" " is cleared).
The inverter can be restarted by performing the reset operation (by turning OFF and ON the power or inputting the RES signal).
NOTE Even when Pr.250 Stop selection "9999" is set and coasting stop is selected, using the PU stop function in the External
operation mode does not provide coasting stop but deceleration stop.
Reset limit (P.E107) Setting P.E107 = "1" or Pr.75 = any of "100 to 103, 114 to 117, 1100 to 1103, or 1114 to 1117" will make the inverter to
refuse any reset operation (RES signal input, etc.) for 3 minutes after the first activation of an electronic thermal O/L relay or protective function (E.THM, E.THT, E.OC[]).
The reset limit function is available with the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
NOTE Resetting the inverter power (turning OFF the control power) clears the accumulated thermal value. When the retry function is set enabled (Pr.67 Number of retries at fault occurrence "0"), the reset limit function is disabled.
Parameters referred to Pr.67 Number of retries at fault occurrencepage 426 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 Pr.250 Stop selectionpage 722 Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selectionpage 400
5.7.3 PU display language selection You can switch the display language of the parameter unit (FR-PU07) to another.
EXT
Speed
Time Key
Key
Stop/restart example for External operation
Operation panel
STF ON (STR) OFF
CAUTION Do not perform a reset while a start signal is being input. Doing so will cause a sudden start of the motor, which
is dangerous.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
145 E103
PU display language selection
0 Japanese 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Spanish 5 Italian 6 Swedish 7 Finnish
3395. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
34
5.7.4 Buzzer control The PU (operation panel or parameter unit) key sound and buzzer can be turned ON/OFF.
NOTE When the buzzer is set to ON, a warning sound will be audible when a fault occurs.
5.7.5 PU contrast adjustment Contrast of the LCD display on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) can be adjusted. Decreasing the setting value lowers the contrast.
This parameter can be selected from among simple mode parameters only when the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) is connected to the inverter.
5.7.6 Display-off setting The LED display of the operation panel (FR-DU08) can be turned OFF when the operation panel has not been used for a certain period of time.
When the operation panel has not been operated for the time set in Pr.1048, the display-off setting is activated and the LED display turns OFF.
In the display-off state, the [MON] indicator blinks slowly. The time interval counting for display-off is reset at removal/reinstallation of the operation panel, power-ON/OFF of the
inverter, or the Inverter reset. The triggers for display-on are as follows:
- Operation of the operation panel, - Occurrence of a warning, alarm, or fault, - Removal/reinstallation of the operation panel, power-ON/OFF of the inverter, or the Inverter reset, - Connection/disconnection at the USB A connector.
NOTE The [P.RUN] indicator is ON even if the operation panel is in the display-off state (while the PLC function is enabled).
5.7.7 Direct setting The PID set point setting screen (direct setting screen) can be displayed first on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) according to the parameter setting.
This function is useful for setting the PID set point on the LCD operation panel.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 990 E104 PU buzzer control 1
0 Turns the key sound and buzzer OFF. 1 Turns the key sound and buzzer ON.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 991 E105 PU contrast adjustment 58 0 to 63 0: Low 63: High
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1048 E106 Display-off waiting time 0
0 Display-off setting is disabled.
1 to 60 (minutes) Set time until the LED of the operation panel is turned OFF.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1000 E108 Direct setting selection 0
0 Displays the Frequency setting screen. 1 Displays the direct setting screen (for set point setting).
2 Displays the direct setting screen (for set point setting) and the frequency setting screen.
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The monitor display can be switched from the main monitor screen to the set point setting screen for the PID action simply
by turning , according to the setting of Pr.1000 Direct setting selection. On each setting screen, turn to input
a setting value, and press to confirm the setting.
*1 When Pr.1000 = "0" *2 When Pr.1000 = "1" *3 When Pr.1000 = "2" *4 Not displayed when PID control is disabled (Pr.128 = "0"). *5 Indication of "NEXT" is not displayed when Pr.1000 = "0".
To switch back the monitor display from the Extended direct screen or the Frequency setting screen to the Main monitor
screen, press .
Parameters referred to Pr.128 PID action selection page 601
5.7.8 Resetting USB host errors When a USB device is connected to the USB connector (connector A), the USB host error can be canceled without performing the Inverter reset.
Parameter copy (refer to page 744) or the trace function (refer to page 649) is available when a USB device (such as a USB memory) is connected to the USB connector (connector A).
When a device such as a USB charger is connected to the USB connector and an excessive current (500 mA or higher)
flows, USB host error " " (UF warning) is displayed on the operation panel. When the UF warning appears, the USB error can be canceled by removing the USB device and setting Pr.1049 = "1".
(The UF warning can also be canceled by resetting the inverter power or resetting with the RES signal.)
5.7.9 Easy frequency setting (Volume-knob-like setting) and key lock function selection
The frequency can be easily set with the setting dial on the operation panel (FR-DU08) like a volume knob. The key operation of the operation panel can be disabled.
(SET)
One of the Main monitor screen
Example of screen switching and shifting when the PID control is enabled (Pr.128 "0")
Direct #1 screen 4 Direct #2 screen 4 Frequency setting screen 5
(NEXT) (NEXT)
(NEXT)
3 (NEXT)
21
2,3 2,3 3
PREV SET NEXT STOP PU
Hz Output frequency 1 2 : 3 4
0.00 N E X TBACK SET NE T
STOP PU
Frequency Setting Pres value Set value
0.00Hz 100.00Hz
10.0PSI 10.0PSI
N E X TBACK SET NE T STOP PU
PID act set pnt Pres value Set value
10.0PSI 10.0PSI
N E X TBACK SET NE T STOP PU
2ndPID set point Pres value Set value
(BACK)
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 1049 E110 USB host reset 0
0 Read only 1 Resets the USB host.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
161 E200
Frequency setting/key lock operation selection 0
0 Normal frequency setting Key lock function disabled.1 Easy frequency setting
(Volume-knob-like setting) 10 Normal frequency setting
Key lock function enabled.11 Easy frequency setting
(Volume-knob-like setting)
3415. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
34
Setting the frequency by turning the setting dial like a volume knob The frequency can be set by simply turning the setting dial on the operation panel (FR-DU08) during operation (Volume-
knob-like setting). needs not to be pressed. (For details on the operation method, refer to page 150.)
NOTE If the display changes from blinking "60.00" to "0.00", the setting value of Pr.161 may not be "1". The newly-set frequency is be saved as the set frequency in EEPROM after 10 seconds. When setting the frequency by turning the setting dial, the frequency goes up to the set value of Pr.1 Maximum frequency.
Be aware of what frequency Pr.1 is set to, and adjust the setting of Pr.1 according to the application.
Disabling the setting dial and keys on the operation panel (by holding down the MODE key for 2 seconds)
The setting dial and keys on the operation panel (FR-DU08) can be disabled to prevent parameter changes, unexpected starts or frequency changes.
Set Pr.161 to "10 or 11" and then press for 2 seconds to disable setting dial and keys.
When setting dial and keys are disabled, " " appears on the operation panel. If setting dial or key operation is
attempted while dial and keys are disabled, " " appears. (After no setting dial or key operation for 2 seconds, the display returns to the monitoring screen.)
To enable the setting dial and keys again, press for 2 seconds.
NOTE
Even if setting dial and keys are disabled, the monitor indicator and are enabled.
The PU stop warning cannot be reset by using keys while the key lock function is enabled.
Parameters referred to Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 428
5.7.10 Frequency change increment amount setting When setting the set frequency with the setting dial of the operation panel (FR-DU08), the frequency changes in 0.01 Hz increments in the initial status. Setting this parameter to increase the frequency increment amount that changes when the setting dial is rotated can improve usability.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
295 E201
Frequency change increment amount setting 0
0 Function disabled 0.01
The minimum change width when the set frequency is changed with the setting dial can be set.
0.10 1.00 10.00
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Basic operation When Pr.295 "0", the minimum increment when the set frequency is changed with the setting dial can be set.
For example, when Pr.295 = 1.00 Hz, one click (one dial gauge) of the setting dial changes the frequency in increments of 1.00 Hz, such as 1.00 Hz 2.00 Hz 3.00 Hz.
NOTE When machine speed display is selected in Pr.37 Speed display, the minimum increments of change are determined by
Pr.295 as well. Note that the setting value may differ as speed setting changes the set machine speed and converts it to the speed display again.
For Pr.295, the increments are not displayed. The Pr.295 setting is enabled only for the changes to the set frequency. It does not apply to the settings of other parameters
related to frequency. When 10 is set, the frequency setting changes in 10 Hz increments. Be cautious of excessive speed (in potentiometer mode).
Parameters referred to Pr.37 Speed displaypage 444
5.7.11 Multiple rating setting Four rating types of different rated current and permissible load can be selected. The optimal inverter rating can be chosen in accordance with the application, enabling equipment size to be reduced.
*1 Not compatible with the IP55 compatible model.
When Pr.295="1"
1 click 1 click
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range
Description (overload current rating, surrounding air temperature)
570 E301 Multiple rating setting 2
0*1
SLD rating. 110% for 60 seconds, 120% for 3 seconds (inverse- time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40C.
1
LD rating. 120% for 60 seconds, 150% for 3 seconds (inverse- time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C.
2
ND rating. 150% for 60 seconds, 200% for 3 seconds (inverse- time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C.
3*1
HD rating. 200% for 60 seconds, 250% for 3 seconds (inverse- time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C.
3435. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
34
Changing the parameter initial values and setting ranges When inverter reset and all parameter clear are performed after setting Pr.570, the parameter initial values are changed
according to each rating, as shown below.
*1 Initial values differ depending on the rating as follows.
*2 The rated current and motor capacity differ depending on the inverter capacity. Refer to the inverter rated specifications (page 826). *3 The initial value for the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and the FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower is set to the 85% of the inverter rated current.
Setting Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration = "5 or 6 (lift mode)" changes the stall prevention operation level as shown below.
Pr. Name Pr.570 setting Refer to
page0 1 2 (initial value) 3 0 Torque boost *1 *1 *1 *1 706
7 Acceleration time *1 *1 *1 *1 367
8 Deceleration time *1 *1 *1 *1 367
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay SLD rated current*2 LD rated current*2 ND rated current*2*3 HD rated current*2*3 415
12 DC injection brake operation voltage
*1 *1 *1 *1 715
22 Stall prevention operation level 110% 120% 150% 200% 245, 431
48 Second stall prevention operation level 110% 120% 150% 200% 431
56 Current monitoring reference SLD rated current*2 LD rated current*2 ND rated current*2 HD rated current*2 457
114 Third stall prevention operation level 110% 120% 150% 200% 431
148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input 110% 120% 150% 200% 431 149 Stall prevention level at 10 V input 120% 150% 200% 250% 431 150 Output current detection level 110% 120% 150% 200% 487
165 Stall prevention operation level for restart 110% 120% 150% 200% 628
557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current SLD rated current*2 LD rated current*2 ND rated current*2 HD rated current*2 363
874 OLT level setting 110% 120% 150% 200% 245
893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity)
SLD rated motor capacity*2
LD rated motor capacity*2
ND rated motor capacity*2
HD rated motor capacity*2 467
Pr. Pr.570 setting
200 V class FR-A820-[] 00046 (0.4K)
00077 (0.75K)
00105 (1.5K)
00167 (2.2K)
00250 (3.7K)
00340 (5.5K)
00490 (7.5K)
00630 (11K)
00770 (15K)
00930 (18.5K)
01250 (22K)
01540 (30K)
01870 (37K)
02330 (45K)
03160 (55K)
03800 (75K)
04750 (90K)
400 V class: FR-A840-[]
00023 (0.4K)
00038 (0.75K)
00052 (1.5K)
00083 (2.2K)
00126 (3.7K)
00170 (5.5K)
00250 (7.5K)
00310 (11K)
00380 (15K)
00470 (18.5K)
00620 (22K)
00770 (30K)
00930 (37K)
01160 (45K)
01800 (55K)
02160 (75K)
02600 (90K)
or higher
0 (%) 0, 1 6 4 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1.5 1.5 1 1 1 2 6 6 4 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 3 6 6 6 4 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
7 (s) 0, 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
8 (s) 0, 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
12 (%) 0, 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Pr. setting Pr.570 setting Refer to
page0 1 2 (initial value) 3
292 5 110% 120% 150% 200%
384 6 115% 140% 180% 230%
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When Pr.570 = "0" (SLD rating), carrier frequency automatic reduction is enabled regardless of the setting in Pr.260. To use the FR-A820-03160(55K) and the FR-A840-01800(55K) in the LD and SLD ratings, a DC reactor, which is available
as an option, corresponding to the applied motor is required. Setting the LD or SLD rating to the FR-A820-03160(55K) and the FR-A840-01800(55K) changes their parameter setting
increments and setting ranges in the same way as for the FR-A820-03800(75K) and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher. In an example of Pr.9, the setting increment changes from "0.01 A" to "0.1 A" and the setting range changes from "0 to 500 A" to "0 to 3600 A". For the setting of each parameter, refer to the parameter list (on page 166).
Parameters referred to Pr.260 PWM frequency automatic switchoverpage 356
5.7.12 Using the power supply exceeding 480 VAC To input a voltage between 480 VAC and 500 VAC to the 400 V class inverter, change the voltage protection level.
To use a voltage between 480 VAC and 500 VAC, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection = "1". The setting is applied after a reset.
Setting Pr.977 = "1" changes the voltage protection level to the one for the 500 V class. The increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation level is 740 V. Use Pr.660 Increased magnetic excitation
deceleration operation selection to select the increased magnetic excitation deceleration.)
NOTE To check availability of stand-alone options when the input voltage is between 480 and 500 VAC, refer to the Instruction
Manual or catalog of each option for details on the ratings. Changing the Pr.977 setting does not affect the voltage level to activate the regenerative overvoltage trip (E.OV1 to E.OV3). Changing the Pr.977 setting does not affect the voltage level set in Pr.883 Regeneration avoidance operation level. The setting of Pr.977 is invalid for the 200 V class inverter.
Parameters referred to Pr.660 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation selectionpage 735
5.7.13 Parameter write selection Whether to enable the writing to various parameters or not can be selected. Use this function to prevent parameter values from being rewritten by misoperation.
Pr.77 can be set at any time regardless of the operation mode or operation status. (Setting through communication is unavailable.)
Parameter write enabled only during stop (Pr.77 = "0 (initial value)") Parameters can be written only during a stop in the PU operation mode. The following parameters can always be written regardless of the operation mode or operation status.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
977 E302
Input voltage mode selection 0
0 400 V class voltage protection level 1 500 V class voltage protection level 2 For manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
77 E400 Parameter write selection 0
0 Parameter write is enabled only during stop. 1 Parameter writing is disabled.
2 Parameter writing is enabled in any operation mode regardless of the operation status.
3455. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
34
*1 Writing during operation is enabled in PU operation mode, but disabled in External operation mode. *2 Writing during operation is disabled. To change the parameter setting value, stop the operation.
Parameter write disabled (Pr.77 = "1") Parameter write, Parameter clear, and All parameter clear are disabled. (Parameter read is enabled.) The following parameters can be written even if Pr.77 = "1".
*1 Writing during operation is disabled. To change the parameter setting value, stop the operation.
Pr. Name Pr. Name
4 to 6 (Multi-speed setting high-speed, middle-speed, low-speed) 551*2 PU mode operation command source selection
22 Stall prevention operation level 555 to 557 (Current average value monitoring) 24 to 27 (Multi-speed setting speed 4 to speed 7) 656 to 659 (Analog remote output) 52 Operation panel main monitor selection 663 Control circuit temperature signal output level 54 FM/CA terminal function selection 675 User parameter auto storage function selection 55 Frequency monitoring reference 750, 751 Motor thermistor interface 56 Current monitoring reference 759 PID unit selection
72*1 PWM frequency selection 774 to 776 (PU/DU monitor selection)
75 Reset selection/Disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection 805 Torque command value (RAM)
77 Parameter write selection 806 Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM)
79*2 Operation mode selection 838 DA1 terminal function selection
129 PID proportional band 866 Torque monitoring reference 130 PID integral time 888, 889 (Free parameter) 133 PID action set point 891 to 899 (Energy saving monitoring) 134 PID differential time C0 (900) FM/CA terminal calibration 158 AM terminal function selection C1 (901) AM terminal calibration 160 User group read selection C8 (930) Current output bias signal 232 to 239 (Multi-speed setting speed 8 to speed 15) C9 (930) Current output bias current
240*1 Soft-PWM operation selection C10 (931) Current output gain signal 241 Analog input display unit switchover C11 (931) Current output gain current 268 Monitor decimal digits selection 990 PU buzzer control 271 High-speed setting maximum current 991 PU contrast adjustment 272 Middle-speed setting minimum current 992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection 273 Current averaging range 997 Fault initiation 274 Current averaging filter time constant 998*2 PM parameter initialization
275*1 Stop-on contact excitation current low-speed scaling factor 999*2 Automatic parameter setting
290 Monitor negative output selection 1000 Direct setting selection 295 Frequency change increment amount setting 1006 Clock (year) 296, 297 (Password setting) 1007 Clock (month, day) 306 Analog output signal selection 1008 Clock (hour, minute) 310 Analog meter voltage output selection 1018 Monitor with sign selection
340*2 Communication startup mode selection 1019 Analog meter voltage negative output selection 345, 346 (DeviceNet communication) 1048 Display-off waiting time 416, 417 (PLC) 1142 Second PID unit selection 434, 435 (CC-Link communication) 1150 to 1199 (PLC function user parameters) 496, 497 (Remote output) 1283 Home position return speed 498 PLC function flash memory clear 1284 Home position return shifting speed
550*2 NET mode operation command source selection
Pr. Name Pr. Name 22 Stall prevention operation level 345, 346 (DeviceNet communication)
75 Reset selection/Disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection 496, 497 (Remote output)
77 Parameter write selection 656 to 659 (Analog remote output)
79*1 Operation mode selection 805 Torque command value (RAM) 160 User group read selection 806 Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM) 296 Password lock level 997 Fault initiation 297 Password lock/unlock
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameter write enabled during operation (Pr.77 = "2") These parameters can always be written. The following parameters cannot be written during operation even if Pr.77 = "2". To change the parameter setting value,
stop the operation.
Pr. Name Pr. Name
23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed 455 Second motor excitation current
48 Second stall prevention operation level 456 Rated second motor voltage 49 Second stall prevention operation frequency 457 Rated second motor frequency 60 Energy saving control selection 458 to 462 (Second motor constant) 61 Reference current 463 Second motor auto tuning setting/status
66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency 507, 508 (Display/reset ABC relay contact life)
71 Applied motor 541 Frequency command sign selection 79 Operation mode selection 560 Second frequency search gain 80 Motor capacity 561 PTC thermistor protection level 81 Number of motor poles 570 Multiple rating setting 82 Motor excitation current 574 Second motor online auto tuning 83 Rated motor voltage 598 Undervoltage level
84 Rated motor frequency 606 Power failure stop external signal input selection
90 to 94 (Motor constant) 639, 640 (Brake sequence) 95 Online auto tuning selection 641, 650, 651 (Second brake sequence) 96 Auto tuning setting/status 660 to 662 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration
135 to 139 (Electronic bypass sequence parameter) 673 SF-PR slip amount adjustment operation selection
178 to 196 (Input and output terminal function selection) 699 Input terminal filter 248 Self power management selection 702 Maximum motor frequency
254 Main circuit power OFF waiting time 706, 707, 711, 712, 717, 721, 724, 725, 1412
(PM motor tuning)
261 Power failure stop selection 738 to 746, 1413 (Second PM motor tuning)
289 Inverter output terminal filter 747 Second motor low-speed range torque characteristic selection
291 Pulse train I/O selection 788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection
292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration 800 Control method selection 293 Acceleration/deceleration separate selection 819 Easy gain tuning selection 298 Frequency search gain 858 Terminal 4 function assignment 313 to 322 (Extended output terminal function selection) 859 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
329 Digital input unit selection 860 Second motor torque current/Rated PM motor current
373 Encoder position tuning setting/status 862 Encoder option selection 406 High resolution analog input selection 868 Terminal 1 function assignment 414 PLC function operation selection 977 Input voltage mode selection 415 Inverter operation lock mode setting 998 PM parameter initialization 418 Extension output terminal filter 999 Automatic parameter setting 419 Position command source selection 1002 Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient 420, 421 (Electronic gear) 1105 Encoder magnetic pole position offset 450 Second applied motor 1292 Position control terminal input selection 451 Second motor control method selection 1293 Roll feeding mode selection 453 Second motor capacity
1348 P/PI control switchover frequency 454 Number of second motor poles
3475. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
34
5.7.14 Password Registering a 4-digit password can restrict access to parameters (reading/writing).
These parameters can be set when Pr.160 User group read selection = "0". However, when Pr.296 9999 (password lock is set), Pr.297 can always be set, regardless of the setting in Pr.160.
*1 Although "0 or 9999" can be input in Pr.297, the value is invalid. (The display cannot be changed.)
Parameter reading/writing restriction level (Pr.296) The access (reading/writing) restriction level to parameters in the PU operation mode or NET operation mode can be
selected with Pr.296.
: Enabled, : Disabled *1 If the parameter reading is restricted by the setting of Pr.160 User group read selection, those parameters cannot be read even when "" is
indicated. *2 If the parameter writing is restricted by the setting of Pr.77 Parameter write selection, those parameters cannot be written even when "" is
indicated. *3 Access from the command source in the PU operation mode (the operation panel (FR-DU08) or the parameter unit in the initial setting) is
restricted. (For the PU operation mode command source selection, refer to page 400.) *4 Access from the command source in the Network operation mode (the RS-485 terminals or a communication option in the initial setting) is
restricted. (For the NET operation mode command source selection, refer to page 400.) *5 Read/write is enabled only for the simple mode parameters registered in the user group when Pr.160 = "9999". Pr.296 and Pr.297 can be read
or written regardless of whether they are registered to the user group. *6 If a communication option is installed, the Option fault (E.OPT) occurs, and the inverter output shuts off. (Refer to page 791.) *7 The PLC function user parameters (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199) can be written and read by the PLC function regardless of the Pr.296 setting.
Locking parameters with a password (Pr.296, Pr.297) The procedure of locking parameters with a password is as follows.
1. Set the parameter reading/writing restriction level to enable the password protection. (Set a value other than "9999" in Pr.296.)
*1 If an invalid password is input 5 times while any of "100 to 106, or 199" is set in Pr.296, the password is locked up afterward (the locked parameters cannot be unlocked even with the valid password). All parameter clear is required to reset the password. (After All parameter clear is performed, the parameters are returned to their initial values.)
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
296 E410 Password lock level 9999
0 to 6, 99, 100 to 106, 199
Password protection enabled. Setting the access (reading/writing) restriction level to parameters locked with a password enables writing to Pr.297.
9999 No password protection
297 E411 Password lock/unlock 9999
1000 to 9998 Input a 4-digit password to lock parameters, or input the valid password to unlock the locked parameters.
(0 to 5)*1 Number of failed password attempts (read only, displayed after any of "100 to 106, or 199" is set in Pr.296 and a password to lock parameters is input).
9999*1 No password protection
Pr.296 setting PU operation mode operation
command*3 NET operation mode operation command*4
RS-485 terminals / PLC function*7 via communication option Read*1 Write*2 Read Write*2 Read Write*2
9999
0, 100*6 1, 101 2, 102 3, 103 4, 104 5, 105 6, 106
99, 199 Only the parameters registered in the user group can be read/written. (For the parameters not registered in the user group, the restriction level when "4 or 104" is set applies.)*5
Pr.296 setting Allowable number of failed password attempts Pr.297 readout
0 to 6 or 99 Unlimited Always 0
100 to 106, 199*1 Limited to 5 times Number of failed password attempts (0 to 5)
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2. Write a four-digit number (1000 to 9998) to Pr.297 as a password (writing is disabled when Pr.296 = "9999"). After a password is set, parameters are locked and access (reading/writing) to the parameters is limited at the level set in Pr.296 until the valid password is input to unlock the locked parameters.
NOTE After a password is set, the Pr.297 readout is always any of "0 to 5".
" " appears when a password-protected parameter is attempted to be read/written.
Even if a password is set, the parameters which are written by the inverter, such as parameters related to the life check of inverter parts, are overwritten as needed.
Even if a password is set, Pr.991 PU contrast adjustment can be read/written when the parameter unit (FR-PU07) is connected.
Unlocking the locked parameters (Pr.296, Pr.297) There are two ways to unlock the locked parameters. Enter the password in Pr.297. When a valid password is input, the locked parameters can be unlocked. When an invalid
password is input, an error indication appears and the parameters cannot be unlocked. If an invalid password is input 5 times while any of "100 to 106, or 199" is set in Pr.296, the locked parameters cannot be unlocked afterward even with the valid password (the password is locked up).
Perform All parameter clear.
NOTE If the password is forgotten, it can be reset by performing All parameter clear, but the other parameters are also reset. All parameter clear cannot be performed during the inverter operation. When using FR Configurator2 in the PU operation mode, do not set "0, 4, 5, 99, 100, 104, 105, or 199" (parameter read is
disabled) in Pr.296. Doing so may cause abnormal operation. The means to reset the password varies according to how the reset command is sent (from the PU, through RS-485
communication, or via a communication option).
: Password reset enabled, : Password reset disabled For the information how to perform Parameter clear or All parameter clear with the parameter unit or via a communication
option, refer to the Instruction Manual of the parameter unit or the option. (For the operation panel (FR-DU08), refer to page 743. For RS-485 communication using the Mitsubishi inverter protocol, refer to page 672. For RS-485 communication using the MODBUS RTU communication protocol, refer to page 686.)
Access to parameters according to the password status
: Enabled, : Disabled *1 Reading/writing is disabled if reading is restricted by the Pr.160 setting. (Reading is available in the Network operation mode regardless of the
Pr.160 setting.) *2 All parameter clear cannot be performed during the operation.
PU (operation panel or parameter unit)
RS-485 communication
Communication option
All parameter clear Parameter clear
Parameter
Password protection disabled / Parameters unlocked Parameters locked Password locked up
Pr.296 = "9999", Pr.297 = "9999"
Pr.296 "9999", Pr.297 = "9999"
Pr.296 "9999", Pr.297 = "0 to 4" (read value)
Pr.296 = "100 to 106, 199" Pr.297 = "5" (read value)
Pr.296 Read *1
Write *1 *1
Pr.297 Read *1
Write *3
Pr.CLR write (Parameter clear) *4 *4
ALL.C write (All parameter clear) *2 *2
Pr.CPY write (Parameter copy)
3495. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
35
*3 Inputting a password is possible but the locked-up password cannot be unlocked or reset even with the valid password. *4 Parameter clear can be performed only via a communication option.
NOTE When "4, 5, 104, or 105" is set in Pr.296 and a password is set, Pr.15 Jog frequency is not listed on the parameter unit (FR-
PU07). When a password has been set and parameters are locked, Parameter copy cannot be performed using the operation panel,
parameter unit, or a USB memory device.
Parameters referred to Pr.77 Parameter write selectionpage 345 Pr.160 User group read selectionpage 354 Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selectionpage 400 Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selectionpage 400
5.7.15 Free parameter Any number within the setting range of 0 to 9999 can be input. For example, these numbers can be used:
As a unit number when multiple units are used. As a pattern number for each operation application when multiple units are used. As the year and month of introduction or inspection.
NOTE Pr.888 and Pr.889 do not influence the operation of the inverter.
5.7.16 Setting multiple parameters by batch The setting of particular parameters is changed by batch, such as communication parameters for connection with the Mitsubishi Electric human machine interface (GOT), the parameters for the rated frequency (50/60 Hz) setting, or the parameters for acceleration/deceleration time increment. Multiple parameters are changed automatically. Users do not have to consider each parameter number (automatic parameter setting).
*1 The read value is always "9999".
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 888 E420 Free parameter 1 9999 0 to 9999 Any value can be input.
The settings are retained even if the inverter power is turned OFF.889
E421 Free parameter 2 9999 0 to 9999
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
999 E431
Automatic parameter setting 9999*1
1 Standard PID display setting 2 Extended PID display setting 10 GOT initial setting (PU connector) "Controller Type" in GOT:
FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO11 GOT initial setting (RS-485 terminal)
12 GOT initial setting (PU connector) "Controller Type" in GOT: FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation)13 GOT initial setting (RS-485 terminal)
20 50 Hz rated frequency 21 60 Hz rated frequency 9999 No action
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Automatic parameter setting (Pr.999) Select which parameters to automatically set from the following table, and set them in Pr.999. Multiple parameter settings
are changed automatically. Refer to page 352 for the list of parameters that are changed automatically.
NOTE If the automatic setting is performed with Pr.999 or the automatic parameter setting mode, the settings including the changed
parameter settings (changed from the initial setting) will be automatically changed. Before performing the automatic setting, confirm that changing the parameters will not cause any problem.
PID monitor indicator setting (Pr.999 = "1 or 2")
*1 Enabled when the FR-LU08 (-01) is used. *2 Enabled when the FR-PU07 is used. *3 Enabled when the FR-PU07-01 is used.
3-line monitor setting On the operation panel or parameter unit, the 3-line monitor is used as the first monitor.
Direct setting Pressing the [FUNC] key on the FR-PU07-01 displays the direct setting screen. The PID action set point can be directly set regardless of the operation mode or Pr.77 Parameter write selection setting.
Pr.999 setting Description Operation in the automatic parameter setting mode
1 Sets the standard monitor indicator setting of PID control. " " (AUTO) " " (PID) Write
"1".
2 Automatically sets the monitor indicator for PID control. " " (AUTO) " " (PID) Write
"2".
10 Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT connection with a PU connector ("Controller Type" in GOT: FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO)
" " (AUTO) " " (GOT) Write
"1".
11 Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT connection with RS-485 terminals ("Controller Type" in GOT: FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO)
12 Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT connection with a PU connector ("Controller Type" in GOT: FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation))
" " (AUTO) " " (GOT) Write
"2".
13 Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT connection with RS-485 terminals ("Controller Type" in GOT: FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation))
20 50 Hz rated frequency Sets the related parameters of the rated
frequency according to the power supply frequency
" " (AUTO) " " (F50) Write
"1".
21 60 Hz rated frequency
Pr. Name Initial value Pr.999 = "1" Pr.999 = "2" Refer to page 759 PID unit selection 9999 9999 4
615 1142 Second PID unit selection 9999 9999 4 774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 9999 9999 52
446775 Operation panel monitor selection 2 9999 9999 53 776 Operation panel monitor selection 3 9999 9999 54 C42 (934) PID display bias coefficient 9999 9999 0
615 C44 (935) PID display gain coefficient 9999 9999 100 1136 Second PID display bias coefficient 9999 9999 0 1138 Second PID display gain coefficient 9999 9999 100 3-line monitor setting Invalid Enabled*1*2*3
Direct setting Invalid Enabled*3
Dedicated parameter list function Invalid Enabled*3
3515. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
35
Pressing the [FUNC] key on the direct setting screen displays the function menu.
Dedicated parameter list function Pressing the [PrSET] key of the FR-PU07-01 displays the dedicated parameter list. Parameters that need to be set first for the PID extended display setting are listed.
NOTE The display of parameters other than the above may be changed due to changes in C42 or C44. Set the PID monitor indicator
before changing the settings of other parameters. To use the direct setting on the LCD operation panel, set Pr.1000 Direct setting selection. (Refer to page 340.)
GOT initial setting (PU connector) (Pr.999 = "10, 12")
*1 The setting is changed when Pr.414 = "0" (initial setting).
Initial setting with the GOT2000 series When "FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT setting, set Pr.999
= "10" to configure the GOT initial setting. When "FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation)" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT setting, the GOT automatic
connection can be used. When "FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation)" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT setting and the GOT automatic connection is not used, set Pr.999 = "12" to configure the GOT initial setting. (Refer to page 701.)
Initial setting with the GOT1000 series Set Pr.999 = "10" to configure the GOT initial setting.
NOTE Always perform an inverter reset after the initial setting. For details on connection with GOT, refer to the Instruction Manual of GOT.
Direct setting Parameter to be set Direct setting 1 Pr.133 PID action set point Direct setting 2 Pr.755 Second PID action set point
Dedicated parameter list Parameter to be set No.1 Pr.999 Automatic parameter setting No.2 Pr.934 PID display bias coefficient No.3 Pr.935 PID display bias analog value
Pr. Name Initial value Pr.999 = "10" Pr.999 = "12" Refer to page 79 Operation mode selection 0 1 1 389
118 PU communication speed 192 192 1152
670
119 PU communication stop bit length / data length 1 10 0 120 PU communication parity check 2 1 1 121 PU communication retry count 1 9999 9999 122 PU communication check time interval 9999 9999 9999 123 PU communication waiting time setting 9999 0 ms 0 ms 124 PU communication CR/LF selection 1 1 1 340 Communication startup mode selection 0 0 0 398 414 PLC function operation selection 0 2*1 646
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
GOT initial setting (RS-485 terminals) (Pr.999 = "11, 13")
*1 The setting is changed when Pr.414 = "0" (initial setting).
Initial setting with the GOT2000 series When "FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT setting, set Pr.999
= "11" to configure the GOT initial setting. When "FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation)" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT setting, the GOT automatic
connection can be used. When "FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation)" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT setting and the GOT automatic connection is not used, set Pr.999 = "13" to configure the GOT initial setting. (Refer to page 701.)
Initial setting with the GOT1000 series Set Pr.999 = "11" to configure the GOT initial setting.
NOTE Always perform an inverter reset after the initial setting. For details on connection with GOT, refer to the Instruction Manual of GOT.
Pr. Name Initial value Pr.999 = "11" Pr.999 = "13" Refer to page 79 Operation mode selection 0 0 0 389
332 RS-485 communication speed 96 192 1152
670
333 RS-485 communication stop bit length / data length 1 10 0
334 RS-485 communication parity check selection 2 1 1 335 RS-485 communication retry count 1 9999 9999 336 RS-485 communication check time interval 0 s 9999 9999 337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting 9999 0 ms 0 ms 340 Communication startup mode selection 0 1 1 398 341 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection 1 1 1 670 414 PLC function operation selection 0 2*1 646 549 Protocol selection 0 0 0 686
3535. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
35
Rated frequency (Pr.999 = "20" (50 Hz) or "21" (60 Hz))
5.7.17 Extended parameter display and user group function
This function restricts the parameters that are read by the operation panel and parameter unit.
*1 The read value is always "9999".
Display of simple mode parameters and extended parameters (Pr.160) When Pr.160 = "9999", only the simple mode parameters are displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU08) and parameter
unit (FR-PU07). (For the simple mode parameters, refer to the parameter list on page 166.) With the initial value (Pr.160 = "0", simple mode parameters and extended parameters can be displayed.
Pr. Name Initial value
Pr.999 = "21" Pr.999 = "20" Refer to pageFM type CA type
3 Base frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 707 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 411
20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 367
37 Speed display 0 0 444 55 Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 457
66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 431
116 Third output frequency detection 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 431
125 (903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz
505 126 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz
263 Subtraction starting frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 642
266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz
386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 406 505 Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 444
808 Forward rotation speed limit/speed limit 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 287
C14 (918) Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 505
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
160 E440
User group read selection 0
9999 Only simple mode parameters are displayed. 0 Displays simple mode and extended parameters. 1 Only parameters registered in user groups are displayed.
172 E441
User group registered display/batch clear 0
(0 to 16) Displays the number of parameters that are registered in the user groups. (Read-only)
9999 Batch clear of user group registrations 173 E442 User group registration 9999*1 0 to 1999, 9999 Sets the parameter number to register for the user group.
174 E443 User group clear 9999*1 0 to 1999, 9999 Sets the parameter number to clear from the user group.
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When a plug-in option in installed on the inverter, the option parameters can also be read. Every parameter can be read regardless of the Pr.160 setting when reading parameters via a communication option. When reading the parameters using the RS-485 terminals, all parameters can be read regardless of the Pr.160 setting by
setting Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection and Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection.
When the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) is installed, Pr.15 Jog frequency, Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time, C42 (Pr.934) PID display bias coefficient, C43 (Pr.934) PID display bias analog value, C44 (Pr.935) PID display gain coefficient, C45 (Pr.935) PID display gain analog value, Pr.991 PU contrast adjustment, Pr.1136 Second PID display bias coefficient, Pr.1137 Second PID display bias analog value, Pr.1138 Second PID display gain coefficient, and Pr.1139 Second PID display gain analog value are displayed as simple mode parameters.
User group function (Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174) The user group function is a function for displaying only the parameters required for a setting. A maximum of 16 parameters from any of the parameters can be registered in a user group. When Pr.160 = "1", reading/
writing is enabled only for the parameters registered in user groups. (Parameters not registered in user groups can no longer be read.)
To register a parameter in a user group, set the parameter number in Pr.173. To clear a parameter from a user group, set the parameter number in Pr.174. To batch clear all the registered parameters,
set Pr.172 = "9999".
Registering a parameter in a user group (Pr.173) To register Pr.3 in a user group
Operating procedure 1. Power ON
Make sure the motor is stopped.
2. Changing the operation mode
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.
3. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears)
4. Selecting a parameter
Turn until " " (Pr.173) appears.
5. Parameter read
Press . " " appears.
6. Parameter registration
Turn until " " (Pr.3) appears. Press to register the parameter.
" " and " "are displayed alternately. To continue adding parameters, repeat steps 5 and 6.
Pr.551 Pr.550 Pr.160 enabled/disabled 1 (RS-485) Enabled
2 (PU), 3 (USB), 9999 (Automatic determination) (initial value)
0 (Communication option) Enabled 1 (RS-485) Disabled (All can be read)
9999 (Automatic determination) (initial value)
With communication option: Enabled Without communication option: Disabled (All can be read)
3555. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
35
Clearing a parameter from a user group (Pr.174) To delete Pr.3 from a user group.
Operating procedure 1. Power ON
Make sure the motor is stopped.
2. Changing the operation mode
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.
3. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears)
4. Selecting a parameter
Turn until " " (Pr.174) appears.
5. Parameter read
Press . " " appears.
6. Clearing the parameter
Turn until " " (Pr.3) appears. Press to delete the parameter.
" " and " "are displayed alternately. To continue deleting parameters, repeat steps 5 and 6.
NOTE Pr.77 Parameter write selection, Pr.160, Pr.296 Password lock level, Pr.297 Password lock/unlock and Pr.991 PU
contrast adjustment can always be read regardless of the user group setting. (For Pr.991, only when the FR-LU08 or the FR-PU07 is connected.)
Pr.77, Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174, Pr.296, and Pr.297 cannot be registered in a user group. When Pr.174 is read, "9999" is always displayed. "9999" can be written, but it does not function. Pr.172 is disabled if set to a value other than "9999".
Parameters referred to Pr.15 Jog frequency, Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration timepage 410 Pr.77 Parameter write selectionpage 345 Pr.296 Password lock level, Pr.297 Password lock/unlockpage 348 Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selectionpage 400 Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selectionpage 400 Pr.991 PU contrast adjustmentpage 340
5.7.18 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control The motor sound can be changed.
*1 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower *2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
72 E600 PWM frequency selection 2
0 to 15*1 The PWM carrier frequency can be changed. The setting value represents the frequency in kHz. However, "0" indicates 0.7 kHz, "15" indicates 14.5 kHz, and "25" indicates 2.5 kHz. (The setting value "25" is for the sine wave filter only.)
0 to 6, 25*2
240 E601
Soft-PWM operation selection 1
0 Soft-PWM control disabled. 1 Soft-PWM control enabled.
260 E602
PWM frequency automatic switchover 1
0 PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function disabled (for the LD, ND, or HD rating)
1 PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function enabled
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Changing the PWM carrier frequency (Pr.72) The PWM carrier frequency of the inverter can be changed. Changing the PWM carrier frequency can be effective for avoiding the resonance frequency of the mechanical system or
motor, as a countermeasure against EMI generated from the inverter, or for reducing leakage current caused by PWM switching.
Under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, and PM sensorless vector control, the following carrier frequencies are used. (For the control method and fast-response mode selection, refer to Pr.800 Control method selection on page 221.)
*1 When low-speed range high-torque characteristic is disabled (Pr.788 = "0"), 2 kHz is used. *2 In the low-speed range (less than 3 Hz) under Real sensorless vector control, the carrier frequency is automatically changed to 2 kHz.
(For the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and the FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower) When using an optional sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC), set "25" (2.5 kHz) in Pr.72. (FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-
A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
NOTE In the low-speed range (less than about 10 Hz), the carrier frequency may be automatically lowered.
Motor noise increases, but not to the point of failure. When Pr.72 = "25", the following limitations apply.
Soft-PWM control (Pr.240) Soft-PWM control is a function that changes the motor noise from a metallic sound into an inoffensive, complex tone. Setting Pr.240 = "1" will enable the Soft-PWM control. To enable the Soft-PWM control, set Pr.72 to 5 kHz or less for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower or the FR-A840-
01800(55K) or lower. For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher or the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, set Pr.72 to 4 kHz or less.
NOTE While a sine wave filter (Pr.72 = "25") is being used, the Soft-PWM control is disabled.
Pr.72 setting Carrier frequency (kHz)
Real sensorless vector control, Vector control PM sensorless vector control, Fast-response mode
0
2 6*1
4
1 2 3 4 5 6
6*2 6 7 8
8 9 10
10*2 10 11 12
12 13 14
14*2 14 15
- V/F control is forcibly set. - Soft-PWM control is disabled. - The maximum output frequency is 60 Hz.
3575. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
35
PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function (Pr.260) Setting Pr.260 = "1 (initial value)" will enable the PWM carrier frequency auto-reduction function. If a heavy load is
continuously applied while the inverter carrier frequency is set to 3 kHz or higher (Pr.72 "3"), the carrier frequency is automatically reduced to prevent occurrence of the inverter overload trip (electronic thermal O/L relay function) (E.THT). The carrier frequency is reduced to as low as 2 kHz. Motor noise increases, but not to the point of failure.
When the carrier frequency automatic reduction function is used, operation with the carrier frequency set to 3 kHz or higher (Pr.72 3) automatically reduces the carrier frequency for heavy-load operation as shown below.
NOTE Reducing the PWM carrier frequency is effective as a countermeasure against EMI from the inverter or for reducing leakage
current, but doing so increases the motor noise. When the PWM carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or lower (Pr.72 1), the increase in the harmonic current causes the fast-
response current limit to activate before the stall prevention operation, which may result in torque shortage. In this case, disable the fast-response current limit in Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection.
The lower limit of carrier frequency after the reduction under PM sensorless vector control (low-speed range high-torque characteristic enabled) is 6 kHz.
During fast-response operation, the carrier frequency automatic reduction function is disabled.
Parameters referred to Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selectionpage 431 Pr.570 Multiple rating settingpage 343 Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selectionpage 233 Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221
Pr.260 setting Pr.570 setting
Carrier frequency automatic reduction operation FR-A820-04750(90K) or lower, FR-A840-
02600(90K) or lower FR-A840-03250(110K) or higher
1
0 (SLD), 1 (LD) The carrier frequency will reduce automatically with continuous operation of 85% of the inverter rated current or higher.
2 (ND), 3 (HD) The carrier frequency will reduce automatically with operation of 150% of the inverter ND rated current or higher.
Continuous operation with the 85% or higher inverter rated current for the ND rating reduces the carrier frequency automatically.
0
0 (SLD) The carrier frequency will reduce automatically with continuous operation of 85% of the inverter rated current or higher.
1 (LD) Without carrier frequency automatic reduction (Perform continuous operation with the carrier frequency set to 2 kHz or lower or with less than 85% of the inverter rated current for the ND rating.)
2 (ND), 3 (HD) Without carrier frequency automatic reduction
Without carrier frequency automatic reduction (Perform continuous operation with the carrier frequency set to 2 kHz or lower or with less than 85% of the inverter rated current for the ND rating.)
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.7.19 Inverter parts life display The degree of deterioration of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, inrush current limit circuit, and relay contacts of terminals A, B, and C can be diagnosed on the monitor. When a part approaches the end of its life, an alarm can be output by self diagnosis to prevent a fault. (Note that the life diagnosis of this function should be used as a guideline only, because with the exception of the main circuit capacitor, the life values are theoretical calculations.)
*1 The setting range (read-only) differs depending on the inverter model (standard model, separate converter type, or IP55 compatible model). *2 The setting is available for the standard structure model and the IP55 compatible model.
Life alarm display and signal output (Y90 signal, Pr.255)
In the life diagnosis of the main circuit capacitor, the Life alarm (Y90) signal is not output unless measurement by turning OFF the power supply is performed.
Whether or not the parts of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, inrush current limit circuit, internal air circulation fans, or relay contacts of terminals A, B, and C have reached the life alarm output level can be checked with Pr.255 Life alarm status display and the Life alarm (Y90) signal. (Internal air circulation fans are equipped with IP55 compatible models.)
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
255 E700 Life alarm status display 0 (0 to 255)*1
Displays whether or not the parts of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and inrush current limit circuit have reached the life alarm output level. Read-only.
256 E701*2
Inrush current limit circuit life display 100% (0 to 100%) Displays the degree of deterioration for the inrush
current limit circuit. Read-only. 257 E702
Control circuit capacitor life display 100% (0 to 100%) Displays the degree of deterioration for the control
circuit capacitor. Read-only.
258 E703*2 Main circuit capacitor life display 100% (0 to 100%)
Displays the degree of deterioration for the main circuit capacitor. Read-only. The value measured by Pr.259 is displayed.
259 E704*2
Main circuit capacitor life measuring 0
0, 1 (2, 3, 8, 9)
Setting "1" and turning the power supply OFF starts the measurement of the main circuit capacitor life. If the setting value of Pr.259 becomes "3" after turning the power supply ON again, it means that the measurement is completed. The degree of deterioration is read to Pr.258.
11 (12, 13, 18, 19)
When "11" is set, turning OFF the power supply starts the measurement of the main circuit capacitor life. If the setting value of Pr.259 becomes "13" after turning the power supply ON again, it means that the measurement is completed. The degree of deterioration is read to Pr.258.
506 E705*2
Display estimated main circuit capacitor residual life 100% (0 to 100%) Displays the estimated residual life of the main circuit
capacitor. Read-only. 507 E706
Display/reset ABC1 relay contact life 100% 0 to 100% Displays the degree of deterioration of the relay
contacts of terminals A1, B1, and C1. 508 E707
Display/reset ABC2 relay contact life 100% 0 to 100% Displays the degree of deterioration of the relay
contacts of terminals A2, B2, and C2.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
bit0 Control circuit capacitor life
1 15bit 7 0
bit1 Main circuit capacitor life (Standard models and IP55 compatible models only)
bit2 Cooling fan life bit3 Inrush current limit circuit life (Standard models and IP55 compatible models only)
Pr.255 read Pr.255 setting read
Bit image is displayed in decimal
bit4 Life of internal air circulation fans (IP55 compatible models only) bit5 Estimated residual-life of main circuit capacitor (Standard models and IP55 compatible models only)
bit6 ABC1 relay contact life bit7 ABC2 relay contact life
3595. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
36
When the parts have reached the life alarm output level, the corresponding bits of Pr.255 turns ON. The ON/OFF state of the bits can be checked with Pr.255. The following table shows examples.
: Parts reaching alarm output level : Parts not reaching alarm output level Diagnosable parts differ depending on the type of the inverter.
: Diagnosable, : Undiagnosable
The Life alarm (Y90) signal turns ON when the life alarm output level is reached for either of the following: the control circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life, internal air circulation fan life, estimated residual-life of the main circuit capacitor, ABC1 relay contact life, or ABC2 relay contact life.
For the terminal used for the Y90 signal, set "90" (positive logic) or "190" (negative logic) in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
NOTE When using an option (FR-A8AY, FR-A8AR, FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, or FR-A8NCG), warning signals can be output
individually: the Control circuit capacitor life (Y86) signal, Main circuit capacitor life (Y87) signal, Cooling fan life (Y88) signal, Inrush current limit circuit life (Y89) signal, Estimated residual-life of main circuit capacitor (Y248) signal, ABC1 relay contact life (Y249) signal, and ABC2 relay contact life (Y250) signal.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Life display of the inrush current limit circuit (Pr.256) (Standard models and IP55 compatible models)
The life of the inrush current limit circuit (relay, contactor and inrush resistor) is displayed in Pr.256. The number of contact (relay, contactor, thyristor) ON times is counted, and it is counted down from 100% (0 time) every
1%/10,000 times. When the counter reaches 10% (900,000 times), bit 3 of Pr.255 is turned ON (set to 1) and the Y90 signal is also output as an alert.
Life display of the control circuit capacitor (Pr.257) The degree of deterioration for the control circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr.257. In the operating status, the control circuit capacitor life is calculated from the energization time and temperature, and is
counted down from 100%. When the counter goes down from 10%, bit 0 of Pr.255 is turned ON (set to 1) and the Y90 signal is also output as an alert.
Pr.255 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Remarks
Decimal Binary
239 11101111 All parts have reached alarm output level for standard structure models.
5 101 Control circuit capacitor and cooling fan have reached alarm output level.
0 0 No parts have reached alarm output level.
Part Applicable inverter
Standard model Separated converter type IP55 compatible model Control circuit capacitor Main circuit capacitor Cooling fan Inrush current limit circuit Internal air circulation fan Main circuit capacitor (estimated residual life)
ABC relay contact
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Life display of the main circuit capacitor (Pr.258, Pr.259) (Standard models and IP55 compatible models)
For accurate life measurement of the main circuit capacitor, wait three hours or longer after turning OFF. The temperature left in the main circuit capacitor affects measurement.
The degree of deterioration for the main circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr.258. With the main circuit capacitor capacity at factory shipment as 100%, the capacitor life is displayed in Pr.258 every time
measurement is made. When the measured value falls to 85% or lower, bit 1 of Pr.255 is turned ON (set to 1) and the Y90 signal is also output as an alert.
Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the degree of deterioration for the capacitor capacity.
1. Check that the motor is connected and at a stop.
2. Set "1 or 11" (measuring start) in Pr.259.
3. Switch the power OFF. The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the inverter is OFF.
4. After confirming that the power lamp is OFF, turn ON the power again.
5. Check that "3 or 13" (measurement complete) is set in Pr.259, read Pr.258, and check the degree of deterioration for the main circuit capacitor.
NOTE When the main circuit capacitor life is measured under the following conditions, "forced end" (Pr.259 = "8 or 18"), or
"measurement error" (Pr.259 = "9 or 19") may occur, or the status may remain in "measurement start" (Pr.259 = "1 or 11"). To perform measurement, first eliminate the following conditions. Under the following conditions, even if "measurement complete" (Pr.259 = "3 or 13") is reached, measurement cannot be performed correctly.
Operation environment: Surrounding air temperature (annual average of 40C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)). Output current: 80% of the inverter rating
Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit, frequent starts and stops of the magnetic contactor must be avoided.
Pr.259 Description Remarks 0 No measurement Initial value
1, 11 Start measurement
Measurement starts when the power supply is switched OFF. (Only once when Pr.259 = "1") When Pr.259 = "11", the measurement starts every time the power supply is turned OFF.
2, 12 During measurement Only displayed and cannot be set. (When "11" is set in Pr.259, "12, 13, 18, or 19" is displayed.)
3, 13 Measurement complete 8, 18 Forced end 9, 19 Measurement error
- FR-HC2, FR-XC (common bus regeneration mode), FR-CV, MT-RC, or a sine wave filter (when Pr.72 = "25") is connected.
- Terminals R1/L11, S1/L21 or DC power supply is connected to terminals P/+ and N/-. - The power supply is switched ON during measurement. - The motor is not connected to the inverter. - The motor is running (coasting). - The motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity by two ranks or more. - The inverter output is shut off or a fault occurred while the power was OFF. - The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal. - The start command is given while measuring. - The applied motor setting is incorrect.
3615. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
36
Life display of the cooling fan If a cooling fan speed of less than the specified speed is detected, Fan alarm " " (FN) is displayed on the operation
panel or the parameter unit. As an alert output, bit 2 of Pr.255 is turned ON (set to 1), and the Y90 signal and Alarm (LF) signal are also output.
For the terminal used for the LF signal, set "98" (positive logic) or "198" (negative logic) in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
NOTE When the inverter is mounted with two or more cooling fans, "FN" is displayed even only one of the fans is detected. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. For replacement of each part, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
Estimated residual life display of the main circuit capacitor (Pr.506) (Standard models and IP55 compatible models)
Even when the power supply cannot be turned OFF, the remaining life of the main circuit capacitor can be estimated without stopping the operation. Note that the remaining life of the main circuit capacitor estimated by this function is theoretical, and should be used as a guideline only.
The estimated residual life of the main circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr.506. The remaining life of the main circuit capacitor is calculated from the energization time and the inverter output power (100%
= Start of service life). When the remaining life of the main circuit capacitor falls below 10%, bit 5 of Pr.255 Life alarm status display turns ON and a warning is output by the Y90 signal.
Life display of the relay contacts of terminals A, B, and C (Pr.507, Pr.508) The degree of deterioration of the relay contacts of terminals A1, B1, and C1 is displayed in Pr.507, and that for terminals
A2, B2, and C2 is displayed in Pr.508. The number of times the contacts of relay turn ON is counted down from 100% (0 time) by 1% (500 times). When the
counter reaches 10% (45,000 times), bit 6 or bit 7 of Pr.255 turns ON and a warning is output by the Y90 signal. Any value can be set in Pr.507 and Pr.508. After replacement of the control circuit terminal block or installation of a control
terminal option, set Pr.507 and Pr.508 again.
Life display of internal air circulation fans (IP55 compatible models) IP55 compatible models are equipped with the internal air circulation fan inside the inverter other than the cooling fan. The
internal fan fault " " (FN2) appears on the operation panel (FR-DU08) when the rotations per minute is less than
70% of the rated value for the internal air circulation fan. (FN is displayed on the parameter unit (FR-PU07).) As an alarm display, Pr.255 bit 4 is turned ON and also a warning is output to the Y90 signal and Alarm (LF) signal.
For the terminal used for the LF signal, set "98" (positive logic) or "198" (negative logic) in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. For replacement of each part, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
WARNING When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr.259 = "1 or 11"), the DC voltage is applied to the motor for about
1 second at power OFF. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering OFF to prevent an electric shock.
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.7.20 Maintenance timer alarm The Maintenance timer (Y95) signal is output when the inverter's cumulative energization time reaches the time period set with the parameter. MT1, MT2 or MT3 is displayed on the operation panel. This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance time of peripheral devices.
The cumulative energization time of the inverter is stored in the EEPROM every hour and displayed in Pr.503 (Pr.686, Pr.688) in 100 h increments. Pr.503 (Pr.686, Pr.688) is clamped at 9998 (999800 h).
When the value in Pr.503 (Pr.686, Pr.688) reaches the time (100 h increments) set in Pr.504 (Pr.687, Pr.689), the
Maintenance timer (Y95) signal is output, and also " " (MT1), " " (MT2), or " " (MT3) is
displayed on the operation panel. For the terminal used for the Y95 signal output, assign the function by setting "95 (positive logic)" or "195 (negative logic)"
in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
NOTE The Y95 signal turns ON when any of MT1, MT2 or MT3 is activated. It does not turn OFF unless all of MT1, MT2 and MT3
are cleared. If all of MT1, MT2 and MT3 are activated, they are displayed in the priority of "MT1 > MT2 > MT3". The cumulative energization time is counted every hour. Energization time of less than 1 h is not counted. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
5.7.21 Current average value monitor signal The output current average value during constant-speed operation and the maintenance timer value are output to the Current average monitor (Y93) signal as a pulse. The output pulse width can be used in a device such as the I/O unit of a programmable controller as a guideline for the maintenance time for mechanical wear, belt stretching, or deterioration of devices with age.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
503 E710 Maintenance timer 1 0 0 (1 to 9998)
Displays the inverter's cumulative energization time in increments of 100 h (read-only). Writing the setting of "0" clears the cumulative energization time while Pr.503 = "1 to 9998". (Writing is disabled when Pr.503 = "0".)
504 E711
Maintenance timer 1 warning output set time 9999
0 to 9998 Set the time until the Maintenance timer (Y95) signal is output. "MT1" is displayed on the operation panel.
9999 Without the function 686 E712 Maintenance timer 2 0 0 (1 to 9998) The same function as Pr.503.
687 E713
Maintenance timer 2 warning output set time 9999
0 to 9998 The same function as Pr.504. "MT2" is displayed on the operation panel.9999
688 E714 Maintenance timer 3 0 0 (1 to 9998) The same function as Pr.503.
689 E715
Maintenance timer 3 warning output set time 9999
0 to 9998 The same function as Pr.504. "MT3" is displayed on the operation panel.9999
First power
Time
ON
Maintenance timer 1 (Pr. 503)
Set "0" in Pr.503
Y95 signal MT1 display
OFF ONON
Pr.504
9998 (999800h)
Operation example of the maintenance timer 1 (Pr.503, Pr.504) (with both MT2 and MT3 OFF)
3635. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
36
The pulse is repeatedly output during constant-speed operation in cycles of 20 seconds to the Current average monitor (Y93) signal.
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
Operation example The pulse output of the Current average monitor (Y93) signal is indicated below. For the terminal used for the Y93 signal output, assign the function by setting "93 (positive logic)" or "193 (negative logic)"
in any of Pr.190 to Pr.194 (Output terminal function selection). (This cannot be assigned by setting in Pr.195 ABC1 terminal function selection or Pr.196 ABC2 terminal function selection.)
Pr.556 Data output mask time setting Immediately after acceleration/deceleration is shifted to constant-speed operation, the output current is unstable
(transitional state). Set the time for not obtaining (masking) transitional state data in Pr.556.
Pr.555 Current average time setting The output current average is calculated during start pulse (1 second) HIGH output. Set the time for calculating the average
current during start pulse output in Pr.555.
Programmable controller Output unit
Input unit
maintenance time
parts have reached their life
Inverter
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 555 E720 Current average time 1 s 0.1 to 1 s Set the time for calculating the average current during start
pulse output (1 second). 556 E721 Data output mask time 0 s 0 to 20 s Set the time for not obtaining (masking) transitional state
data.
557 E722
Current average value monitor signal output reference current
Inverter rated current
0 to 500 A*1 Set the reference (100%) for outputting the output current average value signal.0 to 3600 A*2
Y93 signal Data output mask time
Start pulse
1 cycle (20 s)
Output current average value pulse
Next cycle Time
Output frequency
From acceleration to constant speed operation
Maintenance timer pulse
End pulse
The averaged current value is output as low pulse shape for 0.5 to 9 s (10 to 180%) during start pulse output.
When the speed has changed to constant from acceleration/deceleration, Y93 signal is not output for Pr. 556 time.
Signal output time= output current average value (A)
Pr. 557 (A) 5 s
Signal output time= 5 s 40000h
Pr. 503 100h
output as low pulse shape for 1 to 16.5 s
The maintenance timer value (Pr. 503) is output as Hi output pulse shape for 2 to 9 s (16000h to 72000h).
Output as Hi pulse shape for 1 s (fixed) The output currents are averaged during the time period set in Pr.555.
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Pr.557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current setting
Set the reference (100%) for outputting the output current average value signal. The signal output time is calculated with the following formula.
The output time range is 0.5 to 9 seconds. When the output current average value is less than 10% of the setting value in Pr.557, the output time is 0.5 seconds, and when it is more than 180%, the output time is 9 seconds. For example, when Pr.557 = 10 A and the output current average value is 15 A: 15 A/10 A 5 s = 7.5 s, thus the Current average monitor signal maintains LOW output for 7.5 seconds.
Pr.503 Maintenance timer 1 output After LOW output of the output current value is performed, HIGH output of the maintenance timer value is performed. The maintenance timer value output time is calculated with the following formula.
The output time range is 2 to 9 seconds. When Pr.503 is less than 16000 hours, the output time is 2 seconds. When it is more than 72000 hours, the output time is 9 seconds.
Output current average value 5 s (Output current average value 100%/5 s)
Pr.557 setting value
9
0.5 10 (%)
(s)
Output current average value 180
S ig
na l o
ut pu
t t im
e
Pr.503 100 5 s (Maintenance timer value 100%/5 s)
40000h
9
2
16000 (h)
(s)
Maintenance timer value 72000
S ig
na l o
ut pu
t t im
e
3655. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
36
NOTE Masking of the data output and sampling of the output current are not performed during acceleration/deceleration. If constant speed changes to acceleration or deceleration during start pulse output, it is judged as invalid data, and the signal
maintains HIGH start pulse output for 3.5 seconds and LOW end pulse output for 16.5 seconds. After the start pulse output is completed, minimum 1-cycle signal output is performed even if acceleration/deceleration is performed.
If the output current value (inverter output current monitor) is 0 A at the completion of the 1-cycle signal output, no signal is output until the next constant-speed state.
Under the following conditions, the Y93 signal maintains LOW output for 20 seconds (no data output).
Pr.686 Maintenance timer 2 and Pr.688 Maintenance timer 3 cannot be output. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628, page 635 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473 Pr.503 Maintenance timer 1, Pr.686 Maintenance timer 2, Pr.688 Maintenance timer 3page 363
End signal
Y93 signal
Start pulse
Invalid cycle (20 s) Next cycle Time
Output frequency The speed is changed to deceleration from the constant speed during start pulse output
Previous cycle
Output as high pulse shape for 3.5 s Output as low pulse shape for 16.5 s
- When acceleration or deceleration is operating at the completion of the 1-cycle signal output - When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr.57 Restart coasting time "9999") is set, and the 1-
cycle signal output is completed during the restart operation. - When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr.57 "9999") is set, and the restart operation was being
performed at the completion of data output masking.
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
5.8.1 Setting the acceleration and deceleration time The following parameters are used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time. Set a larger value for a slower acceleration/deceleration, or a smaller value for a faster acceleration/deceleration.
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
To set the motor acceleration/ deceleration time
Acceleration/deceleration time
P.F000 to P.F003, P.F010, P.F011, P.F020 to P.F022, P.F030, P.F031, P.F040, P.F070, P.F071, P.G264
Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.16, Pr.20, Pr.21, Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.110, Pr.111, Pr.147, Pr.611, Pr.791, Pr.792, Pr.1103, Pr.1349
367
To set the acceleration/deceleration pattern suitable for an application
Acceleration/deceleration pattern and backlash measures
P.F100, P.F200 to P.F203, P.F300 to P.F303, P.F400 to P.F403
Pr.29, Pr.140 to Pr.143, Pr.380 to Pr.383, Pr.516 to Pr.519
372
To command smooth speed transition with terminals Remote setting function P.F101 Pr.59 377
To set the starting frequency Starting frequency and start- time hold P.F102, P.F103 Pr.13, Pr.571 381, 382
To set optimum acceleration/ deceleration time automatically
Automatic acceleration/ deceleration
P.F500, P.F510 to P.F513
Pr.61 to Pr.63, Pr.292 384
To set V/F pattern for lift automatically Lift operation (Automatic acceleration/deceleration)
P.F500 to P.F510, P.F520
Pr.61 to Pr.64, Pr.292 387
3675. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
36
For the acceleration time at automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, refer to Pr.611 Acceleration time at a restart (page 628, page 635).
*1 The initial value for the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower. *2 Initial value for the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and FR-A840-00310(11K) and higher.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description FM CA
20 F000
Acceleration/ deceleration reference frequency
60 Hz 50 Hz 1 to 590 Hz
Set the frequency that is the basis of acceleration/deceleration time. As acceleration/deceleration time, set the time required to change the frequency from a stop status (0 Hz) to the frequency set in Pr.20 and vice versa.
21 F001
Acceleration/ deceleration time increments
0 0 Increment: 0.1 s Select the increment for
the acceleration/ deceleration time setting.1 Increment: 0.01 s
16 F002
Jog acceleration/ deceleration time 0.5 s 0 to 3600 s Set the acceleration/deceleration time for JOG operation (from stop
status to Pr.20). Refer to page 410.
611 F003
Acceleration time at a restart 9999
0 to 3600 s Set the acceleration time for restart (from stop status to Pr.20).
9999 Standard acceleration time (for example, Pr.7) is applied as the acceleration time at restart. Refer to page 628, page 635.
7 F010 Acceleration time
5s*1 0 to 3600 s Set the motor acceleration time (time required to change the
frequency from a stop status (0 Hz) to the frequency set in Pr.20).15s*2
8 F011 Deceleration time
5s*1 0 to 3600 s Set the motor deceleration time (from Pr.20 to stop status).
15s*2
44 F020
Second acceleration/ deceleration time
5 s 0 to 3600 s Set the acceleration/deceleration time used while the RT signal is ON.
45 F021
Second deceleration time 9999
0 to 3600 s Set the deceleration time used while the RT signal is ON. 9999 The acceleration time applies to the deceleration time.
147 F022
Acceleration/ deceleration time switching frequency
9999 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency where the acceleration/deceleration time
switches to the time set in Pr.44 and Pr.45.
9999 Function disabled.
110 F030
Third acceleration/ deceleration time
9999 0 to 3600 s Set the acceleration/deceleration time when the X9 signal is ON.
9999 Third acceleration/deceleration is disabled.
111 F031
Third deceleration time 9999
0 to 3600 s Set the deceleration time when the X9 signal is ON. 9999 The acceleration time applies to the deceleration time.
791 F070
Acceleration time in low-speed range
9999 0 to 3600 s Set the acceleration time in a low-speed range (less than 1/10 of the
rated motor frequency).
9999 The acceleration time set in Pr.7 is applied. (While the RT signal or the X9 signal is ON, the second or third function is enabled.)
792 F071
Deceleration time in low-speed range
9999 0 to 3600 s Set the deceleration time in a low-speed range (less than 1/10 of the
rated motor frequency).
9999 The deceleration time set in Pr.8 is applied. (While the RT signal or the X9 signal is ON, the second or third function is enabled.)
1103 F040
Deceleration time at emergency stop 5 s 0 to 3600 s Set the motor deceleration time at a deceleration by turning ON the
X92 signal.
1349 G264
Emergency stop operation selection
0
0 Droop control enabled. Speed loop integration enabled.
1 Droop control enabled. Speed loop integration disabled.
10 Droop control disabled. Speed loop integration enabled.
11 Droop control disabled. Speed loop integration disabled.
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Control block diagram
Acceleration time setting (Pr.7, Pr.20) Use Pr.7 Acceleration time to set the acceleration time required to change the frequency to the frequency set in Pr.20
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency from stop status. Set the acceleration time according to the following formula.
For example, the following calculation is performed to find the setting value for Pr.7 when increasing the output frequency to the maximum frequency of 50 Hz in 10 seconds with Pr.20 = 60 Hz (initial value) and Pr.13 = 0.5 Hz.
Deceleration time setting (Pr.8, Pr.20) Use Pr.8 Deceleration time to set the deceleration time required to change the frequency to a stop status from the
frequency set in Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency. Set the deceleration time according to the following formula.
For example, the following calculation is used to find the setting value for Pr.8 when decreasing the output frequency from the maximum frequency of 50 Hz in 10 seconds with Pr.20 = 120 Hz and Pr.10 = 3 Hz.
NOTE If the acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the
shortest acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical system J (moment of inertia) and motor torque. If the Pr.20 setting is changed, the Pr.125 and Pr.126 (frequency setting signal gain frequency) settings do not change.
Set Pr.125 and Pr.126 to adjust the gains. Under PM sensorless vector control, if the protective function (E.OLT) is activated due to insufficient torque in the low-speed
range, set longer acceleration/deceleration times only in the low-speed range in Pr.791 Acceleration time in low-speed range and Pr.792 Deceleration time in low-speed range.
JOG (Pr.16)
Output frequency Pr.147 (or Pr.147= 9999 ) RT-OFF X9-OFF
JOG-OFF
JOG-ON
X9-ON
RT-ON
Output frequency 10% of the rated motor frequency
Acceleration and deceleration time
(Pr.7, Pr.8)
Second acceleration and deceleration time
(Pr.44, Pr.45)
Third acceleration and deceleration time (Pr.110, Pr.111)
Acceleration and deceleration time
in low-speed range (Pr.791, Pr.792)
Output frequency Pr.147
Acceleration time or deceleration time
Output frequency 10% of the rated motor frequency
Acceleration time setting = Pr.20 setting (Acceleration time to change the frequency from stop status to maximum frequency) / (Maximum frequency - Pr.13 setting)
Pr.7 setting = 60 Hz 10 s / (50 Hz - 0.5 Hz) 12.1 s
Set frequency
Acceleration time
Deceleration time
Time
Pr.20
Pr.7 Pr.8
Ou tp
ut
fre qu
en cy
(H z)
Pr.110 Pr.111 Pr.44 Pr.45
(60Hz/50Hz)
Deceleration time setting = Pr.20 setting (Deceleration time to change the frequency from maximum frequency to stop status) / (Maximum frequency - Pr.10 setting)
Pr.8 setting = 120 Hz 10 s / (50 Hz - 3 Hz) 25.5 s
3695. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
37
Changing the minimum increment of the acceleration/deceleration time (Pr.21)
Use Pr.21 to set the minimum increment of the acceleration/deceleration time. Setting value "0" (initial value): minimum increment 0.1 s Setting value "1": minimum increment 0.01 s
Pr.21 setting allows the minimum increment of the following parameters to be changed. Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.16, Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.110, Pr.111, Pr.264, Pr.265, Pr.791, Pr.792, Pr.1103
NOTE Pr.21 setting does not affect the minimum increment setting of Pr.611 Acceleration time at a restart. The FR-DU08 and the FR-PU07 provide a five-digit readout (including the number of decimal places) on a value of parameters.
Therefore, a value of "1000" or larger is set/displayed only in increments of 0.1 second even if Pr.21 = "1".
Setting multiple acceleration/deceleration times (RT signal, X9 signal, Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.110, Pr.111, Pr.147)
Pr.44 and Pr.45 are valid when the RT signal is ON or when the output frequency is equal to or higher than the frequency set in Pr.147 Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency. Pr.110 and Pr.111 are valid when the X9 signal is ON.
Even at the frequency lower than the Pr.147 setting, turning ON the RT signal (X9 signal) switches the acceleration/ deceleration time to the second (third) acceleration/deceleration time. The priority of the signals and settings is X9 signal > RT signal > Pr.147 setting.
To input the X9 signal, set "9" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to the terminal.
When "9999" is set in Pr.45 and Pr.111, the deceleration time becomes equal to the acceleration time (Pr.44, Pr.110). When Pr.110 = "9999" is set, the third acceleration/deceleration function is disabled. If the Pr.147 setting is equal to or less than the Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency or the Pr.13 Starting
frequency setting, the acceleration/deceleration time switches to the Pr.44 (Pr.45) when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the Pr.10 or Pr.13 setting.
Pr.147 setting Acceleration/deceleration time Description
9999 (initial value) Pr.7, Pr.8 Acceleration/deceleration time is not automatically changed.
0.00 Hz Pr.44, Pr.45 Second acceleration/deceleration time is applied from the start.
0.01 Hz Pr.147 Set frequency Output frequency < Pr.147: Pr.7, Pr.8 Acceleration/deceleration time is
automatically changed.Pr.147 Output frequency: Pr.44, Pr.45
Set frequency < Pr.147 Pr.7, Pr.8 Not changed as the frequency has not reached the switchover frequency.
Time
Output frequency (Hz)
Set frequency
Pr. 147 setting
Pr.7 Pr.44 Pr.44 (Pr.45)
Pr.8Pr.7 Pr.44 Pr.44 (Pr.45)
Pr.8Pr.110 Pr.111
RT signal
X9 signal
ON
ON
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE The reference frequency during acceleration/deceleration depends on the Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern
selection setting. (Refer to page 372.) The RT and X9 signals can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. The RT (X9) signal acts as the second (third) function selection signal and makes the other second (third) functions valid.
(Refer to page 525.) The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
Setting the acceleration/deceleration time in the low-speed range (Pr.791, Pr.792)
If torque is required in the low-speed range (less than 10% of the rated motor frequency) under PM sensorless vector control, set the Pr.791 Acceleration time in the low-speed range and Pr.792 Deceleration time in low-speed range settings higher than the Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time settings so that the mild acceleration/ deceleration is performed in the low-speed range. Such a setting is especially effective when the low-speed range high- torque characteristic is disabled (Pr.788 = "0"). (When RT signal or X9 signal is turned ON, the second or third acceleration/ deceleration time setting is prioritized.)
NOTE Set Pr.791 (Pr.792) to a value larger than the Pr.7 (Pr.8) setting. If set as Pr.791 < Pr.7, the operation is performed as Pr.791
= Pr.7. If set as Pr.792 < Pr.8, the operation is performed as Pr.792 = Pr.8. Refer to page 833 for the rated motor frequency of MM-CF.
Emergency stop function (Pr.1103) When the Emergency stop (X92) signal is ON, the deceleration stop is performed according to the settings in the Pr.1103
Deceleration time at emergency stop and Pr.815 Torque limit level 2. To input the X92 signal, set "92" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to
a terminal. The X92 signal is a normally closed input (NC contact input). "PS" is displayed on the operation panel during activation of the emergency stop function.
Low-speed range (rated motor frequency/10)
Acceleration time Slope set by Pr.7
Deceleration time Slope set by Pr.8
Deceleration time in low-speed range Slope set by Pr.792
Acceleration time in low-speed range Slope set by Pr. 791
Time
O ut
pu t
fr eq
ue nc
y (H
z)
ON OFF
X92
ON
Time
Output frequency
Start signal
Deceleration by an emergency stop
Normal acceleration
OFFON ON
3715. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
37
The droop control and the speed loop integration at the emergency stop by the Emergency stop (X92) signal can be enabled/disabled using Pr.1349 Emergency stop operation selection.
NOTE The X92 signals can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. Refer to page 738 for details on the droop control. Refer to page 254 for details on the speed loop integration.
Parameters referred to Pr.3 Base frequencypage 707 Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequencypage 715 Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selectionpage 372 Pr.125, Pr.126 (frequency setting gain frequency)page 505 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.264 Power-failure deceleration time 1, Pr.265 Power-failure deceleration time 2page 505
5.8.2 Acceleration/deceleration pattern The acceleration/deceleration pattern can be set according to the application. In addition, the backlash measures that stop acceleration/deceleration by the frequency or time set with parameters at acceleration/deceleration can be set.
Pr.1349 setting
Description Droop control Speed loop integration
0 Enabled Enabled 1 Enabled Disabled 10 Disabled Enabled 11 Disabled Disabled
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
29 F100
Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection 0
0 Linear acceleration/deceleration 1 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A 2 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B 3 Backlash measure 4 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C 5 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D 6 Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration
140 F200
Backlash acceleration stopping frequency 1 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
Set the stopping frequency and time during backlash measures. Valid by backlash measures (Pr.29 = "3").
141 F201
Backlash acceleration stopping time 0.5 s 0 to 360 s
142 F202
Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 1 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
143 F203
Backlash deceleration stopping time 0.5 s 0 to 360 s
380 F300 Acceleration S-pattern 1 0 0 to 50%
Set the time for drawing the S-pattern from acceleration/ deceleration start to linear acceleration as a ratio (%) of acceleration/deceleration time (Pr.7, 8, etc.). The acceleration/deceleration curve can be switched by the X20 signal. Valid by S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C (Pr.29 = "4").
381 F301 Deceleration S-pattern 1 0 0 to 50%
382 F302 Acceleration S-pattern 2 0 0 to 50%
383 F303 Deceleration S-pattern 2 0 0 to 50%
516 F400
S-pattern time at a start of acceleration 0.1 s 0.1 to 2.5 s
Set the time required for acceleration (S-pattern) of S- pattern acceleration/deceleration. Valid by S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D (Pr.29 = "5").
517 F401
S-pattern time at a completion of acceleration 0.1 s 0.1 to 2.5 s
518 F402
S-pattern time at a start of deceleration 0.1 s 0.1 to 2.5 s
519 F403
S-pattern time at a completion of deceleration 0.1 s 0.1 to 2.5 s
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Linear acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 = "0 (initial value)") When the frequency is changed for acceleration, deceleration, etc. during inverter operation, the output frequency is
changed linearly (linear acceleration/deceleration) to reach the set frequency without straining the motor and inverter. Linear acceleration/deceleration has a uniform frequency/time slope.
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A (Pr.29 = "1") Use this when acceleration/deceleration is required for a short time until a high-speed area equal to or higher than the base
frequency, such as for the main shaft of the machine. The acceleration/deceleration pattern has the Pr.3 Base frequency (Pr.84 Rated motor frequency under PM motor
control) (fb) as the point of inflection in an S-pattern curve, and the acceleration/deceleration time can be set to be suitable for the motor torque reduction in the constant-power operation range at the base frequency (fb) or more.
Acceleration/deceleration time calculation method when the set frequency is equal to or higher than the base frequency
Reference (0 Hz to set frequency) of acceleration/deceleration time when Pr.3 = 60 Hz
NOTE For the acceleration/deceleration time setting of the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A, set the time to Pr.3 (Pr.84 under
PM sensorless vector control) instead of Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B (Pr.29 = "2") This is useful for preventing collapsing stacks such as on a conveyor. S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B can reduce
the impact during acceleration/deceleration by accelerating/decelerating while maintaining an S-pattern from the present frequency (f2) to the target frequency (f1).
Acceleration time t = (4/9) (T/fb2) f2 + (5/9) T Where T is the acceleration/deceleration time (s), f is the set frequency (Hz), and fb is the base frequency (rated motor frequency)
Acceleration/deceleration time (s)
Set frequency (Hz) 60 120 200 400
5 5 12 27 102 15 15 35 82 305
[Linear acceleration / deceleration]
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H
z)
Time
Setting value "0"
fb
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H
z)
Time
[S-pattern acceleration /deceleration A]
f1
[S-pattern acceleration /deceleration B]
f2
Time
Se t f
re qu
en cy
(H
z) O
ut pu
t f re
qu en
cy
(H z)
3735. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
37
NOTE When the RT or X9 signal turns ON during acceleration or deceleration with the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B enabled,
a pattern of acceleration or deceleration changes to linear at the moment.
Backlash measures (Pr.29 = "3", Pr.140 to Pr.143) Reduction gears have an engagement gap and have a dead zone between forward rotation and reverse rotation. This dead
zone is called backlash, and this gap disables a mechanical system from following motor rotation. More specifically, a motor shaft develops excessive torque when the direction of rotation changes or when constant-speed operation shifts to deceleration, resulting in a sudden motor current increase or regenerative status.
To avoid backlash, acceleration/deceleration is temporarily stopped. Set the acceleration/deceleration stopping frequency and time in Pr.140 to Pr.143.
NOTE Setting the backlash measures increases the acceleration/deceleration time by the stopping time.
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C (Pr.29 = "4", Pr.380 to Pr.383) Switch the acceleration/deceleration curve by the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover (X20) signal. To input the X20 signal, set "20" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to
the terminal.
Set the ratio (%) of time for drawing an S-shape in Pr.380 to Pr.383 with the acceleration time as 100%.
X20 signal During acceleration During deceleration OFF Pr.380 Acceleration S-pattern 1 Pr.381 Deceleration S-pattern 1 ON Pr.382 Acceleration S-pattern 2 Pr.383 Deceleration S-pattern 2
Pr. 142
Pr. 143Pr. 141
Pr. 140Pr. 13
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H z)
[Anti-backlash measure function]
Time
Pr.382
Pr.383
Time
Pr.381
S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration C switchover (X20)
OFF OFFON
Output frequency
Set frequency
Pr.380
Frequency
Parameter setting (%) = Ts / T 100%
S-pattern
acceleration
Linear
acceleration
Ts
T
Ts
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE At a start, the motor starts at Pr.13 Starting frequency when the start signal turns ON. If there is a difference between the speed command and speed at a start of deceleration due to torque limit operation etc., the
speed command is matched with the speed to make deceleration. Change the X20 signal after the speed becomes constant. S pattern operation before switching continues even if the X20
signal is changed during acceleration or deceleration. The X20 signal can be assigned to an input terminal by setting any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. When the RT or X9 signal turns ON during acceleration or deceleration with the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C enabled,
a pattern of acceleration or deceleration changes to linear at the moment.
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D (Pr.29 = "5", Pr.516 to Pr.519) Set the time required for S-pattern operation part of S-pattern acceleration/deceleration with Pr.516 to Pr.519.
Set each S-pattern operation time for acceleration start (Pr.516), acceleration completion (Pr.517), deceleration start (Pr.518), and deceleration completion (Pr.519).
When S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D is set, the acceleration/deceleration time becomes longer, as shown below. The set acceleration/deceleration time T1 indicates the actual time taken for linear acceleration/deceleration as calculated based on Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.110, and Pr.111.
NOTE Even if the start signal is turned OFF during acceleration, the inverter does not decelerate immediately to avoid sudden
frequency change. (Likewise, the inverter does not immediately accelerate when deceleration is changed to re-acceleration by turning the start signal ON during deceleration, etc.)
Actual acceleration time T2 = set acceleration time T1 + (S-pattern time at start of acceleration + S-pattern time at completion of acceleration) / 2 Actual deceleration time T2 = set deceleration time T1 + (S-pattern time at start of deceleration + S-pattern time at completion of deceleration) / 2
Pr.516
TimeO ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
ONStart signal
Pr.517 Pr.518 Pr.519
3755. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
37
For example, the following table shows the actual acceleration time when starting the inverter by selecting S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D from a stop to 60 Hz, as shown below, with the initial parameter settings.
The following table shows the actual deceleration time when stopping the inverter by selecting S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration D from operation to 0 Hz, as shown below, with the initial parameter settings.
NOTE When acceleration/deceleration time (such as Pr.7 and Pr.8) is set to "0 s" under Real sensorless vector control, Vector
control, and PM sensorless vector control (with MM-CF and Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection ="9999 (initial value)"), linear acceleration and deceleration are performed for the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A to D and backlash measures (Pr.29 ="1 to 5").
Set linear acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 ="0 (initial setting)") when torque control is performed under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control. When acceleration/deceleration patterns other than the linear acceleration/deceleration are selected, the protective function of the inverter may be activated.
T2
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency (Pr. 20)
T1 Starting frequency (Pr. 13)
Pr. 517/2
Pr. 517
Pr. 516
Pr. 516/2 Linear acceleration Slope of Pr. 7, Pr. 44, Pr. 110
Set acceleration time T1= (set frequency - Pr.13) Pr.7 / Pr.20 = (60 Hz - 0.5 Hz) 5 s / 60 Hz
Actual acceleration time T2 = set acceleration time T1 + (Pr.516 + Pr.517) / 2 = 4.96 s + (0.1 s + 0.1 s) / 2 = 5.06 s (acceleration time at S-pattern acceleration)
4.96s (actual acceleration time at linear acceleration)
T2
Acceleration/ deceleration reference frequency (Pr. 20)
T1
DC injection brake operation frequency (Pr. 10)
Pr.518/2
Pr.518
Pr.519
Pr.519/2
Linear deceleration Pr. 8, Pr. 45, Pr. 111
Set deceleration time T1 = (set frequency - Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency) Pr.8 / Pr.20 = (60 Hz - 3 Hz) 5 s / 60 Hz
Actual deceleration time T2 = set deceleration time T1 + (Pr.518 + Pr.519) / 2 = 4.75 s + (0.1 s + 0.1 s) / 2 = 4.85 s (deceleration time at S-pattern deceleration)
4.75 s (actual deceleration time at linear deceleration)
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 = "6") This function is useful for variable-torque load such as a fan and blower to accelerate/decelerate in short time.
Linear acceleration/deceleration is performed in the area where the output frequency > base frequency.
NOTE When the base frequency is out of the range 45 to 65 Hz, the linear acceleration/deceleration is performed even if Pr.29 = "6". Even if Pr.14 Load pattern selection = "1 (variable torque load)", variable torque acceleration/deceleration setting is
prioritized and the inverter operates as Pr.14 = "0 (constant torque load)". For the variable torque acceleration/deceleration time setting, set the time period to reach Pr.3 Base frequency. (Not the time
period to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.) The variable torque acceleration/deceleration is disabled during PM sensorless vector control. (Linear acceleration/
deceleration is performed.)
Parameters referred to Pr.3 Base frequencypage 707 Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time, Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequencypage 367 Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequencypage 715 Pr.14 Load pattern selectionpage 708 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
5.8.3 Remote setting function Even if the operation panel is located away from the enclosure, contact signals can be used to perform continuous variable- speed operation, without using analog signals.
Remote setting function When Pr.59 "0" (remote setting enabled), the functions of the signals are as shown in the following table.
[Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration]
Pr.3 Base frequency
Set frequency
Pr.7 Acceleration time
TimePr.8 Deceleration time
Output frequency
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range
Description RH, RM, RL signal
function Frequency setting
storage Deceleration to the
main speed or lower
59 F101
Remote function selection 0
0 Multi-speed setting
Not available
1 Remote setting Enabled 2 Remote setting Disabled
3 Remote setting
Disabled (Turning OFF the STF/STR signal clears the remotely- set frequency.)
11 Remote setting Enabled
Available
12 Remote setting Disabled
13 Remote setting
Disabled (Turning OFF the STF/STR signal clears the remotely- set frequency.)
Signal name Function Description
STF/STR Forward/Reverse The inverter accelerates the motor in the forward or reverse direction up to the main speed or to the frequency stored by the remote setting function.
RH Acceleration The set frequency increases according to the Pr.44 setting. RM Deceleration The set frequency decreases according to the Pr.45 setting. RL Clear The set frequency is cleared and the main speed is applied.
Terminal 2 (analog signal) Main speed The setting of the main speed is used as a base. The main speed is increased by the RH signal and decreased by the RM signal.
3775. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
37
Main speed The main speed used in the remote setting corresponds with each of the following operation modes.
*1 Set Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selection to "1" when enabling compensation for input via terminal 1.
Acceleration/deceleration operation The output frequency changes as follows when the set frequency is changed by the remote setting function.
NOTE If the time setting of the output frequency is longer than the time setting of the set frequency, the motor accelerates/decelerates
according to the time setting of the output frequency.
Acceleration
Deceleration
Clear
Inverter
STF
RH
RM 10
2
5
RL
Connection diagram for remote setting
Forward rotation
SD
Time
Terminal 2 (main speed)
RM (Deceleration)
RL (Clear)
RH (Acceleration)
STF (Forward)
Cleared by RL
Decreased according to the Pr.45 setting
Increased according to the Pr.44 setting
ON
ON
ON
ON
Set frequency (Hz)
Operation mode Main speed PU operation mode / NET operation mode Digital setting External operation mode / PU/External combined operation mode 2 (Pr.79 = "4") Analog input*1
PU/External combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3") Analog input via terminal 4 (AU signal ON)*1
Frequency Time setting Description
Set frequency Pr.44/Pr.45 The set frequency increases/decreases by remote setting according to the Pr.44/Pr.45 setting.
Output frequency Pr.7/Pr.8 The output frequency increases/decreases by the set frequency according to the Pr.7/ Pr.8 setting.
Time
Time
Pr.44 Pr.45
ON
ON
Pr.7 Pr.8
Output frequency
Set frequency
Acceleration (RH)
Deceleration (RM)
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Deceleration to the main speed or lower By setting Pr.59 = "11 to 13", the speed can be decelerated to the frequency lower than the main speed (set by the External operation frequency (except multi-speed setting) or PU operation frequency).
Regardless of whether the remote setting is enabled or disabled, the acceleration/deceleration time set for the output frequency can be changed to the second or third acceleration/deceleration time by turning ON the RT or X9 signal.
The acceleration/deceleration time setting of the set frequency is fixed at the Pr.44/Pr.45 setting.
Frequency setting storage The remotely set frequency is stored, held, or cleared according to the Pr.59 setting. When the inverter is turned ON again
and the operation is resumed, the setting shown in the parentheses will be applied.
Storage conditions The remotely-set frequency is stored at the point when the start signal (STF or STR) turns OFF. The remotely-set frequency is stored every minute after turning OFF (ON) the RH and RM signals together. Every minute, the frequency is overwritten in the EEPROM if the latest frequency is different from the previous one when comparing the two. This cannot be written using the RL signal.
Pr.59 setting Power OFF STF/STR signal OFF 1, 11 Stored (stored frequency) Held (stored frequency) 2, 12 Cleared (main speed) Held (stored frequency) 3, 13 Clear (main speed) Cleared (main speed)
0 ON
ON ONDeceleration(RM)
Acceleration(RH) Forward rotation(STF)
Main speed
Minimum frequency
Time
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H z)
Pr.59 = 1, 2, 3 Decelerates to the main speed
Pr.59 = 11, 12, 13 Decelerates to the minimum frequency
3795. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
38
NOTE When switching the start signal from ON to OFF, or changing frequency by the RH or RM signal frequently, set the frequency
setting value storage function (write to EEPROM) invalid (Pr.59 = "2, 3, 12, 13"). If the frequency setting value storage function is valid (Pr.59 = "1, 11"), the frequency is written to EEPROM frequently, and this will shorten the life of the EEPROM.
The range of frequency changeable using the acceleration (RH) signal and the deceleration (RM) signal is 0 to the maximum frequency (set in Pr.1 or Pr.18). Note that the maximum value of set frequency is equal to the total of the main speed and the maximum frequency.
Even if the start signal (STF or STR) is OFF, turning ON the RH or RM signal varies the preset frequency. The RH, RM, or RL signal can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection). Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
The inverter can be used in the Network operation mode. The remote setting function is invalid during JOG operation and PID control operation. The multi-speed operation function is invalid when remote setting function is selected.
Even when the remotely-set frequency is cleared by turning ON the clear (RL) signal after turning OFF (ON) both the RH and RM signals, the inverter operates at the remotely-set frequency stored in the last operation if power is reapplied before one minute has elapsed since turning OFF (ON) both the RH and RM signals.
When the setting frequency is "0"
Deceleration(RM)
Acceleration(RH)
Forward rotation(STF)
0Hz ON
Time
(Hz)
Main speed setting
Pr.1
The set frequency is clamped at (main speed + Pr.1)
Output frequency is clamped at Pr.1
Set frequency Output frequency
ON
ON
Pr.59="1, 2, 3"
Pr.59="11, 12, 13"
Clear (RL)
Acceleration (RH)
ON
Power supply ON
ON
ON
ON ON
Within 1 minute
Remotely-set frequency stored last time
Time
Remotely-set frequency stored last time
Deceleration (RM) OFF
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H
z)
Forward rotation (STF)
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When the remotely-set frequency is cleared by turning ON the clear (RL) signal after turning OFF (ON) both the RH and RM signals, the inverter operates at the frequency in the remotely-set frequency cleared state if power is reapplied before one minute has elapsed since turning OFF (ON) both the RH and RM signals.
Parameters referred to Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum frequencypage 428 Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time, Pr.44 Second acceleration/deceleration time, Pr.45 Second deceleration timepage 367 Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selectionpage 411 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
5.8.4 Starting frequency and start-time hold function
It is possible to set the starting frequency and hold the set starting frequency for a certain period of time. Set these functions when a starting torque is needed or the motor drive at start needs smoothing.
Starting frequency setting (Pr.13) The frequency at start can be set in the range of 0 to 60 Hz. Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is turned ON.
NOTE The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal has a value lower than that of Pr.13.
For example, while Pr.13 = 5 Hz, the inverter output starts when the frequency setting signal reaches 5 Hz.
Start-time hold function (Pr.571) This function holds during the period set in Pr.571 and the output frequency set in Pr.13 Starting frequency.
CAUTION When using the remote setting function, set the maximum frequency again according to the machine.
Clear (RL)
Acceleration (RH)
Forward rotation (STF) ON
Power supply ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Time
Remotely-set frequency stored last time One minute
Deceleration (RM) OFF
O u tp
u t fr
e q u e n c y
(H z ) More than
one minute Operation is performed at the set
frequency 0Hz.
V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 13 F102 Starting frequency 0.5 Hz 0 to 60 Hz Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is turned
ON. 571 F103 Holding time at a start 9999
0 to 10 s Set the holding time of the frequency set in Pr.13. 9999 The holding function at start is disabled.
Output frequency (Hz)
Time
60
Pr.13
Se tti
ng ra
ng e
STF ON
0
3815. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
38
This function performs initial excitation to smooth the motor drive at a start.
NOTE When Pr.13 = 0 Hz, the starting frequency is held at 0.01 Hz. When the start signal was turned OFF during start-time hold, deceleration is started at that point. At switching between forward rotation and reverse rotation, the starting frequency is valid but the start-time hold function is
disabled.
Parameters referred to Pr.2 Minimum frequencypage 428
5.8.5 Minimum motor speed frequency and hold function at the motor start up
Set the frequency where the PM motor starts running. Set the deadband in the low-speed range to eliminate noise and offset deviation when setting a frequency with analog input.
Starting frequency setting (Pr.13) The frequency where the PM motor starts running can be set in the range of 0 to 60 Hz. When the frequency command specifies the frequency less than the one set in Pr.13 Starting frequency, the PM motor
is stopped. When the frequency command specifies the frequency equal to the set frequency or higher, the PM motor accelerates according to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time.
Output frequency (Hz)
Time
Pr.13
Pr. 571 setting time STF ON
0
60
Se tti
ng ra
ng e
CAUTION Note that when Pr.13 is set to a value equal to or lower than the setting of Pr.2 Minimum frequency, simply turning ON
the start signal runs the motor at the frequency set in Pr.2 even if the command frequency is not given.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 13 F102 Starting frequency Minimum frequency /
minimum rotations per minute 0 to 60 Hz Set the frequency where the motor starts running.
571 F103 Holding time at a start 9999
0 to 10 s Set the time to hold 0.01 Hz. 9999 The holding function at start is disabled.
PM
Output frequency (Hz)
Set frequency
Output frequency
Output from 0.01Hz Time
60
Pr.13
Se tti
ng ra
ng e
STF ON
0
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE Under induction motor control (under V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and
Vector control), the output starts at the frequency set in Pr.13. Under PM sensorless vector control, the output always starts at 0.01 Hz.
The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal has a value lower than that of Pr.13. For example, while Pr.13 = "20 Hz", the inverter output starts when the frequency setting signal reaches 20 Hz.
Start-time hold function (Pr.571) This function holds 0.01 Hz during the period set in Pr.571. Pr.571 is active when the low-speed range high-torque characteristic is enabled (Pr.788 = "9999").
Parameters referred to Pr.2 Minimum frequencypage 428 Pr.7 Acceleration timepage 367
CAUTION Note that when Pr.13 is set to a value equal to or lower than Pr.2 Minimum frequency, simply turning ON the start signal
runs the motor at the frequency set in Pr.2 even if the command frequency is not given.
Pr.571 setting time STF ON
0
60
Holds 0.01 Hz
Output frequency (Hz)
Time
Se tti
ng ra
ng e
3835. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
38
5.8.6 Shortest acceleration/deceleration and optimum acceleration/deceleration (automatic acceleration/ deceleration)
The inverter can be operated with the same conditions as when the appropriate value is set to each parameter even when acceleration/deceleration time and V/F pattern are not set. This function is useful for operating the inverter without setting detailed parameters.
*1 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower *2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
Shortest acceleration/deceleration (Pr.292 = "1, 11", Pr.293) Set this parameter to accelerate/decelerate the motor at the shortest time. This function is useful when the motor needs
to be accelerated/decelerated at a shorter time, such as for a machine, but the designed value of the machine constant is not known.
At acceleration/deceleration, this function adjusts the motor to accelerate/decelerate with the maximum inverter output torque using the Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time setting as reference. (Pr.7 and Pr.8 settings are not changed.)
Use Pr.293 Acceleration/deceleration separate selection to apply the shortest acceleration/deceleration to one of acceleration and deceleration only. When "0 (initial value)" is set, the shortest acceleration/deceleration is performed for both acceleration and deceleration.
Since the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower, FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower capacity inverters are equipped with built-in brake resistors, set Pr.292 to "11". Set "11" also when a high-duty brake resistor or brake unit is connected. The deceleration time can further be shortened.
V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
292 F500
Automatic acceleration/ deceleration 0
0 Normal operation 1 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (without brakes) 11 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (with brakes) 3 Optimum acceleration/deceleration 5, 6 Lift operation 1, 2 (Refer to page 387.) 7, 8 Brake sequence 1, 2 (Refer to page 572.)
61 F510 Reference current 9999
0 to 500 A*1 Set the reference current during shortest (optimum) acceleration/deceleration.0 to 3600 A*2
9999 Rated output current value reference of the inverter
62 F511
Reference value at acceleration 9999
0 to 400% Set the speed limit value (optimum value) during shortest (optimum) acceleration.
9999 Shortest acceleration/deceleration: 150% as the limit value, optimum acceleration/deceleration: 100% as the optimum value
63 F512
Reference value at deceleration 9999
0 to 400% Set the speed limit value (optimum value) during shortest (optimum) deceleration.
9999 Shortest acceleration/deceleration: 150% as the limit value, optimum acceleration/deceleration: 100% as the optimum value
293 F513
Acceleration/deceleration separate selection 0
0 Shortest (optimum) acceleration/deceleration for both acceleration and deceleration
1 Shortest (optimum) acceleration/deceleration for acceleration only
2 Shortest (optimum) acceleration/deceleration for deceleration only
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When the shortest acceleration/deceleration is selected under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control, the stall prevention operation level during acceleration/deceleration becomes 150% (adjustable using Pr.61 to Pr.63). The setting of Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level and stall level by analog input are used only during a constant speed operation. Under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control, the torque limit level (Pr.22, etc.) is applied during acceleration/ deceleration. The adjustments by Pr.61 to Pr.63 are disabled.
It is inappropriate to use for the following applications.
NOTE Even if automatic acceleration/deceleration has been selected, inputting the JOG signal (JOG operation), RT signal (Second
function selection) or X9 signal (Third function selection) during an inverter stop switches to the normal operation and give priority to JOG operation, second function selection or third function selection. Note that during operation, an input of JOG and RT signal does not have any influence even when the automatic acceleration/deceleration is enabled.
Since acceleration/deceleration is made with the stall prevention operation being activated, the acceleration/deceleration speed always varies according to the load conditions.
By setting Pr.7 and Pr.8 appropriately, it is possible to accelerate/decelerate with a shorter time than when selecting the shortest acceleration/deceleration.
Optimum acceleration/deceleration (Pr.292 = "3", Pr.293) The inverter operates at the most efficient level within the rated range that can be used continuously with reasonable
inverter capacity. Using self-learning, the average current during acceleration/deceleration is automatically set so as to become the rated current. This is ideal for applications operated with a predetermined pattern and minimal load fluctuations, such as by an automatically operated conveyor.
When the optimum acceleration/deceleration is selected, at first, the operation is performed with the values set in Pr.0 Torque boost, Pr.7 Acceleration time, and Pr.8 Deceleration time. After the first operation is completed, average and peak currents are calculated based on the motor current during acceleration/deceleration, and the obtained values are compared with the reference current (initially set to the rated inverter current) to adjust the Pr.0, Pr.7, and Pr.8 settings to their optimal values. The operation is the performed with the updated Pr.0, Pr.7, and Pr.8 values onwards, and those parameters settings are adjusted each time. Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control and Vector control, however, the Pr.0 setting is not changed.
When a Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop (E.OV3) occurs during deceleration, the setting of Pr.8 is multiplied by 1.4.
The optimum values of Pr.0, Pr.7 and Pr.8 are written to both the parameter RAM and EEPROM only three times of acceleration (deceleration) after the optimum acceleration/deceleration has been selected or after the power is switched ON or the inverter is reset. At or after the fourth attempt, they are not stored into EEPROM. Hence, after power-ON or inverter reset, the values changed at the third time are valid. However, the optimum values are calculated even for the fourth time and later, and Pr.0, Pr.7, and Pr.8 are set to the RAM; therefore, these can be stored to the EEPROM by reading and writing the settings with the operation panel (FR-DU08).
Either acceleration or deceleration can be made in the optimum acceleration/deceleration using Pr.293 Acceleration/ deceleration separate selection. When the setting value is "0" (initial value), both acceleration and deceleration are made in the optimum acceleration/deceleration.
It is inappropriate for machines which change in load and operation conditions. Optimum values are saved for the next operation. If the operating condition changes before the next operation, a fault such as overcurrent trip or a lack of acceleration/deceleration may occur.
- Machines with large inertia (10 times or more), such as a fan. Since stall prevention operation is activated for a long time, this type of machine may be shut off due to motor overloading, etc.
- When the inverter is always operated at a specified acceleration/deceleration time.
Number of optimum value changes
Pr.0, Pr.7, Pr.8 Operating condition
EEPROM value RAM value 1 to 3 times Updated Updated Updated 4 and more times Unchanged from the 3rd value Updated Updated
3855. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
38
NOTE Even if automatic acceleration/deceleration has been selected, inputting the JOG signal (JOG operation), RT signal (Second
function selection) or X9 signal (Third function selection) during an inverter stop will switch to the normal operation and give priority to JOG operation, second function selection or third function selection. Note that JOG and RT signal input is invalid even if JOG signal and RT signal are input during operation in the optimum acceleration/deceleration mode.
Because of the learning method, the impact of the optimum acceleration/deceleration is not apparent in the first operation after setting to the optimum acceleration/deceleration mode.
The optimum value are calculated for only acceleration from 0 to 30 Hz or higher or deceleration from 30 Hz or higher to 0 Hz. The optimum acceleration/deceleration will not operate if the motor was not connected or the output current is less than 5%
of the rated current of the inverter. A Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop (E.OV3) may occur during deceleration even if the optimum
acceleration/deceleration is selected with Pr.293 ="1 (optimum acceleration/deceleration during acceleration only)" setting. In such case, set Pr.8 setting longer.
Shortest and optimum acceleration/deceleration mode adjustment (Pr.61 to Pr.63)
The application range can be expanded by setting the parameters for adjustment of Pr.61 to Pr.63.
*1 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower *2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
NOTE When Real sensorless vector control or Vector control is selected with the shortest acceleration/deceleration, Pr.61 to Pr.63
are invalid. Even if Pr.61 to Pr.63 are set once, changing the setting to other than the shortest acceleration/deceleration (Pr.292 "1 or
11") automatically resets to the initial setting (9999). Set Pr.61 to Pr.63 after setting Pr.292.
Parameters referred to Pr.0 Torque boostpage 706 Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367 Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 431 Pr.22 Torque limit levelpage 245
Pr. Name Setting range Description
61 Reference current
0 to 500 A*1 Set the rated motor current value such as when the motor capacity and inverter capacity differ. Shortest acceleration/deceleration: Set the reference current (A) of the stall prevention operation level during acceleration/deceleration. Optimum acceleration/deceleration: Set the reference current (A) of the optimum current during acceleration/deceleration.
0 to 3600 A*2
9999 (initial value) The rated inverter current value is the reference.
62, 63
Reference value at acceleration, Reference value at deceleration
0 to 400%
Set this when changing the reference level of acceleration and deceleration. Shortest acceleration/deceleration: Set the stall prevention operation level (percentage of current value of Pr.61) during acceleration/deceleration. Optimum acceleration/deceleration: Set the optimum current level (percentage of current value of Pr.61) during acceleration/deceleration.
9999 (initial value)
Shortest acceleration/deceleration: Stall prevention operation level is 150% for the shortest acceleration/deceleration. Optimum acceleration/deceleration: 100% as the optimum value.
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.8.7 Lift operation (automatic acceleration/ deceleration)
The inverter can be operated according to the load pattern of the lift with counterweight.
*1 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower *2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
Lift operation (Pr.292 = "5, 6") When Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration is set to "5" or "6", the lift operation is selected, and each setting is
changed, as shown in the following table. During power driving, sufficient torque is generated, and during regenerative driving and during driving with no load, the
torque boost setting is adjusted automatically so as not to activate the overcurrent protective function by overexcitation.
If the lift has a load in which the rated current of the inverter is exceeded, the maximum torque may be insufficient.
For a lift without counterweight, setting Pr.14 Load pattern selection to "2 or 3" (for lift load) and setting Pr.19 Base frequency voltage appropriately give the maximum torque a greater advantage than when selecting the lift operation.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
292 F500
Automatic acceleration/ deceleration 0
0 Normal operation
1 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (without brakes)
(Refer to page 384.)11 Shortest acceleration/deceleration
(with brakes) 3 Optimum acceleration/deceleration 5 Lift operation 1 (stall prevention operation level 150%) 6 Lift operation 2 (stall prevention operation level 180%) 7, 8 Brake sequence 1, 2 (Refer to page 572.)
61 F510 Reference current 9999
0 to 500 A*1 Set the reference current during shortest (optimum) acceleration/deceleration.0 to 3600 A*2
9999 Rated output current value reference of the inverter 64 F520
Starting frequency for elevator mode 9999
0 to 10 Hz Set the starting frequency for the lift operation. 9999 The starting frequency is 2 Hz.
Name Normal operation Multi-rating (Pr.570)
Lift operation (Pr.292) 5 6
Torque boost Pr.0 (6/4/3/2/1%) Changes according to the output current (as shown below)
Starting frequency Pr.13 (0.5 Hz) Pr.64 (2 Hz) Accelerate after 100 ms hold.
Base frequency voltage Pr.19 (9999) 220 V class (440 V class)
Stall prevention operation level Pr.22 (150%), etc.
0 (SLD) 110% 115% 1 (LD) 120% 140% 2 (ND) initial value 150% 180%
3 (HD) 200% 230%
V/F
6%
Pr.292 = "5"
Driving current
(%)
When Pr.0 =6%
Torque boost (%)
Regenerative current 0
Pr.0
3%
100 115
Pr.292 = "6"
120 140
Torque boost 0%
3875. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
38
NOTE The stall prevention operation level is automatically lowered according to the cumulative value of the electronic thermal O/L
relay so as to prevent an inverter overload trip (E.THT) and the motor overload trip (E.THM) from occurring.
Lift operation adjustment (Pr.61, Pr.64) The application range can be expanded by setting the parameters for adjustment of Pr.61 and Pr.64.
*1 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower *2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
NOTE Even if the lift operation has been selected, inputting the JOG signal (JOG operation), RT signal (Second function selection)
or X9 signal (Third function selection) during an inverter stop will disable the automatic acceleration/deceleration and give priority to JOG operation, second function selection or third function selection. Note that during operation, an input of JOG and RT signal does not have any influence even when the automatic acceleration/deceleration is enabled.
Even if Pr.61 and Pr.64 are set, changing Pr.292 automatically resets to the initial setting (9999). Set Pr.61 and Pr.64 after setting Pr.292.
Parameters referred to Pr.0 Torque boostpage 706 Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381 Pr.14 Load pattern selectionpage 708 Pr.19 Base frequency voltagepage 707 Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 431 Pr.570 Multiple rating settingpage 343
Pr. Name Setting range Description
61 Reference current 0 to 500 A*1 Set the rated motor current value such as when the motor capacity and
inverter capacity differ. Set the reference current (A) of the stall prevention operation level.0 to 3600 A*2
9999 (initial value) The rated inverter output current value is the reference.
64 Starting frequency for elevator mode
0 to 10 Hz Set the starting frequency for the lift operation. 9999 (initial value) The starting frequency is 2 Hz.
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
5.9.1 Operation mode selection Select the operation mode of the inverter. The mode can be changed among operations using external signals (External operation), operation by the operation panel or the parameter unit (PU operation), combined operation of PU operation and External operation (External/PU combined operation), and Network operation (when RS-485 terminals or a communication option is used).
The following table lists valid and invalid commands in each operation mode.
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
To select the operation mode Operation mode selection P.D000 Pr.79 389 To start up the inverter in Network operation mode at power-ON
Communication startup mode selection P.D000, P.D001 Pr.79, Pr.340 398
To select the command source during communication operation
Operation and speed command sources during communication operation, command source selection
P.D010 to P.D013 Pr.338, Pr.339, Pr.550, Pr.551 400
To prevent the motor from rotating reversely
Reverse rotation prevention selection P.D020 Pr.78 406
To change the setting resolution of speed Set resolution switchover P.D030 Pr.811 444 To change the setting resolution of the torque limit Set resolution switchover P.D030 Pr.811 444
To set the frequency using pulse train input Pulse train input P.D100, P.D101, P.D110, P.D111
Pr.291, Pr.384 to Pr.386 406
To perform JOG (inching) operation JOG operation P.D200, P.F002 Pr.15, Pr.16 410
To control the frequency with combinations of terminals Multi-speed operation P.D300 to P.D315
Pr.28, Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239
411
To select the torque command method during torque control
Torque command source selection
P.D120, P.D121, P.D400 to P.D402
Pr.432, Pr.433, Pr.804 to Pr.806 283
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 79 D000 Operation mode selection 0 0 to 4, 6, 7 Selects the operation mode.
3895. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
39
*1 The following is the frequency commands listed in descending order of priority when "3" is set in Pr.79: Multi-speed setting function (RL/RM/RH/ REX signal) > PID control (X14 signal) > terminal 4 analog input (AU signal) > digital input from the operation panel.
Operation mode basics The operation mode specifies the source of the start command and the frequency command for the inverter.
Pr.79 setting Description
LED indicator Refer to
page: OFF : ON
0 (initial value)
External/PU switchover mode.
The inverter operation mode can be switched between PU and External by pressing .
At power ON, the inverter is in the External operation mode.
PU operation mode
External operation mode
NET operation mode
394
1
Operation mode Frequency command Start command PU operation
mode 394Fixed at PU operation
mode. Sent from the operation panel or parameter unit.
Sent by pressing or
on operation panel or parameter unit.
2
Fixed at External operation mode. However, the inverter operation mode can also be changed to the Network operation mode.
Sent using external signals (input via terminal 2 or 4, using the JOG signal, using the multi-speed setting function, etc.).
Sent using external signals (via terminal STF or STR).
External operation mode
NET operation mode
394
3 External/PU combined operation mode 1
Sent from the operation panel or parameter unit or sent using external signals (input using the multi-speed setting function or via terminal 4).*1
Sent using external signals (via terminal STF or STR). External/PU
combined operation mode
394
4 External/PU combined operation mode 2
Sent using external signals (input via terminal 2 or 4, using the JOG signal, using the multi-speed setting function, etc.).
Sent by pressing or
on operation panel or parameter unit.
395
6 Operation mode switchover during operation. Switching from among the PU, External, and NET operation modes can be performed during operation.
PU operation mode
External operation mode
NET operation mode
395
7
External operation mode (PU operation interlock). X12 signal ON: Switchover to PU operation mode enabled (signal is OFF during External operation). X12 signal OFF: Switchover to PU operation mode disabled.
395
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Basic operation modes are as follows.
The operation mode can be selected from the operation panel or with the communication instruction code.
NOTE There is a choice of two settings, "3" and "4", for the External/PU combined operation mode. The startup method differs
according to the setting value.
In the initial setting, the PU stop selection (function to stop the inverter operation by pressing on the operation panel
or the parameter unit) is enabled even in the operation mode other than the PU operation mode. (Refer to Pr.75 on page 336.)
External operation mode: For giving a start command and a frequency command with an external potentiometer or switches which are connected to the control circuit terminal.
PU operation mode : For giving a start command and a frequency command from the operation panel, parameter unit, or through RS-485 communication via the PU connector.
Network operation mode (NET operation mode)
: For giving a start command and a frequency command via the RS-485 terminals or communication option.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7
8
9 10
Network operation mode
Network operation mode
External operation mode
PU operation mode
Personal computer
Personal computer Operation panel
Programmable controller
Potentiometer Switch
RS-485 terminals
Inverter
Communication option
External terminal
Personal computer
USB connector
PU connector
PU operation mode
Programmable controller Personal computer
3915. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
39
Operation mode switching method
NOTE For details on switching by external terminals, refer to the following pages.
External operation
Network operation
Network operation
PU operation
PU operation
When "0, 1, or 2" is set in Pr. 340
When "10 or 12" is set in Pr. 340
Press on
the PU to light
Press on the PU to light
Switching through the network
Switch to External operation mode through the network. Switch to the Network operation
mode through the network.
Switching with the PU
Press on
the PU to light
Press on the PU to light
PU operation external interlock (X12 signal)page 395 PU/External operation switchover (X16 signal)page 396 PU/NET operation switchover (X65 signal), External/NET operation switchover (X66 signal)page 397 Pr.340 Communication startup mode selectionpage 398
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation mode selection flow Referring to the following table, select the basic parameter settings or terminal wiring related to the operation mode.
Method to give start command
Method to give frequency setting
command Input interface Parameter setting Operation method
Using external signals (via terminal STF/STR)
Using external signals (input via terminal 2/4, using the JOG signal, using the multi-speed setting function, etc.)
Terminal STF (forward rotation) / STR (reverse rotation). (Refer to page page 722.) Terminal 2 and 4 (analog), RL, RM, RH, JOG, etc.
Pr.79 = "2" (Fixed at External operation mode)
Frequency setting: Turn ON a terminal used for frequency setting.
Start command: Turn ON terminal STF/STR.
From PU (digital setting) Terminal STF (forward rotation) / STR (reverse rotation). (Refer to page 722.)
Pr.79 = "3" (External/PU combined operation mode 1)
Frequency setting: Use the DU (digital setting).
Start command: Turn ON terminal STF/STR.
Through communication (via RS-485 terminals)
Terminal STF (forward rotation) / STR (reverse rotation). (Refer to page 722.) RS-485 terminals (Refer to page 661.)
Pr.338 = "1" Pr.340 = "1 or 2"
Frequency setting: Transmit a frequency command through communication.
Start command: Turn ON terminal STF/STR.
Through communication (via communication option)
Terminals for communication option (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the communication option.)
Pr.338 = "1" Pr.340 = "1"
Frequency setting: Transmit a frequency command through communication.
Start command: Turn ON terminal STF/STR.
From PU (using FWD/REV key)
Using external signals (input via terminal 2/4, using the JOG signal, using the multi-speed setting function, etc.)
Terminals 2/4 (analog), RL, RM, RH, JOG, etc.
Pr.79 = "4" (External/PU combined operation mode 2)
Frequency setting: Turn ON a terminal used for frequency setting.
Start command: Press the FWD/REV key.
From PU (digital setting) Pr.79 = "1" (Fixed at PU operation mode)
Frequency setting: Use the PU (digital setting).
Start command: Press the FWD/REV key.
Through communication (via RS-485 terminals / communication option)
Not available.
Through communication (via RS-485 terminals)
Using external signals (input via terminal 2/4, using the JOG signal, using the multi-speed setting function, etc.)
RS-485 terminals (Refer to page 661.) Terminal 2 and 4 (analog), RL, RM, RH, JOG, etc.
Pr.339 = "1" Pr.340 = "1 or 2"
Frequency setting: Turn ON a terminal used for frequency setting.
Start command: Transmit a start command through communication.
From PU (digital setting) Not available.
Through communication (via RS-485 terminals)
RS-485 terminals (refer to page 661) Pr.340 = "1 or 2"
Frequency setting: Transmit a frequency command through communication.
Start command: Transmit a start command through communication.
Through communication (via communication option)
Using external signals (input via terminal 2/4, using the JOG signal, using the multi-speed setting function, etc.)
Terminals on communication option (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the communication option.) Terminal 2 and 4 (analog), RL, RM, RH, JOG, etc.
Pr.339 = "1" Pr.340 = "1"
Frequency setting: Turn ON a terminal used for frequency setting.
Start command: Transmit a start command through communication.
From PU (digital setting) Not available.
Through communication (via communication option)
Terminals on communication option (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the communication option.)
Pr.340 = "1"
Frequency setting: Transmit a frequency command through communication.
Start command: Transmit a start command through communication.
3935. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
39
External operation mode (Pr.79 = "0 (initial value) or 2") Select the External operation mode when the start command and the frequency command are applied from a frequency
setting potentiometer, start switch, etc. which are provided externally and connected to the control circuit terminals of the inverter.
Generally, parameter change cannot be performed in the External operation mode. (Some parameters can be changed. Refer to Pr.77 on page 345.)
When Pr.79 = "0 or 2", the inverter starts up in the External operation mode at power-ON. (When using the Network operation mode, refer to page 398.)
When parameter changing is seldom necessary, setting "2" fixes the operation mode to the External operation mode.
When frequent parameter changing is necessary, setting "0 (initial value)" allows the operation mode to be changed easily
to the PU operation mode by pressing on the operation panel. After switching to the PU operation mode, always
return to the External operation mode. The STF or STR signal is used as a start command. The input voltage or current via terminal 2 or 4, multi-speed setting
signal, or JOG signal is used as a frequency command.
PU operation mode (Pr.79 = "1") Select the PU operation mode when giving start and frequency commands by only the key operation of the operation panel
or the parameter unit. Also select the PU operation mode when giving commands through communication via the PU connector.
When Pr.79 ="1", the inverter starts up in the PU operation mode at power-ON. The mode cannot be changed to other operation modes.
The frequency can also be set by simply turning the setting dial on the operation panel like a volume knob. (Refer to Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection on page 341.)
When the PU operation mode is selected, the PU operation mode (PU) signal can be output.
For the terminal used for the PU signal, set "10 (positive logic)" or "110 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function.
PU/External combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3") Select the PU/External combined operation mode 1 when giving a frequency command from the operation panel or the
parameter unit and giving a start command with the external start switches. Set "3" in Pr.79. The mode cannot be changed to other operation modes. When the frequency commands are given using the multi-speed setting signals (external signals), they have a higher
priority than the frequency commands given from the PU. When the AU signal is ON, inputting the command signals via terminal 4 is enabled.
Inverter
Frequency setting potentiometer
5
10 2
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start
STF STR SDSwitch
Potentiometer
Operation panel (FR-DU08)
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PU/External combined operation mode 2 (Pr.79 = "4") Select the PU/External combined operation mode 2 when giving a frequency command from the external potentiometer,
or using the multi-speed setting signals or the JOG signal, and giving a start command by key operation of the operation panel or the parameter unit.
Set "4" in Pr.79. The mode cannot be changed to other operation modes.
Operation mode switchover during operation (Pr.79 = "6") During operation, the inverter operation mode can be switched from among the PU, External, and Network (Network
operation mode is selectable when RS-485 terminals or communication option is used).
PU operation interlock (Pr.79 = "7") The operation mode can be forcibly switched to the External operation mode by turning OFF the PU operation external
interlock (X12) signal. This function will be usable in a case where the inverter does not reply to external command signals during operation due to the operation mode accidentally unswitched from the PU operation mode to the External operation mode.
To input the X12 signal, set "12" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function. (For details on Pr.178 to Pr.189, refer to page 521.)
Set Pr.79 = "7" (PU operation interlock).
Inverter Operation panel
(FR-DU08)
SD
STF STR
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation startSwitch
Inverter Operation panel
(FR-DU08) Frequency setting potentiometer
5
10 2
Potentiometer
Operation mode switchover Operation/operating status
External operationPU operation
Use the operation panel or parameter unit to change to the PU operation mode. The direction of motor rotation does not change due to the operation mode change from the External
operation mode. The previous setting of frequency which has been set using a potentiometer (frequency command) is taken
over. (However, note that the setting disappears when the power is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset.)
External operationNET operation
Give the command through communication to change the operation mode to the Network operation mode. The direction of motor rotation does not change due to the operation mode change from the External
operation mode. The previous setting of frequency which has been set using a potentiometer (frequency command) is taken
over. (However, note that the setting disappears when the power is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset.)
PU operationExternal operation
Press the key on the operation panel or parameter unit to change the operation mode to the External operation mode. The direction of operation is determined by external input signals used in the External operation mode. The setting frequency is determined by the external frequency command signal.
PU operationNET operation
Give the command through communication to change the operation mode to the Network operation mode. The direction of motor rotation and the frequency setting does not change due to the operation mode change
from the PU operation mode.
NET operationExternal operation
Give the command through communication to change the operation mode to the External operation mode. The direction of operation is determined by external input signals used in the External operation mode. The setting frequency is determined by the external frequency command signal.
NET operationPU operation
Use the operation panel or parameter unit to change to the PU operation mode. The direction of motor rotation and the frequency setting does not change due to the operation mode change
from the Network operation mode.
3955. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
39
If the X12 signal is not assigned, the function of the MRS signal is switched to the PU operation interlock signal from MRS (output stop).
*1 Depends on the Pr.77 Parameter write selection setting and other parameter write conditions. (Refer to page 345.) Functions/operations by X12 (MRS) signal ON/OFF
*1 The mode is switched to the External operation mode regardless of the ON/OFF state of the start signal (STF/STR). Thus, the motor runs under the External operation mode when the X12 (MRS) signal turns OFF while the STF or STR signal is ON.
*2 When a fault occurs, the inverter can be reset by pressing on the operation panel.
NOTE The operation mode cannot be switched to the PU operation mode with the start signal (STF/STR) ON state even if the X12
(MRS) signal turns ON. If the MRS signal is ON and Pr.79 is written to a value other than "7" when the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal,
the MRS signal will act as a regular MRS function (output stop). Also, when Pr.79 = "7", the MRS signal becomes the PU interlock signal.
The logic of the signal follows the setting of Pr.17 MRS input selection also when the MRS signal is used as the PU operation interlock signal. When Pr.17 = "2", ON and OFF in the above explanation are reversed.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Switching operation mode by external signal (X16 signal) When External operation and the operation from the operation panel are used together, the PU operation mode and
External operation mode can be switched during a stop (during motor stop, start command OFF) by using the PU/External operation switchover (X16) signal.
When Pr.79 = "0, 6, or 7", switching between the PU operation mode and External operation mode is possible. (When Pr.79 ="6", switchover is enabled during operation.)
X12 (MRS) signal Function/Operation
Operation mode Parameter writing*1
ON Switching of the operation mode (External, PU, and NET) is enabled. The signal is OFF during External operation. Enabled.
OFF
Operation mode is forcefully changed to the External operation mode. External operation is enabled. Switching to the PU or NET operation mode from the External operation mode is disabled.
Disabled except for Pr.79.
Operating status X12 (MRS) signal Operation
mode Operating status Switching to PU or NET operation modeOperation
mode Status
PU/NET During stop ONOFF*1
External*2 If frequency and start commands are given from external source, the inverter runs by those commands.
Disabled During running ONOFF*1 Disabled
External During stop
OFFON
External*2 During stop
Enabled ONOFF Disabled
During running
OFFON RunningOutput stop Disabled ONOFF Output stopRunning Disabled
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
To input the X16 signal, set "16" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal.
NOTE The operation mode is determined by the setting of Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection and the ON/OFF state
of the X65 and X66 signals. (For the details, refer to page 397.) The priority of Pr.79 and Pr.340 and signals is Pr.79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr.340. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Switching the operation mode by external signals (X65, X66 signals) When Pr.79 = "0, 2 or 6", the PU operation mode and External operation modes can be changed to the Network operation
mode during a stop (during motor stop, start command OFF) by the PU/NET operation switchover (X65) signal, or the External/NET operation switchover (X66) signal. (When Pr.79 = "6", switchover is enabled during operation.)
To switch between the Network operation mode and the PU operation mode
1. Set Pr.79 = "0 (initial value) or 6".
2. Set Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection = "10 or 12".
3. Set "65" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 to assign the PU/NET operation switchover (X65) signal to a terminal.
4. When the X65 signal is ON, the PU operation mode is selected. When the X65 signal is OFF, the NET operation mode is selected.
*1 When the X66 signal is ON, the NET operation mode is selected. *2 When the X16 signal is OFF, the PU operation mode is selected. Also, when "0" is set for Pr.550 NET mode operation command source
selection and the communication option is not connected (communication option is the command source), the PU operation mode is selected. When the X16 signal is ON, the External operation mode is selected.
To switch between the Network operation mode and the External operation mode
1. Set Pr.79 = "0 (initial value), 2, 6, or 7". (When Pr.79 = "7" and the X12 (MRS) signal is ON, the operation mode can be switched.)
2. Set Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection = "0" (initial value), "1" or "2".
Pr.79 setting X16 signal status and operation mode
Remarks ON (External) OFF (PU)
0 (initial value) External operation mode PU operation mode Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation modes is
enabled. 1 PU operation mode Fixed at PU operation mode.
2 External operation mode Fixed at External operation mode (Switching to NET operation mode enabled).
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Fixed at External/PU combined operation mode.
6 External operation mode PU operation mode Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation mode is
enabled during operation.
7
X12 (MRS) ON
External operation mode PU operation mode Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation mode is
enabled (signal is OFF in the External operation mode). X12 (MRS) OFF External operation mode Fixed at External operation mode (forcibly switched to External
operation mode).
Pr.340 setting Pr.79 setting
X65 signal state Remarks
ON (PU) OFF (NET)
10, 12
0 (initial value) PU operation mode*1 NET operation mode*2 1 PU operation mode Fixed at PU operation mode. 2 NET operation mode Fixed at NET operation mode. 3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Fixed at External/PU combined operation mode.
6 PU operation mode*1 NET operation mode*2 The operation mode can be changed during operation.
7
X12 (MRS) ON
Switching between the External operation mode and PU operation mode is enabled.*2
The signal is OFF during operation in the External operation mode.
X12 (MRS) OFF External operation mode The operation mode is forcibly switched to the
External operation mode.
3975. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
39
3. Set "66" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 to assign the NET-External operation switching signal (X66) to a terminal.
4. When the X66 signal is ON, the NET operation mode is selected. When the X66 signal is OFF, the External operation mode is selected.
*1 When Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "0" (communication option control source) and no communication option is connected, the External operation mode is selected.
*2 When the X16 signal is OFF, the PU operation mode is selected. Also, when the X65 signal is assigned, the operation mode follows the ON/OFF state of the X65 signal.
NOTE The priority of Pr.79 and Pr.340 and signals is as follows: Pr.79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr.340. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.15 Jog frequencypage 410 Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 Multi-speed operationpage 411 Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selectionpage 336 Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selectionpage 341 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473 Pr.340 Communication startup mode selectionpage 398 Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selectionpage 400
5.9.2 Startup of the inverter in Network operation mode at power-ON
When power is switched ON or when power comes back ON after an instantaneous power failure, the inverter can be started up in the Network operation mode. After the inverter starts up in the Network operation mode, parameter writing and operation can be commanded from programs. Set this mode when performing communication operation using the RS-485 terminals or a communication option.
Pr.340 setting Pr.79 setting
X66 signal state Remarks
ON (NET) OFF (External)
0 (initial value), 1, 2
0 (initial value) NET operation mode*1 External operation mode*2
1 PU operation mode Fixed at PU operation mode.
2 NET operation mode*1 External operation mode Switching to PU operation mode is disabled.
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Fixed at External/PU combined operation mode.
6 NET operation mode*1 External operation mode*2
The operation mode can be changed during operation.
7
X12 (MRS) ON NET operation mode*1 External operation
mode*2 The signal is OFF during operation in the External operation mode.
X12 (MRS) OFF External operation mode The operation mode is forcibly switched to the
External operation mode.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 79 D000 Operation mode selection 0 0 to 4, 6, 7 Selects the operation mode.
(Refer to page 389.)
340 D001
Communication startup mode selection 0
0 The inverter starts up in an operation mode selected in Pr.79.
1, 2
The inverter starts up in the Network operation mode. If an instantaneous power failure occurs when "2" is set, the operating status before the instantaneous power failure is maintained.
10, 12
The inverter starts up in the Network operation mode. The operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and Network operation mode from the operation panel. If an instantaneous power failure occurs when "12" is set, running is continued at the condition before the instantaneous power failure.
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Selecting the operation mode for power-ON (Pr.340) Depending on the Pr.79 and Pr.340 settings, the operation mode at power-ON (reset) changes as described below.
*1 Use Pr.340 = "2 or 12" setting to perform communication with the RS-485 terminals. Even if an instantaneous power failure occurs while Pr.57 Restart coasting time "9999", the inverter continues running at the condition before the instantaneous failure. When Pr.340 = "1 or 10", if a power failure occurs while the start signal is being input through communication, the start signal is OFF at power restoration.
*2 The operation mode cannot be directly changed between the PU operation mode and Network operation mode.
*3 Switching between the PU and NET operation modes is available with the key on the operation panel and the X65 signal.
Parameters referred to Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628, page 635 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
Pr.340 setting
Pr.79 setting
Operation mode at power-ON, at power restoration, or after a reset Operation mode switching
0 (initial value)
0 (initial value) External operation mode
Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation modes is enabled*2
1 PU operation mode Fixed at PU operation mode.
2 External operation mode Switching between the External and NET operation modes is enabled. Switching to PU operation mode is disabled.
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Operation mode switching is disabled.
6 External operation mode Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation mode is enabled while running.
7
X12 (MRS) signal ON: External operation mode
Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation modes is enabled*2
X12 (MRS) signal OFF: External operation mode
Fixed at External operation mode (forcibly switched to External operation mode).
1, 2*1
0 NET operation mode
Same as Pr.340 = "0".
1 PU operation mode 2 NET operation mode 3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode 6 NET operation mode
7
X12 (MRS) signal ON: NET operation mode X12 (MRS) signal OFF: External operation mode
10, 12*1
0 NET operation mode Switching between the PU and NET operation mode is enabled.*3
1 PU operation mode Same as Pr.340 = "0". 2 NET operation mode Fixed at NET operation mode. 3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Same as Pr.340 = "0".
6 NET operation mode Switching between the PU and NET operation mode is enabled while running.*3
7 External operation mode Same as Pr.340 = "0".
3995. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
40
5.9.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication operation
The start and frequency commands given from an external device can be made valid when using the RS-485 terminals or the communication option. The command source in the PU operation mode can also be selected.
Selection of command source in the network (NET) operation mode (Pr.550)
Either of the RS-485 terminals or the communication option can be specified for the command source in the Network operation mode.
For example, whether or not the communication option is installed, set Pr.550 = "1" to write parameters or give the start and frequency commands via RS-485 terminals in the Network operation mode.
NOTE In the initial setting, "9999" (communication option automatic recognition) is set for Pr.550. Thus, if the communication option
is mounted, parameters cannot be written or the start and frequency commands cannot be sent by communications that use the RS-485 terminals. (Monitoring or parameter reading can be performed.)
Selection of the command source of the PU operation mode (Pr.551) Any of the PU connector, RS-485 terminals, or USB connector can be specified as the command source in the PU
operation mode. To write parameters or execute the start and frequency commands through communication in the PU operation mode, set
Pr.551 = "1" for communication via the RS-485 terminals, or set Pr.551 = "3" or "9999" for communication via the USB connector.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
338 D010
Communication operation command source
0 0 Start command source is communication.
1 Start command source is external.
339 D011
Communication speed command source 0
0 Frequency command source is communication. 1 Frequency command source is external.
2 Frequency command source is external. (When there is no external input, the frequency command given via communication is valid, and the frequency command given via terminal 2 is invalid.)
550 D012
NET mode operation command source selection
9999
0 The communication option is the command source when in the NET operation mode.
1 The RS-485 terminals are the command source when in the NET operation mode.
9999 The communication option is recognized automatically. Normally, the RS-485 terminals are the command source. When the communication option is mounted, the communication option is the command source.
551 D013
PU mode operation command source selection
9999
1 The RS-485 terminals are the command source when in the PU operation mode.
2 The PU connector is the command source when in the PU operation mode.
3 The USB connector is the command source when in the PU operation mode.
9999 USB automatic recognition. Normally, the PU connector is the command source. When the USB is connected, the USB connector is the command source.
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When Pr.550 = "1" (NET mode RS-485 terminals) and Pr.551 = "1" (PU mode RS-485 terminals), the PU operation mode has
a precedence. For this reason, if the communication option is not mounted, switching to the Network operation mode is no longer possible.
Changed setting values are enabled at power-ON or inverter reset.
*1 The MODBUS RTU protocol cannot be used in the PU operation mode. To use the MODBUS RTU protocol, set Pr.551 = "2". *2 If the communication option is not mounted, switching to the NET operation mode is not possible. *3 When Pr.551 = "9999", the priority of the PU command source is USB connector > PU connector.
Pr.550 setting
Pr.551 setting
Command source Remarks
PU connector USB connector RS-485 terminals Communication option
0
1 PU operation mode *1
NET operation mode*2
2 PU operation mode NET operation mode*2
3 PU operation mode NET operation mode*2
9999 (initial value)
PU operation mode *3
PU operation mode *3
NET operation mode*2
1
1 PU operation mode *1 Switching to NET operation mode
disabled
2 PU operation mode NET operation mode
3 PU operation mode NET operation mode
9999 (initial value)
PU operation mode *3
PU operation mode *3
NET operation mode
9999 (initial value)
1 PU operation mode *1
NET operation mode*2
2 PU operation mode
NET operation mode*2 With communication option
NET operation mode Without communication option
3 PU operation mode
NET operation mode*2 With communication option
NET operation mode Without communication option
9999 (initial value)
PU operation mode *3
PU operation mode *3
NET operation mode*2 With communication option
NET operation mode Without communication option
4015. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
40
Controllability through communication
Command interface
Conditions (Pr.551 setting)
Item
Controllability in each operation mode
PU operation
External operation
Combined operation mode 1
(Pr.79 = "3")
Combined operation mode 2
(Pr.79 = "4")
NET operation (via RS-485 terminals)*7
NET operation (via option)*8
PU connector*1
2 (PU connector), 9999 (automatic recognition, without USB connection)
Operation (start) command
Operation (stop) command *4 *4 *4
Frequency setting Monitor Parameter write *5 *6 *5 *5 *6
Parameter read Inverter reset
Terminals other than the above
Operation (start) command
Operation (stop) command *4 *4 *4 *4 *4
Frequency setting Monitor Parameter write *6 *6 *6 *6 *6
Parameter read Inverter reset
RS-485 terminals
1 (RS-485 terminals)
Operation command (start, stop)
Frequency setting Monitor Parameter write *5 *6 *5 *5 *6
Parameter read Inverter reset
Terminals other than the above
Operation command (start, stop) *2
Frequency setting *2 Monitor Parameter write *6 *6 *6 *6 *5 *6
Parameter read Inverter reset *3
USB connector
3 (USB connector), 9999 (automatic recognition, with USB connection)
Operation command (start, stop)
Frequency setting Monitor Parameter write *5 *6 *6 *6 *6
Parameter read Inverter reset
Terminals other than the above
Operation command (start, stop)
Frequency setting Monitor Parameter write *6 *6 *6 *6 *6
Parameter read Inverter reset
Option
Operation command (start, stop) *2
Frequency setting *2
monitor Parameter write *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *5
Parameter read Inverter reset *3
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
: Valid, : Invalid, : Partially valid
*1 RS-485 communication via PU connector *2 Follows the Pr.338 Communication operation command source and Pr.339 Communication speed command source settings. (Refer to
page 400.) *3 At occurrence of RS-485 communication error, the inverter cannot be reset from the computer. *4 Only PU stop is enabled. "PS" is displayed on the operation panel during PU stop. The operation follows the Pr.75 Reset selection/
disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection setting. (Refer to page 336.) *5 Writing of some parameters may be disabled by the Pr.77 Parameter write selection setting and the operating condition. (Refer to page 345.) *6 Some parameters are write-enabled independently of the operation mode and command source presence/absence. Writing is also enabled when
Pr.77 = "2" (refer to page 345). Parameter clear is disabled.
*7 When Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "1" (RS-485 terminals enabled), or Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "9999" with no communication option connected.
*8 When Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "0" (communication option enabled), or Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "9999" with communication option connected.
Operation when a communication error occurs
*1 Selectable with Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. *2 Selectable with Pr.122 PU communication check time interval, Pr.336 RS-485 communication check time interval, and Pr.548 USB
communication check time interval. *3 The operation depends on the communication option setting. *4 In the PU JOG operation mode, operation always stops when the PU is disconnected. The operation at a PU disconnection fault (E.PUE)
occurrence is as set in Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. *5 When Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "1" (RS-485 terminals enabled), or Pr.550 NET mode operation command
source selection = "9999" with no communication option connected. *6 When Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "0" (communication option enabled), or Pr.550 NET mode operation
command source selection = "9999" with communication option connected.
External control circuit terminal
Inverter reset Operation command (start, stop) *2
Frequency setting *2
Command interface
Conditions (Pr.551 setting)
Item
Controllability in each operation mode
PU operation
External operation
Combined operation mode 1
(Pr.79 = "3")
Combined operation mode 2
(Pr.79 = "4")
NET operation (via RS-485 terminals)*7
NET operation (via option)*8
Fault type Conditions (Pr.551 setting)
Operation in each operation mode at error occurrences
PU operation External operation
Combined operation mode 1
(Pr.79 = "3")
Combined operation mode 2
(Pr.79 = "4")
NET operation (via RS-485 terminals)*5
NET operation (via
option)*6
Inverter fault Stop
PU connector disconnection
2 (PU connector), 9999 (automatic recognition)
Stop/continued*1*4
Other than 2 Stop/continued*1
Communication error at PU connector
2 (PU connector) Stop/ continued*2 Continued
Stop/ continued*2 Continued
Other than 2 Continued
Communication error at RS-485 terminals
1 (RS-485 terminals) Stop/ continued*2 Continued
Stop/ continued*2 Continued
Other than 1 Continued Stop/ continued*2 Continued
Communication error at USB connector
3 (USB connector), 9999 (automatic recognition)
Stop/ continued*2 Continued
Other than 3 Continued Communication error at communication option
Continued Stop/ continued*3
4035. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
40
Selecting the command interface in the Network operation mode (Pr.338, Pr.339)
Selecting a command interface is required for the following two types of commands: the operation command using the start signals and the signals related to the inverter function selection, and the speed command using signals related to the frequency setting.
The following table shows the command interface for each function in the Network operation mode, determined by the parameter settings: an external terminal or a communication interface (RS-485 terminals or communication option).
Pr.338 Communication operation command source 0: NET 1: EXT Remarks
Pr.339 Communication speed command source 0: NET
1: EXT
2: EXT
0: NET
1: EXT
2: EXT
Frequency setting through communication NET NET NET NET Terminal 2 EXT EXT Terminal 4 EXT EXT Terminal 1 Compensation
RL*1 Low-speed operation command/Remote setting (setting clear)/Stop-on-contact selection 0 NET EXT NET EXT
Pr.59 = "0" (multi-speed), Pr.59 "0" (remote), Pr.270 ="1, 3, 11, or 13" (stop-on- contact)
RM*1 Middle-speed operation command/Remote setting (deceleration) NET EXT NET EXT
RH*1 High-speed operation command/ Remote setting (acceleration) NET EXT NET EXT
RT*1 Second function selection/ Stop-on-contact selection 1 NET EXT Pr.270 ="1, 3, 11, or 13" (stop-
on-contact)
AU*1 Terminal 4 input selection Combined Combined
JOG*1 Jog operation selection EXT
CS*1 Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start EXT or NET EXT
EXT or NET is selected according to the setting in Pr.162.*2
OH*1 External thermal relay input EXT
REX*1 15-speed selection NET EXT NET EXT Pr.59 ="0" (multi-speed)
X9*1 Third function selection NET EXT
X10*1 Inverter run enable EXT
X11*1 FR-HC2/FR-CC2 connection, instantaneous power failure detection EXT
X12*1 PU operation external interlock EXT
X13*1 External DC injection brake operation start NET EXT
X14*1 PID control valid NET EXT NET EXT
BRI*1 Brake opening completion NET EXT
X16*1 PU/External operation switchover EXT
X17*1 Load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost NET EXT
X18*1 V/F switchover NET EXT
X19*1 Load torque high-speed frequency NET EXT
X20*1 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover NET EXT
X22*1 Orientation command NET EXT
LX*1 Pre-excitation/servo ON NET EXT
MRS*1
Output stop Combined EXT Pr.79 "7"
PU operation interlock EXT Pr.79 = "7". When X12 signal is not assigned.
STP (STOP)*1
Start self-holding selection EXT
MC*1 Control mode switchover NET EXT
TL*1 Torque limit selection NET EXT
X28*1 Start-time tuning start external input NET EXT
X32*1 External fault input EXT
X37*1 Traverse function selection NET EXT
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 Use Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to an input terminal. (Refer to page 521.) *2 When Pr.77 = "2", Pr.162 setting can be changed during operation. The new setting is applied after stop. Until the inverter has stopped, the
previous setting of the interface for the operation command and the speed command in the Network operation mode is valid.
X42*1 Torque bias selection 1 NET EXT
X43*1 Torque bias selection 2 NET EXT
X44*1 P/PI control switchover NET EXT
BRI2*1 Second brake sequence open completion NET EXT
TRG*1 Trace trigger input Combined EXT
TRC*1 Trace sampling start/end Combined EXT
X48*1 Power failure stop external EXT
SQ*1 Sequence start EXT or NET* EXT Pr.414 = "1": Valid when there is EXT or NET input. Pr.414 = "2": EXT
X51*1 Fault clear Combined EXT
X52*1 Cumulative pulse monitor clear NET EXT
X53*1 Cumulative pulse monitor clear (control terminal option) NET EXT
JOGF*1 JOG forward rotation command EXT
JOGR*1 JOG reverse rotation command EXT
CLRN*1 NET position pulse clear NET
STF*1 Forward rotation command NET EXT
STR*1 Reverse rotation command NET EXT
RES*1 Inverter reset EXT
X64*1 PID forward/reverse action switchover NET EXT NET EXT
X65*1 PU/NET operation switchover EXT
X66*1 External/NET operation switchover EXT
X67*1 Command source switchover EXT
NP*1 Simple position pulse train sign EXT
CLR*1 Simple position droop pulse clear EXT
X70*1 DC feeding operation permission signal NET EXT
X71*1 DC feeding cancel signal NET EXT
X72*1 PID P control switchover NET EXT NET EXT
X73*1 Second PID P control switchover NET EXT NET External
X74*1 Magnetic flux decay output shutoff NET EXT
X76*1 Proximity dog EXT
X77*1 Pre-charge end command NET EXT NET EXT
X78*1 Second pre-charge end command NET EXT NET EXT
X79*1 Second PID forward/reverse action switchover NET EXT NET EXT
X80*1 Second PID control valid NET EXT NET EXT
X85*1 SSCNET III communication disabled EXT
X87*1 Sudden stop Combined EXT
LSP*1 Forward stroke end EXT
LSN*1 Reverse stroke end EXT
X92*1 Emergency stop EXT
X93*1 Torque control selection NET EXT
X94*1 Control signal input for main circuit power supply MC EXT
X95*1 Converter unit fault input EXT
X96*1 Converter unit fault (E.OHT, E.CPU) input EXT
RLF*1 Low-speed forward rotation command EXT
RLR*1 Low-speed reverse rotation command EXT
Pr.338 Communication operation command source 0: NET 1: EXT Remarks
Pr.339 Communication speed command source 0: NET
1: EXT
2: EXT
0: NET
1: EXT
2: EXT
4055. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
40
NOTE The communication interface selection is determined by the setting of Pr.550 and Pr.551. The setting of Pr.338 and Pr.339 can be changed during operation when Pr.77 = "2". Note that the changed setting is applied
after the inverter has stopped. Until the inverter has stopped, the previous setting of the interface for the operation command and the speed command in the Network operation mode is valid.
Changing the command interface using a signal input via external terminal (X67 signal)
In the Network operation mode, the command interface for the operation command and the speed command can be changed using the Command source switchover (X67) signal. This method may be useful to use both external terminal and communication interface by using a different interface according to the command type.
For the X67 signal, set "67" to any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a control terminal.
When the X67 signal is OFF, the command interface for the operation command and the speed command is the control terminal.
NOTE The ON/OFF state of the X67 signal is applied only during a stop. When the terminals are switched during operation, the ON/
OFF state is reflected after a stop. When the X67 is OFF, a reset via communication is disabled. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selectionpage 411 Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 367 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
5.9.4 Reverse rotation prevention selection This function can prevent reverse rotation fault resulting from the incorrect input of the start signal.
Set this parameter to limit the motor rotation to only one direction. This parameter is valid for all of the reverse rotation and forward rotation keys of the operation panel and of the parameter
unit, the start signals (STF, STR signals) via external terminals, and the forward and reverse rotation commands through communication.
5.9.5 Frequency setting using pulse train input A pulse train input via terminal JOG can be used to set the inverter's speed command.
[Explanation of Terms in Table] EXT: External terminal only NET: Communication interface only Combined: Either external terminal or communication interface : Neither external terminal nor communication interface Compensation: Only commands given via the external terminal are valid when Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selection = "1".
X67 signal state Interface for the operation command Interface for the speed command
Signal not assigned Determined by Pr.338 setting Determined by Pr.339 setting
ON OFF Control terminal only
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
78 D020
Reverse rotation prevention selection 0
0 Both forward and reverse rotations allowed 1 Reverse rotation disabled 2 Forward rotation disabled
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Moreover, speed synchronized operation of an inverter can be performed by using the pulse train input and output together.
*1 Function assigned to Pr.185 JOG terminal function selection. *2 Valid only for the FM type inverters.
Selection of pulse train input (Pr.291) Setting Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "1, 11, 21, or 100" and Pr.384 Input pulse division scaling factor "0" allows
the function of terminal JOG to change into a pulse train input for setting of the inverter frequency. In the initial setting, the JOG signal is assigned to terminal JOG. A maximum pulse train of 100k pulses/s can be input.
Connection with an open collector output system pulse generator
*1 When the wiring length is long with open collector outputs, the influence of stray capacitance causes the pulse to flatten out and prevents the input pulse from being recognized. When the wiring length is long (10 m or longer of shielded twisted pair cable with a recommended cable gauge of 0.75 mm2), connect the open collector output signal to the power supply by an external pull-up resistor. The following table shows the reference resistance values for wiring length. The stray capacitance of the wiring changes considerably according to how the cable is laid, thus the above wiring lengths are not guaranteed values. When using a pull-up/down resistor, check the permissible power of the resistor and the permissible load current of the output transistor, and use within the permissible range.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
FM CA Pulse train input (terminal JOG)
Pulse train output (terminal FM)
291 D100 Pulse train I/O selection 0
0 JOG signal*1 FM output*2
1 Pulse train input FM output*2
10*2 JOG signal*1 High-speed pulse train output (50% duty)
11*2 Pulse train input High-speed pulse train output (50% duty)
20*2 JOG signal*1 High-speed pulse train output (ON width fixed)
21*2 Pulse train input High-speed pulse train output (ON width fixed)
100*2 Pulse train input
High-speed pulse train output (ON width fixed). Output the pulse train input without changes.
384 D101
Input pulse division scaling factor 0
0 Pulse train input disabled
1 to 250 Division ratio on the input pulse. The frequency resolution on the input pulse changes according to this setting.
385 D110
Frequency for zero input pulse 0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency applicable to the time when the input pulse is
zero (bias). 386 D111
Frequency for maximum input pulse 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency applicable to the time when the input pulse is
maximum (gain).
Wiring length Less than 10 m 10 to 50 m 50 to 100 m Pull-up/down resistor Not required 1 k 470 Load current (reference) 10 mA 35 mA 65 mA
JOG
PC
SD
Sink logic Inverter
Pull up resistor 1
2 k
JOG
PC
SD
Source logic Inverter
Pull down resistor 1
2 k
4075. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
40
Connection with a complementary output system pulse generator
NOTE When pulse train input is selected, the function assigned to terminal JOG by Pr.185 JOG terminal function selection is
invalid. When "2" (simple position pulse train command given by pulse train input) is set to Pr.419 Position command source
selection, the JOG terminal becomes the simple position pulse train terminal regarding of the Pr.291 setting. Pr.291 is the selection parameter for pulse train output/FM output. Thus, before changing the setting, check the specifications
of the device connected to the terminal FM. (For the pulse train output, refer to page 461.)
Pulse train input specification
*1 The wiring length of complementary output is dependent on the output wiring specification of the complementary output unit. The stray capacitance of the wiring changes considerably according to how the cable is laid, so the maximum wiring length is not a guaranteed value.
Adjustment of pulse train and frequency (Pr.385, Pr.386) The frequency during zero input pulse and maximum input pulse can be set with Pr.385 Frequency for zero input pulse
and Pr.386 Frequency for maximum input pulse, respectively.
*1 Limit value = (Pr.386 - Pr.385) 1.1 + Pr.385
How to calculate the input pulse division scaling factor (Pr.384) The maximum number of input pulses can be calculated by the following formula with Pr.384 Input pulse division scaling factor: Maximum number of pulses (pulse/s) = Pr.384 400 (maximum 100k pulses/s) (number of detectable pulses = 11.45 pulses/s) For example, to run the invert at 0 Hz when pulse train input is zero and at 30 Hz when pulse train is 4000 pulses/sec, set the inverter as follows: Pr.384 = "10" (maximum number of input pulses 4000 pulses/s)
JOG
PC
SD
Sink logic Inverter
2 k 24 V power
Source logic
24 V power JOG
PC
SD
Inverter
2 k
Item Specification
Supported pulse method Open collector output / complementary output (24 V power supply voltage)
HIGH input level 20 V or more (voltage between JOG and SD) LOW input level 5 V or less (voltage between JOG and SD) Maximum input pulse rate 100k pulses/s Minimum input pulse width 2.5 s Input resistance/load current 2 k (typ) / 10 mA (typ)
Maximum wiring length (reference value)
Open collector output method 10 m (0.75 mm2/twisted pair) Complementary output method 100 m (output resistance 50 )*1
Detection resolution 1/3750
60Hz(50Hz) Pr. 386
0Hz Maximum input pulse
Limit value
Input pulse (pulse/s)
(Hz)
O ut
pu t
fre qu
en cy
0Pr. 385
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Pr.385 = 0 Hz, Pr.386 = 30 Hz (pulse train limit value 33 Hz)
NOTE The priority of the frequency command given by the external signals is as follows: JOG operation > multi-speed operation >
terminal 4 analog input > pulse train input. When pulse train input is enabled (Pr.291 = "1, 11, 21, or 100" and Pr.384 "0"), terminal 2 analog input becomes disabled.
Speed synchronized operation by pulse input/output
*1 When the wiring length between FM and JOG is long, the influence of stray capacitance causes the pulse to flatten out and prevents the input pulse from being recognized. When the wiring length is long (10 m or longer of shielded twisted pair cable with a recommended cable size of 0.75
mm2), connect between terminal JOG and terminal PC with an external pull-up resistor. The following table shows the reference resistance values for wiring length.
The stray capacitance of the wiring changes considerably according to how the cable is laid, thus the above wiring lengths are not guaranteed values. When using a pull-up/down resistor, check the permissible power of the resistor and the permissible load current (terminal PC: 100 mA, high- speed pulse train output: 85 mA), and use within the permissible range.
Setting "100" in Pr.291 allows the use of the entire pulse train input for the pulse train output (via terminal FM) just as they are. Connecting in a daisy chain enables speed synchronized operation of multiple inverters.
Set Pr.384 to "125" for inverters that receive pulse train since the maximum pulse train output is 50k pulses/s. The maximum number of input pulses should be 50k pulses/s. When performing synchronized operation, wire according to the following procedure. (This is to prevent contact input of 24
V being applied to terminal FM.)
1. Set pulse train output (setting other than "0 or 1") to Pr.291 on the master side inverter.
2. Inverter power OFF
3. Wire the slave side terminal JOG-SD to the master side terminal FM-SD.
4. Turn the inverter power supply ON.
NOTE After changing the Pr.291 setting, connect the JOG terminal to the terminal FM-SD. When FM output (voltage output) is taken
as the pulse train, take caution to prevent voltage from being applied to the terminal FM. Use sink logic (factory setting) for the slave side inverter. The inverter does not operate properly with source logic.
Speed synchronized operation specification
*1 A pulse propagation delay of about 1 to 2 s in the slave occurs and further increases when the wiring length is long.
Parameters referred to Pr.291 (Pulse train output)page 457 Pr.419 Position command source selectionpage 319
Pulse train input
Inverter (master) To next inverter (slave)
To next inverter (slave) FM
SD
FM
SD
JOG
PC
JOG
SD
Speed command
Pulse train output
Pull up resistor*1
Pulse train output
Speed command
Wiring length Less than 10 m 10 to 50 m 50 to 100 m Pull-up resistor Not required 1 k 470 Load current (reference) 10 mA 35 mA 65 mA
Item Specification Output pulse format Pulse width fixed (10 s) Pulse rate 0 to 50k pulses/s Pulse propagation delay 1 to 2 s per unit*1
4095. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
41
5.9.6 JOG operation The frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for JOG operation can be set. JOG operation is possible in both External operation and PU. JOG operation can be used for conveyor positioning, test operation, etc.
Note that these parameters are categorized as a simple mode parameter when the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) is used. Setting of this parameter is enabled when the operation panel (FR-DU08) is connected and "0" is set to Pr.160 User group read selection. (Refer to page 354.)
*1 The Pr.20 initial value is set to 60 Hz for the FM type and to 50 Hz for the CA type.
JOG operation using the external signals Operation can be started and stopped by the start signals (STF and STR signals) when the Jog operation selection (JOG)
signal is ON. (For the operation method, refer to page 162.) While the JOGF or JOGR signal is input, Jog frequency setting (Pr.15) is used for operation. The rotation is forward while
the JOGF signal is input, and the rotation is reverse while the JOGR signal is input. (Direct JOG function) Use the JOG acceleration/deceleration time function (Pr.16) to set the acceleration/deceleration time for JOG operation. To use each signal, set the corresponding number selected from the following table in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input
terminal function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.
JOG operation using the PU When the operation panel or parameter unit is in the JOG operation mode, the motor jogs only while the start button is
pressed. (For the operation method, refer to page 163.)
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
15 D200 Jog frequency 5 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency for JOG operation.
16 F002
Jog acceleration/ deceleration time 0.5 s 0 to 3600 s
Set the motor acceleration/deceleration time during JOG operation. For the acceleration/deceleration time, set the time until the frequency*1 set in Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency is reached. The acceleration/deceleration times cannot be set separately.
Input signal Pr.178 to Pr.189 settings JOG 5 (Pr.185 initial value) JOGF 57 JOGR 58
Output frequency(Hz) Pr.20
Pr.15 setting range
Pr.16
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Time
ON
ON
ON
JOG signal
Forward rotation STF
Reverse rotation STR
ON
ON
JOGF signal
JOGR signal
Time
Output frequency(Hz) Pr.20
Pr.15 setting range
Pr.16
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE The reference frequency during acceleration/deceleration depends on the Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern
selection setting. (Refer to page 372.) The Pr.15 setting should be equal to or higher than the Pr.13 Starting frequency setting. The JOG signal can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. During JOG operation, the second acceleration/deceleration function using the RT signal is disabled. (Other second functions
are enabled (refer to page 525).) When the JOGR or STR signal is input while the JOGF signal is input, the motor is decelerated to stop. When the JOGF or STF signal is input while the JOGR signal is input, the motor is decelerated to stop. The three-wire type connection is not available for the JOGF and JOGR signals.
When Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "4", JOG operation is started by one push of / on the operation panel
and stopped by .
This function is invalid when Pr.79 = "3". Under the position control, when the position command speed creation is completed and the droop pulse is within in-position
width, the external JOG operation can be operated. (The JOG operation cannot be performed from PU.) To perform the JOG operation using the external signals, select the setting of "JOG signal" for the input via terminal JOG in
Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection. (Refer to page 406.)
Parameters referred to Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381 Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time incrementspage 367 Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selectionpage 372 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
5.9.7 Operation by multi-speed setting Use these parameters to change among pre-set operation speeds with the terminals. The speeds are pre-set with parameters.
4115. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
41
Any speed can be selected by simply turning ON/OFF the contact signals (RH, RM, RL, and REX signals).
Multi-speed setting (Pr.4 to Pr.6) The inverter operates at frequencies set in Pr.4 when the RH signal is ON, Pr.5 when the RM signal is ON, or Pr.6 when
the RL signal is ON.
NOTE In the initial setting, if two or more speed switches (signals) are simultaneously turned ON, priority is given to the switch (signal)
for the lower speed. For example, when both RH and RM signals turn ON, the RM signal (Pr.5) has the higher priority. The RH, RM and RL signals are assigned to the terminals RH, RM and RL, respectively, in the initial status. To assign each
signal to a different terminal, set "0" (RL signal), "1" (RM signal), or "2" (RH signal) in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Multi-speed setting for 4th speed or more (Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239) The frequency from 4th speed to 15th speed can be set according to the combination of the RH, RM, RL, and REX signals.
Set the running frequencies in Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239. (In the initial status, 4th to 15th speeds are invalid.)
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description FM CA
28 D300
Multi-speed input compensation selection 0
0 Without compensation 1 With compensation
4 D301 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Sets the frequency when RH is ON.
5 D302
Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Sets the frequency when RM is ON.
6 D303 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 10 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Sets the frequency when RL is ON.
24 D304 Multi-speed setting (speed 4)
9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
Frequency from 4th speed to 15th speed can be set according to the combination of the RH, RM, RL and REX signals. 9999: Not selected
25 D305 Multi-speed setting (speed 5)
26 D306 Multi-speed setting (speed 6)
27 D307 Multi-speed setting (speed 7)
232 D308 Multi-speed setting (speed 8)
233 D309 Multi-speed setting (speed 9)
234 D310 Multi-speed setting (speed 10)
235 D311 Multi-speed setting (speed 11)
236 D312 Multi-speed setting (speed 12)
237 D313 Multi-speed setting (speed 13)
238 D314 Multi-speed setting (speed 14)
239 D315 Multi-speed setting (speed 15)
Forward rotation start
RM
STF STR RH
SD RL
Inverter
Switch
Reverse rotation start High speed
Middle speed Low speed
ON
ON
ON
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H z) Speed 1
(High speed)
Speed 2 (Middle speed)
Speed 3 (Low speed)
Time
RH
RM
RL
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
For the terminal used for REX signal input, set "8" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
*1 When the RH, RM and RL signals are OFF and the REX signal is ON while "9999" is set to Pr.232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8), the inverter operates at the frequency set in Pr.6.
Direct multi-speed setting While the RLF or RLR signal is input, the operation is according to Pr.6 Multi-speed setting (low-speed). The rotation is
forward while the RLF signal is input, and the rotation is reverse while the RLR signal is input.
NOTE The Pr.6 setting should be equal to or higher than the Pr.13 Starting frequency setting. To assign the RLF and RLR signals to input terminals, set "128 (RLF)" and "129 (RLR)" in any two parameters from Pr.178 to
Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection). The direct multi-speed operation is enabled when the inverter operates in External operation mode or External/PU combined
operation mode 1. When the RLR or STR signal is input while the RLF signal is input, the motor is decelerated to stop. When the RLF or STF signal is input while the RLR signal is input, the motor is decelerated to stop. When Pr.59 Remote function selection "0", the RLF signal is used as the STF signal, and the RLR signal is used as the
STR signal. When the stop-on-contact function is enabled, the RLF signal is used as the STF signal, and the RLR signal is used as the
STR signal.
Input compensation of multi-speed setting (Pr.28) Speed (frequency) can be compensated for the multi-speed setting and the remote setting by inputting the frequency
setting compensation signal (terminals 1, 2).
Forward rotation
Multi-speed selection
Inverter STF
REX
RH
RM
RL
SD
Time
Speed 8
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H
z)
1
Speed 9
Speed 10 Speed 11
Speed 12 Speed 13
Speed 14 Speed 15
Speed 4
Speed 5
Speed 6
Speed 7
ONON ON ON ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ONRH
RM
RL
REX
ON ON ON
ON ON
ONON
ON
Low-speed forward rotation command Low-speed reverse rotation command
RLF ON
Time
RLF RLR SD
Inverter
Output frequency
RLR ON
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Pr.6
Pr.6
4135. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
41
NOTE The priority of the frequency commands given by the external signals is as follows: JOG operation > multi-speed operation >
terminal 4 analog input > pulse train input > terminal 2 analog input. (For details on frequency commands given by analog input, refer to page 505.)
The input compensation of multi-speed setting is enabled when the inverter is in the External operation mode or PU/External combined operation mode (Pr.79 = "3 or 4").
Multi-speed parameters can also be set during PU operation or External operation. The Pr.24 to Pr.27 and Pr.232 to Pr.239 settings have no priority among them. When Pr.59 Remote function selection "0", the multi-speed setting is invalid since the RH, RM, and RL signals are for
remote setting. When performing analog input compensation, set Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selection to "1". Select the terminals (terminals 1, 2) to use for compensation input voltage (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V) at Pr.73 Analog input
selection. When using terminal 1 for compensation input, set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment = "0 (initial value)". Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.15 Jog frequencypage 410 Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 377 Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 496 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
5.10.1 Motor overheat protection (electronic thermal O/L relay)
Set the current of the electronic thermal relay function to protect the motor from overheating. Such settings provide the optimum protective characteristic considering the low cooling capability of the motor during low-speed operation.
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
To protect the motor from overheating Electronic thermal O/L relay P.H000, P.H006, P.H010, P.H016, P.H020 to P.H022
Pr.9, Pr.51, Pr.561, Pr.607, Pr.608, Pr.876, Pr.1016
415
To set the overheat protection characteristics for the motor Free thermal O/L relay P.H001 to P.H005,
P.H011 to P.H015 Pr.600 to Pr.604, Pr.692 to Pr.696 422
To decelerate and stop when the motor thermal protection is activated Fault definition P.H030 Pr.875 422
To extend the life of the cooling fan Cooling fan operation selection P.H100 Pr.244 423
To detect an earth (ground) fault at start Earth (ground) fault detection at start P.H101 Pr.249 425
To vary the operating level of the undervoltage protective function Undervoltage level P.H102 Pr.598 425
To initiate an inverter protective function Fault initiation P.H103 Pr.997 425
To disable the I/O phase loss protective function I/O phase loss P.H200, P.H201 Pr.251, Pr.872 426
To restart using the retry function when the protective function is activated Retry operation P.H300 to P.H303 Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 426
To set the upper and lower limits of the output frequency
Maximum/minimum frequency P.H400 to P.H402 Pr.1, Pr.2, Pr.18 428
To prevent the motor from overspeeding under torque control Speed limit P.H410 to P.H412 Pr.807 to Pr.809 287
To avoid overdriving the motor during speed control Overdriving prevention P.H415 to P.H417 Pr.285 to Pr.853,
Pr.873 269
To operate avoiding resonance points Frequency jump P.H420 to P.H425, P.H429
Pr.31 to Pr.36, Pr.552 429
To limit the output current so that the inverter protective function does not activate
Stall prevention
P.H500, P.H501, P.H600 to P.H603, P.H610, P.H611, P.H620, P.H621, P.H631, P.M430, P.T010, P.T040
Pr.22, Pr.23, Pr.48, Pr.49, Pr.66, Pr.114, Pr.115, Pr.148, Pr.149, Pr.154, Pr.156, Pr.157, Pr.858, Pr.868
431
To limit the torque during speed control Torque limit
P.H500, P.H700 to P.H704, P.H710, P.H720, P.H721, P.H730, P.T010, P.T040, P.G210
Pr.22, Pr.801, Pr.803, Pr.810, Pr.812 to Pr.817, Pr.858, Pr.868, Pr.874
245
To monitor for load faults Load characteristics fault detection
P.H520 to P.H527, P.H531 to P.H535 Pr.1480 to Pr.1492 439
To shut off output if the operation panel disconnects Overspeed detection level P.H800 Pr.374 443
To shut off output if the operation panel disconnects Deceleration check P.H881 Pr.690 270
4155. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
41
*1 The initial value for the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower is set to the 85% of the inverter rated current. *2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower The minimum setting increment is 0.01 A. *3 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher The minimum setting increment is 0.1 A. *4 The setting is available when the FR-A8TP is installed.
Electronic thermal O/L relay operation characteristic for induction motor (Pr.9)
This function detects the overload (overheat) of the motor and shut off the inverter output by stopping the operation of the transistor at the inverter output side.
Set the rated current (A) of the motor in Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (If the motor has both 50 Hz and 60 Hz ratings and the Pr.3 Base frequency is set to 60 Hz, set to 1.1 times the 60 Hz rated motor current.)
Set "0" in Pr.9 to avoid activating the electronic thermal relay function; for example, when using an external thermal relay for the motor. (Note that the output transistor protection of the inverter is activated. (E.THT))
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
9 H000 Electronic thermal O/L relay
Inverter rated current*1
0 to 500 A*2 Set the rated motor current.
0 to 3600 A*3
600 H001
First free thermal reduction frequency 1 9999
0 to 590 Hz
The electronic thermal O/L relay operation level can be changed to match the motor temperature characteristics with the combination of these three points (Pr.600, Pr.601), (Pr.602, Pr.603), (Pr.604, Pr.9). 9999: Free thermal O/L relay invalid
9999 601 H002
First free thermal reduction ratio 1 100%
1 to 100% 9999
602 H003
First free thermal reduction frequency 2 9999
0 to 590 Hz 9999
603 H004
First free thermal reduction ratio 2 100%
1 to 100% 9999
604 H005
First free thermal reduction frequency 3 9999
0 to 590 Hz 9999
607 H006 Motor permissible load level 150% 110 to 250% Set the permissible load according to the motor
characteristics.
51 H010
Second electronic thermal O/L relay 9999
0 to 500 A*2 Enabled when the RT signal is ON. Set the rated motor current.0 to 3600 A*3
9999 Second electronic thermal O/L relay invalid 692 H011
Second free thermal reduction frequency 1 9999
0 to 590 Hz
The electronic thermal O/L relay operation level can be changed to match the second motor temperature characteristics with the combination of these three points (Pr.692, Pr.693), (Pr.694, Pr.695), (Pr.696, Pr.51) when the RT signal is ON. 9999: Second free thermal O/L relay invalid
9999 693 H012
Second free thermal reduction ratio 1 100%
1 to 100% 9999
694 H013
Second free thermal reduction frequency 2 9999
0 to 590 Hz 9999
695 H014
Second free thermal reduction ratio 2 100%
1 to 100% 9999
696 H015
Second free thermal reduction frequency 3 9999
0 to 590 Hz 9999
608 H016
Second motor permissible load level 9999
110 to 250% Set the permissible frequency when the RT signal is ON.
9999 The Pr.607 setting is applied even when the RT signal is ON.
561 H020 PTC thermistor protection level 9999
0.5 to 30 k Set the PTC thermistor protection level (resistance). 9999 PTC thermistor protection disabled
1016 H021
PTC thermistor protection detection time 0 s 0 to 60 s
Set the time from when the resistance of the PTC thermistor reaches the protection level until the protective function is activated.
876 H022*4 Thermal protector input 1
0 Terminal OH of the control terminal option (FR-A8TP) is invalid.
1 Terminal OH of the control terminal option (FR-A8TP) is valid.
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When using the Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor, set Pr.71 Applied motor = "1, 13 to 16, 50, 53, 54". (This setting enables the 100% constant-torque characteristic in the low-speed range.)
*1 When setting Pr.9 to a value (current value) of 50% of the inverter rated current *2 The % value denotes the percentage to the rated inverter current. It is not the percentage to the rated motor current. *3 When you set the electronic thermal relay function dedicated to the Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor, this characteristic curve applies to
operation at 6 Hz or higher. (For selection of the operation characteristic, refer to page 528.) *4 Transistor protection is activated depending on the temperature of the heat sink. The protection may be activated even with less than 150%
depending on the operating conditions.
NOTE The internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset to the initial value by the inverter's power
reset or reset signal input. Avoid unnecessary reset and power-OFF. Install an external thermal relay (OCR) between the inverter and motors to operate several motors, a multi-pole motor or a
dedicated motor with one inverter. When setting an external thermal relay, note that the current indicated on the motor rating plate is affected by the line-to-line leakage current. (Refer to page 116.) The cooling effect of the motor drops during low-speed operation. Use a thermal protector or a motor with built-in thermistor.
The protective characteristic of the electronic thermal O/L relay is degraded when there is a large difference in capacity between the inverter and motor, and when the set value is small. In such case, use an external thermal relay.
A dedicated motor cannot be protected by an electronic thermal O/L relay. Use an external thermal relay. Set Pr.9 = "0" for Vector-control-dedicated motors (SF-V5RU) because they are equipped with thermal protectors. The transistor protection thermal O/L relay is activated early when the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting is increased.
Electronic thermal O/L relay when using IPM motor (Pr.9) This function detects the overload (overheat) of the motor and shut off the inverter output by stopping the operation of the
transistor at the inverter output side. Set the rated current (A) of the motor in Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. Performing IPM parameter initialization
automatically sets the rated current of the IPM motor. (Refer to page 231.) Set "0" in Pr.9 to avoid activating the electronic thermal relay function; for example, when using an external thermal relay
for the motor. (Note that the output transistor protection of the inverter is activated. (E.THT))
52.5% 105%
50 100 150 230
60
120
180
240
50
60
70
6Hz
20Hz 10Hz
6Hz
0.5Hz
30Hz or more*3
20Hz 10Hz
0.5Hz
Pr.9 = 50% setting of inverter rating*1*2
Pr.9 = 100% setting of inverter rating*2
S ec
on d
di sp
la y
in th
is re
gi on
M in
ut e
di sp
la y
in
th is
re gi
on
O pe
ra tio
n tim
e (m
in )
O pe
ra tio
n tim
e (s
)
Characteristic when electronic thermal relay function for motor protection is turned off (When Pr.9 setting is 0(A))
30Hz or more*3
Inverter output power (%) (% to the inverter rated current)
Operation region Region on the right of characteristic curve Non-operation region Region on the left of characteristic curve
Range for the transistor protection*4
4175. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
41
Operational characteristic of the electronic thermal O/L relay when MM-CF is used.
*1 The % value denotes the percentage to the rated motor current.
NOTE The internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset to the initial value by the inverter's power
reset or reset signal input. Avoid unnecessary reset and power-OFF. When using a PM motor other than MM-CF, set the free thermal parameters (Pr.600 to Pr.604) in accordance with the motor
characteristic. The transistor protection thermal O/L relay is activated early when the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting is increased.
Set two types of electronic thermal O/L relays (Pr.51)
These settings are used when rotating two motors with different rated current separately by a single inverter. (When rotating two motors together, use an external thermal relay.)
Set the rated motor current for the second motor in Pr.51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay.
Protective function activated area: the area right of the characteristic curve Normal operation area: the area left of the characteristic curve
80 100 120 140 160 200 220 240 260 280 300 Current [%] *1
M in
ut e
di sp
la y
in th
is re
gi on
Se co
nd d
is pl
ay in
th is
re gi
on
Th er
m al
re la
y op
er at
io n
tim e
[m in
]
50
60
70
0
60
120
180
240
Th er
m al
re la
y op
er at
io n
tim e
[s ]
2000r/min (133.33Hz) or lower
3000r/min (200Hz)
2000r/min (133.33Hz) or lower
3000r/min (200Hz)
Range for the transistor protection
RT SD
MC
MC
W V U
M
M
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
While the RT signal is ON, the setting values of Pr.51 is referred to provide thermal protection.
NOTE The RT signal is the Second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 525.) The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
Acceleration time setting (Pr.607, Pr.608) The electronic thermal O/L relay operation characteristic can be changed by setting the permissible load level according to the motor characteristics.
Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm (TH) and warning signal (THP signal)
If the accumulated electronic thermal value reaches 85% of the Pr.9 or Pr.51 setting, electronic thermal O/L relay function pre-alarm (TH) is displayed and the electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm (THP) signal is output. If the value reaches 100% of the Pr.9 setting, the motor thermal protection (E.THM/E.THT) is activated to shut off the inverter output. The inverter output is not shut off with the TH display.
Pr.450 Second applied
motor
Pr.9 Electronic thermal
O/L relay
Pr.51 Second electronic thermal
O/L relay
RT signal OFF RT signal ON
First motor Second monitor First motor Second
monitor
9999 0 9999 0 0.01 to 500 (0.1 to 3600)
9999 Other than 0 9999 0 0.01 to 500 (0.1 to 3600)
Other than 9999 0 9999 0 0.01 to 500 (0.1 to 3600)
Other than 9999 Other than 0 9999 0 0.01 to 500 (0.1 to 3600)
: Values are accumulated by using the output current. : Values are accumulated by assuming the output current is 0 A (cooling processing). : Electronic thermal O/L relay does not operate.
0
60
120
180
240
80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Th er
m al
re la
y op
er at
io n
tim e
(s )
Inverter output power (%) (% to the inverter rated current)
Range for the transistor protection
Motor permissible load 150% (Initial value) Motor permissible load 200%
Motor permissible load 110%
Example of motor permissible load setting (when Pr.9="100% of the inverter rating")
4195. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
42
For the terminal used for the THP signal output, assign the function by setting "8 (positive logic) or 108 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
External thermal relay input (OH signal, E.OHT)
External thermal relay input connection diagram The External thermal relay input (OH) signal is used when using the external thermal relay or the thermal protector built
into the motor to protect the motor from overheating. When the thermal relay is activated, the inverter output is shut off by the external thermal relay (E.OHT). For the terminal used for the OH signal input, set "7" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to
assign the function. Vector-control-dedicated motors (SF-V5RU) are equipped with thermal protectors.
Connecting the SF-V5RU thermal protector *1 Connect the recommended 2 W 1 k resistor between terminals PC and OH. (Refer to page 91.)
When the control terminal option (FR-A8TP) is used, valid/invalid setting of the terminal OH can be changed using Pr.876 thermal protector input.
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
OFF ON
100%
85%
Time ON
Electronic thermal
relay function
operation level
Electronic thermal O/L
relay alarm (THP)
Inverter U V W
OH SD
Thermal relay protector
Motor M
G1 G2
OH SD
PC 2W1k
Inverter SF-V5RU 1
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PTC thermistor input (Pr.561, Pr.1016, E.PTC) This function is used to protect the motor from overheating by inputting outputs from the motor's built-in PTC thermistor to the inverter. It is recommended that a PTC thermistor whose resistance increases most rapidly around the rated activating temperature (TNDT) is used.
Output from the PTC thermistor, which is built into the motor, can be input to terminals 2 and 10. If the input from the PTC thermistor reaches the resistor value set in Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level, the PTC thermistor operation (E.PTC) shuts off the inverter output.
To use the PTC thermistor input function, select voltage input (initial setting) for terminal 2 using the voltage/current input selection switch. (For details on the voltage/current input switch assembly, refer to page 496.)
Confirm the characteristic of the PTC thermistor to be used, and set the resistance for Pr.561 around the center of the R1 and R2 values shown on the figure above so that it does not deviate from the protective function activating temperature TN. If the Pr.561 setting becomes too close to R1 or R2, the protective function activating temperature may be too hot (protection is delayed), or too cold (too much protection).
When the PTC thermistor protection is enabled (Pr.561 "9999"), the resistance value for the PTC thermistor can be displayed on the operation panel or via RS-485 communication. (Refer to page 446.)
When the PTC thermistor protection level setting is used, use Pr.1016 PTC thermistor protection detection time to set the time from when the resistance of the PTC thermistor reaches the protection level until the protective function (E.PTC) is activated.
If the resistance of the PTC thermistor falls below the protection level within the protection detection time, the elapsed time count is cleared.
PTC thermistor input connection diagram Example of PTC thermistor characteristics
Inverter U V W
10 2
Motor R2
R1
Pr.561
TN TN+DTTN-DT
Thermistor temperature
TN: Rated operating temperature
Thermistor resistance
Thermistor curve
Temperature - resistance existing range
PTC thermistor resistance
Time
Pr.561 setting
ALM
The elapsed time count is cleared.
Pr.1016
E.PTC
4215. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
42
NOTE When using terminal 2 for PTC thermistor input (Pr.561 "9999"), the terminal 2 does not operate as an analog frequency
command terminal. The PID and dancer control functions assigned to the terminal 2 is also disabled. Use Pr.133 PID action set point to set the set point for the PID function.
To input power to the PTC thermistor power supply, always use the terminal 10 and do not use any other terminals or an external power supply. Otherwise, the PTC thermistor protection (E.PTC) does not operate properly.
When E.PTC is activated, the alarm display, "External protection (AU terminal)", may appear on the parameter unit (FR-PU07), but it is not a fault.
Overheat protection to match the characteristic of the motor (Pr.600 to Pr.604, Pr.692 to Pr.696)
The activation level of the electronic thermal O/L relay can be varied to match the motor temperature characteristic. The electronic thermal O/L relay operation level can be set with the combination of three points (Pr.600, Pr.601), (Pr.602,
Pr.603), (Pr.604, Pr.9). Two or more points are required for setting. The electronic thermal O/L relay operation level can be set with the combination of three points (Pr.692, Pr.693), (Pr.694,
Pr.695), (Pr.696, Pr.51) when the RT signal is ON.
When setting Pr.600, Pr.602, and Pr.604 (Pr.692, Pr.694, and Pr.696) to the same frequency, the graph shows a step plot.
NOTE Make sure to set the parameters according to the temperature characteristic of the motor used.
Parameters referred to Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528 Pr.72 PWM frequency selectionpage 356 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
5.10.2 Fault definition Fault output can be done after deceleration stop when motor thermal protection is activated.
Output frequencyPr.600 (Pr.692)
Pr.602 (Pr.694)
100%
Pr.603 (Pr.695)
Pr.601 (Pr.693)
Pr.604 (Pr.696)
Load ratio (ratio to Pr.9 (Pr.51)) [%] Continuous operation characteristic
100%
70%
50%
60Hz30Hz6Hz Frequency Frequency
Pr.9=100% of the rated motor current
Pr.600=6Hz Pr.601=50% Pr.602=30Hz Pr.603=70% Pr.604=60Hz
50%
100%
60Hz3Hz 120Hz
60%
Pr.600=120Hz Pr.601=60% Pr.602=3Hz Pr.603=50% Pr.604=60Hz
Load ratioLoad ratioSetting example 1 Setting
example 2
Outout frequency[Hz]
Pr.600 = 10Hz
Pr.602 = 10Hz
100
80
Pr.603 = 50%50
Pr.601 = 80%
10
Pr.604 = 10Hz
Load ratio [%]
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Output shutoff at activation of any protective function (Pr.875 = "0" initial value)
At activation of a protective function, output is shutoff, and the alarm output 2 signal (ER) and the fault signal (ALM) are output.
Deceleration stop at motor thermal protection activation (Pr.875 = "1") At activation of the external thermal relay (E.OHT), motor load (electronic thermal O/L relay) (E.THM) and PTC thermistor
(E.PTC) protective functions, the alarm output 2 (ER) signal is displayed, and the motor decelerates to stop. After it stops, a fault signal (ALM) is output.
When the ER signal comes ON, reduce the load or take other measures to allow the inverter to decelerate. During fault occurrence aside from the E.OHT, THM and E.PTC, the output is immediately shut off, and the fault is signal
(ALM) is output. To use the ER signal, set "97 (positive logic)" or "197 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal
function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
NOTE Regardless of the Pr.875 setting, when the protective function is operating during position control, output is immediately shut
off. (No deceleration stop) For systems with a large load-side torque that prevents deceleration, setting value "0" is recommended. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
5.10.3 Cooling fan operation selection A cooling fan is built into the inverter and its operation can be controlled.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 875 H030 Fault definition 0
0 Normal operation 1 Decelerates to stop at activation of motor thermal protection.
Output frequency
Time
Fault output (ALM, ALM2)
E.OHT occurrence
Alarm output 2 (ER)
E.OHT display
ON
ON
When Pr.875 = "1"
4235. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
42
Cooling fan always ON (Pr.244 = "0") When Pr.244 = "0", the cooling fan operates at power ON. If the fan stops at this time, the inverter finds that the fan
operation is faulty and " " (FN), the indication of the Fan alarm, is displayed on the operation panel. The Fan fault
output (FAN) signal and the Alarm (LF) signal are output. For the terminal used for the FAN signal output, set "25 (positive logic)" or "125 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196
(Output terminal function selection) and for LF signal, set "98 (positive logic)" or "198 (negative logic)".
Cooling fan operation control (Pr.244 (P.H100) = "1" (initial value), "101 to 105")
The cooling fan operation is controlled when Pr.244 = "1". When the inverter is running, the cooling fan operates constantly. When the inverter is stopped, the cooling fan operates depending on the temperature of the inverter heat sink. If the fan stops although it meets the conditions for running, fan operation is regarded as faulty, [FN] is displayed on the operation panel, and the fan signal and LF signals are output.
To prevent the cooling fan from turning ON and OFF repeatedly during frequent starts/stops (inching), the cooling fan stop waiting time can be set. The waiting time when Pr.244 = "101 to 105" is Pr.244 - 100 (or 1 second, if the Pr.244 = "101").
Cooling fan operation command (Y206) signal The Cooling fan operation command (Y206) signal can be output when the inverter cooling fan meets the conditions for
running. The function can be used when the fan installed on the enclosure is synchronized with the inverter cooling fan. The Y206 signal indicates the operating command condition of the inverter cooling fan depending on the power supply ON/
OFF or the Pr.244 settings. The signal does not indicate the actual operation of the cooling fan. (The signal is output even if the cooling fan is stopped due to a fault.)
To use the Y206 signal, set "206 (positive logic) or 306 (negative logic)" in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign function to an output terminal.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
244 Cooling fan operation selection 1
0 Cooling fan ON/OFF control is invalid. (The cooling fan is always ON at power ON) A cooling fan operates at power ON.
1
Cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled. The fan is always ON while the inverter is running. During a stop, the inverter status is monitored and the fan switches ON/OFF according to the temperature.
101 to 105 Cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled. Set the cooling fan stop delay time within 1 to 5 seconds.
1000 Cooling fan ON/OFF control is invalid. (The cooling fan is always ON at power ON) A cooling fan operates at power ON.
The cooling fan can be set to always OFF during Vector control test operation or PM sensorless vector control test operation.
1001
Cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled. The fan is always ON while the inverter is running. During a stop, the inverter status is monitored and the fan switches ON/OFF according to the temperature.
1101 to 1105 Cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled. Set the cooling fan stop delay time within 1 to 5 seconds.
H100 Cooling fan operation selection 1
0 Cooling fan ON/OFF control is invalid. (The cooling fan is always ON at power ON) A cooling fan operates at power ON.
1
Cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled. The fan is always ON while the inverter is running. During a stop, the inverter status is monitored and the fan switches ON/OFF according to the temperature.
101 to 105 Cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled. Set the cooling fan stop delay time within 1 to 5 seconds.
H106
Cooling fan operation selection during the test operation
0 0 The cooling fan operates according to the H100 setting during Vector
control test operation or PM sensorless vector control test operation.
1 The cooling fan can be set to always OFF during Vector control test operation or PM sensorless vector control test operation.
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cooling fan operation selection during the test operation (Pr.244 = "1000, 1001, 1101 to 1105" (P.H106 = "1"))
When P.H106 = "1" or Pr.244 = "1000, 1001, or 1101 to 1105", the cooling fan can be set to always OFF during Vector control test operation or PM sensorless vector control test operation.
NOTE The cooling fan is installed on the FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or higher and the FR-A840-00083(2.2K) or higher. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
5.10.4 Earth (ground) fault detection at start
Select whether to make earth (ground) fault detection at start. When enabled, earth (ground) fault detection is performed immediately after a start signal input to the inverter.
If a ground fault is detected at start while Pr.249 = "1", the output-side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) is displayed and the outputs are shut off. (Refer to page 790.)
Pr.249 setting is enabled during V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control. When the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting is high, enable the ground fault detection at start.
NOTE Because the detection is performed at start, output is delayed for approx. 20 ms every start. Use Pr.249 to enable/disable ground fault detection at operation start. Ground faults are detected always during operation
regardless of the Pr.249 setting.
5.10.5 Varying the activation level of the undervoltage protective function
If the undervoltage protection (E.UVT) activates due to unstable voltage in the power supply, the undervoltage level (DC bus voltage value) can be changed.
*1 For the 200 V class *2 For the 400 V class
NOTE Do not use this function when switching to an external battery, since the inrush current when power is restored increases, as
the undervoltage level is decreased. For the 200 V class inverters, the setting is available for the FR-A820-02330(45K) or lower. The Pr.598 setting is valid for induction motors. When either of the first or second motor is a PM motor, the Pr.598 setting is
invalid.
5.10.6 Initiating a protective function A fault (protective function) is initiated by setting the parameter.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
249 H101
Earth (ground) fault detection at start 0
0 Without the earth (ground) fault detection at start
1 With the earth (ground) fault detection at start
V/F Magnetic flux
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
598 H102 Undervoltage level 9999
175 to 215 VDC*1 Set the DC voltage value at which E.UVT occurs.
350 to 430 VDC*2
9999 E.UVT occurs at 215 VDC (200 V class) / 430 VDC (400 V class).
4255. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
42
This function can be used to check how the system operates at activation of a protective function.
To initiate a fault (protective function), set the assigned number of the protective function to be initiated in Pr.997. The value set in Pr.997 is not stored in EEPROM. When a protective function activates, the inverter output is shut off, a fault is displayed, and a fault signal (ALM, ALM2) is
output. The latest fault in the fault history is displayed while the fault initiation function is in operation. After a reset, the fault history
goes back to the previous status. (The protective function generated by the fault is not saved in the fault history.) Perform inverter reset to cancel the protective function. For the selectable parameter by Pr.997 and the corresponding protective functions, refer to page 776.
NOTE If a protective function is already operating, no fault can be activated by Pr.997. The retry function is disabled when a protective function has been initiated by the fault initiation function. If a fault occurs after a protective function has been activated, the protective function indication does not change. The fault is
not saved in the fault history either.
5.10.7 I/O phase loss protection selection The output phase loss protection function, which stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) is lost, can be disabled. The input phase loss protective function on the inverter input side (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) can be enabled.
*1 The setting is available for the standard structure model and the IP55 compatible model.
Output phase loss protection selection (Pr.251) When Pr.251 is set to "0", output phase loss protection (E.LF) becomes invalid.
Input phase loss protection selection (Pr.872) (Standard models and IP55 compatible models)
When Pr.872 is set to "1", Input phase loss (E.ILF) protection is activated if one of three phases is lost for 1 second.
NOTE When several motors are connected, output phase loss cannot be detected even if the wiring to one motor loses phase. If an input phase is lost while Pr.872 = "1" (with input phase loss protection), Pr.261 Power failure stop selection "0" (power
failure stop function enabled), the motor decelerates to stop without outputting E.ILF. In the case of R/L1, S/L2 phase loss, the input phase loss protection does not operate, and the inverter output is shut off. If an input phase loss continues for a long time, the lives of converter section and capacitor of the inverter become shorter.
Parameters referred to Pr.261 Power failure stop selectionpage 642
5.10.8 Retry function This function allows the inverter to reset itself and restart at activation of the protective function (fault indication). The retry generating protective functions can also be selected.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
997 H103 Fault initiation 9999
16 to 253 The setting range is same with the one for fault data codes of the inverter (which can be read through communication). Written data is not stored in EEPROM.
9999 The read value is always "9999". The protective function is not activated with this setting.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 251 H200
Output phase loss protection selection 1
0 Output phase loss protection disabled 1 Output phase loss protection enabled
872 H201*1
Input phase loss protection selection 0
0 Input phase loss protection disabled 1 Input phase loss protection enabled
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected (Pr.57 Restart coasting time 9999), the restart operation is also performed after a retry operation as well as after an instantaneous power failure. (For restart operation, refer to page 628 and page 635 for selection.)
Setting the retry function (Pr.67, Pr.68) When the inverter protective function is operating (fault indication), the retry function automatically cancels (resets) the
protective function after the time set in Pr.68. The retry function then restarts the operation from the starting frequency. The retry function is enabled when the Pr.67 setting is other than "0". Set the number of retries at activation of the protective
function in Pr.67.
When retries fail consecutively more than the number of times set in Pr.67, a retry count excess (E.RET) occurs, resulting in an inverter retries. (Refer to the Retry failure example.)
Use Pr.68 to set the waiting time from a protective function activation to a retry in the range of 0.1 to 600 seconds. During retry operation, the During retry (Y64) signal is ON. For the Y64 signal, set "64 (positive logic)" or "164 (negative
logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function.
Retry count check (Pr.69) Reading the Pr.69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart times made by retries. The cumulative count
in Pr.69 increases by 1 when a retry is successful. Retry is regarded as successful when normal operation continues without a fault for the Pr.68 setting multiplied by four or longer (3.1 seconds at the shortest). (When retry is successful, the cumulative number of retry failures is cleared.)
Writing "0" in Pr.69 clears the cumulative count.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
65 H300 Retry selection 0 0 to 5 Faults which trigger the retry operation can be selected.
67 H301
Number of retries at fault occurrence 0
0 The retry function disabled.
1 to 10 Set the number of retries at a fault occurrence. A fault output is not provided during the retry operation.
101 to 110 Set the number of retries at a fault occurrence. (The setting value minus 100 is the number of retries.) A fault output is provided during the retry operation.
68 H302 Retry waiting time 1 s 0.1 to 600 s Set the time delay from when an inverter fault occurs until the retry
operation starts. 69 H303
Retry count display erase 0 0 Setting "0" clears the retry success counter ("retry success" means that
the inverter successfully restarts).
Pr.67 setting Fault output during retry operation Retry count
0 No retry function 1 to 10 Not available 1 to 10 times 101 to 110 Available 1 to 10 times
Retry failure example
Inverter output frequency
Fault occurrence
First retry
Fault occurrence
Second retry
Fault occurrence
Third retry Retry failure
(E.RET)
ON
0
Fault signal (ALM)
Pr.68 Pr.68 Pr.68
Time
Y64 ON ON ON
Inverter output frequency
0
Y64
Pr.68 Pr. 68 4
(If it is below 3.1s, 3.1s is set.)
Retry success
Retry success example
Success count + 1 Time
ON
Fault occurrence
Retry success count
Retry start
4275. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
42
Selecting retry generating faults (Pr.65) Using Pr.65, the fault that causes a retry is selectable. No retry is made for the fault not indicated. (For the fault details,
refer to page 779.) indicates the faults selected for retry.
NOTE Use the retry function only when the operation can be resumed after resetting a protective function activation. Making a retry
against the protective function, which is activated by an unknown condition, will lead the inverter and motor to be faulty. Identify and remove the cause of the protective function activation before restarting the operation.
If the retry function operates during PU operations, the operating conditions (forward/reverse rotation) are stored; and operations resume after retry reset.
Only the fault details for the first fault that occurred during retry are stored in the fault history. The reset by the retry function does not clear the accumulated data of the electronic thermal O/L relay, regenerative brake
duty, etc. (This is different from power supply reset or reset by RES signal.) When the parameter storage device fault (E.PE) is occurring and reading of the retry-function-related parameters is not
possible, retry cannot be operated. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628, page 635
5.10.9 Limiting the output frequency (maximum/minimum frequency)
Motor speed can be limited. Clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency.
Retry-making fault
Pr.65 setting Retry-making fault
Pr.65 setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5
E.OC1 E.MB3 E.OC2 E.MB4 E.OC3 E.MB5 E.OV1 E.MB6 E.OV2 E.MB7 E.OV3 E.OS E.THM E.OSD E.THT E.PTC E.IPF E.CDO E.UVT E.SER E. BE E.USB E. GF E.ILF E.OHT E.PID E.OLT E.PCH E.OPT E.SOT E.OP1 E.LCI E. PE E.LUP E.MB1 E.LDN E.MB2
CAUTION When the retry function is set enabled, stay away from the motor and machine in the case of an output shutoff. The motor
and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after the shutoff. When the retry function is selected, apply the supplied CAUTION stickers to easily visible places.
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
Setting the maximum frequency (Pr.1, Pr.18) Set Pr.1 Maximum frequency to the upper limit of the output frequency. If the value of the frequency command given is
higher than the setting, the output frequency is clamped at the maximum frequency. To operate at a frequency higher than the 120 Hz, adjust the upper output frequency limit with Pr.18 High speed
maximum frequency. (When setting a frequency in Pr.18, the Pr.1 setting automatically changes to the frequency set in Pr.18. Also, when setting a frequency in Pr.1, the Pr.18 setting automatically changes to the frequency set in Pr.1.)
Setting the minimum frequency (Pr.2) Set Pr.2 Minimum frequency to the lower limit of the output frequency. If the set frequency is Pr.2 or less, the output frequency is clamped at Pr.2 (does not fall below Pr.2).
NOTE To operate with a frequency higher than 60 Hz using frequency-setting analog signals, change the Pr.125 (Pr.126) (frequency
setting gain) setting. Simply changing the Pr.1 and Pr.18 settings does not enable the operation at a frequency higher than 60 Hz.
During Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control, the upper and lower limits are for the commanded frequency. The final output frequency that is decided by each control may exceed the lower or upper limits.
When Pr.15 Jog frequency is equal to or less than Pr.2, the Pr.15 setting takes precedence. If a jump frequency that exceeds Pr.1 (Pr.18) is set for the 3-point frequency jump, the maximum frequency setting is the set
frequency. If the jump frequency is less than the setting of Pr.2, the jump frequency is the set frequency. (The set frequency can be equal to or lower than the frequency lower limit.) When stall prevention is activated to decrease the output frequency, the output frequency may drop to Pr.2 or below.
Parameters referred to Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381, page 382 Pr.15 Jog frequencypage 410 Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 505
5.10.10 Avoiding machine resonance points (frequency jump)
When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system, these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1 H400 Maximum frequency
120 Hz*1 0 to 120 Hz Set the upper limit of the output frequency.
60 Hz*2
2 H401 Minimum frequency 0 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the lower limit of the output frequency.
18 H402
High speed maximum frequency
120 Hz*1 0 to 590 Hz Set when operating at 120 Hz or higher.
60 Hz*2
CAUTION Note that when Pr.2 is set to any value equal to or higher than Pr.13 Starting frequency, simply turning ON the start
signal runs the motor at the frequency set in Pr.2 even if the command frequency is not given.
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.1 Pr.18
Pr.2 Frequency setting
Clamped at the maximum frequency
Clamped at the minimum frequency
5, 10V (20mA)
0 (4mA)
4295. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
43
3-point frequency jump (Pr.31 to Pr.36) Up to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to either the top or bottom point of each area. The settings of frequency jumps 1A, 2A, 3A are jump points, and operation is performed at these frequencies in the jump
areas.
Example 1) To fix the frequency to 30 Hz in the range of 30 Hz to 35 Hz, set 35 Hz in Pr.34 and 30 Hz in Pr.33.
Example 2) To jump the frequency to 35 Hz in the range of 30 Hz to 35 Hz, set 35 Hz in Pr.33 and 30 Hz in Pr.34.
6-point frequency jump (Pr.552) A total of six jump areas can be set by setting the common jump range for the frequencies set in Pr.31 to Pr.36. When frequency jump ranges overlap, the lower limit of the lower jump range and the upper limit of the upper jump range
are used.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 31 H420 Frequency jump 1A
9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B are frequency jumps (3-point jump). 9999: Function disabled
32 H421 Frequency jump 1B
33 H422 Frequency jump 2A
34 H423 Frequency jump 2B
35 H424 Frequency jump 3A
36 H425 Frequency jump 3B
552 H429 Frequency jump range 9999
0 to 30 Hz Set the jump range for the frequency jumps (6-point jump). 9999 3-point jump
Pr.31
Frequency jump
Pr.32
Pr.34 Pr.33
Pr.35 Pr.36
S et
fr eq
ue nc
y af
te r
fre qu
en cy
ju m
p (H
z)
Input set frequency (Hz)
Pr.34: 35 Hz Pr.33: 30 Hz
Pr.33: 35 Hz Pr.34: 30 Hz
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When the set frequency decreases and falls within the jump range, the upper limit of the jump range is the set frequency. When the set frequency increases and falls within the jump range, the lower limit of the jump range is the set frequency.
NOTE During acceleration/deceleration, the frequency within the set area is valid. If the setting ranges of individual groups (1A and 1B, 2A and 2B, 3A and 3B) overlap, Parameter write error (Er1) occurs. Setting Pr.552 = "0" disables frequency jumps. If a jump frequency that exceeds Pr.1 (Pr.18) Maximum frequency is set for the 3-point frequency jump, the maximum
frequency setting is the set frequency. If the jump frequency is less than the setting of Pr.2 Minimum frequency, the jump frequency is the set frequency. (The set frequency can be equal to or lower than the frequency lower limit.) Example with 6-point frequency jump
Parameters referred to Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.2 Minimum frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum frequencypage 428
5.10.11 Stall prevention operation
This function monitors the output current and automatically changes the output frequency to prevent the inverter from shutting off due to overcurrent, overvoltage, etc. It can also limit the stall prevention and fast-response current limit operation during acceleration/deceleration and power/regenerative driving. This function is disabled during Real sensorless vector control, Vector control and PM sensorless vector control.
Stall prevention: If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the output frequency of the inverter is automatically changed to reduce the output current. Also, the second stall prevention function can limit the output frequency range in which the stall prevention function is enabled.
Fast-response current limit: If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is shut off to prevent an overcurrent.
Pr.36
Pr.31
0
Pr.32
Pr.34 Pr.33
Pr.35
S et
fr eq
ue nc
y af
te r f
re qu
en cy
ju m
p
Input set frequency
Pr.552 Pr.552 Jump range
Jump range
Pr.31
0
Pr.32
Input set frequency
Pr.552 Pr.552
Jump range
Set frequency after frequency jump
Maximum frequency
0 Set frequency
Pr.552
Pr.552
Output frequency
Minimum frequency
0 Set frequency
Pr.552
Pr.552
Output frequency
Maximum frequency and frequency jump Minimum frequency and frequency jump
V/F Magnetic flux
4315. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
43
*1 The upper limit of stall prevention operation is limited internally to the following. 120% (SLD rating), 150% (LD rating), 220% (ND rating), or 280% (HD rating)
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description FM CA
22 H500
Stall prevention operation level 150%
0 Stall prevention operation disabled.
0.1 to 400%*1 Set the current limit at which the stall prevention operation starts.
156 H501
Stall prevention operation selection 0 0 to 31, 100, 101 Enable/disable the stall prevention operation and the fast-
response current limit operation.
48 H600
Second stall prevention operation level
150% 0 Second stall prevention operation disabled.
0.1 to 400%*1 The stall prevention operation level can be changed using the RT signal.
49 H601
Second stall prevention operation frequency
0 Hz
0 Second stall prevention operation disabled.
0.01 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the Pr.48 stall prevention operation starts.
9999 Pr.48 is enabled when the RT signal is ON.
114 H602
Third stall prevention operation level 150%
0 Third stall prevention operation disabled.
0.1 to 400%*1 The stall prevention operation level can be changed using the X9 signal.
115 H603
Third stall prevention operation frequency 0 Hz
0 Third stall prevention operation disabled.
0.01 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the stall prevention operation starts when the X9 signal turns ON.
23 H610
Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed
9999 0 to 200% The stall operation level when running at high speeds above
the rated frequency can be reduced.
9999 Stall prevention operation disabled at double speed.
66 H611
Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the stall operation level reduction starts.
148 H620
Stall prevention level at 0 V input 150% 0 to 400%*1
The stall prevention operation level can be changed by the analog signal input to the terminal 1 (terminal 4).149
H621 Stall prevention level at 10 V input 200% 0 to 400%*1
154 H631
Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation
1
0 Output voltage reduction enabled Enable/disable the output
voltage reduction during stall prevention operation.1 Output voltage reduction
disabled.
10 Output voltage reduction enabled
Use this setting when the overvoltage protective function (E.OV[]) is activated during stall prevention operation in an application with large load inertia.
11 Output voltage reduction disabled.
157 M430 OL signal output timer 0 s
0 to 25 s Set the OL signal output start time when stall prevention is activated.
9999 No OL signal output. 858 T040
Terminal 4 function assignment 0 0, 1, 4, 9999 When set "4", the stall prevention level can be changed with
the signal to the terminal 4. 868 T010
Terminal 1 function assignment 0 0 to 6, 9999 When set "4", the stall prevention level can be changed with
the signal to the terminal 1.
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Setting of stall prevention operation level (Pr.22)
NOTE A continuous overloaded condition may activate a protective function such as motor overload trip (electronic thermal O/L relay
function) (E.THM). When Pr.156 has been set to activate the fast response current limit (initial value), the Pr.22 setting should not be higher than
170%. Such setting prevents torque generation. When Real sensorless vector control or Vector control is selected using Pr.800 Control method selection, Pr.22 serves as
the torque limit level. For the FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower and the FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or lower, the initial value of Pr.22 is 200% instead of 150%.
For Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level, set the ratio of the output current to the inverter's rated current at which the stall prevention operation is activated. Normally, use this parameter in the initial setting.
Stall prevention operation stops acceleration (makes deceleration) during acceleration, makes deceleration during constant speed, and stops deceleration during deceleration.
When the stall prevention operation is performed, the Overload warning (OL) signal is output.Stall prevention operation example
Pr.22
OL
Output current
Output frequency
Acce ler
ati on
Constant speed
Deceleration Time
4335. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
43
Disabling the stall prevention operation and fast-response current limit according to operating conditions (Pr.156)
Referring to the following table, enable/disable the stall prevention operation and the fast-response current limit operation, and also set the operation at OL signal output.
*1 When "operation stop at OL signal output" is selected, the fault output " " (stop due to stall prevention) is displayed, and
operation stops. *2 The OL signal and E.OLT are not outputted because fast-response current limit and stall prevention are not operating. *3 Setting values "100, 101" can be individually set for power driving and regenerative driving. The setting value "101" disables the fast-response
current limit during power driving.
NOTE When the load is heavy or the acceleration/deceleration time is short, stall prevention operates and acceleration/deceleration
may not be performed according to the time set. Set Pr.156 and stall prevention operation level to the optimum values. For lift applications, make settings to disable the fast-response current limit. Otherwise, the torque may be insufficient, causing
the load to drop.
Pr.156 setting
Fast-response current limit : enabled : disabled
Stall prevention operation selection : enabled : disabled
OL signal output : enabled : disabled*1
Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration 0 (initial value) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 *2
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 *2
100*3 Power driving Regenerative driving *2
101*3 Power driving Regenerative driving *2
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Adjusting the stall prevention operation signal and output timing (OL signal, Pr.157)
If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level and stall prevention is activated, Overload warning (OL) signal turns ON for 100 ms or more. The output signal turns OFF when the output current falls to the stall prevention operation level or less.
Pr.157 OL signal output timer can be used to set whether to output the OL signal immediately, or whether to output it after a certain time period has elapsed.
This function also operates during regeneration avoidance operation " " (overvoltage stall).
NOTE OL signal is assigned to the terminal OL in the initial status. The OL signal can be assigned to other terminals by setting "3
(positive logic) or 103 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). If the stall prevention operation has lowered the output frequency to 0.5 Hz and kept the level for 3 seconds, the stall prevention
stop (E.OLT) is activated to shut off the inverter output. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Setting for stall prevention operation in the high-frequency range (Pr.22, Pr.23, Pr.66)
When operating at the rated motor frequency or higher, acceleration may not be made because the motor current does not increase. Also, when operating in the high-frequency range, the current flowing to the locked motor becomes less than the rated output current of the inverter; and even if the motor is stopped, the protective function does not operate (OL). In a case like this, the stall prevention level can be reduced in the high-frequency range to improve the motor's operating characteristics. This is useful when operating up to the high speed range, such as when using a centrifuge. Normally, set Pr.66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency to 60 Hz, and Pr.23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed to 100%.
Calculation formula for stall prevention operation level
When Pr.23 = "9999" (initial value), the stall prevention operation level is constant at the Pr.22 level up to 590 Hz.
Pr.157 setting Description 0 (initial value) Output immediately. 0.1 to 25 Output after the set time (s). 9999 Not output.
Overload state (OL operation)
OL output signal
Pr.157 Set time(s)
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.22
Always at the Pr.22 level when Pr.23 = "9999"
Pr.66 400Hz
St al
l p re
ve nt
io n
op er
at io
n le
ve l (
% )
Stall prevention operation level as set in Pr.23
Output frequency (Hz)
Setting example (Pr.22 = 120%, Pr.23 = 100%, Pr.66 = 60Hz)
18
0 10060 200 300 400
24 36
72
120
S ta
ll pr
ev en
tio n
op er
at io
n le
ve l (
% )
= A + B [ Pr.22 - A
] [ Pr.23 - 100
] Pr.22 - B 100
A = Pr.66 (Hz) Pr.22 (%)
, B = Pr.66 (Hz) Pr.22 (%)
Output frequency (Hz) 400 Hz
Stall prevention operation level (%) in the high-frequency range
Where,
4355. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
43
Setting multiple stall prevention operation levels (Pr.48, Pr.49, Pr.114, Pr.115)
Setting Pr.49 Second stall prevention operation frequency = "9999" and turning ON the RT signal enables Pr.48 Second stall prevention operation level.
For Pr.48 (Pr.114), set the stall prevention operation level that is effective in the output frequency range between 0 Hz and Pr.49 (Pr.115). However, the operation level is Pr.22 during acceleration.
Stop-on-contact operation can be used by decreasing the Pr.48 (Pr.114) setting and loosening the reduction torque. Pr.114 and Pr.115 are enabled when the X9 signal is ON. To input the X9 signal, set "9" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 Input
terminal function selection to assign the function to the terminal.
*1 For the stall prevention operation level, the smaller of Pr.22 and Pr.48 (Pr.115) has precedence. *2 When Pr.858 = "4 (analog input to terminal 4 for stall prevention operation level)" or Pr.868 = "4 (analog input to terminal 1 for stall prevention
operation level)", turning ON the RT (X9) signal does not enable the second (third) stall prevention function. (Input to the terminal 4 or terminal 1 is valid.)
NOTE When Pr.49 "9999" (level change according to frequency) and Pr.48 = "0%", the stall prevention function is disabled at or
lower than the frequency set in Pr.49. The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. The RT (X9) signal acts as the second (third) function selection signal and makes the other second (third) functions valid.
(Refer to page 525.)
Stall prevention operation level setting (analog variable) from terminal 1 (terminal 4) (Pr.148, Pr.149, Pr.858, Pr.868)
To use the terminal 1 (analog voltage input) to set the stall prevention operation level, set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment = "4". Then, input a 0 to 5 V (or 0 to 10 V) to the terminal 1. To choose whether 5 V or 10 V, use Pr.73 Analog input selection. In the initial status, Pr.73 = "1 (initial value)" is set to choose 0 to 10 V input.
When setting the stall prevention operation level from terminal 4 (analog current input), set Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment = "4". Input a 0 to 20 mA to the terminal 4. There is no need to turn ON the AU signal.
Set Pr.148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input to the current limit level when input voltage is 0 V (0 mA).
Pr.49 setting Pr.115 setting Operation 0 (initial value) The second (third) stall prevention function disabled. 0.01 Hz to 590 Hz The second (third) stall prevention function operates according to the frequency.*1
9999*2 Setting not available
The second stall prevention function operates according to the RT signal. RT signal ON: stall level set in Pr.48, RT signal OFF: stall level set in Pr.22
During acceleration
Output frequency
Pr.48
Pr.49
During deceleration/constant speed
Output frequency (Hz) Output
frequency
Time
Pr.22 used
Set frequency
Pr.22 used
Output frequency (Hz) Output
frequency
Stall prevention level
Set frequency
TimeStall prevention levelPr.114
Pr.115 Pr.48(Pr.114) used Pr.48(Pr.114) used Set frequency exceeds Pr.49(Pr.115)Set frequency is Pr.49(Pr.115) or less
Pr.49(Pr.115) Pr.49(Pr.115)
St al
l p re
ve nt
io n
op er
at io
n cu
rre nt
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Set Pr.149 Stall prevention level at 0 V input to the current limit level when input voltage is 10 V/5 V (20 mA).
*1 When Pr.868 = "4" (analog stall prevention), the other functions of terminal 1 (auxiliary input, override function, PID control) do not operate. *2 When Pr.858 = "4" (analog stall prevention), PID control and speed commands via terminal 4 do not operate even when the AU signal is ON. *3 When both Pr.858 and Pr.868 are set to "4" (stall prevention), terminal 1 functions take priority and terminal 4 has no function.
NOTE The fast-response current limit cannot be set.
Further prevention of a trip (Pr.154) Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "0, 10", the output voltage is reduced during
stall prevention operation. By making this setting, an overcurrent trip becomes less likely to occur. Use this setting when torque reduction does not pose a problem. (Under V/F control, the output voltage is reduced only during the stall prevention operation is activated.)
100% 50%
Current limit level (%)
(5V/10VDC)(-5V/10VDC) Input voltage (V)
0V
200%
Set the current limit level at 0V input voltage (input current 0mA) using Pr.148.
Set the current limit level at 10V/5V input power (input current 20mA) using Pr.149.
150%
0mA (20mA) Input current (mA)
Pr.858 setting Pr.868 setting V/F, Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Terminal 4 function Terminal 1 function
0 (initial value)
0 (initial value)
Frequency command (AU signal-ON)
Auxiliary frequency 1 2 3
4*1 Stall prevention 5 6 9999
1
0 (initial value)
1 2 3
4*1 Stall prevention 5 6 9999
4*2
0 (initial value) Stall prevention
Auxiliary frequency 1 2 3
4*1 *3 Stall prevention 5
Stall prevention
6 9999
9999
4375. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
43
Set Pr.154 = "10 or 11" when the overvoltage protective function (E.OV[]) is activated during stall prevention operation in an application with large load inertia. Note that turning OFF the start signal (STF/STR) or varying the frequency command during stall prevention operation may delay the acceleration/deceleration start.
Parameters referred to Pr.22 Torque limit levelpage 245 Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 496 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473 Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500
Pr.154 E.OC[] countermeasure E.OV[] countermeasure 0 Enabled 1 (initial value) 10 Enabled Enabled 11 Enabled
CAUTION Do not set the stall prevention operation current too low.
Doing so will reduce the generated torque. Be sure to perform the test operation.
Stall prevention operation during acceleration may extend the acceleration time. Stall prevention operation during constant-speed operation may cause sudden speed changes. Stall prevention operation during deceleration may extend the deceleration time.
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.10.12 Load characteristics fault detection This function is used to monitor whether the load is operating in normal condition by storing the speed/torque relationship in the inverter to detect mechanical faults or for maintenance. When the load operating condition deviates from the normal range, the protective function is activated or the warning is output to protect the inverter or the motor.
Load characteristics reference setting (Pr.1481 to Pr.1487) Use Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 to set the reference value of load characteristics.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting
range Description FM CA
1480 H520
Load characteristics measurement mode 0
0 Load characteristics measurement mode does not start. (Measurement of load characteristics complete without fault.)
1 Load characteristics measurement mode starts. 2, 3, 4, 5, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85
The load characteristics measurement status is displayed. (Read-only)
1481 H521
Load characteristics load reference 1 9999
0 to 400% Set the reference value of normal load characteristics. 8888: The present load status is written as reference status. 9999: The load reference is invalid.
1482 H522
Load characteristics load reference 2 9999
1483 H523
Load characteristics load reference 3 9999
1484 H524
Load characteristics load reference 4 9999
1485 H525
Load characteristics load reference 5 9999
1486 H526
Load characteristics maximum frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the maximum frequency of the load characteristics fault detection
range. 1487 H527
Load characteristics minimum frequency 6 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the minimum frequency of the load characteristics fault detection
range. 1488 H531
Upper limit warning detection width 20%
0 to 400% Set the detection width when the upper limit load fault warning is output. 9999 Function disabled
1489 H532
Lower limit warning detection width 20%
0 to 400% Set the detection width when the lower limit load fault warning is output. 9999 Function disabled
1490 H533
Upper limit fault detection width 9999
0 to 400% Set the detection width when output is shut off when the upper limit load fault occurs.
9999 Function disabled
1491 H534
Lower limit fault detection width 9999
0 to 400% Set the detection width when output is shut off when the lower limit load fault occurs.
9999 Function disabled
1492 H535
Load status detection signal delay time / load reference measurement waiting time
1 s 0 to 60 s
Set the waiting time after the load fault is detected until warning output or output shutoff. In the load characteristics measurement mode, set the waiting time after the load measurement frequency is reached until the load reference is set.
4395. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
44
Use Pr.1486 Load characteristics maximum frequency and Pr.1487 Load characteristics minimum frequency to set the output frequency range for load fault detection.
Automatic measurement of the load characteristics reference (Load characteristics measurement mode) (Pr.1480)
Perform measurement under actual environment with the motor connected. Set Pr.1487 Load characteristics minimum frequency to a value higher than the Pr.13 Starting frequency setting.
Setting Pr.1480 Load characteristics measurement mode = "1" enables automatic measurement of the load characteristics reference. (Load characteristics measurement mode)
Use Pr.1486 and Pr.1487 to set the frequency band for the measurement, and set Pr.1480 = "1". After setting, when the inverter is started, the measurement starts. (When the value set in Pr.1486 is smaller than the value set in Pr.1487, the measurement does not start.)
The automatically measured load characteristics reference is written in Pr.1481 to Pr.1485. After the measurement is started, read Pr.1480 to display the status of the measurement. If "8" appears in the tens place,
the measurement has not properly completed.
While measuring automatically, the During load characteristics measurement (Y213) signal is output. For the Y213 signal, assign the function by setting "213 (positive logic)" or "313 (negative logic)" in any of in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
Load reference 1 (Pr.1481)
f1 (Pr.1487)
f2 f3 f4 f5 (Pr.1486)
Load reference 2 (Pr.1482)
Load reference 3 (Pr.1483)
Load reference 4 (Pr.1484)
Load reference 5 (Pr.1485)
Load status
Upper limit fault detection width (Pr.1490)
Lower limit warning detection width (Pr.1489)
Upper limit warning detection width (Pr.1488)
Lower limit fault detection width (Pr.1491)
Normal load range
Output frequency
Read value of Pr.1480 Status
Tens place Ones place 1 During measurement from the starting point to Point 1 2 During measurement from Point 1 to Point 2 3 During measurement from Point 2 to Point 3 4 During measurement from Point 3 to Point 4 5 During measurement from Point 4 to Point 5 0 Normal completion
8 1 to 5 Termination of measurement by an activation of a protective function, Inverter reset, turning ON of MRS signal, turning OFF of the start command, or timeout. (The value in the ones place represents the above- mentioned measurement point.)
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Setting "8888" in Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 enables fine adjustment of load characteristics. When setting Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 = "8888" during operation, the load status at that point is set in the parameter. (Only when the set frequency is within 2 Hz of the frequency of the measurement point, and SU signal is in the ON state.)
NOTE Even if the load measurement is not properly completed, the load characteristics fault is detected based on the load
characteristics found by the already-completed portion of the measurement. During the load characteristics measurement, the load characteristics fault detection is not performed. During the load characteristics measurement, linear acceleration/deceleration is performed even if the S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration is set. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Setting the load characteristics reference manually (Pr.1481 to Pr.1485) Set Pr.1480 Load characteristics measurement mode = "0" (initial value). Set Pr.1486 and Pr.1487 to specify the frequency band for the measurement, and calculate the frequency as the load
characteristics reference (f2 to f4) using the following table. Start the inverter operation, and set Pr.1481 = "8888" during operation at the frequency of the load characteristics
reference 1 (f1). The load status at that point is set in Pr.1481 (only when the set frequency is within 2 Hz of the frequency of the measurement point, and the SU signal is ON).
Set load references in Pr.1482 to Pr.1485 in the same way as Pr.1481.
NOTE When inputting values directly in Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 under V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control, input the
load meter value monitored at each reference frequency. When inputting values directly in Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless
vector control, input the motor torque value monitored at each reference frequency.
f2
f1(Pr.1487)
f3
f4
f5(Pr.1486)
Frequency(Hz)
Time
Pr.1492
Load reference 1 recorded
Load reference 2 recorded
Load reference 3 recorded
Load reference 4 recorded
Load reference 5 recorded
STFON Pr.1480=1 Measurement start
Example of starting measurement from the stop state
SU signal
Y213
1 2 3 4 5 0Read value of Pr.1480
Pr.41
Pr.41
Pr.41
Pr.41
Pr.41
Pr.1492 Pr.1492 Pr.1492 Pr.1492
STF ON
ON
ON ON ON ON ON ON
Operation at the set frequency
Reference Frequency Load reference Load characteristics reference 1 f1: load characteristics minimum frequency (Pr.1487) Pr.1481 Load characteristics reference 2 f2 = (f5 - f1)/4 + f1 Pr.1482 Load characteristics reference 3 f3 = (f5 - f1)/2 + f1 Pr.1483 Load characteristics reference 4 f4 = (f5 - f1) 3/4 + f1 Pr.1484 Load characteristics reference 5 f5: load characteristics maximum frequency (Pr.1486) Pr.1485
4415. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
44
Load fault detection setting (Pr.1488 to Pr.1491) When the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr.1488 Upper limit warning detection width, the Upper limit
warning detection (LUP) signal is output. When the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr.1489 Lower limit warning detection width, the Lower limit warning detection (LDN) signal is output. At the same time, the Load fault warning (LDF) appears on the operation panel.
For the LUP signal, assign the function by setting "211 (positive logic)" or "311 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). For the LDN signal, assign the function by setting "212 (positive logic)" or "312 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
When the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr.1490 Upper limit fault detection width, the protective function (E.LUP) is activated and the inverter output is shut off. When the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr.1491 Lower limit fault detection width, the protective function (E.LDN) is activated and the inverter output is shut off.
To prevent the repetitive on/off operation of the signal due to load fluctuation near the detection range, Pr.1492 Load status detection signal delay time / load reference measurement waiting time can be used to set the delay time. Even when a fault is detected out of the detection range once, the warning is not output if the characteristics value returns to the normal range from a fault state within the output delay time.
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Setting example The load characteristics are calculated from the parameter setting and the output frequency. A setting example is as follows. The reference value is linearly interpolated from the parameter settings. For example, the
reference when the output frequency is 30 Hz is 26%, which is linearly interpolated from values of the reference 2 and the reference 3.
ON
ON
ON
LUP
Load status
Load reference Lower limit warning detection width (Pr.1489)
Upper limit warning detection width (Pr.1488)
LDN
LDF warning indication
Lower limit fault detection width (Pr.1491)
Upper limit fault detection width (Pr.1490)
Output shutoffE.LDN
Pr.1492 Pr.1492
Pr.1492
Pr.1492
ON
ON ON
Reference Frequency Load reference Load characteristics reference 1 f1: Load characteristics minimum frequency (Pr.1487) = 10 Hz Pr.1481 = 15% Load characteristics reference 2 f2 = (f5 - f1)/4 + f1 = 22.5 Hz Pr.1482 = 20% Load characteristics reference 3 f3 = (f5 - f1)/2 + f1 = 35 Hz Pr.1483 = 30% Load characteristics reference 4 f4 = (f5 - f1) 3/4 + f1 = 47.5 Hz Pr.1484 = 60% Load characteristics reference 5 f5: Load characteristics maximum frequency (Pr.1486) = 60 Hz Pr.1485 = 100%
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When the load reference is not set for five points, the load characteristics value is determined by linear interpolation of the set
load reference values only. If there is only one load reference setting, the set load reference is used as the load reference all through the range.
Parameters referred to Pr.41 Up-to-frequency sensitivitypage 484 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
5.10.13 Motor overspeeding detection The Overspeed occurrence (E.OS) is activated when the motor speed exceeds the overspeed detection level. This function prevents the motor from accidentally speeding over the specified value, due to an error in parameter setting, etc.
*1 The motor maximum frequency is set in Pr.702 Maximum motor frequency. When Pr.702 = "9999 (initial value)", the Pr.84 Rated motor frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency.
NOTE During the encoder feedback control operation or under Vector control, the motor speed is compared against Pr.374. Under
Real sensorless vector control or PM sensorless vector control, the output frequency is compared against Pr.374.
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Frequency(Hz)
Load(%)
26
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
374 H800
Overspeed detection level 9999
0 to 590 Hz
If the motor rotation speed exceeds the speed set in Pr.374 during encoder feedback control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control or PM sensorless vector control, Overspeed occurrence (E.OS) occurs, the inverter output is shut off.
9999
If the speed exceeds "the maximum speed (Pr.1, Pr.18) + 20 Hz" during encoder feedback control, Real sensorless vector control, or Vector control, E.OS occurs. During PM sensorless vector control, E.OS occurs when the speed exceeds the "maximum motor frequency + 10 Hz"*1.
ALM
Motor speed
Time
E.OS
Coast to stop
ON
Pr.374
4435. PARAMETERS 5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
44
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
5.11.1 Speed indication and its setting change to rotations per minute
The frequency monitored or set on the operation panel can be changed to the motor speed or the machine speed.
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page To display the motor speed (the number of rotations per minute). To switch the unit of measure to set the operation speed from frequency to motor speed.
Speed indication and its setting change to rotations per minute
P.M000 to P.M002, P.D030
Pr.37, Pr.144, Pr.505, Pr.811 444
To change the item monitored on the operation panel and parameter unit
Operation panel monitor item selection, clearing the cumulative value during monitoring
P.M020 to P.M023, P.M030, P.M031, P.M044, P.M045, P.M050 to P.M052, P.M100 to P.M104
Pr.52, Pr.170, Pr.171, Pr.268, Pr.290, Pr.563, Pr.564, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.891, Pr.992, Pr.1018, Pr.1106 to Pr.1108
446
To change the monitor item whose data is output via terminal FM (CA) or AM
Terminal FM (CA) function selection
P.M040 to P.M042, P.M044, P.M300, P.M301, P.D100
Pr.54, Pr.55, Pr.56, Pr.158, Pr.290, Pr.291, Pr.866
457
To adjust the output via terminal FM (CA) or AM
Terminal FM (CA)/AM calibration
P.M310, P.M320, P.M321, P.M330 to P.M334
Pr.867, Pr.869, C0 (Pr.900), C1 (Pr.901), C8 (Pr.930) to C11 (Pr.931)
463
To check the effects of energy saving Energy saving monitoring P.M023, P.M100, P.M200 to P.M207, P.M300, P.M301
Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158, Pr.891 to Pr.899 467
To assign functions to the output terminals
Output terminal function assignment
P.M400 to P.M406, P.M410 to P.M416, P.M420 to P.M422, P.M431
Pr.190 to Pr.196, Pr.289, Pr.313 to Pr.322
473
To detect the output frequency Up-to-frequency sensitivity Output frequency detection Low speed detection
P.M440 to P.M446 Pr.41 to Pr.43, Pr.50, Pr.116, Pr.865, Pr.870
484
To detect the output current Output current detection Zero current detection
P.M433, P.M460 to P.M464
Pr.150 to Pr.153, Pr.166, Pr.167 487
To detect the output torque Output torque detection P.M470 Pr.864 488 To use the remote output function Remote output P.M500 to P.M502 Pr.495 to Pr.497 489 To use the analog remote output function Analog remote output P.M530 to P.M534 Pr.655 to Pr.659 490
To output the fault code via a terminal Fault code output function P.M510 Pr.76 492
To detect the specified output power Pulse train output of output power P.M520 Pr.799 493
To detect the control circuit temperature
Control circuit temperature monitoring P.M060 Pr.663 494
To monitor pulses Cumulative pulse monitoring P.M610 to P.M613 Pr.635 to Pr.638 321
To output divided encoder pulses Encoder pulse dividing output P.M600, P.M601 Pr.413, Pr.863 495
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 The maximum value of the setting range differs according to the Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.505 Speed setting reference, and it can be calculated from the following formula. The maximum value of Pr.37 < 65535 Pr.505 / Pr.1 setting value (Hz). The maximum setting value of Pr.37 is 9998 if the result of the above formula exceeds 9998.
Indication of motor speed (Pr.37, Pr.144) To change the indication to the motor speed, set the number of motor poles (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12) or the number of motor
poles with the addition of 100 (102, 104, 106, 108, 110, or 112) in Pr.144. Whenever the number of motor poles set in Pr.81 Number of motor poles is changed, the Pr.144 setting changes
automatically in conjunction with Pr.81. However, the Pr.81 setting does not automatically change when the Pr.144 setting is changed. Example 1) Changing the initial value of Pr.81 to "2" will change the Pr.144 setting from "4" to "2". Example 2) Changing the Pr.81 setting to "2" while Pr.144 = "104" will change the Pr.144 setting from "104" to "102".
Indication of machine speed (Pr.37, Pr.505) To change the indication to the machine speed, set a number in Pr.37 which corresponds to the speed of machine
operated at the frequency set in Pr.505. For example, when Pr.505 is set to 60 Hz and Pr.37 is set to "1000", the operation panel indicates "1000" as the monitor
value of machine speed while the output frequency is 60 Hz. "500" is displayed while the output frequency is 30 Hz.
Changing the increment of the speed monitoring and setting (Pr.811) When Pr.811 = "1 or 11", the speed can be set in increments of 0.1 r/min on the PU, or can be set and monitored in
increments of 0.1 r/min via RS-485 communication or other communication with a corresponding communication option installed. (The parameter setting is in 1 r/min increments.)
For the information of the availability of changing the increments of speed setting on communication options, refer to the Instruction Manual of each communication option.
Refer to page 245 for details on the setting increments for the torque limit level.
Monitoring/setting items and its increments When both settings of Pr.37 and Pr.144 are changed from the initial values, a precedence order for these settings is as
follows: Pr.144 = "102 to 112" > Pr.37 = "1 to 9998" > Pr.144 = "2 to 12".
The monitoring/setting items and its increments are listed with the following matrix to show the combination of the Pr.37 and Pr.144 settings.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description FM CA
37 M000 Speed display 0
0 Monitoring and setting of frequency
1 to 9998*1 Set a number for the speed of machine operated at the speed (frequency) set in Pr.505.
505 M001
Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 1 to 590 Hz Set the reference speed (frequency) for Pr.37.
144 M002
Speed setting switchover 4 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 102,
104, 106, 108, 110, 112 Set the number of motor poles for the indication of the motor speed.
811 D030
Set resolution switchover 0
0 Speed setting, running speed monitor increments 1 r/min Torque limit setting
increments 0.1% 1 Speed setting, running speed
monitor increments 0.1 r/min
10 Speed setting, running speed monitor increments 1 r/min Torque limit setting
increments 0.01% 11 Speed setting, running speed
monitor increments 0.1 r/min
4455. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
44
*1 Motor speed r/min conversion formula: frequency 120 / number of motor poles (Pr.144) Machine speed conversion formula: Pr.37 frequency / Pr.505 The Pr.144 value in the above formula is Pr.144 - 100" when any of "102 to 112" is set in Pr.144. The value is "4" when Pr.37 = 0 and Pr.144 = 0. The item set in Pr.505 is consistently a frequency (Hz).
*2 The increment can be changed in Pr.811 from 1 r/min to 0.1 r/min.
NOTE The inverter's output frequency is displayed as synchronous speed under V/F control. The displayed value is "actual motor
speed" + "motor slip". When Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or PM sensorless vector control is selected, the actual motor speed (estimated value by motor slip calculation) is used. When the encoder feedback control or vector control is selected, the actual motor speed from the encoder is used.
When Pr.37 = "0" and Pr.144 = "0", the running speed monitor is displayed with the number of motor poles 4. (Displays 1800 r/min at 60 Hz)
To change the PU main monitor (PU main display), refer to Pr.52. If the setting increment is changed to 1 r/min (Pr.811 = "0 or 10") after setting the running speed in 0.1 r/min (Pr.811 = "1 or
11"), the 0.1 r/min increment may be dropped, in order for the rotations per minute resolution to change from 0.1 r/min to 0.3 r/min (when using four poles).
When using the machine speed display for the parameter unit (FR-PU07), do not change the speed with the up/down key if a set speed above 65535 is displayed. The set speed may become an undetermined value.
When a certain type of communication option is used, the frequency display (setting) is used regardless of the Pr.37 and Pr.144 settings. Refer to the Instruction Manual of each communication option for details. (The frequency display (setting) is always used for HMS network options.)
When Pr.811 = "1 or 11" with the 0.1 r/min increment, the upper limit is as follows. Speed command setting range: 6000 r/min for 2 to 10 motor poles, 5900 r/min for 12 motor poles Running speed monitor such as the operation panel: 6553.5 r/min Full scale of the running speed motor for analog output (terminals FM, CA and AM): 6000 r/min
Parameters referred to Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 428 Pr.22 Torque limit levelpage 245 Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selectionpage 446 Pr.81 Number of motor polespage 221 Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221 Pr.811 Set resolution switchoverpage 245
5.11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via communication
The monitor item to be displayed on the operation panel or the parameter unit can be selected.
Pr.37 setting Pr.144 setting Output frequency indication
Set frequency indication
Running speed indication
Indication of frequency setting parameter
0 (initial value)
0 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 r/min*1*2 0.01 Hz.
2 to 12 0.01 Hz (initial setting) 0.01 Hz (initial setting) 1 r/min*1*2(initial setting)
0.01 Hz (initial setting)
102 to 112 1 r/min*1*2 1 r/min*1*2 1 r/min*1*2 1 r/min*1
1 to 9998
0 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 (machine speed*1) 0.01 Hz.
2 to 12 1 (machine speed*1) 1 (machine speed*1) 1 (machine speed*1) 1 (machine speed*1) 102 to 112 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 r/min*1*2 0.01 Hz.
CAUTION Make sure to set the running speed and the number of motor poles.
Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the machine.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
52 M100
Operation panel main monitor selection
0 (output frequency)
0, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 36, 38 to 46, 50 to 57, 61, 62, 64, 67, 71 to 75, 87 to 98, 100
Select the item monitored on the operation panel or parameter unit. Refer to page 447 for the monitor item selection.
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Monitor item list (Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992) Use Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, or Pr.992 to select the item to monitor on the operation panel or the parameter unit. Refer to the following table to find the setting value for each monitoring. The value in the Pr. setting column is set in each
of the parameters for monitoring (Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, and Pr.992) to determine the monitored item. The value in the RS-485 column is used for the RS-485 communication special monitor selection. The value in the MODBUS RTU column is used for the MODBUS RTU real time monitor. (The items marked with " cannot be selected. The circle in the negative indication (-) column indicates that the indication of negative signed numbers is available.)
774 M101
Operation panel monitor selection 1
9999
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 36, 38 to 46, 50 to 57, 61, 62, 64, 67, 71 to 75, 87 to 98, 100, 9999
Each of the initial items monitored on the operation panel or parameter unit in the monitor mode (output frequency, output current, and output voltage) can be switched to a user-designated item. 9999: Follows the Pr.52 setting.
775 M102
Operation panel monitor selection 2
776 M103
Operation panel monitor selection 3
992 M104
Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection 0 (set frequency)
0 to 3, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 36, 38 to 46, 50 to 57, 61, 62, 64, 67, 71 to 75, 87 to 98, 100
Select the monitor item displayed on the operation panel at the time when the setting dial is pressed.
170 M020 Watt-hour meter clear 9999
0 Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter.
10 Set "10" to monitor the cumulative power in the range of 0 to 9999 kWh via communication.
9999 Set "9999" to monitor the cumulative power in the range of 0 to 65535 kWh via communication.
563 M021
Energization time carrying- over times 0 (0 to 65535)
(Read-only) The number of times that the cumulative energization time exceeded 65535 hours is displayed (read-only).
268 M022
Monitor decimal digits selection 9999
0 Value is displayed in 1 increments (an integer). 1 Value is displayed in 0.1 increments. 9999 No function
891 M023
Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times 9999
0 to 4 Set the number of digits to move the decimal point of the cumulative energy monitored value to the left. The readout peaks out at the upper limit of readout.
9999 The function of moving the decimal point is not available. The readout is reset to 0 when it exceeds the upper limit.
171 M030 Operation hour meter clear 9999
0 Set "0" to clear the operation hour meter.
9999 The readout is always 9999. Nothing changes when "9999" is set.
564 M031
Operating time carrying- over times 0 (0 to 65535)
(Read-only) The number of times that the operating time reaches 65535 hours is displayed. Read-only.
290 M044
Monitor negative output selection 0 0 to 7
Set the availability of negative signals output via terminal AM, to the operation panel, and through communication. (Refer to page 455.)
1018 M045 Monitor with sign selection 9999 0, 1, 9999 Select the item group to enable the indication of negative
signed numbers.
1106 M050 Torque monitor filter 9999
0 to 5 s The filter time constant is selectable for monitoring of the torque. A larger setting results in slower response.
9999 0.3 s filter
1107 M051
Running speed monitor filter 9999
0 to 5 s The filter time constant is selectable for monitoring of the running speed. A larger setting results in slower response.
9999 0.08 s filter
1108 M052
Excitation current monitor filter 9999
0 to 5 s The filter time constant is selectable for monitoring of the motor excitation current. A larger setting results in slower response.
9999 0.3 s filter
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Monitor item Increment and unit
Pr. setting RS-485 MODBUS
RTU
Negative indication
(-)*1 Description
Output frequency (speed)*18 0.01 Hz*17 1/0/100 H01 40201 *21 The inverter output frequency is displayed.
Output current*7*9*18 0.01/0.1 A*6 2/0/100 H02 40202 The inverter output current effective value is displayed.
4475. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
44
Output voltage*7*18 0.1 V 3/0/100 H03 40203 The inverter output voltage is displayed. Fault indication 0/100 Each of the last 8 faults is displayed individually. Set frequency / motor speed setting 0.01 Hz*17 5*2 H05 40205 The set frequency is displayed.
Operation speed 1 (r/min) 6*2 H06 40206 *21
The motor speed is displayed (depending on the settings of Pr.37 and Pr.144). (Refer to page 444.) During encoder feedback control operation or under Vector control, the actual motor speed according to encoder signals is displayed.
Motor torque 0.1% 7*2 H07 40207 The motor torque is displayed as a percentage (0% under V/F control), considering the rated torque as 100%.
Converter output voltage*7 0.1 V 8*2 H08 40208 The DC bus voltage value is displayed.
Regenerative brake duty*8 0.1% 9*2 H09 40209 Brake duty set in Pr.70 for the regeneration unit set in
Pr.30 is displayed. Electronic thermal O/ L relay load factor 0.1% 10*2 H0A 40210 The motor thermal cumulative value is displayed,
considering the thermal operation level as 100%.
Output current peak value*7 0.01/0.1 A*6 11*2 H0B 40211
The peak value of output current, which is constantly stored, is displayed. (It is reset with every startup of the inverter.)
Converter output voltage peak value*7 0.1 V 12*2 H0C 40212
The DC bus voltage peak value, which is constantly stored, is displayed. (It is reset with every startup of the inverter.)
Input power 0.01/0.1 kW*6 13*2 H0D 40213 The power at the inverter input side is displayed.
Output power*9 0.01/0.1 kW*6 14*2 H0E 40214 The power at the inverter output side is displayed.
Load meter 0.1% 17 H11 40217
Torque current is displayed as a percentage, considering Pr.56 setting value as 100% (considering the motor rated torque as 100% under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control).
Motor excitation current*7 0.01 A/0.1 A*6 18 H12 40218 The motor excitation current is displayed.
Position pulse*11 19 H13 40219
The number of pulses per motor rotation during orientation control operation or in the position control mode is displayed. (The output voltage is displayed when a Vector control option is not installed.)
Cumulative energization time*3 1h 20 H14 40220
The cumulative energization time since the inverter shipment is displayed. The number of times an integrated value has reached the maximum value of 65535 hours can be checked in Pr.563.
Orientation status*11 1 22 H16 40222
Monitoring is enabled only during orientation control operation. (The output voltage is displayed when a Vector control option is not installed.) (Refer to page 585.)
Actual operation time*3*4 1 h 23 H17 40223
The cumulative operation time is displayed. The number of times an integrated value has reached the maximum value of 65535 hours can be checked in Pr.564. Use Pr.171 to reset the cumulative operation time. (Refer to page 454.)
Motor load factor 0.1% 24 H18 40224
The output current value is displayed as a percentage, considering the inverter rated current value as 100%. Readout (%) = present output current value / inverter rated current value 100
Cumulative energy*7 0.01/0.1 kWh*5*6 25 H19 40225
The cumulative energy based on the monitored output power is displayed. Use Pr.170 to reset it. (Refer to page 454.)
Position command (lower digits) 1 26 H1A 40226 The position command (decimal) before the electronic
gear is set is displayed.*10Position command (upper digits) 1 27 H1B 40227
Monitor item Increment and unit
Pr. setting RS-485 MODBUS
RTU
Negative indication
(-)*1 Description
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Current position (lower digits) 1 28 H1C 40228 The converted number of the position feedback pulse
into the number of pulses before the electronic gear is set is displayed.*10Current position
(upper digits) 1 29 H1D 40229
Droop pulse (lower digits) 1 30 H1E 40230 The droop pulse before the electronic gear is set is
displayed.*10Droop pulse (upper digits) 1 31 H1F 40231
Torque command 0.1% 32 H20 40232 The torque command value adjusted with Vector control is displayed.
Torque current command 0.1% 33 H21 40233 The command value of the current for torque is
displayed.
Motor output 0.01/0.1 kW*6 34 H22 40234 The output of a machine connected to the motor shaft is displayed. It is determined by multiplying the present output torque with the present motor speed.
Feedback pulse*11 35 H23 40235
The number of pulses fed back from the encoder in one cycle of the sampling is displayed (kept displayed during a stop). (The output voltage is displayed when a Vector control option is not installed.) The sampling time period varies depending on the Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses setting. 1050 or less: 1 s, 1051 to 2100: 0.5 s, 2101 to 4096: 0.25 s
Torque (positive polarity for driving torque/negative polarity for regenerative braking torque)
0.1% 36 H24 40236 The value equal to the motor torque is displayed. A positive value for driving torque or a negative value for regenerative braking torque is displayed.
Trace status 1 38 H26 40238 The trace status is displayed. (Refer to page 649.) SSCNET III communication status*11 1 39 H27 40239
The SSCNET III communication status between the inverter and the controller is displayed. The output voltage is displayed when the FR-A8NS is not installed.
PLC function user monitor 1
Increment set in the register SD1215
40 H28 40240 The user-designated monitor item is displayed using the PLC function. Each value of the following special registers is displayed. SD1216: displayed with the setting value "40", SD1217: displayed with the setting value "41", SD1218: displayed with the setting value "42" (Refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.)
PLC function user monitor 2 41 H29 40241
PLC function user monitor 3 42 H2A 40242
Station number (RS- 485 terminals) 1 43 H2B 40243 The station number of the inverter enabling
communication via the RS-485 terminals is displayed.
Station number (PU) 1 44 H2C 40244 The station number of the inverter enabling communication via the PU connector is displayed.
Station number (CC- Link) 1 45 H2D 40245
The station number of the inverter enabling CC-Link communication is displayed. ("0" is displayed when the FR-A8NS is not installed.)
Motor temperature*11 1C 46 H2E 40246 The temperature of the Vector control dedicated motor with thermistor (SF-V5RU[]T/A) is displayed (for the FR- A8AZ).
Power saving effect Increment and unit vary depending on the parameter settings.
50 H32 40250 The energy saving effect monitoring is enabled. The item to monitor is selectable from among the saved power, the average energy saving, and the energy cost savings. Some of them can be displayed as a percentage according to the parameter settings. (Refer to page 467.)
Cumulative energy saving 51 H33 40251
PID set point 0.1% 52 H34 40252 The set point, measured value, and deviation during PID control operation is displayed. (Refer to page 610.)PID measured value 0.1% 53 H35 40253
PID deviation 0.1% 54 H36 40254
Monitor item Increment and unit
Pr. setting RS-485 MODBUS
RTU
Negative indication
(-)*1 Description
4495. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
45
Input terminal status
55*19
H0F*12 40215*12 The ON/OFF state of the input terminals on the inverter is displayed. (Refer to page 453 for details on indication on the DU.)
Output terminal status H10*13 40216*13
The ON/OFF state of the output terminals on the inverter is displayed. (Refer to page 453 for details on indication on the DU.)
Option input terminal status*11 56
The ON/OFF state of the input terminals on the digital input option (FR-A8AX) is displayed on the DU. (Refer to page 453 for details.)
Option output terminal status*11 57
The ON/OFF state of the output terminals on the digital output option (FR-A8AY) or the relay output option (FR- A8AR) is displayed on the DU. (Refer to page 453 for details.)
Option input terminal status 1 (for communication)*11
H3A*14 40258*14
The ON/OFF state of the input terminals X0 to X15 on the digital input option (FR-A8AX) is monitored via RS-485 communication or other communication when the communication option is installed.
Option input terminal status 2 (for communication)*11
H3B*15 40259*15
The ON/OFF state of the input terminal DY on the digital input option (FR-A8AX) is monitored via RS-485 communication or other communication when the communication option is installed.
Option output terminal status (for communication)*11
H3C*16 40260*16
The ON/OFF state of the output terminals on the digital output option (FR-A8AY) or the relay output option (FR- A8AR) is monitored via RS-485 communication or other communication when the communication option is installed.
Motor thermal load factor 0.1% 61 H3D 40261
The accumulated heat value of the motor thermal O/L relay is displayed. The Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay function) (E.THM) occurs at 100%.
Inverter thermal load factor 0.1% 62 H3E 40262
The accumulated heat value of the inverter thermal O/L relay is displayed. The Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay function) (E.THT) occurs at 100%.
PTC thermistor resistance 0.01 k 64 H40 40264
The PTC thermistor resistance is displayed when Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level 9999. (The output voltage is displayed when Pr.561 = 9999.)
PID measured value 2 0.1% 67 H43 40267
The PID measured value is displayed while the PID control is enabled (Pr.128 "0"), even if PID control operating conditions are not satisfied. (Refer to page 610.)
Cumulative pulse*11 71 H47 40271 *20 The cumulative number of pulses is displayed (for Vector control compatible plug-in option). (Monitoring range: - 32767 to 32767)
Cumulative pulse overflow times*11 72 H48 40272 *20
The number of the cumulative pulses carrying overflow times is displayed (for Vector control compatible plug-in option).
Cumulative pulse (control terminal option)*11
73 H49 40273 *20 The cumulative number of pulses is displayed (for the FR-A8TP). (Monitoring range: -32767 to 32767)
Cumulative pulse overflow times (control terminal option)*11
74 H4A 40274 *20 The number of the cumulative pulse overflow times is displayed (for the FR-A8TP).
Multi-revolution counter*11 1 75 H4B 40275
The multi-revolution encoder counter is monitored when the FR-A8APS is installed. (The output voltage is monitored when the FR-A8APS is not installed.)
Monitor item Increment and unit
Pr. setting RS-485 MODBUS
RTU
Negative indication
(-)*1 Description
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
monitor function of the FR-LU08 or the FR-PU07 for setting. *3 The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0. *4 The actual operation time does not increase if the cumulative running time before power OFF is less than an hour. *5 On the parameter unit (FR-PU07), the unit "kW" is displayed. *6 The increment differs according to the inverter capacity. (Increment left of a slash for FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or
lower. Increment right of a slash for FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.) *7 Since each readout of the output voltage and output current displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU08) is a four-digit number, a value of more
than 9999 is displayed as "----". *8 The setting is available for the standard model. *9 The inverter regards the output current which is less than the specified current level (5% of the rated inverter current) as 0 A. Therefore, each
readout of an output current and output power may show "0" if a too small-capacity motor is used as contrasted with the inverter capacity and the output current falls below the specified value.
*10 The displayed item can be changed to the pulse after the electronic gear is set by using Pr.430 Pulse monitor selection. (Refer to page 321.) *11 Monitoring is available when the compatible plug-in option or control terminal option is installed. *12 The details of bits for the input terminal status are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the inverter. "" denotes an indefinite
(null) value.)
*13 The details of bits for the output terminal status are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the inverter. "" denotes an indefinite (null) value.)
32-bit cumulative energy (lower 16 bits) 1 kWh H4D 40277 The upper or lower 16 bits of the 32-bit cumulative
energy is displayed on each indication. It is monitored via RS-485 communication or other communication with a communication option installed. (To find the monitor codes for each communication option, refer to the Instruction Manual of each communication option.)
32-bit cumulative energy (upper 16 bits) 1 kWh H4E 40278
32-bit cumulative energy (lower 16 bits)
0.01 kWh/0.1 kWh*6 H4F 40279
32-bit cumulative energy (upper 16 bits)
0.01 kWh/0.1 kWh*6 H50 40280
Remote output value 1 0.1% 87 H57 40287
Each setting value of Pr.656 to Pr.659 (Analog remote output 1 to 4) is displayed. (Refer to page 490.)
Remote output value 2 0.1% 88 H58 40288
Remote output value 3 0.1% 89 H59 40289
Remote output value 4 0.1% 90 H5A 40290
PID manipulated amount 0.1% 91 H5B 40291 The PID control manipulated amount is displayed. (Refer
to page 610.) Second PID set point 0.1% 92 H5C 40292
The set point, measured value, or deviation is displayed during the second PID control operation. (Refer to page 610.)
Second PID measured value 0.1% 93 H5D 40293
Second PID deviation 0.1% 94 H5E 40294
Second PID measured value 2 0.1% 95 H5F 40295
The PID measured value is displayed while the second PID control is enabled (Pr.753 "0"), even if PID control operating conditions are not satisfied. (Refer to page 610.)
Second PID manipulated amount 0.1% 96 H60 40296 The second PID control manipulated amount is
displayed. (Refer to page 610.) Dancer main set speed 0.01 Hz. 97 H61 40297 The set speed for main speed during the dancer control
operation is displayed.
Control circuit temperature 1C 98 H62 40298
The temperature of the control circuit board is displayed. (Refer to page 494.) When negative number not displayed: 0 to 100C When negative number displayed: -20 to 100C
Monitor item Increment and unit
Pr. setting RS-485 MODBUS
RTU
Negative indication
(-)*1 Description
b15 b0
CS--S2 RES STP (STOP) MRS RHJOG RM RL RT AU STR STFS1
b15 b0 ---- - - - ABC2So (SO) ABC1 FU OL IPF SU RUN-
4515. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
45
*14 The details of bits for the option input terminal status 1 are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the FR-A8AX.) Every bit is 0 (OFF) when the option is not installed.
*15 The details of bits for the option input terminal status 2 are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the FR-A8AX. "" denotes an indefinite (null) value.) Every bit is 0 (OFF) when the option is not installed.
*16 The details of bits for the option output terminal status are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the FR-A8AY/A8AR. "" denotes an indefinite (null) value.) Every bit is 0 (OFF) when the option is not installed.
*17 The increment is 1 when Pr.37 = "1 to 9998" or when Pr.144 = "2 to 12" or "102 to 112". (Refer to page 444.) *18 The monitored values are retained even if an inverter fault occurs. Resetting clears the retained values. *19 Parameter setting is not available for setting the item as the main monitor item on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-
PU07). Use the monitor function of the FR-LU08 or the FR-PU07 for setting. *20 Negative values are not displayed on the operation panel. The values "-1 to -32767" are displayed as "65535 to 32769" on the operation panel. *21 Setting of Pr.1018 Monitor with sign selection is required. Also, it will be displayed without a minus sign on the operation panel. Confirm the
rotation direction with the [FWD] or [REV] indicator.
Monitor display for operation panel (Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776) When Pr.52 = "0" (initial value), the monitoring of output frequency, output current, output voltage and fault display can be
selected in sequence by pressing .
Among the items set in Pr.52, the load meter and motor load factor are displayed in the second screen (initially set to monitor the output current). Other items are displayed in the third screen (initially set to monitor the output voltage).
The first screen (initially set to monitor the output frequency) is displayed at power-ON in the initial setting. To change the
screen displayed at power-ON, display the screen you want to display at power-ON, and hold down for 1 second.
To monitor the output frequency at power-ON again, display the screen of output frequency, and hold down for 1
second.
The following is the screen flow diagram when Pr.52 = "20" (cumulative energization time).
The monitor item to be displayed is set using Pr.774 for the first screen, Pr.775 for the second screen, and Pr.776 for the third screen. When Pr.774 to Pr.776 = "9999" (initial value), the Pr.52 setting value is used.
NOTE On the operation panel (FR-DU08), the "Hz" unit indicator is lit while displaying the output frequency, the "Hz" blinks when
displaying the set frequency.
b15 b0 X11X12X13X14 X10 X9 X8 X6X7 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0X15
b15 b0 ---- - - - -- - - - - - DY-
b15 b0 ---- - RA3 RA2 Y6RA1 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0-
First screen (displayed at power-ON) Second screen Third screen Fault record With fault
Output current monitoring
Output voltage monitoringOutput frequency monitoring
First screen (displayed at power-ON) Second screen Third screen Fault record With fault
Output current monitoring Cumulative energization time monitoringOutput frequency monitoring
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Displaying the set frequency during stop (Pr.52) When Pr.52 = "100", the set frequency is displayed during stop, and output frequency is displayed during running. (LED
of Hz blinks during stop and is lit during operation.)
*1 Displays the frequency that is output when the start command is ON. The value considers the maximum/minimum frequency and frequency jumps. It is different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr.52 = "5".
NOTE During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence appears. During output shutoff by the MRS signal, the values displayed are the same as during a stop. During offline auto tuning, the tuning state monitor takes priority.
Operation panel setting dial push display (Pr.992) Use Pr.992 to select the monitor that appears when the setting dial on the operation panel (FR-DU08) is pushed. When Pr.992 = "0 (initial value)", keep pressing the setting dial when in PU operation mode or External/PU combined
operation mode 1 (Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "3") to show the presently set frequency. When Pr.992 = "100", the set frequency is displayed during stop, and output frequency is displayed during running.
*1 Displays the frequency that is output when the start command is ON. The value considers the maximum/minimum frequency and frequency jumps. It is different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr.992 = "5".
Monitoring I/O terminals on the operation panel (FR-DU08) (Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992)
When Pr.52 (Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992) = "55 to 57", the I/O terminal state can be monitored on the operation panel (FR- DU08).
When a terminal is ON, the corresponding LED segment is ON. The center LED segments are always ON.
*1 The setting value "56 or 57" can be set even if the option is not installed. All are OFF when the option is not connected.
On the I/O terminal monitor, the upper LEDs indicate the input terminal status, and the lower LEDs indicate the output terminal status.
Pr.52 setting Status Output frequency Output current Output voltage Fault monitor
0 During running/ stop Output frequency
Output current Output voltage Fault monitor 100
During stop Set frequency*1
During running Output frequency
Pr.992 setting Status Monitor displayed by the setting dial push 0 During running/stop Set frequency (PU direct-in frequency)
100 During stop Set frequency*1
During running Output frequency
Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992 setting Monitor item Monitor description
55 I/O terminal status Displays the I/O terminal ON/OFF state of the inverter.
56*1 Option input terminal status Displays input terminal ON/OFF state of the digital input option (FR-A8AX)
57*1 Option output terminal status Displays output terminal ON/OFF state of the digital output option (FR-A8AY) or the relay output option (FR-A8AR).
The center LED segments are always ON.
Segments corresponding to input terminals - Display example -
When signals STF, RH and RUN are on
Segments corresponding to output terminals
A
RL RH
RT MRS
RUNABC1
STP (STOP) RM AU
ABC2 OL
SU IPF FU
STR STFRES CSJOG
So (SO)
S1 S2
4535. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
45
The decimal point of the last digit on the LED is lit for the input option terminal monitor.
The decimal point of the second last digit on the LED is lit for the output option terminal monitor.
Monitoring and resetting cumulative power (Pr.170, Pr.891) When the cumulative power is monitored (Pr.52 = "25"), the output power monitor value is added up and is updated in 100
ms increments. The values are stored in EEPROM every 10 minutes. The values are also stored in EEPROM at power OFF or inverter
reset. Increments and ranges of monitoring on the operation panel or parameter unit and via communication (RS-485
communication or other communication with communication option installed) are as follows (when Pr.891 = "9999 (initial value)").
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, the value is measured in 0.01 kWh increments and the upper five digits are displayed. For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, the value is measured in 0.1 kWh increments and the upper five digits are displayed. For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, the cumulative energy up to 999.99 kWh is displayed in 0.01 increments such as "999.99", and that of 1000 kWh or more is displayed in 0.1 increments such as "1000.0".
*2 The display in 0.01 kWh increments is available only for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. The decimal point position on the watt-hour meter can be shifted to left. The number of digits to be shifted is equal to the
setting of Pr.891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times. For example, when Pr.891 = "2", the cumulative power value 1278.56 kWh is displayed as 12.78 (in 100 kWh increments) on the operation panel, or displayed as 12 on a display used for monitoring via communication.
When Pr.891 = "0 to 4", the meter stops at the maximum number. When Pr.891 = "9999", the meter returns to 0 and the counting starts again.
Writing "0" in Pr.170 clears the cumulative power monitor.
NOTE When Pr.170 is read just after "0" has been written in Pr.170, the setting "9999" or "10" is displayed.
Monitoring cumulative energization time (Pr.563) When the cumulative energization time is selected as a monitor item (Pr.52 = "20"), the counter of cumulative energization
time since the inverter shipment accumulated every hour is displayed. The cumulative energization time is displayed in 0.001-hour increments until the cumulative time reaches one hour, and
then the time is displayed in 1-hour increments.
On operation panel or parameter unit*1 Via communication
Range Increment Range
Increment Pr.170 = "10" Pr.170 = "9999"
0 to 999.99 kWh 0.01 kWh*2
0 to 9999 kWh 0 to 65535 kWh (initial value) 1 kWh1000.0 to 9999.9 kWh 0.1 kWh
10000 to 99999 kWh 1 kWh
The center LED segments are always ON.
Decimal point LED of the last digit LED is always ON
X1 X0
X2 X3 X6 X9
X4 X7
X13 X14 X15X12
DYX10 X11
X5 X8
The center LED segments are always ON.
Decimal point LED of the second last digit LED is always ON
Y1 Y0
Y2 Y3 Y6
Y4
RA3RA1RA2
Y5 FR-A8AY
FR-A8AR
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The EEPROM is updated every minute until the cumulative energization time reaches one hour, and then the EEPROM is updated every 10 minutes. The EEPROM is also updated at power OFF.
When the cumulative energization time counter reaches 65535, it starts from 0 again. The number of times the cumulative energization time counter reaches 65535 can be checked with Pr.563.
NOTE The cumulative energization time does not increase if the power is turned OFF after less than an hour.
Actual operation time monitoring (Pr.171, Pr.564) On the actual operation time monitoring (Pr.52 = "23"), the inverter running time is added up every hour. (Time is not added
up during a stop.) The time is displayed in 1-hour increments. The values are stored in EEPROM every 10 minutes. The EEPROM is also updated at power OFF. When the cumulative energization time counter reaches 65535, it starts from 0 again. The number of times the actual
operation time counter reaches 65535 can be checked with Pr.564. Setting "0" in Pr.171 clears the actual operation time meter.
NOTE The actual operation time does not increase if the cumulative running time before power OFF is less than an hour. Once "0" is set in Pr.171, the setting of Pr.171 is always turned to "9999" afterwards. Setting "9999" does not clear the actual
operation time meter.
Hiding the decimal places for the monitors (Pr.268) The numerical figures after a decimal point displayed on the operation panel may fluctuate during analog input, etc. The
decimal places can be hidden by selecting the decimal digits with Pr.268.
NOTE The number of readout digits of the cumulative energization time (Pr.52 = "20"), actual operation time (Pr.52 = "23"),
cumulative energy (Pr.52 = "25"), and cumulative energy saving (Pr.52 = "51") does not change.
Enabling display of negative numbers during monitoring (Pr.290) Negative signal outputs can be selected for the items monitored via terminal AM (analog voltage output), via a
communication option, and on the operation panel. To check which items can be monitored with indication of negative numbers, refer to the monitor items list (on page 447).
: Negative numbers indication disabled (positive only) *1 Indication with a minus sign is not possible via the following communication methods.
RS-485 communication (Mitsubishi inverter protocol, MODBUS RTU), SLMP communication
Pr.268 setting Description 9999 (initial value) No function
0 For the first or second decimal places (0.1 increments or 0.01 increments) of the monitor, numbers in the first decimal place and smaller are rounded to display an integral value (1 increments). The monitor value equal to or smaller than 0.99 is displayed as 0.
1 When monitoring with the second decimal place (0.01 increments), the 0.01 decimal place is dropped and the monitor displays the first decimal place (0.1 increments). When monitoring with the first decimal place, the display will not change.
Pr.290 setting Negative indication (-)
Terminal AM Operation panel Communication option*1 FR Configurator2 etc.*2
0 (initial value) 1 Enabled 2 Enabled 3 Enabled Enabled 4 Enabled Enabled 5 Enabled Enabled Enabled 6 Enabled Enabled Enabled 7 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
4555. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
45
*2 Under the condition that the high-speed sampling and the negative output are selected for FR Configurator2, the display range of the output frequency (Monitor No.1) is -300.00 to 300.00 Hz. A value outside the range is clamped at -300.00 Hz or 300.00 Hz. Under the same condition, the display range of the running speed (Monitor No.6) is -30000 to 30000 r/min. A value outside the range is clamped at -30000 r/min or 30000 r/min. During the trace sampling, the same display ranges are applied. A value outside the ranges is clamped.
Select the item group to enable the indication of negative signed numbers by setting Pr.1018 Monitor with sign selection.
: Negative numbers displayed with minus sign, : Negative numbers not displayed (positive only) *1 Negative numbers are not displayed on the operation panel. Confirm the rotation direction with the [FWD] or [REV] indicator. *2 Signed values are displayed only on the FR-DU08 (-9999 to 9999). Unsigned values (0 to 9999) are displayed on other devices. *3 Full 32-bit data (-2147483648 to 2147483647) is displayed during monitoring via the communication option. *4 Monitor the lower and upper digits at the same timing. Otherwise, the data may not be reliable.
NOTE When the output via terminal AM (analog voltage output) is set to "Negative numbers indication enabled", the output is within
the range of -10 to +10 VDC. Connect the meter with which output level is matched. Parameter unit (FR-PU07) displays only positive values.
Monitor item Pr.1018 setting
9999 0 1 Output frequency *1 *1
Motor speed *1 *1
Motor torque
Position command (lower)*4 *2 *2 *3
Position command (upper)*4 *2 *2 *3
Current position (lower)*4 *2 *2 *3
Current position (upper)*4 *2 *2 *3
Droop pulse (lower)*4 *2 *2 *3
Droop pulse (upper)*4 *2 *2 *3
Torque command Torque current command Torque (positive polarity for driving torque/negative polarity for regenerative braking torque)
Motor temperature PID deviation Cumulative pulse Cumulative pulse overflow times Cumulative pulse (control terminal option) Cumulative pulse overflow times (control terminal option)
Remote output 1 Remote output 2 Remote output 3 Remote output 4 PID manipulated amount Second PID deviation Second PID manipulated amount Control circuit temperature
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Monitor filter (Pr.1106 to Pr.1108) The response level (filter time constant) of the following monitor indicators can be adjusted. Increase the setting when a
monitor indicator is unstable, for example.
Parameters referred to Pr.30 Regenerative function selection, Pr.70 Special regenerative brake dutypage 724 Pr.37 Speed display, Pr.144 Speed setting switchoverpage 444 Pr.55 Frequency monitoring reference, Pr.56 Current monitoring reference, Pr.866 Torque monitoring referencepage 457
5.11.3 Monitor display selection for terminals FM/CA and AM
Monitored values are output in either of the following: analog voltage (terminal AM), pulse train (terminal FM) for the FM type inverter, or analog current (terminal CA) for the CA type inverter. The signal (monitor item) to be output to terminal FM/CA and terminal AM can be selected.
Pr. Monitor number Monitor indicator name
1106
7 Motor torque 17 Load meter 32 Torque command 33 Torque current command 36 Torque monitor
1107 6 Motor speed 1108 18 Motor excitation current
4575. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
45
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher. *3 Function assigned to Pr.185 JOG terminal function selection. *4 Valid only for the FM type inverters.
Monitor description list (Pr.54, Pr.158) Set Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection for monitoring via terminal FM (pulse train output) or terminal CA (analog
current output). Set Pr.158 AM terminal function selection for monitoring via terminal AM (analog voltage output). Negative signals can
be output via terminal AM (in the range of -10 to +10 VDC). The circle in the Negative output column indicates that the output of negative signals is available via terminal AM. (To enable or disable the output of negative signals, refer to page 446.)
Refer to the following table and select the item to be monitored. (Refer to page 447 for the list of monitor items.)
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description FM CA
54 M300
FM/CA terminal function selection
1 (output frequency)
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 32 to 34, 36, 46, 50, 52 to 53, 61, 62, 67, 70, 87 to 90, 92, 93, 95, 97, 98
Select the item monitored via terminal FM or CA.
158 M301 AM terminal function selection
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 32 to 34, 36, 46, 50, 52 to 54, 61, 62, 67, 70, 87 to 98
Select the item monitored via terminal AM.
55 M040
Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
Set the full-scale value when outputting the frequency monitor value to terminals FM, CA and AM.
56 M041 Current monitoring reference Inverter rated
current 0 to 500 A*1 Enter the full-scale value of a meter which
corresponds to the output via terminal FM/CA or terminal AM to monitor the output current.0 to 3600 A*2
866 M042 Torque monitoring reference 150% 0 to 400%
Enter the full-scale value of a meter which corresponds to the output via terminal FM/CA or terminal AM to monitor the motor torque.
290 M044
Monitor negative output selection 0 0 to 7
Set the availability of negative signals output via terminal AM, to the operation panel, and through communication. (Refer to page 455.)
291 D100 Pulse train I/O selection 0
Pulse train input (terminal JOG)
Pulse train output (terminal FM)
0 JOG signal*3 FM output*4
1 Pulse train input FM output*4
10*4 JOG signal*3 High-speed pulse train output (50% duty)
11*4 Pulse train input High-speed pulse train output (50% duty)
20*4 JOG signal*3 High-speed pulse train output (ON width fixed)
21*4 Pulse train input High-speed pulse train output (ON width fixed)
100*4 Pulse train input
High-speed pulse train output (ON width fixed). Output the pulse train input without changes.
Monitor item Increment and unit
Pr.54 (FM/CA), Pr.158 (AM) setting
Terminal FM, CA, AM full-scale value
Negative (-)
output Remarks
Output frequency 0.01 Hz 1 Pr.55 *3
Output current*2 0.01/0.1 A*1 2 Pr.56
Output voltage 0.1 V 3 200 V class: 400 V, 400 V class: 800 V
Frequency setting value 0.01 Hz 5 Pr.55
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Motor speed 1 (r/min) 6 The value converted with the Pr.37, Pr.144 value from Pr.55.
*3 Refer to page 444 for the monitoring of the operation speed.
Motor torque 0.1% 7 Pr.866 Converter output voltage*2 0.1 V 8 200 V class: 400 V,
400 V class: 800 V Regenerative brake duty*4 0.1% 9 Brake duty decided by
Pr.30, Pr.70. Electronic thermal O/L relay load factor 0.1% 10 Electronic thermal O/L
relay (100%) Output current peak value 0.01/0.1 A*1 11 Pr.56
Converter output voltage peak value 0.1 V 12 200 V class: 400 V,
400 V class: 800 V
Input power 0.01/0.1 kW*1 13 Inverter rated power 2
Output power*2 0.01/0.1 kW*1 14 Inverter rated power 2
Load meter 0.1% 17 Pr.866 Motor excitation current 0.01 A/0.1 A*1 18 Pr.56
Reference voltage output 21
Terminal FM: When Pr.291 = "0 or 1", output is 1440 pulses/s. When Pr.291 "0 or 1", output is 50k pulses/s. Terminal CA: Output is 20 mA. Terminal AM: Output is 10 V.
Motor load factor 0.1% 24 200% Torque command 0.1% 32 Pr.866 Torque current command 0.1% 33 Pr.866 Motor output 0.01/0.1 kW*1 34 Rated motor capacity Torque (positive polarity for driving torque/ negative polarity for regenerative braking torque)
0.1% 36 Pr.866
Motor temperature 1C 46 Pr.751 Enabled when the FR-A8AZ is used.
Energy saving effect
Increment and unit vary depending on the parameter settings.
50 Inverter capacity For the information of the power saving effect monitoring, refer to page 467.
PID set point 0.1% 52 100% Refer to page 610 for the PID control.PID measured value 0.1% 53 100%
PID deviation 0.1% 54*5 100%
Motor thermal load factor 0.1% 61 Motor thermal activation level (100%)
Inverter thermal load factor 0.1% 62
Inverter thermal activation level (100%)
PID measured value 2 0.1% 67 100% Refer to page 610 for the PID control. PLC function analog output 0.1% 70 100% Enabled by Pr.414 = "1 or 2".
Refer to page 646 for the PLC function. Remote output value 1 0.1% 87 1000%
Refer to page 490 for the analog remote output.
Remote output value 2 0.1% 88 1000% Remote output value 3 0.1% 89 1000% Remote output value 4 0.1% 90 1000%
Monitor item Increment and unit
Pr.54 (FM/CA), Pr.158 (AM) setting
Terminal FM, CA, AM full-scale value
Negative (-)
output Remarks
4595. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
46
*1 The increment differs according to the inverter capacity. (Increment left of a slash for FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. Increment right of a slash for FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
*2 The inverter regards the output current which is less than the specified current level (5% of the rated inverter current) as 0 A. Therefore, each readout of an output current and output power may show "0" if a too small-capacity motor is used as contrasted with the inverter capacity and the output current falls below the specified value.
*3 Setting of Pr.1018 Monitor with sign selection is required. *4 This signal is available only for the standard model. *5 The setting is available only in Pr.158 (terminal AM).
Frequency monitor reference (Pr.55) Enter the full scale value of a meter used to monitor the output frequency, the frequency setting value, or the dancer main
speed setting via terminal FM/CA or terminal AM. For the FM type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the meter corresponding to a pulse train of 1440 pulses/s (or 50k
pulses/s) output via terminal FM. Enter the frequency value (for example, 60 Hz or 120 Hz) at full scale of the meter (1 mA analog meter) installed between terminal FM and terminal SD. Pulse speed is proportional to the output frequency of the inverter. (The maximum output pulse train is 2400 pulses/s (or 55k pulses/s).)
For the CA type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the meter corresponding to a current of 20 mADC output via terminal CA. Enter the current value (for example, 60 Hz or 120 Hz) at full scale of the meter (20 mADC ammeter) installed between terminal CA and terminal 5. Output current is proportional to the frequency. (The maximum output current is 20 mADC.)
Enter the full-scale value of the meter corresponding to a voltage of 10 VDC output via terminal AM. Enter the current value (for example, 60 Hz or 120 Hz) at full scale of the meter (10 VDC voltmeter) installed between terminal AM and terminal 5. Output voltage is proportional to the frequency. (The maximum output voltage is 10 VDC.)
PID manipulated amount 0.1% 91*5 100%
Refer to page 610 for the PID control.
Second PID set point 0.1% 92 100% Second PID measured value 0.1% 93 100%
Second PID deviation 0.1% 94*5 100% Second PID measured value 2 0.1% 95 100%
Second PID manipulated amount 0.1% 96*5 100%
Dancer main speed setting 0.01 Hz. 97 Pr.55 For details on dancer control, refer to
page 622. Control circuit temperature 1C 98 100C Terminal FM/CA: 0 to 100C,
Terminal AM: -20 to 100C
Monitor item Increment and unit
Pr.54 (FM/CA), Pr.158 (AM) setting
Terminal FM, CA, AM full-scale value
Negative (-)
output Remarks
1Hz 60Hz (initial value)
Output frequency 590Hz
Setting range of Pr.55
2400 (55k) 1440 (50k)
Pu ls
e sp
ee d
(p ul
se s/
s)
Setting range of Pr.55
20 mADC
50Hz (initial value)
590Hz
Output Current
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 FM type: 60 Hz, CA type: 50 Hz *2 Output of negative signals enabled when Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection = "1 or 3"
Current monitor reference (Pr.56) Enter the full scale value of a meter used to monitor the output current, the output current peak value, or the motor
excitation current via terminal FM/CA or terminal AM. For the FM type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the meter corresponding to a pulse train of 1440 pulses/s (or 50k
pulses/s) output via terminal FM. Enter the current value at full scale of the meter (1 mA analog meter) installed between terminal FM and terminal SD. Pulse speed is proportional to the output current monitored. (The maximum output pulse train is 2400 pulses/s (or 55k pulses/s).)
For the CA type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the current meter corresponding to a current of 20 mADC output via terminal CA. Enter the current value at full scale of the meter (20 mADC ammeter) installed between terminal CA and terminal 5. Output current is proportional to the output current monitored. (The maximum output current is 20 mADC.)
Enter the full-scale value of the current meter corresponding to a voltage of 10 VDC output via terminal AM. Enter the current value at full scale of the meter (10 VDC voltmeter) installed between terminal AM and terminal 5. Output voltage is proportional to the output current monitored. (The maximum output voltage is 10 VDC.)
Torque monitor reference (Pr.866) Enter the full scale value of a meter used to monitor the output torque via terminal FM/CA or terminal AM. For the FM type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the torque meter corresponding to a pulse train of 1440 pulses/s (or
50k pulses/s) output via terminal FM. Enter the torque value at full scale of the meter (1 mA analog meter) installed between terminal FM and terminal SD. Pulse speed is proportional to the torque monitored. (The maximum output pulse train is 2400 pulses/s (or 55k pulses/s).)
For the CA type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the torque meter corresponding to a current of 20 mADC output via terminal CA. Enter the torque value at full scale of the meter (20 mADC ammeter) installed between terminal CA and terminal 5. Output current is proportional to the torque monitored. (The maximum output voltage is 20 mADC.)
Enter the full-scale value of the torque meter corresponding to a voltage of 10 VDC output via terminal AM. Enter the torque value at full scale of the meter (10 VDC voltmeter) installed between terminal AM and terminal 5. Output voltage is proportional to the torque monitored. (The maximum output voltage is 10 VDC.)
Terminal FM pulse train output (Pr.291) Two kinds of pulse trains can be outputted via terminal FM. When Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "0 (initial value) or 1", pulse train is output via terminal FM, with a maximum
output of 8 VDC and 2400 pulses/s. The pulse width can be adjusted on the operation panel or the parameter unit by using the calibration parameter C0 (Pr.900) FM/CA terminal calibration.
A 1 mA full-scale DC ammeter or a digital meter can be used to give commands (such as inverter output frequency command).
Setting range of Pr.55
10VDC
60Hz (initial value)
590Hz
-10VDC
60Hz
*2
Output voltage
*1
4615. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
46
*1 Not needed when the operation panel or the parameter unit is used for calibration. Use a calibration resistor when the indicator (frequency meter) needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device because the indicator is located far from the inverter. However, the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resistor is connected. In this case, calibrate additionally with the operation panel or parameter unit.
*2 In the initial setting, 1 mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s terminal FM are used at 60 Hz.
When Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "10, 11, 20, 21, or 100", this is high-speed pulse train output for open collector output. A maximum pulse train of 55k pulses/s is outputted. There are two types of pulse width: "50% duty" and "fixed ON width"; this cannot be adjusted with the calibration parameter C0 (Pr.900) FM/CA terminal calibration.
*1 The pulses may weaken due to stray capacitance in the wiring if the wiring is long, and the pulse counter will be unable to recognize the pulses. Connect the open collector output to the power source with a pull-up resistor if the wiring is too long. Check the pulse counter specs for the pull-up resistance. The resistance should be at 80 mA of the load current or less.
When Pr.291 = "10, or 11", the pulse cycle is 50% duty (ON width and OFF width are the same). When Pr.291 = "20, 21, or 100", the pulse ON width is output at a fixed width (approx. 10 s). At the "100" setting, the same pulse train from the pulse train input (terminal JOG) will be outputted. This is used when
running at a synchronized speed with more than one inverter. (Refer to page 406.)
Inverter
24V
2.2K
20K
3.3K
SD
FM
FM output circuit
8VDC
T2
T1
Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0 Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr.55 (frequency monitor)
Set with Pr.56 (current monitor)
(Digital indicator)
(-)1440 pulses/s(+) FM
SD
Indicator 1mA full-scale analog meter
(+) 1mA
FM
SD
Calibration resistor *1
(-)
FM
SD
Inverter
Pull up resistance *3
Pulse counter
High-speed pulse train output circuit (example of connection to pulse counter)
Hi *4 Low
50%duty 50%duty
Pulse of Pr.291 = "10, 11"
Hi *4 Low
Approx. 10 s Approx. 10 s Pulse of Pr.291 = "20, 21, 100"
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 "HIGH" indicates when the open collector output transistor is OFF.
*1 50k pulses/s when the monitor output value is 100%.
NOTE Terminal JOG input specifications (pulse train input or contact input) can be selected with Pr.291. When changing the setting
value, be careful not to change the terminal JOG input specifications. (Refer to page 406 for pulse train input.) Install a meter between terminals FM and SD after changing the Pr.291 setting value. During output the pulse train via terminal
FM (voltage output), be careful that voltage is not added to terminal FM. The meter cannot be used for the pulse input in a source logic type. If the All parameter clear is performed when the high-speed pulse train output is selected (Pr.291 = "10, 11, 20, 21, or 100"),
the output via terminal FM is changed from high-speed pulse train output to the voltage output because the Pr.291 setting resets to the initial value "0". To perform the All parameter clear, remove the device connected to terminal FM first.
5.11.4 Adjustment of terminal FM/CA and terminal AM The output via terminal FM/CA or terminal AM corresponding to the full-scale value of a meter can be adjusted (calibrated) on the operation panel or the parameter unit.
*1 The parameter number in parentheses is that used (displayed) on the LCD operation panel and the parameter unit.
Terminal FM calibration (C0 (Pr.900)) The output via terminal FM is set to the pulse output. By setting C0 (Pr.900), the meter connected to the inverter can be
calibrated by parameter setting without use of a calibration resistor.
Item High-speed pulse train output specifications
Output method NPN open collector output Voltage between collector-emitter 30 V (max.) Maximum permissible load current 80 mA Output pulse rate 0 to 55k pulses/s*1
Output resolution 3 pulses/s (excluding jitter)
3.3k
Terminal FM0, 1
10, 11, 20, 21, 100
Pr.291
8.2V
FM output circuit
Open collector output circuit
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description C0 (900) M310*1
FM/CA terminal calibration Calibrates the scale of the meter connected to terminals FM and CA.
C1 (901) M320*1 AM terminal calibration Calibrates the scale of the analog meter connected to terminal
AM. C8 (930) M330*1 Current output bias signal 0% 0 to 100% Set the signal value at the minimum analog current output.
C9 (930) M331*1 Current output bias current 0% 0 to 100% Set the current value at the minimum analog current output.
C10 (931) M332*1 Current output gain signal 100% 0 to 100% Sets the signal value when the analog current output is at
maximum. C11 (931) M333*1 Current output gain current 100% 0 to 100% Set the current value at the maximum analog current output.
867 M321 AM output filter 0.01 s 0 to 5 s Set a filter for output via terminal AM.
869 M334 Current output filter 0.01 s 0 to 5 s Set a filter for output via terminal CA.
4635. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
46
The pulse train output via terminal FM can be used for digital display on a digital counter. The output is 1440 pulses/s at full scale. (Refer to page 457 for the full-scale value of each monitor item.)
*1 Not needed when the operation panel or the parameter unit is used for calibration. Use a calibration resistor when the indicator (frequency meter) needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device because the indicator is located far from the inverter. However, the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resistor is connected. In this case, perform calibration using the operation panel or parameter unit.
*2 In the initial setting, 1 mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s terminal FM are used at 60 Hz.
Calibrate the output via terminal FM in the following procedure.
1. Connect an indicator (frequency meter) across terminals FM and SD on the inverter. (Note the polarity. Terminal FM is positive.)
2. When a calibration resistor has already been connected, adjust the resistance to "0" or remove the resistor.
3. Set a monitor item in Pr.54 AM terminal function selection. (Refer to page 457.) When the output frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor, set the output frequency or current value at which the output signal will be 1440 pulses/s, using Pr.55 Frequency monitoring reference or Pr.56 Current monitoring reference beforehand. Normally, at 1440 pulses/s the meter deflects to full-scale.
4. If the meter needle does not point to maximum even at maximum output, calibrate it with C0 (Pr.900).
NOTE When outputting an item such as the output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr.54 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and calibrate. A pulse train of 1440 pulses/s are output via terminal FM. When Pr.310 Analog meter voltage output selection = "21", the output via terminal AM cannot be calibrated. For details on
Pr.310, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8AY. The wiring length to terminal FM should be 200 m at maximum. The initial value of the calibration parameter C0 (Pr.900) is set to 1 mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s terminal FM pulse train
output at 60 Hz. The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400 pulses/s. When connecting a frequency meter between terminals FM-SD and monitoring the output frequency, it is necessary to change
Pr.55 to the maximum frequency, since the FM terminal output will be saturated at the initial value when the maximum frequency reaches 100 Hz or greater.
Calibration with the calibration parameter C0 (Pr.900) cannot be done when Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "10, 11, 20, 21, or 100" (high-speed pulse train output).
8VDC
T2
T1
Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0 Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr.55 (frequency monitor)
Set with Pr.56 (current monitor)
(Digital indicator)
(-)1440 pulses/s(+) FM
SD
Indicator 1mA full-scale analog meter
(+) 1mA
FM
SD
Calibration resistor *1
(-)
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Calibration procedure for terminal FM when using the operation panel (FR-DU08)
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.
Calibration is also possible in the External operation mode.
3. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
4. Calibration parameter selection
Turn until " " appears. Press to display " ".
5. Selecting a parameter
Turn until " " (C0 (Pr.900) FM/CA terminal calibration) appears. Press to enable the
parameter setting. The monitored value of the item (initially the output frequency) selected by Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection will appear.
6. Pulse output via terminal FM
If stopped, press or to start the inverter operation. (To monitor the output frequency, motor connection
is not required.) When a monitor that does not require inverter operation is set in Pr.54, calibration is also possible during a stop status.
7. Scale adjustment
Turn to move the meter needle to a desired position.
8. Setting completed
Press to confirm the selection. The monitored value and " " blink alternately.
NOTE Calibration can also be made for External operation. Set the frequency in the External operation mode, and make calibration
in the above procedure. Calibration can be performed during operation. For the operation from the parameter unit, refer to the Instruction Manual of the parameter unit.
Terminal CA calibration (C0 (Pr.900), C8 (Pr.930) to C11 (Pr.931)) Terminal CA is initially set to provide a 20 mADC output in the full-scale state of the corresponding monitor item. The
calibration parameter C0 (Pr.900) allows the output current ratio (gains) to be adjusted according to the meter scale. Note that the maximum output current is 20 mADC.
Turn to read another parameter.
Press to return to the " " display.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
4655. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
46
Set a value at the minimum current output in the calibration parameters C8 (Pr.930) and C9 (Pr.930). The calibration parameters C10 (Pr.931) and C11 (Pr.931) are used to set a value at the maximum current output.
Set the output signal values (output monitor set with Pr.54) at zero or at the maximum current output via terminal CA using the calibration parameters C8 (Pr.930) and C10 (Pr.931). The full scale for each monitor is 100% at this time.
Set the output current values (output monitor set with Pr.54) at zero and at the maximum current output via terminal CA (using the calibration parameters C9 (Pr.930) and C11 (Pr.931). The output current calibrated by the calibration parameter C0 (Pr.900) is 100% at this time.
Calibrate the output via terminal CA in the following procedure.
1. Connect a 0-20 mADC indicator (frequency meter) across terminals CA and 5 on the inverter. (Note the polarity. Terminal CA is positive.)
2. Set the initial value of the calibration parameter C8 (Pr.930) to C11 (Pr.931). If the meter needle does not indicate zero when the current input is at zero, calibrate the meter using C8 (Pr.930) and C9 (Pr.930).
3. Set a monitor item in Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection. (Refer to page 457.) When the output frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor, set the output frequency or current value at which the output signal will be 20 mA, using Pr.55 or Pr.56 beforehand.
4. If the meter needle does not point to maximum even at maximum output, calibrate it with C0 (Pr.900).
NOTE When outputting an item such as output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr.54 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and calibrate. A current of 20 mADC is output via terminal CA. When Pr.310 Analog meter voltage output selection = "21", the output via terminal CA cannot be calibrated. For details on
Pr.310, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8AY. The output via terminal CA is enabled even if C8 (Pr.930) C10 (Pr.931), C9 (Pr.930) C11 (Pr.931).
Adjusting the response of terminal CA (Pr.869) Using Pr.869, the output voltage response of terminal CA can be adjusted in the range of 0 to 5 seconds. Increasing the setting stabilizes the output via terminal CA more but reduces the response level. (Setting "0" sets the
response level to 7 ms.)
(ammeter) 0 to 20mADC
CA
5
(+) (-)
Analog output current (CA)
20mA
0 Output signal value
Output signal value for minimum analog output (C10 (Pr.931))
Output signal value for zero analog current output (C8 (Pr.930))
Analog current output value for zero output signal (C9 (Pr.930))
Analog current output value for maximum output signal (C11 (Pr.931))
CO (Pr.900) 100%
(initial setting)
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Calibration of terminal AM (C1 (Pr.901)) Terminal AM is initially set to provide a 10 VDC output in the full-scale state of the corresponding monitor item. The
calibration parameter C1 (Pr.901) AM terminal calibration allows the output voltage ratio (gains) to be adjusted according to the meter scale. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10 VDC.
Calibrate the output via terminal AM in the following procedure.
1. Connect a 0-10 VDC indicator (frequency meter) across terminal AM and terminal 5 on the inverter. (Note the polarity. Terminal AM is positive.)
2. Set a monitor item in Pr.158 AM terminal function selection. (Refer to page 457.) When the output frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor, set the output frequency or current value at which the output signal is 10 V, using Pr.55 or Pr.56 beforehand.
3. If the meter needle does not point to maximum even at maximum output, calibrate it with C1 (Pr.901).
NOTE When outputting an item such as the output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr.158 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and calibrate. A voltage of 10 VDC is output via terminal AM. When Pr.306 Analog output signal selection = "21", the output via terminal AM cannot be calibrated. For details on Pr.306,
refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8AY. Use Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection to enable negative signals output via terminal AM. The output voltage range
is -10 to +10 VDC. Calibrate the maximum positive value output via terminal AM.
Adjusting the response of terminal AM (Pr.867) Use Pr.867 to adjust the output voltage response of the terminal AM in the range of 0 to 5 seconds. Increasing the setting stabilizes the output via terminal AM more but reduces the response level. (Setting "0" means the
setting of the response level to 7 ms.)
Parameters referred to Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selectionpage 457 Pr.55 Frequency monitoring referencepage 457 Pr.56 Current monitoring referencepage 457 Pr.158 AM terminal function selectionpage 457 Pr.290 Monitor negative output selectionpage 457 Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selectionpage 406
5.11.5 Energy saving monitoring From the power consumption estimated value during commercial power supply operation, the energy saving effect by use of the inverter can be monitored and output.
AM
Inverter
10VDC
5
4675. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
46
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 52 M100
Operation panel main monitor selection
0 (output frequency)
Refer to page 446.
50: Energy saving effect monitoring, 51: Cumulative energy saving monitoring
774 M101
Operation panel monitor selection 1
9999775 M102
Operation panel monitor selection 2
776 M103
Operation panel monitor selection 3
992 M104
Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection
0 (set frequency)
54 M300
FM/CA terminal function selection 1 (output
frequency) Refer to page 457. 50: Energy saving effect monitoring
158 M301
AM terminal function selection
891 M023
Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times
9999 0 to 4
Set the number of times to move the digit of cumulative power monitored value. The readout peaks out at the upper limit of readout.
9999 The function of moving the decimal point is not available. The readout is reset to 0 when it exceeds the upper limit.
892 M200 Load factor 100% 30 to 150%
Set the load factor for the commercial power supply operation. The setting is used for calculation of the estimated power consumption during commercial power supply operation by being multiplied by the power consumption rate (page 472).
893 M201
Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity)
Inverter rated capacity
0.1 to 55 kW*1 Set the motor capacity (pump capacity). Setting this parameter is required for calculating the rate of saved power, the rate of average energy saving, and the commercial power.0 to 3600 kW*2
894 M202
Control selection during commercial power- supply operation
0
0 Discharge damper control (fan) 1 Inlet damper control (fan) 2 Valve control (pump) 3 Commercial power supply drive (fixed value)
895 M203
Power saving rate reference value 9999
0 Consider the commercial power as 100%. 1 Consider the power set in Pr.893 as 100% 9999 No function
896 M204 Power unit cost 9999
0 to 500 Set the power unit cost. Setting this parameter is required for displaying the energy cost savings in the energy saving monitoring.
9999 No function
897 M205
Power saving monitor average time 9999
0 The time period for averaging is 30 minutes. 1 to 1000 h Set the number of hours for averaging. 9999 No function
898 M206
Power saving cumulative monitor clear 9999
0 Clear the cumulative monitor value 1 Hold the cumulative monitor value 10 Continue accumulation (upper limit communication data is 9999)
9999 Continue accumulation (upper limit communication data is 65535)
899 M207
Operation time rate (estimated value) 9999
0 to 100% Setting this parameter is required for calculating the annual energy saving. Set an annual operating rate (considering a 24- hours-a-day and 365-days-a-year operation as 100%).
9999 No function
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Energy saving monitoring list The items in the energy saving effect monitoring (items which can be monitored when "50" is set in Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158,
Pr.774 to Pr.776, and Pr.992) are listed below. (The items which can be monitored via terminal FM or CA (Pr.54 setting) and via terminal AM (Pr.158 setting) are limited to [1 Power saving] and [3 Average power saving].)
Energy saving monitor item Description and formula Unit and
increment Parameter setting
Pr.895 Pr.896 Pr.897 Pr.899
1 Power saving
The difference between the input power calculated by the inverter and the estimated power required to run a motor off a commercial power supply. [Input power for commercial power supply operation] - [Monitored value of inverter input power]
0.01/0.1 kW*3 9999
9999
2 Power saving rate
It is defined as the power saving expressed as a percentage. The rate of the power saving with respect to the estimated input power for the commercial power supply operation is determined using the following formula.
0.1%
0
The rate of the power saving with respect to the Pr.893 setting is determined using the following formula. 1
3 Average power saving
It is defined as the average hourly energy saving during a monitoring time (set in Pr.897). 0.01/0.1
kWh*3 9999
9999
0 to 1000 h4 Average power saving rate
It is defined as the average hourly energy saving expressed as a percentage. The rate of the average hourly energy saving with respect to the estimated input power for the commercial power supply operation is determined using the following formula.
0.1%
0
The rate of the average hourly energy saving with respect to the Pr.893 setting is determined using the following formula. 1
5 Average power cost savings
It is defined as a monetary value of the average hourly energy saving, determined using the following formula. [3 Average power saving] Pr.896 setting
0.01/0.1*3 0 to 500
[1 Power saving]
Power during commercial power supply operation 100
[1 Power saving]
Pr.893 100
([1 Power saving] t)
Pr.897
([2 Power saving rate] t)
Pr.897 100
[3 Average power saving]
Pr.893 100
4695. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
47
The items in the cumulative energy saving monitoring (items which can be monitored when "51" is set in Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, and Pr.992) are listed below. (The digit of the cumulative energy saving monitored value can be moved to the right according to the setting of Pr.891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times.)
*1 For monitoring via communication (RS-485 communication, or other communication using a communication option), the increments are 1 in no units. For example, a value "10.00 kWh" is converted into "10" for communication data.
*2 On the LCD operation panel or the parameter unit, a readout is displayed in units of kilowatt-hours (kW). *3 The increment differs according to the inverter capacity. (Increment left of a slash for FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or
lower. Increment right of a slash for FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
NOTE The operation panel and the parameter unit have a 5-digit display. This means, for example, that a monitored value up to
999.99 is displayed in 0.01 increments and a monitor value of 1000 or more is displayed in 0.1 increments as "1000.0". The maximum monitored value displayed is "99999".
The maximum monitored value via communication (RS-485 communication or other communication with communication option installed) is 65535 when Pr.898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear = "9999". The maximum monitored value on monitoring in 0.01 increments is "655.35", and that on monitoring in 0.1 increments is "6553.5".
Power saving real-time monitoring ([1 Power saving], [2 Power saving rate])
During [1 Power saving] monitoring, an energy saving effect (power difference) of using the inverter as compared to the commercial power supply operation is calculated and displayed on the main monitor.
In the following cases, the monitored value of [1 Power saving] is "0".
On [2 Power saving rate] monitoring, the rate of the saved power considering the consumed power (estimate) during the power supply operation as 100% is displayed when Pr.895 Power saving rate reference value is set to "0". When Pr.895 is set to "1", the rate of the saved power with respect to the setting of Pr.893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity) that is referenced as 100% is displayed.
Average power saving monitoring ([3 Average power saving], [4 Average power saving rate], [5 Average power cost savings])
The average power saving monitors are displayed by setting a value other than 9999 in Pr.897 Power saving monitor average time.
On [3 Average power saving] monitoring, the average hourly energy saving every preset time period is displayed.
Energy saving monitor item Description and formula Unit and
increment Parameter setting
Pr.895 Pr.896 Pr.897 Pr.899
6 Power saving amount
It is defined as a cumulative energy saving during monitoring, determined by multiplying the saved power by the number of inverter operating hours. ([1 Power saving] t)
0.01 kWh/ 0.1 kWh *1*2*3
9999
9999
7 Power cost savings It is defined as a monetary value of the cumulative energy saving. [6 Power saving amount] Pr.896 setting
0.01/ 0.1*1*3 0 to 500
8 Annual power saving amount
It is defined as an estimated annual energy saving. 0.01 kWh/ 0.1 kWh*1*2*3
9999 0 to 100%
9 Annual power cost savings
It is defined as a monetary value of annual energy saving. [8 Annual power saving amount] Pr.896 setting
0.01/ 0.1*1*3 0 to 500
[6 Power saving amount] Operation time during power
saving accumulation
24 365 Pr.899
100
The result of calculating the saved power is negative value. DC injection brake works. The motor is not connected with the inverter (monitored value of output current is 0 A).
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When the setting of Pr.897 is changed, when the inverter is powered ON, or when the inverter is reset, the averaging is restarted. The Energy saving average value updated timing (Y92) signal is inverted every time the averaging is restarted.
On [4 Average power saving rate] monitoring, the average hourly monitored value of [2 Power saving rate]) is displayed when Pr.895 Power saving rate reference value is set to "0 or 1".
On [5 Average power cost savings] monitoring, a monetary value of the average hourly energy saving ([3 Average power saving] Pr.896 setting) is displayed when the unit price, power cost per kilowatt (hour), is set in Pr.896 Power unit cost.
Cumulative energy saving monitoring ([6 Power saving amount], [7 Power cost saving], [8 Annual power saving amount], [9 Annual power cost savings])
The digit of the cumulative energy monitored value can be moved to the right by the number set in Pr.891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times. For example, when the cumulative energy is 1278.56 kWh and Pr.891 is set to "2", "12.78" is displayed (in 100's of units) on the PU/DU and the communication data is converted into "12". When Pr.891 = "0 to 4" and the cumulative energy reaches more than the upper limit of readout, the readout peaks out at the upper limit, which indicates that moving digit is necessary. When Pr.891 = "9999" and the cumulative energy reaches more than the upper limit of readout, cumulative value is reset to 0 and the metering restarts. The readout of other items in the cumulative energy saving monitoring peaks out at the upper limit of readout.
With the monitored value of [6 Power saving amount], a cumulative energy saving during a desired time period can be measured. Follow this procedure.
1. Set "10" or "9999" in Pr.898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear.
2. Change the setting of Pr.898 to "0" when you want to start measuring the energy saving. The cumulative value is cleared and the cumulative energy saving meter restarts.
3. Change the setting of Pr.898 to "1" when you want to stop measuring the energy saving. The meter stops and the cumulative value is fixed.
NOTE The cumulative value of energy saving is refreshed every hour. This means that the last cumulative value is displayed at a
restart of the inverter and the cumulative meter restarts if the time elapsed between turning OFF and re-turning ON of the inverter is shorter than an hour. (In some cases, the cumulative energy value may decrease.)
0 4 8 12 16 20 Time
When Pr.897=4 [Hr]
Power saving instantaneous value [kW]
Average power saving [kW]
Y92
Operation start
0 in the first measurement
Average Average
During stop
Average
Average
Power is off
Last value
Stores Hi/Low when the power is off and starts.
40 8 12 16 0 4
Time
Pr.897
0 Time
Power saving instantaneous value [kW]
Power saving amount [kWh]
Accumulation start (Pr.898=0)
Accumulation
During stop Power is off
0 Time
Pause (Pr.898=1)
Resume accumulation (Pr.898=10 or 9999)
Clear (Pr.898=0)
RunningRunning
4715. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
47
Estimated input power for the commercial power supply operation (Pr.892, Pr.893, Pr.894)
Select the pattern of the commercial power supply operation from among four patterns (discharge damper control (fan), suction damper control (fan), valve control (pump) and commercial power drive), and set it in Pr.894 Control selection during commercial power-supply operation.
Set the motor capacity (pump capacity) in Pr.893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity). Refer to the following graph to find the rate of power consumption (%) during commercial power supply operation based
on the selected pattern and the rate of motor rotations per minute with respect to the rated speed (the result of dividing the present output frequency by Pr.3 Base frequency setting).
The estimated input power (kW) for the commercial power supply operation is calculated from the motor capacity set in Pr.893, the setting of Pr.892 Load factor, and the rate of power consumption using the following formula.
NOTE If the output frequency rises to the setting of Pr.3 Base frequency or higher, it stays at a constant value because the rotations
per minute cannot rise higher than the power supply frequency during commercial power supply operation.
Annual energy saving and its monetary value (Pr.899) When the operation time rate (ratio of the time period in year when the inverter drives the motor) [%] is set in Pr.899, the
annual energy saving effect can be estimated. When the inverter is operated in specific patterns, the estimate annual energy saving can be calculated by measuring the
energy saving in a certain period. Refer to the following procedure to set the operation time rate.
1. Estimate the average operation time per day (h/day).
2. Calculate the operation days per year (days/year) using the following formula: Average operation days per month 12 (months).
3. Calculate the annual operation time (h/year) from values determined in Step 1 and Step 2, using the following formula.
4. Calculate the operation time rate using the following formula, and set it in Pr.899.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100110
Ratio of speed to rating [%]
Discharge side
damper control
(fan)
Inlet damper control
(fan)
Valve control
(pump)
Commercial power-supply drive
P o w
e r
c o n s u m
p ti o n [ %
]
Pr.893 (kW) Estimated consumed power during commercial power supply operation (kW)
Consumed power (%)
Pr.892 (%) 100 100
Annual operation time (h/year) = average time (h/day) number of operation days (days/year)
Operation time rate (%) = Annual operation time (h/year)
100(%) 24 (h/day) 365 (days/year)
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE Setting example for operation time rate: In the case where the average operation time per day is about 21 hours and the
average operation days per month is 16 days. Annual operation time = 21 (h/day) 16 (days/month) 12 (months) = 4032 (h/year)
Therefore, set 46.03% in Pr.899.
Calculate the annual energy saving from the value of [3 Average power saving] cumulated according to the setting of Pr.899 Operation time rate (estimated value).
When the power cost per hour is set in Pr.896 Power unit cost, the annual energy cost savings can be monitored. The annual energy cost savings is determined by calculation using the following formula.
NOTE During regenerative driving, substitute the output power during the commercial power supply operation for the saved power
(therefore, input power = 0).
Parameters referred to Pr.3 Base frequencypage 707 Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selectionpage 446 Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selectionpage 457 Pr.158 AM terminal function selectionpage 457
5.11.6 Output terminal function selection Use the following parameters to change the functions of the open collector output terminals and relay output terminals.
Operation time rate (%) = 4032 (h/year)
100(%) 46.03% 24 (h/day) 365 (days/year)
Annual power saving amount (kWh/year) = With Pr.898 = 10 or 9999, average power saving (kW) during cumulative period 24h 365 days
Pr.899 100
Annual power cost saving = annual power saving amount (kWh/year) Pr.896
4735. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
47
*1 The initial value is for standard models and IP55 compatible models. *2 The initial value is for separated converter types. *3 The setting is available when the PLC function is enabled or when a compatible plug-in option is installed. *4 The setting is available for the FR-A800-GF.
Output signal list A function listed below can be set to each output terminal. Refer to the following table and set the parameters. (0 to 99, 200 to 299: Positive logic, 100 to 199, 300 to 399: Negative
logic)
Pr. Name Initial value Signal name Setting range
190 M400
RUN terminal function selection
For open collector output terminal
0 RUN (Inverter running)
0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to 57, 60, 61, 63, 64, 67, 68, 70, 79, 80, 84, 85, 90 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 120, 122, 125 to 128, 130 to 136, 138 to 157, 160, 161, 163, 164, 167, 168, 170, 179, 180, 184, 185, 190 to 199, 200 to 208, 211 to 213, 247, 300 to 308, 311 to 313, 347, 9999
191 M401
SU terminal function selection 1 SU (Up to frequency)
192 M402
IPF terminal function selection
2*1 IPF (Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage)
9999*2 No function 193 M403
OL terminal function selection 3 OL (Overload warning)
194 M404
FU terminal function selection 4 FU (Output frequency
detection) 195 M405
ABC1 terminal function selection
For relay output terminal
99 ALM (Fault) 0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to 57, 60, 61, 63, 64, 67, 68, 70, 79, 80, 84, 85, 90, 91, 94 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 120, 122, 125 to 128, 130 to 136, 138 to 157, 160, 161, 163, 164, 167, 168, 170, 179, 180, 184, 185, 190, 191, 194 to 199, 200 to 208, 211 to 213, 247, 300 to 308, 311 to 313, 347, 9999
196 M406
ABC2 terminal function selection 9999 No function
313 M410*3*4
DO0 output selection
For terminal on the option
9999 No function
0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to 57, 60, 61, 63, 64, 68, 70, 79, 80, 84 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 120, 122, 125 to 128, 130 to 136, 138 to 157, 160, 161, 163, 164, 168, 170, 179, 180, 184 to 199, 200 to 208, 211 to 213, 247, 248, 300 to 308, 311 to 313, 347, 348, 9999
314 M411*3*4
DO1 output selection 9999 No function
315 M412*3*4
DO2 output selection 9999 No function
316 M413*3
DO3 output selection 9999 No function
317 M414*3
DO4 output selection 9999 No function
318 M415*3
DO5 output selection 9999 No function
319 M416*3
DO6 output selection 9999 No function
320 M420*3 RA1 output selection 0 RUN (Inverter running)
0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to 57, 60, 61, 63, 64, 68, 70, 79, 80, 84 to 91, 94 to 99, 200 to 208, 211 to 213, 247, 248, 9999
321 M421*3 RA2 output selection 1 SU (Up to frequency)
322 M422*3 RA3 output selection
2*1 IPF (Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage)
9999*2 No function
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
289 M431
Inverter output terminal filter 9999
5 to 50 ms Set the time delay for the output terminal response. 9999 No filtering of the output terminal.
Setting Signal name Function Operation Related
parameter
Refer to
page Positive
logic Negative
logic
0 100 RUN Inverter running Outputted during operation when the inverter output frequency reaches Pr.13 Starting frequency or higher.
479
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1 101 SU Up to frequency *1 Outputted when the output frequency reaches the set frequency. Pr.41 484
2 102 IPF Instantaneous power failure/ undervoltage*5
Outputted when an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage protection operation occurs.
Pr.57 628, 635
3 103 OL Overload warning Outputted while the stall prevention function works.
Pr.22, Pr.23, Pr.66, Pr.148, Pr.149, Pr.154
431
4 104 FU Output frequency detection Outputted when the output frequency reaches the frequency set in Pr.42 (Pr.43 during reverse rotation) or higher.
Pr.42, Pr.43 484
5 105 FU2 Second output frequency detection
Outputted when the output frequency reaches the frequency set in Pr.50 or higher. Pr.50 484
6 106 FU3 Third output frequency detection
Outputted when the output frequency reaches the frequency set in Pr.116 or higher.
Pr.116 484
7 107 RBP Regenerative brake prealarm*2
Outputted when the regenerative brake duty reaches 85% of the setting of Pr.70. Pr.70 724
8 108 THP Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm
Outputted when the cumulative electronic thermal O/L relay value reaches 85% of the trip level. (The electronic thermal O/L relay function (E.THT/E.THM) is activated when the value reaches 100%.)
Pr.9 415
10 110 PU PU operation mode Outputted when the PU operation mode is selected. Pr.79 389
11 111 RY Inverter operation ready
Outputted when the reset process is completed after powering ON the inverter or when the inverter is ready to start operation with the start signal ON or during operation.
479
12 112 Y12 Output current detection Outputted when the output current is higher than the Pr.150 setting for the time set in Pr.151 or longer.
Pr.150, Pr.151 487
13 113 Y13 Zero current detection Outputted when the output current is lower than the Pr.152 setting for the time set in Pr.153 or longer.
Pr.152, Pr.153 487
14 114 FDN PID lower limit Outputted when the input value is lower than the lower limit set for the PID control operation.
Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.575 to Pr.577 60115 115 FUP PID upper limit
Outputted when the input value is higher than the upper limit set for the PID control operation.
16 116 RL PID forward/reverse rotation output
Outputted during forward rotation operation in the PID control operation.
17 MC1 Electronic bypass MC1 Used to work the electronic bypass function. Pr.135 to Pr.139,
Pr.159 56318 MC2 Electronic bypass MC2 19 MC3 Electronic bypass MC3
20 120 BOF Brake opening request Outputted to release the brake while the brake sequence function is enabled.
Pr.278 to Pr.285, Pr.292
572 22 122 BOF2 Second brake opening request
Outputted to release the brake while the second brake sequence function is enabled (while the RT signal is ON).
Pr.641 to Pr.648
25 125 FAN Fan fault output Outputted when a fan fault occurs. Pr.244 423
26 126 FIN Heat sink overheat pre-alarm
Outputted when the heat sink temperature rises to 85% of temperature at which the protective function of the Heat sink overheat is activated.
788
27 127 ORA Orientation complete (output for a Vector control compatible option)*4 Outputted while the orientation control
operation is enabled.
Pr.350 to Pr.366, Pr.369, Pr.393, Pr.396 to Pr.399
585
28 128 ORM Orientation fault (output for a Vector control compatible option)*4
Setting Signal name Function Operation Related
parameter
Refer to
page Positive
logic Negative
logic
4755. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
47
30 130 Y30 Forward rotation output (output for a Vector control compatible option)*4
Outputted while a motor rotates in forward direction.
482
31 131 Y31 Reverse rotation output (output for a Vector control compatible option)*4
Outputted while a motor rotates in reverse direction. 482
32 132 Y32 Regenerative status output (output for a Vector control compatible option)*4
Outputted while the motor is in a regenerative braking state under Vector control. 482
33 133 RY2 Operation ready 2
Outputted while pre-excitation is enabled or during normal operation under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control.
479
34 134 LS Low speed detection Outputted when the output frequency drops to the Pr.865 setting or lower. Pr.865 484
35 135 TU Torque detection Outputted when the motor torque is higher than the Pr.864 setting. Pr.864 488
36 136 Y36 In-position Outputted when the number of droop pulses drops below the setting. Pr.426 327
38 138 MEND Travel completed Outputted when the droop pulse is within the in-position width and the position command operation is completed.
Pr.426 327
39 139 Y39 Start time tuning completion Outputted when tuning at start-up is completed. Pr.95, Pr.574 558
40 140 Y40 Trace status Outputted during trace operation. Pr.1020 to Pr.1047 649
41 141 FB Speed detection Outputted when the actual motor rotations per minute (estimate) reaches the setting of Pr.42, Pr.50, or Pr.116.
Pr.42 to Pr.50, Pr.116 48442 142 FB2 Second speed detection
43 143 FB3 Third speed detection
44 144 RUN2 Inverter running 2
Outputted while the Forward rotation command signal or Reverse rotation command signal is ON. Outputted during deceleration even while the Forward rotation command signal or Reverse rotation command signal is OFF (except while pre-excitation is enabled (the LX signal is ON)). Also outputted while the Orientation command (X22) signal is ON. Outputted while the servo-lock function is working (the LX signal is ON) in the position control mode. (The signal output stops when the servo-lock function stops (the LX signal is OFF).)
479
45 145 RUN3 Inverter running and start command ON
Outputted while the inverter is running or while the start command signal is ON. 479
46 146 Y46 During deceleration at occurrence of power failure
Outputted when the power-failure deceleration function is activated. (The signal output is retained until the function stops.)
Pr.261 to Pr.266 642
47 147 PID During PID control activated Outputted during the PID control operation. Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.575 to Pr.577 601
48 148 Y48 PID deviation limit Outputted when the absolute deviation value exceeds the limit value.
Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.553, Pr.554 601
49 149 Y49 During pre-charge operation Outputted while the pre-charge function is working.
Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.241, Pr.553, Pr.554, Pr.575 to Pr.577, Pr.753 to Pr.769, C42, C45
618
50 150 Y50 During second pre-charge operation
51 151 Y51 Pre-charge time over Outputted when the time period while the pre- charge function is working reaches the time limit set in Pr.764 or Pr.769.52 152 Y52 Second pre-charge time over
53 153 Y53 Pre-charge level over Outputted when the value higher than the detection level set in Pr.763 or Pr.768 is measured until the pre-charge function stops during pre-charge operation.
54 154 Y54 Second pre-charge level over
Setting Signal name Function Operation Related
parameter
Refer to
page Positive
logic Negative
logic
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
55 155 Y55 Motor temperature detection (for FR-A8AZ)*4
Outputted when the temperature of the thermistor-equipped vector control motor (SF-V5RU[]T/A) exceeds the detection level.
Pr.750
56 156 ZA Home position return failure Outputted while the Home position return failure warning is output. 303
57 157 IPM During PM sensorless vector control
Outputted while the operation is performed under PM sensorless vector control.
Pr.71 to Pr.80, Pr.998 230
60 160 FP Position detection level Outputted when the current position exceeds the position detection judgment value (set in Pr.1294 and Pr.1295).
Pr.1294 to Pr.1297 327
61 161 PBSY During position command operation
Outputted during the position command operation.
303 63 163 ZP Home position return
completed Outputted when the home position return operation is completed.
64 164 Y64 During retry Outputted during retry operation. Pr.65 to Pr.69 426
67 167 Y67 Power failed*3
Outputted when the inverter power output is shut off due to power failure or undervoltage or when the power failure time deceleration- to-stop function is activated.
Pr.261 to Pr.266 642
68 168 EV 24 V external power supply operation
Outputted while the inverter operated with a 24 V power supplied from an external source. 80
70 170 SLEEP PID output interruption Outputted while PID output suspension function is activated.
Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.575 to Pr.577 601
79 179 Y79 Pulse train output of output power
Outputted in pulses every time the cumulative value of energy outputted from the inverter reaches the Pr.799 setting.
Pr.799 493
80 180 SAFE Safety monitor output Outputted while the safety stop function is activated. 82
84 184 RDY Position control preparation ready
Outputted when the servo-lock function is working (the LX signal turns ON) and the inverter is ready to operate.
Pr.419, Pr.428 to Pr.430 319
85 185 Y85 DC current feeding*5 Outputted during power failure or undervoltage of the AC power supply. Pr.30 724
86 186 Y86 Control circuit capacitor life (for Pr.313 to Pr.322)*6
Outputted when the control circuit capacitor approaches the end of its life.
Pr.255 to Pr.259 359
87 187 Y87 Main circuit capacitor life (for Pr.313 to Pr.322)*5*6
Outputted when the main circuit capacitor approaches the end of its life.
88 188 Y88 Cooling fan life (for Pr.313 to Pr.322)*6
Outputted when the cooling fan approaches the end of its life.
89 189 Y89 Inrush current limit circuit life (for Pr.313 to Pr.322)*5*6
Outputted when the inrush current limit circuit approaches the end of its life.
90 190 Y90 Life alarm
Outputted when any of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, inrush current limit circuit, or the cooling fan approaches the end of its life.
91 191 Y91 Fault output 3 (Power-OFF signal)
Outputted when the Fault occurs due to an inverter circuit fault or connection fault. 483
92 192 Y92 Energy saving average value updated timing
Switches between ON and OFF every time the average energy saving is updated during the energy saving monitoring. This signal cannot be assigned to any of the relay output terminal (Pr.195, Pr.196, Pr.320 to Pr.322).
Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158, Pr.891 to Pr.899
467
93 193 Y93 Current average monitor
Outputted in pulses for transmission of the average current value and the maintenance timer value. This signal cannot be assigned to any of the relay output terminal (Pr.195, Pr.196, Pr.320 to Pr.322).
Pr.555 to Pr.557 363
94 194 ALM2 Fault output 2
Outputted when the inverter's protective function is activated to stop the power output (when the Fault occurs). The signal output continues during the inverter reset and stops after the inverter reset finishes. *7
483
Setting Signal name Function Operation Related
parameter
Refer to
page Positive
logic Negative
logic
4775. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
47
*1 Note that changing the frequency setting with an analog signal or the setting dial on the operation panel (FR-DU08) may cause the turning ON and OFF of Up to frequency (SU) signal depending on its changing speed and the timing of the speed change determined by the acceleration/ deceleration time setting. (The signal state changing does not occur when the acceleration/deceleration time is set to 0 seconds.)
*2 This signal is available only for the standard model. *3 This signal cannot be assigned to any of the output terminals for plug-in options (FR-A8AY and FR-A8AR). *4 This signal is available when the compatible plug-in option or control terminal option is installed. *5 The setting is available for the standard structure model and the IP55 compatible model. *6 This signal is available for the FR-A800-GF, when the PLC function is enabled, or when an option (FR-A8AY, FR-A8AR, FR-A8NC, or FR-A8NCE)
is installed. Use Pr.313 to Pr.322 to assign the function to the terminal. For the information of the availability of these parameters for each option, refer to the Instruction Manual of the option.
*7 On restarting the inverter, the Fault output 2 (ALM2) signal turns OFF at the time the inverter power turns OFF.
95 195 Y95 Maintenance timer Outputted when the value of Pr.503 reaches the Pr.504 setting or higher. Pr.503, Pr.504 363
96 196 REM Remote output Outputted via a terminal by setting a proper number in a relative parameter. Pr.495 to Pr.497 489
97 197 ER Alarm output 2
The ER signal output follows the ALM signal output when Pr.875 = "0 (initial value)". When Pr.875 = "1" and when any of E.OHT, E.THM, or E.PTC occurs, the inverter decelerates the motor to a stop at a time of the ER signal ON. When any of other faults occurs, the ER signal outputs when the inverter output stops.
Pr.875 422
98 198 LF Alarm Outputted when an Alarm fault (fan fault or a communication error) occurs. Pr.121, Pr.244 423,
663
99 199 ALM Fault
Outputted when the inverter's protective function is activated to stop the power output (when the Fault occurs). The signal output stops when the inverter reset starts.
483
200 300 FDN2 Second PID lower limit Outputted when the input value is lower than the lower limit set for the second PID control operation.
Pr.753 to Pr.758
601
201 301 FUP2 Second PID upper limit Outputted when the input value is higher than the upper limit set for the second PID control operation.
202 302 RL2 Second PID forward/reverse rotation output
Outputted during forward rotation operation in the second PID control operation.
203 303 PID2 During second PID control activated
Outputted during the second PID control operation.
204 304 SLEEP2 During second PID output shutoff
Outputted while the second PID output suspension function is activated.
Pr.753 to Pr.758, Pr.1147 to Pr.1149
205 305 Y205 Second PID deviation limit Outputted when the absolute deviation value exceeds the limit value during the second PID control operation.
Pr.753 to Pr.758, Pr.1145, Pr.1146
206 306 Y206 Cooling fan operation command
Outputted when the cooling fan operation is commanded. Pr.244 423
207 307 Y207 Control circuit temperature Outputted when the temperature of the control circuit board reaches the detection level or higher.
Pr.663 494
208 308 PS PU stopped Outputted while the PU is stopped. Pr.75 336
211 311 LUP Upper limit warning detection Outputted when the load fault upper limit warning is detected.
Pr.1480 to Pr.1492 439212 312 LDN Lower limit warning detection Outputted when the load fault lower limit
warning is detected.
213 313 Y213 During load characteristics measurement
Outputted during measurement of the load characteristics.
247 347 LSYN Phase synchronization completion
Output when phase synchronization for bypass switching has completed (for FR- A8AVP).*4
Pr.139
248 348 Y248 Estimated residual-life of main circuit capacitor (for Pr.313 to Pr.322)*5*6
Output when the main circuit capacitor approaches the end of its estimated life. Pr.255, Pr.506 359
9999 No function
Setting Signal name Function Operation Related
parameter
Refer to
page Positive
logic Negative
logic
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE One function can be assigned to more than one terminal. The function works during the terminal conducts when the parameter setting is any of "0 to 99, 200 to 299", and the function
works during the terminal does not conduct when the setting is "100 to 199, 300 to 399". When Pr.76 Fault code output selection = "1", the outputs of terminals SU, IPF, OL, and FU are used only for outputting the
fault code according to the Pr.76 setting. (When the inverter's protective function is activated, the signal for the fault code is output.)
The output of terminal RUN and the outputs of the relay output terminals are not affected by the Pr.76 setting. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. Do not assign the signal to terminals A1, B1, and C1 or terminals A2, B2, and C2 which frequently changes its state between
ON and OFF. Otherwise, the life of the relay contact may be shortened.
Adjusting the output terminal response level (Pr.289) The responsivity of the output terminals can be delayed in a range between 5 to 50 ms. (The following is the operation
example of the RUN signal.)
NOTE When Pr.157 OL signal output timer is set for the Overload warning (OL) signal output, the OL signal is output when the set
time of (Pr.157 + Pr.289) elapses. The signal output for the PLC function (see page 646) and for the fault code output (see page 492) are not affected by the
Pr.289 setting (not filtered for responsivity).
Inverter operation ready signals (RY, RY2 signals) and inverter running signals (RUN, RUN2, RUN3 signals)
Operation under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control When the inverter is ready for operation, the Inverter operation ready (RY) signal turns ON (and stays ON during
operation). When the inverter output frequency reaches the setting of Pr.13 Starting frequency or higher, the inverter running signals
(RUN, RUN2 signals) turn ON. The signals are OFF while the inverter is stopped or during the DC injection brake operation.
Time RUN
Pr.289 = 9999 ON OFF
RUN Pr.289 9999
ON OFF
Pr.289 Pr.289
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
4795. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
48
The Inverter running and start command ON (RUN3) signal is ON while the inverter is running or while the start command signal is ON (When the start command signal is ON, the RUN3 signal is ON even while the inverter's protective function is activated or while the MRS signal is ON.) The RUN3 signal is ON even during the DC injection brake operation, and the signal is OFF when the inverter stops.
The ON/OFF state of each signal according to the inverter operating status is shown in the matrix below.
*1 The signal is OFF during power failure or undervoltage. *2 This means the state during a fault occurrence or while the MRS signal is ON, etc. *3 The signal is OFF while power is not supplied to the main circuit.
Operation under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control
When the inverter is ready for operation, the Inverter operation ready (RY) signal turns ON (and stays ON during operation).
When the inverter output frequency reaches the setting of Pr.13 Starting frequency or higher, the Inverter running (RUN) turns ON. The signal is OFF during an inverter stop, during the DC injection brake operation, during tuning at start-up, or during pre-excitation.
The Inverter running 2 (RUN2) signal is ON while the inverter is running or while the start command signal is ON. (When the inverter's protective function is activated or the MRS signal is ON, the RUN2 signal turns OFF.)
The Inverter running and start command ON (RUN3) signal is ON while the inverter is running or while the start command signal is ON.
The RUN2 and RUN3 signals are also ON when the start command signal is ON or during pre-excitation with the speed command value 0. (However, the RUN2 signal is OFF during pre-excitation with the LX signal ON.)
Output signal
Start signal OFF (inverter
stopped)
Start signal ON (inverter
stopped)
Start signal ON
(inverter running)
During DC injection
brake operation
Inverter output shutoff*2
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
During coasting Inverter running
after restart
Start signal ON
Start signal OFF
Start signal ON
Start signal OFF
RY*3 ON ON ON ON OFF ON*1 ON RY2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF RUN OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON RUN2 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON RUN3 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
Power supply
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
STF
RH
RY
RUN3
Reset processing Time
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
RUN (RUN2)
DC injection brake operation point
DC injection brake operationPr. 13
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The Operation ready 2 (RY2) signal turns ON when the pre-excitation starts. The signal is ON during pre-excitation even while the inverter stops its output. The signal is OFF during the inverter output shutoff.
NOTE When pre-excitation works with the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal ON, the RY2 signal turns ON after 100 ms (500 ms
for FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher) from the time the LX signal turns ON. (When online auto tuning at start-up is selected (Pr.95 = "1"), the time the signal turns ON is delayed by the tuning time.)
The ON/OFF state of each signal according to the inverter operating status is shown in the matrix below.
*1 When the start signal is ON and the frequency command is 0 Hz, such state is designated as "during pre-excitation". *2 The signal is OFF during power failure or undervoltage. *3 The RY2 signal turns ON after 100 ms (500 ms for FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher) from the time the LX signal
turns ON. *4 The signal is ON while the servo-lock function is ON (the LX signal is ON) in the position control mode. *5 This means the state during a fault occurrence or while the MRS signal is ON, etc. *6 The signal is OFF while power is not supplied to the main circuit.
Time
Power supply
STF
RH
RY
RY2
Reset processing
ON OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MRS
Pr. 13
RUN
RUN2
OFF
OFF
RUN3 OFF
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Pre-excitation (zero speed control)
100(500)ms
LX
RY2
ON
ON
Output signal
Start signal OFF
(inverter stopped)
Start signal ON*1 (during
pre- excitation)
Start signal ON (inverter running)
LX signal ON (during
pre- excitation)
During DC injection
brake operation
(during pre-
excitation)
Inverter output shutoff*5
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure During coasting Inverter
running after
restart Start
signal ON
Start signal OFF
Start signal
ON
Start signal OFF
RY*6 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON*2 ON
RY2 OFF ON ON ON*3 ON OFF OFF ON
RUN OFF OFF ON OFF*4 OFF OFF OFF ON
RUN2 OFF ON ON OFF*4 OFF OFF OFF ON RUN3 OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
4815. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
48
To use the RY, RY2, RUN, RUN2, or RUN3 signal, set the corresponding number selected from the following table in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.
NOTE The RUN signal (positive logic) is initially assigned to the terminal RUN.
Forward rotation output (Y30) signal and Reverse rotation output (Y31) signal
Under Vector control, the Forward rotation output (Y30) signal or the Reverse rotation output (Y31) signal is output according to the actual rotation direction of the motor.
During pre-excitation (zero-speed or servo-lock function ON) in the speed or torque control mode, the Y30 signal and the Y31 signal are OFF. During the servo-lock function ON in the position control mode, however, the Y30 signal or the Y31 signal is ON according to the actual rotation direction of the motor, as well as during normal operation.
To use the Y30 signal, set "30 (positive logic) or 130 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
To use the Y31 signal, set "31 (positive logic) or 131 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
NOTE The Y30 and Y31 signals are always OFF under V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector
control, and PM sensorless vector control. If the motor is rotated by an external force while the inverter is stopped, the Y30 signal and the Y31 signal keep OFF state.
Regenerative status output (Y32) signal When the motor gets in a regenerative braking (dynamic braking) state under Vector control, the Regenerative status
output (Y32) signal turns ON. Once the signal turns ON, the signal is retained ON for at least 100 ms. The signal is OFF during an inverter stop or during pre-excitation.
Output signal Pr.190 to Pr.196 settings
Positive logic Negative logic RY 11 111 RY2 33 133 RUN 0 100 RUN2 44 144 RUN3 45 145
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Time
Pre-excitation
Actual motor speed
ON
Y31
Y30
ON
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
To use the Y32 signal, set "32 (positive logic) or 132 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
NOTE The Y32 signal is always OFF under V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and
PM sensorless vector control.
Fault (ALM) signal and Fault output 2 (ALM2) signal The fault signal (ALM or ALM2 signal) is output when an inverter protective function is activated. The ALM2 signal stays ON during the resetting the inverter after the Fault occurs. To use the ALM2 signal, set "94 (positive logic) or 194 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal
function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal. The ALM signal is initially assigned to the relay terminals A1, B1, and C1.
NOTE For details on the inverter faults, refer to page 779.
Input power shutoff like magnetic contactor (Y91 signal) The Fault output 3 (Y91) signal is output when a fault originating in the inverter circuit or a connection fault occurs. To use the Y91 signal, set "91 (positive logic) or 191 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.
Time
OFFON ON
Signal is retained for 100 ms.
Y32
Regeneration -
Driving +
Less than 100 ms
ON OFF
ON
ON OFF
Reset ON
O u tp
u t fr
e q u e n c y
ALM
ALM2
RES
OFF
Inverter fault occurrence
(trip)
Reset processing
(about 1s)
Time
4835. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
48
The following is the list of faults that output the Y91 signal. (For details on faults, refer to page 779.)
Changing the special relay function for the PLC function For the PLC function, the function of special relays (SM1225 to SM1234) can be changed by setting Pr.313 to Pr.322. (For
details on the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.)
Parameters referred to Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381, page 382 Pr.76 Fault code output selectionpage 492
5.11.7 Output frequency detection If the inverter output frequency which reaches a specific value is detected, the relative signal is output.
Setting the notification zone of the output frequency reaching the set point (SU signal, Pr.41)
The Up to frequency (SU) signal is output when the output frequency reaches the set frequency. Set the value in the range of 1 to 100% in Pr.41 to determine tolerance for the set frequency (considered as 100% point). It may be useful to use this signal to start operating related equipment after checking that the set frequency has been
reached.
Fault type Inrush current limit circuit fault (E.IOH) CPU fault (E.CPU) CPU fault (E.6) CPU fault (E.7) Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board) (E.PE) Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board) (E.PE2) 24 VDC power fault (E.P24) Operation panel power supply short circuit/RS-485 terminals power supply short circuit (E.CTE) Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) Output phase loss (E.LF) Brake transistor alarm detection (E.BE) Internal circuit fault (E.13/E.PBT)
Pr. Name Initial value Setting
range Description FM CA
41 M441
Up-to-frequency sensitivity 10% 0 to 100% Set the level where the SU signal turns ON.
42 M442
Output frequency detection 6 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the FU (or FB) signal turns ON.
43 M443
Output frequency detection for reverse rotation
9999 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the FU (or FB) signal turns ON only
while the motor rotates in reverse direction. 9999 The frequency same as the Pr.42 setting is set.
50 M444
Second output frequency detection 30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the FU2 (or FB2) signal turns ON.
116 M445
Third output frequency detection 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the FU3 (or FB3) signal turns ON.
865 M446 Low speed detection 1.5 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the LS signal turns ON.
870 M400
Speed detection hysteresis 0 Hz 0 to 5 Hz Set the hysteresis width for the detected frequency.
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H
z)
ON
Set frequency Adjustment range Pr.41
SU
Time
OFFOFF
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Output frequency detection (FU, FU2, FU3 signals, FB, FB2, FB3 signals, Pr.42, Pr.43, Pr.50, Pr.116)
The Output frequency detection (FU) signal and the Speed detection (FB) signal are output when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the Pr.42 setting.
The FU, FU2, and FU3 signals are useful for applying or releasing electromagnetic brake, etc. The FU, FU2, and FU3 signal is output when the output frequency (frequency command) reaches the set frequency. On
the other hand, the FB, FB2, and FB3 signal is output when the detected actual speed (estimated speed under Real sensorless vector control, or feedback value under Vector control) of the motor reaches the set frequency. The FU signal and the FB signal are output at the same manner under V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control or during the encoder feedback control operation.
The frequency detection dedicated to motor rotation in reverse direction is enabled by setting the frequency in Pr.43. This setting is useful when the timing of the electromagnetic braking during forward rotation operation (for example, during lifting up in the lifts operation) is different from that during reverse rotation operation (lifting down).
When Pr.43 "9999", the Pr.42 setting is for the forward rotation operation and the Pr.43 setting is for the reverse rotation operation.
When a different detection point of the frequency is required, Pr.50 and Pr.116 are available. The FU2 (or FB2) signal can be set to be output when the output frequency reaches the Pr.50 setting or higher, and the FU3 (or FB3) signal can be set to be output when the output frequency reaches the Pr.116 setting or higher.
To use each signal, set the corresponding number selected from the following table in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.
Low speed detection (LS signal, Pr.865) When the output frequency drops to the setting of Pr.865 Low speed detection or lower, the Low speed detection (LS)
signal is output. In the speed control mode under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control, the fault
occurs, the indication "E.OLT" appears, and the inverter output power shuts off if the inverter condition that the output frequency drops to the Pr.865 setting and the output torque exceeds the setting of Pr.874 OLT level setting by torque limit operation continues for 3 seconds or longer.
Forward rotation
Pr.116 Pr.50 Pr.42
Pr.43 Pr.50 Pr.116
OFFONOFFONOFF
Time
(Hz)
FU/FB
FU2/FB2
FU3/FB3
Output signal
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
Reverse rotation
Output signal Pr.190 to Pr.196 settings Related
ParameterPositive logic Negative logic FU 4 104
42, 43 FB 41 141 FU2 5 105
50 FB2 42 142 FU3 6 106
116 FB3 43 143
4855. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
48
To use the LS signal, set "34 (positive logic) or 134 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
Speed detection hysteresis (Pr.870) Setting the hysteresis width for the detected frequency prevents chattering of the Speed detection (FB) signal. When an output frequency fluctuates, the following signals may chatter (turns ON and OFF repeatedly).
Up to frequency (SU) signal Speed detection (FB, FB2, FB3) signals Low speed detection (LS) signal
Setting hysteresis to the detected frequency prevents chattering of these signals.
NOTE In the initial setting, the FU signal is assigned to terminal FU, and the SU signal is assigned to terminal SU. All signals shown in the following table are OFF during the DC injection brake operation, during the pre-excitation (zero speed
control or servo lock) operation, and during tuning at start-up. The reference frequency in comparison with the set frequency differs depending on the control method.
Setting a higher value in Pr.870 causes a lower responsivity of the signals for frequency detection (SU, FB, FB2, FB3, and LS signals).
The logic (ON/OFF switching) of the LS signal is the reverse of that of the FB signal. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473 Pr.874 OLT level settingpage 245
Time ONLS ONOFF
Pr.865
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H z)
Output frequency (Hz)
Example of the speed detection (FB) signal
Pr.870 Pr.42
ON ON
ON FB
Pr.870 Pr.870
Pr.870 Pr.870
Pr.41
ON ON ON
SU signal
SU output level
SU output level
Output frequency (Hz)
Set frequency
Time
Example of the up to frequency (SU) signal
Control method or function Reference frequency
FU, FU2, FU3 FB, FB2, FB3, SU, LS V/F control Output frequency Output frequency Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Output frequency before the slip compensation
Output frequency before the slip compensation
Real sensorless vector control Frequency command value Estimated frequency (actual motor speed)
Encoder feedback control Frequency converted from actual motor speed
Frequency converted from actual motor speed
Vector control Frequency command value Frequency converted from actual motor speed
PM sensorless vector control Frequency command value Estimated frequency (actual motor speed)
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.11.8 Output current detection function If the inverter output current which reaches a specific value is detected, the relative signal is output via an output terminal.
Output current detection (Y12 signal, Pr.150, Pr.151, Pr.166, Pr.167) The output current detection function is useful for overtorque detection. If the inverter output during inverter running remains higher than the Pr.150 setting for the time set in Pr.151 or longer, the
Output current detection (Y12) signal is output from the inverter's open collector or the relay output terminal. When the Y12 signal turns ON, the ON state is retained for the time set in Pr.166. When Pr.166 = "9999", the ON state is retained until the next start-up of the inverter. Setting Pr.167 = "1" while the Y12 signal is ON does not cause the fault E.CDO. The Pr.167 setting becomes valid after
the Y12 signal is turned OFF. To use the Y12 signal, set "12 (positive logic) or 112 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal. Use Pr.167 to select the inverter operation at the time when Y12 signal turns ON, whether the inverter output stops or the
inverter operation continues.
Zero current detection (Y13 signal, Pr.152, Pr.153) If the inverter output during inverter running remains higher than the Pr.152 setting for the time set in Pr.153 or longer, the
Zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from the inverter's open collector or the relay output terminal. Once the Zero current detection (Y13) signal turns ON, the signal is retained ON for at least 0.1 second.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
150 M460
Output current detection level 150% 0 to 400% Set the level to detect the output current. Consider the value of
the rated inverter current as 100%.
151 M461
Output current detection signal delay time 0 s 0 to 10 s
Set the timing to detect the output current. Enter the delay time between the time when the output current reaches the set current or higher and the time when the Output current detection (Y12) signal is output.
152 M462 Zero current detection level 5% 0 to 400% Set the level to detect the zero current. Consider the value of
the inverter rated current as 100%.
153 M463 Zero current detection time 0.5 s 0 to 10 s
Set the time from the time when the output current drops to the Pr.152 setting or lower to the time when the Zero current detection (Y13) signal is output.
166 M433
Output current detection signal retention time 0.1 s
0 to 10 s Set the retention time period during which the Y12 signal is ON.
9999 The Y12 signal is retained ON. The signal turns OFF at the next start-up of the inverter.
167 M464
Output current detection operation selection 0 0, 1, 10, 11 Select the inverter operation at the time when the Y12 signal
and the Y13 signal turn ON.
Pr.167 setting When the Y12 signal turns ON When the Y13 signal turns ON 0 (initial value) Operation continues. Operation continues. 1 Operation stops by fault (E.CDO). Operation continues. 10 Operation continues. Operation stops by fault (E.CDO). 11 Operation stops by fault (E.CDO). Operation stops by fault (E.CDO).
Time
Pr.150
OFF ON OFF Output current
detection signal (Y12)
Pr.166
Output current
Pr.166 "9999", Pr.167 = "0"
Pr.151
4875. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
48
If the inverter output current drops to zero, slippage due to gravity may occur, especially in a lift application, because the motor torque is not generated. To prevent this, the Y13 signal can be output from the inverter to apply the mechanical brake at zero current output.
To use the Y13 signal, set "13 (positive logic) or 113 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
Use Pr.167 to select the inverter operation at the time when Y13 signal turns ON, whether the inverter output stops or the inverter operation continues.
NOTE This function is enabled during online or offline auto tuning. The response time of the Y12 and Y13 signals is approximately 0.1 second. However, the response time varies according to
the load condition. When Pr.152 = "0", the zero current detection function is disabled. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Online auto tuningpage 558 Offline auto tuningpage 532, page 551 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
5.11.9 Output torque detection function
If the motor torque which reaches a specific value is detected, the relative signal is output. The signal is useful for applying or releasing electromagnetic brake, etc.
The Torque detection (TU) signal turns ON when the motor output torque reaches the value of torque set in Pr.864 or higher. The TU signal turns OFF when the motor output torque drops lower than the set value.
Pr.864 is not available under V/F control.
CAUTION The setting of the zero current detection level should not be too low, and the setting of the zero current detection time
should not be too long. Doing so may cause the signal for the zero current detection not to be outputted when the output current is very low and the motor torque is not generated.
A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided to prevent machines or equipment in hazardous conditions even if the Zero current detection is used.
OFF ONStart signal
Time
Output current
OFF ONZero current detection time (Y13) Pr.153
Detection time Pr.153 Detection time
Pr.152
OFF ON
0[A] 0.1s
Pr.152
When the output is restored to the Pr.152 level, the Y13 signal is turned OFF after 0.1 s.
Pr.167 = "0"
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 864 M470 Torque detection 150% 0 to 400% Set a value of the torque at which the TU
signal turns ON.
Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector PM
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
To use the TU signal, set "35 (positive logic) or 135 (negative logic)" in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
5.11.10 Remote output function The signal can be turned ON or OFF via the output terminal on the inverter as if the terminal is the remote output terminal for a programmable controller.
Remote output setting (REM signal, Pr.496, Pr.497) The signal assigned to each of the output terminal can be turned ON or OFF according to the settings of Pr.496 and Pr.497.
The signal assigned to each of the remote output terminal can be turned ON or OFF through communication via the PU connector, via the RS-485 terminals, or via a communication option.
To use the Remote output (REM) signal, set "96 (positive logic) or 196 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the terminal.
Refer to the following figures to check correspondences between the bit and the actual terminal. When "1" is set in the bit corresponding to the terminal to which the REM signal assigned by setting a number in Pr.496 and Pr.497 each, the signal turns ON (or OFF in negative logic setting). Also, setting "0" allows the signal to turn OFF (or ON in negative logic setting).
For example, when Pr.190 RUN terminal function selection = "96" (positive logic) and "1" (H01) is set in Pr.496, the REM signal assigned to terminal RUN turns ON.
Pr.496
Time ONTU OFF
O ut
pu t t
or qu
e (%
) Pr.864
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
495 M500 Remote output selection 0
0 Remote output data is cleared when the inverter power is turned OFF. Remote output data is
cleared during an inverter reset.1 Remote output data is retained even
after the inverter power is turned OFF.
10 Remote output data is cleared when the inverter power is turned OFF. Remote output data is
retained during an inverter reset.11 Remote output data is retained even
after the inverter power is turned OFF. 496 M501 Remote output data 1 0 0 to 4095 Set a decimal number to enter a binary number in every bit
corresponding to each of the output terminals on the inverter.
497 M502 Remote output data 2 0 0 to 4095
Set a decimal number to enter a binary number in every bit corresponding to each of the output terminals on the option FR- A8AY or FR-A8AR.
b11 b0
A B
C 1
A B
C 2
11111
FU O L
IP F
S U
R U
N
4895. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
49
Pr.497
*1 Any value *2 Y0 to Y6 are available when the output-extending option (FR-A8AY) is installed. *3 RA1 to RA3 are available when the relay output option (FR-A8AR) is installed.
Remote output data retention (REM signal, Pr.495) When the inverter power is reset (or a power failure occurs) while Pr.495 = "0 (initial value) or 10", the REM signal setting
is cleared. (The ON/OFF state of the signal assigned to each terminal is determined by the settings in Pr.190 to Pr.196.) The settings in Pr.496 and Pr.497 are reset to "0".
When Pr.495 = "1 or 11", the remote output data is stored in EEPROM before the inverter power is turned OFF. This means that the signal output setting after power restoration is the same as that before the power was turned OFF. However, when Pr.495 = "1", the data during an inverter reset (terminal reset or reset request via communication) is not saved.
When Pr.495 = "10 or 11", the remote output data in the signal before the reset is stored even during an inverter reset.
NOTE The output terminal to which the REM signal is not assigned by using Pr.190 to Pr.196 does not turn ON or OFF when "1 or
0" is set in bit corresponding to each of the terminals by using Pr.496 and Pr.497. (ON/OFF command affects only the terminal to which the REM signal is assigned.)
When Pr.495 = "1 or 11" (remote output data retained at power OFF), take measures to keep the control circuit power ON, such as connecting terminal R1/L11 with terminal P/+ and connecting terminal S1/L21 with terminal N/- . If the control power is not retained, the output signal after the inverter power turns ON is not guaranteed to work. When the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) or the converter unit (FR-CC2) is connected to the inverter, assign the FR-HC2/FR-CC2 connection, instantaneous power failure detection (X11) signal to an input terminal and input the IPF signal from the FR-HC2/FR-CC2 to the inverter via the terminal to which the X11 signal is assigned.
Parameters referred to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
5.11.11 Analog remote output function An analog value can be output via the analog output terminal on the inverter.
b11 b0
Y5 2
Y6 2
R A1 3
R A2 3
R A3 3
11
Y4 2
Y3 2
Y2 2
Y1 2
Y0 2
Power supply
OFF OFF
ONOFF
Power supply
REMREM
REM signal clear REM signal held
Inverter reset time (about 1s)Pr.495 = 0, 10 Pr.495 = 1, 11
ON/OFF example for positive logic
Signal condition during a reset
Reset ON
ON OFFREM
Reset ON
ONREM
Pr.495 = 0, 1 Pr.495 = 10, 11
When Pr.495 = "1", the signal condition saved in EEPROM (condition of the last power OFF) is applied.
REM signal is saved
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Analog remote output (Pr.656 to Pr.659) The analog signal of the value set in Pr.656 to Pr.659 (Analog remote output) can be output via terminal FM or CA,
terminal AM and the analog output terminal on the option FR-A8AY. When Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection = "87, 88, 89, or 90" (Remote output value), the type FM inverter can
output a pulse train via terminal FM. For FM output (when Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "0 (initial value) or 1"):
Terminal FM output [pulses/s] = 1440 [Hz] (Analog remote output value - 1000)/100 Where the output range is 0 to 2400 pulses/s.
For high-speed pulse output (when Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "10, 11, 20, or 21"): Terminal FM output [pulses/s] = 50k [Hz] (Analog remote output value - 1000)/100 Where the output range is 0 to 55k pulses/s.
When Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection = "87, 88, 89, or 90" (remote output), the type CA inverter can output any analog current via terminal CA.
Terminal CA output [mA] = 20 [mA] (Analog remote output value - 1000)/100 Where the output range is 0 to 20 mA.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
655 M530
Analog remote output selection 0
0 Remote output data is cleared when the inverter power is turned OFF. Remote output data is cleared
during an inverter reset. 1 Remote output data is retained even after
the inverter power is turned OFF.
10 Remote output data is cleared when the inverter power is turned OFF. Remote output data is
retained during an inverter reset.11 Remote output data is retained even after
the inverter power is turned OFF.
656 M531 Analog remote output 1 1000% 800 to
1200%
Value output via the terminal for which "87" is set in the terminal function selection parameter (Pr.54 or Pr.158)
Set the analog value outputted via terminal FM or CA, via terminal AM, and via the analog output terminal on the option FR-A8AY.
657 M532 Analog remote output 2 1000% 800 to
1200%
Value output via the terminal for which "88" is set in the terminal function selection parameter (Pr.54 or Pr.158)
658 M533 Analog remote output 3 1000% 800 to
1200%
Value output via the terminal for which "89" is set in the terminal function selection parameter (Pr.54 or Pr.158)
659 M534 Analog remote output 4 1000% 800 to
1200%
Value output via the terminal for which "90" is set in the terminal function selection parameter (Pr.54 or Pr.158)
1440
1100 1200
Pulse speed [pulse/s]
800 1000 Analog remote output value [%]
0
2400
Terminal FM (FM output)
50K
1100 1200
Pulse speed [pulse/s]
800 1000 Analog remote output value [%]
0
55K
Terminal FM (High-speed pulse train output)
20
1100 1200
Output current [mA]
800 1000 Analog remote output value [%]
0
Terminal CA
4915. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
49
When Pr.158 AM terminal function selection = "87, 88, 89, or 90", an analog voltage can be output via terminal AM. Terminal AM output [V] = 10 [V] (Analog remote output value - 1000)/100
The output range is -10 to +10 V regardless of the Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection setting.
Analog remote output data retention (Pr.655) When the power supply is reset (including a power failure) while Pr.655 Analog remote output selection = "0" (initial
value) or 10" and, the remote analog output (Pr.656 to Pr.659) returns to its initial value (1000%). When Pr.655 = "1 or 11", the remote output data is stored in EEPROM before the inverter power is turned OFF. This means
that the signal output setting after power restoration is the same as that before the power was turned OFF. However, when Pr.655 = "1", the data during an inverter reset (terminal reset or reset request via communication) is not saved.
When Pr.655 = "10 or 11", the remote output data in the signal before the reset is stored even during an inverter reset. When the setting in Pr.655 is changed, the remote analog output (Pr.656 to Pr.659) returns to its initial value (1000%).
NOTE When Pr.655 = "1 or 11" (remote output data retained at power OFF), take measures to keep the control circuit power ON,
such as connecting terminal R1/L11 with terminal P/+ and connecting terminal S1/L21 with terminal N/- (while power is supplied via input terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3). If the control power is not retained, the output signal after the inverter power turns ON is not guaranteed to work. When connecting the high power factor converter FR-HC2, assign the instantaneous power failure detection (X11) signal to an input terminal to input the IPF signal from the FR-HC2 to the terminal for X11 signal.
Parameters referred to Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selectionpage 457 Pr.158 AM terminal function selectionpage 457 Pr.290 Monitor negative output selectionpage 457 Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selectionpage 457
5.11.12 Fault code output selection When a fault occurs, the corresponding data can be output as a 4-bit digital signal using via an open collector output terminal. The fault code can be read using an input module of programmable controller, etc.
10
1100 1200
-10
900
Output voltage [V]
800 1000
Analog remote output value [%]
Terminal AM
0
Power supply
OFF OFFPower supply
Analog output
Analog output clear
Analog output held
Inverter reset time (about 1s)Pr.655 = 0, 10 Pr.655 = 1, 11
ON/OFF example for positive logic
Signal condition during a reset
Reset ON
Reset ON
Pr.655 = 0, 1 Pr.655 = 10, 11
When Pr.655 = "1", the signal condition saved in EEPROM (condition of the last power OFF) is applied.
Analog output saved
Analog output
Analog output
Analog output
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Fault codes can be output to the output terminals by setting Pr.76 Fault code output selection = "1 or 2". When the setting is "2", a fault code is only output when a fault occurs. In normal operation the terminal outputs the signal
assigned in Pr.191 to Pr.194 (Output terminal function selection). The fault codes that can be output are shown in the following table. (0: Output transistor OFF, 1: Output transistor ON)
*1 When Pr.76 = "2", the terminal outputs the signal assigned by Pr.191 to Pr.194.
NOTE If an error occurs while Pr.76 "0", the output terminals SU, IPF, OL, and FU output the signals in the table above regardless
of the settings in Pr.191 to Pr.194 (Output terminal function selection). Take caution when controlling the inverter with the output signals set by Pr.191 to Pr.194.
Parameters referred to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
5.11.13 Pulse train output to announce cumulative output energy
Every time when the output energy cumulated from the time at power ON or at an inverter reset or when the setting of Pr.799 Pulse increment setting for output power has been changed increments by the set value, the Pulse train output of output power (Y79) signal is output in pulses.
Pulse increment setting for output power (Y79 signal, Pr.799) Every time when the output energy cumulated from the time at power ON or at an inverter reset increments by the set value
of Pr.799 Pulse increment setting for output power, the Pulse train output of output power (Y79) signal is output in pulses.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
76 M510 Fault code output selection 0
0 Without fault code output 1 With fault code output 2 Fault code is output only when a fault occurs
Operation panel indication (FR-DU08)
Output terminal operation Fault code
SU IPF OL FU Normal*1 0 0 0 0 0 E.OC1 0 0 0 1 1 E.OC2 0 0 1 0 2 E.OC3 0 0 1 1 3 E.OV1 to E.OV3 0 1 0 0 4 E.THM 0 1 0 1 5 E.THT 0 1 1 0 6 E.IPF 0 1 1 1 7 E.UVT 1 0 0 0 8 E.FIN 1 0 0 1 9 E.BE 1 0 1 0 A E. GF 1 0 1 1 B E.OHT 1 1 0 0 C E.OLT 1 1 0 1 D E.OPT, E.OP1 to E.OP3 1 1 1 0 E
Terminals other than the above 1 1 1 1 F
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
799 M520
Pulse increment setting for output power 1 kWh
0.1 kWh, 1 kWh, 10 kWh, 100 kWh, 1000 kWh
The Pulse train output of output power (Y79) signal is output in pulses every time when the output energy increments by the set amount of energy (kWh).
4935. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
49
The inverter does not stop cumulating (can continue to cumulate) the output energy even if the retry function or the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function works because the cause of the function activation is a mini power failure which is too short to cause an inverter reset.
If a power failure occurs, the cumulative value is reset to 0 kWh and restart cumulating. To use the Y79 signal, set "79 (positive logic) or 179 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
NOTE Because the accumulated data in the inverter is cleared when control power is lost by power failure or at an inverter reset, the
value on the monitor cannot be used to charge electricity bill. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. (Refer to page 473.) Do not assign the signal to terminal ABC1 or terminal ABC2 whose pulse outputs are frequently turned ON/OFF. Otherwise,
the life of the relay contact may be shortened.
Parameters referred to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
5.11.14 Detection of control circuit temperature The temperature of the control circuit board can be monitored, and a signal can be output according to a predetermined temperature setting.
Control circuit temperature monitoring The temperature of the control circuit board can be monitored within the range of 0 to 100C on the operation panel, or via
terminal FM/CA, or terminal AM. Refer to page 446 for information on how to select the monitor item. When Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection is set to enable display of the negative numbers for monitoring on the
operation panel or via terminal AM, the range of monitoring is -20 to 100C. The monitor value is a rough approximation of the change in the surrounding air temperature of the inverter. Use this
parameter to grasp the operating environment of the inverter.
Control circuit temperature detection (Pr.663, Y207 signal) The Y207 signal can be output when the control circuit temperature reaches the Pr.663 setting or higher. To use the Y207 signal, set "207 (positive logic) or 307 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal
function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
NOTE The Y207 signal is turned OFF when the control circuit temperature becomes 5C or more lower than the Pr.663 setting. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selectionpage 457 Pr.158 AM terminal function selectionpage 457 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473 Pr.290 Monitor negative output selectionpage 457
When Pr.799 = 10
10kWh
20kWh
Output power
Time Pulse output of output power (Y79)
OFF
ON for 0.15s
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 663 M060
Control circuit temperature signal output level 0C 0 to 100C Set the temperature where the Y207 signal turns
ON.
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.11.15 Encoder pulse dividing output The encoder pulse signal at the motor end can be divided in division ratio set in the parameter and be output. Use this parameter to make the response of the machine to be input slower, etc. The FR-A8AL or the FR-A8TP is required to be installed.
*1 This parameter is available when the FR-A8AL (option) is installed. *2 This parameter is available when the FR-A8TP (option) is installed.
Division waveform by division ratio Both ON-OFF width is division times (50% duty).
Pulse waveform example at 1000 pulse input when Pr.413 or Pr.863 = "2"
NOTE Control of motor rotation (forward or reverse) by phase difference between A phase and B phase is as follows.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 413 M601*1 Encoder pulse division ratio
1 1 to 32767 Set a numerical value by which pulses are divided. 863 M600*2
Control terminal option- Encoder pulse division ratio
A-phases B-phases
A-phases B-phases
Division ratio
Division ratio
1/1
1/2
(1000 pulses)
(500 pulses) 2 divisions
When A phase is 90 advanced as compared to B phase: Forward rotation When A phase is 90 behind as compared to B phase: Reverse rotation
4955. PARAMETERS 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
49
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
5.12.1 Analog input selection The functions to switch the analog input terminal specifications, override function, forward/reverse rotation by the input signal polarity are selectable.
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
To inverse the rotation direction with the voltage/current analog input selection (terminals 1, 2, and 4)
Analog input selection P.T000, P.T001 Pr.73, Pr.267 496
To assign functions to analog input terminals
Terminal 1 and terminal 4 function assignment P.T010, P.T040 Pr.858, Pr.868 500
To adjust the main speed by the analog auxiliary input
Analog auxiliary input and compensation (addition compensation and override functions)
P.T000, P.T021, P.T041, P.T050, P.T051
Pr.73, Pr.242, Pr.243, Pr.252, Pr.253 501
To eliminate noise on analog inputs Analog input filter P.T002 to P.T007 Pr.74, Pr.822, Pr.826, Pr.832, Pr.836, Pr.849
503
To adjust analog input frequency/voltage (current) (calibration)
Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain
P.T100 to P.T103, P.T200 to P.T203, P.T400 to P.T403, P.M043
Pr.125, Pr.126, Pr.241, C2 to C7 (Pr.902 to Pr.905), C12 to C15 (Pr.917 to Pr.918)
505
To adjust analog input torque/voltage (current) (calibration)
Torque setting voltage (current) bias and gain
P.T110 to P.T113, P.T410 to P.T413, P.M043
Pr.241, C16 to C19 (Pr.919 to Pr.920), C38 to C41 (Pr.932 to Pr.933)
510
To continue operating at analog current input loss 4 mA input check P.T052 to P.T054 Pr.573, Pr.777,
Pr.778 517
To assign functions to input terminals Input terminal function selection
P.T700 to P.T711, P.T740
Pr.178 to Pr.189, Pr.699 521
To change the input specification (NO/NC contact) of input signals
Output stop (MRS) signal input selection P.T720 Pr.17 524
Inverter run enable (X10) signal input selection P.T721 Pr.599 727
Power failure stop external (X48) signal input selection P.T722 Pr.606 642
To enable the second function only during the constant speed
RT signal function validity condition selection P.T730 Pr.155 525
To assign start and forward/reverse commands to different signals
Start signal (STF/STR) operation selection P.G106 Pr.250 722
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
73 T000 Analog input selection 1
0 to 5, 10 to 15
Switch 1 - OFF (initial status)
The terminal 2 input specification (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA) and terminal 1 input specification (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V) are selectable. Also the override and reversible operation settings are selectable.
6 to 7, 16, 17 Switch 1 - ON
267 T001
Terminal 4 input selection 0
0 Switch 2 - ON (initial status) Terminal 4 input, 4 to 20 mA
1 Switch 2 - OFF
Terminal 4 input, 0 to 5 V 2 Terminal 4 input, 0 to 10 V
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Analog input specification selection For terminals 2 and 4 used for analog input, the voltage input (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V) and current input (0 to 20 mA) are
selectable. To change the input specification, change the setting of Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input selection switch (switch 1 or switch 2).
Change the setting of the voltage/current input selection switch to change the rated specification of terminal 2 or 4. Set Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input selection switch according to the analog signal input. The incorrect
settings shown in the following table cause a failure. The inverter does not operate properly with other incorrect settings.
NOTE Check the number of the voltage/current input selection switch before setting, because it is different from the switch number
indicated on the FR-A700 series inverter.
Switch state Input specification Input terminal Rated specification
Switch 1 ON Current input
Terminal 2 For voltage input, the input resistance is 101 k and the maximum permissible voltage is 20 VDC. For current input, the input resistance is 2455 and the maximum permissible current is 30 mA.
OFF Voltage input (initial status)
Switch 2 ON Current input (initial status)
Terminal 4 OFF Voltage input
Voltage/current input switch
2 4
Switch 1 Switch 2
Setting causing a failure Operation
Switch setting Terminal input
ON (Current input) Voltage input Causes an analog signal output circuit failure in an external device (due to increased loads on the signal output circuit of the external device).
OFF (Voltage input) Current input Causes an input circuit failure in the inverter (due to an increased output power in the analog signal output circuit of an external device).
4975. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
49
Set Pr.73 and the voltage/current input selection switch according to the following table.
*1 The main speed setting is indicated.
When the Terminal 4 input selection (AU) signal is turned ON, terminal 4 is used to set the main speed. In this case, terminals 1 and 2 are not used to set the main speed.
Set Pr.267 and the voltage/current input selection switch according to the following table.
NOTE To enable terminal 4, turn ON the AU signal. Set the parameters and the switch settings so that they agree. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure, or malfunction. The frequency setting auxiliary input through terminal 1 is added to the main speed setting signal input through terminal 2 or 4. When the override setting is selected, terminal 1 or 4 is set to the main speed setting, and terminal 2 is set to the override
signal (0 to 5 V or 0 to 10 V, and 50% to 150%). (If the main speed signal is not input through terminal 1 or 4, the compensation by terminal 2 is disabled.)
Use Pr.125 (Pr.126) (frequency setting gain) to change the maximum output frequency at the input of the maximum output frequency command voltage (current). At this time, the command voltage (current) need not be input. Also, the acceleration/ deceleration time, which is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, is not affected by the change in Pr.73 setting.
When "4" is set in Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment (Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment), the stall prevention operation level is input through terminal 1 (4). To input frequency through terminal 1 (4), set "0 (initial value)" in Pr.858 (Pr.868).
Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input signal with Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input selection switch.
When Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level "9999", terminal 2 is not used for the analog frequency command.
Running with analog input voltage For the frequency setting signal, input 0 to 5 VDC (or 0 to 10 VDC) between terminals 2 and 5. The 5 V (10 V) input is the
maximum output frequency.
Pr.73 setting Terminal 2 input Switch 1 Terminal 1
input
Compensation input terminal compensation
method Reversible polarity
0 0 to 10 V*1 OFF 0 to 10 V
Terminal 1 addition compensation
Not applied (state in which a negative polarity frequency command signal is not accepted)
1 (initial value) 0 to 5 V*1 OFF 0 to 10 V
2 0 to 10 V*1 OFF 0 to 5 V
3 0 to 5 V*1 OFF 0 to 5 V
4 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to 10 V*1 Terminal 2 override
5 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to 5 V*1
6 0 to 20 mA*1 ON 0 to 10 V
Terminal 1 addition compensation
7 0 to 20 mA*1 ON 0 to 5 V
10 0 to 10 V*1 OFF 0 to 10 V
Applied
11 0 to 5 V*1 OFF 0 to 10 V
12 0 to 10 V*1 OFF 0 to 5 V
13 0 to 5 V*1 OFF 0 to 5 V
14 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to 10 V*1 Terminal 2 override
15 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to 5 V*1
16 0 to 20 mA*1 ON 0 to 10 V Terminal 1 addition compensation17 0 to 20 mA*1 ON 0 to 5 V
Pr.267 setting Terminal 4 input Switch 2 0 (initial value) 4 to 20 mA ON 1 0 to 5 V OFF 2 0 to 10 V OFF
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The power supply 5 V (10 V) can be input by either using the internal power supply or preparing an external power supply. The internal power supply is 5 VDC output between terminals 10 and 5, and 10 VDC output between terminals 10E and 5.
To supply the 10 VDC input to terminal 2, set "0, 2, 4, 10, 12, or 14" in Pr.73. (The initial value is 0 to 5 V.) Set "1 (0 to 5 VDC)" or "2 (0 to 10 VDC)" in Pr.267 and turn OFF the voltage/current input selection switch to input voltage
through terminal 4. Turning ON the AU signal activates the terminal 4 input.
NOTE The wiring length of terminal 10, 2, and 5 should be 30 m at maximum.
Running with analog input current For constant pressure or temperature control with fans, pumps, or other devices, automatic operation is available by setting
the regulator output signal 4 to 20 mADC to between terminals 4 and 5. To use terminal 4, the AU signal needs to be turned ON.
Set "6, 7, 16, or 17" in Pr.73 and turn ON the voltage/current input selection switch to input current through terminal 2. In this case, the AU signal does not need to be turned ON.
Performing forward/reverse rotation with the analog input (polarity reversible operation)
Setting "10 to 17" in Pr.73 enables the polarity reversible operation.
Terminal Inverter internal power source voltage Frequency setting resolution Pr.73 (terminal 2 input voltage)
10 5 VDC 0.030/60 Hz 0 to 5 VDC input 10E 10 VDC 0.015/60 Hz 0 to 10 VDC input
STF Inverter
Forward rotation
Frequency setting
0 to 5 VDC
SD
10 2 5
Connection diagram using terminal 2 (0 to 5 VDC)
Voltage/current input switch
2 4
STF Inverter
Forward rotation
Frequency setting
0 to 10 VDC SD
10E 2 5
Connection diagram using terminal 2 (0 to 10 VDC)
Voltage/current input switch
2 4
STF InverterForward
rotation
SD
AU
Connection diagram using terminal 4 (0 to 5 VDC)
Terminal 4 input selection
Frequency setting
0 to 5 VDC 10 4 5
Voltage/current input switch
2 4
STF Inverter
Forward rotation
Frequency setting
SD
4
5
AU
Connection diagram using terminal 4 (4 to 20mADC)
4 to 20mADC Current
input equipment
Voltage/current input switch
2 4
STF Inverter
Forward rotation SD
2
5
Connection diagram using terminal 2 (4 to 20mADC)
Frequency setting
4 to 20mADC Current
input equipment
Voltage/current input switch
2 4
4995. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
50
Set a positive or negative input (0 to 5 V or 0 to 10 V) to terminal 1 to allow the operation of forward/reverse rotation according to the polarity of the input value.
Parameters referred to Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 431 Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 505 Pr.252, Pr.253 Override bias/gainpage 501 Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection levelpage 415 Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500
5.12.2 Analog input terminal (terminal 1, 4) function assignment
The analog input terminal 1 and terminal 4 functions are set and changeable with parameters.
For terminals 1 and 4 used for analog input, the frequency (speed) command, magnetic flux command, torque command, and other similar commands are usable. The functions available are different depending on the control method and control mode as shown in the following table. (For details on the control methods, refer to page 221.)
Functions of terminal 1 under different control modes
Functions of terminal 4 under different control modes
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Terminal 1 input (V)
+5 (+10)
-5 (-10)
0
60
Set frequency (Hz)
Reversible
Not reversible
Compensation input characteristics when STF is ON
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 868 T010
Terminal 1 function assignment 0 0 to 6, 9999 Select the terminal 1 function.
858 T040
Terminal 4 function assignment 0 0, 1, 4, 9999 Select the terminal 4 function.
Pr.868 setting
V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector
control
Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, PM sensorless vector control
Speed control Torque control Position control
0 (initial value) Auxiliary frequency setting Auxiliary speed setting Auxiliary speed limit
1 Magnetic flux command*1 Magnetic flux command*1 Magnetic flux command*1
2 Regenerative torque limit (Pr.810 = "1") Regenerative torque limit
(Pr.810 = "1")
3 Torque command (Pr.804 = "0")
4 Stall prevention operation level input Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1") Torque command (Pr.804 = "0") Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
5 Forward/reverse rotation speed limit (Pr.807 = "2")
6 Torque bias input (Pr.840 = "1, 2, or 3")
9999
Pr.858 setting
V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector
control
Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, PM sensorless vector control
Speed control Torque control Position control
0 (initial value)
Frequency command (AU signal- ON)
Speed command (AU signal- ON) Speed limit (AU signal-ON)
1 Magnetic flux command *1*2 Magnetic flux command *1*2 Magnetic flux command *1*2
4 Stall prevention operation level input Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")*3 Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")*3
9999
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
: No function *1 This function is valid under Vector control. *2 Invalid when Pr.868 = "1". *3 Invalid when Pr.868 = "4".
NOTE When Pr.868 = "1" (magnetic flux command) or "4" (stall prevention / torque limit), the terminal 4 function is enabled regardless
of the ON/OFF state of the AU signal.
Parameters referred to Advanced magnetic flux vector controlpage 228 Real sensorless vector controlpage 221 Pr.804 Torque command source selectionpage 283 Pr.807 Speed limit selectionpage 287 Pr.810 Torque limit input method selectionpage 245 Pr.840 Torque bias selectionpage 265
5.12.3 Analog input compensation The analog input for multi-speed operation or speed setting (main speed) through terminal 2 or 4 can be compensated by adding an input, or terminal 2 can be used for an auxiliary input to compensate the analog input at a fixed ratio using the override function.
Compensation by addition (Pr.242, Pr.243)
A compensation signal can be added to the main speed setting for such as synchronous or continuous speed control operation.
Set "0 to 3, 6, 7, 10 to 13, 16, or 17" in Pr.73 to add the voltage determined by the terminal 1 input when the main speed setting is input through terminal 2.
When a negative voltage obtained from the addition, it is regarded as 0 and the operation is stopped when Pr.73 = "0 to 3, 6, or 7", and the operation is reversed (polarity reversible operation) after the STF signal is turned ON when Pr.73 = "10 to 13, 16, or 17".
The terminal 1 compensation input can be added to the multi-speed setting or terminal 4 (initial value: 4 to 20 mA).
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 73 T000 Analog input selection 1
0 to 3, 6, 7, 10 to 13, 16, 17 Compensation by addition 4, 5, 14, 15 Compensation using the override function
242 T021
Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 2)
100% 0 to 100% Set the percentage of addition when terminal 2 is used to set the main speed.
243 T041
Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 4)
75% 0 to 100% Set the percentage of addition when terminal 4 is used to set the main speed.
252 T050 Override bias 50% 0 to 200% Set bias compensation for the override
function. 253 T051 Override gain 150% 0 to 200% Set gain compensation for the override
function.
Example of addition compensation connection
10 2 5
Forward rotation
Inverter
STF SD
1Auxiliary input 0 to 10V( 5V)
5015. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
50
The degree of addition to terminal 2 is adjustable with Pr.242 and the degree of addition to terminal 4 is adjustable with Pr.243.
NOTE After changing the Pr.73 setting, check the setting of the voltage/current input selection switch. Incorrect setting may cause a
fault, failure, or malfunction. (Refer to page 496 for the setting.)
Override function (Pr.252, Pr.253)
Use the override function to make the main speed changed at a specified rate. Set "4, 5, 14, or 15" in Pr.73 to select the override function. When the override function is selected, terminal 1 or 4 is used for the main speed setting, and terminal 2 is used for the
override signal. (If the main speed signal is not input through terminal 1 or 4, the compensation by terminal 2 is disabled.) Specify the scope of override by using Pr.252 and Pr.253. How to calculate the set frequency when the override function is used:
Main speed setting frequency (Hz): Terminals 1 or 4 input, multi-speed setting Compensation (%): Terminal 2 input
Analog command value with use of terminal 2 = terminal 2 input + terminal 1 input Pr.242 100(%)
Analog command value with use of terminal 4= terminal 4 input + terminal 1 input Pr.243 100(%)
Output frequency When voltage across terminals 2 and 5 is 2.5 V (5 V)
When voltage across terminals 2 and 5 is 0 V
+5 V (+10 V)
Terminal 10-2.5 V (-5 V)
-5 V (-10 V)
STF Signal ON
Forward rotation
Forward rotation
(a) When Pr.73 setting is 0 to 3
Output frequency When voltage across terminals 2 and 5 is 2.5 V (5 V)
When voltage across terminals 2 and 5 is 0 V
+5 V (+10 V)
Terminal 10-2.5 V (-5 V)
-5 V (-10 V)
STF Signal ON
Forward rotation
Forward rotation
(b) When Pr.73 setting is 10 to 13
Reverse rotation
Reverse rotation
+2.5 V (+5 V)
+2.5 V (+5 V)
STF Signal ON
STF Signal ON
Auxiliary input characteristics
10
2
5
Forward rotation
Main speed
Inverter
STF SD
1 (-) (+)
Override setting
Connection example for the override function
Set frequency (Hz) = Main speed setting frequency (Hz) Compensation (%)
100(%)
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE To use terminal 4, the AU signal needs to be turned ON. To make compensation input for multi-speed operation or remote setting, set Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation
selection = "1" (with compensation) (initial value "0"). After changing the Pr.73 setting, check the setting of the voltage/current input selection switch. Incorrect setting may cause a
fault, failure, or malfunction. (Refer to page 496 for the setting.)
Parameters referred to Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selectionpage 411 Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 496
5.12.4 Response level of analog input and noise elimination
The response level and stability of frequency command/torque command using the analog input signal (terminal 1, 2, or 4) can be adjusted.
Example) When Pr.73 = "5" By the terminal 1 (main speed) and terminal 2 (auxiliary) input, the setting frequency is set as shown in the figure below.
Pr.252
0V 2.5V (5V)
5V (10V)
0
50
100
150
200
Initial value (50% to 150%)
Voltage across terminals 2 and 5
Pr.253
O ve
rri de
v al
ue (%
)
0 2.5 5 0
30
15
60
45
90
Terminal 1 input voltage (V)
Terminal 2 5VDC input(150%)
Terminal 2 2.5VDC input(100%)
Terminal 2 0V input(50%)
Se t f
re qu
en cy
(H z)
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
74 T002 Input filter time constant 1 0 to 8
Set the primary delay filter time constant to the analog input command. If the setting is too large, response becomes slow.
822 T003 Speed setting filter 1 9999
0 to 5 s Set the primary delay filter time constant to the external speed command (analog input command).
9999 As set in Pr.74.
826 T004 Torque setting filter 1 9999
0 to 5 s Set the primary delay filter time constant to the external torque command (analog input command).
9999 As set in Pr.74. 832 T005 Speed setting filter 2 9999 0 to 5 s, 9999 Second function of Pr.822 (enabled when the RT signal is
ON) 836 T006 Torque setting filter 2 9999 0 to 5 s, 9999 Second function of Pr.826 (enabled when the RT signal is
ON)
849 T007
Analog input offset adjustment 100% 0 to 200%
Set offset for the analog speed input (terminal 2). The motor is prevented from rotating due to noise in the analog input or other factors when a zero speed command is given.
5035. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
50
Block diagram
Analog input time constant (Pr.74) Use this parameter to eliminate noise on the frequency setting circuit. Increase the filter time constant if the operation is unstable due to noise or other factors.
If the setting is too large, response becomes slow. (The time constant can be between 0 and 8, which are about 2 ms to 1 second.)
Analog speed command input time constant (Pr.822, Pr.832) Use Pr.822 Speed setting filter 1 to set the primary delay filter time constant to the external speed command (analog
input command). Increase the setting of the time constant to allow delays in follow-up of the speed command or when the analog input voltage is unstable.
Use Pr.832 Speed setting filter 2 to change the time constant to use one inverter to switch operation between two or more motors.
Pr.832 Speed setting filter 2 is enabled when the RT signal is ON.
Analog torque command input time constant (Pr.826, Pr.836) Use Pr.826 Torque setting filter 1 to set the primary delay filter time constant to the external torque command (analog
input command). Increase the setting of the time constant to allow delays in follow-up of the torque command or when the analog input voltage is unstable.
Use Pr.836 Torque setting filter 2 to change the time constant to use one inverter to switch operation between two or more motors.
Pr.836 Torque setting filter 2 is enabled when the RT signal is ON.
Analog speed command input offset adjustment (Pr.849) Use this parameter to set a range in which the motor is stopped for prevention of incorrect motor operation in a very low
speed rotation when the speed command is an analog input. The voltage range is offset according to the setting in Pr.849 Analog input offset adjustment, assuming that 100%
corresponds to zero. 100% < Pr.849 ...... Positive side 100% > Pr.849 ...... Negative side The detailed calculation of the offset voltage is as described below:
Offset voltage [V] = Voltage at the time of 100% (5 V or 10 V*1) (Pr.849 - 100) / 100
Pr.836
Speed command Pr.822 = 9999
Pr.822 9999
Pr.826 = 9999
Pr.826
Pr.74
Torque command
Pr.822
Pr.74
Pr.826 9999
Pr.832 9999
Pr.836 = 9999
Terminal 1 (2, 4) input
RT-OFF
RT-ON
Pr.832 = 9999
Pr.836 9999
Pr.832
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 It depends on the Pr.73 setting.
NOTE The analog input filter is invalid (no filter) during PID control operation.
Parameters referred to Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 496 Pr.125, C2 to C4 (bias and gain of the terminal 2 frequency setting)page 505
5.12.5 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain The magnitude (slope) of the output frequency can be set as desired in relation to the frequency setting signal (0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA). Use Pr.73 Analog input selection (Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection) and the voltage/current input selection switch to switch among input of 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 V, and 4 to 20 mA. (Refer to page 496.)
*1 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the LCD operation panel and the parameter unit.
0% 100% (10V or 5V)
Pr.849 setting
Frequency command
Speed setting signal
Slope determined according to Pr.125 and C2 to C4
Slope does not change.
0% 200%100%
Pr. Name Initial value Setting
range Description FM CA
C2 (902) T200*1
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the bias frequency for the terminal 2 input.
C3 (902) T201*1
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 0% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the bias voltage (current) for the terminal
2 input. 125 (903) T202 T022*1
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the gain (maximum) frequency for the terminal 2 input.
C4 (903) T203*1
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 100% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the gain voltage (current) for the terminal
2 input. C5 (904) T400*1
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the bias frequency for the terminal 4 input.
C6 (904) T401*1
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 20% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the bias current (voltage) for the terminal
4 input. 126 (905) T402 T042*1
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the gain (maximum) frequency for the terminal 4 input.
C7 (905) T403*1
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 100% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the gain current (voltage) for the terminal
4 input. C12 (917) T100*1
Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) 0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the bias frequency (speed) for the terminal 1 input. (Speed
limit) C13 (917) T101*1 Terminal 1 bias (speed) 0% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the bias voltage for the terminal 1 input.
(Speed limit) C14 (918) T102*1
Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the gain (maximum) frequency (speed) for the terminal 1
input. (Speed limit) C15 (918) T103*1 Terminal 1 gain (speed) 100% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the gain voltage for the terminal 1 input.
(Speed limit)
241 M043
Analog input display unit switchover 0
0 % display Select the unit for analog input display.
1 V/mA display
5055. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
50
Relationship between the analog input terminal function and the calibration parameter
Calibration parameter according to the terminal 1 function
Calibration parameter according to the terminal 4 function
*1 Use Pr.148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input or Pr.149 Stall prevention level at 10 V input to adjust bias or gain for setting the stall prevention operation level.
Changing the frequency for the maximum analog input (Pr.125, Pr.126) Use Pr.125 (Pr.126) to change the frequency setting (gain) for the maximum analog input voltage (current).
(C2 (Pr.902) to C7 (Pr.905) settings do not need to be changed.)
Analog input bias/gain calibration (C2 (Pr.902) to C7 (Pr.905), C12 (Pr.917) to C15 (Pr.918))
The "bias" and "gain" functions serve to adjust the relationship between a setting input signal and the output frequency. A setting input signal is such as a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mADC signal externally input to set the output frequency.
Set the bias frequency of the terminal 2 input using C2 (Pr.902). (It is initially set to the frequency at 0 V.) Use Pr.125 to set the output frequency to the frequency command voltage (current) set by Pr.73 Analog input selection.
Pr.868 setting Terminal function
Calibration parameter Bias setting Gain setting
0 (initial value)
Auxiliary frequency (speed) setting
C2 (Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency, C3 (Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias, C5 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency, C6 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, C4 (Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain, Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency, C7 (Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
1 Magnetic flux command
C16 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias command (torque/magnetic flux), C17 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/ magnetic flux)
C18 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain command (torque/magnetic flux), C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/ magnetic flux)
2 Regenerative driving torque limit C16 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias command
(torque/magnetic flux), C17 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/ magnetic flux)
C18 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain command (torque/magnetic flux), C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/ magnetic flux)
3 Torque command
4 Stall prevention operation level*1/ torque limit / torque command
5 Forward/reverse rotation speed limit
C12 (Pr.917) Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed), C13 (Pr.917) Terminal 1 bias (speed)
C14 (Pr.918) Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed), C15 (Pr.918) Terminal 1 gain (speed)
6 Torque bias input
C16 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias command (torque/magnetic flux), C17 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/ magnetic flux)
C18 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain command (torque/magnetic flux), C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/ magnetic flux)
9999 No function
Pr.858 setting Terminal function
Calibration parameter Bias setting Gain setting
0 (initial value) Frequency command
C5 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency, C6 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency, C7 (Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
1 Magnetic flux command
C38 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias command (torque/magnetic flux), C39 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias (torque/ magnetic flux)
C40 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain command (torque/magnetic flux), C41 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/ magnetic flux)
4 Stall prevention operation level*1/ torque limit
C38 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias command (torque/magnetic flux), C39 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias (torque/ magnetic flux)
C40 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain command (torque/magnetic flux), C41 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/ magnetic flux)
9999 No function
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Set the bias frequency of the terminal 1 input using C12 (Pr.917). (It is initially set to the frequency at 0 V.) Set the gain frequency of the terminal 1 input using C14 (Pr.918). (It is initially set to the frequency at 10 V.) Set the bias frequency of the terminal 4 input using C5 (Pr.904). (It is initially set to the frequency at 4 mA.) Use Pr.126 to set the output frequency to the 20 mA input of the frequency command current (4 to 20 mA).
There are three methods to adjust the bias/gain frequency setting voltage (current). Adjustment by applying voltage (current) between terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5) to set the voltage (current) at the bias/gain frequency. page 508 Adjustment by selecting the voltage (current) at the bias/gain frequency without applying voltage (current) between terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5). page 508 Adjustment by changing the frequency without adjusting the voltage (current). page 510
NOTE When the slope of the frequency is changed after calibration of terminal 2, the slope of the frequency is also changed for
terminal 1. When voltage is applied to terminal 1 while calibration of terminal 2 or terminal 4 is in progress, the terminal 1 input value is
added to the terminal 2 (4) input value. Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input signal with Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input
selection switch.
Display unit changing for analog input (Pr.241) The analog input display unit (%/V/mA) can be changed for analog input bias/gain calibration. Depending on the terminal input specification setting of Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input switch, the unit of the
displayed value of C3 (Pr.902), C4 (Pr.903), C6 (Pr.904) and C7 (Pr.905) changes as shown below:
NOTE When voltage is applied to terminal 1 while the terminal 1 input specification (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V) does not agree with the
main speed (terminal 2 or terminal 4 input) specification (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA), the analog input is not correctly displayed. (For example, when 0 V is applied to terminal 2 and 10 V is applied to terminal 1 in the initial status, the value is indicated as 5 V (100%).) Set "0 (initial value)" in Pr.241 to use the % display.
60Hz (50Hz)
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H
z)
Pr.125 C14(Pr.918)
0
0 0
Frequency setting signal 100%
10V 20mA
Initial value
Bias
Gain
0 5V
C2(Pr.902) C12(Pr.917)
C3(Pr.902) C13(Pr.917)
C4(Pr.903) C15(Pr.918)
60Hz (50Hz)
Pr.126
0
Frequency setting signal
100%
Initial value
Bias Gain
0 20 4 20mA
Output frequency (Hz)
C5 (Pr.904)
C6(Pr.904) C7(Pr.905)
0 1 5V 0 2 10V
Analog command (via terminal 2 or 4) (depending on the settings of Pr.73
(Pr.267) and the voltage/current input selection switch)
Pr.241 = "0 (initial value)" Pr.241 = "1"
0 to 5 V input 0 to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 5 V (0.01 V) 0 to 10 V input 0 to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 10 V (0.01 V) 0 to 20 mA input 0 to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 20 mA (0.01 mA)
5075. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
50
Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain adjustment method Adjustment by applying voltage (current) between terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5) to set the voltage
(current) at the bias/gain frequency (Example of adjustment at the gain frequency)
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode
Press to choose the PU operation mode. The [PU] indicator turns ON.
3. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
4. Calibration parameter selection
Turn until " " appears. Press to display " ".
5. Selecting a parameter
Turn until " " (C4 (Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain) appears for terminal 2, or
" " (C7 (Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain) for terminal 4.
6. Analog voltage (current) display
Press to display the analog voltage (current) value (%) currently applied to terminal 2 (4).
Do not touch until calibration is completed.
7. Voltage (current) application Apply a 5 V (20 mA). (Turn the external potentiometer connected between terminals 2 and 5 (terminals 4 and 5) to a desired position.)
8. Setting completed
Press to confirm the selection. The analog voltage (current) % and " ( )" are displayed alternately.
Turn to read another parameter.
Press to return to the " " display.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
Adjustment by selecting the voltage (current) at the bias/gain frequency without applying voltage (current) between terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5) (Example of adjustment at the gain frequency)
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode
Press to choose the PU operation mode. The [PU] indicator turns ON.
3. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4. Calibration parameter selection
Turn until " " appears. Press to display " ".
5. Selecting a parameter
Turn until " " (C4 (Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain) appears for terminal 2, or
" " (C7 (Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain) for terminal 4.
6. Analog voltage (current) display
Press to display the analog voltage (current) value (%) currently applied to terminal 2 (4).
7. Analog voltage (current) adjustment
When is turned, the gain voltage (current) value (%) currently set to the parameter appears.
Turn until the desired gain voltage (current) value (%) appears.
8. Setting completed
Press to confirm the selection. The analog voltage (current) % and " ( )" are displayed alternately.
Turn to read another parameter.
Press to return to the " " display.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
NOTE
Press after step 6 to check the present bias/gain frequency setting. The setting cannot be checked after step 7.
5095. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
51
Adjustment by changing the frequency without adjusting the voltage (current) (Example of changing the gain frequency from 60 Hz to 50 Hz)
Operating procedure 1. Selecting the parameter
Turn until " " (Pr.125) appears for terminal 2, or " " (Pr.126) for terminal 4.
Press to read the present set value. (60.00 Hz)
2. Changing the maximum frequency
Turn to change the set value to " ". (50.00 Hz)
Press to confirm the selection. " " and " ( )" are displayed alternately.
3. Selecting the mode and the monitor item
Press three times to select the monitor mode, and change the monitor item to the frequency.
4. Start Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal), and turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full. (Refer to steps 2 and 3 in page 157.) The motor is operated at 50 Hz.
NOTE If the frequency meter (display meter) connected between terminal FM and SD (CA and 5) does not indicate exactly 60 Hz,
set the calibration parameter C0 FM/CA terminal calibration. (Refer to page 463.)
If the voltage (current) values at the gain and bias frequencies are too close to each other, an error " " may be indicated.
Changing C4 (Pr.903) or C7 (Pr.905) (gain adjustment) will not change Pr.20. Input to terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) is added to the frequency setting signal.
For operation outline of the parameter unit (FR-PU07), refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-PU07. To set the value to 120 Hz or higher, the Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency needs to be 120 Hz or higher. (Refer to
page 428.) Use the calibration parameter C2 (Pr.902) or C5 (Pr.904) to set the bias frequency. (Refer to page 506.)
Parameters referred to Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum frequencypage 428 Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequencypage 367 Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selectionpage 496 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500
5.12.6 Torque (magnetic flux) setting voltage (current) bias and gain
The magnitude (slope) of the torque can be set as desired in relation to the torque setting signal (0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA).
CAUTION Be cautious when setting any value other than "0" as the bias frequency at 0 V (0 mA). Even if a speed command is not
given, simply turning ON the start signal will start the motor at the preset frequency.
Sensorless Vector PM
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Use Pr.73 Analog input selection or Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection to switch among input 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 V, and 4 to 20 mA. (Refer to page 496.)
*1 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the LCD operation panel and the parameter unit.
Changing the function of analog input terminal In the initial setting, terminal 1 is used for analog input of the auxiliary speed setting (auxiliary speed limit), and terminal 4
is used for the speed command (speed limit). To use the analog input terminal to input the torque command, torque limit, or magnetic flux command, set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment or Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment to change the function. (Refer to page 500.) The magnetic flux command is valid under Vector control only.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
C16 (919) T110*1
Terminal 1 bias command (torque/ magnetic flux) 0% 0 to 400% Set the bias torque (magnetic flux) for the terminal 1
input. C17 (919) T111*1
Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic flux) 0% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the bias voltage for the terminal
1 input.
C18 (920) T112*1
Terminal 1 gain command (torque/ magnetic flux) 150% 0 to 400% Set the gain (maximum) torque (magnetic flux) for the
terminal 1 input.
C19 (920) T113*1
Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux) 100% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the gain voltage for the terminal
1 input.
C38 (932) T410*1
Terminal 4 bias command (torque/ magnetic flux) 0% 0 to 400% Set the bias torque (magnetic flux) for the terminal 4
input.
C39 (932) T411*1
Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic flux) 20% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the bias current (voltage) for the
terminal 4 input.
C40 (933) T412*1
Terminal 4 gain command (torque/ magnetic flux) 150% 0 to 400% Set the gain (maximum) torque (magnetic flux) for the
terminal 4 input.
C41 (933) T413*1
Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux) 100% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the gain current (voltage) for the
terminal 4 input.
241 M043
Analog input display unit switchover 0
0 % display Select the unit for analog input display.1 V/mA display
5115. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
51
Relationship between the analog input terminal function and the calibration parameter
Calibration parameter according to the terminal 1 function
*1 Use Pr.148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input and Pr.149 Stall prevention level at 10 V input to adjust bias and gain for setting the stall prevention operation level.
Calibration parameter according to the terminal 4 function
*2 Use Pr.148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input and Pr.149 Stall prevention level at 10 V input to adjust bias and gain for setting the stall prevention operation level.
Changing the torque for the maximum analog input (C18 (Pr.920), C40 (Pr.933))
Use C18 (Pr.920) or C40 (Pr.933) to change the torque setting (gain) for the maximum analog input voltage (current).
Analog input bias/gain calibration (C16 (Pr.919) to C19 (Pr.920), C38 (Pr.932) to C41 (Pr.933))
The "bias" and "gain" functions serve to adjust the relationship between a setting input signal and the torque. A setting input signal is such as a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mADC signal externally input to set the torque command or the torque limit.
Set the bias torque of the terminal 1 input using C16 (Pr.919). (The initial value is the torque for 0 V.)
Pr.868 setting Terminal function
Calibration parameter Bias setting Gain setting
0 (initial value)
Auxiliary Frequency (speed) setting
C2 (Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency, C3 (Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias, C5 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency, C6 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, C4 (Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain, Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency, C7 (Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
1 Magnetic flux command
C16 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias command (torque/magnetic flux), C17 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/ magnetic flux)
C18 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain command (torque/magnetic flux), C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/ magnetic flux)
2 Regenerative driving torque limit C16 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias command (torque/magnetic flux), C17 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/ magnetic flux)
C18 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain command (torque/magnetic flux), C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/ magnetic flux)
3 Torque command
4 Stall prevention operation level*1/ torque limit / torque command
5 Forward/reverse rotation speed limit
C12 (Pr.917) Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed), C13 (Pr.917) Terminal 1 bias (speed)
C14 (Pr.918) Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed), C15 (Pr.918) Terminal 1 gain (speed)
6 Torque bias input
C16 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias command (torque/magnetic flux), C17 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/ magnetic flux)
C18 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain command (torque/magnetic flux), C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/ magnetic flux)
9999 No function
Pr.858 setting Terminal function
Calibration parameter Bias setting Gain setting
0 (initial value)
Frequency (speed) command / speed limit
C5 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency, C6 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency, C7 (Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
1 Magnetic flux command
C38 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias command (torque/magnetic flux), C39 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias (torque/ magnetic flux)
C40 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain command (torque/magnetic flux), C41 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/ magnetic flux)
4 Stall prevention operation level*2/ torque limit
C38 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias command (torque/magnetic flux), C39 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias (torque/ magnetic flux)
C40 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain command (torque/magnetic flux), C41 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/ magnetic flux)
9999 No function
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Use C18 (Pr.920) to set the torque to the torque command voltage set by Pr.73 Analog input selection. (The initial value is 10 V.)
Set the bias torque of the terminal 4 input using C38 (Pr.932). (The initial value is the torque for 4 mA.) Use C40 (Pr.933) to set the torque to the 20 mA input of the torque command current (4 to 20 mA).
*1 A negative voltage (0 to -10 V (-5 V)) is valid as a torque command. However, when a negative voltage is input as a torque limit value, the torque limit is regarded as "0".
There are three methods to adjust the bias/gain torque setting voltage (current). Adjustment by applying voltage (current) between terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5) to set the voltage (current) at the bias/gain level. page 513 Adjustment by selecting the voltage (current) at the bias/gain level without applying voltage (current) between terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5). page 515 Adjustment by changing the torque without adjusting the voltage (current). page 516
NOTE Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input signal with Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input
selection switch.
Display unit changing for analog input (Pr.241) The analog input display unit (%/V/mA) can be changed for analog input bias/gain calibration. Depending on the terminal input specification setting of Pr.73 (Pr.267), the unit of the displayed value of C17 (Pr.919), C19
(Pr.920), C39 (Pr.932), and C41 (Pr.933) changes as shown below:
Torque setting voltage (current) bias/gain adjustment method Adjustment by applying voltage (current) between terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5) to set the voltage
(current) at the bias/gain torque
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.
3. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears)
Calibration example of terminal 1
400
150
-150
0
0 Torque setting signal
100%
10V
Initial valueBias
0 5V
(-5V)
-100% (-10V)
C18(Pr.920) Gain
C16(Pr.919)
C17(Pr.919) C19(Pr.920)
To rq
ue (%
)
1
400
150
0
Torque setting signal
100%
Bias
0 20 4 20mA
C40 (Pr.933)
Gain
C38 (Pr.932)
C39(Pr.932) C41(Pr.933)
Calibration example of terminal 4
To rq
ue (%
)
Initial value
Analog command (via terminal 1 or 4) (depending on the settings of Pr.73
(Pr.267)) Pr.241 = "0" (initial value) Pr.241 = "1"
0 to 5 V input 0 to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 5 V (0.01 V) 0 to 10 V input 0 to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 10 V (0.01 V) 0 to 20 mA input 0 to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 20 mA (0.01 mA)
5135. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
51
4. Calibration parameter selection
Turn until " " appears. Press to display " ".
5. Selecting a parameter
Turn until " " (C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux)) appears for terminal 1, or
" " (C41 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux)) for terminal 4.
6. Analog voltage (current) display
Press to display the analog voltage (current) % currently applied to the terminal 1 (4).
Do not touch until calibration is completed.
7. Voltage (current) application Apply a 5 V (20 mA). (Turn the external potentiometer connected between terminals 1 and 5 (terminals 4 and 5) to a desired position.)
8. Setting completed
Press to confirm the selection. The analog voltage (current) % and " " (" ") are displayed
alternately.
Turn to read another parameter.
Press to return to the " " display.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Adjustment by selecting the voltage (current) at the bias/gain torque without applying voltage (current) between terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5)
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.
3. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears)
4. Calibration parameter selection
Turn until " " appears. Press to display " ".
5. Selecting a parameter
Turn until " " (C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux)) appears for terminal 1, or
" " (C41 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux)) for terminal 4.
6. Analog voltage (current) display
Press to display the analog voltage (current) % currently applied to the terminal 1 (4).
7. Analog voltage (current) adjustment
When is turned, the gain voltage (current) value (%) currently set to the parameter appears.
Turn until the desired gain voltage (current) value (%) appears.
8. Setting completed
Press to confirm the selection. The analog voltage (current) % and " " (" ") are displayed alternately.
Turn to read another parameter.
Press to return to the " " display.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
NOTE
Press after step 6 to check the present bias/gain torque setting. The setting cannot be checked after step 7.
5155. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
51
Adjustment by changing the torque without adjusting the voltage (current) (Example of changing the gain torque from 150% to 130%)
Operating procedure 1. Selecting the parameter
Turn until " " (Pr.920) appears for terminal 1, or " " (Pr.933) for terminal 4.
Press to read the present set value. (150.0%)
2. Torque setting change
Turn to change the set value to " " (130.0%)
Press to confirm the selection. " " and " " (" ") are displayed alternately.
3. Selecting the mode and the monitor item
Press three times to select the monitor mode, and change the monitor item to the frequency.
4. Start Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR) to apply a voltage across terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5), Operation is performed with 130% torque.
NOTE
If the voltage (current) values at the gain and bias torques are too close to each other, an error (" ") may be indicated.
For operation outline of the parameter unit (FR-PU07), refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-PU07. Use the calibration parameter C16 (Pr.919) or C38 (Pr.932) to set the bias torque. (Refer to page 512.)
Parameters referred to Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequencypage 367 Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selectionpage 496 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500
CAUTION Be cautious when setting any value other than "0" as the bias torque at 0 V (0 mA). Even if a torque command is not
given, simply turning ON the start signal will supply torque to the motor.
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.12.7 Checking of current input on analog input terminal When current is input to the analog input terminal 2 or terminal 4, the input current can be checked and the operation when the input falls below the specified level (the analog current input is lost) can be selected. The operation can be continued even when the analog current input is lost.
Analog current input loss condition (Pr.778) When the current input to terminal 4 (terminal 2) continues to be 2 mA or less for the period set in Pr.778, it is considered
as loss of analog current input and the Alarm (LF) signal is turned ON. The LF signal turns OFF when the current input becomes 3 mA or higher.
For the LF signal, set "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
573 T052 4 mA input check selection 9999
1 Operation continues with output frequency before the current input loss.
Check the current input on terminals 2 and 4.
2 4 mA input fault (E.LCI) is activated when the current input loss is detected.
3
The inverter output decelerates the motor to a stop when the current input loss is detected. After the motor is stopped, 4 mA input fault (E.LCI) is activated.
4 Operation continues at the frequency set in Pr.777.
11 Operation continues at the output frequency before the current input loss.
Check the current input on terminal 4.
12 4 mA input fault (E.LCI) is activated when the current input loss is detected.
13
The inverter output decelerates the motor to a stop when the current input loss is detected. After the motor is stopped, 4 mA input fault (E.LCI) is activated.
14 Operation continues at the frequency set in Pr.777.
21 Operation continues at the output frequency before the current input loss.
Check the current input on terminal 2.
22 4 mA input fault (E.LCI) is activated when the current input loss is detected.
23
The inverter output decelerates the motor to a stop when the current input loss is detected. After the motor is stopped, 4 mA input fault (E.LCI) is activated.
24 Operation continues at the frequency set in Pr.777.
9999 No current input check 777 T053 A681
4 mA input fault operation frequency 9999
0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency to continue operation when current input is lost. (Valid when Pr.573 = "4")
9999 No current input check when Pr.573 = "4" 778 T054 A682
4 mA input check filter 0 s 0 to 10 s Set the current input loss detection time.
4mA2mA
60Hz
20mA
1
Set frequency
Analog input
When C3 (C6) = 0%
Normal use range
Current input decrease detection
5175. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
51
*1 When Pr.573 "9999" and the terminal 4 (terminal 2) input is calibrated to 2 mA or less in C2 (Pr.902) (C5 (Pr.904)), the operation set in Pr.573 is applied to the frequency at the input of 2 mA or less.
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Continuing operation when the analog current input is lost (Pr.573 = "1, 4, 11, 14, 21, or 24", and Pr.777)
When Pr.573 = "1, 11, or 21", operation continues at the output frequency before the current input loss. When Pr.573 = "4, 14, or 24" and Pr.777 "9999", operation continues at the frequency set in Pr.777. When the start command is turned OFF during current input loss, the inverter output decelerates the motor to a stop
immediately, and the operation is not restarted even if a start command is input again. When the current input is restored, the LF signal is turned OFF, and operation is performed according to the current input. The following is the operation example during External operation.
The following is the operation example during PID control (reverse action) operation.
NOTE When the setting is changed to the continuous operation (Pr.573 = "1, 4, 11, 14, 21, or 24") after the input current loss, the
frequency before loss is regarded as 0 Hz.
Fault output (Pr.573 = "2, 12, or 22") When the analog current input becomes 2 mA or lower, the protective function E.LCI (4 mA input fault) is activated and the
output is shut off.
2mA 3mA
STF
20mA
4mA
LF signal
Analog input
Pr.573=1, 11, 21 : Operation continued with the frequency before being lost Pr.573=4, 14, 24 : Operation continued with Pr.777 setting
Return
Time
Input current decrease
Output frequency
20mA
4mA 2mA 3mA
On during input decrease
Return
Input current decreaseSet point (fixed)
Measured value
PID signal
LF signal
Time
Output frequency
Pr.573=1, 11, 21 : Operation continued with the frequency before being lost Pr.573=4, 14, 24 : Operation continued with Pr.777 setting
STF
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The following is the operation example during PID control (reverse action) operation.
Fault output after deceleration to stop (Pr.573 = "3, 13, or 23") When the analog current input becomes 2 mA or lower, the inverter output decelerates the motor to a stop, and then the
protective function E.LCI (4 mA input fault) is activated and the output is shut off. When the analog current input is restored during the deceleration, the motor is accelerated again and operates according
to the current input. The following is the operation example during PID control (reverse action) operation.
The following is the operation example when the analog input current is restored during deceleration under PID control (reverse action).
20mA
4mA 2mA 3mA
Output frequency
Time
PID signal
Measured value
Set point (fixed) Input current decrease
Return
ALM signal
E.LCI occurs
LF signal
STF
20mA
4mA 2mA 3mA
Output frequency
Time
PID signal
Measured value
Set point (fixed) Input current decrease
Return
ALM signal
Decelerates as the input current is lost
After deceleration stop, E.LCI occurs
LF signal
STF
20mA
4mA 2mA 3mA
Output frequency
Time STF
LF signal
PID signal
Measured value
Set point (fixed) Input current decrease
Return
Normal operation after the current is restored
OFF during deceleration
Decelerates as the input current is lost
5195. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
52
Functions related to current input check
Parameters referred to Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selectionpage 496
Function Operation Refer to page
Minimum frequency When the operation continues, the minimum frequency setting is valid even during current input loss. 428
Multi-speed operation
The multi-speed setting signal is prioritized even during current input loss (the motor operates according to the multi-speed setting even during continuous operation at the predetermined frequency or during deceleration to a stop). When the multi-speed setting signal is turned OFF while the input current is lost during the multi-speed operation, the motor is decelerated to a stop even if the parameter is set to continue operation when the current input is lost.
411
JOG operation
JOG operation is prioritized even during current input loss (the motor operation switches to JOB operation even during continuous operation at the predetermined frequency or during deceleration to a stop). When the JOG signal is turned OFF while the input current is lost during the JOG operation, the motor is decelerated to a stop even if the parameter is set to continue operation when the current input is lost.
410
MRS signal The MRS signal is enabled even during current input loss (output is shut off by turning ON the MRS signal even during continuous operation at the predetermined frequency or during deceleration to a stop).
524
Remote setting When the operation using the remote setting function is changed to the continuous operation after the current input is lost, acceleration, deceleration, and clear operations by the remote setting are disabled. The operations are enabled after restoration of current input.
377
Retry function When the protective function is activated during continuous operation after the current input is lost and the retry function is used successfully, operation continues without clearing the frequency setting.
426
Compensation by addition, override compensation
When the operation using compensation by addition or override compensation is changed to the continuous operation after the current input is lost, compensation by addition or override compensation is disabled. The operations are enabled after restoration of current input.
501
Input filter time constant The current before the filter time is applied is used for input loss detection. The current after the filter time is applied is used for continuous operation at the output frequency before the input loss.
517
PID control
PID calculation is stopped during current input loss. However, PID control is not disabled (the operation does not return to normal). During the pre-charge, end determination or fault determination by the pre-charge function is not performed when the current input is lost. The sleep function is prioritized even during current input loss. When the clearing condition of the sleep function is met during current input loss, continuous operation at the predetermined frequency is restored.
601
Power failure stop
The power failure stop function is prioritized even if current input loss is detected during power failure. After the power failure stop and re-acceleration, operation continues at the output frequency before the input loss. When the protective function E.LCI is selected when the current input is lost, E.LCI is activated after the power failure stop.
642
Traverse function Traverse operation is performed based on the frequency even during continuous operation during current input loss. 582
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.12.8 Input terminal function selection Use the following parameters to select or change the input terminal functions.
*1 The initial value is for standard models and IP55 compatible models. *2 The initial value is for separated converter types.
Input terminal function assignment Use Pr.178 to Pr.189 to set the functions of the input terminals. Refer to the following table and set the parameters.
Pr. Name Initial value Initial signal Setting range
178 T700
STF terminal function selection 60 STF (Forward rotation command)
0 to 20, 22 to 28, 32, 37, 42 to 48, 50 to 53, 57 to 60, 62, 64 to 74, 76, 77 to 80, 85, 87 to 89, 92 to 96, 128, 129, 9999
179 T701
STR terminal function selection 61 STR (Reverse rotation command)
0 to 20, 22 to 28, 32, 37, 42 to 48, 50 to 53, 57 to 59, 61, 62, 64 to 74, 76, 77 to 80, 85, 87 to 89, 92 to 96, 128, 129, 9999
180 T702
RL terminal function selection 0 RL (Low-speed operation command)
0 to 20, 22 to 28, 32, 37, 42 to 48, 50 to 53, 57 to 59, 62, 64 to 74, 76, 77 to 80, 85, 87 to 89, 92 to 96, 128, 129, 9999
181 T703
RM terminal function selection 1 RM (Middle-speed operation command)
182 T704
RH terminal function selection 2 RH (High-speed operation command)
183 T705
RT terminal function selection 3 RT (Second function selection)
184 T706
AU terminal function selection 4 AU (Terminal 4 input selection)
185 T707
JOG terminal function selection 5 JOG (Jog operation selection)
186 T708
CS terminal function selection 6 CS (Selection of automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure / flying start)
187 T709
MRS terminal function selection
24*1 MRS (Output stop)
10*2 X10 (Inverter run enable) 188 T710
STOP terminal function selection 25 STP (STOP) (Start self-holding selection)
189 T711
RES terminal function selection 62 RES (Inverter reset)
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
699 T740 Input terminal filter 9999
5 to 50 ms Set the time delay for the input terminal response. 9999 No filter for the input terminal
Setting Signal name Function Related parameter Refer to
page
0 RL
Pr.59 = 0 (initial value) Low-speed operation command Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 411
Pr.59 0 *1 Remote setting (setting clear) Pr.59 377
Pr.270 = "1, 3, 11, 13"*2 Stop-on-contact selection 0 Pr.270, Pr.275, Pr.276 577
1 RM Pr.59 = 0 (initial value) Middle-speed operation
command Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 411
Pr.59 0 *1 Remote setting (deceleration) Pr.59 377
2 RH Pr.59 = 0 (initial value) High-speed operation command Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27,
Pr.232 to Pr.239 411
Pr.59 0*1 Remote setting (acceleration) Pr.59 377
3 RT Second function selection
Pr.44 to Pr.51, Pr.450 to Pr.463, Pr.569, Pr.832, Pr.836, etc.
525
Pr.270 = "1, 3, 11, 13"*2 Stop-on-contact selection 1 Pr.270, Pr.275, Pr.276 577 4 AU Terminal 4 input selection Pr.267 496 5 JOG Jog operation selection Pr.15, Pr.16 410
5215. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
52
6 CS
Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start
Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.162 to Pr.165, Pr.299, Pr.611 628, 635
Electronic bypass function Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.135 to Pr.139, Pr.159 563
7 OH External thermal relay input*3 Pr.9 415
8 REX 15-speed selection (Combination with multi-speeds of RL, RM, and RH)
Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 411
9 X9 Third function selection Pr.110 to Pr.116 525 10 X10 Inverter run enable (FR-HC2/FR-XC/FR-CV/FR-CC2 connection) Pr.30, Pr.70, Pr.599 724
11 X11 FR-HC2/FR-CC2 connection, instantaneous power failure detection Pr.30, Pr.70 724
12 X12 PU operation external interlock Pr.79 389 13 X13 External DC injection brake operation start Pr.10 to Pr.12 715
14 X14 PID control valid Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.575 to Pr.577 601
15 BRI Brake opening completion Pr.278 to Pr.285 572 16 X16 PU/External operation switchover (External operation with X16-ON) Pr.79, Pr.340 389
17 X17 Load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost (For constant-torque with X17-ON) Pr.14 708
18 X18 V/F switchover (V/F control with X18-ON) Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.800 221 19 X19 Load torque high-speed frequency Pr.270 to Pr.274 580 20 X20 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover Pr.380 to Pr.383 372 22 X22 Orientation command (for Vector control compatible options)*4*6 Pr.350 to Pr.369 585
23 LX Pre-excitation/servo ON *5 Pr.850 715
24 MRS Output stop Pr.17 524
Electronic bypass function Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.135 to Pr.139, Pr.159 563
25 STP (STOP) Start self-holding selection Pr.250 722
26 MC Control mode switchover Pr.800 221 27 TL Torque limit selection Pr.815 245 28 X28 Start-time tuning start external input Pr.95 558 32 X32 External fault input 525 37 X37 Traverse function selection Pr.592 to Pr.597 582 42 X42 Torque bias selection 1 Pr.840 to Pr.845 265 43 X43 Torque bias selection 2 Pr.840 to Pr.845 265
44 X44 P/PI control switchover (P control with X44-ON) Pr.820, Pr.821, Pr.830, Pr.831 254
45 BRI2 Second brake sequence open completion Pr.641 to Pr.648 572 46 TRG Trace trigger input Pr.1020 to Pr.1047 649 47 TRC Trace sampling start/end Pr.1020 to Pr.1047 649
48 X48 Power failure stop external Pr.261 to Pr.266, Pr.294, Pr.668 642
50 SQ Sequence start Pr.414 646 51 X51 Fault clear Pr.414 646 52 X52 Cumulative pulse monitor clear (for Vector control compatible plug-
in options) Pr.635 321
53 X53 Cumulative pulse monitor clear (control terminal option) (for FR- A8TP)
57 JOGF JOG forward rotation command Pr.15, Pr.16 410 58 JOGR JOG reverse rotation command Pr.15, Pr.16 410
59 CLRN NET position pulse clear Pr.291, Pr.419 to Pr.430, Pr.464 320
60 STF Forward rotation command (assignable to the STF terminal (Pr.178) only) Pr.250 722
61 STR Reverse rotation command (assignable to the STR terminal (Pr.179) only) Pr.250 722
62 RES Inverter reset Pr.75 336 64 X64 PID forward/reverse action switchover Pr.127 to Pr.134 601 65 X65 PU/NET operation switchover (PU operation with X65-ON) Pr.79, Pr.340 389
Setting Signal name Function Related parameter Refer to
page
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
changed as shown in the table. *3 The OH signal is activated when the relay contact is open. *4 When a stop position command is input from outside for orientation control, the FR-A8AX (16-bit digital input option) is required. *5 Servo ON is enabled in the position control mode. *6 Available when the plug-in option is connected. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of each option. *7 The setting is available for the standard structure model and the IP55 compatible model.
NOTE The same function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the logic of terminal input is OR. The priorities of the speed commands are defined as follows: JOG > multi-speed setting (RH, RM, RL, REX) > PID (X14). When the Inverter run enable (X10) signal is not assigned, or when the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal is not
assigned while Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", the MRS signal performs the same function. The same terminals are used to assign the multi-speed (7-speed) setting and the remote setting. The multi-speed setting and
the remote setting cannot be assigned separately. When the Load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost (X17) signal is not assigned, the RT signal performs the same
function. When Pr.419 = "2" (simple pulse train position command), the terminal JOG is used for the simple position pulse train input
regardless of the setting in Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection. When the terminal assignment is changed using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), wiring may be
mistaken due to different terminal name and signal contents, or may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
66 X66 External/NET operation switchover (NET operation with X66-ON) Pr.79, Pr.340 389
67 X67 Command source switchover (command by Pr.338 or Pr.339 enabled with X67-ON) Pr.338, Pr.339 400
68 NP Simple position pulse train sign Pr.291, Pr.419 to Pr.430, Pr.464 320
69 CLR Simple position droop pulse clear Pr.291, Pr.419 to Pr.430, Pr.464 320
70 X70 DC feeding operation permission*7 Pr.30 724
71 X71 DC feeding cancel *7 Pr.30 724
72 X72 PID P control switchover Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.575 to Pr.577 601
73 X73 Second PID P control switchover Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.575 to Pr.577 601
74 X74 Magnetic flux decay output shutoff Pr.850 717 76 X76 Proximity dog Pr.1282 to Pr.1288 303 77 X77 Pre-charge end command Pr.760 to Pr.764 618 78 X78 Second pre-charge end command Pr.765 to Pr.769 618 79 X79 Second PID forward/reverse action switchover Pr.753 to Pr.758 601 80 X80 Second PID control valid Pr.753 to Pr.758 601 85 X85 SSCNET III communication disabled (for FR-A8NS)*6 Pr.499
87 X87 Sudden stop Pr.464 to Pr.494 303 88 LSP Forward stroke end
Pr.419 316, 319 89 LSN Reverse stroke end 92 X92 Emergency stop Pr.1103 367 93 X93 Torque control selection Pr.1113 287 94 X94 Control signal input for main circuit power supply MC Pr.30, Pr.137, Pr.248, Pr.254 569 95 X95 Converter unit fault input Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.135 to
Pr.139, Pr.159 563 96 X96 Converter unit fault (E.OHT, E.CPU) input 128 RLF Low-speed forward rotation command
Pr.6 411 129 RLR Low-speed reverse rotation command 9999 - No function
Setting Signal name Function Related parameter Refer to
page
5235. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
52
Adjusting the response of input terminals (Pr.699) Response of the input terminals can be delayed in a range between 5 to 50 ms. (The following is the operation example
of the STF signal.)
NOTE The Pr.699 setting is invalid (no filter) for the following signals.
5.12.9 Inverter output shutoff The inverter output can be shut off with the MRS signal. The logic of the MRS signal can also be selected.
Output shutoff signal (MRS signal)
When the Output stop (MRS) signal is turned ON while operating the inverter, the inverter output is instantaneously shut off.
The response time of the MRS signal is within 2 ms. The MRS signal is used in the following cases.
Time ON OFF
STF Pr.699 9999
Pr.699 Pr.699
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
Input signals which are already in the ON state when the power is turned ON Input signals used for the PLC function Inverter run enable (X10) signal, Simple position pulse train sign (NP) signal, Simple position droop pulse clear (CLR) signal
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
17 T720 MRS input selection 0
0 Normally open input 2 Normally closed input (NC contact input specification)
4 External terminal: Normally closed input (NC contact input specification) Communication: Normally open input
ON
ON
MRS signal
Output frequency
STF (STR) signal
Motor coasts to stop
Time
(Initial value)
MRS SD
Inverter
MRS SD
Inverter
Setting value "0" Setting value "2"
Application Description To stop the motor using a mechanical brake (e.g. electromagnetic brake) The inverter output is shut off when the mechanical brake operates.
To provide interlock to disable the motor operation by the inverter
With the MRS signal ON, the motor cannot be driven by the inverter even if the start signal is input to the inverter.
To coast the motor to a stop When the start signal is turned OFF, the inverter decelerates the motor to a stop in the preset deceleration time, but when the MRS signal is turned ON, the motor coasts to a stop.
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
MRS signal logic inversion (Pr.17 = "2") When "2" is set in Pr.17, the input specification of the MRS signal is changed to normally closed (NC contact). The inverter
will shut off the output when the MRS signal is turned OFF (when the contact is opened).
Assigning a different action for each MRS signal input via communication and external terminal (Pr.17 = "4")
When Pr.17 = "4", the MRS signal input from an external terminal is normally closed (NC contact), and the MRS signal input from communication is normally open (NO contact). This function is useful to perform operation via communication while keeping the ON state of the MRS signal input from the external terminal.
NOTE The MRS signal is assigned to terminal MRS in the initial status. By setting "24" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal
function selection), the MRS signal can be assigned to the other terminal. When using an external terminal to input the MRS signal, the MRS signal shuts off the output in any of the operation modes. The MRS signal is valid regardless of whether it is input through the external terminal or via network, but when the MRS signal
is used as the Inverter run enable (X10) signal, input the signal through the external terminal. When the terminal assignment is changed using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), wiring may be
mistaken due to different terminal name and signal contents, or may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
5.12.10 External fault input signal The inverter output can be shut off by inputting the External fault input (X32) signal when an external fault occurs. To assign the X32 signal, set "32" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Details of the operation When the External fault input (X32) signal turns OFF during operation, the inverter activates the protective function with
the indication "E.EF" displayed to shut off the output. When the X32 signal turns OFF during a stop, the protective function is not activated ("E.EF" is not displayed). When the inverter operation is started with the X32 signal OFF, the inverter activates the protective function immediately
to shut off the output.
NOTE When the X32 signal turns OFF during zero speed control or pre-excitation while the start signal is OFF, the inverter output is
shut off. When the inverter operation is started with the X32 signal OFF, the inverter may output the AC voltage for an extremely brief
moment.
5.12.11 Selecting the condition to activate the Second function selection (RT) signal or the Third function selection (X9) signal
The second function can be selected using the RT signal, and the third function can be selected using the X9 signal.
External MRS Communication MRS Pr.17 setting
0 2 4 OFF OFF Operation enabled Output shutoff Output shutoff OFF ON Output shutoff Output shutoff Output shutoff ON OFF Output shutoff Output shutoff Operation enabled ON ON Output shutoff Operation enabled Output shutoff
5255. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
52
The condition to activate the second or third function can be also set.
Turning ON the Second function selection (RT) signal enables the second functions. Turning ON the Third function selection (X9) signal enables the third functions. For the X9 signal, set "9" in any of Pr.178
to 189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function. The following are the examples of the applications of the second (third) functions.
Switching between regular use and emergency use Switching between heavy load and light load Changing the acceleration/deceleration time by break point acceleration/deceleration Switching characteristics of main motor and sub motor
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
155 T730
RT signal function validity condition selection
0
0 The second function is immediately enabled when the RT signal is turned ON, and the third function is immediately enabled when the X9 signal is turned ON.
10
The function cannot be changed to the second or third function during acceleration/deceleration. When the signal is turned ON during acceleration/deceleration, the function is changed after the acceleration/deceleration is finished.
Connection diagram example for the second function Example of the second acceleration/deceleration time
STF/STR
SD
Inverter
Start
Second function selection RT High speed RH
Middle speed RM
(initial value)
RT
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
Setting value "0"
RH
RM
Acceleration time is applied
Time
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Turning ON the RT signal enables the second function, and turning ON the X9 signal enables the third function. The following table shows the functions which can be changed to the second or third function.
*1 The function can be changed by switching the RT signal ON/OFF while the inverter is stopped. If a signal is switched during operation, the operation method changes after the inverter stops. (Pr.450 9999)
*2 When the RT signal is OFF, the first function is valid. When it is ON, the second function is valid.
NOTE The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. By setting "3" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection), the RT signal can be assigned to the other terminal. When both the RT and X9 signals are ON, the X9 signal (third function) is valid. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Function First function parameter number
Second function parameter number
Third function parameter number Refer to page
Torque boost Pr.0 Pr.46 Pr.112 706 Base frequency Pr.3 Pr.47 Pr.113 707 Acceleration time Pr.7 Pr.44 Pr.110 367 Deceleration time Pr.8 Pr.44, Pr.45 Pr.110, Pr.111 367 Electronic thermal O/L relay Pr.9 Pr.51 *2
415Free thermal Pr.600 to Pr.604 Pr.692 to Pr.696 *2
Motor permissible load level *1 Pr.607 Pr.608 *2
Stall prevention Pr.22 Pr.48, Pr.49 Pr.114, Pr.115 431
Applied motor *1 Pr.71 Pr.450 *2 528
Motor constant*1
Pr.80 to Pr.84, Pr.90 to Pr.94, Pr.298, Pr.702, Pr.706, Pr.707, Pr.711, Pr.712, Pr.717, Pr.721, Pr.724, Pr.725, Pr.859
Pr.453 to Pr.457, Pr.560, Pr.458 to Pr.462, Pr.738 to Pr.747, Pr.860
*2 532, 551
Excitation current low-speed scaling factor Pr.85, Pr.86 Pr.565, Pr.566 *2 711
Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic flux vector) Pr.89 Pr.569 *2 228
Offline auto tuning*1 Pr.96 Pr.463 *2 532, 551
Online auto tuning *1 Pr.95 Pr.574 *2 558
PID control Pr.127 to Pr.134 Pr.753 to Pr.758 *2 601
PID pre-charge function Pr.760 to Pr.764 Pr.765 to Pr.769 *2 618
Brake sequence*1 Pr.278 to Pr.285, Pr.639, Pr.640
Pr.641 to Pr.648, Pr.650 to Pr.651
*2 572
Droop control Pr.286 to Pr.288, Pr.994 to Pr.995 Pr.679 to Pr.683 *2 738
Low-speed range torque characteristics*1 Pr.788 Pr.747 *2 233
Motor control method *1 Pr.800 Pr.451 *2 221
Speed control gain Pr.820, Pr.821 Pr.830, Pr.831 *2 254
Analog input filter Pr.822, Pr.826 Pr.832, Pr.836 *2 503
Speed detection filter Pr.823 Pr.833 *2 332
Torque control gain Pr.824, Pr.825 Pr.834, Pr.835 *2 294
Torque detection filter Pr.827 Pr.837 *2 332
5275. PARAMETERS 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
52
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
5.13.1 Applied motor By setting the applied motor type, the thermal characteristic appropriate for the motor can be selected. When using a constant-torque or PM motor, the electronic thermal O/L relay function is set according to the motor.
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page To select the motor to be used Applied motor P.C100, P.C200 Pr.71, Pr.450 528
To maximize the performance of the induction and vector motors Offline auto tuning
P.C000, P.C100 to P.C105, P.C107, P.C108, P.C110, P.C120 to P.C126, P.C200 to P.C205, P.C207, P.C208, P.C210, P.C220 to P.C226
Pr.9, Pr.51, Pr.71, Pr.80 to Pr.84, Pr.90 to Pr.94, Pr.96, Pr.450, Pr.453 to Pr.463, Pr.684, Pr.707, Pr.724, Pr.744, Pr.745, Pr.859, Pr.860
532
To maximize the performance of the PM motor to perform Vector control operation
PM motor offline auto tuning (under Vector control)
P.C000, P.C100 to P.C108, P.C110, P.C120, P.C122, P.C123, P.C126, P.C130 to P.C133, P.C135, P.C150, P.C200 to P.C208, P.C210, P.C220, P.C222, P.C223, P.C226, P.C230 to P.C233, P.C235
Pr.9, Pr.51, Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.83, Pr.84, Pr.90, Pr.92, Pr.93, Pr.96, Pr.450, Pr.453, Pr.454, Pr.456 to Pr.458, Pr.460, Pr.461, Pr.463, Pr.684, Pr.702, Pr.706, Pr.707, Pr.711, Pr.712, Pr.724, Pr.725, Pr.738 to Pr.740, Pr.743 to Pr.746, Pr.859, Pr.860, Pr.1002, Pr.1412, Pr.1413
542
To maximize the performance of the PM motor to perform PM sensorless vector control operation
PM motor offline auto tuning
P.C000, P.C100 to P.C108, P.C110, P.C120, P.C122, P.C123, P.C126, P.C130 to P.C133, P.C135, P.C150, P.C182, P.C185, P.C200 to P.C208, P.C210, P.C220, P.C222, P.C223, P.C226, P.C230 to P.C233, P.C235, P.C282, P.C285
Pr.9, Pr.51, Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.83, Pr.84, Pr.90, Pr.92, Pr.93, Pr.96, Pr.450, Pr.453, Pr.454, Pr.456 to Pr.458, Pr.460, Pr.461, Pr.463, Pr.684, Pr.702, Pr.706, Pr.707, Pr.711, Pr.712, Pr.717, Pr.721, Pr.724, Pr.725, Pr.738 to Pr.747, Pr.788, Pr.859, Pr.860, Pr.1002, Pr.1412, Pr.1413
551
To perform high accuracy operation without being affected by temperature and high-torque/ultra-low speed
Online auto tuning P.C111, P.C211 Pr.95, Pr.574 558
To use the motor with encoder Encoder specifications
P.C140, P.C141, P.C240, P.C241
Pr.359, Pr.369, Pr.851, Pr.852 94
To detect loss of encoder signals Signal loss detection P.C148, P.C248 Pr.376, Pr.855 561
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When the Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control is selected, the motor constant necessary for control (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA, SF-V5RU (1500 r/ min series), MM-CF, etc.) is also selected at the same time.
Setting the applied motor Refer to the following list and set the parameters according to the applied motor.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
71 C100 Applied motor 0
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 8090, 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
By selecting a motor, the thermal characteristic and motor constant of each motor are set.
450 C200 Second applied motor 9999
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 8090, 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
Set this parameter when using the second motor (the same specifications as Pr.71).
9999 The function is disabled.
Pr.71 Pr.450 Motor Motor constant value range when performing offline auto tuning (increment)
Electronic thermal O/L relay function
Standard Constant- torque PM
0 (Pr.71 initial value) Standard motor (such as SF-JR)
Pr.82 (Pr.455) and Pr.859 (Pr.860) 0 to 500 A, 9999 (0.01 A)*2
0 to 3600 A, 9999 (0.1 A)*3 Pr.90 (Pr.458), Pr.91 (Pr.459) 0 to 50 , 9999 (0.001 )*2
0 to 400 m, 9999 (0.01 m)*3 Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461) (Induction motor) 0 to 6000 mH, 9999 (0.1 mH)*2
0 to 400 mH, 9999 (0.1 mH)*3 Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461) (PM motor) 0 to 500 mH, 9999 (0.01 mH)*2
0 to 50 mH, 9999 (0.001 mH)*3 Pr.94 (Pr.462) 0 to 100%, 9999 (0.1%)*2
0 to 100%, 9999 (0.01%)*3 Pr.706 (Pr.738) 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 9999 (0.1 mV/(rad/s))
1
Constant-torque motor (SFJRCA, etc.) SF-V5RU (other than the 1500 r/ min series)
2 Standard motor (such as SF-JR) Adjustable 5 points V/F (refer to page 713)
20 Mitsubishi Electric standard motor (SF-JR 4P 1.5kW or lower)
30 Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) SF-THY
40 Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor SF-HR
50 Mitsubishi Electric constant- torque motor SF-HRCA
70 Mitsubishi Electric high- performance energy-saving motor SF-PR
330*1 IPM motor MM-CF 8090 IPM motor (other than MM-CF) 9090 SPM motor
5295. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
53
*1 The setting is available for the FR-A820-00630(11K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *3 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher. *4 The same operation is performed for the both settings.
NOTE Regardless of the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting, offline auto tuning can be performed according to Pr.96 (Pr.463) Auto tuning
setting/status. (Refer to page 532 for offline auto tuning.)
Using two types of motors (RT signal, Pr.450) When using two types of motors with one inverter, set Pr.450 Second applied motor. The setting value "9999" (initial value) disables the second motor. If Pr.450 9999, the following parameters will be enabled by turning ON the Second function selection (RT) signal.
3 (4)*4 Standard motor (such as SF-JR)
Pr.82 (Pr.455), Pr.859 (Pr.860), Pr.90 (Pr.458), Pr.91 (Pr.459), Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461), Pr.94 (Pr.462), Pr.706 (Pr.738) Internal data value 0 to 65534, 9999 (1) The display increment can be changed in Pr.684.
13 (14)*4 Constant-torque motor (SFJRCA, etc.) SF-V5RU (other than the 1500 r/ min series)
23 (24)*4 Mitsubishi Electric standard motor (SF-JR 4P 1.5kW or lower)
33 (34)*4 Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) SF-THY
43 (44)*4 Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor SF-HR
53 (54)*4 Mitsubishi Electric constant- torque motor SF-HRCA
73 (74)*4 Mitsubishi Electric high- performance energy-saving motor SF-PR
333 (334)*1*4 IPM motor MM-CF
8093 (8094)*4 IPM motor (other than MM-CF)
9093 (9094)*4 SPM motor
5 Standard motor
Wye connection
Pr.82 (Pr.455) and Pr.859 (Pr.860) 0 to 500 A, 9999 (0.01 A)*2
0 to 3600 A, 9999 (0.1 A)*3 Pr.90 (Pr.458), Pr.91 (Pr.459) 0 to 50 , 9999 (0.001 )*2
0 to 400 m, 9999 (0.01 m)*3 Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461) 0 to 50 , 9999 (0.001 )*2
0 to 3600 m, 9999 (0.1 m)*3 Pr.94 (Pr.462) 0 to 500 , 9999 (0.01 )*2
0 to 100 , 9999 (0.01 )*3
15 Constant-torque motor
6 Standard motor
Delta connection
16 Constant-torque motor
9999 (initial value)
No second applied motor
Pr.71 Pr.450 Motor Motor constant value range when performing offline auto tuning (increment)
Electronic thermal O/L relay function
Standard Constant- torque PM
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE The RT signal is the Second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 525.) The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Automatic change of torque boost for the SF-PR motor When the SF-PR motor is selected (Pr.71 = "70, 73, or 74"), the Pr.0 Torque boost is automatically changed to enable
output of the 6 Hz 150% torque under V/F control by setting Pr.81 Number of motor poles according to the number of the SF-PR motor poles.
NOTE When selecting the automatic change of torque boost for the SF-PR motor, set Pr.14 Load pattern selection = "0 (initial
value)". When the Pr.0 setting is changed from its initial value, the automatic change is not performed.
Automatic change of Pr.0 Torque boost and Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage
When initial values are set in Pr.0 and Pr.12, the Pr.0 and Pr.12 settings are automatically changed to the values in the following table by changing the Pr.71 setting.
Function RT signal ON (second motor) RT signal OFF (first motor) Electronic thermal O/L relay Pr.51 Pr.9 Applied motor Pr.450 Pr.71 Control method selection Pr.451 Pr.800 Motor capacity Pr.453 Pr.80 Number of motor poles Pr.454 Pr.81 Motor excitation current Pr.455 Pr.82 Rated motor voltage Pr.456 Pr.83 Rated motor frequency Pr.457 Pr.84 Motor constant (R1) Pr.458 Pr.90 Motor constant (R2) Pr.459 Pr.91 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) Pr.460 Pr.92 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) Pr.461 Pr.93 Motor constant (X) Pr.462 Pr.94 Auto tuning setting/status Pr.463 Pr.96 Frequency search gain Pr.560 Pr.298 Online auto tuning selection Pr.574 Pr.95 Induced voltage constant (phi f) Pr.738 Pr.706 Motor Ld decay ratio Pr.739 Pr.711 Motor Lq decay ratio Pr.740 Pr.712 Starting resistance tuning compensation Pr.741 Pr.717 Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width Pr.742 Pr.721
Maximum motor frequency Pr.743 Pr.702 Motor inertia (integer) Pr.744 Pr.707 Motor inertia (exponent) Pr.745 Pr.724 Motor protection current level Pr.746 Pr.725 Torque current/Rated PM motor current Pr.860 Pr.859
5315. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
53
*1 Pr.71 = "0, 2 to 6, 20, 23, 24, 40, 43, or 44" (standard motor) *2 Pr.71 = "1, 13 to 16, 50, 53, or 54" (constant-torque motor) *3 Pr.71 = "70, 73, or 74" (SF-PR)
NOTE When the Pr.0 and Pr.12 settings are changed from their initial values, the automatic change is not performed. When the SF-PR motor is selected (Pr.71 = "70, 73, or 74"), the output current may become large due to a small load by setting
Pr.81 Number of motor poles according to the number of the SF-PR motor poles. When the SF-PR motor is used, the output current tends to increase compared with the case where the SF-JR or SF-HR motor
is used. Depending on the load conditions, the output current may increase even though the torque boost value has been automatically changed. When the protective function such as the electronic thermal O/L relay (E.THT, E.THM) or stall prevention (OL, E.OLT) is activated, adjust the Pr.0 Torque boost according to the load.
Parameters referred to Pr.0 Torque boostpage 706 Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltagepage 715 Pr.14 Load pattern selectionpage 708 Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/statuspage 532 Pr.100 to Pr.109 (Adjustable 5 points V/F)page 713 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.684 Tuning data unit switchoverpage 532 Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221
5.13.2 Offline auto tuning for an induction motor
The offline auto tuning enables the optimal operation of a motor. Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or Vector control, automatic measurement
of motor constants (offline auto tuning) enables optimal operation of motors even when motor constants vary, when a motor of another company is used, or when the wiring distance is long.
Inverter Pr.0 value (%) after automatic change Pr.12 value (%) after automatic change
FR-A820-[] FR-A840-[]
Standard motor*1
Constant- torque
motor *2 SF-PR*3
Standard motor*1
Constant- torque motor*2
SF-PR *3 SLD/ LD
ND/ HD
SLD/ LD
ND/ HD
Pr.81 2, 4, 6 Pr.81 = 2 Pr.81 = 4 Pr.81 = 6
00046 (0.4K) 00023 (0.4K) 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 00077(0.75K) 00038(0.75K) 6 6 4 7.4 6 6.4 4 4 4 00105(1.5K) 00052(1.5K) 4 4 3 5.8 5 3.7 4 4 2.5 00167(2.2K) 00083(2.2K) 4 4 2.5 6 4.5 3.3 4 4 2.5 00250(3.7K) 00126(3.7K) 4 4 2.5 6.4 4.5 4.2 4 4 2.5 00340(5.5K) 00170(5.5K) 3 2 2 4.5 3.7 3.3 4 2 2 00490(7.5K) 00250(7.5K) 3 2 2 4.4 4.5 3.8 4 2 2 00630(11K) 00310(11K) 2 2 1.5 3.5 3.3 3.5 2 2 1.5 00770(15K) 00380(15K) 2 2 1.5 4.5 3 3.5 2 2 1.5 00930(18.5K) 00470(18.5K) 2 2 1.5 4 3.2 3 2 2 1.5 01250(22K) 00620(22K) 2 2 1.5 2.5 3.4 3 2 2 1 01540(30K) 00770(30K) 2 2 1 3 2 2.5 2 2 1 01870(37K) 00930(37K) 2 2 1 2 2.5 2.6 2 2 1 02330(45K) 01160(45K) 1.5 2 1.5 2 1 2 2 2.4 2 2 1 03160(55K) 01800(55K) 1.5 2 1.5 2 0.7 2 2 0.7 2 2 1 03800 (75K) or higher
02160 (75K) or higher 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CAUTION Make sure to set this parameter correctly according to the motor used. Incorrect setting may cause the motor and the
inverter to overheat and burn.
Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
For the offline auto tuning for a PM motor, refer to page 551.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
684 C000
Tuning data unit switchover 0
0 Internal data converted value 1 The value is indicated in A, , mH, or %.
71 C100 Applied motor 0
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 8090, 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
By selecting a motor, the thermal characteristic and motor constant of each motor are set.
80 C101 Motor capacity 9999
0.4 to 55 kW*2 Set the applied motor capacity.
0 to 3600 kW*3
9999 V/F control 81 C102
Number of motor poles 9999
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of motor poles. 9999 V/F control
9 C103
Electronic thermal O/L relay
Inverter rated current*1
0 to 500 A*2
Set the rated motor current. 0 to 3600 A*3
83 C104
Rated motor voltage 200/400 V*4 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage (V).
84 C105
Rated motor frequency 9999
10 to 400 Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz). 9999 The setting value of Pr.3 Base frequency is used.
707 C107
Motor inertia (integer) 9999 10 to 999, 9999 Set the motor inertia.
9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA, SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) and so on) is used.
724 C108
Motor inertia (exponent) 9999 0 to 7, 9999
96 C110
Auto tuning setting/status 0
0 No offline auto tuning 1 Offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating.
11 Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the motor (V/F control, IPM motor MM-CF). (Refer to page 638.)
101 Offline auto tuning is performed with the motor rotating.
90 C120
Motor constant (R1) 9999
0 to 50 , 9999*2*5
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA, SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) and so on) is used.
0 to 400 m, 9999*3*5
91 C121
Motor constant (R2) 9999
0 to 50 , 9999*2*5
0 to 400 m, 9999*3*5
92 C122
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld)
9999 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*2*5
0 to 400 mH, 9999*3*5
93 C123
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq)
9999 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*2*5
0 to 400 mH, 9999*3*5
94 C124
Motor constant (X) 9999 0 to 100%, 9999*5
82 C125
Motor excitation current 9999
0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5
0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
859 C126
Torque current/ Rated PM motor current
9999 0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5
0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
298 A711
Frequency search gain 9999
0 to 32767 The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for the frequency search.
9999 The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF- JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.
450 C200
Second applied motor 9999
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 8090, 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
Set this parameter when using the second motor (the same specifications as Pr.71).
9999 The function is disabled.
453 C201
Second motor capacity 9999
0.4 to 55 kW*2 Set the capacity of the second motor.
0 to 3600 kW*3
9999 V/F control
5335. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
53
*1 For the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower, it is set to 85% of the inverter rated current. *2 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *3 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher. *4 The initial value differs according to the voltage class (200 V / 400 V). *5 The setting range and unit change according to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting.
454 C202
Number of second motor poles
9999 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of poles of the second motor.
9999 V/F control
51 C203
Second electronic thermal O/L relay 9999
0 to 500 A*2 This function is enabled when the RT signal is ON. Set the rated motor current.0 to 3600 A*3
9999 Second electronic thermal O/L relay disabled. 456 C204
Rated second motor voltage 200/400 V*4 0 to 1000 V Set the rated voltage (V) of the second motor.
457 C205
Rated second motor frequency 9999
10 to 400 Hz Set the rated frequency (Hz) of the second motor. 9999 The Pr.84 Rated motor frequency setting is used.
744 C207
Second motor inertia (integer) 9999 10 to 999, 9999 Set the inertia of the second motor.
9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.745
C208 Second motor inertia (exponent) 9999 0 to 7, 9999
463 C210
Second motor auto tuning setting/status
0
0 No auto tuning for the second motor.
1 Offline auto tuning is performed without the second motor rotating.
11 Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the motor (V/F control, IPM motor MM-CF). (Refer to page 638.)
101 Offline auto tuning is performed with the second motor rotating.
458 C220
Second motor constant (R1) 9999
0 to 50 , 9999*2*5
Tuning data of the second motor. (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.
0 to 400 m, 9999*3*5
459 C221
Second motor constant (R2) 9999
0 to 50 , 9999*2*5
0 to 400 m, 9999*3*5
460 C222
Second motor constant (L1) / d- axis inductance (Ld)
9999 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*2*5
0 to 400 mH, 9999*3*5
461 C223
Second motor constant (L2) / q- axis inductance (Lq)
9999 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*2*5
0 to 400 mH, 9999*3*5
462 C224
Second motor constant (X) 9999 0 to 100%, 9999*5
455 C225
Second motor excitation current 9999
0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5
0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
860 C226
Second motor torque current/ Rated PM motor current
9999 0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5
0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
560 A712
Second frequency search gain
9999
0 to 32767 The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for the frequency search of the second motor.
9999 The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF- JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used for the second motor.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The function is enabled under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and Vector control. By using the offline auto tuning function, the optimum operation characteristics are obtained for a motor other than Mitsubishi
Electric standard motors (SF-JR 0.4 kW or higher), high-efficiency motors (SF-HR 0.4 kW or higher), Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motors (SF-JRCA 4P, SF-HRCA 0.4 kW to 55 kW), Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-serving motor (SF-PR), or Vector control dedicated motors (SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series)), such as an induction motor of other manufacturers, SF-JRC, or SF-TH, or with a long wiring length (30 m or longer).
Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor. During offline auto tuning, the motor rotation can be locked (Pr.96 = "1") or unlocked (Pr.96 = "101"). The tuning is more
accurate when the motor rotates. Reading/writing of the motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled. The offline auto tuning data (motor constants)
can be copied to another inverter using the operation panel. The offline auto tuning status can be monitored on the operation panel or the parameter unit.
Before performing offline auto tuning Check the following points before performing offline auto tuning:
Check that a value other than "9999" is set in Pr.80 and Pr.81, and Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or Vector control is selected (with Pr.800).
Check that a motor is connected. (Check that the motor is not rotated by an external force during tuning.) Select a motor with the rated current equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (The motor capacity must be 0.4 kW
or higher.) If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
Tuning is not available for a high-slip motor, high-speed motor, or special motor. The maximum frequency is 400 Hz. The motor may rotate slightly even if offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/
status = "1"). (The slight motor rotation does not affect the tuning performance.) Fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates. (Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications.)
Check the following points for the offline auto tuning with motor rotation (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status = "101"). The torque is not sufficient during tuning. Check that the motor can be rotated up to the speed close to the rated speed. Check that the mechanical brake is released.
Offline auto tuning is not performed correctly when the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) is inserted between the inverter and motor. Be sure to remove it before performing tuning.
Make sure to connect the encoder to the motor without coaxial misalignment for Vector control. Set the speed ratio to 1:1.
5355. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
53
Settings To perform tuning, set the following parameters about the motor.
*1 The initial value differs according to the voltage class (200 V / 400 V). *2 For the settings for the SF-V5RU, refer to page 94. *3 Set Pr.71 Applied motor according to the motor to be used and the motor constant setting range. According to the Pr.71 setting, the range of
the motor constant parameter setting values and units can be changed. (For other setting values of Pr.71, refer to page 528.)
NOTE When the SF-V5RU (other than the 1500 r/min series) is used, be sure to perform auto tuning after setting "1, 13, or 14" in
Pr.71 and setting Pr.83 and Pr.84. When Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time = "0" or Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage = "0", offline auto
tuning is performed at the initial setting of Pr.11 or Pr.12. When position control is selected (Pr.800 = "3 or 5" (when the MC signal is OFF)), offline auto tuning is not performed. If "wye connection" or "delta connection" is incorrectly selected in Pr.71, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real
sensorless vector control, and Vector control are not performed properly.
First motor
Pr.
Second motor
Pr. Name Initial value Description
80 453 Motor capacity 9999 (V/F control) Set the motor capacity (kW). 81 454 Number of motor poles 9999 (V/F control) Set the number of motor poles (2 to 12).
800 451 Control method selection 20 Set this parameter under Vector control or Real sensorless vector
control.
9 51 Electronic thermal O/L relay Inverter rated current Set the rated motor current (A).
83 456 Rated motor voltage 200 V / 400 V*1 Set the rated motor voltage (V) printed on the motor's rating plate.*2
84 457 Rated motor frequency 9999 Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).*2When the setting is "9999", the
Pr.3 Base frequency setting is used.
71 450 Applied motor 0 (standard motor) Set this parameter according to the motor.*3 Three types of motor constant setting ranges, units and tuning data can be stored according to settings.
96 463 Auto tuning setting/ status 0
Set "1" or "101". 1: Tuning is performed without the motor rotating. (Excitation noise occurs at this point.) 101: Tuning is performed with the motor rotating. The motor can rotate up to the speed near the rated motor frequency.
Motor
Pr.71 setting Motor constant
parameter mH, %, and A unit setting
Motor constant parameter internal
data setting
Motor constant parameter , m, and A unit setting
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor
SF-JR, SF-TH 0 (initial value) 3 (4) SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 20 23 (24) SF-HR 40 43 (44) Others 0 (initial value) 3 (4)
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor
SF-JRCA 4P, SF-TH (constant- torque) 1 13 (14)
SF-HRCA 50 53 (54) Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 1 13 (14)
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor
SF-PR 70 73 (74)
Vector control dedicated motor
SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) SF-THY 30 33 (34)
SF-V5RU (other than the 1500 r/min series) 1 13 (14)
Other manufacturer's standard motor 0 (initial value) 3 (4) 5 (wye connection motor)
6 (delta connection motor) Other manufacturer's constant-torque motor 1 13 (14) 15 (wye connection motor)
16 (delta connection motor)
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
For tuning accuracy improvement, set the following parameters when the motor constants are known in advance.
*4 The setting is valid only when a value other than "9999" is set in both Pr.707 (Pr.744) and Pr.724 (Pr.745).
Performing tuning
Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit if the inverter is in the state ready for tuning. The motor starts by turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable.
In the PU operation mode, press / on the operation panel.
For External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
NOTE Satisfy the required inverter start conditions to start offline auto tuning. For example, stop the input of the MRS signal.
To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or on the operation panel.
(Turning OFF the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) also ends tuning.) During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid (initial value).
Input terminals
When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM/CA and AM, the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in 15 steps from FM/CA and AM.
Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the Second function selection (RT) signal during offline auto tuning. Auto tuning will not be performed properly.
Setting offline auto tuning (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status = "1 or 101") will make pre-excitation invalid. When the offline auto tuning with motor rotation is selected (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status = "101"), take caution and
ensure safety against the rotation of the motor. Since the Inverter running (RUN) signal turns ON when tuning is started, pay close attention especially when a sequence which
releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed. When executing offline auto tuning, input the operation command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
of the inverter. While Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", turn ON the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal for tuning in the PU
operation mode.
During tuning, the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as follows.
First motor Pr.
Second motor Pr. Name
Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA,
SF-HRCA, SF-V5RU) Other motors
707 744 Motor inertia (integer) 9999 (initial value) Motor inertia*4
Jm = Pr.707 10^(-Pr.724) (kgm2)724 745 Motor inertia (exponent)
Tuning status Operation panel (FR-DU08) display LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) display
Pr.96 = "1" Pr.96 = "101" Pr.96 = "1" Pr.96 = "101"
(1) Setting
(2) During tuning
(3) Normal completion
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
1 --- STOP PU PREV NEXT
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
101 --- STOP PU PREV NEXT
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
2 STF FWD PU PREV NEXT
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
102 STF FWD PU PREV NEXT
Blinking Blinking
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
Completed 3 STF STOP PU PREV NEXT
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
Completed 103 STF STOP PU PREV NEXT
5375. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
53
Note: Offline auto tuning time (with the initial setting)
When offline auto tuning ends, press on the operation panel during PU operation. For External operation, turn OFF
the start signal (STF signal or STR signal). This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
NOTE The motor constants measured once during offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until offline
auto tuning is performed again. However, the tuning data is cleared when performing All parameter clear. Changing Pr.71 (Pr.450) after tuning completion will change the motor constant. For example, if "3" is set in Pr.71 after tuning
is performed with Pr.71 = "0", the tuning data becomes invalid. To use the tuned data, set "0" again in Pr.71.
If offline auto tuning has ended in error (see the following table), motor constants are not set. Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto
tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.) Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
When the rated power supply of the motor is 200/220 V (400/440 V) 60 Hz, set the rated motor current multiplied by 1.1 in Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay after tuning is complete.
For a motor with a PTC thermistor, thermal protector, or other thermal detector, set "0" (motor overheat protection by inverter invalid) in Pr.9 to protect the motor from overheating.
NOTE An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error. After power is restored, the inverter starts
normal operation. Therefore, when the STF (STR) signal is ON, the motor starts forward (reverse) rotation. Any fault occurring during tuning is handled as in the normal operation. However, if the retry function is set, no retry is
performed. The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.
Offline auto tuning setting Time No motor rotation (Pr.96 = "1") About 25 to 120 s. (The time depends on the inverter capacity and motor type.)
With motor rotation (Pr.96 = "101") About 40 s. (The following offline auto tuning time is set according to the acceleration/deceleration time setting. Offline auto tuning time = acceleration time + deceleration time + about 30 s)
Error display Error cause Countermeasures 8 Forced end Set Pr.96 = "1 or 101" and try again. 9 Inverter protective function operation Make the setting again.
91 The current limit (stall prevention) function is activated. Set the acceleration/deceleration time longer. Set Pr.156 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "1".
92 The converter output voltage fell to 75% of the rated voltage. Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation. Check the Pr.83 Rated motor voltage setting.
93 Calculation error. The motor is not connected.
Check the Pr.83 and Pr.84 settings. Check the motor wiring and make the setting again.
94 Rotation tuning frequency setting error. (The frequency command for the tuning was given to exceed the maximum frequency setting, or to be in the frequency jump range.)
Check the Pr.1 Maximum frequency and Pr.31 to Pr.36 Frequency jump settings.
CAUTION Note that the motor may start running suddenly. For performing offline auto tuning with the motor rotating in vertical lift applications, etc., caution is required to avoid falling
due to insufficient torque.
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
V
Changing the motor constants The motor constants can be set directly when the motor constants are known in advance, or by using the data measured
during offline auto tuning. According to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting, the range of the motor constant parameter setting values and units can be
changed. The changed settings are stored in the EEPROM as the motor constant parameters.
Changing the motor constants (when setting the Pr.92 and Pr.93 motor constants in units of mH)
Set Pr.71 as follows.
Use the following formula to find the Pr.94 setting value and set a desired value as the motor constant parameter.
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
Motor Pr.71 setting
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor
SF-JR 0 (initial value) SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 20 SF-HR 40
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor SF-JRCA 4P 1 SF-HRCA 50
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor SF-PR 70
Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) 30 SF-V5RU (other than the 1500 r/min series) 1
Equivalent circuit diagram of the motor
First motor Pr.
Second motor Pr. Name Setting range Setting
increments Initial value
82 455 Motor excitation current (no load current)
0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
9999
0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
90 458 Motor constant (R1) 0 to 50 , 9999*1 0.001 *1
0 to 400 m, 9999*2 0.01 m*2
91 459 Motor constant (R2) 0 to 50 , 9999*1 0.001 *1
0 to 400 m, 9999*2 0.01 m*2
92 460 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld)
0 to 6000 mH, 9999*1 0.1 mH*1
0 to 400 mH, 9999*2 0.01 mH*2
93 461 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq)
0 to 6000 mH, 9999*1 0.1 mH*1
0 to 400 mH, 9999*2 0.01 mH*2
94 462 Motor constant (X) 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1%*1
0.01%*2
859 860 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
298 560 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1
The setting value of Pr.94 =1 - M2 100()
L1L2
L1= I1+ M: Primary inductance L2= I2+ M: Secondary inductance
M R2/S
R1 I1 I2 R1: Primary resistance
I1: Primary leakage inductance I2: Secondary leakage inductance M: Excitation inductance S: Slip
R2: Secondary resistance
5395. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
54
NOTE If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid and the constant values for Mitsubishi Electric motors (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-
JRCA, SF-HRCA and SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) and so on) are used.
Changing the motor constants (when setting motor constants in the internal data of the inverter)
Set Pr.71 as follows.
Set desired values as the motor constant parameters. The display units of the read motor constants can be changed with Pr.684 Tuning data unit switchover. Setting Pr.684 = "1" disables parameter setting changes.
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
NOTE As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data (****), refer to the following
setting example when making setting. (The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Therefore, simple addition of a value to the displayed value does not bring the desired effect.)
Setting example: To slightly increase the Pr.90 value (5%) When "2516" is displayed for Pr.90, set 2642 (2516 1.05 = 2641.8) in Pr.90.
If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid and the constant values for Mitsubishi Electric motors (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF- JRCA, SF-HRCA and SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) and so on) are used.
Motor Pr.71 setting
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor
SF-JR, SF-TH 3 (4) SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 23 (24) SF-HR 43 (44) Others 3 (4)
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor SF-JRCA 4P, SF-TH (constant-torque) 13 (14) SF-HRCA 53 (54) Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 13 (14)
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor SF-PR 73 (74)
Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series), SF-THY 33 (34) SF-V5RU (other than the 1500 r/min series) 13 (14)
Other manufacturer's standard motor 3 (4) Other manufacturer's constant-torque motor 13 (14)
First motor Pr.
Second motor Pr. Name
Pr.684 = 0 (initial value) Pr.684 = 1 Initial valueSetting range Setting
increments Range indication Unit indication
82 455 Motor excitation current
0 to ***, 9999 1
0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
9999
0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
90 458 Motor constant (R1) 0 to 50 , 9999*1 0.001 *1
0 to 400 m, 9999*2 0.01 m*2
91 459 Motor constant (R2) 0 to 50 , 9999*1 0.001 *1
0 to 400 m, 9999*2 0.01 m*2
92 460 Motor constant (L1)/d- axis inductance (Ld)
0 to 6000 mH, 9999*1 0.1 mH*1
0 to 400 mH, 9999*2 0.01 mH*2
93 461 Motor constant (L2)/q- axis inductance (Lq)
0 to 6000 mH, 9999*1 0.1 mH*1
0 to 400 mH, 9999*2 0.01 mH*2
94 462 Motor constant (X) 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1%*1
0.01%*2
859 860 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
298 560 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1 0 to 32767, 9999 1
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Changing the motor constants (when setting the Pr.92, Pr.93, and Pr.94 motor constants in units of )
Set Pr.71 as follows.
Set desired values as the motor constant parameters.
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
NOTE If "wye connection" or "delta connection" is incorrectly selected in Pr.71, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real
sensorless vector control, and Vector control are not performed properly. If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid and the constant values for Mitsubishi Electric motors (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-
JRCA, SF-HRCA and SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) and so on) are used.
Tuning the second motor When one inverter switches the operation between two different motors, set the second motor in Pr.450 Second applied
motor. (Refer to page 528.) In the initial setting, no second motor is applied. Turning ON the RT signal enables the parameter settings for the second motor as follows.
Applied motor Pr.71 setting
Wye connection motor Delta connection motor Standard motor 5 6 Constant-torque motor 15 16
Iq = I100 2 - I02
Iq = torque current, I100 = rated current, I0 = no load current
First motor Pr.
Second motor Pr. Name Setting range Setting increments Initial value
82 455 Motor excitation current (no load current)
0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
9999
0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
90 458 Motor constant (r1) 0 to 50 , 9999*1 0.001 *1
0 to 400 m, 9999*2 0.01 m*2
91 459 Motor constant (r2) 0 to 50 , 9999*1 0.001 *1
0 to 400 m, 9999*2 0.01 m*2
92 460 Motor constant (x1) 0 to 50 , 9999*1 0.001 *1
0 to 3600 m, 9999*2 0.1 m*2
93 461 Motor constant (x2) 0 to 50 , 9999*1 0.001 *1
0 to 3600 m, 9999*2 0.1 m*2
94 462 Motor constant (xm) 0 to 500 , 9999*1
0.01 0 to 100 , 9999*2
859 860 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
298 560 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1
Function RT signal ON (second motor) RT signal OFF (first motor) Motor capacity Pr.453 Pr.80 Number of motor poles Pr.454 Pr.81 Motor excitation current Pr.455 Pr.82 Rated motor voltage Pr.456 Pr.83 Rated motor frequency Pr.457 Pr.84 Motor constant (R1) Pr.458 Pr.90 Motor constant (R2) Pr.459 Pr.91 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) Pr.460 Pr.92 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) Pr.461 Pr.93 Motor constant (X) Pr.462 Pr.94 Auto tuning setting/status Pr.463 Pr.96 Frequency search gain Pr.560 Pr.298
5415. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
54
NOTE The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 428 Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relaypage 415 Pr.31 to Pr.36 Frequency jumppage 429 Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528 Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selectionpage 431 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473 Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221
5.13.3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (under Vector control)
The offline auto tuning enables the optimal operation of a PM motor (under Vector control). Automatic measurement of motor constants (offline auto tuning) enables optimal operation of motors for Vector control
even when motor constants vary or when the wiring distance is long. For the offline auto tuning under Vector control (for induction motor), refer to page 532.
Vector
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
684 C000
Tuning data unit switchover 0
0 Internal data converted value 1 The value is indicated in A, , mH, or mV.
71 C100 Applied motor 0
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 8090, 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
By selecting a motor, the thermal characteristic and motor constant of each motor are set.
80 C101 Motor capacity 9999
0.4 to 55 kW*2 Set the applied motor capacity.
0 to 3600 kW*3
9999 V/F control 81 C102 Number of motor poles 9999
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of motor poles. 9999 V/F control
9 C103
Electronic thermal O/L relay
Inverter rated current*1
0 to 500 A*2
Set the rated motor current. 0 to 3600 A*3
83 C104 Rated motor voltage
200/400 V*4 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage (V).
84 C105 Rated motor frequency 9999
10 to 400 Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
9999 As the internal data of the inverter is used, set it correctly according to the motor specifications.
702 C106
Maximum motor frequency 9999
0 to 400 Hz Set the permissible speed (frequency) of the motor. 9999 The Pr.84 setting is used.
707 C107 Motor inertia (integer) 9999 10 to 999, 9999
Set the motor inertia. 9999: Inverter internal data724
C108 Motor inertia (exponent) 9999 0 to 7, 9999
96 C110
Auto tuning setting/ status 0
0 No offline auto tuning 1 Offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating.
11 Offline auto tuning is performed only for motor constant R1 (without motor rotation).
101 Encoder position tuning and offline auto tuning are performed (with the motor rotating slightly).
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
90 C120 Motor constant (R1) 9999
0 to 50 , 9999*2*5
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: Inverter internal data is used.
0 to 400 m, 9999*3*5
92 C122
Motor constant (L1)/d- axis inductance (Ld) 9999
0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5
0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5
93 C123
Motor constant (L2)/q- axis inductance (Lq) 9999
0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5
0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5
859 C126
Torque current/Rated PM motor current 9999
0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5
0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
706 C130
Induced voltage constant (phi f) 9999
0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)*5 Set this parameter according to the PM motor specifications.
9999 The value calculated from the parameter setting for motor constant is used.
1412 C135
Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent
9999 0 to 2
Set the exponent n when the induced voltage constant phi f (Pr.706) is multiplied by 10n.
9999 No exponent setting 711 C131 Motor Ld decay ratio 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is
automatically set.) 9999: Inverter internal data is used.712
C132 Motor Lq decay ratio 9999 0 to 100%, 9999
725 C133
Motor protection current level 9999
100 to 500% Set the maximum current (OCT) level of the motor. 9999 200%
1002 C150
Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient
9999 50 to 150% Adjust the target current during tuning.
9999 100%
450 C200 Second applied motor 9999
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 8090, 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
Set this parameter when using the second motor (the same specifications as Pr.71).
9999 The function is disabled.
453 C201 Second motor capacity 9999
0.4 to 55 kW*2 Set the capacity of the second motor.
0 to 3600 kW*3
9999 V/F control 454 C202
Number of second motor poles 9999
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of poles of the second motor. 9999 V/F control
51 C203
Second electronic thermal O/L relay 9999
0 to 500 A*2 Set the rated current of the second motor.
0 to 3600 A*3
9999 The second electronic thermal O/L relay is disabled. 456 C204
Rated second motor voltage
200 V/ 400 V*4 0 to 1000 V Set the rated voltage (V) of the second motor.
457 C205
Rated second motor frequency 9999
10 to 400 Hz Set the rated frequency (Hz) of the second motor.
9999 As the inverter internal data is used for the second motor, set it correctly according to the motor specifications.
743 C206
Second motor maximum frequency 9999
0 to 400 Hz Set the permissible speed (frequency) of the second motor. 9999 The Pr.457 setting is used.
744 C207
Second motor inertia (integer) 9999 10 to 999, 9999
Set the motor inertia of the second motor. 9999: Inverter internal data745
C208 Second motor inertia (exponent) 9999 0 to 7, 9999
463 C210
Second motor auto tuning setting/status 0
0 No auto tuning for the second motor. 1 Offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating.
11 Offline auto tuning is performed only for motor constant R1 (without motor rotation)
101 Encoder position tuning and offline auto tuning are performed (with the motor rotating slightly).
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
5435. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
54
*1 For the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower, it is set to 85% of the inverter rated current. *2 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *3 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher. *4 The initial value differs according to the voltage class (200 V / 400 V). *5 The setting range and unit change according to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting. *6 The setting is available when the FR-A8AL/FR-A8APR/FR-A8APS/FR-A8APA is installed. *7 The setting is available when the FR-A8TP is installed.
Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor. Reading/writing of the motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled. The offline auto tuning data (motor constants)
can be copied to another inverter using the operation panel. The offline auto tuning status can be monitored on the operation panel or the parameter unit.
Before performing offline auto tuning Check the following points before performing offline auto tuning:
The Vector control is selected. Check that a motor is connected. (Check that the motor is not rotated by an external force during tuning.) The rated motor current should be equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (The motor capacity must be 0.4 kW or
higher.) If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
The maximum frequency is 400 Hz.
458 C220
Second motor constant (R1) 9999
0 to 50 , 9999*2*5
Tuning data of the second motor. (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: Inverter internal data is used.
0 to 400 m, 9999*3*5
460 C222
Second motor constant (L1) / d-axis inductance (Ld)
9999 0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5
0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5
461 C223
Second motor constant (L2) / q-axis inductance (Lq)
9999 0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5
0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5
860 C226
Second motor torque current/Rated PM motor current
9999 0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5
0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
738 C230
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) 9999
0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)*5 Set this parameter according to the PM motor specifications.
9999 The value calculated from the parameter setting for motor constant is used.
1413 C235
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent
9999 0 to 2
Set the exponent n when the induced voltage constant phi f (Pr.738) is multiplied by 10n.
9999 No exponent setting 739 C231
Second motor Ld decay ratio 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 Tuning data of the second motor.
(The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: Inverter internal data is used.
740 C232
Second motor Lq decay ratio 9999 0 to 100%, 9999
746 C233
Second motor protection current level
9999 100 to 500% Set the maximum current (OCT) level of the second motor.
9999 200%
373 C142*6
Encoder position tuning setting/status 0
0 Encoder position tuning disabled. 1 Encoder position tuning enabled.
871 C243*7
Control terminal optionEncoder position tuning setting/ status
0
0 Encoder position tuning disabled.
1 Encoder position tuning enabled.
1105 C143*6
Encoder magnetic pole position offset 65535
0 to 16383 Encoder position tuning data set. 65535 Encoder position tuning not performed.
887 C143*7
Control terminal optionEncoder magnetic pole position offset
65535
0 to 16383 Encoder position tuning data set.
65535 Encoder position tuning not performed.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The motor may rotate slightly even if the offline auto tuning without motor rotation (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status = "1") is selected. (It does not affect the tuning performance.) Fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates. (Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications.)
Tuning is not available during position control. Tuning may be disabled depending on the motor characteristics.
Settings To perform tuning, set the following parameters about the motor.
*1 Set Pr.71 Applied motor according to the motor to be used. According to the Pr.71 setting, the range of the motor constant parameter setting values and units can be changed. (For other setting values of Pr.71, refer to page 528.)
For tuning accuracy improvement, set the following parameters when the motor constants are known in advance.
*1 The setting is valid only when a value other than "9999" is set in both Pr.707 (Pr.744) and Pr.724 (Pr.745).
Performing tuning
Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit if the inverter is in the state ready for tuning. The motor starts by turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable.
In the PU operation mode, press / on the operation panel.
For External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
First motor Pr.
Second motor Pr. Name Setting value
80 453 Motor capacity Motor capacity (kW) 81 454 Number of motor poles Number of motor poles (2 to 12) 9 51 Electronic thermal O/L relay Rated motor current (A) 84 457 Rated motor frequency Rated motor frequency (Hz) 83 456 Rated motor voltage Rated motor voltage (V)
71 450 Applied motor 8090, 8093 (IPM motor), 9090, 9093 (SPM motor)*1
96 463 Auto tuning setting/status 1, 101
Motor Pr.71 setting
Motor constant parameter , mH, and A unit setting
Motor constant parameter internal data setting
IPM motor 8090 8093 (8094) SPM motor 9090 9093 (9094)
First motor Pr.
Second motor Pr. Name Setting value
702 743 Maximum motor frequency Maximum motor frequency (Hz) 707 744 Motor inertia (integer) Motor inertia*1
Jm = Pr.707 10^(-Pr.724) (kgm2)724 745 Motor inertia (exponent) 725 746 Motor protection current level Maximum current level of the motor (%)
5455. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
54
NOTE Satisfy the required inverter start conditions to start offline auto tuning. For example, stop the input of the MRS signal.
To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or on the operation panel. (Turning OFF the start signal (STF signal
or STR signal) also ends tuning.) During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid (initial value).
Input terminals
When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM/CA and AM, the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in 15 steps from FM/CA and AM.
Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the Second function selection (RT) signal during offline auto tuning. Auto tuning will not be performed properly.
A motor with 14 or more poles cannot be tuned. Since the Inverter running (RUN) signal turns ON when tuning is started, pay close attention especially when a sequence which
releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed. When executing offline auto tuning, input the operation command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
of the inverter. While Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", turn ON the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal for tuning in the PU
operation mode. Setting offline auto tuning (Pr.96 = "1") will make pre-excitation invalid.
During tuning, the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as follows.
When offline auto tuning ends, press on the operation panel during PU operation. For External operation, turn OFF
the start signal (STF signal or STR signal). This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
NOTE The motor constants measured once during offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until offline
auto tuning is performed again. However, the tuning data is cleared when performing All parameter clear. Changing Pr.71 after tuning completion will change the motor constant. For example, if the Pr.71 setting is changed to "8093"
after tuned with Pr.71 = "8090", the tuning data become invalid. To use the tuned data, set "8090" again in Pr.71.
Pr.96 (Pr.463) setting
1 101 1 101 Operation panel (FR-DU08) display LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) display
(1) Setting
(2) During tuning
(3) Normal completion
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
1 --- STOP PU PREV NEXT
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
101 --- STOP PU PREV NEXT
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
2 STF FWD PU PREV NEXT
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
102 STF FWD PU PREV NEXT
Blinking Blinking
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
Completed 3 STF STOP PU PREV NEXT
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
Completed 103 STF STOP PU PREV NEXT
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
If offline auto tuning has ended in error (see the following table), motor constants are not set. Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto
tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.) Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
NOTE An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter starts normal operation. Therefore, when the STF (STR) signal is ON, the motor starts forward (reverse) rotation.
Any fault occurring during tuning is handled as in the normal operation. However, if the retry function is set, no retry is performed even when a protective function that performs a retry is activated.
The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.
Parameters updated by tuning results after tuning
: Tuned, : Not tuned *1 The setting is available when the FR-A8AL/FR-A8APR/FR-A8APS/FR-A8APA is installed. *2 The setting is available when the FR-A8TP is installed.
NOTE If the offline auto tuning is started before the encoder position tuning is finished (Pr.1105 (Pr.887) = "65535") for a PM motor,
the protective function (E.MP) is activated.
Tuning adjustment (Pr.1002) The overcurrent protective function may be activated during Lq tuning for an easily magnetically saturated motor (motor
with a large Lq decay ratio). In such case, adjust the target flowing current used for tuning with Pr.1002 Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient.
Error display Error cause Countermeasures 8 Forced end Set Pr.96 (Pr.463)="1 or 101" and try again. 9 Inverter protective function operation Make the setting again.
92 The converter output voltage fell to 75% of the rated voltage. Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation. Check the Pr.83 Rated motor voltage setting.
93 Calculation error. The motor is not connected. Check the motor wiring and make the setting again.
94
Rotation tuning frequency setting error. (The frequency command for the tuning was given to exceed the maximum frequency setting, or to be in the frequency jump range.)
Check the Pr.1 Maximum frequency and Pr.31 to Pr.36 Frequency jump settings.
CAUTION Note that the motor may start running suddenly.
Pr. Name Tuning according to Pr.96 (Pr.463) setting
Description 101 1 11
90 (458) Motor constant (R1) Resistance per phase
92 (460) Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) d-axis inductance
93 (461) Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) q-axis inductance
711 (739) Motor Ld decay ratio d-axis inductance decay ratio 712 (740) Motor Lq decay ratio q-axis inductance decay ratio 859 (860) Torque current/Rated PM motor current 96 (463) Auto tuning setting/status
373*1 871*2 Encoder position tuning setting/status Encoder position tuning status
1105*1 887*2 Encoder magnetic pole position offset Turning data of encoder position tuning
5475. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
54
Changing the motor constants The motor constants can be set directly when the motor constants are known in advance, or by using the data measured
during offline auto tuning. According to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting, the range of the motor constant parameter setting values and units can be
changed. The changed settings are stored in the EEPROM as the motor constant parameters.
Changing the motor constants (when setting motor constants in units of , mH, or A)
Set Pr.71 as follows.
Set desired values as the motor constant parameters.
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
NOTE If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid and the inverter internal constant is used. To change a motor induced voltage constant of PM motors, the setting in Pr.706 Induced voltage constant (phi f) or Pr.738
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) must be changed. If the constant after the change exceeds the setting range of Pr.706 or Pr.738 (0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)), set Pr.1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent or Pr.1413 Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent. Set a value in the exponent n in the formula, Pr.706 (Pr.738) 10n [mV (rad/s)], to set the induced voltage constant (phi f).
When Pr.71 (Pr.450) = "8093, 8094, 9093, or 9094", or Pr.1412 (Pr.1413) = "9999", the motor induced voltage constant is as set in Pr.706 (Pr.738). (No exponent setting)
Changing the motor constants (when setting a motor constants in the internal data of the inverter)
Set Pr.71 as follows.
Motor Pr.71 setting IPM motor 8090 SPM motor 9090
First motor Pr.
Second motor Pr. Name Setting range Setting
increments Initial value
90 458 Motor constant (R1) 0 to 50 , 9999*1 0.001 *1
9999
0 to 400 m, 9999*2 0.01 m*2
92 460 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) 0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
0 to 50 mH, 9999*2 0.001 mH*2
93 461 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) 0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
0 to 50 mH, 9999*2 0.001 mH*2
706 738 Induced voltage constant (phi f) 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 9999 0.1 mV (rad/s)
859 860 Torque current/Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
1412 1413 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent 0 to 2, 9999 1
Motor Pr.71 setting IPM motor 8093 (8094) SPM motor 9093 (9094)
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Set desired values as the motor constant parameters. The displayed increments of the read motor constants can be changed with Pr.684 Tuning data unit switchover. Setting Pr.684 = "1" disables parameter setting changes.
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
NOTE As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data (****), refer to the following
setting example when making setting. (The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Therefore, simple addition of a value to the displayed value does not bring the desired effect.) Setting example: to slightly increase the Pr.90 value (5%) When "2516" is displayed for Pr.90, set 2642 (2516 1.05 = 2641.8) in Pr.90.
If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid. The MM-CF constant is used for the IPM motor MM-CF, and the inverter internal constant is used for a PM motor other than MM-CF.
To change a motor induced voltage constant of PM motors, the setting in Pr.706 Induced voltage constant (phi f) or Pr.738 Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) must be changed. If the constant after the change exceeds the setting range of Pr.706 or Pr.738 (0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)), set Pr.1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent or Pr.1413 Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent. Set a value in the exponent n in the formula, Pr.706 (Pr.738) 10n [mV (rad/s)], to set the induced voltage constant (phi f).
When Pr.71 (Pr.450) = "8093, 8094, 9093, or 9094", or Pr.1412 (Pr.1413) = "9999", the motor induced voltage constant is as set in Pr.706 (Pr.738). (No exponent setting)
Encoder position tuning Encoder position tuning is required when a PM motor with an encoder is driven. The measured offset value between the motor home magnetic pole position and the encoder home position is stored. Only encoder position tuning can be performed when offline auto tuning is not required, such as when the parameters for motor constant are set manually, or when offline auto tuning is already performed.
Before performing encoder position tuning Check that an option for vector control for PM motor, a motor, and an encoder are properly connected. Check that a motor (single, stop status) is connected. (Check that the motor is not rotated by an external force during
tuning.) The mechanical brake is released. Check that the vector control (speed control) for the PM motor with an encoder is selected. (Refer to page 221.)
NOTE Encoder position tuning is required when a PM motor is used. (It is disabled when an induction motor is used.) When auto tuning is performed while Pr.96 = "101", offline auto tuning and encoder position tuning can be performed at the
same time.
First motor Pr.
Second motor Pr. Name
Pr.684 = 0 (initial value) Pr.684 = 1 Initial valueSetting range Setting
increments Setting range Setting increments
90 458 Motor constant (R1)
0 to ***, 9999 1
0 to 50 , 9999*1 0.001 *1
9999
0 to 400 m, 9999*2 0.01 m*2
92 460 Motor constant (L1)/d- axis inductance (Ld)
0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
0 to 50 mH, 9999*2 0.001 mH*2
93 461 Motor constant (L2)/q- axis inductance (Lq)
0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
0 to 50 mH, 9999*2 0.001 mH*2
706 738 Induced voltage constant (phi f)
0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 9999 0.1 mV (rad/s)
859 860 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
1412 1413 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent
0 to 2, 9999 1
5495. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
55
Setting To perform tuning, set Pr.373 (Pr.871) ="1".
Performing tuning
Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit if the inverter is in the state ready for tuning. The motor starts by turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable.
In the PU operation mode, press / on the operation panel.
In the external operation mode, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
NOTE The motor shaft rotates up to 2 times during tuning.
During tuning, the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as follows.
When encoder position tuning ends, press on the PU in the PU operation mode. For External operation, turn OFF
the start signal (STF signal or STR signal). This operation resets encoder position tuning, and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
NOTE The encoder position tuning data is stored in Pr.1105 (Pr.887) until encoder position tuning is performed again. However,
performing All parameter clear resets the tuning data.
If encoder position tuning has ended in error (see the following table), motor constants are not set. Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, the tuning
does not end properly. (The tuning data have not been set.) Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
Status Operation panel (FR-DU08) display LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) display
(1) Setting
(2) During tuning
(3) Normal completion
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
1 --- STOP PU PREV NEXT
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
2 STF FWD PU PREV NEXT
Blinking
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
Completed 3 STF STOP PU PREV NEXT
Pr.373 (Pr.871) setting Error cause Countermeasures
8 Forced end Set "1" in Pr.373 (Pr.871) and retry.
9 Inverter protective function operation Identify and remove the cause of the protective function activation, and make the setting again.
93 The motor or the encoder is not connected. Check the wiring of the motor and the encoder, the brake opening, and make the setting again.
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When the protective function (E.EP) is activated during tuning, check the wiring of the motor and the encoder, Pr.359 (Pr.852) setting, and then perform tuning again.
When tuning ends properly, the counter value of the offset between the motor home magnetic pole position and the encoder home position is written in Pr.1105 (Pr.887).
Parameters referred to Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relaypage 415 Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221
5.13.4 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (motor constant tuning)
The offline auto tuning enables the optimal operation of a PM motor. Automatic measurement of motor constants (offline auto tuning) enables optimal operation of motors for PM sensorless
vector control even when motor constants vary or when the wiring distance is long. IPM and SPM motors other than the MM-CF IPM motor can also be used.
For the offline auto tuning under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and Vector control, refer to page 532.
PM
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
684 C000
Tuning data unit switchover 0
0 Internal data converted value 1 The value is indicated in A, , mH, or mV.
71 C100 Applied motor 0
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 8090, 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
By selecting a motor, the thermal characteristic and motor constant of each motor are set.
80 C101 Motor capacity 9999
0.4 to 55 kW*2 Set the applied motor capacity.
0 to 3600 kW*3
9999 V/F control 81 C102 Number of motor poles 9999
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of motor poles. 9999 V/F control
9 C103
Electronic thermal O/L relay
Inverter rated current*1
0 to 500 A*2
Set the rated motor current. 0 to 3600 A*3
83 C104 Rated motor voltage
200/400 V*4 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage (V).
84 C105 Rated motor frequency 9999
10 to 400 Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
9999
The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM-CF is selected, and the inverter internal data is used when a PM motor other than MM-CF is selected. Use the correct setting according to the motor specification.
702 C106
Maximum motor frequency 9999
0 to 400 Hz Set the permissible speed (frequency) of the motor.
9999 The MM-CF motor maximum frequency is used when the IPM motor MM-CF is selected, and Pr.84 setting is used when a PM motor other than MM-CF is selected.
707 C107 Motor inertia (integer) 9999 10 to 999, 9999
Set the motor inertia. 9999: The MM-CF inertia is used for the IPM motor MM-CF.724
C108 Motor inertia (exponent) 9999 0 to 7, 9999
96 C110
Auto tuning setting/ status 0
0, 101 No offline auto tuning
1 Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the motor (motor other than IPM motor MM-CF).
11 Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the motor (for IPM motor MM-CF).
5515. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
55
90 C120 Motor constant (R1) 9999
0 to 50 , 9999*2*5
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM- CF is selected, and the inverter internal data is used when a PM motor other than MM-CF is selected.
0 to 400 m, 9999*3*5
92 C122
Motor constant (L1)/d- axis inductance (Ld) 9999
0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5
0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5
93 C123
Motor constant (L2)/q- axis inductance (Lq) 9999
0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5
0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5
859 C126
Torque current/Rated PM motor current 9999
0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5
0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
706 C130
Induced voltage constant (phi f) 9999
0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)*5 Set this parameter according to the PM motor specifications.
9999 The value calculated from the parameter setting for motor constant is used.
1412 C135
Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent
9999 0 to 2
Set the exponent n when the induced voltage constant phi f (Pr.706) is multiplied by 10n.
9999 No exponent setting 711 C131 Motor Ld decay ratio 9999 0 to 100%, 9999
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM- CF is selected, and the inverter internal data is used when a PM motor other than MM-CF is selected.
712 C132 Motor Lq decay ratio 9999 0 to 100%, 9999
717 C182
Starting resistance tuning compensation 9999 0 to 200%, 9999
721 C185
Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width
9999 0 to 6000 s, 10000 to 16000 s, 9999
725 C133
Motor protection current level 9999
100 to 500% Set the maximum current (OCT) level of the motor.
9999 The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM-CF is selected, and 200% when a PM motor other than MM-CF is selected.
1002 C150
Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient
9999 50 to 150% Adjust the target current during tuning.
9999 100%
450 C200 Second applied motor 9999
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 8090, 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
Set this parameter when using the second motor (the same specifications as Pr.71).
9999 The function is disabled.
453 C201 Second motor capacity 9999
0.4 to 55 kW*2 Set the capacity of the second motor.
0 to 3600 kW*3
9999 V/F control 454 C202
Number of second motor poles 9999
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of poles of the second motor. 9999 V/F control
51 C203
Second electronic thermal O/L relay 9999
0 to 500 A*2 Set the rated current of the second motor.
0 to 3600 A*3
9999 The second electronic thermal O/L relay is disabled. 456 C204
Rated second motor voltage
200 V/ 400 V*4 0 to 1000 V Set the rated voltage (V) of the second motor.
457 C205
Rated second motor frequency 9999
10 to 400 Hz Set the rated frequency (Hz) of the second motor.
9999
The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM-CF is selected for the second motor, and the inverter internal data is used when a PM motor other than MM-CF is selected. Use the correct setting according to the motor specification.
743 C206
Second motor maximum frequency 9999
0 to 400 Hz Set the permissible speed (frequency) of the second motor.
9999 The MM-CF motor maximum frequency is used when the MM- CF is selected, and Pr.457 setting is used when a motor other than MM-CF is selected.
744 C207
Second motor inertia (integer) 9999 10 to 999, 9999
Set the inertia of the second motor. 9999: The MM-CF inertia is used for the IPM motor MM-CF.745
C208 Second motor inertia (exponent) 9999 0 to 7, 9999
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The settings are valid under PM sensorless vector control. The offline auto tuning enables the operation with SPM motors and IPM motors other than MM-CF. (When a PM motor other
than the IPM motor MM-CF is used, always perform offline auto tuning.) Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor. Reading/writing of the motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled. The offline auto tuning data (motor constants)
can be copied to another inverter using the operation panel. The offline auto tuning status can be monitored on the operation panel or the parameter unit.
Before performing offline auto tuning Check the following points before performing offline auto tuning:
Check that PM sensorless vector control is selected. Check that a motor is connected. (Check that the motor is not rotated by an external force during tuning.)
463 C210
Second motor auto tuning setting/status 0
0, 101 No auto tuning for the second motor.
1 Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the motor (motor other than IPM motor MM-CF).
11 Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the motor (for IPM motor MM-CF).
458 C220
Second motor constant (R1) 9999
0 to 50 , 9999*2*5
Tuning data of the second motor. (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM- CF is selected, and the inverter internal data is used when a PM motor other than MM-CF is selected.
0 to 400 m, 9999*3*5
460 C222
Second motor constant (L1) / d-axis inductance (Ld)
9999 0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5
0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5
461 C223
Second motor constant (L2) / q-axis inductance (Lq)
9999 0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5
0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5
860 C226
Second motor torque current/Rated PM motor current
9999 0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5
0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
738 C230
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) 9999
0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)*5 Set this parameter according to the PM motor specifications.
9999 The value calculated from the parameter setting for motor constant is used.
1413 C235
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent
9999 0 to 2
Set the exponent n when the induced voltage constant phi f (Pr.738) is multiplied by 10n.
9999 No exponent setting 739 C231
Second motor Ld decay ratio 9999 0 to 100%, 9999
Tuning data of the second motor. (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM- CF is selected, and the inverter internal data is used when a PM motor other than MM-CF is selected.
740 C232
Second motor Lq decay ratio 9999 0 to 100%, 9999
741 C282
Second starting resistance tuning compensation
9999 0 to 200%, 9999
742 C285
Second motor magnetic pole detection pulse width
9999 0 to 6000 s, 10000 to 16000 s, 9999
746 C233
Second motor protection current level
9999
100 to 500% Set the maximum current (OCT) level of the second motor.
9999 The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM-CF is selected, and 200% when a PM motor other than MM-CF is selected.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
5535. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
55
The rated motor current should be equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (The motor capacity must be 0.4 kW or higher.) If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
The maximum frequency under PM sensorless vector control is 400 Hz. The motor may rotate slightly even if offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/
status = "1 or 11"). (It does not affect the tuning performance.) Fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates. (Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications.)
Tuning is not available during position control under PM sensorless vector control. Tuning may be disabled depending on the motor characteristics.
Settings To perform tuning, set the following parameters about the motor.
*1 Set Pr.71 Applied motor according to the motor to be used. According to the Pr.71 setting, the range of the motor constant parameter setting values and units can be changed. (For other setting values of Pr.71, refer to page 528.)
NOTE Under PM sensorless vector control, tuning cannot be performed even when Pr.96 = "101". When the MM-CF is set to the
applied motor, tuning cannot be performed even when Pr.96 = "1 or 101".
For tuning accuracy improvement, set the following parameters when the motor constants are known in advance.
*1 The setting is valid only when a value other than "9999" is set in both Pr.707 (Pr.744) and Pr.724 (Pr.745).
Performing tuning
Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit if the inverter is in the state ready for tuning. The motor starts by turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable.
First motor Pr.
Second motor Pr. Name Setting for a PM motor other than
MM-CF Setting for MM-CF
80 453 Motor capacity Motor capacity (kW) Set by the IPM parameter initialization. (Refer to page 231.)
81 454 Number of motor poles Number of motor poles (2 to 12) 9 51 Electronic thermal O/L relay Rated motor current (A) 84 457 Rated motor frequency Rated motor frequency (Hz) 83 456 Rated motor voltage Rated motor voltage (V) Initial value (200 V or 400 V)
71 450 Applied motor 8090, 8093 (IPM motor), 9090, 9093 (SPM motor)*1 330, 333*1
96 463 Auto tuning setting/status 1 11
Motor Pr.71 setting
Motor constant parameter , mH, and A unit setting
Motor constant parameter internal data setting
IPM motor MM-CF 330 333 (334) Other than MM-CF 8090 8093 (8094)
SPM motor 9090 9093 (9094)
First motor Pr.
Second motor Pr. Name Setting for a PM motor other than MM-CF Setting for MM-CF
702 743 Maximum motor frequency Maximum motor frequency (Hz) 9999 (initial value) 707 744 Motor inertia (integer) Motor inertia*1
Jm = Pr.707 10^(-Pr.724) (kgm2) 9999 (initial value)
724 745 Motor inertia (exponent) 725 746 Motor protection current level Maximum current level of the motor (%) 9999 (initial value)
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
In the PU operation mode, press / on the operation panel.
For External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
NOTE Satisfy the required inverter start conditions to start offline auto tuning. For example, stop the input of the MRS signal.
To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or on the operation panel. (Turning OFF the start signal (STF signal
or STR signal) also ends tuning.) During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid (initial value).
Input terminals
When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM/CA and AM, the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in 15 steps from FM/CA and AM.
Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the Second function selection (RT) signal during offline auto tuning. Auto tuning will not be performed properly.
A motor with 14 or more poles cannot be tuned. Since the Inverter running (RUN) signal turns ON when tuning is started, pay close attention especially when a sequence which
releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed. When executing offline auto tuning, input the operation command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
of the inverter. While Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", turn ON the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal for tuning in the PU
operation mode. Setting offline auto tuning (Pr.96 = "1 or 11") will make pre-excitation invalid.
During tuning, the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as follows.
When offline auto tuning ends, press on the operation panel during PU operation. For External operation, turn OFF
the start signal (STF signal or STR signal). This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
NOTE The motor constants measured once during offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until offline
auto tuning is performed again. However, the tuning data is cleared when performing All parameter clear. Changing Pr.71 after tuning completion will change the motor constant. For example, if the Pr.71 setting is changed to "8093"
after tuned with Pr.71 = "8090", the tuning data become invalid. To use the tuned data, set "8090" again in Pr.71.
Pr.96 (Pr.463) setting
1 11 1 11 Operation panel (FR-DU08) display LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) display
(1) Setting
(2) During tuning
(3) Normal completion
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
1 --- STOP PU PREV NEXT
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
11 --- STOP PU PREV NEXT
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
2 STF FWD PU PREV NEXT
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
12 STF FWD PU PREV NEXT
Blinking Blinking
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
Completed 3 STF STOP PU PREV NEXT
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
Completed 13 STF STOP PU PREV NEXT
5555. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
55
If offline auto tuning has ended in error (see the following table), motor constants are not set. Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto
tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.) Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
NOTE An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter starts normal operation. Therefore, when the STF (STR) signal is ON, the motor starts forward (reverse) rotation.
Any fault occurring during tuning is handled as in the normal operation. However, if the retry function is set, no retry is performed even when a protective function that performs a retry is activated.
The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.
Parameters updated by tuning results after tuning
Tuning adjustment (Pr.1002) The overcurrent protective function may be activated during Lq tuning for an easily magnetically saturated motor (motor
with a large Lq decay ratio). In such case, adjust the target flowing current used for tuning with Pr.1002 Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient.
Changing the motor constants The motor constants can be set directly when the motor constants are known in advance, or by using the data measured
during offline auto tuning.
Error display Error cause Countermeasures 8 Forced end Set Pr.96 (Pr.463)="1 or 11" and try again. 9 Inverter protective function operation Make the setting again.
92 The converter output voltage fell to 75% of the rated voltage. Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation. Check the Pr.83 Rated motor voltage setting.
93 Calculation error. The motor is not connected. Check the motor wiring and make the setting again.
94
Rotation tuning frequency setting error. (The frequency command for the tuning was given to exceed the maximum frequency setting, or to be in the frequency jump range.)
Check the Pr.1 Maximum frequency and Pr.31 to Pr.36 Frequency jump settings.
CAUTION Note that the motor may start running suddenly.
First motor Pr.
Second motor Pr. Name Other than MM-CF
Pr.96 (Pr.463) = 1 V/F control, MM-CF Pr.96 (Pr.463) = 11 Description
90 458 Motor constant (R1) Resistance per phase
92 460 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) d-axis inductance
93 461 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) q-axis inductance
711 739 Motor Ld decay ratio d-axis inductance decay ratio 712 740 Motor Lq decay ratio q-axis inductance decay ratio
717 741 Starting resistance tuning compensation
721 742 Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width
When the setting value is 10000 or more: With polarity inversion for compensation, voltage pulse (Pr. setting minus 10000) s
859 860 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
96 463 Auto tuning setting/status
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
According to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting, the range of the motor constant parameter setting values and units can be changed. The changed settings are stored in the EEPROM as the motor constant parameters.
Changing the motor constants (when setting motor constants in units of , mH, or A)
Set Pr.71 as follows.
Set desired values as the motor constant parameters.
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
NOTE If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid. The MM-CF constant is used for the IPM motor MM-CF, and the inverter internal
constant is used for a PM motor other than MM-CF. To change a motor induced voltage constant of PM motors, the setting in Pr.706 Induced voltage constant (phi f) or Pr.738
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) must be changed. If the constant after the change exceeds the setting range of Pr.706 or Pr.738 (0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)), set Pr.1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent or Pr.1413 Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent. Set a value in the exponent n in the formula, Pr.706 (Pr.738) 10n [mV (rad/s)], to set the induced voltage constant (phi f).
When Pr.71 (Pr.450) = "8093, 8094, 9093, or 9094", or Pr.1412 (Pr.1413) = "9999", the motor induced voltage constant is as set in Pr.706 (Pr.738). (No exponent setting)
Changing the motor constants (when setting a motor constants in the internal data of the inverter)
Set Pr.71 as follows.
Motor Pr.71 setting
IPM motor MM-CF 330 Other than MM-CF 8090
SPM motor 9090
First motor Pr.
Second motor Pr. Name Setting range Setting
increments Initial value
90 458 Motor constant (R1) 0 to 50 , 9999*1 0.001 *1
9999
0 to 400 m, 9999*2 0.01 m*2
92 460 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) 0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
0 to 50 mH, 9999*2 0.001 mH*2
93 461 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) 0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
0 to 50 mH, 9999*2 0.001 mH*2
706 738 Induced voltage constant (phi f) 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 9999 0.1 mV (rad/s)
859 860 Torque current/Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
1412 1413 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent 0 to 2, 9999 1
Motor Pr.71 setting
IPM motor MM-CF 333 (334) Other than MM-CF 8093 (8094)
SPM motor 9093 (9094)
5575. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
55
Set desired values as the motor constant parameters. The displayed increments of the read motor constants can be changed with Pr.684 Tuning data unit switchover. Setting Pr.684 = "1" disables parameter setting changes.
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
NOTE As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data (****), refer to the following
setting example when making setting. (The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Therefore, simple addition of a value to the displayed value does not bring the desired effect.) Setting example: to slightly increase the Pr.90 value (5%) When "2516" is displayed for Pr.90, set 2642 (2516 1.05 = 2641.8) in Pr.90.
If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid. The MM-CF constant is used for the IPM motor MM-CF, and the inverter internal constant is used for a PM motor other than MM-CF.
To change a motor induced voltage constant of PM motors, the setting in Pr.706 Induced voltage constant (phi f) or Pr.738 Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) must be changed. If the constant after the change exceeds the setting range of Pr.706 or Pr.738 (0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)), set Pr.1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent or Pr.1413 Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent. Set a value in the exponent n in the formula, Pr.706 (Pr.738) 10n [mV (rad/s)], to set the induced voltage constant (phi f).
When Pr.71 (Pr.450) = "8093, 8094, 9093, or 9094", or Pr.1412 (Pr.1413) = "9999", the motor induced voltage constant is as set in Pr.706 (Pr.738). (No exponent setting)
Parameters referred to Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relaypage 415 Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221
5.13.5 Online auto tuning
If online auto tuning is selected under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or Vector control, favorable torque accuracy is retained by adjusting temperature even when the resistance value varies due to increase in the motor temperature.
Online auto tuning at startup (Pr.95/Pr.574 = "1") By promptly tuning the motor status at startup, accurate operation without being affected by motor temperature is achieved.
Also high torque can be provided at very low speed and stable operation is possible.
First motor Pr.
Second motor Pr. Name
Pr.684 = 0 (initial value) Pr.684 = 1 Initial valueSetting range Setting
increments Setting range Setting increments
90 458 Motor constant (R1)
0 to ***, 9999 1
0 to 50 , 9999*1 0.001 *1
9999
0 to 400 m, 9999*2 0.01 m*2
92 460 Motor constant (L1)/d- axis inductance (Ld)
0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
0 to 50 mH, 9999*2 0.001 mH*2
93 461 Motor constant (L2)/q- axis inductance (Lq)
0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
0 to 50 mH, 9999*2 0.001 mH*2
706 738 Induced voltage constant (phi f)
0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 9999 0.1 mV (rad/s)
859 860 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
1412 1413 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent
0 to 2, 9999 1
Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
95 C111 Online auto tuning selection 0
0 No online auto tuning 1 Online auto tuning is performed at startup. 2 Magnetic flux observer (continuous tuning)
574 C211 Second motor online auto tuning 0 0 to 2 Select online auto tuning for the second motor.
(The settings are the same as those in Pr.95.)
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control (Pr.80 Motor capacity, Pr.81 Number of motor poles) or Real sensorless vector control (Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.800 Control method selection), select the online auto tuning at start.
Make sure to perform offline auto tuning before performing online auto tuning.
Operating procedure 1. Perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to page 532.)
2. Check that Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status = "3 or 103" (offline auto tuning completion).
3. Set Pr.95 Online auto tuning selection = "1" (online auto tuning at start). Online auto tuning is enabled at the next start.
4. Check that the following parameters are set before starting operation.
*1 If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
5. In the PU operation mode, press / on the operation panel. For External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal).
NOTE When performing the online auto tuning at start for a lift, consider using a brake sequence function for the brake opening timing
at a start, or tuning using the external terminal. The tuning takes about 500 ms at the most after starting. However, during this time, it is possible that not enough torque is provided and caution is required to prevent the object from dropping. Use of the Start-time tuning start external input (X28) signal is recommended to perform tuning. (Refer to page 559.)
Perform online auto tuning at startup when the motor is stopped. The online auto tuning is disabled when the MRS signal is being input, the setting speed is Pr.13 Starting frequency or lower
(V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control), an inverter fault is occurring, or the inverter's startup condition is not satisfied.
Online auto tuning does not operate during deceleration and restart from DC injection brake operation. It is disabled during JOG operation. If automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected, automatic restart is prioritized. (Online auto tuning at startup
is not performed during frequency search.) If automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is used together, perform online auto tuning while stopping operation with the X28 signal. (Refer to page 559.)
Zero current detection and output current detection are enabled during online auto tuning. The RUN signal is not output during online auto tuning. The RUN signal is turned ON at operation startup. If the time between the inverter stop and restart is within 4 seconds, tuning is performed at startup but its result will not be
applied.
Online auto tuning at startup using the external terminal (Pr.95/Pr.574 = "1", X28 signal, Y39 signal)
Before turning ON the start signal (STF or STR), online auto tuning can be performed by turning ON the Start-time tuning start external input (X28) signal in a stopped status in order to minimize the startup delay by tuning at start.
Perform offline auto tuning and set "1" (tuning at start) in Pr.95. When the Start time tuning completion (Y39) signal is OFF, tuning at start can be performed with the X28 signal. The tuning takes about 500 ms at the most. To use the X28 signal, set "28" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to
an input terminal.
Pr. Description 9 Rated motor current or electronic thermal O/L relay 71 Applied motor 80 Motor capacity (with the rated motor current equal to or less than the inverter rated current)*1
81 Number of motor poles
5595. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
56
To use the Y39 signal, set "39 (positive logic) or 139 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.
NOTE Even if the start signal is turned ON during zero speed control or servo lock, tuning is performed at startup. The Y39 signal remains ON after the motor is stopped as long as the second flux remains. The X28 signal is disabled while the Y39 signal is ON. The STF and STR signals are enabled after completing tuning at start. The Inverter running (RUN) signal is not turned ON during online auto tuning. The RUN signal is turned ON after starting up. This function is disabled under V/F control or PM sensorless vector control. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) or Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Time X28 signal
Tuning status at starting Y39 signal
Start signal
Tune Completed
ON
(Hz)Output frequency
X28 Signal
Tuning status
at starting
Y39 signal
Start signal
Output
frequency
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Tune
Completed
Completed
ON
Tune
CompletedCompleted
ON
Secondary magnetic
flux exists a few seconds
Secondary magnetic
flux exists a few seconds Secondary magnetic
flux exists
Secondary magnetic
flux exists
a few seconds
Secondary magnetic
flux exists a few seconds
ON
0Hz
0Hz
ON
Tune
ON
Tune
ON
Tune
ON
ON
Tune
Completed Completed
Tune
Completed
Completed
ON
ON
Tune
Y39 signal is OFF when the motor is stopped
and X28 is turned OFF. However if the
secondary magnetic flux exists after motor stop,
the signal remains ON.
Tuning is not
performed if the
Y39 signal is ON.
Tuning is performed at start when X28 signal is OFF
(even when Y39 is ON).
Tuning is not performed at start since X28 signal
and Y39 signal is ON.
Time
Time
X28 Signal
Tuning status
at starting
Y39 signal
Start signal
Output frequency
X28 Signal
Tuning status
at starting
Y39 signal
Start signal
Switching motor
Start
signal
Output
frequency
OFF
0Hz
Time
Y39 signal OFF
OFF
ON
X28 signal
Tuning status
at starting
Motor
switching
RT signal ON
First motor
Second motor
First motor
ON
Y39 turns OFF when the
driven motor is switched
to the second motor
Y39 turns ON due
to the residual second
magnetic flux at the
first motor.
ON a few seconds
While the X28 signal is OFFWhile the motor is stopped
While the X28 signal is ON
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Magnetic flux observer (continuous tuning) (Pr.95/Pr.574 = "2") Performing Vector control with a motor with encoder improves the torque accuracy. Estimate or measure the flux within
the motor using the current running through the motor and the inverter output voltage. Since the flux of a motor can be accurately estimated continuously (even during operation), optimum characteristics can be obtained without being affected by temperature change in the second resistor.
Under Vector control (Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.800), select the magnetic flux observer.
NOTE Offline auto tuning is not necessary when magnetic flux observer is selected for SF-V5RU, SF-JR (with encoder), SF-HR (with
encoder), SF-JRCA (with encoder) or SF-HRCA (with encoder). (However, when the wiring length is long (30 m or longer as a reference), perform offline auto tuning so that the resistance arises in the long wiring can be reflected to the operation.)
Tuning the second motor (Pr.574) When one inverter switches the operation between two different motors, set the second motor in Pr.450 Second applied
motor. (In the initial setting, no second motor is applied. (Refer to page 528.)) Perform tuning using Pr.574 Second motor online auto tuning. Pr.574 is enabled when the Second function selection (RT) signal is turned ON.
*1 If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
NOTE The RT signal is the Second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 521.)
The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relaypage 415 Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528 Pr.80 Motor capacitypage 221, page 532, page 551 Pr.81 Number of motor polespage 221, page 532, page 551 Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/statuspage 532, page 551 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473 Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221
5.13.6 Signal loss detection of encoder signals
Signal loss detection (E.ECT) is turned ON to shut off the inverter output when the encoder signal is lost during encoder feedback control or orientation control operation or under Vector control. Signal loss detection (E.ECA) is activated to shut off the inverter output when the machine end encoder signal is lost during machine end orientation control.
*1 The setting is available when a Vector control compatible plug-in option is installed. *2 These parameters are available when the control terminal option (FR-A8TP) is installed.
Pr. Description 450 Applied motor 453 Motor capacity (with the rated motor current equal to or less than the inverter rated current)*1
454 Number of motor poles
V/F Magnetic flux Vector
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
376 C148*1
855 C248*2
Encoder signal loss detection enable/ disable selection
0 0 Signal loss detection disabled
1 Signal loss detection enabled
5615. PARAMETERS 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
56
5.14 (A) Application parameters
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
To operate by switching between the inverter and the commercial power supply operation
Electronic bypass function P.A000 to P.A005 Pr.135 to Pr.139, Pr.159 563
To reduce the standby power Self power management P.A002, P.A006, P.A007, P.E300
Pr.30, Pr.137, Pr.248, Pr.254 569
To stop the motor with a mechanical brake (operation timing of mechanical brake)
Brake sequence function
P.A100 to P.A106, P.F500, P.A108, P.A109, P.A120 to P.A130
Pr.278 to Pr.285, Pr.292, Pr.639 to Pr.651 572
To count the number of inverter starting times Start count monitor P.A170, P.A171 Pr.1410, Pr.1411 576
To stop the motor with a mechanical brake (vibration control at stop-on- contact)
Stop-on-contact control P.A200, P.A205, P.A206 Pr.270, Pr.275, Pr.276 577
To increase the speed at light load Load torque high-speed frequency control
P.D301, P.D302, P.A200 to P.A204
Pr.4, Pr.5, Pr.270 to Pr.274 580
To strengthen or weaken the frequency at a constant cycle Traverse operation P.A300 to P.A305 Pr.592 to Pr.597 582
To suppress the swinging of an object moved by crane control Anti-sway control P.A310 to P.A317 Pr.1072 to Pr.1079 584
To adjust the stop position (orientation control) of the rotating shaft Orientation control
P.A510 to P.A512, P.A520, P.A524, P.A525, P.A526 to P.A533, P.A540 to P.A545, P.C140, P.C141
Pr.350 to Pr.366, Pr.369, Pr.393 to Pr.399 585
To perform process control, such as for the pump flow volume and air volume
PID control
P.A601 to P.A607, P.A610 to P.A615, P.A621 to P.A625, P.A640 to P.A644, P.A650 to P.A655, P.A661 to P.A665
Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.553, Pr.554, Pr.575 to Pr.577, Pr.609, Pr.610, Pr.753 to Pr.758, Pr.1015, Pr.1134, Pr.1135, Pr.1140, Pr.1141, Pr.1143 to Pr.1149
601
PID Pre-charge function P.A616 to P.A620, P.A656 to P.A660 Pr.760 to Pr.769 618
PID display adjustment P.A600, P.A630 to P.A633, P.A670 to P.A673
Pr.759, C42 to C45 (Pr.934, Pr.935), Pr.1136 to Pr.1139
615
To control the dance roll for winding/ unwinding Dancer control
P.A601, P.A602, P.A605, P.A606, P.A610, P.A611, P.A613 to P.A615, P.A624, P.A625, P.F020, P.F021
Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.128 to Pr.134, Pr.609, Pr.610, Pr.1134, Pr.1135
622
To continue operating at analog current input loss 4 mA input check P.A680 to P.A682 Pr.573, Pr.777, Pr.778 517
To restart without stopping the motor at instantaneous power failure
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start function for induction motors
P.A700 to P.A705, P.A710 to P.F003
Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.162 to Pr.165, Pr.299, Pr.611 628
Frequency search accuracy improvement (V/F control, offline auto tuning)
P.A700, P.A711, P.A712, P.C110, P.C210
Pr.96, Pr.162, Pr.298, Pr.463, Pr.560 638
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start function for IPM motors
P.A700, P.A702, P.F003 Pr.57, Pr.162, Pr.611 635
To decelerate the motor to a stop at power failure
Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function
P.A730 to P.A735, P.A785 Pr.261 to Pr.266, Pr.294 642
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.14.1 Electronic bypass function
The inverter contains complicated sequence circuits for switching between the commercial power supply operation and inverter operation. Therefore, interlock operation of the magnetic contactor for switching can be easily performed by simply inputting start, stop, and automatic switching selection signals.
*1 The coasting time when Pr.57 = "0" is as shown below. (When Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection is set to the initial value.) FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00052(1.5K) or lower: 0.5 s FR-A820-00167(2.2K) to FR-A820-00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00083(2.2K) to FR-A840-00250(7.5K): 1 s FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K): 3.0 s FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher: 5.0 s
To operate with sequence program PLC function P.A800 to P.A805, P.A811 to P.A859
Pr.414 to Pr.417, Pr.498, Pr.675, Pr.1150 to Pr.1199
646
To store the inverter running status to a USB memory device Trace function
P.A900 to P.A906, P.A910 to P.A920, P.A930 to P.A939
Pr.1020 to Pr.1047 649
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
57 A702 Restart coasting time 9999
0 Coasting time differs according to the inverter capacity.*1
0.1 to 30 s Set the delay time for the inverter to perform a restart after restoring power due to an instantaneous power failure.
9999 No restart 58 A703 Restart cushion time 1 s 0 to 60 s Set the voltage cushion time for restart.
135 A000
Electronic bypass sequence selection 0
0 Electronic bypass sequence function disabled. 1 Electronic bypass sequence function enabled.
136 A001
MC switchover interlock time 1 s 0 to 100 s Set the operation interlock time for MC2 and MC3.
137 A002 Start waiting time 0.5 s 0 to 100 s Set a time period that is a little longer than the time period from the ON
signal input to the actual pick-up operation of MC3 (0.3 to 0.5 s).
138 A003
Bypass selection at a fault 0
0 Inverter output stop (motor coasting) at inverter failure
1 Automatic switchover to commercial power supply operation at inverter failure. (Switchover is not possible when an external thermal relay (E.OHT) or CPU fault (E.CPU) is occurring.)
139 A004
Automatic switchover frequency from inverter to bypass operation
9999
0 to 60 Hz
Set the frequency where the inverter operation is switched to commercial power supply operation. The inverter operation is performed from a start to Pr.139 setting, then it switches automatically to the commercial power supply operation when the output frequency is equal to or above Pr.139.
8888
When the FR-A8AVP is installed, the phase-synchronized bypass switching function is enabled. (For details, refer to the FR-A8AVP Instruction Manual.) When the FR-A8AVP is not installed, the operation is the same as the one when the setting is "9999".
9999 Automatic bypass switching disabled
159 A005
Automatic switchover frequency range from bypass to inverter operation
9999
0 to 10 Hz
Set the frequency where the commercial power supply operation, which has been switched from the inverter operation with Pr.139, switches back to inverter operation. When the frequency command becomes less than (Pr.139 - Pr.159), the motor switches automatically to inverter operation and operates at the frequency of the frequency command. Turning OFF a inverter start command (STF/STR) also switches the operation to the inverter operation.
9999
To switch the commercial power supply operation, which has been switched from the inverter operation with Pr.139, to the inverter operation again, the inverter start command (STF/STR) is turned OFF. The operation switches to the inverter operation, and the motor decelerates to a stop.
5635. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
56
Electronic bypass sequence function When operating the motor at 60 Hz (or 50 Hz), the motor can be more efficiently operated with a commercial power supply.
In addition, if the motor cannot be stopped for a long period of time even for an inverter maintenance and inspection, it is recommended that a commercial power supply circuit be installed.
When switching between inverter operation and commercial power supply operation, commercial power supply may be accidentally applied to the output side of the inverter. To avoid such situation, provide an interlock where the magnetic contactor at the commercial power supply side turns ON at turn OFF of the magnetic contactor at the inverter output side. The inverter's electronic bypass sequence that outputs timing signals for the magnetic contactors can act as a complicated interlock between the commercial power supply operation and the inverter operation.
NOTE The commercial power supply operation is not available with Mitsubishi Electric Vector control dedicated motors (SF-V5RU).
Connection diagram A typical connection diagram of the electronic bypass sequence is shown below.
Standard models and IP55 compatible models
Separated converter type
Inverter start (forward rotation)
MC1 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
STF
R1/L11 S1/L21
CS MRS
RES SD
10 2 5
U V W
External thermal relay
M
MC1
MC2
SE
MC3
MC2 24VDC
MC1
External thermal
Frequency setting signal
MC3
Inverter/bypass operation interlock
OH
MCCB
MC2
MC3
MC2
MC3Reset
Inverter start (forward rotation)
MC1 R/L1 S/L2
R1/L11 S1/L21
T/L3 STF
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+ N/-
CS MRS
X10RDA
10 2 5
U V
P/+ N/-
W
External thermal relayInverterConverter unit
M
MC1
MC2
SE
MC3
MC2 24VDC
MC1
Frequency setting signal
MC3
Inverter/bypass operation interlock
MCCB
MC2
SDSE
MC3
MC2
MC3
ALM Y214
X95 X96 RESRSO
RES SD
External thermal OH
Reset
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 Be careful of the capacity of the sequence output terminals. The applied terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
*2 When connecting a DC power supply, insert a protective diode. When connecting an AC power supply, use the relay output option (FR-A8AR), and use contact outputs.
*3 The applied terminals differ by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) *4 To use the signal, assign the function to the output terminal Pr.190 to Pr.195 (Output terminal function selection) of the converter unit. Always
set the negative logic for the ALM signal.
NOTE To use the electronic bypass function, the wiring terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 must be connected to a separate power source
that does not go through MC1. Be sure to connect using a separate power supply. Be sure to provide a mechanical interlock for MC2 and MC3.
Operation of magnetic contactor (MC1, MC2, MC3)
The input signals are as shown below.
*1 For separated converter types, the X10 signal is assigned to the terminal MRS in the initial setting. For the MRS signal, set "24" to any of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to another terminal.
*2 When the MRS signal is OFF, neither the commercial power supply operation nor the inverter operation can be performed. *3 The CS signal operates only when the MRS signal is ON. *4 STF (STR) operates only when the MRS and CS signals are both ON. *5 Whether or not to enable reset input using the RES signal depends on the setting of Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU
stop selection. When the RES signal and another input signal are simultaneously input, the MC operation by the RES signal has a higher priority. *6 MC1 opens at an inverter fault.
Output terminal capacity Output terminal permissible load Open collector output of inverter (RUN, SU, IPF, OL, FU) 24 VDC 0.1 A Inverter relay output (A1-C1, B1-C1, A2-B2, B2-C2) Relay output option (FR-A8AR)
230 VAC 0.3 A 30 VDC 0.3 A
Magnetic contactor Installation location
Operation status During commercial
power supply operation
During inverter operation During inverter fault
MC1 Between power supply and inverter input side Shorted Shorted Open (shorted after the reset)
MC2 Between power supply and motor Shorted Open
Open (Selected by Pr.138. Always open when the external thermal relay is operating.)
MC3 Between inverter output side and motor Open Shorted Open
Signal Terminal Function Operation status MC operation*8
MC1*6 MC2 MC3
MRS MRS*1 Electronic bypass switching function (enable/disable)*2
ON: Electronic bypass switching function enabled.
OFF: Electronic bypass switching function disabled. Unchanged
CS CS Inverter/commercial power supply operation switchover*3
ON Inverter operation OFF Commercial power supply operation
STF (STR)
STF (STR)
Inverter operation command (disabled during commercial power supply operation)*4
ON Forward rotation (reverse rotation)
OFF Stop
OH Selected from Pr.180 to Pr.189 to set "7".
External thermal relay input
ON Motor normal OFF Motor fault
RES RES Operation status reset*5 ON Reset Unchanged Unchanged OFF Normal operation
X95/X96 Selected from Pr.180 to Pr.189 to set "95/ 96".
Converter unit fault / Converter unit fault (E.OHT, E.CPU)
X95 signal OFF, X96 signal OFF. Converter fault (E.OHT, E.CPU).
X95 signal ON, X96 signal ON. Converter normal.
X95 signal OFF, X96 signal ON. Converter fault (other than E.OHT or E.CPU).
*7
5655. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
56
*7 MC2 opens when Pr.138 (Automatic bypass switching after inverter fault) = "0" (disabled), and MC2 closes when Pr.138 = "1" (enabled). *8 MC operation is as shown below.
Output signal list
Electronic bypass operation sequence Example of operation sequence without automatic bypass sequence (Pr.139 = "9999")
Example of operation sequence with automatic bypass sequence (Pr.139 "9999", Pr.159 = "9999")
Notation MC operation ON OFF
MC2-OFF, MC3-ON during inverter operation, MC2-ON, MC3-OFF during commercial power supply operation
Unchanged The status of the MC remains the same after turning ON or OFF of the signal.
Signal Terminal (Pr.190 to Pr.196 setting) Description
MC1 17 Output signal to control MC1 installed on the inverter input side. MC2 18 Output signal to control MC2 installed for commercial power supply operation. MC3 19 Output signal to control MC3 installed on the inverter output side.
ON OFF
Power supply
ON OFF
Operation interlock (MRS)
ON OFF
Inverter run command (STF)
ON OFF
ON OFF
Inverter input side MC (MC1)
ON OFF ON OFF
Each timer
Coasting StopCoasting
ON : Operation enabled OFF: Operation disabled ON : Forward rotation OFF: Stop ON : Inverter operation OFF: Commercial power supply operation
Pr.136 MC switchover interlock time Pr.137 MC3 start (waiting time) Pr.57 Reset time Pr.58 Switchover cushion time
Off only at inverter alarm
Inverter output side MC (MC3)
Pr.136Pr.57 Pr.136 Pr.57
Pr.58Pr.137
Inverter/commercial power supply (CS)
MC for commercial power supply operation
(MC2)
Operating status (motor speed)
INV operation
Bypass operation
INV operation
Indicates the delay time until the MC turns on (off).
STF
Frequency command
Output frequency Pr.139
Time
Time
Actual motor speed
A : Pr.136 MC switchover interlock time B : Pr.137 Start waiting time C : Pr.57 Restart coasting time D : Pr.58 Restart cushion time
MC3 ON OFF
ON OFF
MC2 ON OFF
C A A B C D
INV operation
Commercial power supply operation
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Example of operation sequence with automatic bypass sequence (Pr.139 "9999", Pr.159 "9999")
Operating procedure Operation flowchart
Signal operation after setting parameters
STF
Frequency command
Output frequency Pr.139 Pr.159
Time
Time
Actual motor speed
A : Pr.136 MC switchover interlock time B : Pr.137 Start waiting time C : Pr.57 Restart coasting time D : Pr.58 Restart cushion time
MC3 ON OFF
ON OFF
MC2 ON OFF
C A A B C D A A B C D
INV operation
Commercial power supply operation
Pr.135 = "1" Pr.136 = 2.0 s Pr.137 = 1.0 s (Set the time until MC3 is actually turned ON and the inverter and motor
are electrically connected. If the time is short, the restart may not function properly.) Pr.57 = 0.5 s Pr.58 = 0.5 s (Always set this to switchover from the commercial power supply operation
to the inverter operation.)
Power supply ON
Setting the parameters
Start inverter operation
Constant-speed commercial power supply operation
Deceleration (stop) inverter operation
Status MRS CS STF MC1 MC2 MC3 Remarks
Power ON OFF (OFF)
OFF (OFF)
OFF (OFF)
OFFON (OFFON)
OFF (OFF)
OFF ON (OFF ON)
External operation mode (PU operation mode)
At start (inverter) OFFON OFFON OFFON ON OFF ON
During constant-speed operation (commercial power supply)
ON ONOFF ON ON OFFON ONOFF MC2 turns ON after MC3 turns OFF. The delay time is 2 s (while coasting).
Switching to inverter operation due to deceleration (inverter)
ON OFFON ON ON ONOFF OFFON MC3 turns ON after MC2 turns OFF. The delay time is 4 s (while coasting).
Stop ON ON ONOFF ON OFF ON
5675. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
56
NOTE Take power from any point between the power supply and MC1 to the terminals for control circuit power input (R1/L11 and S1/
L21). If power is taken from any point between MC1 and the inverter, the electronic bypass sequence function does not work. The electronic bypass sequence function is enabled only when Pr.135 = "1" and the inverter is in the External operation mode
or the PU/External combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3" (frequency command using the PU and start command using the external signals)). When Pr.135 = "1" but the inverter is in the operation mode other than mentioned above, the MC1 and MC3 signals are ON.
MC3 turns ON when the MRS and CS signals are ON and the STF (STR) signal is OFF. If the motor coasted to a stop from commercial power supply operation at the previous stop, the motor starts running after the time set in Pr.137.
Inverter operation is only available when the MRS, STF (STR), and CS signals are ON. In all other cases (when the MRS signal is ON), commercial power supply operation is available.
When the CS signal is OFF, the motor switches to the commercial power supply operation. However, when the STF (STR) signal is OFF, the motor decelerates to a stop during inverter operation.
From the point where MC2 and MC3 are both turned OFF, there is a delay time set with Pr.136, till MC2 or MC3 is turned ON. Even when the electronic bypass sequence is enabled (Pr.135 = "1"), the Pr.136 and Pr.137 settings are disabled in PU
operation mode. In addition, the input terminals (STF, CS, MRS, OH) return to perform their normal functions.
When both the electronic bypass sequence function and the PU operation interlock function are enabled at the same time (Pr.135 = "1" and Pr.79 = "7") and the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal is not assigned to any input terminal, the MRS signal will have another function as the X12 signal. (In this case, the inverter operation is enabled when both the MRS signal and the CS signal are ON.)
Set the acceleration time to the level that does not activate the stall prevention operation. If switching to the commercial power supply operation while a failure such as an output short circuit has occurred between the
magnetic contactor MC3 and the motor, the damage may further spread. If a failure has occurred between the MC3 and the motor, a protection circuit such as using the OH signal input must be provided.
Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Switching with the electronic bypass sequence is not available during retry. Switching occurs after the retry. When the electronic bypass is valid at a fault (Pr.138 = "1"), switching occurs also during retry.
When the electronic bypass sequence function and the retry function of the converter unit are used at the same time for the separated converter type, set 101 or more in the number of retries at fault occurrence (Pr.67) on the converter unit side. When a value less than 100 is set, the ALM signal does not turn ON until the retry count is exceeded. In this case, the electronic bypass at a fault is not performed until the retry count is exceeded.
To use X95 and X96 signals for the separated converter type, use a converter unit manufactured in August 2014 or later.
Precautions for electronic bypass sequence function The response time of the inverter to the signals depends on the command source, NET or External.
After the communication with the inverter is established, the motor operation is performed according to the command via NET. The commercial power supply operation with the motor is performed when the MRS signal turns ON before the communication is established. It is recommended to turn the MRS signal ON after the communication is established. Example: the response time of the inverter to the signals in the Network operation mode (power-ON). The command source is External for the MRS signal and NET for the STF (STR) and CS signals.
MRS(External)
STF(NET)
CS(NET)
Power supply
Communication status
Commercial power supply operation
Inverter operation
Until the communication with the inverter is established
From when the communication is established until the inverter receives a command
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation in combination with the self power management function for the separated converter type
When the self power management function is used with the separated converter type, the input signal operations are as follows.
*1 When Pr.138 = "0 (electronic bypass invalid at a fault)", MC2 is OFF. When Pr.138 = "1 (electronic bypass valid at a fault)", MC2 is ON. *2 The self power management operation is followed. *3 MC operation is as shown below.
Parameters referred to Pr.11 DC injection brake operation timepage 715 Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628, page 635 Pr.58 Restart cushion timepage 628 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
5.14.2 Self power management
By turning ON the magnetic contactor (MC) on the input side before the motor is started and turning OFF the MC after the motor is stopped, power is not supplied to the main circuit, reducing the standby power.
X95 (Converter unit
fault)
X96 (Converter unit
fault (E.OHT, E.CPU))
X94 (Control signal for main circuit power
supply MC)
MC operation*3
Converter status MC1 MC2 MC3
OFF OFF ON *2 Converter fault
(E.OHT (Pr.248 = "2"))
OFF Converter fault (E.OHT (Pr.248 = "1"), E.CPU)
ON ON ON *2 Converter normal
OFF ON ON *2 *1
Converter fault (other than the circuit failure fault or E.OHT) (Pr.248 = "2")
OFF *1 Converter fault (other than E.OHT or E.CPU)
Notation MC operation ON OFF
MC2-OFF, MC3-ON during inverter operation, MC2-ON, MC3-OFF during commercial power supply operation
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
248 A006
Self power management selection 0
0 Self power management function disabled
1 Self power management function enabled (main circuit OFF at protective function activation)
2 Self power management function enabled (main circuit OFF at protective function activation due to a circuit failure)
137 A002 Start waiting time 0.5 s 0 to 100 s Set a time period that is a little longer than the time period from the ON
signal input to the actual pick-up operation of MC1 (0.3 to 0.5 s).
254 A007
Main circuit power OFF waiting time 600 s
1 to 3600 s Set the delay time until the main circuit power supply is turned OFF after the motor is stopped.
9999 The main circuit power supply is turned OFF only when the protective function selected by Pr.248 is activated.
30 E300
Regenerative function selection 0
100, 101
Power supply to the inverter: AC (terminals R, S, and T). When power is supplied only to the control circuit, and then switched to be supplied to both the control and main circuits, inverter reset is not performed.
0 to 2, 10, 11, 20, 21, 102, 110, 111, 120, 121
For other settings, refer to page 724.
V/F Magnetic flux PM
5695. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
57
Connection diagram Terminal R1, S1 inputs
24 V external power supply input
Operation of the self power management function This function controls the magnetic contactor (MC) on the input side using the output relay to reduce the standby power
during inverter stop. With the terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 (refer to page 77) and 24 V external power supply input (refer to page 80), the main circuit power supply and control circuit power supply are separated, and the MC for main circuit power supply is controlled by the electronic bypass MC1 signal.
Set Pr.248 Self power management selection = "1 or 2", Pr.30 Regenerative function selection "20, 21, 120, or 121" (other than DC feeding mode 2), and Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) = "17 (positive logic)" to assign the Electronic bypass MC1 (MC1) signal to an output terminal.
After the inverter is stopped and the time set in Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time and Pr.254 Main circuit power OFF waiting time have passed, turning OFF the MC1 signal releases the MC on the input side (main circuit power supply OFF). Set Pr.254 to prevent frequent MC operation.
Turning ON the start signal turns ON the MC1 signal and closes the MC on the input side (main circuit power supply ON). After the time set in Pr.137 Start waiting time has passed, the inverter starts. Set time slightly longer (about 0.3 to 0.5 s) than the time period from the MC1-ON to the actual pick-up operation of the MC is turned ON in Pr.137.
24VDC
MC1
MC1 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
U V W
M
MC1
SE
MCCB MC1 Converter unit Inverter
Separated converter type
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
U V W
M
MC1
SE 24VDC
MC1
MCCB
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+ N/-
P/+ N/-
RDA X10 RSO RES Y17 X94 SE SD
Standard models
Inverter
MC1 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
U V W
MC1
SE
MCCB
M
24VDC
MC1
+24
SD 24VDC
Converter unit InverterMCCB
Separated converter typeStandard models and IP55 compatible models
Inverter MC1 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
U V W
M
MC1
SE 24VDC
MC1
P/+ N/-
P/+ N/-
RDA X10 RSO RES
+24
SD
+24
SD 24VDC24VDC
Y17 X94 SE SD
STF ON
MC1 ON
Time
DC brake
Pr.11 Pr.254
Output frequency (Hz)
ON
ON
Main circuit power supply ON ON
Power supply mode RST input RST inputR1S1 input/ external 24 V input
OFF
OFF
OFF
Pr.137
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When the protective function of the inverter is activated, the MC1 signal is immediately turned OFF according to the Pr.248 setting. (The MC1 signal is turned OFF before the time set in Pr.254 has passed.) When Pr.248 ="1", the MC1 signal is turned OFF when the protective function is activated due to any cause. When Pr.248 ="2", the MC1 signal is turned OFF only when the protective function is activated due to an error resulted from a failure in the inverter circuit or a wiring error (refer to the following table). (For the fault details, refer to page 779.)
To enable the self power management function for the separated converter type, enable the self power management function also on the converter unit side. To activate the self power management function when a converter unit fault occurs, connect the terminal to which the Y17 signal of the converter unit is assigned and the terminal to which X94 signal of the inverter is assigned.
To use the X94 signal, set "94" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to an input terminal.
Fault type Inrush current limit circuit fault (E.IOH) CPU fault (E.CPU) CPU fault (E.6) CPU fault (E.7) Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board) (E.PE) Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board) (E.PE2) 24 VDC power fault (E.P24) Operation panel power supply short circuit/RS-485 terminals power supply short circuit (E.CTE) Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) Output phase loss (E.LF) Brake transistor alarm detection (E.BE) Internal circuit fault (E.13/E.PBT)
Y17 output signal (converter unit)
MC1 output signal (inverter)
MC1 output signal actual operation Main circuit power supply
OFF OFF OFF Stop OFF ON OFF Stop ON OFF OFF Stop ON ON ON Supplied
5715. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
57
NOTE When the start signal is turned OFF before the time set in Pr.137 has passed after the start signal is turned ON, the inverter
does not start and the MC1 signal is turned OFF after the time set in Pr.254 has passed. If the start signal is turned ON again before the time set in Pr.254 has passed, the inverter immediately starts outputting.
At inverter reset, the status of the MC1 signal is held and operation of the magnetic contactor is not performed. When the inverter stops the output due to, for example, the Output stop (MRS) signal, the MC1 signal is turned OFF after the
time set in Pr.254 has passed. During the stop, turning ON the External DC injection brake operation start signal (X13) and Pre-excitation/servo ON signal
(LX) turns ON the MC1 signal. To avoid inverter reset when supplying power to the main circuit is started when power is supplied only to the control circuit,
set 100 or more in Pr.30. (For the separated converter type, setting Pr.30 of the converter unit is also required.) When supplying power to the main circuit is started when power is supplied only to the control circuit, there is a slight delay
before starting. Repeated operation of the magnetic contactor due to frequent start and stop or activation of the protective function may shorten
the inverter life. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) and Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. To use X94 signal for the separated converter type, use a converter unit manufactured in August 2014 or later.
Parameters referred to Pr.11 DC injection brake operation timepage 715 Pr.30 Regenerative function selectionpage 724 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
5.14.3 Brake sequence function This function outputs operation timing signals of the mechanical brake from the inverter, such as for lift applications. This function is useful in preventing load slippage at a start due to poor mechanical brake timing and overcurrent alarm in stop status and enable secure operation.
STF
MC1 ON
Time
Pr.254
Output frequency (Hz)
ON
OFF
Pr.137 Pr.254
Pr.137
STF
MC1 ON
Time
Output frequency (Hz)
ON ONOFF OFF
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
278 A100 Brake opening frequency 3 Hz 0 to 30 Hz Set the rated slip frequency of the motor + approx. 1.0 Hz. This can be
set only when Pr.278 Pr.282.
279 A101 Brake opening current 130% 0 to 400%
Set between 50 and 90% because load slippage is more likely to occur when a start setting is too low. The inverter rated current is regarded as 100%, or the rated motor torque is regarded as 100%. (According to Pr.639 setting)
280 A102
Brake opening current detection time 0.3 s 0 to 2 s Generally set between 0.1 and 0.3 s.
281 A103 Brake operation time at start 0.3 s 0 to 5 s
Set the mechanical delay time until braking eases. When Pr.292 = "8", set the mechanical delay time until braking eases + approx. 0.1 to 0.2 s.
282 A104 Brake operation frequency 6 Hz 0 to 30 Hz
Turn OFF the Brake opening request (BOF) signal and set the frequency for operating the electromagnetic brake. Generally, set the setting value of Pr.278 + 3 to 4 Hz. This can be set only when Pr.282 Pr.278.
283 A105 Brake operation time at stop 0.3 s 0 to 5 s
When Pr.292 = "7", set the mechanical delay time until the brake closes + 0.1 s. When Pr.292 = "8", set the mechanical delay time until the brake closes + approx. 0.2 to 0.3 s.
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 The speed deviation excess detection frequency is used when Vector control compatible option is mounted during Vector control. (Refer to page 269 for details.)
Connection diagram
*1 The input signal terminals differ by the settings of Pr.178 to Pr.189. *2 The output signal terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196.
284 A106
Deceleration detection function selection 0
0 The deceleration detection function disabled.
1 The protective function is activated when the deceleration speed of the deceleration operation is not normal.
285 A107
Overspeed detection frequency*1 9999
0 to 30 Hz The Brake sequence fault (E.MB1) is activated when the difference between the detection frequency and output frequency is equal to or greater than the setting value under encoder feedback control.
9999 Overspeed detection disabled.
292 A110 F500
Automatic acceleration/ deceleration 0
0 Normal operation
1, 11 Operation with the shortest acceleration/deceleration time. (Refer to page 384.)
3 Operation with the optimum acceleration/deceleration time. (Refer to page 384.)
5, 6 Lift operation 1, 2. (Refer to page 387.) 7 Brake sequence mode 1 8 Brake sequence mode 2
639 A108
Brake opening current selection 0
0 Brake opening by output current 1 Brake opening by motor torque
640 A109
Brake operation frequency selection 0
0 Brake closing operation by frequency command
1 Brake closing operation by the actual motor rotation speed (estimated value)
641 A130
Second brake sequence operation selection 0
0 Normal operation when the RT signal is ON 7 Second brake sequence 1 when the RT signal is ON 8 Second brake sequence 2 when the RT signal is ON 9999 First brake sequence is valid when the RT signal is ON
642 A120
Second brake opening frequency 3 Hz 0 to 30 Hz Refer to Pr.278.
Set the second brake sequence function. The second brake sequence function is enabled when the RT signal is ON.
643 A121 Second brake opening current 130% 0 to 400% Refer to Pr.279.
644 A122
Second brake opening current detection time 0.3 s 0 to 2 s Refer to Pr.280.
645 A123
Second brake operation time at start 0.3 s 0 to 5 s Refer to Pr.281.
646 A124
Second brake operation frequency 6 Hz 0 to 30 Hz Refer to Pr.282.
647 A125
Second brake operation time at stop 0.3 s 0 to 5 s Refer to Pr.283.
648 A126
Second deceleration speed detection selection 0 0, 1 Refer to Pr.284.
650 A128
Second brake opening current selection 0 0, 1 Refer to Pr.639.
651 A129
Second brake operation frequency selection 0 0, 1 Refer to Pr.640.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
Mechanical brake
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
M
MC
STF RH
AU(BRI) *1
SD
MC
24VDC
Brake opening request signal (BOF)
Start signal Multi-speed signal
Brake opening completion signal (BRI)
Sink logic Pr.184 = 15 Pr.190 = 20
Power supply
U V W
RUN(BOF)
SE
*2 *3
MCCB
5735. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
57
*3 Be careful of the permissible current of the built-in transistors on the inverter. (24 VDC 0.1 A)
NOTE The automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function and orientation function do not operate when brake sequence
is selected. To use this function, set the acceleration/deceleration time to 1 s or higher. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) and Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Setting the brake sequence operation Set Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration = "7 or 8 (braking sequence operation)".
To ensure sequence operation, it is recommended to use with Pr.292 = "7" (with brake opening completion signal input). Set "15" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), and assign the Brake opening completion (BRI)
signal to the input terminal. Set "20" (positive logic) or "120" (negative logic) in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection), and
assign the brake opening request signal (BOF) to the output terminal. Use Pr.639 Brake opening current selection to select whether the output current or the motor torque is used as a
reference for the brake opening operation. (Under V/F control, this operation is activated regardless of the Pr.639 setting.) Under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control, use Pr.640 Brake operation
frequency selection to select whether the frequency command or the actual motor speed (estimated value) is used as a reference for brake closing operation. If the brake operation timing is different from the motor speed because of the load, set Pr.640 = "1 (brake operation with the actual motor speed (estimated value))".
Under V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control, the frequency command is used as a reference for brake operation regardless of the Pr.640 setting.
NOTE Under torque control, position control, or PM sensorless vector control (with the low-speed range high torque characteristic
disabled), the brake sequence function is disabled.
Operation with brake opening completion signal input (Pr.292 = "7") When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running, and when the output frequency reaches the
frequency set in Pr.278 Brake opening frequency and the output current or the motor torque is equal to or greater than the Pr.279 Brake opening current setting, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is output after the time set in Pr.280 Brake opening current detection time. The Brake opening completion (BRI) signal is input, and the output frequency is increased to the set speed after the set time in Pr.281 Brake operation time at start.
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When the inverter decelerates to the frequency set to Pr.282 Brake operation frequency during deceleration, the inverter turns OFF the brake opening request signal (BOF) and decelerates further to the frequency set in Pr.278. After electromagnetic brake operation completes and the inverter recognizes the turn OFF of the BRI signal, the inverter holds the frequency set in Pr.278 for the time set in Pr.283 Brake operation time at stop. And after the time set in Pr.283 passes, the inverter decelerates again. The inverter outputs is shut off when the frequency reaches Pr.13 Starting frequency setting or 0.5 Hz, whichever is lower.
Operation without Brake opening completion (Pr.292 = "8") signal input When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running, and when the output frequency reaches the
frequency set in Pr.278 Brake opening frequency and the output current or the motor torque is equal to or greater than the Pr.279 Brake opening current setting, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is output after the time set in Pr.280 Brake opening current detection time. After the BOF signal is output, the output frequency is increased to the set speed after the set time in Pr.281 Brake operation time at start.
When the inverter decelerates to the frequency set to Pr.282 Brake operation frequency during deceleration, the inverter turns OFF the brake opening request signal (BOF) and decelerates further to the frequency set in Pr.278. And after the time set in Brake operation time at stop passes, the inverter decelerates again. Pr.13 Starting frequency setting or 0.5 Hz, whichever is lower
NOTE Even if the brake sequence operation has been selected, inputting the JOG signal (JOG operation) changes the operation
method to normal operation and give a priority to the JOG operation. Note that the JOG signal input by the brake sequence function is invalid during operation.
Set multiple brake sequence functions (Pr.641) When the second brake sequence function is set, it is possible to switch between and use two types of brake sequence
functions. Turning ON the Second function selection (RT) signal enables the Second brake sequence function.
STF ON
Output current or motor torque (select by Pr.639)
Brake opening request (BOF signal)
ON
Electromagnetic brake operation
OpenedClosed Closed
Time
Brake opening completion (BRI signal)
ON
Pr.278 Pr.282
Target frequency
Pr.13
Pr.280 Pr.281
Output frequency(Hz)
Pr.283
Pr.279
Pr.13 setting or 0.5Hz, whichever is lower
STF ON
Output current or motor torque (select by Pr.639)
Brake opening request (BOF signal)
ON
Electromagnetic brake operation
OpenedClosed Closed
Time
Pr.278 Pr.282
Target frequency
Output frequency(Hz)
Pr.281
Pr.283
Pr.280
Pr.279
Pr.13
Pr.13 setting or 0.5Hz, whichever is lower
5755. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
57
Select the operation of the Second brake sequence function with Pr.641 Second brake sequence operation selection.
Set "45" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the Second brake sequence open completion signal (BRI2) to the input terminal.
To use the Second brake opening request signal (BOF2), set "22 (positive logic)" or "122 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
The method of setting the second brake sequence parameters is the same as that for the corresponding first brake sequence function parameters.
Switchover of the brake sequence function by RT signal is valid when the inverter is stopped.
Protective function If one of the following faults occur while the brake sequence function is enabled, the inverter enters an fault status, shuts
off output, and turns OFF the brake opening request signal (BOF).
NOTE During PM sensorless vector control, the brake sequence function is available with the IPM motor MM-CF only. During deceleration, inverter output is shut OFF when the frequency reaches Pr.13 Starting frequency or 0.5 Hz, whichever
is lower. For Pr.278 Brake opening frequency, set a frequency equal to or higher than the Pr.13 setting or 0.5 Hz. Pr.285 Overspeed detection frequency is valid under encoder feedback control (used with the FR-A8AP (option)) even if a
value other than "7 or 8" is set in Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration. Setting Pr.278 too high activates the stall prevention and may cause E.MB4. E.MB4 occurs when the acceleration time from Pr.13 to Pr.278 + Pr.280 reaches or exceeds 2 s.
Parameters referred to Pr.3 Base frequencypage 707 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
5.14.4 Start count monitor The inverter starting times can be counted.
Pr.641 setting Brake sequence function when the RT signal is ON 0 (initial value) Normal operation (The first and second brake sequence functions invalid) 7 Second brake sequence mode 1 8 Second brake sequence mode 2 9999 First brake sequence mode is valid
Fault indication Description
E.MB1 When (detection frequency) - (output frequency) Pr.285 during encoder feedback control. When Pr.285 (Overspeed detection function) = 9999, overspeed is not detected.
E.MB2 When deceleration is not normal during deceleration operation from the set frequency to the frequency set in Pr.282. (when Pr.284 = 1) (except stall prevention operation)
E.MB3 When the BOF signal turned ON while the motor is at a stop. (load slippage prevention function)
E.MB4 When more than 2 s have elapsed after the start command (forward or reverse rotation) is input, but the BOF signal does not turn ON.
E.MB5 When more than 2 s have elapsed after the BOF signal turned ON, but the BRI signal does not turn ON. E.MB6 When the inverter had turned ON the brake opening request signal (BOF), but the BRI signal turned OFF. E.MB7 When more than 2 s have elapsed after the BOF signal turned OFF at a stop, but the BRI signal does not turn OFF.
ON
Time
Output frequency
(Hz)
Less than 2s
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H z)
Pr.278
Pr.13
Brake opening request (BOF signal)
Pr.280
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Confirming the starting times can be used to determine the timing of the maintenance, or can be used as a reference for system inspection or parts replacement.
Every start signal input (the RUN signal ON) while the inverter output is stopped is counted as the inverter starting time. (Starting during pre-excitation is also counted.)
The lower four digits of the number of starting times is displayed in Pr.1410 Starting times lower 4 digits, and the upper four digits of the number of starting times is displayed in Pr.1411 Starting times upper 4 digits.
The maximum count is "99999999". When "99999999" is exceeded on the monitor, the monitor value is reset to 0.
NOTE Any value can be set in Pr.1410 or Pr.1411. Set "0" to clear the number on the monitor. Starting during offline auto tuning is not counted. Under position control, the count increases when the LX signal turns ON. The counting is enabled even if the RUN signal is not assigned to an output terminal. For the RUN signal, refer to page 473. Starting during the test operation (Pr.800 = "9") is not counted.
5.14.5 Stop-on-contact control
To ensure accurate positioning at the upper limit, etc. of a lift, stop-on-contact control causes the mechanical brake to close while the motor creates a holding torque to keep the load in contact with a mechanical stopper, etc. This function suppresses vibration that is likely to occur when the load is stopped upon contact in lift applications, thereby ensuring reliable and highly accurate positioning stop.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 1410 A170
Starting times lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 Displays the lower four digits of the number of the inverter starting
times. 1411 A171
Starting times upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 Displays the upper four digits of the number of the inverter starting
times.
Display data Monitor display
10000 Pr.1410 (Lower digits monitor)
Pr.1411 (Upper digits monitor)
100 Pr.1410 (Lower digits monitor)
Pr.1411 (Upper digits monitor)
STF ON
ON ON ON ON
ON
ON
ON ON ON
Start count indication
Output frequency
Time
1 2
RUN
LX
3 4
Magnetic flux Sensorless
Vibration Complete stop
Lift Lift
5775. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
57
*1 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower *2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
Connection and operation example
Setting the stop-on-contact control Make sure that the inverter is in External or Network operation mode. (Refer to page 389.) Select either Real sensorless vector control (speed control) or Advanced magnetic flux vector control. Set "1, 3, 11 or 13" in Pr.270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection. Set the output frequency for stop-on-contact control in Pr.6 Multi-speed setting (low speed).
Set the frequency as low as possible (about 2 Hz). If a frequency higher than 30 Hz is set, it operates with 30 Hz. When both the RT and RL signals are switched ON, the inverter enters the stop-on-contact control, and operation is
performed at the frequency set in Pr.6 independently of the preceding speed.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
6 D303
Multi-speed setting (low speed) 10 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the output frequency for stop-on-contact control.
22 H500
Stall prevention operation level 150% 0 to 400% Set the stall prevention operation level for stop-on-contact control.
48 H600
Second stall prevention operation level 150% 0 to 400% The smaller value set in either Pr.22 or Pr.48 has priority.
270 A200
Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection
0
0 Normal operation 1 Stop-on-contact control 2 Load torque high-speed frequency control (Refer to page 580.)
3 Stop-on contact + load torque high speed frequency control (Refer to page 580.)
11 Stop-on-contact control E.OLT is invalid under stop- on-contact control13
Stop-on contact + load torque high speed frequency control (Refer to page 580.)
275 A205
Stop-on contact excitation current low-speed scaling factor
9999 0 to 300% Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on-contact control.
Normally, set the scaling factor between 130 to 180%. 9999 Not compensated.
276 A206
PWM carrier frequency at stop-on contact 9999
0 to 9*1 Set a PWM carrier frequency for stop-on-contact control. For Real sensorless vector control, the carrier frequency is always 2 kHz when the setting value is 0 to 5 and always 6 kHz when the setting value is 6 to 9. (Valid at the output frequency of 3 Hz or less.)
0 to 4*2
9999 As set in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.
Power supply
Forward rotation command High-speed operation command Middle-speed operation command Stop-on contact selection 0 Stop-on contact selection 1
MCCB R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
STF RH RM RL RT SD
U V W
MC
Mechanical brake
M
The input terminal used differs according to the Pr.180 to Pr.189 settings.
Sink logic
(a) (b) (c)
Time
Pr.4
RH
RM
RL
RT
Pr.5
Pr.6 0
Normal mode Stop-on contact control mode
(a): Acceleration time(Pr.7) (b): Deceleration time(Pr.8) (c): Second deceleration time(Pr.44/Pr.45)
ONOFF
ONOFF
ONOFF
ON
Goes into stop-on-contact control mode when both RL and RT switch on. RL and RT may be switched on in any order with any time difference
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Setting Pr.270 = "11 or 13" disables stall prevention stop (E.OLT) during stop-on-contact control (with both RL and RT signals ON).
NOTE By increasing the Pr.275 setting, the low-speed (stop-on-contact) torque increases, but overcurrent fault (E.OC[]) may occur
or the machine may oscillate in stop-on-contact status. The stop-on-contact function is different from the servo-lock function, and if used to stop or hold a load for an extended period,
this function can cause the motor to overheat. After a stop, immediately switch to a mechanical brake to hold the load. Under the following operating conditions, the stop-on-contact function is invalid:
PU operation (Pr.79), JOG operation (JOG signal), PU + External operation (Pr.79), PID control function operation (Pr.128), Remote setting function operation (Pr.59), Automatic acceleration/deceleration operation (Pr.292), Start time tuning, Orientation control function operation
When performing stop-on-contact control during encoder feedback control, encoder feedback control is invalid due to a transition to the stop-on-contact control mode.
Function switching of stop-on-contact control selection
*1 When RL and RT are ON, Pr.49 Second stall prevention operation frequency is invalid.
Set frequency and validity of the stop-on-contact control (Pr.270 = "1, 3, 11, 13")
The following table lists the frequencies set when the input terminals (RH, RM, RL, RT, JOG) are selected together. Stop-on-contact control is disabled when remote setting function is selected (Pr.59 = 1 to 3).
*1 By 0 to 5 V (0 to 10 V), 4 to 20 mA input
Main functions
Normal operation (Either RL or RT is OFF or both are OFF.) Stop-on-contact control (Both RL and RT are ON.)
Real sensorless vector control
Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Real sensorless vector control
Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Output frequency Multi-speed, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, etc. Pr.6 setting Stall prevention operation level Pr.22 setting
The smaller value set in either Pr.22 or Pr.48*1
Torque limit level Pr.22 setting Pr.22 setting Excitation current low-speed scaling factor The current is compensated by Pr.275 (0 to 300%)
setting from normal operation.
Carrier frequency Pr.72 setting When output frequency is 3 Hz or lower, Pr.276 setting (Pr.72 when Pr.276 = "9999")
Fast-response current limit Enabled Disabled
Input signal Set frequency
Stop-on-contact control
Input signal Set frequency
Stop-on-contact controlRH RM RL RT JOG RH RM RL RT JOG
ON Pr.4 ON ON ON Pr.15 ON Pr.5 ON ON ON Pr.15
ON Pr.6 ON ON ON Pr.6 Enabled ON *1 ON ON ON Pr.15
ON Pr.15 ON ON ON Pr.15 ON ON Pr.26 ON ON ON Pr.6 Enabled ON ON Pr.25 ON ON ON Pr.15 ON ON Pr.4 ON ON ON Pr.26 ON ON Pr.15 ON ON ON Pr.27
ON ON Pr.24 ON ON ON ON Pr.15 ON ON Pr.5 ON ON ON ON Pr.15 ON ON Pr.15 ON ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON Pr.6 Enabled ON ON ON ON Pr.15 ON ON Pr.15 ON ON ON ON Pr.6 Enabled
ON ON Pr.15 ON ON ON ON ON Pr.15 ON ON ON Pr.15 *1
5795. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
58
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27 (multi-speed setting)page 411 Pr.15 Jog frequencypage 410 Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level, Pr.48 Second stall prevention operation level levelpage 431 Pr.22 Torque limit levelpage 245 Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 377 Pr.72 PWM frequency selectionpage 356 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 Pr.95 Online auto tuning selectionpage 558 Pr.128 PID action selectionpage 601 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selectionpage 580 Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/decelerationpage 384, page 387
5.14.6 Load torque high-speed frequency control Load torque high-speed frequency control is a function that automatically sets the maximum operable frequency according to the load. The load size during power driving is estimated by detecting average currents at set timings after a start. When the load is light, the frequency is increased from the originally-set frequency. (In regenerative driving, the frequency is not increased.) This function is designed to increase speed automatically under light load, for example to minimize the incoming/outgoing time in a multi-story parking lot.
frequency control>
frequency control>
Light
Faster
Whether there is a load or
not, the lift is moved
vertically at the same speed.
The lift with a light load or without
a load is moved faster than the lift
with a load.
(The output frequency is increased
only during power driving.)
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description FM CA
4 D301
Multi-speed setting (high speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the higher-speed frequency.
5 D302
Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the lower-speed frequency.
270 A200
Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection
0
0 Normal 1 Stop-on-contact control (Refer to page 577.) 2 Load torque high-speed frequency control
3 Stop-on contact + load torque high speed frequency control (Refer to page 577.)
11 Stop-on-contact control E.OLT is invalid under stop- on-contact control.13
Stop-on contact + load torque high speed frequency control (Refer to page 577.)
271 A201
High-speed setting maximum current 50% 0 to 400%
Set the upper and lower limits of the current at high and middle speeds.272
A202 Middle-speed setting minimum current 100% 0 to 400%
273 A203
Current averaging range 9999
0 to 590 Hz Set the average current during acceleration from (Pr.273 1/2) Hz to (Pr.273) Hz.
9999 Set the average current during acceleration from (Pr.5 1/2) Hz to (Pr.5) Hz.
274 A204
Current averaging filter time constant 16 1 to 4000
Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the output current. (The time constant [ms] is 0.5 Pr.274, and the initial value is 8 ms.) A larger setting results in a stable operation with poorer response.
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Connection diagram
*1 The applied terminals differ by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)
Load torque high speed frequency control setting Set "2, 3 or 13" in Pr.270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection. When the Load torque high-speed frequency (X19) signal ON, the inverter automatically adjusts the maximum frequency
in the range between the Pr.4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) and Pr.5 in accordance with the average current in the current averaging range. The current averaging range is from the 1/2 the Pr.5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) to the full Pr.5 setting (in the current averaging range).
To use the X19 signal, set "19" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to an input terminal.
This is valid in External operation mode and Network operation mode. The control can be activated at every start.
Operation of load torque high speed frequency control When the average current of the current averaging range (chart A below) during operation with the X19 signal ON is the
"inverter rated current Pr.271 setting (%)" or less, the maximum frequency automatically becomes the Pr.4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) setting value.
When the average current of the current averaging range (chart B below) during operation with the X19 signal ON is greater than the "inverter rated current Pr.272 setting (%)", the maximum frequency automatically becomes the Pr.5 Multi- speed setting (middle speed) setting value.
During regeneration load operation, the Pr.5 setting is the maximum frequency regardless of the average current. When Pr.273 is used, the current averaging range can be set between one half of the frequency of the Pr.273 setting value
and the Pr.273 set frequency. (However, the setting value must be smaller than Pr.5 setting.)
Mechanical brake
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
M
MC
STF
CS(X19) SD
Start signal
Load torque high-speed frequency
MCCB
Power supply U V W
Sink logic Pr.186 = 19
(STR)
X19
STF ON ON ON
ON ON
OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
Pr.5
Pr.4
Pr.51 2
Power running Regenerating
A B Current averaging range Current averaging range
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
Time
Less than Pr.271 setting rated current
Pr.272 setting rated current or more
ON
5815. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
58
When the average current is larger than "inverter rated current Pr.271 setting (%)" and smaller than "inverter rated current Pr.272 setting (%)", linear compensation is performed as shown below.
NOTE When the current averaging range includes the constant-output range, the output current may become large in the constant-
output range. When the average current value in the current averaging range is small, deceleration time becomes longer as the output
frequency increases. The automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function, fast-response current limit operation, fast-response current
limit operation, shortest acceleration/deceleration, and optimum acceleration/deceleration are invalid. Changing the terminal assignment with Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect other functions. Set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. Under the following operating conditions, the load torque high-speed frequency function is invalid:
PU operation (Pr.79), PU + External operation (Pr.79), JOG operation, PID control function operation (Pr.128), remote setting function operation (Pr.59), orientation control function operation, multi-speed setting (RH, RM, and RL signals), torque control, position control.
When the average current during acceleration is too small, it may be judged as regeneration, and the maximum frequency may become the setting of Pr.5.
The output frequency may change due to the load, so do not get unnecessarily close to the motor or machine.
Parameters referred to Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27 (multi-speed setting)page 411 Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628, page 635 Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 377 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 Pr.128 PID action selectionpage 601 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
5.14.7 Traverse function The traverse operation, which oscillates the frequency at a constant cycle, is available.
Setting Pr.592 Traverse function selection = "1 or 2" enables the traverse function.
Pr.4 (60Hz/50Hz)
Pr.5 (30Hz)
Pr.271 (50%)
Average current
F re
qu en
cy
Pr.272 (100%)
Value in parenthesis is initial value.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
592 A300
Traverse function selection 0
0 Traverse function invalid
1 Traverse function valid only in External operation mode
2 Traverse function valid regardless of the operation mode
593 A301
Maximum amplitude amount 10% 0 to 25% Level of amplitude during traverse operation
594 A302
Amplitude compensation amount during deceleration
10% 0 to 50% Compensation amount during amplitude inversion (from acceleration to deceleration)
595 A303
Amplitude compensation amount during acceleration
10% 0 to 50% Compensation amount during amplitude inversion (from deceleration to acceleration)
596 A304
Amplitude acceleration time 5 s 0.1 to 3600 s Time period of acceleration during traverse
operation 597 A305
Amplitude deceleration time 5 s 0.1 to 3600 s Time period of deceleration during traverse
operation
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Assigning the Traverse function selection (X37) signal to the input terminal enables the traverse function only when the X37 signal is ON. (When the X37 signal is not assigned, the traverse function is always available.) To input the X37 signal, set "37" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal.
The motor accelerates to the set frequency f0 according to the normal Pr.7 Acceleration time at turn ON of the start command (STF or STR).
When the output frequency reaches f0 and the X37 signal turns ON, the inverter begins traverse operation and accelerates to f0 + f1. The acceleration time at this time is according to the Pr.596 setting. (If the X37 signal turns ON before the output frequency reaches f0, traverse operation begins after the output frequency reaches f0.)
After the inverter accelerates the motor to f0 + f1, this is compensated with f2 (f1 Pr.594), and the motor decelerates to f0 - f1. The deceleration time at this time is according to the Pr.597 setting.
After the inverter decelerates the motor to f0 - f1, this is compensated with f3 (f1 Pr.595), and the motor accelerates again to f0 + f1.
When the X37 signal turns OFF during traverse operation, the inverter accelerates/decelerates the motor to f0 according to the normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr.7, Pr.8). If the start command (STF or STR) is turned OFF during traverse operation, the inverter decelerates the motor to a stop according to the normal deceleration time (Pr.8).
NOTE If the set frequency (f0) and traverse operation parameters (Pr.593 to Pr.597) are changed during traverse operation, this is
applied in operations after the output frequency reaches f0 before the change was made. If the output frequency exceeds Pr.1 Maximum frequency or Pr.2 Minimum frequency during traverse operation, the output
frequency is clamped at the maximum/minimum frequency when the set pattern exceeds the maximum/minimum frequency. When the traverse function and S-pattern acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 "0") are selected, S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration operation occurs only in the range operated at the normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr.7, Pr.8). Acceleration/deceleration during traverse operation is performed linearly.
If stall prevention activates during traverse operation, traverse operation stops and normal operation begins. When stall prevention operation is completed, the inverter accelerates/decelerates to f0 at the normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr.7, Pr.8). After the output frequency reaches f0, the traverse operation begins again.
If the value of the amplitude inversion compensation amount (Pr.594, Pr.595) is too large, an overvoltage trip or stall prevention occurs, and pattern operation cannot be performed as set.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.3 Base frequencypage 707 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
f0
Output frequency(Hz)
Time(s)
f1
f1
t1 (Pr.596)
f2
f3
Pr.7
Pr.8
Pr.7
STF(STR) signal
X37 signal
ON
ON
Traverse operation
t2 (Pr.597)
f0: set frequency f1: amplitude amount from the set frequency
(f0 Pr.593/100) f2: compensation amount at transition from
acceleration to deceleration (f1 Pr.594/100)
f3: compensation amount at transition from deceleration to acceleration (f1 Pr.595/100)
t1: time from acceleration during traverse operation (Time from (f0 f1) to (f0 + f1)) (Pr.596)
t2: time from deceleration during traverse operation (Time from (f0 + f1) to (f0 f1)) (Pr.597)
5835. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
58
5.14.8 Anti-sway control When an object is moved by a gantry crane, swinging is suppressed on the crane's traveling axis.
Anti-sway control operation (Pr.1073) Setting Pr.1073 Anti-sway control operation selection = "1" enables anti-sway control. (Anti-sway control is not
available under zero speed or servo lock control.) During operation under anti-sway control, the travel distance becomes longer. Input a stop command earlier to avoid a
collision with an obstacle. A deceleration to stop without anti-sway control is applied for stopping as a result of PU stop, an emergency stop command
input from a communication option, Pr.875 Fault definition, or an emergency stop input (X92 signal).
NOTE Under torque control or position control, the anti-sway control is disabled. During operation of the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function, or when the automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure is enabled (Pr.57 "9999"), the anti-sway control is disabled.
Swinging frequency setting (Pr.1074 to Pr.1079) Set a swinging frequency in Pr.1074 Anti-sway control frequency. The swinging frequency is used as a notch filter
frequency. Lower the response level of speed control in the frequency band with the width set in the Pr.1076 Anti-sway control width by the gain set in the Pr.1075 Anti-sway control depth.
A deeper notch depth has a greater effect in reducing mechanical resonance, but because the phase delay is larger, swinging may increase. Adjust by starting from the shallowest value.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
1072 A310
DC brake judgment time for anti-sway control operation
3 s 0 to 10 s Set the time from when the output frequency becomes the Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency or less to when the DC injection brake (zero speed control or the servo lock) operation starts.
1073 A311
Anti-sway control operation selection 0
0 Anti-sway control disabled 1 Anti-sway control enabled
1074 A312
Anti-sway control frequency 1 Hz
0.05 to 3 Hz Set a swinging frequency of the object.
9999 Anti-sway control is performed using a swinging frequency estimated by the inverter according to the settings of Pr.1077 to Pr.1079.
1075 A313 Anti-sway control depth 0 0 to 3 0 (Deep) 3 (Shallow)
1076 A314 Anti-sway control width 0 0 to 3 0 (Narrow) 3 (Wide)
1077 A315 Rope length 1 m 0.1 to 50 m Set the rope length of the crane.
1078 A316 Trolley weight 1 kg 1 to 50000
kg Set the weight of the trolley.
1079 A317 Load weight 1 kg 1 to 50000
kg Set the weight of the object.
Setting 3 2 1 0 Gain (depth) -4 dB (shallow) -8 dB -14 dB - (deep)
Frequency command
Frequency
Time
Frequency command of anti-sway control
ONRL
ONRM
ONSTF
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
If the Pr.1076 setting is too large (the width is too wide), the response level of speed control drops, and the system may become unstable.
After setting Pr.1074 = "9999", set the crane rope length in the Pr.1077 Rope length, the trolley weight in the Pr.1078 Trolley weight, and the weight of an object in the Pr.1079 Load weight. Then, anti-sway control is performed using a swinging frequency estimated by the inverter.
Delay time for brake operation of anti-sway control (Pr.1072) Set the time from when the output frequency becomes the Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency or less to when
the zero speed control or the servo lock operation starts in the Pr.1072 DC brake judgment time for anti-sway control operation.
NOTE During anti-sway control operation, even if the motor rotation is restricted to one direction in the Pr.78 Reverse rotation
prevention selection, the motor may rotate in a direction opposite to the setting. A protective function (E.OSD) may be activated during vibration control. When using anti-sway control, set Pr.690
Deceleration check time = "9999 (initial value)" to disable the deceleration check function. When anti-sway control is enabled, regeneration avoidance, shortest acceleration/deceleration, and the traverse function are
disabled. Do not set anti-sway control and droop control together.
Parameters referred to Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequencypage 715 Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selectionpage 406 Pr.286 Droop gainpage 738 Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/decelerationpage 384 Pr.592 Traverse function selectionpage 582 Pr.690 Deceleration check timepage 269 Pr.875 Fault definitionpage 422 Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation selectionpage 732
5.14.9 Orientation control
The inverter can adjust the stop position (Orientation control) using a position detector (encoder) attached to a place such as the main shaft of the machine. A Vector control compatible option is required. Because Pr.350 Stop position command selection is initially set to "9999", the orientation control function is invalid.
STF ON
Frequency command of anti-sway control
Zero speed control Servo lock
Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency
Actual rotation
Pr.1072
Frequency command
Time
V/F Magnetic flux Vector
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
350 A510*1
Stop position command selection 9999
0 Internal stop position command (Pr.356) 1 External stop position command (FR-A8AX 16-bit data) 9999 Orientation control disabled
351 A526*1 Orientation speed 2 Hz 0 to 30 Hz Turning ON the X22 signal decelerates the motor speed to the set value.
352 A527*1 Creep speed 0.5 Hz 0 to 10 Hz After the speed reaches the orientation speed, the speed decreases to the
creep speed set in Pr.352 as soon as the current position pulse reaches the creep switchover position set in Pr.353.353
A528*1 Creep switchover position 511 0 to 16383
5855. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
58
354 A529*1
Position loop switchover position 96 0 to 8191 As soon as the current position pulses reach the set position loop switchover
position, control is changed to the position loop.
355 A530*1
DC injection brake start position 5 0 to 255
After the motor moves into the position loop, the motor stops by the DC injection brake when the current position pulses reach the specified start position of the DC injection brake.
356 A531*1
Internal stop position command 0 0 to 16383 When "0" is set in Pr.350, the internal position command is activated and the
setting value of Pr.356 becomes the stop position. 357 A532*1
Orientation in- position zone 5 0 to 255 Set the in-position width at a stop of the orientation.
358 A533*1
Servo torque selection 1 0 to 13 Operation at orientation completion can be selected.
359 C141 *2
852 C241 *3
Encoder rotation direction 1
0 Set when using a motor for which forward rotation (encoder) is clockwise (CW) viewed from the shaft
Set for the operation at 120 Hz or less.
100 Set for the operation at a frequency higher than 120 Hz.
1 Set when using a motor for which forward rotation (encoder) is counterclockwise (CCW) viewed from the shaft.
Set for the operation at 120 Hz or less.
101 Set for the operation at a frequency higher than 120 Hz.
360 A511*1 16-bit data selection 0
0 Speed command When Pr.350 = "1" is set and the FR- A8AX is installed together, set the stop position using 16-bit data. The stop position command is input as binary regardless of the Pr.304 setting.
1 16-bit data is used as the external position command as is.
2 to 127 Set the stop position by dividing up to 128 stop positions.
361 A512*1 Position shift 0 0 to 16383
Shift the home position using a compensation value without changing the home position of the encoder. The stop position is a position obtained by adding the setting of Pr.361 to the position command.
362 A520*1
Orientation position loop gain 1 0.1 to 100
When the servo torque function is selected using Pr.358, the output frequency for generating servo torque gradually increases to the Pr.352 according to the slope set in Pr.362. Although the operation becomes faster when the value is increased, hunting may occur in the machine.
363 A521*1
Completion signal output delay time 0.5 s 0 to 5 s
The Orientation complete (ORA) signal turns ON after going into the in- position width and waiting for the set time. Also, the signal turns OFF after going out of the in-position width and waiting for the set time.
364 A522*1
Encoder stop check time 0.5 s 0 to 5 s
If the Orientation complete (ORA) signal has never been output and the encoder stays stopped for the set time without completing orientation, the Orientation fault (ORM) signal is output. If the ORA signal has been output before but the orientation cannot be completed within the set time, the ORM signal is also output.
365 A523*1 Orientation limit 9999
0 to 60 s The time elapses after passing the creep switchover position is measured. If orientation cannot be completed within the set time, the Orientation fault (ORM) signal is output.
9999 Set to 120 s.
366 A524*1 Recheck time 9999
0 to 5 s
When the start signal is turned OFF with the Orientation command (X22) ON after stopping the motor by orientation control, the present position is checked again after the set time elapses, and the Orientation complete (ORA) signal or Orientation fault (ORM) signal is output.
9999 Not checked. 369 C140 *4
851 C240 *3
Number of encoder pulses 1024 0 to 4096 Set the number of encoder pulses.
Set the number of pulses before it is multiplied by 4.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
CW
CCW
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 The setting is available when a Vector control compatible option is installed. *2 These parameters are available when a plug-in option (FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR-A8APR/FR-A8APS) is installed. *3 These parameters are available when the option (FR-A8TP) is installed. *4 The setting is available when the FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL is installed. *5 The setting is available when the FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR-A8APR/FR-A8TP is installed. *6 To perform machine end orientation, the plug-in option (FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR-A8APR/FR-A8APS) and control terminal option (FR-A8TP) are
required. *7 The setting is available when the FR-A8AL is installed. *8 When the second motor is selected, the orientation control is disabled.
393 A525*1 Orientation selection 0
0 Orientation is executed from the current rotation direction.
Motor end orientation1 Orientation from the forward rotation direction
2 Orientation from the reverse rotation direction
10 Orientation from the current rotation direction
Machine end orientation*611 Orientation from the forward rotation direction
12 Orientation from the reverse rotation direction
394 A540*5
Number of machine side gear teeth
1 0 to 32767 Set the encoder orientation gear ratio. 395 A841*5
Number of motor side gear teeth
396 A542*1
Orientation speed gain (P term) 60 0 to 1000
Response level during position control loop (servo rigidity) can be adjusted at orientation stop.397
A543*1 Orientation speed integral time 0.333 0 to 20 s
398 A544*1
Orientation speed gain (D term) 1 0 to 100 Lag/advance compensation gain can be adjusted.
399 A545*1
Orientation deceleration ratio 20 0 to 1000 Make adjustment when the motor runs back at orientation stop or the
orientation time is long.
829 A546*7
Number of machine end encoder pulses 9999
0 to 4096 Set the number of pulses output from the encoder connected to the end of the machine. Set the number of pulses before it is multiplied by 4.
9999 Machine end orientation invalid.
862 C242*1
Encoder option selection 0
0
First motor: plug-in option that supports the Vector control Second motor: control terminal option that supports the Vector control*8
Machine end orientation invalid
1
First motor: control terminal option that supports the Vector control Second motor: plug-in option that supports the Vector control*8
Machine end orientation invalid (when Pr.393 = "0, 1, or 2")
Motor end: control terminal option that supports the Vector control Machine end: plug-in option that supports the Vector control
Machine end orientation valid (when Pr.393 = "10, 11, or 12")
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
5875. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
58
Motor end orientation connection example
*1 Single-phase power supply (200 V/50 Hz, 200 to 230 V/60 Hz) is used for the fan for a 7.5 kW or lower dedicated motor. *2 The pin number differs according to the encoder used. *3 Use Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal. (Refer to page 521.) *4 Use Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal. (Refer to page 473.) *5 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio must be 1:1. *6 Connect the shield of the encoder cable to the enclosure using a tool such as a P-clip. (Refer to page 93.) *7 For the differential line driver, set the terminating resistor selection switch to the ON position (initial status) to use. (Refer to page 88.)
Note that the terminating resistor switch should be set to the OFF position when sharing the same encoder with another unit (NC, etc.) or when the terminating resistor is connected to another unit. For the complementary, set the switch to the OFF position.
*8 For terminal compatibility of the FR-JCBL, the FR-V5CBL, and the FR-A8AP, refer to page 88. *9 A separate external power supply is necessary according to the encoder power specification. Make the voltage of the external power supply the
same as the encoder output voltage, and connect the external power supply between terminals PG and SD. When performing encoder feedback control and Vector control together, an encoder and power supply can be shared.
*10 When a stop position command is input from outside, a plug-in option FR-A8AX is required. Refer to page 589 for the external stop position command.
*11 Connect the recommended 2W1k resistor between terminals PC and OH. (Recommended product: MOS2C102J 2W1k by KOA Corporation) Insert the input line and the resistor to a 2-wire blade terminal, and connect the blade terminal to terminal OH. (For the recommended 2-wire blade terminals, refer to page 74.) Insulate the lead wire of the resistor, for example by applying a contraction tube, and shape the wires so that the resistor and its lead wire do not touch other cables. Caulk the lead wire securely together with the thermal protector input line using a 2-wire blade terminal. (Do not subject the lead wire's bottom area to an excessive pressure.) To use a terminal as terminal OH, assign the External thermal relay input (OH) signal to an input terminal. (Set "7" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189.)
Setting When the Orientation command (X22) signal is turned ON during operation after the parameters are set, the motor is
decelerated to the orientation switchover speed. Then, the inverter calculates the orientation stop distance, further decelerates the motor and the motor enters the orientation state (servo lock). The Orientation complete (ORA) signal is output when the motor is within the orientation complete width.
Three-phase AC power
supply
MCCB R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
DY
SF-JR motor with encoder U V W
U V W E
C
*6
*2
*5
*10
*7 *8
*2
*5
*7 *8
X0 X1
X14 X15
R PA1
FR-A8AP
PA2
PB1 PB2
PZ1 PZ2
PG
PG SD
SD
Differential
Terminating resistor ON
OFF
Complementary
A N
B P
H K
M
Differential
Terminating resistor ON
OFF
Complementary
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start Orientation command
Contact input common
STF STR
SD
SD
X22 *3
Encoder
Inverter
ORM ORA *4
SE
*4
FR-A8AX
SF-V5RU
U V W
U
A B C
V W E
G1
G2
A
2W1k
*6
Three-phase AC power
supply
MCCB
B PA1FR-A8AP
PA2
PB1 PB2
PZ1 PZ2
PG
PG SD
SD
C D
F G
S R
M
FAN
Encoder
External thermal relay input *11
Thermal relay protector
*1
CS(OH)
SD
PC
Inverter
For complementary type (SF-V5RU)
5VDC power supply *9
(+) (-)
12VDCpower supply *9
(+) (-)
MC OCR MC
Earth (Ground)
Earth (Ground)
PC
Resistor (2 W1k) Insulate
Insulate
RH (OH)
To thermal protector
2-wire blade terminal
When OH signal is assigned to terminal RH (Pr.182 = 7)
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Setting I/O signals
Selecting stop position command (Pr.350 Stop position command selection)
Select either to use the internal stop position command (Pr.356 Internal stop position command) or the external stop position command (16-bit data using the FR-A8AX).
When the internal stop position command (Pr.350 = "0") is selected, the Pr.356 setting is used as the stop position. When the number of encoder pulses is 1024 pulses/r, one revolution (360) of the encoder is divided by 4096 pulses
(quadruplicated) so that the degree per pulse can be calculated as 360 / 4096 pulses = 0.0879/pulse. Refer to the following figure. Stop position (address) is shown within parentheses.
When the external stop position command (Pr.350 = "1") is selected while the FR-A8AX option is installed, 16-bit data (binary input) is used to give the stop position.
The value set in Pr.360 16-bit data selection should be the divided value minus 1.
Signal Signal name Description
X22 Orientation command
Turn ON the X22 signal to start the orientation operation. For the X22 signal input, set "22" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 to assign the function.
ORA Orientation complete
The output is in LOW state when the orientation stop can be made within the orientation complete width while the start signal and X22 signal are input (ON). For the ORA signal output, set "27 (positive logic)" or "127 (negative logic)" in Pr.190 to Pr.196.
ORM Orientation fault The output is in LOW state when the orientation stop cannot be made within the orientation complete width while the start signal and X22 signal are input (ON). For the ORM signal output, set "28 (positive logic)" or "128 (negative logic)" in Pr.190 to Pr.196.
Pr.350 setting Stop position command source 0 Internal stop position command (Pr.356: 0 to 16383) 1 External stop position command (FR-A8AX) 16-bit data 9999 (initial value) Orientation control disabled
Origin (0) Origin (0) CW CCW
270 (3072)
90 (1024)
Pr.359 = 1
270 (3072)
180 (2048) Pr.359 = 0 180 (2048)
90 (1024)
Pr.360 setting Description 0 External position command is invalid (speed command or torque command via the FR-A8AX)
1
Position command direct input. The 16-bit digital signal via the FR-A8AX is the direct stop position command.
2 to 127
Set the stop position command by dividing up to 128 stop positions. If the external stop command input is greater than the setting, the stop positions are the same as those in the maximum external stop command value.
[Example 1] When Pr.369 = "1024" [Example 2] With 8 stop positions [Example 3] With 120 stop positions Pr.360 = "1" Pr.360 = "7" Pr.360 = "119"
270
(3072(HC00))
180
(2048(H800))
90
(1024(H400))
CW Origin (0) Origin(0)(7 or more)
315
(6)270
(5)225
(1)
45
135
(3)180
(4)
90
(2)
CW
Origin (0) CW
At intervals
of 3 270
(90)
180
(60)
90
(30)
5895. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
59
NOTE Values in parentheses indicate binary data input from the terminals. Even if the position pulse monitor (Pr.52 Operation panel
main monitor selection = "19") is selected, the data monitored is not the number of stop positions. It is the number of pulses from 0 to 65535.
FR-A8AX parameters (Pr.300 to Pr.305) are invalid. (Valid when Pr.360 = "0") Terminal DY (data read timing input signal) becomes invalid during Vector control. (The position data is downloaded at the
start of orientation.) Internal stop position command is given when no option is installed or Pr.360 = "0" even if "1" (external stop position command)
is set in Pr.350.
Relationship between stop position command and 16-bit data
Pr.361 Position shift (initial value "0") The stop position is a position obtained by adding the setting of Pr.361 to the position command. Position shift function
Shift the home position using a compensation value without changing the home position of the position detector (encoder).
NOTE When orientation control is valid using Pr.350 Stop position command selection with the Vector control compatible option
installed, the rotation direction of the encoder is displayed on the rotation direction display of the PU (operation panel/ parameter unit). Make settings so that "FWD" is displayed at turn ON of the STF signal and "REV" is displayed at turn ON of the STR signal.
Monitor display change
*1 Invalid during Vector control. ("0" is always displayed.)
Pr.357 Orientation in-position zone (initial value "5") The in-position width for orientation stop can be set.
The initial value of Pr.357 is "5". To change the value, make fine adjustments by changing in increments of 10.
Pr.350 Stop position command selection Pr.360 16-bit data selection
Operation
Stop position command 16-bit data (FR- A8AX) Speed command
0: internal 0: speed command Internal (Pr.356) Speed command 16-bit data 1, 2 to 127: position command Internal (Pr.356) Disabled External command
(or PU)
1: EXT
0: speed command Internal (Pr.356) Speed command 16-bit data
1, 2 to 127: position command
External (Internal when the FR-A8AX is not installed (Pr.356))
Position command External command (or PU)
Monitor Remarks
Position pulse monitor When "19" is set in Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection, the position pulse monitor is displayed instead of the output voltage monitor of the PU. (Displayed only when the Vector control compatible option is mounted.)
Orientation status*1
When "22" is set in Pr.52, the orientation status is displayed instead of the output voltage monitor of the PU. (Displayed only when the Vector control compatible option is mounted.) 0: Other than orientation operation or orientation speed is not reached 1: Orientation speed is reached 2: Creep speed is reached 3: Position loop is reached 4: Orientation complete 5: Orientation fault (pulse stop) 6: Orientation fault (orientation limit) 7: Orientation fault (recheck) 8: Continuous multi-point orientation
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
If the position detection value from the encoder enters during orientation stop, the Orientation complete (ORA) signal is output.
Orientation at the running status (under V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control) 1. When the orientation command (X22) turns on, the motor speed decreases to the Pr.351 Orientation speed.
(Pr.351 is initially set to: 2 Hz)
2. After the speed reaches the orientation speed, the speed further decreases to the Pr.352 Creep speed as soon as the current position pulse reaches the Pr.353 Creep switchover position. (Pr.352 is initially set to 0.5 Hz, Pr.353 is initially set to "511".)
3. Moreover, as soon as the current position pulse reaches the Pr.354 Position loop switchover position, control is changed to the position loop. (Pr.354 is initially set to "96".)
4. After the motor moves into the position loop, the motor decelerates and stops by the DC injection brake as soon as the current position pulse reaches the Pr.355 DC injection brake start position. (Pr.355 is initially set to "5".)
5. When the motor stops in Pr.357 Orientation in-position zone, the orientation complete (ORA) signal is output after Pr.363 Completion signal output delay time. If the motor does not stop within the in-position width because of external force, etc., the ORA signal turns OFF after the time set in Pr.363. (Pr.357 is initially set to "5", Pr.363 is initially set to 0.5 s.)
6. If the orientation is not completed continuously in Pr.365 Orientation limit after passing the creep switchover position, the orientation fault signal (ORM) is output.
7. After the orientation starts, if the motor is stopped by external force, etc. before reaching the in-position width and the ORA signal is not output, the ORM signal is output after the Pr.364 Encoder stop check time. If the motor is moved out of the in-position width by external force, etc. after the ORA signal has been output once, the ORA signal turns OFF after the set time in Pr.363. If the orientation is not completed within the time set in Pr.364, the ORM signal is output.
8. If the ORA and ORM signals have been output once, but the start signal (STF or STR) is turned OFF while the X22 signal is ON, the ORA or ORM signal is output again after Pr.366 Recheck time.
9. The ORA and ORM signals cannot be output while the X22 signal is OFF.
Set point
Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses
360 Pr.357
4 times
5915. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
59
NOTE When the orientation command turns OFF while the start signal is ON, the speed accelerates to the command speed.
If hunting of the motor shaft occurs during orientation stop, set a larger value in Pr.354 or a smaller value in Pr.352 to prevent it.
Orientation from the stop status (under V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control)
Turning ON the start signal after turning ON the Orientation command (X22) signal increases the motor speed to the Pr.351 Orientation speed, and then the same orientation operation is performed as the operation shown in "Orientation at the running status".
Note that the DC injection brake operates without increasing to the orientation speed if the position signal is within the DC injection brake start position.
Orientation stop position command DC injection brake
Position loop switchover positionCreep switchover position
Orientation speed Home position
Creep speed
Position loop
Main spindle speed (encoder) Pr.351 Pr.352
Start signal (STF, STR) Orientation command (X22)
Current position signal
Origin signal
Orientation speed (set with Pr.351)
Creep speed (set with Pr.352)
Creep switchover position (set with Pr.353)
Position loop switchover (set with Pr.354)
DC injection brake start position (set with Pr.355) Stop position command
0
DC injection brake OFF OFFON
Orientation complete signal (ORA) OFF OFFON
OFF
OFF Time
ON
OFF ON
1) 2) 3) 4)
5)
Orientation speed (orientation switchover speed)
Creep speed (orientation deceleration ratio)
Time OFF ON
ON
ON
ONOFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Main spindle speed (encoder)
Pr.351 Pr.352
Start signal (STF, STR)
Orientation command (X22)
DC injection brake
Orientation complete signal (ORA)
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Continuous multi-point orientation (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control)
Orientation during orientation operation or start signal is ON
The position data is read at the rising edge of DY. (For the details, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-A8AX). When the position signal is within the creep switchover position, the speed starts up to the creep speed not to the
orientation speed. When the position signal is outside the creep switchover position, the speed starts up to the orientation speed. The DC injection brake operates if the position signal is within the DC injection brake start position. 16-bit data with the FR-A8AX is valid only when the DY signal is ON.
NOTE Couple the encoder with the motor shaft or with the shaft that stops the main shaft at the specified position. Couple it with the
speed ratio of 1:1 and without any mechanical looseness. The DC injection brake operates at orientation stop. Release the DC injection brake as soon as possible (within several
seconds), as continuous operation of the DC injection brake will cause the motor to overheat, leading to burnout. Because the servo lock function is not available after orientation stop, provide a holding mechanism, such as a mechanical
brake or knock pin, when secure holding of the main shaft is required. To ensure correct positioning, the encoder must be set in the proper rotation direction, and the A and B phases must be
connected correctly. If the pulse signal from the encoder stops due to encoder signal loss, etc. during orientation, the Orientation fault (ORM) signal
may be output. When performing orientation control, enable the DC injection brake (refer to page 715). When the DC injection brake is
disabled, orientation operation cannot be completed. When orientation control is performed, the DC injection brake operates regardless of the External DC injection brake operation
start (X13) signal even when Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time = "8888" (DC injection brake external selection). To terminate orientation, the start signal (STF or STR) must be first switched OFF, and then the Orientation command (X22)
signal must be switched OFF. As soon as this X22 signal is switched OFF, orientation control ends. (Depending on the Pr.358 Servo torque selection setting, the orientation status continues if the X22 signal remains ON even if the DC injection brake is released by turning OFF the start signal. Because of this, the orientation status on the monitor does not show "0".)
When the retry function of Pr.358 Servo torque selection is selected, the retry operation is performed three times including the first orientation.
When performing orientation control, properly set Pr.350 Stop position command selection and Pr.360 16-bit data selection (external position command selection). If the values set are incorrect, proper orientation control will not be performed.
When orientation control is performed, PID control is disabled.
DY
Position signal
Servo-in
ON
ON
Position command latch
50ms or more is necessary
Servo-in
ON ON
Position command latch
Main spindle speed (encoder)
Pr.351 Pr.352
Start signal
Orientation command
Orientation complete signal
Orientation speed (orientation switchover speed)
Creep speed (orientation deceleration ratio)
5935. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
59
Servo torque selection (Pr.358) (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control) Function and description
Operation for each Pr.358 setting Remarks
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 a. Servo torque function until output of the Orientation complete (ORA) signal
: With servo torque function. : Without servo torque function.
b. Retry function : With retry function. : Without retry function.
c. Output frequency compensation when the motor stops outside the in-position zone
: With frequency compensation. : Without frequency compensation.
d. DC injection brake and servo torque when the motor exits the in-position zone after output of the Orientation complete (ORA) signal
: DC injection brake enabled. : Servo torque enabled.
e. Turning OFF the Orientation complete (ORA) signal when the orientation operation is ended.
: When the start signal (STF, STR) or orientation command is turned OFF. : When the orientation command is turned OFF.
f. Complete signal when the motor exits the in-position zone after output of the Orientation complete (ORA) signal
: Turns OFF the complete signal when the motor exits the in-position zone. : Complete signal remains ON even if the motor exits the in-position zone (the Orientation fault (ORM) signal is not output).
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When the orientation command turns OFF while the start signal is ON, the motor accelerates to the command speed. When the motor shaft stops outside of the set setting range of the stop position, the motor shaft is returned to the stop position
by the servo torque function (if enough torque is generated).
Position loop gain (Pr.362) (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control)
When the servo torque function is selected using Pr.358 Servo torque selection, the output frequency for generating servo torque gradually increases to the Pr.352 Creep speed according to the slope set in Pr.362 Orientation position loop gain.
Although the operation becomes faster when the value is increased, hunting may occur in the machine.
a. Servo torque function until output of the Orientation complete signal Select whether or not servo torque is available using Pr.358 Servo torque selection. Servo torque is not generated if the current position pulse is in between the orientation stop position and DC injection brake start position. The shaft is fixed using the DC injection brake, and when the motor exits the width by external force, etc., the servo torque is generated to move the motor back within the width. Once the Orientation complete (ORA) signal is output, the operation is performed as described in d.
b. Retry function Select retry function using Pr.358. Note that the retry function cannot be used together with the servo torque function. If the motor shaft does not stop within the in-position zone when the motor stop is checked, orientation operation is performed again by the retry function. This retry function is performed three times including the first orientation. The maximum retry number is three. (The Orientation fault (ORM) signal is not output during retry operation.)
c. Frequency compensation when the motor stops outside the orientation complete width When the motor stops before entering the in-position width due to external force, etc., the output frequency is increased to move the shaft to the orientation stop position. The output frequency is gradually increased to the Pr.352 Creep speed. This function cannot be used with the retry function.
d. DC injection brake and servo torque selection when the position pulse exits the in-position zone after output of the ORA signal If the motor exits the in-position width, select the setting either to fix the shaft with the DC injection brake or by returning the motor to the orientation stop position with the servo torque.
e. Turning OFF the Orientation complete (ORA) signal when the orientation operation is ended. When ending the orientation operation, first turn OFF the start (STF or STR) signal, and then turn OFF the Orientation command X22 signal. At this time, select when to turn OFF the ORA signal from either the time the start signal is turned OFF or the time the orientation command signal is turned OFF.
f. Complete signal when the motor exits the in-position zone after output of the Orientation complete (ORA) signal Select to turn OFF the ORA signal or to keep the ORA signal ON (the ORM signal is not output) when the motor exits the in-position width.
5955. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
59
Description of orientation operation (Vector control) Setting the rotation direction (Pr.393 Orientation selection)
Orientation to the current rotation direction (Pr.393 = "0 (initial value), 10") (Vector control)
When the Orientation command (X22) signal is input, the motor speed decelerates from the running speed to Pr.351 Orientation speed. At the same time, the orientation stop position command is read in. (The stop position command is determined by the setting of Pr.350 Stop position command selection, Pr.360 16-bit data selection.)
When the orientation switchover speed is reached, the encoder Z phase pulse is confirmed, and the control changes from speed control to position control (Pr.362 Orientation position loop gain).
The distance to the orientation stop position is calculated at switching of the control, and the motor decelerates to a stop with a set deceleration pattern (Pr.399 Orientation deceleration ratio) and enters the orientation (servo lock) state.
Once in the Pr.357 Orientation in-position zone, the Orientation complete (ORA) signal is output. The home position can be moved using Pr.361 Position shift.
Orientation to the forward rotation direction (Pr.393 = "1, 11") (Vector control)
This method is used to improve the stopping precision and maintain the mechanical precision when the backlash is large. If the motor is running in the forward rotation direction, it makes an orientation stop with the same method as "orientation
to the current rotation direction".
Pr.393 setting Rotation direction Remarks
0 (initial value) Pre-orientation Orientation is executed to the current rotation direction.
Motor end orientation 1 Forward rotation
orientation
Orientation is executed to the forward rotation direction. (If the motor is running in reverse, orientation is executed to the forward rotation direction after deceleration.)
2 Reverse rotation orientation
Orientation is executed to the reverse rotation direction. (If the motor is running forward, orientation is executed to the reverse rotation direction after deceleration.)
10 Pre-orientation Orientation is executed to the current rotation direction.
Machine end orientation
11 Forward rotation orientation
Orientation is executed to the forward rotation direction. (If the motor is running in reverse, orientation is executed to the forward rotation direction after deceleration.)
12 Reverse rotation orientation
Orientation is executed to the reverse rotation direction. (If the motor is running forward, orientation is executed to the reverse rotation direction after deceleration.)
OFF ONX22
Speed (forward rotation)
OFF ONORA
[t]
OFF ONX22
Speed (reverse rotation)
OFF ONORA
[t]
CAUTION If the X22 is turned OFF while the start signal is input, the motor accelerates toward the speed of the current speed
command. Therefore, to stop, turn the Forward rotation (Reverse rotation) signal OFF.
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
If the motor is running in reverse, it decelerates, change to the forward rotation direction, and then orientation stop is executed.
Orientation to the reverse rotation direction (Pr.393 = "2, 12") (Vector control)
If the motor is running in the reverse rotation direction, it executes an orientation stop with the same method as "orientation to the current rotation direction".
If the motor is running in forward, it decelerates, change to the reverse rotation direction, and then orientation stop is executed.
NOTE Couple the encoder with the motor shaft that stops the shaft at the specified position. Couple it with the speed ratio of 1:1 and
without any mechanical looseness. To ensure correct positioning, the encoder must be set in the proper rotation direction, and the A and B phases must be
connected correctly. If the pulse signal from the encoder stops due to encoder signal loss, etc. during orientation, orientation may not be completed. To terminate orientation, the start (STF or STR) signal must be first switched OFF, and then the Orientation (X22) signal must
be switched OFF. As soon as this X22 signal is switched OFF, orientation control ends. When performing orientation control, properly set Pr.350 Stop position command selection and Pr.360 16-bit data
selection. If the values set are incorrect, proper orientation control will not be performed.
When orientation control is performed, PID control is disabled. If Signal loss detection (E.ECT) is displayed when the X22 signal is ON, causing the inverter to trip, check for a break in the
cable of the Z phase of the encoder.
Servo rigidity adjustment (Pr.362, Pr.396 to Pr.398) (Vector control) To increase the servo rigidity*1 during orientation stop using Pr.396 Orientation speed gain (P term) or Pr.397
Orientation speed integral time, make adjustments with the following procedures.
1. Increase the Pr.362 Orientation position loop gain value to the extent that rocking*2 does not occur during orientation stop.
2. Increase Pr.396 and Pr.397 at the same rate. Normally, adjust Pr.396 in the range from 10 to 100, and Pr.397 from 0.1 to 1.0 s. (Note that these do not need to be set to the same rate.)
Speed (forward rotation)
X22 ORA
[t]
Speed (reverse rotation)
X22 ORA
[t]
Speed (forward rotation)
X22 ORA
[t]
Speed (reverse rotation)
X22 ORA
[t]
5975. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
59
3. Pr.398 Orientation speed gain (D term) is the lag/advance compensation gain.
The limit cycle*3 can be prevented by increasing the value, and operation can be stopped stably. However, the torque decreases in relation to the position deviation, and the motor stops with deviation.
*1 Servo rigidity: The response when a position control loop is configured. When the servo rigidity is raised, the holding force increases and operation becomes stabilized, but vibration occurs more easily. When the servo rigidity is lowered, the holding force decreases, and the settling time increases.
*2 Rocking: Movement in which return occurs when the stopping position is exceeded. *3 Limit cycle: This is a phenomenon that generates continuous vibration centering on the target position.
Application of lag/advance control and PI control PI control can be applied by setting Pr.398 to 0. Normally, use the lag/advance control. PI control should be used when using a machine with a high spindle static friction torque and requires a stop position accuracy.
Pr.399 Orientation deceleration ratio (initial value: 20) (Vector control) Make adjustments, as shown below, according to the orientation status. (Make adjustments in the order of a, b, and c.)
Normally, adjust Pr.362 Orientation position loop gain in the range from 5 to 20, and Pr.399 Orientation deceleration ratio from 5 to 50.
NOTE Orientation stop operation fails, causing an excessive position error, or if the motor performs forward/reverse reciprocation
operation, review the settings of Pr.393 Orientation selection (on page 587) and Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction (on page 586).
Pr.351 Orientation speed (initial value: 2 Hz) (Vector control) Set the speed when switching between the speed control mode and the position control mode is performed under
orientation operation. Decreasing the set speed enables stable orientation stop. Note that the orientation time increases.
NOTE When "19" is set in Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection, the position pulse monitor is displayed instead of the
output voltage monitor on the PU.
Condition Adjustment procedure
Rocking occurs during stopping a. Decrease the Pr.399 setting. b. Decrease the Pr.362 setting. c. Increase the Pr.396 and Pr.397 settings.
The orientation time is long. a. Increase the Pr.399 setting. b. Increase the Pr.362 setting.
Hunting occurs during stopping a. Decrease the Pr.362 setting. b. Decrease the Pr.396 setting and increase the Pr.397 setting.
Low servo rigidity during stopping a. Increase the Pr.396 setting and decrease the Pr.397 setting. b. Increase the Pr.362 setting.
Frequency [Hz]
OFF ONOrientation start (X22)
Orientation complete (ORA)
Encoder Z phase pulse
Pr.351 Orientation speed
Orientation command completion
Decelerate according to the deceleration ratio of Pr.399
Time[t]
ON
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Machine end orientation connection diagram (Vector control) To perform machine end orientation control, the following settings are required.
*1 Single-phase power supply (200 V/50 Hz, 200 to 230 V/60 Hz) is used for the fan for a 7.5 kW or lower dedicated motor. *2 The pin number differs according to the encoder used. *3 Use Pr.178 to Pr.182, Pr.185, or Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal. (Refer to page 521.) *4 Use Pr.190 to Pr.192, or Pr.195 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal. (Refer to page 473.) *5 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio must be 1:1. *6 Earth (ground) the shield of the encoder cable to the enclosure using a tool such as a P-clip. (Refer to page 88.) *7 For the differential line driver, set the terminating resistor selection switch to the ON position. (Refer to page 93.)
Note that the terminating resistor switch should be set to the OFF position (initial status) when sharing the same encoder with another unit (NC, etc.) having a terminating resistor under the differential line driver setting. For the complementary, set the switch to the OFF position.
*8 For terminal compatibility between the FR-A8TP and the FR-JCBL/FR-V7CBL, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8TP. *9 A separate external power supply is necessary according to the encoder power specification. When the encoder output is the differential line
driver type, only 5 V can be input. Make the voltage of the external power supply the same as the encoder output voltage, and connect the external power supply between terminals PG and SD. If using the 24V power supply of the FR-A8TP, 24V power can be supplied from terminal PG24. When performing encoder feedback control and Vector control together, an encoder and power supply can be shared.
*10 When a stop position command is input from outside, a plug-in option FR-A8AX is required. Refer to page 589 for the external stop position command.
*11 To enable terminal OH, set Pr.876 Thermal protector input = "1 (initial value)". (Refer to page 420.)
Encoder orientation gear ratio setting (Pr.394, Pr.395) (Vector control) Set the encoder orientation gear ratio for machine end orientation control.
- Install a plug-in option (FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL or FR-A8APR) and a control terminal option (FR-A8TP) to the inverter, a motor end encoder to the control terminal option, and a machine end encoder to the plug-in option.
- Set "1" in Pr.862 Encoder option selection. - Set Pr.393 Orientation selection = "10 to 12". (Refer to page 596.) - Set the gear ratio by setting Pr.394 Number of machine side gear teeth and Pr.395 Number of motor side gear teeth. (Refer to
page 599.)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
DY
U V W
U V W E
C
X0 X1
X14 X15
R PA3
PAR3
PB3 PBR3
PZ3 PZR3
PG
PG SD
SD
OFF
A N
B P
H K
M
OFF
OFF
STF STR
SD
SD
X22
ORM ORA
SE
FR-A8AX
FR-A8TP
FR-A8AP
SF-V5RU
U V W
U V W E
G1
G2
A
B PA3
PAR3
PB3 PBR3
PZ3 PZR3
PG
PG24 SD
C D
F G
S R
M
FAN
External thermal relay
input
OH
SD
PC
Inverter
FR-A8TP
FR-A8AP
(+) (-)
A
A PA1 PA2
PB1 PB2
PZ1 PZ2
PG
PG SD
SD
B B
Z Z
+ -
(+) (-)
(+) (-)
OFF
A
PA1
PB1
PZ1
PG SD PG SD
B
Z
+ -
MC
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB MC OCR
Machine end encoder (differential line driver)
Machine end encoder
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start Orientation command
Contact input common
Inverter
Differential
Terminating resistor ON
Complementary
Differential
Terminating resistor ON
Complementary
Power supply
Differential
Terminating resistor ON
Complementary
Power supply
Differential
Terminating resistor ON
Complementary
Earth (Ground) Thermal
relay protector
Encoder
Encoder
Encoder
For 24 V complementary type (SF-V5RU)
5 VDC power supply
SF-JR motor with encoder
Encoder
Earth (Ground)
5995. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
60
Set the encoder orientation gear ratio in Pr.394 Number of machine side gear teeth, Pr.395 Number of motor side gear teeth An accurate gear ratio (or pulley ratio) from the motor shaft to the spindle is necessary.
NOTE Pulley ratio: Ratio of vector-driven motor side pulley diameter to spindle side pulley diameter
Setting example (When the numbers of gear teeth are as follows)
Machine end simple orientation control Machine end simple orientation control is available when the FR-A8AL option is installed on the inverter and connected to
a machine end encoder. Both machine end orientation control and encoder feedback control/ Vector control is also enabled at the same time.
Set the orientation speed at the motor end encoder in Pr.351 Orientation speed. Set the rotation direction of the encoder in Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction. If the rotation directions of the motor end
encoder and the machine end encoder differ, set the rotation direction of the motor end encoder. To perform encoder feedback control or Vector control using the machine end encoder, set Pr.369 Number of encoder
pulses with the number of motor end encoder pulses converted from the number of machine end encoder pulses. To enable encoder feedback control or Vector control and machine end orientation control at the same time using the
machine end encoder, set the number of machine end encoder pulses in Pr.829 Number of machine end encoder pulses and "0" in Pr.862 Encoder option selection.
When the number of machine end encoder pulses is 4000 and the gear ratio between motor end and machine end is 4:1 (4 rotations of motor equals one rotation of machine), set the value as Pr.369 = "1000", Pr.829 = "4000" (the number of machine end encoder pulses) according to the following formula,
NOTE For other settings, refer to descriptions of motor end orientation control in this manual.
Set the correct numbers of gear teeth in Pr.394 and Pr.395. Pr.394 = A C E Pr.395 = B D F Exercise care so that the A C E and B D F settings do not exceed 32767. If either or both of them exceed that value, make approximations.
Motor
Spindle A B
C D E
F (A to F indicate the numbers of gear teeth.)
A
Spindle side Motor side
A B
B
A: 15, C: 43, E: 60, B: 10, D: 28, F: 55 Pr.394 = 15 43 60 = 38700 Pr.395 = 10 28 55 = 15400 Since Pr.394 setting exceeds 32767 at this time, make approximations as follows. Pr.394/Pr.395 = 38700/15400=3870/1540
Pr.829 setting Pr.862 setting Description 9999 Machine end simple orientation control invalid Other than 9999 (The number of machine end encoder pulses (before multiplied by four) is set.)
0 Encoder feedback control / Vector control and machine end orientation control at the same time using the machine end encoder is enabled.
1 Machine end simple orientation control invalid
The equivalent of number of motor end encoder pulses = 4000 1/4 = 1000
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.14.10 PID control Process control such as flow rate, air volume or pressure are possible on the inverter. A feedback system can be configured and PID control can be performed using the terminal 2 input signal or parameter setting value as the set point and the terminal 4 input signal as the feedback value.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
127 A612
PID control automatic switchover frequency 9999
0 to 590 Hz Set the value at which control is automatically switched to PID control.
9999 No PID control automatic switchover function
128 A610 PID action selection 0
0, 10, 11, 20, 21, 50, 51, 60, 61, 70, 71, 80, 81, 90, 91, 100, 101, 1000, 1001, 1010, 1011, 2000, 2001, 2010, 2011
Select how to input the deviation value, measured value and set point, and forward and reverse action.
40 to 43 Refer to page 622.
129 A613 PID proportional band 100%
0.1 to 1000%
If a narrow proportional band is set (small parameter setting value), the manipulated amount changes considerably by slight changes in the measured value. As a result, response improves as the proportional band becomes narrower, though stability worsens as shown by the occurrence of hunting. Gain Kp=1/proportional band
9999 No proportional control
130 A614 PID integral time 1 s
0.1 to 3600 s
With deviation step input, this is the time (Ti) used for obtaining the same manipulated amount as proportional band (P) by only integral (I) action. Arrival to the set point becomes quicker the shorter an integral time is set, though hunting is more likely to occur.
9999 No integral control
131 A601 PID upper limit 9999
0 to 100% Set the upper limit. The FUP signal is output when the feedback value exceeds this setting. The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the measured value is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
132 A602 PID lower limit 9999
0 to 100% Set the lower limit. The FDN signal is output when the measured value falls below the setting range. The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/ 10 V) of the measured value is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function 133 A611 PID action set point 9999
0 to 100% Set the set point during PID control. 9999 Set point set by Pr.128.
134 A615 PID differential time 9999
0.01 to 10 s
With deviation ramp input, this is the time (Td) used for obtaining the manipulated amount only by proportional action (P). Response to changes in deviation increase greatly as the differential time increases.
9999 No differential control
553 A603 PID deviation limit 9999
0 to 100% The Y48 signal is output when the absolute value of the deviation exceeds the deviation limit value.
9999 No function
554 A604
PID signal operation selection 0 0 to 3, 10 to 13
The action when the upper or lower limit for a measured value input is detected or when a limit for the deviation is detected can be selected. The operation for PID output suspension function can be selected.
575 A621
Output interruption detection time 1 s
0 to 3600 s When the output frequency after PID calculation stays less than the Pr.576 setting for the time set in Pr.575 or more, the inverter operation is suspended.
9999 No output interruption function 576 A622
Output interruption detection level 0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which output interruption is performed.
577 A623
Output interruption cancel level 1000% 900 to 1100% Level at which the PID output suspension function is released. Set
"Pr.577 - 1000%".
609 A624
PID set point/deviation input selection 2
1 The set point or deviation value is input through terminal 1. 2 The set point or deviation value is input through terminal 2. 3 The set point or deviation value is input through terminal 4. 4 The set point or deviation value is input via communication. 5 The set point or deviation value is input by the PLC function.
6015. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
60
610 A625
PID measured value input selection 3
1 The measured value is input through terminal 1. 2 The measured value is input through terminal 2. 3 The measured value is input through terminal 4. 4 The measured value is input via communication. 5 The measured value is input by the PLC function.
1015 A607
Integral stop selection at limited frequency 0
0 Integral stopped at the limit, manipulation range of 100%, integral cleared during output interruption
1 Integral continued at the limit, manipulation range of 100%, integral cleared during output interruption
2 Integral stopped at the limit, manipulation range of 0 to 100%, integral cleared during output interruption
10 Integral stopped at the limit, manipulation range of 100%, integral stopped during output interruption
11 Integral continued at the limit, manipulation range of 100%, integral stopped during output interruption
12 Integral stopped at the limit, manipulation range of 0 to 100%, integral stopped during output interruption
753 A650
Second PID action selection 0
0, 10, 11, 20, 21, 50, 51, 60, 61, 70, 71, 80, 81, 90, 91, 100, 101, 1000, 1001, 1010, 1011, 2000, 2001, 2010, 2011
Refer to Pr.128.
Set the second PID control. For how to enable the second PID control, refer to page 613.
754 A652
Second PID control automatic switchover frequency
9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 Refer to Pr.127.
755 A651
Second PID action set point 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 Refer to Pr.133.
756 A653
Second PID proportional band 100 0.1 to 1000%,
9999 Refer to Pr.129.
757 A654 Second PID integral time 1 s 0.1 to 3600 s,
9999 Refer to Pr.130.
758 A655
Second PID differential time 9999 0.01 to 10 s, 9999 Refer to Pr.134.
1140 A664
Second PID set point/ deviation input selection 2 1 to 5 Refer to Pr.609.
1141 A665
Second PID measured value input selection 3 1 to 5 Refer to Pr.610.
1143 A641 Second PID upper limit 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 Refer to Pr.131.
1144 A642 Second PID lower limit 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 Refer to Pr.132.
1145 A643
Second PID deviation limit 9999 0 to 100%, 9999
Refer to Pr.553. (The Y205 signal is output.)
1146 A644
Second PID signal operation selection 0 0 to 3, 10 to 13 Refer to Pr.554.
1147 A661
Second output interruption detection time
1 s 0 to 3600 s, 9999 Refer to Pr.575.
1148 A662
Second output interruption detection level
0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Refer to Pr.576.
1149 A663
Second output interruption cancel level 1000% 900 to 1100% Refer to Pr.577.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Basic configuration of PID control Pr.128 ="10, 11" (deviation value signal input)
*1 Set "0" to Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment. When Pr.868 "0", PID control is invalid.
Pr.128 = "20, 21" (measured value input)
*2 Note that the input of terminal 1 is added to the set point of terminal 2 as a set point. *3 Set "0" to Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment. When Pr.858 "0", PID control is invalid.
PID action outline PI action PI action is a combination of proportional action (P) and integral action (I), and applies a manipulated amount according to the size of the deviation and transition or changes over time. [Example of action when the measured value changes in a stepped manner]
(Note) PI action is the result of P and I actions being added together.
PD action PD action is a combination of proportional action (P) and differential action (D), and applies a manipulated amount according to the speed of the deviation to improve excessive characteristics. [Example of action when the measured value changes proportionately]
(Note) PD action is the result of P and D actions being added together.
+- M Deviation signal
Feedback signal (measured value)
Ti S 11+ +Td SKp
PID operation
To outside
Set point
Inverter circuit Motor
Terminal 1 0 to 10 VDC
(0 to 5 V)
Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
Manipulated variable
*1
+- M
Pr.133 or terminal 2
Set point
Terminal 4 0 to 5 VDC (0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA)
4 to 20 mADC (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V)Feedback signal (measured value)
PID operation
Inverter circuit Motor
Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
Manipulated variable
Ti S 11+ +Td SKp
*3
*2
Deviation Set point
Measured value
Time
Time
Time PI action
I action
P action
Deviation
Set point
Measured value
Time
Time
Time
PD
action
D action
P action
6035. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
60
PID action PID action is a combination of PI and PD action, which enables control that incorporates the respective strengths of these actions.
(Note) PID action is the result of all P, I and D actions being added together.
Reverse action When deviation X = (set point - measured value) is a plus value, the manipulated amount (output frequency) is increased, and when the deviation is a minus value, the manipulated amount is decreased.
Forward action When deviation X = (set point - measured value) is a minus value, the manipulated amount (output frequency) is increased, and when the deviation is a plus value, the manipulated amount is decreased.
Relationship between deviation and manipulated amount (output frequency)
PID action setting Deviation
Plus Minus Reverse action Forward action
Deviation
Set point
Measured value
Time
Time
Time PID action
D action
P action
I action Time
y = at2 + bt + c
Set
point
X>0
X<0
Feedback signal
(measured value)
+
-
[Heating]
Deviation Set point
Measured value
Cold
Hot
Increase
Decrease
Set
point
X>0
X<0
Feedback signal
(measured value)
+
-
[Cooling]
Deviation
Set point
Measured value
Too cold
Hot
Decrease
Increase
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Connection diagram
*1 Prepare a power supply matched to the power supply specifications of the detector. *2 The applied output terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). *3 The applied input terminals differ by the settings of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) *4 The AU signal need not be input.
Selection of deviation value, measured value and set point input method, and PID action method (Pr.128, Pr.609, Pr.610)
Using Pr.128, select the input method for the PID set point, measured value detected by the meter, and externally calculated deviation. Also, select forward or reverse action.
Sink logic Pr.128 = 20 Pr.183 = 14 Pr.191 = 47 Pr.192 = 16 Pr.193 = 14 Pr.194 = 15
Power supply
MCCB Inverter
Forward rotation Reverse rotation PID control selection
Setting Potentiometer (Set point setting)
0 24V Power supply 1
AC1 200/220V 50/60Hz
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
STF
STR
RT(X14)3
SD
10
2
5
4
U V W
2(FUP)FU 2(FDN)OL
SE
(Measured value) 4 to 20mA
Motor
M
Pump
P
Upper limit 2(PID)SU During PID action
Lower limit
Output signal common
2-wire type
Detector 3-wire type
+-
(24V)
2(RL)IPF
1 (COM)
Forward rotation output Reverse rotation output
-+ +
(OUT) 4
6055. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
60
Switch the power voltage/current specifications of terminals 2 and 4 by Pr.73 Analog input selection or Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection to match the specification of the input device. After changing the Pr.73 or Pr.267 settings, check the voltage/current input selection switch. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure, or malfunction. (Refer to page 496 for the setting.)
*1 When Pr.133 "9999", the Pr.133 setting is valid. *2 CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network, or LONWORKS communication is available. For details on communication, refer to the Instruction Manual of
each option. *3 For details on the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.
The set point/deviation input method can also be flexibly selected by Pr.609 PID set point/deviation input selection and the measured value input method can be selected by Pr.610 PID measured value input selection. Selection by Pr.609 and Pr.610 is valid when Pr.128 = "1000 to 2011".
*4 When the same input method has been selected for the set point and measured value at Pr.609 and Pr.610, set point input is invalid. (Inverter runs at set point 0%)
*5 CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network, or LONWORKS communication is available. For details on communication, refer to the Instruction Manual of each option.
Pr.128 setting
Pr.609 Pr.610 PID action Set point input Measured value input Deviation input
0
Invalid
PID invalid 10 Reverse action
Terminal 1 11 Forward action 20 Reverse action
Terminal 2 or Pr.133*1 Terminal 4 21 Forward action 40 to 43 Enabled Dancer control For details on dancer control, refer to page 622. 50
Invalid
Reverse action Communication*2
51 Forward action 60 Reverse action
Communication*2 Communication*2 61 Forward action 70 Reverse action
PLC function (applied to the frequency)*371 Forward action
80 Reverse action PLC function (applied to the frequency)*3
PLC function (applied to the frequency)*3
81 Forward action 90 Reverse action
PLC function (not applied to the frequency)*391 Forward action
100 Reverse action PLC function (not applied to the frequency)*3
PLC function (not applied to the frequency)*3
101 Forward action
1000
Enabled
Reverse action According to Pr.609*1 According to Pr.610
1001 Forward action 1010 Reverse action
According to Pr.609 1011 Forward action
2000 Reverse action (without frequency reflected)
According to Pr.609*1 According to Pr.610 2001 Forward action (without
frequency reflected)
2010 Reverse action (without frequency reflected)
According to Pr.609 2011 Forward action (without
frequency reflected)
Pr.609 to Pr.610 settings Input method 1 Terminal 1*4
2 Terminal 2*4
3 Terminal 4*4
4 Communication*5
5 PLC function
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When terminals 2 and 4 are selected for deviation input, perform bias calibration using C3 and C6 to prevent a minus voltage
from being entered as the deviation input signal. Input of a minus voltage might damage devices and the inverter.
The following shows the relationship between the input values of the analog input terminals and set point, measured value and deviation. (Calibration parameter initial values)
*6 Can be changed by Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection and the voltage/current input switch. (Refer to page 496.)
NOTE Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input specification with Pr.73 and Pr.267, and the voltage/current
input selection switch.
Input/output signals Assigning the PID control valid signal (X14) to the input terminal by Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)
enables PID control to be performed only when the X14 signal is turned ON. When the X14 signal is OFF, regular inverter running is performed without PID action. (When the X14 signal is not assigned, PID control is enabled only by setting Pr.128 "0".)
Input signal
Input terminal Input specification*6
Relationship with analog input Calibration parameter
Set point Result Deviation
Terminal 2
0 to 5 V 0 V = 0% 5 V = 100%
0 V = 0% 5 V = 100%
0 V = 0% 5 V = 100%
Pr.125, C2 to C40 to 10 V 0 V = 0% 10 V = 100%
0 V = 0% 10 V = 100%
0 V = 0% 10 V = 100%
0 to 20 mA 0 mA = 0% 20 mA = 100%
0 mA = 0% 20 mA = 100%
0 mA = 0% 20 mA = 100%
Terminal 1
0 to 5 V -5 to 0 V = 0% +5 V = +100%
-5 to 0 V = 0% +5 V = +100%
-5 V = -100% 0 V = 0% +5 V = +100%
When Pr.128 = "10", Pr.125 setting, C2 to C4. When Pr.128 "1000": C12 to C15.0 to 10 V -10 to 0 V = 0%
+10 V = +100% -10 to 0 V = 0% +10 V = +100%
-10 V = -100% 0 V = 0% +10 V = +100%
Terminal 4
0 to 5 V 0 to 1 V = 0% 5 V = 100%
0 to 1 V = 0% 5 V = 100%
0 V = -20% 1 V = 0% 5 V = 100%
Pr.126, C5 to C70 to 10 V 0 to 2 V = 0% 10 V = 100%
0 to 2 V = 0% 10 V = 100%
0 V = -20% 2 V = 0% 10 V = 100%
0 to 20 mA 0 to 4 mA = 0% 20 mA = 100%
0 to 4 mA = 0% 20 mA = 100%
0 mA = -20% 4 mA = 0% 20 mA = 100%
Signal Function Pr.178 to
Pr.189 setting
Description
X14 PID control valid 14 When this signal is assigned to the input terminal, PID control is enabled when this signal is ON.X80 Second PID control valid 80
X64 PID forward/reverse action switchover 64
PID control is switched between forward and reverse action without changing parameters by turning ON this signal.
X79 Second PID forward/ reverse action switchover
79
X72 PID P control switchover 72 Integral and differential values can be reset by turning ON this signal.
X73 Second PID P control switchover 73
6075. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
60
Output signal
NOTE Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal.
PID automatic switchover control (Pr.127) The system can be started up more quickly by starting up without PID control activated. When Pr.127 PID control automatic switchover frequency is set, the startup is made without PID control until the output
frequency reaches the Pr.127 setting. Once the PID control starts, the PID control is continued even if the output frequency drops to Pr.127 setting or lower.
Operation selection and sleep function stop selection when a value error is detected (FUP signal, FDN signal, Y48 signal, Pr.554)
Using Pr.554 PID signal operation selection, set the action when the measured value input exceeds the upper limit (Pr.131 PID upper limit) or lower limit (Pr.132 PID lower limit), or when the deviation input exceeds the permissible value (Pr.553 PID deviation limit).
Choose whether to output the signals (FUP, FDN, Y48) only or to activate the protective function to output the inverter shutoff.
Signal Function
Pr.190 to Pr.196 setting
Description Positive
logic Negative
logic FUP PID upper limit 15 115 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr.131 PID upper limit
(Pr.1143 Second PID upper limit).FUP2 Second PID upper limit 201 301 FDN PID lower limit 14 114 Output when the measured value signal falls below Pr.132 PID lower limit
(Pr.1144 Second PID lower limit).FDN2 Second PID lower limit 200 300
RL PID forward/reverse rotation output 16 116 "Hi" is output when the output display of the parameter unit is forward rotation
(FWD) and "Low" is output when the display is reverse rotation (REV) and stop (STOP).RL2 Second PID forward/
reverse rotation output 202 302
PID During PID control activated 47 147 Turns ON during PID control.
When the PID calculation result is reflected to the output frequency (Pr.128 < "2000"), the PID signal turns OFF at turn OFF of the start signal. When the PID calculation result is not reflected to the output frequency (Pr.128 "2000"), the PID signal turns ON during PID calculation regardless of the start signal status.
PID2 During second PID control activated 203 303
Y48 PID deviation limit 48 148 Output when the absolute deviation value exceeds the limit value set in Pr.553 PID deviation limit (Pr.1145 Second PID deviation limit).Y205 Second PID deviation
limit 205 305
SLEEP PID output interruption 70 170 Set Pr.575 Output interruption detection time (Pr.1147 Second output interruption detection time) "9999". This signal turns ON when the PID output suspension function is activated.SLEEP2 During second PID
output shutoff 204 304
Output frequency
Pr.127
STF Time
PID
PID control Without PID control
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The stop action when the inverter output is shut off by the sleep function can be selected.
*1 When each of Pr.131, Pr.132 and Pr.553 settings corresponding to each of the FUP, FDN and Y48 signals is "9999" (no function), signal output and protective function are not available.
PID output suspension function (sleep function) (SLEEP signal, Pr.575 to Pr.577)
When a status where the output frequency after PID calculation is less than Pr.576 Output interruption detection level has continued for the time set in Pr.575 Output interruption detection time or longer, inverter running is suspended. This allows the amount of energy consumed in the inefficient low-speed range to be reduced.
When the deviation (set point - measured value) reaches the PID output shutoff release level (Pr.577 setting value -1000%) while the PID output suspension function is activated, the PID output suspension function is released, and PID control operation is automatically restarted.
Whether to allow motor to coast to a stop or perform a deceleration stop when sleep operation is started can be selected using Pr.554.
While the PID output suspension function is activated, the PID output interruption (SLEEP) signal is output. During this time, the Inverter running (RUN) signal turns OFF and the During PID control activated (PID) signal turns ON.
For the terminal used for the SLEEP signal, set "70 (positive logic)" or "170 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
Pr.554 setting Inverter operation
At FUP/FDN signal output*1 At Y48 signal output*1 At sleep operation start 0 (initial value) Signal output only
Signal output only Coasts to stop
1 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID) 2 Signal output only
Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID) 3 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID) 10 Signal output only
Signal output only Deceleration stop
11 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID) 12 Signal output only
Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID) 13 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)
Output frequency
Deviation When Pr.554="0 to 3", reverse operation (Pr.128="10")
Pr.576
Pr.577 - 1000% Cancel level
RUN
Time
ON
OFF
SLEEP
Less than Pr.575 Pr.575 or more SLEEP period
PID
6095. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
61
*1 When the PID output shutoff release level is reached during a deceleration stop, output shutoff is released, operation is re-accelerated and PID control is continued. During deceleration, Pr.576 Output interruption detection level is invalid.
Integral stop selection when the frequency is limited (Pr.1015) The operation for the integral term can be selected when the frequency or the manipulated amount is limited during PID
control. The operation during output suspension can be selected for the integral term using the PID output suspension (sleep) function.
The manipulation range can be selected.
NOTE While the integral stop is selected, the integral stop is enabled when any of the following conditions is met.
PID monitor function This function displays the PID control set point, measured value and deviation on the operation panel, and can output these
from the terminals FM/CA and AM. An integral value indicating a negative % can be displayed on the deviation monitor. 0% is displayed as 1000. (These
values cannot be output on the deviation monitor from terminals FM and CA.)
Pr.1015 setting Operation at limited frequency Range of manipulation Operation during output
interruption 0 (initial value) Integral stop
-100% to +100% Integral clear1 Integral continuation
2 Integral stop 0 to 100% 10 Integral stop
-100% to +100% Integral stop11 Integral continuation
12 Integral stop 0 to 100%
Integral stop conditions The frequency reaches the upper or lower limit. The manipulated amount reaches plus or minus 100% (Pr.1015 = "0 or 10"). The manipulated amount reaches 0% or 100% (Pr.1015 = "2 or 12").
Output frequency
Pr.576
RUN
Time
ON
OFF
SLEEP
Deceleration stop
PID
When Pr.554="10 to 13", reverse operation (Pr.128="10")
Deviation
Pr.577 - 1000% Cancel level
Less than Pr.575 Pr.575 or more SLEEP period
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Set the following values to Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection, Pr.774 to Pr.776 (Operation panel monitor selection), Pr.992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection, Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection and Pr.158 AM terminal function selection for each monitor.
*1 When C42 (Pr.934) and C44 (Pr.935) are set, the minimum increment changes from unit % to no unit, and the monitor range can be changed. (Refer to page 615.)
*2 When the minus value display is set disabled using Pr.290, the terminal AM output becomes "0".
Adjustment procedure 1. Enable PID control
When Pr.128 "0", PID control is enabled. Set the set point, measured value and deviation input methods at Pr.128, Pr.609 and Pr.610.
2. Setting the parameter Adjust the PID control parameters of Pr.127, Pr.129 to Pr.134, Pr.553, Pr.554, Pr.575 to Pr.577.
3. Terminal setting Set the I/O terminals for PID control. (Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection))
4. Turn the X14 signal ON When the X14 signal is assigned to the input terminal, PID control is enabled by the X14 signal turning ON.
5. Operation
Parameter Setting
Monitor description
Minimum increment
Monitor range RemarksTerminal FM/
CA Terminal
AM Operation
panel 52 PID set point
0.1% 0 to 100%*1
"0" is displayed at all times when PID control is based in deviation input.
92 Second PID set point/deviation input selection
53 PID measured value
0.1% 0 to 100%*1
93 Second PID measured value
67 PID measured value 2
0.1% 0 to 100%*1
Displays PID measured value even if the PID control operating conditions are not satisfied while the PID control is enabled. "0" is displayed at all times when PID control is based in deviation input.
95 Second PID measured value 2
54 PID deviation
0.1% Setting not available
-100% to 100%*1*2
900% to 1100% or -100% to 100%*1
Using Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection, negative values can be output to the terminal AM and displayed with a minus sign on the operation panel (FR-DU08). When signed indication is invalid, the indicated values are from "900%" to "1100%" on the operation panel. (0% is offset and displayed as "1000%".)
94 Second PID deviation
91 PID manipulated amount
0.1% Setting not available
-100% to 100%*2
900% to 1100% or -100% to 100%
96 Second PID manipulated amount
6115. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
61
Calibration example (Adjust room temperature to 25C by PID control using a detector that outputs 4 mA at 0C and 20 mA at 50C.)
*1 When calibration is required Calibrate detector output and set point input by Pr.125, C2 (Pr.902) to C4 (Pr.903) (terminal 2) or Pr.126, C5 (Pr.904) to C7 (Pr.905) (terminal 4). (Refer to page 505.) When both C42 (Pr.934) and C44 (Pr.935) are other than "9999", calibrate the detector output and set point input by Pr.934 and Pr.935 (terminal 4). (Refer to page 615.) Make calibration in the PU operation mode during an inverter stop.
Calibrating set point input (Example: To enter the set point on terminal 2)
1. 1. Apply the input (for example, 0 V) of set point setting 0% across terminals 2 and 5.
2. Using C2 (Pr.902), enter the frequency (for example, 0 Hz) to be output by the inverter when the deviation is 0%.
3. Using C3 (Pr.902), set the voltage value at 0%.
4. Apply the input (for example, 5 V) of set point setting 100% across terminals 2 and 5.
5. Using Pr.125, enter the frequency (for example, 60 Hz) to be output by the inverter when the deviation is 100%.
6. Using C4 (Pr.903), set the voltage value at 100%.
Detector specifications When 0C 4mA and 50C 20mA are used, the set point 25C is 50% on the assumption that 4mA is 0% and 20mA is 100%.
Start
Determination of set point
Conversion of set point into %
Make calibration.
Setting of set point
Operation
Is the set point stable?
Parameter adjustment Parameter optimization
Adjustment end
Yes
No
Determine the set point of what is desired to be adjusted.
Calculate the ratio of the set point to the detector output.
Input a voltage across terminals 2-5 according to the set value %.
To stabilize the measured value, change the proportional band (Pr. 129) to a larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130) to a slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr. 134) to a slightly shorter time.
While the measured value is stable throughout the operation status, the proportional band (Pr. 129) may be decreased, the integral time (Pr. 130) decreased, and the differential time (Pr. 134) may be increased.
Set the proportional band (Pr. 129) to a slightly larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130) to a slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr. 134) to "9999" (no function), and turn ON the start signal.
Set the room temperature to 25C.
Make the following calibration1 when the target setting input (0 to 5 V) and detector output (4 to 20mA) must be calibrated.
When performing operation, first set the proportional band (Pr. 129) to a slightly larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130) to a slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr. 134) to "9999" (no function), and while looking at the system operation, decrease the proportional band (Pr. 129) and increase the integral time (Pr. 130). For slow response system where a deadband exists, differential control (Pr. 134) should be turned ON and increased slowly.
To set the set point to 50% using voltage input The terminal 2 specification is 0 V for 0%, and 5 V for 100%. Thus, to set to 50%, input 2.5 V to the terminal 2.
To set the set point to 50% using parameters Set Pr.133 = "50". (If C42 (Pr.934) and C44 (Pr.935) "9999", set "25 (no % conversion)" directly in Pr.133.)
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When the set point is set at Pr.133, the setting frequency of C2 (Pr.902) is equivalent to 0% and the setting frequency of Pr.125
(Pr.903) is equivalent to 100%.
Measured value input calibration
1. Apply the input (for example, 4 mA) of measured value 0% across terminals 4 and 5.
2. Perform calibration by C6 (Pr.904).
3. Apply the input (for example, 20 mA) of measured value 100% across terminals 4 and 5.
4. Perform calibration by C7 (Pr.905).
NOTE Set the frequencies set at C5 (Pr.904) and Pr.126 to each of the same values set at C2 (Pr.902) and Pr.125. The display unit for analog input can be changed from "%" to "V" or "mA". (Refer to page 507.)
The following figure shows the results of having performed the calibration above.
Setting multiple PID functions When the second PID function is set, two sets of PID functions can be switched for use. The PID setting is selected as
shown in the following table.
*1 While Pr.155 = "0", the second function is enabled immediately after the RT signal turns ON. While Pr.155 = "10", the second function is enabled only during constant speed operation when the RT signal turns ON. (For the details, refer to page 525.)
*2 When dancer control is selected, the setting is not applied to the frequency.
100
0
0 5 (V)
(%)
[Set point setting]
100
0
0 20 (mA)
(%)
[Measured value]
4
60
0 0 100 Deviation (%)
[Manipulated variable] Manipulated variable (Hz)
Pr.128 setting (first PID setting)
Pr.753 setting (second PID setting) Pr.155 setting*1 RT signal PID setting applied to the output
frequency "0" or not applied to the frequency
"0" or not applied to the frequency Control other than PID control
"0" or not applied to the frequency Applied to the frequency Second PID setting
Applied to the frequency "0" or not applied to the frequency First PID setting
Applied to the frequency Applied to the frequency 0
OFF First PID setting ON Second PID setting
10 First PID setting Dancer control Not applied to the frequency*2 Dancer control
6135. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
61
The parameters and signals for the second PID function are in the same way as the following parameters and signals of the first PID function. Refer to the first PID function when setting the second PID functions.
Classification First PID function parameters Second PID function parameters
Pr. Name Pr. Name
Parameter
127 PID control automatic switchover frequency 754 Second PID control automatic
switchover frequency 128 PID action selection 753 Second PID action selection 129 PID proportional band 756 Second PID proportional band 130 PID integral time 757 Second PID integral time 131 PID upper limit 1143 Second PID upper limit 132 PID lower limit 1144 Second PID lower limit 133 PID action set point 755 Second PID action set point 134 PID differential time 758 Second PID differential time 553 PID deviation limit 1145 Second PID deviation limit 554 PID signal operation selection 1146 Second PID signal operation selection
575 Output interruption detection time 1147 Second output interruption detection
time
576 Output interruption detection level 1148 Second output interruption detection
level 577 Output interruption cancel level 1149 Second output interruption cancel level
609 PID set point/deviation input selection 1140 Second PID set point/deviation input
selection
610 PID measured value input selection 1141 Second PID measured value input
selection
Classification First PID function parameters Second PID function parameters
Signal Name Signal Name
Input signal
X14 PID control valid X80 Second PID control valid
X64 PID forward/reverse action switchover X79 Second PID forward/reverse action
switchover X72 PID P control switchover X73 Second PID P control switchover
Output signal
FUP PID upper limit FUP2 Second PID upper limit FDN PID lower limit FDN2 Second PID lower limit
RL PID forward/reverse rotation output RL2 Second PID forward/reverse rotation
output PID During PID control activated PID2 During second PID control activated SLEEP PID output interruption SLEEP2 During second PID output shutoff Y48 PID deviation limit Y205 Second PID deviation limit
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE Even if the X14 signal is ON, PID control is stopped and multi-speed or JOG operation is performed when the multi-speed
operation (RH, RM, RL, or REX) signal or JOG signal (JOG operation) is input. PID control is invalid under the following settings.
Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "6" (Switchover mode) Note that input to the terminal 1 is added to the terminals 2 and 4 inputs. For example when Pr.128 = "20 or 21", the terminal
1 input is considered as a set point and added to the set point of the terminal 2. To use terminal 4 and 1 inputs in PID control, set "0" (initial value) to Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment and Pr.868
Terminal 1 function assignment. When a value other than "0", PID control is invalid. Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal. When PID control is selected, the minimum frequency becomes the frequency of Pr.902 and the maximum frequency becomes
the frequency of Pr.903. (The Pr.1 Maximum frequency and Pr.2 Minimum frequency settings also are valid.)
During PID operation, the remote operation function is invalid. When control is switched to PID control during normal operation, the frequency during that operation is not carried over, and
the value resulting from PID calculation referenced to 0 Hz becomes the command frequency.
Parameters referred to Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 377 Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 496 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473 Pr.290 Monitor negative output selectionpage 457 C2 (Pr.902) to C7 (Pr.905) Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gainpage 505
5.14.11 Changing the display increment of numerical values used in PID control
When the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) is used, the display unit of parameters and monitor items related to PID control can be changed to various units.
PID action
Frequency command
PID set point
Frequency command during normal operation
ON
Operation when control is switched to PID control during normal operation
Normal operation PID operation Normal operation
6155. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
61
*1 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the LCD operation panel and the parameter unit.
Calibration of PID display bias and gain (C42 (Pr.934) to C45 (Pr.935)) When both C42 (Pr.934) and C44 (Pr.935) "9999", the bias and gain values for the set point, measured value and
deviation in PID control can be calibrated. "Bias"/"gain" function can adjust the relation between PID displayed coefficient and measured value input signal that is
externally input. Examples of these measured value input signals are 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mADC. (The terminals used for measured value input can be selected at Pr.128, Pr.609, Pr.610.)
Set the value that is displayed when the PID measured value (control amount) is 0% to C42 (Pr.934) and the value that is displayed when the PID measured value (control amount) is 100% to C44 (Pr.935).
When both of C42 (Pr.934) and C44 (Pr.935) "9999" and Pr.133 is set as the set point, the setting of C42 (Pr.934) is treated as 0%, and C44 (Pr.935) as 100%.
There are three methods to adjust the PID display bias/gain.
(Refer to page 505 for details, and make the necessary adjustments by considering C7 (Pr.905) as C45 (Pr.935) and Pr.126 as C44 (Pr.935).)
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
759 A600 PID unit selection 0
0 to 43 Change the unit of the PID control-related values that is displayed on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07).
9999 Without display unit switching
C42 (934) A630*1 PID display bias coefficient 9999
0 to 500 Set the coefficient of the bias side (minimum) of measured value input.
9999 Displayed in %. C43 (934) A631*1 PID display bias analog value 20% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the bias side (minimum) current/voltage
of measured value input.
C44 (935) A632*1 PID display gain coefficient 9999
0 to 500 Set the coefficient of the gain side (maximum) of measured value input.
9999 Displayed in %. C45 (935) A633*1 PID display gain analog value 100% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the gain side (maximum) current/voltage
of measured value input.
1136 A670
Second PID display bias coefficient 9999
0 to 500 Refer to C42 (934).
Second PID control
9999 1137 A671
Second PID display bias analog value 20% 0 to 300% Refer to C43 (934).
1138 A672
Second PID display gain coefficient 9999
0 to 500 Refer to C44 (935).
9999 1139 A673
Second PID display gain analog value 100% 0 to 300% Refer to C45 (935).
1142 A640 Second PID unit selection 9999 0 to 43,
9999 Refer to Pr.759.
100
0 0 0 0
Frequency setting signal
100% 20mA
5V 10V
C45 (Pr.935)
Initial value
Bias C42 (Pr.934)
Gain C44 (Pr.935)
20 4 1 2
C43 (Pr.934)
C oe
ffi ci
en t
Method to adjust any point by application of a current (voltage) to the measured value input terminal Method to adjust any point without application of a current (voltage) to the measured value input terminal Method to adjust only the display coefficient without adjustment of current (voltage)
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input specification with Pr.73 and Pr.267, and the voltage/current
input selection switch.
Take caution when the following condition is satisfied because the inverter recognizes the deviation value as a negative (positive) value even though a positive (negative) deviation is given: Pr.934 (PID bias coefficient) > Pr.935 (PID gain coefficient). To perform a reverse action, set Pr.128 PID action selection to forward action. Alternatively, to perform a forward action, set Pr.128 to reverse action. In this case, the PID output shutoff release level is (1000 - Pr.577).
(Example) Set the following: Pr.934 = "500" or 20% (4 mA is applied), Pr.935 = "100" or 100% (20 mA is applied). When the set point = 400 and the measured value = 360, the deviation is +40 (>0), but the inverter recognizes the deviation as -10% (<0). Because of this, operation amount does not increase in the reverse operation setting. The operation amount increases when the forward operation is set. To perform PID output shutoff release at deviation of +40 or higher, set Pr.577 = "960".
The display of the following parameters is changed according to the C42 (Pr.934), C44 (Pr.935), Pr.1136, and Pr.1138 settings.
Changing the PID display coefficient of the LCD operation panel (FR- LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) (Pr.759)
Use Pr.759 PID unit selection to change the unit of the displayed value on the FR-LU08 or the FR-PU07. For the coefficient set in C42 (Pr.934) to C44 (Pr.935), the units can be changed as follows.
Pr.934 < Pr.935 (normal setting) Pr.934 Pr.935 Reverse action Reverse action setting to Pr.128 Reverse action Forward action setting to Pr.128 Forward action Forward action setting to Pr.128 Forward action Reverse action setting to Pr.128 PID output shutoff release level Pr.577 - 1000 PID output shutoff release level 1000 - Pr.577
0 100%
500
20%
100
400 360
(0%) (25%) (35%) (100%)
Set point Measured valueDeviation +40
Deviation -10%
* ( ) indicates the deviation value which the inverter can recognize
Pr. Name Pr. Name 131 PID upper limit 1143 Second PID upper limit 132 PID lower limit 1144 Second PID lower limit 133 PID action set point 755 Second PID action set point 553 PID deviation limit 1145 Second PID deviation limit 577 Output interruption cancel level 1149 Second output interruption cancel level 761 Pre-charge ending level 766 Second pre-charge ending level 763 Pre-charge upper detection level 768 Second pre-charge upper detection level
6175. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
61
5.14.12 PID Pre-charge function This function drives the motor at a certain speed before starting PID control. This function is useful for a pump with a long hose, since PID control would start before the pump is filled with water, and proper control would not be performed without this function,
Pr.759 setting Unit indication Unit name Pr.759 setting Unit
indication Unit name
9999 % % 21 CMS Cubic Meter per Second 0 (No indication) 22 ftM Feet per Minute 1 K Kelvin 23 ftS Feet per Second 2 C Degree Celsius 24 m/M Meter per Minute 3 F Degree Fahrenheit 25 m/S Meter per Second 4 PSI Pound-force per Square Inch 26 lbH Pound per Hour 5 MPa Mega Pascal 27 lbM Pound per Minute 6 kPa Kilo Pascal 28 lbS Pound per Second 7 Pa Pascal 29 iWC Inch Water Column 8 bar Bar 30 iWG Inch Water Gauge 9 mbr Millibar 31 fWG Feet of Water Gauge 10 GPH Gallon per Hour 32 mWG Meter of Water Gauge 11 GPM Gallon per Minute 33 iHg Inches of Mercury 12 GPS Gallon per Second 34 mHg Millimeters of Mercury 13 L/H Liter per Hour 35 kgH Kilogram per Hour 14 L/M Liter per Minute 36 kgM Kilogram per Minute 15 L/S Liter per Second 37 kgS Kilogram per Second 16 CFH Cubic Feet per Hour 38 ppm Pulse per Minute 17 CFM Cubic Feet per Minute 39 pps Pulse per Second 18 CFS Cubic Feet per Second 40 kW Kilowatt 19 CMH Cubic Meter per Hour 41 hp Horse Power
20 CMM Cubic Meter per Minute 42 Hz Hertz 43 rpm Revolution per Minute
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
760 A616 Pre-charge fault selection 0
0 Fault indication with output shutoff immediately after pre-charge fault occurs.
1 Fault indication with deceleration stop after pre-charge fault occurs. 761 A617 Pre-charge ending level 9999
0 to 100% Set the measured amount to end the pre-charge operation. 9999 Without pre-charge ending level
762 A618 Pre-charge ending time 9999
0 to 3600 s Set the time to end the pre-charge operation. 9999 Without pre-charge ending time
763 A619
Pre-charge upper detection level 9999
0 to 100% Set the upper limit for the pre-charged amount. A pre-charge fault occurs when the measured value exceeds the setting during pre- charging.
9999 Without Pre-charge upper detection level
764 A620 Pre-charge time limit 9999
0 to 3600 s Set the time limit for the pre-charged amount. A pre-charge fault occurs when the pre-charge time exceeds the setting.
9999 Without Pre-charge time limit 765 A656
Second pre-charge fault selection 0 0, 1 Refer to Pr.760.
Set the second pre-charge function. The second pre-charge function is valid when the RT signal is ON.
766 A657
Second pre-charge ending level 9999 0 to 100%,
9999 Refer to Pr.761.
767 A658
Second pre-charge ending time 9999 0 to 3600 s,
9999 Refer to Pr.762.
768 A659
Second pre-charge upper detection level 9999 0 to 100%,
9999 Refer to Pr.763.
769 A660 Second pre-charge time limit 9999 0 to 3600 s,
9999 Refer to Pr.764.
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation selection for the pre-charge function To enable the pre-charge function when PID control is enabled, set the pre-charge end conditions at Pr.761 Pre-charge
ending level and at Pr.762 Pre-charge ending time, or set "77" to Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection). When operation is started, the inverter runs at the frequency set to Pr.127 PID control automatic switchover frequency to enter the pre-charge state.
Pre-charge ends and PID control starts after a pre-charge ending condition is satisfied. The pre-charge function is also activated at a start after release of a PID output suspension (sleep) state or MRS (output
shutoff). The PID output suspension (sleep) function is not activated until the started pre-charge operation ends. During pre-charge operation, the During pre-charge operation (Y49) signal is output. For the terminal used for the Y49
signal output, set "49 (positive logic)" or "149 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function.
The pre-charge function valid/invalid settings and pre-charge ending conditions are as follows:
*1 When two or more ends conditions are satisfied, the pre-charge operation ends by the first-satisfied condition.
NOTE During the pre-charge operation, it is regarded as integrated value = estimated value. The motor speed may drop shortly from
the automatic switchover frequency depending on the parameter settings. Parameter changes and switchover to the second PID control are applied immediately. If PID control has not started when the
settings were changed, PID control starts with changed settings. (If PID control has already started, these settings do not apply. If the changed settings already satisfies a condition to start PID control, the PID control starts as soon as these are changed.)
The pre-charge also ends when PID control is set to invalid, the start command has been turned OFF, and output has been shut off.
Example of the pre-charge operation When the measured amount reaches the pre-charge ending level (Pr.761 Pre-charge ending level "9999")
The pre-charge operation ends when the measured value reaches the Pr.761 setting or higher, then the PID control is performed.
Pr.127 setting Pre-charge ending condition setting Pre-charge
function Valid pre-charge ending condition*1 Pr.761 setting Pr.762 setting X77 signal
9999 Disabled
Other than 9999
9999 9999
Not assigned Assigned
Enabled
X77
Other than 9999 Not assigned Time Assigned Time X77
Other than 9999 9999
Not assigned Result Assigned Result X77
Other than 9999 Not assigned Result Time Assigned Result Time X77
Pr.127
0Hz STF
PID control
Pr.761 Measured value[PSI]
Output frequency[Hz]
Y49
Ending level
Time
Time
6195. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
62
When the elapsed time reaches the pre-charge ending time (Pr.762 Pre-charge ending time "9999") The pre-charge operation ends when the pre-charge time reaches the Pr.762 setting or higher, then the PID control is performed.
When the signal is input to end the pre-charge operation
NOTE When the PID output suspension (sleep) function is in use, and the X77 signal is set to valid after this function is released, set
the X77 signal to OFF after checking that the during the During pre-charge operation (Y49) signal is OFF. When the PID output suspension (sleep) function is in use, and PID control is to be performed immediately after this function
is released, leave the X77 signal ON until PID control ends. When the pre-charge operation is valid, the pre-charge operation is performed at the output shutoff cancellation (MRS signal,
etc.). (The pre-charge operation is also performed in the case of instantaneous power failure when the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is valid.)
When the control method is changed to PID control from a control with higher priority in frequency command (multi-speed setting, JOG operation, etc.), the motor is accelerated/decelerated until its speed reaches the automatic switchover frequency (Pr.127), and the pre-charge is performed.
Operation setting at pre-charge fault The protective function can be activated when limit values are exceeded if the time limit is set at Pr.764 Pre-charge time
limit and the measured value limit level is set at Pr.763 Pre-charge upper detection level. Whether to shut off output immediately after the protective function is activated or after a deceleration stop can be selected
by Pr.760 Pre-charge fault selection. (Pre-charge protective function is effective regardless of the setting of pre-charge ending conditions.)
When the time limit is exceeded, the Pre-charge time over (Y51) signal is output. When the measured value limit level is exceeded, the Pre-charge level over (Y53) signal is output. For the Y51 signal, set "51 (positive logic)" or "151 (negative logic)" to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection), and for the Y53 signal, set "53 (positive logic)" or "153 (negative logic)" in Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the functions to terminals.
NOTE For Pr.764 Pre-charge time limit, set a value greater than Pr.762 Pre-charge ending time. For Pr.763 Pre-charge upper detection level, set a value greater than Pr.761 Pre-charge ending level.
Pr.127
0Hz
STF
PID controlPr.762
Output frequency[Hz]
Y49
Ending time
Time
When the X77 signal turns ON, the pre-charge operation ends, and the PID control starts. (If a start command is given while the X77 signal is ON, the pre-charge operation is not performed, and PID control starts.)
X77
Pr.127
0Hz
STF
PID control
Output frequency[Hz]
Y49
Time
10ms or more
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Example of protective function by time limit (Pr.760 = "0")
Example of protective function measured value limit (Pr.760 = "1")
Setting multiple PID pre-charge functions When the second pre-charge function is set, two sets of pre-charge functions can be switched for use. The second pre-
charge function is enabled by the turning ON RT signal. The second pre-charge function parameters and signals function in the same way as the following parameters and signals
of the first pre-charge function. Refer to the first pre-charge function when setting the second pre-charge functions.
Output frequency[Hz]
Pr.761
Pr.127
0Hz STF
Measured value[PSI]
Y49
Pr.764
Y51
ALM
Time
Time
Ending level
E.PCH
When Pr.760 = "0", output is immediately shut off.
Pr.127
0Hz STF
Output frequency[Hz]
Y49
Pr.763
Measured value[PSI]
Y53
ALM
When Pr.760 = "1", output is shut off after the motor decelerates to a stop.
Time
Time
E.PCH
Classification First pre-charge function parameters Second pre-charge function parameters
Pr. Name Pr. Name
Parameter
760 Pre-charge fault selection 765 Second pre-charge fault selection 761 Pre-charge ending level 766 Second pre-charge ending level 762 Pre-charge ending time 767 Second pre-charge ending time 763 Pre-charge upper detection level 768 Second pre-charge upper detection level 764 Pre-charge time limit 769 Second pre-charge time limit
Classification First pre-charge function parameters Second pre-charge function parameters
Signal Name Signal Name Input signal X77 Pre-charge end command X78 Second pre-charge end command
Output signal Y49 During pre-charge operation Y50 During second pre-charge operation Y51 Pre-charge time over Y52 Second pre-charge time over Y53 Pre-charge level over Y54 Second pre-charge level over
6215. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
62
NOTE The second PID pre-charge function is valid also when the first pre-charge function is set to invalid and the second pre-charge
function is set. When "10" (second function enabled only during constant-speed operation) is set to Pr.155, the second PID function is not
selected even if the RT signal turns ON.
5.14.13 Dancer control PID control is performed using detected dancer roll position as feedback data. The dancer roll is controlled to be at a designated position.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
44 F020
Second acceleration/ deceleration time 5 s 0 to 3600 s
Set the acceleration/deceleration time during dancer control. In dancer control, this parameter becomes the acceleration/deceleration time of the main speed. This setting does not operate as the second acceleration/deceleration time.
45 F021
Second deceleration time 9999
0 to 3600 s
Set the deceleration time during dancer control. In dancer control, this parameter becomes the deceleration time of the main speed. This setting does not operate as the second deceleration time.
9999 Pr.44 is the deceleration time.
128 A610 PID action selection 0
0 No PID action 40 PID reverse action Additive method: Fixed
For dancer control 41 PID forward action Additive method: Fixed 42 PID reverse action Additive method: Ratio 43 PID forward action Additive method: Ratio Others Refer to page 601.
129 A613 PID proportional band 100%
0.1 to 1000%
If a narrow proportional band is set (small parameter setting value), the manipulated amount changes considerably by slight changes in the measured value. As a result, response improves as the proportional band becomes narrower, though stability worsens as shown by the occurrence of hunting. Gain Kp=1/proportional band
9999 No proportional control
130 A614 PID integral time 1 s
0.1 to 3600 s
With deviation step input, this is the time (Ti) used for obtaining the same manipulated amount as proportional band (P) by only integral (I) action. Arrival to the set point becomes quicker the shorter an integral time is set, though hunting is more likely to occur.
9999 No integral control
131 A601 PID upper limit 9999
0 to 100%
Set the upper limit. The FUP signal is output when the feedback value exceeds this setting. The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
132 A602 PID lower limit 9999
0 to 100%
Set the lower limit. The FDN signal is output when the measured value (terminal 4) falls below the setting range. The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the measured value is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function 133 A611 PID action set point 9999
0 to 100% Set the set point during PID control. 9999 Input of set point by terminal selected by Pr.609
134 A615 PID differential time 9999
0.01 to 10 s
With deviation ramp input, this is the time (Td) used for obtaining the manipulated amount only by proportional action (P). Response to changes in deviation increase greatly as the differential time increases.
9999 No differential control
609 A624
PID set point/deviation input selection 2
1 The set point is input through terminal 1. 2 The set point is input through terminal 2. 3 The set point is input through terminal 4. 4 The set point is input via communication 5 The set point is input by the PLC function.
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Block diagram of dancer control
*1 The main speed can be selected in all operation modes, External (analog voltage input, multi-speed), PU (digital frequency setting) and Communication (RS-485).
Outline of dancer control Dancer control is performed by setting "40 to 43" in Pr.128 PID action selection. The main speed command is the speed
command for each operation mode (External, PU, and communication). PID control is performed by the dancer roll position detection signal, and the control result is added to the main speed command. For the main speed acceleration/deceleration time, set the acceleration time to Pr.44 Second acceleration/deceleration time and the deceleration time to Pr.45 Second deceleration time.
610 A625
PID measured value input selection 3
1 The measured value is input through terminal 1. 2 The measured value is input through terminal 2. 3 The measured value is input through terminal 4. 4 The measured value is input via communication. 5 The measured value is input by the PLC function.
1134 A605
PID upper limit manipulated value 100% 0 to 100% Set the upper limit of PID action.
1135 A606
PID lower limit manipulated value 100% 0 to 100% Set the lower limit of PID action.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Limit
Ratio
Acceleration/deceleration of main speed
Main speed command *1
Dancer roll setting point Pr.133
Terminal 4
Potentiometer
Dancer roll position detection
PID control
PID deviation
PID feedbackPID set point
Target frequency
X14
Pr.128 = 40, 41
Pr.128 = 42, 43
Acceleration/ deceleration
+
- Kp(1+ +Td S)Ti S
1
Convert to 0 to 100%
M
+ +
STF
PID adding value
Main speed
ON
Output frequency
Time
Output frequency
6235. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
62
NOTE Normally, set Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time to 0 s. When the Pr.7 and Pr.8 settings are large, dancer
control response becomes slow during acceleration/deceleration. The Pr.127 PID control automatic switchover frequency setting is enabled. The larger setting value between Pr.7 and
Pr.44 is used as the acceleration time during normal operation. For the deceleration time, the larger setting value between Pr.8 and Pr.45 is used. (For details on Pr.127, refer to page 601.)
If an automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is activated during dancer control, E.OC[] or E.OV[] is likely to occur. In such case, disable the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr.57 = "9999").
Connection diagram
*1 The main speed command differs according to each operation mode (External, PU, communication). *2 The applied output terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). *3 The applied input terminals differ by the settings of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection). *4 The AU signal need not be input.
Dancer control operation selection (Pr.128)
*1 When Pr.133 "9999", the Pr.133 setting is valid.
To enable dancer control, set "40 to 43" in Pr.128 PID action selection. Dancer control is enabled only when the PID control valid (X14) signal turns ON when "14" is set in one of Pr.178 to Pr.182
(Input terminal function selection) and X14 signal is assigned. When the X14 signal is not assigned, dancer control is enabled only by the Pr.128 setting.
Input the main speed command (External, PU, Communication). Dancer control is also supported by the main speed command in all operation modes.
Input the set point between the terminals 2 and 5 (the setting can be selected using Pr.133 or Pr.609) and input the measured value signal (dancer roll position detection signal) between the inverter terminals 4 and 5 (the setting can be selected using Pr.610).
The action of Pr.129 PID proportional band, Pr.130 PID integral time, Pr.131 PID upper limit, Pr.132 PID lower limit and Pr.134 PID differential time is the same as PID control action. In the relationship between the control amount (%) and frequency in PID control, 0% and 100% are equivalent to the frequencies set to Pr.902 and Pr.903, respectively.
Sink logic Pr.128 = 41 Pr.182 = 14 Pr.193 = 14 Pr.194 = 15 Pr.133 = Set point
Power supply
MCCB Inverter
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
PID control selection
Main speed command setting potentiometer 1
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
STF
STR
RH(X14) 3
SD
10
2
5
4 4
U V W
2 (FUP)FU
SE
Motor
IM
Upper limit
2 (FDN)OL Lower limit
Output signal common Feedback value of dancer roll position
Pr.128 setting PID action Additive method Set point input Measured value input 0 PID disabled 40 Reverse action
Fixed Set by Pr.133 or input by terminal selected by Pr.609*1
Input by terminal selected by Pr.610
41 Forward action 42 Reverse action
Ratio 43 Forward action Others Refer to page 601.
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When Pr.128 is set to "0" or the X14 signal is OFF, regular inverter running not dancer control is performed. Dancer control is enabled by turning ON/OFF the bits of terminals assigned the X14 signal by RS-485 communication or over
the network. When dancer control is selected, set the PID output suspension function (Pr.575 Output interruption detection time =
"9999"). When Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level "9999", terminal 2 cannot be used for the main speed command. Terminal
2 becomes the PTC thermistor input terminal.
Selection of set point/measured value input method (Pr.609, Pr.610) Select the set point input method by Pr.609 PID set point/deviation input selection and the measured value input
method by Pr.610 PID measured value input selection. Switch the power voltage/current specifications of terminals 2 and 4 by Pr.73 Analog input selection or Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection to match the specification of the input device.
When Pr.133 PID action set point "9999", Pr.133 is the set point. When the set point is set at Pr.133, the setting frequency of Pr.902 is equivalent to 0% and the setting frequency of Pr.903 is equivalent to 100%.
*1 When the same input method has been selected for the set point and measured value at Pr.609 and Pr.610, set point input is invalid. (Inverter runs at set point 0%)
*2 CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network, or LONWORKS communication is available. For details on communication, refer to the Instruction Manual of each option.
NOTE After changing the Pr.73 or Pr.267 settings, check the voltage/current input selection switch. Incorrect setting may cause a
fault, failure or malfunction. (Refer to page 496 for the setting.) When terminals 2 and 4 are selected for deviation input, perform bias calibration using C3 and C6 to prevent a minus voltage
from being entered as the deviation input signal. Input of a minus voltage might damage devices and the inverter.
The following shows the relationship between the input values of the analog input terminals, and the set point and measured value.
*3 Can be changed by Pr.73 and Pr.267 and the voltage/current input switch. (Refer to page 496.)
Pr.609, Pr.610 settings Input method 1 Terminal 1*1
2 Terminal 2*1
3 Terminal 4*1
4 Communication*2
5 PLC function
Input terminal Input specification*3
Relationship with analog input Calibration parameter
Set point Result
Terminal 2
0 to 5 V 0 V = 0% 5 V = 100%
0 V = 0% 5 V = 100%
Pr.125, C2 to C40 to 10 V 0 V = 0% 10 V = 100%
0 V = 0% 10 V = 100%
0 to 20 mA 0 mA = 0% 20 mA = 100%
0 mA = 0% 20 mA = 100%
Terminal 1 0 to 5 V -5 to 0 V = 0%
+5 V = +100% -5 to 0 V = 0% +5 V = +100% When Pr.128 = "10", Pr.125 setting, C2 to C4.
When Pr.128 "1000", C12 setting, C2 to C15. 0 to 10 V -10 to 0 V = 0%
+10 V = +100% -10 to 0 V = 0% +10 V = +100%
Terminal 4
0 to 5 V 0 to 1 V = 0% 5 V = 100%
0 to 1 V = 0% 5 V = 100%
Pr.126, C5 to C70 to 10 V 0 to 2 V = 0% 10 V = 100%
0 to 2 V = 0% 10 V = 100%
0 to 20 mA 0 to 4 mA = 0% 20 mA = 100%
0 to 4 mA = 0% 20 mA = 100%
6255. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
62
Selection of additive method for PID calculation result When ratio is selected as the additive method (Pr.128 = "42, 43"), PID calculation result (ratio of main speed) is added
to the main speed. The ratio is determined by the Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency and C2 (Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency settings. In the initial status, 0 to 60 Hz is set for 0 to 100%. Thus, 60 Hz main speed is regarded as 100%, and the 30 Hz main speed is regarded as 50%.
NOTE Even if C4 (Pr.903) is set to other than 100%, the frequency setting signal is treated as 100%. Even if C3 (Pr.902) is set to other than 0%, the frequency setting signal is treated as 0%. If C2 (Pr.902) is set to other than 0 Hz, the frequency setting signal is 0% at the C2 (Pr.902) frequency setting or below.
Setting the upper and lower limits of the PID manipulated amount (Pr.1134, Pr.1135)
Set the upper and lower limits of the PID manipulated amount. The upper limit of the manipulated amount is the frequency obtained by adding the value resulting from frequency
conversion of Pr.1134 to the main speed. The lower limit of the manipulated amount is the frequency obtained by subtracting the value resulting from frequency conversion of Pr.1135 from the main speed.
Input/output signals The following signals can be used by assigning functions to Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) and
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). Input signal
0 Frequency setting signal 100%
Initial value
Bias Pr.125 Gain
C2(Pr.902)
60Hz Output frequency
Main speed
Upper limit of PID manipulated amount
Lower limit of PID manipulated amount
Output frequency considering upper/lower limit
of PID manipulated amount
Output frequency
Time
Signal Function Pr.178 to
Pr.189 setting
Description
X14 PID control valid 14 When this signal is assigned to the input terminal, PID control is enabled when this signal is ON.
X64 PID forward/ reverse action switchover
64 PID control is switched between forward and reverse action without changing parameters by turning ON this signal.
X72 PID P control switchover 72 Integral and differential values can be reset by turning ON this signal.
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Output signal
NOTE Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal.
PID monitor function This function displays the PID control set point and measured value on the operation panel, and can output these from the
terminals FM, AM, and CA. Set the following values to Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection, Pr.774 to Pr.776 (Operation panel monitor
selection), Pr.992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection, Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection and Pr.158 AM terminal function selection for each monitor.
NOTE Refer to page 610 for details on other PID control monitors.
Priority of main speed commands The priority of main speed command sources when the speed command source is External is as follows:
JOG signal > multi-speed setting signal (RL/RM/RH/REX) > pulse train input > 16-bit digital input (option FR-A8AX) > analog input (terminals 2, 4, 1)
The priority of main speed command sources when "3" is set to Pr.79 Operation mode selection is as follows: Multi-speed setting signal (RL/RM/RH/REX) > frequency setting (digital setting by PU or operation panel)
Even if the remote operation function is selected by Pr.59 Remote function selection "0", compensation of the remote setting frequency against the main speed is ignored. (The value is "0".)
If terminal 1 is selected for the first and second PID, terminal 1 added compensation of the main speed is invalid. If terminal 2 is selected for the first and second PID, the terminal 2 override function of the main speed is invalid. If the same terminal as an external input terminal having a speed command source (external terminal where a main speed
is input) is specified as the measured value input or set point input, the main speed is treated as "0". Polarity reversible operation of the main speed is not possible. Setting "10 to 17" in Pr.73 Analog input selection enables the polarity reversible operation of the main speed command
to which PID manipulated amount added. (Polarity reversible operation of the main speed command without addition is not possible.)
When the polarity reversible operation is enabled, the integral term cannot be limited by the maximum and minimum frequency when Pr.1015 Integral stop selection at limited frequency = "0 or 10".
Signal Function
Pr.190 to Pr.196 setting
Description Positive
logic Negative
logic
FUP PID upper limit 15 115 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr.131 PID upper limit (Pr.1143 Second PID upper limit).
FDN Lower limit output 14 114 Output when the measured value signal falls below Pr.132 PID lower limit (Pr.1144 Second PID lower limit).
RL PID forward/reverse rotation output 16 116
"Hi" is output when the output display of the parameter unit is forward rotation (FWD) and "Low" is output when the display is reverse rotation (REV) and stop (STOP).
PID During PID control activated 47 147 Turns ON during PID control.
Parameter Setting
Monitor description
Minimum increment
Monitor range RemarksTerminal
FM/CA Terminal
AM Operation
panel
97 Dancer main set speed 0.01 Hz. 0 to 590 Hz
When outputting through terminals FM, CA and AM, the full scale value can be adjusted by Pr.55 Frequency monitoring reference.
6275. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
62
Adjustment procedure for dancer roll position detection signal When the input of terminal 4 is voltage input, 0 V and 5 V (10 V) are the lower limit position and upper limit position,
respectively (initial value). When it is current input, 4 mA and 20 mA are the lower limit position and upper limit position, respectively (initial value). When the potentiometer has an output of 0 to 7 V, C7 (Pr.905) must be calibrated at 7 V.
(Example) To execute control at the dancer center position using a 0 to 7 V potentiometer
1. Switch the current/voltage input selection switch to "OFF", set "2" to Pr.267 and set terminal 4 input to voltage input.
2. Input 0 V across terminals 4 and 5, and calibrate C6 (Pr.904). (The % display that is indicated at analog calibration is not related to the % of the feedback value.)
3. Input 7 V across terminals 4 and 5, and calibrate C6 (Pr.905). (The % display that is indicated at analog calibration is not related to the % of the feedback value.)
4. Set Pr.133 to "50%".
NOTE After changing the Pr.267 setting, check the voltage/current selection switch. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction. (Refer to page 496 for the setting.) If the Multi-speed operation (RH, RM, RL, or REX) signal, or JOG signal is input during regular PID control, PID control is
interrupted. However, at dancer control, these signals are treated as main speed commands, so PID control is continued. During dancer control, Pr.44 and Pr.45 (Second acceleration/deceleration time) is the parameter for setting the acceleration/
deceleration time for the main speed command. This function does not work as a second function. When the switchover mode is set by setting "6" to Pr.79, dancer control (PID control) is invalid. The acceleration/deceleration action of the main speed command is the same as that when the frequency is increased or
decrease by analog input. The SU signal sometimes stays ON even if operation is turned ON/OFF by the start signal. The set frequency monitor is the value "main speed command + PID control" which is constantly changing.
With the main speed setting frequency setting, acceleration/deceleration is performed for the acceleration/deceleration time set in Pr.44 and Pr.45, and with the output frequency setting, acceleration/deceleration is performed for the acceleration/ deceleration time set in Pr.7 and Pr.8. For this reason, with the output frequency, when the time set in Pr.7 and Pr.8 is longer than the time set in Pr.44 and Pr.45, acceleration/deceleration is performed for the acceleration/deceleration time set in Pr.7 and Pr.8.
The limit of the integral term is the smaller of 100% and the value after conversion of the straight line after interpolation of Pr.1 Maximum frequency by Pr.902 and Pr.903 to the PID manipulated amount. However, note that the lower limit frequency limits the output frequency, but does not restrict the action of the integral item.
Parameters referred to Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628 Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 377 Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 496 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473 Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection levelpage 415 C2 (Pr.902) to C7 (Pr.905) Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gainpage 505
5.14.14 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start with an induction motor
The inverter can be restarted without stopping the motor operation in the following situations:
5V(10V)
0V
20mA
4mA 0%
Feedback value Potentiometer, etc.Lower limit
position
Upper limit position
100%
V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When switching from commercial power supply operation over to inverter running When an instantaneous power failure occurs during inverter running When the motor is coasting at start
*1 The coasting time when Pr.57 = "0" is as shown below. (When Pr.162 and Pr.570 are set to the initial value.) FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00052(1.5K) or lower: 0.5 s FR-A820-00167(2.2K) to FR-A820-00490(7.5K) and FR-A840-00083(2.2K) to FR-A840-00250(7.5K): 1 s FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K): 3.0 s FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher: 5.0 s
To operate the inverter with the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function enabled, check the following points.
Set Pr.57 Restart coasting time = "0". When the Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start (CS) signal is assigned to the input
terminal, restart operation is enabled at turn-ON of the CS signal.
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function
The inverter output is shut off at the activation of the Instantaneous power failure (E.IPF) or Undervoltage (E.UVT). (Refer to page 788 for E.IPF or E.UVT.)
When E.IPF or E.UVT is activated, the Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage (IPF) signal is output. The IPF signal is assigned to terminal IPF in the initial status. By setting "2 (positive logic) or 102 (negative logic)" in any
of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection), the IPF signal can be assigned to another terminal.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
162 A700
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection
0
0, 1000 Frequency search only performed at the first start 1, 1001 Reduced voltage start only at the first start (no frequency search) 2, 1002 Encoder detection frequency search 3, 1003 Frequency search only performed at the first start (reduced impact restart) 10, 1010 Frequency search at every start 11, 1011 Reduced voltage start at every start (no frequency search) 12, 1012 Encoder detection frequency search at every start 13, 1013 Frequency search at every start (reduced impact restart)
299 A701
Rotation direction detection selection at restarting
0
0 Rotation direction detection disabled 1 Rotation direction detection enabled
9999
When Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection = "0", with rotation direction detection When Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection= "1 or 2", without rotation direction detection
57 A702 Restart coasting time 9999
0 Coasting time differs according to the inverter capacity.*1
0.1 to 30 s Set the time delay for the inverter to perform a restart after restoring power due to an instantaneous power failure.
9999 No restart 58 A703 Restart cushion time 1 s 0 to 60 s Set the voltage cushion time for restart.
163 A704
First cushion time for restart 0 s 0 to 20 s Set the voltage cushion time for restart.
Consider this matched to the size of the load amount (moment of inertia/ torque).164
A705 First cushion voltage for restart 0% 0 to 100%
165 A710
Stall prevention operation level for restart 150% 0 to 400% Set the stall prevention level at restart operation on the assumption that the
inverter rated current is 100%.
611 F003
Acceleration time at a restart 9999
0 to 3600 s Set the acceleration time to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency at restart.
9999 Standard acceleration time (for example, Pr.7) is applied as the acceleration time at restart.
ONPower supply OFF
15 to 100 ms
ONIPF OFF
1
1 10 to 100 ms for IP55 compatible models
6295. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
63
When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, motor driving is resumed at the power restoration after an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage. (E.IPF and E.UVT are not activated.)
Connection (CS signal)
Restart is enabled at turn-ON of the Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start (CS) signal.
The inverter operation is disabled at turn-OFF of the CS signal while Pr.57 Restart coasting time "9999" (with restart). Separated converter types detect the instantaneous power failure on the converter unit side. Perform wiring so that the IPF
signal transmitted from the converter unit is input to the terminal to which the X11 signal is assigned. On the converter unit side, enable the restart operation. (For setting the converter unit, refer to the Instruction Manual of the converter unit.)
For the terminal used for the X10 or X11 signal, set "10" (X10) or "11" (X11) in Pr.178 to Pr.189 and assign the function. (For separated converter types, the X10 signal is assigned to the terminal MRS in the initial setting.)
For the X10 signal of separated converter types, NC contact input specification is selected in the initial setting. Set Pr.599 = "0" to change the input specification to NO contact.
NOTE The CS signal is assigned to terminal CS in the initial setting. By setting "6" to any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection), the CS signal can be assigned to other terminals. Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
If the CS signal is not assigned to any input terminal, solely setting Pr.57 enables the restart operation at all times.
STF
M
MCCB
CS SD
CS SD
S1/L21 R1/L11 T/L3 S/L2 R/L1
MC1
MC2
W V U
MC switchover sequence
For use for only automatic restart after instantaneous power failure or flying start, turn ON the CS signal in advance.
With electronic bypass sequence
Only with restart after instantaneous power failure
MC3
Converter unit Inverter
RDA X10 IPF X11
CS SE SD
Separated converter type
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Setting for the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation (Pr.162)
The Pr.162 settings and the instantaneous power failure automatic restart operation under each operation mode are as shown in the following table.
Restart operation with frequency search (Pr.162 = "0, 3, 10, 13, 1000, 1003, 1010, or 1013", Pr.299)
When Pr.162 = "0 (initial value), 3, 10, 13, 1000, 1003, 1010, or 1013", the motor speed is detected at a power restoration so that the motor can re-start smoothly.
The encoder also detects the rotation direction so that the inverter can re-start smoothly even during the reverse rotation. Whether or not to detect the rotation direction can be selected by Pr.299 Rotation direction detection selection at
restarting. If the motor capacity is different from the inverter capacity, set Pr.299 = "0" (no rotation direction detection). When the rotation direction is detected, the following operation is performed according to Pr.78 Reverse rotation
prevention selection setting.
: With rotation direction detection : Without rotation direction detection
Pr.162 setting
Restart timing
Automatic restart operation selection after instantaneous power failure CS signal command
source selection
V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector
control Real sensorless vector control
Vector control
PM sensorless vector control
Without encoder With encoder 0 (initial value)
At first start
Frequency search Frequency search
Frequency search (reduced impact restart)
Encoder detection frequency search
Frequency search for PM motor (Refer to page 635.)
Always External
1 Reduced voltage start
Reduced voltage start
2 Frequency search Encoder detection frequency search
3 Frequency search (reduced impact restart)
Frequency search (reduced impact restart)
10
At every start
Frequency search Frequency search
11 Reduced voltage start
Reduced voltage start
12 Frequency search Encoder detection frequency search
13 Frequency search (reduced impact restart)
Frequency search (reduced impact restart)
1000
At first start
Frequency search Frequency search
Determined by the Pr.338 setting
1001 Reduced voltage start
Reduced voltage start
1002 Frequency search Encoder detection frequency search
1003 Frequency search (reduced impact restart)
Frequency search (reduced impact restart)
1010
At every start
Frequency search Frequency search
1011 Reduced voltage start
Reduced voltage start
1012 Frequency search Encoder detection frequency search
1013 Frequency search (reduced impact restart)
Frequency search (reduced impact restart)
Pr.299 setting Pr.78 setting
0 1 2 9999 0 (initial value) 1
6315. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
63
By setting "3, 13, 1003, or 1013" in Pr.162, the restart can be made smoother with even less impact than when "0, 10, 1000, or 1010" is set in Pr.162. When the inverter is restarted with "3, 13, 1003, or 1013" set in Pr.162, offline auto tuning is required. (For details on offline auto tuning of Advanced magnetic flux vector control and Real sensorless vector control, refer to page 532, and for details on offline auto tuning of V/F control, refer to page 638.)
NOTE The rotation speed detection time (frequency search) changes according to the rotation speed of the motor. (maximum 1 s) When the inverter capacity is two ranks or greater than the motor capacity, the overcurrent protective function (E.OC[]) is
sometimes activated and prevents the inverter from restarting. If two or more motors are connected to one inverter, this function operates abnormally. (The inverter does not restart
successfully.) Because a DC injection brake is applied instantaneously at speed detection during a restart, the speed might drop if the
moment of inertia (J) of the load is small. If reverse operation is detected when "1" (reverse rotation disabled) is set to Pr.78, operation decelerates by reverse rotation
and then changes to forward rotation when the start command is forward rotation. The inverter does not restart when the start command is reverse rotation.
When "3, 13, 1003, or 1013" is set to Pr.162, limit the wiring length to within 100 m.
Restart operation without frequency search (Pr.162 ="1, 11, 1001, or 1011")
When Pr.162 = "1 11, 1001, or 1011", reduced voltage start is used for the restart operation. In this method, the voltage is raised gradually while keeping the output frequency level at the level before an instantaneous power failure, regardless of the motor's coasting speed.
Instantaneous (power failure) time Power supply (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Motor speed N (r/min)
Inverter output frequency f(Hz)
Inverter output voltage E(V)
Coasting time (Pr.57)
Speed detection time
+
Acceleration time at a restart (Pr.611 setting)
Restart cushion time (Pr.58 setting)
*
* The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.
V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control Instantaneous (power failure) time
Power supply (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Motor speed N (r/min)
Inverter output frequency f(Hz) output voltage E(V)
Coasting time (Pr.57)
Speed detection time
+ Acceleration time at a restart (Pr.611 setting)
*
Real sensorless vector control
* The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.
Instantaneous (power failure) time
Coasting time Pr.57 setting Restart cushion time
(Pr.58 setting)
Power supply (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) Motor speed N (r/min)
Inverter output frequency f(Hz)
Inverter output voltage E(V)
* The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.
*
V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE This restart method uses the output frequency that was active before the instantaneous power failure stored in memory. If the
instantaneous power failure time is 0.2 s or more, the output frequency can no longer be stored and held in memory, so the restart is performed from Pr.13 Starting frequency (initial value: 0.5 Hz).
During Real sensorless vector control, Pr.162 is set to "3, 13, 1003, or 1013" (reduced impact restart).
Restart operation with encoder detection frequency search (Pr.162 = "2, 12, 1002, or 1012")
When "2, 12, 1002, or 1012" is set in Pr.162 by encoder feedback control, the inverter is restarted by the motor speed and direction of rotation that were detected by the encoder at the power restoration.
By encoder detection frequency search, the Pr.299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting setting are invalid.
NOTE When "2, 12, 1002, or 1012" are set in Pr.162 when encoder feedback control is invalid, the automatic restart is with a
frequency search (Pr.162 = "0, 10, 1000, or 1010"). In Vector control, encoder detection frequency search is used regardless of the Pr.162 setting. The Pr.58 and Pr.299 settings
are invalid at this time. For the encoder feedback control, refer to page 736.
Restart at every start (Pr.162 ="10 to 13, or 1010 to 1013") When "10 to 13, or 1010 to 1013" is set in Pr.162, a restart operation is performed at each start and automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure (after the time period set in Pr.57 elapsed). When "0 (initial value) to 3, or 1000 to 1003" is set in Pr.162, a restart operation is performed at the first start after a power-ON, and from the second power-ON onwards, a start from the starting frequency is performed.
Automatic restart operation of the MRS (X10) signal The restart operation after restoration from output shutoff by the MRS (X10) signal is as shown in the following table
according to the Pr.30 setting.
NOTE When output is shut off using safety stop function (terminals S1 and S2), the inverter restarts in the same way as when output
is shut off by the MRS (X10) signal.
Adjustment of restart coasting time (Pr.57) Restart coasting time is the time period from the occurrence of instantaneous power failure until the operation is restarted
after power is restored. With frequency search, the motor speed is detected and operation is restarted after the coasting time.
Instantaneous (power failure) time Power supply (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Motor speed N (r/min)
Inverter output frequency f(Hz) Output voltage E(V)
Coasting time (Pr.57)
Acceleration time at a restart (Pr.611)
The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.
Restart cushion time (Pr.58)
Pr.30 setting Operation after restoration from output shutoff by the MRS (X10) signal 2, 10, 11, 102, 110, 111 Restart operation (starting from the coasting speed) Other than the above Starting from Pr.13 Starting frequency.
6335. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
63
To enable restart operation, set "0" to Pr.57 Restart coasting time. If "0" is set to Pr.57, the coasting time is automatically set to the following number of seconds. Generally, this setting does not interfere with inverter operation.
Inverter operation is sometimes hindered by the size of the moment of inertia (J) of the load, output frequency, or the residual magnetic flux in the motor. Adjust this coasting time within the range 0.1 to 30 seconds to match the load specification.
Set 3 seconds or more time delay when the sine wave filter is used (Pr.72 PWM frequency selection = "25").
NOTE Note that the coasting time setting is different from that of the FR-A700 series inverter. (Refer to page 856.)
Restart cushion time (Pr.58) The cushion time is the time taken to raise the voltage to the level required for the specified speed after the motor speed
detection (output frequency before the instantaneous power failure when Pr.162 = "1, 11, 1001, or 1011"). Normally, the motor runs at the initial value as it is. However, adjust to suit the moment of inertia (J) of the load or the size
of the torque.
NOTE Pr.58 is invalid under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control.
Pr.570 setting
Pr.162 setting
200 V class FR-A820-[] 00046 (0.4K)
00077 (0.75K)
00105 (1.5K)
00167 (2.2K)
00250 (3.7K)
00340 (5.5K)
00490 (7.5K)
00630 (11K)
00770 (15K)
00930 (18.5K)
01250 (22K)
01540 (30K)
01870 (37K)
02330 (45K)
03160 (55K)
03800 (75K)
04750 (90K)
400 V class: FR-A840-[]
00023 (0.4K)
00038 (0.75K)
00052 (1.5K)
00083 (2.2K)
00126 (3.7K)
00170 (5.5K)
00250 (7.5K)
00310 (11K)
00380 (15K)
00470 (18.5K)
00620 (22K)
00770 (30K)
00930 (37K)
01160 (45K)
01800 (55K)
02160 (75K)
02600 (90K) or higher
0 (SLD), 1 (LD)
Other than 3, 13, 1003, 1013
0.5 0.5 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5
3, 13, 1003, 1013
1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5
2 (ND)
Other than 3, 13, 1003, 1013
0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5
3, 13, 1003, 1013
1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5
3 (HD)
Other than 3, 13, 1003, 1013
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5
3, 13, 1003, 1013
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5
Instantaneous power failure (interruption) time
Coasting time Pr.57 setting
Power supply (R/L1S/L2T/L3)
Inverter output frequency f (Hz)
Interruption Pr.57 settingInterruption > Pr.57 setting Instantaneous power failure (interruption) time
Coasting time Pr.57 setting
Power supply (R/L1S/L2T/L3)
Inverter output frequency f (Hz)
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Adjustment of restart operation (Pr.163 to Pr.165, Pr.611) The voltage cushion time at a restart can be adjusted by Pr.163 and Pr.164 as shown in the figure on the left.
The stall prevention operation level at a restart operation can be set in Pr.165. Using Pr.611, the acceleration time to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency after a restart
operation can be set. This can be set individually from the normal acceleration time.
NOTE Pr.163 to Pr.165 are invalid under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control. Changing the Pr.21 setting does not affect the Pr.611 setting increment. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. When the restart operation is selected, Undervoltage (E.UVT) and Instantaneous power failure (E.IPF) of the fault output
signals become invalid. The SU and FU signals are not output during the restart. These signals are output after the restart cushion time passes. Restart operation is also performed after the inverter reset is released or after the retry by the retry function occurs. The automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is invalid when the load torque high-speed frequency control
(Pr.270 = "2, 3, or 13") is set.
Operation command source selection for the CS signal during communication operation (Pr.162 = "1000 to 1003, 1010 to 1013")
When "1000 to 1003, or 1010 to 1013" is set in Pr.162, the CS signal input via communication is enabled depending on the setting in Pr.338 Communication operation command source. (When Pr.162 = "0 to 3, or 10 to 13", the CS signal can be input via an external terminal only.)
Parameters referred to Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time incrementspage 367 Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381, page 382 Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 Retry functionpage 426 Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selectionpage 406 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
5.14.15 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start with a PM motor
When using the IPM motor MM-CF, the inverter operation can be restarted without stopping the motor operation. When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, the motor driving is resumed in the following situations:
Voltage
100%
Pr.164
(Pr.163) Pr.58 Time
CAUTION Provide a mechanical interlock for MC1 and MC2. The inverter will be damaged if power supply is input to the
inverter output section. When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, the motor suddenly starts
(after reset time passes) when an instantaneous power failure occurs. Stay away from the motor and machinery. Apply the supplied CAUTION stickers to easily visible places when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected.
PM
6355. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
63
When power comes back ON during inverter driving after an instantaneous power failure When the motor is coasting at start
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function
The inverter output is shut off at the activation of the Instantaneous power failure (E.IPF) or Undervoltage (E.UVT). (Refer to page 779 for E.IPF or E.UVT.)
When E.IPF or E.UVT is activated, the Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage (IPF) signal is output. The IPF signal is assigned to terminal IPF in the initial status. By setting "2 (positive logic) or 102 (negative logic)" in any
of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection), the IPF signal can be assigned to another terminal. When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, motor driving is resumed at the power
restoration after an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage. (E.IPF and E.UVT are not activated.)
Connection (CS signal) When the Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start (CS) signal is assigned to an input
terminal (initial setting), a restart operation is enabled at turn-ON of the CS signal. The inverter operation is disabled at turn-OFF of the CS signal while Pr.57 Restart coasting time "9999" (with restart).
NOTE The CS signal is assigned to terminal CS in the initial setting. By setting "6" to any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection), the CS signal can be assigned to other terminals. Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
If the CS signal is not assigned to any input terminal, solely setting Pr.57 enables the restart operation at all times. If the restart operation is selected, instantaneous power failure (E.IPF) is disabled while the fault output signal is output at an
instantaneous power failure. The SU and FU signals are not output during the restart. These signals are output after the restart cushion time passes. Restart operation is also performed after the inverter reset is released or after the retry by the retry function occurs. The automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is invalid when the load torque high-speed frequency control
(Pr.270 = "2, 3, 13") is set.
Selection of restart operation (Pr.162) At a power restoration, the encoder detects the motor speed by a frequency search so that the inverter can re-start
smoothly. The encoder also detects the rotation direction so that the inverter can re-start smoothly even during the reverse rotation.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
57 A702 Restart coasting time 9999
0 No delay
0.1 to 30 s Set the delay time for the inverter to perform a restart after restoring power due to an instantaneous power failure.
9999 No restart
162 A700
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection
0
0 to 3, 1000 to 1003 Frequency search only performed at the first start
10 to 13, 1010 to 1013 Frequency search at every start
611 F003
Acceleration time at a restart 9999
0 to 3600 s Set the acceleration time to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency at restart.
9999 Standard acceleration time (for example, Pr.7) is applied as the acceleration time at restart.
ONPower supply OFF
15 to 100 ms
ONIPF OFF
1
1 10 to 100 ms for IP55 compatible models
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When "10 to 13, or 1010 to 1013" is set in Pr.162, a restart operation is performed at each start and automatic restart after instantaneous power failure. When "0 to 2, or 1000 to 1002" is set in Pr.162, a restart operation is performed at the first start after a power-ON, and from the second power-ON onwards, a start from the starting frequency is performed.
NOTE Because a DC injection brake is applied instantaneously at speed detection during a restart, the speed might drop if the
moment of inertia (J) of the load is small. Restart operation with reduced voltage is not available for PM sensorless vector control.
Restart coasting time (Pr.57) Coasting time is the time from the motor speed detection to the restart operation start. To enable restart operation, set "0" (no coasting time) in Pr.57 Restart coasting time. Generally, this setting does not
interfere with inverter operation. Inverter operation is sometimes hindered by the size of the moment of inertia (J) of the load or the output frequency. Adjust
this coasting time within the range 0.1 to 30 seconds to match the load specification.
Adjustment of restart operation (Pr.611) Using Pr.611, the acceleration time to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency after a restart
operation can be set. This can be set individually from the normal acceleration time.
NOTE Changing the Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting does not affect the Pr.611 setting increment. An IPM motor is a motor with interior permanent magnets. Regression voltage is generated when the motor coasts at an
instantaneous power failure or at a flying start. The inverter's DC bus voltage rises if the motor coasts fast or makes a flying start in this condition. When using the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr.57 "9999"), it is recommended to also use the regenerative avoidance function (Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection = "1") to make startups stable. If the overvoltage protective function (E.OV[]) still occurs with the regeneration avoidance function, also use the retry function (Pr.67).
During PM sensorless vector control, the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function operates only when an IPM MM-CF motor is connected. When a built-in brake or a regeneration unit is used, the frequency search may not be available at 2200 r/min or higher. The restart operation cannot be performed until the motor speed drops to a frequency where the frequency search is available.
Instantaneous (power failure) time
Power supply (R/L1,S/L2,T/L3)
Motor speed N (r/min) Inverter output frequency f (Hz)
Inverter output voltage E (V)
Coasting time (Pr.57)
Speed detection time+
Acceleration time at a restart (Pr.611 setting)* The output shut off timing differs
according to the load condition
*
6375. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
63
Parameters referred to Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381, page 382 Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 Retry functionpage 426 Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selectionpage 406 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation selectionpage 732
5.14.16 Offline auto tuning for a frequency search
Under V/F control or when driving the IPM motor MM-CF, the accuracy of the "frequency search", which is used to detect the motor speed for the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure and flying start, can be improved.
*1 Tuning is not available under PM sensorless vector control. *2 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
CAUTION An IPM motor is a motor with interior permanent magnets. High voltage is generated at motor terminals while the motor
is running. Do not touch motor terminals and other parts until the motor stops to prevent an electric shock.
When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, the motor suddenly starts (after reset time passes) when an instantaneous power failure occurs. Stay away from the motor and machinery. Apply the supplied CAUTION stickers to easily visible places when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected.
V/F PM
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
162 A700
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection
0
0, 1000 Frequency search only performed at the first start 1, 1001 Reduced voltage start only at the first start (no frequency search) 2, 1002 Encoder detection frequency search
3, 1003 Frequency search only performed at the first start (reduced impact restart)
10, 1010 Frequency search at every start 11, 1011 Reduced voltage start at every start (no frequency search) 12, 1012 Encoder detection frequency search at every start 13, 1013 Frequency search at every start (reduced impact restart)
298 A711*1 Frequency search gain 9999
0 to 32767 The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for the frequency search.
9999 The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF- HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA, or MM-CF) is used.
560 A712*1
Second frequency search gain 9999
0 to 32767 The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for the frequency search of the second motor.
9999 The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF- HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA, or MM-CF) is used for the second motor.
96 C110
Auto tuning setting/ status 0
0 No offline auto tuning
1, 101 Offline auto tuning is performed under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or Vector control. (Refer to page 532 and page 542.)
11 Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the motor (for IPM motor MM-CF).
90 C120 Motor constant (R1) 9999
0 to 50 , 9999*2 Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF- JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.
0 to 400 m, 9999*3
463 C210
Second motor auto tuning setting/status 0
0 No auto tuning for the second motor.
1, 101 Offline auto tuning is performed for the second motor. (Refer to page 532 and page 542.)
11 Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the second motor (under V/F control or PM sensorless vector control (IPM motor MM- CF)).
458 C220
Second motor constant (R1) 9999
0 to 50 , 9999*2 Tuning data of the second motor (same asPr.90)
0 to 400 m, 9999*3
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*3 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
Offline auto tuning for a frequency search (reduced impact restart) When an induction motor is used and the frequency search (reduced impact restart) is selected by setting Pr.162
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection = "3, 13, 1003, or 1013", perform offline auto tuning. When the MM-CF motor is used and the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected, it is recommended
that offline auto tuning is performed.
Before performing offline auto tuning Check the following points before performing offline auto tuning:
Check that V/F control or PM sensorless vector control (IPM motor MM-CF) is selected. Check that a motor is connected. (Check that the motor is not rotated by an external force during tuning.) Select a motor with the rated current equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (The motor capacity must be 0.4 kW
or higher.) If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
The target motor is other than a high-slip motor, a high-speed motor, or a special motor. The motor may rotate slightly even if the offline auto tuning without motor rotation (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status =
"11") is selected. Fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates. (Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications.) Note that even if the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is unaffected.
Offline auto tuning is not performed correctly when the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) are inserted between the inverter and motor. Be sure to remove them before performing tuning.
Setting 1. Set "11" in Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status.
2. Set the rated motor current (initial value is inverted rated current) in Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 415.)
3. Set Pr.71 Applied motor according to the motor to be used.
Performing tuning
Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit if the inverter is in the state ready for tuning. The motor starts by turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable.
In the PU operation mode, press / on the operation panel.
For External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts. (At this time, excitation noise occurs.)
Motor Pr.71 setting
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor
SF-JR, SF-TH 0 (3, 4) SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 20 (23, 24) SF-HR 40 (43, 44) Others 0 (3, 4)
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor
SF-JRCA 4P, SF-TH (constant-torque) 1 (13, 14)
SF-HRCA 50 (53, 54) Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 1 (13, 14)
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy- saving motor SF-PR 70 (73, 74)
Other manufacturer's standard motor 0 (3, 4) Other manufacturers constant-torque motor 1 (13, 14)
6395. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
64
NOTE It takes about 10 s for tuning to complete. (The time depends on the inverter capacity and motor type.) Satisfy the required inverter start conditions to start offline auto tuning. For example, stop the input of the MRS signal.
To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or on the operation panel.
(Turning OFF the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) also ends tuning.) During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid (initial value).
Input terminals
When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM/CA and AM, the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in 15 steps from FM/CA and AM.
Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the Second function selection (RT) signal during offline auto tuning. Auto tuning will not be performed properly.
Since the RUN signal turns ON when tuning is started, pay close attention especially when a sequence which releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
When executing offline auto tuning, input the operation command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) of the inverter.
While Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", turn the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal ON to tune in the PU operation mode.
During tuning, the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as follows.
When offline auto tuning ends, press on the operation panel during PU operation. For External operation, turn OFF
the start signal (STF signal or STR signal). This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
At tuning completion, the tuning results are set in the following parameters:
NOTE The motor constants measured once during offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until offline
auto tuning is performed again. However, the tuning data is cleared when performing All parameter clear.
If offline auto tuning has ended in error, motor constants are not set.
Status Operation panel (FR-DU08) display LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) display
Setting
Tuning in progress
Normal end
Parameter Name 90 Motor constant (R1) 298 Frequency search gain 96 Auto tuning setting/status
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
11 --- STOP PU PREV NEXT
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
12 STF FWD PU PREV NEXT
Blinking
AutoTune 12:34 TUNE
Completed 13 STF STOP PU PREV NEXT
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto
tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.) Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
When the rated power supply of the motor is 200/220 V (400/440 V) 60 Hz, set the rated motor current multiplied by 1.1 in Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay after tuning is complete.
For a motor with a PTC thermistor, thermal protector or other thermal detection, set "0" (motor overheat protection by inverter invalid) in Pr.9 to protect the motor from overheating.
NOTE An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error. After power is restored, the inverter starts
normal operation. Therefore, when the STF (STR) signal is ON, the motor starts forward (reverse) rotation.
Any fault occurring during tuning is handled as in the normal operation. However, if the retry function is set, no retry is performed.
The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.
Tuning the second motor (Pr.463) When one inverter switches the operation between two different motors, set the second motor in Pr.450 Second applied
motor, set Pr.463 Second motor auto tuning setting/status = "11", and perform tuning of the second motor. Turning ON the RT signal enables the parameter settings for the second motor as shown in the following table.
NOTE The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relaypage 415 Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 Retry functionpage 426 Pr.71 Applied motor, Pr.450 Second applied motorpage 528 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selectionpage 431 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Error display Error cause Countermeasures 8 Forced end Set "11" in Pr.96 and retry. 9 Inverter protective function operation Make the setting again.
91 The current limit (stall prevention) function is activated. Set the acceleration/deceleration time longer. Set Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection = "1".
92 The converter output voltage fell to 75% of the rated voltage. Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation.
93 Calculation error. The motor is not connected. Check the motor wiring and make the setting again.
94
Rotation tuning frequency setting error. (The frequency command for the tuning was given to exceed the maximum frequency setting, or to be in the frequency jump range.)
Check the Pr.1 Maximum frequency and Pr.31 to Pr.36 Frequency jump settings.
Function RT signal ON (second motor) RT signal OFF (first motor) Motor constant (R1) Pr.458 Pr.90 Frequency search gain Pr.560 Pr.298 Auto tuning setting/status Pr.463 Pr.96
CAUTION Note that the motor may start running suddenly. For the offline auto tuning in vertical lift applications, etc., caution is required to avoid falling due to insufficient torque.
6415. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
64
5.14.17 Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function This is a function to decelerate the motor to a stop when an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage occurs.
Connection and parameter setting
For the standard model, remove the jumpers between terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and terminals S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect terminals R1/L11 and P/+ and terminals S1/L21 and N/-.
If an undervoltage, power failure or input phase loss occurs when Pr.261 Power failure stop selection "0", the motor decelerates to a stop.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting
range Description FM CA
261 A730
Power failure stop selection 0
0 Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function disabled 1, 2, 11, 12, 21, 22
Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function enabled. Select action at an undervoltage or when a power failure occurs.
262 A731
Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 3 Hz 0 to 20 Hz
Normally, the motor runs at the initial value as it is. However, adjust to suit the size of the load specification (moment of inertia, torque).
263 A732
Subtraction starting frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz
0 to 590 Hz
When the output frequency the frequency set in Pr.263: The motor decelerates if the output frequency decreases by the frequency set in Pr.262. When the output frequency < the frequency set in Pr.263: The motor decelerates at frequencies of the output frequency.
9999 The motor decelerates from the output frequency - Pr.262. 264 A733
Power-failure deceleration time 1 5 s 0 to 3600 s Set the slope applicable from the deceleration start to the Pr.266
set frequency.
265 A734
Power-failure deceleration time 2 9999
0 to 3600 s Set the slope applicable for the frequency range starting at Pr.266 and downward.
9999 Same as Pr.264.
266 A735
Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the slope during deceleration switches from the Pr.264 setting to the Pr.265 setting.
294 A785
UV avoidance voltage gain 100% 0 to 200%
Adjust the response at undervoltage avoidance operation. Setting a large value improves the response to changes in the bus voltage.
668 A786
Power failure stop frequency gain 100% 0 to 200% Adjust the response level for the operation where the deceleration
time is automatically adjusted.
606 T722
Power failure stop external signal input selection
1 0 Normally open input (NO contact input specification)
1 Normally closed input (NC contact input specification)
Power supply Power supply
Remove the jumper
Inverter
S/L2 T/L3
S1/L21 P/+ N/-
R1/L11
R/L1
Remove the jumper
Converter unit Inverter
Separated converter type
Standard models
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
U V W
M
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+ N/-
P/+ N/-
Connect terminals R1/L11 and P/+ and terminals S1/L21 and N/-.
Connect terminals R1/L11 and P/+ and terminals S1/L21 and N/-.
Keep the jumpers between terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 connected.
RDA MRS(X10) RSO RES PWF X48
SE SD
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The power failure time deceleration-to-stop function operates as follows at an input phase loss.
For the separated converter type, remove the jumpers between terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and terminals S/L2 and S1/ L21 of the converter unit, and connect terminals R1/L11 and P/+ and terminals S1/L21 and N/-. Do not remove the jumpers of terminal R1/L11 and terminal S1/L21 of the inverter. (In the initial status of the separated converter type, terminals P/+ and R1/L11 and terminals N/- and S1/L21 are connected.)
For the separated converter type, connect the terminal to which the PWF signal of the converter unit is assigned and the terminal to which the X48 signal of the inverter is assigned. Also, set Pr.261 of the converter unit in accordance with the inverter setting. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the converter unit.)
Outline of operation of deceleration stop at a power failure If an undervoltage or power failure occurs, the output frequency is turned OFF only for the frequency set to Pr.262
Subtracted frequency at deceleration start. The motor decelerates for the time set to Pr.264 Power-failure deceleration time 1. (The deceleration time setting is the
time it takes for the motor to stop from Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.) Change the deceleration time (slope) to stop using Pr.265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 when the frequency is too
low to obtain the regenerative energy or in other instances.
Action setting at undervoltage and power failure Set Pr.261 to select the action at an undervoltage and power failure.
Pr.261 Pr.872 Operation when an input phase loss occurs
0 0 Operation continues 1 Input phase loss (E.ILF)
1, 2 0 Operation continues 1 Deceleration stop
21, 22 Deceleration stop
Pr.264 Power-failure deceleration time 1
Pr.265 Power-failure deceleration time 2
Time
Power supply
Output frequency
Subtracted frequency at deceleration start Pr.262
Power-failure deceleration time switchover frequency Pr.266
Pr.261 setting
Action at undervoltage and power failure
Power restoration during deceleration at occurrence
of power failure Deceleration stop time Undervoltage avoidance
function
0 Coasts to stop Coasts to stop 1
Deceleration stop
Deceleration stop According to Pr.262 to Pr.266 setting
Not available 2 Re-acceleration Not available 11 Deceleration stop Available 12 Re-acceleration Available 21 Deceleration stop Automatic adjustment of
deceleration time Not available
22 Re-acceleration Not available
6435. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
64
Power failure stop function (Pr.261 = "1, 11, or 21") Even if power is restored during deceleration triggered by a power failure, deceleration stop is continued after which the
inverter stays stopped. To restart operation, turn the start signal OFF then ON again.
NOTE If the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected (Pr.57 Restart coasting time "9999") while the power
failure time deceleration-to-stop function is set enabled (Pr.261 = "1, 11, or 21"), the power failure time deceleration stop function is disabled.
When the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is enabled (Pr.261 = "1, 11 or 21"), the inverter does not start even if the power is turned ON or inverter reset is performed with the start signal (STF/STR) ON. Turn OFF the start signal once and then ON again to make a start.
During cyclic transmission or the like (in which start commands are periodically transmitted), operation is restarted if the power is restored during the deceleration even when the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is enabled.
Continuous operation function at instantaneous power failure (Pr.261 = "2, 12, or 22")
The motor re-accelerates to the set frequency when the power restores during the deceleration triggered by a power failure.
Combining with the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function enables a deceleration triggered by a power failure and re-acceleration at a power restoration. If the power is restored after stoppage by a power failure, a restart operation is performed when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr.57 "9999") is selected.
*1 Acceleration time depends on Pr.7 (Pr.44)
Undervoltage avoidance function (Pr.261 = "11 or 12", Pr.294) When "11 or 12" is set to Pr.261, the deceleration time is adjusted (shortened) to prevent an undervoltage from occurring
during deceleration at occurrence of power failure.
During deceleration at occurrence of power failure
During stop at occurrence of power failure
STF
Y46
Time
Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again
Power supply
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
Pr.261 = "1"
STF
Power supply
Time
Y46
Not started as inverter is stopped due to power failure
ON
OFF ON ON
Output frequency
IPF Power supply
Output frequency
Y46
During deceleration at occurrence of power failure Reacceleration 1
Time
When power is restored during deceleration at occurrence of power failure
Pr.261 = 2
During power failurePower supply
Time
Output frequency
Y46
During deceleration at occurrence of power failure
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
Reset time + Pr.57
Pr.261 = 2, Pr.57 9999 When used with automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Adjust the downward frequency slope and the response level using Pr.294 UV avoidance voltage gain. Setting a large value improves the response to the bus voltage.
NOTE The undervoltage avoidance function is invalid under torque control by Real sensorless vector control. When Pr.261 = "11
(12)", the operation is performed in the same manner as if Pr.261 = "1 (2)".
Automatic adjustment of deceleration time (Pr.261 = "21 or 22", Pr.294, Pr.668)
When "21 or 22" is set to Pr.261, the deceleration time is automatically adjusted to keep (DC bus) voltage constant in the converter when the motor decelerates to a stop at a power failure. Setting of Pr.262 to Pr.266 is not required.
If a phenomenon such as motor vibration occurs during operation of the deceleration time automatic adjustment function, adjust the response level by setting the Pr.668 Power failure stop frequency gain. Increasing the setting improves the response to change in the bus voltage. However, the output frequency may become unstable.
If setting Pr.294 UV avoidance voltage gain lower also does not suppress the vibration, set Pr.668 lower.
Deceleration stop by the Power failure stop external (X48) signal By turning OFF X48 signal, the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is activated. This function is used, for
example, when an external power failure detection circuit is installed. To use the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function for the separated converter type, use X48 signal. Connect the
terminal to which the PWF signal of the converter unit is assigned and the terminal to which the X48 signal of the inverter is assigned.
In the initial setting, the X48 signal is used with the normally closed (NC contact) input specification. Use Pr.606 Power failure stop external signal input selection to change the specification to the normally open (NO contact) input.
To use the X48 signal, set "48" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to an input terminal.
During deceleration at occurrence of power failure (Y46) signal After deceleration by a power failure, the inverter is not restarted even though the start command is input. Check the During
deceleration at occurrence of power failure (Y46) signal at a power failure. (For example, when input phase loss protection (E.ILF) occurs.)
The Y46 signal is turned ON during deceleration at occurrence of power failure and in a stop status after deceleration at occurrence of power failure.
For the Y46 signal, set "46 (positive logic)" or "146 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function.
Power failed (Y67) signal Y67 signal turns ON when the output is shut off due to detection of power failure (power supply fault) or undervoltage, or
the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is activated. To use the Y67 signal, assign the function by setting "67 (positive logic)" or "167 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196
(Output terminal function selection).
Deceleration time : Automatic adjustment
STF
Y46
Time
Pr.261 = 21 Power supply
Output frequency
During deceleration at occurrence of power failure
During stop at occurrence of power failure
Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again
6455. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
64
NOTE When Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "2" and the FR-HC2, FR-XC (in common bus regeneration mode), or FR-CV
is used, the deceleration stop function is invalid at power failure. If the "output frequency - Pr.262" at undervoltage or at power failure is a negative value, it is regarded as 0 Hz. (DC injection
brake operation is performed without deceleration.) The power failure time deceleration stop function is disabled during a stop or when the breaker is tripped. The Y46 signal turns ON if an undervoltage occurs even if a deceleration at a power failure has not occurred. For this reason,
the Y46 signal is sometimes output instantaneously when the power supply is turned OFF, but this is not a fault. When the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is selected, undervoltage protection (E.UVT), instantaneous power
failure protection (E.IPF) and input phase loss protection (E.ILF) are invalid. When the load is high during PM sensorless vector control, an undervoltage sometimes causes the coasting stop. To use the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function for the separated converter type, use a converter unit manufactured
in August 2014 or later. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) and Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltagepage 715 Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time incrementspage 367 Pr.30 Regenerative function selectionpage 724 Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628, page 635 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473 Pr.872 Input phase loss protection selectionpage 426
5.14.18 PLC function The inverter can be run in accordance with a sequence program. In accordance with the machine specifications, a user can set various operation patterns: inverter movements at signal inputs, signal outputs at particular inverter status, and monitor outputs, etc.
CAUTION Even if the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is set, some loads might cause the inverter to trip and the
motor to coast. The motor coasts if sufficient regenerative power is not obtained from the motor.
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Outline of PLC function To enable the PLC function, set a value other than "0" in Pr.414 PLC function operation selection. When "2 or 12" is set
in Pr.414, the Sequence startup (SQ) signal from the external input terminal is valid regardless of the setting of the Pr.338 Communication operation command source. (The Pr.414 setting change becomes valid after inverter reset.)
Switch the execution key (RUN/STOP) of the sequence program by turning the SQ signal ON/OFF. The sequence program can be executed by turning the SQ signal ON. To input the SQ signal, set "50" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal.
When "1" is set in Pr.415 Inverter operation lock mode setting, the inverter can be operated only when the sequence program is running. By changing the PLC program status from RUN to STOP during inverter operation, the motor decelerates to stop. To stop the inverter operation at the STOP status of the PLC program while performing auto operation using SD1148 (or SM1200 to 1211) of the PLC program, set Pr.415 = "1".
For reading or writing sequence programs, use FR Configurator2 on the personal computer connected to the inverter via RS-485 communication or USB. (When Pr.414 "0", sequence programs can be read from or written to FR Configurator2.)
The following shows the required conditions to enable the SQ signal.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
414 A800
PLC function operation selection 0
0 PLC function disabled
1, 11 PLC function enabled
The SQ signal is enabled by input from a command source (external input terminal/ communication).
2, 12 The SQ signal is enabled by input from an external input terminal.
415 A801
Inverter operation lock mode setting 0
0 The inverter start command is enabled regardless of the operating status of the sequence program.
1 The inverter start command is enabled only while the sequence program is running.
416 A802
Pre-scale function selection 0 0 to 5
Unit scale factor 0: No function 1: 1 2: 0.1 3: 0.01 4: 0.001 5: 0.0001
When the pulse train is input from terminal JOG, the number of sampling pulses can be converted. The result of conversion is stored to SD1236. Number of sampled pulses = Input pulse value per count cycle Pre-scale setting value (Pr.417) Unit scale factor (Pr.416)417
A803 Pre-scale setting value 1 0 to 32767 Pre-scale setting value
498 A804
PLC function flash memory clear 0 0, 9696 (0 to
9999)
0: Clears the flash memory fault display (no operation after writing while the flash memory is in normal operation).
Write9696: Clears the flash memory (no operation after writing while the flash memory is at a fault). Other than 0 and 9696: Outside the setting range 0: Normal display
Read 1: The flash memory is not cleared because the PLC function is enabled. 9696: During flash memory clearing operation or flash memory fault
675 A805
User parameter auto storage function selection
9999 1 Auto storage function enabled
9999 Auto storage function disabled
1150 to 1199 A810 to A859
User parameters 1 to User parameters 50 0 0 to 65535
Desired values can be set. Because devices D206 to D255 used by the PLC function can be mutually accessed, the values set to Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 can be used by the sequence program. The result of performing calculation by a sequence program can also be monitored by Pr.1150 to Pr.1199.
Pr.414 setting Pr.338 setting SQ signal
Input via an external (physical) terminal Input via a communication virtual terminal
1, 11 0 ON ON 1 ON
2, 12 ON
6475. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
64
: Not required to enable the SQ signal
User parameter (data register (D)) auto storage function selection Setting Pr.675 = "1" enables the auto storage function for user parameters. The user parameter auto storage function is used to store the setting of Pr.1195 PLC function user parameters 46 (D251)
to Pr.1199 PLC function user parameters 50 (D255) automatically in EEPROM at power OFF or inverter reset. The auto storage function is disabled while the inverter performs any of the following.
Measurement of the main circuit capacitor's life, offline auto tuning, or measurement of load characteristics
NOTE The auto storage function may fail if the EEPROM is accessed by other functions at the same time at power OFF. To ensure
the auto storage, provide a power source for the control circuit separately from that of the main circuit.
User parameter reading from EEPROM User parameters (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199) are read from RAM or EEPROM according to the settings in Pr.342
Communication EEPROM write selection and Pr.414 PLC function operation selection. When Pr.414 = "11 or 12", RAM data is read regardless of the Pr.342 setting.
NOTE For details on the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual and the Instruction Manual of FR
Configurator2.
Copying the PLC function project data to USB memory This function copies the PLC function project data to a USB memory device. The PLC function project data copied in the
USB memory device can be copied to other inverters. This function is useful in backing up the parameter setting and for allowing multiple inverters to operate by the same sequence programs.
Refer to page 85 for an outline of the USB communication function.
Device Pr.342 Pr.414 Read from Written to
Inverter (via communication), FR Configurator2
0 0, 1, 2 EEPROM
EEPROM 11, 12 RAM
1 0, 1, 2 RAM
RAM 11, 12 RAM
Communication option 0
0, 1, 2 (Differs according to the option type.) EEPROM
11, 12 RAM
1 0, 1, 2 RAM
RAM 11, 12 RAM
Parameter unit Operation panel
0 0, 1, 2 EEPROM
EEPROM 11, 12 RAM
1 0, 1, 2 EEPROM
RAM 11, 12 RAM
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The following data can be copied by copying the project data via USB memory device.
NOTE If the project data of the PLC function is locked with a password using FR Configurator2, copying to the USB memory device
and verification are disabled. Also if set to write-disabled, writing to the inverter is disabled. (For details on the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual and the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.)
Parameters referred to Pr.338 Communication operation command sourcepage 400
5.14.19 Trace function The operating status of the inverter can be traced and stored on a USB memory device. Stored data can be monitored by FR Configurator2, and the status of the inverter can be analyzed.
USB memory mode
Overwrite the inverter project data file onto the designated file in the USB memory device.
Project data file number (displays 1 to 99, unrelated to the number of files saved in the USB memory device)
Write the designated project data file of the USB memory device onto a data file of the inverter.
Verify the designated project data file of the USB memory device against the project data file of the inverter.
Monitor mode Parameter setting mode Function mode Fault history mode
Extension File type Copy from inverter to USB memory device
Copy from USB memory device to inverter
.QPA Parameter file Supported Supported
.QPG Program file Supported Supported
.C32 Function block source information Supported Supported
.QCD Global text comment information Supported Supported
.DAT Project management information Supported Not available
.TXT Copy information Supported Not available
6495. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
65
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1020 A900 Trace operation selection 0
0 Without trace operation (The read value is always "0".) 1 Sampling start 2 Forced trigger 3 Sampling stop 4 Transfer of data to USB memory device
1021 A901 Trace mode selection 0
0 Memory mode 1 Memory mode (automatic transfer) 2 Recorder mode
1022 A902 Sampling cycle 2 0 to 9
Set the sampling cycle. 0: approx. 0.125 ms, 1: approx. 0.25 ms, 2: 1 ms, 3: 2 ms, 4: 5 ms, 5: 10 ms, 6: 50 ms, 7: 100 ms, 8: 500 ms, 9: 1 s (For the setting values "0" and "1", the cycle varies according to the control mode.)
1023 A903
Number of analog channels 4 1 to 8 Select the number of analog channels for sampling.
1024 A904 Sampling auto start 0
0 Manual sampling start
1 Sampling starts automatically when the power supply is turned ON or at a reset
1025 A905 Trigger mode selection 0
0 Fault trigger 1 Analog trigger 2 Digital trigger 3 Analog or digital trigger (OR logic) 4 Both analog and digital triggers (AND logic)
1026 A906
Number of sampling before trigger 90% 0 to 100% Set the percentage of the pre-trigger sampling time with respect to
the overall sampling time. 1027 A910
Analog source selection (1ch) 201
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 24, 32 to 36, 39 to 42, 46, 52 to 54, 61, 62, 64, 67, 71 to 75, 87 to 98, 201 to 213, 222 to 227, 230 to 232, 235 to 238
Select the analog data (monitor item) for sampling on each channel.
1028 A911
Analog source selection (2ch) 202
1029 A912
Analog source selection (3ch) 203
1030 A913
Analog source selection (4ch) 204
1031 A914
Analog source selection (5ch) 205
1032 A915
Analog source selection (6ch) 206
1033 A916
Analog source selection (7ch) 207
1034 A917
Analog source selection (8ch) 208
1035 A918 Analog trigger channel 1 1 to 8 Select the analog channel to be the trigger.
1036 A919
Analog trigger operation selection 0
0 Sampling starts when the value of the analog monitor exceeds the value set at the trigger level (Pr.1037)
1 Sampling starts when the value of the analog monitor falls below the value set at the trigger level (Pr.1037)
1037 A920 Analog trigger level 1000 600 to 1400
Set the level at which the analog trigger turns ON. The trigger level is the value obtained by subtracting 1000 from the set value.
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation outline This function is used to sample the status data (analog monitor and digital monitor) of the inverter, trace the sampling data
when a trigger (trace start condition) occurs, and stores the resulting trace data. When the trace function is set enabled, samplings are collected and the inverter goes into the pre-trigger status. In the pre-trigger status, samples are collected, and the trigger standby status is entered when sufficient samples for the
number of pre-trigger samples have been collected. When a trigger occurs in the trigger standby status, tracing is started and the trace data is stored.
Tracing procedure 1. Preparing a USB memory device
Select a USB memory device with ample capacity to store the necessary amount of trace data. When the trace function is used in the recorder mode, use a USB memory device with at least 1 GB of free space.
1038 A930
Digital source selection (1ch) 1
1 to 255 Select the digital data (I/O signal) for sampling on each channel.
1039 A931
Digital source selection (2ch) 2
1040 A932
Digital source selection (3ch) 3
1041 A933
Digital source selection (4ch) 4
1042 A934
Digital source selection (5ch) 5
1043 A935
Digital source selection (6ch) 6
1044 A936
Digital source selection (7ch) 7
1045 A937
Digital source selection (8ch) 8
1046 A938 Digital trigger channel 1 1 to 8 Select the digital channel to be the trigger.
1047 A939
Digital trigger operation selection 0
0 Tracing starts when the signal turns ON 1 Tracing starts when the signal turns OFF
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Sampling start
Sampling start
Sampling data
0% 90%
Pre-trigger sampling number
If the data is short for the pre-trigger sampling, the inverter goes into the pre-trigger state.
Sampling data
0% 90% 100%
Pre-trigger sampling number
Once the enough data is collected for trigger sampling, the inverter goes into the trigger-ready state.Data in the period
is discarded.
Data in the period is discarded.
Sampling start
Sampling data
0% 90% 100%
A trigger occurs Trace completedTrace start
At trigger generation, samples equivalent to the 100% pre-trigger sampling number are collected and saved.
6515. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
65
2. Prior setting for tracing Set Pr.1021 to select a trace mode. Set Pr.1022 Sampling cycle and Pr.1023 Number of analog channels according to the necessary sampling time. Use Pr.1027 to Pr.1034 to set analog sources, and Pr.1038 to Pr.1045 to set digital sources. Set a trigger type in Pr.1025.
3. Tracing Set Pr.1020 or Pr.1024 to start sampling or store trace data in the USB memory device. The trace status can be monitored. (Refer to page 658.)
4. Waveform check By using FR Configurator2, trace data stored in a USB memory device can be displayed on a computer screen. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.
Selection of trace mode (Pr.1021) Select how to store the trace data which results from sampling the inverter status. There are two methods to store trace data, memory mode and recorder mode.
*1 For details on Pr.1020, refer to page 657.
NOTE When the trace function is used in the recorder mode, use USB memory device having at least 1 GB of free space. Data transferred to the USB memory device is stored in the "TRC" folder under the "FR_INV" folder. Up to 99 sets of trace data can be stored in the USB memory device in the memory mode. When a data set is transferred to
the USB memory that contains 99 sets of data, its "MEM001.tr1" file will be overwritten. REC001.tr1 is the only data file stored in the recorder mode.
The data sampled in the recorder mode will be corrupted by resetting or turning OFF the inverter during sampling. By using FR Configurator2, the trace data of the internal RAM can be directly transmitted to the personal computer via the
USB cable. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.
Pr.1021 setting Mode Description Storing trace data
0 Memory mode Trace data is stored sequentially to the internal RAM in the inverter.
To store trace data on a USB memory device, set Pr.1020 Trace operation selection = "4" after the sampling and tracing is completed.*1
1 Memory mode (automatic transfer)
Trace data is stored sequentially to the internal RAM in the inverter, and automatically transferred to the USB memory device.
Trace data is automatically stored on the USB memory device after tracing is completed.
2 Recorder mode
Trace data is stored directly on the USB memory device. Sampling data is fixed at 8 analog channels and 8 digital channels. The sampling cycle in this mode is longer than in the memory mode. (1 ms or longer)
To stop sampling and complete storing trace data after the sampling is started, set "2" (forced trigger) or "3" (sampling stop) in Pr.1020 Trace operation selection.*1
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Selection of sampling time (Pr.1022, Pr.1023) The sampling time is determined by the sampling cycle and the number of data acquisition points. The number of data
acquisition points differs between the memory mode and the recorder mode.
Memory mode The sampling time varies depending on the setting in Pr.1022 Sampling cycle and Pr.1023 Number of analog channels.
Recorder mode The sampling time varies depending on the setting in Pr.1023 Number of analog channels.
*1 Sampling is performed at a sampling cycle of 1 ms even if "0 or 1" is set to Pr.1022 Sampling cycle.
Pr.1023 Number of analog
channels
Memory mode sampling time Number of data acquisition pointsMinimum (Pr.1022 = "0") Maximum (Pr.1022 = "9")
1 213 ms 1704 s 1704 2 160 ms 1280 s 1280 3 128 ms 1024 s 1024 4 106.5 ms 852 s 852 5 91 ms 728 s 728 6 80 ms 640 s 640 7 71 ms 568 s 568 8 64 ms 512 s 512
Analog channel number Recorder mode sampling time Number of data
acquisition pointsMinimum (Pr.1022 = "2")*1 Maximum (Pr.1022 = "9") Fixed to 8ch (analog source selection) Approx. 14 hours Approx. 621 days 53687091
6535. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
65
Analog source (monitor item) selection Select the analog sources (monitor items) to be set to Pr.1027 to Pr.1034 from the following table.
Setting value Monitor item*1 Minus (-)
display*2
Trigger level
criterion*3 Setting Monitor item*1 Minus (-)
display*2
Trigger level
criterion*3
1 Output frequency/speed *4 74 Cumulative pulse overflow times (control terminal option) *4
2 Output current *4 75 Multi-revolution counter 65535
3 Output voltage *4 87 Remote output value 1 *4
5 Frequency setting value/motor speed setting
*4 88 Remote output value 2 *4
6 Running speed *4 89 Remote output value 3 *4
7 Motor torque *4 90 Remote output value 4 *4
8 Converter output voltage *4 91 PID manipulated amount *4
9*5 Regenerative brake duty *4 92 Second PID set point/deviation input selection
*4
10 Electronic thermal O/L relay load factor
*4 93 Second PID measured value *4
11 Output current peak value *4 94 Second PID deviation *4
12 Converter output voltage peak value
*4 95 Second PID measured value 2 *4
13 Input power *4 96 Second PID manipulated amount *4
14 Output power *4 97 Dancer main set speed *4
17 Load meter *4 98 Control circuit temperature *4
18 Motor excitation current *4 201 *Output frequency Pr.84
19 Position pulse 65535 202 *U-phase output current ND rated current
20 Cumulative energization time 65535 203 *V-phase output current ND rated current
22 Orientation status 65535 204 *W-phase output current ND rated current
23 Actual operation time 65535 205 Converter output voltage 400 V/800 V
24 Motor load factor *4 206 *Output current (all three phases) ND rated current
32 Torque command *4 207 *Excitation current (A) ND rated current
33 Torque current command *4 208 *Torque current (A) ND rated current
34 Motor output *4 209 Terminal 2 100% 35 Feedback pulse 65535 210 Terminal 4 100%
36 Torque monitor (power driving/ regenerative driving polarity switching)
*4 211 Terminal 1 100%
39 SSCNET III communication status*7 65535 212 *Excitation current (%) 100%
40 PLC function user monitor 1 *4 213 *Torque current (%) 100%
41 PLC function user monitor 2 *4 222 Position command 65535
42 PLC function user monitor 3 *4 223 Position command (upper digits) 65535
46 Motor temperature *4 224 Current position 65535
52 PID set point *4 225 Current position (upper digits) 65535
53 PID measured value *4 226 Droop pulse 65535
54 PID deviation *4 227 Droop pulse (upper digits) 65535
61 Motor thermal load factor *4 230 *Output frequency (signed) Pr.84 62 Inverter thermal load factor *4 231 *Motor speed (with sign) *6
64 PTC thermistor resistance Pr.561 232 *Speed command (with sign) *6
67 PID measured value 2 *4 235 *Torque command 100%
71 Cumulative pulse *4 236 *Motor torque 100%
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 "*" shows a monitor item with a high-speed sampling cycle. *2 The monitor items with a circle () represents that its monitor value can be indicated with minus sign. *3 Indicates a criterion at 100% when the analog trigger is set. *4 Refer to the full-scale value of terminal FM/CA, or AM (page 458). *5 Monitoring is available only for standard models. *6 Rated motor frequency 120 / number of motor poles *7 Inverter output voltage is displayed when the FR-A8NS is not installed.
72 Cumulative pulse overflow times *4 237 *Excitation current command 100%
73 Cumulative pulse (control terminal option) *4 238 *Torque current command 100%
Setting value Monitor item*1 Minus (-)
display*2
Trigger level
criterion*3 Setting Monitor item*1 Minus (-)
display*2
Trigger level
criterion*3
6555. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
65
Digital source (monitor item) selection Select the digital sources (input/output signals) to be set to Pr.1038 to Pr.1045 from the following table. When a value
other than the ones in the following table is set, "0" (OFF) is applied for indication.
Trigger setting (Pr.1025, Pr.1035 to Pr.1037, Pr.1046, Pr.1047) Set the trigger generating conditions and the trigger target channels.
Set the trigger generation conditions for the analog monitor.
*1 In Pr.1037, set the number obtained by adding 1,000 to the trigger level.
Setting value Signal name Remarks Setting
value Signal name Remarks
0
For details on the signals, refer to page 521.
101 RUN
For details on the signals, refer to page 473.
1 STF 102 SU 2 STR 103 IPF 3 AU 104 OL 4 RT 105 FU 5 RL 106 ABC1 6 RM 107 ABC2 7 RH 121 DO0
For details on the signals, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR- A8AY (option).
8 JOG 122 DO1 9 MRS 123 DO2 10 STP (STOP) 124 DO3 11 RES 125 DO4 12 CS 126 DO5 21 X0
For details on the signals, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR- A8AX (option).
127 DO6 22 X1 128 RA1 For details on the signals, refer to
the Instruction Manual of the FR- A8AR (option).
23 X2 129 RA2 24 X3 130 RA3 25 X4 26 X5 27 X6 28 X7 29 X8 30 X9 31 X10 32 X11 33 X12 34 X13 35 X14 36 X15 37 DY
Pr.1025 setting Trigger generating conditions Selection of trigger
target channel 0 Tracing starts when inverter enters an fault status (protective function activated) 1 Tracing starts when analog monitor satisfies trigger conditions Pr.1035 2 Tracing starts when digital monitor satisfies trigger conditions Pr.1046 3 Tracing starts when either of analog or digital monitor satisfies trigger conditions (OR) Pr.1035, Pr.1046 4 Tracing starts when both of analog or digital monitor satisfies trigger conditions (AND) Pr.1035, Pr.1046
Pr.1036 setting Trigger generation conditions Trigger level setting
0 Sampling starts when the analog data targeted for the trigger exceeds the value specified at the trigger level Set the trigger level from 600 to
1400 (-400 to 400%*1) in Pr.1037.1 Sampling starts when the analog data targeted for the trigger falls below the value specified
at the trigger level
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Set the trigger generation conditions for the digital monitor.
Start of sampling and copying of data (Pr.1020, Pr.1024) Set the trace operation. The trace operation is set by one of two ways, by setting Pr.1020 Trace operation selection and
by setting in the trace mode on the operation panel. When "1" is set in Pr.1020, sampling starts. When "2" is set in Pr.1020, it is regarded that a trigger occurs (forced trigger), and the sampling stops and the tracing starts. When "3" is set in Pr.1020, sampling stops. When "4" is set in Pr.1020, the trace data in internal RAM is transferred to USB memory device. (Trace data cannot be
transferred during sampling.) To start sampling automatically when the power supply at power-ON or at a recovery after an inverter reset, set "1" in
Pr.1024 Sampling auto start.
The read value of Pr.1020 is always "0". Trace operation can also be set in the trace mode on the operation panel.
Selection of trace operation by input terminal (TRG signal, TRC signal) Trace operation can be selected by signal inputs. A forced trigger can be applied when the Trace trigger input (TRG) signal is ON. Sampling is started and stopped by the Trace sampling start/end (TRC) signal turning ON and OFF, respectively. To input the TRG signal, set "46" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), and to input the TRC
signal, set "47" to assign the function to a terminal.
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Pr.1047 setting Trigger generation conditions
0 Tracing starts when the digital data targeted for the trigger turns ON 1 Tracing starts when the digital data targeted for the trigger turns OFF
Pr.1020 setting Trace mode Operation
0 Sampling standby
1 Sampling start
2 Forced trigger (sampling stop)
3 Sampling stop
4 Data transmission
Monitor mode
Parameter setting mode
Function mode Trace method
No function
Sampling start
Forced trigger (Sampling stop)
Sampling stop
Data transmission
6575. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
65
Monitoring the trace status The trace status can be monitored on the operation panel by setting "38" in Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor
selection, Pr.774 to Pr.776 (Operation panel monitor selection), or Pr.992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection. The content depends on the digits on the operation panel.
*1 The value(s) "0" to the left of the leftmost non-zero value is(are) not shown in the monitor display. For example, if no trace data is in internal RAM, the USB memory is not accessed, no trigger is detected, and the trace operation is performed, "1" appears. (not "0001")
When copying the traced data to a USB memory device, the operating status of the USB host can be checked with the inverter LED. Refer to page 85 for an outline of the USB communication function.
During trace operation, the Trace status (Y40) signal can be output. To use the Y40 signal, set "40 (positive logic) or 140 (negative logic)" in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign function to an output terminal.
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selectionpage 446 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
1s place Indicates trace operation. 10s place Indicates trigger state.
1000s place Indicates internal RAM state.
100s place Indicates USB memory access state.
Monitor value Trace status
Fourth digit Third digit Second digit First digit 0 or no display*1 No trace data in internal RAM USB memory not accessed Trigger not detected Tracing stopped
1 Trace data in internal RAM USB memory being accessed Trigger detected Trace operation
2 USB memory transfer error 3 USB buffer overrun
LED display status Operating status OFF No USB connection. ON The communication is established between the inverter and the USB device.
Blinking rapidly Traced data is being transmitted. (In the memory mode, transmission command is being issued. In the recorder mode, sampling is being performed.)
Blinking slowly Error in the USB connection.
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.14 (A) Application parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
5.15.1 Wiring and configuration of PU connector Using the PU connector as a computer network port enables communication operation from a personal computer, etc. When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA, or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.
PU connector pin-outs
Purpose Parameter to set Refer
to page
To start operation via communication
Initial setting of operation via communication
P.N000, P.N001, P.N010 to P.N014
Pr.549, Pr.342, Pr.349, Pr.500 to Pr.502, Pr.779
663
To communicate via PU connector Initial setting of computer link communication (PU connector) P.N020 to P.N028 Pr.117 to Pr.124
670
To communicate via RS-485 terminals
Initial setting of computer link communication (RS-485 terminals) P.N030 to P.N038 Pr.331 to Pr.337,
Pr.341
MODBUS RTU communication specification P.N002, P.N030, P.N031, P.N034, P.N080
Pr.539, Pr.331, Pr.332, Pr.334, Pr.343
686
To communicate via the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF) CC-Link IE Field Network P.N100 to P.N110,
P.N111 Pr.434 to Pr.435, Pr.541 699
To Communicate using USB (FR Configurator2) USB communication P.N040, P.N041 Pr.547, Pr.548 701
To connect a GOT GOT automatic recognition P.N020, P.N030 Pr.117, Pr.331 701 To back up the data of parameter settings and PLC function to the GOT
Backup/restore P.N110, P.N111 Pr.434, Pr.435 702
Inverter (Receptacle side) Front view
8 1to
Pin number Name Description 1 SG Earth (ground) (connected to terminal 5) 2 Operation panel power supply 3 RDA Inverter receive+ 4 SDB Inverter send- 5 SDA Inverter send+ 6 RDB Inverter receive- 7 SG Earth (ground) (connected to terminal 5) 8 Operation panel power supply
6595. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
66
NOTE Pins No. 2 and 8 provide power to the operation panel or parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication. Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket, or telephone modular connector. The
product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.
Wiring and configuration of PU connector communication system System configuration
Wiring between a computer and an inverter for RS-485 communication
*1 Make connection in accordance with the Instruction Manual of the computer to be used with. Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer since they vary with the model.
NOTE When performing RS-485 communication with multiple inverters, use the RS-485 terminals. (Refer to page 662.) Computer-inverter connection cable
Refer to the following for the connection cable (RS-232C to RS-485 converter) between the computer with an RS-232C interface and an inverter. Commercially available products (as of October 2020)
*2 The conversion cable cannot connect multiple inverters. (The computer and inverter are connected in a 1:1 pair.) This is an RS232C-to- RS485 converter-embedded conversion cable. No additional cable or connector is required. For the product details, contact the manufacturer.
Use Ethernet cables compliant with the following standards when fabricating the cable.
PU connector
Inverter Station 0
Computer
RS-485 interface/ terminals
Communication cable
RJ-45 connector
PU connector
Inverter
FR-DU08
Communication cable
RJ-45 connector RJ-45 connector
Operation panel connector FR-ADP (option)
PU connector
Inverter Station 0Computer
Communication cable
RJ-45 connector
RS-232C connector
RS-232C-RS-485 converter
RS-232C cable
Maximum 15 m
Computer Side Terminals
Send data
Send data
Receive data
Receive data
Description
Frame ground
Signal ground
Clear to send
Clear to send
Request to send
Request to send
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA Signal name
FG
SG
CSB
CSA
RSB
RSA
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
PU connector
SG
Inverter
1
0.2 mm2 or more
Cable connection and signal direction
Communication cable
Model Manufacturer Interface embedded cable DAFXIH-CAB (D-SUB25P for personal computer) DAFXIH-CABV (D-SUB9P for personal computer) + Connector conversion cable DINV-485CAB (for inverter)*2
Diatrend Corp.
Interface embedded cable dedicated for inverter DINV-CABV*2
Ethernet cable Connector Type
Category 5e or higher straight cable (double shielded / STP)*3
RJ-45 connector The following conditioning cables: IEEE 802.3 (1000BASE-T) ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5e)
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*3 Do not use pins No. 2 and 8 of the communication cable.
5.15.2 Wiring and configuration of RS-485 terminals RS-485 terminal layout
Connection of RS-485 terminals and wires The size of RS-485 terminal block is the same as that of the control circuit terminal block. Refer to page 74 for the wiring
method.
NOTE To avoid malfunction, keep the RS-485 terminal wires away from the control circuit board. When the FR-A820-01250(22K) or lower, or the FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower is used with a plug-in option, lead the wires
through the hole on the side face of the front cover for wiring of the RS-485 terminals.
When the FR-A820-01540(30K) of higher, or the FR-A840-00770(30K) or higher is used with a plug-in option, lead the wires on the left side of the plug-in option for wiring of the RS-485 terminals.
Name Description RDA1 (RXD1+) Inverter receive+ RDB1 (RXD1-) Inverter receive- RDA2 (RXD2+) Inverter receive + (for branch) RDB2 (RXD2-) Inverter receive - (for branch) SDA1 (TXD1+) Inverter send+ SDB1 (TXD1-) Inverter send- SDA2 (TXD2+) Inverter send + (for branch) SDB2 (TXD2-) Inverter send - (for branch) P5S (VCC) 5 V (permissible load current 100 mA) SG (GND) Earthing (grounding) (connected to terminal SD)
+ -+ TXD RXD-VCC GND
+ -+ TXD RXD-VCC GND
OPEN
100
RDA1 (RXD1+)
RDB1 (RXD1-)
RDA2 (RXD2+)
RDB2 (RXD2-)
SDA1 (TXD1+)
SDB1 (TXD1-)
SDA2 (TXD2+)
SDB2 (TXD2-)
P5S (VCC)
SG (GND)
P5S (VCC)
SG (GND)
Terminating resistor switch Initially-set to "OPEN". Set only the terminating resistor switch of the remotest inverter to the "100" position.
Cut off with a nipper, etc.
6615. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
66
System configuration of RS-485 terminals Computer and inverter connection (1:1)
Combination of a computer and multiple inverters (1:n)
RS-485 terminal wiring method Wiring between a computer and an inverter for RS-485 communications
Computer
Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable
Set the terminating resistor switch to the "100" position.
Inverter RS-485 terminals
Computer
Converter
RS-232C cable
Inverter RS-485 terminals
RS-485 interface/ terminals
Maximum 15 m
Computer
Twisted pair cable
Twisted pair cable
RS-485 interface terminals
Inverter
RS-485 terminals
Inverter
RS-485 terminals
Inverter
RS-485 terminals
Station 0 Station 1 Station n
Set only the terminating resistor switch of the remotest inverter to the "100" position.
Set only the terminating resistor switch of the remotest inverter to the "100" position.
Computer RS-232C converter
RS-232C cable
Maximum 15m
Converter
InverterInverterInverter
Station 0 Station 1 Station n
RS-485 terminals
RS-485 terminals
RS-485 terminals
RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA
SG
RSB CSA CSB
FG SG
2- + - +
S D
B 1
S D
A 1
R D
B 1
R D
A 1
Computer
1
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Wiring between a computer and multiple inverters for RS-485 communication
*1 Make connection in accordance with the Instruction Manual of the computer to be used with. Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer since they vary with the model.
*2 On the inverter most remotely connected with the computer, set the terminating resistor switch in the ON (100 ) position.
NOTE To connect the terminals in series, refer to the following.
To connect multiple inverters using RS-485 distributors, refer to the following. Commercially available products (as of October 2020)
Two-wire type connection If the computer is 2-wire type, a connection from the inverter can be changed to 2-wire type by passing wires across
reception terminals and transmission terminals of the RS-485 terminals.
NOTE A program should be created so that transmission is disabled (receiving state) when the computer is not sending and reception
is disabled (sending state) during sending to prevent the computer from receiving its own data.
5.15.3 Initial setting of operation via communication Set the action when the inverter is performing operation via communication.
1
Computer RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA
SG
RSB CSA CSB
FG Station 0 SG SG
- + - + - + - +
Station 1 SG SG
- + +- - + +-
Station n SG
2- +
S D
B 1
S D
A 1
R D
B 1
R D
A 1
R D
A 2
R D
B 2
S D
A 2
S D
B 2
S D
B 1
S D
A 1
R D
B 1
R D
A 1
S D
B 1
S D
A 1
R D
B 1
R D
A 1
R D
A 2
R D
B 2
S D
A 2
S D
B 2
- +
TXD RXDVCC TXD RXDVCC
To computer send
To computer receive
To computer ground
To receiving terminal of the next inverter
To sending terminal of the next inverter
To next inverter To earth (ground) terminal
Product name Model Manufacturer
RS-485 distributor
BMJ-8-28N (Pins No. 2 and No. 8 are not connected internally.) (A plug with a terminating resistor is not used.) HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
DMDH-3PN (Pins No. 2 and No. 8 are not connected internally.) DMDH-10PN (Pins No. 2 and No. 8 are not connected internally.)
Diatrend Corp.
TXD+
TXD-
RXD+
RXD-
SGSG
InverterComputer
Pass a wire
Transmission enable
Reception enable
6635. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
66
Set the RS-485 communication protocol. (Mitsubishi inverter protocol / MODBUS RTU protocol) Set the action at fault occurrence or at writing of parameters.
*1 The setting is available only when a communication option is installed. *2 If in communication by the communication option, "E.OP1" is displayed.
Setting the communication protocol (Pr.549) Select the RS-485 communication protocol. The MODBUS RTU protocol can be used by communication from the RS-485 terminals.
Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr.342) When parameter write is performed via the inverter PU connector, RS-485 terminal, USB communication, or a
communication option, the parameters storage device can be changed to "RAM only" from "EEPROM and RAM". Use this function if parameter settings are changed frequently.
When changing the parameter values frequently, set "1" in Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection to write them to the RAM only. The life of the EEPROM will be shorter if parameter write is performed frequently with the setting unchanged from "0 (initial value)" (EEPROM write).
NOTE Turning OFF the inverter's power supply clears the modified parameter settings when Pr.342 = "1 (write only to RAM)".
Therefore, the parameter values at next power-ON are the values last stored in EEPROM. The parameter setting written in RAM cannot be checked on the operation panel. (The values displayed on the operation panel
are the ones stored in EEPROM.)
Operation selection at a communication error (Pr.502, Pr.779) For communication using RS-485 terminals or a communication option, operation at a communication error can be
selected. The operation is active under the Network operation mode.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 549 N000 Protocol selection 0
0 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link) 1 MODBUS RTU protocol
342 N001
Communication EEPROM write selection
0 0 Parameter values written by communication are written to the EEPROM
and RAM. 1 Parameter values written by communication are written to the RAM.
349*1 Communication reset selection/Ready bit status selection
0
0 Enables the error reset function in any operation mode. 1 Enables the error reset function only in the Network operation mode. 100, 101 For details, refer to page 895 and page 897. 1000, 1001, 1100, 1101, 10000, 10001, 10100, 10101, 11000, 11001, 11100, 11101
For details, refer to page 893.
N010*1 Communication reset selection 0
0 Enables the error reset function in any operation mode. 1 Enables the error reset function only in the Network operation mode.
N240*1 Ready bit status selection 0
0 The status of Ready bit in communication data can be changed when an HMS network option is installed.1
500 N011*1
Communication error execution waiting time 0 0 to 999.8 s
Set the time from when the communication line error occurs until the inverter starts the operation for the communication error (when a communication option is used).
501 N012*1
Communication error occurrence count display
0 0 Displays the communication error occurrence count (when a communication option is used).
502 N013
Stop mode selection at communication error 0 0 to 4, 11, 12 Select the operation at a communication error occurrence.
779 N014
Operation frequency during communication error
9999 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency for the operation when a communication error occurs.
9999 Operation continues at the same frequency before the communication error.
Pr.549 setting Communication protocol 0 (initial value) Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link) 1 MODBUS RTU protocol
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Select the stop operation at the retry count excess (Pr.335, enabled only when the Mitsubishi inverter protocol is selected) or at a signal loss detection (Pr.336, Pr.539).
*1 If in communication by the communication option, "E.OP1" is displayed. *2 Under position control, the operation is continued to the target position. *3 When the communication error is removed during deceleration, the motor re-accelerates. Under position control, the motor does not re-accelerate
even when the communication error is removed during deceleration.
The motor is decelerated to a stop according to the setting of Pr.111 Third deceleration time when an error occurs while Pr.502 = "11 or 12".
When a communication error is detected while communication with the RS-485 terminals is performed, the Alarm (LF) signal is output to an output terminal of the inverter. To use the LF signal, set "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal. (To output the LF signal even if communication through RS-485 terminals is not performed for the time set in Pr.336 or longer, or during communication using a communication option, set "3 or 4" in Pr.502.)
Fault type Pr.502 setting
At fault occurrence At fault removal
Operation Indication Fault (ALM) signal Operation Indication Fault (ALM)
signal
Communication line
0 (initial value) Output shutoff E. SER*1 ON Output stop
status continues.
E. SER*1 ON 1, 11 Output to
decelerate and stop the motor.
"E.SER" indication after stop*1
ON after stop
2, 12 OFF Restart*3 Normal OFF
3 Operation continues at the frequency set in Pr.779.*2
Normal
OFF Normal Normal OFF 4 "CF" warning
Communication option (when a communication option is used)
0, 3 Output shutoff "E. 1" ON Output stop status continues.
"E. 1" ON1, 2, 11, 12
Output to decelerate and stop the motor.
"E. 1" after stop ON after stop
4
Operation continues at the frequency set in Pr.779.*2
"CF" warning OFF
Operation continues at the frequency set in Pr.779.
"CF" warning OFF
Pr.502 setting Operation to a stop at a communication error occurrence 0 Output shutoff 1 to 4 Deceleration stop according to the selected deceleration time (selectable using the RT or X9 signal) 11, 12 Deceleration stop according to the setting of Pr.111
6655. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
66
The following charts show operations when a communication line error occurs.
Time
Motor coasting
Communication fault
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
Fault display (E.SER/E.OP1)
Fault output (ALM)
ONOFF OFF
Display
ONOFF
Fault occurrence Fault removal
Time
Fault display (E.SER/E.OP1)
Fault output (ALM)
ONOFF OFF
Display
ONOFF
Pr.502 = "0" (initial value) Pr.502 = "1"
Pr.502 = "2" Pr.502 = "3"
Time
Communication fault
Fault display (E.SER/E.OP1)
Fault output (ALM)
ONOFF OFF
Display
OFF
Decelerates to stop
Decelerates to stop
Fault occurrence Fault removal
Time
Communication fault
Fault display
Fault output (ALM)
ONOFF OFF
OFF
Fault recognition Fault removal
Pr.779 = 9999
Pr.779 9999 (Runs at the frequency setting of Pr.779)
Not displayed
Alarm output (LF)
ONOFF OFF
Communication fault
Fault occurrence Fault removal O
ut pu
t f re
qu en
cy O
ut pu
t f re
qu en
cy
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
Alarm output (LF)
ONOFF OFF
Alarm output (LF)
ONOFF OFF Alarm output (LF)
ONOFF OFF
Pr.502 = "4"
DisplayWarning display (CF)
Time
Communication fault
Fault output (ALM)
ONOFF OFF
OFF
Fault recognition Fault removal
Pr.779 = 9999
Pr.779 9999 (Runs at the frequency setting of Pr.779)
Alarm output (LF)
ONOFF OFF
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
Pr.779
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The following charts show operations when a communication option fault occurs.
Time
Motor coasting
Fault ONOFF OFF
Display
ONOFF
Fault occurrence Fault removal
Time
Fault ONOFF OFF
Display
ONOFF
Decelerates to stop
Fault occurrence Fault removal Pr.502 = "0 (initial value) or 3" Pr.502 = "1 or 2"
OFF OFF
Pr.502 = "4"
ONOFF
Display
Time
Fault ONOFF OFF
OFF
Fault occurrence Fault removal
Pr.779 = 9999
Pr.779 O
ut pu
t f re
qu en
cy
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
Pr.779 9999 (Runs at the frequency setting of Pr.779)
Fault display (E.1)
Fault output (ALM)
Alarm output (LF)
Warning display (CF)
Fault output (ALM)
Alarm output (LF)
Fault display (E.1)
Fault output (ALM)
Alarm output (LF)
6675. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
66
NOTE When a communication option is used, the protective function [E.OP1 (fault data: HA1)] is activated at error occurrences on
the communication line. The protective function [E.1 (fault data: HF1)] is activated at error occurrences in the communication circuit inside the option.
Fault output indicates the Fault (ALM) signal and an alarm bit output. When the fault output is set enabled, fault records are stored in the fault history. (A fault record is written to the fault history at
a fault output.) When the fault output is not enabled, a fault record is overwritten to the fault history temporarily but not stored. After the fault is removed, the fault indication goes back to normal indication on the monitor, and the fault history goes back to
the previous status. When Pr.502 "0", the normal deceleration time setting (settings like Pr.8, Pr.44, and Pr.45) is applied as the deceleration
time. Normal acceleration time setting (settings like Pr.7 and Pr.44) is applied as the acceleration time for restart. When Pr.502 = "2, 3, or 4", the inverter operates with the start command and the speed command, which were used before
the fault. If a communication line error occurs, then the error is removed during deceleration while Pr.502 = "2", the motor re-accelerates
from that point. (When a communication option is used, acceleration does not restart at a communication option error.) The Pr.502 and Pr.779 settings are valid when communication is performed via the RS-485 terminals or a communication
option. These parameters are valid under the Network operation mode. When performing communication through RS-485 terminals,
set Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection "1". Pr.502 is valid for the device that has the command source under the Network operation mode. If a communication option is
installed while Pr.550 = "9999 (initial setting)", a communication error in RS-485 terminals occurs and Pr.502 becomes invalid. If the communication error setting is disabled with Pr.335 = "9999" or Pr.539 = "9999" while Pr.502 = "3 or 4", the inverter does
not operate with the frequency set in Pr.779 when a communication error occurs. If a communication error occurs while continuous operation at Pr.779 is selected with Pr.502 = "3 or 4", the inverter operates
at the frequency set in Pr.779 even though the speed command source is at the external terminals. Example) If a communication error occurs while Pr.339 = "2" and the RL signal is input through an external terminal, the operation is continued at the frequency set in Pr.779.
During position control, an error occurs even if "2" is set in Pr.502.
Waiting time setting from the communication line error occurrence to the communication error activation (Pr.500)
When a communication option is used, use Pr.500 Communication error execution waiting time to set the time from when the communication line error occurs until the inverter starts the operation for the communication error.
When a communication line error occurs and lasts longer than the time set in Pr.500, it is recognized as a communication error. If the communication returns to normal within the time, it is not recognized as a communication error, and the operation continues.
CAUTION When Pr.502 = "3" and a communication line error occurs, or Pr.502 = "4" and a communication line error or a
communication option fault occurs, the operation continues. When setting "3 or 4" in Pr.502, provide a safety stop countermeasure other than via communication. For example, input a signal through an external terminal (RES, MRS, or X92) or press the PU stop on the operation panel.
Normal Error
Pr.500 setting time
Normal Error Communication line status
Alarm signal(LF) (Pr.502 = 3)
Recognition
ON
Pr.500 setting time
Communication error (E.OP1)
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation from the error occurrence until the Pr.500 setting time elapses
*1 When the communication returns to normal within the time period set in Pr.500, the protective function (E.OP1) is not activated.
Displaying and clearing the communication error count (Pr.501) When a communication option is used, the cumulative count of communication error occurrences can be displayed. Write
"0" to clear this cumulative count. When a communication line error occurs, the setting of Pr.501 Communication error occurrence count display
increases by one. The cumulative count of communication error occurrences is counted from 0 to 65535. When the count exceeds 65535,
the displayed value is cleared and the counting starts over from 0 again.
NOTE Communication error count is temporarily stored in the RAM memory. The error count is stored in EEPROM only once per
hour. If power reset or inverter reset is performed, Pr.501 setting will be the one that is last stored to EEPROM depending on the reset timing.
Error reset operation selection at inverter fault (Pr.349) An error reset command from a communication option can be invalidated in the External operation mode or the PU
operation mode.
Operation mode switching and communication startup mode (Pr.79, Pr.340)
Check the following before switching the operation mode. The inverter is at a stop. Both the STF and STR signals are off. The Pr.79 Operation mode selection setting is correct. (Check the setting on the operation panel of the inverter.) (Refer to page 389.)
The operation mode at power ON and at restoration from instantaneous power failure can be selected. Set a value other than "0" in Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection to select the Network operation mode. (Refer to page 398.)
After the inverter starts up in the Network operation mode, parameter write can be commanded via the network.
Fault type Pr.502 setting Operation Indication Fault output
Communication line
0
Operation continues.*1 Normal*1 Not provided.*1
1 2 3 4
Communication option
0, 3 Output shutoff "E. 1" Output
1, 2 Output to decelerate and stop the motor. "E. 1" after stop Output after stop
4 Operation continues. "CF" warning Not output
Normal ErrorCount timing depending on communication line status Incremented by 1
Normal Error
Incremented by 1
Pr.349 setting Description 0 (initial value) Error reset is enabled independently of operation mode. 1 Error reset is enabled in the Network operation mode. 100, 101 For details, refer to page 895 and page 897. 1000, 1001, 1100, 1101, 10000, 10001, 10100, 10101, 11000, 11001, 11100, 11101
For details, refer to page 895.
6695. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
67
NOTE The changed value in Pr.340 is applied after the next power-ON or inverter reset. The Pr.340 setting can be changed on the operation panel in any operation mode. When setting a value other than "0" in Pr.340, make sure that the communication settings of the inverter are correct.
Parameters referred to Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time, Pr.111 Third deceleration timepage 367 Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 Pr.340 Communication startup mode selectionpage 398 Pr.335 RS-485 communication retry countpage 670 Pr.336 RS-485 communication check time intervalpage 670 Pr.539 MODBUS RTU communication check time intervalpage 686 Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selectionpage 400 Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selectionpage 400
5.15.4 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication
Use the following parameters to perform required settings for RS-485 communication between the inverter and a personal computer.
Use the PU connector on the inverter or RS-485 terminals as communication interface. Parameter setting, monitoring, etc. can be performed using Mitsubishi inverter protocol or MODBUS RTU communication
protocol. To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, setting of the communication specifications must
be made to the inverter in advance. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or if there is any setting error.
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters related to PU connector communication Pr. Name Initial value Setting
range Description
117 N020
PU communication station number 0 0 to 31
Use this parameter to specify the inverter station number. Enter the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are connected to one personal computer.
118 N021
PU communication speed 192
48, 96, 192, 384, 576, 768, 1152
Select the communication speed. The setting value 100 equals the communication speed. For example, enter 192 to set the communication speed of 19200 bps.
N022 PU communication data length 0
0 Data length 8 bits 1 Data length 7 bits
N023 PU communication stop bit length 1
0 Stop bit length 1 bit 1 Stop bit length 2 bits
119 PU communication stop bit length / data length
1
0 Stop bit length 1 bit Data length 8 bits
1 Stop bit length 2 bits 10 Stop bit length 1 bit
Data length 7 bits 11 Stop bit length 2 bits
120 N024
PU communication parity check 2
0 Parity check disabled. 1 Parity check (odd parity) enabled. 2 Parity check (even parity) enabled.
121 N025
PU communication retry count 1
0 to 10 Set the permissible number of retries for unsuccessful data reception. If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the permissible value, the inverter output will be stopped.
9999 The inverter output will not be shut off even when a communication error occurs.
122 N026
PU communication check time interval 9999
0 PU connector communication is disabled.
0.1 to 999.8 s
Set the interval of the communication check (Signal loss detection) time. If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible time, the inverter output will be shut off.
9999 No communication check (Signal loss detection)
123 N027
PU communication waiting time setting 9999
0 to 150 ms Set the time delay between data transmission to the converter and the response.
9999 The time delay is not set in this parameter but in communication data. Delay time: Number set in the data 10 ms
124 N028
PU communication CR/ LF selection 1
0 Without CR/LF 1 With CR 2 With CR/LF
6715. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
67
Parameters related to RS-485 terminal communication
*1 When "1" (MODBUS RTU protocol) is set in Pr.549, the setting range within parentheses is applied. *2 When a value outside the setting range is set, the inverter operates at the initial value. *3 In the MODBUS RTU protocol, the data length is fixed at 8 bits. *4 In the MODBUS RTU protocol, Pr.334 setting is applied as the stop bit length. (Refer to page 686.) *5 In the MODBUS RTU protocol, this is invalid.
NOTE The monitor items and parameter settings can be read during communication with the Pr.336 RS-485 communication check
time interval = "0 (initial value)" setting, but such operation will become faulty once the operation mode is changed to the NET operation mode. When the NET operation mode is selected as the start-up operation mode, communication is performed once, then a Communication fault (inverter) (E.SER) occurs. To perform operation or parameter writing via communication, set "9999" or a large setting value in Pr.336. (The setting value is determined by the computer program.) (Refer to page 678.)
Always reset the inverter after making the initial settings of the parameters. After changing the communication-related parameters, communication cannot be made until the inverter is reset.
5.15.5 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
Parameter setting and monitoring, etc. are possible by using the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication) via inverter PU connector and the RS-485 terminals.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
331 N030
RS-485 communication station number 0
0 to 31 (0 to 247)*1*2
Enter the station number of the inverter. (Same specifications as Pr.117)
332 N031
RS-485 communication speed 96
3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96, 192, 384, 576, 768, 1152
Select the communication speed. (Same specifications as Pr.118)
N032 RS-485 communication data length 0 0, 1 Select the data length. (Same specifications as P.N022)*3
N033 RS-485 communication stop bit length 1 0, 1 Select the stop bit length. (Same specifications as P.N023)*4
333 RS-485 communication stop bit length / data length
1 0, 1, 10, 11 Select the stop bit length and data bit length. (Same specifications as Pr.119)*3*4
334 N034
RS-485 communication parity check selection 2 0, 1, 2 Select the parity check specifications.
(Same specifications as Pr.120) 335 N035*5
RS-485 communication retry count 1 0 to 10,
9999 Set the permissible number of retries for unsuccessful data reception. (Same specifications as Pr.121)
336 N036*5
RS-485 communication check time interval 0 s
0 RS-485 communication is available, but the inverter trips in the NET operation mode.
0.1 to 999.8 s
Set the interval of the communication check (Signal loss detection) time. (Same specifications as Pr.122)
9999 No communication check (Signal loss detection) 337 N037*5
RS-485 communication waiting time setting 9999 0 to 150 ms,
9999 Set the waiting time between data transmission to the inverter and the response. (Same specifications as Pr.123)
341 N038*5
RS-485 communication CR/LF selection 1 0, 1, 2 Select the presence/absence of CR/LF.
(Same specifications as Pr.124)
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Communication specifications The communication specifications are shown in the following table.
Communication procedure Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in the following procedure.
*1 If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, perform retry operation with the user program. The inverter output is shut off if the number of consecutive retries exceeds the parameter setting.
*2 On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns reply data (c) to the computer again. The inverter output is shut off if the number of consecutive data errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.
Communication operation presence/absence and data format types Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in ASCII code (hexadecimal code).
Item Description Related parameter
Communication protocol Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication) Pr.551 Conforming standard EIA-485 (RS-485)
Number of connectable units 1: N (maximum 32 units), the setting range of station number is 0 to 31. Pr.117 Pr.331
Communication speed
PU connector Selected among 4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/76800/115200 bps. Pr.118
RS-485 terminals Selected among 300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/76800/ 115200 bps. Pr.332
Control procedure Asynchronous method Communication method Half-duplex system
Communication specifications
Character system ASCII (7 bits or 8 bits can be selected.) Pr.119 Pr.333
Start bit 1 bit
Stop bit length 1 bit or 2 bits can be selected. Pr.119 Pr.333
Parity check Check (at even or odd numbers) or no check can be selected. Pr.120 Pr.334
Error check Sum code check
Terminator CR/LF (whether or not to use it can be selected) Pr.124 Pr.341
Time delay setting Availability of the setting is selectable. Pr.123 Pr.337
(a) Request data is sent from the computer to the inverter. (The inverter will not send data unless requested.) (b) Communication waiting time (c) The inverter sends reply data to the computer in response to the computer request. (d) Inverter data processing time (e) An answer from the computer in response to reply data (c) of the inverter is transmitted. (Even if (e) is not sent, subsequent
communication is made properly.)
When data is read
When data is written
a ed
cb 1
2
Computer (Data flow)
Inverter
Computer (Data flow)
Inverter Time
6735. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
67
Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows.
*1 In the communication request data from the computer to the inverter, the time of 10 ms or more is also required after an acknowledgment (ACK) signal showing "No data error detected" is sent. (Refer to page 677.)
*2 Reply from the inverter to the inverter reset request can be selected. (Refer to page 681.) *3 At mode error, and data range error, C1 data contains an error code. (Refer to page 686.) Except for those errors, the error is returned with data
format D. Data writing format
a. Communication request data from the computer to the inverter
c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (No data error detected)
c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (Data error detected)
*1 A control code. *2 The inverter station number is specified in hexadecimal in the range of H00 to H1F (stations No. 0 to 31). *3 Set the delay time. When Pr.123 PU communication waiting time setting or Pr.337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting is set to
other than "9999", create the communication request data without "delay time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.) *4 CR+LF code: When a computer transmits data to the inverter, some computers automatically provide either one or both of the codes CR (carriage
return) and LF (line feed) at the end of a data group. In this case, the same setting is required for data sent from the inverter to the computer. Use Pr.124 or Pr.341 for the CR+LF code setting.
Data reading format
Symbol Operation Operation command
Operation frequency
Multi command
Parameter write
Inverter reset Monitor Parameter
read
a Communication request is sent to the inverter in accordance with the user program in the computer.
A, A1 A A2 A A B B
b Inverter data processing time With With With With Without With With
c Reply data from the inverter (Data (a) is checked for an error.)
No error*1 (Request accepted)
C C C1*3 C C*2 E, E1, E2, E3 E
With error (Request rejected)
D D D D D*2 D D
d Computer processing delay time 10 ms or more
e
Reply from computer in response to reply data c (Data c is checked for error.)
No error*1 (No inverter processing)
Without Without Without (C) Without Without Without
(C) Without (C)
With error (Inverter outputs c again.)
Without Without F Without Without F F
Format Number of characters
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
A ENQ *1
Inverter station number*2
Instruction code
*3 Data Sum check *4
A1 ENQ *1
Inverter station number*2
Instruction code
*3 Data Sum check *4
A2 ENQ *1
Inverter station number*2
Instruction code
*3 Send data type
Receive data type
Data 1 Data 2 Sum check *4
Format Number of characters
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C ACK *1
Inverter station number *2
*4
C1 STX*
1
Inverter station number *2
Send data type
Receive data type
Error code 1
Error code 2 Data 1 Data 2 ETX*
1 Sum check
*4
Format Number of characters
1 2 3 4 5 D NAK*1 Inverter station number *2 Error code *4
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
a. Communication request data from the computer to the inverter
c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (No data error detected)
c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (Data error detected)
e. Transmission data from the computer to the inverter when reading data
*1 A control code. *2 The inverter station number is specified in hexadecimal in the range of H00 to H1F (stations No. 0 to 31). *3 Set the delay time. When Pr.123 PU communication waiting time setting or Pr.337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting is set to
other than "9999", create the communication request data without "delay time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.) *4 CR+LF code: When a computer transmits data to the inverter, some computers automatically provide either one or both of the codes CR (carriage
return) and LF (line feed) at the end of a data group. In this case, the same setting is required for data sent from the inverter to the computer. Use Pr.124 or Pr.341 for the CR+LF code setting.
Data definitions Control code
Inverter station number
Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer. Instruction code
Specify the processing request, for example, operation or monitoring, given by the computer to the inverter. Therefore, the operation or monitoring an item is enabled by specifying the corresponding instruction code. (Refer to page 681.)
Data
Format Number of characters
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
B ENQ*1 Inverter station number *2
Instruction code *3 Sum check *4
Format Number of characters
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
E STX*1 Inverter station number *2
Read data ETX *1 Sum check *4
E1 STX*1 Inverter station number *2
Read data ETX*1 Sum check *4
E2 STX*1 Inverter station number *2
Read data ETX*1 Sum check *4
Format Number of characters
1 2 3 4 to 23 24 25 26 27
E3 STX*1 Inverter station number*2
Read data (Inverter model information) ETX*1 Sum check *4
Format Number of characters
1 2 3 4 5
D NAK*1 Inverter station number *2
Error code
*4
Format Number of characters
1 2 3 4 C (No data error detected) ACK*1 Inverter station
number *2 *4
F (Data error detected) NAK*1 Inverter station
number *2 *4
Signal name ASCII code Description STX H02 Start Of Text (Start of data) ETX H03 End Of Text (End of data) ENQ H05 Enquiry (Communication request) ACK H06 Acknowledge (No data error detected) LF H0A Line Feed CR H0D Carriage Return NAK H15 Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected)
6755. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
67
Read/write data such as parameters transmitted from/to the inverter. The definitions and ranges of set data are determined in accordance with the instruction codes. (Refer to page 681.)
Time delay
Specify the delay time (time period between the time when the inverter receives data from the computer and the time when the inverter starts transmission of reply data). Set the delay time in accordance with the response time of the computer in the range of 0 to 150 ms in 10 ms increments. (For example, "1" for 10 ms or "2" for 20 ms.)
When Pr.123 PU communication waiting time setting or Pr.337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting is set to other than "9999", create the communication request data without "delay time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
*1 Number set in data 10 (ms) when Pr.123 = "9999". Pr.123 setting (ms) when Pr.123 "9999". *2 About 10 to 30 ms. It varies depending on the instruction code.
NOTE The data check time varies depending on the instruction code. (Refer to page 677.)
Sum check code
The sum check code is a 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum derived from the checked ASCII data.
Error code
Computer
Inverter
Inverter
Computer
Inverter data processing time = +Waiting time*1 data check time*2
(Example 1)
Computer Inverter ENQ
*W ai
tin g
tim e
1
Instruction codeStation
number 0 1
Data
E 1 0 7 A D F 4 H05 H30 H31 H31H45 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34
Binary code
H30+H31+H45+H31+H31+H30+H37+H41+H44
= H1F4
Sum
(Example 2) STX
Data readStation number
0 1 1 7 0 3 0 H02 H30 H31 H37H31 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30
Sum
ETX
7
*When the Pr.123 or Pr.337 (Waiting time setting) "9999", create the communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
Inverter
ASCII Code
ASCII Code
Binary code
H30+H31+H31+H37+H37+H30
= H130
Sum check code
Sum check codeComputer
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its error definition is sent back to the computer together with the NAK code.
Response time
*1 Refer to page 673. *2 Communication specifications
In addition to the above, 1 start bit is necessary. Minimum number of total bits: 9 bits Maximum number of total bits: 12 bits
Error code Error item Error description Inverter operation
H0 Computer NAK error The number of errors consecutively detected in communication request data from the computer is greater than the permissible number of retries.
The inverter output is shut off (E.PUE/E.SER) if error occurs continuously more than the permissible number of retries. The LF signal is output.
H1 Parity error The parity check result does not match the specified parity.
H2 Sum check error The sum check code in the computer does not match that of the data received by the inverter.
H3 Protocol error
The data received by the inverter has a grammatical mistake. Or, data receive is not completed within the predetermined time. The CR or LF code specification is not the same as the setting of the parameter.
H4 Framing error The stop bit length differs from the initial setting.
H5 Overrun error New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter completes receiving the preceding data.
H6
H7 Character error The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to F, control code).
The inverter does not accept the received data. However, the inverter output is not shut off.
H8 H9
HA Mode error
Parameter write was attempted when the inverter does not perform computer link communication, when the operation commands are not given through communication, or during inverter operation.
The inverter does not accept the received data. However, the inverter output is not shut off.HB Instruction code error The specified instruction code does not exist.
HC Data range error Invalid data has been specified for parameter writing, frequency setting, etc.
HD HE HF Normal (no error)
10 ms or more necessary
Computer
Inverter Inverter Computer
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
Inverter data processing time
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
Waiting time (setting 10 ms)
Data check time (depends on the instruction code*3)
Time
1 Communication
speed (bps)
[Formula for data transmission time]
data transmission time (s) Communication specifications (Total number of bits) *2Number of data characters *1
Name Number of bits
Stop bit length 1 bit 2 bits
Data length 7 bits 8 bits
Parity check With 1 bit Without 0
6775. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
67
*3 Data check time
Retry count setting (Pr.121, Pr.335) Set the permissible number of retries at data receive error occurrence. (Refer to page 676 for data receive error for retry.) When the data receive errors occur consecutively and the number of retries exceeds the permissible number setting, a
communication fault (PU connector communication: E.PUE, RS-485 terminal communication: E.SER) occurs and the inverter output is shut off.
When a data transmission error occurs while "9999" is set, the inverter does not shut off its output but outputs the Alarm (LF) signal. To use the LF signal, set "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.
NOTE For the RS-485 terminal communication, the operation at a communication error occurrence depends on the Pr.502 Stop
mode selection at communication error setting. (Refer to page 663.)
Signal loss detection (Pr.122, Pr.336 RS-485 communication check time interval)
If signal loss is detected between the inverter and computer, communication error "E.PUE" (PU connector communication) or "E.SER" (RS-485 terminal communication) will occur and the inverter output is shut off.
The LF signal is not output when a signal loss is detected. However, when a signal loss is detected via communication through the RS-485 terminals while Pr.502 = "3 or 4", the LF signal is output.
When the setting is "9999", communication check (signal loss detection) is not made. When the setting is "0", communication through the PU connector is not possible. The monitor items and parameter
settings can be read during communication via RS-485 terminals, but a communication error (E.SER) occurs instantly when the operation mode is switched to the Network operation.
Setting any value from 0.1 second to 999.8 seconds will enable signal loss detection. To detect signal loss, data must be sent from the computer within the communication check time interval (for further information on control codes, refer to page 675). (The inverter makes a communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting of the data sent from the master).
Item Check time Monitoring, operation command, frequency setting (RAM) Less than 12 ms Parameter read/write, frequency setting (EEPROM) Less than 30 ms Parameter clear / All parameter clear Less than 5 s Reset command No reply
Computer
Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 121 = "1" (initial value)
Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 121 = "9999"
Reception error Reception error
Fault (E.PUE) Inverter
ComputerInverter
Computer Inverter
ComputerInverter
EN Q
A C
K
N A
K
N A
K
LF OFF
OFF
EN Q
A C
K
N A
K
N A
K
ON ON
Illegal
Illegal EN Q
A C
K
NormalEN Q Illegal
EN Q Illegal
Reception errorReception error
ALM ON
ALM
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Communication check is started at the first communication in the operation mode having the operation source (PU operation mode for PU connector communication in the initial setting or Network operation mode for RS-485 terminal communication).
Programming instructions When data from the computer has any error, the inverter does not accept that data. Hence, in the user program, always
insert a retry program for data error. All data communication, for example, run command or monitoring, are started when the computer gives a communication
request. The inverter does not return any data without the computer's request. Hence, design the program so that the computer gives a data read request for monitoring, etc. as required.
Program example: To switch to the Network operation mode
Operation Mode
Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 122 = "0.1 to 999.8s"
External PU
Check start Fault (E.PUE)
Time
Pr.122
E N
Q
Communication check counter
Computer Inverter
ComputerInverter
ALM OFF ON
6795. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
68
Microsoft Visual C++ (Ver.6.0) programming example
#include
void main(void){ HANDLE hCom; // Communication handle DCB hDcb; // Structure for setting communication settings COMMTIMEOUTS hTim; // Structure for setting timeouts
char szTx[0x10]; // Send buffer char szRx[0x10]; // Receive buffer char szCommand[0x10];// Command int nTx,nRx; // For storing buffer size int nSum; // For calculating sum code BOOL bRet; int nRet; int i;
// ****
****
****
****
****
****
****
****
**** ****
****
****
****
****
****
****
****
****Open COM1 port hCom = CreateFile("COM1", (GENERIC_READ | GENERIC_WRITE), 0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL); if(hCom != NULL) {
// Set COM1 port communication noitamrofni noitacinummoc tnerruc teG //;)bcDh&,moCh(etatSmmoCteG
gnittes ezis erutcurtS //;)BCD(foezis = htgnelBCD.bcDh spb 00291 = deeps noitacinummoC //;00291 = etaRduaB.bcDh
stib 8 = htgnel ataD //;8 = eziSetyB.bcDh srebmun neve ta kcehc ytiraP //;2 = ytiraP.bcDh
stib 2 = tib potS //;2 = stiBpotS.bcDh noitamrofni noitacinummoc degnahc fo gnitteS //;)bcDh&,moCh(etatSmmoCteS = teRb
if(bRet == TRUE) { // Set COM1 port timeout
seulav tuoemit tnerruc teG //;)miTh&,moCh(stuoemiTmmoCteG dnoces 1 tuoemit etirW //;0001 = tnatsnoCtuoemiTlatoTetirW.miTh dnoces 1 tuoemit daeR //;0001 = tnatsnoCtuoemiTlatoTdaeR.miTh
hTim.ReadTotalTimeoutConstantSetCommTimeouts(hCom,&hTim);// Setting of changed timeout values // Setting of command for switching the station number 1 inverter to the Network operation mode
)etirw noitarepo TEN( atad dneS //;)"00001BF10",dnammoCzs(ftnirps ezis atad dneS //;)dnammoCzs(nelrts = xTn
// Generate sum code atad mus ezilaitinI //;0 = muSn
for(i = 0;i < nTx;i++) { edoc mus etaluclaC //;]i[dnammoCzs =+ muSn
atad ksaM //;)ffx0( =& muSn }
// Generate send data memset(szTx,0,sizeof(szTx)); // Initialize send buffer
//;))xRzs(foezis,0,xRzs(tesmem Initialize receive buffer sprintf(szTx,"\5%s%02X",szCommand,nSum);// ENQ code + send data + sum code
sedoc mus fo rebmun + atad dnes fo rebmun + edoc QNE //;2 + xTn + 1 = xTn
nRet = WriteFile(hCom,szTx,nTx,&nTx,NULL); // Send if(nRet != 0) {
nRet = ReadFile(hCom,szRx,sizeof(szRx),&nRx,NULL); // Receive
if(nRet != 0) { // Display receive data for(i = 0;i < nRx;i++) {
printf("%02X ",(BYTE)szRx[i]);// Output received data to console // Display ASCII code in Hexadecimal' In case of 0', "30" is displayed.
} printf("\n\r");
} }
} trop noitacinummoc esolC //;)moCh(eldnaHesolC
} }
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
General flowchart
Setting items and set data After completion of parameter settings, set the instruction codes and data, then start communication from the computer to
allow various types of operation control and monitoring.
CAUTION Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation to prevent hazardous conditions. Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides a communication
request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc., the inverter cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter output will be shut off (E.PUE, E.SER). Turn the RES signal of the inverter ON or shut off the power supply to coast the motor to a stop.
If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault etc., the inverter does not detect such a fault. This should be fully noted.
Port open
Communication setting
Time out setting
Send data processing
Receive data waiting
Receive data processing
Data setting Sum code calculation
Data transmission
Receive data processing Screen display
Item Read/ write
Instruction code Data description
Number of data digits (format)*1
Operation mode
Read H7B H0000: Network operation H0001: External operation, External operation (JOG operation) H0002: PU operation, External/PU combined operation, PUJOG operation
4 digits (B and E/D)
Write HFB
H0000: Network operation (Setting is available via communication through the RS-485 terminals.) H0001: External operation H0002: PU operation (Setting is available via communication through the PU connector.)
4 digits (A and C/D)
6815. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
68
M on
ito r
Output frequency / speed
Read H6F H0000 to HFFFF: Output frequency in 0.01 Hz increments. (The display can be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr.37, Pr.144 and Pr.811. (Refer to page 446.))
4 digits (B and E/D)
Output current Read H70
H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal) Increment 0.01 A (FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower) Increment 0.1 A (FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher)
4 digits (B and E/D)
Output voltage Read H71 H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1 V increments 4 digits (B and E/D)
Special monitor Read H72 H0000 to HFFFF: Data of the monitor item selected with the instruction code HF3.
4 digits (B and E/D)
Special monitor selection No.
Read H73 Monitor selection data (Refer to page 446 for details on selection No.)
2 digits (B and E1/D)
Write HF3 2 digits (A1 and C/D)
Fault record Read H74 to H77
H0000 to HFFFF: Two fault records per code.
(Refer to page 776 for details on fault record read data.)
4 digits (B and E/D)
Operation command (extended) Write HF9 Control input commands such as the Forward rotation command (STF) signal
and the Reverse rotation command (STR) signal can be set. (For the details, refer to page 685.)
4 digits (A and C/D)
Operation command Write HFA 2 digits (A1 and C/D)
Inverter status monitor (extended) Read H79 The states of the output signals such as the Forward rotation output, Reverse
rotation output, and Inverter running (RUN) signals can be monitored. (For the details, refer to page 685.)
4 digits (B and E/D)
Inverter status monitor Read H7A 2 digits (B and
E1/D) Set frequency (RAM)
Read H6D Read the set frequency/speed from the RAM or EEPROM.
H0000 to HFFFF: Set frequency in 0.01 Hz increments. (The display can be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr.37, Pr.144 and Pr.811. (Refer to page 446.))
4 digits (B and E/D)Set frequency
(EEPROM) H6E
Set frequency (RAM)
Write
HED Write the set frequency/speed into the RAM or EEPROM. H0000 to HE678 (0 to 590.00 Hz): frequency in 0.01 Hz increments. (The display can be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr.37, Pr.144 and Pr.811. (Refer to page 446.)) To change the set frequency consecutively, write data to the inverter RAM. (Instruction code: HED)
4 digits (A and C/D)Set frequency (RAM,
EEPROM) HEE
Inverter reset Write HFD
H9696: Inverter reset As the inverter is reset at the start of communication by the computer, the inverter cannot send reply data back to the computer.
4 digits (A and C/D)
H9966: Inverter reset After the computer correctly starts communication and send data to the inverter, the inverter returns the ACK signal to the computer before being reset.
4 digits (A and D)
Item Read/ write
Instruction code Data description
Number of data digits (format)*1
b15 b8 b7 b0 Latest faultSecond latest fault
Third latest faultFourth latest fault
Fifth latest faultSixth latest fault
Seventh latest faultEighth latest fault
H74
H75
H76
H77
With the read data H30A0
Fault record display example (instruction code H74)
(Second fault : THT) (Latest fault : OPT)
0 b15
Latest fault (HA0)
Second fault (H30)
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 b8
1 b7
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 b0
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 Refer to page 673 for data formats (A, A1, A2, B, C, C1, D, E, E1, E2, E3, F). *2 Turning OFF the power supply while clearing parameters with H5A5A or H55AA returns the communication parameter settings to the initial
settings. *3 Refer to the following calibration parameter list for details on the calibration parameters. *4 The gain frequency can be also written using Pr.125 (instruction code: H99) or Pr.126 (instruction code: H9A).
NOTE Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999". For the instruction codes HFF, HEC, and HF3, their values once written are held, but cleared to zero when an inverter reset
or all clear is performed. When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitor item is read and the value to be read exceeds HFFFF, HFFFF is returned.
Example) When reading the C3 (Pr.902) and C6 (Pr.904) settings from the inverter of station No. 0.
To read/write C3 (Pr.902) or C6 (Pr.904) after inverter reset or parameter clear, execute from (a) again.
Fault history clear Write HF4 H9696: Fault history is cleared. 4 digits (A,C/D)
Parameter clear / All parameter clear Write HFC
All parameters return to initial values. Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be selected according to the data. Parameter clear
H9696: Parameters including communication parameters are cleared. H5A5A: Parameters other than communication parameters are cleared.*2
All parameter clear H9966: Parameters including communication parameters are cleared. H55AA: Parameters other than communication parameters are cleared.*2
For details on whether or not to clear parameters, refer to page 864. When a clear is performed with H9696 or H9966, communication related parameter settings also return to the initial values. When resuming the operation, set the parameters again. Performing a clear will clear the instruction code HEC, HF3, and HFF settings. Only H9966 and H55AA (All parameter clear) are valid when a password is registered (refer to page 348).
4 digits (A and C/D)
Parameter Read H00 to H6B Refer to the instruction code (page 864) and write and/or read parameter
values as required. When setting Pr.100 and later, the link parameter extended setting must be set.
4 digits (B and E/D)
Write H80 to HEB 4 digits (A and C/D)
Link parameter extended setting
Read H7F Parameter settings are changed according to the instruction code settings. For details on the settings, refer to the extended code in the instruction code list (on page 864).
2 digits (B and E1/D)
Write HFF 2 digits (A1 and C/D)
Second parameter changing (instruction code HFF = 1, 9)
Read H6C When setting the calibration parameters*3
H00: Frequency*4
H01: Parameter-set analog value H02: Analog value input from terminal
2 digits (B and E1/D)
Write HEC 2 digits (A1 and C/D)
Multi command Read/ write HF0 Available for writing 2 commands, and monitoring 2 items for reading data.
(Refer to page 686 for details.) 10 digits (A2 and C1/D)
Pr od
uc t p
ro fil
e Model Read H7C
The inverter model can be read in ASCII code. "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area. Example) FR-A840-1 (FM type): H46,H52,H2D,H41,H38,H34,H30,H2D,H31,H20,H20...H20
20 digits (B and E3/D)
Capacity Read H7D
The capacity in the inverter model can be read in ASCII code. Data is read in increments of 0.1 kW, and rounds down to 0.01 kW increments. "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area. Example) 0.75K: " 7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)
6 digits (B and E2/D)
Item Read/ write
Instruction code Data description
Number of data digits (format)*1
Computer send data Inverter send data Description a ENQ 00 FF 0 01 7D ACK 00 "H01" is set in the extended link parameter. b ENQ 00 EC 0 01 79 ACK 00 "H01" is set in the second parameter changing. c ENQ 00 5E 0 0A STX 00 0000 ETX 20 C3 (Pr.902) is read. 0% is read. d ENQ 00 60 0 F6 STX 00 0000 ETX 20 C6 (Pr.904) is read. 0% is read.
6835. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
68
List of calibration parameters Pr. Name
Instruction code Read Write Extended
C2 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 5E DE 1 C3 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 5E DE 1 125 (903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 5F DF 1 C4 (903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 5F DF 1 C5 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 60 E0 1 C6 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 60 E0 1 126 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 61 E1 1 C7 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 61 E1 1 C12 (917) Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) 11 91 9 C13 (917) Terminal 1 bias (speed) 11 91 9 C14 (918) Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) 12 92 9 C15 (918) Terminal 1 gain (speed) 12 92 9 C16 (919) Terminal 1 bias command (torque/magnetic flux) 13 93 9 C17 (919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic flux) 13 93 9 C18 (920) Terminal 1 gain command (torque/magnetic flux) 14 94 9
C19 (920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux) 14 94 9
C8 (930) Current output bias signal 1E 9E 9
C9 (930) Current output bias current 1E 9E 9
C10 (931) Current output gain signal 1F 9F 9
C11 (931) Current output gain current 1F 9F 9
C38 (932) Terminal 4 bias command (torque/magnetic flux) 20 A0 9
C39 (932) Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic flux) 20 A0 9
C40 (933) Terminal 4 gain command (torque/magnetic flux) 21 A1 9 C41 (933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux) 21 A1 9 C42 (934) PID display bias coefficient 22 A2 9 C43 (934) PID display bias analog value 22 A2 9 C44 (935) PID display gain coefficient 23 A3 9 C45 (935) PID display gain analog value 23 A3 9
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation command
*1 The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) (page 521).
*2 The Inverter run enable signal is in the initial status for the separated converter type. *3 JOG operation/automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/start self-holding selection/reset cannot be controlled over a network, so in the
initial status bit 8 to bit 11 are invalid. To use bit 8 to bit 11, change the signal by Pr.185, Pr.186, Pr.188, or Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) (page 521) (A reset can be executed by the instruction code HFD.)
*4 During RS-485 communication through the PU connector, only the Forward rotation command and Reverse rotation command signals can be used.
Inverter status monitor
Item Instruction code Bit length Description*1*4 Example
Operation command HFA 8 bits
b0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection) b1: Forward rotation command b2: Reverse rotation command b3: RL (Low-speed operation command) b4: RM (Middle-speed operation command) b5: RH (High-speed operation command) b6: RT (Second function selection) b7: MRS (Output stop)*2
Operation command (extended)
HF9 16 bits
b0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection) b1: Forward rotation command b2: Reverse rotation command b3: RL (Low-speed operation command) b4: RM (Middle-speed operation command) b5: RH (High-speed operation command) b6: RT (Second function selection) b7: MRS (Output stop)*2
b8: JOG (Jog operation selection)*3 b9: CS (Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start)*3 b10: STP (STOP) (Start self-holding selection)*3
b11: RES (Inverter reset)*3 b12 to b15:
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 b7 b0
[Example 1] H02 Forward rotation
[Example 2] H00 Stop
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b7 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 b0
[Example 1] H0002 Forward rotation
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b15
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 b0
[Example 2] H0804 Low-speed reverse operation (When Pr. 189 RES terminal function selection is set to "0")
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 b15
Item Instruction code
Bit length Description*1 Example
Inverter status monitor
H7A 8 bits
b0: RUN (Inverter running) b1: Forward rotation output b2: Reverse rotation output b3: SU (Up to frequency) b4: OL (Overload warning) b5: IPF (Instantaneous power failure/ undervoltage)*2 b6: FU (Output frequency detection) b7: ABC1 (Fault)
Inverter status monitor (extended)
H79 16 bits
b0: RUN (Inverter running) b1: Forward rotation output b2: Reverse rotation output b3: SU (Up to frequency) b4: OL (Overload warning) b5: IPF (Instantaneous power failure/ undervoltage)*2 b6: FU (Output frequency detection) b7: ABC1 (Fault) b8: ABC2 () b9: Safety monitor output b10 to b14: b15: Fault occurrence
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 b7 b0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b7 b0
[Example 2] H80
[Example 1] H03
Stop at fault occurrence
During forward rotation
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b15 [Example 1] H0003 During forward rotation
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b15 [Example 2] H8080 Stop at fault occurrence
6855. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
68
*1 The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
*2 No function is assigned in the initial status for the separated converter type.
Multi command (HF0) Sending data format from computer to inverter
Reply data format from inverter to computer (No data error detected)
*1 Specify the data type of sending data (from computer to inverter). *2 Specify the data type of reply data (from inverter to computer). *3 Combination of data 1 and data 2 for sending
*4 Combination of data 1 and data 2 for reply
*5 The error code for sending data 1 is set in error code 1, and the error code for sending data 2 is set in error code 2. Mode error (HA), instruction code error (HB), data range error (HC) or no error (HF) is replied. (Refer to page 776 for details on the error codes.)
5.15.6 MODBUS RTU communication specification Operation by MODBUS RTU communication or parameter setting is possible by using the MODBUS RTU communication protocol through the RS-485 terminals of the inverter.
Format Number of characters
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
A2 ENQ Inverter station number
Instruction code (HF0)
Time delay
Send data type*1
Receive data type*2
Data 1*3 Data 2*3 Sum check CR/ LF
Format Number of characters
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C1 STX Inverter station number
Send data type*1
Receive data type*2
Error code 1*5
Error code 2*5
Data 1*4 Data 2*4 ETX Sum check CR/ LF
Data type Data 1 Data 2 Remarks
0 Operation command (extended) Set frequency (RAM)
Run command (extended) is same as instruction code HF9. (Refer to page 685.)
1 Operation command (extended)
Set frequency (RAM, EEPROM)
Data type Data 1 Data 2 Remarks
0 Inverter status monitor (extended)
Output frequency (speed)
Inverter status monitor (extended) is same as instruction code H79. (Refer to page 685.) Replies the monitor item specified in instruction code HF3 for special monitor. (Refer to page 446.)1 Inverter status monitor
(extended) Special monitor
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE To use the MODBUS RTU protocol, set "1" in Pr.549 Protocol selection. If MODBUS RTU communication is performed from the master to the address 0 (station number 0), the data is broadcasted,
and the inverter does not send any reply to the master. To obtain replies from the inverter, set Pr.331 RS-485 communication station number "0 (initial value)".
Some functions are disabled in broadcast communication. (Refer to page 689.) If a communication option is installed with Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "9999 (initial value)",
commands (operation commands) transmitted via RS-485 terminals become invalid. (Refer to page 400.)
Communication specifications The communication specifications are shown in the following table.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description
331 N030
RS-485 communication station number 0
0 Broadcast communication
1 to 247 Specify the inverter station number. Enter the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are connected to one personal computer.
332 N031
RS-485 communication speed 96
3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96, 192, 384, 576, 768, 1152
Select the communication speed. The setting value 100 equals the communication speed. For example, enter 96 to set the communication speed of 9600 bps.
N033 RS-485 communication stop bit length 1
0 Stop bit length 1 bit Valid when Pr.N034 (Pr.334) = "0"1 Stop bit length 2 bits
333 RS-485 communication stop bit length / data length 1
0 Stop bit length 1 bit
Valid when Pr.334 = "0" 1 Stop bit length 2 bits 10 Stop bit length 1 bit 11 Stop bit length 2 bits
334 N034
RS-485 communication parity check selection 2
0 Without parity check Stop bit length 1 bit / 2 bits (depends on the setting of Pr.333)
1 With parity check at odd numbers. Stop bit length: 1 bit.
2 With parity check at even numbers. Stop bit length: 1 bit.
343 N080 Communication error count 0 Displays the communication error count during MODBUS RTU
communication. Read-only.
539 N002
MODBUS RTU communication check time interval
9999
0 MODBUS RTU communication is available, but the inverter output is shut off in the NET operation mode.
0.1 to 999.8 s Set the interval of the communication check (signal loss detection) time (same specifications as Pr.122).
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection) 549 N000 Protocol selection 0
0 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link) 1 MODBUS RTU protocol
Item Description Related parameter Communication protocol MODBUS RTU protocol Pr.549 Conforming standard EIA-485 (RS-485) Number of connectable units 1: N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 247 stations Pr.331
Communication speed Selected among 300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/76800/ 115200 bps. Pr.332
Control procedure Asynchronous method Communication method Half-duplex system
Communication specifications
Character system Binary (fixed at 8 bits)
Start bit 1 bit Stop bit length Select from the following three types:
No parity check, stop bit length 1 bit / 2 bits (depends on the setting of Pr.333). Odd parity check, stop bit length 1 bit. Even parity check, stop bit length 1 bit.
Pr.333 Pr.334Parity check
Error check CRC code check Terminator Not available
Time delay setting Not available
6875. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
68
Outline The MODBUS communication protocol was developed by Modicon for programmable controllers. The MODBUS protocol uses exclusive message frames to perform serial communication between a master and slaves.
These exclusive message frames are provided with a feature called "functions" that allows data to be read or written. These functions can be used to read or write parameters from the inverter, write input commands to the inverter or check the inverter's operating status, for example. This product classifies the data of each inverter into holding register area (register address 40001 to 49999). The master can communicate with inverters (slaves) by accessing pre-assigned holding register addresses.
NOTE There are two serial transmission modes, the ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) mode and the RTU
(Remote Terminal Unit) mode. However, this product supports only the RTU mode, which transfers 1 byte data (8 bits) as it is. Also, only communication protocol is defined by the MODBUS protocol. Physical layers are not stipulated.
Message format
Data check time
Query A message is sent to the slave (the inverter) having the address specified by the master.
Normal response After the query from the master is received, the slave executes the request function, and returns the corresponding normal response to the master.
Error Response When an invalid function code, address or data is received by the slave, the error response is returned to the master. This response is appended with an error code that indicates the reason why the request from the master could not be executed. This response cannot be returned for errors, detected by the hardware, frame error and CRC check error.
Broadcast The master can broadcast messages to all slaves by specifying address 0. All slaves that receive a message from the master execute the requested function. With this type of communication, slaves do not return a response to the master.
NOTE During broadcast communication, functions are executed regarded of the set inverter station number (Pr.331).
Query communication
Broadcast communication
Query Message
Query Message
Response Message
Inverter (slave)
Inverter (slave)
Programmable controller (Master)
Programmable controller (Master)
No Response
Inverter response time (Refer to the following table for the data check time)
Data absence time (3.5 bytes or more)
Item Check time Monitoring, operation command, frequency setting (RAM) Less than 12 ms
Parameter read/write, frequency setting (EEPROM) Less than 30 ms
Parameter clear / All parameter clear < 5 s Reset command No reply
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Message frame (protocol) Communication method
Basically, the master sends a query message (inquiry), and slaves return a response message (response). At normal communication, the device address and function code are copied as they are, and at erroneous communication (illegal function code or data code), bit 7 (= H80) of the function code is turned ON, and the error code is set at data bytes.
Message frames comprise the four message fields shown in the figures above. A slave recognizes message data as one message when a 3.5 character long no-data time (T1: start/end) is added before and after the data.
Details of protocol The following table explains the four message fields.
Query message from Master
Response message from slave
Device Address Function Code
Eight-Bit Data Bytes
Error Check
Device Address Function Code
Eight-Bit Data Bytes
Error Check
Start Address Function Data CRC check End
T1 8 bits 8 bits n 8 bits L 8 bits
H 8 bits T1
Message field Description
Address field
"0 to 247" can be set in the single-byte (8-bit) length field. Set "0" when sending broadcast messages (instructions to all addresses), and "1 to 247" to send messages to individual slaves. The response from the slave also contains the address set by the master. The value set in Pr.331 RS-485 communication station number is the slave address.
Function field
"1 to 255" can be set as the function code in the single-byte (8-bit) length filed. The master sets the function to be sent to the slave as the request, and the slave performs the requested operation. Refer to the function code list for details on the supported function codes. An error response is generated when a function code other than those in the function code list is set. The normal response from the slave contains the function code set by the master. The error response contains H80 and the function code.
Data field The format changes according the function code. (Refer to page 690.) The data, for example, includes the byte count, number of bytes, and accessing content of holding registers.
CRC check field
Errors in the received message frame are detected. Errors are detected in the CRC check, and the 2 bytes length data is appended to the message. When the CRC is appended to the message, the lower bytes of the CRC are appended first, followed by the upper bytes. The CRC value is calculated by the sender that appends the CRC to the message. The receiver recalculates the CRC while the message is being received, and compares the calculation result against the actual value that was received in the error check field. If the two values do not match, the result is treated as an error.
6895. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
69
Function code list
Read holding register (reading data of holding registers) (H03 or 03) Query message
Normal response (Response message)
Query message setting
Content of normal response
Function name Read/ write Code Outline Broadcast
communication
Message format
reference page
Read holding register Read H03
The data of the holding registers is read. The various data of the inverter can be read from MODBUS registers. System environmental variable (Refer to page 695.) Real time monitor (Refer to page 447.) Fault history (Refer to page 697.) Product profile (Refer to page 698.) Inverter parameters (Refer to page 696.)
Not available page 690
Preset single register Write H06
Data is written to a holding register. Data can be written to MODBUS registers to output instructions to the inverter or set parameters. System environmental variable (Refer to page 695.) Inverter parameters (Refer to page 696.)
Available page 691
Diagnostics Read H08
Functions are diagnosed. (communication check only) A communication check can be made since the query message is sent and the query message is returned as it is as the return message (subfunction code H00 function). Subfunction code H00 (Return query data).
Not available page 691
Preset multiple registers Write H10
Data is written to multiple consecutive holding registers. Data can be written to consecutive multiple MODBUS registers to output instructions to the inverter or set parameters. System environmental variable (Refer to page 695.) Inverter parameters (Refer to page 696.)
Available page 692
Read holding register access log Read H46
The number of registers that were successfully accessed by the previous communication is read. Queries by function codes H03 and H10 are supported. The number and start address of holding registers successfully accessed by the previous communication are returned. "0" is returned for both the number and start address for queries other than function code H03 and H10.
Not available page 693
a. Slave address b. Function c. Starting address d. No. of points CRC check
(8 bits) H03 (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
a. Slave address b. Function e. Byte count f. Data CRC check
(8 bits) H03 (8 bits) (8 bits) H
(8 bits) L (8 bits)
... (n 16 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
Message Description
a Slave address Set the address to send messages to. Broadcast communication is not possible. (Invalid when "0" is set.)
b Function Set H03.
c Starting address
Set the holding register address from which to start reading the data. Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001 For example, when starting register address 0001 is set, the data of holding register address 40002 is read.
d No. of points Set the number of holding registers for reading data. Data can be read from up to 125 registers.
Message Description
e Byte count The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250). Twice the number of reads specified by (d) is set.
f Data The amount of data specified by (d) is set. Read data is output Hi bytes first followed by Lo bytes, and is arranged as follows: data of start address, data of start address+1, data of start address+2, and so forth.
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Example) Read the register values of 41004 (Pr.4) to 41006 (Pr.6) from slave address 17 (H11). Query message
Normal response (Response message)
Read value Register 41004 (Pr.4): H1770 (60.00 Hz) Register 41005 (Pr.5): H0BB8 (30.00 Hz) Register 41006 (Pr.6): H03E8 (10.00 Hz)
Preset single register (writing data to holding registers) (H06 or 06) The content of the system environmental variables and inverter parameters (refer to page 694) assigned to the holding
register area can be written. Query message
Normal response (Response message)
Query message setting
Content of normal response
The contents in the normal response (a to d, including the CRC check) are the same as those in the query messages.
In the case of broadcast communication, no response is returned.
Example) Write 60 Hz (H1770) to 40014 (set frequency RAM) of slave address 5 (H05). Query message
Normal response (Response message) The same data as those in the query message
NOTE With broadcast communication, no response is generated even if a query is executed, so when the next query is made, it must
be made after waiting for the inverter data processing time after the previous query is executed.
Diagnostics (diagnosis of functions) (H08 or 08) A communication check can be made since the query message is sent and the query message is returned as it is as the
return message (subfunction code H00 function). Subfunction code H00 (Return query data)
Slave address Function Starting address No. of points CRC check H11 (8 bits)
H03 (8 bits)
H03 (8 bits)
HEB (8 bits)
H00 (8 bits)
H03 (8 bits)
H77 (8 bits)
H2B (8 bits)
Slave address Function Byte count Data CRC check H11 (8 bits)
H03 (8 bits)
H06 (8 bits)
H17 (8 bits)
H70 (8 bits)
H0B (8 bits)
HB8 (8 bits)
H03 (8 bits)
HE8 (8 bits)
H2C (8 bits)
HE6 (8 bits)
a. Slave address b. Function c. Register address d. Preset data CRC check
(8 bits) H06 (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
a. Slave address b. Function c. Register address d. Preset data CRC check
(8 bits) H06 (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
Message Description a Slave address Set the address to send messages to. Setting "0" enables broadcast communication. b Function Set H06.
c Register address Set the holding register address to write data to. Register address = holding register address (decimal) - 40001 For example, when register address 0001 is set, data is written to holding register address 40002.
d Preset Data Set the data to write to the holding register. Write data is fixed at 2 bytes.
Slave address Function Register address Preset data CRC check H05 (8 bits)
H06 (8 bits)
H00 (8 bits)
H0D (8 bits)
H17 (8 bits)
H70 (8 bits)
H17 (8 bits)
H99 (8 bits)
6915. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
69
Query message
Normal response (Response message)
Query message setting
Content of normal response The contents in the normal response (a to d, including the CRC check) are the same as those in the query messages.
NOTE With broadcast communication, no response is generated even if a query is executed, so when the next query is made, it must
be made after waiting for the inverter data processing time after the previous query is executed.
Preset multiple registers (writing data to multiple holding registers) (H10 or 16)
Data can be written to multiple holding registers. Query message
Normal response (Response message)
Query message setting
Content of normal response The contents in the normal response (a to d, including the CRC check) are the same as those in the query messages.
a. Slave address b. Function c. Subfunction d. Data CRC check
(8 bits) H08 (8 bits)
H00 (8 bits)
H00 (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
a. Slave address b. Function c. Subfunction d. Data CRC check
(8 bits) H08 (8 bits)
H00 (8 bits)
H00 (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
Message Description
a Slave address Set the address to send messages to. Broadcast communication is not possible. (Invalid when "0" is set.)
b Function Set H08. c Subfunction Set H0000. d Data Any 2-byte long data can be set. The setting range is H0000 to HFFFF.
a. Slave address b. Function c. Starting
address d. No. of registers e. Byte count f. Data CRC check
(8 bits) H10 (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
L (8 bits) (8 bits) H
(8 bits) L (8 bits)
... (n 2 8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
a. Slave address b. Function c. Starting address d. No. of registers CRC check
(8 bits) H10 (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
Message Description a Slave address Set the address to send messages to. Setting "0" enables broadcast communication. b Function Set H10.
c Starting address Set the holding register address from which to start writing the data. Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001 For example, when starting address 0001 is set, data is written to holding register 40002.
d No. of registers Set the number of holding registers for writing data. Data can be written to up to 125 registers. e Byte count The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250). Set twice the value specified by d.
f Data Set the amount of data specified by d. Write data is output Hi bytes first followed by Lo bytes, and is arranged as follows: data of start address, data of start address+1, data of start address+2, and so forth.
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Example) Write 0.5 s (H05) to 41007 (Pr.7) and 1 s (H0A) to 41008 (Pr.8) of slave address 25 (H19).
Query message
Normal response (Response message)
Read holding register access log (H46 or 70) Queries by function codes H03 and H10 are supported. The number and start address of holding registers successfully
accessed by the previous communication are returned. "0" is returned for both the number and start address for queries other than the function codes above.
Query message
Normal response (Response message)
Query message setting
Content of normal response
Example) Read the successful register start address and number of successful accesses from slave address 25 (H19).
Query message
Normal response (Response message)
The number of holding registers that were successfully accessed was returned as two with the start address 41007 (Pr.7).
Error response An error response is returned if the query message received from the master contains an illegal function, address or data.
No response is returned for parity, CRC, overrun, framing, and busy errors.
Slave address Function Starting address No. of registers Byte count Data CRC check
H19 (8 bits)
H10 (8 bits)
H03 (8 bits)
HEE (8 bits)
H00 (8 bits)
H02 (8 bits)
H04 (8 bits)
H00 (8 bits)
H05 (8 bits)
H00 (8 bits)
H0A (8 bits)
H86 (8 bits)
H3D (8 bits)
Slave address Function Starting address No. of registers CRC check
H19 (8 bits)
H10 (8 bits)
H03 (8 bits)
HEE (8 bits)
H00 (8 bits)
H02 (8 bits)
H22 (8 bits)
H61 (8 bits)
a. Slave address b. Function CRC check
(8 bits) H46 (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
a. Slave address b. Function c. Starting address d. No. of points CRC check
(8 bits) H46 (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
L (8 bits)
H (8 bits)
Message Description
a Slave address Set the address to send messages to. Broadcast communication is not possible. (Invalid when "0" is set.)
b Function Set H46.
Message Description
c Starting address
The start address of the holding register that was successfully accessed is returned. Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001 For example, when starting address 0001 is returned, the holding register address that was successfully accessed is 40002.
d No. of points The number of holding registers that were successfully accessed is returned.
Slave address Function CRC check H19 (8 bits)
H46 (8 bits)
H8B (8 bits)
HD2 (8 bits)
Slave address Function Starting address No. of points CRC check H19 (8 bits)
H10 (8 bits)
H03 (8 bits)
HEE (8 bits)
H00 (8 bits)
H02 (8 bits)
H22 (8 bits)
H61 (8 bits)
6935. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
69
NOTE No response is also returned in the case of broadcast communication.
Error response (Response message)
Error code list
*1 An error response is not returned in the following cases:
In other words, when function code H03 or H10 is used and multiple holding registers are accessed, an error response is not returned even if a nonexistent holding register or holding register that cannot be read or written from/to is accessed.
NOTE An error response is returned if none of the accessed holding registers exist. When an accessed holding register does not
exist, the read value is 0 and the written data is invalid.
Error detection of message data The following errors are detected in message data from the master. The inverter output is not shut off even if an error is detected.
Error check items
NOTE The LF signal can be assigned to an output terminal by setting Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
MODBUS register The following shows the MODBUS registers for system environment variables (read/write), real time monitor items (read),
parameters (read/write), fault history data (read/write), and model information monitor items (read).
a. Slave address b. Function c. Exception code CRC check
(8 bits) H80 + Function (8 bits) (8 bits) L
(8 bits) H (8 bits)
Message Description a Slave address Set the address received from the master. b Function The function code requested by the master and H80 is set. c Exception code The codes in the following table are set.
Code Error item Error description 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION The query message from the master has a function code that cannot be handled by the slave.
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS*1 The query message from the master has a register address that cannot be handled by the slave. (No parameter, parameter cannot be read, parameter cannot be written)
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE The query message from the master has data that cannot be handled by the slave. (Out of parameter write range, a mode is specified, or other error)
(a) Function code H03 (reading data of holding registers)
When the number of registers is specified as one or more and there are one or more holding registers from which data can be read
(b) Function code H10 (writing data to multiple holding registers)
When the number of registers is specified as one or more and there are one or more holding registers to which data can be written.
Error item Error description Inverter operation
Parity error The data received by the inverter is different from the specified parity (Pr.334 setting).
When this error occurs, Pr.343 is incremented by one. When this error occurs, the LF signal is output.
Framing error The data received by the inverter is different from the stop bit length (Pr.333/Pr.334) setting.
Overrun error The next data has been sent by the master before the inverter completes receiving the preceding data.
Message frame error The data length of the message frame is checked, and an error is generated if the received data length is less than 4 bytes.
CRC check error An error is generated if the data in the message frame does not match the calculation result.
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
System environment variables
*1 Settings in the communication parameters are not cleared. *2 The data is written as a control input command for writing.
The data is read as the inverter status for reading. *3 The data is written as an operation mode setting for writing.
The data is read as the operation mode status for reading. Inverter status / control input command
*4 The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) (page 521). The signals assigned to the input terminals may be valid or invalid in the NET operation mode. (Refer to page 404.)
*5 The Inverter run enable signal is in the initial status for the separated converter type. *6 The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal
function selection) (page 473). *7 No function is assigned in the initial status for the separated converter type.
Operation mode / inverter setting
*8 Writing is available depending on the Pr.79 and Pr.340 settings. (For details, refer to page 398.) Restrictions in each operation mode conform with the computer link specification.
Register Definition Read/write Remarks 40002 Inverter reset Write Any value 40003 Parameter clear Write Set H965A. 40004 All parameter clear Write Set H99AA. 40006 Parameter clear*1 Write Set H5A96.
40007 All parameter clear*1 Write Set HAA99.
40009 Inverter status / control input command*2 Read/write Refer to the following.
40010 Operation mode / inverter setting*3 Read/write Refer to the following. 40014 Set frequency (RAM value) Read/write The display can be changed to the rotations
per minute using Pr.37, Pr.144 and Pr.811. (Refer to page 446.)40015 Set frequency (EEPROM value) Write
Bit Definition
Control input command Inverter status 0 Stop command RUN (Inverter running)*6
1 Forward rotation command Forward running 2 Reverse rotation command Reverse running 3 RH (High-speed operation command)*4 SU (Up to frequency)*6
4 RM (Middle-speed operation command)*4 OL (Overload warning)*6
5 RL (Low-speed operation command)*4 IPF (Instantaneous power failure/ undervoltage)*6*7
6 JOG (Jog operation selection)*4 FU (Output frequency detection)*6
7 RT (Second function selection)*4 ABC1 (Fault)*6
8 AU (Terminal 4 input selection)*4 ABC2 (-)*6
9 CS (Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start)*4
Safety monitor output
10 MRS (Output stop)*4*5 0
11 STP (STOP) (Start self-holding selection)*4 0
12 RES (Inverter reset)*4 0 13 0 14 0 15 Fault occurrence
Mode Read value Write value EXT H0000 H0010*8
PU H0001 H0011*8
EXT JOG H0002
PU JOG H0003
NET H0004 H0014 PU + EXT H0005
6955. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
69
Real time monitor Refer to page 446 for the register numbers and monitor items of the real time monitor.
Parameters
Pr. Register Name Read/write Remarks
0 to 999 41000 to 41999
For details on parameter names, refer to the parameter list (page 166).
Read/write The parameter number + +41000 is the register number.
C2 (902) 41902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias (frequency) Read/write
C3 (902) 42092 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
(analog value) Read/write Analog value (%) set to C3 (902)
43902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of the voltage (current) applied to
terminal 2
125 (903) 41903 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain (frequency) Read/write
C4 (903) 42093 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
(analog value) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C4 (903)
43903 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of the voltage (current) applied to
terminal 2
C5 (904) 41904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias (frequency) Read/write
C6 (904) 42094 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
(analog value) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C6 (904)
43904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
terminal 4
126 (905) 41905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain (frequency) Read/write
C7 (905) 42095 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
(analog value) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C7 (905)
43905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
terminal 4
C12 (917) 41917 Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) Read/write
C13 (917) 42107 Terminal 1 bias (speed) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C13 (917)
43917 Terminal 1 bias (speed) (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of voltage applied to terminal 1
C14 (918) 41918 Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) Read/write
C15 (918) 42108 Terminal 1 gain (speed) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C15 (918)
43918 Terminal 1 gain (speed) (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of voltage applied to terminal 1
C16 (919) 41919 Terminal 1 bias command (torque/magnetic flux) Read/write
C17 (919) 42109 Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic
flux) Read/write Analog value (%) set to C17 (919)
43919 Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic flux) (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of voltage applied to terminal 1
C18 (920) 41920 Terminal 1 gain command (torque/magnetic flux) Read/write
C19 (920) 42110 Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic
flux) Read/write Analog value (%) set to C19 (920)
43920 Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux) (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of voltage applied to terminal 1
C29 (925)
42115 Motor temperature detection calibration (analog input) Read/write
43925 Motor temperature detection calibration (analog input) (terminal analog value)
Read Analog value (%) between terminals TH1 and TH2 of the FR-A8AZ
C30 (926) 41926 Terminal 6 bias frequency (speed) Read/write
C31 (926) 42116 Terminal 6 bias (speed) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C31 (926)
43926 Terminal 6 bias (speed) (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 6 of the
FR-A8AZ
C32 (927) 41927 Terminal 6 gain frequency (speed) Read/write
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Fault history
C33 (927)
42117 Terminal 6 gain (speed) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C33 (927)
43927 Terminal 6 gain (speed) (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 6 of the
FR-A8AZ C34 (928) 41928 Terminal 6 bias command
(torque) Read/write
C35 (928)
42118 Terminal 6 bias (torque) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C35 (928)
43928 Terminal 6 bias (torque) (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 6 of the
FR-A8AZ C36 (929) 41929 Terminal 6 gain command
(torque) Read/write
C37 (929)
42119 Terminal 6 gain (torque) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C37 (929)
43929 Terminal 6 gain (torque) (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 6 of the
FR-A8AZ C8 (930) 41930 Current output bias signal Read/write
C9 (930) 42120 Current output bias current Read/write Analog value (%) set in C9 (930)
C10 (931) 41931 Current output gain signal Read/write
C11 (931) 42121 Current output gain current Read/write Analog value (%) set in C11 (931)
C38 (932) 41932 Terminal 4 bias command
(torque/magnetic flux) Read/write
C39 (932) 42122 Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic
flux) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C39 (932)
43932 Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic flux) (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
terminal 4
C40 (933) 41933 Terminal 4 gain command (torque/magnetic flux) Read/write
C41 (933) 42123 Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic
flux) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C41 (933)
43933 Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux) (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
terminal 4 C42 (934) 41934 PID display bias coefficient Read/write
C43 (934) 42124 PID display bias analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set in C43 (934)
43934 PID display bias analog value (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
terminal 4 C44 (935) 41935 PID display gain coefficient Read/write
C45 (935) 42125 PID display gain analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set in C45 (935)
43935 PID display gain analog value (terminal analog value) Read Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
terminal 4
1000 to 1999
45000 to 45359
For details on parameter names, refer to the parameter list (page 166).
Read/write The parameter number + 44000 is the register number.
Pr. Register Name Read/write Remarks
Register Definition Read/write Remarks 40501 Fault record 1 Read/write
Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as H00. Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the error code. (For details on error codes, refer to page 776.) The fault history is cleared by writing to register 40501. Set any value as data.
40502 Fault record 2 Read 40503 Fault record 3 Read 40504 Fault record 4 Read 40505 Fault record 5 Read 40506 Fault record 6 Read 40507 Fault record 7 Read 40508 Fault record 8 Read
6975. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
69
Product profile
NOTE When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitor item is read and the value to be read exceeds HFFFF, HFFFF is returned.
Pr.343 Communication error count The communication error occurrence count can be checked.
NOTE The communication error count is temporarily stored in the RAM memory. The value is not stored in EEPROM, and so is
cleared to 0 when power is reset and the inverter is reset.
Alarm (LF) signal output (communication error warning) During a communication error, the Alarm (LF) signal is output by open collector output. Assign the terminal to be used using
any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
NOTE The LF signal can be assigned to an output terminal by setting Pr.190 to Pr.196. Changing the terminal assignment may affect
other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Signal loss detection (Pr.539 RS-485 communication check time interval) If a signal loss (communication) is detected between the inverter and the master as a result of a signal loss detection, the
Communication fault (inverter) (E.SER) occurs and the inverter output is shut off. When the setting is "9999", communication check (signal loss detection) is not made. When the setting is "0", reading, etc. of monitors and parameters is possible, though E.SER occurs instantly when the
operation mode is switched to the Network operation.
Register Definition Read/write Remarks 44001 Model (1st and 2nd characters) Read
The inverter model can be read in ASCII code. "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area. Example) FR-A840-1 (FM type): H46, H52, H2D, H41, H38, H34, H30, H2D, H31, H20......H20
44002 Model (3rd and 4th characters) Read 44003 Model (5th and 6th characters) Read 44004 Model (7th and 8th characters) Read 44005 Model (9th and 10th characters) Read 44006 Model (11th and 12th characters) Read 44007 Model (13th and 14th characters) Read 44008 Model (15th and 16th characters) Read 44009 Model (17th and 18th characters) Read 44010 Model (19th and 20th characters) Read 44011 Capacity (1st and 2nd characters) Read The capacity in the inverter model can be read in ASCII code.
Data is read in increments of 0.1 kW, and rounds down to 0.01 kW increments. "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area. Example) 0.75K: " 7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)
44012 Capacity (3rd and 4th characters) Read
44013 Capacity (5th and 6th characters) Read
Parameter Setting range Minimum setting range Initial value 343 (Read-only) 1 0
Alarm data Reply data
Master
Slave
0
Signal LF
Normal dataAlarm data Alarm data
1 2
OFF ON OFF OFFON
Not increased
Turns off when normal data is received
Alarm data :
Normal data Reply data
Communication error count is increased in synchronization with leading edge of LF signal
Data resulting in communication error.
Communication error count
(Pr. 343)
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A signal loss detection is made when the setting is any of "0.1 s to 999.8 s". In order to enable the signal loss detection, data must be sent by the master at an interval equal to or less than the time set for the communication check. (The inverter makes a communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting of the data sent from the master).
The communication check is made from the first communication in the Network operation mode (can be changed by Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection).
The communication check time by query communication includes a no-data time (3.5 bytes). This no-data time differs according to the communication speed, so take this no-data time into consideration when setting the communication check time.
NOTE For the RS-485 terminal communication, the operation at a communication error occurrence depends on the Pr.502 Stop
mode selection at communication error setting. (Refer to page 663.)
5.15.7 CC-Link IE Field Network function setting (FR- A800-GF)
Use the following parameters to perform required settings for CC-Link IE Field Network communication between the inverter and other stations.
For details on the CC-Link IE Field Network, refer to page 752. For the inverter operation at communication error, refer to page 663. Set the parameters other than Pr.434, Pr.435, and Pr.541 in the same way as when a communication option is used.
Operation mode
Example: RS-485 terminal communication, Pr. 539 = "0.1 to 999.8 s"
External NET
Check start Time
Inverter (slave) Inverter (slave)
Communication check counter
Pr.539
PLC (master)
PLC (master)
Query Message1 Query Message2
Data absence time (3.5 bytes or more)
Response Message1 Response Message2 Fault
(E.SER)
Operation mode External NET
Check start Time
Inverter (slave) Inverter (slave)
Communication check counter
Pr.539
PLC (master)
PLC (master)
Query Message2
Fault (E.SER)
Data absence time (3.5 bytes or more)
Query Message1
Query communication
Broadcast communication
ONOFFALM
ONOFFALM
6995. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
70
Network number and station number setting (Pr.434, Pr.435) Enter the inverter network number in Pr.434 Network number (CC-Link IE). The setting range of Pr.434 is "0 to 255", but its active range is "1 to 239". The values out of the active range are invalid
because such values cannot be transmitted to the master station. Use Pr.435 Station number (CC-Link IE) to enter the station number of the inverter. The setting range of Pr.435 is "0 to 255", but its active range is "1 to 120". The values out of the active range are invalid
because such values cannot be transmitted to the master station.
NOTE Use different station numbers for different devices. (If different devices have the same station number, the communication
cannot be performed properly. If an error occurs due to a duplicated number, re-assign the station numbers, then reset the master station and the inverter power.)
Station numbers do not have to be consecutive numbers. The Pr.434 and Pr.435 settings are applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.
Frequency command with sign (Pr.541) By adding a sign to the frequency command value, the start command (forward/reverse rotation) can be inverted to start
operation The Pr.541 Frequency command sign selection setting is applied to the frequency command from RWw0.
Relationship between the start command and sign (Pr.541 = "1")
NOTE When Pr.541 = "1" (with sign)
Parameters referred to Pr.37 Speed display, Pr.144 Speed setting switchover, Pr.811 Set resolution switchoverpage 444
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
434 N110
Network number (CC- Link IE) 0 0 to 255 Enter the network number of the inverter.
435 N111
Station number (CC-Link IE) 0 0 to 255 Enter the station number of the inverter.
541 N100
Frequency command sign selection 0
0 Signed frequency command value 1 Unsigned frequency command value
Rotations per minute (machine speed) setting using Pr.37 and Pr.144
Pr.541 setting Sign Setting range Actual frequency command
Without 0 Without 0 to 59000 0 to 590.00 Hz 1 With -32768 to 32767 (two's complement) -327.68 to 327.67 Hz
With 0 Without 0 to 65535 It depends on Pr.37, Pr.144, and Pr.811
settings (in 1 or 0.1 increments).1 With -32768 to 32767 (two's complement)
Start command Sign of the frequency command
Actual operation command
Forward rotation + Forward rotation - Reverse rotation
Reverse rotation + Forward rotation - Reverse rotation
- When EEPROM write is specified by turning ON of RY22, write mode error (error code H01) will occur. - When both RY21 and RY22 are turned ON, RY21 has precedence. - When power is turned ON (inverter reset), the initial setting status of the sign bit is "positive" and the set frequency is 0 Hz.
(The motor does not operate at the frequency set before turning OFF the power (inverter reset).) - When set frequency is written with the instruction code of HED or HEE, the sign of the frequency command is not changed.
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.15.8 USB device communication A personal computer and an inverter can be connected with a USB cable. Setup of the inverter can be easily performed with FR Configurator2. The inverter can be connected easily to a personal computer by a USB cable.
*1 The changed value is applied after the next power-ON or inverter reset.
USB communication specifications
At the initial setting (Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection = "9999"), communication with FR Configurator2 can be made in the PU operation mode simply by connecting a USB cable. To fix the command source to the USB connector in the PU operation mode, set "3" in Pr.551.
Parameter setting and monitoring can be performed by using FR Configurator2. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.
Parameters referred to Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selectionpage 400
5.15.9 Automatic connection with GOT When the automatic connection is enabled in the GOT2000 series, the inverter can communicate with the GOT2000 series with only setting the station number and connecting the GOT. This eliminates the need for the communication parameter setting.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
547*1
N040 USB communication station number 0 0 to 31 Specify the inverter station number.
548*1
N041 USB communication check time interval 9999
0 USB communication is possible, however the inverter output is shut off (E.USB) when the mode changes to the PU operation mode.
0.1 to 999.8 s Set the communication check time interval. If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible time, the inverter output is shut off (E.USB).
9999 No communication check
Interface Conforms to USB 1.1 (USB 2.0 full speed) Transmission speed 12 Mbps Wiring length Maximum 5 m Connector USB mini B connector (receptacle) Power supply Self-powered Recommended USB cable MR-J3USBCBL3M (cable length 3 m)
USB cable USB connector
7015. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
70
*1 When Pr.549 Protocol selection = "1" (MODBUS RTU protocol), the setting range is as shown in the parentheses. *2 When a value outside the setting range is set, the inverter operates at the initial value.
Automatic connection system configuration
GOT2000 series automatic recognition When the GOT2000 series is connected, the parameters required for the GOT connection are automatically changed by
setting the automatic recognition on the GOT2000 series side. Set the station number (Pr.117 or Pr.331) of the inverter before the automatic recognition is performed. Connect all the stations of inverters with GOT before the automatic recognition is performed. The inverter newly added
after automatic recognition will not be recognized automatically. (When an inverter is added, perform the initial setting in Pr.999 Automatic parameter setting or set the automatic recognition on the GOT side again.)
NOTE If the automatic recognition cannot be performed, initial setting in Pr.999 is required. For connection to a device other than the GOT2000 series, initial setting in Pr.999 is required. For details, refer to the GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Product).
Parameters referred to Pr.999 Automatic parameter settingpage 350
5.15.10 Backup/restore The GOT can be used for backing up inverter parameters and the data used in the PLC function of inverter.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
117 N020
PU communication station number 0 0 to 31
Use this parameter to specify the inverter station number. The inverter station number setting is required when multiple inverters are connected to one GOT (PU connector communication).
331 N030
RS-485 communication station number
0 0 to 31 (0 to 247)*1*2
Specify the inverter station number. The inverter station number setting is required when multiple inverters are connected to one GOT (RS-485 terminal communication).
GOT2000 Terminating resistor
Four-wire multidrop
Automatic change item Automatic change parameter
Setting value after change PU connector connection RS-485 terminal connection
Communication speed Pr.118 Pr.332
Depending on the setting of the connected device on the GOT side.
Data length / stop bit Pr.119 Pr.333 Parity Pr.120 Pr.334 Time delay setting Pr.123 Pr.337 CR/LF selection Pr.124 Pr.341 Number of communication retries Pr.121 Pr.335 9999 (fixed)
Communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336 9999 (fixed)
Protocol selection (Pr.549 holds the value before the automatic recognition.) Pr.549 0 (fixed to Mitsubishi inverter protocol)
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The backup data stored in the GOT can be used to restore the data in the inverter.
*1 The setting is available in the inverter on which the FR-A8NCE is installed or when the FR-A800-GF inverter is used.
Connected devices To enable backup/restore, connect either the general-purpose inverter with the FR-A8NCE or the FR-A800-GF inverter to
a programmable controller (master station) via the CC-Link IE Field Network.
NOTE The backup/restore function is enabled only when the inverter is connected to a master station programmable controller. For details on the connected devices, refer to the GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor).
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
434 N110*1
Network number (CC-Link IE) 0 0 to 255 Enter the network number of the inverter.
435 N111*1 Station number (CC-Link IE) 0 0 to 255 Enter the station number of the inverter.
GOT2000 MELSEC iQ-R
CC-Link IE Field NetworkEthernet
Backup
Restore
FR-A800 (with the FR-A8NCE installed) FR-A800-GF
7035. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
70
Data to be backed up and restored The following data can be backed up and restored. The data other than those listed in the following table cannot be backed
up or restored.
Backup/restore operation The GOT backs up all applicable data in all the inverters that can be identified with the network numbers and station
numbers in the controller list file. The GOT restores all relevant data of the inverters selected based on the network numbers and station numbers using the
backup data. The backup/restore cannot be performed in the following cases.
On the operation panel, "RD" is displayed during backup, and "WR" is displayed during restore.
NOTE To enable the restore operation, Pr.434 Network number (CC-Link IE) and Pr.435 Station number (CC-Link IE) must be
set. Backup is performed for parameters for which parameter copy can be performed. For details on backup/restore function, refer to the GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor).
Item Inverter parameters Parameters used for activating the PLC function Programs (including SFCs) used in the PLC function Global device comment information used in the PLC function Function block source information
Operation Inverter status Backup During an inverter reset
A password is registered or password protection is enabled (Pr.297 "9999"). During parameter copy using an operation panel or USB memory device (during writing to the inverter) During restore While password protection is enabled for files used in the PLC function (read protection) While PLC function project data is written to, read from, or verified against a USB memory device
Restore During an inverter reset During running During auto tuning A password is registered or password protection is enabled (Pr.297 "9999"). While parameter write is disabled (Pr.77 = "1") During parameter copy using an operation panel or USB memory device (during writing to / reading from / verification against the inverter) During backup operation During the RUN status of the PLC function While password protection is enabled for files used in the PLC function (write protection) While PLC function project data is written to, read from, or verified against a USB memory device
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.16 (G) Control parameters
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
To set the starting torque manually Manual torque boost P.G000 to P.G010, P.G020
Pr.0 to Pr.46, Pr.112 706
To set the motor constant Base frequency, base frequency voltage
P.G001, P.G002, P.G011, P.G021
Pr.3, Pr.19, Pr.47, Pr.113 707
To select the V/F pattern matching the application Load pattern selection P.G003 Pr.14 708
To improve the torque in a low-speed range Excitation current low-speed scaling factor
P.G003, P.G080, P.G201, P.G202, P.G301, P.G302
Pr.14, Pr.85, Pr.86, Pr.565, Pr.566, Pr.617
711
To perform energy saving operation Energy saving operation P.G030 Pr.60 712
To use a special motor Adjustable 5 points V/F P.C100, P.G040 to P.G049
Pr.71, Pr.100 to Pr.109 713
To compensate the motor slip amount when replacing an SF-JR motor with an SF-PR motor
SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode P.G060, P.G061 Pr.673, Pr.674 714
To adjust the motor braking torque DC injection brake, zero speed control, servo lock, magnetic flux decay output shutoff
P.G100 to P.G103, P.G108 to P.G110
Pr.10 to Pr.12, Pr.802, Pr.850, Pr.1299
715
To coast the motor to a stop Output stop function P.G105 Pr.522 720 Selection of motor stop method P.G106 Pr.250 722
To use the regeneration unit to increase the motor braking torque Regenerative brake selection P.E300 to P.G107,
P.T721 Pr.30, Pr.70, Pr.599 724
To operate the inverter with DC power supply DC feeding mode P.E300 Pr.30 724 To avoid overvoltage fault due to regenerative driving by automatic adjustment of output frequency
Regeneration avoidance function P.G120 to P.G125 Pr.882 to Pr.886, Pr.665 732
To decrease the deceleration time of the motor
Increased magnetic excitation deceleration P.G130 to P.G132 Pr.660 to Pr.662 735
To select the control method Control method selection P.G200, P.G300 Pr.800, Pr.451 221 To secure the low-speed torque by compensating the slip of the motor Slip compensation P.G203 to P.G205 Pr.245 to Pr.247 736
To select the torque characteristic Constant output range torque characteristic selection P.G210 Pr.803 245, 283
To adjust the speed control gain Speed control gain P.G211, P.G212, P.G311, P.G312
Pr.820, Pr.821, Pr.830, Pr.831 254
To adjust the torque control gain Torque control gain P.G213, P.G214, P.G313, P.G314
Pr.824, P.825, Pr.834, P.835 294
To stabilize speed and torque feedback signal
Speed detection filter, torque detection filter
P.G215, P.G216, P.G315, P.G316
Pr.823, Pr.827, Pr.833, Pr.837 332
To change excitation ratio Excitation ratio P.G217 Pr.854 332 To improve the motor trackability for the speed command changes
Speed feed forward control, model adaptive speed control
P.G224, P.G220 to P.G222, P.G223
Pr.828, Pr.877 to Pr.879, Pr.881 263
To make starting torque start-up faster Torque bias P.G230 to P.G238 Pr.840 to Pr.848 265
To make the motor speed constant by the encoder Encoder feedback control
P.M002, P.A107, P.C140, P.C141, P.G240, P.G241
Pr.144, Pr.285, Pr.359, Pr.367 to Pr.369
736
To select low-speed range torque characteristics
Low-speed range torque characteristics P.G250, P.G350 Pr.788, Pr.747 233
To select operation at emergency stop Emergency stop operation selection P.G264 Pr.1349 367
To perform frequency control appropriate for load torque Droop control P.G400 to P.G404,
P.G420 to P.G424
Pr.286 to Pr.288, Pr.679 to Pr.683, Pr.994, Pr.995
738
To suppress the machine resonance Speed smoothing control P.G410, P.G411 Pr.653, Pr.654 741 Notch filter P.G601 to P.G603 Pr.1003 to Pr.1005 271
To adjust the speed gain for Advanced magnetic flux vector control Speed control gain P.G932, P.G942 Pr.89, Pr.569 228
7055. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
70
5.16.1 Manual torque boost
Voltage drop in the low-frequency range can be compensated, improving reduction of the motor torque in the low-speed range. Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted according to the load, increasing the motor torque at the start up. By using the RT signal or X9 signal, it is possible to switch between 3 types of torque boost.
*1 The initial value for the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower. *2 The initial value for the FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K), FR-A840-00052(1.5K) to FR-A840-00126(3.7K). *3 The initial values for the FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K). *4 The initial value for the FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K). *5 The initial value for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) and higher.
Starting torque adjustment Assuming Pr.19 Base frequency voltage is 100%, set the output voltage at 0 Hz to Pr.0 (Pr.46, Pr.112) in percentage. Perform the adjustment of the parameter little by little (approximately 0.5%), and confirm the status of the motor each time.
The motor may overheat when the value is set too high. Do not use more than 10% as a guideline.
Setting multiple torque boosts (RT signal, X9 signal, Pr.46, Pr.112) When changing the torque boost depending on the application or when using single inverter switching between multiple
motors, use the second (third) torque boost. Pr.46 Second torque boost is enabled when the RT signal is ON. Pr.112 Third torque boost is enabled when the X9 signal is ON. Set "9" in Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the X9 signal function to a terminal.
NOTE The RT (X9) signal acts as the second (third) function selection signal and makes the other second (third) functions valid.
(Refer to page 525.) The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal. Set a larger value when the distance between the inverter and the motor is long or when there is not enough motor torque in
the low-speed range. It may cause overcurrent trip when it is set too large. Setting for Pr.0, Pr.46, and Pr.112 becomes enabled only when the V/F control is selected. When the initial value is set in Pr.0, the Pr.0 setting is automatically changed by changing the Pr.71 Applied motor or Pr.81
Number of motor poles setting. (Refer to page 528.) Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 G000 Torque boost
6%*1
0 to 30% Set the output voltage at 0 Hz in %. 4%*2
3%*3
2%*4
1%*5
46 G010 Second torque boost 9999
0 to 30% Set the torque boost value at when the RT signal is ON. 9999 Without the second torque boost
112 G020 Third torque boost 9999
0 to 30% Set the torque boost value at when the X9 signal is ON. 9999 Without the third torque boost
V/F
Output voltage
Pr.0 Pr.46 Setting
range
Base frequency
0
100%
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.112
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters referred to Pr.3 Base frequency, Pr.19 Base frequency voltagepage 707 Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
5.16.2 Base frequency voltage
Use this function to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to match with the motor rating.
Base frequency setting (Pr.3) When operating a standard motor, generally set the rated frequency of the motor in Pr.3 Base frequency. When the motor
operation require switching to the commercial power supply, set the power supply frequency in Pr.3. When the frequency described on the motor rating plate is "50 Hz" only, make sure to set to 50 Hz. When it is set to 60 Hz,
the voltage will drop too much, causing insufficient torque. As a result, the inverter output may be shut off due to overload. A caution is required especially in case of Pr.14 Load pattern selection = "1" (variable torque load).
When using the Mitsubishi Electric constant torque motor, set Pr.3 to 60 Hz.
Setting multiple base frequencies (Pr.47, Pr.113) To change the base frequency when using a single inverter switching between multiple motors, use Pr.47 Second V/F
(base frequency) and Pr.113 Third V/F (base frequency). Pr.47 is enabled when the RT signal is ON and Pr.113 is enabled when the X9 signal is ON. To input the X9 signal, set
"9" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal.
NOTE The RT (X9) signal acts as the second (third) function selection signal and makes the other second (third) functions valid.
(Refer to page 525.) The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
Setting of base frequency voltage (Pr.19) Use Pr.19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage (for example, rated motor voltage). When it is set lower than the power supply voltage, maximum output voltage of the inverter will be the voltage set in Pr.19.
V/F
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description FM CA
3 G001 Base frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at the rated motor torque. (50/60
Hz)
19 G002 Base frequency voltage 9999 8888
0 to 1000 V Set the base voltage. 8888 95% of the power supply voltage 9999 Same as the power supply voltage
47 G011
Second V/F (base frequency) 9999
0 to 590 Hz Set the base frequency when the RL signal is ON. 9999 Second V/F disabled
113 G021
Third V/F (base frequency) 9999
0 to 590 Hz Set the base frequency when the X9 signal is ON. 9999 Third V/F disabled
Pr.19 Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.3 Pr.47
O ut
pu t v
ol ta
ge (V
)
Pr.113
7075. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
70
Pr.19 can be used in following cases.
When operating a Vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU, SF-V5RU1, SF-V5RU3, SF-V5RU4, SF-VR) with V/F control, perform following settings.
NOTE When the operation becomes not possible due to failure in encoder, etc., under Vector control, set Pr.80 Motor capacity or
Pr.81 Number of motor poles = "9999" to perform V/F control. When the Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector
control is selected, Pr.3, Pr.47, Pr.113, and Pr.19 will become disabled, and Pr.83 and Pr.84 will become enabled. However, S-pattern curve with Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection = "1" (S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A) will make Pr.3 or Pr.47 and Pr.113 enabled. (S-pattern curve under PM sensorless vector control is the rated frequency of the motor.)
When Pr.71 Applied motor = "2" (adjustable 5 points V/F), setting for Pr.47 and Pr.113 will become disabled. Also, Pr.19 cannot be set to "8888" or "9999".
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.14 Load pattern selectionpage 708 Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selectionpage 372 Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528 Pr.83 Rated motor voltage, Pr.84 Rated motor frequencypage 532 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
5.16.3 Load pattern selection
Optimal output characteristics (V/F characteristics) for application or load characteristics can be selected.
(a) When regenerative driving (continuous regeneration, etc.) is performed frequently Output voltage will get higher than the specification during the regenerative driving, which may cause overcurrent trip (E.OC[]) by the increase in motor current.
(b) When the fluctuation of power supply voltage is high When the power supply voltage exceeds the rated voltage of the motor, fluctuation of rotation speed or overheating of motor may occur due to excessive torque or increase in motor current.
Motor model Pr.19 setting Pr.3 setting SF-V5RU, 3.7 kW or lower 170 V
50 Hz SF-V5RU, 5.5 kW or higher 160 V SF-V5RUH, 3.7 kW or lower 340 V SF-V5RUH, 5.5 kW or higher 320 V SF-V5RU1, 30 kW or lower 160 V
33.33 Hz SF-V5RU1, 37 kW 170 V SF-V5RU3, 22 kW or lower 160 V SF-V5RU3, 30 kW 170 V SF-V5RU4, 3.7 kW and 7.5 kW 150 V
16.67 Hz SF-V5RU4 and motors other than described above 160 V SF-VR 160 V
50 Hz SF-VRH 320 V
V/F
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
14 G003 Load pattern selection 0
0 For constant-torque load 1 For variable-torque load 2 For constant-torque lift (boost at reverse rotation: 0%) 3 For constant-torque lift (boost at forward rotation: 0%)
4 RT signal ON... for constant-torque load, RT signal OFF... for constant-torque lift, boost at reverse rotation 0%
5 RT signal ON... for constant-torque load, RT signal OFF... for constant-torque lift, boost at forward rotation 0%
12 to 15 Excitation current low-speed scaling factor (Refer to page 711.)
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Application for constant-torque load (Pr.14 ="0", initial value) The output voltage will change linearly against the output frequency at the base frequency or lower. Set this parameter when driving a load that has constant load torque even when the rotation speed is changed, such as
conveyor, dolly, or roll drive.
Select for constant-torque load (setting value "0") even for fan and pump in following cases. When accelerating a blower with large moment of inertia (J) in a short period of time. When it is a constant-torque load such as rotary pump or gear pump. When the load torque increases in low speed such as screw pump.
Application for variable-torque load (Pr.14 ="1") The output voltage will change in square curve against the output frequency at the base frequency or lower. (1.75th-power
curve for the FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher, and the FR-A840-00930(37K) or higher) Set this parameter when driving a load with load torque change proportionally against the square of the rotation speed,
such as a fan or pump.
Vertical lift load applications (Pr.14 = "2, 3") Set "2" when a vertical lift load is fixed as power driving load at forward rotation and regenerative load at reverse rotation. Pr.0 Torque boost is valid during forward rotation, and torque boost is automatically changed to "0%" during reverse
rotation. Set "3" for an elevated load that is in the driving mode during reverse rotation and in the regenerative load mode during
forward rotation according to the load weight, e.g. counterweight system.
100%
O ut
pu t v
ol ta
ge
Pr. 3 Base frequency Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.14 = 0
100%
O ut
pu t v
ol ta
ge
Pr. 3 Base frequency Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.14 = 1
Pr.14 = 2 Pr.14 = 3
100% Forward rotation
Pr.0
O ut
pu t
v ol
ta ge
Base frequency Output frequency (Hz)
For vertical lift loads At forward rotation boost...Pr.0 setting At reverse rotation boost...0%
Reverse rotation
100% Reverse rotation
Pr.0
O ut
pu t
v ol
ta ge
Base frequency Output frequency (Hz)
For vertical lift loads At forward rotation boost...0% At reverse rotation boost...Pr.0 setting
Forward rotation
7095. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
71
NOTE When torque is continuously regenerated as vertical lift load, it is effective to set the rated voltage in Pr.19 Base frequency
voltage to prevent trip due to current at regeneration.
Switching load pattern using signal (Pr.14 = "4, 5") The output characteristics can be switched between for constant-torque load and for lift with the RT signal or X17 signal. To input the X17 signal, set "17" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function. Switching with the RT signal will become disabled when the X17 signal is assigned.
NOTE The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to 189 may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function
of each terminal. Pr.14 will become enabled under V/F control. Other second functions will become enabled when the RT signal is ON.
Parameters referred to Pr.0 Torque boostpage 706 Pr.3 Base frequencypage 707 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.14 setting RT (X17) signal Output characteristics
4 ON For constant-torque load (same as setting value "0") OFF For lift, boost at reverse rotation 0% (same as setting value "2")
5 ON For constant-torque load (same as setting value "0") OFF For lift, boost at forward rotation 0% (same as setting value "3")
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.16.4 Excitation current low-speed scaling factor
Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control or Real sensorless vector control, the excitation current scaling factor in the low- speed range can be adjusted.
*1 The setting is valid only under Advanced magnetic flux vector control or Real sensorless vector control. When Pr.14 = "12 to 15" and V/F control is selected, the operation is the same as the one for constant-torque load (Pr.14 = "0"). (Refer to page 708.)
Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control or Real sensorless vector control, excitation current in the low-speed range can be increased to improve torque. When Pr.14 = "12 to 15", the excitation current scaling factor can be switched for the forward/reverse rotation.
Increased excitation is applied when the output frequency is equal to or lower than the setting in Pr.85 Excitation current break point. The excitation current scaling factor at 0 Hz is set in Pr.86 Excitation current low-speed scaling factor. Use Pr.565 Second motor excitation current break point and Pr.566 Second motor excitation current low-speed scaling factor for the setting for using the second motor (RT signal-ON).
When Pr.14 = "14 or 15" and the X17 signal is turned ON, the excitation current scaling factor is switched from the value set in Pr.617 to the value set in Pr.86.
Magnetic flux Sensorless
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
14 G003 Load pattern selection 0
0 to 5 Excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.86 Refer to page 708 for details on the operation under V/F control.
12*1 Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.86 Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.617
13*1 Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.617 Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.86
14*1 Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.86 Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.617 (X17-OFF), Pr.86 (X17 signal-ON)
15*1 Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.617 (X17-OFF), Pr.86 (X17 signal-ON) Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.86
85 G201
Excitation current break point 9999
0 to 400 Hz Set the frequency at which increased excitation is started.
9999 SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined frequency is applied. Motor other than the above: 10 Hz is applied.
86 G202
Excitation current low- speed scaling factor 9999
0 to 300% Set an excitation current scaling factor at 0 Hz.
9999 SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined scaling factor is applied. Motor other than the above: 130% is applied.
617 G080
Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor
9999
0 to 300% Set an excitation current scaling factor when different excitation current scaling factors are used for forward and reverse rotation.
9999 SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined scaling factor is applied. Motor other than the above: 130% is applied.
565 G301
Second motor excitation current break point 9999
0 to 400 Hz Set an excitation current break point when the RT signal is ON.
9999 SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined frequency is applied. Motor other than the above: 10 Hz is applied.
566 G302
Second motor excitation current low-speed scaling factor
9999
0 to 300% Set an excitation current low-speed scaling factor when the RT signal is ON.
9999 SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined scaling factor is applied. Motor other than the above: 130% is applied.
Excitation current scaling factor
100%
0 Output frequency
Pr.86 (Pr.566)
Pr.85 (Pr.565)
7115. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
71
An excitation current low-speed scaling factor set in the parameter shown in the table is used according to the Pr.14 setting and other conditions.
When the SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor is used (Pr.71 = "40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, or 74") and "9999" is set in Pr.85/ Pr.86, the predetermined setting in the following table is applied.
5.16.5 Energy saving control
The inverter will automatically perform energy saving operation without setting detailed parameters. This control method is suitable for applications such as fans and pumps.
Energy saving operation (Pr.60 = "4") Setting Pr.60 = "4" will select the energy saving operation. With the energy saving operation, the inverter will automatically control the output voltage so the inverter output power
during the constant-speed operation will become minimal. Energy saving operation will be enabled under V/F control.
Optimum excitation control (Pr.60 = "9") Setting Pr.60 = "9" will select the Optimum excitation control. The Optimum excitation control is a control method to decide the output voltage by controlling the excitation current so the
efficiency of the motor is maximized. Optimum excitation control will be enabled under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control.
Pr.14 setting X17 signal During forward rotation During reverse rotation
RT signal OFF RT signal ON RT signal OFF RT signal ON 0 to 5 Pr.86 Pr.566 Pr.86 Pr.566 12 Pr.86 Pr.566 Pr.617 Pr.617 13 Pr.617 Pr.617 Pr.86 Pr.566
14 OFF Pr.86 Pr.566 Pr.617 Pr.617 ON Pr.86 Pr.566 Pr.86 Pr.566
15 OFF Pr.617 Pr.617 Pr.86 Pr.566 ON Pr.86 Pr.566 Pr.86 Pr.566
Motor capacity
(kW)
SF-PR SF-HR/SF-HRCA Pr.81 = "2" Pr.81 = "4" Pr.81 = "6" Pr.81 = "2" Pr.81 = "4" Pr.81 = "6"
Pr.85 Pr.86 Pr.85 Pr.86 Pr.85 Pr.86 Pr.85 Pr.86 Pr.85 Pr.86 Pr.85 Pr.86 0.4 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 0.75 20 Hz 130% 20 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 1.5 30 Hz 140% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 2.2 10 Hz 150% 10 Hz 130% 20 Hz 130% 20 Hz 150% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 3.7 30 Hz 150% 25 Hz 133% 20 Hz 130% 30 Hz 160% 30 Hz 140% 10 Hz 130% 5.5 10 Hz 150% 10 Hz 130% 30 Hz 130% 30 Hz 140% 30 Hz 140% 20 Hz 140% 7.5 10 Hz 150% 30 Hz 118% 30 Hz 130% 30 Hz 140% 30 Hz 140% 30 Hz 150% 11 10 Hz 150% 20 Hz 140% 10 Hz 130% 30 Hz 140% 10 Hz 130% 30 Hz 130% 15 10 Hz 150% 30 Hz 130% 30 Hz 130% 20 Hz 140% 10 Hz 130% 30 Hz 130% 18.5 10 Hz 150% 30 Hz 130% 20 Hz 130% 30 Hz 150% 30 Hz 140% 30 Hz 140% 22 30 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 30 Hz 150% 30 Hz 140% 20 Hz 140% 30 10 Hz 150% 20 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 30 Hz 150% 20 Hz 150% 10 Hz 130% 37 20 Hz 140% 10 Hz 140% 20 Hz 130% 20 Hz 160% 20 Hz 150% 10 Hz 130% 45 10 Hz 140% 20 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 20 Hz 140% 10 Hz 140% 55 20 Hz 140% 30 Hz 130% 10 Hz 140% 20 Hz 150%
V/F Magnetic flux
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
60 G030
Energy saving control selection 0
0 Normal operation 4 Energy saving operation 9 Optimum excitation control
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE In the energy saving operation mode, an energy saving effect is not expected for applications with high load torque or with the
equipment with frequent acceleration and deceleration. In the Optimum excitation control mode, an energy saving effect is not expected when the motor capacity is extremely small
compared with the inverter capacity or when multiple motors are connected to a single inverter. When the energy saving operation mode or Optimum excitation control mode is selected, the deceleration time may become
longer than the setting value. Also, it may cause overvoltage more often compared to constant-torque load characteristics, so set the deceleration time longer.
When the motor becomes unstable during the acceleration, set the acceleration time longer. Output current may increase slightly with the energy saving operation mode or the Optimum excitation control mode since the
output voltage is controlled.
5.16.6 Adjustable 5 points V/F
By setting a desired V/F characteristic from the start up to the base frequency or base voltage with the V/F control (frequency voltage/frequency), a dedicated V/F pattern can be generated. The optimal V/F pattern matching the torque characteristics of the facility can be set.
By setting the V/F1 (first frequency voltage/first frequency) to V/F5 parameters in advance, a desired V/F characteristic can be obtained.
For an example, with the equipment with large static friction factor and small dynamic friction factor, large torque is required only at the start up, so a V/F pattern that will raise the voltage only at the low-speed range is set.
Setting procedure
1. Set the rated motor voltage in Pr.19 Base frequency voltage. (No function at the setting of "9999" or "8888".)
2. Set Pr.71 Applied motor = "2" (adjustable 5 points V/F).
V/F
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
71 C100 Applied motor 0
2 Standard motor (such as SF-JR) Adjustable 5 points V/F
Others Refer to page 528. 100 G040 V/F1 (first frequency) 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
Set each point of the V/F pattern (frequency, voltage). 9999: Do not set V/F.
101 G041
V/F1 (first frequency voltage) 0 V 0 to 1000 V
102 G042
V/F2 (second frequency) 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
103 G043
V/F2 (second frequency voltage) 0 V 0 to 1000 V
104 G044 V/F3 (third frequency) 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
105 G045
V/F3 (third frequency voltage) 0 V 0 to 1000 V
106 G046 V/F4 (fourth frequency) 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
107 G047
V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage) 0 V 0 to 1000 V
108 G048 V/F5 (fifth frequency) 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
109 G049
V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage) 0 V 0 to 1000 V
7135. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
71
3. Set frequency and voltage to be set in Pr.100 to Pr.109.
NOTE The adjustable 5 points V/F is enabled under V/F control. When Pr.19 Base frequency voltage = "8888 or 9999", setting of Pr.71 = "2" is not available. To set "2" in Pr.71, set the rated
motor voltage in Pr.19.
A write disable error " " is generated when the same frequency value is used for multiple points.
Set frequency or voltage for each point in Pr.100 to Pr.109 within the range of Pr.3 Base frequency or Pr.19 Base frequency voltage.
When Pr.71 = "2", Pr.47 Second V/F (base frequency) and Pr.113 Third V/F (base frequency) are not available. When Pr.71 = "2", the inverter calculates the characteristic of the electronic thermal relay for a standard motor. By simultaneously using Pr.60 Energy saving control selection and the adjustable 5 points V/F, further energy saving effect
is expected. The Pr.0 Torque boost and Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage settings are automatically changed according to
the Pr.71 setting. (Refer to page 531.)
Parameters referred to Pr.0 Torque boostpage 706 Pr.3 Base frequency, Pr.19 Base frequency voltagepage 707 Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltagepage 715 Pr.47 Second V/F (base frequency), Pr.113 Third V/F (base frequency)page 713 Pr.60 Energy saving control selectionpage 712 Pr.71 Applied motor, Pr.450 Second applied motorpage 528
5.16.7 SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode
As compared to our conventional SF-JR motor, the slip amount is small for the high-performance energy-saving SF-PR motor. When replacing the SF-JR to the SF-PR, the slip amount is reduced and the rotations per minute increases. Therefore, when the SF-PR is used with the same frequency setting as that of the SF-JR, power consumption may increase as compared to the SF-JR.
By setting the slip amount adjustment mode, the frequency command can be adjusted to keep the rotations per minute of the SF-PR equivalent to those of the SF-JR for power consumption reduction.
By setting the number of SF-PR motor poles in Pr.673 SF-PR slip amount adjustment operation selection, the SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode is activated.
The SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode is available only under V/F control.
CAUTION Make sure to set the parameters correctly according to the motor used. Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat
and burn.
Base frequency
voltage Pr.19
Base frequency
Pr.3
Torque boost Pr.0
V/F Characteristic 0
V/F5
V/F4
V/F3
V/F2 V/F1
Frequency
Voltage
V/F
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 673 G060
SF-PR slip amount adjustment operation selection 9999
2, 4, 6 Set the number of SF-PR motor poles. 9999 The slip amount adjustment is disabled.
674 G061
SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain 100% 0 to 500% Setting is available for fine adjustment of the slip amount.
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Use Pr.674 SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain to fine-tune the rotations per minute. To reduce the rotations per minute (to increase the compensation frequency), set a larger value in Pr.674. To increase the rotations per minute (to reduce the compensation frequency), set a smaller value in Pr.674. (Lower rotations per minute reduce the power consumption, and higher rotations per minute increase the power consumption.)
NOTE The slip amount adjustment is not available in the following conditions.
During acceleration/deceleration, during DC injection brake operation, during PID control, during orientation control, during encoder feedback control, during stall prevention operation, during regeneration avoidance operation, during traverse operation, and while the slip compensation is valid (Pr.245).
The slip amount adjustment is not available when the applicable motor capacity of the inverter is not compatible with the SF- PR. (For details on applicable motor capacity, refer to page 826.)
5.16.8 DC injection brake, zero speed control, and servo lock
Adjust the braking torque and timing to stop the motor using the DC injection brake. Zero speed control is also available under Real sensorless vector control, and zero speed control and servo lock are selectable under Vector control or PM sensorless vector control. When the DC injection brake operation is used, DC voltage is applied to the motor to prevent rotation of the motor shaft, and when the zero speed control is used, Vector control is performed to keep 0 r/min. Either way, when a motor shaft is rotated by external force, it does not go back to the original position. When the servo lock control is used, the position of the motor shaft is held. When a motor shaft is rotated by external force, it goes back to the original position.
Select the magnetic flux decay output shutoff function to decay the magnetic flux before shutting off the output at a stop.
*1 The initial value for the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower. *2 The initial value for the FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K). *3 The initial value for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) and higher.
Setting of operating frequency (Pr.10) By setting the frequency to operate the DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock) to Pr.10 DC injection brake
operation frequency, the DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock) will operate when it reaches this frequency at the time of deceleration.
When Pr.10 = "9999", DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock) will start when the frequency reaches Pr.13 Starting frequency.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
10 G100
DC injection brake operation frequency 3 Hz
0 to 120 Hz Set the operation frequency for the DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock).
9999 The operation starts at the frequency set in Pr.13 or lower.
11 G101
DC injection brake operation time 0.5 s
0 Without DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock)
0.1 to 10 s Set the operation time for the DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock).
8888 The operation continues while the X13 signal is ON.
12 G110
DC injection brake operation voltage
4%*1
0 to 30% Set the DC injection brake voltage (torque). When set to "0", the DC injection brake is not applied.2%*2
1%*3
802 G102
Pre-excitation selection 0
0 Zero speed control 1 Servo lock
1299 G108
Second pre- excitation selection 0
0 Zero speed control The pre-excitation operation of the second motor can be selected.1 Servo lock
850 G103
Brake operation selection 0
0 DC injection brake operation 1 Zero speed control (Real sensorless vector control) 2 Magnetic flux decay output shutoff (Real sensorless vector control)
7155. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
71
The DC injection brake operation frequency depends on the stopping method.
The DC injection brake operation frequency will be fixed to 0 Hz under PM sensorless vector control (low-speed range high-torque mode disabled).
NOTE When executing pre-excitation (zero speed control) under Real sensorless vector control, set Pr.10 DC injection brake
operation frequency to 0.5 Hz or lower since it may cause motor vibration, etc., at the time of deceleration stop. The initial value of Pr.10 will automatically switch to 0.5 Hz under Vector control.
Setting of operation time (X13 signal, Pr.11) Set the operation time for the DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock) to Pr.11 DC injection brake operation
time. When the motor does not stop due to large load moment (J), increase the setting to ensure the effect. When Pr.11 = "0 s", DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock) will not operate. (The motor will coast to stop.) When Pr.11 = "8888", DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock) will operate when the X13 signal is turned ON.
DC injection brake will operate when the X13 signal is turned ON even while operating. For the X13 signal input, set "13" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 to assign the function.
NOTE Under Real sensorless vector control, when the X13 signal turns ON while Pr.11 = "8888", the zero speed control is activated
regardless of the Pr.850 Brake operation selection setting. Under Vector control or PM sensorless vector control, zero speed control or servo lock will operate depending of the setting
of Pr.802. The X13 signal is disabled during PM sensorless vector control.
Stopping method Parameter setting DC injection brake operation frequency
Press the STOP key on the operation panel. Turn OFF the STF/STR signal.
0.5 Hz or higher in Pr.10 Pr.10 setting Lower than 0.5 Hz in Pr.10, and 0.5 Hz or higher in Pr.13 0.5 Hz
Lower than 0.5 Hz in both Pr.10 and Pr.13 Pr.10 or Pr.13 setting, whichever larger Set frequency to 0 Hz Pr.13 setting or 0.5 Hz, whichever smaller
Time
Pr. 10 Operation frequency
Time
Pr.12 Operation voltagevoltage
Pr. 11 Operation time
O ut
pu t
fr eq
ue nc
y (H
z)
DC injection brake
Time
Time
Pr.12 DC injection
brake voltage
X13 signal ON OFFON
STF ON
When Pr. 11 = "8888"
O ut
pu t
fre qu
en cy
(H z)
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Setting of operation voltage (torque) (Pr.12) Set the percentage against the power supply voltage in Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage. (The setting is not
used for zero speed control or servo lock.) The DC injection brake operation is not available when the setting of Pr.12 is 0%. (The motor will coast to stop.)
NOTE When the setting of Pr.12 is the initial value, the setting corresponding to the motor is set according to the Pr.71 Applied motor
setting. (Refer to page 531.) However, when an energy saving motor (SF-HR or SF-HRCA) is used, change the Pr.12 setting as shown below.
Even if the setting value of Pr.12 is made larger, braking torque will be limited so the output current will be within the rated current of the inverter.
Braking operation selection under Real sensorless vector control (Pr.850 = "0 or 1")
The braking operation under Real sensorless vector control can be selected between the DC injection brake operation (initial setting) and zero speed control. By setting Pr.850 Brake operation selection = "1", zero speed control will be performed at the frequency set in Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency or lower.
NOTE Under Real sensorless vector control, when the X13 signal turns ON while Pr.11 = "8888", zero speed control is activated
regardless of the Pr.850 setting. When restarting the operation after a brake operation under Real sensorless vector control, set Pr.850 = "1" (zero speed
control). Setting "0" (DC injection brake) may cause a delay of about 2 seconds from the time the start up command is input until it actually is output.
Magnetic flux decay output shutoff and the Magnetic flux decay output shutoff signal (X74 signal, Pr.850 = "2")
Frequent starts/stops (inching) under Real sensorless vector control may cause an inverter failure or create a difference in operation with the motor. The reason is that some magnetic flux is left in the motor at shutoff of the inverter output. If this is the case, set Pr.850 = "2" (magnetic flux decay output shutoff) or turn ON the Magnetic flux decay output shutoff (X74) signal to decay the magnetic flux at a stop, and then shut off the output.
While Pr.850 = "2", deceleration starts at turning OFF of the start command, and the magnetic flux decay output shutoff is activated when the estimated speed becomes lower than Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency.
While the brake sequence function is active, the magnetic flux decay output shutoff is activated when the running frequency drops to 0.5 Hz or Pr.13 Starting frequency, whichever is smaller.
Inverter Pr.12 setting FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or lower 4%
FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K) 3%
FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-01250(22K), FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-00620(22K), FR-A840-00930(37K) or higher 2%
FR-A820-01540(30K) FR-A840-00770(30K) 1.5%
7175. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
71
Inverter output voltage shutoff timing when Pr.850 = "2"
Tuning ON the Magnetic flux decay output shutoff (X74) signal starts the magnetic flux decay output shutoff regardless of the Pr.850 setting. For the X74 signal, set "74" in any of Pr.178 to 189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
Inverter output shutoff timing with X74 signal
*1 Maximum processing time of the magnetic flux decay Since the torque will decrease at the time of magnetic flux decay output shutoff, set up so the mechanical brake will
operate. The magnetic flux decay output shutoff will be canceled at the time of restart and when the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX)
signal or External DC injection brake operation start (X13) signal is turned ON. If an MC is installed at the inverter's output side, set to open the MC after the operation time of the magnetic flux decay
output shutoff elapses. (See below.)
*1 Maximum processing time of the magnetic flux decay
RY2 ON
RUN
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Start command (STF, STR)
Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency
Mechanical brake
MC on the output side
Output voltage
Speed command (rotation per second)
Magnetic flux decay processing time*1
Magnetic flux decaying
Do not turn OFF MC during this period
Normal operation
RY2 ON
RUN ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Start command (STF, STR)
Mechanical brake
MC on the output side
Output voltage
Speed command (rotation per minute)
Magnetic flux decay processing time*1
Magnetic flux decaying
Do not turn OFF MC during this period
Pr.13 Starting frequency or 0.5Hz (whichever is lower)
During brake sequence
X74
Output voltage
RUN
Magnetic flux decay processing time*1
Do not turn off MC during this processing time
ON
ON
ON
ON
Mechanical brake
MC on the output side
Mechanical brake
MC on the output side
ON ON
X74 signal
MRS
Output voltage
RUN
ON
ON
ON
ON
MRS signal
Motor capacity (Pr.80 setting) 2.2 kW or lower 3.7 kW to 11 kW 15 kW to 30 kW 37 kW to 55 kW 75 kW or higher Magnetic flux decay process time 250 ms 500 ms 800 ms 900 ms 1100 ms
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE When operating under controls other than Real sensorless vector control, the inverter will immediately shutoff the output when
the X74 signal is turned ON. Even under Real sensorless vector control, the inverter will immediately shutoff the output when the X74 signal is turned ON
during the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure and online auto tuning during the start up. If another output-shutoff trigger (inverter fault, turn-ON of the MRS signal, etc.) occurs during the magnetic flux decay
operation, the magnetic flux decay operation is terminated, and the output is shut off immediately. Unlike the MRS signal, voltage is output during the magnetic flux decay output shutoff operation, so take caution on electric
shocks. When the release timing of the mechanical brake is too fast, the motor shaft may be rotated by dropping or external force.
When the release timing is too late, the overcurrent prevention operation, stall prevention operation, or electronic thermal O/ L relay function may be activated. Perform release of the mechanical brake matching the equipment using the Output frequency detection (FU) signal or Output current detection (Y12) signal.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Braking operation selection under Vector control or PM sensorless vector control (Pr.802, Pr.1299)
Pr.802 Pre-excitation selection to select the braking operation when the pre-excitation is performed from either zero speed control or servo lock.
Turning ON the RT signal enables the second pre-excitation selection (when Pr.450 "9999").
The relation between the DC injection brake operation and pre-excitation operation is as follows.
Pr.802 (Pr.1299) setting
Pre- excitation Description
0 (initial value) Zero speed control
Even under a load, the inverter does not rotate the motor and holds 0 r/min. However, it will not return to its original position when the shaft moves due to external force. This setting is invalid during position control. The inverter operates according to this setting only during speed control.
1 Servo lock
Even under a load, the inverter holds the position of the motor shaft. When the shaft moves due to external force, it will return to its original position after the external force is removed. To perform the position control, this loop gain can be adjusted using Pr.422 Position control gain (Pr.1298 Second position control gain).
Control method Control mode
Pr.802 (Pr.1299) Pr.850 Deceleration stop LX-ON X13-ON
(Pr.11 = "8888") V/F control DC injection brake DC injection brake Advanced magnetic flux vector control DC injection brake DC injection brake
Real sensorless vector control
Speed
0 DC injection braking Zero speed Zero speed
1 Zero speed
2 Magnetic flux decay output shutoff Zero speed Zero speed
Torque
0 DC injection braking Zero speed Zero speed
1 Zero speed
2 Magnetic flux decay output shutoff Zero speed Zero speed
Vector control Speed
0 Zero speed Zero speed Zero speed 1 Servo lock Servo lock Servo lock
Torque Zero speed Zero speed Zero speed Position Servo lock
PM sensorless vector control, low-speed range high-torque mode disabled
Speed DC injection brake
PM sensorless vector control, low-speed range high-torque mode enabled
Speed 0
Zero speed Zero speed
1 Servo lock Servo lock
Position Servo lock
7195. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
72
Pre-excitation signal (LX signal) When the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal is turned ON while the motor stops under Real sensorless vector control,
Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control, pre-excitation (zero speed control / servo lock) starts. To input the LX signal, set "23" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. Performing pre-excitation (by using the LX or X13 signal) during torque control (under Real sensorless vector control) may
rotate a motor at a low speed even though a start command (STF or STR) is not input. The inverter at a start command ON may also rotate the motor at a low speed even though a speed limit value is set to zero. It must be confirmed that the motor running will not cause any safety problem before performing pre-excitation.
Note that during the pre-excitation operation, a voltage is applied to the motor even with the FWD/REV indicator OFF on the operation panel.
When offline auto tuning (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status = "1, 11, or 101") is performed during pre-excitation operation, pre-excitation is disabled.
Parameters referred to Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381, page 382 Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528 Pr.80 Motor capacitypage 532 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.422 Position control gain, Pr.1298 Second position control gainpage 328
5.16.9 Output stop function The motor coasts to a stop (inverter output is shutoff) when the inverter output frequency falls to Pr.522 setting or lower.
When both of the frequency setting signal and output frequency fall to the frequency set in Pr.522 or lower, the inverter stops the output and the motor coasts to a stop.
The motor re-starts when the frequency setting signal exceeds Pr.522 + 2 Hz and is accelerated at the Pr.13 Starting frequency (0.01 Hz under PM sensorless vector control).
CAUTION During the orientation operation, do not set "0 or 8888" in Pr.11 and do not set "0" in Pr.12. The motor may not stop
properly. Install a mechanical brake to make an emergency stop or to stay stopped for a long time.
Wait until the machine stops completely, and fix the motor with a mechanical brake, then turn the LX signal (pre- excitation) OFF.
Operation frequency
Time
Pr. 10
Zero speed control Servo lock
When Pr. 850 = 1
Operation time ON
Normal operationNormal operation Pr. 11
(Hz)
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
LX signal
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
522 G105 Output stop frequency 9999
0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency to start coasting to a stop (output shutoff). 9999 No function
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*2 The motor is accelerated at the Pr.13 Starting frequency (0.01 Hz under PM sensorless vector control). *3 The steepness of the slope depends on the acceleration/deceleration time settings such as Pr.7.
NOTE When the output stop function is enabled (Pr.522 "9999"), the DC injunction brake (zero speed control / servo lock) operation
is disabled and the motor coasts to stop when the output frequency drops to the Pr.522 setting or lower. The motor starts acceleration again at Pr.13 Starting frequency (0.01 Hz under PM sensorless vector control) when the
command value exceeds Pr.522 + 2 Hz again if the start signal remains ON while the motor is coasting after the frequency drops to the Pr.522 setting or lower. Re-acceleration during coasting may cause an output shutoff of the inverter depending on the parameter setting. (Activation of the restart function is recommended especially for a PM motor.)
The output stop frequency function is disabled during PID control, JOG operation, power failure stop, traverse function operation, offline auto tuning, orientation control, position control, torque control, or stop-on contact control.
The output stop function does not operate during reverse rotation deceleration. However, when the frequency setting signal and output frequency fall to Pr.522 or lower, the inverter output is shut off.
During the output stop due to the output stop function (when forward/reverse command is given, but frequency command is not given), the FWD/REV LED indicator on the operation panel blinks fast. (When the frequency command is not given even if the forward/reverse command is given.)
CAUTION A PM motor is a motor with interior permanent magnets. High voltage is generated at motor terminals while the motor is
running. Do not touch motor terminals and other parts until the motor stops to prevent an electric shock.
Example of when target frequency>Pr.522+2Hz, and start signal is ON/OFF
Output frequency1
Pr.522
Pr.13
STF
Time Inverter output shutoff
RUN
Pr.522+2Hz
Target frequency (fixed)
Pr.522
Pr.13
STF
1
Output frequency2
1
Time
RUN
Pr.522+2Hz
Analog input command
Pr.522
Time
Pr.522+2Hz
Inverter output shutoff
Inverter output shutoff
Example of: target frequency = analog input command, start signal always ON
3 3
7215. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
72
Parameters referred to Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency, Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time, Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltagepage 715 Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381, page 382
5.16.10 Start signal operation selection / stop selection Select the stopping method (deceleration stop or coasting) at turn-OFF of the start signal. Coasting can be selected for the cases such that the motor is stopped with a mechanical brake at turn-OFF of the start signal. The operation of the start signal (STF/STR) can be selected.
Stop selection To decelerate the motor to a stop
Set Pr.250 = "9999 (initial value) or 8888". The motor is decelerated to a stop when the start signal (STF/STR) is turned OFF.
To coast the motor to a stop Set the time required to shut off the output after the start signal is turned OFF in Pr.250. When "1000 to 1100" is set, output
is shut off after a lapse of the (Pr.250 - 1000) seconds. The output is shut off after a lapse of the setting time of Pr.250 when the start signal is turned OFF. Motor coasts to a stop. The RUN signal is turned OFF when the output is shut off.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Start signal (STF/STR) Stop operation
250 G106
Stop selection 9999
0 to 100 s STF signal: Forward rotation start STR signal: Reverse rotation start
The motor coasts to a stop after a lapse of the setting time when the start signal is turned OFF.
1000 to 1100 s STF signal: Start signal STR signal: Forward/reverse rotation signal
The motor coasts to a stop after a lapse of the (Pr.250 - 1000) seconds when the start signal is turned OFF.
9999 STF signal: Forward rotation start STR signal: Reverse rotation start
The motor is decelerated to a stop when the start signal is turned OFF.
8888 STF signal: Start signal STR signal: Forward/reverse rotation signal
Time
ON OFFStart signal
Deceleration starts when start signal turns OFF
Deceleration time (Time set in Pr. 8, etc.)
DC brake
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H
z)
ON OFF RUN signal
OFFONStart signal
Output is shut off when set time elapses after start signal turns OFF Pr.250
Motor coasts to stop Time
OFFRUN signal
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy
(H
z)
ON
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE The stop selection setting is disabled when following functions are operating.
When Pr.250 "9999 or 8888", acceleration/deceleration is performed in accordance to the frequency command until the output is shut off by turning OFF the start signal.
When the restart signal is turned ON during the motor coasting, the operation is resumed from Pr.13 Starting frequency. Even with the setting of coasting to a stop, when the LX signal is turned ON, the motor does not coast but zero speed control
or servo lock is applied.
Start signal operation selection 2-wire type (STF signal, STR signal)
The following figure shows the 2-wire type connection. As an initial setting, the forward/reverse rotation signals (STF/STR) acts as both start and stop signals. Either one turned
ON will be enabled, and the operation will follow that signal. The motor will decelerate to a stop when both are turned OFF (or both are turned ON) during the operation.
The frequency can be set by inputting 0 to 10 VDC between the speed setting input terminals 2 and 5, or with Pr.4 to Pr.6 Multi-speed setting (high speed, middle speed, and low speed). (For the multi-speed operation, refer to page 411.)
By setting Pr.250 = "1000 to 1100, 8888", the STF signal input becomes the start command and the STR signal input becomes the forward/reverse command.
NOTE By setting Pr.250 = "0 to 100, 1000 to 1100", the motor will coast to a stop when the start command is turned OFF. The STF and STR signals are assigned to terminals STF and STR in the initial status. The STF signal can be assigned to
terminal STF only using Pr.178 STF terminal function selection, and the STR signal can be assigned to terminal STR only using Pr.179 STR terminal function selection.
3-wire type (STF signal, STR signal, STP (STOP) signal) The following figure shows the 3-wire type connection. The self-holding function is enabled when the STP (STOP) signal is turned ON. In such case, the forward/reverse signal
is simply used as a start signal.
Position control Power failure stop function (Pr.261) PU stop (Pr.75) Deceleration stop due to fault definition (Pr.875) Deceleration stop due to communication error (Pr.502) Offline auto tuning (with motor rotation)
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
STF ON
Time
STF STR SD
Inverter
STR
2-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "9999")
ON
10 2 5
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy Fo
rw ar
d ro
ta tio
n R
ev er
se ro
ta tio
n
Start signal Forward/ reverse signal
STF ON
Time
2-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "8888")
STF STR SD
Inverter
STR ON
10 2 5
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy Fo
rw ar
d ro
ta tio
n R
ev er
se ro
ta tio
n
7235. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
72
Even if a start signal (STF or STR) is turned ON and then OFF, the start command remains valid and the motor operation continues. To change the rotation direction, turn the STR (STF) signal ON once and then OFF.
In order to decelerate the motor to a stop, turn OFF the STP (STOP) signal once.
NOTE The STP (STOP) signal is assigned to terminal STP (STOP) in the initial status. Set "25" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 to assign
the STP (STOP) signal to another terminal. When the JOG operation is enabled by turning ON the JOG signal, the STP (STOP) signal will be disabled. Even when the output is stopped by turning ON the MRS signal, the self-holding function is not canceled.
Start signal selection
Parameters referred to Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367 Pr.4 to Pr.6 (Multi-speed setting)page 411 Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381, page 382 Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selectionpage 336 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.261 Power failure stop selectionpage 642 Pr.419 Position command source selectionpage 298 Pr.502 Stop mode selection at communication errorpage 663 Pr.875 Fault definitionpage 422
5.16.11 Regenerative brake selection and DC feeding mode
When performing frequent start and stop operation, usage rate of the regenerative brake can be increased by using the optional high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) or the brake unit (FR-BU2, BU, or FR-BU).
Stop Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
STF
STR
SD
STP (STOP)
Inverter
Time
STF
STR
3-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "9999")
ON
ON
STP (STOP) ON OFF OFF
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy Fo
rw ar
d ro
ta tio
n R
ev er
se ro
ta tio
n
Time
Stop
Forward rotation /reverse rotation
Start
STF
STR
ON
STP (STOP) ON
STF
STR
SD
STP (STOP)
Inverter
ON
ON
3-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "8888") OFF OFF
O ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy Fo
rw ar
d ro
ta tio
n R
ev er
se ro
ta tio
n
STF STR Pr.250 setting and inverter status
0 to 100 s, 9999 1000 to 1100 s, 8888 OFF OFF Stop
Stop OFF ON Reverse rotation ON OFF Forward rotation Forward rotation ON ON Stop Reverse rotation
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC in power regeneration mode 1 or 2), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), and power regeneration converter (MT-RC) are used for continuous operation during regenerative driving. The high power factor converter (FR-HC2) and multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC in common bus regeneration mode) can also be used to reduce harmonics, improve power factor, and operate continuously during regenerative driving.
It is possible to choose between the DC feeding mode 1, which will operate with DC power supply (terminals P and N), and DC feeding mode 2, which will normally operate in AC power supply (terminals R, S, and T) and operate in DC power supply (terminal P and N), such as batteries, at the time of power failure.
While the power is supplied only to the control circuit, the reset operation when the power is supplied to the main circuit can be selected.
*1 The initial value or setting range for the standard model. *2 The initial value or setting range for the separated converter type. *3 The initial value or setting range for the IP55 compatible model. *4 The setting is available for the standard model.
Details of the setting value FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
30 E300
Regenerative function selection
0*1*3, 10*2
0 to 2, 10, 11, 20, 21, 100 to 102, 110, 111, 120, 121*1
Set the applied regeneration unit, the terminal used for power supply, and whether to reset the inverter when the power is supplied to the main circuit.
2, 10, 11, 102, 110, 111*2
0, 2, 10, 20, 100, 102, 110, 120*3
70 G107*4
Special regenerative brake duty 0% 0 to 100% Set the %ED of the built-in brake transistor operation.
599 T721
X10 terminal input selection
0*1*3, 1*2
0 Normally open input 1 Normally closed input (NC contact input specification)
Regeneration unit Power supply terminals of
inverter
Pr.30 setting*4
Pr.70 setting Remarks
Built-in brake*3, brake unit (FR-BU2 (GZG/GRZG/FR- BR), FR-BU, BU)
R, S, T 0 (initial value), 100
The regenerative brake duty will be as follows. FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 00250(3.7K): 3% FR-A820-00340(5.5K), 00490(7.5K): 2% FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 00250(7.5K): 2% Other than above: 0% (without the built-in brake
resistor)
P, N 10, 110
R, S, T/P, N 20, 120
High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
R, S, T 1, 101 10%*1
6%*2 The FR-ABR can be used with FR-A820-01250(22K) or lower and the FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower.P, N 11, 111
R, S, T/P, N 21, 121 Multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC) (power regeneration mode 1 or 2)
R, S, T 0 (initial value)
High power factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC) (common bus regeneration mode), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
P, N 2, 102 0% (initial value)
7255. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
72
FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
FR-A842-07700(315K) or higher
*1 For the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower. *2 For the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher, and FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher. *3 The built-in brake is installed on FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower. *4 While the power is supplied only to the control circuit with Pr.30 = "100 or higher", the inverter reset is not performed when the power is supplied
to the main circuit.
NOTE For the use of a brake resistor other than the FR-ABR, contact your sales representative.
When using the built-in brake resistor or brake unit (FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU) (FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower)
When using the built-in brake, using the FR-BU2 in combination with the GZG/GRZG/FR-BR, or using the BU or FR-BU, set Pr.30 = "0 (initial value), 10, 20, 100, 110, or 120". The Pr.70 setting is invalid. At this time, the regenerative brake duty is as follows.
NOTE The built-in brake resistor is equipped for the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower, and the FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.
When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) (FR-A820-01250(22K) or lower, FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower)
Set "1, 11, or 21" in Pr.30. Set Pr.70 as follows.
When using the brake unit (FR-BU2) (FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR- A840-02160(75K) or higher)
To use the FR-BU2 in combination with the MT-BR5, set as follows. Set "1, 11, or 21" in Pr.30.
Regeneration unit Power supply terminals of inverter Pr.30 setting*4 Pr.70 Setting
Without regenerative function R, S, T 0 (initial value), 100
P, N 10, 110 R, S, T/P, N 20, 120
Brake unit (FR-BU2 (MT-BR5)) R, S, T 1, 101
0% (initial value)P, N 11, 111 R, S, T/P, N 21, 121
Power regeneration converter (MT-RC) R, S, T 1, 101 0% (initial value) High power factor converter (FR-HC2) P, N 2, 102 Multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC) (power regeneration mode 1 or 2)
R, S, T 0 (initial value)
Regeneration unit Pr.30 setting*4
Without regenerative function (FR-CC2) 10 (initial value), 110 Brake unit (FR-CC2+FR-BU2 (MT-BR5)) 11, 111 High power factor converter (FR-HC2) 2, 102
Inverter Regenerative brake duty FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower 3% FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K) 2% FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower 2% Other than the above 0% (without the built-in brake resistor)
Inverter Pr.70 setting FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower, FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower 10% FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher, FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher 6%
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Set Pr.70 = 0% (initial value). Set the brake unit FR-BU2, Pr.0 Brake mode selection = "2".
NOTE The stall prevention (overvoltage), oL, does not occur while Pr.30 = "1, 11, or 21".
When using the power regeneration converter (MT-RC) Set "1 or 101" in Pr.30. Set Pr.70 = 0% (initial value).
When using the high power factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), or converter unit (FR-CC2)
To use the FR-HC2 or FR-CV, set Pr.30 = "2 or 102". The Pr.70 setting is invalid. To use the FR-XC in common bus regeneration mode, set Pr.30 = "2 or 102". To use the FR-XC in power regeneration mode, set Pr.30 = "0 or 100". When using the FR-CC2, set Pr.30 = "10" (initial value of the separated converter type). Use any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function assignment) to assign the following signals to the contact input
terminals.
For the terminal used for the X10 or X11 signal, set "10" (X10) or "11" (X11) in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 and assign the function. (For the separated converter type, the X10 signal is assigned to terminal MRS in the initial setting.)
NOTE For details of the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR), brake unit, high power factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction
regeneration converter (FR-XC), or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) connections, refer to page 97. Also, for details on each option, refer to the Instruction Manual of each option.
Setting Pr.30 = "2" will reset the inverter, and "Err" is displayed on the operation panel during the reset.
Logic reversing of the Inverter run enable signal (X10 signal, Pr.599) Use Pr.599 X10 terminal input selection to select the X10 signal input specification between normally open (NO contact)
and normally closed (NC contact). With the normally closed (NC contact) input specification, the inverter output is shut off by turning OFF (opening) the X10 signal.
Changing the inverter logic (NO/NC contact) with the Pr.599 setting is required according to the logic of the Inverter run enable signal sent from the option unit.
(a) Inverter run enable (X10) signal: FR-HC2 connection, FR-XC connection, FR-CV connection, FR-CC2 connection To ensure coordinated protection of the FR-HC2, FR-XC (common bus regeneration mode), FR-CV, or FR-CC2, use the X10 signal to shut off the inverter output. Input the RDY signal of the FR-HC2 (the RYB signal of the FR-XC, the RDYB signal of FR-CV, or the RDA signal of FR-CC2).
(b) FR-HC2/FR-CC2 connection, instantaneous power failure detection (X11) signal: FR-HC2 connection, FR-CC2 connection During the operation using RS-485 communication, with the remote output and analog remote output functions enabled, the X11 signal is used to store the status when the inverter is set to store the status before an instantaneous power failure. Input the FR-HC2/FR-CC2 connection, instantaneous power failure detection signal.
7275. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
72
The response time of the X10 signal is within 2 ms.
Relationship between Pr.599 and the Inverter run enable signal of each option unit
NOTE If the X10 signal is unassigned while Pr.30 = "2" (FR-HC2/FR-XC/FR-CV connection) or "10 or 11" (DC feeding mode 1), the
MRS signal can be used as the X10 signal. At this time, logic setting for the signal will follow Pr.17 MRS input selection. The MRS signal is valid from either of communication or external, but when the MRS signal is to be used as the Inverter run
enable (X10) signal, it must be input from external. When the FR-HC or MT-HC is connected, set Pr.599 = "0 (initial value)". When the terminal assignment is changed with Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), wiring may be mistaken
due to different terminal name and signal contents, or may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Regenerative brake duty warning output and the warning signal (RBP signal) (standard models)
When the regenerative brake duty reaches 85% of the Pr.70 setting, "RB" is indicated on the operation panel and the Regenerative brake prealarm signal (RBP) signal is output. When it reaches 100% of the Pr.70 setting, it will become regenerative overvoltage (E.OV[]).
The inverter output is not shut off with the warning signal. For the terminal to be used for the RBP signal output, set "7 (positive logic) or 107 (negative logic)" to one of Pr.190 to
Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection), and assign the function.
100%: Regeneration overvoltage protection operation value
NOTE When Pr.30 = "0 (initial value), 10, or 20" for the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and the FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher, "RB"
is not indicated. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
ON
OFF
X10 signal (Pr.599=0)
Time
Motor coasts to stopOutput frequency
X10 signal (Pr.599=1)
Pr.599 setting Corresponding signals of the option unit Operation according to the X10
signal statusFR-HC2 FR-XC FR-CV FR-CC2 0 (initial value of standard structure models and IP55 compatible models)
RDY (negative logic) (initial setting) RYB RDYB RDB X10-ON: Inverter output shutoff (NO
contact)
1 (initial value of separated converter types)
RDY (positive logic) RYA RDYA RDA X10-OFF: Inverter output shutoff (NC contact)
Ratio of brake duty to the Pr. 70 setting
Regenerative brake pre-alarm (RBP)
Time
OFF ON
100% 85%
ON
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Selection between resetting or not resetting during power supply to main circuit (Pr.30 = "100, 101, 102, 110, 111, 120, or 121")
Inverter reset is not performed if Pr.30 = "100" or more, and supplying power to the main circuit (input through terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) is started when power is supplied only to the control circuit (input through terminals R1/L11 and S1/ L12, or 24 V external power supply input).
When a communication option, etc. is used, communication interruption due to the inverter reset can be avoided.
NOTE When supplying power to the main circuit is started while the protective function of the inverter is activated, inverter reset is
performed even when "not resetting after power-ON" is selected.
DC feeding mode 1 (Pr.30 = "10 or 11") (standard models and IP55 compatible models)
For standard models and IP55 compatible models, setting Pr.30 = "10 or 11" allows operation with a DC power supply. Keep the AC power supply connection terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 open, and connect the DC power supply between
terminals P/+ and N/-. Also, for the standard model, remove the jumpers between terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and between terminals S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 to the terminals P/+ and N/- respectively.
The following diagram shows a connection example.
DC feeding mode 2 (Pr.30 = "20 or 21") (standard models and IP55 compatible models)
When Pr.30 = "20 or 21", it will normally operate with AC power supply and operate with DC power supply such as batteries at the time of power failure.
Connect the AC power supply to the AC power supply connecting terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3, and connect the DC power supply to the terminals P/+ and N/-. Also, for the standard model, remove the jumpers between terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and between terminals S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 to the terminals P/+ and N/- respectively.
Operation with DC current is possible by turning ON the DC feeding operation permission (X70) signal. For details on the I/O signals, refer to following table.
CAUTION Do not connect a separated converter type inverter to a DC power supply. Doing so may damage the inverter.
DC power
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
P/+
N/-
M
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start
Contact input common
STF STR SD
R1/L11 S1/L21 Earth
(Ground)
Inverter
10
2 2
3
1
Frequency command Frequency setting
potentiometer 1/2 W 1 k
5
(+)
(-)
Inrush current
limit circuit
MC
7295. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
73
Following is the connection diagram of switching to DC power supply using the power failure detection of the inverter.
*1 Assign the function using Pr.178 to Pr.182 (Input terminal function selection). *2 Assign the function using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
Signal name Name Description Parameter setting
Input
X70 DC feeding operation permission
To operate with DC feeding, turn ON the X70 signal. When the inverter output is shutoff due to power failure, it will be possible to start up 200 ms after turning ON the X70 signal. (Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure can start after the time set in Pr.57 has elapsed.) When the X70 signal is turned OFF while operating the inverter, output shutoff (Pr.261 = "0") or deceleration stop (Pr.261 "0") will occur.
Set "70" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189.
X71 DC feeding cancel
Turn ON when stopping the DC feeding. When the X71 signal is turned ON during the operation of the inverter and X70 signal is ON, output shutoff (Pr.261 = "0") or deceleration stop (Pr.261 "0") will occur, and Y85 signal will turn OFF after stopping. After turning ON the X71 signal, operation is not possible even if the X70 signal is turned ON.
Set "71" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189.
Output Y85 DC current feeding
This signal will turn ON during power failure or undervoltage of the AC power supply. It will turn OFF when the X71 signal turns ON or power restoration. The Y85 signal will not turn OFF even with the power restoration while the inverter is running, but turns OFF after stopping the inverter. When the Y85 signal is turned ON due to undervoltage, the Y85 signal will not turn OFF even when the undervoltage is resolved. The ON/OFF status is maintained when the inverter is reset.
Set "85 (positive logic) or 185 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196.
DC power
MCCB MC R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
P/+
N/-
SE
Y85
M
STF STR X70
X71 SD
R1/L11 S1/L21 Earth
(Ground)
10
2 2
3
1 5
(+)
(-)
MC1
MC1
Three-phase AC power supply
DC feeding permission signal DC feeding cancel signal
Contact input common
Reverse rotation start Forward rotation start
Inverter
Inrush current
limit circuit
Frequency command Frequency setting
potentiometer 1/2W1k
24VDC
DC feeding signal
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation example at the time of power failure occurrence 1
Operation example at the time of power failure occurrence 2 (when the AC power supply is restored)
Operation example at the time of power failure occurrence 3 (when continuing the operation)
Time
ON ON
Back up operation
Motor coasting
Approx. 200ms
STF(STR)
DC power supplyAC power supplyControl power supply
ONAC power supply
ONY85(MC)
ONX70
ONX71
Output frequency (Hz)
Time
ON ON
Back up operation
Motor coasting
Turns off after stop while running
Approx.200ms
STF(STR)
DCAC ACControl power supply
ON Power restorationAC power supply
ONY85(MC)
ON
OFF
X70
X71
Output frequency (Hz)
Time
ON
Back up operation
Output frequency
(Hz)
STF(STR)
DCAC ACControl power supply
ON Power restorationAC power supply
ONY85(MC)
ON
OFF
X70
X71
Remains on while running
7315. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
73
Power supply specification for DC feeding (standard models and IP55 compatible models)
NOTE The voltage between terminals P and N briefly increases to 415 V (830 V) or higher during the regenerative driving, so take
caution on the selection of the DC power supply. When an AC power supply is connected to terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 during DC feeding with Pr.30 = "2, 10, or 11" (DC
feeding), an option fault (E.OPT) will occur. When the input voltage is insufficient during inverter operation with Pr.30 = "2, 10, 11, 20, or 21" (DC feeding), the inverter
output will be shut off. (The undervoltage protection function (E.UVT) is not activated.) When the inverter is operated with Pr.30 = "2, 10, 11, 20, or 21" (DC feeding), detection of Instantaneous power failure (E.IPF)
is not performed. When the DC power is switched ON, an inrush current higher than that for the AC power flows in the inverter. Minimize the
number of power-ON events. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) or Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.17 MRS input selectionpage 524 Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628, page 635 Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473 Pr.261 Power failure stop selectionpage 642
5.16.12 Regeneration avoidance function The regenerative status can be detected and avoided by raising the frequency.
The operation frequency is automatically increased to prevent the regenerative operations. This function is useful when a load is forcibly rotated by another fan in the duct.
200 V class Rated input DC voltage 283 to 339 VDC Permissible fluctuation 240 to 373 VDC
400 V class Rated input DC voltage 537 VDC to 707 VDC Permissible fluctuation 457 VDC to 777 VDC
WARNING The value set in Pr.70 must not exceed the setting of the brake resistor used.
It may cause overheating.
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Regeneration avoidance operation (Pr.882, Pr.883) When the regenerative voltage increases, the DC bus voltage will rise, which may cause an overvoltage fault (E.OV[]). The
regenerative status can be avoided by detecting this rise of bus voltage, and raising the frequency when the bus voltage level exceeds Pr.883 Regeneration avoidance operation level.
The regeneration avoidance operation can be selected to operate constantly or operate only during constant speed. The regeneration avoidance function is enabled by setting "1 or 2" in Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation
selection.
NOTE The slope of frequency rising or lowering by the regeneration avoidance operation will change depending on the regenerative
status.
The DC bus voltage of the inverter will be approximately times of the normal input voltage.
The bus voltage is about 311 VDC (622 VDC) when the input voltage is 220 VAC (440 VAC). However, it may vary depending on the input power supply waveform.
Make sure that the setting value of Pr.883 will not get under DC bus voltage level. The frequency will rise with operation of the regeneration avoidance function even during operation other than the regenerative operation.
The stall prevention (overvoltage) (oL) will only operate during deceleration, stopping the lowering of output frequency, but on the other hand, the regeneration avoidance function will constantly operate (Pr.882 = "1") or operate only at constant speed (Pr.882 = "2"), and raise the frequency depending on the amount of regeneration.
When the motor becomes unstable due to operation of the stall prevention (overcurrent) (OL) during the regeneration avoidance operation, increase the deceleration time or lower the setting of Pr.883.
During position control, the regeneration avoidance function is not activated.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
882 G120
Regeneration avoidance operation selection
0
0 The regeneration avoidance function is disabled. 1 The regeneration avoidance function is always enabled.
2 The regeneration avoidance function is enabled only during constant-speed operation.
883 G121
Regeneration avoidance operation level
200 V class 380 VDC
300 to 1200 V
Set the bus voltage level to operate the regeneration avoidance operation. When the bus voltage level is set low, it will be harder to generate overvoltage error, but actual deceleration time will be longer. Set the setting value higher than the (power supply voltage
) value.
400 V class 760 VDC
884 G122
Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity
0
0 The regeneration avoidance is disabled due to bus voltage change rate.
1 to 5 Set the sensitivity to detect the bus voltage change rate. Setting value 1 (detection sensitivity: low) to 5 (detection sensitivity: high)
885 G123
Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value
6 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the limit value for frequency to rise when the regeneration
avoidance function is activated.
9999 The frequency limit is disabled.
886 G124
Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 100% 0 to 200% Adjust the response during the regeneration avoidance
operation. Increasing the setting improves the response to change in the bus voltage. However, the output frequency may become unstable. If setting a smaller value in Pr.886 does not suppress the vibration, set a smaller value in Pr.665.
665 G125
Regeneration avoidance frequency gain
100% 0 to 200%
2
Pr. 883
Time
Time
Regeneration avoidance operation example for acceleration
Bu s v
olt ag
e (V
DC )
Ou tp
ut
fre qu
en cy
(H z)
During regeneration avoidance function operation
Pr. 883
Time
Time
Regeneration avoidance operation example for constant speed
Bu s
vo lta
ge
(V D
C )
O ut
pu t
fre qu
en cy
(H z)
During regeneration avoidance function operation
Pr. 883
Time
Time
Bu s
vo lta
ge
(V D
C )
O ut
pu t
fre qu
en cy
(H z)
During regeneration avoidance function operation
Regeneration avoidance operation example for deceleration
2
7335. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
73
Detecting the regenerative status faster during deceleration (Pr.884) Since a rapid change in bus voltage cannot be handled by bus voltage level detection during the regeneration avoidance
operation, deceleration is stopped by detecting the change in bus voltage and if it is equal to or lower than Pr.883 Regeneration avoidance operation level. Set the detectable bus voltage change rate as the detection sensitivity in Pr.884 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity. A larger set value increases the detection sensitivity.
NOTE When the setting value is too small (detection sensitivity is not good), detection will not be possible, and regeneration
avoidance will operate even with the bus voltage change caused by a change in the input power.
Limiting the regeneration avoidance operation frequency (Pr.885) It is possible to assign a limit to the output frequency corrected (rise) by the regeneration avoidance operation. Limit of the frequency is output frequency (frequency before regeneration avoidance operation) + Pr.885 Regeneration
avoidance compensation frequency limit value for during acceleration and constant speed. During deceleration, when the frequency increases due to the regeneration avoidance operation and exceeds the limit value, the limit value will be retained until the output frequency is reduced to be the half the Pr.885 setting.
When the frequency that have increased by the regeneration avoidance operation exceeds Pr.1 Maximum frequency, it will be limited to the maximum frequency.
When Pr.885 = "9999", the regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit is disabled. Set the frequency around the motor rated slip frequency. Increase the setting value if the overvoltage protection function
(E.OV[]) is activated at the start of deceleration.
Adjusting the regeneration avoidance operation (Pr.665, Pr.886) If the frequency becomes unstable during regeneration avoidance operation, decrease the setting of Pr.886 Regeneration
avoidance voltage gain. On the other hand, if an overvoltage fault occurs due to a sudden regeneration, increase the setting.
If setting a smaller value in Pr.886 does not suppress the vibration, set a smaller value in Pr.665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain.
NOTE During the regeneration avoidance operation, the stall prevention (overvoltage) "oL" is displayed and the Overload warning
(OL) signal is output. Set the operation pattern at an OL signal output using Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection. Use Pr.157 OL signal output timer to set the OL signal output timing.
The stall prevention is enabled even during regeneration avoidance operation. The regeneration avoidance function cannot decrease the actual deceleration time for the motor to stop. Since the actual
deceleration time is determined by the regenerative power consumption performance, consider using a regeneration unit (FR- BU2, BU, FR-BU, FR-CV, FR-HC2, or FR-XC) or a brake resistor (such as the FR-ABR) to decrease the deceleration time.
When using a regeneration unit (FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU, FR-CV, FR-HC2, or FR-XC) or a brake resistor (such as the FR-ABR) to consume the regenerative power at constant speed, set Pr.882 = "0 (initial value)" (the regeneration avoidance function is disabled). When consuming the regenerative power at the time of deceleration with the regeneration unit, etc., set Pr.882 = "2" (enables regeneration avoidance function only at the constant speed).
When using the regeneration avoidance function under Vector control, noise may be generated from the motor during deceleration. In such case, adjust the gain by performing easy gain tuning, etc. (Refer to page 254.)
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency rated rotation speed
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency Rated motor frequencyRated motor slip frequency =
Limit level
Time
Pr.885 Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.885/2
O ut
pu t
fre qu
en cy
(H z)
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters referred to Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 428 Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367 Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 431
5.16.13 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration
Increase the loss in the motor by increasing the magnetic flux during deceleration. The deceleration time can be reduced by suppressing the stall prevention (overvoltage) (oL). The deceleration time can further be shortened without a brake resistor. (When a brake resistor is used, the duty can be reduced.)
Setting of increased magnetic excitation rate (Pr.660, Pr.661) To enable the increased magnetic excitation deceleration, set Pr.660 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration
operation selection = "1". Set the amount of excitation increase in Pr.661 Magnetic excitation increase rate. Increased magnetic excitation
deceleration will be disabled when Pr.661 = "0". When the DC bus voltage exceeds the increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation level during the deceleration,
excitation is increased in accordance with the setting value in Pr.661. The increased magnetic excitation deceleration will continue even if the DC bus voltage goes under the increased
magnetic excitation deceleration operation level during increased magnetic excitation deceleration.
When the stall prevention (overvoltage) occurs during the increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation, increase the deceleration time or raise the setting value of Pr.661. When the stall prevention (overcurrent) occurs, increase the deceleration time or lower the setting value of Pr.661.
Increased magnetic excitation deceleration is enabled under V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control (speed control), and Vector control (speed control).
NOTE Increased magnetic excitation deceleration will be disabled in the following conditions:
During PM sensorless vector control, power failure stop, orientation control, operation with the FR-HC2, FR-XC (in common bus regeneration mode), or FR-CV, energy saving operation, Optimum excitation control, and stop-on-contact control.
Overcurrent prevention function (Pr.662) The overcurrent prevention function is enabled under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control. The increased magnetic excitation rate is lowered automatically when the output current exceeds the level set in Pr.662
during increased magnetic excitation deceleration.
V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
660 G130
Increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation selection
0 0 Without the increased magnetic excitation deceleration function
1 With the increased magnetic excitation deceleration function
661 G131
Magnetic excitation increase rate 9999
0 to 40% Set the increase of excitation.
9999
The magnetic excitation increase rate is 10% under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control. The magnetic excitation increase rate is 0% under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control.
662 G132
Increased magnetic excitation current level 100% 0 to 300%
The increased magnetic excitation rate is automatically lowered when the output current exceeds the setting value during increased magnetic excitation deceleration.
Inverter Increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation level
200 V class 340 V 400 V class 680 V With 500 V input 740 V
7355. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
73
When the inverter protective function (E.OC[], E.THT) is activated due to increased magnetic excitation deceleration, adjust the level set in Pr.662.
The overcurrent preventive function is disabled when Pr.662 = "0".
NOTE When the level set in Pr.662 is more than the one set in Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level, the overcurrent preventive
function is activated at the level set in Pr.22. (The level set in Pr.662 is applied when Pr.22 = "0".)
Parameters referred to Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 431 Pr.30 Regenerative function selectionpage 724 Pr.60 Energy saving control selectionpage 712 Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selectionpage 628, page 635 Pr.270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selectionpage 577 Pr.261 Power failure stop selectionpage 642 Pr.350 Stop position command selectionpage 585
5.16.14 Slip compensation
Under V/F control, the slip of the motor is estimated from the inverter output current to maintain the rotation of the motor constant.
Calculate the rated motor slip and set the value in Pr.245 to enable slip compensation. Slip compensation is not performed when Pr.245 = "0 or 9999".
NOTE When the slip compensation is performed, the output frequency may become larger than the set frequency. Set Pr.1 Maximum
frequency higher than the set frequency. Slip compensation will be disabled in the following conditions:
Stall prevention (oL, OL) operation, regeneration avoidance operation, auto tuning, encoder feedback control operation
Parameters referred to Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 428 Pr.3 Base frequencypage 707
5.16.15 Encoder feedback control
This controls the inverter output frequency so that the motor speed is constant to the load variation by detecting the motor speed with the speed detector (encoder) to feed back to the inverter. A Vector control compatible option is required.
V/F
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
245 G203 Rated slip 9999
0.01 to 50% Set the rated motor slip. 0, 9999 No slip compensation
246 G204
Slip compensation time constant 0.5 s 0.01 to 10 s
Set the response time of the slip compensation. Reducing the value improves the response, but the regenerative overvoltage (E.OV[]) error is more likely to occur with a larger load inertia.
247 G205
Constant output range slip compensation selection 9999
0 No slip compensation in the constant power range (frequency range higher than the frequency set in Pr.3).
9999 Slip compensation is performed in the constant power range.
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency - rated rotation speed Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency
100 [%]Rated slip =
V/F Magnetic flux
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 The speed deviation excess detection frequency is used when Vector control compatible option is mounted during Vector control. (Refer to page 269 for details.)
*2 The setting is available when a Vector control compatible option is installed. *3 The parameter number is the one for use a Vector control compatible option. (Pr.369 is applicable for the FR-A8AP and FR-A8AL.) *4 The parameter number is the one for use with the control terminal option (FR-A8TP).
Setting before operation (Pr.144, Pr.359, Pr.369) For the operation during encoder feedback control under V/F control, set the number of motor poles in Pr.144 Speed
setting switchover in accordance with the applied motor. Since the Pr.81 Number of motor poles setting is used during Advanced magnetic flux vector, the Pr.144 setting does not need to be changed.
Use Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction and Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses to set the rotation direction and the number of pulses for the encoder.
NOTE Operating the inverter with Pr.144 = "0, 10, 12, 110, or 112" causes E.1 to E.3. When "102, 104, 106, or 108" is set in Pr.144, the value obtained by subtracting 100 from the set value will be set as the
number of poles. The Pr.144 setting changes automatically when setting the motor poles in Pr.81, but even if Pr.144 is changed, Pr.81 will not
automatically change. Control with correct speed is not possible if the number of poles for the applied motor is incorrect. Check first before operation. Encoder feedback control is not possible when the rotation direction setting of the encoder is incorrect. (Operation of the
inverter is possible.) Check the indicator on the parameter unit to confirm the direction.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
144 M002 Speed setting switchover 4
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 102, 104, 106, 108, 110, 112
Set the number of motor poles for the encoder feedback control under V/F control.
285 H416
Overspeed detection frequency*1 9999
0 to 30 Hz
When the difference between the detected frequency and the output frequency exceeds the set value during encoder feedback control, an inverter fault (E.MB1) is generated.
9999 Overspeed detection is disabled.
359*2*3
C141 852*4
C241 Encoder rotation direction 1
0 Set when using a motor for which forward rotation (encoder) is clockwise (CW) viewed from the shaft
Set for the operation at 120 Hz or less.
100 Set for the operation at a frequency higher than 120 Hz.
1 Set when using a motor for which forward rotation (encoder) is counterclockwise (CCW) viewed from the shaft.
Set for the operation at 120 Hz or less.
101 Set for the operation at a frequency higher than 120 Hz.
367*2G240 Speed feedback range 9999 0 to 590 Hz Set the range of speed feedback control. 9999 The encoder feedback control is disabled.
368*2G241 Feedback gain 1 0 to 100 Set when the rotation is unstable or response is slow.
369*2*3
C140 851*4
C240 Number of encoder pulses 1024 0 to 4096 Set the number of encoder pulses.
Set the number of pulses before it is multiplied by 4.
CW
CCW
7375. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
73
Selection of encoder feedback control (Pr.367) When a value other than "9999" is set in Pr.367 Speed feedback range, encoder feedback control is enabled. Set a target
value (frequency at which stable speed operation is performed) and specify the range around the value. Normally, use the frequency converted from the slip amount (r/min) at the rated motor speed (rated load). If the setting is too large, response becomes slow.
Example: when the rated speed of a motor (4 poles) is 1740 r/min at 60 Hz
Feedback gain (Pr.368) Set Pr.368 Feedback gain when the rotation is unstable or response is slow. Response of the feedback will become slow when the acceleration/deceleration time is long. In such case, increase the
setting value of Pr.368.
Overspeed detection (Pr.285) To prevent malfunction when the correct pulse signal cannot be detected from the encoder, when
[detection frequency] - [output frequency] Pr.285 during encoder feedback control, a protective function (E.MB1) will be activated to shut off the inverter output.
Overspeed detection is not performed when Pr.285 = "9999".
NOTE Couple the encoder on the same axis as the motor axis without any mechanical clatter, with speed ratio of 1:1. Encoder feedback control is not performed during the acceleration and deceleration to prevent unstable operation such as
hunting. Encoder feedback control is performed after the output frequency has reached [set frequency] [speed feedback range] once. When following status occurs during encoder feedback control operation, the inverter output is not shut off, the output
frequency becomes the value obtained by [set frequency] [speed feedback range], and tracking of the motor speed is not performed. When the pulse signal from the encoder is lost due to a break, etc. When correct pulse signal cannot be detected due to induction noise, etc. When the motor is forcefully accelerated (regenerative rotation) or decelerated (motor lock) due to large external force
Use the Inverter running (RUN) signal when releasing the brake from the motor with a brake. (The brake may not be released when the Output frequency detection (FU) signal is used.)
Do not turn OFF the external power supply for the encoder during encoder feedback control. Normal encoder feedback control will not be possible.
Parameters referred to Pr.81 Number of motor polespage 221, page 532
5.16.16 Droop control
This is a function to give droop characteristics to the speed by balancing the load in proportion with the load torque during the Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control.
Speed feedback range
Set value (Set command)
Driven load Regenerative load
Slip Nsp = Synchronous speed - Rated speed = 1800 - 1740 = 60 (r/min)
Frequency equivalent to slip (fsp) = Nsp Number of poles/120 = 60 4/120 = 2 (Hz)
Pr.368 setting Description Pr.368 > 1 Response will become faster but it may cause overcurrent or unstable operation. 1 > Pr.368 Response will become slower but the operation will become more stable.
Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector PM
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
This is effective in balancing the load when multiple inverters are connected.
Droop control Droop control is enabled under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and
PM sensorless vector control. In the droop control, the speed command changes depending on the amount of the current for torque.
Set the droop amount at the rated torque in Droop gain as % value of the rated motor frequency (or motor speed when Pr.288 = "10 or 11").
The upper limit of the droop compensation frequency is 400 Hz or Pr.1 Maximum frequency, whichever smaller.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
286 G400 Droop gain 0%
0 Normal operation
0.1 to 100% Droop control enabled. Set the droop amount at the time of rated torque as % value of the rated motor frequency.
287 G401 Droop filter time constant 0.3 s 0 to 1 s Set the time constant of the filter relative to the torque current.
288 G402
Droop function activation selection 0
0 No droop control during acceleration/deceleration (with 0 limit)
The Pr.84 setting is the droop compensation reference.1 Continuous droop control
during operation (with 0 limit)
2 Continuous droop control during operation (without 0 limit)
10 No droop control during acceleration/deceleration (with 0 limit) The motor speed is the droop
compensation reference. 11 Continuous droop control
during operation (with 0 limit)
20 No droop control during acceleration/deceleration (with 0 limit)
The Pr.1121 setting is the droop compensation reference.
21 Continuous droop control during operation (with 0 limit)
22 Continuous droop control during operation (without 0 limit)
994 G403 Droop break point gain 9999
0.1 to 100% Set the droop amount to be changed as % value of the rated motor frequency.
9999 No function 995 G404 Droop break point torque 100% 0.1 to 100% Set the torque to change the droop amount.
679 G420 Second droop gain 9999
0 to 100% Refer to Pr.286.
Set the second droop control. The second droop control is enabled when the RT signal is ON.
9999 The first droop control setting is applied.
680 G421
Second droop filter time constant 9999
0 to 1 s Refer to Pr.287.
9999 The first droop control setting is applied.
681 G422
Second droop function activation selection 9999
0 to 2, 10, 11, 20 to 22 Refer to Pr.288.
9999 The first droop control setting is applied.
682 G423
Second droop break point gain 9999
0.1 to 100% Refer to Pr.994.
9999 The first droop control setting is applied.
683 G424
Second droop break point torque 9999
0.1 to 100% Refer to Pr.995.
9999 The first droop control setting is applied.
7395. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
74
During PM sensorless vector control, the upper limit of the droop compensation frequency is 400 Hz, the frequency set in Pr.1, or the maximum motor frequency, whichever the smallest.
The droop compensation frequency is calculated as follows.
NOTE Set the droop gain equivalent to the rated slip of the motor.
The speed loop integration can be disabled at the emergency stop using Pr.1349 Emergency stop operation selection. (Refer to page 367.)
Limiting the frequency after the droop compensation (0 limit) Under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control, the lower limit can be set for the
frequency command value by setting Pr.288 when the value falls below zero after droop compensation.
*1 Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, the operation is the same as the one when the setting is "0".
Pr.288 setting Operation When the output frequency after droop compensation is negative
Droop compensation reference
0 (initial value)
No droop control during acceleration/deceleration
Limited at 0 Hz (limited at 0.5 Hz under Advanced magnetic flux vector control)
Rated motor frequency (Pr.84 setting)
10*1 Motor speed
20*1 Per-unit speed control reference frequency (Pr.1121 setting)
1*1
Continuous droop control during operation
Rated motor frequency (Pr.84 setting)
11*1 Motor speed
21*1 Per-unit speed control reference frequency (Pr.1121 setting)
2*1
Continuous droop control during operation
Not limited (but reversed) under Vector control or PM sensorless vector control
Limited at 0 Hz under Real sensorless vector control
Rated motor frequency (Pr.84 setting)
22*1 Per-unit speed control reference frequency (Pr.1121 setting)
Droop compensation frequency
Torque 100%
Droop gain
-100%
Frequency
0
Droop compensation reference
Current for torque after filtering
Rated torque current K Droop compensation frequency =
Droop compensation reference Droop gain
100
When the output frequency is equal to or lower than the rated frequency set in Pr.84: K1
When the output frequency is higher than the rated frequency set in Pr.84: K = Output frequency
Rated frequency (Pr.84)
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency - rated rotation speed
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency 100[%]Rated slip =
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Setting the break point for droop control (Pr.994, Pr.995) Set Pr.994 and Pr.995 to have a break point on a droop compensation frequency line. Setting a break point allows the
inverter to raise the droop compensation frequency for light-load (no load) operation without raising it for heavy-load operation.
NOTE The droop break point function is disabled when any of the following conditions is met. (Linear compensation by Pr.286 is
performed.) Pr.995 = 100% (initial value) Pr.286 < Pr.994 Pr.994 Pr.995 Pr.286 / 100%
Setting multiple droop control types (Pr.679 to Pr.683) When the second droop control is set, two sets of droop controls can be switched for use. Turning ON the Second function
selection (RT) signal enables the second droop control.
NOTE The RT signal is the Second function selection signal which also enables other second functions. The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 428 Pr.178 to Pr.189 Input terminal function selection page 521
5.16.17 Speed smoothing control
The output current (torque) of the inverter sometimes becomes unstable due to vibration caused by mechanical resonance. Such vibration can be suppressed by reducing fluctuation of the output current (torque) by changing the output frequency.
Droop break point gain (Pr.994)
Droop compensation frequency
Increased amount of the droop compensation frequency
Droop break point torque (Pr.995)
Torque 100%
Droop gain (Pr.286)
-100%
Frequency
0
Droop compensation reference
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
653 G410
Speed smoothing control 0% 0 to 200% Check the effect by increasing and decreasing the value at around
100%. 654 G411
Speed smoothing cutoff frequency 20 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the minimum frequency for the torque variation cycle.
V/F
7415. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
74
Control block diagram
Setting method When vibration caused by mechanical resonance occurs, set 100% in Pr.653 Speed smoothing control, perform
operation at the frequency with the largest vibration, and check if the vibration is suppressed after few seconds. If the setting is not effective, gradually increase the value set in Pr.653 and repeat the operation to check the effect to
determine the most effective value (Pr.653). If the vibration increases by increasing the value in Pr.653, decrease the value in Pr.653 from 100% to check the effect. When the vibrational frequency at which mechanical resonance occurs (during fluctuation of torque, speed, or converter
output voltage) is measured using an instrument such as a tester, set 1/2 to 1 times of the vibrational frequency in Pr.654 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency. (Setting the resonance frequency range mitigates vibration more effectively.)
NOTE Depending on the equipment, the vibration may not be suppressed sufficiently or the setting is not effective.
V/F control
Current for torque
Frequency output Voltage output
+
-
Acceleration/deceleration processing
Output frequency Speed command
Proportional gain Pr.653
Cutoff frequency Pr.654
Speed smoothing control
0 Vibrational frequency159Hz (fixed)
Torque fluctuation detection range
Cutoff frequency
Pr.654
Current for torque
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.17 Parameter clear / All parameter clear
Set "1" to Pr.CLR Parameter clear or ALL.CL All parameter clear to initialize all parameters. (Parameters cannot be cleared when Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "1".)
Pr.CLR does not clear calibration parameters or the terminal function selection parameters. Refer to the parameter list on page 864 for parameters cleared with this operation.
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Changing the operation mode
Press to choose the PU operation mode. The [PU] indicator turns ON.
3. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
4. Selecting the parameter
Turn to " " for Parameter clear or turn it to " " for All parameter clear, and press
. " (initial value)" appears.
5. Parameter clear
Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to set. " " and " "
(" ") are displayed alternately after parameters are cleared.
NOTE
" " and " " are displayed alternately when the operation mode is other than the PU operation mode.
Stop the inverter first. Writing error occurs if parameter clear is attempted while the inverter is running. To clear parameters, the inverter must be in the PU operation mode even if "2" is set to Pr.77. For availability of the Parameter clear or All parameter clear operation for each parameter, refer to the parameter list on page
864.
Turn to read another parameter.
Press to show the setting again.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
Setting Description
Pr.CL Parameter clear ALL.CL All parameter clear 0 Initial display (Parameters are not cleared.)
1 The settings of parameters except for calibration parameters and terminal function selection parameters are initialized.
The settings of all the parameters, including calibration parameters and terminal function selection parameters, are initialized.
1) Press .
turns ON, and " " appears on the monitor. (When Pr.79 ="0" (initial value))
2) Press to clear the parameter.
7435. PARAMETERS 5.17 Parameter clear / All parameter clear
74
5.18 Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel
NOTE When the copy destination is other than the FR-A800 series or when parameter copy is attempted after the parameter copy
reading was stopped, the product series error " " appears. Refer to the parameter list on page 864 for the availability of parameter copy. When the power is turned OFF or an operation panel is disconnected, etc. during parameter copy writing, write again or check
the setting values by parameter verification. When parameters are copied from a different-capacity inverter, there are parameters with different initial values depending on
the inverter capacity, so the setting values of some parameters will be automatically changed. After performing a parameter copy from a different-capacity inverter, check all the parameter settings. (Refer to the parameter list (page 166) for details on parameters with different initial values depending on individual inverter capacity.)
While password protection is enabled, parameter copy and parameter verification cannot be performed. (Refer to page 348.) If parameters are copied from an older inverter to a newer inverter that has additional parameters, out-of-range setting values
may be written in some parameters. In that case, those parameters operate as if they were set to initial values.
5.18.1 Parameter copy Inverter parameter settings can be copied to another inverter.
Reading the parameter settings in the inverter and storing them in the operation panel
Operating procedure 1. Connect the operation panel to the source inverter.
2. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
3. Selecting the parameter
Turn to " " (Parameter copy) and press .
" " appears.
4. Reading to and storing in the operation panel
Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to start reading the parameter settings by the
operation panel. (It takes about 30 seconds to read and store all the settings. During reading, " " blinks.)
5. End of reading and storing
" " and " " are displayed alternately after the reading and storing are completed.
NOTE
" " appears when a parameter read error occurred. Perform the operation from step 3 again.
Pr.CPY setting value Description 0.--- Initial display 1.RD Copy the parameters from the source inverter to the operation panel. 2.WR Write the parameters stored in the operation panel to the target inverter. 3.VFY Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel. (Refer to page 746.)
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.18 Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Copying parameter settings stored in the operation panel to the inverter Operating procedure 1. Connect the operation panel to the destination inverter.
2. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
3. Selecting the parameter
Turn to " " (Parameter copy), and press .
" " appears.
4. Selecting parameter copy
Turn to change the set value to " ", then press .
appears.
5. Copying to the inverter
Press to start copying to the inverter. (It takes about 60 seconds to copy all the settings. During copying,
" " blinks.) Perform this step while the inverter is stopped. (Parameter settings cannot be copied during operation.)
6. End of copying
" " and " " are displayed alternately after copying ends.
7. When parameters are written to the destination inverter, reset the inverter before operation by, for example, turning the power supply OFF.
NOTE
" " appears when a parameter write error occurred. Perform the operation from step 3 again.
" " and " " are displayed alternately when parameter copy is performed between the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower or FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower inverters and the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher or FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher inverters. When CP and 0.00 are displayed alternately, set Pr.989 Parameter copy alarm release as shown in the following table (initial value).
After setting Pr.989, perform setting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.51, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.61, Pr.70, Pr.72, Pr.80, Pr.82, Pr.90 to Pr.94, Pr.453, Pr.455, Pr.458 to Pr.462, Pr.557, Pr.859, Pr.860, and Pr.893 again.
Pr.989 setting Operation 10 Cancels the warning of FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. 100 Cancels the warning of FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
7455. PARAMETERS 5.18 Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel
74
5.18.2 Parameter verification Whether the parameter settings of inverters are the same or not can be checked.
Operating procedure 1. Copy the parameter settings of the verification source inverter to the operation panel according to the procedure on
page 744.
2. Detach the operation panel from the source inverter and attach it to the verification target inverter.
3. Turning ON the power of the inverter The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
4. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
5. Selecting the parameter
Turn to " " (Parameter copy) and press .
" " appears.
6. Parameter verification
Turn to change to setting value " " (Parameter copy verification mode).
Press . Verification of the parameter settings copied to the operation panel and the parameter settings of the verification destination inverter is started. (It takes about 60 seconds to verify all the settings. During verification,
" " blinks.)
If there are different parameters, the different parameter number and " " are displayed alternately.
To continue verification, press .
7. " " and " " are displayed alternately after verification ends.
NOTE
When " " blinks, the set frequency may be incorrect. To continue verification, press .
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.18 Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.19 Copying and verifying parameters using a USB memory
Inverter parameter settings can be copied to a USB memory device. Parameter setting data stored in a USB memory device can be copied to another inverter or verified to see if they differ
from the parameter settings of another inverter. Parameter settings can also be imported to a personal computer and edited in FR Configurator2.
Changes in the USB memory copy operation states Insert the USB memory device into the inverter. The USB memory mode is displayed and the USB memory operations are
enabled.
USB memory mode
Overwrite the inverter parameter setting onto the designated file in the USB memory device.
Parameter setting file number saved in the USB memory device (up to 99)
Copy the parameter setting from the inverter to the USB memory device.
Write the designated parameter setting file of the USB memory device to a parameter file of the inverter.
Verify the designated parameter setting file of the USB memory device against the parameter file of the inverter.
Monitor mode Parameter setting mode Function mode Fault history mode
7475. PARAMETERS 5.19 Copying and verifying parameters using a USB memory
74
NOTE When parameter settings are copied to the USB memory without specifying a parameter setting file number in the USB
memory, numbers are automatically assigned. Up to 99 files can be saved in the USB memory. When the USB memory already has 99 files, attempting copying of another
file to the USB memory causes the file quantity error (rE7). Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2 for the details on importing files to FR Configurator2. While password protection is enabled, parameter copy and parameter verification cannot be performed. (Refer to page 348.)
Procedure for copying parameters to the USB memory Operating procedure 1. Insert the USB memory device into the copy source inverter.
2. USB memory mode
Press to change to the USB memory mode.
3. Displaying the file selection screen
Press three times to display " " (file selection screen) and press . (To overwrite files on
the USB memory, display the file selection screen, turn to select the file number, and press .)
4. Copying to the USB memory
Turn to change to " ". Press to copy the parameter settings at the copy source to the USB
memory. (It takes about 15 seconds to copy all the settings. During copying, " " blinks.)
" " and the file number are displayed alternately after copying ends.
Procedure for copying parameters from the USB memory to the inverter Operating procedure 1. Insert the USB memory device into the destination inverter.
2. USB memory mode
Press to change to the USB memory mode.
3. Displaying the file selection screen
Press three times to display " " (file selection screen).
4. Selecting the file number
Turn to select the file number to copy to the inverter, and press .
5. Turn to display " " and press . " " appears.
6. Writing to the inverter
Press to start writing the parameter settings stored in the USB memory to the destination inverter. (It takes
about 15 seconds to copy all the settings. During copying, " " blinks.)
" " and the file number are displayed alternately after copying ends. Perform this step while the inverter is stopped.
7. When parameters are written to the destination inverter, reset the inverter before operation by, for example, turning the power supply OFF.
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.19 Copying and verifying parameters using a USB memory
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE
" " or " " appears when a USB memory device error occurred. Check the connection of the USB memory device and try the operation again.
" " and " " are displayed alternately when parameter copy is performed between the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower or FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower inverters and the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher or FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher inverters. When CP and 0.00 are displayed alternately, set Pr.989 Parameter copy alarm release as shown below (initial value).
After setting Pr.989, perform setting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.51, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.61, Pr.70, Pr.72, Pr.80, Pr.82, Pr.90 to Pr.94, Pr.453, Pr.455, Pr.458 to Pr.462, Pr.557, Pr.859, Pr.860, and Pr.893 again.
When the destination inverter is other than the FR-A800 series or when Parameter copy is attempted after the parameter copy
reading was stopped, the model error " " appears. Refer to the parameter list on page 864 for the availability of parameter copy. When the power is turned OFF or an operation panel is disconnected, etc. during parameter copy writing, write again or check
the setting values by parameter verification. When parameters are copied from a different-capacity inverter, there are parameters with different initial values depending on
the inverter capacity, so the setting values of some parameters will be automatically changed. After performing a parameter copy from a different-capacity inverter, check all the parameter settings. (Refer to the parameter list (page 166) for details on parameters with different initial values depending on individual inverter capacity.)
Procedure for verifying parameters in the USB memory Operating procedure 1. Copy the parameter settings of the verification source inverter to the USB memory according to the procedure on
page 748.
2. Move the USB memory device to the inverter to be verified.
3. Turning ON the power of the inverter The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
4. USB memory mode
Press to change to the USB memory mode.
5. Displaying the file selection screen
Press three times to display " " (file selection screen).
6. Selecting the file number
Turn to select the file number to be verified, and press .
7. Parameter verification
Turn to display the setting " " (Parameter copy verification mode), and press .
" " appears.
Press to start verification of the parameter settings copied to the USB memory and the parameter settings of
the verification destination inverter. (It takes about 15 seconds to verify all the settings. During verification,
" " blinks.)
If there are different parameters, the different parameter number and " " are displayed alternately.
To continue verification, press .
Pr.989 setting Operation 10 Cancels the warning of FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. 100 Cancels the warning of FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
7495. PARAMETERS 5.19 Copying and verifying parameters using a USB memory
75
8. The verified file number and " " are displayed alternately after verification ends.
NOTE
When " " blinks, the set frequency may be incorrect. To continue verification, press .
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.19 Copying and verifying parameters using a USB memory
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.20 Checking parameters changed from their initial values (initial value change list)
Parameters changed from their initial values can be displayed.
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
3. Selecting a parameter
Turn to " " (Initial value change list), and press .
" " appears.
4. Checking the Initial value change list
Turn . The parameter numbers that have been changed from their initial value appear in order.
When is pressed with a changed parameter displayed, the parameter settings can be changed as they are.
(Parameter numbers are no longer displayed in the list when they are returned to their initial values.)
Other changed parameters appear by turning .
The indication returns to " " when the last changed parameter is displayed.
NOTE The calibration parameters (C0 (Pr.900) to C7 (Pr.905), C42 (Pr.934) to C45 (Pr.935)) are not displayed even when these
are changed from the initial settings. Only the simple mode parameters are displayed when the simple mode is set (Pr.160 ="9999"). Only user groups are displayed when user groups are set (Pr.160 = "1"). Pr.160 is displayed independently of whether the setting value is changed or not. Parameter setting using the Initial value change list is also possible.
7515. PARAMETERS 5.20 Checking parameters changed from their initial values (initial value change list)
75
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
5.21.1 Cyclic transmission Data communication is available periodically among stations on the same network. Link devices (RX, RY, RWr, and RWw) are used.
Data flow and link device assignment (master and slave stations (except for local stations))
One-to-one communication is possible between the master and slave stations. The status information of the link devices (RY and RWw) of the master station is output to the external device of the slave station, and the input status information from the external device of the slave station is stored in the link devices (RX and RWr) of the master station.
Status No. Description
Output from the master station
(1) The device of the CPU module turns ON.
(2) The device status data of the CPU module are stored in the link devices (RY and RWw) of the master station by link refresh.
(3) The status data of the link devices (RY and RWw) of the master station are stored in the link devices (RY and RWw) of each slave station by link scan.
(4) The inverter starts according to the link device (RY and RWw) conditions (input signals such as STF and STR) of the slave station.
Input from the slave station
(5) Inverter conditions (output signals such as RUN and SU, monitoring) are stored in the link devices (RX and RWr) of the slave station.
(6) The status data of the link devices (RX and RWr) of the slave station are stored in the link devices (RX and RWr) of the master station by link scan.
(7) The status data of the link devices (RX and RWr) of the master station are stored in the devices of the CPU module by link refresh.
1
Slave station
Station No.1
RX, RWr
Slave station
Station No.2
RX, RWr
Master station
Station No.1
Station No.2
CPU module
Device RX, RWr
END Link refresh
Link refresh
Link scan
RY, RWw
RY, RWw
( )
(2) (3)
(3)
(4)
(4)
(5)
(5)
(6)
(6)
(7)
Station No.1
Station No.2
RY, RWw
Sequence scan
Sequence scan
END
Station No.0
Area for sending to other stations
Station No.1
Station No.2
Station No.1
Station No.2
M0 Y
Device
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE Refer to the MELSEC iQ-R, MELSEC-Q, or MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual for the
detailed assignment methods for the link devices and link refresh.
5.21.2 I/O signal list Remote I/O (64 points (fixed))
*1 These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.180 to Pr.189, input signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed. (Refer to page 521.)
*2 The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters. *3 These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.190 to Pr.196, output signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed. (Refer to page
473.) *4 Output signal can be assigned using Pr.313 to Pr.315. (Refer to page 473.) *5 "n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.
Device No.*5 Signal Refer to page Device No.*5 Signal Refer
to page RYn0 Forward rotation command*2 756 RXn0 Forward running 758
RYn1 Reverse rotation command*2 756 RXn1 Reverse running 758
RYn2 High-speed operation command (terminal RH function)*1
756 RXn2 Running (terminal RUN function)*3 758
RYn3 Middle-speed operation command (terminal RM function)*1
756 RXn3 Up to frequency (terminal SU function)*3 758
RYn4 Low-speed operation command (terminal RL function)*1
756 RXn4 Overload alarm (terminal OL function)*3 758
RYn5 Jog operation selection (terminal JOG function)*1
756 RXn5 Instantaneous power failure (terminal IPF function)*3
758
RYn6 Second function selection (terminal RT function)*1
756 RXn6 Frequency detection (terminal FU function)*3
758
RYn7 Current input selection (terminal AU function)*1
756 RXn7 Error (terminal ABC1 function)*3 758
RYn8 Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (terminal CS function)*1
756 RXn8 (terminal ABC2 function)*3 758
RYn9 Output stop (terminal MRS function)*1 756
RXn9 to RXnF Reserved
RYnA Start self-holding selection (terminal STOP function)*1
756
RYnB Reset (terminal RES function)*1 756 RYnC to RYnF
Reserved RY(n+1)0 to RY(n+1)2
RX(n+1)0 Pr.313 assignment function (DO0)*4 758
RX(n+1)1 Pr.314 assignment function (DO1)*4 758
RX(n+1)2 Pr.315 assignment function (DO2)*4 758 RY(n+1)3 to RY(n+1)F Reserved RX(n+1)3 to
RX(n+1)F Reserved
RY(n+2)0 Monitor command 756 RX(n+2)0 Monitoring 758 RY(n+2)1 Frequency setting command (RAM) 756 RX(n+2)1 Frequency setting completion (RAM) 758
RY(n+2)2 Frequency setting command (RAM, EEPROM) 756 RX(n+2)2 Frequency setting completion (RAM,
EEPROM) 758
RY(n+2)3 Torque command / torque limit (RAM) 757 RX(n+2)3 Torque command / torque limit setting completion (RAM) 758
RY(n+2)4 Torque command / torque limit (RAM, EEPROM) 757 RX(n+2)4 Torque command / torque limit setting
completion (RAM, EEPROM) 758
RY(n+2)5 Instruction code execution request 757 RX(n+2)5 Instruction code execution completed 758 RY(n+2)6 to RY(n+3)9 Reserved RX(n+2)6 to
RX(n+3)9 Reserved
RY(n+3)A Error reset request flag 757 RX(n+3)A Error status flag 758
RY(n+3)B to RY(n+3)F Reserved
RX(n+3)B Remote station ready 758 RX(n+3)C to RX(n+3)F Reserved
7535. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
75
Remote register (128 words (fixed)) Address*3 Description Refer
to page Address*3 Description Refer to pageUpper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits
RWwn Set frequency (0.01 Hz increments) 759 RWrn Reply code 760 RWwn+1 Reserved RWrn+1 Reserved RWwn+2 Torque command / torque limit 759 RWrn+2 Reply code 760 RWwn+3 Reserved RWrn+3 Reserved RWwn+4 PID set point (0.01% increments)*1 759 RWrn+4 Reply code 760
RWwn+5 PID measured value (0.01% increments)*1 759 RWrn+5 Reply code 760
RWwn+6 PID deviation (0.01% increments)*1 759 RWrn+6 Reply code 760 RWwn+7 to RWwn+F Reserved RWrn+7 to
RWrn+F Reserved
RWwn+10 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code*2 759 RWrn+10 Reply code 760
RWwn+11 Write data 759 RWrn+11 Read data*2 760
RWwn+12 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code*2 759 RWrn+12 Reply code 760
RWwn+13 Write data 759 RWrn+13 Read data*2 760
RWwn+14 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code*2 759 RWrn+14 Reply code 760
RWwn+15 Write data 759 RWrn+15 Read data*2 760
RWwn+16 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code*2 759 RWrn+16 Reply code 760
RWwn+17 Write data 759 RWrn+17 Read data*2 760
RWwn+18 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code*2 759 RWrn+18 Reply code 760
RWwn+19 Write data 759 RWrn+19 Read data*2 760
RWwn+1A Link parameter extended setting Instruction code*2 759 RWrn+1A Reply code 760
RWwn+1B Write data 759 RWrn+1B Read data*2 760 RWwn+1C to RWwn+1F
Reserved RWrn+1C to RWrn+1F Reserved
RWwn+20 Reserved RWrn+20 Error status 760
RWwn+21 Fault history No. 759 RWrn+21 Fault history No. Fault record (fault data) 760
RWwn+22 to RWwn+25
Reserved
RWrn+22 Fault record (output frequency) 760 RWrn+23 Fault record (output current) 760 RWrn+24 Fault record (output voltage) 760 RWrn+25 Fault record (energization time) 760
RWwn+26 Monitor code 1 759 RWrn+26 First monitor value 760 RWwn+27 Monitor code 2 759 RWrn+27 Second monitor value 760 RWwn+28 Monitor code 3 759 RWrn+28 Third monitor value 760 RWwn+29 Monitor code 4 759 RWrn+29 Fourth monitor value 760 RWwn+2A Monitor code 5 759 RWrn+2A Fifth monitor value 760 RWwn+2B Monitor code 6 759 RWrn+2B Sixth monitor value 760 RWwn+2C Monitor code 7 759 RWrn+2C Seventh monitor value 760 RWwn+2D Monitor code 8 759 RWrn+2D Eighth monitor value 760 RWwn+2E Monitor code 9 759 RWrn+2E Ninth monitor value 760 RWwn+2F Monitor code 10 759 RWrn+2F Tenth monitor value 760
RWwn+30 to RWwn+39
Reserved
RWrn+30 Output frequency 760 RWrn+31 Reserved RWrn+32 Output current 760 RWrn+33 Output voltage 760 RWrn+34 Reserved RWrn+35 Frequency setting value 760 RWrn+36 Motor speed 760 RWrn+37 Motor torque 760 RWrn+38 Converter output voltage 760 RWrn+39 Regenerative brake duty 760
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RWwn+3A to RWwn+73
Reserved
RWrn+3A Electric thermal relay function load factor 760 RWrn+3B Output current peak value 760 RWrn+3C Converter output voltage peak value 760 RWrn+3D Input power 760 RWrn+3E Output power 760 RWrn+3F Input terminal status 760 RWrn+40 Output terminal status 760 RWrn+41 Load meter 760 RWrn+42 Motor excitation current 760 RWrn+43 Position pulse 760 RWrn+44 Cumulative energization time 760 RWrn+45 Reserved RWrn+46 Orientation status 760 RWrn+47 Actual operation time 760 RWrn+48 Motor load factor 760 RWrn+49 Cumulative power 760 RWrn+4A Position command (lower) 760 RWrn+4B Position command (upper) 760 RWrn+4C Current position (lower) 760 RWrn+4D Current position (upper) 760 RWrn+4E Droop pulse (lower) 760 RWrn+4F Droop pulse (upper) 760 RWrn+50 Torque command 760 RWrn+51 Torque current command 760 RWrn+52 Motor output 760 RWrn+53 Feedback pulse monitor 760 RWrn+54 Torque monitor 760 RWrn+55 Reserved RWrn+56 Trace status 760 RWrn+57 Reserved RWrn+58 PLC function user monitor 1 760 RWrn+59 PLC function user monitor 2 760 RWrn+5A PLC function user monitor 3 760 RWrn+5B Station number (RS-485 terminals) 760 RWrn+5C Station number (PU) 760 RWrn+5D Station number (CC-Link) 760 RWrn+5E Motor temperature 760 RWrn+5F to RWrn+61 Reserved
RWrn+62 Power saving effect 760 RWrn+63 Cumulative energy saving 760 RWrn+64 PID set point 760 RWrn+65 PID measured value 760 RWrn+66 PID deviation 760 RWrn+67 to RWrn+69 Reserved
RWrn+6A Option input terminal status 1 760 RWrn+6B Option input terminal status 2 760 RWrn+6C Option output terminal status 760 RWrn+6D Motor thermal load factor 760 RWrn+6E Inverter thermal load factor 760 RWrn+6F Reserved RWrn+70 PTC thermistor value 760 RWrn+71
Reserved RWrn+72 RWrn+73 PID measured value 2 760
Address*3 Description Refer to page Address*3 Description Refer
to pageUpper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits
7555. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
75
*1 When Pr.128 = "50, 51, 60, or 61", the register is valid. *2 Instructions will be processed in the order they are received. Thus, the read value of an instruction may differ at different timings if other writing
requests are being made. *3 "n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.
5.21.3 Details of the remote input and output signals The following device numbers are for the station number 1. For the station number 2 and later, the device numbers are different. (Refer to the manual for the CC-Link master module for the correspondence between device numbers and station numbers.)
Output signals (from the master module to the inverter) Output signals from the master module are as follows. (Input signals to the inverter)
RWwn+74 to RWwn+7F
Reserved
RWrn+74 to RWrn+76 Reserved
RWrn+77 Cumulative pulse 760 RWrn+78 Cumulative pulse overflow times 760 RWrn+79 Cumulative pulse (control terminal option) 760
RWrn+7A Cumulative pulse overflow times (control terminal option) 760
RWrn+7B to RWrn+7F Reserved
Address*3 Description Refer to page Address*3 Description Refer
to pageUpper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits
Device No. Signal Description
RY0 Forward rotation command 0: Stop command 1: Forward rotation start
When "1" is set, a start command is input to the inverter. When "1" is set in RY0 and RY1, a stop command is input.
The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters.
RY1 Reverse rotation command 0: Stop command 1: Reverse rotation start
RY2 High-speed operation command (terminal RH function)
Functions assigned to terminals RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, AU, CS, MRS, STOP and RES are activated.
These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.180 to Pr.189, input signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed. Some signals are not controllable via network depending on the settings of Pr.338 and Pr.339. For example, RYB reset (terminal RES function) cannot be controlled via network.
RY3 Middle-speed operation command (terminal RM function)
RY4 Low-speed operation command (terminal RL function)
RY5 Jog operation selection (terminal JOG function)
RY6 Second function selection (terminal RT function)
RY7 Current input selection (terminal AU function)
RY8 Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (terminal CS function)
RY9 Output stop (terminal MRS function)
RYA Start self-holding selection (terminal STOP function)
RYB Reset (terminal RES function)
RY20 Monitor command When "1" is set in the monitor command (R20), the monitored value is set in the remote register RWr26 to RWr2F, and "1" is set in the monitoring (RX20). While "1" is set in the monitor command (RY20), the monitored data is always updated.
RY21 Frequency setting command (RAM)
When "1" is set in the frequency setting command (RY21), the set frequency (RWw0) is written to RAM of the inverter. While "1" is set, the set frequency (RWw0) is always applied. After the writing completes, "1" is set in the frequency setting completion (RX21).
RY22 Frequency setting command (RAM, EEPROM)
When "1" is set in the frequency setting command (RY22), the set frequency (RWw0) is written to RAM and EEPROM of the inverter. After the writing completes, "1" is set in the frequency setting completion (RX22). To change the frequency consecutively, be sure to write data to the inverter RAM.
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 Torque control cannot be performed with a PM motor.
RY23 Torque command / torque limit (RAM)
When "1" is set in the torque command / torque limit (RY23), the set torque command / torque limit (RWw2) is written to RAM of the inverter. After the writing completes, "1" is set in the torque command / torque limit setting completion (RX23). The following value is written to RAM.
During torque control*1: Torque command value During speed control / position control: Torque limit value
RY24 Torque command / torque limit (RAM, EEPROM)
When "1" is set in the torque command / torque limit (RY24), the set torque command / torque limit (RWw2) is written to RAM and EEPROM of the inverter. After the writing completes, "1" is set in the torque command / torque limit setting completion (RX24). The following value is written to RAM and EEPROM.
During torque control*1: Torque command value During speed control / position control: Torque limit value
To change the torque command or the torque limit consecutively, be sure to write data to the inverter RAM.
RY25 Instruction code execution request
When "1" is set in the instruction code execution request (RY25), processes corresponding to the instruction codes set to RWw10, 12, 14, 16, 18 and 1A are executed. "1" is set in the instruction code execution completed (RX25) after completion of instruction codes. When an instruction code execution error occurs, a value other than "0" is set in the reply code (RWr10, 12, 14, 16, 18, and 1A).
RY3A Error reset request flag When "1" is set in the error reset request flag (RY3A) at an inverter fault, the inverter is reset, then "0" is set in the error status flag (RX3A). Refer to page 669 for operation conditions of inverter reset.
Device No. Signal Description
7575. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
75
Input signals (from the inverter to the master module) Input signals to the master module are as follows. (Output signals from the inverter)
5.21.4 Details of the remote register The following device numbers are for the station number 1. For the station number 2 and later, the device numbers are different. (Refer to the manual for the CC-Link master module for the correspondence between device numbers and station numbers.)
Device No. Signal Description
RX0 Forward running 0: Other than forward running (during stop or reverse rotation) 1: Forward running
RX1 Reverse running 0: Other than reverse running (during stop or forward rotation) 1: Reverse running
RX2 Running (terminal RUN function)
Functions assigned to terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU, ABC1 and ABC2 are activated.
These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.190 to Pr.196, output signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed.
RX3 Up to frequency (terminal SU function) RX4 Overload alarm (terminal OL function)
RX5 Instantaneous power failure (terminal IPF function)
RX6 Frequency detection (terminal FU function)
RX7 Error (terminal ABC1 function) RX8 (terminal ABC2 function) RX10 (DO0 function) Functions assigned to Pr.313 to Pr.315 are activated.
No signal is assigned in the initial setting. Use Pr.313 to Pr.315 to assign signals.
RX11 (DO1 function) RX12 (DO2 function)
RX20 Monitoring After "1" is set in the monitor command (RY20), and the monitored value is set in the remote register RWr26 to RWr2F, "1" is set in this signal. When "0" is set in the monitor command (RY20), "0" is set in this signal.
RX21 Frequency setting completion (RAM) After "1" is set in the frequency setting command (RY21) and the set frequency is written to the inverter RAM, "1" is set in this signal. When "0" is set in the frequency setting command (RY21), "0" is set in this signal.
RX22 Frequency setting completion (RAM, EEPROM)
After "1" is set in the frequency setting command (RY22) and the set frequency is written to the inverter RAM and EEPROM, "1" is set in this signal. When "0" is set in the frequency setting command (RY22), "0" is set in this signal.
RX23 Torque command / torque limit setting completion (RAM)
After "1" is set in the torque command / torque limit (RY23) and the torque command / torque limit value is written to the inverter RAM, "1" is set in this signal. When "0" is set in the torque command / torque limit (RY23), "0" is set in this signal.
RX24 Torque command / torque limit setting completion (RAM, EEPROM)
After "1" is set in the torque command / torque limit (RY24) and the torque command / torque limit value is written to the inverter RAM and EEPROM, "1" is set in this signal. When "0" is set in the torque command / torque limit (RY24), "0" is set in this signal.
RX25 Instruction code execution completed
After "1" is set in the instruction code execution request (RY25) and the processes corresponding to the instruction codes (RWw10, 12, 14, 16, 18 and 1A) are executed, "1" is set in this signal. When "0" is set in the instruction code execution request (RY25), "0" is set in this signal.
RX3A Error status flag When an inverter error occurs (protective function is activated), "1" is set in this signal.
RX3B Remote station ready
When the inverter goes into the ready status upon completion of initial setting after power-on or hardware reset, "1" is set in this signal. When an inverter error occurs (protective function is activated), "0" is set in this signal. The signal is used as an interlock during the write to/read from the master module.
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Remote register (from the master module to the inverter)
*1 The rotation speed command or the machine speed command is selected according to the combination of Pr.37, Pr.144, and Pr.811. (Refer to page 444.)
*2 When Pr.541 Frequency command sign selection = "1", the set frequency is a signed value. When the setting value is negative, the command is the inverse from the start command. Setting range: -327.68 Hz to 327.67 Hz (-327.68 to 327.67), 0.01 Hz increments. (Refer to page 699.)
*3 When Pr.128 = "50, 51, 60, or 61", the register is valid. If the data outside the range is set, the previous setting is retained. (Refer to page 601.) *4 Write data is in hexadecimal, and only two digits are valid. (The upper two digits are ignored.) *5 The value in RWw2 is used as the torque limit value during speed control or position control, and as the torque command value during torque
control. (Torque control cannot be performed with a PM motor.) To use the value as the torque limit value, set Pr.810 = "2".
Device No. Signal Description
RWw0 Set frequency*1*2
Specify the set frequency or rotations per minute (machine speed). At this time, whether to write to RAM or EEPROM is decided with the RY21 and RY22 settings. After setting the set frequency in this register, set "1" in RY21 or RY22 to write the frequency. After writing of frequency is completed, "1" is set in RX21 or RX22 in response to the input command.
The setting range is 0 to 590.00 Hz (0.01 Hz increments). Write "59000" when setting 590.00 Hz.
RWw2*5
Torque command value Specify the torque command value / torque limit value. Set Pr.804 Torque command source selection = "1, 3, 5, or 6" to activate this signal under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control. The value is written to the inverter either by RY23 or RY24. Pr.805 Torque command value (RAM) and Pr.806 Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM) are updated as well. The setting range and the setting increment depend on the Pr.804 setting. (Refer to page 762.)
Torque limit value
RWw4 PID set point*3 Set the PID action set point. Setting range: 0 to 100.00% Input a value 100 times greater than the value to be
set. For example, enter "10000" when setting 100.00%.
Refer to page 601 for details on PID control.
RWw5 PID measured value*3 Set the PID measured value. Setting range: 0 to 100.00%
RWw6 PID deviation*3 Set the PID deviation. Setting range: -100.00 to 100.00%
RWw10, RWw12, RWw14, RWw16, RWw18, RWw1A
Link parameter extended setting / instruction code
Set an instruction code (refer to page 760) for an operation such as operation mode switching, parameter read/write, error reference, and error clear in the lower eight bits. The instructions are executed in the following order by setting "1" in RY25 after completing the register setting: RWw10, 12, 14, 16, 18, then 1A. After completing the execution up to RWw1A, "1" is set in RX25. Set HFFFF to disable an instruction by RWw10 to 1A. Set the link parameter extended setting in the upper 8 bits. Example) When reading Pr.160, instruction code is H0200.
RWw11, RWw13, RWw15, RWw17, RWw19, RWw1B
Write data
Set the data specified by the instruction code of RWw10, 12, 14, 16, 18 and 1A (when required). RWw10 and 11, 12 and 13, 14 and 15, 16 and 17, 18 and 19, and 1A and 1B correspond each other. Set "1" in RY25 after setting the instruction codes (RWw10, 12, 14, 16, 18 and 1A) and the corresponding register. Set "0" when the write data is not required.
RWw21 Fault history No.*4 Set the individual fault number of the fault history that you want to read. Fault records can be read back to the eighth latest fault. Last two digits: H00 (latest fault) to H07 (eighth latest fault) Set H08 to HFF to make the fault history No. to "0".
RWw26 Monitor code 1*4
Set the monitor code to be monitored. By setting "1" in RY20 after setting, the specified monitor data is stored in RWr26 to RWr2F. If a monitor code out of the setting range is set, no item is monitored (the monitor value is fixed to 0). The monitor codes are the same as those of the RS-485 communication dedicated monitor. (Refer to page 446.) When the remote registers RWw26 to 2F are used for monitoring, H01 (output frequency) and H05 (set frequency) always indicate the frequency regardless of the settings of Pr.37, Pr.144, and Pr.811.
RWw27 Monitor code 2*4
RWw28 Monitor code 3*4
RWw29 Monitor code 4*4
RWw2A Monitor code 5*4
RWw2B Monitor code 6*4
RWw2C Monitor code 7*4
RWw2D Monitor code 8*4
RWw2E Monitor code 9*4
RWw2F Monitor code 10*4
7595. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
76
Remote register (from the inverter to the master module)
Instruction code Set instruction codes using the remote register (RWw). (Refer to page 759.)
Device No. Signal Description
RWr0 Reply code
When "1" is set in RY21 or RY22, the following reply codes are set for the frequency setting command. The setting value "0" is set normally, and a value other than "0" is set at an error. H0000: Normal H0001: Write mode fault H0003: Setting range fault
RWr2 Reply code
When "1" is set in RY23 or RY24, the following reply codes are set for the torque command / torque limit. The setting value "0" is set normally, and a value other than "0" is set at an error. H0000: Normal H0003: Setting range fault
RWr4, RWr5, RWr6 Reply code
When the PID command (RWw4 to RWw6) is set, the following reply code is set for the PID command. The setting value "0" is set normally, and a value other than "0" is set at an error. H0000: Normal H0003: Setting range fault
RWr10, RWr12, RWr14, RWr16, RWr18, RWr1A
Reply code
When "1" is set in RY25, the following reply codes corresponding to the instruction code RWw10, 12, 14, 16, 18, and 1A are set. The setting value "0" is set normally, and a value other than "0" is set at an error. H0000: Normal H0001: Write mode fault H0002: Parameter selection fault H0003: Setting range fault
RWr11, RWr13, RWr15, RWr17, RWr19, RWr1B
Read data In a normal reply, a replay code for the instruction code is set.
RWr20 Error status The setting value "0" is set during normal inverter operation, and the data code of the corresponding error is set at an error. (For the data codes or details of fault records, refer to page 776.)
RWr21 Fault record (fault data) The data code of fault history No. specified by RWw21 is stored in the lower 8 bits. Lower 8 bits of RWw21 will be reverted back to the upper 8 bits.
RWr22 Fault record (output frequency) The output frequency of the fault history No. specified in RWw21 is stored.
RWr23 Fault record (output current) The output current of the fault history No. specified in RWw21 is always stored.
RWr24 Fault record (output voltage) The output voltage of the fault history No. specified in RWw21 is always stored.
RWr25 Fault record (energization time) The energization time of the fault history No. specified in RWw21 is always stored.
RWr26 First monitor value
When "1" is set in RY20, the monitor value specified to the corresponding monitor code (RWw26 to RWw2F) is stored. The output frequency, output current, and output voltage monitors are held at an inverter failure.
RWr27 Second monitor value RWr28 Third monitor value RWr29 Fourth monitor value RWr2A Fifth monitor value RWr2B Sixth monitor value RWr2C Seventh monitor value RWr2D Eighth monitor value RWr2E Ninth monitor value RWr2F Tenth monitor value RWr30 to RWr7F Monitor value Fixed monitored data are saved regardless of the RY20 setting.
The output frequency, output current, and output voltage monitors are held at an inverter failure.
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The definition read by the instruction code is stored in the remote register (RWr). (Refer to page 760.)
Item Read/ write
Instruction code Data description
Operation mode
Read H7B
H0000: Network operation mode H0001: External operation mode, External JOG operation mode H0002: PU operation mode, External/PU combined operation 1 and 2, PUJOG operation
Write HFB H0000: Network operation mode H0001: External operation mode H0002: PU operation mode (Pr.79 = "6", Pr.340 = "10, 12")
Monitor
Output frequency*1*2 Read H6F H0000 to HFFFF: Output frequency in 0.01 Hz increments (The display can be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr.37, Pr.144 and Pr.811. (Refer to page 444.))
Output current Read H70 H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal) Increment 0.01 A (FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower) Increment 0.1 A (FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher)
Output voltage Read H71 H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage (hexadecimal) Increments 0.1 V
Special monitor Read H72 H0000 to HFFFF: Monitor data selected in the instruction code HF3
Special monitor selection No.
Read H73 H01 to HFF: Selection of the monitor item (monitor code) If a monitor code out of the setting range is set, a range error occurs. The monitor codes (monitor items) are the same as those of the RS-485 communication dedicated monitor. (Refer to page 446.)
Write HF3*3
Fault record Read H74 to H77
H0000 to HFFFF: Two fault records per code.
(Refer to page 776 for details on fault record read data.)
Set frequency (RAM) Read
H6D Read the set frequency/speed from the RAM or EEPROM. H0000 to HFFFF: Set frequency in 0.01 Hz increments (The display can be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr.37, Pr.144, and Pr.811. (Refer to page 444.))
Set frequency (EEPROM) H6E
Set frequency (RAM)*4 Write HED Write the set frequency/speed into the RAM or EEPROM. H0000 to HE678 (0 to 590.00 Hz): frequency in 0.01 Hz increments (The display can be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr.37, Pr.144, and Pr.811. (Refer to page 444.)) To change the set frequency consecutively, write data to the inverter RAM.
(Instruction code: HED)
Set frequency (RAM and EEPROM)*4
Write HEE
Parameter
Read H00 to H6B Refer to the instruction code (page 864) and write and/or read parameter values as
required. Write to Pr.77 and Pr.79 is disabled. When setting Pr.100 and later, set the link parameter extended setting. Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999". When changing the parameter values frequently, set "1" in Pr.342 to write them to
the RAM. (Refer to page 663.) Write H80 to HEB
Fault history clear Write HF4 H9696: Fault history is cleared.
b15 b8 b7 b0 Latest faultSecond latest fault
Third latest faultFourth latest fault
Fifth latest faultSixth latest fault
Seventh latest faultEighth latest fault
H74
H75
H76
H77
With the read data H30A0
Fault record display example (instruction code H74)
(Second fault : THT) (Latest fault : OPT)
0 b15
Latest fault (HA0)
Second fault (H30)
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 b8
1 b7
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 b0
7615. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
76
*1 When "100" is set in Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection, set frequency is monitored during a stop and output frequency is monitored during running.
*2 When position control is selected, the number of pulses is monitored when Pr.430 "9999". *3 Write data is in hexadecimal, and only two digits are valid. (The upper two digits are ignored.) *4 Setting from the remote register (RWw0) is also available. *5 Turning OFF the power supply while clearing parameters with H5A5A or H55AA returns the communication parameter settings to the initial
settings. *6 Reading or writing is available when the link parameter extended setting = "1 or 9". *7 The gain frequency can be also written using Pr.125 (instruction code: H99) or Pr.126 (instruction code: H9A).
NOTE When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitored value is read and the read value exceeds HFFFF, the reply data will be HFFFF.
Torque command / torque limit through CC-Link IE Field Network communication
Torque commands can be given or the torque can be limited via CC-Link IE Field Network under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control. The value is used to limit the torque during speed control or position control, and to give a torque command during torque control. To limit the torque, set Pr.810 = "2". The torque command / torque limit setting method can be selected using Pr.804 Torque command source selection. (Torque control cannot be performed with a PM motor.)
For setting the torque limit parameters, refer to page 245, and for setting the torque command parameters, refer to page 283.
Set the torque command value or the torque limit value in RWw2. The RWw2 function is switched according to the Pr.804 and Pr.810 settings and the control mode.
Relationship between the Pr.804 setting, the setting range, and the actual torque command / torque limit (when setting is made from CC-Link IE Field Network communication)
*1 The torque limit setting is defined as an absolute value.
Parameter clear All parameter clear Write HFC
All parameters return to initial values. Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be selected according to the data. Parameter clear
H9696: Communication parameters are cleared. H5A5A*5: Communication parameters are not cleared.
All parameter clear H9966: Communication parameters are cleared. H55AA*5: Communication parameters are not cleared.
For details on whether or not to clear parameters, refer to page 864. When clear is performed with H9696 or H9966, communication related parameter settings also return to the initial values. When resuming the operation, set the parameters again. Performing a clear will clear the instruction code HEC, HF3, and HFF settings.
Inverter reset Write HFD H9696: Resets the inverter.
Second parameter changing*6
Read H6C Read or write of bias and gain parameters (instruction codes H5E to H61 and HDE to HE1 with the link parameter extended setting = "1", H11 to H23 and H91 to HA3 with the link parameter extended setting = "9"). H00: Frequency*7
H01: Parameter-set analog value H02: Analog value input from terminal
Write HEC
Item Read/ write
Instruction code Data description
Pr.804 setting Pr.810 setting RWw2 function
Speed control / position control Torque control
1, 3, 5, 6 2 Torque limit Torque command 0, 1 RWw2 disabled Torque command
0, 4 RWw2 disabled RWw2 disabled
Pr.804 setting Setting range Actual torque command Actual torque limit 1, 3 600 to 1400 (1% increments)*1 -400 to 400% 0 to 400%
5, 6 -32768 to 32767 (two's complement)*1
-327.68 to 327.67% 0 to 327.67%
2 5. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Torque command / torque limit setting method
5.21.5 Programming examples The following explains the programming examples for controlling the inverter with sequence programs.
System configuration for programming example
In the programming example, network parameters of the master station are set as follows. (Network parameters (module 1))
Setting method Setting procedure
Writing in RWw2 1. Set the torque command / torque limit value in RWw2. 2. Set "1" in RY23 (or RY24).
Writing in Pr.805 or Pr.806
1. Set link parameter extended setting = H08 for RWw10 (12, 14, 16, 18, 1A). 2. Set H85 or H86 as the instruction code. 3. Set the torque command / torque limit value in RWw11 (13, 15, 17, 19, 1B). 4. Set "1" in RY25.
Item Program example Refer to page
Reading the inverter status Reading the inverter status from the buffer memory of the master station 765 Setting the operation mode Selecting the Network operation mode 765 Setting the operation commands Commanding the forward rotation and middle speed signals 766 Setting the monitoring function Monitoring the output frequency 766 Reading a parameter value Reading the value of Pr.7 Acceleration time 767 Writing a parameter value Setting "3.0 s" in Pr.7 Acceleration time 767 Setting the set frequency (set speed) Setting to 50.00 Hz 768
Reading the fault records Reading the inverter faults 769 Inverter reset Resetting the inverter when an inverter error occurs 769
Power supply
Q61P-A1
CPU Q02UCPU
Master station QJ71GF11-T2 (X/Y00 to 1F)
Input unit QX40
(X20 to X2F)
Output unit QY40P
(Y30 to Y3F)
Station 1 Inverter
Pr.434 = 1 Pr.435 = 1
Pr.434 = 1 Pr.435 = 2
Station 2 Inverter
PLC
X20 Y30
Item Setting condition Network type CC-Link IE Field (master station) Start I/O 0000 Network No. 1 Total number of (slave) stations 2 Mode Online (standard mode) Network configuration Refer to the following. Refresh parameter Refer to the following.
7635. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
76
Network configuration (assignment method: start/end)
Refresh parameters (assignment method: start/end)
Remote I/O (RX and RY) transmitted between the programmable controller CPU and intelligent device stations
Item Setting condition
Module 1 Module 2 Station number 1 2 Station type Intelligent device station Intelligent device station
RX/RY setting Start 0000 0040 End 003F 007F
RWw/RWr setting Start 0000 0080 End 007F 00FF
Reserved station / error invalid station No setting No setting
Link side Master side Device name Start End Device name Start End
SB 0000 01FF SB 0000 01FF SW 0000 01FF SW 0000 01FF RX 0000 007F X 1000 107F RY 0000 007F Y 1000 107F RWr 0000 00FF W 000000 0000FF RWw 0000 00FF W 000100 0001FF
RX3F to RX00X103F to X1000
X107F to X1040
Y103F to Y1000
Y107F to Y1040
Programmable controller CPU Intelligent device station 1
Intelligent device station 2
RY3F to RY00
RX3F to RX00
RY3F to RY00
4 5. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Remote registers (RWw and RWr) transmitted between the programmable controller CPU and the intelligent device stations
Programming example for reading the inverter status The following program turns ON the signal Y00 of the output unit when the station 1 inverter starts running.
Programming example for setting the operation mode The following explains a program to write various data to the inverter. The following program changes the operation mode of the station 1 inverter to network operation.
Operation mode write code: HFB (hexadecimal) Network operation set data: H0000 (hexadecimal) (Refer to page 760.)
RWw0W100
Programmable controller CPU For writing
RWw1W101
W17E W17F W180 W181
RWw7E RWw7F RWr0
W000 For reading
RWr1
W001
W07E W07F
W0FF
RWr7E RWr7F
W1FE W1FF
W080 W081
W0FE
RWw0 RWw1
RWw7E RWw7F RWr0 RWr1
RWr7E RWr7F
Intelligent device station 1
Intelligent device station 2
*1 These signals are assigned in the initial status. Use Pr.190 to Pr.196 and Pr.313 to Pr.315 (Output terminal function selection) to change the output signals.
M0
Y30
END
Check the data link status of the station 1 SB49
0
3
6
M0 X1002 Turn ON the signal Y00 of the output unit
Inverter running (RX02)
SW0B0.0
0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b15 X101F X1000
b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
[Inverter status]
Inverter status b0 : Forward running b1 : Reverse running b2 : Running (RUN) b3 : Up to frequency (SU) b4 : Overload alarm (OL) b5 : Instantaneous power failure (IPF) b6 : Frequency detection (FU) b7 : Fault (ABC1)
b16 : (DO0) b17 : (DO1) b18 : (DO2)
b8 : (ABC2)
One station
Remote input
0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
[Inverter status]
RX3F to RX00
7655. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
76
The reply code (RWr10) to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 760 for the reply code (RWr10).)
Programming example for setting the operation commands The following program gives a forward rotation command and middle-speed operation command to the station 1 inverter.
Programming example for monitoring the output frequency The following explains a program to read monitor functions of the inverter.
The following program reads the output frequency of the station 1 inverter to output to D1. Output frequency read code: H0001 (hexadecimal) For the monitor codes, refer to page 446.
*1 These signals are assigned in the initial status. Use Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to change the input signals. Some signals are not controllable by a command from the programmable controller depending on the setting.
SET M301
PLS M300
M301
MOV W10 D2
MOV H0FB W110 Write the operation mode write code (HFB) to RWw10 and the set data (H0000) to RWw11.
SET Y1025
Turn OFF the instruction code execution request (RY25).
0
9
M0 X20
X1025
M300
RST M301
SET M302 M302
18
RST Y1025
RST M302
END24
3
7
Turn ON the instruction code execution request (RY25).
MOV H0 W111
Read the reply code (RWr10) to D2 when the instruction code execution completion (RX25) turns ON.
SB49
X1025
SW0B0.0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1.
Forward rotation command (RY00)
SB49
M0 X20 0
3
7
Middle-speed operation command (RY03)
Y1000
END
Y1003
Check the data link status of the station 1.M0 SW0B0.0
0 0 0 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 b15 b0
Y100F Y1000 b7
[Run command] Forward rotation
1: ON 0: OFF
One station
Middle speed
RY3F to RY00
Run command b0 : Forward rotation command
b5 : Jog operation selection (JOG)1
b1 : Reverse rotation command b6 : Second function selection (RT)1
b2 : High-speed operation command (RH)1
b7 : Terminal 4 input selection (AU)1
b3 : Middle-speed operation command (RM)1
b8 : Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (CS)1
b10 : Start self-holding selection (STOP)1
b11 : Inverter reset (RES)1
b4 : Low-speed operation command (RL)1
b9 : Output stop (MRS)1
6 5. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Example) The output frequency of 60 Hz is indicated as "H1770 (6000)".
Programming example for the parameter reading The following program reads Pr.7 Acceleration time of the station 1 inverter to output to D1.
Pr.7 Acceleration time reading instruction code: H07 (hexadecimal) Refer to page 864 for details on the parameter instruction code. The reply code (RWr10) to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 760 for the reply code (RWr10).)
NOTE For the parameter assigned the number of 100 or higher, change the link parameter extended setting (set it to the one other
than H00). Refer to page 864 for the settings.
Programming example for the parameter writing The following program changes the setting value in Pr.7 Acceleration time of the station 1 inverter to 3.0 seconds.
Acceleration time writing instruction code: H87 (hexadecimal) Acceleration time setting data: K30 (decimal)
For details on instruction codes of each parameter, refer to the list of parameters (function codes) and instruction codes under different control modes (on page 864).
SB49
Set the monitor code (H01) of output frequency in RWw26.MOV H1 W126
Turn ON the monitor command (RY20).
MOV W26 D1 Read the output frequency (RWr26) to output to D1 when the monitoring (RX20) turns ON.
END11
3
0
X1020
M0 X20
Y1020
Check the data link status of the station 1.M0 SW0B0.0
SET M301
PLS M300
M301
MOV W11 D1
MOV H7 W110 Write the Pr. 7 read code (H07) to RWw10.
RST M301
Turn OFF the instruction code execution request (RY25).
0
3
7
9
16
24
M0 X20
X1025
X1025
SB49
M300
SET M302
SET Y1025
M302
MOV W10 D2
RST Y1025
RST M302
END
Turn ON the instruction code execution request (RY25).
Read the acceleration time (RWr11) and the reply code (RWr10) to output to D1 and D2 when the instruction code execution completion (RX25) turns ON.
Check the data link status of the station 1.M0 SW0B0.0
7675. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
76
The reply code (RWr10) to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 760 for the reply code (RWr10).)
NOTE For the parameter assigned the number of 100 or higher, change the link parameter extended setting (set it to the one other
than H00). Refer to page 864 for the settings. For other functions, refer to the instruction codes (refer to page 760).
Programming example for setting the running frequency The following program changes the running frequency of the station 1 inverter to 50.00 Hz.
Set frequency: K5000 (decimal) The reply code (RWr10) to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 760 for the reply code (RWr0).)
NOTE To change the set frequency continuously from a programmable controller, check that the frequency setting complete (for
example, X1021) turns ON, and the reply code from the intelligent register is H0000. Then change the setting data (for example, W100) continuously.
To write the set frequency to the EEPROM, change the following points in the program shown above.
SET M301
PLS M300
MOV W10 D2
MOV H87 W110 Write the Pr. 7 write code (H87) to RWw10 and the acceleration time setting data (K30) to RWw11.
SET Y1025
Turn OFF the instruction code execution request (RY25).
0
3
7
9
18
24
M0 X20
X1025M301
SB49
X1025
M300
SET M302 M302
RST Y1025
RST M302
END
Turn ON the instruction code execution request (RY25).
MOV K30 W111
RST M301
Read the reply code (RWr10) to output to D2 when the instruction code execution completion (RX25) turns ON.
Check the data link status of the station 1.M0 SW0B0.0
SET M301
PLS M300
M301
MOV W0 D2
MOV K5000 W100 Write the set frequency to RWw0.
SET Y1021
Turn OFF the frequency setting command RAM (RY21).
0
3
7
9
16
22
RST M301
M0 X20
X1021
SB49
M302 X1021
M300
SET M302
RST Y1021
RST M302
END
Turn OFF the frequency setting command RAM (RY21).
Read the reply code (RWr0) to output to D2 when the frequency setting completion (RX21) turns ON.
Check the data link status of the station 1.M0 SW0B0.0
- Frequency setting command (from Y1021 to Y1022) - Frequency setting completion (from X1021 to X1022)
8 5. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 To the EEPROM, a writing is performed only once after the command Y1022 turns ON. *2 If the set data is changed at the command Y1022 ON, the change is not applied to the inverter.
Programming example for the fault record reading The following program reads the fault records of the station 1 inverter to output to D1.
Fault history No. 1 and 2 reading instruction code: H74 (hexadecimal) For the error code, refer to page 776. The reply code (RWr10) to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 760 for the reply code (RWr10).)
Programming example for resetting the inverter at an inverter fault The following program resets the station 1 inverter at an inverter fault.
NOTE The inverter reset with the flag RY3A shown above is enabled at an inverter fault only. When Pr.349 Communication reset selection/Ready bit status selection = "0 or 100", inverter reset is available
independently of the operation mode. When using the instruction code execution request (RY25) with the instruction code (HFD) and data (H9696) to reset the
inverter, set a value other than "0" in Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection or change the operation mode to the Network operation mode. (For the program example, refer to page 765.)
Y1021
W100
Inverter set frequency
Y1022 ()
() W100
Inverter set frequency
Apply to the inverter when the command Y1022 turns ON.
SET M301
PLS M300
MOV W11 D1
MOV H74 W110 Write the fault history No.1 and No.2 read code (H74) to RWw10.
SET Y1025
Turn OFF the instruction code execution request (RY25).
0
3
7
9
16
24
M0 X20
X1025
SB49
M302 X1025
M301
M300
RST M301
SET M302
MOV W10 D2
RST Y1025
RST M302
END
Turn ON the instruction code execution request (RY25).
Read the fault record (RWr11) and the reply code (RWr10) to output to D1 and D2 when the instruction code execution completion (RX25) turns ON.
Check the data link status of the station 1.M0 SW0B0.0
SB49
M0 X103A X20 0
3
7 END
Check the data link status of the station 1.
Error status flag
Turn ON the error reset request flag (RY3A). Turn OFF the error reset request flag (RY3A) when the error status flag (RX3A) is OFF.
Y103A
M0 SW0B0.0
7695. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
77
5.21.6 Instructions Programming instructions
Since the buffer memory data of the master station is kept transferred (refreshed) to/from the inverters, the TO instruction need not be executed every scan in response to data write or read requests. (The execution of the TO instruction every scan does not pose any problem.)
If the FROM/TO instruction is executed frequently, data may not be written reliably. When transferring data between the inverter and sequence program via the buffer memory, perform the handshake to confirm that data has been written without error.
Operating and handling instructions The commands only from the programmable controller can be accepted during CC-Link IE Field Network communication.
The run command from external and parameter unit is ignored. If multiple inverters have the same station number, the communication cannot be performed properly. The inverter protective function (E.OP1) is activated if data communication stops for more than the time set in Pr.500
Communication error execution waiting time due to a programmable controller fault, an open Ethernet cable etc. during CC-Link IE Field Network operation.
If the programmable controller (master station) is reset during CC-Link IE Field Network operation or if the programmable controller is powered off, data communication stops and the inverter protective function (E.OP1) is activated. To reset the programmable controller (master station), switch the operation mode to the External operation once, then reset the programmable controller.
When Pr.340 = "0 (initial value)", any inverter whose main power is restored is reset to return to the External operation mode. To resume the Network operation, therefore, set the operation mode to the Network operation using the sequence program. Set a value other than "0" in Pr.340 to start in the Network operation mode after inverter reset.
5.21.7 Troubleshooting
TO instruction
Write completion
TO instruction
Write completion Correct Incorrect
Description Point to be checked
Operation mode does not switch to the Network operation mode.
Check for looseness of the connector between the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board and the inverter's control circuit board. Check that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly. (Check for contact fault, break in the cable, etc.) Check that Pr.434 Network number (CC-Link IE) and Pr.435 Station number (CC-Link IE) are correctly set. (Check that their settings match with the program, that the network number is set within the range, that no overlapping stations exist, and that the station number is set within the range.) Check that the inverter is in the External operation mode. Check that the operation mode switching program is running. Check that the operation mode switching program has been written correctly.
Inverter does not start in the Network operation mode.
Check that the inverter starting program is running. Check that the inverter starting program has been written correctly. Check that Pr.338 Communication operation command source is not set to External.
0 5. PARAMETERS 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
CHAPTER 6
C H
A PT
ER 6
4
5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6
7
8
9
10
6.1 Inverter fault and alarm indications.......................................................................................................................772 6.2 Reset method for the protective functions ............................................................................................................773 6.3 Check and clear of the fault history ......................................................................................................................774 6.4 List of fault displays ..............................................................................................................................................776 6.5 Causes and corrective actions..............................................................................................................................779 6.6 Check first when you have a trouble.....................................................................................................................800
771
77
6 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the "PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS" that operate in this product. Always read the instructions before use.
6.1 Inverter fault and alarm indications When the inverter detects a fault, depending on the nature of the fault, the operation panel displays an error message or
warning, or a protective function is activated to shut off the inverter output. When any fault occurs, take an appropriate corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume the operation. Restarting
the operation without a reset may break or damage the inverter. When a protective function is activated, note the following points.
Inverter fault or alarm indications are categorized as follows.
NOTE The last eight faults can be displayed on the operation panel. (Fault history) (For the operation, refer to page 774.)
Item Description
Fault output signal Opening the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side of the inverter at a fault occurrence shuts off the control power to the inverter, therefore, the fault output will not be retained.
Fault or alarm indication When a protective function is activated, the operation panel displays a fault indication.
Operation restart method While a protective function is activated, the inverter output is kept shutoff. Reset the inverter to restart the operation.
Displayed item Description
Error message A message regarding operational fault and setting fault by the operation panel and the parameter unit. The inverter output is not shut off.
Warning The inverter output is not shut off even when a warning is displayed. However, failure to take appropriate measures will lead to a fault.
Alarm The inverter output is not shut off. An Alarm (LF) signal can also be output with a parameter setting. Fault When a protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and a Fault (ALM) signal is output.
2 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.1 Inverter fault and alarm indications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
6.2 Reset method for the protective functions Reset the inverter by performing any of the following operations. Note that the accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter. The inverter recovers about 1 second after the reset is released.
On the operation panel, press to reset the inverter. (This operation is valid only when a protective function for a fault
is activated. (Refer to page 785 of the Instruction Manual for faults.))
Switch the power OFF once, then switch it ON again.
Turn ON the Reset (RES) signal for 0.1 second or more. (If the RES signal is kept ON, "Err" appears (blinks) to indicate that the inverter is in a reset status.)
NOTE OFF status of the start signal must be confirmed before resetting the inverter fault. Resetting an inverter fault with the start
signal ON restarts the motor suddenly.
ON
OFF
SD
Inverter
RES
7736. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.2 Reset method for the protective functions
77
6.3 Check and clear of the fault history The operation panel stores the fault indications which appear when a protective function is activated to display the fault record for the past 8 faults (fault history).
Check for the fault history
*1 When an overcurrent trip occurs by an instantaneous overcurrent, the monitored current value saved in the fault history may be lower than the actual current that has flowed.
*2 The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0.
Fault history mode
Monitor mode Parameter setting mode Function mode
[Operation for displaying fault history] The last eight fault records can be displayed. (On the display of the last fault record (fault record 1), a decimal point LED is ON.)
When the fault history is empty, "E0" is displayed.
Latest fault
Second latest fault
Eighth latest fault
Fault record 1
Output frequency
Blinking Blinking
BlinkingBlinking
Blinking Blinking
BlinkingBlinking
Cumulative energization time
Fault record number
Fault record number
Fault record number
Output current
Output voltage
Fault record 2
Fault record 8
Press the setting dial.
Press the setting dial.
Press the setting dial.
Time
Day
Month Year
4 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.3 Check and clear of the fault history
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Fault history clearing procedure
Set Err.CL Fault history clear = "1" to clear the fault history.
Operating procedure 1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
2. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
3. Selecting the parameter number
Turn until " " (Fault history clear) appears. Press to read the present set value. " "
(initial value) appears.
4. Fault history clear
Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to start clearing.
" " and " " are displayed alternately after parameters are cleared.
Turn to read another parameter.
Press to show the setting again.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
7756. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.3 Check and clear of the fault history
77
6.4 List of fault displays If the displayed message does not correspond to any of the following or if you have any other problem, contact your sales representative.
Error message A message regarding operational fault and setting fault
by the operation panel and the parameter unit is displayed. The inverter output is not shut off.
Warning The inverter output is not shut off even when a warning is
displayed. However, failure to take appropriate measures will lead to a fault.
Alarm The inverter output is not shut off. An Alarm (LF) signal
can also be output with a parameter setting.
Fault When a protective function is activated, the inverter
output is shut off and a Fault (ALM) signal is output. The data code is used for checking the fault detail via
communication or with Pr.997 Fault initiation.
Data code 16 to 199
Operation panel indication Name Refer
to page
Operation panel lock 779
Password locked 779
to
Parameter write error 779, 780
to Copy operation fault 780,
781
Error 781
Operation panel indication Name Refer
to page
Stall prevention (overcurrent) 782
Stall prevention (overvoltage) 782
Regenerative brake pre-alarm 782
Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm
783
PU stop 783
Speed limit indication 783
Parameter copy 783
Safety stop 783
to Maintenance signal output 784
USB host error 784
Home position return setting error 784
Home position return uncompleted 784
Home position return parameter setting error
784
Continuous operation during communication fault
784
Load fault warning 784
Operation panel indication Name Refer
to page
Fan alarm 785
Internal fan alarm 785
Operation panel indication Name Data
code Refer
to page Overcurrent trip during acceleration
16 (H10) 785
Overcurrent trip during constant speed
17 (H11) 786
Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop
18 (H12) 786
Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration
32 (H20) 787
Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed
33 (H21) 787
Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or
34 (H22) 787
Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay
48 (H30) 787
Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay
49 (H31) 788
Heat sink overheat 64 (H40) 788
Instantaneous power failure 80 (H50) 788
Undervoltage 81 (H51) 789
Input phase loss 82 (H52) 789
Stall prevention stop 96 (H60) 789
Loss of synchronism detection
97 (H61) 790
Upper limit fault detection 98 (H62) 790
Lower limit fault detection 99 (H63) 790
Operation panel indication Name Refer
to page
6 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.4 List of fault displays
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Data code 200 or more Others
The fault history and the operation status of the inverter are displayed. It is not a fault indication.
Brake transistor alarm detection
112 (H70) 790
Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent
128 (H80) 790
Output phase loss 129 (H81) 791
External thermal relay operation
144 (H90) 791
PTC thermistor operation 145 (H91) 791
Option fault 160 (HA0) 791
Communication option fault
161 (HA1)
792162 (HA2) 163 (HA3)
User definition error by the PLC function
164 (HA4)
792
165 (HA5) 166 (HA6) 167 (HA7) 168 (HA8)
Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board)
176 (HB0) 792
PU disconnection 177 (HB1) 792
Retry count excess 178 (HB2) 793
Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board)
179 (HB3) 793
CPU fault 192 (HC0) 793
Operation panel power supply short circuit/RS-485
193 (HC1) 793
24 VDC power fault 194 (HC2) 793
Abnormal output current detection
196 (HC4) 794
Inrush current limit circuit fault
197 (HC5) 794
Communication fault (inverter)
198 (HC6) 794
Analog input fault 199 (HC7) 794
Operation panel indication Name Data
code Refer
to page
USB communication fault 200 (HC8) 794
Safety circuit fault 201 (HC9) 795
Internal circuit fault
202 (HCA)
795 253 (HFD)
Operation panel indication Name Data
code Refer
to page
Overspeed occurrence 208 (HD0) 795
Speed deviation excess detection
209 (HD1) 795
Signal loss detection 210 (HD2) 796
Excessive position fault 211 (HD3) 796
Orientation encoder no- signal
212 (HD4) 796
Brake sequence fault
213 (HD5)
797
214 (HD6) 215 (HD7) 216 (HD8) 217 (HD9) 218 (HDA) 219 (HDB)
Encoder phase fault 220 (HDC) 797
Magnetic pole position unknown
222 (HDE) 797
External fault during output operation
224 (HE0) 797
Abnormal internal temperature
225 (HE1) 797
4 mA input fault 228 (HE4) 797
Pre-charge fault 229 (HE5) 798
PID signal fault 230 (HE6) 798
Option fault
241 (HF1)
798242 (HF2) 243 (HF3)
CPU fault
245 (HF5)
793246 (HF6) 247 (HF7)
Opposite rotation deceleration fault
251 (HFB) 799
Operation panel indication Name Refer
to page
Fault history 774
No fault history 799
Operation panel indication Name Data
code Refer
to page
7776. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.4 List of fault displays
77
If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
24 V external power supply operation
799
Backup in progress 799
Restoration in progress 799
Operation panel indication Name Refer
to page
8 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.4 List of fault displays
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
6.5 Causes and corrective actions
Error message A message regarding operational troubles is displayed. Output is not shut off.
Operation panel indication HOLD
Name Operation panel lock
Description Operation lock is set. Operation other than is invalid. (Refer to page 341.)
Check point --------------
Corrective action Press for 2 seconds to release the lock.
Operation panel indication LOCD
Name Password locked Description Password function is active. Display and setting of parameters are restricted. Check point --------------
Corrective action Enter the password in Pr.297 Password lock/unlock to unlock the password function before operating. (Refer to page 348.)
Operation panel indication Er1
Name Write disable error
Description
Parameter setting was attempted while Pr.77 Parameter write selection is set to disable parameter write. Overlapping range has been set for the frequency jump. Overlapping range has been set for the adjustable 5 points V/F. The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication. IPM parameter initialization was attempted while Pr.72 PWM frequency selection = "25".
Check point
Check the Pr.77 setting. (Refer to page 345.) Check the settings of Pr.31 to Pr.36 (frequency jump). (Refer to page 429.) Check the settings of Pr.100 to Pr.109 (adjustable 5 points V/F). (Refer to page 713.) Check the connection of PU and the inverter. Check the Pr.72 setting. A sine wave filter cannot be used under PM sensorless vector control.
Operation panel indication Er2
Name Write error during operation Description Parameter write was attempted while Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "0". Check point Check that the inverter is stopped.
Corrective action After stopping the operation, make parameter setting. When setting Pr.77 = "2", parameter write is enabled during operation. (Refer to page 345.)
Operation panel indication Er3
Name Calibration error Description Analog input bias and gain calibration values have been set too close. Check point Check the settings of the calibration parameters C3, C4, C6, and C7 (calibration functions). (Refer to page 505.)
Operation panel indication Er4
Name Mode designation error
Description Parameter setting was attempted in the External or NET operation mode while Pr.77 Parameter write selection
= "1". Parameter write was attempted when the command source is not at the operation panel (FR-DU08).
Check point Check that the operation mode is the PU operation mode. Check that the Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection setting is correct.
Corrective action After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode", make parameter setting. (Refer to page 389.) When Pr.77 = "2", parameter write is enabled regardless of the operation mode. (Refer to page 345.) Set Pr.551 = "2". (Refer to page 400.)
7796. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
78
Operation panel indication Er8
Name USB memory device operation error
Description An operation command was given during the USB memory device operation. A copy operation (writing) was performed while the PLC function was in the RUN state. A copy operation was attempted for a password locked project.
Check point Check if the USB memory device is operating. Check if the PLC function is in the RUN state. Check if the project data is locked with a password.
Corrective action
Perform the operation after the USB memory device operation is completed. Stop the PLC function. (Refer to page 646 and the PLC function programming manual.) Unlock the password of the project data using FR Configurator2. (Refer to the Instruction Manuals of FR
Configurator2 and GX Works2.)
Operation panel indication rE1
Name Parameter read error
Description A failure has occurred at the operation panel side EEPROM while reading the copied parameters. A failure has occurred in the USB memory device while copying the parameters or reading the PLC function
project data. Check point --------------
Corrective action
Perform parameter copy again. (Refer to page 744 and page 747.) Perform PLC function project data copy again. (Refer to page 646.) The USB memory device may be faulty. Replace the USB memory device. The operation panel (FR-DU08) may be faulty. Contact your sales representative.
Operation panel indication rE2
Name Parameter write error
Description
Parameter copy from the operation panel to the inverter was attempted during operation. A failure has occurred at the operation panel side EEPROM while writing the copied parameters. A failure has occurred in the USB memory device while writing the copied parameters or PLC function project
data. Check point Check that the inverter is stopped.
Corrective action
After stopping the operation, perform parameter copy again. (Refer to page 744.) The operation panel (FR-DU08) may be faulty. Contact your sales representative. Perform parameter copy or PLC project data copy again. (Refer to page 646 and page 747.) The USB memory device may be faulty. Replace the USB memory device.
Operation panel indication rE3
Name Parameter verification error
Description
The data in the inverter are different from the data in the operation panel. A failure has occurred at the operation panel side EEPROM during parameter verification. A failure has occurred in the USB memory device during parameter verification. The data in the inverter are different from the data in the USB memory device or the personal computer (FR
Configurator2). Check point Check the parameter setting of the source inverter against the setting of the destination inverter.
Corrective action
Continue the verification by pressing . Perform parameter verification again. (Refer to page 746.) The operation panel (FR-DU08) may be faulty. Contact your sales representative. The USB memory device may be faulty. Replace the USB memory device. Verify the PLC function project data again. (Refer to page 646.)
0 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation panel indication rE4
Name Model error
Description The series of the source inverter used to copy or verify parameters is not the same as the target inverter. The operation panel data was incorrect when attempting to verify parameters or copy parameters from the
operation panel to the inverter.
Check point Check that the source inverter being used to verify or copy parameters is the same series as the target inverter. Check that the copying of parameters was not interrupted due to a loss of power to the inverter or the operation
panel being disconnected.
Corrective action Use a source inverter that is the same series (FR-A800 series) as the target inverter. Try to copy the parameters to the operation panel from the inverter again.
Operation panel indication rE5
Name File error Description The data in the USB memory device may be damaged. Check point --------------
Corrective action Delete the copy file in the USB memory device and perform parameter copy again.
Operation panel indication rE6
Name File error
Description The parameter copy file in the USB memory device cannot be recognized. An error has occurred in the file system during transfer of the PLC function data or writing to RAM.
Check point --------------
Corrective action Perform parameter copy again. (Refer to page 747.) Copy the PLC function project data again. (Refer to page 646.)
Operation panel indication rE7
Name File quantity error
Description A parameter copy was attempted to the USB memory device in which the copy files from 001 to 099 had already been saved.
Check point Check if the number of copy files in the USB memory device has reached 99. Corrective action Delete the copy file in the USB memory device and perform parameter copy again. (Refer to page 747.)
Operation panel indication rE8
Name No PLC function project file Description The specified PLC function project file does not exist in the USB memory device.
Check point Check that the file exists in the USB memory device. Check that the folder name and the file name in the USB memory device is correct.
Corrective action The data in the USB memory device may be damaged.
Operation panel indication Err.
Description
The RES signal is turned ON. The operation panel and inverter cannot make normal communication (contact faults of the connector). This error may occur when the voltage at the input side of the inverter drops. When using a separate power source for the control circuit power (R1/L11, S1/L21) from the main circuit power
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3), this error may appear at turning ON of the main circuit. It is not a fault.
Corrective action Turn OFF the RES signal. Check the connection between the operation panel and the inverter. Check the voltage on the input side of the inverter.
7816. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
78
Warning Output is not shut off when a protective function is activated.
Operation panel indication OL FR-LU08 indication OL
Name Stall prevention (overcurrent)
Description
When the output current of the inverter increases, the stall prevention (overcurrent) function is activated. The following section explains about the stall prevention (overcurrent) function.
During acceleration
When the output current (output torque under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control) of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention level (Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the increase in frequency until the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload current is reduced below stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency again.
During constant- speed operation
When the output current (output torque under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control) of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention level (Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function reduces frequency until the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload current is reduced below stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency up to the set value.
During deceleration
When the output current (output torque under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control) of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention level (Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the decrease in frequency until the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload current is reduced below stall prevention operation level, this function decreases the frequency again.
Check point
Check that the Pr.0 Torque boost setting is not too large. The Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time settings may be too short. Check that the load is not too heavy. Check for any failures in peripheral devices. Check that the Pr.13 Starting frequency is not too large. Check that Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level is appropriate.
Corrective action
Gradually increase or decrease the Pr.0 setting by 1% at a time and check the motor status. (Refer to page 706.)
Set a larger value in Pr.7 and Pr.8. (Refer to page 367.) Reduce the load. Try Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or Vector control. Change the Pr.14 Load pattern selection setting. The stall prevention operation current can be set in Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level. (Initial value is
150%.) The acceleration/deceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention operation level with Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level, or disable stall prevention with Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection. (Use Pr.156 to set either operation continued or not at OL operation.)
Operation panel indication oL FR-LU08 indication oL
Name Stall prevention (overvoltage)
Description
When the output voltage of the inverter increases, the stall prevention (overvoltage) function is activated. The regeneration avoidance function is activated due to excessive regenerative power of the motor. (Refer to
page 732.) The following section explains the stall prevention (overvoltage) function.
During deceleration If the regenerative power of the motor becomes excessive to exceed the regenerative power consumption capability, this function stops decreasing the frequency to prevent overvoltage trip. As soon as the regenerative power has reduced, deceleration resumes.
Check point Check for sudden speed reduction. Check if the regeneration avoidance function (Pr.882 to Pr.886) is being used. (Refer to page 732.)
Corrective action The deceleration time may change. Increase the deceleration time using Pr.8 Deceleration time.
Operation panel indication RB FR-LU08 indication RB
Name Regenerative brake pre-alarm (Standard models only)
Description Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty value. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV[ ]) occurs.
Check point Check if the brake resistor duty is not too high. Check that the Pr.30 Regenerative function selection and Pr.70 settings are correct.
Corrective action Set the deceleration time longer. Check the Pr.30 and Pr.70 settings. (Refer to page 724.)
2 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation panel indication TH FR-LU08 indication TH
Name Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm
Description Appears if the cumulative value of the electronic thermal O/L relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the preset level of Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. If the specified value is reached, the protection circuit is activated to shut off the inverter output.
Check point Check for large load or sudden acceleration. Check that the Pr.9 setting is appropriate. (Refer to page 415.)
Corrective action Reduce the load and frequency of operation. Set an appropriate value in Pr.9. (Refer to page 415.)
Operation panel indication PS FR-LU08 indication PS
Name PU stop
Description The motor is stopped using under the mode other than the PU operation mode. (To enable
under the mode other than the PU operation mode, set Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/ PU stop selection. Refer to page 336 for details.)
The motor is stopped by the emergency stop function.
Check point Check for a stop made by pressing of the operation panel. Check for whether the X92 signal is OFF.
Corrective action Turn the start signal OFF and release with . Turn ON the X92 signal and OFF the start signal for release.
Operation panel indication SL FR-LU08 indication SL
Name Speed limit indication (output during speed limit) Description Output if the speed limit level is exceeded during torque control.
Check point Check that the torque command is not larger than required. Check if the speed limit level is set too low.
Corrective action Decrease the torque command value. Increase the speed limit level.
Operation panel indication CP FR-LU08 indication CP
Name Parameter copy
Description Appears when parameter copy is performed between the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower / FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower inverters and the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher / FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher inverters.
Check point Resetting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.51, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.61, Pr.70, Pr.72, Pr.80, Pr.82, Pr.90 to Pr.94, Pr.453, Pr.455, Pr.458 to Pr.462, Pr.557, Pr.859, Pr.860, and Pr.893 is necessary.
Corrective action Set the initial value in Pr.989 Parameter copy alarm release.
Operation panel indication SA FR-LU08 indication
Name Safety stop Description Appears when safety stop function is activated (during output shutoff). (Refer to page 82.)
Check point Check if an emergency stop device is activated. Check if the shorting wire between S1 and PC or between S2 and PC is disconnected when not using the safety
stop function.
Corrective action
An emergency stop device is active when using the safety stop function. Identify the cause of emergency stop, ensure the safety and restart the system.
When not using the safety stop function, short across terminals S1 and PC and across S2 and PC with shorting wire for the inverter to run.
If " " is indicated when wires across S1 and SIC and across S2 and SIC are both conducted while using the safety stop function (drive enabled), internal failure might be the cause. Check the wiring of terminals S1, S2, and SIC and contact your sales representative if the wiring has no fault.
7836. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
78
Operation panel indication MT1 to MT3
to FR-LU08 indication MT1 to MT3
Name Maintenance signal output
Description
Appears when the inverter's cumulative energization time reaches or exceeds the parameter set value. Set the time until the MT is displayed using Pr.504 Maintenance timer 1 warning output set time (MT1), Pr.687 Maintenance timer 2 warning output set time (MT2), and Pr.689 Maintenance timer 3 warning output set time (MT3). MT does not appear when the settings of Pr.504, Pr.687, and Pr.689 are initial values (9999).
Check point The set time of maintenance timer has been exceeded. (Refer to page 363.)
Corrective action Take appropriate countermeasures according to the purpose of the maintenance timer setting. Setting "0" in Pr.503 Maintenance timer 1, Pr.686 Maintenance timer 2, and Pr.688 Maintenance timer 3 clears the indication.
Operation panel indication UF FR-LU08 indication UF
Name USB host error Description Appears when an excessive current flows into the USB A connector. Check point Check if a USB device other than a USB memory device is connected to the USB A connector.
Corrective action If a device other than a USB memory device is connected to the USB A connector, remove the device. Setting Pr.1049 USB host reset = "1" or inverter reset clears the UF indication.
Operation panel indication HP1 to HP3
to FR-LU08 indication HP1 to HP3
Name Home position return error
Description Appears when an error occurs during the home position return operation under position control. For the details, refer to page 313.
Check point Identify the cause of the error occurrence. Corrective action Check the parameter setting, and check that the input signal is correct.
Operation panel indication CF FR-LU08 indication CF
Name Continuous operation during communication fault
Description Appears when the operation continues while an error is occurring in the communication line or communication option (when Pr.502 = "4").
Check point Check for a break in the communication cable. Check for communication option faults.
Corrective action Check the connection of communication cable. Replace the communication option.
Operation panel indication LDF FR-LU08 indication LDF
Name Load fault warning
Description Appears when the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr.1488 Upper limit warning detection width or Pr.1489 Lower limit warning detection width.
Check point Check if too much load is applied to the equipment, or if the load is too light. Check that the load characteristics settings are correct.
Corrective action Inspect the equipment. Set the load characteristics (Pr.1481 to Pr.1487) correctly.
4 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Alarm Output is not shut off when a protective function is activated. The Alarm (LF) signal can be output depending on the parameter setting. (Set "98" in Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). Refer to page 473.)
Fault When a protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and a Fault signal is output.
*1 Differs according to ratings. The rating can be changed using Pr.570 Multiple rating setting. (Refer to page 343.) 148% for SLD rating, 170% for LD rating, 235% for ND rating (initial setting), and 280% for HD rating
Operation panel indication FN FR-LU08 indication FN
Name Fan alarm
Description For the inverter that contains a cooling fan, FN appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to a fault, low rotation speed, or different operation from the setting of Pr.244 Cooling fan operation selection.
Check point When the cooling fan is replaced, check that the fan is not installed upside down. Check the cooling fan for a failure.
Corrective action Install the fan correctly. (Refer to page 815.) If the fan alarm still occurs after the fan is installed correctly, the fan may be faulty. Contact your sales representative.
Operation panel indication FN2 FR-LU08 indication FN2
Name Internal fan alarm (IP55 compatible models only) Description FN2 appears on the operation panel when the internal air circulation fan stops due to a fault or low rotation speed. Check point Check the internal air circulation fan for a failure.
Corrective action The fan may be faulty. Contact your sales representative.
Operation panel indication E.OC1 FR-LU08 indication OC During Acc
Name Overcurrent trip during acceleration
Description When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 235%*1 of the rated current during acceleration, the protection circuit is activated and the inverter output is shut off.
Check point
Check for sudden speed acceleration. Check if the downward acceleration time is too long in a lift application. Check for output short-circuit. Check that the Pr.3 Base frequency setting is not 60 Hz when the motor rated frequency is 50 Hz. Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high. Check if the fast-response current limit operation is
disabled. Check that the regenerative driving is not performed frequently. (Check if the output voltage becomes larger
than the V/F reference voltage at regenerative driving and overcurrent occurs due to increase in the motor current.)
Check that the power supply for RS-485 terminal is not shorted (under Vector control). Check that the encoder wiring and the specifications (encoder power supply, resolution, differential/
complementary) are correct. Check also that the motor wiring (U, V, W) is correct (under Vector control). Check that the rotation direction is not switched from forward to reverse rotation (or from reverse to forward)
during torque control under Real sensorless vector control. Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity. (PM sensorless vector control) Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (PM sensorless vector control)
Corrective action
Set the acceleration time longer. (Shorten the downward acceleration time of the lift.) If "E.OC1" always appears at start, disconnect the motor once and restart the inverter. If "E.OC1" still appears,
contact your sales representative. Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur. Set 50 Hz in Pr.3 Base frequency. (Refer to page 707.) Lower the stall prevention operation level. Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (Refer to page
431.) Set the base voltage (rated voltage of the motor, etc.) in Pr.19 Base frequency voltage. (Refer to page 707.) Check RS-485 terminal connection (under Vector control). Check the wiring and specifications of the encoder and the motor. Perform the setting according to the
specifications of the encoder and the motor (under vector control). (Refer to page 87.) Prevent the motor from switching the rotation direction from forward to reverse (or from reverse to forward)
during torque control under Real sensorless vector control. Choose inverter and motor capacities that match. (PM sensorless vector control) Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure/flying start function. (Refer to page 635.) (PM sensorless vector control)
7856. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
78
*2 Differs according to ratings. The rating can be changed using Pr.570 Multiple rating setting. (Refer to page 343.) 148% for SLD rating, 170% for LD rating, 235% for ND rating (initial setting), and 280% for HD rating
*3 Differs according to ratings. The rating can be changed using Pr.570 Multiple rating setting. (Refer to page 343.) 148% for SLD rating, 170% for LD rating, 235% for ND rating (initial setting), and 280% for HD rating
Operation panel indication E.OC2 FR-LU08 indication OC During Cnst Spd
Name Overcurrent trip during constant speed
Description When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 235%*2 of the rated current during constant- speed operation, the protection circuit is activated and the inverter output is shut off.
Check point
Check for sudden load change. Check for a short-circuit in the output circuit. Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high. Check if the fast-response current limit operation is
disabled. Check that the power supply for RS-485 terminal is not shorted (under Vector control). Check that the rotation direction is not switched from forward to reverse rotation (or from reverse to forward)
during torque control under Real sensorless vector control. Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity. (PM sensorless vector control) Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (PM sensorless vector control)
Corrective action
Keep the load stable. Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur. Lower the stall prevention operation level. Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (Refer to page
431.) Check RS-485 terminal connection (under Vector control). Prevent the motor from switching the rotation direction from forward to reverse (or from reverse to forward)
during torque control under Real sensorless vector control. Choose inverter and motor capacities that match. (PM sensorless vector control) Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure/flying start function. (Refer to page 635.) (PM sensorless vector control)
Operation panel indication E.OC3 FR-LU08 indication OC During Dec
Name Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop
Description When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 235%*3 of the rated current during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protection circuit is activated and the inverter output is shut off.
Check point
Check for sudden speed reduction. Check for a short-circuit in the output circuit. Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake. Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high. Check if the fast-response current limit operation is
disabled. Check that the power supply for RS-485 terminal is not shorted (under Vector control). Check that the rotation direction is not switched from forward to reverse rotation (or from reverse to forward)
during torque control under Real sensorless vector control. Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity. (PM sensorless vector control) Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (PM sensorless vector control)
Corrective action
Set the deceleration time longer. Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur. Check the mechanical brake operation. Lower the stall prevention operation level. Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (Refer to page
431.) Check RS-485 terminal connection (under Vector control). Prevent the motor from switching the rotation direction from forward to reverse (or from reverse to forward)
during torque control under Real sensorless vector control. Choose inverter and motor capacities that match. (PM sensorless vector control) Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure/flying start function. (Refer to page 635.) (PM sensorless vector control)
6 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation panel indication E.OV1 FR-LU08 indication OV During Acc
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration
Description If regenerative power causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check point Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during downward acceleration in vertical lift load) Check that the Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level is not set to the no load current or lower. Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load inertia.
Corrective action
Set the acceleration time shorter. Use the regeneration avoidance function (Pr.882 to Pr.886). (Refer to page 732.)
Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr.22. Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10 or 11". (Refer to page 431.)
Operation panel indication E.OV2 FR-LU08 indication OV During Cnst Spd
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed
Description If regenerative power causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check point
Check for sudden load change. Check that the Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level is not set to the no load current or lower. Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load inertia. Check that acceleration/deceleration time is not too short.
Corrective action
Keep the load stable. Use the regeneration avoidance function (Pr.882 to Pr.886). (Refer to page 732.) Use the brake unit, multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC), or power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV) as required. Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr.22. Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10 or 11". (Refer to page 431.) Set the acceleration/deceleration time longer. (Under Vector control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control,
the output torque can be increased. However, sudden acceleration may cause an overshoot in speed, resulting in an occurrence of overvoltage.)
Operation panel indication E.OV3 FR-LU08 indication OV During Dec
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop
Description If regenerative power causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check point Check for sudden speed reduction. Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load inertia.
Corrective action
Set the deceleration time longer. (Set the deceleration time which matches the moment of inertia of the load.) Make the brake cycle longer. Use the regeneration avoidance function (Pr.882 to Pr.886). (Refer to page 732.) Use the brake unit, multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC), or power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV) as required. Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10 or 11". (Refer to page 431.)
Operation panel indication E.THT FR-LU08 indication Inv. overload trip
Name Inverter overload trip (Electronic thermal O/L relay)*4
Description If the temperature of the output transistor elements exceeds the protection level with a rated output current or higher flowing without the overcurrent trip (E.OC[]), the inverter output is stopped. (Overload capacity 150% 60 s)
Check point
Check that acceleration/deceleration time is not too short. Check that torque boost setting is not too large (small). Check that load pattern selection setting is appropriate for the load pattern of the using machine. Check the motor for the use under overload. Check that the encoder wiring and the specifications (encoder power supply, resolution, differential/
complementary) are correct. Check also that the motor wiring (U, V, W) is correct (under Vector control).
Corrective action
Set the acceleration/deceleration time longer. Adjust the torque boost setting. Set the load pattern selection setting according to the load pattern of the using machine. Reduce the load. Check the wiring and specifications of the encoder and the motor. Perform the setting according to the
specifications of the encoder and the motor (under vector control). (Refer to page 87.)
7876. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
78
*4 Resetting the inverter initializes the internal cumulative heat value of the electronic thermal O/L relay function.
*5 Resetting the inverter initializes the internal cumulative heat value of the electronic thermal relay function.
*6 10 ms for IP55 compatible models
Operation panel indication E.THM FR-LU08 indication Motor Ovrload
Name Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay function)*5
Description
The electronic thermal O/L relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat, which is caused by overload or reduced cooling capability during low-speed operation. When the cumulative heat value reaches 85% of the Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, pre-alarm (TH) is output. When the accumulated value reaches the specified value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. When the inverter is used to drive a dedicated motor, such as a multiple-pole motor, or several motors, the motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal O/L relay. Install an external thermal relay on the inverter output side.
Check point Check the motor for the use under overload. Check that the setting of Pr.71 Applied motor for motor selection is correct. (Refer to page 528.) Check that the stall prevention operation setting is correct.
Corrective action Reduce the load. For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr.71. Set the stall prevention operation level accordingly. (Refer to page 431.)
Operation panel indication E.FIN FR-LU08 indication Heatsink overheat
Name Heat sink overheat
Description
When the heat sink overheats, the temperature sensor is activated, and the inverter output is stopped. The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heat sink overheat protection operation temperature. For the terminal used for the FIN signal output, assign the function by setting "26 (positive logic) or 126 (negative logic)" from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 473.)
Check point Check for too high surrounding air temperature. Check for heat sink clogging. Check that the cooling fan is not stopped. (Check that FN is not displayed on the operation panel.)
Corrective action Set the surrounding air temperature to within the specifications. Clean the heat sink. Replace the cooling fan.
Operation panel indication E.IPF FR-LU08 indication Instant Pwr failure
Name Instantaneous power failure (Standard models and IP55 compatible models only)
Description
If a power failure occurs (or when power input to the inverter is shut off) for longer than 15 ms*6, the instantaneous power failure protective function is activated to shut off the inverter output in order to prevent the control circuit from malfunctioning. If a power failure persists for 100 ms or longer, the fault warning output is not provided, and the inverter restarts if the start signal is ON upon power restoration. (The inverter continues operating if an instantaneous power failure is within 15 ms*6.) In some operating status (load magnitude, acceleration/deceleration time setting, etc.), overcurrent or other protection may be activated upon power restoration. When instantaneous power failure protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to page 628 and page 635.)
Check point Find the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence.
Corrective action
Remedy the instantaneous power failure. Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure. Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr.57). (Refer to page 628 and page
635.)
8 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation panel indication E.UVT FR-LU08 indication Under Voltage
Name Undervoltage (Standard models and IP55 compatible models only)
Description
If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform normal functions. In addition, the motor torque will be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if the power supply voltage decreases to about 150 VAC (300 VAC for the 400 V class) or below, this function shuts off the inverter output. When a jumper is not connected across P/+ and P1, the undervoltage protective function is activated. When undervoltage protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to page 628 and page 635.)
Check point Check if a high-capacity motor is driven. Check if the jumper is connected across terminals P/+ and P1.
Corrective action
Check the devices on the power supply line such as the power supply itself. If this function is activated due to unstable voltage in the power supply, change the undervoltage level (DC bus voltage value). (Refer to page 425.)
Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor. If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, contact your sales representative.
Operation panel indication E.ILF FR-LU08 indication Input phase loss
Name Input phase loss (Standard models and IP55 compatible models only)
Description When Pr.872 Input phase loss protection selection is enabled ("1") and one of the three-phase power input is lost, the inverter output is shut off. This protective function is not available when Pr.872 is set to the initial value (Pr.872 = "0"). (Refer to page 426.)
Check point Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.
Corrective action Wire the cables properly. Repair a break portion in the cable.
Operation panel indication E.OLT FR-LU08 indication Stall prevention STP
Name Stall prevention stop
Description
If the output frequency has fallen to 0.5 Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3 seconds, a fault (E.OLT) appears and the inverter is shut off. OL appears while stall prevention is being activated.
When speed control is performed, a fault (E.OLT) appears and the inverter output is shut off if frequency drops to the Pr.865 Low speed detection (initial value is 1.5 Hz) setting by torque limit operation and the output torque exceeds the Pr.874 OLT level setting (initial value is 150%) setting and remains 3 seconds.
Check point
Check the motor for the use under overload. Check that the Pr.865 and Pr.874 values are correct.
(Check the Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level setting under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control.)
Check if a motor is connected under PM sensorless vector control.
Corrective action
Reduce the load. Change the Pr.22, Pr.865, and Pr.874 values. (Check the Pr.22 setting under V/F control and Advanced
magnetic flux vector control.) For the test operation without connecting a motor, select the PM sensorless vector control test operation.
(Refer to page 224.) Also check that the stall prevention (overcurrent) warning (OL) or the stall prevention (overvoltage) warning
(oL) countermeasure is taken.
V/F Magnetic flux
Sensorless Vector PM
7896. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
79
Operation panel indication
E.SOT FR-LU08 indication Motor Step Out
Name Loss of synchronism detection
Description The inverter output is shut off when the motor operation is not synchronized. (This function is only available under PM sensorless vector control.)
Check point
Check that the PM motor is not driven overloaded. Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the PM motor is coasting. Check if a motor is connected under PM sensorless vector control. Check if a PM motor other than the MM-CF series is driven.
Corrective action
Set the acceleration time longer. Reduce the load. If the inverter restarts during coasting, set Pr.57 Restart coasting time "9999", and select the automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure. Check the connection of the IPM motor. For the test operation without connecting a motor, select the PM sensorless vector control test operation.
(Refer to page 224.) Drive an IPM motor (MM-CF series). When driving an IPM motor other than MM-CF series, offline auto tuning must be performed. (Refer to page
551.)
Operation panel indication E.LUP FR-LU08 indication Upper limit fault
Name Upper limit fault detection
Description The inverter output is shut off when the load exceeds the upper limit fault detection range. This protective function is not available in the initial setting of Pr.1490 (Pr.1490 = "9999").
Check point Check if too much load is applied to the equipment. Check that the load characteristics settings are correct.
Corrective action Inspect the equipment. Set the load characteristics (Pr.1481 to Pr.1487) correctly.
Operation panel indication E.LDN FR-LU08 indication Lower limit fault
Name Lower limit fault detection
Description The inverter output is shut off when the load falls below the lower limit fault detection range. This protective function is not available in the initial setting of Pr.1491 (Pr.1491 = "9999").
Check point Check if the equipment load is too light. Check that the load characteristics settings are correct.
Corrective action Inspect the equipment. Set the load characteristics (Pr.1481 to Pr.1487) correctly.
Operation panel indication E.BE FR-LU08 indication Brake transistor err
Name Brake transistor alarm detection
Description
The inverter output is shut off if a fault due to damage of the brake transistor and such occurs in the brake circuit. In such a case, the power supply to the inverter must be shut off immediately.
Appears when an internal circuit fault occurred for separated converter types and IP55 compatible models.
Check point Reduce the load inertia. Check that the brake duty is proper.
Corrective action Replace the inverter.
Operation panel indication E.GF FR-LU08 indication Ground Fault
Name Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent
Description The inverter output is shut off if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows due to an earth (ground) fault that occurred on the inverter's output side (load side).
Check point Check for a ground fault in the motor and connection cable. Corrective action Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
PM
0 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation panel indication E.LF FR-LU08 indication Output phase loss
Name Output phase loss Description The inverter output is shut off if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) is lost.
Check point Check the wiring. (Check that the motor is normally operating.) Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter. Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (PM sensorless vector control)
Corrective action Wire the cables properly. Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure/flying start function (page 635). (PM sensorless vector control)
Operation panel indication E.OHT FR-LU08 indication Ext TH relay oper
Name External thermal relay operation
Description
The inverter output is shut off if the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection or the internally mounted thermal relay in the motor, etc. switches ON (contacts open). This function is available when "7" (OH signal) is set in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection). This protective function is not available in the initial status. (OH signal is not assigned.)
Check point Check for motor overheating. Check that the value "7" (OH signal) is set correctly to any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection).
Corrective action Reduce the load and operation duty. Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.
Operation panel indication E.PTC FR-LU08 indication PTC thermistor oper
Name PTC thermistor operation
Description
The inverter output is shut off if resistance of the PTC thermistor connected between terminal 2 and terminal 10 is equal to or higher than the Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level setting for a continuous time equal to or longer than the setting value in Pr.1016 PTC thermistor protection detection time. When the initial value (Pr.561 = "9999") is set, this protective function is not available.
Check point Check the connection with the PTC thermistor. Check the Pr.561 and Pr.1016 settings. Check the motor for operation under overload.
Corrective action Reduce the load.
Operation panel indication E.OPT FR-LU08 indication Option Fault
Name Option fault
Description
Appears if the AC power supply is accidentally connected to terminal R/L1, S/L2, or T/L3 when a high power factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC in common bus regeneration mode), or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) is connected to the inverter while Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "2".
Appears when torque command by the plug-in option is selected using Pr.804 Torque command source selection and no plug-in option is mounted. This function is available under torque control.
Appears when either one of a Vector control compatible plug-in option or a control terminal option (FR-A8TP) is not installed during machine end orientation control.
Appears when the switch for manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed. Appears when a communication option is connected while Pr.296 Password lock level = "0 or 100".
Check point
Check that the AC power supply is not connected to terminal R/L1, S/L2, or T/L3 when the FR-HC2, FR-XC (in common bus regeneration mode), or FR-CV is connected to the inverter while Pr.30 = "2".
Check that the plug-in option for torque command setting is connected. Check that the Vector control plug-in option and the control terminal option (FR-A8TP) are installed correctly.
Check that the Pr.393 Orientation selection and Pr.862 Encoder option selection settings are correct. Check for the password lock with a setting of Pr.296 = "0, 100".
Corrective action
Check the Pr.30 setting and wiring with the FR-HC2, FR-XC, or FR-CV. The inverter may be damaged if the AC power supply is connected to terminal R/L1, S/L2, or T/L3 when a high
power factor converter is connected. Contact your sales representative. Check for connection of the plug-in option. Check the Pr.804 setting. Install the Vector control plug-in option and the control terminal option (FR-A8TP) correctly. Set Pr.393 and
Pr.862 correctly. (Refer to page 585.) Set the switch on the plug-in option, which is for manufacturer setting, back to the initial setting. (Refer to the
Instruction Manual of each option.) To apply the password lock when installing a communication option, set Pr.296 "0, 100". (Refer to page 348.)
7916. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
79
Operation panel indication E.OP1 to E.OP3 to FR-LU08 indication Option1 Fault to Option3 Fault
Name Communication option fault
Description
The inverter output is shut off if a communication line error occurs in the communication option. This function stops the inverter output when a communication line error occurs on the CC-Link IE Field network
communication circuit board of the FR-A800-GF. When the FR-A8APR is installed to the inverter and a motor with a resolver is used, the inverter output is shut
off if the FR-A8APR fails or the wiring of the resolver is not properly connected.
Check point
Check for an incorrect option function setting and operation. Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely. For the FR-A800-GF, check that the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board is securely installed
to the connector of the inverter control circuit board. Check for a break in the communication cable. Check that the terminating resistor is fitted properly. Check that the wiring of the resolver is correct. (When the FR-A8APR is used.)
Corrective action
Check the option function setting, etc. Connect the plug-in option securely. Connect the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board of the FR-A800-GF securely. Check the connection of communication cable. Check the wiring of the resolver (when the FR-A8APR is used). If the fault occurs again when the inverter is reset, contact your sales representative.
Operation panel indication E.16 to E.20
to FR-LU08 indication Fault 16 to Fault 20
Name User definition error by the PLC function
Description
The protective function is activated by setting "16 to 20" in the special register SD1214 for the PLC function. The inverter output is shut off when the protective function is activated. The protective function is activated when the PLC function is enabled. This protective function is not available in the initial setting (Pr.414 = "0"). Any character string can be displayed on FR-LU08 or FR-PU07 by sequence programs.
Check point Check if "16 to 20" is set in the special register SD1214. Corrective action Set a value other than "16 to 20" in the special register SD1214.
Operation panel indication E.PE FR-LU08 indication Corrupt Memory
Name Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board) Description The inverter output is shut off if a fault occurs in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure) Check point Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Corrective action
Contact your sales representative. Set "1" in Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection (write to RAM) for the operation which requires frequent parameter writing via communication, etc. Note that writing to RAM goes back to the initial status at power OFF.
Operation panel indication E.PUE FR-LU08 indication PU disconnection
Name PU disconnection
Description
The inverter output is shut off if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended, e.g. the operation panel or parameter unit is disconnected, when the disconnected PU disconnection function is valid in Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.
The inverter output is shut off if communication errors occurred consecutively for more than permissible number of retries when Pr.121 PU communication retry count "9999" during the RS-485 communication via the PU connector.
The inverter output is shut off if communication is broken within the period of time set in Pr.122 PU communication check time interval during the RS-485 communication via the PU connector.
Check point Check that the operation panel or the parameter unit is connected properly. Check the Pr.75 setting.
Corrective action Fit the operation panel or the parameter unit securely.
2 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation panel indication E.RET FR-LU08 indication Retry count excess
Name Retry count excess
Description The inverter output is shut off if the operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set in Pr.67 Number of retries at fault occurrence. This function is available when Pr.67 is set. This protective function is not available in the initial setting (Pr.67 = "0").
Check point Find the cause of the fault occurrence. Corrective action Eliminate the cause of the fault preceding this fault indication.
Operation panel indication E.PE2 FR-LU08 indication PR storage alarm
Name Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board) Description The inverter output is shut off if a fault occurs in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure) Check point
Corrective action Contact your sales representative.
Operation panel indication
E.CPU
FR-LU08 indication
CPU Fault
E. 5 Fault 5
E. 6 Fault 6
E. 7 Fault 7
Name CPU fault Description The inverter output is shut off if the communication fault of the built-in CPU occurs. Check point Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
Corrective action Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter. Contact your sales representative.
Operation panel indication E.CTE FR-LU08 indication Circuit fault
Name Operation panel power supply short circuit/RS-485 terminals power supply short circuit
Description
When the power supply for the operation panel (PU connector) is shorted, the power output is shutoff and the inverter output is shut off. The use of the operation panel (parameter unit) and the RS-485 communication via the PU connector are disabled. To reset, enter the RES signal from the terminal, reset through communication via the RS-485 terminals, or switch power OFF then ON again.
When the power supply for the RS-485 terminals are short circuited, this function shuts off the power output. At this time, communication from the RS-485 terminals cannot be made. To reset, use on the operation panel, enter the RES signal, or switch power OFF then ON again.
Check point Check that the PU connector cable is not shorted. Check that the RS-485 terminals are connected correctly.
Corrective action Check PU and the cable. Check the connection of the RS-485 terminals.
Operation panel indication E.P24 FR-LU08 indication 24 VDC power fault
Name 24 VDC power fault
Description When the 24 VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted, this function shuts off the power output.
At this time, all external contact inputs switch OFF. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES signal. To reset it, use the operation panel, or switch power OFF, then ON again.
Check point Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output. Check that the 24 V external power supply voltage is correct.
Corrective action
Repair the short-circuited portion. Supply the power at 24 V. (If the power with insufficient voltage is supplied to the 24 V input circuit for a long
time, the inverter internal circuit may heats up. Although it will not damage the inverter, supply power at the correct voltage.)
7936. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
79
Operation panel indication E.CDO FR-LU08 indication OC detect level
Name Abnormal output current detection
Description The inverter output is shut off if the output current exceeds the Pr.150 Output current detection level setting. This functions is available when "1" is set in Pr.167 Output current detection operation selection. When the initial value (Pr.167 = "0") is set, this protective function is not available.
Check point Check the settings of Pr.150, Pr.151 Output current detection signal delay time, Pr.166 Output current detection signal retention time, and Pr.167. (Refer to page 487.)
Operation panel indication E.IOH FR-LU08 indication Inrush overheat
Name Inrush current limit circuit fault (Standard models and IP55 compatible models only)
Description The inverter output is shut off when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit is overheated. The inrush current limit circuit is faulty.
Check point
Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated. Check if the input side fuse (5A) in the power supply circuit of the inrush current limit circuit contactor (FR-A840-
03250(110K) or higher) is blown. Check that the power supply circuit of inrush current limit circuit contactor is not damaged.
Corrective action Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated. If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, contact your sales representative.
Operation panel indication E.SER FR-LU08 indication VFD Comm error
Name Communication fault (inverter)
Description
The inverter output is shut off when communication error occurs consecutively for the permissible number of retries or more when Pr.335 RS-485 communication retry count "9999" during RS-485 communication through the RS-485 terminals. The inverter output is also shut off if communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr.336 RS-485 communication check time interval.
Check point Check the RS-485 terminal wiring. Corrective action Perform wiring of the RS-485 terminals properly.
Operation panel indication E.AIE FR-LU08 indication Analog input fault
Name Analog input fault
Description The inverter output is shut off when a 30 mA or higher current or a 7.5 V or higher voltage is input to terminal 2 while the current input is selected by Pr.73 Analog input selection, or to terminal 4 while the current input is selected by Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection.
Check point Check the Pr.73, Pr.267, and the voltage/current input switch settings. (Refer to page 496.)
Corrective action Either give a current less than 30 mA, or set Pr.73, Pr.267, and the voltage/current input switch to the voltage input and input a voltage.
Operation panel indication E.USB FR-LU08 indication USB comm error
Name USB communication fault
Description The inverter output is shut off when the communication is cut off for the time set in Pr.548 USB communication check time interval.
Check point Check that the USB communication cable is connected securely.
Corrective action Check the Pr.548 setting. Connect the USB communication cable securely. Increase the Pr.548 setting or set "9999." (Refer to page 701.)
4 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation panel indication E.SAF FR-LU08 indication Safety circuit fault
Name Safety circuit fault
Description
The inverter output is shut off when a safety circuit fault occurs. The inverter output is shut off if the either of the wire between S1 and SIC or S2 and SIC becomes non-
conductive while using the safety stop function. When the safety stop function is not used, the inverter output is shut off when the shorting wire between
terminals S1 and PC or across S2 and PC is disconnected. Settings of the switches (SW3 and SW4) for manufacturer setting may have been changed from the initial
settings.
Check point
Check that the safety relay module or the connection has no fault when using the safety stop function. Check if the shorting wire between S1 and PC or between S2 and PC is disconnected when not using the safety
stop function. Check that the initial position of each switch was not changed.
Corrective action
When using the safety stop function, check that wiring of terminal S1, S2 and SIC is correct and the safety stop input signal source such as a safety relay module is operating properly. Refer to the Safety Stop Function Instruction Manual for causes and countermeasures. (Contact your sales representative for the manual.)
When the safety stop function is not used, short across terminals S1 and PC and across S2 and PC with shorting wires. (Refer to page 82.)
Set each manufacturer setting switch to the initial position (OFF). (Refer to page 19 for the positions of the switches.)
Operation panel indication
E.PBT FR-LU08 indication
PBT fault
E.13 Internal circuit fault
Name Internal circuit fault Description The inverter output is shut off when an internal circuit fault occurs.
Corrective action Contact your sales representative.
Operation panel indication E.OS FR-LU08 indication Overspeed occurrence
Name Overspeed occurrence
Description The inverter output is shut off when the motor speed exceeds the Pr.374 Overspeed detection level under encoder feedback control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control. This protective function is not available in the initial status.
Check point
Check that the Pr.374 setting is correct. Check that the setting of Pr.369 (Pr.851) Number of encoder pulses does not differ from the actual number
of encoder pulses. (Under encoder feedback control or vector control) Check that the motor temperature is not increased under Real sensorless vector control. (The motor constant
may vary due to increase in the motor temperature.)
Corrective action
Set Pr.374 correctly. Set Pr.369 (Pr.851) correctly. (Under encoder feedback control or vector control) When the motor temperature increases, enable the online auto tuning at startup (set Pr.95 (Pr.574) = "1")
(under Real sensorless vector control). To perform the online auto tuning at startup for a lift, use of the Start- time tuning start external input (X28) signal is recommended. (Refer to page 558.)
Operation panel indication
E.OSD FR-LU08 indication Spd deviation fault
Name Speed deviation excess detection
Description
The inverter output is shut off if the motor speed is increased or decreased under the influence of the load etc. during Vector control with Pr.285 Overspeed detection frequency set and cannot be controlled in accordance with the speed command value.
If the motor is accelerated against the stop command accidentally, the deceleration check function (Pr.690) is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check point
Check that the settings of Pr.285 and Pr.853 Speed deviation time are correct. Check for sudden load change. Check that the setting of Pr.369 (Pr.851) Number of encoder pulses does not differ from the actual number
of encoder pulses.
Corrective action Set Pr.285 and Pr.853 correctly. Keep the load stable. Set Pr.369 (Pr.851) correctly.
Vector
7956. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
79
Operation panel indication E.ECT FR-LU08 indication Encoder signal loss
Name Signal loss detection
Description The inverter output is shut off when the encoder signal is shut off under orientation control, encoder feedback control or vector control. This protective function is not available in the initial status.
Check point
Check for the encoder signal loss. Check that the encoder specifications are correct. Check for a loose connector. Check that the switch setting of a Vector control compatible option is correct. Check that the power is supplied to the encoder. Alternatively, check that the power is not supplied to the
encoder later than the inverter. Check that the voltage of the power supplied to the encoder is the same as the encoder output voltage.
Corrective action
Remedy the signal loss. Use an encoder that meets the specifications. Make connection securely. Make a switch setting of a Vector control compatible option correctly. (Refer to page 88.) Supply the power to the encoder. Or supply the power to the encoder at the same time when the power is
supplied to the inverter. If the power is supplied to the encoder after sent to the inverter, check that the encoder signal is properly sent and set "0 (initial value)" in Pr.376 Encoder signal loss detection enable/disable selection to disable signal loss detection.
Make the voltage of the power supplied to the encoder the same as the encoder output voltage.
Operation panel indication
E.OD FR-LU08 indication Position fault
Name Excessive position fault
Description The inverter output is shut off when the difference between the position command and position feedback exceeds the setting of Pr.427 Excessive level error during position control. This protective function is not available in the initial status.
Check point Check that the position detecting encoder mounting orientation matches the parameter. Check that the load is not large. Check that the settings of Pr.427 and Pr.369 (Pr.851) Number of encoder pulses are correct.
Corrective action Check the parameters. Reduce the load. Set Pr.427 and Pr.369 (Pr.851) correctly.
Operation panel indication
E.ECA FR-LU08 indication ENC direction fault
Name Encoder signal loss for orientation
Description The inverter output is shut off when the machine end encoder signal is shut off during machine end orientation control under Vector control. This protective function is not available in the initial status.
Check point
Check for the encoder signal loss. Check that the encoder specifications are correct. Check for a loose connector. Check that the switch setting of a Vector control compatible option is correct. Check that the power is supplied to the encoder. Alternatively, check that the power is not supplied to the
encoder later than the inverter. Check that the voltage of the power supplied to the encoder is the same as the encoder output voltage.
Corrective action
Remedy the signal loss. Use an encoder that meets the specifications. Make connection securely. Make a switch setting of a Vector control compatible option correctly. (Refer to page 88.) Supply the power to the encoder. Or supply the power to the encoder at the same time when the power is
supplied to the inverter. If the power is supplied to the encoder after sent to the inverter, check that the encoder signal is properly sent and set "0 (initial value)" in Pr.376 Encoder signal loss detection enable/disable selection to disable signal loss detection.
Make the voltage of the power supplied to the encoder the same as the encoder output voltage.
Vector
Vector
6 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation panel indication E.MB1 to 7
to FR-LU08 indication E.MB1 Fault to E.MB7 Fault
Name Brake sequence fault
Description The inverter output is shut off when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence function (Pr.278 to Pr.285). This protective function is not available in the initial status. (The brake sequence function is invalid.) (For details on fault records, refer to page 572.)
Check point Find the cause of the fault occurrence. Corrective action Check the set parameters and perform wiring properly.
Operation panel indication
E.EP FR-LU08 indication Encoder phase fault
Name Encoder phase fault
Description The inverter output is shut off when the rotation command of the inverter differs from the actual motor rotation direction detected from the encoder during offline auto tuning. This protective function is not available in the initial status.
Check point Check for mis-wiring of the encoder cable. Check if the Pr.359 (Pr.852) Encoder rotation direction setting is incorrect.
Corrective action Perform connection and wiring securely. Change the Pr.359 (Pr.852) setting.
Operation panel indication
E.MP FR-LU08 indication MagnetPole Pos Fault
Name Magnetic pole position unknown
Description When the offset value between the PM motor home magnetic pole position and the home position of the encoder (position detector) is unknown, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check point Check that the encoder position tuning was performed. Check that the encoder position tuning ended properly. When Pr.1105 (Pr.887) Encoder magnetic pole
position offset = "9999", the encoder position tuning does not end properly.
Corrective action Perform encoder position tuning with Pr.373 (Pr.871) Encoder position tuning setting/status. (Refer to page
542.) Remove the cause of the tuning error, and perform tuning again. (Refer to page 542.)
Operation panel indication E.EF FR-LU08 indication E.EF
Name External fault during output operation
Description When the X32 signal turns OFF (the contact opens) due to an external fault or other factor, the inverter output is shut off. This function is available when "32" is set in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection). This protective function is not available in the initial status (X32 signal is not assigned).
Check point Check that the X32 signal is OFF. Corrective action Make sure that there is no problem in starting operation, and turn ON the X32 signal.
Operation panel indication E.IAH FR-LU08 indication Abnormal Intnl Temp
Name Abnormal internal temperature (IP55 compatible models only) Description The inverter output is shut off when the inverter internal temperature reaches the specified value or higher.
Check point Check for too high surrounding air temperature. Check if the internal air circulation fan or the cooling fan stops due to a fault.
Corrective action Install an inverter suitable for the installation environment. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Hardware).) Replace the internal air circulation fan or the cooling fan.
Operation panel indication E.LCI FR-LU08 indication 4 mA input fault
Name 4 mA input fault
Description The inverter output is shut off when the analog input current is 2 mA or less for the time set in Pr.778 4 mA input check filter. This function is available when Pr.573 4 mA input check selection = "2 or 3". (Refer to page 517.) This protective function is not available in the initial status.
Check point Check for a break in the wiring for the analog current input. Check that the Pr.778 setting is not too short.
Corrective action Check the wiring for the analog current input. Set the Pr.778 setting larger.
Vector
Vector
7976. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
79
Operation panel indication E.PCH FR-LU08 indication Pre-charge fault
Name Pre-charge fault
Description
The inverter output is shut off when the pre-charge time exceeds Pr.764 Pre-charge time limit. The inverter output is shut off when the measured value exceeds Pr.763 Pre-charge upper detection level during pre- charging. This function is available when Pr.764 and Pr.763 are set (refer to page 618). This protective function is not available in the initial status.
Check point
Check that the Pr.764 setting is not too short. Check that the Pr.763 setting is not too small. Check that the Pr.127 PID control automatic switchover frequency setting is not too low. Check for a break in the connection to the pump.
Corrective action
Set the Pr.764 setting longer. Set the Pr.763 setting larger. Set the Pr.127 setting higher. Check the connection to the pump.
Operation panel indication E.PID FR-LU08 indication PID signal fault
Name PID signal fault
Description
The inverter output is shut off if the measured value exceeds the PID upper limit or PID lower limit parameter setting, or the absolute deviation value exceeds the PID deviation parameter setting during PID control. Set this function in Pr.131 PID upper limit, Pr.132 PID lower limit, Pr.553 PID deviation limit, and Pr.554 PID signal operation selection. (Refer to page 601.) This protective function is not available in the initial status.
Check point Check the meter for a failure or break. Check that the parameter settings are correct.
Corrective action Check that the meter has no failure or break. Set the parameters correctly.
Operation panel indication E. 1 to E. 3
to FR-LU08 indication Fault 1 to Fault 3
Name Option fault
Description
The inverter output is shut off when a contact fault is found between the inverter and the plug-in option, or when the communication option is not connected to the connector 1.
For the FR-A800-GF, the inverter output is shut off when a connector contact fault or the like occurs between the CC-Link IE Field network communication circuit board and the inverter control circuit board.
The inverter output is shut off when encoder feedback control is performed while 10 poles or more is set in Pr.144 Speed setting switchover.
Appears when the switch for manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
Check point
Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely. (1 to 3 indicate connector numbers for connection of options.)
For the FR-A800-GF, check that the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board is securely installed to the connector of the inverter control circuit board.
Check for excessive noise around the inverter. Check if the communication option is connected to the connector 2 or 3. For encoder feedback control operation, check that the number of motor poles is correct.
Corrective action
Connect the plug-in option securely. Connect the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board of the FR-A800-GF securely. Take precautions against noise if there are devices producing excessive electrical noise around the inverter.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, contact your sales representative. Connect the communication option to the connector 1. For encoder feedback control operation, use a motor with 8 poles or less. Set the switch on the plug-in option, which is for manufacturer setting, back to the initial setting. (Refer to the
Instruction Manual of each option.)
8 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Others Indicate the status of the inverter. It is not a fault.
NOTE If protective functions with indication of "Fault" on the FR-LU08 or FR-PU07 are activated, "ERR" appears in the fault history
of the FR-LU08 or FR-PU07. If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
Operation panel indication
E.11 FR-LU08 indication Opst rot dtct fault
Name Opposite rotation deceleration fault
Description
The speed may not decelerate during low speed operation if the rotation direction of the speed command and the estimated speed differ when the rotation is changing from forward to reverse or from reverse to forward during torque control under Real sensorless vector control. The inverter output is shut off when overload occurs due to the un-switched rotation direction. This protective function is not available in the initial status (V/F control). (This function is only available under Real sensorless vector control.)
Check point Check that the rotation direction is not switched from forward to reverse rotation (or from reverse to forward) during torque control under Real sensorless vector control.
Corrective action Prevent the motor from switching the rotation direction from forward to reverse (or from reverse to forward)
during torque control under Real sensorless vector control. Contact your sales representative.
Operation panel indication E.0 FR-LU08 indication No faults
Name No fault history
Description Appears when no fault records are stored. (Appears when the fault history is cleared after the protective function has been activated.)
Operation panel indication EV FR-LU08 indication
Name 24 V external power supply operation Description Blinks when the main circuit power supply is off and the 24 V external power supply is being input. Check point Power is supplied from a 24 V external power supply.
Corrective action Turning ON the power supply (main circuit) of the inverter clears the indication. If the indication is still displayed after turning ON of the power supply (main circuit) of the inverter, the power
supply voltage may be low, or the jumper between terminals P/+ and P1 may be disconnected.
Operation panel indication RD FR-LU08 indication Rd
Name Backup in progress
Description The GOT is used for backing up inverter parameters and the data used in the PLC function of inverter. (Refer to page 702.)
Operation panel indication WR FR-LU08 indication WR
Name Restoration in progress Description The backup data stored in the GOT is used to restore the data in the inverter. (Refer to page 702.)
Sensorless
7996. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.5 Causes and corrective actions
80
6.6 Check first when you have a trouble For Real sensorless vector control and Vector control, also refer to the troubleshooting on page 261 (speed control), page 295 (torque control), and page 329 (position control).
If the cause is still unknown after every check, it is recommended to initialize the parameters, set the required parameter values and check again.
6.6.1 Motor does not start Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page
Main circuit
An appropriate power supply voltage is not applied. (The operation panel display is not operating.)
Power on a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), an earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB), or a magnetic contactor (MC).
Check for the decreased input voltage, input phase loss, and wiring. If only the control power is ON when using a separate power source for the control circuit, turn ON the main circuit power. 77
The motor is not connected properly. Check the wiring between the inverter and the motor. If the electronic bypass function is active, check the wiring of the magnetic contactor (MC) between the inverter and the motor.
55
The jumper across P/+ to P1 is disconnected. A DC reactor (FR-HEL) is not connected.
Securely fit a jumper across P/+ and P1. When using a DC reactor (FR-HEL), remove the jumper across P/ + to P1, and then connect the DC reactor. Connect the DC reactor securely when required according to the capacity.
55, 109
0 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Input signal
A start signal is not input.
Check the start command source, and input a start signal.
PU operation mode: / External operation mode: STF/STR signal
393
Both the forward and reverse rotation start signals (STF, STR) are input simultaneously.
Turn ON only one of the forward and reverse rotation start signals (STF or STR). When the STF and STR signals are turned ON simultaneously in the initial setting, a stop command is given.
68
Frequency command is zero. (The [FWD] or [REV] LED indicator on the operation panel is blinking.)
Check the frequency command source and input a frequency command. 393
The AU signal is not ON when terminal 4 is used for frequency setting. (The [FWD] or [REV] LED indicator on the operation panel is blinking.)
Turn ON the AU signal. Turning ON the AU signal activates terminal 4 input. 496
The Output stop (MRS) signal or Inverter reset (RES) signal is ON. (The [FWD] or [REV] LED indicator on the operation panel is blinking.)
Turn the MRS or RES signal OFF. The inverter starts the operation with a given start command and a frequency command after turning OFF the MRS or RES signal. Before turning OFF, ensure the safety.
68
The CS signal is OFF while the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected (Pr.57 Restart coasting time 9999). (The [FWD] or [REV] LED indicator on the operation panel is blinking.)
Turn ON the Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start (CS) signal. When the CS signal is assigned to an input terminal, automatic restart operation is enabled when the CS signal is turned ON.
628
The jumper connector for selecting sink logic or source logic is incorrectly installed. (The [FWD] or [REV] LED indicator on the operation panel is blinking.)
Check that the control logic switchover jumper connector is correctly installed. If it is not installed correctly, the input signal is not recognized.
72
The wiring of the encoder is incorrect. (Under encoder feedback control or vector control)
Check the wiring of the encoder. 91
The voltage/current input switch is not correctly set for the analog input signal (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, or 4 to 20 mA). (The [FWD] or [REV] LED indicator on the operation panel is blinking.)
Set Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection, and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting.
496
The key was pressed. (The operation panel indication is
" " (PS).)
During the External operation mode, check the method of restarting
from a input stop from PU. 338, 783
For the separated converter type, terminals RDA and SE of the converter unit are not connected to terminals MRS (X10 signal) and SD (PC for source logic) of the inverter respectively.
Check for secure wiring connections.
Refer to the Instruction Manual (Hardware) of the FR- A802.
Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page
8016. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
80
Parameter setting
Two-wire or three-wire type connection is incorrect.
Check the connection. Use the Start self-holding selection (STP (STOP)) signal when the three-wire type is used.
722
Under V/F control, Pr.0 Torque boost setting is not appropriate.
Increase the Pr.0 setting by 0.5% increments while observing the rotation of a motor. If that makes no difference, decrease the setting.
706
Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection is set.
Check the Pr.78 setting. Set Pr.78 when you want to limit the motor rotation to only one direction. 406
The Pr.79 Operation mode selection setting is incorrect.
Select the operation mode suitable for the input methods of the start command and frequency command. 389
The bias and gain (the calibration parameter C2 to C7) settings are not appropriate.
Check the bias and gain (the calibration parameter C2 to C7) settings. 505
The Pr.13 Starting frequency setting is greater than the set frequency.
Set the frequency higher than the one set in Pr.13. The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal has a value lower than that of Pr.13.
381, 367
Zero is set in frequency settings (such as for multi-speed operation). Especially, Pr.1 Maximum frequency is zero.
Set the frequency command according to the application. Set Pr.1 higher than the actual frequency used. 411, 428
Pr.15 Jog frequency is lower than Pr.13 Starting frequency for JOG operation.
The Pr.15 setting should be equal to or higher than the Pr.13 setting.
381, 382, 410
The Pr.359 (Pr.852) Encoder rotation direction setting is incorrect under encoder feedback control or under vector control.
If the REV indicator on the operation panel is ON even though the forward-rotation command is given, set Pr.359 (Pr.852) = "1". 94, 736
When a Vector control option is used, the option to be used and parameter settings do not match.
Correctly set Pr.862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be used. 226
Operation mode and a writing device do not correspond.
Check Pr.79 Operation mode selection, Pr.338 Communication operation command source, Pr.339 Communication speed command source, Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection and Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection, and select an operation mode suitable for the purpose.
389, 400
The start signal operation selection is set by Pr.250 Stop selection
Check the Pr.250 setting and the connection of the STF and STR signals. 722
The motor has decelerated to a stop when the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is selected.
When power is restored, ensure the safety, and turn OFF the start signal once, then turn ON again to restart. When Pr.261 Power failure stop selection = "2 or 12", the motor automatically restarts after the power is restored.
642
Auto tuning is being performed.
When offline auto tuning ends, press the key of the operation panel for the PU operation. For the External operation, turn OFF the start signal (STF or STR). This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the PUs monitor display returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
532, 542, 551, 638
The automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function or power failure stop function has been activated. (Performing overload operation during input phase loss may cause voltage insufficiency, and that may result in detection of power failure.)
Set Pr.872 Input phase loss protection selection = "1" (input phase failure protection active). Disable the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function and power failure stop function. Reduce the load. Increase the acceleration time if the function was activated during acceleration.
426, 628, 635, 642
The motor test operation is selected under Vector control or PM sensorless vector control.
Check the Pr.800 Control method selection setting. 221
When the FR-HC2, FR-XC, FR-CV, or FR- CC2 is used, the input logic setting of the X10 signal is incorrect.
Set Pr.599 = "0" (initial value for standard models and IP55 compatible models) to use the X10 signal with the NO contact input specification, and Pr.599 = "1" (initial value for separated converter types) to use the X10 signal with the NC contact input specification.
724
Load Load is too heavy. Reduce the load. The shaft is locked. Inspect the machine (motor).
Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page
2 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
6.6.2 Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise
6.6.3 Inverter generates abnormal noise
Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page Input signal Disturbance due to EMI when the frequency
or torque command is given through analog input terminal 1, 2, or 4.
Take countermeasures against EMI. 116
Parameter setting
Increase the Pr.74 Input filter time constant setting if steady operation cannot be performed due to EMI. 503
Parameter setting
No carrier frequency noises (metallic noises) are generated.
In the initial setting, Pr.240 Soft-PWM operation selection is enabled to change motor noise to an unoffending complex tone. Therefore, no carrier frequency noises (metallic noises) are generated. Set Pr.240 = "0" to disable this function.
356
The motor noise increases due to activation of the carrier frequency automatic reduction function when the motor is driven overloaded.
Reduce the load. Disable the automatic reduction function by setting Pr.260 PWM frequency automatic switchover = "0". (As the load remains excessive, overload may cause a protective function E.THT.)
356
Resonance occurs. (Output frequency)
Set Pr.31 to Pr.36, and Pr.552 (frequency jump). When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system, these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped.
429
Resonance occurs. (Carrier frequency)
Change the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting. Changing the PWM carrier frequency produces an effect on avoiding the resonance frequency of a mechanical system or a motor.
356
Set a notch filter. 271 Auto tuning is not performed under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or Vector control.
Perform offline auto tuning. 532
Gain adjustment during PID control is insufficient.
To stabilize the measured value, change the proportional band (Pr.129) to a larger value, the integral time (Pr.130) to a slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr.134) to a slightly shorter time. Check the calibration of set point and measured value.
601
The gain is too high under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control.
During speed control, check the setting of Pr.820 Speed control P gain 2. 254
During torque control, check the setting of Pr.824 Torque control P gain 2 (current loop proportional gain). 294
Others Mechanical looseness Adjust machine/equipment so that there is no mechanical
looseness.
Contact the motor manufacturer. Motor Operating with output phase loss Check the motor wiring.
Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page
Fan The fan cover was not correctly installed when a cooling fan was replaced. Install the fan cover correctly. 816
8036. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
80
6.6.4 Motor generates heat abnormally
6.6.5 Motor rotates in the opposite direction
6.6.6 Speed greatly differs from the setting
Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page
Motor
The motor fan is not working. (Dust is accumulated.)
Clean the motor fan. Improve the environment.
Phase to phase insulation of the motor is insufficient. Check the insulation of the motor.
Main circuit
The inverter output voltage (U, V, W) are unbalanced.
Check the output voltage of the inverter. Check the insulation of the motor. 821
Parameter setting
The Pr.71 Applied motor setting is incorrect. Check the Pr.71 Applied motor setting. 528
Motor current is too large Refer to "6.6.11 Motor current is too large". 807
Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page Main
circuit The phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is incorrect. Connect the output side terminals (terminals U, V, and W) correctly. 55
Input signal
The start signals (STF and STR signals) are connected improperly.
Check the connection. (STF: forward rotation, STR: reverse rotation) 68, 722
The polarity of the frequency command is negative during the polarity reversible operation set by Pr.73 Analog input selection.
Check the polarity of the frequency command. 496
Input signal,
parameter setting
The torque command is negative during torque control under Vector control. Check the torque command value. 283
Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page
Input signal
The frequency setting signal is incorrect. Measure the input signal level. The input signal lines are affected by external EMI.
Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using shielded wires for input signal lines. 118
Parameter setting
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.2 Minimum frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency, and the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings are not appropriate.
Check the settings of Pr.1, Pr.2, and Pr.18. 428
Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings. 505
Pr.31 to Pr.36, and Pr.552 (frequency jump) settings are not appropriate. Narrow down the range of frequency jump. 429
Load
The stall prevention (torque limit) function is activated due to a heavy load.
Reduce the load weight.
Parameter setting
Set Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level) higher according to the load. (If Pr.22 is set too high, an overcurrent trip (E.OC[]) is likely to occur.)
245, 431
Motor Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.
4 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
6.6.7 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page
Parameter setting
The acceleration/deceleration time is too short. Increase the acceleration/deceleration time. 367
The torque boost (Pr.0, Pr.46, Pr.112) setting is not appropriate under V/F control, so the stall prevention function is activated.
Increase/decrease the Pr.0 Torque boost setting value by 0.5% increments so that stall prevention does not occur. 706
The base frequency does not match the motor characteristics.
Under V/F control, set Pr.3 Base frequency, Pr.47 Second V/F (base frequency), and Pr.113 Third V/F (base frequency). 707
Under Vector control, set Pr.84 Rated motor frequency. 221
Regeneration avoidance operation is performed.
If the frequency becomes unstable during regeneration avoidance operation, decrease the setting of Pr.886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain.
732
Load
The stall prevention (torque limit) function is activated due to a heavy load.
Reduce the load.
Parameter setting
Set Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level) higher according to the load. (If Pr.22 is set too high, an overcurrent trip (E.OC[]) is likely to occur.)
245, 431
Motor Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.
8056. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
80
6.6.8 Speed varies during operation Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and encoder feedback control, the output frequency varies between 0 and 2 Hz as the load fluctuates. This is a normal operation and not a fault.
Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page
Load The load varies during an operation. Select Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or encoder feedback control. 221, 736
Input signal
The frequency setting signal is varying. Check the frequency setting signal.
The frequency setting signal is affected by EMI.
Set filter to the analog input terminal using Pr.74 Input filter time constant, Pr.822 Speed setting filter 1. 503
Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using shielded wires for input signal lines. 118
A malfunction is occurring due to the undesirable current generated when the transistor output unit is connected.
Use terminal PC (terminal SD when source logic) as a common terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable current. 74
A multi-speed command signal is chattering. Take countermeasures to suppress chattering.
The feedback signal from the encoder is affected by EMI.
Run the encoder cable away from any EMI source such as the main circuit and power supply voltage. Earth (ground) the shield of the encoder cable to the enclosure using a metal P-clip or U-clip.
91
Parameter setting
Fluctuation of power supply voltage is too large.
Under V/F control, change the Pr.19 Base frequency voltage setting (approximately by 3%). 707
The Pr.80 Motor capacity and Pr.81 Number of motor poles settings are not appropriate for the motor capacity under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control.
Check the settings of Pr.80 and Pr.81. 221
The wiring length exceeds 30 m when Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control is selected.
Perform offline auto tuning. 532
Under V/F control, wiring is too long and a voltage drop occurs.
In the low-speed range, adjust the Pr.0 Torque boost setting by 0.5% increments. 706
Change the control method to Advanced magnetic flux vector control or Real sensorless vector control. 221
Hunting occurs by the generated vibration, for example, when structural rigidity of the load is insufficient.
Disable automatic control functions, such as the energy saving operation, fast-response current limit operation, torque limit, regeneration avoidance function, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, encoder feedback control, droop control, stall prevention, online auto tuning, notch filter, and orientation control. For PID control, set smaller values to Pr.129 PID proportional band and Pr.130 PID integral time. Lower the control gain to increase the stability.
Change the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting. 356
6 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
6.6.9 Operation mode is not changed properly
6.6.10 Operation panel (FR-DU08) display is not operating
6.6.11 The motor current is too large
Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page Input signal The start signal (STF or STR) is ON. Check that the STF and STR signals are OFF.
When either is ON, the operation mode cannot be changed. 68, 722
Parameter setting
The Pr.79 Operation mode selection setting is not appropriate.
When the Pr.79 is set to "0 (initial value)", the operation mode is the External operation mode at power ON. To switch to the PU
operation mode, press the key on the operation panel
(press the key on the parameter unit (FR-PU07)). At other settings (1 to 4, 6, 7), the operation mode is limited accordingly.
389
Operation mode and a writing device do not correspond.
Check Pr.79 Operation mode selection, Pr.338 Communication operation command source, Pr.339 Communication speed command source, Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection and Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection, and select an operation mode suitable for the purpose.
389, 400
Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page Main
circuit, control circuit
The power is not input. Input the power. 46
Front cover
The operation panel is not properly connected to the inverter. Check if the inverter front cover is installed securely. 33
Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page
Parameter setting
The torque boost (Pr.0, Pr.46, Pr.112) setting is not appropriate under V/F control, so the stall prevention function is activated.
Increase/decrease the Pr.0 Torque boost setting value by 0.5% increments so that stall prevention does not occur. 706
The V/F pattern is not appropriate when V/ F control is performed. (Pr.3, Pr.14, Pr.19)
Set the rated frequency of the motor to Pr.3 Base frequency. Use Pr.19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage (for example, rated motor voltage).
707
Change the Pr.14 Load pattern selection setting according to the load characteristic. 708
The stall prevention (torque limit) function is activated due to a heavy load.
Reduce the load weight. Set Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level)higher according to the load. (If Pr.22 is set too high, an overcurrent trip (E.OC[]) is likely to occur.)
245, 431
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor. Offline auto tuning is not performed under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or Vector control.
Perform offline auto tuning. 532
When PM sensorless vector control is selected for an IPM motor other than MM- CF, offline auto tuning is not performed.
Perform offline auto tuning for the IPM motor. 551
8076. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
80
6.6.12 Speed does not accelerate Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page
Input signal
The start command or frequency command is chattering. Check if the start command and the frequency command are correct.
The wiring length is too long for the analog frequency command, causing a voltage (current) drop.
Perform the bias and gain calibration for the analog input. 505
The input signal lines are affected by external EMI.
Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using shielded wires for input signal lines. 118
Parameter setting
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.2 Minimum frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency, and the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings are not appropriate.
Check the settings of Pr.1 and Pr.2. To operate at 120 Hz or higher, set Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency. 428
Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings. 505
The maximum voltage (current) input value is not set during the External operation. (Pr.125, Pr.126, Pr.18)
Check the settings of Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency and Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency. To operate at 120 Hz or higher, set Pr.18.
428, 505
The torque boost (Pr.0, Pr.46, Pr.112) setting is not appropriate under V/F control, so the stall prevention function is activated.
Increase/decrease the Pr.0 Torque boost setting value by 0.5% increments so that stall prevention does not occur. 706
The V/F pattern is not appropriate when V/ F control is performed. (Pr.3, Pr.14, Pr.19)
Set the rated frequency of the motor to Pr.3 Base frequency. Use Pr.19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage (for example, rated motor voltage).
707
Change the Pr.14 Load pattern selection setting according to the load characteristic. 708
The stall prevention (torque limit) function is activated due to a heavy load.
Reduce the load weight. Set Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level) higher according to the load. (If Pr.22 is set too high, an overcurrent trip (E.OC[]) is likely to occur.)
245, 431
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor. Auto tuning is not performed under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or Vector control.
Perform offline auto tuning. 532
The setting of pulse train input is not appropriate.
Check the specification of the pulse generator (open collector output or complementary output) and check the adjustment of the pulse train and frequency (Pr.385 Frequency for zero input pulse and Pr.386 Frequency for maximum input pulse).
406
During PID control, the output frequency is automatically controlled so that the measured value equals the set point. 601
Main circuit
A brake resistor is connected across terminals P/+ and P1 or across P1 and PR by mistake.
Connect an optional brake resistor (FR-ABR) across terminals P/+ and PR. 97
8 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
6.6.13 Unable to write parameter setting
6.6.14 Power lamp is not lit
Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page Input signal
Operation is being performed (the STF or STR signal is ON).
Stop the operation. When Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "0 (initial value)", writing is enabled only during a stop. 345
Parameter setting
Parameter setting was attempted in the External operation mode.
Choose the PU operation mode. Or, set Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "2" to enable parameter writing regardless of the operation mode.
345, 389
Parameter write is disabled by the Pr.77 Parameter write selection setting. Check the Pr.77 setting. 345
The key lock mode is enabled by the Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection setting.
Check the Pr.161 setting. 341
Operation mode and a writing device do not correspond.
Check Pr.79, Pr.338, Pr.339, Pr.550 and Pr.551, and select an operation mode suitable for the purpose. 389, 400
Under PM sensorless vector control, setting "25" in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection was attempted. Or, setting PM sensorless vector control was attempted while Pr.72 = "25".
Under PM sensorless vector control, "25" cannot be set in Pr.72. (A sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) cannot be used under PM sensorless vector control.)
356
Check point Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to
page Main
circuit, control circuit
The wiring or installation is inadequate. Check for secure wiring and installation. The power lamp is lit when power is supplied to the control circuit (R1/ L11, S1/L21).
54
8096. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
81
MEMO
0 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
CHAPTER 7
C H
A PT
ER 7
4
5
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
6
7
8
9
10
7.1 Inspection item......................................................................................................................................................812 7.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents, and powers...............................................................................821
811
81
7 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
This chapter explains the precautions for maintenance and inspection of this product. Always read the instructions before use. For the precautions for maintenance and inspection of the separated converter type inverter, refer to the FR-A802 (Separated Converter Type) Instruction Manual (Hardware). For the precautions for maintenance and inspection of the IP55 compatible model inverter, refer to the FR-A806 (IP55/UL Type 12 specification) Instruction Manual (Hardware).
7.1 Inspection item The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any fault from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
Precautions for maintenance and inspection When accessing the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF. Then, make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/- on the inverter is not more than 30 VDC using a digital multimeter, etc.
7.1.1 Daily inspection Basically, check for the following faults during operation.
Motor operation fault Improper installation environment Cooling system fault Abnormal vibration, abnormal noise Abnormal overheat, discoloration
7.1.2 Periodic inspection Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection. Consult us for periodic inspection.
NOTE When using the safety stop function, periodic inspection is required to confirm that safety function of the safety system
operates correctly. For more details, refer to the Safety Stop Function Instruction Manual.
Check and clean the cooling system: Clean the air filter, etc. Check the tightening and retighten: The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration, temperature
changes, etc. Check and tighten them. Tighten them according to the specified tightening torque. (Refer to page 57.)
Check the conductors and insulating materials for corrosion and damage. Measure the insulation resistance. Check and change the cooling fan and relay.
2 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7.1 Inspection item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
7.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection
Area of inspection
Inspection item Description
Inspection interval
Corrective action at fault
occurrence
Check by user
Daily Periodic*3
General
Surrounding environment
Check the surrounding air temperature, humidity, dirt, corrosive gas, oil mist, etc. Improve the
environment.
Overall unit Check for unusual vibration and noise.
Check fault location and retighten.
Check for dirt, oil, and other foreign material.*1 Clean.
Power supply voltage
Check that the main circuit voltage and control circuit voltage are normal.*2
Inspect the power supply.
Main circuit
General
Check with megger (between main circuit terminals and earth (ground) terminal). Contact the
manufacturer. Check for loose screws and bolts. Retighten.
Check for overheat traces on the parts. Contact the manufacturer.
Check for stains. Clean.
Conductors and cables
Check conductors for distortion. Contact the manufacturer.
Check cable sheaths for breakage and deterioration (crack, discoloration, etc.). Contact the
manufacturer.
Transformer/ reactor
Check for unusual odor and abnormal increase of whining sound.
Stop the equipment and contact the manufacturer.
Terminal block Check for a damage.
Stop the equipment and contact the manufacturer.
Smoothing aluminum electrolytic capacitor
Check for liquid leakage. Contact the manufacturer.
Check for safety valve projection and bulge. Contact the manufacturer.
Visual check and judge by the life check of the main circuit capacitor. (Refer to page 815.)
Relay/contactor Check that the operation is normal and no chattering sound is heard. Contact the
manufacturer.
Resistor Check for cracks in the resistor insulator. Contact the
manufacturer.
Check for a break in the cable. Contact the manufacturer.
Control circuit, protection circuit
Operation check
Check for an output voltage imbalance between phases while operating the inverter alone. Contact the
manufacturer. Check that no fault is found in protective and display
circuits in a sequence protective operation test. Contact the manufacturer.
C om
po ne
nt s
ch ec
k
Overall Check for unusual odor and discoloration.
Stop the equipment and contact the manufacturer.
Check for serious rust development. Contact the manufacturer.
Aluminum electrolytic capacitor
Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor and deformation trace. Contact the
manufacturer. Visual check and judge by the life check of the control
circuit capacitor. (Refer to page 815.)
Cooling system
Cooling fan
Check for unusual vibration and noise. Replace the fan.
Check for loose screws and bolts. Fix with the fan cover fixing screws.
Check for stains. Clean.
Heat sink Check for clogging. Clean. Check for stains. Clean.
8137. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7.1 Inspection item
81
*1 Oil component of the heat dissipation grease used inside the inverter may leak out. The oil component, however, is not flammable, corrosive, nor conductive and is not harmful to humans. Wipe off such oil component.
*2 It is recommended to install a voltage monitoring device for checking the voltage of the power supplied to the inverter. *3 One to two years of periodic inspection cycle is recommended. However, it differs according to the installation environment.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
NOTE Continuous use of a leaked, deformed, or degraded smoothing aluminum electrolytic capacitor (as shown in the table above)
may lead to a burst, breakage, or fire. Replace such capacitor without delay.
7.1.4 Checking the inverter and converter modules Preparation
Disconnect the external power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and motor cables (U, V, W). Prepare a continuity tester. (For the resistance measurement, use the 100 range.)
Checking method Change the polarity of the tester alternately at the inverter terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, P/+, and N/- and check the electric continuity.
NOTE Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged. At the time of electric discontinuity, the measured value is almost . When there is an instantaneous electric continuity, due
to the smoothing capacitor, the tester may not indicate . At the time of electric continuity, the measured value is several to several tens of . When all measured values are almost the same (although values may not be constant depending on the tester type), it shows that there are no electrical paths with problems.
Module device numbers and terminals to be checked
(Assuming that an analog meter is used.)
Display
Indication Check that indications are correct. Contact the
manufacturer. Check for stains. Clean.
Meter/counter Check that readouts are correct.
Stop the equipment and contact the manufacturer.
Load motor Operation check
Check for vibration and abnormal increase in operation noise.
Stop the equipment and contact the manufacturer.
Area of inspection
Inspection item Description
Inspection interval
Corrective action at fault
occurrence
Check by user
Daily Periodic*3
Tester polarity Continuity
Tester polarity Continuity
Converter module
D1 R/L1 P/+ No
D4 R/L1 N/- Yes
P/+ R/L1 Yes N/- R/L1 No
D2 S/L2 P/+ No
D5 S/L2 N/- Yes
P/+ S/L2 Yes N/- S/L2 No
D3 T/L3 P/+ No
D6 T/L3 N/- Yes
P/+ T/L3 Yes N/- T/L3 No
Inverter module
TR1 U P/+ No
TR4 U N/- Yes
P/+ U Yes N/- U No
TR3 V P/+ No
TR6 V N/- Yes
P/+ V Yes N/- V No
TR5 W P/+ No
TR2 W N/- Yes
P/+ W Yes N/- W No
4 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7.1 Inspection item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
7.1.5 Cleaning Always run the inverter in a clean status. When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.
NOTE Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as these will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off. The display, etc. of the operation panel (FR-DU08) and parameter unit (FR-PU07) are vulnerable to detergent and alcohol.
Therefore, avoid using them for cleaning.
7.1.6 Replacement of parts The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices. The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced performance or fault of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be replaced periodically. Use the life check function as a guidance of parts replacement.
*1 Estimated lifespan for when the yearly average surrounding air temperature is 40C. (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
*2 Output current: 80% of the inverter rating
NOTE For parts replacement, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
Inverter parts life display The inverter diagnoses the main circuit capacitor, control circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and inrush current limit circuit by itself and estimates their lives. The self-diagnostic warning is output when the life span of each part is near its end. It gives an indication of replacement time. Guideline for life judgment using the life warning output
Converter module Inverter module
D1 D2 D3
D4 D5 D6
TR1 TR3 TR5
TR4 TR6 TR2
U
V
W
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
C
P/+
N/
Part name Estimated lifespan*1 Description Cooling fan 10 years Replace (as required) Main circuit smoothing capacitor 10 years*2 Replace (as required)
On-board smoothing capacitor 10 years*2 Replace the board (as required). Relays As required Main circuit fuse inside the inverter (FR-A840- 04320(160K) or higher) 10 years Replace (as required)
Part Judgment level Main circuit capacitor 85% of the initial capacity Control circuit capacitor Estimated remaining life 10% Inrush current limit circuit Estimated remaining life 10% (Power ON: 100,000 times left) Cooling fan Less than the specified speed
8157. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7.1 Inspection item
81
NOTE Refer to page 359 to perform the life check of the inverter parts.
Replacement procedure of the cooling fan The replacement interval of the cooling fan used for cooling the parts generating heat such as the main circuit semiconductor is greatly affected by the surrounding air temperature. When unusual noise and/or vibration are noticed during inspection, the cooling fan must be replaced immediately.
Removal (FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 04750(90K), FR-A840-00083(2.2K) to 03610(132K)) 1. Push the hooks from above and remove the fan cover.
2. Disconnect the fan connectors.
3. Remove the fan.
*1 The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity.
Installation (FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 04750(90K), FR-A840-00083(2.2K) to 03610(132K)) 1. After confirming the orientation of the fan, install the fan so that the "AIR FLOW" arrow faces up.
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 00250(3.7K) FR-A840-00083(2.2K), 00126(3.7K)
FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to 01540(30K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to 00770(30K)
FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher FR-A840-00930(37K) to 03610(132K)
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 00250(3.7K) FR-A840-00083(2.2K), 00126(3.7K)
FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to 01540(30K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to 00770(30K)
FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher FR-A840-00930(37K) to 03610(132K)
Fan cover
Fan
Fan cover
Fan connection connector *1
Fan cover
Fan connection connector
AIR FLOW
6 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7.1 Inspection item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2. Connect the fan connectors.
3. Install the fan cover.
NOTE Installing the fan in the opposite direction of air flow may shorten the inverter life. Ensure that the cables are not caught when the fan is installed. Switch OFF the power before starting the fan replacement work. To prevent an electric shock accident, keep the inverter with
its covers on during fans replacement since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after power OFF.
Removal (FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher) 1. Remove the fan cover fixing screws, and remove the fan cover.
2. Disconnect the fan connector and remove the fan block.
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 00250(3.7K) FR-A840-00083(2.2K), 00126(3.7K)
FR-A820-00930(18.5K), 01250(22K) FR-A840-00470(18.5K), 00620(22K)
FR-A820-01870(37K), 02330(45K) FR-A840-00930(37K) to 01800(55K)
FR-A820-03160(55K) or higher FR-A840-02160(75K) to 03610(132K)
FR-A820-01540(30K) FR-A840-00770(30K)
FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to 00770(15K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to 00380(15K)
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 00250(3.7K) FR-A840-00083(2.2K), 00126(3.7K)
FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to 01540(30K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to 00770(30K)
FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher FR-A840-00930(37K) to 03610(132K)
2. Insert hooks until you hear a click sound. 1. Insert hooks
into holes.
2. Insert hooks until you hear a click sound.
1. Insert hooks into holes. 2. Insert hooks
until you hear a click sound.
1. Insert hooks into holes.
8177. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7.1 Inspection item
81
3. Remove the fan fixing screws, and remove the fan.
*1 The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity.
Installation (FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher) 1. After confirming the orientation of the fan, install the fan so that the "AIR FLOW" arrow faces up.
2. Install fans referring to the above figure. The tightening torque of the fan fixing screws is 0.73 Nm.
NOTE Installing the fan in the opposite direction of air flow may shorten the inverter life. Ensure that the cables are not caught when the fan is installed. Switch OFF the power before starting the fan replacement work. To prevent an electric shock accident, keep the inverter with
its covers on during fans replacement since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after power OFF.
Smoothing capacitors A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the DC section of the main circuit, and an aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Adverse effects from ripple currents deteriorate capacitors. Replacement intervals of capacitors vary greatly with surrounding temperatures and operating conditions. Replace them roughly every 10 years when used in normal air-conditioned environments. Inspecting the product visually:
Case: Check that the sides and bottom of the capacitor have not ruptured. Rubber seal: Check for any noticeable bulging or severe cracks. Check for external cracks, discoloration, leakage, etc. It is assumed that the capacitor has reached the end of its life when
its capacity has dropped below 80% of its rated capacity.
NOTE The inverter diagnoses the main circuit capacitor and control circuit capacitor by itself and estimates its remaining life. (Refer
to page 359.)
1)
2)
3)
Fan *1
Fan connection connector
Fan cover
Fan block
AIR FLOW
8 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7.1 Inspection item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Relay output terminals The contacts of relays deteriorate over time. To prevent faults from occurring, relays must be replaced when they have
reached the maximum of switching operations (switching life). The control terminal block must be replaced (refer to page 819) in case of failure of either relay between the relay output
terminals C1 and B1 or A1, or terminals C2 and B2 or A2. After replacing the control terminal block, connect the jumper connector to the correct position in accordance with the control logic of input signals. (Refer to page 72.)
Main circuit fuse inside the inverter (FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher) Fuses are used in some inverters. Replacement intervals of fuses vary greatly with surrounding temperatures and operating conditions. Replace them roughly every 10 years when used in normal air-conditioned environments.
7.1.7 Removal and reinstallation of the control circuit terminal block
This product has a removable control circuit terminal block, which can be replaced with a new one or a control terminal option.
Removal and reinstallation 1. Loosen the two installation screws at the both side of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be
removed.) Slide down the control circuit terminal block to remove it.
2. Be careful not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it with the mounting screws.
NOTE Before starting the replacement, power OFF the inverter, wait for at least 10 minutes, and then check that the charge lamp is
OFF to ensure safety.
Removal and reinstallation precautions The following are the precautions to remove or reinstall the control circuit terminal block. Observe the following precautions and handle the inverter properly to avoid malfunctions or failures.
To remove or reinstall the control circuit terminal block, keep it upright so that it is parallel with the inverter. To install the control circuit terminal block, slide it upward so that the tongues on the inverter slot into the grooves on the
terminal block.
Loosen the screws
8197. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7.1 Inspection item
82
Check that the terminal block is parallel to the inverter and the pins on the inverter control circuit connector are not bent. After checking proper connection, fix the terminal block in place with two screws.
NOTE Do not tilt the terminal block while tightening the screws or removing it from the inverter. (Otherwise, a stress applied to the
control circuit terminal block or the control circuit connector may cause damage to them.) After replacing the control terminal block, connect the jumper connector to the correct position in accordance with the control
logic of input signals. (Refer to page 72.)
Tighten the screws.
Control circuit terminal block
Inverter's control circuit connector
A
View from side A
Control circuit terminal block Inverter's control circuit connector
Insert the terminal block parallel to the
inverter.
Slot the tongue into the groove.
0 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7.1 Inspection item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
7.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents, and powers
Since the voltages and currents on the inverter power supply and output sides include harmonics, measurement data depends on the instruments used and circuits measured. When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement, measure the following circuits with the instruments given on the next page.
NOTE When installing meters etc. on the inverter output side
When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is long, especially in the 400 V class, small-capacity models, the meters and CTs may generate heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore, choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the current rating. To measure and display the output voltage and output current of the inverter, it is recommended to use the terminal AM and FM/CA output functions of the inverter.
+ -
Ar
As
At
Vr
Vs
Vt
Au
Av
Aw
Vu
Vv
Vw
W21
V
U
V
W
Inverter
Three-phase power supply To the motor
Input voltage
Input current
Output voltage
Output current
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
P/+ N/-
W11
W12
W13 W22
8217. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents, and powers
82
Measuring points and instruments
*1 Use an FFT to measure the output voltage accurately. A digital multimeter or general measuring instrument cannot measure accurately. *2 When the setting of Pr.195 ABC1 terminal function selection is the positive logic.
Item Measuring point Measuring instrument Remarks (reference measured value)
Input voltage V1
Between R/L1 and S/L2, S/L2 and T/L3, and T/L3 and R/L1
Digital power meter (designed for inverter)
Commercial power Within permissible AC voltage fluctuation. (Refer to page 826.)
Input current I1
Line current at R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3
Input power P1
At R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3, and between R/L1 and S/ L2, S/L2 and T/L3, and T/ L3 and R/L1
P1 = W11 + W12 + W13 (3-wattmeter method)
Input power factor Pf1
Calculate after measuring input voltage, input current and input power.
Output voltage V2
Between U and V, V and W, and W and U
Digital power meter (designed for inverter)*1
Difference between the phases must be within 1% of the maximum output voltage.
Output current I2 Line current at U, V, and W
Digital power meter (designed for inverter)
Difference between the phases must be within 10%.
Output power P2
At U, V, and W, and between U and V, and V and W
P2 = W21 + W22 2-wattmeter method (or 3-wattmeter method)
Output power factor Pf2
Calculate in similar manner to the input power factor.
Converter output Between P/+ and N/- Digital multimeter or other tester Inverter LED indication 1.35 V1 Frequency setting signal
2, and between 4(+) and 5
Digital multimeter or other tester, or moving-coil type instrument (internal resistance 50 k or more)
0 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA
Terminal 5 is a common terminal.
Between 1(+) and 5 0 to 5 VDC and 0 to 10 VDC Power supply for a frequency setting potentiometer
Between 10(+) and 5 5.2 VDC
Between 10E(+) and 5 10 VDC
Frequency meter signal
Between AM(+) and 5 Approximately 10 VDC at maximum frequency (without frequency meter)
Between CA(+) and 5 Approximately 20 mADC at maximum frequency
Between FM(+) and SD
Approximately 5 VDC at maximum frequency (without frequency meter)
Terminal SD is a common terminal.Pulse width T1: Adjust with C0
(Pr.900). Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr.55 (for frequency monitor only).
Start signal, selection signal, reset signal, output stop signal
Between STF, STR, RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, AU, STP (STOP), CS, RES, or MRS(+) and SD (for sink logic)
Voltage when terminal is open: 20 to 30 VDC. Voltage when signal is ON: 1 V or less.
Fault signal Between A1 and C1 Between B1 and C1 Digital multimeter or other tester
Continuity check*2
Normal: discontinuity across A1 and C1 (continuity across B1 and C1) Fault: continuity across A1 and C1 (discontinuity across B1 and C1)
8VDC
T1
T2
2 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents, and powers
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
7.2.1 Measurement of powers Use digital power meters (for inverter) both on the inverter's input and output sides.
7.2.2 Measurement of voltages Inverter input side Use a digital power meter (for inverter) on the inverter's input side.
Inverter output side When using a measuring instrument, use a digital power meter for inverters as the inverter outputs PWM-controlled square wave voltage. The value monitored on the operation panel is the inverter-controlled voltage itself. Monitoring values via the operation panel or by outputting the analog signal is recommended as these values are accurate.
7.2.3 Measurement of currents Use a digital power meter (for inverter) both on the inverter's input and output sides. Since the inverter input current tends to be unbalanced, measurement of three phases is recommended. The correct value cannot be obtained by measuring only one or two phases. On the other hand, the unbalanced ratio of each phase of the output current should be within 10%. The inverter output current can be monitored on the operation panel. The value displayed on the operation panel is accurate even if the output frequency varies. Hence, it is recommended to monitor values on the operation panel.
7.2.4 Measurement of inverter input power factor Calculate the factor from the effective power and the apparent power. A power-factor meter cannot indicate an exact value.
7.2.5 Measurement of converter output voltage (between terminals P and N)
The output voltage of the converter can be measured with a voltmeter (such as a digital multimeter) between terminals P and N. The voltage varies according to the power supply voltage. Approximately 270 to 300 VDC (540 to 600 VDC for the 400 V class) is output when no load is connected. The voltage decreases when a load is applied. When energy is regenerated from the motor during deceleration, for example, the converter output voltage rises to nearly 400 to 450 VDC (800 to 900 VDC for the 400 V class) maximum.
7.2.6 Measurement of inverter output frequency In the initial setting of the FM type inverter, a pulse train proportional to the output frequency is output across the pulse train output terminals FM and SD on the inverter. This pulse train output can be counted by a frequency counter, or a digital multimeter can be used to read the mean value of the pulse train output voltage. When a digital multimeter is used to measure the output frequency, approximately 5 VDC is indicated at the maximum frequency. For detailed specifications of the pulse train output terminal FM, refer to page 463. In the initial setting of the CA type inverter, a pulse train proportional to the output frequency is output across the analog current output terminals CA and 5 on the inverter. Measure the current using a digital multimeter. For detailed specifications of the analog current output terminal CA, refer to page 465.
Total power factor of the inverter = Effective power Apparent power
= Three-phase input power found by the 3-wattmeter method
3V (power supply voltage) I (input current effective value)
8237. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents, and powers
82
7.2.7 Insulation resistance test using megger For the inverter, conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as follows and do not perform the test on
the control circuit. (Use a 500 VDC megger.)
NOTE Before performing the insulation resistance test on the external circuit, disconnect the cables from all terminals of the inverter
so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter. For the continuity test of the control circuit, use a tester for high resistance range and do not use the megger or buzzer.
7.2.8 Withstand voltage test Do not conduct a withstand voltage test. Deterioration may occur.
U V W
Inverter
500 VDC megger
Power supply M
Motor R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
4 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents, and powers
CHAPTER 8
C H
A PT
ER 8
4
5
SPECIFICATIONS
6
7
8
9
10
8.1 Inverter rating........................................................................................................................................................826 8.2 Motor rating...........................................................................................................................................................829 8.3 Common specifications.........................................................................................................................................835 8.4 Outline dimension drawings..................................................................................................................................837
825
82
8 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter explains the specifications of this product. Always read the instructions before use. For the separated converter type inverter, refer to "SPECIFICATIONS" in the FR-A802 (Separated Converter Type) Instruction Manual (Hardware). For the IP55 compatible model inverter, refer to "SPECIFICATIONS" in the FR-A806 (IP55/UL Type12 specification) Instruction Manual (Hardware).
8.1 Inverter rating
200 V class
*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric standard 4-pole motor.
Model FR-A820-[] 00046 00077 00105 00167 00250 00340 00490 00630 00770 00930 01250 01540 01870 02330 03160 03800 04750 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K 90K
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1
SLD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90/ 110 132
LD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 ND (initial setting) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 HD 0.2*2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
O ut
pu t
Rated capacity (kVA)*3
SLD 1.8 2.9 4 6.4 10 13 19 24 29 35 48 59 71 89 120 145 181 LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12 17 22 27 32 43 53 65 81 110 132 165 ND (initial setting) 1.1 1.9 3 4.2 6.7 9.1 13 18 23 29 34 44 55 67 82 110 132 HD 0.6 1.1 1.9 3 4.2 6.7 9.1 13 18 23 29 34 44 55 67 82 110
Rated current (A)
SLD 4.6 7.7 10.5 16.7 25 34 49 63 77 93 125 154 187 233 316 380 475 LD 4.2 7 9.6 15.2 23 31 45 58 70.5 85 114 140 170 212 288 346 432 ND (initial setting) 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215 288 346 HD 1.5 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215 288
Overload current rating*4
SLD 110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40C LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C ND (initial setting) 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C HD 200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C
Rated voltage*5 Three-phase 200 to 240 V
Regenerative braking
Brake transistor Built-in FR-BU2 (option)
Maximum brake torque*7 150% torque, 3% ED*6
100% torque, 3% ED*6
100% torque, 2% ED*6 20% torque, continuous 10% torque,
continuous when the option FR- ABR is used
150% torque, 10% ED 100% torque, 10% ED 100% torque, 6% ED
Po w
er s
up pl
y
Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 170 to 264 V, 50/60 Hz Permissible frequency fluctuation 5%
Rated input current (A)*8
Without DC reactor
SLD 5.3 8.9 13.2 19.7 31.3 45.1 62.8 80.6 96.7 115 151 185 221 269 LD 5 8.3 12.2 18.3 28.5 41.6 58.2 74.8 90.9 106 139 178 207 255 ND (initial setting) 3.9 6.3 10.6 14.1 22.6 33.4 44.2 60.9 80 96.3 113 150 181 216 266
HD 2.3 3.9 6.3 10.6 14.1 22.6 33.4 44.2 60.9 80 96.3 113 150 181 216
With DC reactor
SLD 4.6 7.7 10.5 16.7 25 34 49 63 77 93 125 154 187 233 316 380 475 LD 4.2 7 9.6 15.2 23 31 45 58 70.5 85 114 140 170 212 288 346 432 ND (initial setting) 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215 288 346
HD 1.5 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215 288
Power supply capacity (kVA)*9
Without DC reactor
SLD 2 3.4 5 7.5 12 17 24 31 37 44 58 70 84 103 LD 1.9 3.2 4.7 7 11 16 22 29 35 41 53 68 79 97 ND (initial setting) 1.5 2.4 4 5.4 8.6 13 17 23 30 37 43 57 69 82 101
HD 0.9 1.5 2.4 4 5.4 8.6 13 17 23 30 37 43 57 69 82
With DC reactor
SLD 1.8 2.9 4 6.4 10 13 19 24 29 35 48 59 71 89 120 145 181 LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12 17 22 27 32 43 53 65 81 110 132 165 ND (initial setting) 1.1 1.9 3 4.2 6.7 9.1 13 18 23 29 34 44 55 67 82 110 132
HD 0.6 1.1 1.9 3 4.2 6.7 9.1 13 18 23 29 34 44 55 67 82 110
Protection rating of structure (IEC 60529)*10 Enclosed type Open type (IP00) Cooling system Natural Forced air Approx. mass (kg) 2.0 2.2 3.4 3.4 3.4 6.7 6.7 8.3 15.5 15.5 15.5 22 42 42 54 74 74
6 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.1 Inverter rating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*2 A 0.2 kW motor can be operated under V/F control only. *3 The rated output capacity is the value with respect to 220 V output voltage. *4 The percentage of the overload current rating is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. *5 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about . *6 The built-in brake resistor is used. *7 Value for the ND rating *8 The rated input current is the value at a rated output voltage. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables) affect
the value. *9 The power supply capacity is the value at the rated output current. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables)
affect the value. *10 FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector)
400 V class 00023 to 01800
*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric standard 4-pole motor. *2 A 0.2 kW motor can be operated under V/F control only. *3 The rated output capacity is the value with respect to 440 V output voltage. *4 The percentage of the overload current rating is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
2
Model FR-A840-[] 00023 00038 00052 00083 00126 00170 00250 00310 00380 00470 00620 00770 00930 01160 01800 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1
SLD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75/90 LD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 ND (initial setting) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 HD 0.2*2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
O ut
pu t
Rated capacity (kVA)*3
SLD 1.8 2.9 4 6.3 10 13 19 24 29 36 47 59 71 88 137 LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12 18 22 27 33 43 53 65 81 110 ND (initial setting) 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 18 24 29 34 43 54 66 84 HD 0.6 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 18 24 29 34 43 54 66
Rated current (A)
SLD 2.3 3.8 5.2 8.3 12.6 17 25 31 38 47 62 77 93 116 180 LD 2.1 3.5 4.8 7.6 11.5 16 23 29 35 43 57 70 85 106 144 ND (initial setting) 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86 110 HD 0.8 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86
Overload current rating*4
SLD 110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40C LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C ND (initial setting) 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C HD 200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C
Rated voltage*5 Three-phase 380 to 500 V
Regenerative braking
Brake transistor Built-in
Maximum brake torque*7 100% torque, 2% ED*6 20% torque, continuous when the option FR-ABR is used 100% torque, 10% ED 100% torque, 6% ED *12
Po w
er s
up pl
y
Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 380 to 500 V, 50/60 Hz*11
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 323 to 550 V, 50/60 Hz Permissible frequency fluctuation 5%
Rated input current (A)*8
Without DC reactor
SLD 3.2 5.4 7.8 10.9 16.4 22.5 31.7 40.3 48.2 58.4 76.8 97.6 115 141 LD 3 4.9 7.3 10.1 15.1 22.3 31 38.2 44.9 53.9 75.1 89.7 106 130 ND (initial setting) 2.3 3.7 6.2 8.3 12.3 17.4 22.5 31 40.3 48.2 56.5 75.1 91 108 134
HD 1.4 2.3 3.7 6.2 8.3 12.3 17.4 22.5 31 40.3 48.2 56.5 75.1 91 108
With DC reactor
SLD 2.3 3.8 5.2 8.3 12.6 17 25 31 38 47 62 77 93 116 180 LD 2.1 3.5 4.8 7.6 11.5 16 23 29 35 43 57 70 85 106 144 ND (initial setting) 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86 110
HD 0.8 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86
Power supply capacity (kVA)*9
Without DC reactor
SLD 2.5 4.1 5.9 8.3 12 17 24 31 37 44 59 74 88 107 LD 2.3 3.7 5.5 7.7 12 17 24 29 34 41 57 68 81 99 ND (initial setting) 1.7 2.8 4.7 6.3 9.4 13 17 24 31 37 43 57 69 83 102
HD 1.1 1.7 2.8 4.7 6.3 9.4 13 17 24 31 37 43 57 69 83
With DC reactor
SLD 1.8 2.9 4 6.3 10 13 19 24 29 36 47 59 71 88 137 LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12 18 22 27 33 43 53 65 81 110 ND (initial setting) 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 18 24 29 34 43 54 66 84
HD 0.6 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 18 24 29 34 43 54 66
Protection rating of structure (IEC 60529)*10 Enclosed type Open type (IP00) Cooling system Natural Forced air Approx. mass (kg) 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.4 3.4 6.7 6.7 8.3 8.3 15 15 23 41 41 43
8278. SPECIFICATIONS 8.1 Inverter rating
82
*5 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about . *6 The built-in brake resistor is used. *7 Value for the ND rating *8 The rated input current is the value at a rated output voltage. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables) affect
the value. *9 The power supply capacity is the value at the rated output current. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables)
affect the value. *10 FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector) *11 For the power voltage exceeding 480 V, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection. (For details, refer to page 345.) *12 The braking capability of the inverter can be improved with a commercial brake resistor. (For details, refer to page 97.)
02160 to 06830
*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric standard 4-pole motor. *2 The rated output capacity is the value with respect to 440 V output voltage. *3 The percentage of the overload current rating is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. *4 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about . *5 Value for the ND rating *6 The rated input current is the value at a rated output voltage. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables) affect
the value. *7 The power supply capacity is the value at the rated output current. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables)
affect the value. *8 FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector) *9 For the power voltage exceeding 480 V, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection. (For details, refer to page 345.)
2
Model FR-A840-[] 02160 02600 03250 03610 04320 04810 05470 06100 06830 75K 90K 110K 132K 160K 185K 220K 250K 280K
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1
SLD 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 LD 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 ND (initial setting) 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 HD 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250
O ut
pu t
Rated capacity (kVA)*2
SLD 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521 LD 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 ND (initial setting) 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 HD 84 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367
Rated current (A)
SLD 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610 683 LD 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610 ND (initial setting) 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 HD 110 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481
Overload current rating*3
SLD 110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40C LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C ND (initial setting) 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C HD 200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C
Rated voltage*4 Three-phase 380 to 500 V
Regenerative braking
Brake transistor FR-BU2 (option)
Maximum brake torque*5 10% torque, continuous when the option FR-ABR is used
Po w
er s
up pl
y
Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 380 to 500 V, 50/60 Hz*9
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 323 to 550 V, 50/60 Hz Permissible frequency fluctuation 5%
Rated input current (A)*6
With DC reactor
SLD 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610 683 LD 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610 ND (initial setting) 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547
HD 110 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481
Power supply capacity (kVA)*7
With DC reactor
SLD 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521 LD 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 ND (initial setting) 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417
HD 84 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367
Protection rating of structure (IEC 60529)*8 Open type (IP00) Cooling system Forced air Approx. mass (kg) 52 55 71 78 117 117 166 166 166
2
8 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.1 Inverter rating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
8.2 Motor rating
8.2.1 Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU (1500 r/ min series)
Motor specifications 200 V class Motor model: SF-V5RU[]K 1 2 3 5 7 11 15 18 22 30 37 45 55 Applicable inverter model: FR-A820-[]K (ND rating) 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
Rated output power (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30*1 37*1 45*1 55
Rated current (A) 8.5 11.5 17.6 28.5 37.5 54 72.8 88 102 126 168 198 264 Rated torque (Nm) 9.55 14.1 23.6 35.0 47.7 70.0 95.5 118 140 191 235 286 350 Maximum torque at 150% 60 s (Nm) 14.3 21.1 35.4 52.4 71.6 105 143 176 211 287 353 429 525
Rated speed (r/min) 1500
Maximum speed (r/min) 3000*2 2400
Frame No. 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180M 200L 200L 200L 225S
Inertia moment J (10-4 kgm2) 67.5 105 175 275 400 750 875 1725 1875 3250 3625 3625 6850
Noise*5 75 dB or less 80 dB or less 85 dB or less
Cooling fan (with thermal protector)*7* 8
Voltage Single-phase 200 V 50 Hz / Single-phase 200 to 230 V 60 Hz
Three-phase 200 V 50 Hz / Three-phase 200 to 230 V 60 Hz
Input*3 36/55 W (0.26/0.32 A) 22/28 W (0.11/ 0.13 A) 55/71 W (0.37/0.39 A) 100/156 W (0.47/0.53 A) 85/130 W
(0.46/0.52 A) Recommended thermal setting 0.36 A 0.18 A 0.51 A 0.69 A 0.68 A
Surrounding air temperature and humidity -10 to +40C (non-freezing), 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Structure (Protection rating) Totally enclosed forced ventilated (Motor: IP44, Cooling fan: IP23S)*4
Detector Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase, +12 V/24 VDC power supply*6
Equipment Encoder, thermal protector, fan Insulation class F Vibration rank V10 Approx. mass (kg) 24 33 41 52 62 99 113 138 160 238 255 255 320
8298. SPECIFICATIONS 8.2 Motor rating
83
400 V class
*1 80% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 2400 r/min or faster.) (Contact us separately for details.) *2 The maximum speed of a 3.7 kW motor or less is 3600 r/min. Consult our sales office for use of these motor. *3 Power (current) at 50/60 Hz. *4 Since a brake motor has a window for gap check, the protection rating of both the cooling fan section and brake section of the motor is IP20. The
letter S in IP23S is an additional code indicating that a cooling fan was checked for water protection while it is stationary. *5 The value shown is applicable to the motor at high carrier frequency (Pr.72 = 6 and Pr.240 = 0). *6 A separate power supply of 12/24 V is required for the encoder. (When the FR-A8TP is installed on the inverter, the 24 V power supply from the
FR-A8TP is available.) *7 The cooling fan is equipped with a thermal protector. The cooling fan stops when the coil temperature exceeds the specified value in order to
protect the fan motor. A restrained cooling fan or degraded fan motor insulation could be causes for the rise in coil temperature. The cooling fan re-starts when the coil temperature drops to normal.
*8 The cooling fan voltage and input values are the basic specifications of the cooling fan alone and free air values. The input value becomes slightly larger when it is rotated by this motor due to an increased workload, but the cooling fan can be used as it is. When preparing a thermal relay at the user side, use the recommended thermal setting.
Motor torque The torque characteristics of the SF-V5RU series driven by the inverter are shown in graph form as follows.
Motor model: SF-V5RUH[]K 1 2 3 5 7 11 15 18 22 30 37 45 55 Applicable inverter model: FR-A840-[]K (ND rating) 2.2 2.2 3.7 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
Rated output power (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30*1 37*1 45*1 55
Rated current (A) 4.2 5.8 8.8 14.5 18.5 27.5 35.5 44 51 67 84 99 132 Rated torque (Nm) 9.55 14.1 23.6 35.0 47.7 70.0 95.5 118 140 191 235 286 350 Maximum torque at 150% 60 s (Nm) 14.3 21.1 35.4 52.4 71.6 105 143 176 211 287 353 429 525
Rated speed (r/min) 1500
Maximum speed (r/min) 3000*2 2400
Frame No. 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180M 200L 200L 200L 225S
Inertia moment J (10-4 kgm2) 67.5 105 175 275 400 750 875 1725 1875 3250 3625 3625 6850
Noise*5 75 dB or less 80 dB or less 85 dB or less
Cooling fan (with thermal protector)*7* 8
Voltage Single-phase 200 V 50 Hz / Single-phase 200 to 230 V 60 Hz
Three-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz / Three-phase 400 to 460 V 60 Hz
Input*3 36/55 W (0.26/0.32 A) 22/28 W (0.11/ 0.13 A) 55/71 W (0.19/0.19 A) 100/156 W (0.27/0.30 A) 85/130 W
(0.23/0.26 A) Recommended thermal setting 0.36 A 0.18 A 0.25 A 0.39 A 0.34 A
Surrounding air temperature and humidity -10 to +40C (non-freezing), 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Structure (Protection rating) Totally enclosed forced ventilated (Motor: IP44, Cooling fan: IP23S)*4
Detector Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase, +12 V/24 VDC power supply*6
Equipment Encoder, thermal protector, fan Insulation class F Vibration rank V10 Approx. mass (kg) 24 33 41 52 62 99 113 138 160 238 255 255 320
0 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.2 Motor rating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
These are the case of the motor driven by the inverter at ND or HD rating. As the overload capacity decreases in the case of LD or SLD rating, observe the specified range of the inverter.
The maximum speed of the SF-V5RU55K and SF-V5RU30K3 is 2400 r/min. The maximum speed of a 3.7 kW motor or less is 3600 r/min. Consult our sales office for use of these motor. The maximum speed of a brake motor is 1800 r/min. The maximum short-time torque of the SF-V5RU[]K1, SF-V5RU[]K3, and SF-V5RU[]K4 is 120% of the rated torque. The
maximum short-time torque of the SF-V5RU[]K1Y, SF-V5RU[]K3Y, and SF-V5RU[]K4Y is 150% of the rated torque.
SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) 1.5 to 22 (kW) 30 to 55 (kW)
Constant power
Maximum torque for short time
Speed (r/min)
Continuous operation torque
50
0
75
100
1500 3000
150
O ut
pu t t
or qu
e
(%)
Constant power Reduced output
40
0
60 63
94 100
1500 2400 3000
150
Speed (r/min)
O ut
pu t t
or qu
e
(%)
Maximum torque for short time
Continuous operation torque
SF-V5RU1 (1000 r/min) speed ratio = 1:2 SF-V5RU3 (1000 r/min) speed ratio = 1:3 SF-V5RU4 (500 r/min) speed ratio = 1:4 1.5 to 37 (kW) 1.5 to 30 (kW) 1.5 to 15 (kW)
120
150
100
0
Speed (r/min)
Maximum torque for short time (SF-V5RU[]K1)
Maximum torque for short time (SF-V5RU[]K1Y)
Continuous operation torque
60 75
50
0 1000 2000
Constant power
45
54
Reduced output 30 kW (SF-V5RU30K1)O
ut pu
t t or
qu e
(%)
150
120
100
0
Maximum torque for short time (SF-V5RU[]K3)
Continuous operation torque
33
42 50
63
40
0 1000 3000
Constant power
2400
Maximum torque for short time (SF-V5RU[]K3Y)
Speed (r/min)
O ut
pu t t
or qu
e
(%)
120
100
0
Speed (r/min)
Maximum torque for short time (SF-V5RU[]K4)
Maximum torque for short time (SF-V5RU[]K4Y)
Continuous operation torque
30 37.5
25
0 500 2000
Constant power
150
O ut
pu t t
or qu
e
(%)
8318. SPECIFICATIONS 8.2 Motor rating
83
8.2.2 Vector control dedicated motor SF-THY Motor specifications
*1 The 12/24 V power supply is required for the encoder. *2 A motor with a thermal protector is available. Contact your sales representative.
Motor torque The torque characteristics of the SF-THY driven by the inverter are shown in graph form as follows.
Motor model SF-THY
Applicable inverter model (ND rating) FR-A820-[]K FR-A840-[]K
90 90 110 132 160 185 220 280 Rated output power (kW) 75 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 Rated torque (Nm) 477 477 572 700 840 1018 1273 1591 Maximum torque at 150% 60 s (Nm) 715 715 858 1050 1260 1527 1909 2386 Rated speed (r/min) 1500 1500 Maximum speed (r/min) 2400 2400 1800 Frame No. 250MD 250MD 250MD 280MD 280MD 280MD 280L 315H
Inertia moment J (kgm2) 1.1 1.1 1.7 2.3 2.3 4.0 3.8 5.0 Noise 90 dB 90 dB 95 dB
Cooling fan Voltage Three-phase 200 V 50 Hz / 200 V 60 Hz / 220 V 60 Hz
(400 V class cooling fan is available upon order.)
Input (W) 50 Hz
750 400 400 400 400 400 750 750
60 Hz 750 750 750 750 750 1500 1500 Approx. mass (kg) 610 610 660 870 890 920 1170 1630
Common specifications
Surrounding air temperature and humidity -10 to +40C (non-freezing), 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Structure Totally enclosed forced ventilated Equipment Encoder, thermal protector*2, fan Insulation class F Vibration rank V10
Dedicated encoder
Resolution 2048 pulse/rev Power supply voltage 12/24 VDC10%*1
Current consumption 90 mA Output signal form Phase A and Phase B: 90 degrees out of phase, Phase Z: 1 pulse/rev Output circuit Complementary (constant voltage output matched by emitter follow)
Output voltage "H" level: 9 V power supply voltage or more (IOH: -20 mA). "L" level: 3 V power supply voltage or less (IOL: 20 mA).
75 (kW) 90 to 250 (kW)
150
100 94
63
0 1.5 1500 2400
Rated torque
Maximum torque
Speed (r/min)
(%)
O ut
pu t t
or qu
e
150
100 125
83
0 1.5 1500 1800
Rated torque
Maximum torque
Speed (r/min)
(%)
O ut
pu t t
or qu
e
2 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.2 Motor rating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
8.2.3 IPM motor MM-CF (2000 r/min series) Motor specifications
*1 The rated output power or speed is not guaranteed at low supply voltages. *2 It is the case that the load torque is 20% of the motor rating. The permissible load inertia moment ratio is smaller when the load torque is larger.
Consult us if the load inertia moment ratio exceeds the above value. *3 This does not apply to the shaft through portion. *4 The value after the slash is for MM-CF[ ]2C. *5 The value for MM-CF[ ]2B is indicated in parentheses. *6 The one-rank higher inverter is designated for high torque in low-speed range. *7 Set 3150 r/min (210 Hz) or less in Pr.374 Overspeed detection level. The inverter may be damaged by the motor induction voltage if the motor
speed exceeds 3150 r/min (210 Hz).
Motor model: MM-CF[] 52(C)(B) 102(C)(B) 152(C)(B) 202(C)(B) 352(C)(B) 502(C) 702(C)
Applicable inverter model: FR-A820[]K
SLD 0.4 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 LD 0.4 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 ND (initial setting) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 HD 0.75*6 1.5*6 2.2*6 3.7*6 5.5*6 7.5*6 11*6
Continuous characteristics*1
Rated output power (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 5.0 7.0 Rated torque (Nm) 2.39 4.78 7.16 9.55 16.70 23.86 33.41
Rated speed*1(r/min) 2000 Maximum speed (r/min) 3000 Instantaneous permissible speed (r/min) 3450*7
Maximum torque (Nm) 4.78 9.56 14.32 19.09 33.41 47.73 66.82
Inertia moment J*5
(10-4 kg m2) 6.6
(7.0) 13.7
(14.9) 20.0
(21.2) 45.5
(48.9) 85.6
(89.0) 120.0 160.0
Recommended ratio of load inertia moment to motor shaft inertia moment*2
100 times max. 50 times max.
Rated current (A) 1.81 3.70 5.22 7.70 12.5 20.5 27.0 Insulation class F Structure (Protection rating) Totally enclosed, naturally air-cooled (IP44*3/IP65*3*4) Surrounding air temperature and humidity -10 to +40C (non-freezing), 90% RH or less (non-condensing) Storage temperature and humidity -20 to +70C (non-freezing), 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Ambience Indoors (no direct sun light) and free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt, etc.
Altitude Maximum 1000 m Vibration X: 9.8 m/s2, Y: 24.5 m/s2
Approx. mass*5 (kg) 5.1/7.8 7.2/11 9.3/13 13/20 19/28 27 36
8338. SPECIFICATIONS 8.2 Motor rating
83
Motor torque Motor capacity Low speed high torque setting enabled (high frequency superposition control)
1.5 kW or lower ND rating HD rating
2.0 kW or higher ND rating HD rating
2000100
150
200
100
Torque %
Speed r/min
Instantaneous (3 s)
Continuous120
3000
Short duration (60 s)
2000
150
200
100
Instantaneous (3 s)
Continuous
3000
Short duration (60 s)
Torque %
Speed r/min
2000100
150
200
100 Continuous120
Instantaneous (3 s)
3000
Short duration (60 s)
Torque %
Speed r/min 2000100
150
200
100
Instantaneous (3 s)
Continuous
Zero speed up to a 150% instantaneous output torque
3000
Short duration (60 s)
Torque %
Speed r/min
Motor capacity Low speed high torque setting disabled (current synchronization operation)
All capacities ND rating
2000 3000200
150
200
100
Instantaneous (3 s)
Continuous
50
Short duration (60 s)
Torque %
Speed r/min
4 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.2 Motor rating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
8.3 Common specifications C
on tr
ol
Control method Soft-PWM control, high carrier frequency PWM control (selectable among V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control), Optimum excitation control, Vector control*1, and PM sensorless vector control
Output frequency range 0.2 to 590 Hz (The upper-limit frequency is 400 Hz under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control*1, and PM sensorless vector control.)
Frequency setting and resolution
Analog input
0.015 Hz/60 Hz at 0 to 10 V/12 bits (terminals 2 and 4). 0.03 Hz/60 Hz at 0 to 5 V/11 bits or 0 to 20 mA/approx. 11 bits (terminals 2 and 4), at 0 to 10 V/12 bits (terminal 1). 0.06 Hz/60 Hz at 0 to 5 V/11 bits (terminal 1).
Digital input 0.01 Hz Frequency accuracy
Analog input Within 0.2% of the maximum output frequency (25 10C) Digital input 0.01% or less of the set output frequency
Voltage/frequency characteristics
Base frequency can be set from 0 to 590 Hz. Constant-torque/variable-torque pattern or adjustable 5 points V/F can be selected.
Starting torque*2
SLD rating: 120% 0.3 Hz, LD rating: 150% 0.3 Hz, ND rating: 200%*3 0.3 Hz, HD rating: 250%*3 0.3 Hz (under Real sensorless vector control) SLD rating: 120% 0 Hz, LD rating: 150% 0 Hz, ND rating: 200%*3 0 Hz, HD rating: 250%*3 0 Hz (under Vector control*1)
Torque boost Manual torque boost Acceleration/deceleration time setting
0 to 3600 s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration mode, backlash countermeasures acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
DC injection brake (induction motor) Operation frequency (0 to 120 Hz), operation time (0 to 10 s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable
Stall prevention operation level
Activation range of stall prevention operation (SLD rating: 0 to 120%, LD rating: 0 to 150%, ND rating: 0 to 220%, HD rating: 0 to 280%). Whether to use the stall prevention or not can be selected (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control)
Torque limit level Torque limit value can be set (0 to 400% variable). (Real sensorless vector control, Vector control*1, PM sensorless vector control)
O pe
ra tio
n
Frequency setting signal
Analog input Terminals 2 and 4: 0 to 10 V / 0 to 5 V / 4 to 20 mA (0 to 20 mA). Terminal 1: -10 to +10 V / -5 to +5 V.
Digital input Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit. Input of four-digit BCD (Binary-coded decimal) or 16-bit binary when the option FR-A8AX is installed.
Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Input signal (12)
Low-speed operation command, Middle-speed operation command, High-speed operation command, Second function selection, Terminal 4 input selection, Jog operation selection, Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start, Output stop, Start self-holding selection, Forward rotation command, Reverse rotation command, Inverter reset The signal to be input can be changed using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Pulse train input 100k pulses/s
Operational function
Maximum frequency, Minimum frequency, multi-speed operation, acceleration/deceleration pattern, thermal protection, DC injection brake, Starting frequency, JOG operation, Output stop (MRS), stall prevention, regeneration avoidance, increased magnetic excitation deceleration, DC feeding*4, frequency jump, rotation indication, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, electronic bypass sequence, remote setting, Automatic acceleration/deceleration, retry function, carrier frequency selection, fast-response current limit, forward/reverse rotation prevention, Operation mode selection, slip compensation, droop control, load torque high-speed frequency control, Speed smoothing control, traverse, auto tuning, applied motor selection, gain tuning, RS-485 communication, PID control, PID pre-charge function, dancer control, Cooling fan operation selection, Stop selection (deceleration stop/coasting), power-failure deceleration stop function, stop-on-contact control, PLC function, life diagnosis, maintenance timer, current average monitoring, multiple rating, orientation control*1, speed control, torque control, position control, pre-excitation, torque limit, test operation, 24 V power supply input for control circuit, safety stop function, anti-sway control, CC-Link IE Field Network communication*11
O ut
pu t s
ig na
l
Open collector output (5) Relay output (2)
Inverter running, Up to frequency, Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage*4, Overload warning, Output frequency detection, Fault The signal to be output can be changed using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). Fault codes (4 bits) of the inverter can be output from the open collector.
Pulse train output (FM type inverter) 50k pulses/s
8358. SPECIFICATIONS 8.3 Common specifications
83
*1 Available when a Vector control compatible option is installed. *2 For PM sensorless vector control, refer to page 863. *3 For the FR-A820-00340(5.5K) or higher and the FR-A840-00170(5.5K) or higher, the starting torque is initially limited to a level of 150% due to
the torque limitation. *4 The function is available for standard structure models and IP55 compatible models. *5 Not activated in the inverter in the initial state. *6 Available only for the standard model. *7 Available only for the IP55 compatible model. *8 Applicable to conditions for a short time, for example, in transit. *9 For the installation at an altitude above 1000 m, consider a 3% reduction in the rated current per 500 m increase in altitude.
*10 2.9 m/s2 or less for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher. *11 Available only for the FR-A800-GF series.
In di
ca tio
n
For indication on external meters
Pulse train output (FM type inverter)
Max. 2.4 kHz via one terminal (for the indication of inverter output frequency). The item for monitoring can be changed using Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection.
Current output (CA type inverter)
Max. 20 mADC via one terminal (for the indication of inverter output frequency). The item for monitoring can be changed using Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection.
Voltage output Max. 10 VDC via one terminal (for the indication of inverter output frequency). The item for monitoring can be changed using Pr.158 AM terminal function selection.
Operation panel (FR- DU08)
Status monitoring
Output frequency, output current, output voltage, and frequency setting value are monitored. The item for monitoring can be changed using Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection.
Fault monitoring
When a protective function is activated, a fault indication is displayed and the output voltage, output current, output frequency, cumulative energization time, date (year, month, day) and time at the occurrence of the fault are stored. Each fault is recorded and the last 8 records can be displayed.
Protective function
Fault
Overcurrent trip during acceleration, Overcurrent trip during constant speed, Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop, Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration, Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed, Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop, Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay function), Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay function), Heat sink overheat, Instantaneous power failure*4, Undervoltage*4, Input phase loss*4*5, Stall prevention stop, Loss of synchronism detection*5, Brake transistor alarm detection*6, Upper limit fault detection, Lower limit fault detection, Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, Output short circuit, Output phase loss, External thermal relay operation*5, PTC thermistor operation*5, Option fault, Communication option fault, Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board), PU disconnection, Retry count excess*5, CPU fault, Operation panel power supply short circuit/RS-485 terminals power supply short circuit, 24 VDC power fault, Abnormal output current detection*5, Inrush current limit circuit fault*4, Communication fault (inverter), Analog input fault, USB communication fault, Safety circuit fault, Overspeed occurrence*5, Speed deviation excess detection*1*5, Signal loss detection*1*5, Excessive position fault*1*5, Brake sequence fault*5, Encoder phase fault*1*5, 4 mA input fault*5, Pre- charge fault*5, PID signal fault*5, Option fault, Opposite rotation deceleration fault*5, Internal circuit fault, Abnormal internal temperature*7, Magnetic pole position unknown*1, External fault during output operation*5
Alarm, warning, error message
Fan alarm, Stall prevention (overcurrent), Stall prevention (overvoltage), Regenerative brake pre- alarm*5*6, Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU stop, Speed limit indication*5, Parameter copy, Safety stop, Maintenance signal output*5, USB host error, Home position return setting error*5, Home position return uncompleted*5, Home position return parameter setting error*5, Operation panel lock*5, Password locked*5, Parameter write error, Copy operation error, 24 V external power supply operation, Internal fan alarm*7, Continuous operation during communication fault*5, Load fault warning
En vi
ro nm
en t
Surrounding air temperature -10 to +50C (0 to +50C for the FR-A800-GF) (non-freezing) (LD, ND, HD ratings). -10 to +40C (0 to +40C for the FR-A800-GF) (non-freezing) (SLD rating, IP55 compatible models).
Surrounding air humidity 95% RH or less (non-condensing) (With circuit board coating (conforming to IEC 60721-3-3 3C2/3S2), IP55 compatible models). 90% RH or less (non-condensing) (Without circuit board coating).
Storage temperature*8 -20 to +65C Ambience Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt) Altitude/vibration Maximum 2500 m *9, 5.9 m/s2 or less*10 at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
6 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.3 Common specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
8.4.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings FR-A820-00046(0.4K), FR-A820-00077(0.75K)(-GF)
*1 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
(Unit: mm)
Inverter model D D1 FR-A820-00046(0.4K) 110 20 FR-A820-00077(0.75K) 125 35
6 95 110
7. 5
24 5
(7 .5
) 26
0 (1
.5 )
7.5 5 D1
D
26 hole
*1
8378. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
83
*1 FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 00052(1.5K) are not provided with a cooling fan. *2 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
(Unit: mm)
FR-A820-00105(1.5K), 00167(2.2K), 00250(3.7K)(-GF) FR-A840-00023(0.4K), 00038(0.75K), 00052(1.5K), 00083(2.2K), 00126(3.7K)(-GF)
150
5
*2
*1
140
(1 .5
) 24
5 7.
5
26 0
45 .5
(7 .5
)
6
12.5 125
FAN
26 hole
8 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(Unit: mm)
FR-A820-00340(5.5K), 00490(7.5K), 00630(11K)(-GF) FR-A840-00170(5.5K), 00250(7.5K), 00310(11K), 00380(15K)(-GF)
6 195 220
7. 5
H 1
(7 .5
) H
2 H
2.3
*1
D 1
12.5 D
FAN
26 hole
Inverter model H H1 H2 D D1 FR-A820-00340(5.5K), 00490(7.5K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K), 00250(7.5K) 260 245 1.5 170 84
FR-A820-00630(11K) FR-A840-00310(11K), 00380(15K) 300 285 3 190 101.5
8398. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
84
*1 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
(Unit: mm)
FR-A820-00770(15K), 00930(18.5K), 01250(22K)(-GF) FR-A840-00470(18.5K), 00620(22K)(-GF)
250 230
10
*1
10 (1
.5 )
38 0
(1 0)
40 0
2.3
190 93
.3
10
FAN
210 hole
0 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
(Unit: mm)
FR-A820-01540(30K)(-GF) FR-A840-00770(30K)(-GF)
10
325 270 10
55 0
(1 0)
53 0
3.2
3.2 *1
(1 5)
52 0
15
195
420 hole for hanging 17210 hole
8418. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
84
*1 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or whenever a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.
*2 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth. (Unit: mm)
FR-A820-01870(37K), 02330(45K), 03160(55K), 03800(75K), 04750(90K)(-GF) FR-A840-00930(37K), 01160(45K), 01800(55K), 02160(75K), 02600(90K), 03250(110K), 03610(132K)(-GF)
W
12 W1
10 H
1 (1
5) H
3.2
D 18 H
2 (1
8)
FAN
212 hole D14d hole
*2
Inverter model W W1 H H1 H2 d D D1 FR-A820-01870(37K), 02330(45K) FR-A840-00930(37K), 01160(45K), 01800(55K)*1
435 380 550 525 514 25 250 24
FR-A820-03160(55K)*1 465 410 700 675 664 25 250 22
FR-A820-03800(75K)*1, 04750(90K)*1 465 400 740 715 704 24 360 22
FR-A840-02160(75K)*1, 02600(90K)*1 465 400 620 595 584 24 300 22
FR-A840-03250(110K)*1, 03610(132K)*1 465 400 740 715 704 25 360 22
2 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option. *1 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
(Unit: mm)
FR-A840-04320(160K), 04810(185K)(-GF)
3.2 380 13
98 4
(1 3)
22
FAN
416 hole
*1
312 hole (1 5)
10 98
5
10 10
12 200
498
200
8438. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
84
Always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option. *1 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
(Unit: mm)
Operation panel (FR-DU08, FR-LU08)
(Unit: mm)
FR-A840-05470(220K), 06100(250K), 06830(280K)(-GF)
300
680
12
300
13 98
4 (1
3)
10 10
3.2
380
13 98
4 (1
3)
FAN
22 416 hole312 hole
*1
27.8 Operation panel
66
72 .5
78 .5
3 3
3 3
72
16
17
3.2max
66
72 .5
21
5
22
20
Outline drawing Panel cutting dimension drawing
2-M3 screw
Panel
Air- bleeding hole
Operation panel connection connector (FR-ADP option)
120 or more
Denotes the space required to connect an optional parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB2[ ]). When using another cable, leave the space required for the cable specification.
Parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB2[ ]) (option)
4 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
8.4.2 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (standard
horizontal type)
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
Frame number: 90L Frame number: 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
S
T
W
U
Section AA
15
9
Frame leg viewed from above
Sliding distance
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) Mark for earthing (grounding)
Direction of cooling fan wind
Exhaust
Suction
40 50
L
A
Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P
XBFF
N
KA B
R
A
A
D
27
4
C H
K G
KL
EE
M
K P
4
1 2
Sliding distance
Frame leg viewed
from above
S
U
T
W
Section AA
Mark for earthing
(grounding)
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
27
40
EE
M
ML
6 .5 C
H
I
K G
D
KL
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Exhaust
Suction
XBFF
N
QKKA
QBA
R
L
A
A
For motor (U, V, W)
For cooling fan (A, B)
Thermal protector (G1, G2)
A B G2G1U V W
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M4)
SF- V5RU
[]K
SF- V5RU []K1
SF- V5RU []K3
SF- V5RU []K4
Frame No.
Mass (kg)
Motor Terminal screw size
A B C D E F H I KA KG KL (KP) L M ML N XB Q QK R S T U W U, V,
W A, B, (C)
G1, G2
1 90L 24 256.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 198 53 65 220 (210) 425 175 150 56 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
2 1 100L 33 284 128 100 207 80 70 203.5 230 65 78 231 477 200 212 180 63 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 3 2 1 112M 41 278 135 112 228 95 70 226 253 69 93 242 478 230 242 180 70 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 5 3 2 - 132S 52 303 152 132 266 108 70 265 288 75 117 256 542 256 268 180 89 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 7 5 3 1 132M 62 322 171 132 266 108 89 265 288 94 117 256 580 256 268 218 89 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
8458. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
84
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
NOTE Install the motor with a frame number 180 or larger on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from
the opposite load side to the load side.
The vertical tolerance for the shaft center height is . The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its model name.
Frame Number: 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L Frame number: 200L, 225S
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Mark for earthing
(grounding)
Earth (ground)
terminal (M8)
With guard
wires
Exhaust
Suction
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
56K G
XB
FF
N
90KA
110BA
R
L
50
EE
M
D
KL
8
C
H
I
A
A
Section AA
T
U
S
W
1 4
.5
4
Sliding distance
Frame leg viewed
from above Frame leg viewed
from above
4
1 8
.5
Sliding distance
S
W
T
U
Section AA
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
Mark for earthing
(grounding)
Earth (ground)
terminal (M12)
With guard
wires
K G K
P
L
A
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Exhaust
Suction
9
0
70
EE
M
1 1
C
H
D
XBFF
N
110KA
140B
R
A
A
For motor (U, V, W)
For cooling fan (A, B, C) For thermal protector (G1, G2)
Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M8)
SF- V5RU
[]K
SF- V5RU []K1
SF- V5RU []K3
SF- V5RU []K4
Frame No.
Mass (kg)
Motor Terminal screw size
A B C D E F H I KA KG KL (KP) L M ML N XB Q QK R S T U W U, V,
W A, B, (C)
G1, G2
11 7 5 2 160M 99 412 198 160 318 127 105 316 367 105 115 330 735 310 254 108 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 15 11 7 3 160L 113 434 220 160 318 127 127 316 367 127 115 330 779 310 298 108 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 18
180M 138
438.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 359 410 127 139 352 790 335 285 121 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4 22 15 11 160 18 15 5 180L 200 457.5 242.5 180 363 139.5 139.5 359 410 146 139 352 828 335 323 121 370.5 55m6 10 6 16 M8 M4 M4 30 7
200L 238
483.5 267.5 200 406 159 152.5 401 145 487 (546) 909 390 361 133 425.5 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 37, 45 22, 30 18, 22 255
55 37 30 11, 15 225S 320 500 277 225 446 178 143 446 145 533 (592) 932 428 342 149 432 65m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4
0
-0.5
6 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (standard horizontal type with brake)
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
Frame number: 90L Frame number: 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M
* indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual opening. Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
Sliding distance
Frame leg viewed from above
Z
X
Section AA
U
W
T
S
Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P
Mark for earthing (grounding)
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
A
A
R B
N F F XB
50 40
Suction Exhaust
Direction of cooling fan wind
Terminal box for cooling fan
L A
KA
M E E
CG
D
2 2
2
*2
1*1
KL
K P
K G
27
Main terminal box
Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
Mark for earthing (grounding)
Suction Exhaust
Direction of cooling fan wind
A
A
R
N F F XB
CG
D
ML M
E E J
B Q QKMain
terminal box
A L
Terminal box for cooling fan
2 2
27
KA
KL
K P
H
K G
Section AA
W
S
U
T
Sliding distance
Frame leg viewed from above
Z
X
*1
*2
*1
*2
VUB2B1 W G1 G2 CBA
For motor (U, V, W)
For cooling fan (A, B)
For brake (B1, B2)
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M4)
Main terminal box
Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M4)
Terminal box for cooling fan
SF- V5RU []KB
SF- V5RU []K1B
SF- V5RU []K3B
SF- V5RU []K4B
Frame No.
Mass (kg)
Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
A B C D E F G H I J KA KD KG KL KP L M ML N X XB Z Q QK R S T U W U, V, W
A, B, (C)
G1, G2
B1, B2
1 90L 29 296.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 4 53 27 65 220 245 465 175 150 15 56 9 50 40 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4 2 1 100L 46 333.5 128 100 207 80 70 6.5 40 65 27 78 231 265 526.5 200 212 180 4 63 12 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4 3 2 1 112M 53 355 135 112 228 95 70 6.5 40 69 27 93 242 290 555 230 242 180 4 70 12 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4 5 3 2 132S 70 416 152 132 266 108 70 6.5 40 75 27 117 256 329 655 256 268 180 4 89 12 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4 7 5 3 1 132M 80 435 171 132 266 108 89 6.5 40 94 27 117 256 329 693 256 268 218 4 89 12 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
8478. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
84
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
NOTE Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from
the opposite load side to the load side.
The vertical tolerance for the shaft center height is . The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its model name. Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure. (This device should be arranged by the customer.
Refer to the FR-A800 catalog.)
Frame Number: 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L Frame number: 200L, 225S
* indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual opening. Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
Sliding distance
Frame leg viewed from above
X
Z
W
S
U
T
Section AA
Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P
Earth (ground) terminal (M8)
Mark for earthing (grounding)
Suction
Direction of cooling fan wind
Terminal box for cooling fan
*1, 2
*1
*2A
A
R B 110KA
Exhaust 90
N F F XB
L A
H C
G
D
M E E
J K
G 56
2 2
KL
K P
Main terminal box
Sliding distance
Z
X
Frame leg viewed from above
Section AA
U
T
W
S
Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P
Earth (ground) terminal (M12)
Mark for earthing (grounding)
*1 *2
D
H CG
M E E
J
9 0
K P
K G
A
A
R B 140
KA 110
N F F XB
Suction Exhaust
Direction of cooling fan wind
L A
Terminal box for cooling fan
*1, 2
22 Main terminal box
B2B1
U
G2G1
WV
CBA
For cooling fan (A, B, C)
For motor (U, V, W)
Earthing
(grounding)
terminal (M8) Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M4)
For brake (B1, B2) For thermal protector (G1, G2)
Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan
SF- V5RU []KB
SF- V5RU []K1B
SF- V5RU []K3B
SF- V5RU []K4B
Frame No.
Mass (kg)
Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
A B C D E F G H I J KA KD KG KL KP L M ML N X XB Z Q QK R S T U W U, V, W
A, B, (C)
G1, G2
B1, B2
11 7 5 2 160M 140 522.5 198 160 318 127 105 8 50 105 56 115 330 391 845.5 310 254 4 108 14.5 110 90 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4 15 11 7 3 160L 155 544.5 220 160 318 127 127 8 50 127 56 115 330 391 889.5 310 298 4 108 14.5 110 90 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4 18
180M 185
568.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 8 50 127 56 139 352 428 920 335 285 4 121 14.5 110 90 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4 M4 22 15 11 215 18 15 5 180L 255 587.5 242.5 180 363 139.5 139.5 8 50 146 56 139 352 428 958 335 323 4 121 14.5 110 90 370.5 55m6 10 6 16 M8 M4 M4 M4 30 7
200L 305
644.5 267.5 200 406 159 152.5 11 70 145 90 487 546 1070 390 361 4 133 18.5 140 110 425.5 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 M4 37, 45 22, 30 18, 22 330
55 37 30 11, 15 225S 395 659 277 225 446 178 143 11 70 145 90 533 592 1091 428 342 4 149 18.5 140 110 432 65m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 M4
0
-0.5
8 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (flange type)
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
Frame number: 90L Frame number: 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
LN LZ
KL
KD
LA
A
A
Section BB
U W
T
S
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
Mark for earthing (grounding)
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P LL
KB LR
LG LE QK
Q
L C
L B
B
B
Section
AA
D
Suction
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Exhaust
Section BB
W
U
T
S
LN LZ
KD
KL
IE
A
A
LA
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
Mark for earthing (grounding)
LL
KB LR
LG LE QK
Q
L C
L B
Section
AA
B
B
D
Suction
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Exhaust
For motor (U, V, W)
For cooling fan (A, B)
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
A B G2G1U V W
Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M4)
SF- V5RUF
[]K
SF- V5RUF
[]K1
SF- V5RUF
[]K3
SF- V5RUF
[]K4
Flange No.
Frame No.
Mass (kg)
Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
D IE KB KD KL LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W U, V, W
A, B, (C)
G1, G2
1 FF165 90L 26.5 183.6 198.5 27 220 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 402 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 2 1 FF215 100L 37 207 130 213 27 231 215 180j6 250 4 16 432 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 3 2 1 FF215 112M 46 228 141 239 27 242 215 180j6 250 4 16 448 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 5 3 2 FF265 132S 65 266 156 256 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 484 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 7 5 3 1 FF265 132M 70 266 156 294 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 522 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
8498. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
85
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
NOTE The motor with a frame number 180 or larger cannot be installed on the ceiling (with the shaft facing up). For use with the shaft
facing down, the protection rating of the cooling fan is IP20. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from
the opposite load side to the load side. The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its model name.
Frame Number: 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L Frame number: 200L
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
Section BB
W
S
T
U
A
A
LN LZ
L A IE
KL
KD
QK
Q
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
Earth (ground) terminal (M8)
Mark for earthing (grounding)
With guard wires
Section
AA
L C
L B
B
B
LRKB
LG LE
LL
D
Suction
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Exhaust
Section BB
W
S
T
U
LR Q
QK
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
Earth (ground) terminal (M12)
Mark for earthing (grounding)
With guard wires
Section
AA
L C
L B
B
B
KB
LG LE
LL
D
Suction
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Exhaust
A
A
LN LZ
LA IE
KL
KD
For motor (U, V, W)
For cooling fan (A, B, C) For thermal protector (G1, G2)
Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M8)
SF- V5RUF
[]K
SF- V5RUF
[]K1
SF- V5RUF
[]K3
SF- V5RUF
[]K4
Flange No.
Frame No.
Mass (kg)
Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
D IE KB KD KL LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W U, V, W
A, B, (C)
G1, G2
11 7 5 2 FF300 160M 110 318 207 318 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 625 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 15 11 7 3 FF300 160L 125 318 207 362 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 669 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 18
FF350 180M 160
363 230 378.5 56 352 350 300j6 400 5 20 690 4 18.5 110 110 90 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4 22 15 11 185 18 15 5 FF350 180L 225 363 230 416.5 56 352 350 300j6 400 5 20 728 4 18.5 110 110 90 55m6 10 6 16 M8 M4 M4 30 7
FF400 200L 270
406 255 485 90 346 400 350j6 450 5 22 823.5 8 18.5 140 140 110 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 37, 45 22, 30 18, 22 290
0 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (flange type with brake)
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
Frame number: 90L Frame number: 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M
* indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual opening. Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) Mark for earthing (grounding)
Suction
Exhaust
Direction of cooling fan wind
Terminal box for cooling fan
*1
*2 B
B
Section AA
LCLB
LG LE
LL
LR
Q QK
D
KB
LN LZ *1
*2
KD
A
A
LA
KL
2 2
K P
Section BB
U
W
T
S
Main terminal box
Section BB
W
S
U
T
Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P
QK
Q
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) Mark for earthing (grounding)
Suction
Exhaust
Direction of cooling fan wind
Terminal box for cooling fan
*1
*2
Section AA
LCLB
B
B
LR
LG LE
LL
D
KB
A LN LZ
A
*1
*2 LA
KD
KL
2 2
K P
Main terminal box
VUB2B1 W G1 G2 CBA
For motor (U, V, W)
For cooling fan (A, B)
For brake (B1, B2)
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
Earthing
(grounding)
terminal (M4)
Earthing
(grounding)
terminal (M4)
Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan
SF- V5RUF
[]KB
SF- V5RUF []K1B
SF- V5RUF []K3B
SF- V5RUF []K4B
Flange No.
Frame No.
Mass (kg)
Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
D KB KD KL KP LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W U, V, W
A, B, (C)
B1, B2
G1, G2
1 FF165 90L 31.5 183.6 198.5 27 220 155 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 442 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4 2 1 FF215 100L 50 207 213 27 231 165 215 180j6 250 4 16 481.5 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4 3 2 1 FF215 112M 58 228 239 27 242 178 215 180j6 250 4 16 525 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4 5 3 2 FF265 132S 83 266 256 27 256 197 265 230j6 300 4 20 597 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4 7 5 3 1 FF265 132M 88 266 294 27 256 197 265 230j6 300 4 20 635 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
8518. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
85
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
NOTE Install the motor on the wall and use it with the shaft horizontal. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from
the opposite load side to the load side. The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its model name. Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure. (This device should be arranged by the customer.
Refer to the FR-A800 catalog.)
Frame number: 160M, 160L
* indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual opening. Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
Section BB
W
S
U
T
A
A
LN LZ
*2
*1
LA
KD
KL
2 2
K P
Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P
QK Q
D
Earth (ground) terminal (M8) Mark for earthing (grounding)
Suction
Direction of cooling fan wind
Terminal box for cooling fan
*1, 2
Section AA
LCLB
B
B
LL KB LR
LG LE
Exhaust
Main terminal box
B2B1
U
G2G1
WV
CBA
For cooling fan (A, B, C)
For motor (U, V, W)
Earthing
(grounding)
terminal (M8)
Earthing
(grounding)
terminal (M4)
For brake (B1, B2) For thermal protector (G1, G2)
Terminal box for cooling fanMain terminal box
SF- V5RUF
[]KB
SF- V5RUF []K1B
SF- V5RUF []K3B
SF- V5RUF []K4B
Flange No.
Frame No.
Mass (kg)
Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
D KB KD KL KP LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W U, V, W
A, B, (C)
B1, B2
G1, G2
11 7 5 2 FF300 160M 151 318 318 56 330 231 300 250j6 350 5 20 735.5 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4 15 11 7 3 FF300 160L 167 318 362 56 330 231 300 250j6 350 5 20 779.5 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
2 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Dedicated motor (SF-THY) outline dimension drawings (1500 r/min series)
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
NOTE The vertical tolerance for the shaft center height C is for the frame number 250, and for the frame number 280 or larger.
Frame number: 250MD, 280MD 75 to 160 kW
Frame number: 280L, 315H 200 kW, 250 kW
L
A R
B
KA
Q
QK
Exhaust
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
Suction
K2 K2
K1
F F XB
N
K 4-Z hole
This hole is not used.
PF4 Class B screw
J
E E
S
W
M
H
K G
C
T U
G
Terminal box for cooling fan
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Terminal box for cooling fan
L
A R
B
K2
K1 K
K2
XBFF
N
KA
Q
QK
ExhaustSuction
4-Z hole
This hole is not used.
PF4 Class B screw
S
W
T U
H
K G
GC -1
.0
J
E E
M
0
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Output Frame No.
Mass (kg)
Motor Shaft end size A B C D E F G H J K K1 K2 L M N R Z XB KA KG Q QK S W T U
75 250MD 610 988.5 340.5 250 557 203 174.5 30 775 100 130 168 50 1471 486 449 482.5 24 168 157.5 635 140 110 75m6 20 12 7.5 90 250MD 660 988.5 340.5 250 557 203 174.5 30 775 100 130 168 50 1471 486 449 482.5 24 168 157.5 635 140 110 75m6 20 12 7.5 110 280MD 870 1049.5 397.5 280 607 228.5 209.5 30 845 110 130 181 40 1619 560 449 569.5 24 190 210.5 705 170 140 85m6 22 14 9 132 280MD 890 1049.5 397.5 280 607 228.5 209.5 30 845 110 130 181 40 1619 560 449 569.5 24 190 210.5 705 170 140 85m6 22 14 9 160 280MD 920 1049.5 397.5 280 607 228.5 209.5 30 845 110 130 181 40 1619 560 499 569.5 24 190 210.5 705 170 140 85m6 22 14 9 200 280L 1170 1210.5 416.5 280 652 228.5 228.5 30 885 110 160 160 75 1799 560 607 588.5 24 190 214.5 745 170 140 85m6 22 14 9 250 315H 1630 1343 565 315 717 254 355 35 965 130 175 428 80 2084 636 870 741 28 216 306 825 170 140 95m6 25 14 9
0
-0.5
0
-1.0
8538. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
85
MEMO
4 8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4 Outline dimension drawings
CHAPTER 9
C H
A PT
ER 9
4
5
APPENDIX
6
7
8
9
10
9.1 For customers replacing the conventional model with this inverter ......................................................................856 9.2 International standards .........................................................................................................................................858 9.3 Acquisition of type certification for ship classification standards (400 V class) ....................................................858 9.4 Specification comparison between PM sensorless vector control and induction motor control............................863 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods....................................................864 9.6 For customers using HMS network options ..........................................................................................................893 9.7 Ready bit status selection (Pr.349, N240) ............................................................................................................897
855
85
9 APPENDIX APPENDIX provides the reference information for use of this product. Refer to APPENDIX as required.
9.1 For customers replacing the conventional model with this inverter
9.1.1 Replacement of the FR-A700 series Differences and compatibility with the FR-A700 series
Item FR-A700 FR-A800
Control method
V/F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control Vector control (with plug-in option) PM sensorless vector control (IPM motor)
V/F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control Vector control (with plug-in option / control terminal option) PM sensorless vector control (IPM motor / SPM motor)
Added functions USB host function, safety stop function, etc.
Brake transistor (brake resistor usable)
Built in for the FR-A720-0.4K to 22K. Built in for the FR-A740-0.4K to 22K.
Built in for the FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K). Built in for the FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 01800(55K).
M ax
im um
o ut
pu t f
re qu
en cy V/F control 400 Hz 590 Hz
Advanced magnetic flux vector control 120 Hz 400 Hz
Real sensorless vector control 120 Hz 400 Hz
Vector control 120 Hz 400 Hz
PM sensorless vector control 300 Hz 400 Hz
PID control Turn the X14 signal ON to enable PID control.
When the X14 signal is not assigned, just set a value in Pr.128 to enable PID control. When the X14 signal is assigned, turn the X14 signal ON while Pr.128 "0" to enable PID control. The PID pre-charge function and dancer control are added.
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure Turn the CS signal ON to enable restart. Restart is enabled by turning ON the CS signal, or solely setting
Pr.57 if the CS signal is not assigned to any input terminal. Restart coasting time after instantaneous power failure
Time period from restoration of power until the operation is restarted
Time period from occurrence of instantaneous power failure until the operation is restarted
Number of motor poles V/F control switching
The V/F switchover (X18) signal is valid when Pr.81 = "12 to 20" (2 to 10 poles).
Pr.81 = "12" (12 poles) The X18 signal is valid regardless of the Pr.81 setting. (The Pr.81 settings "14 to 20" are not available.)
PTC thermistor input Input through terminal AU (The function of terminal AU is switched by a switch.)
Input through terminal 2 (The function of terminal 2 is switched by the Pr.561 setting.)
USB connector B connector Mini B connector Control circuit terminal
block Removable terminal block (screw type) Removable terminal block (spring clamp type)
Terminal response level The FR-A800's I/O terminals have better response level than the FR-A700's terminals. By setting Pr.289 Inverter output terminal filter and Pr.699 Input terminal filter, the terminal response level can be compatible with that of FR-A700. Set to approximately 5 to 8 ms and adjust the setting according to the system.
PU FR-DU07 (4-digit LED) FR-PU07
FR-DU08 (5-digit LED) FR-LU08 (LCD operation panel) FR-PU07 (Some functions such as Parameter copy are unavailable.) The FR-DU07 is not supported.
Plug-in option Dedicated plug-in options (not interchangeable)
6 9. APPENDIX 9.1 For customers replacing the conventional model with this inverter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Installation precautions Removal procedure of the front cover is different. (Refer to page 33.) Plug-in options of the FR-A700 series are not compatible. Operation panel (FR-DU07) cannot be used.
Wiring instructions The spring clamp type terminal block has changed to the screw type. Use of blade terminals is recommended.
Instructions for continuous use of the PU07 (parameter unit) manufactured in September 2015 or earlier
For the FR-A800 series, many functions (parameters) have been added. When setting these parameters, the parameter names and setting ranges are not displayed.
Only the parameter with the numbers up to "999" can be read and set. The parameters with the numbers after "999" cannot be read or set.
Many protective functions have been added for the FR-A800 series. These functions are available, but all faults are displayed as "Fault". When the fault history is checked, "ERR" appears. Added faults will not appear on the parameter unit. (However, MT1 to MT3 are displayed as MT.)
Parameter copy/verification function are not available.
Copying parameter settings The FR-A700 series' parameter settings can be easily copied to the FR-A800 series by using the setup software (FR
Configurator2). (Not supported by the setup software FR-SW3-SETUP or older.)
9.1.2 Replacement of the FR-A500(L) series Installation precautions
Installation size is compatible for replacing the FR-A520(L)-0.4K to 90K, FR-A540(L)-0.4K to 7.5K, 18.5K to 55K, 110K, 160K, or 220K. New mounting holes are required for replacing models with other capacities.
To use the same mounting holes of the FR-A540-11K or 15K for the A800 series, the optional installation interchange attachment (FR-AAT) is necessary.
The external heat sink attachment is not interchangeable. The enclosure cut dimensions of the FR-A520-3.7K or lower, FR-A520-30K, FR-A520-55K or higher, FR-A540-3.7K or lower, FR-A540-11K and 15K, and FR-A540-75K or higher are not compatible.
NOTE For the installation size and the outline dimensions of the separated converter type, refer to the FR-A802 (Separated Converter
Type) Instruction Manual (Hardware).
Communication option Connected to the connector 3 Connected to the connector 1
Installation size For standard structure models, installation size is compatible for all capacities. (Replacement between the same capacities does not require new mounting holes.) For separated converter types, installation size is not compatible. (New mounting holes are required.)
Converter Built-in for all capacities An optional converter unit (FR-CC2) is required for separated converter types.
DC reactor The 75K or higher comes with a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840- 02160(75K) or higher, and when a 75 kW or higher motor is used, select a DC reactor suitable for the applicable motor capacity. (A DC reactor is not included.) Separated converter types (converter unit FR-CC2) and IP55 compatible models have a built-in DC reactor.
Brake unit (75 kW or higher) FR-BU2, MT-BU5 FR-BU2
Item FR-A700 FR-A800
8579. APPENDIX 9.1 For customers replacing the conventional model with this inverter
85
9.2 International standards For information on compliance with EU Directives or standards including UL or cUL standards, refer to both the Startup
and Hardware versions of the Instruction Manual.
9.3 Acquisition of type certification for ship classification standards (400 V class)
9.3.1 Applicable models
*1 FR-A846-00023(0.4K) to 03610(132K)-C3 inverters are not applicable.
9.3.2 Details of type certification for standard model / Separated converter type
The inverters can be used in ships, except on the bridge and open deck areas.
Details of certification
*1 From November 2014 to October 2015, the certification body was DNV. (Certificate No.: E-14104)
Precautions The following are precautions for the system as a whole to be compliant with ship classification standards.
To use the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, set AC voltage/frequency to three-phase 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz. The applicable inverters have been approved as products for use in enclosure. Install the inverters in enclosures. Use the inverters in an environment without corrosive gas or the like. (Inverters with circuit board coating are available for
improved environmental resistance. Consult our sales office for more details.) For electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), install the recommended EMC filter shown in the following page (manufactured
by Soshin Electric Co., Ltd.) or an equivalent at the input side of the inverter. Set the built-in EMC filter in the inverter to "enabled" (ON). Ensure that the finalized system which includes an inverter complies with the ship classification standards.
Structure/functionality Applicable inverter Standard model FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 06830(280K)
Separated converter type FR-A842-07700(315K) to 12120(500K) FR-CC2-H315 to H500K
IP55 compatible model FR-A846-00023(0.4K) to 03610(132K)-C2*1
Certification body Certificate number Compatible from (Manufacture year and month)
NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai) 14A020 September 2014
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) 19-YO1938937-PDA 19-YO1938937-PDAPDP September 2014
BV (Bureau Veritas) 37962/B0 October 2014
DNV GL (DNV GL AS)*1 TAE00000H2 November 2015
LR (Lloyd's Register of British and Foreign Shipping)
LR2002550TA-CERT LR2002550TA-DAD LR2002550TA-Appendix
November 2014
CCS (China Classification Society) DB15T00005 DB19PTB00014 April 2015
KR (Korean Register of Shipping) TKY21652-AC002 April 2015
8 9. APPENDIX 9.2 International standards
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Noise filter wiring Install a recommended noise filter (manufactured by Soshin Electric Co., Ltd.) at the input side of the inverter as shown in the following diagram.
Recommended EMC filter (manufactured by Soshin Electric Co., Ltd.) The following section shows the specifications of recommended EMC filters to be used in combination with inverters.
Standard model
Separated converter type
Inverter
M
Noise filter
Three-phase AC power supply
1 R S T
U V W
2 3
4 5 6
Inverter model FR-A840-[]
Noise filter model SLD LD ND HD
00023(0.4K) HF3010C-SZA00038(0.75K)
00052(1.5K) 00083(2.2K)
HF3020C-SZA 00126(3.7K) 00170(5.5K) HF3030C-SZA HF3020C-SZA 00250(7.5K) HF3030C-SZA 00310(11K) HF3040C-SZA 00380(15K) HF3050C-SZA HF3040C-SZA 00470(18.5K) HF3060C-SZA 00620(22K) HF3080C-SZA 00770(30K) HF3100C-SZA 00930(37K) HF3150C-SZA HF3100C-SZA 01160(45K) HF3150C-SZA 01800(55K) HF3200C-SZA 02160(75K)
HF3250C-SZA 02600(90K) 03250(110K) HF3600C-SJB HF3300C-SJB 03610(132K) HF3600C-SJB HF3300C-SJB 04320(160K)
HF3600C-SJB 04810(185K) 05470(220K) 06100(250K) 06830(280K) HF31000C-SJB
Inverter model FR-A842-[]
Noise filter model SLD LD ND HD
07700(315K) HF31000C-SJB08660(355K)
09620(400K) 10940(450K) HF31200C-SJB 12120(500K) HF31600C-SJB
8599. APPENDIX 9.3 Acquisition of type certification for ship classification standards (400 V class)
86
Appearance examples and outline dimensions
(Unit: mm) For details on this filter, contact Soshin Electric Co., Ltd.
9.3.3 Details of type certification for IP55 compatible model
The inverters can be used in ships, except on the bridge and open deck areas.
Details of certification
Precautions The following are precautions for the system as a whole to be compliant with ship classification standards.
To use the FR-A846-01800(55K)-C2 or lower, set AC voltage/frequency to three-phase 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz. Set the built-in EMC filter in the inverter to "enabled" (ON). Ensure that the finalized system which includes an inverter complies with the ship classification standards. For electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), install the recommended ferrite core (shown in the following page) or an
equivalent by two turns (passing the cable twice through the core) for wiring of control circuit terminals.
W
D
H H
W
D
HF3000C-SZA(10A-30A) HF3300C-SJB HF3600C-SJB
Noise filter model W D H HF3010C-SZA
220 66 78HF3020C-SZA HF3030C-SZA HF3040C-SZA
270 80 84HF3050C-SZA HF3060C-SZA HF3080C-SZA
310 100 210 HF3100C-SZA HF3150C-SZA 395 110 230 HF3200C-SZA
400 120 260 HF3250C-SZA HF3300C-SJB
340 190 140 HF3600C-SJB HF31000C-SJB 390 190 160 HF31200C-SJB
480 200 190 HF31600C-SJB
Certification body Certificate number Compatible from (Manufacture year and month)
NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai) 14A020 October 2015
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) 19-YO1938937-PDA 19-YO1938937-PDAPDP October 2015
BV (Bureau Veritas) 37962/B0 October 2015
LR (Lloyd's Register of British and Foreign Shipping)
LR2002550TA-CERT LR2002550TA-DAD LR2002550TA-Appendix
October 2015
DNV GL (DNV GL AS) TAE00000H2 November 2015
CCS (China Classification Society) DB16T00003 DB19PTB00014 April 2016
KR (Korean Register of Shipping) TKY21652-AC002 April 2016
0 9. APPENDIX 9.3 Acquisition of type certification for ship classification standards (400 V class)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When the inverter is used in an environment with the surrounding air temperature exceeding 40C, the rated output current must not exceed the value shown in the following table.
Example of installing ferrite cores
The wiring must be contained in the casing. When there is more than one bundle of control signal lines, install ferrite cores to each bundle.
Recommended ferrite core Manufacturer: TOKIN Corporation Model: ESD-SR-250
For details on this ferrite core, contact TOKIN Corporation.
Inverter model FR-A846-[]-C2
Rated output current ND rating LD rating
Surrounding air temperature: 45C
Surrounding air temperature: 50C
Surrounding air temperature: 45C
Surrounding air temperature: 50C
00023(0.4K) 1.4 A 1.4 A 2.0 A 1.9 A 00038(0.75K) 2.4 A 2.3 A 3.3 A 3.2 A 00052(1.5K) 3.8 A 3.6 A 4.6 A 4.3 A 00083(2.2K) 5.7 A 5.4 A 7.2 A 6.8 A 00126(3.7K) 8.6 A 8.1 A 10.9 A 9.2 A 00170(5.5K) 11.4 A 9.6 A 13.6 A 11.2 A 00250(7.5K) 16 A 15 A 22 A 21 A 00310(11K) 22 A 21 A 28 A 26 A 00380(15K) 29 A 28 A 33 A 28 A 00470(18.5K) 36 A 30 A 37 A 30.1 A 00620(22K) 42 A 40 A 54 A 51 A 00770(30K) 54 A 51 A 67 A 63 A 00930(37K) 67 A 64 A 81 A 77 A 01160(45K) 82 A 77 A 101 A 95 A 01800(55K) 105 A 99 A 137 A 130 A 02160(75K) 137 A 130 A 171 A 162 A 02600(90K) 171 A 162 A 205 A 178 A 03250(110K) 205 A 194 A 247 A 234 A 03610(132K) 247 A 234 A 284 A 244 A
Control cableFerrite core
For using one ferrite core For using two ferrite cores
13.0 or less
31.5 38.0
31 .6
(Unit: mm)
8619. APPENDIX 9.3 Acquisition of type certification for ship classification standards (400 V class)
86
9.3.4 Wiring for compliance with EMC standards When a power supply is provided for the control circuit separately from the main circuit and a capacitive device (such as
an EMC filter or a radio noise filter) is connected, connect a noise filter (example: RTMN5006 manufactured by TDK- Lambda Corporation) to the control circuit power supply.
Connect the inverter, noise filter, and motor to the enclosure earth (ground). (It is assumed that the enclosure earth (ground) is connected to the ship hull earth (ground).)
When the wiring is different from the recommended one, the noise suppression effect may be insufficient (inadequate earthing (grounding)).
R1/L11 S1/L21
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
MC
Capacitive
device
Noise filter
Connect two of the three phases.
2 9. APPENDIX 9.3 Acquisition of type certification for ship classification standards (400 V class)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
9.4 Specification comparison between PM sensorless vector control and induction motor control
*1 For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (It must be 0.4 kW or higher.) If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
NOTE Before wiring, make sure that the motor is stopped. Otherwise you may get an electric shock. Never connect an IPM motor to the commercial power supply. No slippage occurs with an IPM motor because of its characteristic. If an IPM motor, which took over an induction motor, is
driven at the same speed as for the general-purpose motor, the running speed of the IPM motor becomes faster by the amount of the general-purpose motor's slippage. Adjust the speed command to run the IPM motor at the same speed as the induction motor, as required.
Item PM sensorless vector control (MM-CF) Induction motor control
Applicable motor IPM motor MM-CF series (0.5 to 7.0 kW) (Refer to page 833.) IPM motors other than MM-CF (tuning required)*1 Induction motor*1
Starting torque
High frequency superposition control
200% (when used with MM-CF, 200% for the 1.5 kW or lower, and 150% for the 2.0 kW or higher)
200% (FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower and FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or lower). 150% (FR-A820-00340(5.5K) or higher and FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or higher) under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control.
Current synchronization operation 50%
Zero speed
High frequency superposition control
Available (Select the HD rating for zero speed 200%.) Available under Real sensorless
vector control and Vector controlCurrent synchronization operation Not available
Carrier frequency
High frequency superposition control
6 kHz (Pr.72 = "0 to 9"), 10 kHz (Pr.72 = "10 to 13"), 14 kHz (Pr.72 = "14 or 15") (6 kHz in a low-speed range of 10 kHz or higher. 2 kHz is not selectable.)
Any value in the range of 0.75 kHz to 14.5 kHz (FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower)
Current synchronization operation
2 kHz (Pr.72 = "0 to 5"), 6 kHz (Pr.72 = "6 to 9"), 10 kHz (Pr.72 = "10 to 13"), 14 kHz (Pr.72 = "14 or 15") (6 kHz in a low-speed range of 10 kHz or higher.)
0.75 kHz to 6 kHz (FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher)
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
No startup delay time. Using the regeneration avoidance function or retry function together is recommended.
Startup waiting time exists.
Startup delay Startup delay of about 0.1 second for magnetic pole position detection.
No startup delay (when online auto tuning is not performed at startup).
Driving by the commercial power supply Cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.
Can be driven by the commercial power supply. (Other than vector control dedicated motor.)
Operation during coasting While the motor is coasting, potential is generated across motor terminals.
While the motor is coasting, potential is not generated across motor terminals.
Torque control Not available Available under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
Position control
High frequency superposition control Available (sensorless)
Available under Vector control. Current synchronization operation Not available
8639. APPENDIX 9.4 Specification comparison between PM sensorless vector control and induction motor control
86
9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
*1 Instruction codes are used to read and write parameters in accordance with the Mitsubishi inverter protocol of RS-485 communication. (For RS- 485 communication, refer to page 670.)
*2 Function availability under each control method is shown as follows: : Available : Not available : Available with some restrictions
*3 If function availability differs between using induction motors with an encoder and using PM motors with an encoder, the function availability using PM motors with an encoder is described in parentheses. Also, a PM motor with an encoder is not available in the torque control mode.
*4 For Parameter copy, Parameter clear, and All parameter clear, indicates the function is available, and indicates the function is not available. *5 Communication parameters that are not cleared by parameter clear or all clear (H5A5A or H55AA) via communication. (For RS-485
communication, refer to page 670.) *6 When a communication option is installed, parameter clear (lock release) during password lock (Pr.297 Password lock/unlock 9999) can be
performed only from the communication option. *7 Available when the IPM motor MM-CF series is used and the low-speed range high-torque characteristic is enabled (Pr.788 Low speed range
torque characteristic selection = "9999 (initial value)"). *8 Reading and writing via the PU connector are available.
Symbols in the table indicate parameters that operate when the options are connected.
FR-A8AP, FR-A8AL, FR-A8TP, FR-A8APR, FR-A8APS, FR-A8APA, FR-A8AR, FR-A8AX, FR-
A8AY, FR-A8AZ, FR-A8AVP, FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, FR-A8NCG, FR-A8ND, FR-A8NP, FR-A8NF,
FR-A8NS
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
0 Torque boost 00 80 0 1 Maximum frequency 01 81 0 2 Minimum frequency 02 82 0 3 Base frequency 03 83 0 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 04 84 0
5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 05 85 0
6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 06 86 0 7 Acceleration time 07 87 0 8 Deceleration time 08 88 0 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay 09 89 0
10 DC injection brake operation frequency 0A 8A 0
11 DC injection brake operation time 0B 8B 0
12 DC injection brake operation voltage 0C 8C 0
13 Starting frequency 0D 8D 0 14 Load pattern selection 0E 8E 0 15 Jog frequency 0F 8F 0
16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time 10 90 0
17 MRS input selection 11 91 0 18 High speed maximum frequency 12 92 0 19 Base frequency voltage 13 93 0
20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency 14 94 0
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
4 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments 15 95 0
22 Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level) 16 96 0
23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed
17 97 0
24 Multi-speed setting (speed 4) 18 98 0 25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5) 19 99 0 26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6) 1A 9A 0 27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7) 1B 9B 0
28 Multi-speed input compensation selection 1C 9C 0
29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection 1D 9D 0
30 Regenerative function selection 1E 9E 0 31 Frequency jump 1A 1F 9F 0 32 Frequency jump 1B 20 A0 0 33 Frequency jump 2A 21 A1 0 34 Frequency jump 2B 22 A2 0 35 Frequency jump 3A 23 A3 0 36 Frequency jump 3B 24 A4 0 37 Speed display 25 A5 0 41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 29 A9 0 42 Output frequency detection 2A AA 0
43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation 2B AB 0
44 Second acceleration/ deceleration time 2C AC 0
45 Second deceleration time 2D AD 0 46 Second torque boost 2E AE 0 47 Second V/F (base frequency) 2F AF 0
48 Second stall prevention operation level 30 B0 0
49 Second stall prevention operation frequency 31 B1 0
50 Second output frequency detection 32 B2 0
51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay 33 B3 0
52 Operation panel main monitor selection 34 B4 0
54 FM/CA terminal function selection 36 B6 0
55 Frequency monitoring reference 37 B7 0 56 Current monitoring reference 38 B8 0 57 Restart coasting time 39 B9 0 58 Restart cushion time 3A BA 0 59 Remote function selection 3B BB 0 60 Energy saving control selection 3C BC 0
61 Reference current 3D BD 0 ()
62 Reference value at acceleration 3E BE 0 ()
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8659. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
86
63 Reference value at deceleration 3F BF 0 ()
64 Starting frequency for elevator mode 40 C0 0
65 Retry selection 41 C1 0
66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency 42 C2 0
67 Number of retries at fault occurrence 43 C3 0
68 Retry waiting time 44 C4 0 69 Retry count display erase 45 C5 0 70 Special regenerative brake duty 46 C6 0 71 Applied motor 47 C7 0 72 PWM frequency selection 48 C8 0 73 Analog input selection 49 C9 0 74 Input filter time constant 4A CA 0
75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection 4B CB 0
76 Fault code output selection 4C CC 0
77*8 Parameter write selection 4D CD 0
78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 4E CE 0
79*8 Operation mode selection 4F CF 0 80 Motor capacity 50 D0 0 81 Number of motor poles 51 D1 0
82 Motor excitation current 52 D2 0 ()
()
83 Rated motor voltage 53 D3 0 ()
84 Rated motor frequency 54 D4 0 85 Excitation current break point 55 D5 0
86 Excitation current low-speed scaling factor 56 D6 0
89 Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic flux vector) 59 D9 0
90 Motor constant (R1) 5A DA 0
91 Motor constant (R2) 5B DB 0 ()
()
92 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) 5C DC 0
93 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) 5D DD 0
94 Motor constant (X) 5E DE 0 ()
()
95 Online auto tuning selection 5F DF 0 ()
()
96 Auto tuning setting/status 60 E0 0 ()
100 V/F1 (first frequency) 00 80 1 101 V/F1 (first frequency voltage) 01 81 1 102 V/F2 (second frequency) 02 82 1 103 V/F2 (second frequency voltage) 03 83 1 104 V/F3 (third frequency) 04 84 1 105 V/F3 (third frequency voltage) 05 85 1
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
6 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
106 V/F4 (fourth frequency) 06 86 1 107 V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage) 07 87 1 108 V/F5 (fifth frequency) 08 88 1 109 V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage) 09 89 1
110 Third acceleration/deceleration time 0A 8A 1
111 Third deceleration time 0B 8B 1 112 Third torque boost 0C 8C 1 113 Third V/F (base frequency) 0D 8D 1
114 Third stall prevention operation level 0E 8E 1
115 Third stall prevention operation frequency 0F 8F 1
116 Third output frequency detection 10 90 1
117 PU communication station number 11 91 1 *5 *5
118 PU communication speed 12 92 1 *5 *5
119 PU communication stop bit length / data length 13 93 1 *5 *5
120 PU communication parity check 14 94 1 *5 *5
121 PU communication retry count 15 95 1 *5 *5
122 PU communication check time interval 16 96 1 *5 *5
123 PU communication waiting time setting 17 97 1 *5 *5
124 PU communication CR/LF selection 18 98 1 *5 *5
125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 19 99 1
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 1A 9A 1
127 PID control automatic switchover frequency 1B 9B 1
128 PID action selection 1C 9C 1 129 PID proportional band 1D 9D 1 130 PID integral time 1E 9E 1 131 PID upper limit 1F 9F 1 132 PID lower limit 20 A0 1 133 PID action set point 21 A1 1 134 PID differential time 22 A2 1
135 Electronic bypass sequence selection 23 A3 1
()
136 MC switchover interlock time 24 A4 1 ()
137 Start waiting time 25 A5 1 ()
138 Bypass selection at a fault 26 A6 1 ()
139 Automatic switchover frequency from inverter to bypass operation 27 A7 1
()
140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency 28 A8 1
141 Backlash acceleration stopping time 29 A9 1
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8679. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
86
142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 2A AA 1
143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 2B AB 1
144 Speed setting switchover 2C AC 1 145 PU display language selection 2D AD 1
147 Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency 2F AF 1
148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input 30 B0 1
149 Stall prevention level at 10 V input 31 B1 1
150 Output current detection level 32 B2 1
151 Output current detection signal delay time 33 B3 1
152 Zero current detection level 34 B4 1 153 Zero current detection time 35 B5 1
154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation 36 B6 1
155 RT signal function validity condition selection 37 B7 1
156 Stall prevention operation selection 38 B8 1
157 OL signal output timer 39 B9 1 158 AM terminal function selection 3A BA 1
159 Automatic switchover frequency range from bypass to inverter operation
3B BB 1 ()
160 User group read selection 00 80 2
161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection 01 81 2
162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection
02 82 2
163 First cushion time for restart 03 83 2 164 First cushion voltage for restart 04 84 2
165 Stall prevention operation level for restart 05 85 2
166 Output current detection signal retention time 06 86 2
167 Output current detection operation selection 07 87 2
168 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
169 170 Watt-hour meter clear 0A 8A 2 171 Operation hour meter clear 0B 8B 2
172 User group registered display/ batch clear 0C 8C 2
173 User group registration 0D 8D 2 174 User group clear 0E 8E 2 178 STF terminal function selection 12 92 2 179 STR terminal function selection 13 93 2 180 RL terminal function selection 14 94 2 181 RM terminal function selection 15 95 2 182 RH terminal function selection 16 96 2
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
183 RT terminal function selection 17 97 2 184 AU terminal function selection 18 98 2 185 JOG terminal function selection 19 99 2 186 CS terminal function selection 1A 9A 2 187 MRS terminal function selection 1B 9B 2 188 STOP terminal function selection 1C 9C 2 189 RES terminal function selection 1D 9D 2 190 RUN terminal function selection 1E 9E 2 191 SU terminal function selection 1F 9F 2 192 IPF terminal function selection 20 A0 2 193 OL terminal function selection 21 A1 2 194 FU terminal function selection 22 A2 2 195 ABC1 terminal function selection 23 A3 2 196 ABC2 terminal function selection 24 A4 2 232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8) 28 A8 2 233 Multi-speed setting (speed 9) 29 A9 2 234 Multi-speed setting (speed 10) 2A AA 2 235 Multi-speed setting (speed 11) 2B AB 2 236 Multi-speed setting (speed 12) 2C AC 2 237 Multi-speed setting (speed 13) 2D AD 2 238 Multi-speed setting (speed 14) 2E AE 2 239 Multi-speed setting (speed 15) 2F AF 2 240 Soft-PWM operation selection 30 B0 2
241 Analog input display unit switchover 31 B1 2
242 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 2) 32 B2 2
243 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 4) 33 B3 2
244 Cooling fan operation selection 34 B4 2 245 Rated slip 35 B5 2 246 Slip compensation time constant 36 B6 2
247 Constant output range slip compensation selection 37 B7 2
248 Self power management selection 38 B8 2
()
249 Earth (ground) fault detection at start 39 B9 2
250 Stop selection 3A BA 2
251 Output phase loss protection selection 3B BB 2
252 Override bias 3C BC 2 253 Override gain 3D BD 2
254 Main circuit power OFF waiting time 3E BE 2
()
255 Life alarm status display 3F BF 2
256 Inrush current limit circuit life display 40 C0 2
257 Control circuit capacitor life display 41 C1 2
258 Main circuit capacitor life display 42 C2 2
259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 43 C3 2
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8699. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
87
260 PWM frequency automatic switchover 44 C4 2
261 Power failure stop selection 45 C5 2
262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 46 C6 2
263 Subtraction starting frequency 47 C7 2 264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 48 C8 2 265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 49 C9 2
266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency 4A CA 2
267 Terminal 4 input selection 4B CB 2 268 Monitor decimal digits selection 4C CC 2 269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection
4E CE 2
271 High-speed setting maximum current 4F CF 2
272 Middle-speed setting minimum current 50 D0 2
273 Current averaging range 51 D1 2
274 Current averaging filter time constant 52 D2 2
275 Stop-on contact excitation current low-speed scaling factor 53 D3 2
276 PWM carrier frequency at stop- on contact 54 D4 2
278 Brake opening frequency 56 D6 2 279 Brake opening current 57 D7 2
280 Brake opening current detection time 58 D8 2
281 Brake operation time at start 59 D9 2 282 Brake operation frequency 5A DA 2 283 Brake operation time at stop 5B DB 2
284 Deceleration detection function selection 5C DC 2
285 Overspeed detection frequency (Speed deviation excess detection frequency)
5D DD 2
286 Droop gain 5E DE 2 287 Droop filter time constant 5F DF 2
288 Droop function activation selection 60 E0 2
289 Inverter output terminal filter 61 E1 2
290 Monitor negative output selection 62 E2 2
291 Pulse train I/O selection 63 E3 2
292 Automatic acceleration/ deceleration 64 E4 2
()
293 Acceleration/deceleration separate selection 65 E5 2
()
294 UV avoidance voltage gain 66 E6 2
295 Frequency change increment amount setting 67 E7 2
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
0 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
296 Password lock level 68 E8 2 297 Password lock/unlock 69 E9 2 *6 298 Frequency search gain 6A EA 2
299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting 6B EB 2
300 BCD input bias 00 80 3 301 BCD input gain 01 81 3 302 BIN input bias 02 82 3 303 BIN input gain 03 83 3
304 Digital/analog input compensation enable/disable selection
04 84 3
305 Read timing operation selection 05 85 3
306 Analog output signal selection 06 86 3
307 Setting for zero analog output 07 87 3
308 Setting for maximum analog output 08 88 3
309 Analog output voltage/current signal switchover 09 89 3
310 Analog meter voltage output selection 0A 8A 3
311 Setting for zero analog meter voltage output 0B 8B 3
312 Setting for maximum analog meter voltage output 0C 8C 3
313 DO0 output selection 0D 8D 3
314 DO1 output selection 0E 8E 3
315 DO2 output selection 0F 8F 3
316 DO3 output selection 10 90 3 317 DO4 output selection 11 91 3 318 DO5 output selection 12 92 3 319 DO6 output selection 13 93 3 320 RA1 output selection 14 94 3 321 RA2 output selection 15 95 3 322 RA3 output selection 16 96 3 323 AM0 0 V adjustment 17 97 3 324 AM1 0 mA adjustment 18 98 3
326 Motor temperature feedback reference 1A 9A 3
() ()
328 Inverter/converter switching 1C 9C 3 329 Digital input unit selection 1D 9D 3
331 RS-485 communication station number 1F 9F 3 *5 *5
332 RS-485 communication speed 20 A0 3 *5 *5
333 RS-485 communication stop bit length / data length 21 A1 3 *5 *5
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8719. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
87
334 RS-485 communication parity check selection 22 A2 3 *5 *5
335 RS-485 communication retry count 23 A3 3 *5 *5
336 RS-485 communication check time interval 24 A4 3 *5 *5
337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting 25 A5 3 *5 *5
338 Communication operation command source 26 A6 3 *5 *5
339 Communication speed command source 27 A7 3 *5 *5
340 Communication startup mode selection 28 A8 3 *5 *5
341 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection 29 A9 3 *5 *5
342 Communication EEPROM write selection 2A AA 3
343 Communication error count 2B AB 3 345 DeviceNet address 2D AD 3 *5 *5
346 DeviceNet baud rate 2E AE 3 *5 *5
349 Communication reset selection/ Ready bit status selection
31 B1 3 *5 *5
350 Stop position command selection 32 B2 3
351 Orientation speed 33 B3 3
352 Creep speed 34 B4 3
353 Creep switchover position 35 B5 3
354 Position loop switchover position 36 B6 3
355 DC injection brake start position 37 B7 3
356 Internal stop position command 38 B8 3
357 Orientation in-position zone 39 B9 3
358 Servo torque selection 3A BA 3
359 Encoder rotation direction 3B BB 3
() ()
360 16-bit data selection 3C BC 3
361 Position shift 3D BD 3
362 Orientation position loop gain 3E BE 3
363 Completion signal output delay time 3F BF 3
364 Encoder stop check time 40 C0 3
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
2 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
365 Orientation limit 41 C1 3
366 Recheck time 42 C2 3
367 Speed feedback range 43 C3 3
368 Feedback gain 44 C4 3
369 Number of encoder pulses 45 C5 3
() ()
373 Encoder position tuning setting/ status 49 C9 3
()
374 Overspeed detection level 4A CA 3
376 Encoder signal loss detection enable/disable selection
4C CC 3
379 SSCNET III rotation direction selection 4F CF 3 *5 *5
380 Acceleration S-pattern 1 50 D0 3 381 Deceleration S-pattern 1 51 D1 3 382 Acceleration S-pattern 2 52 D2 3 383 Deceleration S-pattern 2 53 D3 3 384 Input pulse division scaling factor 54 D4 3 385 Frequency for zero input pulse 55 D5 3
386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 56 D6 3
393 Orientation selection 5D DD 3
394 Number of machine side gear teeth 5E DE 3
395 Number of motor side gear teeth 5F DF 3
396 Orientation speed gain (P term) 60 E0 3
397 Orientation speed integral time 61 E1 3
398 Orientation speed gain (D term) 62 E2 3
399 Orientation deceleration ratio 63 E3 3
406 High resolution analog input selection 06 86
407 Motor temperature detection filter 07 87
408 Motor thermistor selection 08 88 413 Encoder pulse division ratio 0D 8D 4 414 PLC function operation selection 0E 8E 4
415 Inverter operation lock mode setting 0F 8F 4
416 Pre-scale function selection 10 90 4 417 Pre-scale setting value 11 91 4
418 Extension output terminal filter 12 92 4
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8739. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
87
419 Position command source selection 13 93 4
420 Command pulse scaling factor numerator (electronic gear numerator)
14 94 4
421 Command pulse multiplication denominator (electronic gear denominator)
15 95 4
422 Position control gain 16 96 4 423 Position feed forward gain 17 97 4
424 Position command acceleration/ deceleration time constant 18 98 4
425 Position feed forward command filter 19 99 4
426 In-position width 1 A 9A 4 427 Excessive level error 1B 9B 4 428 Command pulse selection 1C 9C 4 429 Clear signal selection 1D 9D 4 430 Pulse monitor selection 1E 9E 4
432 Pulse train torque command bias 20 A0 4
433 Pulse train torque command gain 21 A1 4
434 Network number (CC-Link IE) 22 A2 4 *5 *5
IP Address 1
435 Station number (CC-Link IE)
23 A3 4 *5 *5 IP Address 2
436 IP address 3 24 A4 4 *5 *5
437 IP address 4 25 A5 4 *5 *5
438 Subnet mask 1 26 A6 4 *5 *5
439 Subnet mask 2 27 A7 4 *5 *5
440 Subnet mask 3 28 A8 4 *5 *5
441 Subnet mask 4 29 A9 4 *5 *5
446 Model position control gain 2E AE 4 447 Digital torque command bias 2F AF 4 448 Digital torque command gain 30 B0 4 449 SSCNET III input filter setting 31 B1 4 *5 *5
450 Second applied motor 32 B2 4
451 Second motor control method selection 33 B3 4
453 Second motor capacity 35 B5 4 454 Number of second motor poles 36 B6 4
455 Second motor excitation current 37 B7 4 ()
()
456 Rated second motor voltage 38 B8 4 ()
457 Rated second motor frequency 39 B9 4 458 Second motor constant (R1) 3A BA 4
459 Second motor constant (R2) 3B BB 4 ()
()
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
4 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
460 Second motor constant (L1) / d- axis inductance (Ld) 3C BC 4
461 Second motor constant (L2) / q- axis inductance (Lq) 3D BD 4
462 Second motor constant (X) 3E BE 4 ()
()
463 Second motor auto tuning setting/status 3F BF 4
()
464 Digital position control sudden stop deceleration time 40 C0 4
465 First target position lower 4 digits 41 C1 4 466 First target position upper 4 digits 42 C2 4
467 Second target position lower 4 digits 43 C3 4
468 Second target position upper 4 digits 44 C4 4
469 Third target position lower 4 digits 45 C5 4
470 Third target position upper 4 digits 46 C6 4
471 Fourth target position lower 4 digits 47 C7 4
472 Fourth target position upper 4 digits 48 C8 4
473 Fifth target position lower 4 digits 49 C9 4 474 Fifth target position upper 4 digits 4A CA 4
475 Sixth target position lower 4 digits 4B CB 4
476 Sixth target position upper 4 digits 4C CC 4
477 Seventh target position lower 4 digits 4D CD 4
478 Seventh target position upper 4 digits 4E CE 4
479 Eighth target position lower 4 digits 4F CF 4
480 Eighth target position upper 4 digits 50 D0 4
481 Ninth target position lower 4 digits 51 D1 4
482 Ninth target position upper 4 digits 52 D2 4
483 Tenth target position lower 4 digits 53 D3 4
484 Tenth target position upper 4 digits 54 D4 4
485 Eleventh target position lower 4 digits 55 D5 4
486 Eleventh target position upper 4 digits 56 D6 4
487 Twelfth target position lower 4 digits 57 D7 4
488 Twelfth target position upper 4 digits 58 D8 4
489 Thirteenth target position lower 4 digits 59 D9 4
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8759. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
87
490 Thirteenth target position upper 4 digits 5A DA 4
491 Fourteenth target position lower 4 digits 5B DB 4
492 Fourteenth target position upper 4 digits 5C DC 4
493 Fifteenth target position lower 4 digits 5D DD 4
494 Fifteenth target position upper 4 digits 5E DE 4
495 Remote output selection 5F DF 4 496 Remote output data 1 60 E0 4 497 Remote output data 2 61 E1 4 498 PLC function flash memory clear 62 E2 4
499 SSCNET III operation selection 63 E3 4 *5 *5
500 Communication error execution waiting time
00 80 5
501 Communication error occurrence count display
01 81 5
502 Stop mode selection at communication error 02 82 5
503 Maintenance timer 1 03 83 5
504 Maintenance timer 1 warning output set time 04 84 5
505 Speed setting reference 05 85 5
506 Display estimated main circuit capacitor residual life 06 86 5
507 Display/reset ABC1 relay contact life 07 87 5
508 Display/reset ABC2 relay contact life 08 88 5
516 S-pattern time at a start of acceleration 10 90 5
517 S-pattern time at a completion of acceleration 11 91 5
518 S-pattern time at a start of deceleration 12 92 5
519 S-pattern time at a completion of deceleration 13 93 5
522 Output stop frequency 16 96 5
539 MODBUS RTU communication check time interval 27 A7 5 *5 *5
541 Frequency command sign selection 29 A9 5 *5 *5
542 Communication station number (CC-Link) 2A AA 5 *5 *5
543 Baud rate selection (CC- Link) 2B AB 5 *5 *5
544 CC-Link extended setting 2C AC 5 *5 *5
547 USB communication station number 2F AF 5 *5 *5
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
6 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
548 USB communication check time interval 30 B0 5 *5 *5
549 Protocol selection 31 B1 5 *5 *5
550 NET mode operation command source selection 32 B2 5 *5 *5
551 PU mode operation command source selection 33 B3 5 *5 *5
552 Frequency jump range 34 B4 5 553 PID deviation limit 35 B5 5 554 PID signal operation selection 36 B6 5 555 Current average time 37 B7 5 556 Data output mask time 38 B8 5
557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current 39 B9 5
560 Second frequency search gain 3C BC 5 561 PTC thermistor protection level 3D BD 5
563 Energization time carrying-over times 3F BF 5
564 Operating time carrying-over times 40 C0 5
565 Second motor excitation current break point 41 C1 5
566 Second motor excitation current low-speed scaling factor 42 C2 5
569 Second motor speed control gain 45 C5 5 570 Multiple rating setting 46 C6 5 571 Holding time at a start 47 C7 5 573 4 mA input check selection 49 C9 5
574 Second motor online auto tuning 4A CA 5 ()
()
575 Output interruption detection time 4B CB 5
576 Output interruption detection level 4C CC 5
577 Output interruption cancel level 4D CD 5 592 Traverse function selection 5C DC 5 593 Maximum amplitude amount 5D DD 5
594 Amplitude compensation amount during deceleration 5E DE 5
595 Amplitude compensation amount during acceleration 5F DF 5
596 Amplitude acceleration time 60 E0 5 597 Amplitude deceleration time 61 E1 5
598 Undervoltage level 62 E2 5 ()
()
599 X10 terminal input selection 63 E3 5
600 First free thermal reduction frequency 1 00 80 6
601 First free thermal reduction ratio 1 01 81 6
602 First free thermal reduction frequency 2 02 82 6
603 First free thermal reduction ratio 2 03 83 6
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8779. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
87
604 First free thermal reduction frequency 3 04 84 6
606 Power failure stop external signal input selection 06 86 6
607 Motor permissible load level 07 87 6
608 Second motor permissible load level 08 88 6
609 PID set point/deviation input selection 09 89 6
610 PID measured value input selection 0A 8A 6
611 Acceleration time at a restart 0B 8B 6
617 Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor 11 91 6
635 Cumulative pulse clear signal selection 23 A3 6
636 Cumulative pulse division scaling factor
24 A4 6
637
Control terminal option- Cumulative pulse division scaling factor
25 A5 6
638 Cumulative pulse storage 26 A6 6
639 Brake opening current selection 27 A7 6
640 Brake operation frequency selection 28 A8 6
641 Second brake sequence operation selection 29 A9 6
642 Second brake opening frequency 2A AA 6
643 Second brake opening current 2B AB 6
644 Second brake opening current detection time 2C AC 6
645 Second brake operation time at start 2D AD 6
646 Second brake operation frequency 2E AE 6
647 Second brake operation time at stop 2F AF 6
648 Second deceleration detection function selection 30 B0 6
650 Second brake opening current selection 32 B2 6
651 Second brake operation frequency selection 33 B3 6
653 Speed smoothing control 35 B5 6
654 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency 36 B6 6
655 Analog remote output selection 37 B7 6 656 Analog remote output 1 38 B8 6 657 Analog remote output 2 39 B9 6
658 Analog remote output 3 3A BA 6
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
659 Analog remote output 4 3B BB 6
660 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation selection 3C BC 6
()
661 Magnetic excitation increase rate 3D BD 6 ()
662 Increased magnetic excitation current level 3E BE 6
663 Control circuit temperature signal output level 3F BF 6
665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 41 C1 6
668 Power failure stop frequency gain 44 C4 6
673 SF-PR slip amount adjustment operation selection 49 C9 6
674 SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain 4A CA 6
675 User parameter auto storage function selection 4B CB 6
679 Second droop gain 4F CF 6 680 Second droop filter time constant 50 D0 6
681 Second droop function activation selection 51 D1 6
682 Second droop break point gain 52 D2 6 683 Second droop break point torque 53 D3 6 684 Tuning data unit switchover 54 D4 6 686 Maintenance timer 2 56 D6 6
687 Maintenance timer 2 warning output set time 57 D7 6
688 Maintenance timer 3 58 D8 6
689 Maintenance timer 3 warning output set time 59 D9 6
690 Deceleration check time 5A DA 6
692 Second free thermal reduction frequency 1 5C DC 6
693 Second free thermal reduction ratio 1 5D DD 6
694 Second free thermal reduction frequency 2 5E DE 6
695 Second free thermal reduction ratio 2 5F DF 6
696 Second free thermal reduction frequency 3 60 E0 6
699 Input terminal filter 63 E3 6
702 Maximum motor frequency 02 82 7 ()
()
706 Induced voltage constant (phi f) 06 86 7 ()
()
707 Motor inertia (integer) 07 87 7
711 Motor Ld decay ratio 0B 8B 7 ()
()
712 Motor Lq decay ratio 0C 8C 7 ()
()
717 Starting resistance tuning compensation 11 91 7
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8799. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
88
721 Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width 15 95 7
724 Motor inertia (exponent) 18 98 7
725 Motor protection current level 19 99 7 ()
()
738 Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) 26 A6 7
() ()
739 Second motor Ld decay ratio 27 A7 7 ()
()
740 Second motor Lq decay ratio 28 A8 7 ()
()
741 Second starting resistance tuning compensation 29 A9 7
742 Second motor magnetic pole detection pulse width 2A AA 7
743 Second motor maximum frequency 2B AB 7
() ()
744 Second motor inertia (integer) 2C AC 7 745 Second motor inertia (exponent) 2D AD 7
746 Second motor protection current level 2E AE 7
() ()
747 Second motor low-speed range torque characteristic selection 2F AF 7
750 Motor temperature detection level 32 B2 7
751 Reference motor temperature 33 B3 7
753 Second PID action selection 35 B5 7
754 Second PID control automatic switchover frequency 36 B6 7
755 Second PID action set point 37 B7 7 756 Second PID proportional band 38 B8 7 757 Second PID integral time 39 B9 7 758 Second PID differential time 3A BA 7 759 PID unit selection 3B BB 7 760 Pre-charge fault selection 3C BC 7 761 Pre-charge ending level 3D BD 7 762 Pre-charge ending time 3E BE 7 763 Pre-charge upper detection level 3F BF 7 764 Pre-charge time limit 40 C0 7
765 Second pre-charge fault selection 41 C1 7
766 Second pre-charge ending level 42 C2 7 767 Second pre-charge ending time 43 C3 7
768 Second pre-charge upper detection level 44 C4 7
769 Second pre-charge time limit 45 C5 7
774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 4A CA 7
775 Operation panel monitor selection 2 4B CB 7
776 Operation panel monitor selection 3 4C CC 7
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
0 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
777 4 mA input fault operation frequency 4D CD 7
778 4 mA input check filter 4E CE 7
779 Operation frequency during communication error 4F CF 7
788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection 58 D8 7
791 Acceleration time in low-speed range 5B DB 7
792 Deceleration time in low-speed range 5C DC 7
799 Pulse increment setting for output power 63 E3 7
800 Control method selection 00 80 8 802 Pre-excitation selection 02 82 8
803 Constant output range torque characteristic selection 03 83 8
() ()
804 Torque command source selection 04 84 8
805 Torque command value (RAM) 05 85 8
806 Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM) 06 86 8
807 Speed limit selection 07 87 8
808 Forward rotation speed limit/ speed limit 08 88 8
809 Reverse rotation speed limit/ reverse-side speed limit 09 89 8
810 Torque limit input method selection 0A 8A 8
811 Set resolution switchover 0B 8B 8 812 Torque limit level (regeneration) 0C 8C 8 813 Torque limit level (3rd quadrant) 0D 8D 8 814 Torque limit level (4th quadrant) 0E 8E 8 815 Torque limit level 2 0F 8F 8
816 Torque limit level during acceleration 10 90 8
817 Torque limit level during deceleration 11 91 8
818 Easy gain tuning response level setting 12 92 8
819 Easy gain tuning selection 13 93 8 820 Speed control P gain 1 14 94 8 821 Speed control integral time 1 15 95 8 822 Speed setting filter 1 16 96 8
823 Speed detection filter 1 17 97 8
824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) 18 98 8
825 Torque control integral time 1 (current loop integral time) 19 99 8
826 Torque setting filter 1 1 A 9A 8 827 Torque detection filter 1 1B 9B 8 828 Model speed control gain 1C 9C 8
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8819. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
88
829 Number of machine end encoder pulses 1D 9D 8
830 Speed control P gain 2 1E 9E 8 831 Speed control integral time 2 1F 9F 8 832 Speed setting filter 2 20 A0 8
833 Speed detection filter 2 21 A1 8
834 Torque control P gain 2 (current loop proportional gain) 22 A2 8
835 Torque control integral time 2 (current loop integral time) 23 A3 8
836 Torque setting filter 2 24 A4 8 837 Torque detection filter 2 25 A5 8
838 DA1 terminal function selection 26 A6 8
839 DA1 output filter 27 A7 8
840 Torque bias selection 28 A8 8 ()
841 Torque bias 1 29 A9 8 ()
842 Torque bias 2 2A AA 8 ()
843 Torque bias 3 2B AB 8 ()
844 Torque bias filter 2C AC 8 ()
845 Torque bias operation time 2D AD 8 ()
846 Torque bias balance compensation 2E AE 8
()
847 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias 2F AF 8
()
848 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 gain 30 B0 8
()
849 Analog input offset adjustment 31 B1 8 850 Brake operation selection 32 B2 8
851 Control terminal option-Number of encoder pulses 33 B3 8
() ()
852 Control terminal option-Encoder rotation direction 34 B4 8
() ()
853 Speed deviation time 35 B5 8
854 Excitation ratio 36 B6 8 ()
()
855 Control terminal option-Signal loss detection enable/disable selection
37 B7 8 ()
()
857 DA1-0V adjustment 39 B9 8 858 Terminal 4 function assignment 3A BA 8
859 Torque current/Rated PM motor current 3B BB 8
860 Second motor torque current/ Rated PM motor current 3C BC 8
862 Encoder option selection 3E BE 8
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
2 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
863 Control terminal option-Encoder pulse division ratio 3F BF 8
864 Torque detection 40 C0 8 865 Low speed detection 41 C1 8 866 Torque monitoring reference 42 C2 8 867 AM output filter 43 C3 8 868 Terminal 1 function assignment 44 C4 8 869 Current output filter 45 C5 8 870 Speed detection hysteresis 46 C6 8
871 Control terminal option Encoder position tuning setting/ status
47 C7 8 ()
872 Input phase loss protection selection 48 C8 8
873 Speed limit 49 C9 8
()
874 OLT level setting 4A CA 8 875 Fault definition 4B CB 8 876 Thermal protector input 4C CC 8
877 Speed feed forward control/ model adaptive speed control selection
4D CD 8
878 Speed feed forward filter 4E CE 8 879 Speed feed forward torque limit 4F CF 8 880 Load inertia ratio 50 D0 8 881 Speed feed forward gain 51 D1 8
882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection 52 D2 8
883 Regeneration avoidance operation level 53 D3 8
884 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity 54 D4 8
885 Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value
55 D5 8
886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 56 D6 8
887 Control terminal option Encoder magnetic pole position offset
57 D7 8 ()
()
888 Free parameter 1 58 D8 8 889 Free parameter 2 59 D9 8
891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times 5B DB 8
892 Load factor 5C DC 8
893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity) 5D DD 8
894 Control selection during commercial power-supply operation
5E DE 8
895 Power saving rate reference value 5F DF 8
896 Power unit cost 60 E0 8
897 Power saving monitor average time 61 E1 8
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8839. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
88
898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 62 E2 8
899 Operation time rate (estimated value) 63 E3 8
C0 (900) FM/CA terminal calibration 5C DC 1
C1 (901) AM terminal calibration 5D DD 1
C2 (902)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 5E DE 1
C3 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 5E DE 1
125 (903)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 5F DF 1
C4 (903)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 5F DF 1
C5 (904)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 60 E0 1
C6 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 60 E0 1
126 (905)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 61 E1 1
C7 (905)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 61 E1 1
C12 (917)
Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) 11 91 9
C13 (917) Terminal 1 bias (speed) 11 91 9
C14 (918)
Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) 12 92 9
C15 (918) Terminal 1 gain (speed) 12 92 9
C16 (919)
Terminal 1 bias command (torque/magnetic flux) 13 93 9
C17 (919)
Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic flux) 13 93 9
C18 (920)
Terminal 1 gain command (torque/magnetic flux) 14 94 9
C19 (920)
Terminal 1 gain (torque/ magnetic flux) 14 94 9
C29 (925)
Motor temperature detection calibration (analog input) 19 99 9
C30 (926)
Terminal 6 bias frequency (speed) 1A 9A 9
C31 (926) Terminal 6 bias (speed) 1A 9A 9
C32 (927)
Terminal 6 gain frequency (speed) 1B 9B 9
C33 (927) Terminal 6 gain (speed) 1B 9B 9
C34 (928)
Terminal 6 bias command (torque) 1C 9C 9
C35 (928) Terminal 6 bias (torque) 1C 9C 9
C36 (929)
Terminal 6 gain command (torque) 1D 9D 9
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
4 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C37 (929) Terminal 6 gain (torque) 1D 9D 9
C8 (930) Current output bias signal 1E 9E 9
C9 (930) Current output bias current 1E 9E 9
C10 (931) Current output gain signal 1F 9F 9
C11 (931) Current output gain current 1F 9F 9
C38 (932)
Terminal 4 bias command (torque/magnetic flux) 20 A0 9
C39 (932)
Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic flux) 20 A0 9
C40 (933)
Terminal 4 gain command (torque/magnetic flux) 21 A1 9
C41 (933)
Terminal 4 gain (torque/ magnetic flux) 21 A1 9
C42 (934) PID display bias coefficient 22 A2 9
C43 (934) PID display bias analog value 22 A2 9
C44 (935) PID display gain coefficient 23 A3 9
C45 (935) PID display gain analog value 23 A3 9
977 Input voltage mode selection 4D CD 9 989 Parameter copy alarm release 59 D9 9 990 PU buzzer control 5A DA 9 991 PU contrast adjustment 5B DB 9
992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection 5C DC 9
994 Droop break point gain 5E DE 9 995 Droop break point torque 5F DF 9 997 Fault initiation 61 E1 9 998 PM parameter initialization 62 E2 9 999 Automatic parameter setting 63 E3 9
1000 Direct setting selection 00 80 A
1002 Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient 02 82 A
()
1003 Notch filter frequency 03 83 A 1004 Notch filter depth 04 84 A 1005 Notch filter width 05 85 A 1006 Clock (year) 06 86 A 1007 Clock (month, day) 07 87 A 1008 Clock (hour, minute) 08 88 A
1015 Integral stop selection at limited frequency 0F 8F A
1016 PTC thermistor protection detection time 10 90 A
1018 Monitor with sign selection 12 92 A
1019 Analog meter voltage negative output selection 13 93 A
1020 Trace operation selection 14 94 A
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8859. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
88
1021 Trace mode selection 15 95 A 1022 Sampling cycle 16 96 A 1023 Number of analog channels 17 97 A 1024 Sampling auto start 18 98 A 1025 Trigger mode selection 19 99 A
1026 Number of sampling before trigger 1A 9A A
1027 Analog source selection (1ch) 1B 9B A 1028 Analog source selection (2ch) 1C 9C A 1029 Analog source selection (3ch) 1D 9D A 1030 Analog source selection (4ch) 1E 9E A 1031 Analog source selection (5ch) 1F 9F A 1032 Analog source selection (6ch) 20 A0 A 1033 Analog source selection (7ch) 21 A1 A 1034 Analog source selection (8ch) 22 A2 A 1035 Analog trigger channel 23 A3 A
1036 Analog trigger operation selection 24 A4 A
1037 Analog trigger level 25 A5 A 1038 Digital source selection (1ch) 26 A6 A 1039 Digital source selection (2ch) 27 A7 A 1040 Digital source selection (3ch) 28 A8 A 1041 Digital source selection (4ch) 29 A9 A 1042 Digital source selection (5ch) 2A AA A 1043 Digital source selection (6ch) 2B AB A 1044 Digital source selection (7ch) 2C AC A 1045 Digital source selection (8ch) 2D AD A 1046 Digital trigger channel 2E AE A 1047 Digital trigger operation selection 2F AF A 1048 Display-off waiting time 30 B0 A 1049 USB host reset 31 B1 A
1072 DC brake judgment time for anti- sway control operation 48 C8 A
1073 Anti-sway control operation selection 49 C9 A
1074 Anti-sway control frequency 4A CA A 1075 Anti-sway control depth 4B CB A 1076 Anti-sway control width 4C CC A 1077 Rope length 4D CD A 1078 Trolley weight 4E CE A 1079 Load weight 4F CF A
1103 Deceleration time at emergency stop 03 83 B
1105 Encoder magnetic pole position offset 05 85 B
() ()
1106 Torque monitor filter 06 86 B 1107 Running speed monitor filter 07 87 B 1108 Excitation current monitor filter 08 88 B
1109 PROFIBUS communication command source selection 09 89 B *5 *5
1110 PROFIBUS format selection 0A 8A B *5 *5
1113 Speed limit method selection 0D 8D B
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
6 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1114 Torque command reverse selection 0E 8E B
1115 Speed control integral term clear time 0F 8F B
1116 Constant output range speed control P gain compensation 10 90 B
1117 Speed control P gain 1 (per-unit system) 11 91 B
1118 Speed control P gain 2 (per-unit system) 12 92 B
1119 Model speed control gain (per- unit system) 13 93 B
1121 Per-unit speed control reference frequency 15 95 B
1134 PID upper limit manipulated value 22 A2 B
1135 PID lower limit manipulated value 23 A3 B
1136 Second PID display bias coefficient 24 A4 B
1137 Second PID display bias analog value 25 A5 B
1138 Second PID display gain coefficient 26 A6 B
1139 Second PID display gain analog value 27 A7 B
1140 Second PID set point/deviation input selection 28 A8 B
1141 Second PID measured value input selection 29 A9 B
1142 Second PID unit selection 2A AA B 1143 Second PID upper limit 2B AB B 1144 Second PID lower limit 2C AC B 1145 Second PID deviation limit 2D AD B
1146 Second PID signal operation selection 2E AE B
1147 Second output interruption detection time 2F AF B
1148 Second output interruption detection level 30 B0 B
1149 Second output interruption cancel level 31 B1 B
1150 PLC function user parameters 1 32 B2 B 1151 PLC function user parameters 2 33 B3 B 1152 PLC function user parameters 3 34 B4 B 1153 PLC function user parameters 4 35 B5 B 1154 PLC function user parameters 5 36 B6 B 1155 PLC function user parameters 6 37 B7 B 1156 PLC function user parameters 7 38 B8 B 1157 PLC function user parameters 8 39 B9 B 1158 PLC function user parameters 9 3A BA B 1159 PLC function user parameters 10 3B BB B 1160 PLC function user parameters 11 3C BC B 1161 PLC function user parameters 12 3D BD B
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8879. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
88
1162 PLC function user parameters 13 3E BE B 1163 PLC function user parameters 14 3F BF B 1164 PLC function user parameters 15 40 C0 B 1165 PLC function user parameters 16 41 C1 B 1166 PLC function user parameters 17 42 C2 B 1167 PLC function user parameters 18 43 C3 B 1168 PLC function user parameters 19 44 C4 B 1169 PLC function user parameters 20 45 C5 B 1170 PLC function user parameters 21 46 C6 B 1171 PLC function user parameters 22 47 C7 B 1172 PLC function user parameters 23 48 C8 B 1173 PLC function user parameters 24 49 C9 B 1174 PLC function user parameters 25 4A CA B 1175 PLC function user parameters 26 4B CB B 1176 PLC function user parameters 27 4C CC B 1177 PLC function user parameters 28 4D CD B 1178 PLC function user parameters 29 4E CE B 1179 PLC function user parameters 30 4F CF B 1180 PLC function user parameters 31 50 D0 B 1181 PLC function user parameters 32 51 D1 B 1182 PLC function user parameters 33 52 D2 B 1183 PLC function user parameters 34 53 D3 B 1184 PLC function user parameters 35 54 D4 B 1185 PLC function user parameters 36 55 D5 B 1186 PLC function user parameters 37 56 D6 B 1187 PLC function user parameters 38 57 D7 B 1188 PLC function user parameters 39 58 D8 B 1189 PLC function user parameters 40 59 D9 B 1190 PLC function user parameters 41 5A DA B 1191 PLC function user parameters 42 5B DB B 1192 PLC function user parameters 43 5C DC B 1193 PLC function user parameters 44 5D DD B 1194 PLC function user parameters 45 5E DE B 1195 PLC function user parameters 46 5F DF B 1196 PLC function user parameters 47 60 E0 B 1197 PLC function user parameters 48 61 E1 B 1198 PLC function user parameters 49 62 E2 B 1199 PLC function user parameters 50 63 E3 B 1220 Target position/speed selection 14 94 C
1221 Start command edge detection selection 15 95 C
1222 First positioning acceleration time 16 96 C
1223 First positioning deceleration time 17 97 C
1224 First positioning dwell time 18 98 C 1225 First positioning sub-function 19 99 C
1226 Second positioning acceleration time 1A 9A C
1227 Second positioning deceleration time 1B 9B C
1228 Second positioning dwell time 1C 9C C
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1229 Second positioning sub-function 1D 9D C
1230 Third positioning acceleration time 1E 9E C
1231 Third positioning deceleration time 1F 9F C
1232 Third positioning dwell time 20 A0 C 1233 Third positioning sub-function 21 A1 C
1234 Fourth positioning acceleration time 22 A2 C
1235 Fourth positioning deceleration time 23 A3 C
1236 Fourth positioning dwell time 24 A4 C 1237 Fourth positioning sub-function 25 A5 C
1238 Fifth positioning acceleration time 26 A6 C
1239 Fifth positioning deceleration time 27 A7 C
1240 Fifth positioning dwell time 28 A8 C 1241 Fifth positioning sub-function 29 A9 C
1242 Sixth positioning acceleration time 2A AA C
1243 Sixth positioning deceleration time 2B AB C
1244 Sixth positioning dwell time 2C AC C 1245 Sixth positioning sub-function 2D AD C
1246 Seventh positioning acceleration time 2E AE C
1247 Seventh positioning deceleration time 2F AF C
1248 Seventh positioning dwell time 30 B0 C 1249 Seventh positioning sub-function 31 B1 C
1250 Eighth positioning acceleration time 32 B2 C
1251 Eighth positioning deceleration time 33 B3 C
1252 Eighth positioning dwell time 34 B4 C 1253 Eighth positioning sub-function 35 B5 C
1254 Ninth positioning acceleration time 36 B6 C
1255 Ninth positioning deceleration time 37 B7 C
1256 Ninth positioning dwell time 38 B8 C 1257 Ninth positioning sub-function 39 B9 C
1258 Tenth positioning acceleration time 3A BA C
1259 Tenth positioning deceleration time 3B BB C
1260 Tenth positioning dwell time 3C BC C 1261 Tenth positioning sub-function 3D BD C
1262 Eleventh positioning acceleration time 3E BE C
1263 Eleventh positioning deceleration time 3F BF C
1264 Eleventh positioning dwell time 40 C0 C
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8899. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
89
1265 Eleventh positioning sub- function 41 C1 C
1266 Twelfth positioning acceleration time 42 C2 C
1267 Twelfth positioning deceleration time 43 C3 C
1268 Twelfth positioning dwell time 44 C4 C 1269 Twelfth positioning sub-function 45 C5 C
1270 Thirteenth positioning acceleration time 46 C6 C
1271 Thirteenth positioning deceleration time 47 C7 C
1272 Thirteenth positioning dwell time 48 C8 C
1273 Thirteenth positioning sub- function 49 C9 C
1274 Fourteenth positioning acceleration time 4A CA C
1275 Fourteenth positioning deceleration time 4B CB C
1276 Fourteenth positioning dwell time 4C CC C
1277 Fourteenth positioning sub- function 4D CD C
1278 Fifteenth positioning acceleration time 4E CE C
1279 Fifteenth positioning deceleration time 4F CF C
1280 Fifteenth positioning dwell time 50 D0 C
1281 Fifteenth positioning sub- function 51 D1 C
1282 Home position return method selection 52 D2 C
1283 Home position return speed 53 D3 C
1284 Home position return shifting speed 54 D4 C
1285 Home position shift amount lower 4 digits 55 D5 C
1286 Home position shift amount upper 4 digits 56 D6 C
1287 Travel distance after proximity dog ON lower 4 digits 57 D7 C
1288 Travel distance after proximity dog ON upper 4 digits 58 D8 C
1289 Home position return stopper torque 59 D9 C
1290 Home position return stopper waiting time 5A DA C
1292 Position control terminal input selection 5C DC C
1293 Roll feeding mode selection 5D DD C 1294 Position detection lower 4 digits 5E DE C 1295 Position detection upper 4 digits 5F DF C 1296 Position detection selection 60 E0 C
1297 Position detection hysteresis width 61 E1 C
1298 Second position control gain 62 E2 C
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
0 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1299 Second pre-excitation selection 63 E3 C 1344 R-S turns ratio compensation 2C AC D 1345 T-S turns ratio compensation 2D AD D
1348 P/PI control switchover frequency 30 B0 D
()
1349 Emergency stop operation selection 31 B1 D
()
1382 MC switchover interlock time (for phase-synchronized bypass switching function)
52 D2 D
1383 Phase compensation amount for synchronous bypass switching
53 D3 D
1384 PLL tuning gain 54 D4 D 1410 Starting times lower 4 digits 0 A 8A E 1411 Starting times upper 4 digits 0B 8B E
1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent 0C 8C E
() ()
1413 Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent 0D 8D E
() ()
1442 IP filter address 1 (Ethernet) 2A AA E *5 *5
1443 IP filter address 2 (Ethernet) 2B AB E *5 *5
1444 IP filter address 3 (Ethernet) 2C AC E *5 *5
1445 IP filter address 4 (Ethernet) 2D AD E *5 *5
1446 IP filter address 2 range specification (Ethernet) 2E AE E *5 *5
1447 IP filter address 3 range specification (Ethernet) 2F AF E *5 *5
1448 IP filter address 4 range specification (Ethernet) 30 B0 E *5 *5
1459 Clock source selection 3B BB E *5 *5
1480 Load characteristics measurement mode 50 D0 E
1481 Load characteristics load reference 1 51 D1 E
1482 Load characteristics load reference 2 52 D2 E
1483 Load characteristics load reference 3 53 D3 E
1484 Load characteristics load reference 4 54 D4 E
1485 Load characteristics load reference 5 55 D5 E
1486 Load characteristics maximum frequency 56 D6 E
1487 Load characteristics minimum frequency 57 D7 E
1488 Upper limit warning detection width 58 D8 E
1489 Lower limit warning detection width 59 D9 E
1490 Upper limit fault detection width 5A DA E 1491 Lower limit fault detection width 5B DB E
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
8919. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
89
1492 Load status detection signal delay time / load reference measurement waiting time
5C DC E
Pr. Name
Instruction code*1 Control method*2 Parameter
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
*3
C op
y*4
C le
ar *4
A ll
cl ea
r*4
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
To rq
ue c
on tr
ol
Sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Po si
tio n
co nt
ro l*7
V /F
V /F
V /F
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Ma gn
et ic
flu x
Vector Sensorless PM
2 9. APPENDIX 9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
9.6 For customers using HMS network options
List of inverter monitor items / command items The following items can be set using a communication option.
16-bit data
No. Description Unit Type Read/ write H0000 No data - - - H0001 Output frequency 0.01 Hz unsigned R H0002 Output current 0.01 A/0.1 A unsigned R H0003 Output voltage 0.1 V unsigned R H0004 reserved - - - H0005 Frequency setting value 0.01 Hz unsigned R H0006 Motor speed 1 r/min unsigned R H0007 Motor torque 0.1% unsigned R H0008 Converter output voltage 0.1 V unsigned R H0009 Regenerative brake duty 0.1% unsigned R
H000A Electric thermal relay function load factor 0.1% unsigned R
H000B Output current peak value 0.01 A/0.1 A unsigned R H000C Converter output voltage peak value 0.1 V unsigned R H000D Input power 0.01 kW/ 0.1 kW unsigned R H000E Output power 0.01 kW/ 0.1 kW unsigned R H000F Input terminal status*1 - - R
H0010 Output terminal status*1 - - R H0011 Load meter 0.1% unsigned R H0012 Motor excitation current 0.01 A/0.1 A unsigned R H0013 Position pulse 1 unsigned R/W H0014 Cumulative energization time 1 h unsigned R H0015 reserved - - - H0016 Orientation status 1 unsigned R H0017 Actual operation time 1 h unsigned R H0018 Motor load factor 0.1% unsigned R H0019 Cumulative power 1 kWh unsigned R H001A Position command (lower 16 bits)
1 signed R H001B Position command (upper 16 bits) H001C Current position (lower 16 bits)
1 signed R H001D Current position (upper 16 bits) H001E Droop pulse (lower 16 bits)
1 signed R H001F Droop pulse (upper 16 bits) H0020 Torque order 0.1% unsigned R H0021 Torque current order 0.1% unsigned R H0022 Motor output 0.1 kW unsigned R H0023 Feedback pulse 1 unsigned R H0024 H0025 reserved - - -
H0026 Trace status - unsigned R H0027 reserved - - - H0028 PLC function user monitor 1 - unsigned R H0029 PLC function user monitor 2 - unsigned R H002A PLC function user monitor 3 - unsigned R H002B to H002D reserved - - -
H002E Motor temperature R H002F to H0031 reserved - - -
H0032 Power saving effect - unsigned R
8939. APPENDIX 9.6 For customers using HMS network options
89
*1 For the details, refer to page 446.
H0033 Cumulative saving power - unsigned R H0034 PID set point 0.1% unsigned R/W H0035 PID measured value 0.1% unsigned R/W H0036 PID deviation 0.1% unsigned R/W H0037 to H0039 reserved - - -
H003A Option input terminal status 1*1 - - R
H003B Option input terminal status 2*1 - - R
H003C Option output terminal status*1 - - R H003D Motor thermal load factor 0.1% unsigned R H003E Transistor thermal load factor 0.1% unsigned R H003F reserved - - - H0040 PTC thermistor resistance ohm unsigned R
H0041 Output power (with regenerative display) R
H0042 Cumulative regenerative power R H0043 PID measured value 2 H0044 Second PID set point 0.1% unsigned R/W H0045 Second PID measured value 0.1% unsigned R/W H0046 Second PID deviation 0.1% unsigned R/W H0047 Cumulative pulse 1 signed R H0048 Cumulative pulse carrying-over times 1 signed R
H0049 Cumulative pulse (control terminal option) 1 signed R
H004A Cumulative pulse carrying-over times (control terminal option) 1 signed R
H004B Multi-revolution counter 1 unsigned R H004C to H004F reserved - - -
H0050 Integrated power on time R H0051 Running time R H0052 Saving energy monitor R H0053 reserved - - - H0054 Fault code (1) - - R H0055 Fault code (2) - - R H0056 Fault code (3) - - R H0057 Fault code (4) - - R H0058 Fault code (5) - - R H0059 Fault code (6) - - R H005A Fault code (7) - - R H005B Fault code (8) - - R H005C to H005E reserved - - -
H005F Second PID measured value 2 0.1% unsigned R H0060 Second PID manipulated variable 0.1% signed R H0061 to H0063 reserved - - -
H0064 Current position 2 (lower 16 bits) 1 signed R
H0065 Current position 2 (upper 16 bits) H0066 PID manipulated variable 0.1% signed R H0067 to H00F8 reserved - - -
H00F9 Run command*2 - - R/W H00FA to H01FF reserved - - -
No. Description Unit Type Read/ write
4 9. APPENDIX 9.6 For customers using HMS network options
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*2 Operation command This signal is assigned in the initial status. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection). (Refer to page 521.)
<32-bit data>
Error reset and Ready bit status selection An error reset command from a communication option can be invalidated in the External operation mode or the PU
operation mode. The status of Ready bit is selectable.
The status of Ready bit in communication data can be changed when an HMS network option is installed. (P.N240) When an HMS network option is installed and the communication option is specified for the command source in Network
operation mode, it is possible to select whether the inverter is reset after the "Fault reset" command is executed. (P.N241)
- - - - RES STP (STOP) CS JOG MRS RT RH RM RL - - AU
b15 b0
No. Description Unit Type Read/ write H0200 reserved - - - H0201 Output frequency (0-15 bit)
0.01 Hz signed R H0202 Output frequency (16-31 bit) H0203 Setting frequency (0-15 bit)
0.01 Hz signed R H0204 Setting frequency (16-31 bit) H0205 Motor rotation (0-15 bit)
1 r/min signed R H0206 Motor rotation (16-31 bit) H0207 Load meter (0-15 bit)
0.1% signed R H0208 Load meter (16-31 bit) H0209 Positioning pulse (0-15 bit)
1 signed R/W H020A Positioning pulse (16-31 bit) H020B Watt-hour meter (1 kWh step) (0-15 bit)
1 kWh unsigned R H020C Watt-hour meter (1 kWh step) (16-31 bit)
H020D Watt-hour meter (0.1/0.01 kWh step) (0-15 bit)
0.1/0.01 kWh unsigned R H020E Watt-hour meter (0.1/0.01 kWh step) (16-
31 bit) H020F Position error (0-15 bit)
1 signed R H0210 Position error (16-31 bit) H0211 Position command (lower 16 bits)
1 signed R H0212 Position command (upper 16 bits) H0213 Current position (lower 16 bits)
1 signed R H0214 Current position (upper 16 bits) H0215 to H03FF reserved - - -
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
349 Communication reset selection/Ready bit status selection
0
0, 1, 100, 101, 1000, 1001, 1100, 1101, 10000, 10001, 10100, 10101, 11000, 11001, 11100, 11101
Use this parameter to select the error reset operation, Ready bit status, and inverter reset operation when a fault is cleared.
N010 Communication reset selection 0
0 Enables the error reset function in any operation mode.
1 Enables the error reset function only in the Network operation mode.
N240 Ready bit status selection 0
0 The status of Ready bit in communication data can be selected.1
N241 Reset selection after inverter faults are cleared
0 0 The inverter is reset when a fault is cleared.
1 The inverter is not reset when a fault is cleared.
N242 DriveControl writing restriction selection 0
0 DriveControl writing is not restricted. 1 DriveControl writing is restricted.
8959. APPENDIX 9.6 For customers using HMS network options
89
When an HMS network option is installed, the command source to change the DriveControl settings can be restricted to only the command source selected by Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection. (P.N242)
*1 The operation mode affects the availability of communication reset. *2 The ON/OFF state of the power supply affects the ON/OFF state of Ready bit. *3 When either the external 24 V power supply or the control circuit power supply is ON. *4 Available when the HMS network option is installed.
Direct command mode for position control In the direct command mode, the target position and maximum speed can be set through communication.
The point table is set as follows in the direct command mode. (The setting is applied when the start signal is turned ON.)
*1 Same as the point table 1. However, even when continuous operation is set in the auxiliary function, individual operation is applied. *2 The direct command mode is available only for individual operation. The dwell time is invalid.
Setting value Description
Pr.349 N010 N240 N241 N242
Communication reset selection*1
Ready bit status selection*2
Reset selection after inverter faults are
cleared
DriveControl writing
restriction NET
operation mode
Other than NET
operation mode
Main circuit:
power-ON
Main circuit: power- OFF*3
0 0 0 0 0 Reset enabled
Reset enabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: ON Reset Not restricted
1 1 0 0 0 Reset enabled
Reset disabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: ON Reset Not restricted
100 0 1 0 0 Reset enabled
Reset enabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: OFF Reset Not restricted
101 1 1 0 0 Reset enabled
Reset disabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: OFF Reset Not restricted
1000 0 0 1 0 Reset enabled
Reset enabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: ON Not reset*4 Not restricted
1001 1 0 1 0 Reset enabled
Reset disabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: ON Not reset*4 Not restricted
1100 0 1 1 0 Reset enabled
Reset enabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: OFF Not reset*4 Not restricted
1101 1 1 1 0 Reset enabled
Reset disabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: OFF Not reset*4 Not restricted
10000 0 0 0 1 Reset enabled
Reset enabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: ON Reset Restricted*4
10001 1 0 0 1 Reset enabled
Reset disabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: ON Reset Restricted*4
10100 0 1 0 1 Reset enabled
Reset enabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: OFF Reset Restricted*4
10101 1 1 0 1 Reset enabled
Reset disabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: OFF Reset Restricted*4
11000 0 0 1 1 Reset enabled
Reset enabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: ON Not reset*4 Restricted*4
11001 1 0 1 1 Reset enabled
Reset disabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: ON Not reset*4 Restricted*4
11100 0 1 1 1 Reset enabled
Reset enabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: OFF Not reset*4 Restricted*4
11101 1 1 1 1 Reset enabled
Reset disabled
Ready bit: ON
Ready bit: OFF Not reset*4 Restricted*4
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1220 B100
Target position/speed selection 0
0 Target position and maximum speed: Point table
1 Target position: Direct command. Maximum speed: Point table.
2 Target position and maximum speed: Direct command
Pr.1220 setting Target position Maximum speed Acceleration time
Deceleration time Dwell time Auxiliary
function 1 Direct command Point table 1 *1 *1 Invalid*2 *1
2 Direct command Direct command Pr.7 Pr.8 Invalid*2 *1
6 9. APPENDIX 9.6 For customers using HMS network options
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
To perform positioning operation in the direct command mode, specify the point table (RH recommended) and turn ON the start signal. (When no point table is specified, home position return operation is performed.)
Example when Pr.1220 = "1"
Example when Pr.1220 = "2"
9.7 Ready bit status selection (Pr.349, N240)
Error reset operation selection at inverter fault The status of Ready bit in communication data can be selected when a communication option (FR-A8ND or FR-A8NF) is
installed. An error reset command from a communication option can be invalidated in the External operation mode or the PU
operation mode. The status of Ready bit is selectable.
0
Maximum speed of point table 1
Time
Position command speed
STF ON
Acceleration time of point table 1 Deceleration time
of point table 1
Target position Target position of direct command0
Servo-ON (LX) ON
Direct command sent
RH ON
RM
RL
OFF
OFF
0
Maximum speed of direct command
Time
Position command speed
STF ON
Acceleration time of Pr.7 Deceleration time
of Pr.8
Target position Target position of direct command0
Servo-ON (LX) ON
Direct command sent
RH ON
RM
RL
OFF
OFF
8979. APPENDIX 9.7 Ready bit status selection (Pr.349, N240)
89
*1 The setting is available only when a communication option is installed.
Ready bit status selection (P.N240) The status of Ready bit in communication data can be selected.
*1 When either the external 24 V power supply or the control circuit power supply is ON. FR-A8ND
Class 0x29 Instance 1
FR-A8NF Inverter status monitor
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Function
349*1 Communication reset selection/Ready bit status selection
0
0, 100 Error reset is enabled independently of operation mode.
1, 101 Error reset is enabled in the Network operation mode. 1001, 1000, 1100, 1101, 10000, 10001, 10100, 10101, 11000, 11001, 11100, 11101
For details, refer to page 893.
N010*1 Communication reset selection 0
0 Enables the error reset function in any operation mode.
1 Enables the error reset function only in the Network operation mode.
N240*1 Ready bit status selection 0
0 The status of Ready bit in communication data can be selected when a communication option is installed.1
Setting value Description
Pr.349 N010 N240 Communication reset selection Ready bit status selection
NET operation mode Other than NET operation mode
Main circuit: power- ON
Main circuit: power- OFF*1
0 0 0 Reset enabled Reset enabled Ready bit: ON Ready bit: ON 1 1 0 Reset enabled Reset disabled Ready bit: ON Ready bit: ON 100 0 1 Reset enabled Reset enabled Ready bit: ON Ready bit: OFF 101 1 1 Reset enabled Reset disabled Ready bit: ON Ready bit: OFF
Attribute ID Access Name Data type
Number of data bytes
Initial value Range Description
9 Get Ready BOOL 1 1
0 Other than the below
1
Pr.349 = "0, 1" N240 = "0"
During stop / during acceleration / during constant speed operation / during deceleration / during reverse rotation deceleration
Pr.349 = "100, 101" N240 = "1"
During stop while the RY signal is ON / during acceleration / during constant speed operation / during deceleration / during reverse rotation deceleration
Bit Name Description
14 READY signal Reset cancel
Pr.349 = "0, 1" N240 = "0"
0: During an inverter reset / during startup after power-ON. 1: During normal operation
Pr.349 = "100, 101" N240 = "1"
0: RY signal is OFF 1: RY signal is ON
8 9. APPENDIX 9.7 Ready bit status selection (Pr.349, N240)
REVISIONS *The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Revision date *Manual number Revision May 2013 IB(NA)-0600503ENG-A First edition Dec. 2013 IB(NA)-0600503ENG-B Added
FR-A840-03250(110K) to FR-A840-06830(280K) IP55 compatible model Compatibility with FR-A8NP SF-PR included (Pr.71 (Pr.450) = "70, 73, 74") Anti-sway control (Pr.1072 to Pr.1079) Position control functions added (Pr.1289, Pr.1290, Pr.1292 to Pr.1297)
Mar. 2014 IB(NA)-0600503ENG-C Added Separated converter type
Apr. 2014 IB(NA)-0600503ENG-D Added Motor permissible load level (Pr.607, Pr.608) FR-A846-00023(0.4K) to FR-A846-00170(5.5K)
Sep. 2014 IB(NA)-0600503ENG-E Added SF-PR heavy duty setting SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode (Pr.673, Pr.674) Addition to the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function (Pr.606, X48 signal, Y67 signal, and
compatibility with the separated converter type) Addition to the self power management function (X94 signal) Addition to the electronic bypass sequence function (X95 signal and X96 signal) Pr.1015 Integral stop selection at limited frequency Pr.1016 PTC thermistor protection detection time
Mar. 2015 IB(NA)-0600503ENG-F Added Second droop control (Pr.679 to Pr.683) Internal torque limit 2 (Pr.810 = "2") Pr.1018 Monitor with sign selection Current position 2 (Pr.430) Cumulative pulse monitor value clear (Pr.635 to Pr.638) Compatibility with FR-A8TP, FR-A8APR, and FR-A8AZ
Edited Availability of the brake sequence function under V/F control Availability of the anti-sway control under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Aug. 2015 IB(NA)-0600503ENG-G Added FR-A800-GF (CC-Link IE Field Network communication function type)
Oct. 2016 IB(NA)-0600503ENG-H Added Start count monitor (Pr.1410, Pr.411) Excitation current low-speed scaling factor (Pr.14 = "12 to 15", Pr.85, Pr.86, Pr.565, Pr.566, Pr.617) Backup/restore function Input signals (CLRN, JOGF, JOGR) Output signal (SAFE) Simple position control by point table (The home position information is retained at servo-OFF.)
(Pr.419 = "10") MODBUS RTU communication stop bit length selection Continuous operation at communication error (Pr.502 = "4")
May 2017 IB(NA)-0600503ENG-J Added Load characteristics fault detection (Pr.1480 to Pr.1492) Droop control using the per-unit speed control reference frequency (Pr.288 (Pr.681) = "20 to 22") Torque current command limit (Pr.801, Pr.803 = "2") PID manipulated amount: 0 to 100% (Pr.1015 = "2, 12") Pr.1348 P/PI control switchover frequency Pr.1349 Emergency stop operation selection Operation selection at a communication error (Pr.502 = "11, 12") Multi-revolution counter monitoring
Edited Pr.275 setting range: 0 to 300%
Oct. 2018 IB(NA)-0600503ENG-K Added Reset selection / disconnected PU detection / PU stop selection (Pr.75 = "1000 to 1003, 1014 to
1017, 1100 to 1103, 1114 to 1117") External fault input signal (Pr.178 to Pr.189 = "32") Error reset operation selection at inverter fault (Pr.349 = "100, 101") PLC function (Pr.414 = "11, 12", Pr.675) Pulse monitor selection (Pr.430 = "2000 to 2005, 2012, 2013, 2100 to 2105, 2112, 2113, 3000 to
3005, 3012, 3013, 3100 to 3105, 3112, 3113")
899
90
Revision date *Manual number Revision Apr. 2020 IB(NA)-0600503ENG-L Added
Operation command source selection for the CS signal (Pr.162 = "1000 to 1003, 1010 to 1013") Main circuit capacitor life measurement at power OFF (every time) (Pr.259 = "11") Selecting clearing of the current position 2 monitor value (Pr.419 = "200, 210, 300, 310, 1310") Pr.506 Display estimated main circuit capacitor residual life Current input check terminal selection (Pr.573 = "11 to 14, 21 to 24") Ready bit status selection (for FR-A8ND and FR-A8NF) Forward stroke end (LSP) signal, Reverse stroke end (LSN) signal Low-speed forward rotation command (RLF) signal, Low-speed reverse rotation command (RLR)
signal Vector control for PM motor with encoder supported (for FR-A8AL and FR-A8TP) Input terminal monitor (for terminals S1 and S2) Reset selection after inverter faults are cleared (with the HMS network option installed)
Mar. 2021 IB(NA)-0600503ENG-M Added Cooling fan operation selection during the test operation (Pr.244 = "1000, 1001, 1101 to 1105") Display/reset ABC relay contact life (Pr.507, Pr.508) DriveControl writing restriction selection (Pr.349 = "10000, 10001, 10100, 10101, 11000, 11001,
11100, 11101")
0
1 BCN-C22005-957
FR-A800/A800 Plus Series Instruction Manual Supplement
1 Emergency drive
This function is used in case of emergency such as a fire to forcibly continue inverter operation to drive a motor without activating protective functions even if the inverter detects a fault. Using this function may cause damage of the motor or the inverter because driving the motor is given the highest priority. Use this function for emergency operation only. When the inverter is damaged by a fault, the motor operation can be continued by switching to the commercial power supply operation. The emergency drive function is available only for standard structure models and IP55 compatible models.
*1 The setting is available for the standard structure model and the IP55 compatible model. *2 Set Pr.524 after setting Pr.523. *3 When Pr.523 = "100, 200, 300, or 400", the emergency drive is activated regardless of the Pr.524 setting.
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting range Description FM CA
523 H320*1
Emergency drive mode selection 9999
100, 111, 112, 121, 122, 123, 124, 200, 211, 212, 221, 222, 223, 224, 300, 311, 312, 321, 322, 323, 324, 400, 411, 412, 421, 422, 423, 424
Select the operation mode of the emergency drive.
9999 Emergency drive disabled.
524 H321*1*2
Emergency drive running speed 9999
0 to 590 Hz*3 Set the running frequency in the fixed frequency mode of the emergency drive (when the fixed frequency mode is selected in Pr.523)
0% to 100%*3 Set the PID set point in the PID control mode of the emergency drive (when the PID control mode is selected in Pr.523)
9999*3 Emergency drive disabled.
515 H322*1
Emergency drive dedicated retry count
1 1 to 200 Set the retry count during emergency drive operation.
9999*3 Without retry count excess (no restriction on the number of retries).
1013 H323*1
Emergency drive running speed after retry reset
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency for operation after a retry when any of E.CPU, E.1 to E.3, and E.5 to E.7 occurs during emergency drive operation.
514 H324*1
Emergency drive dedicated waiting time
9999 0.1 to 600 s Set the retry waiting time during emergency drive
operation. 9999 The Pr.68 setting is applied to the operation.
136 A001
MC switchover interlock time 1 s 0 to 100 s Set the operation interlock time for MC2 and MC3.
139 A004
Automatic switchover frequency from inverter to bypass operation
9999 0 to 60 Hz
Set the frequency at which the inverter-driven operation is switched over to the commercial power supply operation when the condition for the electronic bypass is established during emergency drive operation.
8888, 9999 Electronic bypass during emergency drive is disabled.
57 A702
Restart coasting time 9999
0
Coasting time differs according to the inverter capacity. (Refer to the description of the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function in the Instruction Manual (Detailed) or the Instruction Manual (Function).)
0.1 to 30 s Set the waiting time for the inverter to perform a restart after restoring power due to an instantaneous power failure.
9999 No restart
V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless PM
BCN-C22005-957_ENG.fm 1
2 BCN-C22005-957
Connection diagram A connection diagram of the emergency drive (commercial mode) is as follows.
*1 Be careful of the capacity of the sequence output terminals. The applied terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
*2 When connecting a DC power supply, insert a protective diode. When connecting an AC power supply, use relay output terminals of the inverter or contact output terminals of the relay output option (FR-A8AR).
*3 The applied terminals differ by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) *4 The applied terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
NOTE Be sure to provide a mechanical interlock for MC2 and MC3.
Output terminal capacity Output terminal permissible load Open collector output of inverter (RUN, SU, IPF, OL, FU) 24 VDC 0.1 A
Inverter relay output (A1-C1, B1-C1, A2-B2, B2-C2) Relay output option (FR-A8AR)
230 VAC 0.3 A 30 VDC 0.3 A
Emergency drive execution
IM R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
X84
Emergency drive in operation
Fault output during emergency drive
CS
RES
SD
U V W
Y65
MC2
SE
MC3
MC2 24VDC
Reset
MC3
Inverter/bypass
MCCB
MC2
MC3
MC2
MC3
ALM3
BCN-C22005-957_ENG.fm 2
3 BCN-C22005-957
Emergency drive execution sequence
When the X84 signal is ON for 3 seconds, the emergency drive is activated. The Y65 signal turns ON during emergency drive operation. "ED" appears on the operation panel during emergency drive operation. The ALM3 signal turns ON when a fault occurs during emergency drive operation.
To activate the emergency drive, the X84 signal needs to be ON for three seconds while all the following conditions are satisfied.
When the "retry" (Pr.523 = "2[][], 3[][]") is selected, it is recommended to use the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function at the same time.
Parameter setting is not available during emergency drive operation. To return to the normal operation during emergency drive operation, do the following. (The operation will not be
returned to normal only by turning OFF the X84 signal.) Reset the inverter, or turn the power supply OFF. Clear a fault by turning ON the X51 signal while the sequence function is enabled (when the protective function is activated).
The operation is switched over to the commercial power supply operation in case of the following during emergency drive operation while the commercial mode or the retry / commercial mode is selected. 24 V external power supply operation, power failure status or operation with the power supplied through R1/S1 (except when the DC feeding mode 1 or 2 is selected), undervoltage
To input the X84 signal, set "84" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
For the terminal used for the Y65 signal output, assign the function by setting "65 (positive logic)" or "165 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). For the terminal used for the ALM3 signal output, assign the function by setting "66 (positive logic)" or "166 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
The X84 signal input is valid either through the external terminal or via network regardless of the Pr.338 and Pr.339 settings (Selection of control source in Network operation mode).
During emergency drive operation, the operation is performed as Pr.502 Stop mode selection at communication error = "0 (initial value)" and communication errors (such as E.SER) do not occur. (A protective function is performed according to its operation during emergency drive operation.)
Item Condition Emergency drive parameter settings
Pr.523 "9999" Pr.524 "9999" (Setting is not required when Pr.523 = "100, 200, 300, or 400".)
Control method
Either of the following control methods is selected (when Pr.800 = "9, 10, 20, 109, or 110" or Pr.451 = "10, 20, 110, or 9999") V/F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control (speed control) PM sensorless vector control (speed control) PM sensorless vector control test operation
Contradictory condition
None of the following conditions are satisfied. Enabling the electronic bypass sequence function Enabling the brake sequence function Using the FR-A8NS (option) During offline auto tuning Supplying power through terminals R1 and S1 Pr.30 = "2, 102"
BCN-C22005-957_ENG.fm 3
4 BCN-C22005-957
The following diagram shows the operation of the emergency drive function (in the retry / output shutoff mode or in the fixed frequency mode (Pr.523 = "211")).
The following diagram shows the operation of switching over to the commercial power supply operation during emergency drive operation by using the CS signal (when the electronic bypass during emergency drive operation is enabled) (in the commercial mode or in the fixed frequency mode (Pr.523 = "411")).
*1 Input the CS signal via an external terminal.
NOTE The emergency drive function is not available for the FR-A800-CRN and FR-B, B3 series inverters.
Continuous operation except in case of critical faults (such as E.PUE)
Coasting
RES
X84
STF
ALM3
Time
Motor rotations per minute
Retry waiting time Pr.514
Emergency drive in operation Y65
Retry in case of critical faults
Normal operation
Emergency drive continued
ALM
Frequency
Pr.524
3s
Emergency drive finished
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
3s
Emergency drive continued
Normal operation
Coasting
Power supply
STF
X84
CS*1
MC3
MC2
MC3
MC2
Frequency
Pr.136
Time
Motor rotations per minute
Emergency drive commercial power supply operation
Emergency drive in operation Y65
MC delay
MC delay
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
BCN-C22005-957_ENG.fm 4
5 BCN-C22005-957
Emergency drive operation selection (Pr.523, Pr.524) Use Pr.523 Emergency drive mode selection to select the emergency drive operation. Set a value in the
hundreds place to select the operation when a valid protective function is activated (critical fault) during emergency drive. Set values in the ones and tens places to select the operation method.
*1 Under PM sensorless vector control, the operation is not switched over to the commercial power supply operation and the output is shut off.
NOTE The operation is automatically switched from the PU operation mode or External/PU combined operation mode to
the External operation mode when the emergency drive is activated in the fixed frequency mode or in the PID control mode.
Retry operation during emergency drive (Pr.515, Pr.514) Set the retry operation during emergency drive operation. Use Pr.515 Emergency drive dedicated retry count
to set the retry count, and use Pr.514 Emergency drive dedicated waiting time to set the retry waiting time. The ALM signal output conditions depend on the Pr.67 Number of retries at fault occurrence setting. (Refer to
the description of the retry function in the Instruction Manual (Detailed) or the Instruction Manual (Function).) For the protective functions (critical faults) for which a retry is performed during emergency drive operation, refer
to page 7.
NOTE During emergency drive operation, Pr.65 Retry selection is not available.
Pr.523 setting Emergency drive operation mode Description
1[][] Output shutoff mode
Selecting operation when a critical fault occurs during emergency drive operation
Output shutoff at a critical fault occurrence.
2[][] Retry / output shutoff mode
Retry operation at a critical fault occurrence. (Output shutoff at the occurrence of a fault for which retry is not permitted.) The output is shut off when a critical fault for which retry is not permitted occurs, or the retry count is exceeded.
3[][]*1 Retry / commercial mode
Retry operation at a critical fault occurrence. (Electronic bypass at the occurrence of a critical fault for which retry is not permitted.) The operation is switched over to the commercial power supply operation when a critical fault for which retry is not permitted occurs, or the retry count is exceeded. While Pr.515 = "9999", the operation is switched over to the commercial power supply operation when the retry count reaches 200.
4[][]*1 Commercial mode The operation is switched over to the commercial power supply operation when a critical fault occurs.
[]00 Normal operation
Selecting the operation method during emergency drive operation
The operation is performed with the same set frequency and by the same starting command as those in the normal operation. Use this mode to avoid output shutoff due to a fault.
[]11 Fixed frequency mode
Forward rotation The operation is forcibly performed with the frequency set in Pr.524. Even when the motor is stopped, the operation is started by the emergency drive operation.
[]12 Reverse rotation
[]21
PID control mode
Forward rotation The operation is performed under PID control using the Pr.524 setting as a set point. The measured values are input in the method set in Pr.128.[]22 Reverse rotation
[]23 Forward rotation (Second PID measured value input) The operation is performed under PID control using the
Pr.524 setting as a set point. The measured values are input in the method set in Pr.753.
[]24 Reverse rotation (Second PID measured value input)
9999 Emergency drive disabled.
BCN-C22005-957_ENG.fm 5
6 BCN-C22005-957
Electronic bypass during emergency drive (Pr.136, Pr.139, Pr.57) For selecting the commercial mode (Pr.523 = "3[][], 4[][]"), setting is required as follows.
Set Pr.136 MC switchover interlock time and Pr.139 Automatic switchover frequency from inverter to bypass operation and assign MC2 and MC3 signals to output terminals. When the CS signal is assigned to an input terminal, set Pr.57 Restart coasting time "9999" and input the CS signal through the terminal. (In the initial setting, the CS signal is assigned to the terminal CS.) Select V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, or Real sensorless vector control. (Under PM sensorless vector control, the operation is not switched over to the commercial power supply operation the output is shut off.)
During emergency drive operation, the operation is switched over to the commercial power supply operation when any of the following conditions is satisfied. CS signal turns OFF. A critical fault for which retry is not permitted occurs while Pr.523 = "3[][]". A critical fault occurs while Pr.523 = "4[][]".
While the motor is driven by the inverter during emergency drive operation, if a condition for electronic bypass is satisfied, the output frequency is accelerated/decelerated to the Pr.139 setting. When the frequency reaches the set frequency, the operation is switched over to the commercial power supply operation. (The operation is immediately switched over to the commercial power supply operation during output shutoff due to a critical fault occurrence.)
If the parameter for electronic bypass is not set while the commercial mode is set (Pr.523 = "3[][], 4[][]"), the operation is not switched over to the commercial power supply operation even when a condition for switchover is satisfied, and the output is shut off.
To assign the MC2 and MC3 signals to output terminals, use any two of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) and set "18 (positive logic)" for the MC2 signal and set "19 (positive logic)" for the MC3 signal.
Operation of magnetic contactor (MC2, MC3)
The input signals are as follows.
*1 Input the CS signal via an external terminal. (Set Pr.162 = "0 to 3, 10 to 13" or Pr.338 = "1".) *2 If the signal is turned ON after switchover to the emergency drive commercial power supply operation, the operation will not be
returned to the inverter-driven operation. *3 If the signal is turned OFF during the emergency drive operation, the operation will not be returned to normal. *4 MC operation is as follows.
NOTE During electronic bypass operation while the electronic bypass sequence is enabled (Pr.135 = "1"), the emergency
drive function is not available.
Magnetic contactor Installation location
Operation During commercial power
supply operation During inverter operation
MC2 Between power supply and motor Shorted Open MC3 Between inverter output side and motor Open Shorted
Signal Function Operation MC operation*4
MC2 MC3
CS*1 Inverter/bypass ON: Inverter operation OFF: Emergency drive commercial power supply operation*2
X84 Emergency drive operation ON: Emergency drive operation
OFF: Normal operation*3
RES Operation status reset ON: Reset No change OFF: Normal operation
Notation MC operation ON OFF
During inverter operation: MC2-OFF, MC3-ON During commercial power supply operation: MC2-ON, MC3-OFF
No change The operation status before changing the signal state to ON or OFF is held.
BCN-C22005-957_ENG.fm 6
7 BCN-C22005-957
PID control during emergency drive operation During emergency drive operation in the PID control mode, the operation is performed under PID control using
the Pr.524 setting as a set point. Input the measured values in the method set in Pr.128 or Pr.753. When the PID control mode is selected for emergency drive, the PID action during emergency drive operation is
as follows depending on the PID control setting.
While the "retry" (Pr.523 = "22[], 32[]") is selected in the PID control mode, if a retry occurs at an occurrence of E.CPU, E.1 to E.3, or E.5 to E.7 during emergency drive operation, the operation is performed not under PID control but with the fixed frequency. Use Pr.1013 Emergency drive running speed after retry reset to set the fixed frequency.
Operation of protective functions during emergency drive Operation of protective functions during emergency drive is as follows.
*1 While the switchover to the commercial power supply operation during emergency drive operation is enabled, when the same protective function is activated twice consecutively, the retry is attempted up to twice.
*2 In normal operation (Pr.523 = "200 or 300"), the start signal is turned OFF at the same time the retry function resets the protective function. Input the start signal again to resume the operation.
Item PID control action
Set point / measured value input setting Deviation input setting Without PID control
setting Measured value input selection (Pr.128, Pr.753) Held Terminal 4 input Terminal 4 input Forward action / reverse action selection (Pr.128, Pr.753) Held Held Reverse action
Proportional band (Pr.129, Pr.756) Held Held 100% (initial value) Integral time (Pr.130, Pr.757) Held Held 1 s (initial setting) Differential time (Pr.134, Pr.758) Held Held Not used (initial setting) Applied to the frequency / calculation only (Pr.128, Pr.753) Applied to the frequency Applied to the frequency Applied to the frequency
Dancer control Invalid Invalid Invalid Other PID-related settings Held Held Held
Protective function
Operation during emergency drive
Protective function
Operation during emergency drive
Protective function
Operation during emergency drive
E.OC1 Retry E.OP3 The function is disabled. E.ECA The function is disabled. E.OC2 Retry E.16 The function is disabled. E.MB1 The function is disabled. E.OC3 Retry E.17 The function is disabled. E.MB2 The function is disabled. E.OV1 Retry E.18 The function is disabled. E.MB3 The function is disabled. E.OV2 Retry E.19 The function is disabled. E.MB4 The function is disabled. E.OV3 Retry E.20 The function is disabled. E.MB5 The function is disabled. E.THT Retry E.PE Output shutoff E.MB6 The function is disabled. E.THM Retry E.PUE The function is disabled. E.MB7 The function is disabled. E.FIN Retry E.RET Output shutoff E.EP The function is disabled. E.IPF The function is disabled. E.PE2 Output shutoff E.MP The function is disabled. E.UVT The function is disabled. E.CPU Retry E.EF The function is disabled. E.ILF The function is disabled. E.CTE The function is disabled. E.IAH The function is disabled. E.OLT Retry E.P24 The function is disabled. E.LCI The function is disabled. E.SOT Retry E.CDO Retry E.PCH The function is disabled. E.LUP The function is disabled. E.IOH Output shutoff E.PID The function is disabled. E.LDN The function is disabled. E.SER The function is disabled. E.1 Retry*2
E.BE Retry*1 E.AIE The function is disabled. E.2 Retry*2
E.GF Retry E.USB The function is disabled. E.3 Retry*2
E.LF The function is disabled. E.SAF Retry*1 E.5 Retry*2
E.OHT Retry E.PBT Retry*1 E.6 Retry*1*2
E.PTC Retry E.OS The function is disabled. E.7 Retry*1*2
E.OPT The function is disabled. E.OSD The function is disabled. E.11 The function is disabled. E.OP1 The function is disabled. E.ECT The function is disabled.
E.13 Output shutoff E.OP2 The function is disabled. E.OD The function is disabled.
BCN-C22005-957_ENG.fm 7
8 BCN-C22005-957
The fault output during emergency drive operation is as follows.
Input signal operation During emergency drive operation in the fixed frequency mode or in the PID control mode, input signals unrelated
to the emergency drive become invalid with some exceptions. The following table shows functions of the signals that do not become invalid during emergency drive operation
in the fixed frequency mode or in the PID control mode.
*1 The signal is available only for the FR-A800-LC.
Emergency drive status monitor Set "68" in Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992 to monitor the status of the emergency drive on the operation panel. Description of the status monitor
*1 The first digit remains the same as the previous numerical value (fault condition). *2 "A certain alarm" means a protective function disabled during emergency drive shown in the tables on page 7.
Signal Pr.190 to Pr.196 setting
DescriptionPositive logic
Negative logic
ALM 99 199 Turns ON at the occurrence of a fault that causes the above-mentioned "retry" or "output shutoff" during emergency drive operation.
ALM3 66 166 Output when a fault occurs during emergency drive operation. During emergency drive operation, if a fault that does not activate any protective function occurs, the signal turns ON for 3 seconds and then turns OFF.
Input signal status Fixed frequency mode PID control mode
Valid OH, X31*1, X32, X41*1, TRG, TRC, X51, RES, X70, X71
OH, X31*1, X32, X41*1, TRG, TRC, X51, RES, X70, X71
Held RT, X9, X17, X18, MC, SQ, X84 RT, X9, X17, X18, MC, SQ, X64, X65, X66, X67, X79, X84
Always-ON X14, X77, X78, X80
Operation panel
indication
Description
Emergency drive setting Emergency drive operating status
0 Emergency drive function setting is not available.
1
Electronic bypass during emergency drive operation is disabled.
During normal operation 2
Emergency drive in operation
Operating properly 3 A certain alarm is occurring.*2
4 A critical fault is occurring. The operation is being continued by the retry.
5 A critical fault is occurring. The continuous operation is not allowed due to output shutoff.
11
Electronic bypass during emergency drive operation is enabled.
During normal operation 12
Emergency drive in operation
Operating properly 13 A certain alarm is occurring.*2
14 A critical fault is occurring. The operation is being continued by the retry.
15 A critical fault is occurring. The continuous operation is not allowed due to output shutoff.
2[]*1 Electronic bypass is started during emergency drive (during acceleration/ deceleration to the switchover frequency).
3[]*1 During electronic bypass during emergency drive (waiting during the interlock time).
4[]*1 During commercial power supply operation during emergency drive
CAUTION When the emergency drive operation is performed, the operation is continued or the retry is repeated even when
a fault occurs, which may damage or burn the inverter and motor. Before restarting the normal operation after using this function, make sure that the inverter and motor have no fault. Any damage of the inverter or the motor caused by using the emergency drive function is not covered by the warranty even within the guarantee period.
BCN-C22005-957_ENG.fm 8
9 BCN-C22005-957
2 Forward rotation output (Y30) signal and Reverse rotation output (Y31) signal
The Forward rotation output (Y30) signal and Reverse rotation output (Y31) signal become available under encoder feedback control.
Under Vector control or encoder feedback control, the Forward rotation output (Y30) signal or the Reverse rotation output (Y31) signal is output according to the actual rotation direction of the motor.
NOTE For the details on the Y30 and Y31 signals, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) or the Instruction Manual
(Function).
BCN-C22005-957_ENG.fm 9
1 BCN-C22005-969
FR-A800/A800 Plus Series Instruction Manual Supplement
1 Internal storage device fault (E.PE6) The operation of the storage device in the inverter can be checked. If a data fault occurs in the storage device in the inverter, the protective function (E.PE6) is activated. When the read value of Pr.890 is "7" or smaller, an inverter reset after All parameter clear can return the operation to normal. (The parameters that had been changed before All parameter clear must be set again.)
*1 For example, when parameter clear, All parameter clear, Parameter copy, or offline auto tuning is performed in the inverter, or when parameter batch write is performed in FR Configurator2.
NOTE "E.PE6" does not activate the retry function. "E.PE6" outputs the Fault output 3 (Y91) signal. "E.PE6" turns OFF the Safety monitor output (SAFE) signal. "E.PE6" is not cleared by turning ON the Fault clear (X51) signal. "E.PE6" is not activated during emergency drive operation. The communication data code for "E.PE6" is 172 (HAC).
Checking faulty area in the internal storage device When E.PE6 occurs, faulty area in the internal storage device can be checked by reading Pr.890.
Use the read value of Pr.890 to check the faulty area. The following table shows faulty areas indicated by the read value of Pr.890. Some read values indicate that there are multiple
faulty areas. (For example, the read value "7" indicates that all the areas described in No. 1 to No. 3 are faulty.)
Operation panel indication E.PE6 FR-LU08
indication Fault
Name Internal storage device fault
Description This protective function is activated by an inverter reset if writing data fails due to power-OFF or a data fault occurs in the storage device during parameter operations*1.
Check point Check if the power was turned OFF during parameter operations.
Corrective action
Check the power supply or the devices on the power system to check that the devices have no fault. When E.PE6 occurs due to power-OFF during parameter operations:
Check the read value of Pr.890. When the value is "7" or smaller, perform All parameter clear and then an inverter reset. The parameters that had been changed before All parameter clear must be set again.
When E.PE6 occurs due to other reason (such as turning OFF/ON the power or an inverter reset): Contact your sales representative.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 890 H325
Internal storage device status indication 0 (0 to 9999) A faulty area detected by self-check function can be
indicated in the internal storage device.
No. Read value Description
1 1, 3, 5, 7
Storage area other than the area for parameter settings is faulty (such as area for the set frequency). (When All parameter clear is performed, the set frequency, remotely-set frequency, host name for Ethernet communication, position pulse, multi-revolution counter, and offline auto tuning data are cleared.)
2 2, 3, 6, 7 Storage area for standard parameter settings is faulty. 3 4, 5, 6, 7 Storage area for communication parameter settings is faulty. 4 8 to 9999 Area for manufacturer setting
Pr.890 read Pr.890 setting read
BCN-C22005-969_ENG.fm 1
2 BCN-C22005-969
2 Note for terminal P3 (200/400 V class only) Some descriptions about terminal P3 are incorrect in the Instruction Manual. The descriptions are corrected as follows.
Details on the main circuit terminals Use terminal P3 only when a brake resistor is connected. [Incorrect]
[Correct]
Terminal connection diagrams In the terminal connection diagrams, the wiring of the optional brake unit is corrected as follows.
Terminal symbol Terminal name Terminal function description
P3, PR Brake resistor connection for FR-A820- 00770(15K) to 01250(22K), or FR- A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
Connect an optional brake resistor across terminals P3 and PR. Connecting a brake resistor increases the regenerative braking capability.
P/+, N/- Brake unit connection
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), power regeneration converter (MT-RC), high power factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC), or DC power supply (under DC feeding mode). When connecting multiple inverters, FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K) or FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K), in parallel using the FR-CV, FR-HC2, or FR-XC, always use either terminal P/+ or P3 for the connection. (Do not use terminals P/+ and P3 together.) Do not connect the DC power supply between terminals P3 and N/-. Use terminals P/+ and N/- for DC feeding.
P3, N/- Brake unit connection for FR-A820- 00770(15K) to 01250(22K), or FR- A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
Terminal symbol Terminal name Terminal function description
P3, PR Brake resistor connection for FR-A820- 00770(15K) to 01250(22K), or FR- A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
Connect an optional brake resistor across terminals P3 and PR. Connecting a brake resistor increases the regenerative braking capability.
P/+, N/- Brake unit connection
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), power regeneration converter (MT-RC), high power factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC), or DC power supply (under DC feeding mode).
[Incorrect] [Correct]
Jumper
P1
Earth (Ground)
R
P3 PR N/-P/+
Brake unit (Option)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Brake resistor
Inrush current limit circuit
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
Jumper
P1
Earth (Ground)
R
P3 PR N/-P/+
Brake unit (Option)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Brake resistor
Inrush current limit circuit
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
BCN-C22005-969_ENG.fm 2
3 BCN-C22005-969
Connection of stand-alone option units When the brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), power regeneration converter (MT-RC), high power factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC), or DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) is connected, use terminal P/+ of the inverter. (Do not use terminal P3.) The following diagram shows the connection example with the FR-BU2 (GRZG type discharging resistor).
U V W
P/+ N/-
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Motor M
Inverter PR
N/- BUE SD
P/+ A B C
FR-BU2
GRZG type discharging
resistor RR
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB MC
OFFON
MC T
10 m or less
OCR contact
MC
External thermal relay
OCR
PR PX
Connection example with the FR-BU2 (GRZG type discharging resistor)
BCN-C22005-969_ENG.fm 3
1 BCN-C22005-980
FR-A800/A800 Plus Series Instruction Manual Supplement
1 Monitoring terminals S1 and S2 (FR Configurator2) Graph display using FR Configurator2 is supported for terminals S1 and S2 (data from the high speed sampling and the USB trace file). The state of terminals S1 and S2 can be displayed in graph form using FR Configurator2. The FR Configurator2 version 1.28E or later supports graph display for terminals S1 and S2. For details on FR Configurator2, refer to the FR Configurator2 Instruction Manual.
Digital source (monitor item) selection Terminals S1 and S2 can be selected as digital sources for the trace function. Select the digital sources (input/output signals) to be set to Pr.1038 to Pr.1045 from the following table. When a
value other than the ones in the following table is set, "0" (OFF) is applied for indication.
2 Note for use with the Type E combination motor controller
When Appendix "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction Manual (Startup) mentions the Type E combination motor controller, only the MMP-T series controllers with the UL mark affixed are applicable for certification.
Setting value
Signal name
Setting value
Signal name
Setting value
Signal name
1 STF 21 X0 101 RUN 2 STR 22 X1 102 SU 3 AU 23 X2 103 IPF 4 RT 24 X3 104 OL 5 RL 25 X4 105 FU 6 RM 26 X5 106 ABC1 7 RH 27 X6 107 ABC2 8 JOG 28 X7 121 DO0 9 MRS 29 X8 122 DO1 10 STP(STOP) 30 X9 123 DO2 11 RES 31 X10 124 DO3 12 CS 32 X11 125 DO4 15 S2 33 X12 126 DO5 16 S1 34 X13 127 DO6
35 X14 128 RA1 36 X15 129 RA2 37 DY 130 RA3
BCN-C22005-980_ENG.fm 1
1 BCN-C22005-991
FR-A800/A800 Plus Series Instruction Manual Supplement
1 Earth (ground) fault detection at start / restricting reset method for an earth (ground) fault
The reset method for the output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) can be restricted. Select whether to enable or disable the earth (ground) fault detection at start. When enabled, the earth (ground)
fault detection is performed immediately after a start signal input to the inverter. Select whether to restrict the reset method for an earth (ground) fault.
Selecting whether to perform the earth (ground) fault detection at start
If an earth (ground) fault is detected at start while Pr.249 = "1 or 2", the output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) is detected and output is shut off.
Earth (ground) fault detection at start is enabled under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control. When the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting is high, enable the earth (ground) fault detection at start.
NOTE Because the detection is performed at start, output is delayed for approx. 20 ms every start. Use Pr.249 to enable/disable the earth (ground) fault detection at start. During operation, earth (ground) faults are
detected regardless of the Pr.249 setting.
Restricting reset method for an earth (ground) fault The reset method when the output is shut off due to the output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) can
be restricted. When E.GF occurs while Pr.249 = "2", E.GF can be reset only by turning OFF the control circuit power.
This restriction prevents the inverter from being damaged due to repeated reset operations by the other methods such as entering the RES signal.
When E.GF occurs while Pr.249 = "2", the output short-circuit detection (ALM4) signal can be output. For the terminal used to output the ALM4 signal, set "23" (positive logic) or "123" (negative logic) in any of Pr.190
to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). If Pr.249 is set to "2" while the retry function is enabled (Pr.67 is not set to "0"), no retry is performed even when
E.GF occurs. If Pr.249 is set to "2" while the automatic bypass switching after inverter fault is enabled (Pr.138 is not set to "1"),
the operation is not switched to the commercial power supply operation even when E.GF occurs.
NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the
other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. E.GF is not cleared by turning ON the Fault clear (X51) signal when Pr.249 = "2". If E.GF occurs during emergency drive operation when Pr.249 = "2", the output is shut off.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Earth (ground) fault Reset method
249 H101
Earth (ground) fault detection at start 0
0 Not detected at start Not restricted
1 Detected at start
2 Restricted
V/F Magnetic flux
2 BCN-C22005-991
2 Output short-circuit fault (E.SCF) Select the reset operation and fault indication for an output short-circuit.
The fault indication for an output short-circuit (E.OC1 to E.OC3, and E.SCF) can be changed by the Pr.521 setting.
When an output short-circuit is detected while Pr.521 = "1", E.SCF is displayed and the inverter output is shut off. When E.SCF occurs while Pr.521 = "1", E.SCF can be reset only by turning OFF the control circuit power. (E.OC1
to E.OC3 can be reset by any reset method.) This restriction prevents the inverter from being damaged due to repeated reset operations by the other methods
such as entering the RES signal. When E.SCF occurs, the output short-circuit detection (ALM4) signal can be output. For the terminal used to output the ALM4 signal, set "23" (positive logic) or "123" (negative logic) in any of Pr.190
to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). If the automatic bypass switching after inverter fault is enabled (Pr.138 is not set to "1"), the operation is not
switched to the commercial power supply operation even when E.SCF occurs.
NOTE When short-circuit resistance is large, the current does not reach the short-circuit detection level. In such a case,
an output short-circuit cannot be detected. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the
other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. E.SCF does not activate the retry function. E.SCF is not cleared by turning ON the Fault clear (X51) signal. If E.SCF occurs during emergency drive operation, the output is shut off. The communication data code for E.SCF is 20 (H14).
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range
Description Operation after detection Reset method
521 H194
Output short-circuit detection 0
0 E.OC1 to E.OC3 Not restricted 1 E.SCF Restricted
Operation panel indication E.SCF FR-LU08
indication Fault
Name Output short-circuit fault
Description The inverter output is shut off when an output short-circuit is detected while Pr.521 = "1". When Pr.521 = "0" (initial value), E.OC1, E.OC2, or E.OC3 appears when an output short-circuit is detected.
Check point Check for output short-circuit.
Corrective action Check the wiring to make sure that any output short circuit does not occur, then turn OFF the control circuit power to reset the inverter.
3 BCN-C22005-991
3 Extended detection time of the output current and zero current
The setting range of the Pr.151 Output current detection signal delay time and Pr.153 Zero current detection time is extended.
4 Selecting the command interface in the Network operation mode (Pr.338, Pr.339)
The proximity dog (X76) signal can be input via communication. The following table shows the command interface for the function in the Network operation mode, determined by
the parameter settings: an external terminal or a communication interface (RS-485 terminals or communication option).
[Explanation of Terms in Table] EXT: External terminal only Combined: Either external terminal or communication interface
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
151 M461
Output current detection signal delay time 0 s 0 to 300 s
Set the output current detection time. Enter the time from when the output current reaches the set current or higher to when the Output current detection (Y12) signal is output.
153 M463
Zero current detection time 0.5 s 0 to 300 s
Set the time from when the output current drops to the Pr.152 setting or lower to when the Zero current detection (Y13) signal is output.
Pr.338 Communication operation command source 0: NET 1: EXT Pr.339 Communication speed command source 0: NET 1: EXT 2: EXT 0: NET 1: EXT 2: EXT
X76 Proximity dog Combined EXT
INVERTER
IN VER
TER FR
-A 800
IN STR
U C
TIO N
M A
N U
A L (D
ETA ILED
)
M
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
IB(NA)-0600503ENG-M(2103)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.
FR-A800 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (DETAILED)
FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 04750(90
Related manuals for Mitsubishi FR-A800-E FR-A840-00023-0.4K Inverter Instruction Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the FR-A840-00023-0.4K Mitsubishi works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi FR-A800-E FR-A840-00023-0.4K Inverter Instruction Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Instruction Manual for Mitsubishi FR-A840-00023-0.4K as well as other Mitsubishi manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Instruction Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi FR-A840-00023-0.4K. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi FR-A800-E FR-A840-00023-0.4K Inverter Instruction Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Mitsubishi FR-A800-E FR-A840-00023-0.4K Inverter Instruction Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Mitsubishi FR-A800-E FR-A840-00023-0.4K Inverter Instruction Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Mitsubishi FR-A800-E FR-A840-00023-0.4K Inverter Instruction Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi FR-A800-E FR-A840-00023-0.4K Inverter Instruction Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.